ΤΥ Pe RE AS AE LA LE LE OG 08 be bd BO bm Be be Pe Pe PO S|
Deh ES BA be ΜΉ ΜΗ
ἩΗΜΜΗΜΜΗΜΗΝΗΗΗΜΜΗΜΗΜΜΗΜΜΉΜΙ
“ἘΠ Ή ΓΕ ΠῚ
ANNUAL CALENDAR
FOR SESSION 1903-1908
PASS LISTS —
EXAMINATION PAPERS
FOR SESSION 1902..1903
~
Digitized by the Internet Archive
in 2008 with funding from
‘ Microsoft Corporation _ a
ἌΡ i —— Υ "
ἂν τὰν δ ae
τους Ἂν. a
τ΄ http:/Avww.archive.org/details/calendar190304mc
Rh A 3
VOR . ϊ οι
a Pah | * : Site wt: 2 oe
ns
4
wa 7
Mi ee ee |
ah A
ANNUAL CALENDAR
McGILL COLLEGE
AND
UNIVERSITY,
MONTREAL.
FOUNDED UNDER BEQUEST OF THE HON. JAMES McGILL,
ERECTED INTO A UNIVERSITY BY ROYAL CHARTER
IN 1821, AND RE-ORGANIZED BY AN nS
a
0
AMENDED CHARTER IN 1852. y
Last
SESSION [905-1904
HLowtveal ;
PRINTED FOR THE UNIVERSITY BY THE GAZETTH PRINTING COMPANY.
1903.
~
———SS το το χο
‘The List of Graduates, corrected to July, 1908. and the —
rT -ae.: bl Ἂς
Vise γα
/ 903//o1
Examination Papers for each Session (price 75 cents),
are published separately, and may be obtained on
application to the Registrar. a
i
¢ 7
: a
“Ὁ
S| = τὴν j
INDEX.
PaGE,
ὑχζοι Fee 2 CO od BLOT 36 Laren BRE οὐπεσον ARE ee TA πο ana xvi
ΠΕ 1 DES Sa Rr cS aches OREN oa eA τὺ 34
Admission ...... Nia ον Ose 010 ORDO oR AIC τος 10
Of Students of other Universities......------ ΕΚ ΠΟΤΕ 21
Affiliated Colleges and ΞΟΠΟΟΙΒ. - - -- -- τ το ὁ ο τενεοστσστηλττλσησοτ 5
‘Afliliation to Oxford, Cambridge, Eyre 0011 τ το τὸ τὰν Coot 7
Ree wtor Admission’ «222-6 anta-targern Δ ee ay 8
Petia ταν ae COURSE INE ὑπ ara eer A inten Pot τ ete rarer πους 252
ΤΠ Ξε CO) Gol pe ee A ORIOL SIR gina cS ea νν Stake 284
AmpleSaxon, Courses in... “Ὁ. 00 00 ποτ τωτν 87, 89
Announcements :
Faculty of Applied Science.....-.-.-4----++e020) tote 141
ERC ULL YE OL SA Tiss Seite at reset. eee a ee ep τὦ 45
nculby OL AuaWins epson a aes fant eee eg 217
Hacultyiat Medicine: 9h. .b = 4. ero es 234
ΜΕΝ τ] School. © 32/05.)5--:- ι.0.0ϑτ| {τ 299
Royal Victoria College for Wich ypandcoedcopou. voosoce 136
Applied Mechanics, COuLSe MINES noo e eee elsee ee a ee 165
Applied Science, Baculty/ Of: s2s-whesteosre- bape eer: : 4, 141
Courses, Outline of
RechiGecture se ver ae oe fac see ree Ὁ : 149
ἘΠΕ ΞΟ Ce ase γι Oe een τ eee ΝΗ ἴΩ 152
Eivilebneineering: se" 2 cist Agente a eee 153
Electrical Engineering......- i Ca δ, δ κα eon tach 154
Mechanical Engineering .... τ τον τττττττσσσσσσν Sra 156
ΝΠ oy meteor oso ce nee Me es Crean 157
Mining Pmeineering 2-3-~ 0. . 7.0 92-2 ee 159
Courses of Lectures :—
iMac lnitectune tel ue ths eaten gece eer ero aS 160
Chemistry and Assaying τι Δ εσν τοῦτ τ 1 0 0 πν 163
Civil Engineering and Applied Mechanics......----- 165
Bridge Construction.....-.----- Bead al enn 166
ἘΠ᾿ dradlicss ose? Πρ ΠΠΠΠπὸ 167
Municipal Engineering. ..-..--------+--++5-5707° τι 168
Structural Engineering....-.----+----+2++ srttt 162
Theory of Ξύγοὔυ 68. «--- {0 τοστον ἐστε τυ τσ σσεστσσστον 165
Descriptive Geometry......------222 terete 168
Electrical Engineering... ...+-..-e0erserrse ners ett 169°
Bnglish.-.:3-<.s22+---2--- GPRS Ae αν τ Ὡς τ ἀγούνον 172
Experimental Physics... 0° τι τ sone 185
Freehand Drawing and Lettering... ..------- +--+--- 173
Cealony ee ee er hc ee sar Ge eae 173
Mathematics and Mathematical IB ΞΙΟΒ oa sEaScbauT 175
Mechanical Engineering.....-.-------+ysrsset tt 176
ΜΠ Πρ ct oo ls eee cen © ee aie aa ene ne 178
Wieperealow yess eee ane ee ee 181
Whimeralocys teste ae. eae ee enn gE 181
Mining Engineering. -- π-ς τῆι τς τ΄ tt on 181
Grimmer Schools. < tens sae. acme ese πὴ ΠΗ 147, 184
‘Surveying and Geodesy - --.- Ὁ τ 7 τν εν ττστσστστεληεττυτι 188
Te. SCHOO ares ἘΠ nepal προ: 147, 189
MhermodyNaMics..o.-. 2.2.20. eunne: lyase τὴς 191
Pransportationc: ean, re asec eee 190
oa
Donations (1902-03)
Double’ Gourses'.2, <e. 4p en
Mime: Tables... :... fs ΟΣ οι λυ eee
Architecture
GOUPSOMIN. «Fhe d oie 6 asco cn tae dee Sb ee ee
Vv
PAGE
Meteorology....------:. 0 :,7..... ΤΉ τ νυ} 125
ΜΠ ΠΕΡ elise cee ee οι SS ᾿, 90
ΤΥ TERS oa “Πρ aa a τνν 115
WR CONC ORIN eae igs gah hes Dogars cere gs ee 90
ΠΕ a ρα δε Meer ei al nas 2 Se ese” 91
Nana pe nIOSOplye wera meg [ἘΠ ΚΝ 104
ὌΠ ἀρουυσι οθντρο, 111
Bedaporyie ce eee es kt eee 125
[EL WSS Lsis er tee are BNA aga gr an Ae ln tage 109, 111
Physiography ...-- ----- ὍὉ.--΄᾿ en eaten care 2
PO σον cree tse ye τ 254
Poliicalesclencel a-- Messen ee Ee es 100
ἘΞ ΠΟΙ JES GAMO Ec ic OL OC eA eae aaa nae re ντὴ 104
PubliesHinance eee yee 1 er ee 101
Ἐν emer τ᾿ ποτ cere, ee aa 103
ΘΟ ΕΞ ΕΣ eet ee Denno sonar pee Pe SS” Ὁ εἰ 84
Seite milan euagesacs- tees a et ie ae ie 97
ΕΙΣ ΠΡ το aay od gaia aa ta Aca Yea 119
ΤΠ ἐς Shy ety 42 hoe nr ote RE Re aS We,
Degrees, Requirements ΔΝ cue abana god ps a ane 21,58
EPIC C Ree tree cs το ἘΠ bere sais eae oe 21, 64
Double Courses
Arts and Applied Science....--.---------": Se aati 68
Woe arid aye tg nen oe Nr Ea 71
Arts (B. A.) and IWiedicilie Sosa se 0“ 69
‘Arts (B. Sc.) and Wediciner sere τον πὸ τὰ: δεν 70
πο Session ator Sorte se onsen ay Se ποτ: a
MEIN uION Sh ee eae ee oe eee are SG 65, 67
NGeChristmasneaes: nee 0 as ESE ΘΕ ΚΆΚΟΥ: 66
πον Γι dels cee eae ce Be easels ae hae 12
Sinnlemientaleeae REC uncer yeni a | 66
Exemptions in Double (Ginhesiiiocenbec wonn onosenmoenboS 68, 69, 70
For Theological Students.....------+++++srsrsr rec 72
Ereiiipianie eee ee. cer ote acing ceo cae αι 45
πο Sap eae Ai acta gira I aR aire Sd ae 47
See oudhiean Waiter a oa ee he oe ore eae 53
Cae ἡ ΤΥ rere hl pane 29
Mime for Payment...% 222 225, setae 3 Eire 27
ERB LSeset ey sass Seas ee eras ee δεν ἐς 61
Laboratories .....---------: a oh he suey ce Ae eae 125
Witaraie mane Ants yee ase cee ere ae a 72
τ Mere pe china oe Gia πον cera Ἴ 72
TST το ol ACNE EL ORE aH oO In a aed 72
Ἐπ τα iat oe eee er ae Or | 27
SOEs lsat Mee Serer Mee ἀκ ες 45, 55
Ranier OlaSSes teen faeces a a eae) 76
rraitsesistpolies: et reek rch so ee a 312
Mine COM Ie Lt ste eer Πρ ον ier | 130
Assaying, Courses ΤῊ ΑΕ Bp ἀπ πο ἘΜ. πολ. τὸ 163, 178
Laboratories....----.--:: Ἐν τ ας ΠΥ τευ ος 198
Associate of Arts, @ertificate! Olas sae ta oe per enrages 11
Associations, see Societies.
Wetronomiical OUSeERVatOry mes. 23 nck are pee eS 43
Wetranomiys Courses λον ot ποὺ ec oep or ir 0 ΠῈ᾿ 1
TC LIRISTIES,, ole AcE, Soy Oe SN ΔΝ ar SEL as aaa oh ah See RN ΠΤ 38
- Athletic Association, Wniversityes coe ek τ τ 38, 337
ἘΔ Wepsree, Regulavlons: «tierce Sato p 1| τ 1 58
ἘΠ ΣΕ τ Dua cee eae ay en Pe ag a Bee 58
Pxaminations τς τον ττ τὰ προ σπου A eo Horne no om oh ὃ 65, 67
Exemptions for Professional Students... ...--------++--> 68, 69, 70
HIG NOMIIC GUTSES ee ae sree ate οτος 61
B.C.L. Degree, Regulations ... .---------- -: Εν ἘΠ τα Ἐς ΘΕ, 22, 219
B.Sc. Degree, Regulations....--...-----:--ssserve 21, 64, 142
Eourse in Baculty of ΑΒ π..Ὁ00ι τι τ 64
In Faculty of Applied SGrence ΡῈ cee i tits 149, 160
v1
PAGE.
EXAM AGIONS σε να ὦ τ oles Mo eee ere te sey Vaca σοί 12, 13, 65, 142
"Double; Course for ΒΕΑ and BsS¢.... i444. eee 68
Honour Coursesirn’ es, is...) is eats eatin eke eh ae eee eee 61, 146
Bar Regulations, Province of Quebec. ......:.. .....0..0...% 229
IBCNELACTORSHE nme cite iar bien iseiee Anes st ete ty dive 342
IBiolosyanCounsestinw AMS) -e. be ἀπο 116
(Medicine) yess tent a: τ το τοὺ ἡ 261
BoardsotmGowennorse mae his... aces aE ee peas ey OE ἐς xiv
Ath Cire OW ETS ieee os bie acai, oc Ue css Eee 2
Boardvandi@Resid ences... λον ιν τυ ae eee ee 7
In Royal Victoria College for Women...... ......... .. 138
Botanicalawaboratoriestas. 4... τ eee eee eee 128
Botany Coursesein (Amts)i.. 22. 21 \0) ae 117
(Medicine) Aaa: «beeen aes: wae tes BL eee Nye St ees 261
Bursaries, see Exhibitions.
CalendarvofsAppointments, etc. Jax c00. seen eet eee Xxvii
CambridcesUniversity, Affiliation to-..... 225. ssacsens ssn : τ
Wanpenter’ SHO ΤΣ οέοΡΈρέο[ὁΠῦύΓ 0 ρον ete 200
Instruction in..... ee ee MEY ete, hs, * ΤΣ ΡΝ ἄγ 207
Cawbiome Money. ΨΨ ΜΠ On ace Be eee 30, 33
Cement Laboratory .......-. node) cae he es i Sey Ce eS eee 195
CerbificatewAsSsociate ofr ATts:.....60 ὐπὸ νυν σὰ it
OLAS tam dinar. sed. sehr ties es ene eee Oe 33
Of iteratesinvArts 32: 85.2 Se τὺ Ὅς 72
LT SPATEES αι ΨΥ ere eraerate See ἢ See Ee 73
Matriculation¥ss ec eo <')-.c02 2.2. 4) ae ee Lee 28
@Ghancellon ΠΟ τ πο Ὁ ΠΟ ee ee oe 2
GAT Cer eT eRe TAs ape co shcyaret chad Che ose stocks RN eae one aoa 2
Chemistry, Building, ‘They Macdonald). 2.20427 eee ᾿ 40
Chemistry :—
COURSE RIT aq einstein eS fee 22 els see ae eee ee Eee =, 152
Suibjectiot(Amts) ity. y in! Seas + Sn Ἐν ar ee 113
(AppliedyScience)icee nso tas. ieee aa are eee Ὁ 163
(Medicine) ........ ORE, OPE Oe ek ae 253
Maboraboniesie ne cen. ee Se Me pore Pe uae eS 193, 238
Civil Engineering :—
[ΟΣ dates nia iter γος τ τ᾿ outta A Oe 153
UDI CCLAO Lute nee ok scans cal ee cte χε IE Ree OE een ae eae 165
Civil Procedure, Courses in..... ΡΞ Sata ses Bis Sys yc 223
CLASSMIGIS CS Ape easy as re ails. © ote Sioncs decanter τ eee ΤῈ 312
Classical Literature and History, Courses in........... ΤῊΝ τὸ
ΟἹ ϑιοου οΙσθ δ υ5, τὸ. Ὁ ces. sent nase τα : 8
Clinical Medicine, Courses in...... .......... ἘΣ ΘΑ ας σον eee 257
GlinicalaSurcery.-Coursesimie:.9 4.ce: 24... c06 eo ae Aen ee 258
Clubs, see Societies.
College Grounds: Management οἷ... ἡ... τὺ lien oss eae 38
Commercialaw.- Courses ΤΠ: τι ia... sac ot eee 223
Committees of Governors and Corporation .................. xvil
Companies, Courses in Law of.................. Josten See 222
Conditionedustudentstee eee eee e sere eek oe oo eee : 9
Conductyrotrstudentsey cick. See on ok cae ete a he Ieee 35
Constitution of the University: τ: τ. Ὁ Ὁ Ὁ 2
Constitutionalsbirstory, Courses. οι sc Sen πφπφΦ΄ῤῤῤῸπΠπΠπΠππ 99, 193
Constitutional@lawe» @ourses inte. 9-. aes shocks ee ise, SLOSS 2ZI
Corporation ΠΟΥ een. ster a. ees Sm SAP ie Ns 9
Corporations, Courses in Law of, .............. SRNR A ery 222
Criminal alawas CourSes ini seemptscricccic evade ae ares aes 223
DAC ΤΙ ΡΥ ΘΟ, ΠΕ ΘΟ ΠΤ ΘΙ ΘΒ, ΠΟΥ πὸ... ὍΠρΕῤΔΨΕὃ[ὃΚἜὍἘρ haces 25, 226
D Litt DegreesReqnirements forsee. cree eee ae 24
D:Scs Degrees Requirements: torso: 27. scissor eee 25
Degrees, Regulations concerning.... .............. ......-- 21
be vol, | he dns Va a ae os Eel a 5 - af EY dee te
eae Bartha tee oe. AS WAL
MSs Say χὰ sar 2 ee ee ΡΣ Went Ds re
Vii
; PAGE
Descriptive Geometry, Courses in.... ....-..--- ----+++--+++- 168
πὴ πε ρος ὉΠ emepoote aoe ΠΠ τς το τὶ τ ΣΕ 35
Diseases of Infants, Courses in.......... χη Poser ee 258, 266
WonaplonsineA plied ClenGer.2 sass sss ose es a 4) 210
Dram ie COMES ΠΥ och on οτος τὺ πιπεου τ αὐγὴ ἦς: 68
Dublin Umiversitys AtihiationitOse-as ec. -tr5-5-cs-cre τς 7
τιν COULTSESMETIE peieg am ce erase τὺ iol kev Gla 175. Wig
Wresss Academics. Ὁ beatae SB τ a ane aera eae Were aie 34
ID argos, Comms shay Eohopensa ecoppaseceureese: Dae Es coe 110, 175
lb NIOINy Witsoe mecomsssoosAPanooLee © Tacecoc aE τ 202
Early English Text Society’s Prize....... pe inet rE ne 74
Economics, Courses in.... . A cee Ree oe τι Φ EA ae ἊὉ 100
Electrical Engineering.
Courses liner. πο Me See cee ee l= Palate tons isles 154
SOHO ge, See: dade sone. whGce oa: sanagtbnpaccupood aecbaEe 169
Waboratories.: 2.6.2 -ses - ES ον Ser ER eta an 195
Hlocubion..Weector: .csesescce seek =e A ie Patent oe oie fo ee 33
Mneimeerin oi COUTSESH δε. τοῦς τ. 2 os eee ne Meelis = ἦς aes oe 153
English Language and Literature, Courses in .... ......... 85, 172
Ἐπ ον RIT ATES Cea aan Προ. Ee Ὁ cOO SSR Bor Sonn τ Best ator oe 342
BAEC Cee eee et τ nak. τς πος ee ees ae eae 10
TUCO SECOND ΘΠ mek te ee ee let Nae eee ae aes 20
Entrance Examination, see Matriculation.
Equivalent Standing for Students from other Universities. 21
Exemptions from Matriculation Examination......... 11
Exemptions in Arts for Students in Professional Faculties. 68, 69, 70
For Students in Theological Colleges.................... 72
Exhibitions :—
Dire σα τ ΒΕ ΡΠ ΠΕ ΤῺ PSHE e oe hens oe hen pee omneme sor SrA
Seconds MearermeArts 44-0 sans . 51 τ.--- ΕΣ ἘΣ ῊΣ 53
THA oyalhivetel | STEIN ce caoais ΡΟ Hb ocls0ee decsean soumce 144
AWW Trap averess cone {{90 M205) ean oy aie τυ in eee oe Gs 10
And see Scholarships.
Expenses of Board and Residence........ .... --.-- .--..--- Τί
Experimental Physics, Courses im,.-....---.-:-..---..:--.--- 108, 125
Haculties, General Statement Of...) acl 2 Hen ὖν 3
Faculty of Applied Science, see Applied Science.
Of Arts, see Arts.
Of Law, see Law.
Of Medicine, see Medicine.
Hees
ne HaculbyeObeAppliedsS Glen Cele «ee cerca Ὁ 5} 30
ΠΑ ΤΌ οτος Je ee E Onn nrode agreed 5 dee 29
Tha BAe ae SRO oe oa en an EEE Otte O SORE ACIS SecA 32
im=sWedicinie: τὸ ee aes, dar λον oh ta aa δ τς 91
Ido slid ave IDES. τ 351 dbo Se canna ν΄. 5 1 33
Wika Qui atone: 866) ance ao ον ὅν Εν προς Ὄπ δ σα “Ὁ Dob 28
ΞΕ ΠΕ τορι Sr arene πὸ τὴν ποι τ ΣΟΥ Σ 33
VETS Cg ΡΥ πότ τος νιν 0) 2.:.... 4, 139
Royal Victoria College for Women................---..+% 29, 138
AbHIehICGS Poses cece: SETI ie ee eg Ne ede rate, ἐπ 0) Sete 39
hime vor Payments... 0.) 2 PIS Bebe eee 8 Φ Ἢ sass, Pes 27
HellowsyOlubie ΠΗ ΘΎΞΙΟΥ ἀν satel hele terse {τὸς os Pre N ste ΔῸΣ Xv,3
ἘΠ πιοῦν ΘῈ Live Seb LVeLSIGyeere te ee = cei Ὁ a Sake ier
ΟΠ ΟΝ AM. g ss hyhomedoebere .5y onbe ate dec τὸ .5-.--ὕὕ- 207
Instruction in....... Ne RS AER AE PIR Deh at coche fers see eters 208
THinealagyavse ID τ ἐπ Ojolweec(els} Milam joan Ὁ. Oude Gace Ge bocecuceans 173, 193
Tinerngliy, Owes esial, Swann ein oacuede an Gee Seno b Re oShbOOe Ἶ
vill ae
PaGE. ap
GeodesyeCoursés Ane. 15.40. Shaken eek ποι τ 188
Geodetic: Laboratory . 21.2... τ een ee 196
Geology; Courses in’ 5.9055... a. 5. eee eee 122, 173
Geonietry,) Courses in’ Descriptive:.../0) 05 4.)0 ee 168
German, Courses in’... Sea a ee 94
Governorsy Board, Of! .)./:.4.0.. .coeee ae ιν μον Xiv
Meir IPOWELS oi cies kool he ele τον ΟΝ 2
Graduates (1901-1902). 04... Be eee eee 304
raduate Courses in Applied Science........................ 142
Tne digine yi.t oh, hal co iar et oo ee 271
Graduates, Lectures open to, in Arts................... .... 24, 7:
Graduates’ Societies, see Societies. Pat
Greek,(Coursesyin': τ Προ Πρ ον. 77
Grounds;;Managementiofi.. .... .. ne ee eee 38 ;
Committeetof Management! 4.2490) a τ" 38
Gymnastics; Olasses for-Men) ini. 4>. — ane ee 43 ἢ
Classes) for) πο π π-. Nada ces νὴ 138
Gynaecolory,. Coursesin:. ...,....s ap) aes ee ee ee . 209 ἃ
lebrewer@Ounsestanes τειν ΡΥ ΠῚ ae 97 ΥΩ
Histological Laboratories.............. .. θεῖς Coe ae see sa ae 239 |
Elistology "Courses inte... gene ee, eee 255
History, Courses in.......... a okey nial Saag eee Ππτ πτρτκωνς 98
Constitutional® Courses in’.2) 3) shoe. a a eee 99, 103
Ofthe Hactliy ofMMedicine. ... | esi iat see ΤῊΝ 234
Ofithe Universityers \o. ρον oes ee 1
Honore Coursesmim HATts. 16: core Ae) ie ee ote ee 61
Certificates ra. ee: at 4 0 ae Sle ek Oe 73
Hospitals FG τ ees jaro Metence ee Pe eS re ane eee oe syd 288
Hydraulics’: Courses ἰὴ τ Sed ale ie eee nai es 167
Maboratony le ΤΣ tek Ga ΤῈ Ἔν ΣΙ te 197
Infantile Diseases, Courses in................ EB ee ane 258, 266
Instruction, Officers of............ RPP AA has aks Te RN ty Catv! xviii
International aw, Courses in... ............... Rene Teer 226
ΤΑΙ ον yi Meee caer ie eta ko). πτυ τ δῆμος, Seah 96
Latin. Courses gine Mee Ades ieee int, ee ee ee 80
Tarynsology; “Courses nex to Poet me το ΡΟ, 265
Maw ΒΟΌΣ ΟΡ ΤΥ ener. τ τὸ μην eae ne 4, 217
ATIMOUNCEMENU sede eats. Ul Se Le th SR oy geet 217
Bar requirements for Admission to Study.............. 229
To Practices: came mete cia: cen ecu OU te Sg ae 229
Courses of Lectures :—
Agencyandybarinershipee ness Ὁ: eR i trike 222
Civil Procedures: ee fe Ae TP eee eae ee! 223, 224
Commercta@lenia wee cece Sek ek rk tk oa ee ee ame, 223
Constittionale lia. weew aed tone oes st ee 221
COLpOrations:. suite Meee τ eee len 222
ΟΥ̓ ΠΣ ΠΆΠΑ να ἡ eevee re ery ee et es en Wana 223
International Hawes tea. ee eee ee ee 226
Legal History-and Bibliography.................-..:- 221
Marriage Covenants and Minor Contracts........... 224
Obligations!:s We Mayen ee re ie τ νον 225
Real Property and. Notarial Law........:............ 225
Romani ΤΉ νος τ ΕΣ ΣΤ eee er ἀπὸ ae nee apne ae 220
Successions, Gifts and Substitutions. ... ... ........ 224
Double: Courses;in#Artsvanduawe et cone eet 71
Degree; (Requirements fort iCal age ce ee eee ee 22, 219
For DiC Te ee aah an nm A a EIR Up 6. 25, 226 A
Duration ;of*Sessions.. 7.252 eee eee eee 7
Hxaminatious ono, 2h) .0 sls seen sees war abe eres, 219
REGS iN TaN An CPi ea POLY fie saa Re UR ne TEE Τὰ ἤτον στ ατι τ τς 32
Ἔν ae 2 % , \ ς " = cP >
ix
PAGE.
IOWA yS\ A. 0%. ao ΚΕ tent ee eae Sao Rote ae eee Ne 220
WGRAcH SoU EAB Col ee OBER an Oe ence eC Sane Aon Noa ae: 14
ΘΙ τ ace ox oI vets cp στ eels πως δ ἢ 219
IDES eae Deeg Oba a ὑπ δι σεν τοι Coan so ΟῸΣ 218
IRYSSAIS TUMOR 266% oon Oo cocina due ous OORe eee eapscocccuapmerec 27
ἘΝ AION: Soe octeh oe br oo Cadacdun aca gad ate ade aso 218
ἘΒΗ ΒΗ iacrine Moon wit jooe 6 © dc ebeno acosSRecouenadcGs oe 218
‘StudemtsmeliSts Ofna tcc ot πὴ aiae sales os caer ἜΧΕΝ 312
ΠΟ τ sy ce Cece chores cn sta ener Gore Ἐν τ τς πῸν 232
IDA GORE ISIN Ὁ Ὁ, Ἐξ cose Gabo Bae ae een een enc bhoosangboslin ogee xviii
Legal History and Bibliography, Courses in................. 221
loons, ANIey hohe re cb bo Geo π΄ ππ' τ ν Ὁ 41, 295
PREC UAGONSI Geese ices teeta a Πρ tole» ora τὴν ; 296
Libraries, Departmental.
ΡΟ POSIT πὰ 5) cps τ || τ ΠΠ 40
Gliemnsiany eich Mobo Ae Oka SoU Rasen meee πὴ Πὺ᾿-ν 128
aS Sees eras Sari fer Phe ett ts apes eee sata ti atthe 217
WHE OTTER nike tn Gene ate roe COR Os OER eee sects a: 285
ΠΟΥ τον ΣΎ "τοῦ της. ΤΟΣ 120
ὑηξα ἀαεἴιη πε τ ποτ Εν ὙΠ᾿ 312
Literate in Arts, Certificate of .......... Woes ee ARIA o>, ere 72
LL.D. Degree, Requirements One PSAP AS See C αὐτὸ ya hedoe 25
Mocak@entres.) Matriculation Xam. fOtese eo © Gee. teeG 2τὸ 10
ΠΌΡΟΣ (COURSES Wipe por obneccsse souk G-UnSeoagoccs ἘΠ ee: 105
ΔΕ ΟΡ ΟΡ ΟΡ ΠΡΟ <a πο} ts cans eee a 10. eee τ. rs 22,
MED He Meomeew Ε ΒΡ Ula bONS err ais tests eet oe scien - 24
TRXEG HUTTON NAT MOA Se oe ok aocr Sc hee 6 ooo HeCOE ΛΣΤ a ris)
WIESE. 1 Oey ere eran oie Moen Sintra” ποὺ an Ate es 24
Nachimes DeStones Courses ine eta. cet etoile ae oe te eee 177
ἈΠ ΠΡ ΞΟ τε Oke τος πὸ ae Soma oor One tron (oo οὐ τίν, 207
θυ πο. συ πα 1 Προ. Ἐν: foci ae ον ee Sh των ; 208
Maritime παν COULSESAINs ©. kt © Επτ τῷ ecole te ele os = 223
Marriage Cov enants, Goursest nwa Of bene es ee eee wre 224
Materia Medica“ Woursessimes. sas cee ste Sees heater olar= 256
Mathematics and Math. Physics, Courses in (ATtS) τ τς 108
(Aca plied ΞΟΠ ΡΣ δ τ chia sce δ Raat a ciate Ὁ τος ; 175
ΘΗ ΥΩ ΒΟ ἘΠ ΠΣ bora uObyeorsn cer rise ect ΡΠ} 202
Mia Ere π πτθτι Εν ΘΙ. ὦ... Ὁ a. - πὸ ρ το eee 10
Requirements of Faculties>.........2,.F4........-- : 12
ΠΕ ποι πιο θοθ. seco es se tse karen Sat tore othe aie 15
IRete mG p Sin bs oo Dade + ἐν SCUOLA εν Ἐπ τ Ὁ 10
IRCCS ALOE yey Re a ΦΈΠΟΥ ede: GEN clas o aug eaee spat clas dM rol state stats 28
DoH OMR BHO) flan ye ae πΠ Bh nebo cous sua ΠΡ 11
Mimevands ΘΙ ΘΟ ΘΙ. τ ΡΣ Sete rer τον 10
IN Bl σα ΠΟΘΙ ΤΟΝ eee ee eee recta oe eo seen tela = tee 10, 19
(CRANE ICENRD oor Geko hi ao 5 πεν προ Le Se Boobs Seen pane OO Oe 28
McGill Normal School Announcement .... ................-- 299
Mechanical Engineering.
WOUTS CHIT ees ticks mars Role ss IRE vet CD atpar Reee athens Ἂς ee cletete 156
Sulbjeet ΟΣ τὸ sc hiss eerste east ne Faire Ramee se aes oe 176
IDPS EN Ho ee ME aL ATES Bae etn clin ρον 198
Mechanics: AC OUrSCS IME. . swiss Ae lcabciattio 2 c/ale «Sie τς το τος Siorere 111, 175
Wied al SuanwanGeds Lins ATS ii to circtua os bor opie ρον τ 12
ImigAp ΠΝ δ SCLEN CO πον ΣΡ oct oto ον ΥΩ ΚΤ 3 of 144
JERE ee ee eee peat hh ian A Cen an generale Reka a aie 219
en We GiGING ssace sae sae Mees ane Sater Seed ed Σ ee 27
Ronse hy sical Gulawre τ το so eee aye ΤΥ ee Ae Seems br cholate 44
Medical unisprudencesbeebures im... τὸ τὴς Ὅτ ie o'er 260
Medi ΟΙ ΟΣ MeChUTeS IM ao). S34.) er cpacictee τή 11 πεν oe oione oie 256
257
Wedicme: Subj ΘΟ ΘΕ Oli Cal essen coi emitted: cele τονε
x
PAGE
Medicine placulty of): s)cc...05 bho-nn eee 234
(Οὐ he. vk ns Node oan Rey ieee eee 251
Po hich Ο ΘΟ tien τον ἐν δεν Εν τ aot ΔΝ whet. eee ae 271
Double Courses in Arts and: Medicine.............. 69, 267
Graduates τ τος aw Se (ers 271
Courses of Lectures :—
MAC OUAY τος (soiree ἐπὴν το maces hed ee 252
BSIOLOB Ya ah in siorey © Os ok Socoges toe 4 ae 261
Cheniistry eo. noel, Ch ONO | τὺ π| 0... 253
Clinical’ Microscopy ..2!:. 9... 425%, oe νων 266
Gy MAC COlO Y= ep esate. See ee ee 259
Veen eye. 3. ck ee ὙΠῸ sof Rais Serge hin Sees ea 264
Histology 3: 2 besos “tye EA ieee οεροοέΨἔσιεο 255
infantile Diseases’ εν ον Os τε το ee. νθΝ 258, 266
Laryngology. 208. )i.0. hs Ne 265
Medical, Jurisprudencé..;:. ec. ee eee 260
Medicine and Clinical Medicine...................... “256, 257
Mental-Diseasest να ee ee ee 266
ODStetries </iee es ion GROAN 3 ie slik Ss ae 258
Opthalmology “and Otology:..:....4.<... 30) ee 260
Patholory and ‘Bactericlosy<..2.. 44) 5. eee 262
Pharmacology and Therapeutics...................... 256
PH yStOlO eye τος ee ce oes ee ane oe ee 254
Public Health and Preventive Medicine. ............ 264, 274
Ribinolos yes aie ee eae ee 265
Surgery and Clinical Surgery:...:...2:...2....... 257, 258
Buildings; ‘DMescription"of., cs. 5 eles ae eee 237
Climicaljpinstruction «.) 2) ae. eee ee : 291
Degree; Requirements for Mop. se ee 24, 275
Duration sof. Session..0.4 soe ee ee ee a
Fixamin ations ye... ae Mee Roe ete ππεν τ, 218
Mees. ie rcl e ate og tae Se ee es Pa eee 91
Helllowshipsity. see eee ΤΑ oils eee Re 279
Foundation and Early History............¥\......-.. 2.. 234
ΕΟΠΘΌΥΞ. . παι κῶν ἰού λον Eee 219
Hospitals, act πο τ τ lta eee ee ΡΝΝ 288
laboratories: ΝΕ oe ee eee 238
AUDA ΙΗ ΤΥ ΔΝ ἐπ ed ee 285
Maternity;:The Montreal, 401s. oe τον 292
Miftriculation’.<p 000 2 eee len See ee he ΔΝ 5.0} 14
UCTS EC aie eas MaRS Ave nme eM LS en Sky) IF” ᾿ς 219
Medical ‘Societys. 2.22, ...c60 a νυν 287
IVINTSE HI Si nets, haste! en ee enn Cie ae 75 281
AMA COM ICA rH never see onl ὑπνκο ae τ ον 284
ERY CONG is Poe Ak Ok Pe ae See ae ee ΕΝ 283
Pathological *<. "20... took eae aia ee ct oe ey 282
ETIZES aah Be Ske Pes nce Eh Ne I a (τιν Bode 279
Registration requirements of Provinces, Great Britain,
andcelsewherel:. ον εν 6.8 een So uaa = 240
Rep ulabiOnS se ei hs Se τυ στον ee ee ΟΝ 275
SunmmmersSchooll.. py. ee Beane ats - ὌΝ A oni 272
SludentemMstlor. πον Στοῦ ΘΛ ieee eee a ΥΝΝΝ 320
LER TMBOOK Si eae ΑΒ Pash ce een eee ge ae a ΕΡΗΝΝ 280
ΤΠ ΘΙ] ΘΈΤΟ A. el eka hed ταν οἷς ποι i ee σ ΟΟ ΜΙ 240
Medical Buildings, Description of.................2..-c.. ccs. 237
Mental sDiseases4 Coursessin’as)>. ce. eek ee 266
Mental and Moral Philosophy, Courses in............ ....... 104
Metallurgy.
WOnrs yn Te A νυ εν ἐν Ὁ tan ge 157
SUD IE CUOL a tetrey TA er ee Tn eee el ee 178
MAD OLALOTIES Resets: ee ae ee See 198
Metaphysics; Courses sine aya eer a enn eee eee ee 104
Me teorolosyas Courseseina.. a eee er area ον τὰς 125, 181
METI Sg ROOT A ον hoe gee πον ἀν ἀν el eg ΠΘΕῚ 199
iy os -<9.2 Alea ee Png nat ὐν δ Ἄν
t
ΧΙ
ῬΑΘΕ.
Mineralocyesoursesm inerrant nels aie lass yay es 115, 181
Ninine “Suildine, the Macdonal@. τι .cec-e--- ere 0.0} 40
Mining Engineering.
WOES eee ee eae cote Peery peas heute Cros sata s 159
ΘΟ Dlit las os Ae a epee {dees ρου amen woado dae 181
ha DOLAEOLICSH Re ee Rae ae ΤΣ ΟΡ eeneene 199
Wikeale!! ΞΟΙΘ ΘΙ Nese on Sona Somr ohne τ τἀ τ τοὺ 300
Museum, The Peter RECipa lpm ΑΠ Meare mre ecm 42
MinseumsnOl sApplied | SClENCG sey τος το ΕΟ Το τὰς 205
OfeAmatoniyiere. eee ete προ Ἐπ: Age 281
ὩΣ ΕΙΣ ΟΠ ΠΥ So dee 6-4. Sead red oo ORB Ἄς τ ρα 283
(OW IBAA τ ΠΣ ob beh tanya er tax 282
Musics Coursessins.. sce. - 2 aC eds. ἐς epee LS A με συ ον 139
Hxaminations in:....:..%- XN SR ΕΣ τον να ἘΝ at ae 4
Ng mey Seah WC erll πτθῃΓΚΓ στε ες το τ τε τὴς 209
INotarial lucas COUTSES OI anes eae tee. oe 4 ΄- 225
@blizations, Coursesins aw, ΟἿ. τ τ τὸ. as: 1 22-8 oe als 225
ΕΟ ΟΣ JUNG oan cdadnesemdacnean cor s dbtopaun et aobsenbor s 43
OVS ΘΟ ΙΕ ΘΗ ΞΟΠ jbo secs Son horas oseenoos oem sabenseone 258
Occasional Students, see Partial Students.
Officers of Instruction, ΡΟ ee stom τὲς ΤΡ ens moe XViii
Opthalmolocy WC OuLSeS πηι ψοὦρψὥνἕιὁ«ιἕὥνἜἝέ͵ΕὦΕεἊο.Ἅὃοκ arm τ τ 260
OfolOs yar COUTSCSIe Ne Sate yet saa ee a ntora iat eels cle ῪΣ 260
Oxford University, ἈΠ τ στο, eRe shee. eos 7
PalAcanwO lone COULSES τ of ees sat aercyee nel Aer telah pelt 123
ΕἾ τα ΞΡ ember eee netcn. & nee ee ce cece ere tse Ὑ ΤΣ tte et
Pathology, GOTSER BIL Whee oy Ree Re ee aE oe AV 262
Laboratory ΟΕ... Pee cd Me, WN Sahar cin Nara Sea N RES Be 239
ΞΘ ΟΕ Δεν πες ν ἐγ οτος, τσ ee pe TIS) SE eee ae ey Me eae 282
IBN iWernaene ieanajeptesoY) 55.5: oo meee ne bodesy seeded. a auoehes Ὁ 206
Course of Instruction in........ Be rae Bt Ame EE le 208
IBA VINEN PEO leh CCS ase mere a Aten ἢ: iB Mea Cartes τς 27
[Redav aoe COULSe Sm lly ie ecg eee eo a Serle ον 125
ΒΕ ΕΟ ΝΘ pabhe MuSGuMiae ce eee eerie τ τ το 42
Retrocrapiical ΠΑ ΠΟΥ ΠΟΥ ἐπεὶ 20s. 22 a eee te PM ea eae 129, 200
Rharmacolocical (Ua bOrabOUles. το τ see <a ποτ τς 237
Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Courses in ............ uy 256
Physicals Culture elassese (Wen ) eres tec are siete tee .-- "Ὁ 43
(Women) 015. fon. Sie 9. Pte Spee τὺ ie esse 138
Physics Building, The Macdonald........ . RRC ΔΑ ΣΑΣ 41
AHORA τ σα: ἐν τ ρον. Monee φορος στο τε Σιν 125, 201
Physics; Courses, ime(Arts) (225 ..-2-- .-e- = Bee ted Bae Ma 109, 111
(Appplieds Science) Balser pater ieee ere cee 185
Physiological WaboratOnieSce aj... eer mal: = Oe as aa pe 239
Physiology, Courses in........ πεν ρος teh no Oke A eee λα, 254
Politicalesciencess © OUTSESSINN. yet ches 6 tere fet. oes eels 100
Preventive Medicine, (το ese ΤῊ νον arn oe 264, 274
MUS GUT Olineccery ea eee oe etre i a cede: tear ee ceon tenet τ τ μὸ τ ἐπ 283
ΕΠ ΠΟΙ ΠΠ ΟΣ πος ρος em oittyrelin τὴν σον 2
Private, Imbermationaleawe (CoOursessimre-ssee se) 0s ep ee 226
ἘΠ σοι Ασα Πρ {Ὁ ap ete lorie en ΠΣ: 72
lon. A oySMKEG LISTEN. ὙΠ Saas c, Sere ποιό τ 144
Tiree ον Δ Ae ay lee AR an Seiad ee ea ἧλος 218
nee dicinieyen see sce ete ἌΓ ΟΣ ἐπ ae ae EE leat Goatees 279
Procedure, Courses in Civil................. Bs I eres 223, 224
Professional Students’ HI XETIPDLON SH INIVAULS Sao Δ 7: 68
Professors, List ΟἿ. Ὁ. ΠπΠ.- τς τς Ὁ00ὕ00---- xviii
DEITY CNG Tes, Pee eae CTP 71. Ἐπ hoes taje bevel tetra il aisie bobs XXvi
Public Health and Preventive Medicine, Courses I ees 264, 274
ΕΠ ΞΘ wr ean ees προ ἘΠ πρ Pay chun a ara 283
Public International Law, Courses in................ Bi dante 226
ΕΣ ΞΟΠΟΙ ΟΡ GourseSmlliace ne eseriici eerie te aii =e 104
ἘΠ
PAGE
RealiProperty, waw, Courses nt... s.-ite ee ee eee ee 225
Rerishratlon rn. wc. cls dh on Mee , εἰ...“ τ ΠΣ 27
Residences Board andes. ΕΝ eee 7
ΠΟ ΟΠ ETI mete rk wee ΝΡ ΤῊ eee hiwAhir tna dele 138
Rhinology, Courses in............ PEE CORI is SoA AY: 265
Romani Waw;" COULSES: All. 5 eects ae ee ere ῊΝ 220
Roval Institute of British Architects :
HxXaminations tor Associateship. ..:ceeccekes see 162
Royal Victoria College for “Women:. 5.2. ...han 0) eee 41, 186 ᾿
Sanskmit. «Courses. Πέτρος Act Siete ila See π 84
Scholarshipsy im, τα ΠΡ cos. «nue eee ae ν τ 45, 55
InvApplied Sciences. Vegas ies sist eee ee eae ne 144
D.-M>\Comms:’ for the Exhibition of 1851.44... 75, 146
Wain ers ΘΕ 1009 1905), που το τὰν δ, 910
And see Exhibitions.
Schools, University (A.A.) Examinations of ................. ᾿ 11
Second Years Admission to.) ose eee SER EEA AT ADI ἢ : 20
Semitic Languages, Courses in........ et Arata ten, seme a ae 97
Session Duration ΘΟ τ. ἀν το πο εν Βα rae 7
Singing Coursesyoks... An es 2. eee he a ee ea 139
be) eit] ie) 1X0) oe ee eI EME MRNA a cal N SL 208
Courses ofImstruction ine h \-0.te see ee ae 208
Societies, “Associations, and Clubs).... 5.45.0. ee ee 335
Apphed) SciencesSociety,.. ssa. Wa toe eee ee 335
Atle bic ASSOCIATION: ἡ fice op ΡΤ ΠΝ . do0%, 838
BasketsBalli@lub en. cc ee τσ παν ae 338
ChemicaliSocrety.se) sa ὡς Ae BNA ISS Merete in PE 336
Grigket s Clue yas ste bes eae Sere aT alee eae ΘΎΕΙ ee Ae 338
DeltasSigma.Society,.. shee ies Mie ee eee Rig ke ot 335
FooL balls Clabes eee ae a aa δι 337
INSSOCIA GION a ie ao eee ee et NE es ee oe eee ee 337
Gleeand Banjo Clinb.i 2 sui Soe heen wae ΤΩΣ 998
Graduates’ Societies :
INT eB Ae Nad iat Odio frags Re Se ee 339
BritishaColumibiany. ss. heroes wean hae ee 340
Chicago. ss τον τὰ Ν On en a ον εν τ 340
District of. Bedford 5 Lane! el alae cere i ον ΟΝ 340
Maritime?Provincesit το ΠΝ ΤΣ e 341
McGill Wniversitys ) ass. 3: Pee ΝΕ ΤΡ ΤῸ Τὴ 339
New Hine land yo. epee, eae eee eee ee 340
INE WEOYIOBK: tr Uo ae, sa hii ae a: tS Στ ΨΟΊΩΝΙ 339
Ottawan' Valley oye che ith ee, a Guna 339
DOPONTO ME Es τα eee dette ἡδύς CoE ee Ce ie. of ὙΜΉΝ, 340
Historical) Clubs! ἀπο τότες τον ee ee ασνονς 335
Hockey Club seins cook ate a en ee ae 338
Laven} Tennis ‘Clube (86! fei) 5 eae ee na eee 338
Literary Society, Undergraduates’.... .... ............. 335
Medical <Societ ye ie ah cg oa an ee ain 287, 336
Mining Society. 220.5 ee ane ep oe ae 336
Rhysical Society ccf ond one ee eee 335
Skavinoilubw te we ae nae Fe Ris a Ma iis ee) bak 338
Young iMen’s! Christian .,'Association, 2.2: 7 3. s.ase 336
Young Women’s Christian Association............ ..... 337
Special Lectures in Applied Science................... 192
Stanstead Wesleyan’ Collepe \) c+... τορι τ ἀπ: 5
vO CUaenbS Ofer de. ss). ὦ kc ths. cee Re ee ee 333
Soudents: Classification vot τ ode ieee ee ξ
Of other Universities’ admitted. 75-422.) δ 21
sists} ofa ES at RE AS Oh ee oe ee 312
Number “in “Attendance 2>. τορι si 334
Ber Στ τι Ρ
} Sy a a
( ἱ : ὃ Ε ἊΨ
Se be" ΓΑ
3 wt
. xili
> ert PAGE
Summer Schools and Classes in Arts.....-.---++-++++e++0+5- 76
In Applied Science....-....---<202-00-- sheers rete ene . 147
τ ΝΕ Προ". ἴτε γος το Lar 2k ea ae τ σὲ 184
inte Sue OVINE es out Mees een ent ones Fee nee een 189
Mme Miedicinemen in. aeescbete. oes sel: lees oie 272
"τ Supplemental Examinations in ΑὙῦϑ.. «τ τ τντντνττοττσσελεσσεττι 66, 133
Tn Applied’ Science: © 2222-24 tae. t- 0 τὖὕὉ0τ000. 148
Ter ON We ΕΙΠΕ DY Beene og aah πιὰ tan acide 090 πους 279
Gureery, Courses Is. 2.25502: πΦᾳ«“«ι«Φ««ιο ones ieee ees eens se 257
“Testing Laboratories......--.--..+2--.s+2+22 -ὉτὕὃὌὍὉπτ| |ττπ0ὕ{- 202
Text-books in Medicine...........-. ὺ. 00... {00ὕ0Κ 000 0 9π.-- 280
Theological Colleges, ΑΒ] δύϊοη. .--- «τς τ τον τιν τνττσσττσσενεν ᾿ 5
Exemptions in Arts tor Students Of es Nee το ΚΒ ἧς 72
Therapeutics, Courses in..........--+----eeee cere err ἐτξ τι σεν 256
Thermodynamics, Courses in........--++-.++e0+2+0e2eees acer 191
HOAWOLBUOLY 20 gee -eelo les. ἃ ne cen ise ee 204
ime Table of Lectures, etc., in Applied Science......... . 212
Tiriy JIG) Oe end ic ioe © ae Bidding oto Ot Canes DG ee orate 130
Tan L Gig eben one Beene Boe Aon ao sucGr obs os 1 τ or 232
TRV CLING ee cee ears ρου eager ayeoie gis Ponca 249
In Royal Victoria College for VOM GIL eee ee 5 ates Se 140
Transportation, Courses in ... ......-+++++++ sees eerste 190
Wrideroraduates. #022. 2a lar. tops oie Fo ge lee ela inne 2 9
University Athletic Association. -- - - «τ τν τ τεσ τσ στεετσσσσσσεν ; 38, 337
University School (A. A.) MxaminaclOnS-seeee cabanas Ὁ 41}
Waneou ver ΟΠ τρα οπόυ πρέΕροόΨψΠΨἔΕΠΡΠἘ[ἘοιἍἘΠμΠέὁΕὌοΙ sta Deere 5
SHIGenUSWOL, erties Bea ise ook Boge roe 5 rah = ae ee ean 333
Victoria College for Women, The Royal. .... .--..--------- 136
Wictorias College, BO: 9.0. ga. ππΠ Porites Years oie Naina 5
Women, Courses open to, in Arts.........----- στο eeeseees 9
ce In the Royal Victoria College ..........--.-- ban aoe 136
r Gymnastic Classes ΤΌΤ... - -- οςς ς τον τ τον σε στιν freer cece 198
Residence: ΟΟ τροᾧΨ΄οἕΕιΨἔἘὁΠΡ. ee Πρ τὸ. Ὁ {τ -- 7,138
The Royal Victoria College for.........---+-----+++++++- 136
Wood-turning Shop.......-. fn CS OCA REO CD OSEL Et 206
WR GHODS Sie ata on τεῦς τς νου συ ρος eagle cme rg 206
Y.M.G.A. of McGill University ........5... ---s--e eee e eee 336
Y. W.C. A. of McGill University..............--- 00s ses eee: 337
Zoological TEP) OMS ow SC BBR e Gore ags, Bo Gobc ooe oes suoCuCs go 2)
Zoology, Courses in (Αὐ 8). τ--- τ τ τς το τθν νος seen δεν ν τς κοῖτον 119
(In ΜΙΘΘΙΟΙΠ6)..- ποτ ττοτ τι ὑππ| ὐῸ΄ς Bae ARO 261
Governing Hody of the WMniversity.
VISITOR:
HIS EXCELLENCY THE RIGHT HONOURABLE THE
HARE OR MINTO, ΘΝ br. Day Pic:
GOVERNOR-GENERAL OF CANADA, ETC.
GOVERNORS:
THE RIGHT HON. LORD STRATHCONA AND MOUNT ROYAL,
G.C.M.G., LL.D (Hon. Cantab.), President and Chancellor of
the University.
JOHN MOLSON, Esq.
SIR WILLIAM C. MACDONALD.
GEORGE HAGUE, Esq.
EDWARD B. GREENSHIELDS, Esq., B.A.
SAMUEL FINLEY, Esq.
ANDREW FREDERICK GAULT, Esq.
HON. JOHN SPROTT ARCHIBALD, M.A., D.C.L.
CHARLES J. FLEHT, Esq.; B.A., B:C-L.
RICHARD B. ANGUS, Esq.
SIR WILLIAM C. VAN HORNE, K.C.M.G.
JAMES ROSS, Esq.
CHARLES -S;CAMPBHEL,, Hsq), ΠΝ Kee
ROBERT CRALTK Hsq:, MoD: ἘΠῚ D:
‘
XLV.
PRINCIPAL.
WILLIAM PETERSON, M.A., ΤΠ ΜΈ (τ Vice-Chancellor.
(The Principal has, under the Statutes, the general superintend-
ence of all affairs of the College and University, under such regula-
tions as may be in force.)
FELLOWS.
Ex-Officio.
ALEXANDER JOHNSON, M.A., ἘΠ ao. IDOE ἘΠΕ ΘΟ νος
Principal, and Dean of the Faculty of Arts. ;
HENRY T. BOVEY, M.A., D.C.L., ἘΠ), F.R.S., M.Inst.C.H., Dean
of the Faculty of Applied Science.
-F. P. WALTON, B.A., LL.B., Dean of the Faculty of Law.
THOMAS G. RODDICK, M.D., LL.D., Dean of the Faculty of
Medicine.
Ss. P. ROBINS, M.A., LL.D., Principal of McGill Normal School.
1'o retire on 1st September, 1903.
JOHN REDPATH DOUGALL, M.A., Representative Fellow in Arts.
Rive eels Rextord. ΤΕ Δ Governors’ Fellow.
Rev. James Barclay, M.A., D.D., Governors’ Fellow.
ALEXANDER FALCONER, B.A., B.C.L., Representative Fellow in
Law.
CHAS. E. MOYSE, B.A., LL.D., Elective Fellow, Faculty of Arts.
JOHN COX, M.A., F.R.S.C., Hlective Fellow, Faculty of Arts.
Rev. J. T. L. MAGGS, B.A., B.D., Representative Fellow, Montreal
Wesleyan Theological College.
ioe DaLADAMS) DNc., Bh oD, Representative Fellow in Applied
Science.
W. J. McGUIGAN, M.D., LL.B., Representative Fellow, Vancouver
College, Vancouver, B.C.
110 retire on 1st September, 1904.
BERNARD J. HARRINGTON, M.A., LL.D., Governors’ Fellow.
FREDERICK W. KELLEY, B.A., Ph.D., Representative Fellow in
Arts. Ἢ
Reve UL AN. BoA. MD: F.R.S.C., Elective Fellow, Faculty of
Medicine.
Cc. H. GOULD, B.A., Governors’ Fellow.
E. Ww. MACBRIDE#, M.A., D.Se., Elective Fellow, Faculty of Arts.
Tore . INE ISUNEIby MD pIDE Representative Fellow, Congregational Col-
lege of Canada, Principal of the College.
CG. ‘W. WILSON, M.D., Representative Fellow in Medicine.
Ke BS Ce MOORES ΤΕΥ ΟΣ Representative Fellow in Comparative
Medicine and Veterinary Science.
Rev. HENRY M. HACKETT, M.A., B.D., Representative Fellow,
Montreal Diocesan Theological College, Principal of the College.
ot GAPPHR, M:A; A.R-LB-A., R.C.A., Elective Fellow, Faculty
of Applied Science.
To retire on 1st September, 1905.
Rev. JOHN SCRIMGER, M.A., D.D., Representative Fellow, Pres-
byterian College, Montreal.
Rev. J. CLARK MURRAY, LL.D., F.R.S.C., Elective Fellow, Faculty
of Arts.
ΝΠ T. WESLEY MILLS, M.A., M.D., F.R.S.C., Representative Fellow
in Medicine.
CGC. H. McLEOD, Ma.E., F.R.S.C., Representative Fellow in Applied
Science.
7 ἢ -
ΡΥ τ Ὲ
= ͵
my
Ὗ
XVI
Rev. C. R. FLANDERS, B.A., D.D., Representative Fellow, Stan-
stead Wesleyan College, Stanstead, Que., Principal of the College.
G. CUNNINGHAM WRIGHT, B.C.L., Representative Fellow in Law.
ARCHIBALD McGOUN, M.A., B.C.L., K.C., Elective Fellow, Faculty
of Law.
F. J. SHEPHERD, M.D., Elective Fellow, Faculty of Medicine.
J. BONSALL PORTER, E.M., Ph.D., Elective Fellow, Faculty of
Applied Science.
R. TAIT McKENZIE, B.A., M.D., Governors’ Fellow.
Wie Wi OVER BE SIVE Dt. John, N. B., non-resident Representative
Fellow (Maritime Provinces and Newfoundland).
E. B. Cc. HANINGTON, M.D., non-resident Representative Fellow
(British Columbia, Manitoba and North-West Territories).
ROBERT W. ELLS, M.A., LL.D., Ottawa, non-resident Representa-
tive Fellow (Ontario).
WM. OSLER, M.D., LL.D., F.R.S., Johns Hopkins University, non-
resident Representative Fellow (United States).
(The Governors, Principal and Fellows constitute, under the Char-
ter, the Corporation of the University, which has the power, under
the Statutes, to frame regulations touching the Course of Study,
Matriculation, Graduation and other educational maiters, and to
grant degrees).
SECRETARY AND BURSAR :
WALTER VAUGHAN, OFFICE, East WING, MCGILL COLLEGE.
REGISTRAR :
J. A. NICHOLSON, M:A., OFFICE, EAST WING, McGiILL COLLEGE.
Office Hours : 9 to 5.
THE ACADEMIC BOARD.
(Regular Meetings on the first Wednesday of October, December, Pebr uary,
and March, at 8.15 p.m.)
CHAIRMAN—THE PRINCIPAL.
The Principal, the Deans of the several Faculties, the Professors
and Associate Professors, and other members, not exceeding ten in
number, of the teaching staff of the University, have been consti-
tuted, tinder the statutes, the Academic Board of the University,
with the duty of considering such matters as pertain to the interests
of the University as a whole and making recommendations con-
cerning the same.
Maer νέαν ep ich det τ σους χα A as
᾿ ν at? Ws oe Sah
Mommittees.
FINANCE COMMITTEE OF THE GOVERNORS.
(Meeting on the second Thursday of each month at 4 p.m.)
Sir Wm. C. MACDONALD. SAMUEL FINLEY, Esa.
BE. ΙΒ. GREENSHIELDS, Esa. Cc. J. FuBET, Hsa.
GEORGE HaGuE, Esa. R. B. ANGus, Esa.
PRINCIPAL PETERSON.
PETER REDPATH MUSEUM COMMITTEE.
(Meeting on the Monday before each Regular Meeting of Cor-
poration, at 4.30 p.m.) Ἶ
PRINCIPAL PETERSON, Chairman. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
GEORGE HAGUE, ‘ESQ. ProFr. Ὁ. P. PENHALLOW.
Cc. J. FLEET, Esa. Dr. Εἰ. Ὁ. ADAMS.
J. R. DovGatt, Esa. Pror. ERNEST W. MCBRIDE.
UNIVERSITY LIBRARY COMMITTEE.
(Meeting on the Monday before each Regular Meeting of
Corporation at 5 p.m.)
PRINCIPAL PETERSON, Chairman. Dr. H. T. ‘BOVEY.
Cc. J. FLEET, Esa. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
JAMES Ross, Esa. Pror. C. E. MOYSE.
J. R. DouGALL, Esa. C. H. GOULD, Esq.
Dr. ALEX. JOHNSON. Pror. Ὁ. P. PENHALLOW.
Rey. Dr. J. CLARK MURRAY. Pror. F. P. WALTON.
COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT OF THE MACDONALD PHYSICS
BUILDING.
(Meeting on the Thursday before each Regular Meeting of
Corporation at 5 p.m.)
PRINCIPAL PETERSON. Dr. ALEX. JOHNSON.
Dr. ROBERT CRAIK. Dr. H. T. BOVEY.
PrRoF. JOHN Cox.
COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT OF THE MACDONALD
ENGINEERING BUILDING.
(Meeting on the third Monday of each month at 4.30 p.m.)
Cc. J. FLEET, Esa. Dr. H. T. ‘BOVEY.
PRINCIPAL PETERSON. Pror. C. H. McLEop.
COMMITTEE OF MANAGEMENT OF THE MACDONALD
CHEMISTRY AND MINING BUILDING.
(Meeting on the third Monday of each month at 4 p.m.)
Cc. J. FLEET, Esa. Dr. H. T. BOVEY.
PRINCIPAL PETERSON. Dr. B. J. HARRINGTON.
Dr. J. B. PORTER.
COMMITTEE OF MAN AGEMENT OF THE COLLEGE GROUNDS.
(Meeting on the third Monday of each month at 5.15 p.m.)
Cc. J. FueEet, Esa. Pror. C. H. McLeop (Sec. of Com.)
PRINCIPAL PETERSON. Pror. F. P. WALTON.
Pror. FRANK CARTER. Dr. R. ἘΠῚ RUTTAN.
And Representatives of the Graduates and of the University
Athletic Clubs.
**
en a ee .ἣ ΝΣ BOM MA ay hf λύτο
Ofticers of Austruction.
ARTS.
W. PETERSON, M.A., (Edin. and Oxon), LL.D. (St. Andrews), C.M.G.
Principal and Professor of Classics. 889 Sherbrooke Street.
BERNARD J. HARRINGTON, M.A., Ph.D. (Yale), LL.D., F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Macdonald Professor of Chemistry and Mineralogy, Lecturer
in Assaying, and Director of Chemistry and Mining
Building. 295 University Street.
CHARLES ἘΣ. Moysez, B.A. (London), LL.D.
Molson Professor of English Language and Literature.
802 Sherbrooke Street.
D. P. PENHALLOW,’B.Sc. (Boston Univ.), M.Sc., F.R.S.C., F.R.M.S.
Macdonald Professor of Botany. The Marlborough, 210 Milton St.
REV. DANIEL COUSSIRAT, B.A., B.D. (Université de France), D.D.
(Queen's), Officier de l’Instruction Publique.
Professor of Semitic Languages and Oriental Literature.
171 Hutchison Street.
JOHN Cox, M.A. (Cantab.), E.R.S.C.; late: Fellow Trin. Coll., ,Cam-=
bridge.
Macdonald Professor of Physics and Director of
Physics Building. . 241 University Street.
FRANK Ὁ. ADAMS, M.A.Sc.,, Ph.D. (Heidelberg), D.Sc, F.G.S.A.,
HSE ec.
Logan Professor of Geology and Paleontology 243 Mountain Street.
Co Wa Couey ΝΑ. ands heb. (blarvard)s
Kingsford Professor of History. 127 Bishop Street.
ERNEST W. MacBRIDE, M.A. (Cantab.), D.Sc. (lond.), late Fellow of
St. John’s College, Cambridge.
Strathcona Professor of Zoology. 76a Crescent Street.
ERNESt RUTHERFORD, M.A.. D.Se., (Univ. N.Z.), F.R.S.
Macdonald Professor of Physics. 152 St. Famille Street.
J. WALLACE WALKER, M.A. (St. Andrews), Ph.D. (Leipsic), F.R.S.C.
Macdonald Professor of Chemistry. 15 Lorne Avenue.
A. W. Fuux, M.A. (Cantab.), late Fellow of St. John’s College, Cam-
bridge.
William Dow Professor of Political Economy. 126 Crescent Street.
HERMANN WALTER, M.A. (Edin.), Ph.D. (Munich).
Professor of Modern Languages. 150 St. Famille Street.
JAMES HARKNESS, M.A. (Cantab.).
Peter Redpath Professor of Pure Mathematics. McGill College.
Frothingham Professor of Philosophy.
Macdonald Professor of Moral Philosophy.
Mills Professor of Classics.
A. JUDSON EATON, Ph.D., A.M. (Leipsic). \
Associate Professor of Classics. 154 Drummond Street.
Paun T. LAFLEUR, M.A.
David J. Greenshields Associate Professor of English. 58 University St.
H. M. Tory, M.A.
Associate Professor of Mathematics. 197 Mance Street.
LEIGH R. GreGor, B.A., Ph.D. (Heidelberg).
Lecturer in Modern Languages. 189 Bayle Street.
(The above Professors and Lecturers constitute the Faculty of Arts.)
Kx
OTHER OFFICERS OF INSTRUCTION.
Nevin Norton Evans, M.A.Sc.
Assistant Professor of Chemistry. 157 St. Famille Street.
HowarRp T. BARNES, D.Sc.
Assistant Professor of Physics. 5 Lorne Avenue.
Carrif M. Derick, M.A.
Lecturer in Botany. 46 Cathcart Street.
Rev. J. L. Morin, M.A.
Lecturer in French. 65 Hutchison Street.
S. B. Stack, M.A. (Oxon).
Lecturer in Classics. McGill College.
E. T. LAMBBRT, B.A. (Lond.).
Lecturer in Modern Languages. 456 Mountain Ave., Westmount.
HinpA DIANA OAKELEY, M.A., Warden, Royal Victoria College.
Lecturer in Philosophy. Royal Victoria College.
JoHN W. CUNLIFFE, M.A. & D.Litt. (Lond.).
Lecturer in English Language and Literature.
The Marlborough, 210 Milton Street.
J. STaFrorD, M.A. (Toronto), Ph.D. (Leipsic).
Lecturer in Zoology. McGill College.
SB. Leacock, B.A. (Toronto), Pa.D. (Chicago).
Lecturer in Political Science and History. McGill College.
J. wW. A. Hickson, M.A., Ph.D. (Halle).
Lecturer in Philosophy. 272 Mountain Street.
R. Tair McKENzIE, B.A., M.D.
Medical Director of Physical Training. $13 Dorchester Street.
W. R. FRASER,-Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins).
Lecturer in Classics. McGill College.
Murray McNBSILL, M.A. (Harvard), M.I.A.
Lecturer in Mathematics. McGill College.
Susan E. CAMERON, M.A.
Resident Tutor and Lecturer in Finglish. Royal Victoria College.
MaRtIn-LOUISE MILHAU, Officier da’ Academie.
Resident Tutor and Lecturer m French and German.
Royal Victoria College.
CLARA LICHTENSTEIN.
(Diplomée of the Royal Academy of Music, Buda-Pesth).
Resident Instructor in Musie. Royal Victoria College.
ANNA FYSHE. ;
Assistant Instructor im Music. 70 McTavish Street.
JoHN P. STEPHEN. j
Instructor in Elocution. 875 Dorchester Street.
ELIzABETH A. HamMMOND, M.A
Tuior in Classics. 224 St. Urbain Street.
A. Douacuas McINTOsSH, B.Sc. (Dalhousie), A.M. (Cornell), M.Sc.
Senior Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
ALFRED W. G. WILSON, M.A., Ph.D. (Harvard).
Demonstrator in Geology. McGill College.
BH, H. ARCHIBALD, M.Sc. (Dalhousie), A.M.,Ph.D (Harvard).
Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
BERTRAM Ὁ. STEELE, D.Sc. (Melbourne). Ξ
Demonstrator in Chemistry. 37a Waverley St., Montreal Annex.
M. VIoLETTE Dover, B.A., M.Sc.
Lecture-Assistant in Chemistry. 41 Burnside Place.
VENDLA M. HoLMstTRom.
Instructor in Gymnastics. 20 St. Luke Street.
C. C. SCHENCK, A.B., Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins).
Demonstrator in Physics. McGill College.
BELLA MARCUSE, B.A., M.Sc.
Demonstrator in Chemistry. 407 Metcalfe Ave., Westmount.
JAMES E. A. EGLESON, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
W. Lioyp Lopceg, M.A., B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Chemistry. 144 Drummond Street.
5. J. ALLEN, M.Sc.
Demonstrator in Physics. McGill College.
H. L. Cooks, M.Sc. ;
Demonstrator in Physics. McGill College.
With the foregoing are associated:
F. P. WALTON, B.A. (Oxon), L-B. (Edin.).
Gale Professor of Roman Law and Lecturer on Constitutional
Law. 522 Pine Avenue.
Cy) EL Mcbinop,;Ma.E).) RS ΤΟΙΣ
Superintendent of Meteorological Observatory. McGill College.
APPLIED SCIENCE.
HENRY T. Bovey, M.A. (Cantab.), M. Inst. C.H., LL.D. D.C.L. (Bish-
ΟΡ 5), F.R.S., late Fellow Queen’s College, Cambridge.
Dean of the Faculty of Applied Science, and William Scott
Professor of Civil Engineering and Applied Mechanics.
Sunnandene, Ontario Avenue.
BERNARD J. HARRINGTON, M.A., LL.D., Ph.D., (Yale), F.G.S., F.R.S.C.
Macdonald Professor of Chemistry and Mineralogy, Lecturer in
Assaying, and Director of Chemistry and Mining Building.
295 University Street.
C. H. McLeop, Ma.E., F.R.S.C. Su
Professor of Surveying and Geodesy, and Lecturer on Descriptive
Geometry, Supt. of Meteorological Observatory.
Observatory, McGill College.
G. H. CHANDLER, M.A.
Professor of Applied Mathematics. 32 Lorne Avenue.
JOHN Cox, M.A. (Cantab.), late Fellow Trin. Coll., Cambridge.
Macdonald Professor of Physics and Director of Physics
Building. 241 University Street.
FRANK D. ApDams, M.A.Sc., Ph.D. (Heidelberg), D.Sc., F.G.S.A.,
HRS Ce
Logan Professor of Geology and Paleontology. 243 Mountain Street.
J. BONSALL PORTER, E.M. & Ph.D. (Columbia), M.-Inst. C.E.
F.G.S.A.
Macdonald Professor of Mining Engineering. 392 Pine Avenue.
ERNEST RUTHERFORD, M.A., D.Sc. (Univ. N.Z.), F.R.S.
Macdonald Professor of Physics. 152 St. Famille Street.
J. WALLACE WALKER, M.A. (St. Andrews), Ph.D. (Leipsic), F.R.S.C.
Macdonald Professor of Chemistry. 15 Lorne Avenue.
R. B. OwEns, M.A., H.E. (Columtiay, D.Se., E.R.S.C.
Macdonald Professor of Electrical Engineering. 210 Milton Street.
Ro <3. DuRvury, .B.Sc.- (London); ΜΌΞΗΣ, AM. “inst. ΟΕ ΜῈ Am:
Soc. M.E.
Thomas Workman Professor of Mechanical Engineering and
Lecturer on Thermodynamics. 131 Stanley Street.
Ἷ 4 9s
mt Fo
Xxi
ALFRED STANSFIELD, D.Sc. (London).
Professor of Metallurgy. 58 Metcalfe Street.
Macdonald Professor of Architecture.
(The above Professors constitute the Faculty of Applied Science.)
OTHER OFFICERS OF INSTRUCTION.
Ricuarp 5. Lea, Ma.E., M. Can. Soc. C.E.
Assistant Professor of Civil Engineering and Lecturer in
Mathematics. 913 Dorchester Street.
HENRY Ε΄. ARMSTRONG.
Assistant Professor of Freehand Drawing and Descriptive
Geometry.
BE. G. Coker, M.A. (Cantab.), D.Sc. (Edin.), A.M. Inst. Cub:
Assistant Professor of Cwwil Engineering. 323 Pine Avenue.
NeEviL Norton EVANS, M.A.Sce.
Assistant Professor of Chemistry. 217 Milton Street.
Homer M. Jaquays, B.A., M.Se:, A.M. Can. Soc. C.B., A.M. Am.
Soc, M.E., A.M.A.I.E.E.
Assistant Professor of Mechan ical Engineering. 862 Sherbrooke Street.
jJ. G. G. Kerry, Ma.E., A.M. Can. Soc. C.E.
Assistant Professor of Surveying. 149 Durocher Street.
HowarRpD T. BARNES, D.Se.
Assistant Professor of Physics. 5 Lorne Avenue.
Lovis Herpt, Ma.E., E.E. (Elec. Inst. Montefiore, Belgium),
A.M.LE.E., A.M. Can. Soc. C.E. “
Assistant Professor of Electrical Engineering. 28 Montée du Zouave.
Murray McNEILu, M.A. (Harvard), M.I.A.
Lecturer im Mathematics. McGill College.
E. 5. S. Marrics, B.A.Sc., M. Can.. Soc. C.E.
Special Lecturer on Building Construction. 4278 Western Avenue.
MarceEt C. J. BEULLAC, B.Se. (Univ. of France), A.M. Can. Soc. C.E.
Special Lecturer on Building Construction. 35 Mayor Street.
A. DouGLAs McINTOSH, B.Sc. (Dalhousie), A-M. (Cornell). M.Sc.
Senior Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
E. H ARCHIBALD, M.Sc. (Dalhousie), A.M., Ph.D. (Harvard).
Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
ALFRED W. G. WILSON, MAL, PhD: (Harvard), F.G.S.A.
Demonstrator in Geology. McGill College.
C. C. ScHENcK, A.B., Ph.D. (Johns Hopkins).
Demonstrator in Physics. MeGill College.
BERTRAM D. STEELE, D.Sc. (Melbourne).
Demonstrator in Chemistry. 27a Waverley St., Montreal Annex.
K. M. CaMERON, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Civil Engineering. McGill College.
H. P. DE PENCIER, M.Sc.
Demenstraior in Mining. McGill College.
Ὁ J. ALLEN, M.Sc.
Demonstrator in Physics. MeGill College.
A. R. Roserts, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Mechanical Engineering. McGill College.
Fraser S. KertH, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Electrical Engineering. McGill College.
CHARLES L. TRIMINGHAM, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Electrical Engineering. McGill College
Xxil
ΒΕ Abney ΒΘΞῸΣ
Demonstrator in Metallurgy. 143 Mansfield Street.
JAMES ἘΣ. A. EGLESON, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Chemistry. McGill College.
W. Τα θυ" LopGsr, M.A., B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Chemistry. ἶ McGill College.
OF EVAL BSc
Demonstrator in Mechanical Engineering. McGill College.
H. W. JONES, B.Sc.
Demonstrator in Surveying and Drawing. McGill College.
With the foregoing are associated:
CHARLES ἘΣ Moyst, B.A. (Lond.), LL.D.
Molson Professor of English Language and Literature.
802 Sherbrooke Street.
JOHN W. CUNLIFFE, M.A. & D. Litt. (Lond.).
Lecturer in English Language and Literature.
The Marlborough, 219 Milton Street.
LAW.
(Macdonald Foundation.)
EF. P: WALTON, B.A. (Oxon), LL.B. (Hdin.).
Dean of the Faculty of Law and Gale Professor of Roman
Law. 552 Pine Avenue.
ARCHIBALD McGoun, M.A., B.C.L., K.C.
Professor of Civil Law. Dunayon, Westmount, & 107 St. James St.
Hon. THOMAS FORTIN, D.C.L.
Professor of Civil Law. 465 Sherbrooke Street.
W. DE M. MARLER, B.A., D.C.L.
Professor of Civil Law. 288 Peel Street.
Hon. CHARLES J. DOHERTY, D.C.L.
Professor of Civil Law. 282 Stanley Street.
BHUGENE. LAFLEUR, B.A., D.C..L, K.C.
Professor of International Law. N.Y. Life Building, Place d’Armes.
HON. CHARLES PEERS DAvipson, M.A., D.C.L.
Professor of Criminal Law. Place Viger Hotel.
ieee. sOMITE) 3, ©. Ke,
Professor of Commercial Law. 185 St. James Street.
(The above constitute the Faculty of Law.)
OTHER OFFICERS OF INSTRUCTION.
BWR Cy Com RYAN, 13:C.1i.
Lecturer on Civil Procedure. Canada Life Building, St. James St.
AIME GEOFFRION, B.C.L.
Lecturer on Obligations. 20 Bayle Street.
GORDON W. McDouGALL, B.A., B.C.L.
Lecturer on Civil Procedure. N.Y. Life Building, Place d’Armes.
MEDICINE.
THomAsS G. Roppick, M.D., LL.D. (Edin.).
Dean of the Faculty of Medicine and Professor of Surgery.
80 Union Avenue.
WILLIAM GARDNER, M.D.
Professor of Gynecology. 899 Sherbrooke Street.
XXill
FRANCIS J. SHEPHERD, M.D.
Professor of Anatomy. 152 Mansfield Street.
FRANK BULLER, M.D.
Professor of Opthalmology and Otology. 123 Stanley Street.
JAMES STEWART, M.D.
Professor of Medicine and Clinical Medicine. 285 Mountain Street.
GEORGE WILKINS, M.D. ,
Professor of Medical Jurisprudence and Lecturer in Histology.
- 898 Dorchester Street.
D. P. PENHALLOW, B.Sc. (Boston Univ.), M.Sc., F.R.S.C., F.R.MS.
Professor of Botany. McGill College.
TT’ WESLEY Mitts, M.A., M.D., F.R.S.C.
Joseph Morley Drake Professor of Physiology. McGill College.
J. CHALMERS CAMERON, M.D.
Professor of Midwifery and Diseases of Infancy. 941 Dorchester St.
ALEX. D. BLACKADER, B.A., M.D.
Professor of Pharmacology and Therapeutics, and Lecturer
on Diseases of Children. 236 Mountain Street.
R. F. Rutran, B.A. (Toronto), M.D., F.R.S, Can.
Professor of Chemistry. 1018 Sherbrooke Street.
JAMES BELL, M.D.
Professor of Clinical Surgery. 873 Dorchester Street.
J. GeorcE ADAMI, M.A., M.D. (Cantab. and McGill), F.R.S.E., LL.D.
Strathcona Professor of Pathology and Director of Pathological
Museum. 331 Peel Street.
H. 5. BIRKETT, M.D.
Professor of Laryngology. 123 Stanley Street.
F. G. FINLEY, M.B. (London), M.D.
Assistant Professor of Medicine and Associate Professor of
Clinical Medicine. 1013 Dorchester Street.
H. A. LAFLEUR, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Professor of Medicine and Associate Professor of
Clinical Medicine. 58 University Street.
GEORGE E. ARMSTRONG, M.D.
Associate Professor of Clinical Surgery. 320 Mountain Street.
ERNEST W. MacBripp, M.A. (Cantab.) D.Se., (Lond.), late Fellow
of St. John’s College, Cambridge.
Strathcona Professor of Zoology. 7éa Crescent Street.
T A. SraRKEY, M.B. (Lond.), D.P.H. (Lond.), M.R.C.S. (Eng.).
Professor of Hygiene. 801 Dorchester Street.
(The above Professors constitute the Faculty of Medicine.)
OTHER OFFICERS OF INSTRUCTION.
Tad. WV. BURGESS, ΠΝ:9...ὄ ΒΕ Ὲ ΝΣ τ.
Professor of Mental Diseases. Medical Superintendent
Protestant Hospital for Insane. Drawer 2381, Montreal.
C. F. Marttn, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Professor of Medicine and Clinical Medicine.
33 Durocher Street.
JOHN M. ELDER, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Professor of Surgery. 4201 Sherbrooke Street, Westmount.
W. S. Morrow, M.D.
Lecturer in Physiology. 82 Union Avenue.
J. J. GARDNER, M.D.
Lecturer in Opthalmology. 184 Peel Street.
J. A. SPRINGLE, B.A., M.D.
Lecturer in Anatomy. 1237 Dorchester Street.
EF. A. L. LOCKHART, M.B. (Edin.).
Lecturer in Gynecology. 38 Bishop Street.
A. ἘΣ GARROW, M.D.
Lecturer in Surgery and Clinical Surgery. 2730 St. Catherine Street.
W. F. HAMILTON, M.D.
Lecturer in Clinical Medicine. 287 Mountain Street.
G. GORDON CAMPBELL, B.Sc. (Dalhousie), M.D. ;
Lecturer in Clinical Medicine. 117 Metcalfe Street.
J. G McCartuy, M.D.
Lecturer in Anatomy. 61 Drummond Street.
Ὁ. J. Evans, M.D.
Lecturer in Obstetrics. 939 Dorchester Street.
N. D. GuNN, M.D.
Lecturer in Histology. 49 Union Avenue.
J. W. STIRLING, M.B. (Edin.), F.R.G.S.
Lecturer in Opthalmology. 255 Mountain Street.
J. ALEX. HUTCHISON, M.D. :
Lecturer in Clinical Surgery. 70 Mackay Street.
A. G. NICHOLLS, M.A., M.D.
Lecturer in Pathology. 2728 St. Catherine Street.
J. T. Hauspby, M.D. (Columbia).
Lecturer in Pharmacology. 48 Durocher Street.
W. W. CHIPMAN, B.A. (Acadia), M.D. (Edin.), F.R.S.C. (Edin.).
Lecturer in Gynecology. 287 Mountain Street.
H. WoOLFERSTAN THOMAS.
Fellow in Pathology. McGill College.
GEORGE A. CHARLTON, [M.D.
Fellow in Pathology. McGill College.
LEO LOEB. ;
Fellow in Pathology. 801 Dorchester Street.
R. Tarr McKENzib; IBsA.; M.D:
Demonstrator of Anatomy. 918 Dorchester Street.
J. A. HENDERSON, M.D.
Demonstrator of Anatomy. 34 Park Avenue.
KENNETH CAMERON, B.A., M.D.
Demonstrator of Clinicial Surgery. 903 Dorchester Street.
ἘΣ J. SEMPLE, B.A. (St. Mary’s College), M.D.
Demonstrator of Surgical Pathology. 375 St. Antoine Street.
R. A. KERRY, M.D.
Demonstrator of Pharmacy. 122 Stanley Street.
Jind 2 OSS, BAG MED:
Demonstrator of Anatomy. 414 Bourgeois Street.
A. ἘΣ ORR, M.D.
Demonstrator of Anatomy. 900 Dorchester Street.
ἘΠῚ ΒΥ ΑΕ, BA. (Cantalb.), M.D:
Demonstrator of Bacteriology. 257 Peel Street.
A. A. ROBERTSON, B.A., M.D.
Demonstrator of Physiology. 79 St. Matthew Street.
J. D. CAMERON, M.D.
Demonstrator of Gynecology. 2068 St. Catherine Street.
D. Ὁ. MacTaGGarRtT, B.A.Sc., M.D.
Demonstrator of Pathology. 705 Sherbrooke Street.
XXV
D. P. ANDERSON, B.A., M.D.
Demonstrator of Pathology. 100 Park Avenue.
S. RIpLEY MACKENZIE, M.D.
Demonstrator of Medicine. 192 Peel Street.
HvuBertT Ὁ. HAMILTON, M.D.
Demonstrator of Laryngology. 141 Crescent Street.
W. GorpDON M. Byers, M.D.
Demonstrator of Opthalmology. 192 Peel Street.
J. McCrag, 'B.A., M.D.
Demonstrator of Pathology.
D. A. SHIRRES, M.D.
Demonstrator of Neuro-Pathology. 919 Dorchester Street.
JAMES BARCLAY, M.D.
Demonstrator of Obstetrics. 14 Osborne Street.
H. B. FRASER, B.A., M.D.
Demonstrator of Histology. 1171 St. Denis Street.
J. A. WILLIAMS, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Bacteriology. 450 Guy Street.
A. "TE BAZIN, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy. 454 St. Antoine Street.
H. M. CHurcH, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy. 354 Greene Avenue.
W. G. REILLY, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy. 51 Park Avenue.
R. A. WESTLEY, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy. 238 Bishop Street.
W.-M. Fisk, M.D.
Demonstrator of Histology. 53 Prince Arthur Street.
Ὁ. PaTrRick M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Gynecology. 4174 St. Catherine Street.
ἘΣ R. BRown, B.A., ‘M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Histology. 54 Drummond Street.
A. Ὁ. IRVINE, |M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Clinical Chemistry. 4356 St. Catherine St.
W. K. Brown, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Clinical Chemistry. 99 University Street.
E. A. ARCHIBALD, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Pathology. 113 Mackay Street.
A. MACKENZIE FORBES, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Anatomy. 122 Stanley Street.
H. R. DUNSTAN GRAY, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Obstetrics. 59 Beaver Hall Hill.
CG. FE. WYLDE, 'M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Clinical Microscopy. 56 Mackay Street.
ἘΠ B. Jones, M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Clinical Microscopy. 501 Sherbrooke St.
ἘΠῚ ἘΞ CusHinec, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Histology. 2494 St. Catherine Street.
A. H. Gorpbon, B.A., M.D.
Assistant Demonstrator of Physiology. 75 Shuter Street.
LIBRARY.
CHas. H. GOULD, B.A.
University Librarian. 862 Sherbrooke
Montreal General Hospital.
Street.
ΧΧΥῚ
Ger A (ORE Deed sx
Mrotessors Ameri.
[Retaining their Rank and Titles, but retired from work.)
WM. WRIGHT, M.D.
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Medicine. 84 St. Famille St.
D. C. MacCaLuum, M.D. ed
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Medicine. 45 Union Ave.
MatrtTrHEW HUTCHINSON, D.C.L.
Hmeritus Professor in the Faculty of Law. Westmount.
Hon. J. EMERY RoOpipoux, D.C.L.
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Law. 396 St. Denis Street.
Hon. J. 5. C. WURTELE, D.C.L., J.K.B. (Officier d’Instruction
Publique).
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Law. 78 Union Avenue.
GILBERT ἘΣ GIRDWOOD, M.D., M.R.C.S., E.R.S.C., E.1KC.
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Medicine. 111 University St.
ALEX JOHNSON, M.A., LL.D., F.R.S.C.
Hmeritus Professor in the Faculty of Arts. 895 Sherbrooke St.
J2ACruARK Murray. uD. “ERIS. (ὡς:
Emeritus Professor in the Faculty of Arts. 20 McTavish Street.
ACADEMICAL YEAR 1903-1904.
1 ‘Tuesday
2 Wednesday
3 Thursday
4 Friday
δ Saturday
6 SUNDAY
7 Monday
8 Tuesday
9 Wednesday
10 Thursday
11 Friday
12 Saturday
13 SUNDAY
14 Monday
15 Tuesday
16 Wednesday
17 Thureday
18 Friday
19 Saturday
20 SUNDAY
21 Monday
22 Tuesday
23 Wednesday
24 Thursday
25 Friday
26 Saturday
27 SUNDAY
28 Monday
29 Tuesday
30 Wednesday
| Introductory Lecture in Law.
Register opens for students in Medicine.
Lectures in Law begin,
SEPTEMBER, 1903.
Normal School opens.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Finance Committee.
Examinations continued.
Examinations in Arts continued,
Examinations, Applied Science.
Examinations continued.
Meeting of Governors,
Exhibition
mittee.
begin.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
in Summer Reading, Applied Science.
Introductory Lecture in Medicine.
Examinations, Applied’ Science.
College Grounds Committee.
Chemistry and Mining Building Committee.
Lectures in Arts, and A
Meeting of Examiners.
Lectures in Medicine begin
OCTOBER, 1903.
XxXvili
Matriculation, Exhibition, Scholarship, Supplemental Examinations, Arts.
Examinations continued.
Examinations continued,
Supplemental
Examinations
Engineering Building Com-
pplied Science
1 Thursday
2 Friday
3 Saturday
4 SUNDAY
5 Monday
6 Tuesday
7 Wednesday
8 Thursday
9 Friday
10 Saturday
1. SUNDAY
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
20
21
22
23
24
25
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
26
27
28
29
30
31
Sports Day.
mittee.
Museum Committee.
Meeting of Governors.
Engineering Building Committee.
Summer Essays in Applied Science to be sent in.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Founder’s Birthday.
Normal School Committee. Meeting of Academic Board,
Finance Committee.
Physics Building Committee.
The William Molson Hall opened, 1862.
Library Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Chemistry and Mining
College Grounds Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
New Library opened, 1893.
Norg.—Meetings of the Faculty of Arts are held at 5 P.M. unless otherwise specified
Regular Meeting of Corporation. Annual Report to the Visitor.
Building Com-
ΧΧΥ]
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
19
NOVEMBER, 1903.
SUNDAY
Monday
Tues iay
W ednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
W ednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Edward VII born, 1841.
Finance Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts. 4
Engineering Building Committee, Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee.
Meeting of Governors.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
DECEMBER, 1903.
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
W ednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
20 SUNDAY
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
3]
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
W ednesday
Thursday
Meeting of Academic Board.
Physics Building Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Museum Committee. Library Committee, Meeting of Faculty of Applied
Science.
Regular Meeting of Corporation,
Finance Committee.
Last day of Lectures in Arts for Term.
Christmas Examinations in Arts begin. Sessional Examinations in Medi-
cine begin.
Meeting of Governors. Autumn term of Faculty of Medicine ends. Last
day of Lectures in Law.
Christmas Vacation begins. HKngineering Building Committee. Chemistry
and Mining Building Committee. College Grounds Committee.
Christmas-Day.
1 Friday
2 Saturday
3
SUNDAY
Monday
4
5 Tuesday
6 Wednesday
7 Thursday
8 Friday
9 Saturday
10 SUNDAY
11 Monday
12 Tuesday
13 Wednesday
14 Thursday
15 Friday
16 Saturday
17 SONDAY
18 Monday
19 Tuesday
20 Wednesday
21 Thursday
22 Friday
23 Saturday
24 SUNDAY
25 Monday
26 Tuesday
27 Wednesday
28 Thursday
29 Friday
30 Saturday
81 SUNDAY
JANUARY, 1904. ae
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine. Meeting of Faculty of Arts. (4 p.m.)
Lectures in Arts, Law and Applied Science resumed, Winter term Faculty
of Medicine begins. Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Normal School Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Finance Committee.
Meeting of Governors.
Engineering Building Committee. Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee.
Queen Victoria died, 1901. Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Theses for M.A. and LID, to be sent in.
—_—_—_————_— a a a
1 Monday
2 Tuesday
3 Wednesday
4 Thursday
5 Friday
6 Saturday
7 SUNDAY
8 Monday
9 Tuesday
10 Wednesday .
11 Thursday
12 Friday
18 Saturday
14 SUNDAY
15 Monday
16 Tuesday
17 Wednesday
18 Thursday
19 Friday
20 Saturday
21 SUNDAY
22 Monday
23 Tuesday
24 Wednesday
25 Thursday
26 Friday
27 Saturday
28 SUNDAY
29 Monday
FEBRUARY, 1904.
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Meeting of Academic Board.
Physics Building Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Museum Committee. Library Committee.
Regular Meeting of Corporation.
Finance Committee.
Engineering Building Committee, Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee.
Ash Wednesday. No lectures.
Meeting of Governors. Meeting of Faculty of Arts.
Physics and Engineering Buildings opened 1893.
XxX
1 Tuesday
2 Wednesday
3 Thursday
4 Wriday
5 Saturday
6 SUNDAY
7 Monday
8 Tuesday
9 Wednesday
10 Thursday
lit Friday
12 Saturday
13 SUNDAY
14 Monday
15 ‘Tuesday
16 Wednesday
17 Thursday
18 Friday
19 Saturday
20 SUNDAY
21 Monday
22 Tuesday
23 Wednesday
24 Thursday
25 Friday
26 Saturday
27 SUNDAY
28 Monday
29 Tuesday
80 Wednesday
81 Thursday
MARCH, 1904.
Meeting of Academic Board.
Meeting of Faculty of Arts,
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine,
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Finance Committee. \
Meeting of Governors. Meeting of Faculty of Arts. Reports of Atten lance
on Lectures.
Engineering Building Committee. Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee.
Winter term Faculty of Medicine ends.
Last day of Lectures in Arts, Law and Applied Science.
SS απο τευσαπεισπο ας τανανανα ππασπνοανονα οτασανσασοναπασιινσ.
wore
conn ~
OF 69
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
APRIL, 1904.
Good Friday. Faster vacation begins.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Kaster Sunday,
Meeting of Faculty of Applied Science.
Haster vacation ends. Spring term begins, Faculty of Medicine.
Normal School Committee.
Physics Building Committee. Examinations in Arts begin.
Museum Committee. Library Committee.
Regular Meeting of Corporation.
Finance Committee.
Meeting of Governors.
Wngineering Building Committee. Chemistry and Mining Buil Lug Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee.
Convocation for Degrees in Aits, Law, and Applied Science.
MAY, 1904. ΧΧΧῚ
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
8 SUNDAY
Monday
τ Tuesday
11 Wednesday
12 Thursday
13. Friday
14 Saturday
ap SUNDAY
Monday
Mame τὸ μὰ
17 Tuesday
18 Wednesday
19 ‘Thursday
20 Friday
21 Saturday
22 SUNDAY
23 Monday
24 Tuesday
25 Wednesday
26 Thursday
27 Friday
28 Saturday
29 SUNDAY
30 Monday
31 Tuesday
Summer Classes in Arts begin. Meeting of Examiners for School Ex-
aminations.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Finance Committee.
Lectures end, Faculty of Medicine.
Engineering Building Committee. Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee. College Grounds Committee. Examinations begin, Faculty of
Medicine.
Meeting of Governors.
Whit Sunday,
Normal School closes.
Trinity Sunday,
JUNE, 1904.
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
mR
SUNDAY
Monday
iTS
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
-
or oa~
11 Saturday
12 SUNDAY
138 Monday
14 Tuesday
15 Wednesday
16 Thursday
17 Friday
18 Saturday
19 SUNDAY
20 Monday
21 Tuesday
22 Wednesday
23 Thursday
24 Friday
25 Saturday
26 SUNDAY
27 Monday
28 Tuesday
29 Wednesday
30 Thursday
Graduate Course in Medicine begins.
Physics Building Committee.
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
Examinations begin for Matriculation and Associate in Arts.
Committee. Library Committee.
Museum
Regular Meeting of Corporation.
Finance Committee.
Spring Term ends, Faculty of Medicine.
Medicine. Summer Classes in Arts end.
Normal School Committee.
Convocation for degrees in
Meeting of Governors.
Engineering Building Committee.
Chemistry and Mining Building Com-
mittee.
College Grounds Committee.
Graduate course in Medicine ends.
ὩΣ" χα ee ἋΣ ΝΟΣ ha
sie irae Ἂν Nek a fen shee Ie
XXxii
JULY, 1904.
C@ONIe®eSe CO DH
ae I EE ES ES SE EE NE Foe ES EE TES
coo οἴ σσιμ οι
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tucsday
W ednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
SUNDAY
Monday
Tueslay
Wednesday
Meeting of Faculty of Medicine.
AUGUST, 1904
Peter Redpath Museum opened 1882.
SB UILDINGS**e GROUNDS»
M°GILL UNIVERSITY
MONTREAL
Scare
a |
ROVAL VICTORIA
HOSPITAL
WESLEYAN
COLLEGE
) pur sSurpr md
τ
.Σ
‘spunod
HPSoW
a
‘AJISIIATU
PRESBYTERIAN. REOPATH* ‘
COLLEGE q MUSEUM [ΑΕ]
\
' ENGINEERING DIOCESAN
| BUILDING COLLEGE
}
ἥν I ζζοοννο .
“CHEMISTRY AND ,
| MINING DUAL GIN
ἢ ε μαξοοναιαὶ ἢ
ly " ἘΝ |Pvsics suo
[“ i“ MOYAL VICTORIA
COLLEGE FOR WOMEN
|?
4
| =
υ
ls
Ve
Ss et
Pe ied y: ἰῷ :
= ra « Fe) YMCA Ω wl
i9 τ 1s >
Ϊ
᾿ rx 9 <
ie)
Ἶ 3 ig
4 Π |
: κ᾿ - ἢ
|
Hees ο | τ " Ζ
ed Ξθα __| Sal (dice 300) >
GCG A T oH δ oR ie ee oe es [9]
ee τὸ ——— δ, ππσασς.......ὕ.ὄ Ξ, =
‘ [ [ J Ϊ =
ia = - ᾿ Ζ
Ϊ ι- =
1:34] 0 Ζ =)
ΟῚ
Ω υ _ [GYMNASIUM
2 2
F - |
is |
ju | ly
| | t VETERINARY
ΙΣ 54 COLLEGE
Ὁ :
᾿Ξ es πὶ
Dp © τ Goiriy Ee Sot Abr > Τ'
TAcGil uiversity.
GENERAL INFORMATION.
Foundation and Early History.
Almost alone in this respect among Canadian colleges and univer-
sities, McGili University owes its origin to a private endowment. Its
founder, the Hon. James McGill, from whom the University takes its
name, was born on the 6th October, 1744, in Glasgow, Scotland,
where he received his early educaiion and training. Emigrating to
Canada before the American Revolution, he engaged in the North-
West fur trade, then one of the leading branches of business in
Canada. Subsequently he settled in Montreal, and, in partnership
with kis brother, Andrew McGill, became one of its leading mer-
chants, distinguished for his public spirit and his exertions for the
advancement of the city. He was lieutenant-colonel and subse-
quently colonel of the Montreal City Militia; and, in his old age, on
the breaking out of the American war of 1812, he became brigadier-
general, and was prepared to take the field in defence of his country.
He also represented the West Ward of Montreal in the Provincia]
Legislature, and was afterwards a member of the Legislative and
Executive Councils. Cultivating and enjoying the society of the few
men of learning then in the colony, he took a special interest in the
establishment of an educational system in the Province of Quebec.
By his will, bearing date the 8th January, 1811, more than two years
before his death, which happened on the 19th December, 18138, he
bequeathed his property of Burnside and a sum of £10,000 in money,
‘to found a college in a provincial university, the erection of which had
already been provided for by the generosity of the British Govern-
ment. Three leading citizens of Montreal were among the trustees
appointed under his will, who were directed to convey the subject
property of the bequest to the Royal Institution for the Advance-
ment of Learning, a body which, in 1802, had been incorporated by
the Legislature ‘“‘for the establishment of Free Schools and the
advancement of Learning’? in the Province of Quebec. The condi-
tions upon which the property was to be transferred to the Royal
Institution for the Advancement of Learning were, mainly, that that
Institution should, within ten years after the testator’s decease,
erect and establish on his Burnside estate ‘an University or College,
for the purposes of education and the advancement of learning in
this Province,’ and that the college, or one of the colleges, in the
University, if established, should “be named and perpetually be
known and distinguished by the appellation of McGill College.”’
Cwing to persistent opposition by the leaders of one section of the
people to any system of governmental education and to the refusal
by the Legislature to make the grants of land and money which had
been promised, the proposed establishment of the provincial univer-
sity by the British Government was abandoned.
2
In so far as the McGill College was concerned, however, the Royal
Institution at once took action by applying for a Royal Charter.
Such a charter was granted in 1821, and the Royal Institution pre-
pared to take possession of the estate. But, owing to protracted
litigation, this was not surrendered to them till 1829. Commencing
then the work of teaching with two faculties, Arts and Medicine, the
record of the first thirty years of the University’s existence is an
unbroken tale of financial embarrassment and administrative diffi-
culties. The charter was cumbrous and unwieldy, and unsuited to
a small college in the circumstances of this country, and the Uni-
versity, with the exception of its medical faculty, became almost
extinct. But after thirty years the citizens of Montreal awoke to
the value of the institution which was struggling in their midst.
Several gentlemen undertook the responsibility of its renovation,
and, in 1852, an amended charter was secured. The Governor-
General of Canada for the time being, Sir Edmund Head, became
interested in its fortunes, and in 1855, with the advent of a new
Principal, an era of progress and prosperity began.
Constitution of the University.
By the amended Charter “the Governors, Principal, and
Fellows” of the University are constituted a body politic and
corporate, with all the usual rights and privileges of corporate
bodies. . The supreme authority of the University, however,
is vested in the Crown, and is exercised by His Excellency the
Governor-General of Canada for the time being as Visitor.
This is a special and important feature of the constitution,
for, while it gives the University an imperial character and
removes it at once from any merely local or party influence,
it secures the patronage of the head of the political system of
the country.
The Governors of the University are the members of the
Royal Institution for the Advancement of Learning, above
mentioned, and in them are vested the management of
finances the passing of University statutes and ordinances,
the appointment of professors, and other important duties.
Their number is limited to fifteen, and vacancies are filled by
the nomination of the remaining members, with the approval
of the Visitor. The President of the Board of Governors is,
ex-officio, Chancellor of the University.
The Principal is the academic head and chief administrative
officer. He is appointed by the Board of Governors, and is,
ex-officio, Vice-Chancellor of the University.
The Fellows are limited to 48 in number, and are selected
with reference to the representation of all the faculties and
3
departments of the University, of affiliated colleges, and of
other bodies.
The Governors, Principal, and Fellows, together constitute
the Corporation, the highest academical body. Its powers are
fixed by statute, and include the framing of all regulations
tcuching courses of study, matriculation and graduation, and
the granting of degrees.
The Principal, the Deans of the several Faculties, the Pro-
fessors and Associate Professors, and other members, not
exceeding ten in number, of the teaching staff, constitute the
Academic Board of the University, with the duty of consid-
ing such matters as pertain to the interests of the University as
a whole, and of making recommendations concerning the
same.
The Statutes and Regulations of the University have been
framed on the most liberal principles, with the view to afford-
ing to all classes of persons the greatest possible facilities for
the attainment of mental culture and professional training.
Faculties and Courses.
The educational work of the University is carried on in
McGill College, the Royal Victoria College for Women, and
other University buildings in Montreal, and in affiliated
colleges.
The Faculties are four in number :
The Faculty of Arts——The undergraduate courses of study
extend over four Sessions of seven and a half months each. In
the third and fourth years extensive options are provided, and
certain exemptions also are allowed to professional students.
The courses of study lead to the Degrees of B.A., M.A., B.Se.,
M.Sc., D.Sc., and D.Litt. The Degree of B.A. from this Uni-
versity admits the holder to the study of the learned pro-
fessions, without preliminary examination, in the Provinces of
Canada, and in Great Britain and Ireland, and elsewhere.
The undergraduate course in Arts can be taken along with
the undergraduate course in Medicine or Applied Science in
six years, or with the undergraduate course in Law in five
years. This is effected by-avoiding the duplication of courses
in the same subjects or in those which give the same educa-
tional training, and by a proper adaptation of the time tables.
Alternatively, a certificate of Literate in Arts is given along
4
with the Legree in Medicine, Applied Science, or Law, to
candidates who have completed two years in Arts before enter-
ing the professional Faculty. Ὁ
The curriculum in Arts provides for the education οἵ
women, mainly in separate classes, with courses of study,
exemptions, degrees, and honours identical with those for men.
The Faculty of Applied Science.—The undergraduate courses
of study extend over four Sessions of seven and a half months
each, and provide a thorough professional training in Civil
Engineering, Mechanical Engineering, Metallurgy, Mining
Engineering, Electrical Engineering, Practical Chemistry, and
Architecture. The courses of study lead to the Degrees of
B.Sc., M.Se., and D.Sc. The undergraduate course in Arts
can be taken along with the undergraduate course in Applied
Science in six years.
The Faculty of Law.—The undergraduate course extends
over three Sessions of cight months each, and leads to the
Degrees of B.C.L. and D.C.L. The undergraduate course in
Arts can be taken along with the undergraduate course in
Law in five years.
The Faculty of Medicine-—The undergraduate course of
study extends over four Sessions of nine months each, and
leads to the Degree of M.D., C.M. The undergraduate course
in Arts can be taken along with the undergraduate course in
Medicine in six years.
EXAMINATIONS IN MuUsIc.
An arrangement has been made whereby the University
has undertaken, in conjunction with the Associated Board
of the Royal Academy of Music and the Royal College of
Music, London, England, to carry on throughout Canada the
Examinations in Music hitherto conducted by the Associated
Board alone. Under this arrangement, the University will
be responsible for the proper and effective conduct of the
Examinations, and successful candidates will be entitled to
receive certificates bearing the imprimatur of the University
as well as that of the Associated Board.
These examinations comprise School Examinations (Ele-
mentary, Lower and Higher divisions)’ and Local Centre
Examinations (Junior and Senior grades)—the Senior grade
calling for a high degree of proficiency. They are of gradu-
5
ated difficulty ; are theoretical and practical in character, em-
bracing Rudiments of Music, Harmony and Grammar of Music,
Counterpoint, Pianoforte, Organ, Violin, Harp, Wind In-
struments, Singing, ete.; and are suited to candidates of all
degrees of proficiency.
In addition to those above-named there is an examina-
tion for individual Teaching Certificates and title of Licen-
tiate of the Associated Board.
‘ The examinations in Practical subjects will be held dur-
a ing May and those in Theory in the early part of the same
month.
Full details of the requirements for each examination,
fees, ete., are published in a separate syllabus, which can be
obtained, together with specimen Theory papers and full
information, on application to the Registrar of the Uni-
versity. :
‘ Affiliated Colleges.
Students of Affiliated Colleges are matriculated in the Uni-
versity, and may pursue their course of study in the Affiliated
College, or in part in the Affiliated College, and in part in
McGill College, as the case may be, and may come up to the
B - University Examinations on the same terms as the students of
McGill College.
The Stanstead Wesleyan College, Stanstead, P.Q.—Is afliliated
in so far as regards the work of the first two years in Arts.
Detailed information may be obtained from the Rev. C. R.
Flanders, B.A., D.D., Prineipal.
Ἢ Vancouver College, Vancouver, 8.C.—Is afliliated in so far as
᾿ ‘ regards the work of the first two years in Arts. Detailed infor-
es F mation may be obtained from J. C. Shaw, Esq.. M.A., Principal.
Victoria Coliege, Victoria, 8-C.—Is affiliated in so far as
regards the work of the First Year in Arts. Detailed inform-
ation may be obtaimed from the Principal.
i s tte τ Je
pr ΨΚ.Ρ
_ ς Tea *
Cffiliated Theological Colleges.
Students of the following Affiliated Theological Colleges may
attend the courses of study in Arts, either as undergraduates
a
"ΟΞ
Ρ
“ἢ
τ
i , or partial students, with such facilities in regard to exemptions
ΤῊΝ ;
as may be agreed on.
ΤᾺ The Congregational College of Canada, Montreal. Principal,
i Rev. E. M. Hill, D.D., 58 MeTavish St.
Ve Pe
The Presbyterian College, Montreal, in connection with the
Presbyterian Church in Canada. Acting Principal, Rev. John
Campbell, M.A., LL.D.
0
The Wesleyan College of Montreal. Principal, Rev. W. I. Shaw,
IDSDs, aks: D:
The Diocesan College of Montreal.—Principal, Rev. Henry M.
Hackett, M.A., B.D., 201 University St.
Calendars of the above Colleges and all necessary information may
be obtained on application to their Principals.
McGili Normal School.
The McGill Normal School provides the training requisite for
Teachers of Elementary and Model Schools and Academies.
Teachers trained in this School are entitled to Provincial
Diplomas, and may, on certain conditions, enter the classes
in the Faculty of Arts for Academy Diplomas and for the
Degree of B.A. Principal, 5. P. Robins, LL.D., 32 Bel-
mont St., Montreal, from whom copies of the School an-
nouncement may be obtained.
Affiliated High Schools, Etc.
The following schools are affiliated in the sense of preparing
candidates for matriculation:
The Trafalgar Institute for the higher education of women, Simpson
St., Montreal—Principal, Miss Grace Fairley. The High School
of Montreal, and the Girls’ High School of Montreal, Metcalfe
St.—Principal, Rev. Elson I. Rexford, B.A.
Schools which have prepared successful candidates for the University
School Examinations or for matriculation (June 1902).
High School, Montreal; Girls’ High School, Montreal; Abingdon
School, Montreal; Miss Symmers’ and Miss Smith’s School, Mont-
real; Westmount Acad.; St. Andrew’s School, Annapolis Royal,
N.S.; All Hallows’ School, Yale, B.C.; Aylmer Academy; Bedford
Academy; Belleville H. S.; Bishop’s College School, Lennoxville;
The Catholic High School, Montreal; Brockville C. I.; Coaticook
Academy; Cookshire Acad.; Cowansville Academy; Crichton
- School; Danville Acad.; Dufferin Grammar School, Brigham, Que.;
Dunham Ladies’ Coll.; Gault Institute, Valleyfield; Granby
Academy; Highfield School; Huntingdon Acad.; Inverness Acad.;
Knowlton Acad.; Lachute Acad.; Lennoxville Academy; Magog
Mod. School; Morrin College, Que.; Morrisburg C. I.; Nanaimo
High School; Ormstown Acad.; Ottawa Col. Inst.; Ottawa Ladies’
College; Prince of Wales College, Charlottetown, P.H.I.; Boys’
H.S., Quebec; Girls’ H.S., Quebec; Ridley Coll, St. Catharines;
Sebrevois College, Montreal; The Senior School, Montreai;
Shawville Academy; School of St. John the Evangelist; Sher-
brooke Acad.; Stanstead College School; Sutton Acad.; St. Al-
ban’s School, Brockville; St. Lambert Mod. School; St...Francis
Coll. School; St. John’s H.S.; Three Rivers High School; Upper
Canada Col.; Vancouver Coll., Vancouver, B.C.; High School,
Victoria, B.C.; Waterloo Acad.; Williamstown H.S.
tea oe ee
δ᾿
Sa)
—
nae
ee
V4
:
“
i) ii? « a δ. τ oe ΑΣ,
ae te ΨΎ ee oe 2
‘wrar
op ats
ee
fy
7
Affiliation to other Universities.
The University is affiliated to the Universities of Oxford,
Cambridge, and Dublin, under conditions which allow an
undergraduate who has taken two years’ work, and has passed
the University Intermediate Examination in Arts, to pursue
his studies and take his Degree at any of those universities on
a reduced period of residence.
The Session.
The University Year or Session is divided into two terms,
the first extending to the Christmas vacation, and the second
from the expiry of the Christmas vacation to the date
appointed for the meeting of Convocation for the conferring
of degrees.
For 1903-1904 the Session of the Faculty of Arts com-
mences on 22nd September, 1903, and ends on 29th April,
1904. Second Year Exhibition, Scholarship and Supplemental
Examinations begin on September 9th. Summer classes in Eng-
lish, Latin, Greek, Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, French,
German and Logic will be held during the months of May and
June.
The Session of the Faculty of Applied Science commences
on 22nd September, 1903, and ends on 29th April, 1904. Field
work in Surveying commences on 24th August, 1903. The Sum-
mer School in Mining commences at the end of the Session,
and continues to about the end of the second week in June.
The Session of the Faculty of Law commences on 15th Sep-
tember, 1908, and ends on 29th April, 1904.
The Session of the Faculty of Medicine commences on 23rd
September, 1903, and ends on 10th June, 1904. The Intro-
ductory Lecture will be given on 22nd September.
Examinations for entrance to the above-named Faculties
will be held in June and September—commencing in September
on the 9th. See time table pp. 19 and 20.
Board and Residence.
No residential accommodation has as yet been provided in
the College for men students. Women students may board
and reside either in private houses or in the Royal Victoria
College, which provides, in addition to separate lecture rooms,
residential accommodation for the women students of the Uni-
versity.
Good board and lodgings can be obtained in private houses
in the vicinity of the University buildings at a cost of from
$16 to $25 per month; or, separately, board at $12 to $15 per
month, rooms at $4 to $10 per month.
A list of suitable boarding and lodging houses, the sanitary
conditions of which are required to be properly certified, is
prepared annually, and may be obtained upon application to
the Registrar of the University or the Janitor of the Medical
Building.
Full particulars of the Royal Victoria College for Women
and the terms of residence therein are given on pp. 136-140.
The erection of suitable University residential halls for men
is contemplated in the near future.
The McGill Y.M.C.A. will arrange.to meet any stranger at
the station, and aid him to secure lodgings, etc., if sufficient
notice of time of arrival and station is sent to the secretary of
the McGill Y.M.C.A., 844 Sherbroke Street, Montreal.
Exhibitions, Scholarships, Prizes, Etc.
Bursaries, Exhibitions, and Scholarships, particulars of
which are given in the announcements of the several Faculties
(see post), are offered for competition to students every year.
In addition to a number of valuable exhibitions and scholar-
ships open to Second and Third Year students, nineteen Ex-
hibitions, ranging in value from $100 to $300 each, will be
offered for competition to students entering the First Year in
Arts, in June, 1903. For details cf the examination see pp.
47-53.
Gold Medals, Honours, and Prizes are awarded for advanced
courses of study.
Classification of Students.
Except under special circumstances, no student under the
age of sixteen is admitted to the First Year courses, or under
the age of seventeen to the Second Year courses in Arts,
Applied Science, or Medicine, and no student under the age
of seventecr is admitted to the course in Law.
Students are classified as Graduate Students (see pp. 26 and
142), Undergraduates, Conditioned Students and Partial Stu-
dents.
Undergraduates are matriculated students who are pursuing
a full undergraduate course of study leading to a degree.
-9
Conditioned Students are those who, not having completed
their matriculation examination, are pursuing a full under-
graduate course of study leading to a degree, and are entitled,
under the regulations of the Faculty, to obtain undergraduate
standing upon completing their matriculation; credit being
given for their work as Conditioned Students (see below).
Partial Students are those who, not belonging to one of the
above classes of students, are pursuing a course of study in the
University. |
Women are admitted to the courses in Arts (on identical
terms with men, but mainly in separate classes), and also to
the Architectural, Freehand Drawing, and Modelling Classes
in Applied Science. y
All students are required to attend lectures at the Univer-
sity buildings in Montreal, or at one of the affiliated colleges.
Undergraduates.
In order to obtain undergraduate standing, a candidate
must have passed the Matriculation Examination of the Uni-
versity, or some other examination accepted in lieu thereof
(see p. 11), and have registered as a Matriculated Under-
graduate.
Conditioned Students.
Candidates who in the September Matriculation Examina-
tion fail in a small part only of the whole examination may,
‘if their general standing is sufficiently high, be allowed to
enter the First Year Undergraduate Course as Conditioned
Students. Such students can obtain full undergraduate
standing, by passing at a subsequent. June or September
Matriculation Examination in the subjects in which they failed,
and will not be permitted to enter the second year of their
course of study until such examinations have been passed.
Partial Students.
Partial Students may, subject to the approval of the Pro-
fessor, attend any class without previous examination.
Partial Students who subsequently obtain undergraduate
standing by passing the Matriculation Examination may, as
Undergraduates, be exempted, at the discretion of the Faculty,
from a particular course or courses of lectures which they
a‘tended as Partial Students.
mel LenS ah το τὶ
10
MATRICULATION. ‘
|. Matriculation Examination Regulations.
1. Matriculation Examinations (for entrance into all
Faculties) are held only in June and September—in June at
McGill College and (on application) at Local Centres; in
September at McGill College and affiliated colleges (Van-
couver, B.C., and Stanstead, P.Q.) only.
All inquiries relating to the Examination should be addressed
to the Registrar of the University.
2. Every candidate for examination is required to fill up
an application form and return the same with the necessary
fee one month before the examination. Blank forms may
be obtained from the Registrar.
3. Applications for examinations at Local Centres must
be made before May 1st. The University will be responsible
for no other local expenses than the payment of the Deputy-
Examiners.
4. The Matriculation Examination is divided into two
parts, Preliminary and Final. The subjects of the Prelimin-
ary Division may be taken at any Matriculation Examina-
tion, and those of the Final Division at the same or any sub-
sequent examination, but (except as provided in the two
following regulations) a candidate must pass in the whole
of either division at one time in order to secure exemption
from further examination therein.
5. Candidates who fail in one or more subjects at the
June examination, or who have taken part only of the ex-
amination, and present themselves in the following Septem-
ber, will not be required to take the subjects in which they
passed in June.
6. Candidates who in the September Examinations fail
in a small part only of the whole examination may, if their
general standing is sufficiently high, be allowed to enter the
First Year Undergraduate Course as Conditioned Students.
Such students can obtain full undergraduate standing by
passing at a subsequent June or September Matriculation
Examination in the subjects in which they failed, and will
not be permitted to enter the Second Year of their Course
of Study until such examinations have been passed.
‘sndurrg 911 ττοα] UNosNy 91,
. ‘
“ ο = Ἂ
Vi ;
ΕΣ ͵
a
i ᾿
᾿
' :
. :
; ;
:
᾿
=
᾿ Π -
11
%. Certificates of having passed the following evamina-
tions will, if submitted to the Registrar, be accepted pro
tanto in lieu of the Matriculation Examination, 1. 6., in so
far as the subjects and standard are, to the satisfaction of
the Board of Matriculation Examiners, the same as or
equivalent to those required for the Matriculation Examina-
tion of the Uuiversity; but candidates offering certificates of
having passed such examinations will be required to pass the
Matriculation Examination in such of the required subjects,
if any, as are not covered thereby :—
Province of Quebec.
The Preliminary subjects of the A. A. Examination and
Academy Grade I.
The University Schoo] (A.A.) Examinations.
The Examination for the Model School Diploma of the
McGill Normal School, under certain conditions.
Province of Ontario.
The Leaving Examinations, Parts I. and II.
Province of New Brunswick.
The Examinations for Superior and Grammar School
Licenses.
Province of Nova Scotia.
The Leaving Examinations, Grades XI. and XII.
Province of Prince Edward Island.
The Leaving Examination of Prince of Wales College.
Province of British Columbia.
The Intermediate and Senior Grade Examinations.
Applications for exemptions from the Matriculation Ex-
amination, based upon certificates of having passed examin-
ations other than those above mentioned, will be considered
as occasion may require by the Board of Matriculation Ex-
aminers. Every such application must be accompanied by
certificates and ful particulars, and should be addressed to the
Registrar.
5)
il. Matriculation Fees.
See p. 28.
Il. Subjects of Examination
FACULTY OF ARTS.
PRELIMINARY DIVISION
(See Regulation 4, page 10.)
English -
(Composition, Dictation, Grammar).
British History.
Arithmetic.
FINAL DIVISION.
For Candidates intending to take the B.A. Course:—
1.
Zs
3.
4.
5.
6
For Candidates intending to take the B.Sc.
English Literature.
Latin or Greek.
One of the following :
Greek or Latin (the one not already chosen), French, German,
Algebra, Part I.
Geometry, Part I.
One of the following :
Physiography, Botany, Chemistry, Physics, a Language
not already chosen.
Arts :—
(See p. 64 for character of course).
Oh WN =
English Literature.
French.
German.
Algebra, Part |.
Geometry, Part I.
One of the following :
Course in
Physiography, Botany, Chemistry, Physics. Latin, Greek.
Candidates who intend ultimately to proceed to the study
of Medicme are reminded that for Medical Registration it
will be necessary to take Latin.
--.-
ὐ
>
>
.
(a
ὍΝ ΨΥ alti ie tht δ΄ ee
oo ἃ χων ἐς
Υ̓́Σ
hs
“:
19
Eleven Exhibitions, of the average value of $100, will be
offered for award on the result of the Matriculation Examina-
tion in the subjects of the Final Division, in June next; five,
each of the value of $150, on the result of an Examination on
the subjects required for Matriculation, together with addi-
tional work; and three, of the value of $300 each, for an ex-
amination on special work.
Full particulars are given in the First Year Exhibition
Announcement.
FACULTY- OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
PRELIMINARY DIVISION
(See Regulation 4, page 10.)
English :
(Composition, Dictation, Grarnmar).
British History.
Arithmetic.
FINAL DIVISION.
English Literature.
One of the following :
N>-
French, German, Latin, Greek.
Algebra, Parts_l and Il.
Geometry, Parts | and II.
Trigonometry.
One of the following :
Physiography, Botany, Chemistry, Physics, a Language
not already chosen.
Do p od
In addition to those who qualify in whole or in part on
certificates mentioned on p. 11, par. 7, students who have
completed one or more years of the Arts Course in any
recognized University, may enter the Faculty on passing
an examination in the additional mathematics, if any, re-
quired for Matriculation in Applied Science.
French candidates for Matriculation in this Faculty will be
allowed to take examinations in French equivalent to those
required in English and an examination in English equivalent
to that required in French.
14
FACULTY OF MEDICINE.
PRELIMINARY DIVISION
(See Regulation 4, page 10.)
English :
(Composition, Dictation, Grammar).
British History.
Arithmetic.
FINAL DIVISION.
—
.
English Literature.
Latin.
Algebra, Part I.
Geometry, Part I.
Chemistry.
Physics.
One of the following :
Greek, French, German.
NOR ON
In addition to the certificates mentioned on p. 11, par. ἴ,
the following are accepted in lier of the Matriculation
Examination for entrance in Medicine, provided they cover
Latin .—
The Degree of Bachelor of Arts obtained from any recog-
nized university.
A certificate of having passed the Examination of a Pro-
vincial Medical Council.
In the case of candidates from the United States, a certi-
ficate of having passed a State or University Examination
fully equivalent to the Matriculation Examination required
. for entrance in this University.
The examination requirements for those who intend to
practise medicine in any of the Provinces of Canada, or in
Great Britain and Ireland and the British Colonies, will be
found in the University or Medical Calendar.
FACULTY OF LAW.
PRELIMINARY DIVISION
(See Regulation 4, page 10.)
English :
(Composition, Dictation, Grammar).
British History.
Arithmetic.
a oe
we
Rt TA τ κα
ΤΥΨΈΨῃ ee
ἦν rn SP
15
FINAL DIVISION.
. English Literature.
. Latin.
. French.
. Algebra, Part I.
. Geometry, Part I°
OoaR WAND -
- One of the following :
Physiography, Botany, Chemistry, Physics, Greek, German.
Candidates must reach a high standard in Latin and
French.
In addition to those who qualify in whole or in part on
certificates mentioned on p. 11, par. 7, Bachelors of Arts,
Science, or Letters of any Canadian or British University
(see R.S.Q., 3503a) are admitted without examination.
Candidates who intend to practise law or to be admitted
to the notarial profession in the Province of Quebec are
referred to the statutory requirements (see p. 229). If they are
not graduates they should pass the examination for admission
to study required by the Council of the Bar or by the Board of
Notaries, as the the case may be, before seeking to matriculate.
In that case they will be matriculated without examination.
IV. Details of the Requirements in each Subject.
PRELIMINARY DIVISION
English:
(Composition, Dictation, Grammar).
Candidates will write a short essay on a subject given
at the time of the examination.
A paper on English Grammar, including Analysis The
candidate will be expectcd to show a good knowledge of
Accidence, as treated in any grammar prepared for the
higher forms of schools. A similar “statement applies to
grammatical Analysis. Candidates are required to state the
class to which any subordinate sentence belongs, and to
arrange and define the various members of all sentences set.
Failure in Analysis or Parsing will cause the rejection of
the paper. West’s English Grammar for Beginners is re-
commended as a text-book.
10
British History.
Candidates will be required to show a somewhat intimate
acquaintance with the History from 1485 to the present
time. While any text-book written for the upper forms of
schools may be used in preparation for the examination,
Gardiner’s Outline of English History (Longmans) is recom-
mended.
Arithmetic.
All the ordinary rules, including Square Root and a know-
ledge of the Metric System.
FINAL DIVISION.
English Literature.
We ce Py λης
1903. (a) Scorr’s Lady of the Lake (ed. Stuart, Mac-
millan), or Selections from Tennyson, Part. I. (ed. Rowe ‘and
Webb, Macmillan) ; (b) Suaxspere’s Richard II. (ed. Deigh-
ton, Macmillan.)
1904. Selections from Tennyson, Part. L, (ed. Rowe &
Webb, Macmillan) ; SHaxsprre’s Merchant of Venice.
The requirements for the Junior Leaving English of the
Province of Ontario will be accepted.
Greek.
Grammar.
Terts—(Translation and grammatical study) :—
1903-—Xenophon, Anabasis I (as in White’s Beginners’
Greek Book. pp. 304-428), or Xenophon, Anabasis
ΤΊ:
1904 and 1905—As in 1903.
Translation at Sight, and Prose Composition (sentences
and easy narrative based upon the prescribed texts).
The requirements for the Junior Leaving Greek of the
Province of Ontario will be accepted in place of the texts
specified above. At the September Examination other
texts equivalent to those specified may be accepted if appli-
cation be made to the Registrar, at least one month before
the date of the examination.
;
4
τ
;
;
᾿
4
ν
i
ὌΠ oe
4
Latin.
Grammar.
-Texts.—(Translation and grammatical study) :—
1803—Cornelius Nepos, Lives of Miltiades and Epamin-
ondas (G. H. Nall in Maemillan’s Hlementary
Classics).
Caesar, De Bello Gallico, I. and II. Ovid, Stories
from the Metamorphoses (as in Gleason’s “A Term
of Ovid,’ pages 1 to 53, American Book Company).
1904—As in 1908.
1905—Cornelius Nepos, Lives of Themistocles and Aristides
(6. H. Nall in Macmillan’s Elementary Classics); Cesar, De
Bello Gallico, Bks. IV. and V; Ovid, Stories from the Meta-
merphoses (as in Cleason’ Siac Term of Ovid,” pages 54 to the
end, American Book Company).
Translation at Sight, and Prose Composition (sentences
and -easy narrative based upon the prescribed texts).
The requirements for the Junior Leaving Latin of the
Province of Ontario will be accepted in place of the texts
specified above. At the September Examination other texts
in Latin equivalent to those specified may be accepted, if
application be made to the Registrar at least a month before
the day of the examination.
French.
Grammar.—Accidence and Syntax. Candidates will be
required to possess an exact knowledge of the common
elements. Bertenshaw’s French Grammar is recommended
as containing the amount required for the examination.
Translation at Sight from French into English. Trans-
lation into French of easy English passages.
German.
Grammar.—A thorough knowledge of German accidence.
Transiation.—Candidates must be able to translate into
German with tolerable correctness exercises approximately
equal in difficulty to those contained in the First Part of
Van der Smissen’s High School German Grammar, or in
the First and Second Parts of the Joynes-Meissner German
Grammar (Heath & Co.)
Texts—(Translation and grammatical study) :—
1903—Leander, Triiumereien (Copp, Clark Co.).
1904 and 1905—Auf der Sonnenseite (Heath & 0.).
Storm, Immensee.
18
The requirements for the Junior Leaving German of the
Province of Ontario will be accepted in place of the texts
specified above. At the September examination other texts
equivalent to those specified may be accepted, if application
be made to the Registrar, at least one month before the date
of the examination.
Algebra, Part I.
Elementary Rules, Involution, Evolution, Fractions, In-
dices, Surds, Simple and Quadratic Equations of one or more
unknown quantities, as in Hall and Knight’s Elementary
Algebra to end of Surds (omitting portions marked with an
asterisk), or in similar text-books.
Algebra, Part I}.
The three Progressions, Ratio, Proportion, Variation,
Permutations and Combinations, Binomial Theorem, Loga-
rithms, Interest and Annuities, as in remainder of Hall and
Knight’s Elementary Algebra, (omitting chaps. 36, 40, 41,
42) or in similar text-books.
Geometry, Part I.
Euclid’s Elements, Books I, 11, II, with easy deductions;
or an equivalent.
Geometry, Part II.
Euclid’s Elements, Books IV and VI, with definitions of
Book V, and easy deductions; or an equivalent.
Trigonometry.
Measurement of angles, Trigonometrical ratios or func-
tions of one angle, of two angles and of a multiple angle,
as in Hamblin Smith’s Trigonometry, pp. 1-105, or as in
Lock’s Elementary Trigonometry, Chap. I-XII, or in similar
text-books.
Physiography.
The elements of the Science, as in Davis’s Elementary
Physical Geography, Tarr’s First Book of Physical Geo-
graphy, or other text-books covering the same ground.
Botany.
As in Groom’s Elementary Botany.
Candidates will be given extra credit for Plant collections
A Dat Bt ig Sa nlc a οἱ
19
of a maximum of 25 species each. They will use Pen-
hallow’s Guide to the Collection of Plants and Blanks for
Plant Descriptions.
The collections will be returned, if desired, at the expense
of the school or individuals to whom they belong.
Any plant of the same family may be substituted for any
one of those specified in Part II of Groom’s Elementary
Botany, according to the requirements of the locality.
Chemistry.
Elementary Inorganic Chemistry, comprising the prepara-
tion and properties of the chiei non-metallic elements and
their more important compounds, the laws of chemical
action, combining weight, etc. (The ground is simply and
effectively covered by Remsen’s “Elements of Chemistry,”
pp. 1 to 165, Macmillan’s Edition).
Physics.
Properties of Matter; Elementary Meclianics of Solids
and Fluids, including the Laws of Motion, Simple Machines,
Work, Energy, Fluid Pressure and Specific Gravity ;
Thermometry, The effects and modes of transmission of
Heat. (See for instance, Gage’s Introduction to Physical
Science, ch. I-V.)
V. Dates of the Examinations.
The examinations in 1903 will commence on June 8th and
on September 9th. Special arrangements may be made for the
examination of candidates who are prevented by severe illness
or domestic affliction from presenting themselves on the dates
fixed.
The time table for the September examination will be
as follows :—
WEDNESDAY, 9TH.
Morning, 9-10.80.—English Grammar.
10.30-11.—English Dictation.
11—12.—English Composition.
Afternoon, 2—3.30.—English Literature.
3.30—5.—Physiography.
20
THURSDAY, 10TH.
" Morning, 9—11.—Algebra, Part 1.
Afternoon, 24.—Geometry, Part I.
4_5.30.—Physiecs.
FRIDAY, 117TH.
Morning, 9—10.30.—Arithmetic.
10.30—12.—British History. '
Afternoon, 2—4.—Algebra, Part IT and Geometry,
Part II.
4—5.50.—Botany.
Monpay, 141TH.
Morning, 9-11.—Latin Grammar and Composition.
11—12.50.— Trigonometry.
Afternoon, 2.30--4.30.—Latin Books and Sight Translation.
TUESDAY, 15TH.
Morning, 9—11.—French.
Afternoon, 2—4.—German.
4—5.30.—Chemisiry.
WEDNESDAY, 16TH,
Morning, 9-11.—Greek Grammar and Composition.
Afternoon, 2--4.—Greek Books and Sight Translation.
Admission to Second Year.
Admission to the Second Year is open, as a Tule, only to
Undergraduates who have passed the First Year Sessional
Examination in regular course, but in exceptional cases, to
be dealt with by the Faculty in which they desire to register,
candidates may be admitted directly to the Second Year with-
out having passed through the curriculum of the First Year.
21
Students of other Universities Applying for Equivalent
Standing.
Any student of another University desirous to be admitted
to this University with equivalent standing is requested to
send with his application :—
ist.—A Calendar of the University in which he has studied,
giving a full statement of the courses of study.
2nd.—A complete statement of the course he has followed.
3rd._—A certificate of the standing gained, and of conduct.
These will be submitted to the Faculty in which he desires
to register.
The Faculty, if otherwise satisfied, will decide what exam-
ination, if any, or what conditions, may be necessary before
admitting the candidate.
DEGREES.
All theses for higher degrees must be sent to the Registrar
of the University. No thesis will be received or examination
granted until the fee for the degree has been paid.
In order to obtain the degrees of B.A., B.Sc, B.C.L.
and M.D., C.M., students of this University are required to
attend the lectures and to pass the examinations of the
undergraduate courses.
Regulations for the Degree of B.A.
Students who shall have satisfactorily completed the Regu-
lar Course of Study in Arts, shall have passed the prescribed
examinations during the Course, and also the special ex-
aminations for graduation, and shall have performed such
exercises as may be prescribed to that end, shall be entitled
to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts.
Regulations for the Degree of B.Sc.
Students who shall have satisfactorily completed the pre-
scribed Course of Study in the Faculty of Arts for the Degree
of Bachelor of Science, or the Course of Study in the Faculty
of Applied Science, shall have passed the prescribed examina-
22
tions during the Course, and also the special examinations for
Graduation, and shall have performed such exercises as may
be prescribed to that end, shall be entitled to the Degree of
Bachelor of Science.
Regulations for the Degree of B.C.L.
Students who shall have satisfactorily completed the Regu-
lar Course of Study in Law, shall have passed the prescribed
examinations during the Course and also the special examina-
tions for Graduation, shall be entitled to the Degree of Bach-
elor of Civil Law. A Bachelor or Master of Arts, or an
Articled Student with a practising Member of the Bar of the
Province of Quebec, who shall have matriculated in the third
year of his Clerkship under such articles, shall be entitled to
such Degree after two years’ attendance on the said Course
of Study, if he shall satisfactorily pass all requisite examina-
tions, and perform all required exercises.
Regulations for the Degree of M.A.
Bachelors of Arts of this University, of at least one year’s
standing, who (a) shall have taken for one year a graduate
course of study in Arts in the University, previously submitted
to and approved by the Faculty, and (Ὁ) shall have passed an
examination at the end of the course, and (c) shall have pre-
sented, if required, a satisfactory thesis, shall be entitled to the
Degree of Master of Arts. Bachelors of Arts of at least two
years’ standing who shall have presented a satisfactory thesis
and passed a special examination, shall be entitled to the Degree
of Master of Arts.
Any Bachelor of Arts who graduated prior to May Ist,
1899, or any Undergraduate in Arts registered at that date,
and proceeding thereafter to the Degree of Bachelor of Arts,
shall at his option be entitled to the Degree of Master of Arts
on the following conditions:
1. A candidate must be a Bachelor of Arts of at least three
years’ standing.
2. He is required to prepare and sabi to the Faculty a
thesis on some literary or scientific subject, under the follow-
ing rules :—
(a) The subject of the thesis must be submitted to the
Faculty before the thesis is presented.
23
(b) A paper read previously to any association, or pub-
lished in any way, cannot be accepted as a thesis.
(c) The thesis submitted becomes the property of the
University, and cannot be published without the consent of
the Faculty of Arts.
(4) The thesis must be submitted before some date to be
fixed annually by the Faculty, which date must not be less
than two months before the candidate proceeds to the Degree.
The last day in the session of 1903-1904 for sending in
Theses for M.A will be Jan. 30th, 1904.
3. All candidates, except those who have taken First or
Second Rank B.A. Honours, or have passed First Class in the
Ordinary Examinations for the Degree of B.A., are required
to pass an examination also, either in Literature or in Science,
as each candidate may select.
The subjects of the Examination in Literature are divided
into three divisions, as follows:
Group A.—Latin, Greek, Hebrew.
Group B.—Irench, German, English.
Group C.—History, Economics and Political Science, Law.
The subjects of the Examination in Science are divided into
three divisions :—
Group A.—Pure Mathematics (advanced or ordinary),
Mechanics (including Hydrostatics), Astronomy, Optics.
Group B.—Geology and Mineralogy, Botany, Zoology,
Chemistry.
Group C.—Mental Philosophy, Moral Philosophy, Logic,
History of Philosophy.
Every candidate is required to select two out of the three
groups in the section in which he is a candidate; and in one
of the groups so chosen to select for Examination two subjects,
and in the other group one subject.
One of the subjects selected as above will be considered the
principal subject (being so denoted by the candidate at the
time of application), and the other two as subordinate subjects.
The whole examination may be taken in one year, or dis-
tributed over two or three years, provided the examination in
any one subject be not divided.
For further details of the examination, application must
be made to the Faculty before the above date.
94
The fee for the degree is $20; ὧν absentia, $40. (In case
of failure, the candidate may present himself in a subsequent
year without further payment of fees.) The examination
will be held in April in McGill College only. A candidate
after fulfilling all the conditions ought to notify the Faculty
of his desire to proceed to the degree at the next convocation.
Candidates who oblained the degree of B.A. before 1884 may
proceed to the degree of M.A. under the regulations in force
previous to 1884.
Lectures are open to Bachelors of Arts who are candidates
for M.A., the sessional examinations corresponding to these
lectures being reckoned as parts of the M.A. examination.
The subjects are Greek, Latin, Hnelish, French, German,
tlistory, Mental and Moral Philcsophy, Chemistry, Experi-
mental Physics, Botany, Zoology, Geology and Mineralogy.
Certificates of standing will be given.
Regulations for the Degre2 of M.Sc.
Bachelors of Arts or Bachelors of Science of at least one
year’s standing who shall have taken for one year a Graduate
Course of Study in the Faculty of Arts or the Faculty of
Applied Science of the University, previously submitted to
and approved by the Faculty, shall have passed an examina-
tion at the end of the year, and shall, if required, have pre-
sented a satisfactory thesis; or Bachelors of Arts or Bachelors
of Science of at least two years’ standing who shall have
presented a satisfactory thesis, and shall have passed a special
examination for the degree, shall be entitled to the Degree
of Master of Science.
The fee for the degree is $20; in absentia, $40. °
Regulations for the Degree of M.D.
Studenis who shall have satisfactorily completed the Regu-
lar Course of Study in Medicine, shall have passed the pre-
scribed examinations during the course, and also the special
examinations for Graduation, shall be entitled to the Degree
of Doctor of Medicine and Master of Surgery.
Regulations for the Degree of D.Litt.
Candidates for the Degree of Doctor of Literature must be
Masters of Arts, of at Jeast five years’ standing, who shall have
Ww
5)
distinguished themselves by special research and learning in
the domain of Literature or Philosophy. They are required
to present a satisfactory thesis or published work.
The fee for the degree is $80.
Regulations for the Degree_of D.Sc.
Jandidates for the Degree of Doctor of Science must be
Masters of Arts or Masters of Science, or Doctors of Medicine,
of at least five years’ standing, who shall have distinguished
themselves by special research and learning in the domain of
Science. They are required to present a satisfactory thesis
or published work.
The fee for the degree is $80.
Regulations for the Degree of D.C.L.
Candidates for the Degree of Doctor of Civil Law must be
Bachelors of Civil Law of at least twelve years’ standing.
They are required to pass a special examination for the
degree and to present a satisfactory thesis or published work
on some subject selected or approved by the Faculty of Law.
For details of the examination, etc., see pp.
The fee for the degree is $80.
᾿ Regulations.for the Degree of LL.D.
Execpt as hereinafter mentioned, the Degree of Doctor of
Laws is given only as an honorary degree.
Any person who matriculated and attended lectures in the
Faculty of Arts before the 31st January, 1899, may proceed
to the Degree of Doctor of Laws in course upon the following
conditions:
Candidates for the Degree of LL.D., in course, must be
Masters of Arts of at least twelve years’ standing, and are
required to prepare and submit to the Faculty of Arts, not
less than three months before proceeding to the degree,
twenty-five printed copies of a thesis on some Literary or
Scientific subject which has been previously approved by the
Faculty. The thesis must exhibit such a degree of literary
or scientific merit, and give evidence of such originality ot
thought or extent of research as shall, in the opinion of the
Faculty, justify recommendation for the degree.
20
Candidates are also required to submit, with their thesis, a
list of books treating of some one branch of Literature or of
Science satisfactory to the Faculty, in which they are pre-
pared to submit to examination, and in which they shall be
examined, unless otherwise ordered by the Faculty.
The fee for the degree in course is $80.
Admission ‘‘Ad Eundem Gradum.”’
The following are the regulations applicable to admission
“ad eundem gradum” :—
Extract from the Statutes, Chap. VIII.
“Graduates of other Universities, desirous of admission
“to the like Degree in this University, may be so admitted
“by the Corporation ; due enquiry being first made as to
“their moral character and sound learning, and opportunity
“given to the several Faculties to make such representation
“in the premises as they may see fit. Provided always, that,
“unless by unanimous consent, such admission shall not
“be put to vote until after three months’ notice, and shall
“not be ordered, if as many as five Members of the Corpora-
“tion shall vote against it.”
Extract from the Regulations of the Corporation.
“Tn all cases in which anyone is proposed for any ‘Ad
“Eundem’ degree, it shall be necessary for the Member or
“Members of the Corporation making such proposal, to state
“in writing therewith the grounds upon which the granting
“of such degree is advocated, and when the case shall be re-
“ferred to the Faculties, under Chap. VIII. of the Statutes,
“copies of such proposal and grounds shall be transmitted to
“the Faculties by the Secretary for their consideration.”
Note.—In considering applications under the above regu-
lations, the Faculties will require as “grounds” the pursuit
of a course of study or research in this University ; associa-
tion with the academic work of the University ; or similar
qualifications.
Admission “ad eundem gradum” is not granted merely as a
titular distinction.
μεν ὦ he ΠΣ ΩΣ
\ a) » νὰ
2
REGISTRATION AND PAYMENT OF FEES.
Registraticn.
1. At any time before the first day of lectures in each ses-
sion, candidates entering on a course of study in the Faculties
of Arts, Law, and Applied Science, whether as Under-
eraduates, Conditioned Students or Partial Students,
are required to attend at the office of the University Registrar,
for the purpose of filling out in duplicate the usual form of
registration, and of signing the following declaration in the
Matricula or Register :—
“1 hereby declare that I will faithfully observe the Statutes,
Rules and Ordinances of this University of McGill College to
the best of my ability.”
2. On the first day of lectures students of the Second, Third
and Fourth Years in the Faculties of Arts, Law, and Applied
Science shall register in such place or places as may be found
most convenient, due notice of which shall be given.
3. After registering, the student will be given a registration
ticket, on presentation of which to the different professors and
lecturers whose classes he proposes to attend, his name will be
entered in the Class Register. It will not be entered on any
other condition.
4. Students who find it impossible to present themselves at
the times specified in Regulations 1 and 2 must register as
soon as possible thereafter, and will not be allowed to attend
any lectures, until they have obtained their registration
tickets.
Payment of Fees.
1. Fees must be paid in the office of the Bursar on or before
October 1st. Students entering after October 1st must pay
their fees at the time of registration. The Registration Ticket
must be shown to the Bursar, in every case, before the fee is
paid. ;
2. Immediately after the above date the Registrar shall send
to each professor and lecturer a list containing the names of
the registered students who have not paid their fees, on re-
ceipt of which the professor or lecturer shall strike the names
of such students from the register of attendance.
SO Υ Ὁ pap Tt ge Fy bese Τα ce a te ον
- ᾿ aA .
3. Students whose names have been dropped from the class
records on account of non-payment of fees can have them re-
placed, on presentation of a special ticket certifyirig that the
fees have been paid. This ticket will only be issued on pay-
ment of an additional fee of two dollars.
BEES.
Matriculation fees must be sent to the University Registrar
at the time of application for the examination. All other
fees as well as all fines in the Faculties of Arts, Law, and
Appled Science must be paid to the Bursar of the Univer-
sity; those in the Faculty of Medicine (with the exception
of the Graduation fee) to the Registrar of that Faculty.
Matriculation Fees.
Kor sthe- fll Examinatione si hate πε ee $5 00
(In case of a Local Examination, where one candidate
only is examined, the fee will be $10.)
In case of candidates who do not complete the ex-
amination at one time. for the first examination. . 5 00
For any subsequent examination....-.......... 2 00
For examination of certificates, other than A.A.
Certificates, in respect of which candidates are
exempted from the whole of the Matriculation
TERA MA MatO Ws Ὁ ous ccs es has Be eee δι 100
Candidates who have passed. the University School (A.A.)
Examination in the required matriculation subjects, and
desire to enter the University, are required to pay the same
fee as that for the Matriculation Hxamination, viz., $5.00,
less any sum already paid in connection with the A.A.
Examination.
Certificates will, on application, be issued to successful
candidates without additional fee. Duplicate certificates
will not be granted unless satisfactory proof be given of
the loss or destruction of the original. The fee for a dupli-
cate certificate is $1.00.
‘SuIpling soissyq pleuoporw
29
Fees in the Faculty of Arts.
For Regulations re payment, see p. 27.
1. Undergraduates and Conditioned Students.—$61 per ses-
sion. This will include the fee for Laboratory work, Library,
Gymnasium and Athletics, and Graduation. In the Third
and Fourth years, it will cover the normal amount of prac-
tical instruction given in each subject having a Laboratory
Course.
Matriculation fee for entrance into the Second Year, $10,
in addition to the sessional fee.
2. Partial Students.—(First and Second Years.)—$16 per
session for one course or one half-course of lectures, includ-
ing the use of the Library; $12 per session for each additional
course ; $8 per session for each additional half-course. In
addition there will be a fee of $3 for Athletics.
3. Partial Students.—(Third and Fourth Years.)—$22 per
session for one course or one half-course of lectures, including
the use of the Library ; $20 per session for each additional
course ; $11 per session for each additional hal{-course. In
addition there will be a fee of $3 for Athletics.
The lectures (and laboratory work, if any) in one subject
in any of the four College years constitute a “ Course,”
if occupying three hours per week, a “ Half-Course ” if occupy-
ing less than three hours per week.
Conditioned Students and Partial Students taking the full
curriculum in any one year pay the same fees as Undergraduates
in that year.
4. Graduates in Arts of this University and graduates of
other Universities attending full courses in affiliated Theological
Colleges are allowed, on payment of one-half of the usual fees,
to attend all lectures, except those for which a special fee is
exigible. For Bachelors of Arts proceeding to M.A. by taking
for one year a graduate course of study, the fee is $40. This
will cover Laboratory work.
5. Special Fees.—
SuPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATION, at the regular date fixed
Dy the MAC ty. ier Patter = tye a ale apace τ τς 2 00
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATION, when granted at any
other time than the regular date fixed by the
Bu Livery meet a ere ecraiaes eg sins Pen ees ae DO 00
30
All fees for Supplemental Examinations must be paid to
the Bursar, and the receipts shown to the Dean before the
examination.
6. Caution Money.—Every student is required to deposit
with the Bursar the sum of $5, as caution money, to cover
damage done to furniture, apparatus, books, ete. This amount,
less deductions (if any), will be returned at the close of the
session.
7. Summer Classes.—During the months of May and June,
a series of SUMMER CLASSES will be conducted, intended mainly
in the first instance, to meet the requirements of students in
the first two years of their course. ‘The subjects offered are
English, Latin, Greek, Mathematics, Physics, Chemistry, Logic,
French and German. A fee of eight dollars will be exigible
for any one class, and of four dollars for each additional class.
All fines are applied to the purchase of books for the
Library.
Fees in the Faculty of Applied Science.
For Regulations re payment, see p. 27.
Annual fee for the undergraduate course.........--. $175.00
(Undergraduates and conditioned students who were in at-
tendance at the University during the Session of 1902-1903,
or previously, will be allowed to complete their several courses
on payment of $156.00 per annum. Should, however, any
student repeat a year the fee for such additional session will
be $175.00).
Students taking the Double Course in the Faculties of Arts
and Applied Science shall receive a rebate on the Faculty of
Applied Science fees of an amount equal to the fees paid for
equivalent subjects in the Faculty of Arts.
The fees for Partial Students sare :—$10.00 for
Library, Athletics and Caution money ; and a fee
at the rate of $6.00 per annum for each hour of
instruction per week, but the maximum fee shall
in mo case: exceed’ $175.00 8 )o sos csicre misters πὴ
Deposit for caution money for undergraduates and
Conditioned “Students, 22... tie. ws ee.) t-te ie) τ: 5.00
Fee: for Graduate’ Course:’.. 02... -. 5.52.25 2s hee ae 150.00
ol
(Graduates of this Faculty will be required to pay only one-
half of this amount.)
Sessional fee for the Special Course on Architectural
Spylese (Fors partial students)... ποι... ἡ. $10.00
Supplemental Examinations.—The fee is $2.00 for each
examination period (morning or afternoon). It must be paid
to the Bursar of the University not later than the day before
the examinations, and receipt for the same shown to the Profes-
sor in charge before the examination papers are distributed.
The fee for a special Supplemental Examination is $5.00.
Summer Term Art Classes (see p. 192).
Full Term.—$25.00, whole day; $15.00, *half day.
One month of 4 weeks, commencing any time during the
term; $15.00, whole day; $9.00, *half day.
Note.—Any period more than a month, but less than the term,
will be charged for at the rate per month.
Fees in the Faculty of Medicine.
All fees are payable in advance to the Registrar, and, except
by permission of the Faculty, will not be received later than
October 20th.
It is strongly recommended to parents or guardians of
students that the fees be transmitted direct by cheque or P.O.
Order to the Registrar, who will furnish official receipts.
The total Faculty Fees for the whole medical course of four
full sessions, including clinics, laboratory work, dissecting
material and reagents, will be jive hundred dollars, payable in
four annual instalments ‘of $125 each.
Partial students will be admitted to one or more courses
on payment of special fees. An annual University fee of three
dollars is charged students of all the faculties for the main-
tenance of college grounds and athletics.
Students repeating the course of study of any Academic
session are not required to pay full fees. A fee of thirty-
five dollars will be charged, which will include Hospitals, dis-
secting material, chemical reagents, laboratory fees, etc. The
same fee is charged students entering from other colleges who
have already paid fees elsewhere for the courses taken.
* Half day means mornings and afternoons, not interchangeable,
52
An ad eundem gradum fee of $10 will be charged students
entering from another university 1 in the second, third or fourth
year of: the course.
Special Fees—Annual tickets entitling students to admission
to both the Montreal General and the Royal Victoria Hospitals
must be taken out at the commencement of the session.
For the convenience of the undergraduates, the Hospital
fees are payable in the Registrar’s office ; ten dollars to be
paid at the beginning of each of the last three sessions, viz.,
the second, third and fourth years. This will entitle each
undergraduate to perpetual tickets for both the Montreal
General and Royal Victoria Hospitals.
The fee for the Maternity Hospital for twelve months is $12,
payable at the Hospital.
The fee for the Degree of Doctor of Medicine and Master of
Surgery shall be thirty dollars, to be paid by the successful
candidate to’ the University Bursar immediately after examin-
ation.
The following fees are exigible in the different graduate
courses offered :—
Regular Graduate Course (including Hospital fees).. $40.00
(Special fees will be arranged for single courses.)
Course in Legal Medicine, and Diploma............ $20.00
Course in Public Health, and Diploma............. $20.00
Fees in the Faculty of Law.
For Regulations re payment, see p. 27.
Registration Wee! sok. meeyet ache, ob ataseee tel sone een haere $ 5 00
Sessional Fee (including Athletics) for Undergraduates
matriculating in and after September, 1903...... 60 00
Sessional Fee for Undergraduates previously enrolled... 53 00
Athletics Fee, payable by Partial Students.......... 3 00
Graduation Kee}. ΕΝ Ss bec. sere akan eee et eree nent tere: 12 50
Sessional Fee by Partial Students:—for the course of
Roman Law, $20 ; for each of the courses on Suc-
cessions, Criminal Law, Commercial Law, Obligations
and Civil Procedure, $15 ; and for each one of the
shorter courses, $10.00.
Ps)
Caution Money.—Every student is required to deposit with
the Bursar the sum of $5, as caution money, to cover damage
done to furniture, loss of books, ete. This amount, less
deductions, (if any), will be returned at the close of the session.
Fees for Higher Degrees.
For the Degree ΘΙ Uae ee ΤΑΣ ὅπη δα, 8950 oa $20.00
ἐν et OSLER? B= B02 τς τινες 40.00
(rn case of failure on examination or the rejection of
the thesis the candidate may present himself in
a subsequent vear without further payment of
fee.)
For _the Degree Cape Se eink, eas Ped NS $20.00
Set. (CLs DOSCILUTO eats, thes 3d tS apes 40.00
ie * ESCA | is caer ame ire Nees WEED BEL τς 80.00
Cs τ Πα πόστον eR ant eee 80.00
Ἧ ἐς DSO RU I ee eee Be eS ah ae 80.00
- : PD De, ety SCOMTSE) Ory tis ic'ath State τς 80.00
No fee shall be charged for the Degree of LL.D., granted
“honoris causa.”
The fee for any Higher Degree must be sent with the thesis
to the Registrar of the University. This is a condition essen-
tial to the reception of the application. The Registrar will
then forward the thesis to the Dean of the Faculty. If no
thesis be required, the fees must be paid before the Examina-
tion.
Miscellaneous Fees.
19) safer vay Tid (67 ena) 221 Vee eae a ope lg i oP ἡ $5.00
Library (optional for students in Law and Medicine).. 4.00
Gymnasium (optional for undergraduates in Law and
Medicine, and also for Partial Students in all
SUIS wibec, era k JA ares anes oe te ots that is Se 2.50
Certificate of Standing, as to year of Course........ 1.00
Certificate of Standing, accompanied by a statement
of classification in the several subjects of examina-
TWP ene a ORs ais Pape ΚΡ πον ἐμ ν 2.00
All applications for certificates must be addressed to the
Registrar of the University, accompanied by the required fee.
No certificates are given for attendance on lectures unless
the corresponding examinations have been passed.
9
oO
SPECIAL REGULATIONS.
Academic Dress.
Professors, Lecturers, and Students are required to wear
academic dress at lectures, except in those cases in which a
dispensation shall have been granted by the Faculty.
Undergraduates shal) wear a plain black stuff gown, not falling
below the knee, with round sleeve cut above elbow.
Bachelor of Arts.—Black stuff gown, falling below knee, with full
sleeve cut to elbow and terminating in a point (similar to that of
the Cambridge B.A.); hood, black silk, lined with pale blue silk and
edged with white fur.
Bachelor of Science.-—The same gown as Bachelors of Arts; hood,
black silk, lined with yellow silk and edged with white fur.
Bachelor of Civil Law.—The same gown as Bachelors of Arts; hood,
black silk, lined with French grey silk and edged with white fur.
Master of Arts—Black gown of stuff or silk falling below knee,
with long sleeve with semi-circular cut at the bottom; (similar to
that of the Cambridge M.A.); hood, black silk, lined with pale blue
silk.
Master of Science.—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood, black .
silk, lined with yellow silk.
Doctor of Medicine-—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood, scar-
let cloth, lined with dark blue silk.
Doctor of Laws.—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood, scarlet
cloth, lined with white silk.
Doctor of Literature—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood,
scarlet cloth, lined with pale blue silk.
Doctor of Science.—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood, scarlet
cloth, lined with yellow silk.
Doctor of Civil Law.—The same gown as Masters of Arts; hood,
searlet cloth, lined with French grey silk.
Doctors of Laws, Doctors of Civil Law, Doctors of Literature, and
Doctors of Science shall be entitled to wear for full dress a robe of
scarlet cloth (similar in.pattern to that of the Cambridge LL.D.)
faced with silk of the same colour as the lining of their respective
hoods. ν᾿
All hoods shall be in pattern similar to that of the Masters of
Arts of Cambridge University.
Undergraduates and graduates shall wear the ordinary black
trencher with black tassel, but Doctors of Laws, Doctors of Civil Law,
Doctors of Literature, and Doctors of Science shall wear for full dress
a black velvet hat with gold cord, similar to that worn by Doctors of
Laws of Cambridge University.
Samples of the colours of the linings of all hoods shall be kept
‘or inspection in the office of the Registrar.
35
Attendance and Conduct:
1. Punctual attendance on all his classes is required of each
student.
2. A record shall be kept by each Professor or Lecturer,
in which the presence or absence of students shall be care-
fully noted. The record shall be submitted to the Faculty at
all their ordinary meetings during the Session.
3. Credit for attendance on any lecture or class may be
refused on the grounds of lateness, inattention, neglect of
study, or disorderly conduct in the class-room or laboratory.
In the case last mentioned, the student may, at the discretion
of the Professor, be required to leave the room. Persistence
in any of the above offences against discipline shall, after
admonition by the Professor, be reported to the Dean of
Faculty. The Dean may, at his discretion, reprimand the
student, or refer the matter to the Faculty at its next meeting,
and may in the interval suspend from classes.
4. Absence from lectures can only be excused by neces-
sity or duty, of which proof must be given, when called for,
to the Faculty. The number of times of absence, from neces-
sity or duty, that shall disqualify from the keeping of a session
shall in each case be determined by the Faculty.
5. Any student found guilty of dishonest practices at an
examination shall be liable to expulsion from the University,
or to be suspended for a term of years.
6. While in college, or going to or from it, students arc
expected to conduct themselves in the same orderly manner
as in the class-rooms. Smoking is prohibited in the College
buildings, except in such rooms, if any, as may be set apart
for that purpose. Any Professor observing improper con-
duct in the College buildings or grounds may admonish the
student, and, if necessary, report him to the Dean. Without,
as well as within the walls of the College, every student is
required to maintain a good moral character.
7. When students are brought before the Faculty under the
above rules. the Faculty may reprimand, report to parents
or guardians, impose fines, disqualify from competing for
prizes or honors, suspend from classes, or report to the Cor-
poration for expulsion.
8. Any student damaging the furniture or buildings will
be required to bear the expense of repairing or making good
Te eee Yh ee δ. ἜΝ eae Ti ate ee Ds ta ith ot αι
: ἢ ἐν ΑΝ
90
A
the same, and will, in addition, be subject to such other penalty
as the Faculty may see fit to inflict. Τ individual responsi-
bility for damage cannot be traced, a pro rata assessment may
be made on all the students more directly concerned.
9. All cases of discipline involving the interests of more
than one Faculty, or of the University in general, shall be
immediately reported to the Principal, or, in his absence, to
the Vice-Principal.
10. Petitions from the students to any University body on
any subject can, in general, be taken into consideration only
at the regular meetings appointed in the Calendar.
Conduct of Examinations.
1. The supervision of the examinations of the University is
entrusted largely to officers specially appointed from year to
year in sufficient numbers for the purpose. An attendant is
present in the Examination Hall throughout each examina-
tion.
2. Writing paper for the examinations is provided in the
form of books, with covers in special colours.. Each book
contains a statement of the duties of candidates, and to each
is attached a small envelope containing a card or slip for
the name of the candidate.
3. Each colour has a number, and only one colour is em-
ployed at a given examination. A certain scheme of colours
is arranged beforehand for the whole period of the examina-
tion.
4. The seating of the students is arranged in advance, and
is posted at the entrance of the Hall fifteen minutes before
the commencement of the examination.
5. The Faculty, or a Committee of the Faculty concerned,
will arrange for at least one examiner, and such other paid
examiners as are deemed necessary, to be present in the Hall
for each examination ; and will also arrange the scheme of
seating and books to be used.
6. All examiners are expected to ΤΕΣ strictly to the
supervision of the examinations while they are in the Hall.
7. They shall instruct each candidate to write the number
of his table on the outside of his book ; to write his name
plainly upon the card provided in the envelope on the book ;
to replace it and seal the envelope.
oe
να νος Oy eee κύον Niky
-
37
After this has been done, the examination papers are dis-
tributed. Any candidate entering late will be required to
sign his card and close the envelope before receiving the ex-
amination paper.
The examiners shall also call the attention of the candidates
to the rules printed upon the envelope.
8. During the course of the examinations the examiner
shall verify the position of each candidate in the examination
hall aceording to a plan. ;
9. For the convenience of candidates, the examiners may
announce the time when half of the period allowed for the
examination has expired ; and also at thirty minutes and five
minutes before the close.
10. Before beginning to write on the examination, candi-
dates should write their names plainly on the slip provided
in the envelope, and enclose it, fastening the envelope, and
write the number of their desk or table plainly on the cover
of the examination book.
11. No candidate shall be permitted to enter the examina-
tion room after the expiry of one-half hour, or leave it before
the expiry of one-half hour, from the commencement of the
examination. Any candidate leaving the examination room
after the issue of the examination papers in any subject, shall
not be perinitted to return during the course of that examina-
tion. .
12. Candidates guilty of any of the following or similar
dishonest practices shall be immediately dismissed from the
examination, and shall be liable to permanent disqualification
for membership in McGill University:
A. Making use of any books, papers, or memoranda, other
than those provided by the examiners.
B. Speaking or communicating with other candidates un-
der any circumstances whatever.
C. Exposing written papers to the view of other candi-
dates.
The plea of accident or forgetfulness shall not be received.
13. Candidates shall write their answers on the right hand
pages of the Regulation Answer Book provided for the pur-
pose by the University, entering on the margin nothing but
the number or letter of the question they are about to answer.
The left-hand page may be used for rough drafts or for scrib-
88
bling purposes. No other paper than the regulation answer
book above mentioned shall be used by the candidates, and no
pages removed from the books.
14. Candidates are not permitted to leave their places.
Should they desire anything, they may signify it by standing
up.
"1B. When the examiner announces that the examination
is over, all candidates must leave the hall. On leaving the
hall, the examination books must be deposited by the candi-
dates as directed by the examiners.
?College Grounds and Athletics.
All matters relating to the management of the College
Grounds and of Out-Door Athletics and Sports are under the
control of a Committee consisting of :—
One Governor.
The Principal.
One Member of the Faculty of Arts.
One Member of the Faculty of Applied Science.
One Member of the Faculty of Law.
One Member of the Faculty of Medicine.
One Graduate.
One Undergraduate, member of the Football Club.
One Undergraduate, member of the Tennis ΟἹ.
One Undergraduate, member of the Cricket Club.
One Undergraduate, member of the Hockey Club.
One Undergraduate, member of the Skating Club.
The President of the Athletic Association.
The several Members of the Committee are elected annually
by their respective bodies ; and the Committee meets for
organization on ‘the third Tuesday in September in each
year. The Undergraduate Members of the Committee are
entitled to vote only on matters relating to Athletics.
The following extracts are made from the rules and regula-
tions of the Committee, for the guidance of Members of the
University and the several Athletic Clubs and Associations
which are from time to time permitted to use the grounds :
The University and McTavish Street gates shall be closed
between 6 p.m. and 7 a.m. on week days and the whole day
on Sunday.
39
The Sherbrooke Street gates shall be closed between 10 p.m.
and 6 a.m.
Such persons as are entitled to use the Grounds shall be
provided with tickets renewable each year.
Those entitled to tickets are the Members of the University
and prominent Benefactors, and the families of Governors
and Professors.
The several Clubs shall be permitted to issue special
tickets, entitling the holders to admission to the Grounds for
the purpose of viewing matches, or for other special occasions
of public interest.
All students desirous of taking part in football matches, or
otherwise engaging in violent athletic contests, must pass a
medical examination, to be held under the direction of the
Superintendent of the Gymnasium. A complete record of all
such examinations shall be kept by the Superintendent or
other officer appointed to this duty. The Managers and
Captains of Clubs or other responsible executive officers are
required to insist upon the strict observance of the rule in
regard to Medical Examination, and all the rules and regula-
tions of the Committee which concern them.
All Clubs must submit their Regulations, Rules, and By-
Laws, and any changes in the same, for the approval of the
Committee. They must make application for the use of such
portions of the Grounds as they require, and for any special
privileges. .
Clubs must not engage in matches with outside clubs except
with the approval of the Committee.
The Athletic Association must submit its programme for
each year for the approval of the Committee.
All students of the University are required to pay a fee of
three dollars ($3.00) for the use of the Grounds. The
amount so paid is handed over to the Committee, and is by it
expended in the interest of College Athletics and in the per-
manent improvement of the portions of the grounds used for
Athletics.
40. ;
UNIVERSITY BUILDINGS.
The Centre Building.
This building, the first and oldest building of McGill College,
contains the lecture-rooms of the Faculty of Arts and the Botanical
Laboratories in the centre. The East Wing contains the newly
equipped Zoological Laboratories, the offices of the Administration,
and the lecture-rooms of the Faculty of Law. The West Wing com-
prises the Molson Convocation and Examination Hall and the Cor-
poration Meeting-room.
The Botanical Laboratories are described in detail on p. 128, the
Zoological Laboratories on p. 129.
The Macdonald Engineering Building.
The Engineering Building, erected, equipped and endowed by Sir
William C. Macdonald, represents, in architectural effect, a severe
treatment of the Italian renaissance. Besides numerous lecture-
rooms, students’ rooms, a departmental library, and a large techni-
cal museum, which holds the Reuleaux collection of Kinematic
models-—-bélieved to be the most complete in America, the building
contains large and thoroughly equipped electrical and magnetic
laboratories; dynamo rooms; lighting station; accumulator reom;
laboratories of Mathematics, Dynamics, Mechanics, Geodesy, Model-
ling, Testing, and Thermodynamics; workshops (in the annex erected
under the bequest of the late Thomas Workman) for Carpentry,
Wood-turning, and Pattern-making; Machine shops; Smithy; Foun-
dry, ete.
The whole of one floor is given up to Drawing-rooms, and the
Museum of the building contains a large collection of casts illustra-
tive of the historical development of the various styles of architecture
and of casts of architectural and figure sculpture.
A detailed description of the laboratories and workshops and their
equipment is given on pp. 1938 et seqq.
Macdonald Chemistry and Mining Building.
Admirable facilities are afforded in the Macdonald Chemistry and
Mining Building for study and research in the departments of Chem-
istry, Metallurgy, Mining, Mineralogy and Geology. The building
was erected, equipped and endowed by Sir William σ, Macdonald.
It is spacious, admirably lighted, heated by hot water and ventilated
by eiectric fans. In addition to the large Lecture Theatre, which
seats about 250 students, there are four lecture rooms for smaller
classes, and a number of offices.
There are three large general Chemical Laboratories, large labor-
atories for Ore-dressing and Metallurgy and a number of smaller
rooms for special purposes, including research work. Among the
special laboratories may be mentioned those for Organic Chemistry,
Physical Chemistry, Electrolytic Analysis, Gas Analysis, Iron and
Steel Analysis, Fire Assaying, Water Analysis, Determinative
Mineralogy, Petrography, Photography, ete. The reference library
contains about 1,300 volumes.
A detailed description of the laboratories and their equipment is
given on pp. 127 and 193.
i
+
~~ Y ae
or. ΡΩΝ ᾿
os sale
ΒΡ
Fs
See ee
*
Py
x
Ἂν
¥
fe
41
‘The Macdonald Physics Building.
The Macdonald Physical Laboratory, another of Sir William C.
Macdonald’s gifts to the University, contains five storeys, each of
8,000 square feet area. Besides a lecture theatre and its apparatus
rooms, the Building includes an elementary laboratory nearly 60 feet
Square; large special laboratories arranged for higher work by ad-
vanced students in Heat and Electricity; a range of rooms for
foptical work and photography; separate rooms for private thesis
‘work by students; and two large laboratories arranged for research,
provided with solid piers and the usual standard instruments. There
are also a lecture room, with apparatus room attached, for Mathe-
matical Physics, a special physical library, and convenient work-
shops. The equipment is on a corresponding scale, and comprises:
(1) apparatus for illustrating lectures; (2) simple forms of the prin-
cipal instruments for use by the students in practical work; (3) the
most recent types of all important instruments for exact measure-
ment, to be used in connection with special work and research.
A detailed description of the laboratories and their equipment is
given on pp. 125 and 201.
Medical Buildings
The present main building of the Faculty of Medicine was erected
in 18738. In 1885, and again in 1893, large additions and alterations
were made to the buildings. These again, however, have proved
inadequate, and a thorough reconstruction and enlargement of the
buildings has lately been completed. The present buildings comprise
several large lecture theatres; a large reading|room, managed by the
students themselves; a fine medical library; dissecting rooms; and
a large number of completely equipped laboratories for Physiology,
Histology, Pharmacology, Chemistry, Hygiene, Bacteriology, and
Pathology, in addition to numerous museums, preparation rooms, and
offices. Clinical teaching is conducted in the theatres, wards, out-
patient rooms, and laboratories of the Montreal General Hospital,
the Royal Victoria Hospital, and the Montreal Maternity Hospital.
A detailed description of the laboratories and museums is given
on pp. 237 to 240 and 281 to 285.
The Royal Victoria College for Women.
This residential college for the Women Students of McGill Un1-
versity, erected and endowed by Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal,
is situated on Sherbrooke Street, in close proximity to the University
buildings and laboratories. The Professors and Lecturers of the
University are thereby enabled to give their services in the conduct
of the College classes.
Full particulars of the College, terms of residence, etc., are given
on pp. 136 et seqq.
The University Library.
Librarian:—Charles H. Gould, B.A.
The general library is housed in the fine Romanesque building
erected in 1893 by the late Mr. Petér Redpath.
Dignified and convenient as originally designed, it has recently
been improved and greatly enlarged by the liberality of Mrs. Peter
42
\
Redpath. It now possesses ample accommodation for three hundred
and fifty readers, of whom fully one hundred can be provided for
in the seminary rooms and special studies.
The main architectural feature of the interior is the general
reading room, 110 feet long, 48 feet wide, and 44 feet high. It will
seat one hundred and fifty readers and has open shelves for about
4,000 volumes.
The book stack, four and five storeys high, of approved type,
excellently lighted and ventilated, with four reading bays on each
storey, has a working capacity of 250,000 volumes, besides special
provision for the storage of maps and of newspapers.
Library regulations, with a description of the collections are
given on pp. 295 to 298.
The Peter Redpath Museum.
Senior Curator—Prof. B. J. Harrington, M.A., LL.D.
This building was erected in 1882 by the liberal benefactor whose
name it bears. It occupies a commanding position at the upper end
of the campus, and besides its central hall and other rooms devoted
to the collections, contains a large lecture theatre, class-rooms, and
work-rooms.
The general arrangement of the collections is as follows:—
1. The Botanical Room on the ground floor contains the Herba-
rium, consisting of 30,000 specimens of Canadian and exotic plants
and collections illustrating structural and economic botany.
2. On the first floor is a room over the entrance hall, in which are
cases containing archaeological and ethnological objects with large
slabs of fossil foot-prints on the walls.
3. This room opens into the great Museum Hall, on each side of
which are alcoves with upright and table cases containing the collec-
tions in Palaeontology, arranged primarily to illustrate the succes-
sive geological systems, and subordinately to this, in the order of
zoological and botanical classification, so as to enable the student to
see the general order of life in successive periods, and to trace any
particular group through its geological \history.
4. At the extreme end of the Hall are placed the collections of
minerals and rocks, arranged in such manner as to facilitate their
systematic study. In the centre of the Hall are economic collections
and large casts and models.
5. In the upper story or gallery of the great Hall are placed the
zoological collections; the invertebrate animals in table cases in
regular series, beginning with the lower forms; the vertebrate
animals in upright cases, in Similar order. The PHILIP CARPENTER
COLLECTION of shells is especially noteworthy for its arrangement
and completeness.
Details as to the several departments of the Museum are given in
the ‘Museum Guide,’’ and papers or memoirs relating to type speci-
mens in the collections can be obtained from the Museum Assistant.
Tickets are issued to students by the Professors in charge of the
several departments, and classes of pupils from schools can be ad-
mitted on certain days under regulations which may be learned from
the Professors or from the Registrar of the University.
University Library.—Main Reading Room,
Redpath Museum.—Interior View.
48
Observatory.
Latitude, N. 45° 30’ 17”. Longitude, 4h° 54m" 188᾽ 67.
Height above sea level, 187 feet.
‘Superintendent—C. H. McLeod, Ma.E.
The Observatory in which courses of instruction are given in the
use of meteorological instruments and in astronomical work, is situ-
ated at the head of the University campus... ἡ
Meteorological observations.—Records of temperature, atmospheric
pressure, wind velocity and direction, and sunshine are obtained by
self-recording instruments. Check observations are made at 7.40
a.m., 3 p.m., and 7.40 p.m. on standard instruments.
The principal instruments employed are two standard mercurial
barometers; one Richard barograph; one Richard thermograph; one
Callendar thermograph; one Kew standard thermometer; two Pas-
torelli thermometers; one maximum thermometer; one minimum
thermometer; one set of six self-recording thermometers, with con-
trolling clock, battery, etc.; two anemometers; one wind vane; one
anemograph with battery, etc.; one sunshine recorder; one rain-
band spectroscope and one rain gauge.
The Anemometer and Vane are on the summit of Mount Royal,
at a point about three-quarters of a mile north-west of the Observ-
atory. They are 57 feet above the surface of the ground and 810
feet above sea level.
Soil temperatures are observed, in co-operation with the Physical
Laboratory, by. means of platinum thermometers at depths ranging
from one inch to nine feet.
The astronomical equipment consists of:—The Blackman Tele-
scope (6% in.); a photoheliograph (4% in.); a 3% in. transit with
striding level, etc.; a prismatic (8cm.) transit instrument, also ar-
ranged as a zenith telescope; a 2 in. transit in the prime vertical;
two collimating telescopes; one sidereal clock; one mean time clock;
one sidereal chronometer; one mean time chronometer; one chrono-
graph; batteries, telegraph lines, and sundry minor instruments.
Observations for clock errors are made on nearly every clear
night. Time exchanges are regularly made with the Toronto observ-
atory. Time signals are distributed throughout the city by means
of the noon time-ball, continuous clock-signals, and the fire-alarm
bells; and to the country through the telegraph lines.
The longitude of the Observatory was determined in 1892 by direct
telegraph connection with Greenwich, with exchange of observers
and instruments. The position is believed to be the most accurately
‘determined in America.
Gymnasiums.
The University Gymnasium.
Medical Director of Physical Training:—R. Tait McKenzie, B.A., M.D.
The classes, which are open to men students of all the Facultiss,
will meet at the University Gymnasium at hours to suit, as far as
possible, the convenience of students, and to be announced at the
commencement of the Session.
44
\
The recent addition of some special apparatus enables the in-
structor to devote some attention to the application of exercise in
treating special cases of weakness or deformity, whch should be
reported to him before the regular class work is undertaken,
THE WICKSTEED SILVER AND BRONZE MEDALS FOR PHYSICAL
CULTURE (the gift of Dr. R. J. Wicksteed) are offered for competition
to students of the graduating class and to students who have had
instruction in the Gymnasium for ‘two sessions; the silver medal
to the former, the bronze medal to the latter.
The award of these medals is made by Judges, appointed by the
Corporation of the University.
Every competitor for the silver medal is required to ledge with
the Judges, before the examination, a certificate of good standing
in the graduating class signed by the Dean or Registrar of the
Faculty to which he belongs, and the medal will not be awarded to
any student who may fail in his examination for the degree.
The Royal Victoria College Gymnasium,
Instructor:—Miss Vendla Μ. Holmstrom.
Classes for Women Students are conducted in the newly equipped
Gymnasium of the Royal Victoria College, see page 188.
“SuIpIIng Siw
Faculty of Arts.
Tue Frest Day or Lecrures, SESSION 1903-1904, WILL BE TUESDAY
SEPTEMBER 22ND.
i. REGULATIONS FOR ENTRANCE.
See pp. 10-21.
il. FEES AND REGISTRATION.
See pp. 27-30.
Ili, SCHOLARSHIPS AND EXHIBITIONS’.
GENERAL REGULATIONS.
1. A Scholarship is tenable for two years; an Exhibition
for one year.
2. Scholarships are open for competition to students who
have passed the University Intermediate Examination, pro-
vided that not more than three sessions have elapsed since
their Matriculation; and also to candidates who have obtained
what the Faculty may deem equivalent standing in some other
University, provided that application be made before the end
of the Session preceding the examination. For details of the
examination, see pp. 55—d7.
3. Exhibitions are assigned to the First and Second Years.
First Year Exhibitions are open for competition to candi-
dates for entrance into the First Year. The examination is
held in June. For details, see pp. 47—53.
Second Year Exhibitions are open for competition to stu-
dents who have passed the First Year Sessional Examinations,
provided that not more than two sessions have elapsed since
their Matriculation; and also to candidates for entrance into
* In Session 1903-1904 the Scholarship and Second Year Exhibition Examinations
7 will begin on Wednesday, September 9th,
iy
Fe
ας tS ον
γ
=
a aes
ee 7
40
the Second Year. The examination is held at the beginning
of every session, in September. For details, see pp. 53-05.
4. The Second Year Exhibition Examination will, for
candidates who have not previously entered the University, be
regarded as a Matriculation Examination.
5. No student can hold more than one Exhibition or Schol-
arship at the same time.
6. Exhibitions and Scholarships will not necessarily be
awarded to the candidates who have obtained the highest
marks. An adequate standard of merit will be required.
7. If in any College Year there be not a sufficient number
of candidates showing adequate merit, any one or more of the
Exhibitions or Scholarships offered for competition may be
given to more deserving candidates in another year.
8. A successful candidate must, in order to retain his Schol-
arship or Exhibition, proceed regularly with his College Course
to the satisfaction of the Faculty.
9. The annual income of the Scholarships or Exhibitions
will be paid in four instalments, viz.:—In October, December,
February and April, about the 20th day of each month.
10. For the Session of 1903-1904 there will be thirty-one
Scholarships and Exhibitions, including the following :—
The Jane Redpath Hxhibition, founded by Mrs. Redpath, of
Terrace Bank, Montreal:—value, about $90 yearly, open to
both men and women.*
Oltawa’ Valley Graduates’ Society Exhibition, awarded on the
results of the June Examination.
Two Sir William Dawson Exhibitions, given by the New York
Graduates’ Society:—value, one $62 and the other $60
yearly.
Ten Macdonald Scholarships and Exhibitions, founded by Sir
W. C. Macdonald, Montreal :—value $125 each, yearly.
The Charles Alewander Scholarship, (for men students), founded
by Charles Alexander, Hsq.,. Montreal, for the encourage-
ment of the study of Classics and other subjects:—value
$90 yearly.
* Resolutions are now in force by which all Exhibitions and Scholarships have been
thrown open without restriction of sex, ‘‘except in cases where the deeds of gift or the
ascertained wishes of the donor expressly preclude such a course; it being understood
that in the event of the establishment of any large number of Exhibitions and Scholar-
ships specially appropriated to either of the sexes by the terme of the foundation, the
Board of Governors may again restrict some of those now existing in favour of the other
sex.”
ΕΟ τ ΤΆ τ ΑΡ ς
παν ΤΠ Ἢ ἘΠῚ Teh
41
The Major H. Mills Scholarship, founded by bequest of the late
Major Hiram Mills:—value $100 yearly.
The Barbara Scott Scholarship, founded by the late Miss Bar-
bara Scott, Montreal, for the encouragement of the study
of the Classical languages and literature:—value $100 to
$120 yearly.
The Mackenzie Scholarship for Economics and Political Science,
founded in memory of the late Hon. Alexander Mackenzie:
—value $125 yearly.
Four Exhibitions in the Royal Victoria College, open to women
only :—ranging in value from $75 to $200 yearly.
One Royal Victoria College Scholarship, for women :—value $125
yearly.
RESEARCH SCHOLARSHIP IN CHEMISTRY.
it is proposed to offer in September, 1904, a Research
Scholarship in Chemistry, on the endowment of the late Dr.
T. Sterry Hunt, to graduate students in the Faculties of Arts
and Applied Science.
FIRST YEAR EXHIBITIONS.
The following nineteen Exhibitions are offered. for competi-
tion in June, 1903, to candidates for admission to the First
Wear:
Three Ο (Advanced), each of $300.
For particulars, see pp. 51—53.
(Not transferable to other divisions below or other years.)
Five B (Higher), each of $150.
For particulars, see pp. 48-51.
(Any or all of these may be raised to $200, if the answering is suffi-
ciently good, and if there be other Exhibitions unawarded.)
Five A (Ordinary Matriculation, B. A. course), viz., two of
$125 each; three of $100 each.
Four A (Ordinary Matriculation, B. Sc. course), viz., one of
$112; two of $100; one of $60.
Two R. V. C. Exhibitions for Ordinary Matriculation, open
to women only, and conditional on residence in the Royal Vic-
toria College, viz., one of $200, and one of $100.
As previously announced, the examination for First Year
Exhibitions will be held hereafter in June, instead of Septem-
ber, beginning June 8th, 1903.
There will be three divisions, A, B and C.
First Year
Exhibi-
tions.
48
᾿"
They are open to men and women on equal ‘terms, unless
the contrary is stated.
No candidate can hold two exhibitions at the same time.
Blank forms of application, to be obtained from the Regis-
trar of the University, must be filled out and returned before
the 1st of May, 1903.
In his application the candidate will specify the degree
(B. A. or B. Se.) to which he intends to proceed. The tenure
of an Exhibition is conditional on the pursuit of the corre-
sponding curiculum in the First Year.
A. EXHIBITIONS.
The A (Matriculation) Exhibitions will be awarded on the
results of the Matriculation Examination only, whether for
B.A. or B.Sc. The marks for English Grammar, Composition,
Dictation, Arithmetic and British History will not be taken
into account, however, in the competition, and candidates who
have previously passed in these subjects will not be required to
repeat the examination.
(For details of requirements in the different subjects, see pp.
15-19.
B. EXHIBITIONS.
The B (Higher) Exhibitions will be awarded on the results
of an examination in the subjects required for Matriculation,
together with additional work in any three of the following;
provided, however, that the Ordinary Matriculation papers in
the three chosen have also been taken :—
English.
Latin.
Greek.
French.
German.
Mathematics, Part If (if not taken for Matriculation).
A candidate, not successful, may nevertheless receive an A
Exhibition, but in determining this, the marks for the addi-
tional work will not be taken into account.
The details of the additional work in the above subjects
are as follows :—
English.
Grammar.—An advanced knowledge of this subject will be
required, and, in additsen, some acquaintance with the histor-
‘
a - _ id 5 Σ Ὰ . »
ee ὠνε Ee eS ee ee ee εν ΨΥ μος
eee “ν᾿
νος
ical development of English as illustrated in common and im-
portant words. The candidate is recommended to read Ma-
son’s or West’s Elements of English Grammar, and expected to
supplement Mason or West by using Morris’s Historical Out-
lines of English Accidence (Macmillan & Co.) as a book of ref-
erence.
Literature, 1903 and 1904.—Milton, L’Allegro and other
short poems, ed. Bell (Macmillan & Co.); Macaulay, Essays on
Byron, Warren Hastings, Clive.
Composition—The candidate will be required to write an
essay on some subject connected with the examination.
Provided two months’ notice be given, candidates may sub-
stitute in any year an equivalent amount from the works pre-
scribed for the Senior Leaving Examination of the Province °
of Ontario, Grade XII of the Province of Nova Scotia, or the
Senior Leaving Examination of the Prince of Wales College,
ῬΈΕΙ.
Latin.
Grammar; Translation at Sight; Prose Composition.
Trxt-Booxs.—Sonnenschein’s or Allen and Greenough’s
Latin Grammar; Arnold’s Latin Prose Composition by Bradley,
or Collar’s Latin Composition, Parts IIT and IV.
Translation from the following prescribed books :—
1903 and 1904—Horace, Odes ITI.
1905—Horace, Odes’ I.
Provided two months’ notice be given, candidates may sub-
stitute in any year an equivalent amount from the works pre-
scribed for the Senior Leaving Examination of the Province of
Ontario, Grade XII of the Province of Nova Scotia, or the
Senior Leaving Laamination of the Prince of Wales College,
ἘΠῚ:
Greek.
Grammar; Translation at Sight; Prose Composition.
Trxt-Booxs.—Sonnenschein’s or Rutherford’s Greek Gram-
mar, or Burnet’s Greek Rudiments, or White’s First Greek Book;
Abbott’s Arnold’s Greek Prose Composition.
Translation from the following prescribed books :—
1903, 1994 and 1905.—Homer, Odyssey VIT: Euripides,
Heeuba (Sidgwick’s Selections).
50 Ἶ
Provided two months’ nolice be given, candidates may sub-
stitute im any year an equivalent amount from the works pre-
scribed for the Senior Leaving Examination of the Province of
Ontario, Grade XII of the Province of Nova Scotia, or the
Senior Leaving HKaamination of the Prince of Wales College,
| Feed Opel
In both Latin and Greek, candidates who do not offer the
books prescribed above will have the option of an additional
paper in Composition and Translation at Sight.
French.
(a) Grammar, including Syntax; (b) Translation at sight
of French into English; (c) Translation at sight of easy Eng-
lish prose passages into French; (ὦ) Translaticn from the fol-
lowing texts :—
1903. Sarcey, Le Siége de Paris (Heath & Co.); Sandeau,
Mademoiselle de la Seighére (Heath & Co.); About, Le Roi
des Montagnes (Heath & Co.)
1904. Augicr, Le Gendre de M. Poirier’ (Heath & Co.) ;
DeVigny, La Canne de Jone (Heath & Co.) ; Sand, La Mare au
Diable (Heath & Co.)
Provided two months’ notice be given, candidates may sub-
stitute in any year an equivalent amount from the works pre-
scribed for the Senior Leaving Examination of the Province of
Ontario, Grade XII of the Province of Nova Scotia, or the
Senior Leaving Examination of the Prince of Wales College,
ated.
German.
(a) Grammar.— Accidence and Syntax; (Ὁ) Translation at
sight from German into English; (6) Translation at sight into
German of an easy passage of English prose; (d) Translation
and grammatical study of the following texts :—
1903. Sudermann, Der Katzensteg (Heath & Co.) ; Schiller,
Wilhelm Tell (Macmillan & Co.), or Leander, Traiumereien
(Copp, Clark Co.) ; Gerstaecker, Germelshausen (Heath & Co.)
1904. Schiller, Maria Stuart (Heath & Co.) ; Freytag, Die
Journalisten (Heath & Co.); Keller, Kleider machen Leute
(Heath & Co.).
Provided two months’ notice be given, candidates may sub-
stitute in any year an equivalent amount from the works pre-
51
scribed for the Senior Leaving Examination of the Province
of Ontario, Grade XII of the Province of Nova Scotia, or the
Senior Leaving Examination of the Prince of Wales College,
Paks
Mathematics, Part II.
Geometry—kEuclid’s Elements, Books IV and VI, with
definitions of Book V, and easy deductions.
Algebra.—The three Progressions, Ratio, Proportion, Varia-
tion, Permutations and Combinations, Binomial Theorem,
Logarithms, Interest and Annuities, as in Hall & Knight’s
Elementary Algebra, omitting Chapters 36, 40, 41, 42, or in
similar text-books.
Trigonometry.—Measurement of Angles, Trigonometrical
ratios or functions of one angle, of two angles and of a multiple
angle, as in Hamblin Smith, pp. 1-105, or as in Lock’s Ele-
mentary Trigonometry, Chapters I-XI{, or in similar text-
* books.
Cc. EXHIBITIONS.
Examination in Special Courses.
In awarding the © (Advanced) Exhibitions, the marks for
Ordinary Matriculation will not be taken into account. A pass
in the subjects chosen will, however, count towards matricu-
lation, and in order to complete his matriculation, a candidate
will take the ordinary papers in the remaining subjects required.
Candidates who have previously taken the matriculation
examination in this University, or who matriculate on certifi-
cates, will not be required to take the ordinary papers.
A candidate, not successful, may nevertheless receive a B or
an A Exhibition if he has fulfilled the conditions for them
given above. The special papers set for C will, in this case,
be regarded as papers both for B and A.
The subjects for examination are as follows :—
English (including History).
Mathematics.
Latin.
Greek.
French.
German.
52
In the examination a candidate will be permitted to offer any
of the above subjects or all of them, and will not be disquali-
fied from gaining an Exhibition by failure in, or omission of,
any subject or subjects.
Twenty-five per cent. of the possible maximum in each sub-
ject offered will be deducted from the marks obtained by each
candidate, and the remainder will be the marks assigned this
work.
In the awarding of Exhibitions, marked excellence in any
subject will be taken into special account.
Following are the details of the requirements in the above
subjects :-—
English and History.
1903 and 1904. Zanguage.—Toller, Outlines of the History
of the English Language (Macmillan & Co.).
Literatwre-—Coleridge, Ancient Mariner, ed. Bates (Long-
mans) ; Wordsworth, Selections, ed. Webb (Macmillan & Co.) ;
Tennyson, Selections ed. Rowe and Webb (Macmillan & Co. ;
Shakspere, Merchant of Venice, ed. Deighton (Macmillan &
Co.) ; As You Like Ut, ed. Deighton (Macmillan & Co.) ; Julius
Cesar, ed. Deighton (Macmillan & Co.).
History.—Green’s Short History of the English People.
Composition—An essay on some subject connected with the
works specified.
Mathematics. ἡ
Geometry.—Euclid’s Elements, Books I, H, 111, IV, VI,
with definitions of Book V and deductions.
A special paper will be set in deductions from the first three
books. Candidates are recommended to study the Theorems
and Examples in these books in Hall & Stevens’ Edition.
Algebra—Elementary Rules, Involution, Evolution, Frac-
tions, Indices, Surds, Simple and Quadratic Equations of one
or more unknown quantities, the three Progressions, Ratio,
Proportion, Variation, Permutations and Combinations, Bino-
mial Theorem, Logarithms, Interest and Annuities, as in Hall
& Knight’s Elementary Algebra, omitting Chapters 36, 40,
41 and 42.
Trigonometry.—Measurement of Angles, Trigonometrical
ratios or functions of one angle, two angles, and of a multiple
angle, as in Hamblin Smith, pp. 1-105, or as in Lock’s Ele-
mentary~ Trigonometry, chapters TsX¥E, or: in similar text-
books.
In addition, the Solution of Triangles will be required.
Latin.
Higher Grammar, Higher Prose Composition, and Trans-
lation at Sight. Passages for translation from the following
books :-—
1903, 1904 and 1905.—Virgil, Aeneid I-VI; Caesar, De Bello
Gallico; Cicero, Catiline Orations.
Greek.
Higher Grammar, Higher Prose Composition, and Trans-
lation at Sight. Passages for translation from the following
books :—
1903, 1904 and 1905.—Homer, Odyssey VI-XII; Xenophon,
Anabasis; Euripides, Hecuba and Alcestis.
French.
Higher Grammar, Higher Prose Composition, and Trans-
ation αὖ Sight. Passages for translation from the texts
prescribed ioe the B Exhibitions, and from the following, in
addition :—
1903 and 1904. Thierry, Récits des Temps Merovingiens
(Pitt Press) ; Mme. de 5186], Le Directoire (Pitt Press).
German.
Higher Grammar, Higher Prose Composition, and Trans-
lation at Sight. Passages for translation from the texts
prescribed for the A and B Exhibitions, and from the follow-
ing in addition :—
1903 and 1904, Lessing, Minna von Barnholm.
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS.
The examinations for Second Year Exhibitions and Third
Year Scholarships will be held as usual in September. For
time table, see Ὁ. 133.. The following are offered for competi-
tion in 1903:—
Two of $125, open to both colleges.
One of 75, =
One of 100, “ to R. V. C. only.
πον avo.- |“ to Ro VV. C. only.
Seoond
Year
Exhibi-
tions.
54
The subjects of examination and details of the requirements
in each are as follows :—
Greek.
Lucian, Charon and Somnium (Heitland, Pitt Press); De-
mosthenes, Olynthiacs I and 11; Euripides, Medea.
Latin.
Cicero, Selections, Parts I. and 11. (Brackenbury, Riving-
tons); Cicero, De Senectute (Howson, Longmans); Horace,
Odes, Bk. TV.
Greek and Latin Prose Composition, and Translation at
sight.
A paper on Grammar and History.
Teat-books.—Oman’s History of Greece, chaps. I-XXV (to
the outbreak of the Peloponnesian War); and How and Leigh’s
History of Rome, chaps. XVII-XLIV (from the first Punic
War to the death of Sulla); Abbott’s Arnold’s Greek Prose
Composition, or Sidgwick’s First Greek Writer; Ramsay’s Latin
Prose, Vol. 1 or similar manual.
Mathematics.
Euclid (six books); Casey’s sequel to Euclid; Algebra (Hall
and Knight’s Advanced); Theory of Equations (in part); Trig-
onometry (as in ordinary course of First Year).
English and Modern History.
Language.—Trench, Study of Words. Literature.—Spenser,
Faerie Queene, Bk. 1, ed. Percival (Macmillan); Tennyson,
Selections from Tennyson, ed. Rowe and Webb (Macmillan).
History.—Church, The Beginning of the Middle Ages (Epochs
of Modern History, Longmans). Composition.—The candidate
will be required to write an essay on some subject connected
with the literature or history prescribed.
French.
(2) Grammar: (Ὁ) Translation at sight of an English pass-
age into French: (c) French composition on a prescribed sub-
ject: (d) a critical study of the following texts, tested by
questions in the French language, to be answered in French :—
Balzac, Eugénie Grandet; Michelet, Pages choisies (chez A.
Colin, Paris); Daudet, Jack.
Or, instead of French :--ττ--
German.
(a) Grammar; (Ὁ) Translation at sight from German into
English, and from English into German; (c) a critical study of
Die Braut von Messina, and of the lives of Schiller and Goethe;
(d) Translation from the following texts:—
Schiller, Die Braut von Messina, der Neffe als Onkel; Hauff,
Der Zwerg Nase (Heath & Co.); Riehl, Der Fluch der Schoén-
heit (Heath & Co.); Benedix, Die Hochzeitsreise (Heath & Co.);
Schiller, Der Neffe als Onkel; Baumbach, Die Nonna (Heath
& Co.). :
No Candidate who has been placed in the Third Class in
more than one subject can be awarded a Second Year Exhi-
bition.
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS.
The following Scholarships will be open for competition in
September, 1903. (For time table, see p. 133) :—
One of $125 for Mathematics and Logic, open to both col-
leges.
One of $125 for Mathematics and Logic, open to R. V. C.
only.
One of $125 for Natural Science (Biology) and Logic, open
to both colleges.
Three in Classics and Modern Languages, viz., one of $100
and two of $90; open to both colleges.
One of $125 in Economics and Political Science, open to
both colleges.
The details of the requirements in each subject are as fol-
lows :—
Mathematics.
Differential Calculus (Williamson, Chaps. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 9;
Chap. 12, Arts. 168-183 inclusive; Chap. 17, Arts. 225-242 in-
clusive). Integral Calculus (Williamson, Chaps. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5;
Chap. 7, Arts. 126-140 inclusive; Chap. 8, Arts. 150-156 in-
elusive; Chap. 9, Arts. 168-176 inclusive. Analytic Geometry
(Salmon), Conic Sections, subjects of chaps. 1-13 (omitting
Chap. 8), with part of Chap. 14. Lock, Higher Trigonome-
try. MclLelland and Preston, Spherical Trigonometry, Part
Third Year
Scholar-
ships.
Mathema-
tics and
Logic, and
Science
and Logic.
I. Salmon, Modern Higher Algebra (first four chapters).
Todhunter or Burnside and Panton, Theory of Equations (se-
lected course).
Logic.
As in Jevons’ Elementary Lessons in Logie.
Biology.
Goebel’s Organography, Vol. I.; Bower, F. 0., The Origin
of the Sporophyte in Ferns, (Trans. Royal Soe.); Huxley,
Elementary Lessons in Physiology; Verworn, General Physi-
ology.
Greek.
Classics Plato, Purves, Selections, pp. 1-21, 55-112 (Clarendon |
aa Press); Thucydides, Book VI (Marchant, Macmillan); Soph- .
Languages Ocles, Antigone (Jebb, Pitt Press).
Prose Composition and Translation at Sight.
Latin.
Horace, Epistles, Book I (Wilkins, Macmillan); Cicero,
Selections from Letters (Tyrrell, Macmillan), pp. 1-83; Virgil,
Aeneid, Book IX (Sidgwick, Pitt Press); Sallust, Catiline
(Cook, Macmillan).
Prose Composition and Translation at Sight.
Ancient History.
Teat-books—Bury, History of Greece, The Peloponnesian
War (Macmillan); How and Leigh, History of Rome to the
Death of Caesar (Longmans).
English and History.
Interature.—Shakspere, Tempest, ed. Deighton (Macmillan) ;
Milton, Paradise Lost, Books I and II, ed. Macmillan (Mac-
millan); Lamb, Essays of Elia, ed. Hallward and Hill (Mac-
millan. story.—Myers, Mediaeval and Modern History
(Ginn), Part I; For 1904.—Robinson, Introduction to the
History of Western Europe (Ginn & Co.), Part I. Composi-
tion.—The candidate will be required to write an essay on
some subject connected with the literature or history pre-
seribed. High marks will be given for this subject.
ae, Wee ge See.
Tiga ig ?
7.
s
ge :
Bike
French.
Candidates will be questioned on the subject matter of the
following texts, the lives of their authors, and the literary
schools which they represent. The entire examination will be
held in the French language.
For 1903-4.—Moliére, Tartuffe; Racine, Iphigénie; De Vigny,
Servitude et. Grandeur militaires; De Musset, Les Nuits,
Pierre et Camille.
Or, instead of French :—
- German.
(a) Grammar; (0) Translation at sight from English into
German; (6) Critical study of the lives of Goethe and Schiller
and of those of their works which are mentioned below;
(d) Translations from the following texts :—
For 1903, Schiller, Don Carlos; Goethe, Dichtung and
Wahrheit (Heath & Co.) ; Immermann, Der Oberhof (Wagner,
Pitt Press) ; Meyer, Gustav Adolf’s Page (Heath & Co.).
Economics and Political Science.
The subjects of examination are as follows :—
Elements of Political Science.-—Seeley, Introduction to Pol- Economies
itical Science; Woodrow Wilson, The State, Chaps. I, V, XII
to XVI, inclusive.
The Constitution and Government of England.—Macy, The
English Constitution, Part [; Burgess, Political Science and
Constitutional Law, Vol. II, pp. 59-76, 185-215, and 338-346
(Edition of 1898).
Elements of Economic Theory, viz,: The Scope and Method
of Political Economy; the Organization of Production; the
Theory of Value; Distribution—rent, wages, interest, profits ;
Exchange, including international trade; the Theory of Money;
Principles of Taxation. I. A. Walker, Political Economy,
Advanced Course.
History of Economic Theory.—l. L. Price, Political Econ-
omy in England.
[Two papers in Economie Theory; one in each of the other
subjects. The subject-matter of the papers to be limited to
what is treated in the books (or parts thereof) named. |
and
Political
Sclence.
First
Year.
Advanced
Sections.
58
IV. REGULATIONS FOR DEGREES IN ARTS.
Regulations for the Degree of B.A.
After passing the First Year Matriculation Examination,
an Undergraduate, in order to obtain the Degree of B.A. or
B.Sc., is required to attend regularly the appointed courses of
lectures for four years, and to pass the required Examinations
in each year. He cannot take more than the number of sub-
jects specified for each year without the special permission of
the Faculty, nor can he proceed with his course unless he passes
each examination in its assigned order. Failure in the First
or Second Year in two or more subjects, and in the Third Year
in more than one, will entail the passing at the beginning of
the following session, of a Supplemental Examination, which
shall include all the subjects of the previous Sessional Examin-
ation. Failure in one subject at this Supplemental shall neces-
sarily cause the loss of the session. Undergraduates are ar-
ranged in Years, from First to Fourth, according to their
academic standing.
1. Ordinary Course for the Degree of B.A.
N.B.—The Arabic numerals refer to the numbering of the
courses on pp. 76, et seqg; for example, Greck, 2, refers to the
second course given under the head of Classical Literature and
History, p. 77.
First Year.
Greek, 1, or Latin, 1.
English, 1A, 1B, and History, 1.
Mathematics, 1.
Latin, 1, 07 Greek, 1, ov French, !, 2, or German, 2,
Physics, 2.
French cannot be taken as a qualifying option in the First
Year, except by students who have passed the Matriculation
Examination in this subject.
An additional Language may be taken as an extra subject
in the first two years, if application be made to, and permission
obtained from the Faculty at the beginning of the Session.
Credit will be given for it on application.
With a view to the encouragement of higher work, Advanced
Sections will be formed in all subjects as far as practicable,
and in these Honours may be awarded. Permission to take an
advanced section is granted by the professor.
Students taking the work of advanced sections may be excused
from the work of the corresponding ordinary sections on the
|
|
|
,
AM mn ᾿ ΠῚ =
ων =
Macdonald Physics Building.—Departmental Library.
Macdonald Physics Building.—An Electrical Laboratory.
ὅ9
recommendation of the professor. No exemptions from other
subjects will be granted to students in advanced sections.
Second Year. Second
& English; 2. eee
(b) Latin, 2, or Greek, 2-
(Ὁ Greek, 2, or Latin, 2,07 a Modern Language.
Any Three, of | (ὦ Mathematics, 3A, including Dynamics, 3B,
Seren (dite) or Elementary Biology, 1-
ae » ‘C's >) (6) Chemistry, 1, Laboratory work‘in addition.
or (g) must be | (ἡ Logic and Psychology, 1A, 1B.
one. | (g) Hebrew, I.
~(h) German or French.
Students intending to take the double course in Arts (B.A.)
and Applied Science must take Mathematics and Chemistry;
those intending to take the double course in Arts (B.A.) and
Medicine must take Chemistry and Biology.
Advanced Sections will be formed in the Second Year, as in p~gvanced
the First. Sections.
Third and Fourth Years.
The subjects of the Third and Fourth Years are arranged in Third and
the following divisions :— ΓΟΌΣΕΣ
ears.
LANGUAGE AND History, PHILOSOPHY SCIENCE.
LITERATURE. AND Law.
English, 3A, 3C, History, 2. Mathematics" 4.
4A,4B,anytwo; LogicandMetaphy- Mechanics, 6, and
or for any two, sics, 3A, 3B. Optics, and Astro-
3c. Moral Philosophy, Boreas See
Latin, 3, 4. 5A, 5B. of courses). -
εξ ats 5 ysics:
reeks: 4. Political Science,6 Sounditight.Heat
Sanskrit, 1A, IB. *Economics, I. (full course), 7A,
Frenoh, 5, 6 Roman Law, |. 7B, 7C.
German, 4, 5. Constitutional Law Μ ‘ ful
Italian in alternate and History. dada at ae
Aa ge Art (History of) and Chemistry, PAI fo of be
Semitic Languages, Archzeology (two 5 Gym ΤΣ Εἰ-
Pas EN half courses Zoology, 2.
Comparative Philo- in successive ππβρρίβην. 2.3
logy (halfcourse), years. Gaslaay Ϊ i
ΙΑ, IB. History of Philoso- : In the Fa-
phy, 4A, 48. Physiology | ἃ
culty οἵ
Anatomy
Medicine.
Electricity and
From the above divisions six courses are to be selected by each
student in the Third and Fourth Years, three in each year.
*Political Science and Economics may be considcred as continuations, one of the other.
oY ORT ok te US κυ ΨΥ, ὙΠ ΤῊΝ δὰ
ἷ i \ ν eis
60
ν
Hach will be studied in lecture courses extending over not more
than four hours per week, with collateral reading, and, in the
case of the science subjects, laboratory work. One subject
chosen in the Third Year must be continued by every student
in his Fourth Year (Political Science, 6, will be accepted as a
continuation of Economics, 1, and vice versa); two subjects may
be continued if application to that effect be granted by the
Faculty or the Advisory Committee of the Faculty. Of the
whole six courses, one must be chosen by all candidates from the
list of subjects included under the head of Science, except
in cases where Chemistry or Biology has been selected as an
option in the Second Year.
Every undergraduate in the Third and Fourth Years is
required to submit to the Faculty, for their approval, at the
beginning of the session, a written statement of the subjects
he proposes to study during the session. He will not be allowed
to discontinue any of these, if approved, or begin any other,
without the special permission of the Faculty.
The Advisory Committee will meet not later than Oct. 1st
in each session, and repcrt on the selections of subjects to the
Faculty. It may also report on the subjects chosen by the First
and Second Years.
In order to differentiate the B.A. curriculum from that laid
down for the B.Sc. (Arts), candidates for B.A. are debarred
from selecting more than three out of their six courses from
the Science Division Free options are allowed in all other
cases (except as far as regards the selecting of at least one
subject from the Science Division), subject to approval by the
Faculty, or the Advisory Committee of the Faculty.
In addition to the six courses, a course of one hour a week
in English Composition (3D, 40) must be taken by every can-
didate for the Ordinary B.A. in the Third and Fourth Years,
and also by Honour students in English.
For details of each subject, see Courses of Lectures, pp. 76,
et seqq.
(Political Science, 6, will be accepted as a continuation of
Economics, 1, and vice versa).
A candidate who seeks to obtain an Ordinary B.A. Degree
of the First Class must fulfil the following conditions: he must
not only obtain the required aggregate of marks (viz., three-
fourths of the maximum), but he must also obtain First Class
61
standing in three of his subjects, and not less than Second
4g Class in the remainder.
For arrangements enabling Students in Medicine or Apphed Profes-
4 ~ Science to take the course in Arts also, and obtain B.A., and Pippin
___—-BSe. (Applied Science), or M.D., in six years, see pp. 68—70;
δ᾿ and for the course leading to the degrees of B.Sc. (Arts) and
M.D. in six years, see pp. 70 and 71.
Υ 2. Honour Courses for the Degree of B.A.
Honours of First, Second, or Third Rank will be awarded Honour
to successful candidates in any Honour Course established by Courses.
the Faculty, provided they have passed creditably the ordinary
Examinations in all the subjects proper to their year.
No undergraduate is permitted to attend the Honour lec-
tures unless (a) he has been placed in the First Class in the
4 subject at the preceding Sessional Examinaticn, if there he
ho one; (Ὁ) has satisfied the Professor that he is otherwise quali-
a fied; and (6) while attending lectures makes progress satisfac-
: Ἔ 5 5
᾿ tory to the Professor. In case his progress is not satisfactory
he may be notified by the Faculty to discontinue attendance.
; Candidates for Honours must take the Ordinary Course in
: the subject in which they are reading for Honours. But where
5 the Honours Course corresponds to two ordinary subjects, can-
ὃ didates may, at the discretion of the department, be exempted
4 from. attendance on lectures in these ordinary subjects for a
: number of hours not exceeding four weekly.
Honour lectures are open to all Partial Students who can
satisfy the Professor of their fitness to proceed with the work
of the course. Such students will not be ranked with under-
graduates in the Examination lists.
No student is allowed to attend two Honour Courses without
the special permission of the Faculty.
A student proposing to read for an Honour Course in the Toe ance
Third Year must Hondas
(1) Satisfy the Department of his qualifications to proceed
with the subject or subjects in question ;
(2) Fulfil the following qualifying conditions :—
Ὁ (a) Where the Honour Course is represented by one sub-
i ject in the Second Year, he must have obtained at
a least a Second Class in that subject and in one other.
62
Should he have failed in any subject, he must com-
pensate for this by having obtained a First in the
Honour subject.
(b) Where the Honour Course is represented by two sub-
jects in the Second Year, he must have obtained at
least (a) a Second Class in both subjects, or (b) a
First Class in one subject and a Third in the other.
A failure in some other subject may be compensated
for by obtaining at least a First Class in one subject
and a Second in the other.
(c) Where the Honour Course is not represented by any
subject in the Second Year, he must have obtained at
least Second Class in three subjects. A First and a
Third may be considered equivalent to two Seconds.
A failure may be compensated for by obtaining at
least four Seconds or their equivalent.
(3) While attending lectures he must make progress satisfac-
tory to the Department.
A student who desires to be a candidate for B.A. Honours
must have taken at least Second Rank Honours in the Third
Year. In this case he shall be required to take only one sub-
ject in his Ordinary Course, viz., that in which he is reading
for Honours.
Note-—For subjects of Ordinary Courses, see p. 76, ef seqq.
The following are the departments in which Honour Courses
are at present offered. Students who desire to graduate with
Honours in any of them are strongly recommended to take the
Advanced Sections of the Department in the First and Second
Years, where such are provided.
(N.B.—The numbers which stand after the Academic years
refer to the corresponding numbers of the Courses given on
the pages indicated.
I. Classical Literature and History.
Third Year Honours—Greek, 5, 6, (p. 79).
Latin, 5, 6, (p. 82).
Fourth Year Honours—Greek, 5, 7, (p..79).
Latin (bs ver(Osnor)-
}
;
4
Ἵ
j
:
;
ταὶς του em ee ΟΡ, τ F ee
63
2. English Language and Literature
Third Year Honours—4, 6, es ἫΝ
. Fourth Year Honours—7, 8, 9, (p. 89); or 10, 11, 12, 18,
(p. 90).
3 (a) History.
Fourth Year Honours—4, 6, 9, (p. 98).
3 (b) History and Economics.
(A). Third Year Honours—History, 2, 4, 9, (Ὁ. 98).
Heononiits AGS Political Science,
1, 6, (pp. 100 and 102).
Fourth Year Honours—History, 4, 6, 9, (p. 98).
Economics and Political Science,
2.3, and τὸν 8. (0. 100).
ics and Political Science,
1, 4, 5, 6, (pp. 100-102).
History, 2, (Ὁ: 98).
Fourth Year Honours.—Economics and Political Science,
25°33 45.5, % 8, (pp. 100-102).
History, 4, 9, (p- 98).
(B). Third Year
4. Modern Languages.
Third Year Honours—French, 7 or 8; 9, (p. 93).
German, 6 or 7; 8, (p. 96).
Fourth Year Honours—French, 7 or 8; 9, (p. 99).
German, 6 or 7; 8, (p. 96).
5. Semitic Languages.
Third Year Honours—4a and 4, (p. 97).
Fourth Year Honours—5a and ὅν, (p. 97).
6. Mental and Moral Philosophy.
Third Year Honours—6, 7, 8, 9, (p. 106).
Fourth Year Honours—10, 11, 12, (p. 107).
7. Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Third Year Honours—?, 11, 12, 15, (p. 111).
Fourth Year Honours—8, 13, 14, 16, (p. 111).
πῇ μος eect argo eee
ἢ ἶ ᾿ ἢ Ἂν Δ, a
‘ * , Ἦν
64
8. Geology and Mineralogy.
Third Year Honours—Mineralogy, 1, 3, (p. 115).
Fourth Year Honours—Mineralogy, 2, (p. 116).
Fourth Year Honours—Geology, 2, 3A, 3B, 4, 5, 6, 7 (p. 122).
9. Chemistry.
Third Year Honours—2, 3, 4, (p. 114).
Fourth Year Honours—5, 6, 7, 8; or 7, 8, 9, (p. 114).
10. Biology.
Third Year Honours— Botany, 5, (p. 119).
Zoology, 4, (p. 121).
Fourth Year Honours— Botany, 6, (p. 119).
Zoology, 5, (p. 121).
Students proceeding to Honours Biology in the Third and
Fourth Years will take Chemisiry and Biology in the Second
Year, one half course of Organic Chemistry in the Third Year,
and one half course of Geology in the Fourth Year.
3. Ordinary Course for the Degree of B.Sc. (Arts.)
The B.Sc. course in Arts has been specially arranged to give
the student a thorough training in Science, combined with a
good knowledge of English, French, and German. A wide
range of sciences may be studied, and the course differs from
those offered in the Faculty of Applied Science in the substitu-
tion of modern languages for the more purely technical work
of that Faculty.
A high standard of attainment will in all cases be exacted,
and it is expected that in the Final Year the course will include
instruction in the methods of modern research.
First Year.
English, 1A, 1B, and History, 1
French, 1, 2.
German, 2.
Mathematics, 1.
Physics, 2.
Scere.
65
Second Year.
English, 2.
French, 3, 4.
German, 3.
Chemistry, i—Laboratory work in addition.
Mathematics, 3A, 3B, 07 Elementary Biology, 1.
(a) Upon entering ihe Second Year, the student must de-
cide upon the general character cf the course which he will
follow in the Third and Fourth Years. If his course in these
Years is to consist chiefly of Mathematics and Physics, he must
choose Mathematics; if it is to be chiefly Biological or Geo-
logical, he must. take Biology; while if he mtends to select
Chemistry, he must take Mathematics if he intends to devote
special attention to Physical Chemistry, but Biology if he
intends to make special study of other bramches of this
sci-nce.
(Ὁ) A: candidate for the degree of B.Se. must obtain at least
Second Class standing both in French: and German at th> In-
termed'ate Examination, and, upon entering the Third Year,
must, in order to proceed with his course, be able te read with
ease scientific papers in both of these languages.
(ὁ) The student shall in the Third Year take ἃ full course
in cach of the three following sciences, viz.:—Mathematics,
Physies, Chemistry, Zoology, Botany, Geology. He shall take,
in addition, a portion of the B. A. Honour Course in one of
them, as weli as a course in English Composition.
(4) In the Fourth Year the student shall devote his time
chiefly to advanced work in one of the three sciences which
he has already studied in the Third Year. The course which
he is to follow will be drawn up by the Profe-sors of the
science which he selects and must be approved by the B. Se.
Advisory Committee.
V. EXAMINATIONS.
(A) College Examinations.
1. There are two examimations in each year, viz., at Christ-
mas and at the end of the Session. Successful students are
arranged in three classes at the Sessional examimations.
Christmas Examinations will be held in all the subjects of
the First and Second Years, and are obligatory om all under-
graduates, and also on all Partial Students intending to gain
-
9)
00
undergraduate standing. Twenty-five per cent. of the marks
given for the sessional work in each subject will be assigned
for the results of the Christmas Examinations. Students
prevented by illness from attending the examinations, will, on
presenting a Medical Certificate, be allowed full marks at the
April examinations. Candidates who fail in courses of the
First and Second Years, terminating at Christmas, will be’
required to pass, at the Sessional Examinations, on an extra
paper in the subject in which they have failed.
Christmas Examinations in the Third or Fourth Years
may be held at the option of the Professors. When held, the
sane value will be assigned to them as in the case of the First
and Second Years.
In the Fourth Year only, there is no Sessional Examina-
tion; the University Examination for B.A. or B.Sc. takes its
p ace.
2. An undergraduate who fails in one subject at the Ses-
sional Examina!i ions of the First or of the Second Year, will
not be allowed to proceed with his Year unless he passes a
Supplemental Examination therein at the beginning of the
Session, or takes the Summer Course, if there be one, in the
subject, and passes the corresponding examination.
3. Failure*in two or more subjects at the Sessional Exam-
inations of the First or of the Second Year, or in one subject
at the Third Year Se:sional Examinations, involves the loss
of the Session. The Faculty may permit the student to re-
cover his standing by passing a Supplemental Examination at
the beginning of the following Session. If he fail in any sub-
ject at this examination he will be required to repeat the year.
A Summer Course, on same conditions as above, may be ac-
cepted instead of a Supplemental Examination.
4. Examinations Supplemental to the Sessional Examina-
tions will be held in September, simultaneously with the Ma-
tr'culation Examinations.
A list of those to whom the Faculty may grant Supple-
mental Examinations in the following September will be pub-
lished after the Sessional Examination. The time for the.
Supplemental Examination will be fixed by the Faculty; the
examination will not be-granted at any other time, except by
special permission of the Faculty, and oa paymen® of a fee
of $5.
67
(B) University Examinations.
For the Degree of B.A.
Afier passng the Matriculation Examination at entrance,
candidates for the Degree of Bachelor of Arts must pass each
of the four Sessional Examinations, including the Intermedi-
ate Examination at the end of the Second Year. Under the
provisions of the new curriculum, the Third and Fourth Year
Sessional Examinations constitute the Final.
1. Matriculation Examination.
1. The subjects are stated on p. 12.
2. Intermediate Examination.
2. The subjects are as follows:—
(a) English.
(b) Greek or Latin.
(c) Latin or Greek or a Modern lercvece.
(d) Mathematics, including Dynamics, or Ele- Any three
mentary Biology. ot which. 1)
(e) Chemistry. Cah Ἐ ΡΟΣ (@):
(Ὁ), Logic and Psychology. Se Ne one:
g) Hebrew.
(h) German or French.
Students intending to take the double course in Arts (B.A.)
and Applied Science must take Mathematics and Chemistry ;
those intending to take the double course in Arts (B.A.) and
Medicine must take Biology and Chemistry.
English.-The course for the second year. See p. 86
Greek.—The course for the Second Year. See Ὁ. 77.
A paper will be set early in October on the Summer Readings,
Lucian, Charon and Somnium (Heitland, Pitt Press).
rn
ICG ΠΣ ΜΝ -
Latin.—lhe course for the Second Year. See p. 81. _
A paper will be set early in October on the Summer Readings,
Cicero, Selections, Parts I and II, (Brackenbury,
Rivingtons). See p. 81.
68
Mathematies.—1he course for the Second Year. See p. 110.
Dynamics.—lhe course for the Second Year. See p. 110.
Blemeritary BiclogyLlhe course for the Seeond Year.
See p. 116.
Chemistry.-The course for the Second Year. See ἢ. 118.
Logic and Psycholegy._Lhe course for the Second Year.
See pp. 104 and 105.
Hebrew.—Lhe course for the Second Year. See Ὁ. 97.
German.—The course for the Second Year. Seep. 95.
French.—Lhe course for the Second Year. See p. 92.
2. Final Examination.
The qualifying subjects for the B.A. Degree will, under the
New Curriculum, consist of the six subjects taken up in course
in the Third and Fourth Years (pp. 59-61).
VI. REGULATIONS FOR COURSES IN ARTS LEAD-
ING INTO THE PROFESSIONSL FACULTIES.
Arts and Applied Science.
1. Any student intending to claim the privileges offered
below, is required, at the beginning of the session, to present
to the Dean of the Faculty of Arts a ceriiiicate of registration
in the Professional Faculty, and to produce at the end certifi-
cates of attendance and examinaticn in the professional chis-v>
specified.
2. Undergraduates beginning the Third Year in Aris who
have taken all the Ordinary Mathematics of the first iwo years,
and the Chemistry of the Second Year, and who wish to pursue
their professional studies in the Faculty of Applied Science
so as to obtain the Degree of B.A. and B.Se. (App. Sc.) within
the following four years, will be exempted by the Faculty of
Applied Science from the Mathematics of the First Year in
Applied Science and from Chemistry of the Second Year.
3. They must, unless by special permission of the Faculty,
distribute the course of the Third and Fourth Years in Arts
a 69
over three years, in accordance with the following schedule
of studies :—
I. In the Third Year :—
(a) Physics of Third Year.
(b) Two of the courses which are not placed under the
heading “‘Science” in the Arts curriculum. The
time tables of the two Faculties allow two of the
following subjects to be chosen:—English, History,
Εν". Political Science.
(c) Either one or two hours weekly in English Compo-
sition.*
ΤΙ. In the Fourth Y ear :—
(a) Physics of Fourth Year.
(b) One hour weekly in English Composition, if only one
has been taken in the Third Year.
(c) The Mathematics of the Second Year Applied Sci-
ence (6 hours weekly as 14 courses).
: III. In the Fifth Year :---
The Mathematics of the Third Year Applied Science
(2 hours weekly as a half course). or another course
.in the Arts curriculum. Ἵ
4. Students who, having obtained permission of the Faculty,
desire to complete the course for the B.A. Degree in four
years, are required to take a full course in one subject in the
a Arts curriculum in addition to the courses prescribed in 3, I,
, above.
Arts (B.A. Course) and Medicine.
: 1. Undergraduates beginning the Third Year, who have
᾿ taken the Chemistry and Biology of the Second Year, and who
a wish to pursue their professional studies in the Faculty of
Ἢ Medicine so as to obtain the Degrees of B.A. and M.D. within
bk the following four years, will be exempted by the Faculty of
ἢ Medicine from the subjects of Chemistry and Physics, and
7 Biology in the First Year of the Faculty of Medicine. In
a. the Second Year (Arts) they are permitted to take the con-
δ tinuation course in Animal Biology, on the same conditions as
ΩΣ students taking the six years’ course leading to the degrees
Me of B. Se. and M.D. ν
zi *Nore.—Students are recommended to distribute their English work over two years.
τ
2. They may complete the Arts curriculum by taking the
following courses :—-
I. In the Third Year :—
(a) Anatomy and Practical Anatomy, Histology and Phy-
siology, of First Year Medicine.
(b) ‘Two of the courses which are not placed under the
heading “Science” in the Arts curriculum. The
time tables of the two Faculties allow the following
to be chosen :—
(1) French or Moral Philosophy or Economics.
(2) Political Science.
(c) Either one or two hours weekly in English Compo-
sition.*
Ul. Jn the Fourth Year :—
(a) Anatomy and Practical Anatomy, Histology, Physio-
logy, Chemistry, of Second Year Medicine.
ib) One hour weekly in English Composition, if only one
has been taken in the Third Year.*
3. The Faculty strongly recommends intending students of
Medicine who do not take the combined six years’ course 10
spend a preliminary year in the study of the non-professional
subjects, 1.6., Biology, Chemistry, and Physics, before enterirg
on the curriculum in the Faculty of Medicine.
Arts (B.Sc. Course) and Medicine.
1. Students who wish to take a combined course in the
Faculties of Arts and Medicine with a view to obtaining the
Degrees of B.Sc. (Arts) and M.D. within six years, must take
Latin under head 6 of the Matriculation requirements for the
B.Sc. course, see p. 12.
2. They must take the Ordinary B.Sc. course with the fol-
lowing modifications :—
Second Year Students shall take Elementary Biology. This
course shall consist of either (1) the course in Elementary
Biology required of First Year Students in Medicine (1.e., 8
weeks Zoology together with 4 weeks Botany), together with a
further course after Christmas (during the spring term of the
Faculty of Arts) in Animal Biology; or (2) the full ordinary
* Norr.—Students are recommended to distribute their English work over two years.
Cal
course in Elementary Biology of the Faculty of Arts, consist-
ing of 12 weeks Zoology (up to Christmas) followed by 12
weeks Botany.
Third Year Students taking the Double Course shall be re-
quired to offer one of the following :—
I. Zoology—(a) The full Ordinary Continuation Course of
the Faculty of Arts, and in addition (b) half the Honours
Course, the latter to be taken during the first half of the
session.
11. Physics —(a) The Full Ordinary Course of the Faculty
of Arts, under which head students may take either the course
in Sound, Light and Heat (Physics, 7) or that on Electricity
and Magnetism (Physics, 8), or a combined course consisting
of portions of these, and in addition (b) advanced work con-
stituting half an Honours Course, the latter to be taken during
the first half of the session.
III. Chemistry—(a) A half-course in Physical Chemistry,
during the first half of the session (from Chemistry, 7, 8) ;
(b) a half-course in Organic Chemistry, during the second half
of the session (Chemistry, 3, 6); (6) advanced work constitut-
ino half an Honours Course, the last to be taken during the
first half of the session.
IV. Botany—(a) The full Ordinary Primary Cours» of
the Faculty of Arts (Botany, 2); (Ὁ) either half the Honours
Course prescrised for Fourth Year Students in the Faculty
of Arts (Botany, 6); or half an Honours Course in Chemis-
try, Physics cr Zoology. The work under (6) is in any case
to be taken during the first half of the session.
Fourth Year.—Wednesday afternoon and Saturday morn-
ing of each week shall be devoted either (1) to Laboratory
Work in connection with still more advanced study in the
subjects selected during the Third Year; or (2) to work in
another branch of Science, provided the student is sufficiently
well grounded to enable him to do the special work which
may be assigned to him.
Arts and Law.
Students intending to go forward to the Faculty οὐ Law
are recommended to include in their Third and Fourth Years
Aris, such subjects as Constitutional Law and History, Econ-
omics, Political Science, and Roman Law.
Literate in Arts.
A certificate of “Literate in Arts” will be given along with
the professional degree in Medicine or Applied Seience, to
those who have completed two years’ study in the Faculty of
Arts, and have passed the prescribed examinations.
Students of the University Attending Affiliated Theological
Colleges.
1. These students are subject to the regulations of the Fac-
ulty of Arts in the same manner as other students.
2. The Faculty will make formal reports to the governing
body of the Theological College which such students may
attend as to:—(a) their conduct and attendance on the classes
of the Faculty; and (b) their standing in the several examina-
tions; such reports to be furnished alter the Examinations, if
called for.
3. Students of affiliated Theological Colleges who are pur-
suing a double course in Arts and Divinity (six years at least)
will take in the Third and Fourth Years the courses which
constitute the ordinary curriculum in Arts, less a half course
in each of these Years, or a whole course in either.
Vil. MEDALS, PRIZES, CLASSING, AND CERTIFI-
CATES.
1, Gold Medals will be awarded in the B.A. Honour Exam-
inations to students who take the highest honours of the First
Rank in the subjects stated below, and who shall have passed
ereditably the Ordinary Examinations for the Degree of B.A.,
provided they have been recommended therefor to the Corpor-
ation by the Faculty on the report of the Examiners :—
The Henry Chapman Gold Meda for Ctassical Languages
and Literature.
The Prince of Wales Gold Medal for Mental and Moral
Philosophy.
The Anne Molson Gold Medal for Mathematics and Natural
Philosophy.
The Shakspere Gold Medal for the English Languag> and
Literature.
The Logan Gold Medal for Geology, Mmeralogy and Paleon-
tology.
ΕΟ as ΡΝ ΡΣ
πο
The Major Hiram Mills Gold Medal for Biology.
The Governor-General’s. Gold Medal for Modern Languages
and Literature (see below, paragraph 6).
In addition to the above, certain Medals are offered annually
by the Allance Francaise, at the discretion of the Depart-
ment of Modern Languages.
If there be no candidate for any Medal, or if none of the
candidates fulfil the required conditions, the Medal will be
withheld, and the proceeds of its endowment for the year may
be devoted to prizes in the subject for which it was intended.
For details, see announcement of the several subjects below.
2. Special Certificates will be given to those candidates for
B.A. who have been placed in the First Class at the ordinary
B.A. Examination; have obtained three-fourths of the maxi-
mum marks in the aggregate of the six courses proper to, the
Third and Fourth Years, are in the First Class in not less
than half of these courses, and have no Third Class. At this
examination, no candidate who has taken exemptions (see
pp. 68-72) can be placed in the First Class unless he has ob-
tained First Class in four of the departments in which he has
been examined, ard has no Third Class.
3. Certificates of High General Standing will be granted to
those Undergraduates of the first two years who have obtained
three-fourths of the maximum marks in the aggregate of the
studies proper to their year, are placed in the First Class in
not less than half the subjects, and have not more than one
Third Class.
4, Prizes or Certificates will be given to those Undergradu-
ates who have distinguished themselves in the studies of a
particular class, and have attended all the other classes proper
to their year. ἣν seat
5. Graduates who attend lectures in any subject, and pass
the correspording examinations therein, may obtain certifi-
cates of their standing, whether the course in question be
Ordinary, Advanced or Honour.
6. His Fxcellency the Earl of Minto has been pleased to
offer annually during his term of office a Gold Medal for the
study of Modern Languages and Literature.
Following are the regulations :—
(1) The subjects for competition shall be the French and German
languages and literatures.
(es
(2) The course of study shall extend over two years, viz., the
Third and Fourth Years.
(3) The successiul Candidate must be capable of speaking and
writing both languages correctly.
(4) There shall be examinations in the subjects of the course in
both the Third and Fourth Years, at which Honours may be awarded
to deserving Candidates.
(5) The general conditions of ‘competition and the privileges as
regards exemptions shall be the same as for the other Gold Medais
in the Faculty cf Arts.
(6) Students from other Faculties shall be allowed to compete,
provided they pass the examinations of the Third and Fourth Years
in the above subjects.
(7) Candidates desiring to enter the Third Year of the Course,
who have not obtained First-Class Standing at the Intermediate or
Sessional Examinations of the Second Year in Arts, are required to
pass an examination in the work of the first two years of the Course
in Modern Languages, if called on to do so by the Professors.
(8) The subjects cf examination shall be those of the Honour
Course in Modern Languages.
7. The Neil Stewart Prize of $15 open to all Undergradu-
ates and Graduates of this University, and also to Graduates
of any other University, who are students of Theology in
some College affihated to this University. The rules which
govern the award of this prize are as follows:—
(1) The Candidate must pass, in the First Class, a thorough
examination upon the following subjects: Hebrew Grammar; reading
and translation at sight from the Pentateuch, and from such poetic
portions of the Scriptures as may be determined.
(2) There will be two Examinations .of three hours each—one in
Grammar and the other in Translation and Analysis
(Course for the present year: Hebrew Grammar (Gesenius;
Translation and Analysis of Exodus; Isaiah XL. to the end of the
book.)
(3) In case competitors should fail to attain the above standard,
the prize will be withheld, and a prize of $30 will be offered in the
following year for the same.
This Prize, founded by the late Rev. C. C. Stewart, M.A.,
and terminated by his death, was re-established by the liberal-
ity of the late Neil Stewart, Esq., of Vankleek Hill.
8. Early English Text Society’s Prize——This prize, the an-
nual gift of the Early English Text Society, will be awarded
for proficiency in the subjects of the language group in the
English Honour curriculum of the Third and Fourth Years.
9. New Shakspere Society’s Prize—This prize, the annual
gift of the New Shakspere Society, open to Graduates and
Undergraduates, will be awarded for a critical knowledge of
the following plays of Shakspere:—Hamlet, Macbeth, Othello,
King ‘Lear.
ih 3 pS AE SES
τὸ
10. Charles G. Coster Memorial Prize.—This prize, intended
as a tribute to the memory of the late Rev. Chas. ἃ. Coster,
M.A., Ph.D., Principal of the Grammar Szhool, St. John,
N.B., is offered by Colin H. Livingstone, B.A., to Undergrad-
uates (men or women) from the Maritime Provinces (Nova
Scotia, New Brunswick and Prince Edward Island). In April,
1904, it will be awarded to that Undergraduate of the First,
Second or Third Year, from the above Provinces, who, in the
opinion of the Faculty, has passed the most satisfactory Ses-
sional Examinations, under certain conditions laid down by
the donor.
11. Annie McIntosh Prize.—The income of the sum of $425,
subscribed by the pupils and friends of the late Miss Annie
M. McIntosh, will be offered as a pvize to students of the
Royal Victoria College in such subject or for such work as
the Faculty may determine.
12. Science Scholarships Granted by Her Majesty’s Commis-
sion for the Exhibition of 1851.—These scholarships of the
value of £150 a year are tenable for two or, in rare instances,
three years. They are limited, according to the Report of
the Commision, “to those branches of Science (such as Phy-
sics, Mechanics and Chemistry) the extension of which is
specially important for our national industries.” Their object
is not to facilitate ordinary collegiate studies, but “to enable
students to continue the prosecution of science with the view of
aiding in its advance or in its application to the industries of
the country.”
Seven nominations to these scholarships have already been
placed by the Commissioners at the disposal of McGill Uni-
versity (in 1891, 1893, 1895, 1897, 1899, 1901 and 1903). A
scholarship was awarded on each occasion.
When nominations are offered, they are open to students
of not less than three years standing in the Faculty of Arts
or of Applied Science, and are tenable at any University or
at any other Institution approved by the Commission.
13. The names of those who have taken Honours, Certi-
ficates or Prizes will be published in order of merit, with
mention, in the case of students of the First and Second
Years, of the schools in which their preliminary education
has been received.
Ὁ ἀν RETRY τὰν srs ΠΡ eee ΜΟΥ ash Crs
76
Vill. SUMMER CLASSES.
During the months of May and June, a series of SUMMER
Crasses will be conducted, intended mainly in the first in-
stance, to meet the requirements of students in the first two
years of their course. The subjects offered are English, Latin,
Greek, Mathematics, Logic, Physics, Chemistry, French and
Cae A fee of eight dollars will be exigible for any one
class, and of four dollars for each additional “class.
IX. COURSES OF LECTURES.
Classical Literature and History.
PROFESSORS:—W. PETERSON, M.A., LLD.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR:—A. J. Eaton, M.A., PH.D.
LECTURER :—S. B. Sphack, M.A.
TurorR -- ———
In this department, the work of the first two years is divided
mainly between exercise in Grammar and Composition and
the reading of selected authors. The attention of the student
is at the same time directed to the collateral subjects of History,
Literature, Antiquities, and Geography, in connection with
which various text-books are recommended, as specified below.
In the Third and Fourth Years (as also in the Honour
Courses) the instruction takes more of the lecture form, and
an attempt is made to give a connected view of the leading
branches of ancient literature, and the most important phases
of ancient life and thought.
Students may be examined on the whole of the work pre-
scribed for cach class, even though it may not have been over-
taken in lecture.
Subjects are suggested for Summer Readings in the various
branches of class work. Students are strongly recommended
to undertake these subjects during their long vacation, and
credit will be given for them at an examination held in the
first week in October.
Students are also recommended to devote some part of the
vacation to the subjects set down under the head of History
and Literature, which will form part of the Sessional Examin-
ation.
|
ae
ww «AB es
α΄ σος, χγςς Ὁ, ας
πον
κι. Re, Seen heen san
pe
~
~
r= -»
|e Ἶ ¥
ἐ ek
=
‘
hl
Tw oy, δῶν
tee
uilding.
B
Mining
mistry and
Che
Macdonald
«
εν
*
(i
Greek.
1. In this class, besides a review of grammatical principles Ordinary
(Allen’s Elementary Grammar), portions of some Greek First! Year.
-authors—e.g., Xenophon, Homer, Herodotus, Lucian, and
Zuripides—are read and explained.
For 1903-04, the work will be CebetisTabula (Jerram, Clar-
endon Press); Homer, Tliad XXII (Edwards, Pitt Press) ;
Euripides, Alcestis (Blakeney, Bell & Sons). For Compo-
sition, the manual used will be North & Hillard’s Greek Prose
Composition (Rivingtons) ; for Translation at Sight, written
and oral, Jerram’s Reddenda Minora (Clarendon Press).
Histary.—From B.C. 560 to 479, Cox’s “Greeks and Per-
sians” (Longmans’ Epoch Series).
Four hours a week.
2. The work of the Second Year will be selected mainly from
the Greek Dramatists, and from Thucydides, Plato or Demos-
thenes.
Subjects for 1903-04 :—
Summer READINGS.—Lucian’s Charon and Somnium (Heit-
land, Pitt Press). Students are also recommended to work
through some portion of Burnet’s Greek Rudiments (Long-
mans).
SrsstonaL. LectuRES.—Thucydides, [TV (Graves, Macmillan),
in part; Homer, Odyssey LX (Edwards, Pitt Press); Sopho-
cles, Electra (Jebb, Longmans, or Bayfield, Macmillan). The
practice of Composition and Translation at Sight will be con-
tinued as before: North & Hillard’s Greek Prose Composition
(Rivingtons), and Jerram’s Anglice Reddenda (First Series).
Hisrory.—The Athenian Supremacy; Cox’s “Athenian Em-
pire” (Longmans’ Epoch Series), with Abbott’s “ Pericles”
(Putnam).
LivERATURE.—Outlines as contained in Jebb’s Primer of
Greek Literature, pp. 1-100.
Four hours a week.
The following books are recommended for general use during
the first two years of the course :—Jebb’s Introduction to Homer
(Maclehose) ; Jebb’s Primer of Greek Literature, supplemented
by readings in Murray, Jevons or Mahaffy; Gow’s Companion
to School Classics (in part) ; Oman’s History of Greece (Long-
mans), or Bury’s (Macmillan); Mahaffy’s Primer of Greek
Antiquities; and Tozer’s Primer of Classical Geography (Mac-
—
Second
Year.
-hird Year
Fourth
Year.
78
millan) ; Allen’s Elementary Greek Grammar (Clarendon
Press); or Burnet’s Greek R idiments.
Students should provide themselves also with Kiepert’s Atlas
Antiquus.
3. Under the provisions of the new curriculum Greek is one
of the subjects which may be offered as one of the six courses
during the Third and Fourth Years together. The increased
time which is thus given to it makes it possible to add to the
rcading cf selected authors and the practice of Composition
and Translation at Sight short courses of lectures on subjects
cf general interest in the departments of History, Philosophy,
Literature, Art and Antiquities. One-fourth of the whole time
of the Class (1.6, one hour a week) is devoted to such lecture
courses.
For the Session 1903-04, the course will be as follows :—
a. SUMMER READINGS.—Sophocles, Antigone (Jebb, Pitt Press,
or Campbell & Abbott, Clarendon Press).
b. History, LITERATURE, ART AND ANTIQUITIES.—Courses will
be delivered on two of the following three :—
(1) Greek Life and Antiquities—12 Lectures.
(2) An outline sketch of Greek Poetry—12 Lectures.
(3) Early Greece—12 Lectures.
These lectures will be illustrated, where possible, by lantern
slides or photographs, while many of the best works on classical
antiquities will also be accessible to the student in the College
Library.
c. AutHoRS.—Plato, Euthyphro (Heidel, American Book Com-
pany); Aristophanes, Knights (Merry, Clarendon Press) ;
Isocrates, Panegyricus (Sandys, Rivingtons).
d. For practice in Composition, Sidgwick’s Introduction to
Greek Prose will be used; for Translation at Sight, Tod
and Longworth, Passages for Unseen Translation (Long-
mans).
Four hours a week.
4. Subjects for 1903-4.
Suwmer ReapINGs—Merriam’s “The Phaeacians of
Tomer (Harper’s), containing Odyssey Vey Va Vaio
MPT 1-134.
The remainder of the course will be the same as for the
Third Year.
uci a) ΤῊ ΠΥ Δ δα
ἐπ!
19
-The following books are recommended for general use:
(iow’s Companion to School Classics (Macmillan); Bury’s
History of Greece (Macmillan) ; Jebb’s Growth and Influence
of Classical Greek Poetry (Macmillan) ; Campbell’s Guide to
Greek Tragedy (Percival); Abbott’s Pericles (Putnam) ;
Haigh’s The Attic Theatre (Clarendon Press) ; Cornish’s Con-
cise Dictionary of Greek and Roman Antiquities (Murray) ;
Jevons’ or Mahaffy’s or Murray’s History of Greek Literature;
Kiepert’s Manual of Ancient Geography (Macmillan) ; Green-
idge’s Constitutional History; King & Cookson’s Comparative
Grammar (Clarendon Press).
Students taking Comparative Philology as a half course in
ether the Third or Fourth Year may in that year omit from
the prescribed courses in Greek, or Latin, or Greek and Latin
together, one author and two of the short courses under the
head of Listory, Literature, Art and Antiquities.
~
5. The work of the Honours Classes in Greek has been so Honours:
arranged as to admit of separate courses of lectures being given, rps and
with illustrative readings, along certain main lines of literary ies
study, in addition to supplementary work as provided for below.
In 1903-04 the Lecture courses will be as under, the books
selected for class reading being specified under each separate
head :-—
A. Alexandrine Poetry: Selections from Theocritus (Cholm-
ley, Bell & Co.); Callimachus.
B. Drama: Aeschylus, Agamemnon (Sidgwick, Clarendon
Press).
C. History: Thucydides VII (Marchant, Macmillan).
Three hours a week.
Translation at Sight—Fox & Bromley’s Models and Exer-
cises (Clarendon Press).
Prose Composition.—Sidgwick, and from dictation.
Seminary Work.—Essays and Lectures on History, Litera-
ture, Comparative Philology and Ancient Philosophy.
6. Private Reading.—Plato, Purves’s Selections, pp. 1-21, Third Year.
and 55 to 112 (Clarendon Press) ; Thucydides VI (Marchant,
Macmillan) ; Sophocles, Antigone (Jebb, Pitt Press; or Camp-
bell & Abbott, Clarendon Press).
In History the examination will be directed to testing a gen-
eral knowledge of the course of Greek History to the death of
Fourth
Year.
Crdinary.
First
Year.
δὺ
Alexander, and a more minute knowledge of the development
of the Athenian Constitution and the period of Athenian
Supremacy. In Literature, a general knowledge will be ex-
pected of ‘the course of Greek hterature and a more minute
knowledge of the lives and writings of the authors prescribed.
”. Private Reading.—Sophocles, Trachiniae, (Jebb, Cam-
bridge Press); Herocotus, Book VII (Butler, Macmillan);
Aristophanes, Frogs (Merry, Clarendon Press); Attic Orators
(Jebb’s Selections, Macmillan) ; Aristotle, Ethies, I, I], and X
(Bywater, Oxford); Theocritus, I, 11, IV, X1, XV (Cholmeley,
Pell & Sons).
History, Literature and Antiquities—Oman, Bury, Symonds,
Murray; Jebh’s Growth and Influence of Classical Greek
Poetry; Leaf’s Companion to the Iliad; Butcher’s Aspects of
the Greek Genius; Mahaffy’s Social Life in Greece; Jebb’s
Aitie Orators.
Grammar and Philology—Goodwin’s Greek Moods and
Terses, and Giles’s Short Manual of Philology (Macmillan);
Monro’s Homeric Grammar (Clarendon Press).
British School of Classical Studies in Athens.
This University is a contributor to the support of ‘this
School, which affords facilities for archeological and classical
investigation, and study in Greece. Graduates in Arts of
McGill University are accordingly entitled to special privileges
and advantages as regards tuition in the School.
Latin.
1. In this class, besides a general review of grammatical
principles (Latin Grammar, Gildersleeve and Lodge), portions
of some Latin, author,—such as Ovid, Tibullus, Livy, Sallust,
Virgil, Horace or Cicero—are read and explained.
For 19034, the subjects will be Cicero, De Amicitia (Ben-
nett, Sanborn & Co.); Ovid, Elegiac Selections (F. Ὁ, Smith,
Bell & Go.); ‘Virgil, Aeneid V (Phillipson, Bell & Co.). For
practice in Composition, both written and oral, the text-book in
use during the first year will be Nutting, Supplementary Latin
Composition (Allyn and Bacon); and for Translation at Sight,
Ritchie’s Easy Passages for Sight Translation (Longmans).
History Carthaginian Wars, B.C.,263-146; Shuckburgh’s
History of Rome, or “Rome and Carthage” (Longmans’ Epoch
Series).
Four hours a week.
Si
2. For 1903-04, the subjects will be:—
Summer Reapincs.—Cicero, Selections, (Parts I and IJ)
(Brackenbury, Rivingtons).
Students are also recommended to continue the practice of
Prose Compos'tion (North and Hillard).
SEsstonaL ‘LEcTuRES.—Livy’ ,Book XXI (Trayes, Bell &
Sons); Horace, Church’s Political and Historical Odes, (Blackie,
Clarendon Press); Virgil, Aeneid VI (Sidgwick, Pitt Press).
Composition and Translation αἱ Sight, North and Hillard’s
Latin Prose Composition (Rivingtons); and Ritchie’s Hasy
Passages (Longmans).
History.—The Last Century of the Republic, B.C., 133-
31; as in Beesly’s “The Gracchi, Marius and Sulla” (Long-
wan’s Epoch Series), and “The Roman Triumvirates” (Meri-
vale, Longmans’ Epoch Series).
LiarERATURE.—The subject matter of Quintilian X, chap.
1, 88. 81.181.
Four hours a week.
The following books are recommended for general use dur-
ing the first two years of the course: How and Leigh’s His-
tory of Rome (Longmans); Strachan-Davidson’s Cicero;
Warde-Fowler’s Caesar (Putnam); Literature: Wilkins’ Primer
of Roman Literature; Wilkins’ Primer of Roman Antiquities;
Latin Grammar, Gildersleeve and Lodge.
Students should provide themselves also with Niepert’s
Atlas Antiquus.
3. Under the provisions of the new curriculum, Latin 15
one of the subjécts which may be offered as one of six courses,
during the Third and Fourth Years together. The increased
time which is thus given to it makes it possible to add to the
reading of selected authors and the practice of Composition
and Translation at Sight short courses of lectures on subjects
of general interest in the departments of History, Philosophy,
Literature, Art and Antiquities. One-fourth of the whole
time of the Class (i.e., one hour a week) is devoted to such lec-
ture-courses.
For the Session of 1903-04, the course will be as follows:—
a. Summer Reapines.—Virgil, Aeneid ΙΧ (Sidgwick, Pitt
Press).
Second
Year.
Third
Year.
Fourth
Year.
Honours.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
2)
b. History, LITERATURE AND ANTIQUITIES.—Courses_ will
be delivered on at least two of the following three sub-
jects :-—
(1) Private Life of the Romans—12 Lectures.
(2) The History of the Roman Empire—12 Lectures.
(5) History of Roman Literature from the end of the
Republic—12 Lectures.
These lectures will be illustrated, where possible, with lan-
tern slides or photographs, while many of the best works on
classical antiquities will also be accessible to the student in
the College Library.
c. AuTHORS.—Cicero, Pro Plancio (Auden, Macmillan);
Tacitus, Histories IT. (Godley, Macmillan); Catullus, Ti-
bullus and Propertius (Wratislaw and Sutton, Bell &
Sons).
d. For practice in Composition, Nixon’s Parallel Extracts (Mac-
millan), and from dictation; and for T'ranslation at Sight,
Tod and Longworth, Passages for Unseen Translation
(Longmans).
Four hours a week.
4. Subjects for 1903-04 :—
Summer Reaptnas.—Horace, De Arte Poetica (Wilkins,
Macmillan).
The remainder of the course will be the same as for the
Third. “Year.
Norr.—The following books are recommended for general
use: Gow’s Companion to School Classics (Macmillan) ;
Mackail’s Latin Literature (Murray); How and Leigh’s His-
tory of Rome (Longmans); Pelham’s Outlines of Roman His-
tory (Percival) ; Capes’ Early Roman Empire (Longmans’ Epoch
Series); Cornish’s Concise Dictionary of Greek and Roman
Antiquities (Murray); Kiepert’s Manual of Ancient Geography
(Macmillan); Bennett’s Appendix to Latin Grammar.
Students taking Comparative Philology as a half course in
either the Third or Fourth Year may in that year omit from
the prescribed courses in Latin, or Greek, or Latin and Greek
together, one author and two of the short courses under the
head of History, Literature, Art and Antiquities.
5. As in Greek, the work of the Honours Classes in Latin
has been so arranged as to admit of separate courses of lec-
tures being given, with illustrative readings, along certain
@
ΩΦ
main lines of literary study, in addition to supplementary
work as provided for below. In 1903-04, the Lecture Courses
will be on three of the following, the books selected for class
reading being specified under each separate head :—
A. Epic Poetry: Virgil, Aeneid, I-IV (Sidzwick Pitt Press) ;
Selections from Lucan and Statius.
B. Prose: Development of Latin Style (Gudeman’s Prose
Selections, Harper).
C. Satire: Merry’s Fragments; Horace, Satires (Palmer);
Juvenal (Duff, Pitt Press); Persius (Conington and Neitleship,
Clarendon Press).
D. Oratory: Cicero, Verrine Orations (in part).
Three hours a week.
Translation at Sight—Fox ἃ Bromley’s Models and Exer-
cises (Clarendon Press). Pcse Composition.—Selected pas-
sages.
Seminary Work.—Essays and Lectures on History, Litera-
ture, Comparative Philology and Ancient Philosophy.
6. Private Reading.—Horace, Epistles 1 (Wilkins, Macmil-
lan); Cicero, Selections from Letters (Tyrrell, Macmillan,
pp. 1-83) ; Virgil, Aeneid IX (Sidgwick, Pitt Press) ; Sallust,
Catiline (Cook, Macmillan).
History—A general knowledge of Roman History to the end
of the first Century A.D., and a more minute knowledge of
the period from B.C. 146 to the Death of Augustus.
Literature—A general knowledge will be expected of the
course of Roman Literature, and a more minute knowledge of
the lives and writings of the authors prescribed.
%. Private Readinjgs—Plautus, Trinumnus, (Gray, Pitt
Press) ; Livy II (Conway, Pitt Press) ; Cicero, Tusculan Dis-
putations _ II, and Pro Cluentio (Peterson, Macmillan) ;
Merry’s Fragments of Early Latin Poetry (Clarendon Press) ;
Quintilian, Book X (Peterson, Clarendon Press).
History, Literature and Antiquities —How ἃ Leigh’s History
of Rome (Longmans); Tyrrell’s Latin Poetry; Students’ Com-
panion to Latin Authors (Middleton & Mills, Maemillan).
Grammar and Philology —tlULindsay’s Short Historical Latin
Grammar (Clarendon Press) and Giles’ Short Manual of
Philology (Macmillan) ; Lindsay’s Textual Emendation (Mac-
millan).
Third
Year.
Fourth
Year.
British School of Classical Studies at Rame..
The University has become a contributor to the support of
this School, which has been recently instituted, and the same
advantages will be enjoyed by members of the University as are
offered in connection with the School at Athens (p. 80). The
publications of both Societies are available in the University
Library.
Sanskrit.
LECTURER:
The two courses in Sanskrit are primarily intended for stu-
dents who have passed the Intermediate examination, but per-
mission may in certain other cases be obtained to attend the
elementary course.
1. A. For beginners, the work mainly consisting in the
mastering of the elements of Sanskrit Grammar with such
composition as tends to fix in the mind the knowledge thus
acquired. Etymological references will be frequently made and
comparisons suggested in order at once to familiarize the lan-
guage and give it an educational value in spite of the elemen-
tary nature of the course. This course counts as a half-course
qualifying for the degree, and it is especially recommended to
students attending the half-course in Comparative Philology.
Two hours a week.
1. B. For those students who have already passed through
Course A or its equivalent in Sanskrit preparation; one hour
per week is devoted to Lectures on Indian Literature, com-
mencing (1903-04) with the Post Vedie Period. Two hours
are devoted to reading selections; one hour to grammar and
composition bearing especially on the texts read. Course B
counts as one full course to the Final; courses A and B together,
one and one-half, the student taking up Course B not being
debarred thereby from repeating a course in another department.
Four hours a week.
Books required: Perry, Senskrit Primer; Whitney’s San-
skrit Grammar; Lanman’s Sanskrit Reader (Ginn & Co.). For
reference: Sanskrit Literature, A. A. Macdonell (Heinemann).
Summer Readings.—A course of Summer Readings will be
suggested according to individual needs. During the months
of May and June the lecturer will be glad to give his personal
supervision to students of Sanskrit and is prepared to give
lectures if due notice is given.
τ Se ΧΕ ΡΣ
5 85
Comparative Philology.
eee ___ fA. JuDSON Eston, M.A., PH.D.
eee ORES fea ποεῖν νον MA}
1. A.—Iytropuctory Course.—25 Lectures.
This course will deal with the following subjects: the history
of the Science of Comparative Philology; the Indo-Germanic
languages and their classification and relation to one another ;
the origin of the so-called Aryan people and their primitive
home and culture; the nature of compounds; the phenomenon
of Ablaut and its importance in explaining apparent irregular-
ities of declension and conjugation; the existenee of external
Sandhi in the Indo-Germanic languages; and the imfluence of
Analogy and Contamination in the formation of words. The
lectures will then go om to consider the Phonology of the Indo-
Germanic languages in detail.
1. B.—CompaARATIVE GRAMMAR OF GREEK AND LatIn.—
25 Lectures.
- This course will deal more exclusively with the history and
structure of these languages and their relation to the other
members of the group.
It is primarily intended for Honour Students in the Classics,
but is open also to such others as may be found to be qualified.
Certain exemptions in the Classical Courses (see pp. 79 and 89)
are allowed to students taking the lectures in Comparative
Philology, enabling them to make a full course by combining
it with either Greek or Latin, or two full courses by combining
it with both.
English Language and Literature.
PROFESSOR :—CHAS. E. Moyss, B.A.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR :—P. T. LAFLEUR, M.A.
LECTURER :—J. W. CUNLIFFE, D.LITT.
TUTOR AND LECTURER (ROYAL VICTORIA COLLEGE) :—
SusAN Hi CAMERON, M.A.
1. A. Eneuisn Lirerature.—The course will present an Ordinary:
outline of English Literature from the Anglo-Saxon Period to First
the present day, and will be illustrated by printed syllabuses Year.
and lantern slides. The general subject will be divided into
four periods (Pre-Chaucerian, Italian, French, Popular),
and approached for the most part through literary types.
Students are recommended to use Morley’s Charts of Eng-
lish Literature. Three hours a week.
Second
Year.
TaAird and
Fourth
Years.
86
For affiliated Colleges in place of the above, the whole of
Hallecx’s History of Eglish Literature (American Book
Co.).
1. ΡΒ. Enetisn Compostrion.—A course of lectures, chiefly
synthetical, on the principles of English composition, with
special reference to the use of words and the construction of
sentences and paragraphs. Regular essays are required of all
students. Text-Books:—Nichol’s Manual (or an equivalent).
One hour a week.
1. Ὁ. Huistroky.—The Main Epochs of European History,
being History I, (see p. 98).
2. EnGuisH Lir—ERATURE.—The course (for the Session 1903-
O4-only), will be 1. A of the First Year.
For affiliated Colleges, Halleck’s History of English Liter-
ature, as above.
Fortnightly Essays will be required on subjects set in con-
nection with the lectures and will be taken into account in
determining the standing of students at the end of the session.
3. A. Enouisit LIrerature.—Shakspere—This course will
begin with a review of the early history of the English drama,
and of the conditions which led to its development in the time
of Elizabeth. The advances made by the earlier Elizabethan
dramatists will be noted, and Shakspere’s methods illustrated
by a comparative study of A Midsummer Night’s Dream,
Romeo and Juliet, Henry V, As You Like It, Hamlet, Macbeth,
King Lear, and The Tempest; the relation of these plays to
their sources will also be considered. Students are recom-
mended to read as many of Shakspere’s plays as they can, and
to give special attention to those mentioned above.
3. B. A course on Poetry and the Drama. England from
1660 to 1789, with special and detailed reference to changes
in literary ideals and expression during the period discussed.
The lectures will include poets, from Dryden to Crabbe; dra-
matists, from the writers of Heroic plays to Sheridan. Stu-
dents will be called upon to pay special attention to the fol-
lowing works: Dryden, Absalom and Achitophel; Pope, Selec-
tions from the Essay on Man, and The Rape of the Lock;
Thomson, The Seasons (one book) ; Cowper, The Task (one
book) ; Crabbe, The Borough (four divisions) ; Dryden, Essay
on Dramatic Poesy; Addison, Cato; Goldsmith, She Stoops to
Conquer; Sheridan, The School for Scandal. Two hours a
week.
|
a
|
|
ΜΕ ἘΠ ΓΑ ΤΑΣ ἐν
es ane
= =
87
3. C. Encuish Lancuacre.—The course will consist mainly
of the translation and examination of the English Language
in its earliest and distinctive stages, and may be taken instead
of any two courses in English Literature. From time to time
the relation of English to other Teutonic languages will be
illustrated. A few Early English texts will be studied with
the view of elucidating the later history of English. There
will be a series of illustrated lectures in which various details
of literature and aspects of life in the period under inyestiga-
tion will be exhibited.
Text-Books:—Sweet, Anglo-Saxon Primer; Anglo-Saxon
Reader (the whole). Morris, Specimens of Early English,
Part IE, Extt. I, I1, VI, VII, 1X. Four hours a week.
3. Ὁ. EnetisH Composition.—An advanced course on
English Composition, including style, methods and principles
of literary criticism treated from the historical point of view,
and an introduction to the comparative study of literature in
accordance with the most recent results of contemporary
thought and research. In connection with this course students
will be examined in a course of prescribed readings. Essays
at stated periods are required of all.
Books of reference and authorities:—Saintsbury’s History
of Criticism; Lessing, Sainte-Beuve, Brunetiére, Arnold, Rus-
kin, Worsfold. One hour a week.
4, A. Eneiisu LiTerature.—A course on the Leading Poets
of the Nineteenth Century. The chief aspects of the French
Revolution will be considered, and Republican feeling in Eng-
land illustrated chiefly from the works of Wordsworth, Cole-
ridge and Southey. The indirect revolutionary poets Byron
and Shelley will then be considered, and their typical poems,
together with those of the poets already mentioned, critically
examined. The remainder of the course will be given to Scott,
Keats, Tennyson, Browning and Swinburne. ‘Two hours a
week.
The following poems have been selected for private reading.
A paper will be set on them at the sessional examination of the
Fourth Year:
Wordsworth:—The Scholars of the Village School of—;
Two April Mornings; The Fountain; The Peak of Weather-
lam, in the Prelude—(“ One Summer evening (led by her)
T found,” Book 1) ; Lucy Poems; “ Barth has not anything—;”
Oe Rg Te Tg i ἀν τῶν Me OS a MO Tp ee ΜΡ
¥ ‘ ν , es STL DAN rae eh ee”
~ ¢ fi " si bas
r
88
Hart-leap Well; Tables Turned; Lines written in early spring;
To my Sister; Excursion—The Vision in the Skies, (“So was
he lifted gently from the ground,” Book 11); The Child and
the Shell, (“I have seen a curious Child,” Book IV); lao-
damia; “It is a beauteous evening”; “ The world is too much
with us”; “Scorn not the Sonnet”: “ Milton, thou shouldst
be living”; Daffodils; The Yarrow Poems. Coleridge:—De-
jection; Ode to France; Lines to a Gentleman, composed on
the Night after his Recitation of a Poem on the Growth of an
Individual Mind; Love; Youth and Age; Fancy in Nubibus;
Christabel; Hymn before sunrise in Vale of Chamouni.
Scott:—Lady of the ~Lake; Wild Huntsman; Fire King.
Byron:—A Distant View of Harrow on the Hill; Childish
Recollections; Manfred; Childe Harold, Canto I. Keats:—
Isabella; Ode to a Grecian Urn; Chapman’s Homer. Shel-
ley :—Ode to the West Wind; The Cloud; The Skylark; Alas-
tor; Ozymandias; Adonais. Tennyson:—The Princess; In
Memoriam. Browning:—Christmas Eve and Easter Day;
Saul; Johannes Agricola; Pictor Ignotus; Fra Lippo Lippi;
Andrea del Sarto; The Bishop orders his Tomb at Saint
Praxed’s Church; Bishop Blougram’s Apology.
4. B. A general course on the history of English Prose
Fiction from Richardson to the middle of the nineteenth cen-
tury, treating of the various forms successively given to English
novels during ihe period, and the influences that stimulated
or otherwise affected such productions. While students are
expected to show particular knowledge of English masterpieces
in this kind, frequent reference to cognate works by continental
writers will also demand some familiarity with contemporary
European literature. Portions of the following works will be
selected for detailed study and discussion: Richardson, Clarissa
Harlowe; Fielding, Amelia; Goldsmith, The Vicar of Wake-
field; Godwin, Caleb Williams; Walpole, The Castle of Otranto ;
Thackeray, Henry Esmond. Books of reference :-—Raleigh,
The English Novel; Dunlop, History of Fiction; Tuckerman,
Jeaffreson. Two hours a week.
4. C. Encrisn Composrtion.—The statement respecting 3
D (p. 87), indicates the method and character of this course,
which is regarded as a continuation of the course in the Third
Year.
τ με a, PAP pS te EAS RY ΤΌ» Th pe eg Ae we CR ΠΡ Ee
re he xd 7 q .
89
Honour students of the Third Year will take courses 5 and Honours.
6 m addition to the ordinary English requirements of the Tr’
Year in language and literature.
5. CHAUCER, SPENSER AND Miiton.—Chaucer will be con-
sidered with reference to the social life of his time, which will
be illustrated from his works, chiefly from the Prologue to the
Centerbury Tales. He will then be discussed with the view of
bringing out not only his intrinsic merits, but his connection
with French and Ltalian literature and his relation to his pre-
decessors and successors in Enelish poetry.
Students will read the following works for examination:
Prologue to the Canterbury Tales; The Knightes Tale; The
Parlement of Foules; The Hous of Fame.
Twe hours.a week up to Christmas.
After Christmas, Spenser and Milton will be studied, first
in relation to the political and religious life of their times, and
afterwards as to their poetic development and influence.
Students will read the following works for examination:
Mother Hubbard’s Tale; Colin Clout’s Come Home Again;
Epithalaniium ; Faerie Queene, Bk. 1; Milton’s English Poems
of the First Period (to 1637); Paradise Lost, Bks. I and IT.
Two hours a week.
6. Prose writers before Dryden.—The main object of the
course will be to discuss the chief literary influences visible
Third
Year.
in the Pre-Restoration writers of English Prose and to exam- ,
ine characteristics of style. The subject will be treated chron-
ologically. As the course is largely interpretative and crit-
ical, facts of biography will be used only when they illustrate
_points of moment.
Students will read the following works for examination:
More, Utopia; Sidney, An Apologie for Poetry (Cook); Lodge,
Rosalynd (Collier’s Shakespeare’s Library); Bacon,.New At-
lantis; Earle, Microcosmographie (Arber); Milton, Areopagit-
ica (Hales).
Two hours a week.
Honour Students of the Fourth Year will select Language or
Literature.
Lanevace.—The main subjects of study will be Anglo-
Saxon, Middle English and Mceso-Gothic. Elementary courses
may be given in Icelandic and Old Saxon if thought desirable.
7. Anglo-Saxon.—The whole of Béowulf will be read in class
and illustrated by notes on origins, philology and textual emen-
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
90
dations. Teal-Bock: Harrison and Sharp’s Béowulf (Ginn).
Students will read selected portions of other poems for examin-
ation, Anglo-Saxon prose will be studied mainly in the trans-
lation of Gregory’s Pastoral Care and Zllfric’s Homilies.
Students will Le guided in the examination of dialectal texts
and referred to important articles in periodical literature deal-
ing with that subject and also with the field of Anglo-Saxon
generally.
Three hours a week.
8. Middle English.—The course is intended to give a know-
ledge of dialectical English and to illustrate the changes the
language has undergone. ‘The texts given in Morris’s Speci-.
mens of Early English, Part 1, and Morris and Skeat’s Speci-
mens of Karly English, Part II, may be regarded as the chief
material for study. A list of books of reference and of impor-
tant monographs will be given at the commencement of the
course.
Two hours a week.
9. Mceso-Gothic.—The course on Meeso-Gothic is intended
to open the way to the comparative study of allied Teutonic
languages. Particular attention will be given to the phono-
logical relations of Meeso-Gothic and Anglo-Saxon. Tevrt-
Books: Wright, Primer of the Gothic language; Ulfilas
(Heyne).
L.iTERATURE.—The courses in Literature deal mainly with
the post-Restoration period. Two of them are of a general
character and two are limited to individual authors. The
latter may be supplemented by courses on Wordsworth and
‘Tennyson.
10. Moprrn Prose Wrirers.—After a short sketch of the
earlicr history of English prose, attention will be directed to
the development of periodical literature and the rise of jour-
nalism. The influence of leading essayists upon their contem-
poraries and successors will be analyzed, with special reference
to the works of Carlyle, Ruskin, Matthew Arnold and Robert
Louis Stevenson. Some account will be given of modern news-
paper organization and its relation to present-day literature.
Students will read the following works for examination:
Carlyle, Heroes and Hero Worship; Ruskin, Crown of Wild
Olive; Arnold, Essays in Criticism, Second Series (Macmil-
lan) ; Stevenson, Virginibus Puerisque.
Two hours a week.
91
11. COMPARATIVE LITERATURE.—A course of lectures on the
influence of English literature upon the continent of Europe,
chiefly during the eighteenth and nineteenth centuries. The
treatment discusses mainly the historical development of ideas,
but examines also corresponding modifications regarding liter-
ary method and form.
Voltaire, Letters concerning the English Nation; Elton, The
Augustan Age; Texte, Jean Jacques Rousseau and the Cosmo-
politan Spirit in Literature (tr. Matthews); Brunetiere,
L’Evolution des Genres.
Two hours a week.
12. SHAKSPERE.—The history of Shakesperean criticism,
textual and esthetic, will be traced from its beginnings in Eng-
land and Germany to the present time. Students will be
directed to make themselves acquainted by private reading with
the most important problems and results of modern research.
Two hours a week before Christmas.
13. Browninc.—This course will aim at explaining Brown-
ing’s view of the poetic art, his characteristic methods, and
his outlook on the life and thought of his time. Selected short-
er poems will be studied in class, and detailed lists of these,
arranged under subject-headings, will be supplied for private
reading.
Two hours a week after Christmas.
Modern Languages.
PROFESSOR :—HERMANN WALTER, M.A., PH.D.
LEIGH R. GREGOR, B.A., PH.D.
LECTURERS : | E. T. LAMBERT, B.A.
| J. Τὸ Morin, M.A.
TUTOR AND LECTURER (ROYAL VICTORIA COLLEGE) :—
MLLE. MILHAU, Lic. UNIV. F'R., OFFICIER D’ ACADEMIE.
A.—French.
Owing to the position which this University occupies in the
midst of a very large French-speaking population, there is a
permanent demand for courses of a practical, conversational
character; for the same reason the Department profits by the
co-operation of French church services, French family hfe,
French newspapers, French theatres, French literary clubs,
and public lecture courses in the French language.
Ordinary.
First
Year.
Second
Year.
92
In drawing up the following dual courses endeavours have
been made to meet the special needs of the professional men
of the Province of Quebec (every student being given the op-
portunity to learn to speak French), and also to provide for the
maintenance of scientific methods. In Courses 1 and 3, the
study of grammar and literature is carried on in accordance
ait the usual academic traditions, the French language being,
however, largely used in class instruction. In Cae 2 and
4, the method of teaching is of a more practical character; the
French language only is used, and the texts prescribed are made
the subject of conversation, analysis, résumés, ete. In the
Third and Fourth Years all lectures are given and all studies
earried on in French.
Students will take as part of their Honour Course in Mod-
ern Languages that part of section 1. A, of the course on Com-
parative Philology (p. 85), which deals with the general prin-
ciples of linguistic development. Ἢ
1. Borel, Grammaire Francaise (Holt and Co.). The follow-
ing texts will be studied: G. Sand, La Mare au Diable (Ginn
and Co.) Super, Histoire de Τὺ: (Holt and Co).
Maupassant, Huit contes choisis (Heath and Co.); Lamar-
tine, Scenes de la Révolution Francaise (Heath and GCo.);
Labiche, Voyage de M. Perrichon (American Book Co.);
Mérimée, Quatre Contes (Holt and Co.); A number of French
poems selected by the Department.
There will be regular written exercises. Great importance
will be attached to correct pronunciation, which will be taught
phonetically.
The examinations for the stvdents of Affiliated Colleges will
include the whole of courses 1 an 2. Equivalents for the oral
work of Course 2 and the oral examination will be stated on
application.
Four hours weekly, two for each course.
3. Summer Reaprnes for students entering on their Second
Year:—Moliéere, Femmes Savantes; Vigny, La canne de jone
(Heath and Co.).
SrsstonaL Lecrures.—Macmillan’s Third French Course;
Correille, Horace (Holt and Co.); Hugo, Les Misérables (Ginn
and Co.); Elementary Historical French Grammar.
4. Ségur, La Retraite de Moscou (Holt and Co.); Ra-
cine, Andromaque (Heath and Co.); Hugo, Ruy Blas (Heath
and Co.); Mansion, Petite esquisse de la Littérature Frangaise
(McDougall, London).
Ὑ πὶ ΜΡ to wes ρῶν ale Bey VRS ς 7 ἦν ‘ te, ae μῸ ἐ. ἊΜ τ, ae
~
oh
99
The examination for the students of Affilated Colleges will
include the whole of Courses 3 and 4. Equivalents for the
oral work of Course 4.and the oral examination will be stated
on application.
Four hours weekly, two for each course.
5. These courses will consist mainly in the study of French
Literature and Advanced Prose -Composition.
Summpr Reapines for students entering on the Third or
Fourth Year:—Moleére, Misanthrope (Holt and Co.); Renan,
Souvenirs d’Enfance et ce Jeunesse (Heath and Co.).
Sessionat Lecrures.—Literature in the XVIIIth and
XIXth Centuries; Lesage, Gil Blas (Heath and Co.); Mari-
vaux, Le Jeu de ?Amour et du Hasard; J. J. Rousseau, Selec-
tions; Voltaire, Mérope; Victor Hugo, Hernani; Musset, Se-
lections (Ginn and Co.); Balzac, Eugénie Grandet; Banville,
Gringoire.
Prose Composition.—Spiers Graduated Course of Transla-
tion into French Prose (Simpkim, Marshall and Co., London.)
6. Literature up to the end of theaXVIIth Century; Cor-
neille, Polyeucte; Racine, Athalie, Bajazet; Moliére, L’Avare;
Boileau, L’Art Poétique (Pitt Press); La Bruyére, Selections ;
Madame de la Fayette, La Princesse de Cleve; Faguet, Littéra-
ture Francaise.
_ Prose Composition:—Spiers, Graduated Course of Transla-
tion into French Prose (Simpkin, Marshall and Co., London).
N. B.—In order to be admitted to the above classes a student
must understand French well enough to take lectures deliv-
ered in French.
Four hours weekly.
The work of the Honours Classes in French is divided into
three sections. The First includes the Historical study of the
French language, the Second, the History of French Litera-
ture, the Third, French Composition and the Reading and
Study of French Texts. The First and Second Sections are
taken up in alternate years, the Third annually. Students
of the Third and Fourth Years take lectures together. In
order to obtain Honours, candidates must be able to speak
French fluently.
τ. This course will deal with the Historical development of
the French language from its origin to the present day. The
Old French Period will receive special attention, and in this con-
nection the oldest texts will be read. Provencal grammar will
Third and
Fourth
Years.
1903-1904.
1904-1905.
Honours.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
Philology.
1903-1904.
History οἵ
Literature.
1904-1905
Texts and
Composi-
tion.
Ordinary.
Beginners
Course.
94
n<cessarily be referred to. Students will make use of Schwan’s
Altfranzésische Grammatik (revised by Behrens), Darmes-
teier’s Cours de Grammaire Histo:ique and Nyrop’s Gram-
maire Historique.
Th e2 hours weekly.
8. Inasmuch as the Ordinary Course provides a comprehen-
sive survey of French Literature, Honour Students will be re-
quired to make a special study of certain men, movements and
pericds.
Three hours weekly.
9. Students will receive instruction in the art of composi-
tion. They will be required to write a number of French papers
on literary subjects, in connection with which readings will be
suggested.
N. B.—Fefore entering on their Third Year Course, Honour
Studerts are expected to have read the following: Corneille,
Le Cid, Horace, Cinna, Polyeucte; Racine,—Andromaque,
Britannicus, Phédre, Athalie; Moliere,—Ecole des Femmes,
Misanthrope, Tartuffe, Le Bourgeois Gentilhomme, Les
Femmes Savantes; Boileau,—L’Art Poétique, except where
these texts are part of the readings prescribed for the Ordinary
Course.
B.—German.
The Crdinary Courses mainly keep practical ends in view.
In the first two years special attention is given to Grammar,
in the Third and Fourth to Literature. Texts are studied °
from the wsthetic and critical as well as from the historical
and linguistic point of view. A considerable amount of trans-
lation is done in class. English-German exercises in the pre-
seribed text-book on Grammar being supplemented by the
translation into German of easy prose passages and the retrans-
lation of texts. Importance is attached to correct and expres-
sive reading aloud.
The Joynes-Meissner German Grammar (Heath & Co.) ;
Huss, German Reader (Heath & Co.); Wildenbruch, Stille
Wasser (Heath & Co.); Stern, Geschichten vom Rhein (Ameri-
can Book Co.) ; Moser, Der Bibliothekar (American Book Co.).
Tutorial classes conducted during May and June enable
students to overtake work not completed by the close of the
Winter Session.
Four hours weekly.
|
|
95
2. The Joynes-Meissner German Grammar; Horning’s Ger-
man Composition; Wildenbruch, Das Edle Blut (Heath & Co.) ;
Uhland, Ballads and Romances (Macmillan & Co.) ; Heyse,
L, Arrabbiata (G. Wahr); Schiller, Maria Stuart (Heath &
Co.).
Four hours weekly.
The examination for the students of Affiliated Colleges
will, in addition to the above, include equivalents for the oral
examination to be stated on application.
Summer Reapines for students entering on their Second
Year :—Hauff, Lichtenstein (Heath ἃ Co.).
3. SessionaL Lectures.—The Joynes-Meissner German
Grammar; Horning’s German Composition; Schiller, Wilhelm
Tell (Heath & Co.); Meyer, Gustav Adolf’s Page (Heath &
Co.) ; Goethe, Hermann and Dorothea; Schiller, Das Lied von
der Glocke (Heath & Co.); Schiller’s Ballads (Heath & Co.);
Keller, Bilder aus der Deutschen Literatur (American Book
Co.).
Four hours weekly.
The examination for the students of Affiliated Colleges
will, in additidn to the above, include equivalents for the oral
examination to be stated on application.
_ Summer Reapines for students entering on their Third or
Fourth Year.—Freytag, Soll und Haben (Heath & Co.).
4. SEssIoNAL LEcTURES.—Lessing,, Emilia Galotti (Heath
& Co.) ; Goethe, Iphigenie auf Tauris (Pitt Press) ; Schiller,
Historische Skizzen (Clarendo1 Pres); Keller, Dietegen
(Ginn & Co.) ; Heine, Poems (Heath & Co.).
5. Goethe, Egmont (Ginn & Co.); Schiller, Die Braut von
Messina; Kleist, Prinz Friedrich von Homburg (Ginn & Co.) ;
Sudermann, Der Katzensteg (Heath ἃ Co.) : Heine, Harzreise.
Translation of prose passages from English into German.
Four hours weekly in each year.
The work of the Honour Classes in German is divided into
three Sections. The First includes the Historical study of the
German Language; the Second, the History of German Litera-
ture; the Third, German Composition and the Reading and
Critical Study of Texts. The First and Second Sections are
taken up in alternate years; the Third, annually. Students
of the Third and Fourth Years take Lectures together. Lan-
guage in German is taken up in the same Session as Literature
First
Year.
Second
Year.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
1903-1904.
1904-1905.
Honours.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
Philology.
1904-1905.
History of
Literature.
1903-1904.
Texts and
Composi-
tion.
1903-1904.
06
in French, and vice versa. The German Language alone is used
in class instruction.
In order to obtain Honours, candidates must be capable of
speaking German fluently.
(a) A general outline of the development of the German
Language from its origin to the present day, in the course of
which the operation of the principal laws exemplified in the
growth of the language will be traced.
(0) A special study of the Middle High German period, its
language and literature, with selected texts.
The following books will be used:—Bachmann, Mittelhoch-
deutsches Lesebuch (Faesr and Beer, Zurich) ; Ff. Kaufmann,
Deutsche Grammatik; Behaghel, Die Deutsche Sprache;
Wright, Middle High German Primer (Clarendon Press).
Three hours weekly.
Inasmuch as the Ordinary Course provides a comprehen-
sive survey of German Literature, Honour Students will be
required to make a specal study of certain men, movements
and periods.
Three hours weekly.
8. Students will receive instruction in the art of cemyposition.
They will be required to write a number of German papers on
literary subjects in connection with which oe will be sug- .
gested.
N.B.—Before entering on their Third Year Course, Honour
Students are expected to have read the following :—Lessing,—
Minna von Barnhelm or Nathan der Weise; Schiller,—Wihelm
Tell, Maria Stuart, Jungfrau von Orleans, Wallenstein, Bal-
lads; Goethe,—Goetz von Berlichingen, Egmont, Hermann und
Dorothea, Poems, except where these texts are part of the read-
ings prescribed for the Ordinary Course.
Italian.
LECTURER :—LEIGH R. GREGOR, B.A.,. PH.D.
The following course, given in alternate years, is intended
for students who have passed the Intermediate Examination.
Partial students who wish to join the class must give satisfac-
tory evidence of their ability to keep up with the undergra-
duates.
Grandgent, Italian Grammar (Heath & Co.); Grandgent,
Italian Composition (Heath & Co.) ; De Amicis, Selections fronr
ΤΙ Cuore; Manzoni, Selections from I Prome:si Sposi; Mar-
Macdonald Chemistry Building.—A Lecture Theatre.
Macdonald Chemistry Building.—A Laboratory.
tuscelli, Raccolta di scelte poesie (Chiurazzi, Naples) ; selections
from the Divina Commedia; Notes on some of the great names
of Italian Literature.
Semitic Languages.
PROFESSOR :—D. COUSSIRAT, B.A., B.D., D.D., OFFICIER DE
L’INSTRUCTION PUBLIQUE.
The course comprises lectures on the above languages and
their literature, their genius and peculiarities Comparative
philology, affinity of roots, ete., also receive due attention, while -
the portions selected for translation will be illustrated and ex-
plained by reference to Oriental manners, customs, history, etc.
1. Hebrew grammar and translation. English rendered into
Hebrew. Masoretic notes explained. The Hebrew text
compared with the Septuagint and Vulgate Versions.
Four hours a week.
This course may also be taken as a course in either the
Third or Fourth Years, by students who have not taken
αὖ in the Second Year.
2. Hebrew Syntax. Translation of difficult passages of the
Old Testament. Notes on the Massora and the Talmud
(Mishna and Gemara). Aramaic.
3. Translation continued. Characteristics of the Semitic
Languages, particularly of Aramaic, Syriac, Samaritan,
Rabbinic, Arabic, Assyrian. Semitic Inscriptions.
Four hours a week for the combined courses.
4a. HEBrEw.—Genesis, Isaiah, 40-66. Ecclesiastes. Liter-
ature.—F. Lenormant, The Beginnings of History.
HeEsprew.—The course for the Second Year.
Hesrew.—The course for the Fourth Year.
4b. Aramaic.—Daniel. Ezra. Selections from the Targums.
Literature.—Sayee, Lectures on the Origin and Growth
of Religion.
Two hours a week.
δα. Hesrew.—Malachi, Psalms, 1-72; Job, 26-42. Litera-
ture—Renan. A general History of the Semitic
Languages.
Ordinary
Second
Year.
Third Year
Fourth
Year.
Honours.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
. 2 eo
Ae es
ty f
44 IE ἀντ fo oad 21a ea, clear aene ae a ea
08 :
5b. Syriac.—Selections from the Peshito, and from the Chron-
icles of Bar Hebreus. Literature—W. Wright, Com-
parative Grammar of the Semitic Languages.
Two hours a week.
History.
PROFESSOR :—CHARLES W. CoLBy, M.A., PH.D.
LECTURER :—STEPHEN B. LEACOCK, B.A.
1. The Main Epochs of European History.
Ordinary. Twenty-four lectures will be given on as many subjects, taken
ies from Ancient, Mediwval and Modern History. The design of
the course is less to present a mass of facts than to illustrate
the chief features of racial, political and social progress. <A
syllabus has been prepared which contains a list of topical read-
ings. The sessional examination will be based mainly on these
and on the following text-book :—“ European History,” by 6.
B. Adams (Macmillan). The results of the examination will
be counted under the head of English. Students will be re-
quired to present short essays on historical subjects at regular
intervals. A few illustrated lectures may also be given if
suitable hours can be found. The use of Putzger’s Historischer
Schul-Atlas is recommended.
One hour a week.
Thirdor ὦ. The Medieval and Modern History of Europe, 378-1648
A This is a general course dealing with the historical develop-
ment of European nations from the German Inroads to the
Peace of Westphalia. Special attention will be devoted to
institutions and movements. Topics for investigation will be
frequently assigned, and students will write at least one thesis
during the year. Readings to accompany each lecture are
assigned in the syllabus for the course.
Four hours a week.
Honours. 3. The Renaissance. Two hours a week. (Omitted in
mec and ©1903-1904. )
Years. 4. The Reformation,—1563.
The main motives of this course will be found in the develop-
ment of the religious schism, and in the relations of scholar-
ship with theology.
Two hours a week.
5. The Seventeenth Century. Three hours a week. (Omitted
in 1903-1904.)
SS a a
99
6. The Political and Constitutional History of Europe since
1789.
In this course narrative history will be subordinated to a
description of the leading types of government which have been
established in Europe since the beginning of the French Revolu-
tion. The constitutional changes of France, Germany, Italy,
Switzerland and Austria-Hungary will be rendered most prom-
inent.
Four hours a week.
7. English Constitutional History—1307. Two hours a
week. (Omitted in 1903-1904.)
8. The Political and Constitutional History of the United
States and Canada. Four hours a week. (Omitted in 1908-
1904.)
9. Historical Seminary. Two hours a week.
Texts—Honour Students in History will be examined at
the end of the Third Year on the following texts :—
Herodotus, VI—VIII, Macaulay’s trans.; Thucydides, I, TR
1—65, VI, VII, Jowett’s trans.; Plato, The Republic, Jowett’s
trans.; Plutarch, The Lives of Aristides, Themistocles, Pericles
and Timoleon, Clough’s trans. ; Polybius, I, U, V, Shuckburgh’s
trans.; Livy, XXI-XXII, Church and Brodribb’s trans. ;
Tacitus, Annals II, Germania, Vita Agricolae, Church and
Brodribb’s trans.
Honour students in History will be examined at the end of
the Fourth Year on the following texts :—
Clarendon, History of the Rebellion, Book XI; Gibbon, De-
cline and Fall, chaps. XLIV, L, LI, LXVI; Burke, Reflec-
tions on the French Revolution; Macaulay, History of England,
chap. III; Bagehot, The English Constitution; Stubbs, Select
Charters, Introduction; Captain Mahan, The Influence of Sea
Power on History; Langlois et Seignobos, Introduction aux
Etudes Historiques, trans. G. G. Berry; Bryce, The American
Commonwealth, Vol. I; Parkman, Montcalm and Wolfe.
Summer Reaprnes.—All students in History are expected
to follow a course of Summer Readings as a preparation for the
work of the ensuing session. Special programmes will be
drafted with a view to individual needs.
Honour Courses in History and Economics.—A combined
course for Honours in History and Economics is now offered,
with a choice between studies (A) chiefly in history and politics,
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
Honours.
Third and
Fourt|
Years
Ordinary
Third or
«Fourth
- Year.
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
100
and (B) chiefly in economics and politics. The courses of lee-
tures prescribed for Honour Students are as follows :—
A. 3rd Year.—History, 2, 4, 9;
Political Science, 6;
Keonomies, 1.
4th Year.—History, 4, 6, 9;
Political Science, 7 or 8;
Economics, 2, 3.*
B. 38rd Year.—Economics, 1, 4, 5;
Political Science, 6;
History, 2.
4th Year.—Kconomics, 2, 3, 4, 5;
Political Science, 7, 8;
History, 4, 9.
Economics and Political Science.
PROFESSOR :—A. W. FLux, M.A.
LECTURER :—STEPHEN B, LEAcocs#, B.A.
1. ELEMENTS oF ECONOMICS.
The scope and method of Economic Science; the organiza-
tion of production; the theory of value; the distribution of
wealth, including the theories of rent, wages, interest and
profits; exchange and the mechanism of exchange; the theory
of money; international trade; principles of taxation.
Four hours per week throughout the Session.
Text-book:—¥. A. ‘Walker, Political Economy (Advanced
Course).
For further reference :—Keynes, Scope and Method of Polit-
ical Economy; Hadley, Economics; Marshall, Principles of
Economics; J. S. ΜΗ], Principles of Political Economy, Book
III; Jevons, Money and the Mechanism of Exchange; Bastable,
Theory of International Trade; Sidgwick, Principles of Polit-
ical Economy, Book III.
2. History or Economic THEory:
The development of economic doctrine will be traced, es-
pecially in relation to the special contributions of individual
writers of great prominence. A closer examination of econ-
omic theories treated of in the preceding course will be made.
* For Economics 2 or 3, may be substituted Art and Archaeology (half course) or His-
tory of Philosophy (half course).
ae ee
Teat-books:—Price, Short History of Political Economy
in England; Cohn, History of Political Kconomy.
Works of Reference:—Cossa, Introduction to the Study of
Political Economy; Ingram, History of Political Economy ;
Sewell, The Theory aa Value ae Adam Smith; Cannan,
History of the Theories of Production and Distribution ; to-.
gether with the treatises of writers named, or referred to,
εἰν τ
Four hours per week during the first half ae the Session.
3. (a) Currency, BANKING AND TRADE.
Half course of 50 lectures (Omitted in 1903-04).
(b) Tue ΤΉΠΟΒΥ OF DISTRIBUTION.
An examination of the theories of wages, rent and profits.
Works of Reference:—Clark, The Distribution of Wealth;
Commons, The Distribution of Wealth; Hobson, The HEcono-
mics of Distribution; Walker, The Wages Question; Taussig,
Wages and Capital; Béhm-Bawerk, Capital and Interest; Le-
roy Beaulieu, Kesai sur la Repartition des Richesses.
Four hours per week during the second half of the Session.
4. SEMINARY IN ECONOMICS.
In connection with courses 2 and 3, a study of the writings
of leading economists will be carmied on, reports made, and
methods of investigation illustrated practically. Opportunity
will also be afforded for corresponding work in connection
with courses 5, % and 8 (see below). The meetings of the
Seminary will be weekly.
5. (a) History or INDUSTRY AND COMMERCE.
Two hours a week (omitted in 1903-04).
(0) PuBiic FINANCE.
State expenditures, with a discussion of the relations between
those of central and local governments; public revenues, forms
of tavation, incidence of taxation; public debts; financial ad-
ministration.
‘Two hours per week throughout the Session.
Text-book:—Pilehn, Introduction to Public Finance.
Works of Reference:—Bastable, Public Finance; Adams, The
Science of Finanee; Cohn, The Science. of Finance; Leroy
Beauliou, Traité de la Science des Finances; Seligman, Essays
in Taxation and The Shifting and Incidence of Taxation:
Adams, Public Debts.
: i we
Honours. —
Fourth ~
Year.
Honours.
Third and
Fourth
Years.
- eee ΧΕ =
re
7
Fe SG ee ee es, ee ee Δ ΤῊ ἐπ πν
β΄
Ὶ
Ordinary.
Third or
Fourth
Year.
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
102
6. ELEMENTS OF POLITICS.
The introductory part of the course will deal with the gen-
eral principles of Political Science, the nature of the State
and the different theories of its purpose and origin.
The main work of the year will consist of a study of com-
parative national government. The constitutions, govern-
ments and political parties of Great Britain and the United
States will be treated in detail. The governmental systems
of continental Europe will also be examined.
Four hours per week throughout the Session.
Text-book:—The State (Woodrow Wilson).
Books of Reference:—Sidgwick, Elements of Politics; Bur-
gess, Political Science and Constitutional Law; Anson, Law
and Custom of the Constitution; Bryce, American Common-
wealth; Bodley, France; Lowell, Governments and Parties in
Continental Europe.
%. LEGISLATIVE POLICY.
A half course of 50 lectures. This course will consist of a
detailed examination of the functions exercised by the State
in industrial control. Modern legislation and legislative the-
ories will be discussed in reference to their economic effects.
Reports by members of the class upon special topics will be
made a prominent feature of the work.
Four hours per week during the first half of the Session.
Books of Reference:—Leroy Beaulieu, The Modern State;
Sidgwick, Elements of Politics, chaps. ΓΝ, LX, X; Farrar, The
State in Relation to Trade; Jevons, The State in Relation to
Labour; Frankenstein, Der Arbeiterschutz, seine Theorie und
Politik.
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
8. History oF PouiticaL THEORY.
A half course of 50 lectures. Only a brief summary of
Ancient and Medizval political philosophy will be attempted.
The chief part of the course will be devoted to the political
speculation of the 18th and 19th centuries.
Four hours per week for the second half of the Session.
Books of Reference :—Sir F. Pollock, History of the Science
of Politics, and the political works of Hobbes, Locke, Montes-
quieu, Rousseau, Burke, Bentham, J. S. Mill, Herbert Spencer,
Bluntschli, and Sir Henry Maine.
105
SuMMER ReEapines.—Students who intend to follow the
Honour course in Economics and Political Science are advised
to read, during the summer vacation preceding the commence-
ment of that course, the books prescribed for the Scholarship
examination in those subjects (see p. 57).
During the summer vacation following the Third Year they
are advised to study the following books :—
Adam Smith, Wealth of Nations; Ricardo, Principles of
Political Economy and Taxation; J. 5. Mill, Principles of
Political Economy; and such of. the works referred to in con-
nection with course 8, (see p. 102), as may be available for use.
Honour Courses.—Students of the Third Year who are can-
didates for Honours in History and Economics, and select
Course B (see p. 100), will take the following courses of lec-
tures: History, 2; Economics, 1, 4, 5; Political Science, 6.
Students of the Fourth Year who are candidates for Hon-
ours in History and Economics, and have selected Course B,
will take the following courses of lectures: History, 4, 9;
Economics, 2, 3, 4, 5; Political Science, 7, 8.
Constitutional Law.
PROFESSOR :—F.. P. WALTON (DEAN FACULTY oF LAW.)
The Constitutional Law of Canada will be treated in the
following order:—1. Canadian Constitutional History prior
to Confederation. 2. The British North America Act, and the
leading cases under it which illustrate the respective powers
of the Dominion and the Provinces. 3. The fundamentals
of English Constitutional Government which form the basis of
the Canadian Constitution. 4. The Cabinet System. 5. The
difference between English and French practice as to responsi-
bility of officials.
T'wo hours a week.
Roman Law.
LECTURER :—F. P. WALTON (DEAN FACULTY OF LAW).
1. A Course is offered in Roman Law, open to Third and
Fourth Year students in Arts, and qualifying as an option for
the B.A. degree. For details, see p. 220.
Μη
ee
᾿
Σ
ἌΝ
᾿᾿
>
ἊΝ
a
t
Ordinary.
Second
' Year.
Art (History of) and Archzeclogy.
LECTURER ---------
The course comprises two sessions’ work, a half-course (of
fifty lectures) being given each session. Uhe lectures, which
are illustrated by photographs, casts, lJantern-slides, and
diagrams, are delivered in the Architecture class-room, En-
gineering Building, on Monday and Thursday, at 4 p.m.
The fee for the full course is $25.00; for each half-course, if
taken separately, $14.00 (including Grounds and Athletics).
For Session 1900-1901 the course comprised a general survey
of the architecture and sculpture of the ancient world (Egypt,
Assyria, Greece and Rome).
In 1901-02, the first term was devoted to the architecture of
the late Roman Empire and of the Early and Later Middle
Ages; in the second term the class studied the Painting of the
Renaissance in [ialy. ἥ
In 1902-03 the course was devoted to Greek sculpture and
classical architecture, with special lectures upon the topography
of ancient Athens and Rome.
In Session 1903-04 the first term will be devoted to a study
of medixval architecture and the allied arts; in the second
term the history of Painting will be resuined for the Northern
Schools of Europe.
In addition to the class lectures, candidates are expected to
show a knowledge of the text-hooks prescribed and of portions
of the books of reference, as indicated in connection with the
lectures. A certain number of class essays are prescribed dur-
ing the session.
Text-Books:—Baldwin Brown, “The Fine Arts” (Murray;
Scribner) ; Von Reber, “ History of Medizeval Art” (Harper) ;
any good manual of the history of Pamting, such as Poynter's
(Sampson Low) or Van Dyke’s (Longmans).
Niental and Moral Philosophy.
PROFESSOR OF MENTAL PHILOSOPHY :— --
ςς
τε CS UOT (RAT: a
Hinpa D. OAKELEY, M.A.
ee RS ee \ J. W. Hickson, M.A., PH.D.
1 A. In the first term a course on Elementary Psychology.
While discussing the phenomena of sensation, and the elemen-
tary processes of mental evolution, the lectures also introduce
DPI aE a a eee Ὑγ0 8. ees
the student to the principles and methods involved in the study
of more advanced philosophical problems. While the course
follows in its general outline Book 1. in Murray’s Handbook
of Psychology, the student is made acquainted with the leading
works in psychological literature, and is expected to study the
_ passages recommended. Occasional essays also are prescribed.
7 ~ 1B. In the second term a course in Formal Logic and the
a Fallacies as in Hyslop’s Elements of Logic. ‘The lectures
endeavour to show the application of logical processes to actual
* discussion, with special attention to common fallacies exem-
plified in literature and daily life.
In addition, students will be required to consult Sidgwick,
| Fallacies; and Lafleur, Illustrations of Logic.
: Both classes meet three hours a week.
rs 2 A. This course will comprise the following divisions:
Philosophy amongst the Greeks;
j b Explanation of the fundamental methods of thought
ee or the principles underlying conception, judgment
= and inference ;
ἫΝ _ Philenous” as introduction to the Psychological
Problem; Perception of a Material World.
q Books recommended :—Sidgwick’s Introduction to Philo-
ae sophy; A Dialogue of Plato; Berkeley’s Dialogues between
| Hylas and Philonous.
B:* Writing of papers expected from time to time.
qi Two hours a week throughout the session.
δ ΠΡ General Psychology, including the Elements of
a Psychophysics.
No text-book is prescribed, but students will be referred to
Wundt’s Outline of Psychology, and to James’ Principles of
Psychology.
One hour a week throughout the session.
3 A. In the First Term a course on the Logic of Scientific
Method, including an examination of the fundamental
Conceptions and Principles of the Physical and His-
torical Sciences. In addition to Jevons’ Principles of
Science and Mills’ System of Logie (Books ΠΠῚ and VT)
Science, 2nd ed., and to the writings of HE. Mach.
Four hours a week.
ὁ Analysis of Berkeley’s Dialogues between “ Hylas and —
students will be referred to Pearson’s Grammar of
ἂρ ἢ
Advanced —
Pe a General Introduction to Philosophy; The Origin of Sections. —
Υ
j
Second
Year! τὸν
eines
hs
Ay
+
ΚΕ ΕΣ at ae
Ordinary.
Third or
Fourth —
Year.
Ῥ ὄρ a ee ee
ap eee ee al ES, ee
ee
Honecurs.
Third
Year.
106
3 B. Inthe Second Term an advanced course on the Psycho-
logy of Cognition, tracing, as far as possible, the prin-
cipal stages in the evolution of intelligence. The gen-
eral problem, also, of the nature of knowledge is dis-
cussed, in view of the light which it throws on the
ultimate nature of reality. ‘The principal topics are
indicated in Murray’s Handbook of Psychology, Book I1;
but students are expected also to study selected passages
from the most important works on Psychology.
Four hours a week.
4 A, History of Modern Philosophy.
First Term: From the Renaissance to Kant.
Four hours a week.
4 B. Second Term: From Kant to the Present Time.
Teat-books recommended :—Falckenberg’s History of Modern
Philosophy ; Hoffding’s History of Modern Philosophy (2 vols.
translated by Meyer); Adamson’s Lectures on Modern
Philosophy.
Four hours a week.
5 A. In the First Term a course on Moral Philosophy, dis-
cussing the problem of Ethical Theory.
Four hours a week.
5 B. In the Second Term a course on Applied Ethics.
While these courses follow in general outline Murray’s Intro-
duction to Ethics, the student is expected to read portions of
other works recommended. 5
Four hours a week.
N.B.—In all the classes of Logic, Metaphysics and Moral
Philosophy, students are required to write essays or to perform
exercises.
Candidates for Honours are required to take the ordinary
course in Philosophy and the ordinary course either in Econ-
omics or in Political Science in one year.
6. A course in Greek Philosophy. This begins with the col-
onial period, during which philosophical activity was most ener-
eetic among the colonies of the Greeks in Asia Minor and Italy.
It then passes on to the Athenian period, beginning about the
middle of the fifth century B. C., when Philosophy found a
home in the greatest centre of intellectual life in the ancient
107
world. A third period is then described, during which Phiio-
sophy extends its culture over ancient life by the spread of the
great schools, especially the Stoical and the Epicurean, which
arose towards the end of the fourth century, B. C. Finally,
some account is given of the movement, of which Alexandria
was the centre and by which Greek Philosophy was brought
into contact with Oriental thought. The history is carried
down to the closing of the Pagan Schools in Athens by the
Emperor Justinian. Students are expected to make an indepen-
dent study of the fragments of one of the early philosophers,
and to write an essay embodying the results of their study.
Books of Reference: Zeller, History of Greek Philosophy, and
Windelband, History of Ancient Philosophy.
Two hours weekly.
ἡ. Plato and Aristotle. In this course it is expected that
some work of at least one of these thinkers will be read.
For 1903-4 the Theaetetus is prescribed.
One or two hours weekly.
8. English Empiricism, Idealism and Criticism. This
course will consist in reading and discussing the principal por-
tions of Locke’s Essay concerning the Human Understanding
(Books 1, 2,.4), Berkeley’s Principles of Human Knowledge,
Hume’s Inquiry and portions of the Treatise on Human Nature.
Two hours a week.
9. Theory of Knowledge. This course will be both historical
and critical.
Books recommended :—Seth’s Scottish Philosophers, Lotze’s
Logic and selected portions of Bradley’s Logic, Bosanquet’s
Logic and Ritchie’s Darwin and Hegel.
One or two hours a week.
10. Reading and discussion of Kant’s Prolegomena and por-
tions of the Critique of Pure Reason, as an introduction to
Kantian Philosophy. In connection with this course the fol-
lowing works are recommended: Morris, Kant’s Critique of
Pure Reason, 3rd edition (Grigg’s Philosophical Classics),
Caird’s Critical Philosophy of Kant, 2nd edition, and Adamson’s
Lectures on Kant.
Two hours weekly.
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
it “11. The Principles and Methods of Ethies.
. : wick, Method of Ethics; Green, Prolegomena to Ethics.
πο Two hours a week.
: 12. An Introduction to Philosophy. An advanced course
την - dealing with fundamental problems of. Metaphysics and with
cy” leading types of philosophical theory, such as Materialism,
Bap", Idealism, Dualism, and Monism. There will be opportunity
Rae. for jnformal discussions. ; ;
ΤΩΝ Books of Reference:—Kiilpe’s Introduction to Philosophy ;
Ὁ; Watson’s Outline of Philosophy; Riehl’s Theory of Science and
Bas Metaphysics (translated by Fairbanks).
δὴν Two hours weekly in second term.
eae In addition to the above mentioned courses there will be an
examination at the end of the session on some book or books to
be read privately by students. Subjects for the session 1903-4:
and World as Will and Idea.
i Students are required to write an essay on Leibnitz’s Critique
ees of Locke in the Nouveaux Essats.
Be (Norn.—Vhe above progrdmme of studies in Mental and
ee Moral Philosophy is subject to modification on the appointment
i %, of the new Professors.)
ae
Nathematical and Physical Sciences.
(a) ΜΑΤΗΒΜΑΤΊΟΒ.
PROFESSOR (MATHEMATICS AND ASTRONOMY) :—
JAMES HARKNESS, M.A.
ASsocIATE PROFESSOR:—H. M. Tory, M.A., D.Sc.
BA
og LECTURER:—Mutrray Macnei.i, M.A.
a
ΕἾ \ 1:
| (0) Puystics.
ὯΝ JoHN Cox, M.A.
ἢ PROFESSORS ἐπ RUTHERFORD, M.A., Ὁ. Sc.
ἢ eit : ASSISTANT PROFESSOR :—HoWARD T. BARNES, DSc
Go
ον Ὁ DEMonNstTRATORS :—C. C. ScuENK, ῬΉ.Ώ., S. J. ALLAN, B.Sc.
ee:
SiGrdinary. al Maruewatics—Arithmetic.—Euclid, Books ΙΝ 2, 3, 4, 6
_ First Year. (omitting propositions 27 ,28, 29), with definitions of
ee Book 5, Hall and Stevens:—Hall and Knight’s Ele-
mentary Algebra (omitting Chapters 36, 40, 41, 42); or
5/3 Books recommended :—Aristotle, Nichomachean Ethics; Sidg- ΤᾺ
Spinoza’s Ethic, Schopenhauer’s Principle of Sufficient Reason
ἔν.
the same subjects in similar text-books.—Hall and
-Knight’s or Locke’s Elementary Trigonometry. Nature
and use of Logarithms.
Four hours a week.
2. Puysics.—This course has two objects: (1) to give the
‘minimum acquaintance with Physical Science requisite for a
a - liberal education to those whose studies will be mainly liter-
ary; (2) to be introductory to the courses in Chemistry and
ae other branches of Natural Science, and to the more detailed
Bs courses in Physics in the Third and Fourth Years. Only
= the most important principles in each branch of the subject
will be treated, as far as possible with reference to their his-
torical development and mutual relations; and they will
receive concrete illustration in the study of the principal in-
_ struments in daily use in the laboratory. Two illustrated
ΝΣ lectures will be given per week. During the session each
τ΄. student will be required to attend in ihe laboratory eight
᾿ times, and make measurements involving the use of the fol-
[ lowing instruments:—Balance, Pendulum, Barometer, Ther-
mometer, Sonometer, Telescope or Microscope. Tangent Gal-
vanometer, Wheatstone’s Bridge.
Primary Phenomena (“States and Properties of Matter’),
(a Motion, Velocity, Acceleration, Laws of Motion, Momentum,
= Energy, Work. The Parallelogram Law for Velocities and
4 Forces, Equilibrium and the Simple Machines. Uniform cir-
cular motion, Vibration, the Pendulum, Fluid Pressure, the
Barometer, Specific Gravity. Summary of Mechanics, indi-
cating the principle of the Conservation of Energy.
The niissing Energy traced in (1) Sound. Nature of wave
Motion. Intensity, Pitch and Quality of Musical Notes.
The stretched String and Organ Pipe. Resonance.
(2) Heat. Temperature and the Thermometer. The Calo-
rimeter, Fusion and Vaporisation. Laws of Boyle and Gay-
Iussac. The Mechanical Equivalent. Application of Con-
duction, Convection and Radiation to common problems of
Climate, Ventilation, ete.
(3) Light. Reflection, Refraction, the Spherical Mirror,
Prism, Lens, Microscope, Telescope, Spectroscope, Polari-
scope. Principle of Interference and sketch of the Undula-
tory ‘Theory.
Outline of Syllabus. The scope and method of Science, -
So Pie Wea ae ΡΕα Ὧν
gawd
‘* : Ἷ
Ron
out αἴ
τε
a
cet
>
Second
Year,
110
(4). Electricity and Magnetism. The Electrophorus, the
Modern Induction Machine, the Condenser. Coulomb’s Law
of Force. The idea of Potential. The Quadrant, Electro-
meter. Atmospheric Electricity. | Magnetic Pole, Moment,
Field and Law of Force. The Compass and Terrestrial Mag-
netism. Effects of Current. The Voltameter and Storage
Cell. The Galvanometer. Heating Effects. Simple Bat-
teries. Ohm’s Law. Units and Measurement of Current
Resistance, Electromotive Force, Mutual Mechanical Effects
of Conductors and Magnetic Fields. Principle of the Elec-~
tric Motor. The Electro-magnet. Induction of Currents,
and Principle of the Dynamo. Applications to Telegraph,
Telephone, Lighting, and supply of Power.
Conclusion.—Restatement of Principle of Conservation of
Energy in complete form. Dissipation of Energy.
Two hours a week.
3. A. Maruematics.—Algebra.—Exponential and Logarith-
mic series; Undetermined Coefficients; Partial Frac-
tions; Elementary Theory of Probabilities; Elements of
Determinants; Geometrical Conic Sections—Solid
Geometry (Euclid, Bk. XI and first two props of Bk.
XII, or equivalent):—Spherical Trigonometry (Solu-
tion of Spherical Triangles with proofs of the necessary
preliminary propositions and formulae).
Téat-books:—Hall and Wnight’s Higher Algebra; Wil-
son’s Solid Geometry and Conic Sections.
Two hours a week.
3. B. Dynamics.—This course is chiefly experimental, and
deals with:—Range and Time of Flight of Projectiles;
Morin’s Machine; Laws of Direct Impact of Elastic
Bodies; Simple Harmonic Motion; Simple and Com-
pound Pendulum; Determination of Gravity; Moments
of Inertia, and their Experimental Determination; Mo-
ment of Momentum, and Energy of a Rotating Body.
One hour a week.
Third or 4. Marnuematics.—EHlementary Analytical Geometry; LEle-
Fourth
Year.
mentary parts of the Differential and Integral Calcu-
lus; Simple Differential Equations.
Four hours a week.
Astronomy AND Optics.—T'wo hours a week. Half
course.
Macdonald Physics Building.—A Lecture Theatre.
Macdonald Physics Building.—An Elementary Electrical Laboratory.
111]
s A. Asrronomy.—Galbraith and MHaughton’s Astronomy
or Brinkley by Stubbs and Briinnow. Lockyer’s Ele-
mentary Astronomy (English edition), and Gall’s “Hasy
Guide to the Constellations” are recommended as intro-
ductory.—The subject is taken with Optics as a half
course. The lectures will be given before Christmas.
First term; two hours a week.
5. B. Oprics.—Two hours a week, from January to end of
Session. Text-book:—Galbraith and Haughton.
6. Mecuanics AND Hyprosratics.—Tezt-book:— Loney,
Mechanics. Half course.
y. A. EXPERIMENTAL Prysics.—(First Course.)—Laws of En-
ergy, Sound, Light and Heat. Teat-books :—Deschanel,
Part IV, or Ganot or Jones; Heat (Wright’s, Long-
mans).
Lectures fully illustrated; two hours a week, with Lab-
oratory Course, three hours a week.
Laboratory Manuals.—Pitcher and Tory; Chandler.
ἡ B. Sounp.—Velocity of Sound; Determination of Rates of
vibration of Tuning Forks; Resonance; Laws of vibra-
tion of strings.
ἡ C. Licur.—Photometry; Laws of Reflection and Refrac-
tion; Indices of Refraction; Focal Lengths and Mag-
nifying Powers of Mirrors, Lenses, Telescopes and
Microscopes; the Sextant, Spectroscope, Spectrometer,
Diffraction Grating, Optical Bench and Polariscopes.
Heat.—Construction and Calibration of Thermometers ;
Melting and Boiling Points; Air Thermometer ; Expan-
sion of solids, liquids and gases; Calorimetry; Specific
and Latent Heats; Laws of Vapour Pressure; Radia-
tion; the Mechanical Equivalent of Heat.
8. EXPERIMENTAL Puysics.—(Second Course.)—Hlectricity
and Magnetism. Teat-book:—Ganot or δ. P. Thomp-
son.
Lectures fully illustrated; two hours a week, with Lab-
oratory Course, three hours a week.
Laboratory Manual—Pitcher and Tory.
Third
Year.
Fourth
Year.
»"Ἥ" ψυ; ᾿» 4 ὴκ" yy Tom = > eS Ὁ 4. BUCS ὦ" ἌΡ ΣΉ Β, 7s)
Rl i LANNE ht ἘΦ ἘΝ ei MM bet ie ΚΥΡΉΝΗΝ Κρ ge Ve Thi ls
er | k ΓΝ ν᾽ * ‘
> - i
ae je te ae ae - ‘ δὰ
ΝΑ es , eh
112
Measurement of Pole Strength and Moment of
a Magnet; the Magnetic Field; Methods of Deflec-
tion and Oscillations; Comparison of moments and de-
termination of elements of Earth’s magnetism. Fric-
tional Electricity. Current Electricity—Complete course
of measurements of Current Strength, Resistance and
Klectromotive Force; Calibration of Galvanometers;
the Hlectro-dynamometer; Comparison of Galvanome-
ters; the Electrometer; Comparison of Condensers;
hiectromagnetic Induction.
N.B.— For advanced Courses intended for Electrical En-
gineering Students and Graduates pursuing the study of
Physics, see Calendar, Faculty of Applied Science.
(2) Mathematics.
Advanced 9. Mareemarics.—Hall and Stevens, Euclid; Casey, Sequel
Sections. to Huclid; Hall and Knight, Advanced Algebra; Tod-
Ginsu Near. hunter or Burnside and Panton, Theory of Equations
: (selected course). Two or three hours each week.
10. Mararmarics—Lock, Higher Trigonometry, with McClel-
land and Preston, Spherical Trigonometry, Part I; Sal-
mon, Conic Sections, chapters 1, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, and 10 to
13 inclusive; Williamson, Differential and Integral Cal-
culus (selected course).
Four hours a week.
(Ὁ) Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Honour 11. Maruemartics.—Williamson, Differential and Integral
Courses. Caleulus; and Boole or Forsyth, Differential Equations,
Halon or Salmon, Geometry of Three Dimensions (alternate
Years. vears) ; Quaternions (Kellund and Tait).
; Astronomy.—Godtray.
Two hours a week. |
4
Sine 12. MatHematicaL Puysics.—Minchin, Statics, Vol. I (se-
ear
lected chapters) ; Williamson and Tarleton, Dynamics.
Chaps. 1 to 8, inclusive; Besant, Vol. I, Hydro-
Mechanics, Part.J, chaps. 1, 2, 3, 7; Parkinson, Optics.
EXPERIMENTAL PHysics.—Course 7.
Two hours a week.
18. ῬΗΎΒΙΟΑΙ, Asrronomy.—Godfray, Lunar Theory; or Fourth
Cheyne, Planetary Theory; Newton, Principia, Lib. I,
secs 9 and 11, with the necessary preliminary proposi-
> tions.
14. MarurmaticaL Puysics.—Minchin, Statics, Vol. ΤΙ, se-
lected chapters; Williamson and‘ Tarleton, Dynamics;
Routh, Dynamics of a Rigid Body (for reference) ;
Besant, Hydro-Mechanics; Preston, Theory of Light;
Cumming, Theory of Electricity.
EXPERIMENTAL PHysics.—Course 8.
‘ .
Special courses for Graduates and Advanced Students will
be delivered during the Session 1903-4, by Professors Cox and
‘Rutherford, at hours to be arranged. Subjects—The Relations
between Optics and Electricity; and Radioactivity.
(ec) Experimental Physics.
15. Courses 7, 8, (10 hours a week. Elements of the Cal- Honour ~
culus; Simple ἘΠ ΤΠ Equations; Elements of Analytical ee
Geometry, Elementary Dynamics of a Particle; Elementary
Rigid Dynamics.
16. Advanced Courses in Heat, Optics and Electricity. A Fourth
short course in Physical Chemistry. Year.
(Norse.—The programme of studies in Mathematics is sub-
ject to modification on the appointment of the new Professor.)
Chemistry.
PROFESSORS :—B. J. HARRINGTON, M.A., PH.D., LL.D.
J. WALLACE WALKER, M.A., PH.D.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR :—NEVIL NORTON Evans, M.A.Sc.
DEMONSTRATORS :— A. DouGLAS McIntTosH, M.A.
BERTRAM D. STEELE, D.Sc.
E. H. ARCHIBALD, A.M., PH.D.
LECTURE ASSISTANT :—M. VIOLETTE Dover, B.A., M.Sc.
1. GENERAL CHEMISTRY.—A Course of lectures on Elementary Second
Chemical Theory, and on the principal elements and Year:
their compounds. ‘The lectures are fully illustrated by
means of experiments. :
Text-book :—Newth’s Tee HOO of Inorganic Chem-
istry.
Three hours a week.
hird Year ©
oe eee
he 7
ὡς a a
v
Bed soit
πῶς;
ἘΞ
ὟΣ
ee #5
) ee
A’ Aes
Ἔ
=
ἐ ΣΝ νον αι,
114
ELEMENTARY PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.—This course is
compulsory for all undergraduates taking the above
course of lectures. The work includes experiments il-
lustrative of the Laws of Chemical Combination, the
Preparation of Pure Chemical Compounds, and elemen-
tary Qualitative Analysis.
Six hours a week.
Third ὦ. INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—An elementary course on special
Year. departments of Inorganic Chemistry.
Two hours a week during the first term.
3. ELEMENTARY ORGANIC CiEeMIsTRY.—An elementary course
of lectures on’ Organic Chemistry open to Biological
Students and compulsory for students intending to take
the advanced course on Organic Chemistry in the Fourth
Year.
Text-book.—Hollman’s Text-book of Organic Chem-
istry.
Two hours a week during the second term.
4. ADVANCED PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.—Laboratory practice in
methods of gravimetric, volumetric and_ electrolytic
Quantitative Analysis, during the first term, and pre-
paration of simple Organic Substances in the second
term.
Note.— xtra reading and laboratory work will be required
from Honour Students.
The Organic Laboratory will be open during the Second
Term for Biological Students who desire to obtain an ele-
mentary knowledge of the methods employed in preparing Or-
ganic Substances.
Fourth 5. Organic CHemistry.—A systematic course of lectures on
Meat: Organic Chemistry, including the Analysis of Organic
Substances, Calculation of Formule, Determination of
Molecular Weights, Polymerism, Isomerism, etc., fol-
lowed by a discussion of the more important derivatives
of the Aliphatic and Aromatic Series of Compounds.
Students intending to enter the Medical Faculty would
find this course of great advantage.
Two hours a week.
ΜΌΝ ARIA τὰ
a a
ἐι
: 115
6. PracticaL OrGaANic CHEMISTRY.—A complete course on
the preparation and analysis of Organic Substances, with
_ determinations of Molecular Weights, etc.
=
y. PuystcaL Curmistry.—The lectures on Physical Chemis-
try are divided into two parts. In the first term they
¥ include a study of such physical properties of gases,
liquids, and solids as are known to depend upon their
Chemical Constitution, Thermo-chemistry and the Law
of Mass Action. ‘The second term is devoted to Electro-
chemistry. The lectures will be based upon the applica-
tions of the gaseous laws to solutions.
8. PracticaL PuysicaL CHEemistry.—Laboratory work will
include the various methods of determining the Mole-
cular Weights of gases and of substances in solution,
accurate measurement of Densities, Refractive Indices,
? Surface Tensions and Specific Rotations; also examples
᾿ of Chemical Statics and Kinetics, and Electro-chemical
measurements.
9. MinrERAL ANALYSIS.—A course of laboratory work compris-
ing advanced quantitative analysis and investigation of
the constitution of mineral species.
(1) Chemistry, 2, 3, 4; (2) Experimental Physics; (Course
| 7); and one of the following :—Mechanics (Course 6 A), with
a Differential and Integral Calculus (4 hours a week for the
: first half of second term or 2 hours a week for whole term), or
Biology, or Geology, or Mineralogy.
(1) Chemistry, 5, 6, 7, 8; or 7, 8, 9; (2) Experimental
Physics (Course 8).
Mineralogy.
PROFESSOR :—B. J. HARRINGTON, M.A., PH.D.
1. Mryrratocy.—Lectures and demonstrations illustrated by
: models and specimens in the Peter Redpath Museum
᾿ and the Macdonald Chemistry and Mining Building.
i Among the subjects discussed are: Crystallography; phy-
ο΄. sical properties of minerals dependent upon light, elec-
=. tricity, state of aggregation, ete.; chemical composition,
i calculation of mineral formule, quantivalent ratios, etc. ;
principles of classification, description of species.
Two hours a week.
Honour
Courses.
Third
Year.
Fourth
Year.
Honours.
Third
Year.
2. MINERALOGY. an ΞΕ οἱ No. 1) _—Deseriptio
_ Species, particular attention being paid to those which a
are important as rock constituents and to the economic
minerals of Canada. ; Π ὁ i
First term, two hours a week. ,
5. DETERMINATIVE MINERALOGY.—Laboratory practice in
blow-pipe analysis and its application to the Senge πε
ation of mineral species. This work is carried on in
the new laboratory provided for the puLpose in the Chem- :
istry and Mining Building. pred
Thursday, 2 to 5 p.m.
Elementary Biology.
PROFESSORS :—D. P. PENHALLOW, M.Sc.
HE. W. MacBripg, M.A., D:Sc-
This course is designed for those who may wish an. intro-
᾿ duction to the principles of general biology, but who cannot
Ὁ ΟΝ, carry such work beyond the limits of an elementary course;
for students in Arts proceeding to Medicine; and also for those
who may wish to take the more advanced work of the Third =
ἊΝ and Fourth Years to which it will be introductory.
.
A. ZooLtocy.—First half session.. This course will com-
mence the study of a selected number of types, leading up to
and including the rudiments of vertebrate anatomy and forming —
an introduction to the more systematic work of the Third and
Fourth Years.. The types selected are Ameeba, Parameecium, -
Hydra, Lumbricus, Scyllium, and Rana.
B. Borany.—Second half session. A course in the general
morphology of plants SN nee a discussion of the general ΤΣ “4
Ὶ principles of morphology and classification, respiration, photo- _ a
synthesis, nutrition, reproduction, symbiosis and adaptations,
as also the relations of plants in geological time. ‘These studies
will be illustrated by means of special types taken from the
principal groups, and emphasis will be given to a study of-the |
flowering plants, including herbarium work, determination of —
a species and geographical distribution. ἐς ἧς
ἐπ This course is designed with special reference to those who
, may not be able to carry such work beyond the limits of. an
ie 7
In the Zoological Laboratories.
Laboratory of Normal Histology.
᾿»
τς Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week.
ΟΠ G. Continuation Course IN ANIMAL BrioLocy.—Students
ΜΝ
slementary course, where it will form the basis for more special-
jzed work in the Third and Fourth Years.
_ taking the combined six-year course leading to the degrees of
B.A. and M.D. or B.Sc. and M.D. may, in lieu of B, take the
following course, but in the event of their doing so must
‘complete the Botany required for the Medical course in the
Apu Lerma ——
A study of the anatomy and osteology of the Rabbit followed
by a detailed study of microscopic structure of its tissues.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods a week during the
spring term.
Botany. '
PROFESSOR :—D. P. PENHALLOW, M.Sc.
LECTURER :—C. M. Derick, M.A.
at Ἢ = - Healt ᾿ ‘ ς
1. Puant ΒΙΟΙΟΘΎ. (See page 116). This course is intro- Second
-ductory to the more specialized work of the Third and Fourth Year.
Years, and will be represented by a number of types, including
the flowering plants and a determination of species:
Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week during
the spring term.
2. SprciaL MorpHoLogy. This course is designed to give Ordinaryial
a comprehensive knowledge of plant structures and relation- Third a
ships. The principles of development will be illustrated by Years;
type studies which may also serve as the basis of more special
work in Bacteriology, Physiology, Ecology, or Paleo-botany.
It comprises :— ὶ ae
(a) First Half-Sesston. During the autumn term, atten-
tion will be directed to a study of the general histology of the
plant, with special reference to the seed plants and as a basis
for the more advanced work of the Fourth Year, to differential
reactions, methods of staining, imbedding, section cutting and
general technique.
This course will be especially adapted to chemists as applied
to a study of food adulterants, etc.; to those who are intending
to follow a medical course, as a preparation for animal his-
tology, and it will be required of all who elect the course in the
Fourth Year.
{
Ordinary.
Fourth
Year.
Ordinary.
Fourth
Year.
118
The course presupposes familiarity with the optics of the
microscope as given in Physics (3) of the Second Year.
(b) Critical studies of the Thallophyta by means of selected
types designed to illustrate the origin of organs, the origin and
development of sex, the division of labour and the general laws
of development.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week throughout
the session.
3. SPECIAL MorPHoLoey.
(a) The complete study of a selected series of types, illus-
trating the structure, origin and relationships of the Bryo-
phytes, and Pteridophytes.
(b) The special morphology of the Seed Plants as repre-
sented by types illustrative of the principal groups, with special
reference to relationship, development and adaptations.
Students entering upon this course will be required to present
qualifications equivalent to the course of the Third Year.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week through-
out the session.
For the work of the Third and Fourth Years, each student
will be required to provide himself with a laboratory drawing
book of specified form, and with necessary pencils, slides and
cover glasses.
4, SysteMATIC Borany.—A_ practical course embracing
herbarium work and the systematic study of the seed plants
with reference to the determination of species, their environ-
ment and mutual relations. These studies will be prosecuted
with special reference to a field knowledge of the ferns and
flowering plants in the neighbourhood of Montreal.
This course is designed to complete and round out the
study of the higher plants as given in the courses on Special
Morphology (2 and 3). Students specializing in Botany will
be required to follow this as part of the ordinary course of the
Fourth Year. The course is also open to teachers of schools
and to others who may have gained a knowledge equivalent to
that represented by Gray’s Structural Botany.
Two hours laboratory each week throughout the session, with
field days as may be arranged for.
119
B.A. Honour CoursrE IN BIOLOGY.
5. Candidat:s for Honours in the Third Year will, in addi-
tion to the ordinary work of that year, take a special course of
reading under the direction of the professor, who will hold a
colloquium once each week for the purpose of giving advice
and direction in such work.
For the Session of 1903-1904, the following works will be
read :—Fossil Plants, Seward, Vol. 1; Studies in Fossil Botany,
D. H. Scott.
6. Candidates for Honours in the Fourth Year will take a
course in experimental plant physiology based upon the follow-
ing works :—
Pfeffer, Plant Physiology; MacDougall, Experimental Plant
Physiology; Darwin and Acton, Practical Physiology of Plants.
Special easy work upon the experiments performed, and upon
collateral readings, will be assigned from time to time during
the session.
Students will not be permitted to take this course unless they
have previously taken the course prescribed for the Second
Wear.
One lecture and six laboratory hours per week.
B.Sc. COURSE.
6. Students proceeding to the degree of B.Sc. will be re-
quired to take the ordinary course of the Third Year Arts, (2)
and also one-half of the Honour course for that year.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week through-
out the session.
Colloquium one hour per week during the spring term.
During the Fourth Year, students proceeding to the degree
of B.Sc. will be required to pursue special studies in extension
of the work of the Fourth Year Arts, (3), in accordance with
such plan as may be adopted by the B.Sc. Committee at the
time of his entrance upon that year.
Zoology.
PROFESSOR :—E. W. MaAcBRIDE, M.A., D.Sc
LECTURER :—J. STAFFORD, M.A., PH.D.
DEMONSTRATOR:—J. C. SIMPSON.
1A. ANIMAL BroLocy (see Biology, p. 116).
This course includes a careful study of the laws of
Biology as illustrated by a selected series of types,
Special stress is laid on the study of the elements of
Honours.
Third
Year:
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
Ordinary
Third
Year
Fourth
Year.
Ordinary-
Biology.
Second
Year.
᾿ Ordinary-
re Third or
wey) 6 Fourth
Year.
Ordinary
Third or
Fourth
Year.
Oy i Plea ΡΥ A
vertebrate anatomy and physiology, to which the most
of the time is devoted. The types studied are Ameeba,
Parameecium, Hydra, Lumbricus, Seyllium and Rana.
This course, together with the corresponding course
in Botany, constitutes the course in General Biology.
It can, however, be taken along with 1 B instead of
Botany, by students who are taking the combined six-
year course in Arts and Medicine leading to the degrees
of B.A. and M.D., and of B.Se. and M.D.
Two lectures and two demonstrations a week during the
autumn terin.
1 B. ConrTrnvaTIon Course IN ANIMAL BioLtocy.—This
course comprises a further study of vertebrate anatomy,
including a detailed study. of the tissues. The type se-
lected is the Rabbit, of which the osteology and gross
anatomy are first studied, and then the finer structure
of the tissues. ‘The practical work includes instruction
in the staining and mounting of sections.
.Two lectures and two demonstrations a week during the
spring term.
2 A. GENERAL Zoo.ocy.—This course consists of a general
survey of the principal classes of animals. It is
specially suited to the requirements of those who in-
tend to take geology, and the structure of fossil species
is studied along with that of their living representa-
tives.
Two lectures and two demonstrations a week throughout
the session.
ἢ . Sprcrat ZooLocy.—This course comprises :—
(a) A special study of those groups in the animal
kingdom, the members of which are concerned in pro-
ducing disease.
(0) A study of the comparative anatomy of the
Veriebrata, with special reference to the osteology.
(c) A study of Comparative Embryology, with special
reference to the Vertebrata, forming an introduction
io Human Embryology.
Two lectures and two demonstrations a week throughout
the session.
3. A special course in Embryology, consisting of 8 lectures
and 8 periods of laboratory instruction, is given after the con-
121
clusion of the regular courses of lectures, during the month
_ of April. Though this course is designed specially for the
benefit of medical students it is open to all undergraduates in
the Faculty of Arts.
Students are required to have taken 1 A and either 1 B or
2 A before proceeding to 2 B. It is in most cases advisable
that 1 A should be taken before proceeding to 2 A; but it is
possible for the student, by a certain amount of extra reading
and laboratory work, to cover the ground required for 2 A,
even if 1 A has not been taken.
_ For all the courses a study of Shipley and MacBride’s Text-
book of Zoology is required.
B.A. Honour Course ry Brionoey.
(For the Botanical portion of this course, see p. 119).
4. During the Third Year, students pursuing the Honour
course in Biology will take the course 2 A, and in addition
pursue a course of reading under the direction of the Pro-
fessor. The Professor will hold a colloquium once a week
in order to supervise the studies of honour students.
The books studied during 1903-1904 will be: Darwin, Ori-
gin of Species, and Wallace, Island Life.
5. During the Fourth Year, honour students will take
courses 1 B and 2 B, and pursue in addition a course of extra
reading, supervised, as in the Third Year, by the Professor.
The books studied during 1903-1904, will be: Romanes,
Darwin and after Darwin; and Balfour, Comparative Embry-
ology, Vol. I.
No student is permitted to attend the lectures without taking
the practical work. For use in the laboratory, a special note-
book and a set of disseciing insiruments are required, and will
be supplied to the student, who is required to pay a fee of
$2.50 to cover the cost of these.
6. B.Sc. Course.—Students proceeding to the degree of
B.Se., will in the Third Year be required to take 2 A., ‘and, in
addition, a special course of reading under the supervision of
the professor during the spring term. In the Fourth Year they
will take 2 B., and, in addition, such extra reading and
laboratory work as may be required by the B.Sc. Committee.
Honours.
Third
Year.
Honours.
Fourth
Year.
DS
Re
le &
Ye sie Mais a
Re eee
ἘΠ
és
he as
a
129
“
Geology.
PROFESSOR :—F RANK Ὁ. ADAMS, D.Sc., PH.D.
DEMONSTRATOR :—ALFRED W. G. WILSON, M.A., PH.D.
Ordinary 1. General Geology.—The lectures will embrace a general
Third survey of the whole field of Geology, and will be intro-
pest: duced by a short course in Mineralogy. Especial atten-
tion will be devoted to Dynamical Geology and to His-
torical Geology including a description of the fauna and
flora of the earth during the successive periods of its
past history.
The lectures will be illustrated by the extensive col-
lections in the Peter Redpath Museum, as well as by
models, maps, sections-and lantern views. There will
be an excursion every Saturday until the snow falls,
after which the excursion will be replaced by a demon-
stration in the Museum.
T ext-book:—Scott, An Introduction to Geology
Books of Reference:—Dawson, Hand-Book of Geo-
logy; Dana, Manual of Geology.
Three hours a week throughout the year, with additional
excursions and demonstrations as above stated.
Honours. Honour Course in Geology and Mineralogy.
Third : " d ὃ
+ ies (For Mineralogical portion of this course, see p. 115).
In the Third Year, students pursuing the Honour Course
will take the Ordinary work (General Geology, 1).
Honours. In the Fourth Year they will take the following courses (2,
Fourth 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7.
Year.
2. Petrography.—The modern methods of study employed in
Petrography are first described, and the classification
and description of rocks are then taken up.
One lecture a week during the first term. One after-
noon a week throughout the year will be devoted to
special microscopical work in the Petrographical Lab-
oratory.
T ext-book :—Harker, Petrology for Students.
Books cf Reference:—Rosenbusch, Mikroskopische
Physiographie, and Rutley, Rock-forming Minerals.
128
3. A. Paleontology.—An extension of the Paleontology of
Course 1, with special studies of some of the more im-
portant groups of fossils.
One lecture a week during the second term and one
demonstration a week, with special studies in the Peter
Redpath Museum.
Books of Reference:—Nicholson and Lydekker, Man-
ual of Paleontology; Zittel, Text-Book of Palxontology.
On
3. B. Physiography.—A description of Land Forms with
reference to their origin, classification, drainage, develop-
ment, climatic and human controls.
The physical features of Canada will be described dur-
ing the latter half of the course.
The course will consist of lectures, demonstrations,
and laboratory work, and will be illustrated by maps,
models, and lantern slides.
Two hours a week during the first term.
4, Ore Deposits, Economic Geology and Practical Geology.
—The nature, mode of occurrence and classification of
Ore Deposits will first be taken up. A series of typical
occurrences will then be described and their origin dis-
cussed—the more important non-metallic materials—
e.g., Fuels, Clay, Abrasive Materials, Building Stones,
etc., will be similarly treated, as well as questions of
water supply, Artesian Wells etc. The methods em-
ployed in carrying out Geological and Magnetic Surveys
and in constructing Geological Sections will then be
taken up with special studies in folding, faulting, ete.
Four lectures a week throughout the Second Term.
The course will be illustrated by maps, models, lantern
slides and specimens.
Text-books:—Geikie, Outlines of Field Geology;
Kemp, Ore Deposits of the United States and Canada;
Phillips and Louis, A Treatise on Ore Deposits.
Books of Reference:—The Monographs of the U. 5.
Geological Survey, and the Reports of the Geological
Survey of Canada.
5. Canadian Geology.—A general description of the Geology
and Mineral Resources of the Dominion. '
One lecture a week during the first term.
Tevt-book :—Dawson, Hand-hook of Geology.
Books of leeference:—Vhe Reports of the Geological
Survey of Canada.
6. Geological Colloquium.—A discussion each week of some
Geological topic, references to the literature of which
have been-given by the Professor in the week preceding.
The course is intended to give students some acquain-,
tance with Geological literature, as well as a wider know-
ledge of the great principles which underlie the Science.
One hour a week in second term.
“"
?. Geological Survey.—Candidates for Honours in the Fourth
Year will also undertake, under the direction of the
Demonstrator in Geology, a Geological Survey of some
suitable area selected for that purpose. ‘This Survey
will occupy two wecks, and will be made either at the
close of the Third Year or immediately before the open-
ing of the regular work of the Fourth Year, as may be
arranged by the Professor of Geology. The preparation
of a geological map of the surveyed area, the examination
of the specimens collected, and the writing of a detailed
report upon the area, will form part of the work of the
Fourth Year.
N.B.—A large amount of additional private reading will also
be required of Candidates for Honours.
Students taking any of these courses are entitled to tickets —
of admission to the Museum of the Natural History Society of
Montreal.
Course for B.A. Honours in Geology and Mineralogy.
Third Year—Geology (ordinary of Third Year). ~
Mineralogy.
Zoology (ordinary of Third Year).
Chemistry (of Second or Third Year).
Fourth Year.—Geology (Advanced)—lLectures, Lab. work,
Field work, Colloquium, Reading.
Mineralogy (Advanced).
Botany (ordinary of Third Year).
ἐλ σα ae
ἌΣ χὰ ΝῊ
we ἣν
125
Meteorology.
SUPERINTENDENT OF OBSERVATORY :—C. H. McLeop, Ma.E.
Instruction in Meteorological Observations will be given in
the Observatory at hours to suit the convenience of the senior
students.
- Certificates will be granted to those students who pass a
satisfactory examination on the construction and use of meteor-
q ological instruments and on the general facts of Meteorology.
ἥ a Pedagogy.
ἊΝ - Ἧ
57." LECTURER :—PRINCIPAL 5. P. Rosins, M.A., Li.D.
ΕἾ. Lectures on this subject will be given in the Normal ϑομοοί
ΕΒ. to undergraduates of the Third and Fourth Years, who wish
B? to obtain the Provincial Academy Diploma.
ae Lecture hours, Tuesdays and lridays, 2 to 3.
at Physical Training.
MEDICAL DIRECTOR OF PHYSICAL TRAINING :—
a ; R. Tarr McKEnNzI£, B.A.,. M.D.
The classes will meet at the University Gymnasium at hours
to be announced at the commencement of the Session. ‘The
4 Wicksteed. Silver and Bronze Medals (the gift of Dr. R. J.
Wicksteed) are offered for competition to students of the Gradu-
% ating Class and to students who have had instruction in the
Ἂ Gymnasium .for two sessions,—the silver medal to the former,
the bronze medal to the latter. (See p. 44.)
Ἂ
a Vill. Laboratories.
a The Macdonald Physical |! aboratories.
‘a The equipment of the Macdonald Physical Laboratories com-
εὖ prises: () apparatus for illustrating lectures; (2) simple forms
3 of the prijcipal instruments for use by the students in practical
Be work (3) the most recent types of all important instruments for
aa exact measurement, to be used in connection with special work and
research.
7 The basement contains the cellars, furnaces, and janitor’s depart-
ν ment at the west end of the building. The machine room—contain-
ae ing « small gas engine and dynamo, which are fitted for testing, but
can also be used for light and power, a motor-alternator and a
motor-dynamo—is situated at the extreme western corner of the
basement so as to be as far removed as possible from the delicate
126
magnetic and electrical instruments. Here is also the switch board
for controlling the various circuits for supplying direct or alternat-
ing current to different parts of the building. The Accumulator
Room contains a few large storage cells, charged by the motor-
dynamo, which are fitted with a suitable series-parallel arrangement
and with rheostats for obtaining and controlling large currents up
to 4,000 amperes for testing ammeters and low resistances, etc.
The Magnetic Laboratory contains magnetic instruments and
variometers of different patterns, and also a duplicate of the B. A.
Electro-dynamometer, which has been completely remodelled and
set up with great care for absolute measurements of current. The
Laboratory, on the opposite side of the basement contains a very
fine Lorenz apparatus for the absolute measurement of resistance,
constructed under the supervision of Prof. Viriamu Jones. It also
contains a set of Ewing Seismographs and a pair of Darwin Record-
ing Mirrors for measuring small movements of the soil.
There is a Constant Temperature Room, surrounded by double
walls, which contains a Standard Rieffler Clock, and is fitted for
comparator work.
The ground floor contains at the western corner a small machine
shop, fitted with a milling machine and suitable lathes and tools,
driven by electric motors, and such appliances as are required for
the making and repairing of the instruments, for which the services
of a mechanical assistant are retained. There is also a store room
for glass, chemicals and cleaning materials, and extensive lockers
and lavatories for the use of the students.
The Main Electrical Laboratory is a room 60 feet by 40, and is
fitted with a number of brick piers, which come up through the
floor, and rest on independent foundations, in addition to the usual
slate shelves round the walls. This room contains a large number
of electrometers, galvanometers, potentiometers and other testing
instruments of various patterns, and adapted for different uses. It
connects with a smaller room at the side, in which are kept the
resistance boxes and standards, and also the capacity standards. A
small research laboratory, adjoining the electrical laboratory, is fit-
ted up for the study of electrical discharge in high vacua, and for
work with Rontgen and uranium radiation, and with ultra-violet
light.
The First Floor contains the Main Lecture Theatre, with seats
for about 250 students. The lecture table is supported on separate
piers, which are independent of the floor. Complete arrangements
are provided for optical projections and illustration. The Prepara-
tion Room in the rear contains many of the larger pieces of lecture
apparatus, but the majority of the instruments, when not in use,
are kept in suitable cases in the adjoining apparatus room. On the
same floor there is the Heat Laboratory, devoted to advanced work
in Thermometry, Pyrometry and Calorimetry, and also to such elec-
trical work as involves the use of thermostats and the measurement
of the effects of temperature. There are also two smaller rooms for
Professors and Demonstrators.
The Second Floor is partly occupied by the upper half of the Lec:
ture Theatre. There is also an Examination Room for paper work,
a Mathematical Lecture Room, with a special apparatus room de-
voted to apparatus for illustrating Mathematical Physics, and a
special Physical Library chiefly devoted to reference books ‘and
periodicals relating to Physics. A store room, lavatories and Pro-
fessors’ Room occupy the remainder of the flat.
43S
-~
΄
Wore
a
—-— ~~ e
“=e. OU ϑμμανν
127
The Third Floor contains the Elementary Laboratory, a room 60
feet square, devoted to elementary practical work in Heat, Sound and
Electricity and Magnetism. There is a Demonstrator’s room adjoin-
ing, and an optical annex devoted to experiments with lenses, gal-
vanometers, ete., which require a darkened room. On the other side
of the building there is a spectroscopic room, containing a six-inch
Rowland grating, with mountings by Brashear, and other large spec-
trometers and polarimeters. Also a series of smaller optical rooms,
including a photometric room, specially fitted for Arc photometry,
and a dark room for photographic work. Communication between
the different flats is facilitated by means of a hydraulic elevator.
The building is lighted throughout by electricity, and heated by hot
water. The walls are of pressed brick, and the floors of hard maple.
There is a ventilating system, consisting of Tobin tubes and Suitable
exit flues, assisted by a fan in the roof.
The Macdonald Chemical Laboratories.
The main lecture-theatre, extending through two stories, is en-
tered from the ground floor, and seats nearly 250 students. The lec-
ture-table is supplied with coal-gas, oxygen and hydrogen, elec-
tricity, water, vacuum, down-draught, etc., and can be well seen
from all parts of the room.
Besides the main lecture-theatre, there ‘are three smaller class-
rooms, accommodating from 40 to 60 students each.
The three principal laboratories have each a floor-space of about
2,400 square feet, and together have accommodation for nearly two
hundred students working at a time. They are lighted on three
sides, and have ample hood space. One is intended for beginners,
and the others for more advanced work, more particularly in quali-
tative and quantitative analysis. In connection with each of the
main laboratories is a balance-room, equipped with balances by
several of the best makers.
Physcal Chemistry is provided for in a special laboratory, nearly
30 by 40 feet, lighted from the north, and supplied with electricity,
steam, vacuum pumps, etc. The equipment of this department con-
sists of the apparatus necessary for the determination of the specific
gravities of solutions, of the depression of freezing point, and the
rise of boiling point, of the densites of gases and vapours. There
are constant temperature baths for accurate measurement of solu-
bilities, Kohlrausch’s apparatus for determining the electrical con-
ductivity of solutions, and the apparatus necessary for measuring
the electro-motive forces generated between metals and their solu-
tions, and in voltaic cells generally. There are also calorimeters for
measuring the heat effects produced in chemical reactions. There
is on the same floor an optical room furnished with refractometers
for measuring the refractive indices of solutions, goniometers, po-
lariscopes and spectroscopes. Other forms of apparatus will be add-
ed as required for research work.
Immediately adjoining the laboratory of Physical Chemistry is
the Photographic department, supplied with two dark rooms, ar-
ranged on the maze system, and supplied with the necessary appli-
ances for all ordinary photographic work, including an enlarging
camera. Apparatus for micro-photography will shortly be added to
the equipment.
128
The laboratory for Gas Analysis has a northern exposure, and is
fitted with a large tank, to contain water at the temperature of the
room, for use in the measurement of gases. The tables are arranged
for work with mercury, and the laboratory is supplied with the
apparatus of Hempel, Dittmar, Orsat, Elliott, and others. It contains
also Fleuss, Boltwood, and Topler pumps for providing high vacua.
The laboratory for Electrolytic Analysis is supplied with accu-
mulators, thermopile, platinum electrodes, rheostats, ammeters, volt-
meters, etc.
Another room has lately been equipped with electric furnaces
and other appliances for electro-chemical work.
The Organic Department comprises a laboratory for preparations
and research, a combustion room for analysis, a dark room for po-
loriscope and sacharimeter work, and a lecture room. The labora-
tory is fitted with all the necessary ‘apparatus for organic re-
search—special hoods for work with poisonous gases, regulating
ovens for digesting and drying at various temperatures, filter press-
es for the extraction of raw materials, and various forms of ap-
paratus for distillation in vacuo. The dark room is equipped with
polariscopes and saccharimeters for sugar work. There is a large
quantity of the necessary organic chemicals, which are supplied
free of charge to students engaged in routine or research work in
this department.
The laboratory for Determinative Mineralogy has places for 28
students, and is supplied with abundant material for practical work.
It adjoins the lecture-room, in which the lectures on advanced
minéralogy are delivered. The mineralogical department is also pro-
vided with suitable machinery, run by electricity, for cutting and
polishing minerals. :
The Lbrary contains a valuable collection of the most recent
English, French and German books, and sets of various journals and
transactions, including the Berichte der Deutschen Chemischen Ge-
sellschaft, Journal fiir praktische Chemie, Chemisches Central-blatt,
Fresenius’ Zeitschrift fiir Analytische Chemie, Zeitschrift fiir Anor-
ganische Chemie, Annales de Chimie et de Physique, Journal of the
Chemical Society, Journal of Physical Chemistry, American Che-
mical Journal, Chemical News, Zeitschrift fiir physikalische Chemie,
Zeitschrift fiir Elektrochemie, Mineralogische und Petrographische
Mittheiliingen, ete. The library is open to students under Such re-
strictions as are necessary to prevent damage or loss of books.
The rooms for allied purposes have, as far as possible, been
grouped together on the same floor, and there is a hydraulic lift
running from the basement to the attic. The offices and principal
laboratories and supply rooms are also connected by a system of
telephones, The building is practically fire-proof. ;
Botanical Laboratories.
The Botanical Laboratories occupy the upper floor of the central
Arts building.
The laboratory for general Morphology provides table accommo-
dation for twenty students, and is equipped with all the necessary
appliances for the practical study of plants, either fresh or dry.
In connection with this laboratory, a large collection of dried
plants is maintained, from which material is drawn for practical
work.
Mathematical Laboratory
ratory.
oO
Petrographical Lab
ἣν ὙΠ ιν ἐν ἀν ΟΝ i
129
The laboratories for special Morphology at present afford accom-
modation for twelve students. Each table is provided With a com-
plete outfit of instruments and reagents. Provision is also made
for accurate micrometric work, and for the production of accurate
drawings by means of the camera lucida and Leitz’s drawing instru-
ment. More special instruments, including polariscope, Spectroscope
and photographing apparatus, afford opportunity for detailed studies
in these several directions.
An investigator’s table held by the University at the Biological
Laboratory, Wood’s Hall, Massachusetts, is available for such stu-
dents as may sucessfully complete the advanced course of the Third
and Fourth Years.
Zoological Laboratories.
The Zoological Department occupies the whole of the uppermost
floor of the east wing of McGill College and the larger portion of
the floor immediately below.
It consists of:—
(a). A large laboratory affording accommodation for a class of
90 students.
(b). A smaller laboratory capable of seating about 18 students.
(c) Three smaller laboratories fitted up for purposes of research.
(d). A room fitted up for the University Osteologist.
Dissecting trays, simple and compound microscopes, reasonable
quantities of the ordinary reagents and of glass are provided by
the department, but students must provide themselves with dissect-
ing instruments, and with razors.
The Department is provided with four large tanks and a number
of smaller ones in order to maintain a supply of fresh specimens
throughout the winter.
The subjects for practical work, are, so far as possible, selected
from species inhabiting the vicinity of Montreal.
The laboratories are well provided with thermostats, microtomes,
and other instruments required for advanced research. There is also
a small library attached to the department.
A complete set of apparatus for microphotographic work has
recently been added to the equipment of the laboratory.
Petrographical Laborator .
The Petrographical Laboratory, containing the chief rock collec-
tions of the University, is situated in the Macdonald Chemistry and
Mining Building, and is arranged for the use of Honour and Graduate
students. It is provided with a number of petrographical microscopes
by Seibert and Crouch, as well as with models, sets of thin sections,
electro-magnets, heavy solutions, ete., for petrographicai work.
For purposes of study and comparison, in connection with ad-
vanced work and petrographical investigation, Dr. Adams’ extensive
private collection of rocks and thin sections is available.
130
TIME TABLES.—FACULTY OF ARTS.
LECTURES.
First Year—Men.
Hours.| Monpbay. TUESDAY. W RDNESDAY. THURSDAY. | FRIDAY. SATURDAY,
a 2 | | |
9 Latin. Math, Math. French. | Latin. |
—_—— στ
]
10 | French. Greek. Latin. Greek. Greek. |
ll Math. French. English. German. History.
12 English. German. German, English. Physics.
Ὁ Greek. Eng. Comp. French. Latin. Math.
3 Physics. German.
|
4 |
8
First YEAR—WOMEN.
Hours.| Monpay. TUESDAY. V]EDNESDAY. THURSDAY. Fripay. | Saturpay,
!
9 Greek. Physics. Greck. Greek, | Greek. |
10 English, History. French. French. Math.
ee ΕΣ ΙΞ at
11 German. Math. Latin, | English. | French.
12 Latin. Latin. Math. | German. Latin.
i]
| |
2 Math. French, German. | Physics, English.
3 Eng. Comp. | German.
4 | ἢ | ;
“A |
ΞΈΘΟΝΌ YEAR—MEnN,
()
Monpay TUESDAY WEDNESDAY THURSDAY, FRIDAY. SATURDAY
; 9 Sener Logic. eee | French. French. Chem. Lab.
56. 10 Latin Latin. _ Greek. core qubrew- || Chemewate
u Math. Chenier English Latin. Math. Ἐκ περ εν
ee 12 English, Greek. Che mistry. English. Chemistry: nae
ΕἸΣ 2 Greek. Biology. French. Math. Biology.
an 3 Chem. Lab. ΤῊΝ Latin. Logie ouaees
έΠΠρΠἐ tee, 1) SN Lae a |) te,
ΚΠ: 5 Chem. Lab. French. Eee Logic. ae
Seconp YEAR—WoOMEN.
Hours.| Monpay. TUESDAY. WEDNESDAY. | THURSDAY. FRIDAY. SATURDAY.
9 Greek. Latin. French. Latin. Math. Chem. Lab.
“ee 10 cliche Math. Math. French, Latin. Chem. Lal.
“a 11 Logic Chemistry. German. English. German.
ee: 12 German. Greek. Chemistry. | Logic. Chemistry.
ἘΞ | | eae Β6Ξ
2 Biol. Lab. French. Latin. | Bioi. Lab. a
ες 3 Biol. Lab. | Chem. Lab. Biology. Biol. Lab.- ᾿ French j
| =
4 Biology. Chem, Lab. Logie. Greek, Greek.
5 German. ; a
During Second Term.
Prrvary Courses (Turrp AND FourtH YEARS).
Se: ὙῚ ΠΤ ee ἘΡ ee ee we τ τ ἢ
| Monpay. TuESDAY. | WBPDNESDAY. THURSDAY. FRIDAY. SATURDAY,
| Geology. | Geology.
Sanskrit. | Chem, Sanskrit. Latin. Chem. Lab.
| 9 |Hist.ofPhilos, History. | Astr (a) Opt. (b) Hebrew. -Zoology. Geol. Lab.
Mechanics, Greek, |Hist. of Philos
| German. | German.
— | ee
Botany. Ξ | Botany Geology.
| English Eng. Comp. | Tatin inclish Sanskrit. Chem. Lab,
10 Mathematics ἘΠῚ. | Hebrew. Math. fae: of ea PAD a To
Physics (B). | Physics (B) |” ee oRe )
| Chemistry. | ; : Chemistry. : Chem, Lab
: Latin. History. τις . Latin. : : z
il pee Hebrew. Greek. ets Hebrew. ορσωνοα,
-:----- τὸ -- |
lng .Ἴ Physics (A) Physics (A) :
| Moral Philos,\roral Philos.{ Eng.Comp. | Moral Philos. Mora! Philos
510 French French Geol. Lab
Economics French, ΤΥ. nzench: | Economig ; ;
* | Economics. Economics. | 0 omnes:
| Zool. Lab. Peda,sogy. ; 7 |
| Comp. Phil. |#ist. of PhiL:| χροϊου oat. Lab. | Pedagogy
: Ε oy. J ὅ
| 3 Chem. Lab. Sanskrit. | poy; ee y C x τῷ PI a | Bot. Lab.
Polit. Science] Mechanics. OPUS preven: ah ἘΣ ΕΣ |Polit. Science:
Paysics Lab. | German. ᾿
Zool. Lab. English. ‘ τα’ Bot. Lab.
g | Chem. Lab. | Bot. Lab. | Chera.Lab. | poo. Nab | gnglish.
Physics Lab. |Mathematics | 5 τ |Mathenvatics
mee aoe Bot. Lab. | Romam Law. | Art & Arch. |Logie & Met
πὰ Roman Law.,| Logic & Met.| Bot. Lab. | Logic & Meta. |\Rom Law (b)
Chem. Lab. | Roman Law.| Chem. Lab. Roman Law. |Cons. Law (a,
"ΕΞ τ᾿ |
Ὶ ye Bot. Lab. | τῷ ἘΝ |
Pub. Finance.|Const, L. & H. : /Public Finance. Const. L. & H.
5 |Const. L. & H. | (Chen. hab” | Const. Ee ἘΠῚ
| |
(A) Heat, Light and Sound.
(B) Magnetism and Electricity,
(a) During First Term. (b) During Second Term.
N.B.—The term Primary Course denotes the first course taken in the subject subsequent to the
Intermediate Examination, whether in the Third or Fourth Year.
~~ =.
᾿
q
OANZVLOW]
pave A10}stF]T ‘UOT
-surviy, Iqstg pur
pu £10}81H 'ΠΟΠῸΤ
“£104STH
pue woe
Pa a Le ως Te ee ee ee Fp ge EE a bo a eg by τ CaS eg Oe ee ee
- 4
: aded 908 5918} UOLVULWIRXY UOIQR[NOLIQLI, το
ΠΟΤῈ =: ‘oanqudoyy “£1038
: pure arvuue..y ᾿ ‘ 086
-SUBLI], JUDSIG "ποι. ποιῃτθοσιπορ Yoory| -suvIT, ISIS ‘UOT |, Σ τϑτιθ αι, FUSIG ‘UOT, |
-tsodulog) Yooar) -1sodwo() yaors) WOT σατο Ὁ T0et8) -1s0d uo) Yooarpy -
: “woo 90 ΒΗ ᾿ς ἐ "ΠΟ Ὁ], IUDIg |, ᾿ : penn: ὃ
ἘΣ ΟΡ Bere) ‘ aan yooat). Ces seers) put syoog yaory Ba Cae 712270) 6 θ1΄ AvpsoupaM
ysu0g ‘Susp “(ouoay,) oduns
: AagstuayO ‘Aas woyy -uv'y {{51|5 τι pus 08°%
: ΑἈΟΊΒΤΗ ULOPOPW ἀπ ᾿ΑἸΟΊΒΤΗ ULOpOW _
; “Ss F : ιν “boy 270 '911), : ΟῚ
*SOTPUULI 120 1. ΠΩΣ ce es "SOVULI 010 ( Ὁ ΠΡΟ ἐπ soiskud 2 6 (1) 149 “Av psony,
“ueutra Ὁ) She i aa “Uv Uta Ὁ) URULIay ταῦτα 1) 086
Een ke ae ae MMO uO Fl a. eee : ca oa
“Auvyog : youegp |{Aaystmeyy !youorg “ποποα “youody “ςοτιθα 6 se Ke puoyl
ger ε (supnotuy, “UNTIL | wea :
a inp) 5 “oy ‘Horutsodwop
“Tee a pur (query Βοχαθι 0) “AD0[01g 08°
as ra = _fomaraoiry {|51|51{Ὶ Pen Tee ; s
bite ὍΠΟΥ UOT = | onDOr] “πομιτβοί πιο.) "πο TsOdWLOD Ὁ (UOS UOTISO HOD Ψ
ἐν τα 51| τ pur ofodsoynyg) PUL αν Ὁ 0717 -Auue gy, Y tosuadg) pur £10487 6 LEE APO ΘΟ πη
css” ΔΝ θατιγ} Ὁ 1011} Ystpsugq |fosvunsury {5 1|5 ANU LAV, {515 απ] θα 10 0717] {513 80} νὰ : ἢ
ξύν" - “ ( “£agoutoay) ‘
s ; = *BOTPVULOY AL AL Rare ἀσ γὴν “SOTIQVULAYAR I 086
: ἊΣ “wayyy | ALO StH Pees ; ἂν τ τὶ
"Βοτηῦτιι 911} 71 ‘ouy ᾧ ( (6) “woes ΒΟ. ΌΤΙ 91|}Ὸ IAL ( ὅπ aN (Pug) “SOTIVULOYIVIN 6 Or *°* ABpsainyg
“VU ) “Ue IT PULA WW
OANGRALOVUT 4 5 θ 12 {0217 3 id
1 ea ‘MOHLsULAL FSIS | yoy seannG, upgery | ἀοιηθθαῦα,, WAS ἀπ πβο οἷο ὧν ug dORHOaTAUL κ᾿ ἰβ hes
5: ‘rontsodwog uryery Ὁ Ὁ THVT | rontsodmog une) ἘΣ DUI U OTe O CRON SUT ΤΌΓι
; vr | CU) ποθ ‘Teuay) 5 ; “LOVSUBLL ISIE ; ee >
; syoog unr] TVW ‘soos ure} syoog urnuy puv syoog {Π|Ὸ 0 syoog uney 6 6 Aepsoupa AA
*[unOIsseg αὐοχ “(avo X party) ‘OPVLPIULO}VUT OF *SUOTIIQULX [Γ *‘TBUOTSSOg Iva ἄ .
par, 07 ddng Β τι βαυ το [equowotddug Iva puoosg jsut 0} 'ddng PALS) aLvda
“SO6BL ‘aad WALA ‘SNOMLVNINYX3] TIVLINANATId AG GNV dIHSUYVIOHOS *NOMIGINX GY
Ἢ Ω oo o Ἐπ . ἣν τς ὼς “ é ἢ ἃ Ἂν A = a ΓΗ͂Σ τὰ sad 7 = S > ΡΥ f
134
CHRISTMAS EXAMINATIONS, 1908.
Morning examinations commence at 9; afternoon examina-
tions at 2.30.
Day AND Dare. First YEAR. | SECOND YEAR. |THIRD AND FourTH YEARS.
Monday, Dec, 14th.... A.M. Latin. Latin. Mechanics; Astronomy.
ἐξ PM, | Mathematics. German,
Tuesday, Dec. 15th..... A.M, Greek. Greek. Greek ; Political Economy.
“ PM: Chemistry. Geology.
Wednesday, Dec, 16th... A.M. Physics. Psychology. Moral Philosophy.
me P.M. French. French. Latin.
Thursday, Dec. 17th...A.M. | Mathematics. English. Botany ; Political Science.
ἐξ P.M. German. German, French.
Hebrew. History of Philosophy.
Friday, Deo, 18th......A.M. English. Physics. Logic.
τ P.M. Biology. Zoology.
* The Christmas Examinations are obligatory on all undergraduates, and on partials
desiring to be undergraduates, and the standing gained therein will be taken into account
by the Faculty atthe close of the session. The results will be made known after the
Christmas vacation.
The above time table is subject to modification, especially in regard to the Third and
Fourth Years.
SEssionAL EXAMINATIONS, 1904.
Morning examinations commence at 9; afternoon examina-
tions at 2.30.
é
Day anpD DATE. First YEAR. | Seconp YEAR. |THIRD AND FoURTH YEARS.
" Thur.day, April 7th... A.M. Latin. Latin. ἊΝ ΘΝ eS:
- ες P.M. Latin, “*1-) Tati: ΜΕ
"Friday, April sth......A.M.| English. English. i
τῷ C P.M. English. English,
Ν᾽ ᾿ \ ἴ
Monday, April 11th.,..A.M. German German. Order of subjects to be de- Σ BEEN :
at determined in the course of iy ΆΡΕΝ
Ἧ ; “ P.M. German. Goan the session. τ
x sab a
i Tuesday, April 12th....A.M.|(;eom. & Arith.. Mathematics, : =e
a ἣν ΡΜ. Trig. ᾧ Alg. | Mathematics. τ
ae Sn
ies Wednesday. April 13th.A.M. Chemistry. δι"
a τ Ῥ.Ν. Chemistry. Ψ
a ie ‘
ΤΩΣ ᾿ς Thursday, April 14th. A.M. Greek. Greek.
A é
Bes τὸ ΡΜ. Greek. Greek. εἰς ἣν
τὸ Friday, April 15th. .. A Μ. French. French. me
ce P.M. French. French.
δ Monday, April 18th...... A.M. Physics. Logic.
ae (ὃ P.M. Hebrew.
> iw
; Tuesday, April 19th..,,A.M. Botany,Zoology
τ Ὄχδας P.M. Biology, Me
Royal Victoria Gollege.
The institution of the Royal Victoria College, in Septem-
ber, 1899, was a direct continuation of the work begun in 1883,
during the Principalship of the late Sir William Dawson, when
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal placed a sum at the dis-
posal of the University of McGill, for the Endowment of a
College and classes for women. Jor many years previously it
had been hoped by those interested in the education of women
in Montreal that the University would extend its benefits to
women, but the means necessary for carrying out such an aim
nad not been available. The classes were organized in 1854
as a Special Course in the Faculty of Arts, held at McGill Col-
lege, separate in the main from those for men, but under iden-
tical conditions. In some of the work of the Third and Fourth
Years, and in the Honour and Additional Courses, the classes
were held jointly.
The ultimate aim of Lord Strathcona had been the founda-
tion of a place of residence, and, with this object, he announced
his intention of building and endowing the Royal Victoria
College. By the opening of this Institution the opportunity
of residence and college life is given to women-students of
McGill University, working in accordance with the system pre-
viously organized in the Special Course in Arts, but under
greatly improved conditions. A share in the advantages of
college life is offered also to the non-resident women-students
of the University, who are henceforth also students of the
Royal Victoria College. Additional elements have been added
in the organization of a Musical Department, and in the 1ῃ-
stitution of Resident Women Tutors. These additions are in
accordance with the general aim of the College; viz., the higher
education of women, and mainly to qualify them to take de-
grees in Arts (including Pure Science), and to provide them
with instruction in those branches of a liberal education neces-
sary thereto and in such other subjects as may from time to
time be determined.
‘USUIO λα 0
a
J a3aT[09 ῬΙΜΟΊΟΙΛ 18
See ee oe
Aoy
137
The College being a residential College for the Women-
Students of McGill University, its students, whether Under-
graduates, Conditioned Students, or Partial, follow the courses
in Arts and Pure Science offered by the University, (see pp.
76--125).
Lectures are given by the Professors and Lecturers
of the University, either in the College or in the University
buildings, and students attend the University Laboratories for
practical instruction. In addition to the instruction given in
lectures and laboratory practice, the students of the Royal
Victoria College are assisted in their studies by the Resident
Tutors.
The College Building.
The College is situated on Sherbrooke Street, at the head
of Union Avenue, in close proximity to the University build-
ings and to the slopes of Mount Royal. The building is fire-
proof, and much thought and artistic care have been given to
the furnishing and decoration.
On the ground floor are the offices of the Administration,
including the rooms of the Warden and Secretary, the Pro-
fessors’ common room, lecture rooms (English, French, Ger-
man, Mathematics), students’ common room and a spacious
dining hall. On the first floor are other lecture rooms (Latin,
Greek, Logic, and Philosophy), the library, reading-room, and
a handsome assembly hall. On the second and third floors are
the rooms of the resident students. These are of varying size
and plan. Each student has a separate bedroom, and, as a
rule, one sitting-room is shared by the occupants of the two
or three bedrooms immediately adjoining. The entire use of
a sitting-room can be obtained, and there are some rooms which
may be used as study-bedrooms. The rooms are completely
furnished, and no article of furniture need be brought by the
students. No part need be taken by the students in the care of
their rooms.
In addition to the lawn at the hack of the College, the
students are entitled to use, subject to regulations, the grounds
of McGill University, with its tennis-courts, skating-rink, ete.
A nucleus of the College Library has been formed in a set
of books, comprising the stated books and others referred to
in connection with the University curricula, the modern
language course being especially well represented. There are
Pas
ee
ly
τ
ἢ
al
δε
=
2
᾿,
>
158
also works of general literature. The Library is a reading-
room, and the books are not taken away. ‘The students have
access also to the University Lending Library.
Students of Music have the use of a large practising-room,
and, at certain hours, of the piano in the common room, as
also of the Gymnasium piano.
The Gymnasium, fully equipped in accordance with the re-
quirements of the Swedish system, is in the basement. In con- |
nection with the Gymnasium there are bath-rooms and dressing-
rooms. |
The health of the stwdents is under the charge of a competent
physician practising in Montreal, who may be consulted free of
charge. ‘
Students of the Royal Victoria College, as students of McGill
University, are entitled to the use of the University Library,
containing about 96,500 volumes, and the Peter Redpath
Museum containing large collections in Mineralogy, Palzeon-
tology, Zoology, Botany, Archeology, and Ethnology, and to
work in the Physical, Chemical, Zoological, Botanical and other
laboratories and the Botanic Gardens of the University. (For
particulars of laboratories, etc., see pp. 125, et seqq).
Board and Residence.
Residence in the College buildings is open to Undergraduates,
Conditioned Students, or Partial Students, but the last are not
received in residence unless they take courses of study ap-
proved by the Faculty of the College. The expense of board
and residence ranges from $290 to $440, in addition to the ses-
sional fees for tuition (see p. 29), according to the room or
rooms occupied by the students; for a majority of the rooms
the expense of board and residence is $290. These charges
cover the University Session, 9th September—30th April, and
the summer classes, 30th April—26th June. A deduction of
$50 is made in the case of students who go out of residence at
the end of the University Session.
Applications for admission or further particulars should be
addressed to the Warden, Royal Victoria College, Montreal.
Physical Training.
The Gymnasium is in the charge of Miss Holmstrém, graduate
of the Posse Gymnasium, Boston, and of the Harvard Summer
School, who teaches on Swedish principles. Special attention
139
is devoted to the application of exercise in cases of physical
weakness, Miss Holmstrém having had considerable experience
in the medical branch of her work. All students undergo a
physical examination on entering upon the gymnastic course,
under the superintendence of Dr. R. Tait Mackenzie, B.A.,
M.D., Assistant Lecturer in Anatomy at the University. Teams
of Basket-Ball are formed, and, when weather permits, this and
other exercises are practised on the lawn, at the back of the
College building. This ground is also provided with lawn-
tennis courts.
Exhibitlons and Scholarships.
For a statement of the Exhibitions and Scholarships open
to Women Students of the University, see pp. 47, 53 and 55.
In addition to these, and further to encourage residence
within the College walls of students who might otherwise ar-
range to board in the city, the Warden and Faculty are em-
powered to make nominations in any of the four College years
to not more than three additional Exhibitions of the value of
$100 each.
Music.
Apart from the University Courses, instruction in Music is
offered at the College, for which a separate fee is charged. The
instruction includes the Pianoforte in all its branches (solo,
ensemble playing, concertos, duos for two pianofortes); Sing-
ing (voice production, vocalization, sight-singing, ear-tests, solo
and part singing); and Lectures on Theory (elements of music,
harmony, counterpoint, and history of music). Attendance at
certain of these Courses is expected of all students of music.
ROYAL VICTORIA COLLEGE.
First YEAR.
Hours| Monpay, TUESDAY. WEDNESDAY. THURSDAY. FRIDAY, SavurDay.
9 Greek. Physics. Greek. Greek. Greek.
ei 10 English. History. French. French. Math.
11 German. Math. Latin English. French.
ν᾿
19 Latin. Latin. Math. German. Latin.
se |
2 Math. ¥rench. German. Physics, | English.
is 8 Eng. Comp. | German. eee
23 ρὲ ; |
Ὶ ΕΣ,
' : |
Second YEAR.
Hovurs.| Mownpay. TUESDAY. WEDNESDAY. | THURSDAY. FRIDAY, SaTURDAY.
9 Greek. Latin. furs Latin. Math. Chem. Lab.
ἘΠ 10 English. Math. Math. French. ' Latin. Chem. Lab.
ey ar, Logic. Chemistry. German, English. German.
12 German. Greek. Chemistry, Logie. Chemistry.
2 Biol. Lab. ae Latin, Biol. Lab. English.
ee 3 Biol. Lab. | Chem. Lab. Biology. Biol. Lab. French.
4 Biology. Chem, Lab. Logic Pe Greek
5 German,
(b) During second term.
‘SUIP[ING ϑ1τπιϑϑι 51}. P[BUOPYIVIN
ring
Faculty of Applied Science.
ἘΠΕ) WorkK IN SURVEYING WILL BEGIN ON Monpay,
Aveust 24TH. LECTURES WILL BEGIN ON TUESDAY, SEPTEM-
BER 22ND.
21. General Statement.
The instruction in this Faculty is designed to afford a
complete preliminary training, of a practical as well as theo-
retical nature, in the following :—
I.—ARCHITECTURE.
II.—CHEMISTRY.
III.—Civin ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING.
IV.—ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
V.—-MECHANICAL ENGINEERING,
VI.—METALLURGY.
VII.—MINING ENGINEERING.
The degrees conferred by the University upon such under-
graduates of the Faculty as fulfil the conditions and pass the
examinations hereinafter stated are, in the first instance,
“Bachelor of Science” (B.Sc.), mention being made in the
diploma of the particular Course of study pursued, and, sub-
sequently, the degrees of “ Master of Science” (M.Sc.), and
“ Doctor of Science” (D.8c.).
The curriculum, as laid down in the following pages, may
be changed from time to time as may be deemed advisable
by the Faculty, and it is now under contemplation to make
important modifications in the several courses. Should the
proposed changes be carried out, the work of the first two
years will be the same for the civil, electrical, mechanical and
mining courses.
142
811. Matriculation and Admission.
For subjects of matriculation, conditions and fees, see pp.
10-20.
2111. Examinations and Degrees.
|. For the Degree of Bachelor of Science (B.Sc).
Sessional examinations are held in all the subjects. In addi-
tion, there are Christmas examinations in certain of the subjects,
and class examinations are held from time to time.
II. Higher Degrees.
For regulations relating to the degrees of “ Master of Sci-
ence” (MiSe:), and’ = Doctor® of Science 47 (D:S¢.)) see
pp. 24 and 26.
III. Special Provisions for Obtaining the two Degrezs of “ Bachelor
of Arts (B.A.) and Bachelor of Science (B.Sc.)
in Six Years.
For particulars, see p. 68.
21V. Graduate Courses.
Students who take the Bachelor’s degree in one of the courses
provided by the Faculty of Applied Science may graduate in
any of the remaining courses by attending one or more subse-
quent sessions.
Graduates may also take an advanced course in the branch in
which they have received their degree. On passing an examin-
ation at the end of such advanced course, the Master’s degree
will be conferred without further examination, on presentation
at the end of one additional year, of a satisfactory thesis on
approved work.
Students are strongly recommended to take a graduate course,
and special arrangements will be made for advanced and re-
search work in the following :---
Architecture-—Advanced study in design. Students may
also take any of the options of the course (see p. 160), and
the course on Art History (see p. 104).
148
The elasticity and strength of materials. (See ὃ ΧΙ, 3, and
ἘΕΙΒΙΕ 119.
Mining and Metallurgy.—Advanced study in metallurgy and
mining can be carried on with great advantage in the labora-
tories. (See § XI, 11, 14, and § XII, 9 and 10.)
The efficiency of pumps and hydraulic motors. -(See § ΧΙ, 3,
and § XII, 7.)
Ore dressing, coal washing, and gold and silver milling.
The laboratories of the Mining department have been equipped
and arranged with especial reference to advanced and research
work in the theory and practice of concentration. (See p. 199.)
The efficiency of power transmission by air, water, gas, and
steam. (See § XI, 3, 5, 10.)
The efficiency of steam, gas and hot-air engines and of air
Se
: compressors. (See § ΧΙ, 10 and 17.)
Ἷ The efficiency of machines and machine tools, and the power
absorbed by the several processes of mechanical work. (See
, § XI, 10.)
: The efficiency of dynamometers, belting and shafting, includ-
4 ing investigations into the relative merits of the several un-
Ἴ guents. (See § XII, 8.) .
4 The efficiency of the several types of boilers, including in-
ἣ vestigations on the heat-producing power of fuels. (See § XI,
Ἶ ft)
q The flow of water through orifices and pipes, and over weirs.
3 (See'$ XIj 3, and § XIT,7.)
Geodesy and praetical astronomy. (See § XII, 6.)
Physics.—The Macdonald Physics Building has been equipped
and arranged with special reference to graduate courses and
: original research work in various branches of pure Physics.
| Kvery facility will be afforded in the workshops for the con-
! struction of special apparatus required for such investigations.
| (See § XIT, 12.)
Mathematics.—Students taking graduate courses will receive
euidance in any adyanced mathematics required in connection
with their work.
Chemistry and Mineralogy. (See § XI, 2, 8 and 13, and
§ XIT, 4.)
The determination and comparison of the errors and the co-
efficients of standards of length. (See ὃ XI, 4, and § XII, 6.)
The determination of gravity. (See § XII, 6.).
Aa 1
4 τ αι δυο κυ ἐν AY pe Ses ἀν TA Ve Or PA, er wile eo
t ee ote ha | ἄρα « . " : Υ͂
2V. Attendance and Conduct.
See page 35.
@MI, Library.
Students in this Faculty are entitled to use the University
Library under the regulations cited on p. 296. Students also
have access to the various departmental libraries under the
special regulations by which each is governed.
ZVI. Fees and Registration,
See pp. 27-.and 30.
2 VII. Medals, Exhibitions, Prizes and Honours.
1. The British Association Medals and Exhibition, found-
ed by the British Association for the Advancement of Science,
in commemoration of the meeting held in Montreal in the
year 1884. :
A British Asociation medal and prize in books are open for
competition to students of the graduating class in each of the
seven courses, and, if the examiners so recommend, will be
awarded to the student taking the highest position in the final
examinations.
2. The Governor General’s silver medal (the gift of His Ex-
cellency The Right Honourable the Earl of Minto).
This medal will be awarded for graduate research work.
3. Summer Work. (See § IX, 1.) The following prizes
are offered for the best swmmer theses :—
To the students of the Civil Engineering Course, a prize
of $25 presented by KE. B. Greenshields, Esq., B.A.
To the students of the Electrical Engineering Course, a
prize of $25 from the British Association fund.
To the students of the Mechanical Engineering Course, a
prize of $25 presented by the Crosby Steam Gauge & Valve
Co. ;
To the students of the Mining Engineering Course, a prize
of $25 presented by Geo. E. Drummond, Esq.
Four prizes, each of the value of $25, are offered for com-
petition to student members of the Canadian Society of Civil
Engineers, for the best papers on subjects in any department
of engineering. The summer theses prepared by students of
this University are available for this competition.
4, A gold medal and two prizes of $35 and $15, offered by
the Canadian Mining Institute, will be open for competition
to students from McGill University, Toronto University and
Queen’s University, and will be awarded to the students pre-
senting the best papers on some subject connected with min-
ing, ore dresing, metallurgy, or economic geology. Prefer-
ence will be given to those theses which show decided origin-
ality.
5. The following Exhibitions and Prizes will be open for
competition at the beginning of the session:—(Students are re-
quired to notify the Dean of their intention to compete, at least
one week before the commencement of the Haamination.)
(A) A British Association Exhibition of $50:00 and prize
of $25,00, to students entering the fourth year, the subjects
of examination being the Mathematics and Theory of Struc-
tures of the ordinary course.
(B) Three prizes of $25.00, $15.00 and $10.00, to students
entering the third year, the subject of examination being the
Mathematics of the second year.
ian Society of Montreal, in commemoration of the Centenary
of Sir Walter Scott, and two prizes of $25.00 and $15.00, to
_ students entering the second year, the subjects of examination
being :—
(a) English Literature (Summer Vacation Work); (b) (Mathematics
of the first year ; (c) Descriptive Geometry of the first year.
(D) Two prizes, each of $10.00, presented by J. M. McCar-
thy, Esq.. B.A.Sc., to students entering the third year, for
proficiency in Levelling or Transit Work.
6. The sum of $150, presented by W. A. Carlyle, Esq.,
Ma.E., may be awarded in prizes to students of the Mining
Course taking the highest positions in the degree examina-
tions of 1904.
7. A -prize of $50.00, presented by James Tighe, B-A:S¢;,
for research work in Hydraulics.
(C) A Scott Exhibition of $50.00, founded by the Caledon- .
146
8. An exhibition offered to graduates by A. E. Childs, M.Sc.,
for a special research on ““The flow of gas through pipes under
pressure.”
9. It is proposed to offer in September, 1904, a Research
Scholarship in.Chemistry, on the endowment of the late Dr.
T. Sterry Hunt, to graduate students in this Faculty or the
Faculty of Arts.
10. The Canadian General Electric Company, through Mr.
F. Nicholls, of Toronto, has decided to present annually to the
Faculty four scholarships, each in the form of a-three months’
course at the Company’s works at Peterboro or Montreal, with
the addition of the sum of $100.00.
11. The Allis-Chalmers Company of Chicago has decided to
present annually to the Faculty a scholarship in the form of
a three or four months’ course at the Company’s works at
Chicago, with the addition of a sum of $150.00.
12. Two scholarships, of the value of $75, are offered by Mr.
Andrew ΤΠ. Taylor, F.R.I.B.A., for students entering the second
year of the course; the first of these will be awarded in Sep-
tember, 1903; the second in September, 1904. The scholar-
ships are restricted to students taking the full curriculum and
proceeding to the degree of B.Sc. in Architecture. Candidates
must have passed in all subjects of the first year (or have
passed equivalent examinations, accepted by the Faculty, else-
where).
13. The Province of Quebec Association of Architects’ pro-
pose to offer a scholarship covering the fees of a full course in
Architecture, to be open for competition to students from the
Province of Quebec. Particulars may be obtained from the
Assistant Secretary of the Association, 112 Mansfield Street,
Montreal.
14. Prizes or Certificates of Merit are given to such stu-
dents as take the highest place in the sessional and degree
examinations.
15. Honours.—On graduation, Honours will be awarded for
advanced work in professional subjects.
16. Science Scholarships granted by the Royal Commission
foy the Exhibition of 1851.—The Scholarships of £150 ster-
ling a year are tenable for two or, in rare instances, three
years. They are limited, according to the Report of the Com-
mission, “to those branches of Science such as Physics, Me-
oP PI NT a ἘΠ ΡΤ |
Fide ibis ede eieitne ine
aN
147
chanics and Chemistry, the extension of which is specially im-
portant for our national industries.” Their object is not to
facilitate ordinary collegiate studies, but “to enable students
to continue the prosecution of Science with the view of aiding
in its advance or in its application to the industries of the
country.”
It is open to students of not less than three years’ standing
in the Faculties of Arts or Applied Science, and is tenable at
any university or at any other institution approved by the Com-
mission.
A nomination to one of these scholarships for the year 1903
was placed by the Commission at the disposal of McGill Uni-
versity, and another may be granted in 1905.
This Exhibition has been awarded as follows :—
Evans, P.N., 1891; Macphail, J. A., 1893; King, R. O. 1895; Gill,
J. L. W., 1897: McLean, W.B., 1899; McClung, R. K., 1901 ; Cooke, H.
Lester, 1903.
17%. Workshop Prizes.—A prize of $20.00, presented by Ὁ. J.
Fleet, Esq., B.A., B.C.L., for bench and lathe work in the
woodworking department, open to students of not more than
two terms’ standing in workshop practice.
$ 1X. Special Provisions.
1. Summer Work.—During the summer vacation following
the close of each year, all students entering the third and fourth
years are required to prepare a thesis on a subject specified
by the Faculty. Any student may substitute for the specified
subject a report on some practical work in course of construc-
tion. The marks given for these theses will be added to the
results of the sessional examinations. The theses must be
handed in to the Dean on or before October 1st.
2. All students in the Civil and Mining Engineering Courses,
entering the second and third years, students in the Civil En-
gineering Course entering the fourth year, and students in the
Architectural Course entering the third and fourth years, are
required to be in attendance at the Surveying School on the
24th August, when the Field-work in Surveying and Geodesy
will commence. (See § XI, 16.)
3. All students in the Mining and Metallurgical Courses are
required to attend the Summer School in Mining, held between
148
the third and fourth years (four to six weeks of field-work).
The school is held in May amd June. (See § XI, 14)
4, Partial Students may be admitted to the professional
classes upon payment of special fees. (See p. 30.)
5. Students in Applied Science may, by permission of the
Faculty, take the Honour Courses in the Faculty of Arts.
6. Undergraduates in Arts of the second and third years, or
graduates of any university, entering the Faculty of Applied
Science, may, at the discretion of the professors, be exempted
from such lectures in that Faculty as they have previously at-
tended as students in Arts.
7. Students who have failed in an examination may regain
their standing by passing a supplemental examination at a time
appointed by the Faculty. Unless such supplemental examin-
ation is passed, students will not be allowed to proceed to any
subsequent examination in the subject. A second supplemental
examination will not be granted unless under exceptional cir-
cumstances, to be investigated in each case by the Faculty.
8. Students may be required to answer satisfactorily a weekly
paper on such subjects of the course as the Facvlty may deter-
mine.
9. Credit will be given in the sessional standing for class
examinations held during the session, and for the Christmas
examinations.
10. Students who fail to obtain their session, and who in
consequence repeat a year, will not be exempted from examin-
ation in any of those subjects in which they may have previously
passed, except by the express permission of the Faculty. Appli-
cation for such exemption must be made at the commencement
of the session. ὶ
11. Partial Students are not eligible for prizes.
12. Certificates may be given to students who have passed
through any of the special courses attached to the curriculum.
13. The headquarters of the Camadian Society of Civil En-
gineers are located in Montreal. Students in all departments
of engineering are strongly recommended to become student
members of the Society, which they can do on payment of a
fee of $2.00. They are then entitled to the two volumes of
“Transactions,” which are annually published, and to the use
;
“a
149
of the Society’s rooms on Dorchester Street. They also have
opportunities of meeting the prominent engineers of the coun-
try and of being present at the fortnightly sessions, at which
papers are read by leading members of the Society on current
engineering subjects and works of construction.
During the winter there will be a special series of students’
meetings, at which papers, illustrated by lantern slides, will be
read by well-known engineers. Students may also compete
for the prizes which are offered by the Society, (see p. 145).
14. The headquarters of the Canadian Mining Institute are
in Montreal. Students in Mining and Metallurgy are strongly
recommended to become members of the McGill Mining Society,
which, although a student body (see p. 184), is affiliated with
the Institute. Members of this Society receive the Transactions
of the Institute without extra expense, and are entitled to at-
tend all meetings and to compete for the prizes offered (see
p-- 145).
X. Courses of Instruction.
l. Architecture.
The Architectural Course begins in the second year, for
which the first year is preparatory, especially in the departments
of Mathematics and Drawing (Frechand, Lettering, and Pro-
jections).
The work of the second year is of a general character, and is
planned to combine to some extent the work of the Architectural
and of the Civil Engineering students.
The third and fourth years are devoted to more specialized
architectural study in various branches, and a fifth or graduate
year has been organized for advanced study in design. For
those students who desire to devote themselves more especially
to the engineering side of architecture, the course is modified
to include additional mathematics in the third year, and the
advanced course of Theory of Structures in the fourth year.
Such students devote proportionately less time to architectural
drawing and designing.
In the second year the historical course embraces a survey
of architectural history from ancient Egyptian to modern times.
The great eras of European civilization are successively dealt
with, and the evolution of styles is traced in their construc-
tional and ornamental forms and methods.
150
In the third and fourth years the lectures are arranged in
continuation and extension of this general course. Renaissance
and Modern Architecture are studied in the third year; while a
course, covering both third and fourth years, comprises more
detailed study of ecclesiastical, domestic, and public archi-
tecture, and deals with the historic evolution of architectural
styles and with the problems and requirements of modern work.
Instruction in drawing is given during all four years—free-
hand drawing (ornament and figure) from the cast and archi-
tectural drawing occupying much of the students’ time during
three years of the course. Modelling in clay is included in
the third and fourth years.
Problems in architectural design form the basis of work in
the architectural drawing class from the earliest available
period, being at first more especially combined with the study
of the Classical Orders.
A course of lectures is included upon general Art History,
so as to place the architectural student in touch, not only with
the decorative details of the different architectural styles, but
also with contemporary forms in other branches of art, espe-
cially the decorative arts employed in building.
For the scientific side of professional study the courses in
Mathematics are very fully developed in the first and second
years, being continued in the third year also by those who elect
to take the advanced course in Theory of Structures. Descrip-
tive Geometry is studied, as well as elementary Shades and
Shadows, and Perspective. A course in Surveying, both prac-
tical and theoretical, is also included; four weeks before the
beginning of the session are devoted to Field Work in each of
the two last years. A short course in Geology is given in the
fourth “year. ; =
Theory of Structures and Strength of Materials form one of
the chief subjects of study in the third year, the course also
comprising instruction in Graphical Statics, as well as supple-
mentary work of a practical nature in the Testing Laboratories.
A full course on Building Construction and Architectural
Engineering has been organized for the third and fourth years,
common to both architectural and engineering students. It
includes also Sanitation, and Hygiene; Heating and Ventila-
tion ; Specifications and Professional Practice.
lol
A special course of lectures has been arranged to be available
for those who are engaged in office work during the day; it
embraces the subject of Architectural Styles, their features,
mouldings and ornament. ‘This course is planned with a view
to preparation for the examinations for Associateship now held
in colonial centres by the Royal Institute of British Architects :
it comprises a detailed study of the three great divisions of
historical architecture, Classical, Medizval and Renaissance,
in accordance with the examination-programme of the Royal
Institute.
The course will be repeated in session 1903-1904, if sufficient
students come forward. (See p. 162.)
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per week
devoted to each subject are as follows :—
First YEAR.
(pe13)s5a(a);, 7) (b)
Graphical Staties...... (p. 165), 2 (a)
Mapping (p. 188), 3
Hrs HRs
Descriptive Geometry..... (p. 168),4 Mathematics........... (p. 175), 10
HD US. erste ac roe νς (naeli2) 2 ele hivsiGS eae: SEARO Or (p85); 2
Freehand Drawing....... (p. 173), 3 Physical Laboratory...(p. 186), 45
eG TOTIM Sets. πο νος (pals) 3s 2 Shopworks.2.. 4.54 87: (pa 7): ἢ
SECOND YEAR.
Hrs. Hrs
Architecture(Elementsof) (p. 161), 1 Mathematics... .(p. 175), 6
Architecture (Eustory)ace (ps 00). Ὁ ἘΠ ΒΟ... -67-.-- 5.0} (Ρ. 185), 2
@hemiStryger rec see ee ee (p: 163), 3 Chemical Lab......-.. (p. 163), 3
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 3. Physical Lab.... ....- (p. 186), 3
- Drawing and Design..-...(p. 161), 7 Shopwork.............. (p. 207), 3
Freehand Drawing...... (p. 173), 4
THIRD YEAR.
HRs. Irs
Anrchibectunes.. 28" sae (p. 160), 1 Mathematics ...... (p. 175), 2 (opt.)
Architecture (History) (p. 160), 2 Modelling .......... (p. 161), 3 (b)
PAT ΕΠ ΒΌΘΕΥ 4011s 310 oe (p. 161), 1 Municipal Engineer-
Descriptive Geometry..(p. 169), 3 (a) INOAE Ae. s (p. 168), 1 (opt.)
Designing or Drawing. Structural Engineer-
(p. 161), 10 AN eee lr (p. 162), 2
Freehand Drawing.... Surveying .......... (p. 188), 3
Theory of Structures(p. 165), 3
Testing Laboratory.(p. 166), 3
152
FOURTH YEAR.
HRs. Urs.
ἌΧ ΘΟ ΤΟ one a (p. 161, 2 Municipal Engineering
PATb WEIISCORY rte see eer e (pe 161). ἢ (p. 168), 1 (opt.)
Mesigninge) i: τ Ἀν πο so. (p. 161), 20 Structural Engineering
Freehand Drawing and (p. 162), 2
Water Colouring (p. 161)6(a),9(b) Theory of Structures. .
Geology teeaseetens (p:-\78),-3:(a) (p. 165), 4 (opt.)
Graphical Staties...(p. 165), 8 (opt.) Testing Laboratory....
Miodellineyi aces. ον (p. 161), ὃ (0) (p. 166), 4 (opt.)
Il. Chemistry.
The course in Chemistry is arranged to give the student in
the first two years a thorough knowledge of the fundamental
principles of Chemistry and Physics, with sufficient Mathema-
tics to enable him to understand the theoretical parts of these
subjects.
In the two subsequent years Chemistry, analytical, organie,
and physical, is taught both in its purely scientific aspects and
in its relations to all kinds of commercial work. Special facil-
ities are afforded for the prosecution of post-graduate research
work in all the branches of Chemistry.
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per week
devoted to each subject are as follows :—
Firsr YEAR. j
Hrs. Hrs.
Descriptive Geometry..(p. 165), 4 Mathematics.......... (p. 175), 10
Haolishe Ane, c net - (pf 192), 28 seh ysiestiss.. aes eee: (p. 185), 2
Freehand Drawing..... (p. 173), 3 Physical Laboratory..(p. 186), 43
PiGUb STINTS see oe cael ieee {15} 95. eShop works. seas (p.' 207), 7
SECOND YEAR.
HRs. Pee Se
Ghemistrye:; cet. Sehr (p. 163), 3. Chemical Laboratory... (p. 163), 17
Mathematics # τ τ Ὑν ἐν (p. 175), 6 . Physical Laboratory..... (p. 186), 3
ἜΠΕΙΘΕ: τε ἘΣ ee tome ὦ: (p. 185), 2
THIRD YEAR.
Hrs. Hrs.
Chemistryg leet. es τς (p. 164), 3° Mineralogy .....2....- (pe 81} ἃ
Determinative Mineralogy(p. 181), 3 Ore-Dressing ........... (p SSL al
Geoloo yin πε sc (p. 173), 3. Chemical Laboratory...(p. 164), 18
Metallamoy.2et sii: Wie sok Datis) sal
FouRTH YEAR.
HRs. Hrs.
Chemistrye:. Sea (Ds, 10), Ἢ Chemical Laboratory....(p. 164), 29
Mineralogy a... τὴ τ (p. 181), 2 (a)
BS yi oy
ἫΝ
-
A
‘
a oe oe
153
ll. Civil Engineering.
The courses of study in Civil Engineering are designed to
give to the student a sound theoretical and practical training
in the sciences and principles which underlie the profession of
a civil engineer. It is scarcely possible for any one person to
become proficient in al! branches of civil engineering, so wide
is its scope and so inclusive is its purpose. As generally de-
fined it is the “art of economically directing the great sources
of power in nature to the use and convenience of man,” by
the construction of roads, railways, bridges, aqueducts, via-
ducts, canals, docks, harbours, breakwaters, light-houses, by the
construction and adaptation of machinery, by the lighting and
draining of cities and towns, and by the exploitation of mines.
All these works are more or less governed by the same prin-
ciples, and in these principles the student is carefully instructed,
and by means of numerous problems occurring in every day
practice, he is taught to apply his knowledge to the actual con-
ditions of life.
During the session arrangements are made for the delivery,
by distinguished engineers, of special lectures or short courses
of lectures on actual works of construction.
Provision is made, by means of advanced classes, for graduates
and special students to continue their studies and to engage in
researches with-a view to the solving of some of the numberless
problems which confront the engineer in every direction.
Much valuable work of this character has been already accom-
plished, and especial reference may be made io, the fact that
for several years graduates of other universities—some holding
scholarships under the Royal Commissioners for the Exhibition
of 1851—have carried out investigations in the several labor-
atories.
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per weck
devoted to each subject are as follows :—
FIRST YEAR
Hrs. HRs.
Descriptive Geometry..{p. 168), 4 Mathematics.......... (p. 175), 10
ἘΠΕ Fore, 8 νος ὅπ τ (p. 172), Py Sies sc See (p. 185), 2
2
Freehand Drawing..... (p. 173), 3 Physical Laboratory..(p. 186), 44
We ΟΌΕ ον ne: οὶ πες (Bolts); Su, ΞΗΡΆ ΌΤΙ, τὰ τοι (p. 207), 7
Te sOERS Fad eee ar aoe ai ay a ofc Pah ae γ᾽ tes ἊΣ ὝΜΡΑ, ΠΣ si er
tes tot TN
154
SECOND YEAR.
Hrs, Hrs.
Building Construction....(p. 162), 1 Physics τ (p. 185), 2
C@hemistryzsc. seoceeee rs: (p 163), 5; Surveying erie es (p. 188), 3
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 3 Chemical Lahboratory..... (p. 163), 3
Mia pp lin oe neve terete (p. 188), 6 Physical Laboratory...... (p. 186), 3
Mathematics. ..0....2 -<os(*. 175)5-6). = Shopwork cee. acre (p. 207), 4
THIRD YEAR.
Hrs. Hrs.
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 169), 4 Railway Structures....(p. 191), 3 (b)
Geolo syste see ae eke (p. 173), 8 Roads and Canals........ (p. 190), 2
Graphical Staties.(p. 165), 2 (a), 3 (Ὁ) Structural Engineering .(p. 162), 2
ΠΡ OVA ρα ΠΣ (0 188). 6 Surveying. eae cer Rakion ΘΒ.
Matirematicsy: τ πε: (p. 175), 2 Theory of Structures. ....(p. 165), 3
Mechanical Drawing.(p. 177), 3 (opt-) Thermodynamics ......... (p. 191), 1
Municipal Engineering. ..(p. 168), 1 Testing Laboratory....... (p. 166), 3
Museum Work in Geology Thermodynamic Lab.. .(p. 191), 2 (Ὁ)
(p. 173), 1 (b)
FouRTH YEAR.
HRs. Hrs.
JOYA ea oY eae eGo Sosa Root (p. 161), 6 Railway Engineering..... (p. 191), 2
Geodesy 35. ian ΑΜ" (p. 188), 2 Structural Engineering. .(p. 162), 2
Graphical Statics......... (p. 165), 3 Theory of Structures..... (p. 165), 4
Hydraulics ὦ ἡ ἢ ........(p. 167), 2 Geodetic Laboratory..... (p. 189), 4
Mechanical] Engineering... Hydraulic Laboratory ...
(p. 176), 2 (a) (p. 167), 3 (a)
Municipal Engineering... .(p. 168), 1 Testing Laboratory.. .... (p. 166), 6
Iv. Electrica! Engineering.
The first and second years of the undergraduate course of
instruction in Electrical Engineering, are devoted, mainly, to
a preparation in Mathematics, Physies, Chemistry, Mechanics,
Drawing, Shopwork and work in the physical and chemical
Laboratories.
The electrical studies of the third year embrace a consider-
ation of continuous current flow, in circuits of different kinds,
the principles of electro-magnetism, electrical measurements
and the design and action of commutating machinery.
The fourth year is devoted principally to electrical work,
and includes lectures and recitations on variable and alter-
nat ing current phenomena, the principles of action and the
design of alternating current machinery, electric lighting and
‘systems of power distribution, central station design and oper-
An Electrical Engineering Research Laboratory.
Direct Current Dynamo Laboratory.
155
ations, urban and inter-urban railways and long distance power
transmission.
In the second term of the fourth year a choice may be made
between electro-chemistry and hydraulics.
Each fourth year
student is required to present a thesis giving the results of a
suitable experimental investigation.
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per
week devoted to each subject are as follows :—
First YEAR.
Descriptive Geometry... .«p. 168), 4
English
Freehand Drawing, Ma-
chine Sketching and
Wettering® ses. 5 4. ee (p. 173), 6
SECOND
HRs.
@hemiStry.2 ds. e esc ceases (p. 163), 3
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 3
Kinematics of Machines. .(p. 176), 3
Mat henmiabicsieaeee τ. (p. 175), 6
Mechanical Drawinc..... (peels 3
Hrs.
Chemistry cca ae eo (p. 164), 1
Continous Currents and
Commutating Machi-
ML ORY ears ΣΕ wee (p. 169), 2
Machine Design.......... (peels
WiarhenbaticS tae. oe cee (p. 175), 2
Mechanical Drawing..... {0.5
FOURTH
Hrs.
Alternating currents
and Alternating cur-
rent machinery..... (p. 169), 3
Electro-Chemistry ....(p. 164), 1 (b)
Electrical Designing. .(p. 170), 4
Electric Lighting and -
Power Distribution .(p.
Electric Traction...... (p.
lahore Saann 55 fo eee
THIRD YEAR.
169), 3 (a)
170), 3 (Ὁ)
. 167), 2
HRs.
Mathematics ............ (p. 175), 10
IP DYSICSaeEereees ele yey (185 2
Physical Laboratory...... (p. 186), 43
Shopworkeemrene trees (p. 207), 7
YEAR.
Hrs
PDVSICS ter eaten cole ee. (p. 185), 3
Chemical Laboratory..... (p. 163), 6
Physical Laboratory..... (p. 186), 6
Shopworkee- asec a. (p. 207), 6
HRs.
IBD YSICSB. oct tase ote ἘΣ (p. 185), 2
Theory of Structures..(p.
Chemical Laboratory. .(p.
Elect. Eng. Laboratory(p.
Physical Laboratory... .(p.
Civ. Eng. Laboratory. .(p.
165), 3
164), 3
170), 6
186), 6
166), 3 (b)
YEAR.
HRs.
Machine Design..... (p. 177), l(a
Mechanical Engineer-
IN ee ates eee (p. 177), 2 (a)
Thermodynamics ..... (p. 191), 2
Civ. Eng. Laboratory..(p. 166), 3 (a)
Electro-Chemical Lab.(p. 164), 3 (b)
Electrical Engineering
Ga Dee ot cee rae, eee: (p. 170), 9
Mech. Eng. Laboratory(p. 178), 3
156
V. Mechanical Engineering.
The coinplete undergraduate course in Mechanieal Engineer-
ing extends over four years, and provision is made for a fifth
year or graduate course in advanced experimental and other
work.
The first two years of the undergraduate course of imstruc-
tion are largely occupied in preparation in Mathematics, Phys-
ics, Chemistry, Mechanies, Drawing, and Shopwork. During
the second year one lecture and one exercise class per week are
devoted to the Kinematics of Machines.
While motion without regard to force is treated in the Kine-
matic course, the action of external forces In producing or
changing motion in the links of mechanisms is considered in
the third and fourth years, under the head of Dynamics of
Machines. ‘Two lectures per week are given in this subject in
each year, and exercise classes are held for the purpose of work-
ing the problems necessary for illustration.
The work in Machine Design is carried on during the third
and fourth years in conjunction with the practical iastruction
in mechanical designing and drawing in the Drawing Rooms.
A course of two lectures per week is given during the fourth
year on Mechanical Engineering as appHed to questions con-
nected with Power Installations and Prime Movers. A large
portion of the work of this course is supplmentary to, and fol-
lows, the instruction given in Thermodynamics and Machine
Design, which extends over the third and fourth years. (See
ΕΓ: .
Instruction in Workshop Practice (see p. 208) is given
in each of the four years. It is of a systematic nature, and is
intended to prepare for, but by no means to replace, that prac-
tical experience of workshop operations on a commercial basis
which every mechanical engineer must obtain for himself.
The work of the Jecture rooms is illustrated throughout the
course by experimental work carried out by the student, and
by demonstrations in the laboratories of the department.
Arrangements are made for occasional visits to power plants
and mannufactories of importance.
Ref:
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per
week devoted to each subject are as follows :—
Hrs. Hrs.
Descriptive Geometry...(p. 168), 4 Mathematics............ (p. 175), 10
ἜΠΟΣ ΘΗ πὸ τὰς ςτὸ 2 Voy Gog ann eer ete soca (p. 185), 2
Freehand Drawing..... (p. 173), 3 © Physical! Laboratory....(p. 186), 45
Eetterime ......... -.-. (p. 173), 3 Shopwork ............-.. (p. 207), 7
SECOND YEAR.
Hrs. HRs.
Chemistry ccs os eka - (Gig UGB ἢ αν τ Stein ome Ὁ. (p. 185), 2
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 8 Chemical Laboratory..... (p. 163), 2
Kinematics of Machines.(p. 176), 8 Physical Laboratory..... (p. 186), 3
Mathematics .....:....... {5 175)» 6. shop workwes.5 τ΄. 0ὕὃὕὌὕς (p. 207), 7
Mechanical Drawing. ...(p. 177), 6
THIRD YEAR.
Hrs. Hrs
Dynamics of Machines.(p. 176), 2 Thermodynamics ... .(p. 191), 2
Continuous Currents Theory of Structures. .(p. 165), 3
and Commutating Elect. Eng. Laboratory(p. 170), 3
Machinery ........ (p. 169), 2 Testing Laboratory...(p. 166), 3
Graphical Statics...... (p. 165), 2 (a) Mech. Eng. Laboratory(n. 178), 3
Machine Design...... (pe πὴ ὦ Shap works. s jen (p. 207), 6
Mathematics.......... (p. 175), 2 Physical Laboratory. .(p. 186), 3
Mechanical Drawing. .(p. 177), 6
FouRtTH YEAR.
HRs. Hrs.
1) SUSAN BEN, τ; abate (p. 177), 6 Mechanical Engineer-
Dynamics of Machines...(p. 176), 4 diss Seta oe on Pe orn ee {- πῇ). ἃ
Hydraulics and Hydraulic Thermodynamics ..... (p. I91), 4
eee ΝΕ ΠΟΙ τος ssa (p. 167), 2 Hydraulic Laboratory.(p. 167), 3 (b)
Machine Design.........- (p. 177), 2. Mech. Eng. Lab. ....- (p. I77, 12
Shopwerk <.... 2.2... (p. 207), €
V. Metallurgy.
The successful guidance of metallurgical industry requires,
apart from considerations of business training and aptitude,
an adequate knowledge of certam branches of Chemistry and
Engineering as well as a familiarity with Metallurgy proper.
In arranging the following course special prominence has been
given to the chemical group of studies, so as to adapt it to the
needs of students who intend to become metallurgical chemists.
The Faculty has under consideration an alternative course in
which more time will be given to Mechanical and Electrical
Engineering.
158
In the first two years the studies are the same as in the
course in Chemistry, with the addition of Mechanical Drawing
and Shopwork.
In the third and fourth years thorough instruction is given
in Metallurgy, Assaying, Ore-dressing, Inorganic Chemistry,
Geology and Mineralogy. In the fourth year nearly two days
per week are spent in the Metallurgical and Ore-dressing lab-
oratories and drawing room.
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per
week devoted to each subject are as follows:—
First YEAR.
Hrs Hrs
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 4 Mathematies...... ..... (p. 175), 10
Ein oclis hye oe aoe are (Ὁ: ΤΣ Ὁ ΒΗ ΘΙ τ΄. ΣΡ ΔΓΡ. 185. ὦ
Freehand Drawing ..... (p. 173), 3. Physical Labor hiner ...(p. 186), 44
Weetterin go. exter ene (pesl'73) Poe NOD WOL Ky eee ener (DE ZOT) ἢ
SECOND YEAR.
Hks. HRs.
Chemistiye ts. πον: ....(p. 163), 8 Mechanical Drawing....(p. 177), 3
De-criptive Geometry ....(p. 168), 3. Chemical Laboratory . .(p. 163), 12
Mathematics’... .2...0 «©... (peli5), ἡ Physical Waboratory, .2 = (p. 186), 3
led ON AICCH eo Gap ce τ πον (0. ΓΘΌ her4e “—tsleVol holden, Sean cds koe be (p. 207), 4
THIRD YEAR.
H HRs
C@hemistryey.c vaeeer (p. 164), 3 Ore-Dressin gern. .r se (pols eal
Geology. ae (p. 173), 3 Assaying Laboratory...(p. 178),
_ Geological Excursions(p. 173), 3. (ce) Chemical Laboratory...(p. 164), 11
* Geological Museum. (p. 173), 13 Determinative Mineral-
Mechanical Drawing.(p. 177), 3 OD Yara πεν ΣΕ (p. 181), 3
Me talllureyitana- pet: (p. 178), 2 Ore-Dressing Lab..:... (pe L79)5 el
Mineralomyn πὲς (pial Sl) saz MestinemGal. secant (p. 166), 2}
FouRTH YEAR.
Hrs. Ars.
Chemistry ties ls ie (p. 164), 2 Ore-Dressing and Milling (p. 182), 1
IDF ed Ninhece, eon ae ae - (p. 177), 13 Chemical Laboratory....(p. 164), 9
ΒΟ πο ae (p. 173), 25 Metallurgical Laborat-
Mechanical Engineering (p. 177), 1 OLY Sees no aoe (p. 179), 73
Metall eygescec es mec ce (p. 179), 55 Ore-Dressing Laborat-
Mineralogy syare. sete (p. 181), 1 ΟΥ̓ a eee Cone (p. 179), 24
Mining and Metallurgical Petrographical Lab......(p. 174), 1
Machinery. 22.8). sa. (p. 182), 1
ὩΣ kee. ΡΣ ον ἡ Τ᾿ ἮΝ Oe τ
Ξ 59
VII. Mining Engineering.
I. The first two years of the undergraduate course in Mining
Kngineering are mainly devoted to Mathematics, Mechanics,
Physics, Elementary Chemistry, etc., as it is deemed necessary
that the students should master the general principles under-
lying all scientific work before they attack the somewhat com-
plex and specialized subjects of the professional course.
In the third year elementary courses in both Mining and
Metallurgy are.given, and a thorough course in Fire Assaying,
but again the chief work of the year is in Applied Mechanics,
Mechanical Engineering, Geology, Mineralogy and Chemistry.
The fourth year, on the other hand, 'is very largely given
up to special work in Mining and Metallurgy, and, in addition
to the lectures and demonstrations, nearly two days per week
are spent in the Mining and Metallurgical laboratories and the
drawing room.
The subjects of instruction and the number of hours per week
devoted to each subject are as follows :—
First YEAR.
HRs. HRs.
Descriptive Geometry..(p. 168), 4 Mathematics..... .... [0 175}. 10
EI Sls aie. τ΄ ὉΠ: a (opel) sete nee SN SI CSie ον τ (p. 185), 2
Freehand Drawing..... (p. 173), 35 Physical Laboratory..(p. 186), 43
ILPU RAGIN AR ἘΠ Golscmods (pa l73)Sio Shopwork.....9-.7 re. - (p. 207), .7
SECOND YEAR.
Hrs. Hrs.
ΠΟ ΞΡ Yin. clase (p. 163), 3 Surveying....... ἜΤ, (Ρ. 188), 8
Descriptive Geometry....(p. 168), 3 Chemical Laboratory.....(p. 163), 6
IVES DilT Owes ee as ceroee (p. 188), 3 Physical Laboratory..... (p. 186), 3
Maen aGiCsiaaae cee ae ΡΠ]. (ShopwOLK sees. sacar. ae (p. 207), 4
ΕΣ ΥΘΙΟΒ hikes ce as - (p= 185); ὦ
THIRD YEAR.
Hrs. HRs.
@hemiistry-. is. sock eee {ΠΟ ΠΣ SoS Oe RAE eae (p. 181), 1
Geological Excursions.(p. 173), 3 (Ὁ) Ore-Dressing......... (p. 181), 2 (b)
Geological Museum SURVeyiINee ee ose (p. 188), 2
ΣΕ τὸ (Ρ. 173), 1(a)2(b) Theory of Structures.(p. 165), 3
Geology ei Πρ ποτ (pa 11|5}}5 Transportation........ (p. 190), 2 (b)
Graphical Statices...... (p. 165), 2(a) Chemical Laboratory. .(p. 163), 3
Machine Design....... (pe akin); 2 Determinative Miner-
ΝΡ a have 9 τὸ ey ee ee (p. 188), 6 (a) alogy Laboratory....(p. 181), 3
Mathematics..... .... (p. 175), 2 Fire Assaying Labor-
Mechanical Drawing. .(p. 177), 3 ALOLV meena eee ( 118); 5.0)
Metallunoys τος. .c.8. (p. 178), 2 (a) Ore-Dressing Lab .... (p. 182), 2 (Ὁ)
Mineralooye.. s,s (p. 181), 2 Testing “Lab... ....:. (p. 166), 3 (d) (b)
100.
FOURTH YEAR.
Hrs.
Chemistry :....... (p. 164), 2 (b) opt.
Desigmimg... 2230.2. τ: (p. 177), 3 (b)
Geology and Ore Deposits,
(p. 174), 4 (b)
Canadian Geology..... (p. 174), 1 (a)
Hydraulies..(p. 167), 1 (a), 1 (b) opt.
Hydraulic Machinery....(p. 167), 1
Metallurgy ....... (p. 179), 2
τῷ Tron and steel.(p. 179), 1 (a)
se Alloys ...(p. 179), 1 (b) opt.
us Advanced(p. 179), 1 opt.
τ Electro ..(p. 179), 1(b) opt.
Mineralogy........ pw(p. 181), 2a)
Mining. 3... 0.4. (p. 182), 2 (a), 3 (b)
δ ΧΙ.
Hrs.
Mining Problems.(p. 182), 1 (b)
Mining Machinery(p. 182), 2 (a) 1 (b)
Mining Colloquium...... (p. 182), 1
Ore-Dressing & Milling.(p. 182), 2 (a)
Physiography....(p. 174), 1 (Ὁ) opt.
Petrography.......5.... (p. 178), 1 (a)
Mechanical Engineering,
(p. 177), 2 (a)
Chemical Lab ...(p. 164), 9 (a), 6 (b)
Hydraulic Laboratory. :(p. 167), 3 (a)
Metallurgical Lab(p. 179), 5 (a) ( 11(b)
Ore-Dressing,Lab.(p. 182), 5 (a) |
Petrographical Lab....(p. 174), 3 (b)
COURSES OF LECTURES.
N.B.—The following courses are subject to such modifica-
tions during the year as the Faculty may deenr advisable.
1. Architecture,
PROFESSOR: —
LECTURER:—H. Ἐς. ARMSTRONG.
The courses of study are as follows:—
1. General Architectural
History.
Second Year—( First
Term )—Ancient Egypt; Greece; Rome; Byzantine and
Karly Christian Architecture.
anesque; the Monastic Orders;
Wed., di; Phurs:,' da:
(Second ‘Term)—Rom-
Gothic; Renaissance.
Text Books:—Smith & Slater; “Architecture, Classic &
Early Christian;” Smith & Poynter: “Architecture,
Gothic & Renaissance” (5. Low, Marston & Co.) 5 or
Hamlin: “ History of Architecture ” (Longmans, Green
& Gone
Reference Books:—Fergusson: “History of Architecture”
(Murray); R. Sturgis: “ European Architecture ” (Mac-
millan ):
2. Renaissance and Modern
Text Books:—Anderson:
Architecture.
(First Term)—Italy; Spain.
England; Colonial; Modern.
i ‘Renaissance
Third Year—
(Second Term)—France ;
Mon); 95. hums. ὃ:
Architecture in
Italy (Batsford); Blomfield: “Short History of Renais-
sance Architecture in England” (Bell).
“Ζπϑι 7 Ὁ θ6 [Banjoeyory 904 ὉΠ WooYy V
ΝΥ ΟΜΝ ΤῊΣ ΑΛ ΤΟΙ Bae A es a ae i
st gt eg REAR HN cae Nt
ae ea τὴς Ἢ
161
Reference Books:—Fergusson: “History of Modern Archi-
tecture” (Murray); Gotch: “Early Renaissance Architec-
ture in England” (Batsford); Blomfield: “Renaissance
Architecture in England” (Bell).
3. Domestic, Public, and Ecclesiastical Architecture. Third
and Fourth Years together. Historical Survey; mod-
ern conditions and requirements. Mon., 12.
Reference Books:— Statham: “Modern Architecture ”
(Chapman & Hall); Stevenson: “House Architecture”
(Macmillan). ἘΣ
4. Elements of Architecture. Second Year. The classical
Orders; arcading, mouldings, ete., classical and gothic:
composition; elements of architectural effect; style.
Tues., 12.
Reference Books:—Baldwin Brown: “The Fine Arts”
(Murray; Scribner); Statham: “Architecture for Gen-
eral Readers” (Chapman & Hall).
5. Art History. Third and Fourth Years together. Sculp-
ture; painting; the industrial arts. Tues., 9.
Reference Books:—Baldwin Brown: “The Fine Arts”
(Murray; Scribner); Upeott: “Introduction to Greek
Sculpture” (Clarendon Press); Gardner: “ Handbook of
Greek Sculpture” (Macmillan); Woltman ἃ Woermann:
History of Painting” (Kegan Paul, & Co.); Labarte:
“Histoire des Arts Industriels” (Morel).
6. Drawing and Modelling.
(a) Freehand drawing from the cast (ornament and figure).
Second Year—4 hrs.; Third and Fourth Years—6 hrs.
extra time fer water color work. Mr. Armstrong.
(8) Architectural Drawing and Desiga.—
Second Year—7 hrs. Studies of the orders; rendering
with the pen and brush; elementary problems in design.
Third Year—10 hrs. Problems in Design.
Fourth Year—20 hrs. Problems in Design.
Advanced (Graduate) Course. Problems in Design.
(c) Modelling. Third and Fourth Years—3 hrs. (Sec-
ond Term). Architectural ornament modelled in clay
from the cast. Mr. Armstrong.
6
162
Structural Engineering.
Messrs. Τὸ, I. 5. Mattice, B.A.Sc., (McGill), and Με C. J.
Beullac, B.Sc., (Univ. of France), of the Dominion Bridge
Works, give special courses of lectures on Wednesdays at 12
m., and Fridays at 2 p.m., in the following :—
1. Building materials; the history, properties, tests and
uses of all materials of construction.
2. Specifications and professional practice; the different
methods of preparing specifications for estimates, in-
structions to bidders, and rules to be observed inj; writ-
ing specifications, general clauses, law of contracts.
3. Building Construction :—
(a) Carpentry; frames, joints, framing of floors and roofs,
partitions, bridging, furring, ete.
(b) Slow burning construction.
(c) Masonry.
4, Hygiene :—
(a) Plumbing.
(b) Disposal of household refuse.
(c) Heating.
(d) Ventilation.
5. Steel frame buildings; design, mill-work, steel and cast
iron columns and connections, beams and girders, fram-
ing and wind bracing.
Special designs will be prepared in the drawing-room illus-
trating the several subjects of the lectures.
R. I. B. A. Examinations.—The Royal Institute of British
Architects having decided to hold in the Colonies qualifying
examinations for Associateship, and Montreal having been se-
lected as the examination-centre for the Dominion, a special
course of lectures in preparation for these examinations will
be given during the winter, provided a sufficient number come
forward to attend it. The course will embrace the subject
of Architectural Styles, their Features, Mouldings, and Orna-
ment, comprising a study in detail of the three great divisions
of historical architecture, Classic, Medieval and Renaissance,
in accordance with the programme of the Royal Institute.
The lectures will be given on Tuesday and Thursday, from
5.30 to 6.30 p.m., unless other times prove more convenient to
the majority of those attending. The complete course will
109
cover two sessions; for session 1903-04 the subject will be
Classic and Medieval Architecture. The Architectural Li-
brary will be available for reading and reference to those tak-
ing this course; it is open in the evening from 7.30 to 10.30,
as well as during the day. The fee for this course is ten dol-
lars ($10.00) per session.
ARCHITECTURAL EQuipMENT.—The architectural equipment
consists of a representative collection of casts, comprising ar-
chitectural detail and ornament, as well as figure sculpture;
of photographs and illustrations; an arc-light electric lantern;
a large collection of slides, diagrams, and models; and a library
for architectural study. (See § XIII.)
Women SrupEents.—The classes in freehand drawing, and
modelling, and in architectural design, as well as the architec-
tural lectures, are open to women students. Information as
to admission may be obtained on application to the Dean of
the Faculty or to the Professor of Architecture.
2. Chemistry and Assaying,
PROFESSORS:—B.° J. HARRINGTON.
J. WALLACE WALKER.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—N. NORTON EVANS.
DEMONSTRATORS:—D. MACKINTOSH.
BERTRAM D. STEELE.
L. O. HOWARD.
CHARLES 5. PATERSON.
E. H. ARCHIBALD.
LECTURE ASSISTANT:—M,. VIOLETTE DOVER.
Students in all the courses of Applied Science are expected
to take up the study of Chemistry in the second year, having
previously acquired a knowledge of some branches of Physics
in the first year of their course. They attend a course of lec-
tures, supplemented by tutorial classes, on the laws of chem-
ical combination, chemical formule and equations, the pre-
paration and properties of the more important elements and
their compounds, etc. They must also devote at least one
morning or afternoon a week throughout the session to prac-
tical work in the laboratory, where they learn the construc-
tion and use of ordinary apparatus, and perform a series of
experiments designed to cultivate the powers of observation
and deduction. Many of the experiments involve accurate
weighing, and for this purpose the elementary laboratory is
104
well supplied with balances. During the second term consid-
erable attention is also devoted to the subject of Qualitative
Analysis.
The lectures in the third year comprise :—
(a) A course dealing mainly with the methods and reac-
tions employed in chemical analysis, being explanatory of the
work done in the laboratory; one lecture a week during the
session. (b) A course on Industrial Chemistry; two lectures
a week during the first term. (c) An elementary course on
Organie Chemistry ; two lectures a week during the second term.
(d) A course on the composition and analysis of Iron and
Steel; one lecture a week during the second term.
The laboratory work of the third year comprises :—
(a2) An extensive course of Analytical Chemistry, including
gravimetric, volumetric and electrolytic methods. (Ὁ) An ele-
mentary course on the preparation of Organic Compounds.
(2) Water Analysis and Analysis of Iron and Steel, both in
the second term. Students im the Mining Course are exempt
jrom Organic Chemistry.
Lectures in the fourth year comprise :—
(a) A systematic course on Organic Chemistry, two lectures
a week. (b) A course on Physical Chemistry, two lectures a
week. (c) A course on Mineral Analysis. (d) A short course
on Gas Analysis. In the lectures on Organic Chemistry spe-
cial atention is paid to the commoner substances which find
application in the arts. The lectures on Physical Chemistry
are divided into two parts. In the first term they include a
study of such physical properties of gases, liquids, and solids
as are known to depend upon their chemical constitution; also
‘Thermo-Chemistry and the law of Mass Action. The second
term is devoted to Electro-Chemistry, theoretical and applied.
The lectures will be based upon the application of the gaseous
Jaws to solutions. This will be followed by descriptions of
the most recent applications of electricity to the production of
metals and chemicals.
Laboratory work in the fourth year will be arranged to suit
the requirements of students. Those intending to prosecute
organic work will take up a complete course of Organic Pre-
parations and Analysis, but they must also spend some time
on the essential physico-chemical methods; while students of
Physical Chemistry must spend enough time in the organic
165
laboratory to become familiar with the chief methods of or-
ganic work. Those intending to devote themselves to Mineral
Chemistry will omit the Organic Chemistry, but must study
the more important physico-chemical methods, and devote a
large amount of time to advanced Mineral Analysis. ΑἹ] stu-
dents in the Chemistry Course must take up Gas Analysis.
Laboratory courses will also be provided for students who
wish to make a specialty of any particular branch of Indus-
trial Chemistry, such as Chemistry of Oils, Iron and Steel
Analysis, Bleaching, Papermaking, and manufacture of
Chemicals, ete.
Of the above fourth year subjects students in the Mining
Course take only the lectures and practical work in Mineral
Analysis.
3. Civil Engineering and Applied Mechanics.
PROFESSOR:—HENRY T. BOVEY.
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS:—R. 5. LEA.
E. G. COKER.
DEMONSTRATOR:—K, M. CAMERON.
1. Theory of Structures.—The lectures on this subject em-
brace :—
(a) The analytical and graphical determination of the
stresses in the several members of framed-structures, both
simple and complex, as, ¢.g., cranes, roof and bridge trusses,
piers, ete.
(b) The methods of ascertaining and representing the shear-
ing forces and bending moments to which the members of a
structure are subjected.
(c) A study of the strength, stiffness and resistance of ma-
terials, including a statement of the principles relating to work,
inertia, energy, together with a discussion of the nature and
effect of the different kinds of stress, and the resistance offered
by a material to deformation and to blows.
(d) The design and proper proportioning of beams, pillars,
shafts, roofs, bridge piers and trusses, arches, arched ribs,
masonry dams, foundations, earth works, and retaining walls.
Graphics.—A complete course of instruction is given in the
graphical analysis of arches and of bridge, roof, and other
trusses, and in the graphical solution of mechanical problems.
It is therefore possible for the student to apply both the ana-
166
lytical and graphical methods of treatment, and thus to verify
the accuracy of his calculations. Dr. Bovey and Dr. Coker.
Text Book:—Bovey’s Theory of Structures and Strength of
Materials.
The Laboratory Work (see ὃ XII.) is as follows:—
Fourth Year.—During the fourth year students are expected
to engage in a research upon the physical properties of a ma-
terial of construction, with special reference to the form and
position of such material in the structure; or research may be
taken up on the flow of water, through orifices and pipes, over
weirs, and on the efficiency of vanes, pumps and hydraulic
motors.
Third Year.—During the third year a systematized course
of laboratory instruction is given in which students carry out
for themselves a series of tests upon engineering materials.
The course comprises :—
(a) Linear measurements by Whitworth measuring machine,
dividing engine, and micrometer gauges.
(b) Calibration of extensometers, gauges, and the like.
(c) Tension tests of long wires above and below the elastic
limit.
(d) Tensile and compressive tests of cast iron, wrought iron,
steel, brass, copper, timber, stone, bricks, and cements.
-(e) Transverse tests of beams under different conditions of
loading and fixing.
(7) Shearing tests of iron, steel, timber, stone, and the like.
(g) Torsional tests of metals.
(h) Tests of materials under compound stress.
(i) Tests of chains, wire cables, spikes, screws and the like.
(j) Pillar tests under various conditions of loading and fixing.
(k) Determination of the various moduli of materials by static
and dynamic methods.
(1) Determination of centres of gravity, moments of inertia,
and moments of resistance.
(m) The testing of concrete and cement in accordance with
standard specifications.
2. Bridge Construction.—A course of lectures is given on
practical bridge construction, including:
(a) The reasons governing the selection of a particular type
of bridge ;
a
DRED παρ δ Satie een A hiturs am :
a
ot etal ἂρ
*
?
An Engineering Testing Laboratory.
Hydraulic Laboratory.
167
(b) A discussion of the loads to which the bridge will be
subjected ;
(c) The calculations of the stresses in the several members
of the bridge;
(d) The determination of the sectional areas and forms of
the members ;
(6) The design of the connections ;
(f) The preparation of complete engineering drawings.
Dr. Bovey and Dr. Coker.
3. Hydraulics.—The student is instructed in the funda-
mental laws governing the equilibrium of fluids, and in the
laws of flow through orifices, mouthpieces, submerged (partially
or wholly) openings, over weirs, through pipes, and in open
channels and rivers. The impulsive action of a free jet of water
upon vanes, both straight and curved, is carefully discussed,
and is followed by an investigation of the power and efficiency
of the several hydraulic motors, as, ¢.g., reaction wheels, pres-
sure engines, vertical water wheels, turbines, pumps, ete. Dr.
Bovey, Dr. Coker.
Text Book :—Bovey’s Hydraulics.
The laboratory work (see also ἃ XII) will include the fol-
lowing :—
(a) Flow through orifices—The determination of the co-effi-
cients of discharge, velocity, etc.
(0) Flow over weirs.—The determination of the co-efficient
of discharge with and without side contraction. Also
the measurement of the section of the stream.
(c) Flow through pipes.—The determination of critical velo-
cities and of the effect upon the flow, of angles, bends,
and sudden changes in section.
(d) Impact.—The determination of the co-efficient of impact.
(e) Motors, etc—The determination of the efficiency of Pelton
and other wheels, of vortex and other turbines, of centri-
fugal and other pumps, ete.
4. Hydraulic Machinery.—The lectures in this course apply
the principles of hydraulics to explain the construction and
action of hydraulic presses, accumulators, lifts, rams, riveting
machinery, pumps, multi-cylinder engines, workshop tools, tur-
bines, centrifugal pumps, and the like. The design of one or
two types is considered in detail.
i aig a γε
108
The hydraulic transmission of power and the design and
construction of central stations is also included. Dr. Coker.
5) Municipal Engineerting.—The lectures on this subject
will embrace :—
(a) Water Supply—yThe quantity and quality of water; sys-
tems and sources of supply; rainfall and evaporation; storage
as related to the supplying capacity of water-sheds; natural
and artificial purification; distribution, including the location
of mains, hydrants, stop-valves, etc.; combined or separate fire
and domestic systems; details of construction, including dams.
reservoirs, pumps, ete.; preliminary surveys, estimates of cost,
statistics, ete.
(b) Sewerage of Cities and Towns.—The various systems
for the removal of sewage; special methods in use for its treat-
ment and ultimate disposal; the proportioning and construction
of main, branch, and intercepting sewers; man-holes, flush-
tanks, catch-basins, οἷο. ; materials used in construction; esti-
mates of cost. Mr. Lea.
6. Structural Engineering.—A special course of lectures on
this subject is given by Messrs. E. 8. 8. Mattice, B.A.Se., and
M. C. J. Beullac, B.Se., of the’ Dominion Bridge Company.
For details of this course see § XI, 1, p. 162.
4. Descriptive Geometry.
LECTURERS:—C. H. McLEop.
H. F. ARMSTRONG.
This course deals with the methods of representing objects
on one plane so that their true dimensions may be accurately
sealed. It discusses the methods employed in the graphical
solution of the various problems arising in engineering design,
and deals generally with the principles underlying all construc-
tive drawing. The methods taught are illustrated by applica-
tions to practical problems. It is the aim of the work to develop
the imagination in respect to the power of mentally picturing
unseen objects, and, incidentally, precision in the use of the
drawing instruments is attained.
First Year—Geometrical drawing, orthographie projections,
including penetrations, developments, sections, etc.; isometric
projection. Mr. Armstrong.
Second Year.—Problems on straight line and plane; pro-
jections of plane and solid figures; curved surfaces and tan-
nen tees en, | Ge allt
we, ee Se νυ ἮΝ δι νν ee
=
᾿
=
Ν ΚΤ ΚΕ PL s ΤΥ ας ΡΟ
ἮΝ phy Υ : 3 Υ
ἴ
?
169
gent planes; intersections of curved surfaces; axometric pro-
jections; shades and shadows. Professor McLeod.
Third Year.—Mathematical perspective and perspective of
shadows, οἷο; spherical projection, and the construction of
maps. (This course is given under Surveying and Geodesy,
see XI, 16, p. 188).
5, Electrical Engineering.
PROFESSOR:—R. B. OWENS.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—L. A. HERDT.
DEMONSTRATORS:
UNDERGRADUATE COURSES.
1. Continuous Currents and Commutating Machinery.—The
theoretical consideration of continuous current fiow in circuits
of different kinds; the laws of electro-magnetism and of the mag-
netic circuit; the action and principles of design of commutat-
ing and rectifying machinery :—required of students in Elec-
trical and Mechanical Engineering.
T. and Th., 9-10—Mr. Herdt. First and second terms.
Text-books:—Elements of Electricity and Magnetism, J. J.
Thomson; Magnetic Induction of Iron and other Metals, J. A.
Ewing; Continuous Current Dynamos. J. Fisher-Hinnen; De-
sign of Dynamos, 8. P. Thompson.
2. Alternating Current and Alternating Current Machinery.—
The theoretical consideration of variable current flow in cir-
cuits containing resistance, inductance and capacity under dif-
ferent conditions; the action and principles of design of syn-
chronous and induction machinery :—required of students in
Electrical Engineering. Must be preceded by course 1.
W., Th. and F., 11-12—Professor Owens. First and second
terms.
Text-books :—Theoretical Elements of Electrical Engineer-
ing, C. P. Steinmetz; Alternating Currents and Alternating
Current Machinery, D. C. Jackson.
3. Electric Lighting and Power Distribution.—The design
and operation of central and isolated lighting and power plants ;
the design and construction of distributing lines; arc and in-
candescent lighting; the applications of stationary motors to
hie ΡΤ ἘΠ ΣΝ
By Se δ ἐν tas
τὰ κως eee
170
general power purposes:—required of students in Electrical
Engineering. Must be preceded by course 1.
T., W. and F., 10-11—Mr. Herdt. Second term.
Text-books :—Electric lighting, F. B. Crocker; Electric
Power Transmission, Louis Bell.
4. Klectric Traction Determination of power required to
accelerate and draw, at different speeds, loads under varying
track and other conditions; car equipment as affected by nature
of service; track construction ; systems of distribution for urban
and for heavy through traffic conditions :—required of students
in Electrical Engineering. Must be preceded by course 1.
T., W. and F., 10-11—Mr. Herdt. Second term.
Text-books:—The Electric Railway, Louis Bell. Students
are furnished with supplementary notes.
5. Hlectrical Designing.—(a) Detailed electric and magnetic
calculations and complete drawings for a commutating machine,
a synchronous machine and a transformer or an induction
motor :—required of students in Electrical Engineering. Must
be preceded by course 1 and taken in conjunction with course 2.
Saturday, 9-1..Professor Owens. First and second terms.
Text-books:—Continuous Current Dynamos, J. Fisher-
Hinnen; The Induction Motor, B. A. Behrend. Supplemented
by MS. notes and data.
(b) Complete plans and estimates for an isolated or central
lighting or power plant, including distributing system :—re-
quired of students in Electrical Engineering. Must be preceded
by course 1 and taken in conjunction with courses 3 and 4.
Mr. Herdt. First and second terms.
Text-books:—No text-books. Notes and data are furnished.
6. Electrical Engineering Laboratory.—(a) Includes such
tests of direct current metering and controlling devices, dyna-
mos, motors, boosters, motor-generators, dynamotors, converters,
open and closed coil, constant current machines and are and
incandescent lamps as illustrate the principles of their action
and the limits of their proper use; also complete test of direct
current isolated or central lighting or power plant :—required
of students in Electrical Engineering. Must be taken in con-
junction with or be preceded by course 1.
T., Th., 2-5—Professor Owens, Mr. Herdt. First and second
terms.
Wit
Text-books:—Handbook for the Electrical Laboratory and
Testing Room, J. A. Fleming. In addition, students are fur-
nished with special laboratory notes and forms.
(b) Includes experiments on variable current flow in cir-
cuits of different kinds; tests of alternators, synchronous motors
and converters, compensators, induction motors, transformers,
frequency and phase-changing apparatus, potential regulators,
reaction coils, etc., and complete test of alternating lighting
or power plant:—required of students in Electrical Engineer-
ing. Must be preceded by course 1 and taken in conjunction
with course 2. .
M., W. and F., 2-5—Professor Owens, Mr. Herdt. First and
second terms.
Text-books:—No text-books. Students are furnished with
special laboratory notes and forms.
ἡ. Telegraphy and Telephony.—Single duplex, quadruplex
and multiplex telegraph systems, telephone systems, current
generation for telegraph and telephone work, central tele-
graph and telephone stations; line construction and testing;
special systems of signalling :—optional. One lecture per week,
at time to be arranged—Professor Owens. First term.
Text-books:—Telegraphy, Preece and Sievewright ; A manual
on Telephony, Preece and Stubbs.
GRADUATE COURSES.
8. Special problems in the theory and practice of alternating
current working.—Two lectures per week at time to be ar-
ranged—Professor Owens. First and second terms.
9, Special problems in Electric T'raction.—One lecture per
week at time to be arranged—Mr. Herdt. First and second
REPTNSe ον
10. Advanced Laboratory Investigations—Special research
work by students having necessary previous training—Profes-
sor Owens, Mr. Herdt.
11. Electrical Engineering Seminar.—Weekly meetings are
held, at which students present carefully prepared papers upon
current engineering literature and special topics in connection
with their studies or their laboratory work—Professor Owens,
Mr. Herdt.
she pane Wea ne διιαῖς
Lae
Fahd oie φῇ
ae ἀφο Ὁ
er a
Ss
“Ὁ.
NN
ἢ
112
6. English Language and _Literature.
PROFESSOR:—C. ἘΠ. MoyseE.
LECTURER:—J. W. CUNLIFFE.
In view of the importance of accuracy of expression to those
engaged in scientific or professional work, a course in English
Composition is prescribed for all undergraduates of the first
year, and no student will be allowed to enter the second year
until he has given satisfactory proof that he is able to write
omtelligently, clearly, and correctly. In order to make the in-
struction as practical as possible, short essays on current events
and simple literary and historical subjects are required weekly,
and will be commented upon in class in illustration of the
points advanced in the lectures, which will aim at explaining
the elementary principles of composition. (‘Two hours a week.)
The hand-book used is Carpenter’s Elements of Rhetoric, First
High School Course (Macmillan Co.), and every member of the
class is required to provide himself with a copy. Students who
prove themselves competent may be excused further work in
composition, and additional exercises will be required from
those who are backward. Satisfactory results must be obtained
in the regular essay work, as well as in the examinations, in
order to pass in the subject. A short course of lectures will be
given introductory to the course of Summer Reading.
Summer Reading.—During the vacation, students entering
the second year are expected to read certain standard works in
literature and fiction, on which an examination will be held in
the beginning of October. The marks obtained in this examin-
ation will be reckoned in determining the relative standing at
the sessional examinations at the end of the second year.
The works selected for the vacation of 1903 are:—
Shakspere’s Henry V., ed. Deighton (Macmillan) ;
Goldsmith’s Vicar of Wakefield ;
Scott’s Waverley ;
Stevenson’s Kidnapped.
French Students may substitute for the above the following :—
Corneille—Le Cid, Horace.
V. Hugo—Hernani, Ruy Blas.
Balzac—Eugenie Grandet.
Students will also be required to possess some knowledge of
the lives of the above French authors.
πονῶν bit ria eatin σαὶ
_
ον Ὁ ΣΝ
In the Drawing Rooms.
Carpenter Shop.
118
Students who have already taken equivalent courses in this,
or in any other university, may be exempted from a part or
from the whole of the above work, on written application to the
Dean.
7. Freehand Drawing, Lettering, Etc.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—H. F. ARMSTRONG,
In the Freehand Course, the object is to train the hand and
eye so that students may readily make sketches from parts of
machinery, etc., either as perspective drawings in hight. and
shade, or as preparatory dimensioned sketches from which to
make scale drawings.
In the Lettering Course, plain block alphabets, round writ-
ing, and titles, will be chiefly dealt with. In this course, also,
tinting, tracing, blue printing and simple map drawing will
be included.
8. Geology.
PROFESSOR:—F., D. ADAMs.
DEMONSTRATOR:—A. W. G. WILSON.
The courses are arranged as follows:—
Third Year.—
General Geology—tThe lectures will embrace a general sur-
vey of the whole field of Geology, and wil} be intro-
duced by a short course on Mineralogy. Especial atten-
tion will be devoted to Dynamical Geology and to His-
torical Geology, including a description of the fauna
and flora of the earth during the suecessive periods of
its past history, as well as to the economic aspeets of the
subject.
The lectures will be illustrated by the extensive collec-
tions in the Peter Redpath Museum, as well as by
models, maps, sections and lantern slides. here will
be an excursion every Saturday until the snow falls,
after which the excursion will be replaced by a demon-
stration in the Museum.
Text Book:—Scott, An Introduction to Geology.
Petrography.—The modern methods of study employed in
Petrography are first described, and the classification
and description of rocks is then taken up.
114
In addition to the lectures, one afternoon a week dur-
the second term will be devoted to special microsco-
pical work in the Petrographical Laboratory.
Text Book:—Harker, Petrology for Students.
Ore Deposits, Economic Geology and Practical Geology.—The
nature, mode of occurrence and classification of Ore
Deposits will first be taken up. A series of typical oc-
currences will then be described and their origin dis-
cussed. The more important non-metallic materials,
e.g., fuels, clays, abasive materials, building stones, etc.,
will be similarly treated as well as questions of water
supply, artesian wells, etc. The methods employed in
carrying out geological and magnetic surveys and in
constructing geological sections will then be taken up,
with special studies in folding, faulting, ete.
The course will be illustrated by maps, models, lan-
tern slides and specimens.
Text Books:—Geikie, Outlines of Field Geology;
Kemp, Ore Deposits of the United States and Canada;
Phillips and Louis, A Treatise on Ore Deposits.
Books of Reference:—The Monographs of the U. S.
Geological Survey, and the Reports of the Geological
Survey of Canada. ,
Canadian Geology=—A general description of the Geology
and Mineral Resources of the Dominion.
Petrographical Laboratoryx—See ὃ XII, 11. This laboratory
is open to Fourth Year mining students during the sec-
ond term.
Physiography.—The course will consist of a study of the
principal types of Land Forms and their influence upon
human development. Attention will be given more
particularly to the practical bearing of the subject on
engineering work. During the latter part of the course,
a brief description of the salient physical features of
Canada will be presented.
The course will be illustrated by maps, models and
lantern slides.
Field Work.—The students in mining will receive a course
of instruction in geological mapping and field work—
extending over one week—in connection with the sum-
mer schoo] of mining.
175
Norr.—Students of the Mining and Chemistry courses take
all the Mineralogy of the third year. Mining Students take
all courses of the fourth year. Chemistry Students take,
in addition to the Geology of the third year, the Mineralogy
of the fourth year.
The Petrographical Laboratory is open to fourth year Min-
ing Students during the second term.
9. Mathematics and Mathematical Physics.
PROFESSOR:—G. H. CHANDLER.
LECTURER:—R. S. LEA.
The work in this department is conducted from the outset
with special reference to the needs of students of applied
science. Much time is given to practice in the use of mathe-
matical tables, particular attention being paid to the solution
of triangles, the tracing of curves, graphical representation of
functions, reduction of observations, etc.
The courses of study are as follows :—
First YEAR.
Geometry.—Exercises on Euclid, including Loci, Transver-
sals, etc.; elements of Solid Geometry and of Geometrical Conic
Sections.
Algebra.—Miscellaneous theorems and exercises; Complex
Numbers; Elementary Determinants.
Trigonometry.—Plane and Spherical.
Mechanics——An elementary course in Kinematics, Kinetics,
Statics, and Hydrostatics.
SECOND YEAR.
Analytic Geometry.—The Point, Straight Line, Circle, Para-
bola, Ellipse and Hyperbola.
Differential and Integral Calculus.—Differentiation of func-
tions of one or more variables; Successive differentiation ;
Tangents, etc.; Multiple Points; Asymptotes; Curvature; Max-
ima and Minima; Integration, with application to Areas, Vol-
umes, Moments of Inertia, etc.
Mechanics.—Kinematics; Kinetics of a Particle; Statics.
THIRD YEAR.
Analytic Geometry.—Conjugate Diameters; General Equa-
tions of the Second Degree; Elements of Geometry of Three
Dimensions.
176
Calculus —Various Applications; Elementary Differential
Equations.
Mechanics.—Winetics of a Rigid Body; Centres of Pressure,
ete.
Classes may also be held for advanced (optional) work in
the above or other subjects. Students taking graduate courses
will receive guidance in any advanced Mathematics required in
connection with their work.
Text-books. First Year:—Wilson’s Solid Geometry and
Conic Sections (Macmillan); Hall & Knight’s Elementary
Algebra (Macmillan) ; Murray’s Plane and Spherical Trig-
onomeiry (Longmans); Blaikie’s Dynamics (J. Thin, Edin-
burgh) ;.Bottomley’s Mathematical Tables (Macmillan) ; Cham-
bers’s Mathematical Tables. Second and Third Years:—Went-
worth’s Analytic Geometry (Ginn & Co.); Chandler’s Cal-
culus (ἢ. M. Renouf, Montreal): Wright’s Mechanies (Van
Nostrand).
10. Mechanical Engineering.
PROFESSOR:—R. J. DURLEY.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:!:—H. M: JAQUAYsS.
f A. R. ROBERTS.
ἢ \O: Hina.
1. Kinematics of Machines—(Wednesday, 11; Thursday, 10).
Definitions; mechanisms and machines; kinematic pairing;
velocity and acceleration in mechanisms; centrodes; restraint
in mechanisms; analysis of the quadric crank chain, the slider-
erank chain, and the double-slider crank chain; higher pairing
in mechanisms; cams; ratchet-and click trains; chamber-crank
and chamber-wheel trains; mechanisms involving non-rigid
links; screw motion and spheric motion in mechanisms.
Text-book.—Durley’s Kinematics of Machines (Wiley).
2. Dynamics of Machines.—Third Year—(Monday, 10;
Wednesday, 9). Elementary dynamics of the steam engine;
diagrams of crank effort; fluctuation of energy and speed; fly-
wheels; friction of journals and pivots;. graphic treatment of
friction in mechanisms; brakes; dynamics of belt and rope
driving; transmission and absorption dynamometers.
Fourth Year.— (Tuesday, 9; Wednesday, 9; Thursday, 12.)
Balancing of double and single acting engines; dynamics of the
connecting rod; gyrostatic action in machines; theory of gov-
DEMONSTRATORS:
ΔΩ
177
ernors; graphic methods in dynamics; vibration in machines;
knocking of steam engines.
3. Machine Design.—Third Year—Thursday, 10. Princi-
ples of the Strength of Materials as applied to the design of the
parts of machines; fastenings used in machine construction,
bolts, screws, keys, cotters, rivets and rivetted joints; journals
and bearings; shafts and couplings.
Fourth Year.—(Monday, 9; Wednesday, 12).—Design of
wheel gearing; belts, ropes and pulleys; pipes and pipe joints;
cylinders; eccentrics, pistons and piston rods, connecting rods,.
cross-heads and other engine details; flywheels; design of valves
and valve gears.
Text-book:—Unwin’s Machine Design (Longmans, 2 Vols.).
Book of Reference :—Low and Bevis’ Machine Drawing and
Design. (Longmans. )
4. Mechanical Drawing and Designing.—Second Year.—
(Monday and Thursday, 2). Elementary principles of me-
chanical drawing and draftsmanship; preparation of working
drawings of simple machine details; making dimensioned
sketches of machines and their parts, dimensioning and con-
ventional colouring of drawings; preparation of tracings.
Third Year (Monday and Thursday, 2).—Designing of sim-
ple machine paris; more difficult exercises in mechanical draw-
ing; engine designing.
Fourth Year (Monday and Thursday, 2)——The complete
design of a machine, such as a steam engine, a pump, or a ma-
chine tool, is worked out, and the requisite working drawings
and tracings are prepared.
5. Mechanical Engineering.—(Thursday, 10; Friday, 9).
Steam boilers and steam production: fuel and combustion ;
corrosion and defects of boilers; boiler installations; the steam
engine—estimation of power developed under various condi-
tions; the indicator and its diagrams; steam distribution, and
performance of pumping and air-compressing machinery, as
shown by the indicator; economy of steam machinery; gas and
oil engines; gas producers; mechanical distribution of power,
and losses of power, in power installations and workshops; air
compressors; fans; pumping machinery; steam engine valves
and valve gears; valve diagrams; speed regulation in steam en-
cines; lubrication in steam engines; steam turbines and engines
for special services; relation between weight and power in steam
118
machinery; marine engines and ship propulsion; elements of
locomotive engineering; tractive force in locomotives; train
resistance; brakes; refrigerating machinery.
Books of Reference :—Ewing’s The Steam Engine (Camb.
Univ. Press) ; Lineham’s Mechanical Engineering (Chapman &
Hall); Hutton’s Mechanical Engineering of Power Plants
(Wiley).
3. Thermodynamics. See page 191.
. Laboratory Instruction. See pages 198 and 204.
. Workshop Practice. See pages 207 and 208.
΄--
CO -2
GRADUATE COURSES.
The graduate courses in Mechanical Engineering comprise
experimental research work of the following kinds :—
Tests of the economy and performance of steam engines and
boilers, air and gas engines, and air compressors; experiments
on the behaviour of superheated steam, on cylinder condensa-
tion, on feed heating, and on the value of fuels; experiments
on the properties and relative values of lubricants, on transmis-
sion and absorption dynamometers, on the efficiency of trans-
mission machinery and of machine tools; tests of fans and
blowers; experiments on the flow of air and of steam; researches
on the tempering and welding of various materials, on the
properties of alloys and on the action of cutting tools.
11. Metallurgy.
PROFESSOR:—ALFRED STANSFIELD.
DEMONSTRATOR:— EDWIN B. ‘TILT.
I. The undergraduate courses for Metallurgical and Mining
students are as follows :—
Third Year.—(1) General Elementary Metallurgy, including
introduction, fuels, furnaces and refractory materials, typical
metallurgical operations and reactions. Two lectures a week
during first term.
Text-book:—Huntingdon and Macmillan, “ Metals, their
Properties and Treatment.”
(2) Fire Assaying, including introductory, furnaces and ap-
pliances, balances and wet assay apparatus, sampling and prepar-
ation of ores for assay, fluxes and reagents, assays of gold, silver,
and lead ores, assays of bullion and base bullion.
™ To Verh” Se Teh oe 7% La >
179
Lectures, demonstrations, and laboratory work,—50 hours,
during Second term.
Text-book :—Furman, “ Manual of Practical Assaying.”
Fourth Year (3) The Metallurgy of iron and steel, copper,
lead, gold and silver. The lectures cover the more important
dry, wet and electrical methods of extracting these metals from
their ores, and refining them. The chemical, physical and me-
chanical properties of the metals are also considered. ‘The mill-
ing and amalgamation, cyaniding and chlorination of gold and
silver ores are excluded from this course, as they are treated in
the lectures on ore-dressing (see Mining (6) ).
Two lectures a week in first term and three lectures a week
in second term. Laboratory, see (8).
Books of Reference:—T. Turner, “Metallurgy of Iron”;
H. M. Howe, “Metallurgy of Steel”; F. W. Harbord, “Metal-
lurgy of Steel”; H. H. Campbell, “ Manufacture and Proper-
ties of Structural Steel”; E. D. Peters, “ Modern Copper Smelt-
ing”; H. O. Hoffman, “ Metallurgy of Lead”; H. F. Collins,
“Metallurgy of Silver and Lead”; T. K. Rose, “ Metallurgy
of Gold”; M. Hissler, “ Metallurgy of Gold”; C. Schnabel,
“ Handbook of Metallurgy,” Vol. I.
(4) Alloys,—their constitution, manufacture and properties ;
fuels and refractory materials,—their examination and use, in-
cluding calorimetry and pyrometry. One lecture a week during
second term.
Books of Reference:—W. C. Roberts-Austen, “ Introduction
to the Study of Metallurgy ”; R. H. Thurston, “ Materials of
Engineering.”
(5) Metallurgical Problems.—One lecture a week during
. second term. (This course is alternative with Hydraulics).
(6) Additional lectures are given in the third and fourth
years to Metallurgical students. In these lectures the metal-
lurgy and electro-metallurgy of the remaining metals is con-
sidered, and attention is given to laboratory and research work
in metallurgy and to furnace construction and cost of metallur-
gical operations.
(7) Metallurgical Machinery (see p. 182).
(8) Laboratory :—One whole day and one half day per week
are given to work in the Ore Dressing and Metallurgical Labor-
atories. In the first term this time is evenly divided between
Ore Dressing and Metallurgy, and certain typical operations in
180
each are carried out either as demonstrations, or by groups or
individual students.
The whole time in the laboratory in the second term is given
to thesis work, and in this individual work each student is
permitted to elect between ore dressing and metallurgy, and,
when practicable, to select his own special subject.
The following metallurgical exercises will be carried out, as
far as time will permit, during the first term, either as demon-
strations, individual work, or work in groups. During the
second term, any of these or some similar exercises may be se-
lected by the students as their thesis work :—
(a) Roasting a sulphide or arsenical ore on a small scale and
also in the large roasting furnaces.
(6) Formation and properties of copper or lead mattes and
slags.
(c) Smelting a copper or lead ore in the water jacketed blast
furnace.
(4) Melting and easting certain metals and alloys.
(6) The use of the electric furnace.
(f) Cyaniding or chlorination of a gold ore.
(q) Leaching a copper or silver ore.
(h) Elementary exercises in some of the following :—
Pyrometry, Calorimetry, Flue Gas Analysis, Tests of Refrac-
tory Materials, Microscopic Examination of Metals, Heat Treat-
ment of Iron or Steel.
The details of the ore dressing work are given in Mining (8).
Il. Grapuatre CoursEs.—Special advanced courses of labor-
atory work are offered in Metallurgy and Assaying.
Il. MeratturcicaL anp Assayine LABoratories.—For
description, see p. 198.
IV. METALLURGICAL EXcuRSIONS AND SUMMER ScHOOLS.—
Students attending the courses in Mining and Metallurgy are
required to attend the Summer School in Mining (see Mining
VL.) at the end of their third year.
At this school, when practicable, a portion of the time is
devoted to a thorough examination of some metallurgical estab-
lishments.
In addition to this, excursions may be made by the class from
time to time to such metallurgical works as are within reach.
181
12. Meteorology.
Instruction in meteorological observations will be given in
the observatory at hours to suit the convenience of the senior
students.
Certificates will be granted to those students who pass a
satisfactory examination on the construction and use of meteor-
ological instruments, and on the general facts of meteorology.
13. Mineralogy.
PROFESSOR:—B. J. HARRINGTON.
The courses are arranged as follows :—
Third Year :—
Mineralogy.—Lectures and demonstrations illustrated by
models and specimens in the Peter Redpath Museum.
Among the subjects discussed are: crystallography ; phy-
sical properties of minerals dependent upon light, elec-
tricity, state of aggregation, etc.; chemical composition,
calculation of mineral formule, quantivalent ratios,
etc. ; principles of classification, description of species.
Determinative Mineralogy—tLaboratory practice in blow-pipe
analysis and its application to the determination of min-
eral species.
Fourth Year :—
Mineralogy (in continuation of the course in third year) —
Description of species, particular attention being paid to
those which are important as rock constituents and to
the economic minerals of Canada.
14, Mining Engineering.
PROFESSOR:—JOHN BONSALL PORTER.
FELLOW IN MINING:—C. V. COoRLESS.
DEMONSTRATOR :—H. P. DEPENCIER.
I. The undergraduate courses in detail are as follows:—
Third Year.—(1) Mining. Excavation, explosives and -
blasting; rock drills, coal cutters, etc.; gold washing, river
mining, hydraulic mining and gold dredging. (One lecture
per week. This course is continued in the fourth year, see
Mining 4).
(2). Ore dressing. The theory and practice of ore dress-
ing and coal washing; the forms in which ores occur and the
et ie Τλοὰ
182
effect of mixture, impurity, ete.; the theoretical considerations
affecting mineral separations; the general mechanical opera-
tions involved; Dressing Machinery—breakers, rolls, screens,
jigs, vanners, tables, washers, buddles, magnetic separators,
etc. (Two hours per week in the second term. This course
is continued in the fourth year. See Mining 6).
(3). Laboratory. Simple examinations and tests of ores,
sands, and gravels, by means of pan, vanning shovel, hand jig,
magnet, classifier, etc. (Hight afternoons in the second term.
Further laboratory work in the fourth year, see Mining 8).
Fourth Year—(4). Mining Engineering. The Principles
and Practice of mining; prospecting, sinking, drifting, devel-
oping, methods of mining, timbering, hauling, hoisting, drain-
age, lighting, ventilating, etc.; mine accidents and their preven-
tion; general arrangement of plant, administration, stores and
dwellings; examination and. valuation of mines and mineral
prorperties and mine reports. (Two lectures a week in the first
term and three in the second).
(5). Mining and Metallurgical Machinery; the generation,
transmission and utilization of power in mining, ore dressing,
and metallurgy; steam, hydraulic and electric power plants,
air compressors, blowing engines, dynamos, transmission lines,
motors, conveyors, cranes, hoists, pumps, ventilating machin-
ery, etc. (Two lectures a week and twelve afternoons in the
designing room). ;
(6). Ore Dressing and Milling. Continuation of the ore
dressing course of the third year; concentration plants, coal
breakers and washers, dry concentration, amalgamation, gold
and silver milling, cyaniding, chlorinating, ete. (Two lectures
a week in the first term).
(7). Mining Colloquium. One hour a week throughout the
session is given to informal discussion of the work being done
in the department and of other matters relating to mining
and ore dressing. Students are required to take active part in
these discussions.
TEXT Books :—
No set text-books are used, but students are recommended
to freely consult the following works of reference, in addition
to the special references given from time to time:—
C. Le Neve Foster’s Ore and Stone Mining; H. W. Hughes’
Coal Mining; Ihlsing’s Manual of Mining; W. B. Kunhard’s
2 : He Ht
be Nee
Sr
ai
| {Π}}}}}
Fo
Ferrer
WALSALL LLL
oom in the ‘Mining Department.
R
Milling
183
Ore Dressing in Europe; R. H. Richard’s Ore Dressing; T. A.
Rickard’s Stamp Milling of Gold Ores; H. Louis’ Handbook of
Gold Milling; T. K. Rose’s Metallurgy of Gold; M. Eissler’s
Metallurgy of Gold; H. F. Collins’ Metallurgy of Silver; The
Coal and Metal Miners’ Pocket-book.
(8). Laboratory. One whole day and one-half day per week
are given to work in the ore dressing and metallurgical labor-
atories. In the first term this time is evenly divided between
Ore Dressing and Metallurgy and certain typical operations in
each are carried out either as demonstrations or by individuals
or groups of students. In the second term each student is
permitted to elect between Mining, Ore Dressing and Metal-
lurgy and to choose an individual subject or thesis, and the
whole of the laboratory time in the second term is given to this
thesis work.
The set exercises in Ore Dressing comprise ἅ series of ex-
periments in crushing, classifying, jigging, slime treatment,
magnetic separation, and amalgamation, and include a com-
plete trial run of the five-stamp battery on a free milling gold
ore.
The number of subjects available for thesis work is very
ereat, and ranges from purely theoretical investigations in
classification, concentration, etc., to the experimental deter-
mination of the best methods of treatment of ores and coals.
Nearly one hundred different lots of ore are available, and the
quantities are sufficient for work on a comparatively large
scale.
The metallurgical work is detailed in Metallurgy 11 (8).
Il. Grapuate CoursEs:—Special’ courses in advanced work
‘are also offered in both Mining and Ore Dressing, and these
courses, owing to the unequalled equipment of the new lab-
oratories, as detailed elsewhere, can be made exceedingly val-
uable, both theoretically and practically.
III. Laporatortes:—The admirable laboratories of the Uni-
versity are of peculiar advantage to students in the Mining
Course, and enable them not only to become acquainted with
the theory of their subject, but to personally investigate its
methods on a large scale.
During the first three years of the course the students do
systematic work in the several workshops and laboratories of
the other departments. During the last half of the third and
the whole of the fourth year they spend a large proportion of
184
their time in the special laboratories for Ore Dressing and
Metallurgy. (See ὃ XII). In these, the general method is
first to conduct before the whole class a limited number of
important typical operations in ore dressing and metallurgy,
and then to assign to each student certain methods which he
must study out in detail, and upon which he must experiment
and make written report. In this work he is guided by the
professors and demonstrators, and assisted by the other stu-
dents, whom he must in turn assist when practicable. In this
way every student acquires detailed knowledge of certain typ-
ical operations and a fair general experience in all the import-
ant methods in use.
IV. Intustrations, Museums, Socieries, Erc.:—In addi-
tion to a large series of lantern slides, the department owns a
collection of about twenty-five hundred photographs and other
illustrations, the most important of which are kept in sets
and sold at cost price, to such students as wish to retain them.
This collection is constantly being enlarged.
~The Museums of the new building contain suites of ores,
fuels and metallurgical materials, models of mines and fur-
naces, and specimens of finished preducts.
The McGill University Mining Society meets fortnightly
to read and discuss papers by graduate and student members,
and from time to time to hear lectures given by gentlemen
eminent in the profession.
The Society has recently been made a students’ section of
the Canadian Mining Institute, and its undergraduate mem-
bers are therefore student members of the Institute, and re-
ceive all its publications.. Papers read before the Mining So-
ciety may be entered in competition for any students’ prizes
offered by the Institute. See p. 145.
VI. Summer ScHoont In Minine:—The summer vacation
class instituted in 1897 is now a fixed part of the course. All
students of Mining in regular course are required to attend
this class at the end of the third year.
The school lasts about six weeks. Of this period about
one-sixth is given to field work in Geology, one-half or more
to mining work proper and the remainder, when practicable,
to an examination of ore dressing and milling plants and met-
allurgical establishments. The professor of mining and his
assistant go with the party and hold daily demonstrations or
classes. The students take notes and sketches on the ground,
185
and afterwards are required to work up these notes and to
submit a formal report on some part or the whole.
The work in Metallurgy and Geology is carried on by offi-
cers of these departments, who attend the school for this pur-
pose, and in certain cases it may be found practicable to per-
mit students especially interested in these subjects to substi-
tute additional work in them for a portion of the mining.
In 1898 and again in 1902 the school was held in the coal
region of Cape Breton and the gold region of Nova Scotia.
In 1899 the anthracite region of Pennsylvania and metallur-
gical works at Bethlehem and Philadelphia, Pa., and Perth Am-
boy, N. J., were visited. In 1901 the*’school was held in Brit-
ish Columbia, and the most important camps were studied. In
1903 it is proposed to visit the copper and iron mines of North-
ern Michigan.
The instruction given during this summer course is free
to all mining students, the only expense to them being the
cost of board, lodging, and railway fares, and every effort is
made to keep these expenses as low as is practicable.
As some students may have difficulty in finding even this
sum in addition to the cost of the regular course, a fund has
been provided by Sir William Macdonald, and deserving stu-
dents who require aid can have money advanced them by ap-
plying to the professor of mining.
15. Physics (Experimental),
PROFESSORS:—JOHN Cox.
E. RUTHERFORD.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—H. T. BARNES.
DEMONSTRATORS:—A. G. GRIER.
S. J. ALLEN.
The instruction includes a fully illustrated course of Experi-
mental Lectures on the general Principles of Physics (embrac-
ing, in the first year—The Laws of Energy—Heat, Tight, and
Sound ; in the second year—Electricily and Magnetism), accom-
panied by courses of practical work in the laboratory, in which
the students will perform for themselves experiments, chiefly
quantitative, illustrating the subjects treated in the lectures.
Opportunity will be given to acquire experience with all the
principal instruments used in exact physical and practical
measurements.
186.
LABORATORY COURSE.
Three hours per week spent in practical measurements in the
Macdonald Physical Laboratory in conjunction with the lecture
courses.
Sound.—Velocity of Sound; determination of rates of vibra-
tion of tuning forks: resonance; laws of vibration of strings.
Light.—Vhotometry ; laws of reflection and refraction; focal
lengths and magnifying powers of mirrors, lenses, telescopes
and microscopes: the sextant; spectroscope, spectrometer, dif-
fraction grating, optical bench, polariscopes.
Heat.—Construction and calibration of thermometers: melt-
ing and boiling points;“air thermometer; expansion of solids.
liquids and gases; calorimetry; pyrometry.
Text-books :—Deschanel, Part IV.:; or Ganot: Jones, Sound,
Light and Heat; Wright, Heat: Tory and Pitcher, Laboratory
Manual; Chandler, Laboratory Manual.
Magnetism and Electricity—Measurements of pole strength
and moment of a magnet; the magnetic field; methods of de-
flection, and oscillation; comparison of moments and determin-
ation of the elements of the earth’s magnetism ; frictional elec-
tricity:
Current Hlectricity—A complete course of measurements of
current strength, resistance, and electromotive force; calibration
of galvanometers; the electrometer; comparison of condensers;
electromagnetic induction.
‘Text-books:—S. P. Thompson, Electricity and Magnetism;
Tory and Pitcher, Laboratory Manual.
Second Year.—Electrical Engineering students are given an
extra laboratory period of 3 hours per week, which allows of a
more extended and complete course of experimental work.
Third Year.—Students of Electrical Engineering will con-
tinue their work in the Physical Laboratory in the third year.
The following is a brief outline of the course :—
Magnetic elements and measurements: use of variometers;
testing magnetic qualities of iron; theory and practice of abso-
lute electrical measurements; comparison and use of electrical
standards of resistance, E.M.F., self-induction, and capacity;
principles of construction of electrical instruments; testing and
calibration of ammeters, voltmeters and wattmeters; insulation
and capacity tests; electrometers and ballistic methods; con-
or sis we
‘ Ls
‘e
187
struction and treatment of storage cells; testing for capacity
and rate of discharge; electric hght photometry.
The following are some of the sections in which special pro-
vision has been made for advanced physical work :—
Heat.—Thermometry :—comparison and verification of deli-
cate thermometers; air thermometry ; measurement of high tem-
peratures; electrical resistance thermometers and pyrometers;
thermo-electric pyrometers.
Calorimetry :—Mechanical equivalent of heat; variation of
specific heat with temperature; latent heat of fusion and vapor-
isation; heat of solution and combustion; electrical methods;
radiation and conduction of heat with special methods and
apparatus; dynamical theory of gases: viscosity; surface ten-
sion; variation of properties with temperature.
Light.—Photometric standards; spectro-photometry; theory
of colour vision; spectroscopy and spectrum photography;
compound prism spectrometers; six inch and 24 inch Rowland
gratings; study of spectra of gases; fluorescence and anomalous
dispersion; polarimetry; Landolt and other polarimeters; form
of wave surface.
Sound.—Velocity in gases and various media; absolute deter-
minations of period; harmonic analysis of sounds; effects of
resonance and interference.
Electricity and Magnetism.—Magnetic properties; influence
of stress and torsion; influence of temperature; effects of hys-
teresis ; magneto-optics; other effects of magnetisation ; diamag-
netism; electrical standards and absolute measurements; cal-
-ibration of electrical instruments; insulation and capacity test-
ing; electrometer and ballistic methods; temperature, variation
of resistance, and E.M.F.; thermo-electric effects; electrolysis;
chemistry of primary and secondary batteries; resistance of
electrolytes; polarisation; electric discharge in gases and high
vacua; dielectric strength; behaviour of insulators under elec-
tric stress, specific inductive capacity; electro-magnetic optics;
alternating currents of high frequency and voltage; electrical
waves and oscillations; discharge of electrification by Réntgen
rays, ultra violet, uranium and thorium radiations.
Professor Cox will give a special course of lectures to ad-
vanced and graduate students, on “ the relations between optics,
electricity and magnetism,” and Prof. Rutherford will give a
course on “ Radio-Activity in electric oscillations.”
188
N.B.—Students taking a graduate course will receive guid-
ance in any advanced Mathematics required in connection with
their work.
16. Surveying and Geodesy.
PROFESSOR:—C. H. McLEop.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—J. G. G. KERRY.
DEMONSTRATOR:—H. W. JONES.
This course is designed to give the student a theoretical and
practical training in the methods of land and geodetic survey-
ing, in the field work of engineering operations, and in prac-
tical astronomy. ‘The course is divided as follows :—
Second Year.—Chain and angular surveying: the construc-
tion, adjustment, use and limitations οἵ the various instru-
ments; underground surveying; topograpLy, levelling, contour
surveying; sunple curves and setting out work; descriptions for
deeds; general land systems of the Dominion and Provinces.
Mr. Kerry.
Third Year.—Construction surveying, including the location .
of roads, transition curves, setting out work and calculation
of quantities; geodetic, trigonometric and barometric levelling;
topographic and photographic surveying; hydrographic survey-
ing; introduction to practical astronomy; graphical determin-
ation of spherical triangles, spherical projections, construction
of maps; mathematical perspective and the perspective of shades
and shadows. Professor McLeod.
In the field the students of the second and third years are
required to carry out the following:—(1) A chain survey.
(2) A chain and compass survey. (3) A pacing survey. (4) A
compass and micrometer survey. (5) A contour survey. (6) A
plane table survey. (7) A survey and location of a line of road
with determination of topography and contours and subsequent
staking out for construction. (8) A hydrographic survey of a
river channel, including measurement of discharge. (9) A
survey at night illustrating underground methods. Astronomi-
cal observations with sextant and engineer’s transit.
All students are required to keep complete field notes, and
from them prepare maps, sections and estimates of the work.
The large drawing rooms are furnished with fixed mountings
for the various instruments, in order to permit of their use and
investigation during the winter months.
159
Fourth Year.—Practical Astronomy :---ἰπο determination of
time, latitude, longitude and azimuth. | Geodesy :—figure of
the earth; measurements of base lines and triangulation system ;
adjustments and reductions of observations.
The field work of the fourth year consists in the measurement
of a base-line, in triangulations and precision levelling.
The practical work in astronomy (for equipment of observ-
atory see ὃ XII, 6) comprises: (1). Comparisons of clocks and
chronometers. (2). Determination of meridian by solar attach-
ment. (3). Meridian, latitude and time by solar and stellar
observations with the engineer’s transit. (4). Latitude and
time by sextant. (5). Time by astronomical transit. (6). Lati-
tude by zenith telescope. (7). Latitude by transit in prime
vertical.
Field work is required of all students of the second and third
years in the courses of Civil and. Mining Engineering, of the
third and fourth years of the Architectural course, and of the
fourth year in the Civil Engineering course. The work will
begin in 1903 on 24th August, and continue for a month. The
Surveying School will this year be held near Melbourne, P.Q.,
where a camp will be established for the accommodation of the
classes.
Exercises in the geodetic laboratory (for equipment see § XII,
Art. 6, p. 196), carried out in the fourth year include the fol-
lowing: (1) Measurement of magnifying power. (2) Deter-
mination of vernier errors. (3) Errors of graduation. (4)
Measurement of eccentricity of circles. (5) Determination of
errors of run of theodolite microscopes. (6) Investigation of
the errors of a standard bar. (7) Graduating scales with the
dividing engine, and comparison thereof on the comparator.
(8) Investigation of the errors of circles on the circular com-
parator. (9) Determination of the constants of steel tapes.
(10) Investigation of the graduation errors of steel tapes on
the fifty-foot comparator. (11). Investigation of the errors of
aneroid barometers. (12) Investigation of the errors of level
tubes, and determination of their scale values. (13) Measure-
ment of the force of gravity with a reversible pendulum.
The equipment of the surveying department comprises the
following, in adition to the apparatus of the observatory and
geodetic laboratory :—Twenty-four transit theodolites by various
190
makers, with solar and mining attachments; a photo-theodolite,
8-in. alt-azimuth ; fifteen dumpy and five wye levels; hand levels
and clinometers; two precision levels; eight surveyor’s com-
passes; one miner’s dial; three prismatic compasses; pocket
compasses; two solar compasses; three marine sextants 3 arti-
ficial horizons; six box sextants; two reflecting circles; two
large plane tables; four transverse plane tables; four current
meters; Rochon micrometers; double image micrometers ; field-
glasses ; two heliotropes; several barometers; 300 ft. and 500 ft.
steel tapes suitable for base measurements; steel chains and steel
bands; linen and metallic tapes; sounding lines; pickets; level-
ling rods; micrometer targets; slope rods; pedometers; station
pointer, pantographs, planimeter, slide rules and minor appli-
ances.
EXAMINATIONS FOR LaNp Surveyors :—Any graduate in the
Faculty of Applied Science, in the Department of Civil En-
gineering and Land Surveying, may have his term of appren-
ticeship shortened to one year for the profession of Land Sur-
veyor in Quebec or Ontario or for the profession of Dominion
Land Surveyor.
‘Text-Books :—Gillespie’s Surveying, Johnson’s Theory and
Practice of Surveying, Shortland’s Nautical Surveying, Greene’s
Practical and Spherical Astronomy, Nautical Almanac, Baker’s
Engineers’ Surveying Instruments.
TRANSPORTATION.
(On Common Roads, Railways and Canals.)
The lectures will embrace :—
(a) A brief historical review of the inception and carrying
out of the great Canadian systems of transportation, and a
resumé of the laws governing them.
(0) Common roads and streets.—Provision made for them
in settling up land; the traffic for which they are suited, and
the cost of hauling it over different surfaces; the materials used
in their construction and the merits and cost of the various
systems,
(c) Canals and rivers.—The Canadian canal system; the
methods and cost of construction and maintenance; the traffic
it is designed to carry; and the cost of transportation.
191
(d) Steam railroads.—The traffic they serve and the cost of
handling it; the details of location and the influence of physical
features and trade possibilities upon it; the cost and design of
construction; the duties of the engineer upon such work; the
appliances at present in use for safe and speedy handling of
trains.
(6) Electric roads—The traffic which they now carry; their
location and construction ; the reasons for their rapid extension,
and their probable future. :
The questions of the development and applying of motive
power and the various appliances, mechanical and electrical,
now in use for these special purposes, are taken up in special
descriptive lectures in the mechanical and electrical depart-
ments. Mr. Kerry.
17. Thermodynamics.
LECTURER:—R. J. DURLEY.
DEMONSTRATOR:—H. M. JAQuAYS.
The course in this subject extends over the third and fourth
years, and includes the following :—
Third Year—(Monday, 11; Tuesday, 10.)—Fundamental
laws and equations of Thermodynamics; their application to
gases and to vapours, saturated and superheated; efficiency of
ideal heat engines; properties of steam, and elementary theory
of the steam engine; elementary theory of gas and hot air en-
gines.
Fourth Year—(Monday, 12; Thursday, 11.)—Theory of
reversed heat engines and refrigerating machines; entropy and
entropy-temperature diagrams; a thermodynamic study of the
steam engine, including the behaviour of steam in the cylinder;
economy of steam engines; influence of size, speed, and rate of
expansion ; compound expansion; the steam jacket: the testing
of steam engines; more advanced theory of gas, air, and oil
engines.
The advanced course is carried out as far as possible in
connection with the experimental work of the thermodynamic
laboratory.
Text Books:—Ewing’s Steam Engine (Cambridge Univ.
Press) ; Peabody’s Tables of Properties of Steam (Wiley).
193
18. Summer Term Art Classes.
Classes in Drawing, Painting and Modelling, open to both,
men and women students, will be held in the rooms of the
Architectural Department, under the direction of Mr. Henry
F._ Armstrong, commencing in April and continuing until
June.
The rooms will be open on week-days from 10 a.m. to 5 p.m.
Students may pursue their studies in one or more of the
subjects continuously every day.
Teaching and criticism will be given daily during the above
hours, except on Saturdays.
I. Freehand Drawing :—
(a2) In lead-pencil and in charcoal, for students prepar-
ing for, or engaged in, any branch of art work.
(0) In lead-pencil, for engineering and other science
students.
11. Owl Painting and Water Colour Painting.
111. Modelling in Clay and Casting in Plaster.
There will also be a special course in the Descriptive Geome-
try of the Furst Year.
For fees see p. 31.
19. Special Lectures-
The following special lectures were given during session
1902-03:
“Notes on the design of large alternating current genera-
tors,” by B. A. Behrend, Ch. Eng., Bullock Elect. Mfg. Co.,
Cincinnati.
“Transformer design,” by K. C. Randall, Eng. Dept., West-
inghouse Elect. and Mfg. Co., Pittsburg.
“Shawinigan-Montreal transmission line,” by R. D. Mershon,
Cons. Eng., Montreal.
A special course on “The relations between opties, electricity
and magnetism,” by Prof. J. Cox.
A special course on “Radio-activity in electric oscillations,”
by Prof. E. Rutherford.
199
ΧΙ!Γ. Laboratories.
In the Laboratories the student will be instructed in the art of
conducting experiments, a sound knowledge of which is daily becom-
ing of increasing importance in professional work
1. Assaying Laboratory. See Mining and Metallurgical Labora-
tories.
2. Astronomical Observatory. See Geodetic Laboratory.
-3. Cement Laboratory. —The importance of tests of the strength
of mortars and cements is very great. The equipment of the labora-
tory for the purpose is on a complete plan, including :—
(a) Three one-ton tensile testing machines, representing the best
English and American practice.
(Ὁ) One 50-ton hydraulic compressive testing machine.
(c) Volumenometers for determining specific gravity and for
determining the carbonic acid in the raw material.
(d) Faija steaming apparatus for blowing tests.
(e) Mechanical hand and power mixers.
(f) Apparatus for determining standard consistency.
(g) Vieats’ and Gilmore’s needles for determining set.
(hk) Weighing hopper, spring and other balances.
(i) Gun metal moulds for tension, compression and transverse
test pieces, and special moulds for placing mortar into the moulds
under a uniform pressure, which, together with the mechanical mix-
ers, enable the personal errors to be eliminated.
(j) Sieves of 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 70, 80, 100, 120 and 180 meshes per
lineal inch for determining the fineness.
(k) A Boehme hammer, with all accessories.
The laboratory is also fitted with copper-lined cisterns, in which .
the briquettes may be submerged for any required time, and with
capacious slated operating tables, bins and tin boxes for keeping the
‘cement dry for any period. .
In the Cement Testing Laboratory, researches have been made on
the strength of mortars set under pressure, the effect of frost on
natural and Portland cements, the effect of sugar on lime and cement
mortars, the strength of lime and cement mortars and of the bricks
in brick piers, the effect of fine grinding on the adhesive strength of
* eements, of using hot water in mixing mortars. Continued tests on
the strength of concrete blocks in series are made by Fourth Year
Students.
In addition to these researches, a large amount of work is done.
each year by the Third Year students, in investigating the specific
gravity, fineness, setting properties, constancy of volume, and the
tensile, comprehensive and transverse strengths of cement, both neat
and with the sand.
4. Chemical Laboratories. The main lecture-theatre, extending
through two storeys, is entered from the ground floor, and seats
nearly 250 students. The lecture-table is supplied with coal-gas,
oxygen and hydrogen, electricity, water vacuum, down-draugnht, etc.,
and can be well seen from all parts of the room.
Besides the main lecture theatre there are three smaller class
rooms, accommodating from 40 to 60 students each.
The three principal laboratories have each a floor-space of about
2,400 square feet, and together have accommodation for nearly two
7
Ἢ
:
*
3
7
ἢ
‘ y
x
3
fe Cae
194
hundred students working at a time. They are lighted on three
sides, and have ample hood space. One is intended for beginners,
znd the others for more advanced work, particularly in qualitative
and quantitative analysis. In connection with each of the main
laboratories is a balance-room, equipped with balances by several
of the best makers.
Physical Chemistry is provided for in a special laboratory, nearly
30 by 40 feet, lighted from the north, and supplied with electricity,
steam, vacuum pumps, ete. The equipment of this department con-
sists of the apparatus necessary for the determination of the specific
gravities of solutions, of the depression of freezing point, and the
rise of boiling point, of the densities of gases and vapours. There
are constant-temperature baths for accurate measurement of solu-
bilities, Kohlrausch’s apparatus for determining the electrical con-
ductivity of solutions, and the apparatus necessary for measuring
the electromotive forces generated between metals and their solu-
tions, and in voltaic cells generally. There are also calorimeters for
measuring the heat effects produced in chemical reactions. There
is on the same floor an optical room furnished with refractometers
for measuring the refractive indices of solutions, goniometers, pol-
ariscopes and spectroscopes. Other forms of apparatus will be added
as required for research work.
Immediately adjoining the laboratory of physical chemistry is
the photographic department, supplied with two dark rooms,
arranged on the maze system, and provided with the necessary ‘appli-
ances for all ordinary photographic work, including an enlarging
camera. Apparatus for micro-photography has recently been added
to the equipment.
The laboratory for gas analysis has a northern exposure, and is
fitted with a large tank to contain water at the temperature of the
room, for use in obtaining a constant temperature in the measure-
ment of gases. The tables are arranged for work with mercury, and
the laboratory is supplied with the apparatus of Hempel, Dittmar,
Orsat, Elliot and others. It contains also Fleuss, Boltwood, and _
Tépler pumps for producing high vacua.
The laboratory for electrolytic analysis is supplied with accumu-
lators, thermopile, platinum electrodes, rheostats, ammeters, volt-
meters, etc. :
Another room has lately been equipped with electric furnaces
and other appliances for electro-chemical work.
The organic department. comprises a laboratory for preparations
and research, a combustion room for analysis, a dark room for
polariscope and saccharimeter work, and a lecture room. The
laboratory is fitted with all the necessary apparatus for organic
research—special hoods for work with poisonous gases, regulating
ovens for digesting and drying at various temperatures, filter presses
for the extraction of raw materials, and various forms of apparatus
for distillation in vacuo. The dark room is equipped with polari-
scopes and saccharimeters for sugar work. There is a large supply
of the necessary organic chemicals, which are supplied free of charge
to students engaged in routine or research work in this department,
The laboratory for determinative mineralogy has places for 28
students, and is supplied with abundant materials for practical work,
It adjoins the lecture-room in which the lectures in advanced min-
eralogy are delivered. The mineralogical department is also provided
with suitable machinery, run by electricity, for use in the cutting
and polishing of minerals and rocks.
195
The Library contains a valuable collection of the most recent
English, French, and German books, and sets of various journals
and transactions, including the Berichte der Deutschen Chemischen
Gesellschaft, Journal fiir Praktische Chemie, Chemisches Central-
blatt, Fresenius’ Zeitschrift fiir Analytische Chemie, Annales de
Chemie et de Physique, Journal of the Chemical Society, Chemical
News, Mineralogical Magazine, Mineralogische und Petrographisiche
Mittheilungen, etc. The library is open to students under such
restrictions 2s are necessary to prevent damage or loss of books.
The rooms for allied purposes have, as far as possible, heen
grouped together on the same floor, and there is a hydraulic lift
running from the basement to the attic. The offices and principal
laboratories and supply rooms are also connected by a systein οἵ
telephones. The building is practically fire-proof.
5. Electrical Laboratories.— These laboratories contain all prin-
cipal types of commutating, synchronous, and induction machin-
ery, together with ample facilities for investigatiny their action.
The several laboratories are the Standardizing Laboratory, the
Dynamo Laboratory, the High Tension Testing Room, the Photo-
meter Room, and the laboratory for special investigation.
(a) The Standardizing Laboratory is equipped with four Kelvin
Balances for alternating and direct current measurements, best
range .025 to 600 amperes; a Kelvin standard electrostatic multicellu-
lar voltmeter, Roard of Trade pattern: a Weston laboratory stand-
ard Ammeter, range with shunts 0 to 1500 amperes; a Weston
Laboratory standard Voltmeter range with multipliers, 0 to 3000
volts; a Weston Laboratory standard wattmeter range 0-7500
watts; special Weston alternating current voltmeters and watt-
meters ; a special Elliott Potentiometer with standard cells for
electromotive force and current measurement; means for measuring
high and low resistances, capacity, and di-electric strength of in-
sulating materials, ete., ete. Direct current for the Laboratory is
furnished either from the service plant, from a special motor-dynamo,
the voltage of which can be continuously varied from 0 to 10 volts,
current capacity 300 amperes ; from a 75 K.W. hour storage battery
arranged in sections, or from any d.c. machine in the Dynamo Labor-
atory. Alternating current of several wave shapes and frequencies
up to 150 periods per second, and voltages up to 200,000 is available.
A special transformer having a current capacity of 890 amperes is
. used for alternating current ammeter calibration. For alternating
current voltmeter calibration, a special regulator is provided, by
which voltages from 0 to 200 can be obtained in as small steps as
desired.
(b) The Dynamo Laboratory. This laboratory consists of two
sections, one devoted to direct current work, and the other to alter-
nating current work. The former method of driving all dynamos
from an overhead line shaft and clutch pulleys has been abandoned
and individual motors supplied for each machine. Each motor is
provided with suitable series turns and variable shunt, the whole
being connected to act with or against the shunt turns, as a com-
pounding or differential effect is desired. The speed of the motors
can be varied about 50 per cent. by field rheostat. This gives per-
fect control of dynamo speed. Current for operating is obtained from
six independent sources of Supply; one 75 K.W. direct connected
unit in the service plant; ὃ sets of 25 K. W. hour chloride accumula-
tors and two city supply circuits, All dynamos and motors are
mounted on strong testing benches fifteen inches high, with slotted
eS
oa ἘΠ᾿: τ τ τῷ 1
eS Te See ee
apa Say
BoE
Sy! pi Som ας
RD Ros oe ee
»
\
heb ee
190 ;
floor, so that any machine can be placed anywhere on the benches
and secured in place. Two small travelling cranes over the benches
allow machines to be easily shifted. All wiring is done in conduits
under the floor, and large sectional switchboards are provided for
current distribution about the laboratories. Special testing tables,
permanently wired up and fitted with circuit breakers, switches, ete.,
facilitate the work. Twenty-five commutating machines, generators,
motors, boosters, motor-generators, dynamotors, converters, closed
and open coil arc machines, varying in capacity from a fraction of a
kilowatt to 75 kilowatts, of many different types and makes, are pro-
vided for direct current testing. Twelve alternating current machines,
including generators, synchronous motors, compensators, and syn-
chronous converters, together with a large amount of stationery and
rotary induction apparatus, are provided for alternating current
work. Several of the alternating current dynamos are of the induc-
tor type and several different shaped inductors are provided with
each machine to give different wave forms. <A specially arranged
induction motor serves as a frequency changer. The laboratory is
also provided with between eighty and ninety voltmeters, ammeters,
and wattmeters of standard make, and of different ranges; con-
densers, rheostats, standard resistances, etc.
(©) High Tension Testing Room. This room is equipped with four
10 K.W., 200-50,000 volt. transformers with switch board and suitable
controlling devices. The voltage can be varied in small steps by
means of a Stillwell regulator inserted in the primary and by vary-
ing the field of the dynamo supplying current. A Kelvin direct read-
ing electrostatic voltmeter, range 100-100,000 volts., gives a means of
measuring high voltages directly.
(d) The Photometer Room. This room is equipped with standard
photometric apparatus for candle power measurements on are and
incandescent lamps.
(e) The laboratory for special investigation adjoins the Standard-
izing Laboratory. Meter and transformer testing are also done in
this room. ἢ
6. Geodetic Laboratory—The equipment of this laboratory con-
sists of :—
(1) Linear instruments.
(a) Α, Rogers comparator and standard bar for investigating
standards of length.
(Ὁ) A fifty-foot standard and comparator for standardizing
steel bands, chains, tapes, rods, ete.
(Ὁ A Whitworth end-measuring machine and set of standards.
(4) A Munro-Rogers linear dividing engine.
(2) Circular instruments.
(a) A Rogers’ circular comparator and dividing engine.
(b) Two level triers.
(3) Time:—
(c) An astronomical clock and clock circuit in connection with
the observatory clocks.
(Ὁ) Chronometers running on mean and sidereal time.
(c) Chronograph.
(4) Gravity.—A portable Bessel’s reversible pendulum apparatus
with special pendulum clock and telescopic apparatus for
observing coincidences of beats.
Aliernating Current Dynamo Laboratory.
Electrical Standardizing Room.
ae
() A water gauge apparatus for testing aneroid barometers.
(6) Magnetic instruments :-—
(a) A Kew @ip circle.
(Ὁ) A Kew filar magnetometer.
The laboratory is constructed with double walls and enclosed air
spaces, and has a special heating apparatus, so that the temperature
within may be brought to, and held at, any desired degree.
The ordinary course of instruction in this laboratory is described
Hilts Κι. Age: 10,
Astronomical Observatory.--The observatory equipment for the
purpose of instruction in practical astronomy consists of :—
1. A Bamberg prismatic transit with zenith attachment,
2. Two astronomical transits for meridan observations, Collim-
ating telescopes.
3. A Troughton & Simms’ zenith telescope.
4. An astronomical transit in the prime vertical.
5. Sidereal and mean time clocks and chronometers.
6. Chronograph and electrical circuits by which observations and
clock comparisons within or without the observatory may be
made.
7. Hydraulic Laboratory.—Here the student will study prac-
tically the flow of water through orifices of various forms and sizes,
through submerged openings, over weirs, through pipes, mouth-
pieces, ete.
The equipment of this laboratory includes :—
(a) A large Experimental Tank, 30 ft. in height and 25 sq. ft. in
sectional area. With this tank experiments are conducted on the
flow of water through orifices either free or submerged. By a simple
arrangement the orifices can be rapidly interchanged without lower-
ing the head, and with the loss of only about one pint of water. The
indicating and measuring arrangements connected with the tank are
exceedingly delicate and accurate, all times being automatically
recorded by an electric chronograph, and valuable results have
already been obtained. By means of a special connection with the
city water-supply, the available head of water may be increased up
to 280 ft.
(Ὁ) An Impact Machine, which renders it possible to measure the
force with which water flowing through an orifice, nozzle, or pipe,
strikes any given surface, and also the impulsive effect of the water
entering the buckets of hydraulic motors.
(Ὁ A Rife’s Hydraulic Ram.
(d) A Jet Measurer specially designed for investigating the
dimensions of the jet produced in the phenomena known as “ the in-
version of the vein.’ With this apparatus it is possible to determine,
within .001 inch, the dimensions of a jet in any plane and at any
point of the path.
(e) Numerous orifices, nozzles, and mouth-pieces.
(f) A specially designed -stand-pipe, with all the necessary con-
nections for pipes of various sizes for investigations on frictional
resistance. The pressures are measured by recording gauges. etc.
(g) A flume about 35 feet in length, by 5 ft. in width by 3 ft. 6 ins.
in depth.
(hk) Weirs up to 5 ft. in width, and with a depth of water over the
~
sill varying from nil to 8 inches. A weir-depthing machine, witk
198
three adjustable heads, gives the surface depth of the stream at any
three points in a transverse section. The velocity of the stream is
also determined by means of a double Pit6t tube.
(i) Numerous hydraulic pressure-gauges.
(7) A mercury column 60 feet in height.
(k) Gauge-testing apparatus.
(1) Various rotary, and piston meters, and a Venturi meter.
(m) Apparatus for illustrating vortex motion.
(n) Apparatus for illustrating vortex ring motion, and for deter-
mining the critical velocity of water flowing through pipes.
(0) Five specially built gauging tanks with suitable indicators,
each having a capacity of 800 cubie feet, for determining the critical
velocity of water flowing through pipes. Also other portable tanks.
(p) Transmission and absorption dynamometers.
(q) An experimental centrifugal pump, which can be tested with
varying thheights of suction and discharge.
(r) An inward-flow turbine, a new American turbine, an outward-
flow impulse turbine, a Pelton, and other motors and turbines.
(s) Graduated measures of various sizes; standard gallon and
litre measures with glass strikes. This Laboratory is also provided
with a set of pumps, specially designed for experimental work and
research. They are adapted to work under all pressures up to 120
lbs. per sq. in., and at all speeds up to the highest found practicable.
The set is composed of three vertical single acting plunger pumps
of 7 in. diam., 18 in. stroke, driven from one shaft. They have two
interchangeable valve chests, and it is arranged that both the valves
and their seats may be removed and replaced by others. The pumps
are also provided with a double set of continuous recording indica-
tors designed in the laboratory and having electrical connections.
With these, an accurate record of the suction and discharge valves
may be obtained at any given time, all fluctuations of speed,
pressure, etc., being automatically recorded.
8. Mechanical Laboratory —The equipment of this Laboratory
includes :—A belt-testing machine, capable of taking a six-inch belt
at 15 feet centres (the machine includes a special hydraulic dyna-
mometer, and a friction brake, and will absorb 15 ἘΠ P.); a
Thurston railway-pattern oil-tester, fitted with water cooling and
heating apparatus for varying the temperature of the brasses as
desired; an Engler standard viscosimeter, and other necessary
apparatus for the physical testing of lubricants; a specially designed
hydraulic support and fittings for carrying out experiments on the
action of cutting tools in the lathe; apparatus for experiments on
the efficiency of pulleys and hoisting appliances, and on the efficiency
of worm and other gearing; apparatus for governor-testing.
This Laboratory is used in connection with the courses in
Mechanical Engineering subjects.
9. Metallurgical and Assaying Laboratories —These consist
of a large furnace room of 2,200 sq. feet for metallurgical operations,
a furnace room for assaying of 1,300 sq. feat, a balance room, small
analytical laboratory and parts of other rooms which are utilized for
pyrometric and photo-microscopic work. The furnace room is fitted
with a water-jacket blast-furnace, 24 inches inside diameter, for
smelting lead and copper ores; also a hand reverberatory furnace
for roasting ores, having a hearth 14 ft, by 6 ft., a Brtickner roast-
ing furnace and an English cupellation furnace. .
It has also a large lead-lined chlorination-barrel for high pres-
sures, with filter press, air pump, etc.
VE OTA = BEA OE, ME νον PR
x -
199
The furnace room adjoins the milling and ore dressing room (see
below) and ores which have been crushed and dressed can easily
be conveyed into the furnace room for roasting, smelting or leaching
treatments. ᾿
In addition to this comparatively large scale plant apparatus is
being provided to enable the students to study in detail the more
important metallurgical operations using quantities of ore or metal-
lurgical products of usually not more than a few pounds in weight.
With such appliances the work of the student can be of a more
individual character than is generally possible with large scale
plant, and the reactions which occur can be more easily and exactly
studied.
For the purpose of small scale work there is a large crucible
furnace which can be used with either natural or forced draught,
a large gas furnace which can be used either as an oven furnace
or a muffle furnace, and a number of small muffle and crucible
furnaces in the assaying laboratory.
In the autumn of 1901 the students erected a model brick blast
furnace, and used it successfully for smelting copper ores. A Roots
blower has been provided for the blast furnaces, and connections
for supplying forced draft have been made to the gas and reverber-
atory furnaces. Electric furnaces are being constructed for carrying
on operations at very high temperature, and there is a low voltage
moto dynamo and storage battery for electrolytic work. Leaching
operations on a small scale are conducted in stoppered bottles which
can be agitated by machinery.
A powerful hydraulic press and a piece of apparatus for com-
pressing gases by hydraulic power are available for experiments
that have to be conducted under great pressure.
The Assaying Laboratory is equipped with a large soft coal assay
furnace, anu with a number of small muffle and crucible furnaces
fired with coke; the large gas muffle furnace in the furnace room
is also available for assaying purposes, and there is a small muffle
furnace and a crucible furnace fired by gasoline.
Adjoining the assaying laboratory, is the balance room and a
small laboratory for chemical work.
In another room are a number of electrical pyrometers of both
the Le Chatelier and Callendar type, and a micro-photographic out-
fit for recording the microscopic structure of metals and alloys. A
polishing machine, worked by power, has been instal’ed to prepare
the specimens for examination.
The courses of instruction in these laboratories are described in
Spe ἘΠῚ
10. Mining and Ore-Dressing Laboratories.—The Depart-
ment of Mining Engineering has one large laboratory for ore-dress-
ing and a number of rooms of moderate size equipped for use
as special laboratories, offices, lecture room, dark room, machine
shop, etc. The effective floor space is about 6,600 square feet, in
addition to which the departmental store rooms, ore bins ,etc., have
an area of 1,000 feet.
The ore-dressing laboratory proper has about 4,200 feet of floor
space and is 25 feet high in the centre.
It is equipped with two classes of apparatus. First, a large num-
ber of pieces especially designed for individual work on a small
scale. Many of these are for elementary investigations and de-
monstrations of a theoretical nature, others are small scale reproduc-
tions of typical ore-dressing and milling machines. Second, a com-
plete plant of standard apparatus for crushing, sampling, milling,
concentrating and coal washing. The apparatus last mentioned has
been chosen from the best designs in common use and each impor-
tant class of ore-dressing machinery is represented by two or more
different types in order that comparative tests may be made. Each
machine is so arranged that it may be used, tested and cleaned up
independently, but when expedient, a4 number of machines can be
connected by automatic conveyors and thus complete working plants
of many kinds can be improvised, each of sufficient capacity to test
large lots of material under approximately working conditions.
The chief pieces of apparatus in the laboratory are rock-breakers
of four kinds, Blake, Dodge, Comet and Sturtevant, for coarse
crushing ; Stamp mills of 600 and 950 Ilbs., respectively, for the fine
erushing and amalgamating of gold ores; Huntingdon centrifugal
roller mill, for crushing and amalgamating; high speed steel rolls,
for fine crushing ; Gates’ grinder for preparing samples, and a ball
mill for extremely fine grinding.
Following these there is a Bridgman automatic sampler and a
series of trommels and hand and power shaking screens for sizing
the crushed ores ; two specially designed jigs of two and four com-
partments, with adjustable eccentric, cam and slide mechanisms, a
pneumatic jig, and several small hand and power jigs for coarse
coneentration : revolving, bumping and stationary glass tables;
Frue vanner, Wilfley table, etce., for separating valuable minerals con-
tained in fine sands and slimes; plates, pans, and barrels for
amalgamating gold and silver ores; vats and other apparatus for
cyaniding, chlorinating and other leaching processes; spitzkasten,
spitzliitte, magnetic separators, coal washers, dolly tubs, and various
other special pieces of ore-dressing apparatus.
An hydraulic lift and a complete series of belt and bucket eleva-
tors, feeders, samplers, etc., are provided for use in heavy continu-
ous work. The motive power used is electricity, generated in the
University power and light station, and utilized through a number
of electric motors conveniently placed near the machines to be
operated. The department is equipped with the most approved ap-
paratus for electrical measurements, and is thus able to make fre-
quent and accurate determinations of the amount of power used
by each machine, and for any especial condition of use.
In addition to the main laboratory there are excellent facilities
for advanced and research work—including a thoroughly equipped
analytic and assay laboratory and a photographic room. The de-
partment possesses an excellent Fuess petrographical microscope,
a good set of weighing and measuring devices, and a number of
pieces of special apparatus for advaneed theoretical investigation.
The courses of instruction im these laboratories are described in
XI., 14.
11. Petrographical Laboratory.—The Petrographical Laboratory,
containing the chief rock collection of the University, is situated
in the Chemistry and Mining building. It is arranged for the use
of students in the Mining Course as well as for those desiring
to take advanced work, and is provided with a number of petrogra-
phical microscopes by Seibert, Crouch, and Fuess as well as with
models, sets of thin sections, electro-magnets, heavy solutions, etc.,
for petrographical work.
A collection of typical rocks has been especially prepared for
the use of students, and a complete equipment for cutting, grinding,
Te
ab heme
Fo
΄
Sis
(te ep oe ay
δὰ ya -
7
’
πως
ΤΌ ΟΣ ἘΚ τ ἈΠ RoE πὸ
and polishing rocks, has been installed, which runs by electric power
and gives excellent facilities for the preparation of thin sections for
microscopic use. ὶ
For advanced work and petrographical investigation Dr. Adams’
extensive private collection of rocks and thin sections is available
for purposes of study and comparison.
12. Physical Laboratory.—The equipment of the Macdonald Labor-
atories comprises: (1) apparatus for illustrating lectures, (2) simple
forms of the principal instruments for use by the students in prac-
‘tical work; (3) the most recent types of all the important instru-
nents for exact measurement, to be used in connection ‘with special
work and research.
_ The basement contains the cellars, furnaces, and, janitor’s depart-
ment at the west end of the building. The machine room—contain-
ing a small gas engine and dynamo, which are fitted for testing, but
can also be used for light and power, a motor-alternator and a
motor-dynamo—is situated at the extreme western corner of the
basement so as to be as far removed as possible from the delicate
magnetic and electrical instruments. Here is also the switch-board
for controlling the various circuits for supplying direct or alternat-
ing current to different parts of the building. The Accumulator
Room contains a few large storage cells, charged by the motor-
dynamo, which are fitted with a suitable series-parallel arrangement,
and with rheostats for obtaining and controlling large currents up
to 4,000 amperes for testing ammeters and low resistances, etc.
The Magnetic Laworateory contains magnetic instruments and
variometers of different patterns, and, also a duplicate ‘of the B. A.
lectro-dynmamometer, which has been completely remodelled and
set up with great care for absolute measurement of current. 'The
laboratory, on the opposite side of the basement, contains a very fine
Lorenz apparatus for the absolute measurement of resistance, con-
structed under the supervision of Prof. Viriamu Jones. it also con-
taims a set of Ewing Seismegraphs and a pair of Darwin recording
mirrors for measuring small movements of the soil.
There is a constant temperature room, surrounded by double
walls, which contains a Standard Rieflier clock, and is fitted for com-
parator work.
The ground floor contains at the western corner a small machine
_ shop, fitted with a milling machine and suitable lathes and tools
driven by electric motors, and such appliances as are required for
’ the making and repairing of the instruments, for which the services
of a mechanical assistant are retained. There is also a store room
for glass, chemicals, and cleaning materials, and extensive lockers
and lavatories for the use of the students.
The main Electrical Laboratory is a room 60 feet by 40, and is
fitted with a number of brick piers, which come up through the
floor, and rest on independent foundations, in addition to the usual
slate shelves round the walls. This room contains a large number
of electrometers, galvanometers, potentiom ters and other testing
instruments of various patterns, and adapted for different uses. It
connects with a smaller room at the side, in which are kept the
resistance boxes and standards, and also the capacity standards. A
small research laboratory adjoining the electrical laboratory, is fitted
up for the study of electrical discharge in thigh vacua and for work
with Roéntgen and uranium radiation, and with witra-violet light.
The first floor contains the main Lecture Theatre, with seats
for about 250 students. The lecture table is supported on separate
202
piers, which are independent of the floor. Complete arrangements
are provided for optical projection and illustration. The Preparation
Room in the rear contains many of the larger pieces of lecture -
apparatus, but the majority of the instruments, when not in use,
are kept in suitable cases in the adjoining apparatus room. On the
same floor there is the Heat Laboratory, devoted to advanced work
in Thermometry, Pyrometry and Calorimetry, and also to such elec-
trical work as involves the use of thermostats and the measurement
of the effects of temperature. There are also two smaller rooms for
Professors and Demonstrators.
The second floor is partly occupied by the upper half of the Lec-
ture Theatre. There is also an Examination Room for paper work,
a Mathematical Lecture Room, with a special apparatus room de-
voted to apparatus for illustrating Mathematical Physics, and a
special Physical Library chiefly devoted to reference books and
periodicals relating to Physics. A store room, lavatories, and Pro-
fessors’ room occupy the remainder of the fiat.
The third floor contains the Elementary Laboratory, a room 60
feet square, devoted to elementary practical work in Heat, Light,
and Sound, and Electricity and Magnetism. There is a Demonstra-
tor’s Room adjoining, and an optical annex devoted to experiments
with lenses, galvanometers and polarimeters. Also ἃ series of
smaller optical rooms, including a photometric room, specially fitted
for arc photometry, and a dark room for photographic work.
Mathematics and Dynamics.—Part of this floor, allotted
to the supject of Mechanics, contains instruments for measuring
length, area, volume, time, mass; Atwood machines and a Galileo
Inclined Plane for the study of the Laws of Motion; Willis Appara-
tus for experiments in Statics and Friction on a large scale; Simple,
Kater and Ballistic Pendulums; and torsion and rotation apparatus
for determining moments of inertia. The practical work in this
section is arranged to run parallel with and illustrate the lectures
jn Dynamics delivered in the first year, and also those in the second
year of the Faculty of Arts.
13. Testing Laboratories.—The principal experiments carried out
in these will relate to the elasticity and strength of materials, fric-
tion, the theory of structures, the accuracy of springs, gauges, dyna-
mometers, etc. The equipment of this laboratory includes :—
(a) A Wicksteed 100-ton and an Emery 50-ton machine for testing
the tensile, compressive and transverse strength of the several
materials of construction. To the former has been added a specially
designed arrangement, by which the transverse strength of girders
and beams up to 26 ft. in length can be determined. These machines
are provided with the holders required for the various kinds of tests,
and new holders have also been specially designed and made in the
laboratory for investigating the tensile and shearing strength of
timber for wire rope and belt tests, etc. Numerous attachments
have also been made to the machines, which have already increased
their efficiency. The most recent addition is a double-bearing sup-
port for transverse testing.
(Ὁ) An Impact Machine, with a drop of 30 ft., and with gearing
which will enable specimens to be rotated at any required speed, and
the blows to be repeated at any required intervals. By means of a
revolving drum, a continuous and accurate record of the deflections
of the specimens under the blows can be obtained.
205
(c) An Unwin Torsion Machine with a specially designed angle-
measurer, by which the amount of the torsion can be measured with
extreme accuracy.
(d) An Accumulator, furnishing a pressure of 3,600 lbs. per square
inch, which is trasmitted to the several testing machines, and en-
sures a perfectly steady application of stress, an impossibility when
any form of pump is substituted for an Accumulator.
(e) A Blake and a Worthington Steam Pump, designed to work
against a pressure of 3,600 lbs. per square inch. The Accumulator
may be actuated by either of the pumps, and, if at any time it is
desirable to do so, either of the pumps may be employed to actuate
the testing machine direct. When in operation the work of the
pump and the accumulator is automatic.
(f) Extensometers of the Hwing, Unwin, Martens, Marshall and
other types. The extensometer equipment has recently been enriched
by seven sets of improved extensometer apparatus designed and
made in the laboratory.
(g) Portable cathetometers, and also a large cathetometer speci-
ally designed and constructed for the determination of the exten-
sions, compressions and deflections of the specimens under stress in
the testing machines.
(A) An automatic electric motor pump for actuating the Accumu-
lator; also various electric motors for working the several machines.
(ὃ A drying oven for beams up to 26 ft. in length. The hot air
in this oven is kept in circulation by means of a fan driven by an
electric motor.
(Gj) Numerous gauges, amongst which may be specially noticed an
Emery pressure gauge, graduated in single lbs. up to 2,500 105. per
square inch. All of the testing machines are on the same pressure
circuit, and are connected with the Hmery gauge and also other
standard gauges, including recording gauges. This arrangement pro-
vides a practically perfect means of checking the accuracy of the
testing.
(k) Special apparatus and recording gauge for the testing of hose,
etc.
(1) Dynamometers for measuring the strength of textile fabrics,
the holding power of nails, etc.
(m) Apparatus for determining the elasticity of long wires.
(n) Apparatus for determining the hardness of materials of con-
struction. :
(0) Zeiss and other Microscopes.
(p) Delicate chemical and other balances. A very important part
of the equipment is the Oertling balance, capable of indicating with
extreme accuracy weights of from .00001 lb. up to 125 lbs.
(q) Apparatus for the microscopic study of metals and for micro-
scope photography.
(7) Micrometers of all kinds.
(s) A transverse bending machine, which is adapted for loads up to
3000 lbs. and for beams of 10 ft. span.
(t) Small beam testing machines, used to illustrate the laws of the
bending of beams, both when the ends are free and when they are
fixed.
(vw) Two small tension machines, in which experiments are made on
metals, the strains being within the elastic limit.
(Ὁ) Apparatus with experiments for long wires, adapted for experi-
ments on wires 60 ft. in length.
204
(w) A lever machine of experiments on alternate twisting.
(vz) A testing machine for breaking tests on wires.
(y) A powerful hydraulic press for compression tests on metals,
cements, stone and similar materials.
(z) Apparatus for measuring strains of compression.
The following new apparatus is being installed:—A Riehle testing machine
of 60,000 lbs. capacity; a testing machine for applying bending and torsion
simultaneously; α Fairbanks’ seales.
14. Thermodynamic Laboratory.—The Thermodynamic Labor-
atory is furnished with an experimental steam engine of 120 I. H. P.,
specially designed for investigating the behaviour of steam under
various conditions; the cylinders are 6 1-2 inches, 9 inches, 13 inches.
and 18 inches in diameter, and the stroke of all the pistons is 15 inches.
The cylinders can be so connected as to allow of working as a simple,
compound, triple, or quadruple expansion engine, either condensing or
non-condensing, and with any desired rate of expansion. The jackets
are so fitted as to permit of measuring independently the water
condensed in the cover, barrel, cr bottom jacket of each cylinder,
and the engine can be worked with any desired initial pressure up
to 200 Ibs. per square inch. The measurements of heat are made
by means of large tanks, which receive the cooling water and the
condensed steam. There is an independent surface condenser and
air pump. Two hydraulic absorption brakes and an alternative
friction brake serve to measure the mechanical power developed.
The Laboratory also contains the following machinery:—
A Robb automatic cut-off engine, having a cylinder 10 1-2 inches
in diameter by 12 inches stroke. This engine is specially fitted up
for the measurement of cylinder temperatures, and can be run at
speeds up to 300 revolutions per minute.
An automatic high speed engine by Macintosh & Seymour, having
a cylinder 12 mches diameter by 12 1-2 inches stroke. Automatic
recording apparatus, registering the load on the brake of this engine,
has been constructed and fitted up during the past session.
A hot-air engine built by Woodbury Merrill of Ticonderoga.
An Atkinson ‘ Cyecle’’ Gas engine, having a cylinder 7 inches dia-
meter by ὃ inches stroke, and indicating 6 H. P.
An Otto gas engine (built in the workshops of the Department),
having a cylinder § 1-2 inches diameter by 12 inches stroke, and in-
dicating 12 H. P.
A ‘SDake’”’ steam engine of 4 H. P.
A two stage air compressor taking 40 H P., and having cylinders
10 inches and 17 inches in diameter, by 15 inches stroke. The com-
pressor delivers its air into reservoirs placed beneath the floor of the
machine shop, and is provided with an intercooler whose capacity can
be varied as desired.
A high speed horizontal engine having a cylinder 6 inches diameter
by 9 inches stroke, and operated by compressed air.
A gas-fired preheater for the above engine.
A standard 9 1-2 inch Westinghouse air brake pump, fitted for test-
ing and for supplying compressed air for experimental and other pur-
poses.
A non-rotative Blake steam pump, having steam and water cylin-
ders, 44% and 2% inches diameter and 414 inches stroke.
The smaller apparatus belonging to the laboratory includes the
necessary equipment of weighing machines, brakes, calorimeters, ther-
i
ee ee Υ ee ey ΠΟΤ
ot Sey κα,
Thermodynamic Laboratory.
| pas ear
Sf
Wi
(i FES fi
of
Testing Laboratory.
ngineering
<
“
An E
aa Sa ἘΜ ΡΝ Wee Δ roe.
Cos =i 4 j
205
mometers, gauges, pyrometers, fuel testers, indicators, planimeters,
and a Moscrop recorder.
The boiler installation of the Engineering Building supplies steam
for heating and power purposes, and is so arranged as to be available
for experimental work in connection with the Thermodynamic Labora-
tory. It comprises boilers of five distinct types as follows:—
One Cornish boiler, for heating service, rated at 50 H. P.
One locomotive boiler, Belpaire type, 100 H. P.
One internally fired tubular boiler, 120 H. P.
Two Babcock-Wilcox water-tube boilers, each 60 H. P.
One Yarrow water-tube boiler, fitted in a closed stokehold, for
working under forced draft, rated at 150 H. P.
-These boilers are provided with the necessary tanks, weighing-
machines and apparatus for carrying out evaporative tests.
4 ΧΙΠ. Museums.
The Peter Redpath Museum.— The Peter Redpath Museum
contains large and valuable collections in Botany, Zoology, Miner-
alogy and Geology, arranged in such a manner as to facilitate the
work in these departments. Students have access to this Museum, in
connection with their attendance on the classes in Arts in the subjects
above named, and also by tickets which can be obtained on applica-
tion.
Engineering Museum.— This Museum occupies the third storey
of the Engineering Building, and amongst other apparatus, contains
the Reuleaux collection of kinematic models, presented by Sir Wil-
liam Macdonald, and pronounced by Professor Reuleaux to be the
finest and most complete collection in America.
Architectural Equipment.— The Architectural Department has
been endowed by Sir Wm. Macdonald, the founder, with a very thor-
ough equipment for practical purposes of instruction. In the Museum
of the Engineering Building is included a large collection of casts
both of architectural detail and ornament (illustrative of the histori-
cal development of the various styles) and of architectural and figure
sculpture. The freehand-drawing classes for architectural students,
as also the classes of architectural drawing and design, are conducted
in this portion of the building.
A special architectural department has been added to the Univer-
sity Library; text-books and other works have been added to the
Faculty Library. <A collection of photographs is placed in the archi-
tectural room for the use of students in the class of design, in addi-
tion to a select reference library of illustrated works. Diagrams and
lantern slides are used in illustration of the historical courses: models
and specimens of materials and fittings in those on Building Con-
struction, Sanitation, ete.
SP ee ee
epic. ἐν
| et SSP Gas © ὦ
πα
a.
et 4 are Seer ete ee
NR Ἀν ΦΆΤ ΓΑΕᾺ
+ τὰ
ἢ ἐν “ἑ,
te
Fa oo}
5
ὃ
3
200
ἄχι!ν. Workshops and Workshop Instruction.
The Workshops, erected on the Thomas Workman Endow-
ment, ‘have a total floor area of more than 25,00) square
feet. The course in shopwork is intended to afford some pre-
paration for that study of workshop practice on a commercial
scale which every engineer has to carry out for himself. With
this end in view, the student works in the various shops of the
department, and completes in each a series of practical exer-
cises. He thus obtains some knowledge of the nature and
properties of the various materials he employs; he becomes fa-
miliar with the use and care of the more important hand and
machine tools; and he acquires some manual skill.
The instruction thus obtained must, however, be continued
and supplemented. For this purpose students are expected to
spend the greater portion of each long vacation in gaining prac-
tical experience in some enginering workshops outside the Uni-
versity.
Throughout the course, advanced students are as far as pos-
sible entrusted with the construction and erection of machinery
and apparatus which afterwards form part of the equipment
of the department. An air-compressor, a boring bar, a belt-
testing machine, and a duplex feed pump, are examples of the
work which has been done in this manner. Such students are
also encouraged to see and assist in the repairs required by the.
engines, boilers and machine tools in the engineering building.
Equipment.—The Carpenter’s Shop and the Pattern Shop
contain thirty-eight carpenters’ and pattern-makers’ benches
complete with the necessary sets of hand tools, twenty-two
wood-turning lathes with their turning tools, a large pattern-
makers’ lathe for faceplate work, one circular saw bench, a
jig saw, a band saw, two wood trimmers, a surface planer, a
thickness planer, a mortising machine, a saw-sharpener, and
one universal wood-working machine.
The Smith Shop is provided with sixteen Sturtevant forges
which are power-driven and are connected with an exhaust fan.
There is a power hammer, and the necessary equipment of an-
vils, swage blocks, sets, flatteners and other tools. Provision
is made for instruction in soldering and brazing, and for an
elementary course in ornamental wrought iron work in connec-
tion with the architectural course.
207
The Foundry has benches, tools, and apparatus for benclr
and floor moulding and core-making, and is able to acommo-
date twenty students. A gas-fired brass melting furnace, a
cupola for melting iron, and the necessary core-ovens and core-
benches give facilities for undertaking iron foundry work in
green and dry sand, and for brass moulding. The shop is
served by a hand travelling crane of one ton capacity.
The Machine Shop has twelve 18-inch engine lathes, one
18-inch turret lathe fitted for stud and screw making, one 27-
‘inch engine lathe, one 72-inch surfacing lathe, one brass-fin-
ishing lathe, one 36-inch vertical drilling machine with com-
pound table, one universal milling machine with vertical mill-
ing attachment and dividing headstock, one planer capable of
taking work up to 24” 24” Χ 5 ft., one 9-inch slotting ma-
chine, one 16-inch shaper, one universal grinding machine, a
centering machine, a cutter grinder, a tool grinder and a
buffing and emery grinding machine. There are vise benches
for eighteen students, with the necessary hand-tools, and a
marking-off table. The tool-room contains a full equipment
of drills, reamers, milling cutters, and accessories, gauges, cal-
lipers, and other measuring instruments.
All the machinery in the Workshops is driven electrically
by motors taking power from the generating station in the
Macdonald Building.
Courses of Instruction.
INSTRUCTORS IN SHOPWORK.
CARPENTERS | SHORVAN DT PATTERNISHOPs: «feces cos ecees see. G. WooLEey
SMILRHRS HO Pie = es ee δ᾽ οτος ΠΕ, hetero Bug τὶ Ἀν ae Ss
EU ONG Rae tnae oy ay eos Serene ey eee IRN BEN Ps ΠΡ ον τυ Wy H. LANE
ΜΙ ΘΈΕΙΝ ἘΠ OHO Bets by ete ean Wha Lee 2 am Cake -.J. EK. MACOUN
The work of the various shops is carried out under the diree-
of the Professor of Mechanical Engineering. The following
are the subjects of instruction :—
Carpentry and Joiner Work.—Sharpening and care of wood-
working tools. Sawing, planing and paring to size. Prepar-
ation of flat surfaces, parallel strips, and rectangular blocks.
Construction of the principal joints employed in carpentry and
joiner work, such as end and middle lap joints, end and middle
mortise and tenon joints, mitres, and dado and sash joints. ~
Dovetailing, scarfing. Joints used in roof and girder work.
Wood-turning, use of wood-turning tools.
208 :
Pattern making.—Use of pattern-makers’ tools. Elements
of pattern-making, allowances to be made for draught and for
contraction in moulding and casting, use of contraction rule.
Preparation of prints and plain core-hoxes. Exercises in paring
and turning. Construction of patterns and core boxes for pipes,
flanges, elbows, tees, and valves. More difficult exercises in
pattern-making, including built-up patterns and face-plate
work. Gear and wheel patterns.
Smith-work.—The forge and its tools. Use and care of
smiths’ tools. Management of fire. Use of anvil and swage-
block. Drawing taper, square and parallel work. Bending,
upsetting, twisting, punching, and cutting. Welding and scarf-
ing. Forging, hardening, and tempering tools for forge and
machine work. ‘Tempering drills, dies, taps, and springs
ne
=
Foundry-work.—Mouiders’ tools and materials used in foun-
dry work. The cupola. The brass furnace. Preparation of
moulding sand. Boxes and flasks. Core-making. Use of core-
irons. Bench moulding. Blackening, coring and finishing
moulds. Vents, gates and risers. Special methods required in
brass moulding. Floor moulding. Open sand work. Advanced
examples of moulders’ work. Melting and pouring metal. Mix-
tures for iron and brass casting.
Machine-shop Work.—Exercises in chipping. Preparation of
flat surfaces. Filing to straight edge and surface plate. Scrap-
ing. Screwing and tapping. Use of scribing block and surface
gauge. Marking off work for lathes and other machines. Turn-
ing and boring cylindrical work to gauge. Surfacing. Screw-
cutting and preparation of screw-cutting tools. Use of turret
lathe. ‘Taper turning. Machining flat and curved surfaces on
the planing and shaping machines. Plain and cireular milling
with vertical and horizontal spindles: gear-cutting. Cutter-
grinding. Drilling and boring. Use of jigs. Grinding flat and
cylindrical surfaces. Cutting tools for hand and machine; their
cutting angles and speeds. Dressing and grinding tools.
The folowing work has recently been completed or is now
in progress in the Workshops of Department of Mechanical
Engineering :—
72 in. surfacmg and boring lathe, and compound rest for
same.
New rocking grate for locomotive boiler.
Machine Shop.
Pattern Shop.
209
Apparatus for experimenting on efficiency of worm gearing.
Set of cast iron gauges for machine shop.
Model to illustrate engine balancing.
Three surface condensers. .
One 1,000 lbs. coal car for boiler room.
Two hydraulic dynamometers.
Two draft gauges of special design.
One preheater for 6 x 9 compressed air engine.
XV. Statement of Research Work in the
Laboratories 1902-03.
On the back water produced by diminishing the width of a
weir. Prof. H. T. Bovey (in progress).
On the pressures produced by sand on vertical and inclined
surfaces. Prof. H. Τὶ Bovey (in progress).
An experimental determination of the variation of the critical
velocity of water with temperature. Dr. E. G. Coker and 8. B
Clement. Phil. Trans., 1903.
A flexible joint for securing tubes in vessels under ~ ressure.
Dr. E. G. Coker. Phys. Review, 1903.
On the loss of head due to sudden changes of section in pipes
conveying water. Dr. E. G. Coker and K. M. Cameron (in
progress).
On the microscopic structure of cements. Dr. E. G. Coker
and K. M. Cameron (in progress).
On the loss from unresisted expansion in the intermediate
cylinder of a triple expansion steam engine. Prof. R. J.
Durley.
On the co-efficient of discharge for air passing through ori-
fices in thin plates under small differences of pressure. Prof.
R. J. Durley.
On the efficiency of Hindley worm-gearing. Prof. R. J. Dur-
ley.
A new curent wave meter. Prof. R. B. Owens. Trans.
Amer. Inst. Elect. Emgs., 1902.
Determination of alternator characteristics. Τὶ. A. Herdt.
Trans. Amer. Inst. Elect. Engs., 1902.
Relation of temperature and current in electrical conductors
under different conditions. H. A. Burson.
210
An electric accelerometer. Prof. R. B. Owens.
An electrical indicating transmission dynamometer. Prof.
R. B. Owens.
On the perfeimance of a repulsion motor. Prof. R.. B.
Owens and L. a. Herdt.
Tests on induction generators. L. A. Herdt.
On the overheating and burning of steel. Prof. A. Stans-
field.
The microscopic structure of overheated steel. Prof. A.
Stansfield and Howells Frechette.
On the coking of coal. Prof. A. Stansfield and C. A. Row-
lands. ΄
On the free fall of spheres in still water. Dr. J. B. Porter
and ©. V. Corless.
On the relation of the power consumed in crushing rock to
the size and surface of the fragments produced. Dr. Porter
and... P: DePencier.
On the concentration of certain crystalline magnetites by
hydraulic vs. magnetic methods. Dr. Porter.
On the rate of flow of films of water of different depths on
inclined planes. T. F. Robertson.
On sizing vs. classifying as a preparation for concentration
on tables. 8S. H. Boright.
On pneumatic jigging methods as applied to mixtures of
minerals of different densities. A. 5. B. Lucas.
On the Elmore Oil process as applied to certain ores. O.
Hall.
XVI. Donations During Session 1902-03.
One Riehle testing machine, 60,000 lbs. capacity, from R. iG. Reid,
Esq.
One steam engine indicator, from the Star Brass Mfg. Co. (Boston.)
One Daft electric light dynamo, from the Northern Electric & Mfg.
Co. (Montreal).
One 5 H. P. induction motor, from the Ampere Electric Mfg. Co.
(Montreal), and one steel beam.
Two steel castings, from the Canada Switch and Spring Company.
Weston laboratory standard wattmeter and voltmeter. Anonymous.
High tension insulators and pole head, from the Shawinigan Light
and Power Company.
One 7.5 k.w. and 15 k.w. transformer, from the Westinghouse Elec-
tric and Mfg. Company, (Pittsburg).
One standard 50 mil-amp. capacity megohm and portable wattmeter,
from Anonymous.
211
Seventeen high tension reactive coils, from the Atmospheric Product
Co.
Rubber insulated wire for research work, from the Okonite Com-
pany.
Lots of ore, coal, ete., from the Intercolonial Copper Co., Dorches-
ter, N.B.; the Dominion Iron and Steel Co., Sydney, C.B.; the
London and B.C. Gold Fields Co., Ltd., Nelson, B.C., etc.
Apparatus from the Montreal Rolling Mills.
Books from Can. Rand Drill Co., Dr. Adams, Dr. Porter, Prof. Durley.
Number of framed photographs, from the Grand Trunk Railway
Company.
Photographs, drawings, blue prints, reports, specifications, etc., from
the Canadian Pacific Railway Co., the Dominion Coal Co. and the
Dominion Iron and Steel Co. (Sydney, C.B.), the General Electric
Co. (Schnectady), the Westinghouse Elect. and Mfg. Co. (Pitts-
burg), the Bullock Elect, and Mfg. Co. (Cincinnati), The Crocker-
Wheeler Elect, and Mfg. Co. (Ampere), Canadian General Elect.
Co. (Toronto), U.S. Navy Department, Bureau of Construction and
Bureau of Steam Engineering, Westinghouse Air Brake Co.
(Pittsburg), Pennsylvania Steel Co. (Steelton, Pa.), American
Bridge Co. (per C. Schneider, Esq.), Grand Trunk Railway Co.,
E. Deville, Esq. (Ottawa), F. H. McGuigan, Esq. (G.T.R.), W. D.
Robb, Esq. (G.T.R.), E. A. Williams, Esq. (C.P.R.), W. B. Mac-
Kenziew isd. G.@sks);. Ἐπ “Al. Mountains ΒΞ (CAR) Οἱ ἘΣ
Smith, Esq., etc., ete.
Publications:—Inst. C. E. (London); Inst. Mech. Eng. (London); Inst.
of Engs. and Shipbuilders, in Scotland; Society of Engineers
(London); Liverpool Engineering Society; Amer. Inst. C. E.;
Amer. Inst. Mech. Engs.; Can. Soc. C. Ἐπ; Cassier’s Magazine
Company, Am. Inst. Mining Engrs.; The Inst. of Mining and
Metallurgy (London); Australasian Inst. Mining Engrs. (Mel-
bourne); The Geological Survey of Canada, etc., etc.
ΟἹ
ΟἽ
-190uIsUq Sur 2 ‘“squopnyg ΤΌΟΤΘΧ ΤΌΤ 9
"ΒΘ ΠΟΡ ΤΊ LISIUIIYO Ὁ. "BIWOPNAG 1θαΤΙΟΟ ΠΟ Ἵ Ἴ51 ΔΟΝ ἀΘ} 7 (9) ‘“uItay, puoses (4)
‘ard ¢ ΟὙ᾿ατ' 0 τποὰ} (pajdeoxo Avpanyes) ΑἼΤΕΡ Β0ΒΒΌ170 vaX ΠΊατιο, Κα pue pat
“ἀοτς ourgorW ‘JT {doyg ἀϑηπθάθο Ὃ : Arpunog “WwW
"s]UOPTN4G SuMIULSUR ἸΒΟΤΙΖΌΘΤ “F
"MIA, ISAT (Ὁ)
“squapnyg Sulooulsuy TeoluvyooN 6
"ΕΒΌΤΟ JO
Fey 19430 (4)
WL ‘puooeg 03 uodo 910 sotrojyws0 gery ΤῈ Οτιπο [0 91{1
$ AyWuUIg "g—: H1oMdoys
“syuepNys Suie0ulsuy [IAIN δ
᾿ΒΒΈΤΟ JO JTeY-2uO (V)
“squepnyg Sur
1 ‘gfe Buraerd “(ye
“+ CN)
"o *y ‘g Εἴ : ; £1 (5) ‘yromdoys Ξ ᾽ς (WW) στολάοπο
“aey ΤΌΟΤΒ ΑἸ 4 τς Cees Ὁ ‘Sumer “Tool Pee ele “2 Ὁ *p “query yeotstyg | 6 015
“2 *9 ‘query [worwmayO τ ‘Barer -4q01¥ P (£8 ‘puiddey ‘¢ BL“ qery ‘wayp
. 9 Ὁ “QB T [votmoy() eee cet al ee eee
a at
. (a bz ba te & lo bz (- “a ¢ “, bq ia sz be bn t τ ‘Burmerq puryooly
L499 F 86 T 9 ‘FC AP'S) SMomdoys ιν θοτ eat! a [Loos 5. αὐ [eoraeyo| 3. ou
og Aaystmayo Vv Ααγϑιταθτίο οὐ ‘4qory 10 ‘mol ΕΠ : to
Z ἰῷ ‘sore UeUL yy : e ‘Surmevrq πόαν a
Silt ΤΕΙΞΥ͂ΤΕ Ἐς ἘΞ ; S
a (a P'S) Yromdoyg Δ "8 ‘Burdéoaing Ξ
1 (9 Ὁ Fe ST Vv νῷ ἐξ ‘goreaeUry "Ὁ ΘΟ QRULAUTy «9 οἷς Ὁ τ a ‘Burner pueresre a
od ‘0198 UL TIY IAL ἽἼ Sqqory jo ἽΒΤΗ "T “qqory jo 4stH ‘£aysturayy) 2.9 te Ve Geet Ἵ τε 10] TT Ὀ
+9 “Ὁ “4 ὍΠ jwormayy 9 ' ᾿Αιγβτιποτο ACME ETO να AEA, μ4
L ‘9 ‘g τ fc. Wd ἐγ 5) 69 fo 2 bo be oT ot ἐδ ‘Surfaaing oe 9 Xe) ‘Ss ‘a 4 ἐπ " eS
od ‘T ‘SuUIMeAG puryeorg | ᾿Βοτβάταᾷ ΤῸ} πθαιταθ αΧ ΠῚ "ΒΌΤΥΒΤΕΟ 18 1ῚΙ τ δ ᾿Ααγβταιοηο ‘soishyd Τυγ πο πα α xq or bd
84 “5 ὙῬ ᾿ϑοτυταθα |,
“2 9 8. CIM) +) bo ‘Burk LP tira ΤῊΝ rd a PRA eG Petite aye TG by GE en ee Gs
"ἢ Δ΄ 8 “SutAeaAIng JEANS Pattee Loess? sS-Gar ἘΣΘ Fes Oe Lie 9 OF PSSA a 6
τ ἢ CP *S) ‘quomdoysg τ ‘SurmMerqg pue aly ‘solyvula yey "ΒΌΛΙ 178 10 ἐΒΌΤ7Ὁ ὕ19|7 811 "ΒΟΤΊ τ 91{10]}
τ ‘Surmerq Ἅποαν
é (Ca φ 5)
5 orskud 4. : : > :
‘SUIMVI(T puvlaoly ξ = Cer Wa : Ααγθῖποθ 5964 1 qeyrTeorssyd Ὑ ytomdoyg ‘g ¢ 04g
(HP 8) “πολάοαβ Ὑ : ‘qery peoisdua
(4) Burx0340'T : ; ie ἘΞ
og. (Ὁ) Burmeviq ‘woey sorsdyd Hut104}0'T ‘sored (al Y *S) ‘¥tomdoys ΟἿ Ps
ence =e ὲ Gaya ; al |
τιτὰθ Β
oa (ΔΝ BS ae τι “yst[sug ‘BupwoyorT ys sag (a P *g) ‘yxomdoug Il μή
OUT a nn a 7 a Ξ
Ξ Pr
od “‘BOTPVUIOYIE TL BOTZVIIG IVA “SOTVMLIY IIL “Β01Ί Β ΠΌΤ} I "ΒΌΤΊ Ὁ 1017 AL OL bd
(9) xromdoug "8017 8 1: Π9 1011 “sOT]BUTOT BIN "ΒΌΤΊ Β ULI ICAL “SOTVULAY 1811 "ΒΟΤΊΒΙΠΘΙ VIL 6
*‘AVGUNLVS ‘AVOINA ‘KVaSUNHY, ‘AVGSANGH AA “KVGSHO YL, ‘KVGNON ᾿ΒΈΠΟΗΙ ‘SUVA
‘SUVAA GNOOUS GNV ISYIA—ATAVL AWLL—AONAIOS GAITddV AO ALTAOVA
‘tad ¢ 09 “αν ὃ ὑπο} (poydooxe Anpangeg) ΒΟΕΒΌΪΟ σθὸχ yunog pre party, ‘puooog 67 todo 918 Βοτχογυχο 8} τϑοτι ποῦ οἱ,
ἀοτῷ παϑηῦᾷ “ἢ ‘$doyg ourqoey yo ! yAOMAOYS) ᾿οΒατορ τὐτιοιηάρ κα “STTAIO pug WIM 8}O@IITOIV IVOX PIL
“squepNyg Sursosursuy Fura ὁ
“Syuopnyg [Rorsanqi [eyo ὃ ‘8;UNpNyG Satassaoursagq TeoluvyooW Ὁ ΒΗ ΠΘΡΠΊΝ Sursosulsug_ [eowqoory “fp ‘syuopnyg Furteoursuq [ap ‘e ‘sjuepnyg A1ystmMIeYO δ
“SJUIPNS [BANZOI}TYOI ΤΣ “Wra], Puoosg Jo Frwy puoosog (f) ‘UOT, sty JO JTeY puooog (P) wa], γα Jo JyeY ἼΒαΤ (9) “wiay, puoosg (4) "παρ, γατῇ (0)
GQ) “Quy “wey 0 “310
18 (4) “gongs ΑΌΔΤΙΟΣ | "2 “9 (4) ‘VT ssorp-010] 2 9 (9) ‘ery ssotp-o41¢
“EPL Sag young "T ‘(q) σα Π͵ΙΌΡΟῚΝ 4 0 (Qi ἷ “ey leat :2΄9' Ω)4 ἘΠῚ Luss Ὁ ory
Ὁ Ὁ pus "4) Yromdoys) 9 ‘Burma tyoow #54 9. ΜῈ knssy ona} 2 (ν) 8 Barddeyy
“ye qury [wos AU "2 (0) Sarddey Ἢ Quy yeorwdy Ὁ “ὁ "ἢ “akg 6 (4) Ὁ "αι oN "810
τ “Βος [woryduay Ἢ “qury πα ¥a°G (2) ᾿ΑἼΠΙ ᾿τπθ 0) *T ‘Burustsocy "29 “4 ‘p ‘Farmevrq [yoo
τ ‘Buus ts0(T Ὁ ἢ (0) “ποθ Ὁ ‘oso 8 put χτ' δυιτα ἀν yw κκ Ὁ (2) “Quy “αθτ0 *T ‘Burusdsisoqy 901
“1 9 Ὁ “ὑπὸ 4194 2 (4) “ὁ (Ὁ) 9 ᾿αὐ Έ ‘woyD) “2 “9. Ὁ (Ὁ) “ΑἘΠ ποτο | ‘9 “ὅ (Ὁ) ᾿αὉΓ ποτ 6 (Ὁ) “qury “wey
ἦ (4) Yaomdoys ‘eT “Sung yongs
"2 ‘9 ‘8 (9) (ΝΥ ® ‘d) “πολάοῃς
ἽΟΟ Ὁ UT YM WnoBNn ἡ: SBULUTAT Yate 5 0} 9 “6 (Ὁ) "MoYO 4“snpuUT
οὐ FF liye oP KS Ὁ ak eld “ὁ (Q) ΑϑιΌΤΓ ΒΘ ΤΥ ‘soanjonayg jo £100, ax I PLO “B'e
OP OLY SUF AN (Co) 6-399 1) (Ὁ) sovqg ToTydray ‘sornyonayg Jo L109 I, “4 “qury “Bung ‘pypooyr “Ὁ (9) 'αὍ7 F109 ‘80178 ULO Te IT ΟἹ
Ad 1094) UI HAO Δὰ WSN YT (4) ϑαταυχα punyoorg ‘9 ‘g “mayQ ysnpuly 9(Y) 3 Quy sutaYyD Ὃ (Ὁ) 9-qury ἀπο 7 ‘aanqoaqzyory
‘9 (Ὁ) Ὁ “ΑὉΤ ἀρ]
‘e “Sug τυάτοτττιν
“2 (η ‘aonrqiodsuray, 9. (4) "qury “τ1π010
oe) Ὁ ‘(q) Yaomdoyg Ὁ (Ὁ) 9 query sway ¥ ἽἽ ‘Burfoaing *L (qd) "ποτη Aodsuvry,
a MH Pa ΒΟΥ “8. ‘s[RUR_D pu sprory Py CON ¥ ‘a) YroOmdoyS Cau Olay “6 ‘sotmvuc pouty, Il
(Ὁ) βοιγυγῷ [vOTYdray δ [4) ποτ{0 SSA "Δ Ὁ “) ‘Hutssorg orQ | ‘soanjonayg Jo kao, ' (4) “Wet “Bug
ς ‘od L(G) 6 purqoouy | -2'¢ ‘ πα ϑτβος euryouyy | 2 ‘9 δ (Ὁ) ‘AB anqpego pw “ὁ (4) ‘QUT 510 Ἴ 'δατλλθας Ῥαπ θα
ἐν 9G “QUIT “uLouD τ ‘Baud wo Ὃ “qury “Suit ΠΟΘΙ Ὃ 19) 9 “qury ‘wagqg “ 9. (0) ‘Kaystmeyp
: "hg ‘Batfaaing ᾿ς “ukpousoyy,
i Y CW ® 4) Yxomdoyg ‘al ‘4 ‘g ‘Burkoaing *L ‘9 “(ω) ‘Sutssorp-01¢9)
: Η ‘od "9% “qery *aroyp Ὃ "ΛΈΓ “Duy “TOO W “Ὁ (η) “QUT '3χ0 "2 9. Ὃ (Ὁ) SBanq eyo
Ὃ (4) Ca) αολάοῃς “ὁ 'ᾳ “Ῥ BOC “YOU! Ἵ ‘Satanic ΡαὺπΠορα Ὕ “SBOTN 001 ‘LT 'δαιλθας puryoouy or
“49'S Ὁ ‘ABOTOaH ‘TL ‘Sursisoq δ (9) 9 Saystureyo "Ὁ (Ὁ) ὃ “qery ‘wey Ὃ Ψ “yowp jo ΔΕ
"2 “ὁ ’ ᾿Αϑοχυχοττι 8 ‘sqTeung pure sprory
*L ‘9 4 δ ‘Lavy Bursa, xl ‘Bupfoaang *g “ΤΠΟΘῺ ‘osa(y “ Ὁ 8 'σ ‘fBopooy 2 ‘9 ἐδ ᾿ΑΒΟΓ 191 1Ὲ1
68.5.9) ye T pus Ὁ ΚΠ Ὃ Ὁ 1 ᾿διταῦαᾳ purloougy ‘o ‘p “AYOVW “OO “2 ‘9 ‘g “σ ‘£B0Toon 6
‘uolsanox | [worsopoan | 4 ‘ce ‘Pp ‘g ᾿ΒΌΤΨ Ὁ Malye AL "L “yoy Jo “4sreT Ὃ ‘¢ ‘qouy jo ‘uk ‘LT ‘A1038tH WWW “L “yor y Jo ἽΒΤΗ
“KYCUNLVS “AVA “KvaSHOoOHy, ‘AVASHNGH AL ‘xAVaSaay, “AVONOW "RUnOFT
‘AVGA CUIHL—ATAVL ANIL—AONAIOS GAITddV 0 ALTOOVA
Saray 2
qa
ΒΕ} ΡΤ TeolSanyppewy 9
‘s]UIPNAG Τ[υὰ ποθ 0 ν᾽ Ἵ
“urd 4 0 ‘ure 6 τπ01} (ρθγηάθοχο Avpangeg) ΑΠΈΡ ΒΟΒΕΈΤΟ ἁποχ ΠΊΔΤΟ
᾿ΒΎΠΘΡΤΊΩΣ SUlsoulsuq [wotueyoow Ὁ
“WaT, Puddes JOJ[VY puooog (9)
ἘΦ τ Buy “jonas
2 {9 CqeT “Teo Φ ‘UW
*s TPE‘ qey Suysoy,
“S]UOPNAG [ROMO TT Ὑ
“Mie], puooe 10 J[vy ysitq (9) “Way, Ῥαορος (q)
᾿ΒΙΒογαθ oout ΔΌΘΑ pAlyy UTA BTBOTIZOeTO αὐϑα YANO] y
*sqUepNj{g Sutsvsusuq |IAto “8
“WaT, yay (9)
JI pues parqy ‘puooeg 03 uedo ore ΒΘΙΧΟ ΈΙΟΘΘΓ ΤΒοταιθτ 90,
“sjyupnys Φαταθθτ 5
‘syuepmig ἀπηβταιθ
‘OSINOD [VUOINd Ose
"Gi(f) + qu Suyse, L
Ὁ (4) yaoMdoys
“Δ ‘9 (4) “query “Boye
‘7 “qey owvusqg
9. CQuy ‘Buy ‘Toa LQ) ‘Sulptpapoy τ ὩΣ πῶ “qe olmeapsAR | ‘¢ “᾿΄ΔΈΠ ‘Sum ‘pyoow [᾿Δ 9 (4) $¢ ‘e 1 ‘Surusisog| G0} %
κεῖ P € ‘so1yeag “ydeiy bqey Sug [yoo “qeyT οὐπθ πα Γ᾽ fe 2) “αὐ orneipAH [149 (Ὁ) $y qery Τθοταιθτ 0)
τ ‘Surustsaqy Ἵ (Ὁ) τς ‘Surustsaq τ ‘BuluBisoq 4" Te Sarustsoqy
*F (0) "ἘΠ oureukq “2 95 “Qey [vormseyg (ΟΣ $9 Ὁ “qery ‘aeyo |-z‘9 (v) § “Ὁ { qury [wotulayg
“Z"qery TeormeyyO
aa DPE gt τῇ ‘ABANTTVIO YW | == --------
“sonayg jo k10oyg, [ὅτ 2 (0) Wena 4yovad Δ Ὃ ‘£Binq 1911
“29 “QUT ἽἼΠ29ΙΝ Y “UL Ὁ ᾿Ααγδτιαθη “319 1 “Sug ‘yong Ἢ ‘uystaroyp ‘sfyuq_ ΧΡ) [9 ‘aBisoq auryoryw
‘od 4 “ΔΈΠ ‘sug “[yoo ᾿ς “tory jo ‘us 29 ῷ ‘ ‘sqtsodoq 910 “2 “ ‘ABN Te W τῷ ‘fsapoay ras
I ‘Surmerq puryaoiy “5 ‘T ‘Burustsacy 9 °% (”) *ABoTwAOUTN 4" query ‘Susp ‘yqoayw “Ὁ ‘AaystulayO
(4) “WeqD OoaTT | 2 (0) ADo0ToaH uvtpeurg| Ὁ Ὁ): ‘soq ΠΟΘΙ τ ἢ ᾿ϑαταδιβοα ἽΤ ᾿θατγοθητηοαν
Ὁ (q) “παροτααο % ule δι
‘od Ὁ “us pours 1g ὦ ἘΠΕ "2 ‘5 (») ues aeto 1 (4 ‘Barolo 1910 MA
“259 “Quy “]Te1aW P “UII [Oe OU ii Aempey “2 9 “ (Ὁ) ΑΒοχθαθτιτ]Ν Ἢ “qury ‘Suq 1ΠΟ911 ΩΝ ᾿πΑροῦχαθι 1,
Ὁ “query “Buy “[qooW *L 9 (Ὁ) Cqoew Suruny | +, ‘Surmeaq puryqoorg "LT ‘BuLUStsacT Δ 9 (9) δι{{589.(1 atO
Du ‘T ‘Burmesq puryeoig "29 (4) ‘ABINYLIOIN *G (Ὁ) “Yor Jo *uA(y ῥ ἀπαθαβοιβάπα πὶ Ὁ & “BUC [edrorunyy 1
a .: ἡ ἘΠ αΞΙΒΡΙ anata "6 ‘Surusisoq #4 2 (6) 9 9 (4) Tern ae δε (q) coe aes
“pte WRN Ὃ Ὑ Ἢ" {08} Ὧν "shy oe ee ie τῷ εἰ Sun Φ97π Ὁ) Ὁ δατλλθα puryset
8 A ΤΟΣ RY σε τες Ὁ (6) Qe MAI) -οαηοο τη
“2 9 (ω) “θοτιοῦ) Sie on πα ΕΣ ae
*¢(q) tuspourayy, + F “udpoussyy,
‘od "τί ) ‘Sulinopog 1918 MA “xT ‘Surfaaing «aL “199 10 LIOVTL
‘LOOT TRON P ὌΠ “2 (2) ‘qQoadg Saray xa Τ ‘Surfaaang re TCD) § 9 (2) TreeW
᾿ς “qury “δα 0] ἼΠΟΘΙΣ “ 9 ( *boTop ‘9 (q) S5anqpeqoW 2 ‘9 (Ὁ) ‘SyderBor30d meats, sornerpsyR
"I (Ὁ) ‘£5 0T004) Ὁ ΡΟ ‘PF ‘8 *T ‘Burmrarq puryqesrg | 2 5 (4) ‘sytsodoq og (| 2 (9) " 4 “Ὁ ‘ge ‘sorpnerpsH] Ol
*e ‘Ksapoas) (): 4 τος TOO Ἢ ΒΟΉ 1001} 9 “query ‘Sug ‘tqooy | Γ, ϑαμαθας pueqoory
Ἢ (0) “Bug ἼΘΟΤ 8 (4) τ ‘BuruStseq “Ὁ (ἢ he "ΠΟΘΙ jo ΛΠ "ϑαταϑιβος Ἢ (4) Quy "ταθπῦ "10915
‘g ‘SuraStsaq |
, Ὁ (1) Aomdoys 2 (4) ° expos,
Δ 9. “ἘΠ “TIMaW PUTTY TPE tyonyg Jo “qy, | "Ὁ ‘sorurvudpoutreqy,
Ἵ (Ὁ) ABoTOad) “ (4) ᾿"δατατιο τοῦ 19040 MW 9 (0) " πρθν Sararyy "eg (Sug Semprey “2 'βατατη
“eg “qery ὈΠ29ΡΟΘῺ *2°9(Q) “OG “£xysur0q) ‘shud "2 (4) Surat ‘9 5 Ὁ mayo ‘shu Ἴ (0) ‘£0T009)
Ὑ (4) "487 οἰππάα “qey ἽΤΌ1ΘΤΙ P Sururypy Eg sie "9 (4) ᾿ΑΒατ 8 1910 ch ‘Bururyw τ (4) ‘buraviq pueysesy 6
"LT (4) ‘Burudisaq Ln ἘΣΘ (Ὁὴ ὑπο 79 σΑύουΙν ΟἸΤΠΡαΡ ΔῊ δ (9) £50]004) | ‘-youy jo πα "p (4)
"Ὁ "qe “ἀπ980 “Bu “Too Ἵ sSurusisaq Ὁ (vp) you jo‘usq | T ‘A104STH LW “query ‘wayQ-o01,99 Tq]
πον ne rs. "6 ‘SuruSrsacq |
"KVGUALVS AyaIug *xVasuaHy, "KVCSINGa MA ‘AVaSaO, ‘AVGNOWL sunoH
‘aVaA ALYNOA—-aAT&VL AWIL—AONAIOS CHITddV JO ALTINOVA
215
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
Christmas Examinations,
December,
(Subject to Alteration by the Faculty.)
1903.
Day AND ΠΑ͂ΤΕ.
Monday, 14.,
Tuesday, 15....A.M.
ἘΣ:
Wednesday,16.A.M.
Thursday, 17..A.M.
P.M. |
Friday,18.....A.M.
A.M.
First YEAR.
Seconp YEAR. THIRD YEAR.
FourRTH YEAR.
| Exp, Physics.
Mathematics.
Geom. Draw-
ing (D).
Graph. Stat, (D). |
|
Elect. Magnet.
Chemistry (1) Geology (M).
Surveying ‘D)| Surveying (D)
Mathematics. Mathematics.
|
Iixp. Physics. Metallurgy.
Ore Dressing.
Hy draul. Lab.
Mech. Engin.
Hydraulics.
Mineralogy. (C)
Pract. Astron.
Mach. Design
Metallurgy.
Elect. Lighting.
(C). Chemistry Bdg.
(D). Drawing Rooms,
other examinations, Carpenter Shop, Engin. Bdg,
Engin. Bdg.
(M). Molson Hall.
Al
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
(Subject to Alteration by the Faculty.)
April Examinations, 1904.
5»
Day AND DATE.
First YEAR.
Seconp YEAR.
Trirp YEAR,
| FourtH YEAR.
|
|
|
Tuesday, April 5.....,.A.M. |Des. Geom. (D).| Des. Geom. (D).
|
|
Wednesday, April6...A.M. |
Thursday, April7....,A-M._
|
|
Friday, April 8... sore lecoSA Ee
P.M.
Saturday, April 9.....A.M.
Monday, Aprilil......AM.
PONE:
Tuesday, April 12,....A.M.
P.M,
|
Wednesday, April 13..A.M. |
Thursday, April 14....A.M. |
Friday, April 15.,.....A.M.
Saturday, April 16,.,,,A.M. |
|
Th Struct.
Org. Chem. (J)
Exp. Physics. | Exp, Physics, | Ore Dressing.
Algebra.
Dynamics.
English.
Trigonometry.
‘Chemistry (32),
|
|
|
|
|
|
Caleulus.
Kinematics.
El. Archit, (D),
Mech. Draw-
ing (D).
Mechanics.
Surv. (D).
Prac. Chem. (C)
Hist. Arch,
Phys. Lab.
(C).
Chemistry Bag.
aminations, Carpenter Shop, Engin. Bdg.
(D). Drawing Roo.ns, Engin. Bdg,
|Prac, Chem.(C).)
Architecture,
Pract. Astron.
D. C. Dyn. Mach.
Org. Chem. (Μὴ.
Geology (217).
Geology (JD.
Anal. Chem,
Testing Lab.
Indus, Chem.
Struct. Engin.
Elect. Meas.
Meech. Draw, (D).
Art Hist.
Assaying.
Mechanics.
Thermodyn.
Transport.
Hist. Archt.
R, R. Engin.
Mach. Design.
Munic. Engin,
Mineral. (()
Th, Struct.
lect. Rail.
| Mechl. Engin.
| Ph. Struct., (Ὁ).
Dyn. of Mach, * |
Des. Geom. (D).)
Designing, (D).
‘Canad. Geol, (C).
Architecture.
Geodesy.
A, C, Mach.
Twermo, Lab,
Mining.
Elect. Chem.
Dyn. of Mach.
M. & M. Mach.
Prob. & All.
Metall. Cu, Pb.
Th. Struct.
Adv. Metall.
Phys..Cbhem.
Physiog,
Struct. Engin.
Hyd. Mach.
Art. Hist.
Gas Anal.
Hydraulics.
Hilec. Metall.
Thermodyn.
Petrography (C).
R.R. Engin.
Mach. Desgn.
Pr. seol. Ore
Dep. (C).
Munic Engin,
Miner. Anal.
(1). Molson Hall.
All other ex-
Macdonald Mining Building.—An Assay Room,
Faculty of Law.
(Macdonald Foundation),
The Curriculum extends over three years. It ineludes Jec-
tures upon all the branches of the Law administered in the
Province of Quebec, and also upon Roman Law, Legal History,
and the Constitutional Law of England, and of the Dominion.
Its primary design is to afford a comprehensive legal education
for students who intend to practise at the Bar of the Province.
In all the courses the attention of students will be directed to
the sources of the Law, and to its historieal development. Dur-
ing their First Year the students will attend one hundred lec-
tures on Roman Law, from which the Law of this Province is
in great part derived. In the lectures on Legal History, the
history of our law sinee the Cession, and its relation with the
French and with the English laws, will be explained. First
Year Students will also attend courses on the Law of Persons ;
the Law of Real Estate; the Law of Obligations; the Elemen-
tary rules of Procedure; and an introductory course on Crim-
inal Law. The remaining branches of law, civil, eommereial,
and criminal, will be dealt with in the Second and Third years.
During the three years the Civil Code, the Criminal Code, and
the Code of Civil Procedure will be covered, and lectures will
also be given upon subjects, such as Bills of Exchange, Mer-
chant Shipping, and Banking, which are regulated mainly by
special statutes.
Students have the free use of the Law Library of the Faculty,
to which large additions are continually being made, those
lately added including the Ontario Reports, Dalloz, Recueil
Périodique, and such valuable works of reference as the Ameri-
can and English Encyclopedia of Law and the American and
English Encyclopedia of Pleading and Practice. The prin-
cipal reports and legal periodicals are taken. A special room
for Law Students is provided in the Redpath Library. This
room is open during the day, and in the evenings from eight to
ten o'clock.
The lectures are delivered in the rooms furnished for the
Faculty in the East Wing of McGill College by its munificent
pa γι y Mees: ὦ a
918
benefactor, Sir Wm. C. Macdonald. The Faculty desire to
impress upon English students the great importance of obtain-
ing a familar knowledge of French. In the practice of the
profession in this Province it is almost indispensable that a
lawyer shall be able to write and speak French. All who intend
to become Students of Law are urged to pay special attention
to this subject.
Those students who are able to take the B.A. course be-
fore entering upon their legal studies are strongly recom-
mended to do so. Those for whom this is impossible are advised
to attend the course in the Faculty of Arts for two years.
Matriculation.
For particulars of the University Matriculation Examina-
tion for Students in Law see pp. 10—21.
The attention of students who intend to practise law in the
Province of Quebec, or to be admitted to the notarial profes-
sion, is called to the statutory requirements as to admission to
study. ‘These will be found on pp. 229-231.
Scholarships aad Prizes.
Various scholarships and prizes will be awarded to the
students of each year who obtain the highest distinction at the
Examinations in April, 1904.
No scholarship or prize will, however, be awarded to any
student unless in the estimation of the Faculty a sufficiently
high standing be attained to merit it.
Faculty Regulations.
1. Students of Law shall be known as of the First, Second,
and Third Year, and shall be so graded by the Faculty. In each
year, students shall take the studies fixed for that year, and
those only, unless by special permission of the Faculty.
2. The Register of Matriculation shall be closed on the Ist
of October in each year, and return thereof shall be immedi-
ately made by the Dean to the Registrar of the University.
Candidates applying thereafter may be admitted on a special
examination to be determined by the Faculty; and, if admitted,
their names shall be returned in a supplementary list to the
eee
. The lectures will be delivered between the hours of half-
Pp ast 8 8 and half-past 9 in the morning, and between 4 and half-
eS ee eee RR A AN Re ee ee YE en ee eT
— sa a a Ἢ , = 3 ’ Ἢ
219
past 6 in the afternoon; and special lectures in the evening
at such hours and in such order as shall be determined by the ᾿
Faculty. Professors shall have the right to substitute an ex-
amination for any such lecture.
4. At the end of each College Year there shall be a general
examination of all the classes, under the superintendence of the
Professors, and of such other examiners as may be appointed
by the Corporation. ‘The examination shall be conducted by
means of printed questions, answered by the students in writing
in the presence of the examiners. The result shall be reported
as early as possible to the Faculty.
After the examination, the Faculty shall decide the general
standing of the students.
5. At the end of.the Third College Year there shall be a
Final Examination of those students who have completed the
Curriculum. This Examination shall be conducted partly by
written papers and partly orally. It shall cover all the sub-
jects upon which lectures have been delivered during the three
years’ course. Those students who satisfy the examiners shall
be entitled, after making the necessary declaration and pay-
ment of the Graduation Fee, to proceed to the Degree of B.C.L.
The Elizabeth Torrance Gold Medal shall be awarded to the
student who shall obtain the highest marks in the Examination,
provided his answers shall, in the estimation of the Faculty,
be of sufficient merit to entitle him to this distinction. There
shall be no Sessional Examination of students who are candi-
dates in the Final Examination.
6. No student shall be considered as having kept a Session
unless he shall have attended regularly all the Courses of
Lectures, and shall have passed the Sessional Hxaminations
to the satisfaction of the Faculty in the classes of his year.
%. The Faculty shall have the power, upon special and suffi-
cient cause shown, to grant a dispensation to any student from
attendance on any particular Course or Courses of Lectures,
but no distinction shall in consequence be made between the
Examinations of such students and those of the students regu-
larly attending Lectures.
8. Every Candidate, before receiving the Degree of BCs;
shall make and sign the following declaration :—
Ego A.B. polliceor sancteque recipio, me, pro meis viribus,
studiosum fore communis hujus Universitatis boni, et operam
daturum ut ejus decus et dignitatem promoveam, et officiis
omnibus ad Bacealaureatus in Jure Civili gradum pertinen-
tibus fungar.
Fees.
See page 32.
Special Holidays.
On the following days, when they fall within the session,
no lectures will be delivered, viz.: Good Friday, Easter Mon-
day, and Thanksgiving Day. On the following days the morn-
ing lectures will be omitted, viz.: Ash Wednesday, All Saints
Day (Noy. 1st), and Conception (Dec. 8th).
Examinations.
The University Examinations are held in April, at the close
of the session.
COURSES OF LECTURES.
Roman Law.
PROFESSOR WALTON.
During the first part the external history of the law from
the early period to the codification of Justinian will be dealt
with. The sourees of the law will be described, and the
gradual evolution explained, by which the law of the city of
Rome became fitted to be the law of the civilized world. A
brief sketch will be given of the legal institutions of Rome
in the first period and of the early constitutional history.
In the doctrinal part of the course matters mainly of anti-
quarian interest will be touched on but shghtly. Those por-
tions of the Roman Law which have been followed most closely
in the existing law of the Province, e.g., Property, Servitudes,
Pignus and Hypothec, and Obligations, will be treated in de-
tail, and the modifications made by the modern law will be
noticed. Class-examinations will be held from time to time,
and a first and second prize of books will be given to the two
students who obtain the highest marks in these examinations.
Text-book, Moyle’s or Sandar’s Institutes of Justinian, or
Girard, Manuel de Droit Romain.
Looks of reference :
Muirhead’s Historical Introduction to Roman Law.
Muirhead’s Institutes of Gains.
221
Maynz, Cours de Droit Romain.
Puchta, Institutionen.
Maine’s Ancient Law.
Constitutional and Administrative Law.
PROFESSOR WALTON.
The object of this course is to shew the actual working of
the Canadian Constitution. A sketch of the Constitutional
History prior to Confederation is given. ~The B. N. A. Act
is explained, and the leading cases discussed which illustrate
the respective powers of the Federal and of the Provincial
Legislatures. The growth of Cabinet Government is traced,
and some of the fundamental rules of the English Constitu-
tion are expounded and contrasted with those followed in
other countries.
No text-book is prescribed, but students are recommended to
refer to Todd, Parliamentary Government in the British Col-
onies; Houston, Constitutional Documents of Canada; Dicey,
Law of the Constitution; Anson, Law and Custom of the Con-
stitution.
Legal History and Bibliography.
PROFESSOR McGown.
This course comprises an outline of the history of the ἘΞ
in force in the Province of Quebec.
The main source from which this law is derived is the Cus-
tomary Law of France, as modified by the principles of Roman
Law, embodied in several of the codes or collections of Roman
Law before the time of Justinian. The Customs of France
after being reduced to writing were further modified by the
influence of modern Roman Law, which prevailed throughout
the larger part of France. The ordinances of the French kings
and the commentaries of the great jurists, from Cujas and
Dumoulin down to Pothier, brought the Civil Law of France
into the systematic form in which it was introduced into this
Province. The Custom of Paris, one of the most important
of those recognized in France, became formally the basis of the
Civil Law in “this country, and the ordinance of 1667 was the
main authority for procedure.
Since the opening of the British régime the development of
Lower Canadian Civil Law has proceeded independently of the
Civil Law of France, where the Code Napoléon was passed early
222
in the Century. In Lower Canada a code on the same lines
was adopted shortly before Confederation. Lower Canadian
Civil Law has been modified by English Law in commercial
matters, and also by statutes passed in the Province. The
Criminal Law has been derived almost exclusively from the
Criminal Law of England.
The leading authorities upon the main branches of the law,
with the reports of decisions of our courts, are brought under
the attention of the students in this course.
Agency and Partnership.
PROFESSOR MCGOUN.
This course begins with the principles of the law of Mandate
as laid down in the Civil Code of Lower Canada, and treats
of Civil and of Commercial Agency. The rights and liabili-
ties of principal and agent both between themselves and in
relation to third parties is considered, and special attention is
directed to the powers of agents in selling, pledging, and deal-
ing with the property of the principal. The law relating to
Factors or Commission Merchants, Brokers, and other Agents
is explained.
In partnership the right of each partner to bind his fellow
partner in virtue of the mandate reciprocally given and en-
joyed, leads to the distinction hetween Civil and Commercial
partnership, and the Limited Partnership or Société en Com-
mandite is also treated of. The distinction between Partner-
ship and Joint Stock Companies leads to a consideration of the
connexion between this subject and the subject of Companies
and Corporations which form the subject matter of a Course
in alternate years on the Law of Corporations and of Joint
Stock Companies, as follows:
Law of Corporations and of Joint Stock Companies.
This course is the sequel of the course on Agency and Part-
nership. The doctrine of limited liability and the opportunity
which it affords of carrying out enterprises of great import-
ance, by means of capital contributed by a large number of in-
dividuals, is treated of in this course. The growth of Corpora-
tions, both those established by long custom, and those created
by Royal Charter, or by Parliamentary or Legislative authority,
is also explained, as well as the relation between these corpora-
tions and the ordinary forms of joint stock companies. Cor-
298
porations sole and Corporations aggregate are defined, and the
principles of laws relating to Corporations and Companies ex-
plained.
Criminal Law.
PROFESSOR Mr. JUSTICE DAVIDSON.
This course includes :
A history of the Criminal Law and Criminal Procedure of
England; and of their introduction into and development
throughout Canada; discussion of the Criminal Code and other
Statutes enacting criminal offences: of the rules of evidence in
criminal cases; of the Fugitive Offenders’ Act; of extradition;
and generally of the principal features belonging to the Crim-
inal Law of the Dominion.
Commercial Law.
PROFESSOR R. C. SMITH.
The subjects dealt with will include Commercial Sales,
Bills and Notes, the law of Carriers, the law of Insurance
and the law of Banks and Banking.
1. The course on Carriers will cover:
(a) Carriers, contracts with;
(b) Affreightment;
(c) Merchant Shipping;
(d) Bottomry and Respondentia.
2. The course en Insurance will cover:
(a) Insurance, contracts of;
(b) Marine Insurance;
(c) Fire Insurance;
(d) Life Insurance.
Civil Procedure.
Mr. GORDON W. MACDOUGALL.
This course to the students of the First Year is intended to
form an introduction to the subject, to explain the simpler
kinds of actions, the general rules of pleading, and the juris-
diction of the several courts.
The revised Code of Civil Procedure for the Province of
Quebec is the text-book.
ww ae ee
ἀκ Mish με ἐν
Uae i ah
294.
Civil Procedure.
Mr. Percy C. RYAN.
The advanced course for the Second and Third Years covers
all matters of procedure not dealt with in the First Year
Course, and includes Provisional Remedies, such as capias,
attachment before judgment, injunction, ete., and special pro-
ceedings, such as proceedings relating to corporations, and pub-
lic offices, mandamus, ete., as well as the rules of pleading in
the more, complicated classes of action. It will be divided into
two parts, which will be taken in alternate years.
Marriage Covenants and Minor Contracts, Prescription. Lease,
and Municipal Law.
PrRoFEsSOR, Mr. Justice FORTIN.
Two courses—in alternate years.
Successlons, Gifts, and Substitutions.
PROFESSOR Mr. JUSTICE DOHERTY.
Two courses—in alternate years.
I. The Law of Succession.
The course consists of a commentary and explanation of
the whole of Title I, and the Third Chapter of Title II of the
Third Book of the Civil Code. The order followed by the
Code in dealing with the different matters coming within the
scope of this course, has however been departed from, with a -
view of presenting to the student the law governing succes-
sions as one whole. The subject will be developed as nearly as
possible in the following order:—
1. General notions, definitions, and divisions of the subject;
The Testamentary Succession; The Ab-Intestate Succes-
sion.
2. Rules of Law common to both Successions.
3. Rules peculiar to the Testamentary Succession.
4. Rules peculiar to the Ab-Intestate Succession.
5. Partition of the ‘Succession (and of property held in
undivided ownership generally), its incidents and effects.
II. Gifts and Substitutions.
This course comprises a commentary on and explanation of
Chapters I, II, and IV of Title II of the Third Book of the
Civil Code, dealing with:
1. Gifts inter vivos.
225
2. Gifts in contemplation of death, as permitted in Con-
tracts of Marriage.
3. Substitutions.
; Obligations.
Mr. AIME GEOFFRION.
This course of lectures will consist of a commentary on the
title on obligations in the Civil Code, less the chapter of proof
(articles 982 to 1,202 inclusive). Our law on the subject will
be compared with the old French law and the modern French
law, and its general principles will be explained and illustrated.
Real Property Law and Registration.
PROFESSOR MARLER.
First Year Course—25 lectures.
Distinction of Things—Corporeal moveables and immove-
ables: Immoveables by incorporation and destination; Incor-
poreal property; Real and personal rights.
Ownership—Its characteristics and limitations; Possession,
good and bad faith; Possessory actions; The Petitory Action;
Their results on the Possessor; Accession, natural and indus-
striale
Usufruct—General characteristics; Fruits and their percep-
tion; Quasi-usufruct; Modes of enjoyment by usufructuary ;
His duties before and during usufruct; How terminated.
Registration—Its modes and formalities; The Cadastral Sys-
tem.
Second and Third Year Courses—25 Lectures in alternate
Courses.
First Course—Mode of acquisition of Immoveables—25 Lec-
tures.
In this Course, a Deed of Sale will be analysed and its vari-
ous clauses explained: The parties; The description and the
measurement of land; The obligations of buyer and seller and
the security for their performance; Warranty, its modifications
and results; The form and registration of the deed; The rights
of the wife; The distinctions between Sale and other modes of
acquisition, and their effects on the parties.
Forced sales, their incidents and results.
Examination of Titles, practically considered.
Second Course:—Privileges and Hypothecs; Servitudes—25
Lectures.
8
220
Debts and Causes of Preference.
Characteristics of Hypothec; The various kinds, their his-
tory, conditions and effects; The Ranking of Hypothecs; The
Hypothecary action, its characteristics, incidents and results.
Privileges on immoveables.
Registration of Privileges and Hypothees.
Servitudes.—Natural, legal and conventional; Water Courses
and streams; Walls and fences.
Public International Law.
PROFESSOR LAFLEUR.
Sovereignty and equality of Independent States; Recogni-
tion of Belligerency and Independence; Justifiable grounds of
intervention; Modes of territorial acquisition; Territorial
boundaries; Doctrine of Exterritoriality; Treaties and Arbi-
trations; Laws of War; Neutrality of States and of individuals;
Laws of Blockade; Contraband; Confiscation; Prize-Courts
and their jurisprudence.
The students’ attention will be specially directed to Treaties,
Diplomatic Relations, and International Arbitrations, in which
Canada is directly concerned.
Private International Law.
PROFESSOR LAFLEUR.
Distinction between the a priori and positive methods;
Sources of the positive law of Quebec on the subjects; Ap-
plication and illustrations of the rules for solving conflicts of
law in regard to the different titles of the Civil Code; Com-
parisons between our jurisprudence and that of England,
France and Germany.
These two courses will be given in alternate years.
Requirements for the Degree of Doctor of Civil Law.
Adopted March, 1891.
Every candidate for the degree of D.C.L. in Course must
be a bachelor of Civil Law of twelve years’ standing, and must
pass such examination for the Degree of D.C.L. as shall be
prescribed by the Faculty of Law. He shall also, at least two
months before proceeding to the Degree, deliver to the Faculty
twenty-five printed copies of a Thesis or Treatise of his own
composition on some subject, selected or approved by the Fac-
ΔΩ ΩΣ
ee ee ee
>
221
ulty, such Thesis to contain not less than fifty octavo pages of
printed matter, and to possess such degree of merit as shall, in
the opinion of the Faculty, justify them in recommending him
for the degree.
The Examination for the Degree of D.C.L. in Course, shall,
until changed, be on the following subjects and authors, with
the requirement of special proficieney in some one of the
groups below indicated. In the groups other than the one se-
lected by the Candidate for special proficiency, a thorough ac-
quaintance with two works of each group shall be sufficient,
including in all cases the work first mentioned in each group
and the first two works in the third group. In the first group
one work on Public and one on Private International Law mus’
be offered.
1. International Law
A. Public:—
Twiss, Sir T., Law of Nations.
Hall, W. E., International Law.
Harcourt, Sir W. V., Letters by Historicus.
Ortolan, T., Diplomatie de la Mer.
De Martens, Droit International.
Holland, Studies in International Law.
Bee okityate——
Savigny, Private International Law (Ed. Guthrie).
Bar, Private International Law (Ed. Gillespie).
Foelix, Droit International Privé.
Laurent, Droit Civil International.
Brosher, Droit International Privé.
Fiore, Droit International Privé (Ed. Pradier-Fodéré).
Dicey, Conflict of Laws.
Story, Conflict of Laws.
Lafleur, E., Conflict of Laws.
2. Roman Law.
Maynz, Droit Romain.
Muirhead’s Roman Law.
Girard, Manuel de Droit Romain.
Ortolan’s Institutes (Ed. Labbé).
Savigny, Roman Law in the Middle Ages.
Cuq, Les Institutions Juridiques.
Puchta, Institutionen.
228
Kriger, Rémische Rechtsquellen.
Roby’s Introduction to the Digest.
Hunter’s Roman Law.
3. Constitutional History and Law.
Dicey’s Law of the Constitution.
Stubbs’ Constitutional Law of England.
Hearn, Government of England.
Bagehot, English Constitution.
Franqueville, Gouvernement et Parlement Britanniques.
Gneist, Constitution of England.
Hallam, Constitutional History of England.
May, Constitutional History of England.
Gardiner, Constitutional History of England.
Freeman, Growth of the English Constitution.
Mill, Representative Government.
Anson, Law and Custom of the Constitution.
4. Constitution of Canada and Works Relevant Thereto.
Todd, Parliamentary Government in the British Colonies.
Bourinot, Federal Government in Canada.
Cartwright, Cases under the British North America Act.
Lord Durham’s Report on British North America.
Lareau, Histoire du Droit Canadien.
Houston’s Constitutional Documents of Canada.
Volume O., Statutes of Lower Canada.
Maseres’ Collection of Quebec Commissions.
Viollet, Histoire du Droit Francais.
Dilke, Problems of Greater Britain.
Bryce, American Commonwealth.
Cooley, Principles of Constitutional Law.
Curtis, History of the Constitution of the United States.
5. Criminal Law, Jurisprudence, and Political Science
Stephen, History of the Criminal Law.
Blackstone, Vol. IV.
Harris, Principles of Criminal Law.
Holland, Elements of Jurisprudence.
Austin, Lectures, omitting chapters on Utilitarianism.
Lorimer’s Institutes. 4
Amos, Science of Law. !
229
Woolsey, Political [thies.
Lieber, Political Ethics.
Freeman, Comparative Politics.
Aristotle’s Politics, by Jowett.
APPENDIX.
The attention of intending Students is called to the follow-
ing provisions of the Revised Statutes of Quebec and amend-
ments, as bearing on the requirements for the study and prac-
tice of Law in the Province.
|. Regulations Applicabie to those who Intend to Become
Members Of the Bar.
Article 3544 R.S.Q.—Examinations for admission to study
and to practice law in the Province of Quebec are held at the
time and place determined by the General Council.
The examinations for the practice are held alternately in
Montreal and Quebec every six months, namely—at Mont-
real, on the second Tuesday of each January, and at Quebec
on the first Tuesday of each July.
All information concerning all these examinations can be
obtained from the General Secretary’s Office. The present
General Secretary is Arthur Globensky, Esq., Montreal.
Article 3546——Candidates must give notice as prescribed
by this article at least one month for the study and fifteen
days for the practice before the time fixed for the examination
to the Secretary of the Section in which he has his domicile
or in which he has resided for the past six months.
The present Secretary of the Montreal Section is Robert
Taschereau, Esq., N. Y. Life Building, Montreal.
Article 3503a. (added by Statute of Quebec, 1890, 53 Vic-
toria Cap. 45). This article provides that Candidates holding
the Diploma of Bachelor of Arts, Bachelier-és-Lettres, or Bach-
elier-és-Sciences from a Canadian or other British University
are dispensed from the examination for admission to study.
Such Candidates are required to give the notice mentioned
above.
Article 3548 R.S.Q. (as altered by by-law of the General
Council)—On giving the notice prescribed by Article 3546,
the Candidate pays the Secretary a fee of $2, and makes a
deposit of $45 for a complete certificate of admission to study;
Pk ὙΣΥ ἢ Chat ee a
ar , ΕΥ ἐς
f ’ : 7
230
of $30 for a partial certificate of admission to study; and of
$70 for admission to practice, which deposit, less $10, is re-
turned in case of his not being admitted.
Article 3552 (amended 1894, Q. 57 Vic., c. 35).—To be ad-
mitted to practice, the Student must be a British subject, and
must have studied regularly and without interruption during
ordinary office hours, under indentures before a Notary as
Clerk, or Student with a practicing Advocate, during four
years, dating from the registration of the certificate of admission
to study. 'This term is reduced to three years in the case of a
student who has followed a regular law course in a University
or College in this Province and taken a degree in law therein.
The By-Laws passed by the General Council of the Bar of
the Province of Quebec, 16th Sept., 1886, and amended 10th
Feb., 1892, provide as follows:—
Art. 42.—A course of lectures on law given and followed at
a University or College in this Province, and a diploma or de-
gree conferred on students by such University or College, shall
be held to be such as contemplated in Art. 3552 R.S.Q. only
when the University or College conferring the degree and the
student who receives it shall have efficiently followed the pro-
gramme herein set forth. This article and article 44 shall
apply to students already admitted only as regards lectures to
be given after the 1st of January, 1887.
2. The subjects on which lectures shall be given, and the
number of lectures required on each subject for a regular
course of lectures on law in a University or College shall be as
follows :—
Roman Law:—103 Lectures:—This subject shall include an
introduction to the study of Law and the explanation of and
comments on the Institutes of Justinian and the principal
jurisconsults of Rome.
CiviL, COMMERCIAL, AND Maritime Law:—413 Lectures :—
Lectures on these subjects shall cover at least three years.
They consist of the history of French and Canadian law, the
explanation of and comments on the Civil Code of the Pro-
vince of Quebec and the Statutes relating to Commerce and
Merchant Shipping.
CiviL PRocEDURE:—103 Lectures:—Lectures on this sub-
ject shall extend over at least two years. It shall consist of
the explanation of and comments on the Code of Civil Pro-
— eee
i ek ἘΠ eee, Re ee ΎΨΉΡῚ ne
ἢ
AS
αν
281
cedure and the Statutes amending it, the organization of the
Civil Courts of this Province and the history of the different
judicial systems of the country; also, the special modes of pro-
cedure provided by statutes and laws of general application.
INTERNATIONAL Law, Private and Public:—21 Lectures :—
CrImMINAL Law:—69 Lectures:—This subject includes the
history of criminal law in Canada, the constitution of crim-
inal courts, criminal procedure, comments on statutes relating
to criminal law, the relation of criminal law in Canada to the
criminal law of England. The lectures shall extend over two
years.
ADMINISTRATIVE AND ΟΟΝΒΤΙΤΌΤΙΟΝΑΙ, Law:—41 Lectures.
—These subjects include an inquiry into the different polit-
ical institutions and the public institutions of the country, the
powers, organization and procedure of the Federal Parliament
and of the Local Legislature, the laws on Education and the
Municipal Code.
Art. 43.—Candidates for practice who hold a degree in law
from a University or College in this Province shall produce
with their notices, a certificate from the principal or rector of
such University or College to the effect that they followed a
course of lectures on law in the same, during at least three
years, in conformity with the by-laws of the Bar; and such cer-
tificate shall further specify the number of public lectures at
which they shall have attended on each subject mentioned in
the foregoing programme, during each of the said three years.
The last part of this certificate shall only be required for
courses of lectures given after the 1st January, 1897.
Art. 44.—The examiners shall not consider a university de-
gree in law valid for the purposes of admission to the Bar if
they find that the candidate has not in fact followed the pro-
gramme above.
Il. Regulations Applicable to those who Intend to Become
Notaries.
For the regulations applicable to the candidates for the No-
tarial Profession see Revised Statutes of Quebec, Arts. 3801-
3833, and 53 Vict., c. 45 Queb.).
ΝΥ ὩΣ
232
TIME
TABLE.
SESSION 1903-1904.
Inrropuctrory Lecrursr, Monpay, 14ΤῊ Sepr., 4 P.M.
FIRST YEAR STUDENTS.
TurEspAy, 15ta Sepr., To Frrpay, 13ra NovEMBER—9 WEEKS.
Hours. Monpbay. TUESDAY. W EDNESDAY. THURSDAY, FRIDAY.
7 Ea ean Procedure.
8 30 ἘΠΕ ΟΒΕΣ Mr. Gordon Obligations. Procedure. Obligations,
Bea ge aa Macdongall.
a ΟΝ Constitutional
4.00 aan, a Rom. Roin Rom. | Law.
et yee” a The Dean.
; Legal History. | Persons. a 4
5.00 Prof MeGoun. ] Prof. Lafleur. Hist. Persons. Hist,
Monpay, 16tH Nov., τὸ Frrpay, 18tH Drc.—5 WEEKS.
Hours. Monpay, | TUESDAY. ‘WEDNESDAY. THURSDAY, FRIDAY,
pelea ΡΣ r= Bee =
8.30 Obligations. Procedure. Obligations, Proced. Obligations.
foro [ἘᾺΝ ἊΣ “ἃ z |
4.00 Roman, | Rom Rom Rom, Const.
Real Rights, | τ :
5.00 Prof, Marler Persons. Persons, Persons. Real Rights.
Monpay, 4ra JAN., TO Fripay, 4rH MArcH—9 WEEKS.
2 ἔ : ase ee ae a τἰς τὶ
Hours. Monpay, TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY | THURSDAY. FRIDAY.
3.39 Obligations. Obligations. | Obligations.
Ἦ ΣΝ τὴν Constitutional
4.00 Roman. Law. Rom. | _ Const. Rom,
. The Dean. ve
PA he Real Rights. 3 Be oe
5.60 fihnee iW coke: Roman, Real Rights. | Rom. Real Rights.
Monpbay, 7rH Marcu, To Frrpay, Ist APRIL, 4 WEEKs.
| , ᾿ Ὁ ὃ
Hours. Monpay. | TUESDAY. | WEDNESDAY. ‘THURSDAY. FRIDAY
ἜΝ i | - | 4
8.80 |
| ay Ε ry | aan : a,
4.00 Roman, | Const. Rom, | Const. Rom.
| Criminal Law.| "Ἢ | Ae
5.00 Prof. Mr.Justice. Crim, Crim. Crim.
Davidson. | | 7
Roman Law.....-... ...+. 115 lectures, | Criminal ie easton 10 lectures.
legal) Mistoryce. sec 28 τς Constitutional and Admin-
Persons ..... ᾿ Baoconl 2) oe istrative LAWasceseriecleemoe, ce
RealtRightsy we cctewisccssareO Ἢ ==
Procedure ra -schsyeces MoO se Total τον την το τς τ ΜΗ
Obligations i. actin ττητον 50 a
Agency; ὥστ οτος:
Real Property Law
Marriage Covenants...
Minor Contracts.....- ...
aes ole ΣΤ, ae ΤῊΣ pont
at ate 3 ae awe Oe oe x δ“ :
a exes a i
a pede Pee ἊΝ ἘΣ Σ ,
᾿ v ͵ ‘
TIME TABLE.
SESSION 1903-1904.
Inrropucrory Lecture, Monpay, 14TH Sepr., 4 P.M.
SECOND AND THIRD YEAR STUDENTS.
Tuespay, 15TH Sepr., To Fripay, 13tH NovemMBer—9 WEEKS.
Hovurs. Monpbay. TUESDAY. WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY. _ FRIDAY.
Gifts and ae
- Substitutions, | Civ. Procedure. Gifts and Gifts and
sey Prof.Mr.Justice| Mr. Ryan. Substitutions. Cave ΒΡΟΘΕα: Substitutions.
Doherty.
Marriage Cove- fo ed
4.00 nants, &c. Marriage Cove- Series Marriage Cove-|MarriageCove-
¢ Prof.Mr, Justice nants, &c. ΡΣ Tea “ nants, &c. nants, &c.
Fortin. 5 \
Criminal Law. | Commercial
5.00 Prof. Mr.Justice Law. Crim. Comm. Law, Crim,
Davidson. Prof. R.C.Smith
Monpay, 16TH Nov., to Fripay, 18TH Dec.—5 WEEKS.
Hours. Monpbay. TUESDAY, WEDNESDAY. THURSDAY. FRIDAY.
8.30 Gifts, &c. Civ. Proced. Gifts, ἄς. Civ. Proced. Gifts, ἄς.
Z Marriage Uove- hy ἢ :
nants, &c. |Marriage Cove-| ἐπ Marriage Cove-|MarriageCove
20 Prof.Mr, Justice nants, &c. Obligations. nants, &c. nants, &e.
Fortin.
5.00 Criminal. dara aoe τς Crim. Comm. Law. Crim.
᾿ aw,
Monpay, 47H JAN., TO FrRipay, 4rH MarcHo—9 WEEKS.
Hoors. Monpay. TUESDAY. WEDNESDAY, THURSDAY, FRIDAY.
Gifts, ὥς. 5wks, ei Ξ i> are A
: Agency, ἄσ. Gifts, &c. Gifts, ὧς.
βου Civ. Proced. | Prof. McGoun.| Civ. Proced. Agency, &c. Civ. Proced.
᾿ 4 weeks.
Real Property
Law.
Prof, Marler.
6 weeks.
4.00 |N-B.Thiscourse) Obligations, | Real Property | Obligations. | Real Property
Ὁ will begin after Law. Law.
the completion 4
Ἢ of Prof Mar-
ler’s course to
᾿ the first year. | Ε =
Private Inter- | Commercial i
5.59 nat. Law. | Law, ΡΥ ΓΕ Comm. Law. PSE Τὴ
Prof. Lafleur. |Prof. R.C.Smith
Monpay, 7TH Marcu, To Fripay, Ist APRIL, 4 WEEKS.
Hovrs. Monpay. TUESDAY, WRODNESDAY. THURSDAY. FRIDAY,
|
8.30 Agency, &c. Civ. Proced Agency, &c. Civ. Proced. Agency, &c.
4.00 Ree Ls: eae ΤΩΝ j | ΡΤ
ee) ; τ ΚῚΣ μ᾿ = = i eee ἐρ "ap hee
5.00 poms) IPs Tse Comm, Law. ΘΒ ΡΝ | Comm. Law.
... 5U lectures. Oramina laws 7.7. .τὉνἡ- . 40 lectures.
Srey WOO Ὡς IPE OCEGUE Cys iechie cre ΣΕ τ τ 40 wo
25 τέ International... - Je 25 ὃς
ΕΟ Ὁ Σ: Obligations a) τς τ Ὁ 40
ἘΦ wd. “Ὁ
25 ss MO tales aot oe 345
TEE PPAR ae 8 ea aA οὐ ΟΜ eae ee eRe ae MN
ἐν ~~ oe <4 >
Faculty of Medicine.
1
Foundation and Early History.
The Seventy-second Session of this Faculty will be opened
on Tuesday, September 22nd, 1903, by an introductory lecture
at 3 p.m. The regular lectures in all subjects will begin on
September 23rd at the hours specified in the time-tables, and
will be continued until May 21st, 1904, when the annual ex-
aminations will begin.
The Faculty of Medicine of McGill University is the direct
outcome and continuance of a teaching body known as the
Montreal Medical Institution which was organized as a full
medical school in the years 1823-24 by Drs. Wm. Robertson,
Wm. Caldwell, A. F. Holmes, John Stephenson and H. P.
Loedel. These men constituted the first medical staff of the
Montreal General Hospital, itself established in 1819. The
first session of the Montreal Medical Institution opened in No-
vember, 1824, with 25 students, and the lectures were given at
the House of the Institution, No. 20 St. James Street, a build-
ing situate on the north side of St. James Street, on or near
Place d’Armes.
In the year 1829, the Montreal Medical Institution became,
by the formal act of the Governors of the Royal Institution
for the Advancement of Learning, the Medical Faculty of
McGill University. It was a condition of the bequest of the
late Hon. James McGill that the college must be in operation
within a certain number of years of his decease; failing this,
the money and the Estate of Burnside on which the college was
to be built, were to pass to the heirs-at-law, the Desrivieres
family. To enable this essential condition to be realized, the
Montreal Medical Institution, then an active teaching body of
a να. ὁ ἰμννω.: “6. ἰ«ς- 4. ὠ
Κρισνο.. ψοσιρουν
> ALISU APIA TI sy
ΠΣ τς 27)
EIA) USpas TFTA,
OGTYIIOMSL τ, peIpap
TREY IGA a
Yar avg
Ag veal πος Coa POT
Suming WUD YES ΠΟ ὙΠ ΤΙΣ σ᾽ ἢ ἌΣ Rann jomBoiegay
235
established reputation, was “ engrafted upon ” the University
of McGill College as its Medical Faculty. This event took
place at the first meeting of the Governors of “ Burnside Uni-
versity of McGill College,” held at Burnside House June 29th,
1829, with the object of organizing the University. The first
session of the McGill Medical Faculty took place in the winter
of 1829-30, and the first university degree, a medical one, was
conferred four years later in 1833.
There were no sessions held during the political troubles of
1836 to 1839, and it is owing to this fact that this is the Sev-
enty-second instead of the Seventy-fifth Session of the Faculty,
dating from its incorporation with the University in the year
1829.
In 1844 the number of students in the Medical Faculty was
50; in 1851, 64 with 15 graduates; in 1872-73, 154 with 35 grad-
uates; in 1892-93, 315 with 46 graduates; in 1895-96, 419 with
90 graduates; in 1901-02, 440 students were registered. ;
After carrying on the work for some years on St. James
Street, the Faculty removed to a house on St. George Street,
near Craig Street, where they remained until 1845. From
1845 to 1851 they occupied the central part of the present Arts
Building, which with the East Wing was the only part of the
present Arts Building then standing. The remote situation of
the University grounds was found to be a source of great in-
convenience to both teachers and students, and the Faculty
returned to the heart of the City, to No. 15 Coté Street, for
the Session 1851-52. This building was erected for the uses of
the Faculty at the private expense of three of its members,
who held the Faculty as their tenants until 1860, when the
University authorities took over the Coté Street building, at
the same time enlarging it at a cost of some $4,100.00, to
meet the increased demands of the rapidly growing medical
school. The Faculty remained on Coté Street until 1872 when
the need of extension was again felt and the front block of the
present medical building in the University Grounds was pro-
vided by the Governors.
In 1885 this building of 1872, which, as has been said, con-
stitutes the front block of the present building, was again
found to be inadequate and an addition was built at the rear,
which at the time afforded all the facilities for carrying out
the great aim of the Faculty—that of making the teaching of
the primary branches thoroughly practical.
236
Owing to the larger classes and the necessity for more lab-
oratory teaching, the Lecture Rooms and Laboratories added
in 1885 soon became insufficient in size and equipment to meet
the requirements of the Faculty. The late Mr. John H. R.
Molson with timely generosity came to the aid of the Faculty,
and in 1893 purchased property adjoining the college grounds,
and enabled the Faculty to erect new buildings and extensively
alter and improve those already in-use.
These wings were completed and officially opened by His
Excellency, the Earl of Aberdeen, Visitor of the University,
January 8th, 1895. They were erected as an extension of the
old building, towards ihe northwest, partially facing Carlton
Road, and convenient to the Royal Victoria Hospital. They
connected the Pathological building, the private residence
acquired by Mr. Molson in 1893, with the older buildings, and
comprised 2 large lecture room, capable of accommodating 450
students, with adjoining preparation-rooms and new suites of
laboratories for Pathology, Histology, Pharmacology and San-
itary Science. The laboratories, etc., in the older buildings
were also greatly enlarged and improved.
On the ground floor the Library and Museum were enlarged.
The original library of the building erected for the Faculty by
the Governors in 1872 was furnished as a reading room for the
use of the students, and the extensive reference library of the
Faculty was thus for the first time made available for the use
of the students.
On this floor were also the Faculty room, the Registrar’s
office, the special museum for Obstetrics and Gynaecology, to-
ecther with Professors’ rooms, ete. The chemical laboratories
were increased by including the laboratories formerly used by
the department of Physiology.
In the basement were the janitor’s apartments, cloak rooms
with numerous lockers for use of students, the lavatory, etc.,
recently furnished with the most modern sanitary fittings.
In less than five years the extension of the practical labora-
tory work and the increase in the number of students and
teachers made an enlargement of the buildings almost impera-
tive. Before, however, the want of space and equipment was
very seriously felt Lord Strathcona generously provided means
to meet the requirements.
we.
:
4
:
\
ΠΥ eee PS ae ee
7
eh ee
ie
237
The New Buildings.
The Faculty has great pleasure in announcing that the new
Medical Buildings were formally opened by H.R.H. the Prince
of Wales, September 19th, 1901, and are now complete and
fully equipped. They are the gift of Lord Strathcona, who in
the names of Lady Strathcona and the Hon. Mrs. Howard in
1898, contributed $100,000 towards extensions and alterations
of the Medical Buildings. These buildings, the result of this
munificent donation, have more than twice the capacity of the
bui dings occupied during the Session of 1900-1901.
The alterations and extensions may be described as consist-
ing of three wings. First, a Laboratory wing. This wing oc-
cupies the north-east corner of the block of buildings and re-
places what was formerly the Pathology wing. A second wing
connects this with the front building on the east, and the third
wing connects the Molson block with the original building on
the west side.
The central wings extend east and west about 70 feet and
form the central feature of what is now a symmetrical block
of cut stone buildings. It will be seen that the stone and brick
extensions, erected by the Faculty in 1885, have been entirely
removed and replaced by these substantial structures. The
alterations and extensions now completed form the larger por-
tion of a scheme of complete reconstruction and extension which
will ultimately lead to the replacing of the original stone build-
ing now remaining by a facade which will project into the Uni-
versity grounds to the south of the buildings and so convert
the whole into a single symmetrical structure.
The new building is of four stories except in the front
block, where the three original stories remain. The total
length of the buildings, as will be seen by the plan, is 280
feet and the maximum width 145 feet. Its cubic capacity is
about 1,750,000 cubic feet, making it the largest of the build-
ings on the University campus.
The ground floor contains the lavatories, locker rooms, fur-
nace rooms, vat rooms, rooms for stores and janitor’s dwelling.
In the laboratory wing there is a large recreation room for stu-
dents, a students’ laboratory for pharmacology and therapeu-
tics, a research laboratory and a private room connected with
this department.
The first floor, of which a plan has been inserted, contains
to the right and left of the entrance, occupying the whole floor
238
of the original building, a students’ Library Reading-room,
with accommodation for 200 readers, and the Pathological Mu-
seum. The students’ reading room is connected with a fire-
proof stack room which contains the valuable library of the
Faculty. This stack room has a capacity of 40,000 volumes,
the Library at present containing about 24,000. The Patho-
logical museum on the opposite side of the hall connects with
rooms beneath the seats of Lecture Room No. IV. which are
used for special collections and for curator’s rooms. Four
small rooms adjoining are for the use of professors as private
rooms. On the opposite side of the hallway in the central sec-
tion of the building are the professors’ common room, the Fac-
ulty room and the offices of the Registrar.
The most striking feature in the construction of the build-
ing is the large central hall or rotunda extending from the
eround floor through the three stories to the roof, ighted by
skylight occupying the whole length of the middle section,
This hall is 70 feet long by 45 feet wide with galleries at each
floor connecting the various laboratories and lecture rooms with
broad staircases at each end.
The northern section contains the Chemical Laboratory, 80
feet long by 45 feet wide, and the ceiling 20 feet high, sur-
rounded with draft cupboards, and having benches for 150 to
180 students. Connected with this room is a’:commodious re-
search laboratory for advanced work in medical chemistry, and
a small professor’s laboratory. On the opposite side of the
hall is a large lecture room with a seating capacity of from 400
to 450, the museum preparation room, a small cloak room and
preparation rooms connected with the lecture room.
The floor above in the two southern sections is devoted en-
tirely to Anatomy. The dissecting room ocupying the top of
the front building remains unchanged, and is connected on the
west with a serics of demonstrators’ rooms, a private dissect-
ing room and two rooms for the professor of this department.
These rooms surround Lecture Room No. II., especially ar-
ranged for lectures in Anatomy. On the opposite side of the
hall, occupying the same area as the lecture room and adj oining
zooms is the Anatomical Museum. Intervening between this
and the dissecting room on the east side are a small demonstra-
tion room, locker rooms and service rooms connected with the
department of Anatomy.
me
a
Ss ee
j
2
:
a
ε΄
I
y
᾿
eee ὼ a ee
PL DSI YF ee Pee ΨΥ ΤΥ ay
. . Ύ ν᾿
“ἈΝ 2p
ee eee
, =
239
In the northern section are the museum for Hygiene and
the Hygiene laboratory. These rooms extend the whole dis-
tance across the east and west wings.
On the top floor are the departments of Physiology, Path-
ology, Bacteriology and Histology. The department of Path-
ology and Bacteriology has a laboratory of the same dimensions
as the chemical laboratory, 80 x 45 feet, especially well lighted
with three large roof lights in addition to the lights on both
sides. Besides the tables, lockers, etc., provided for students
in this department, there is a small demonstrating theatre and
a series of small rooms for advanced work and for special pur-
poses. These include a dark room, an incubator room, refer-
ence library and three private laboratories. On the opposite
side of the hall, occupying a similar floor area, are the labora-
tories for Physiology, consisting of a students’ laboratory which
has been especially equipped this year with sets of apparatus
for the practical study of the principles of physiology by the
graphic method. Connecting the students’ laboratory with lec-
ture room No I., to be used for Physiology chiefly, are a series
of four rooms for advanced work and special research, service
rooms and store rooms.
Occupying the entire northern end of this floor is the His-
tological laboratory with an adjoining room for private work.
This laboratory is 105 feet long and affords space for the use
of 150 microscopes at one time.
The laboratory wing is ventilated by a system of artificial
ventilation, a powerful fan supplying each laboratory with
warm fresh air, while extraction flues, to which extraction
fans are attached, draw off the foul air from each room in this
wing.
It will thus be seen that the new buildings of the Medical
Faculty contain four lecture rooms, three of which have a seat-
ing capacity of 250, the fourth from 400 to 450. There are
five museums, namely, for Pathology, Anatomy, Obstetrics and
Gynaecology, Pharmacy and Hygiene. Other collections are
being made and space has been arranged for their accommoda-
tion.
Extensive locker rooms have been arranged so that at a nom-
inal cost each student may have a locker for himself. Lockers
will also be provided in connection with each of the large lab-
oratories in which the student would be required to keep his
own material, instruments, etc.—as for instance, in connection
240
with the dissecting room and the laboratories for Pathology and
Bacteriology. In addition to the large reading room of the
Library and the recreation room on the ground floor of the
Laboratory wing, a small reading room is provided for the use
of students and controlled by the Students’ Medical Society, in
which are kept the daily papers, periodicals, etc.
II.
Matriculation.
For particulars of the University Matricylation, see pp.
10-20.
Intending students are reminded that a University degree in
Medicine does not always give a right to practice the profes-
sion of Medicine. It is necessary to conform with the Medical
laws of the country or province in which it is proposed to begin
practice. Each province in Canada at present has its special
requirements for its license and in most provinces a special
standard of general Education is insisted upon before begin-
ning the study of Medicine.
The requirements for those who intend to practice in any
of the provinces of Canada, or in Great Britain, etc., are as
follows :—
A. General !Gouncil of Medical Education and Enregistration
of Great Britain.
A license from this body entitles the holder to practice in Eng-
land, Ireland, Scotland and all colonies except the various provinces
in Canada. The Matriculation Examination in Medicine of this
University, as described on pp. (14-20) is accepted by the General
Medical Council. Graduates of this University desiring to register
in England are exempted from any examination in preliminary edu-
cation on production of the McGill Matriculation certificate. Certi-
ficates of this University for attendance on lectures, practical work
and clinics are also accepted by the various examining boards in
Great Britain. To obtain a licence from the General Council it is
necessary for all Canadian graduates to pass one of the examining
boards of Great Britain in both primary and final subjects.
Detailed information may be obtained from one of the three regis-
trars: Henry E. Allen, B.A, 299 Oxford Street, London; W. J. Rob-
ertson, 54 George St., Edinburgh; S. W. Wilson, 35 Dowson St.,
Dublin.
8S. The Province of Quebec.
No University Matriculation Examination is accepted by the Col-
lege of Physicians and Surgeons of this Province. Graduates in Arts
of any LDritish or Canadian University are however exempted from
examination on presentation of their Diplomas.
“ASOLOISAUG JO ALOPVMOGC VT]
- a
241
Those who pass the Preliminary Examinations described below, or
Graduates in Arts who register as students in the C. P. & S., Quebec,
on beginning their studies in Medicine, obtain on graduating from McGill
University a license to practice in Quebec without further examina-
tion in any professional subject.
Graduates who have registered with the General Council of Great
Britain are at present admitted to practice without examination.
The requirements for the Matriculation Examination of the Pro-
vince of Quebec for 1903 are:—
LaTINn.—Cesar’s Commentaries, Bks. IV., V., VI.—Virgil’s Aeneid,
Bks. V., VI.—Cicero Pro Milone, with a sound knowledge
of the Grammar of the Language.
ENGLISH.—For LHnglish-speaking candidates.—A critical knowledge of
: one of Shakspere’s plays, viz., The Merchant of Venice, for
1903, with English Grammar, as in Mason.
For French-speaking candidates.—Translation into French
of passages from the first eight books of Washington Irving’s
Life of Columbus, with questions on grammar. Translation
into English of extracts from Fénélon’s Télémaque.
FRENCH.—For French-speaking candidates.—A critical knowledge of
Racine’s “Athalie’” and La Fontaine’s Fables, Bks. 1., IL.,
III.,with questions on Grammar and Analysis.
For English-speaking candidates.—Translation into English
of passages from Fénélon’s Télémaque, with questions on
Grammar. Translation into French of easy English extracts.
BELLES LETTRES AND RHETORIC.—Principles of the subject.
History of the Literature of the age of Pericles in Greece,
of Augustus in Rome, and of the 17th, 18th and 19th cen-
turies of England, and France.
History.—Outlines of the History of Greece and Rome, and particu-
lar knowledge of the History of Britain, France and Canada.
GEOGRAPHY.—A general view, with particular knowledge of Britain,
France and North America,
ARITHMETIC.—Must include Vulgar and Decimal Fractions, Simple
and Compound Proportion, Interest and Percentages, and
Square Root.
ALGEBRA.—Must include Fractions and Simultaneous Equations of
the First Degree.
GEOMETRY.—Euclid, Biss. Wo ΕΤΤ shVesand sBook VI., or the por-
tion of plane Geometry covered by those Books. Also the
measurement of the lines, surfaces and volumes of regular
geometrical figures.
CHEMISTRY.—Outlines of the subject as in P. Wurtz, Troost, or
Roscoe,
BoTaNny.—Outlines as in Moyen, Provancher, Laflamme, or Spotton.
PuHysiIcs.—Outlines as in Peck-Ganot’s Physics.
PHILOSOPHY.—Elements of Logic as in Jevon’s Logic: Elements of
Philosophy, as in Professor Murray’s Hand-Book of
Psychology.
The examinations will be held in September, 1903, at Quebec, and
in June, 1904, at Montreal. Applications to be made to Dr. J. A.
Macdonald, No. 1 Belmont Street, Montreal, or to Dr. C. R. Paquin
of Quebec, who will furnish schedule giving text-books and per-
centage of marks required to pass in each Subject.
τ Fg Ry SRSA We ERLE eg ae yo See aa Rn, πο",
: 2 Ρ ent ind ας
5 ee: : ΤΩΝ Wing
242
Examination Fee, twenty dollars. Should the candidate be unsuc-
cessful, one-half of the fee will be returned on first failure.
Of the four years’ study, after having passed the Matriculation
Examination, three six months’ sessions, at least, must be attended
at;ia University, College or Incorporated School of Medicine recog-
nized by the “Provincial Medical Board.’ The first session must be
attended during the year immediately succeding the Matriculation
Examination, and the final session must be in the fourth year.
Students wishing to register degrees in Arts must do so before the
15th of September of the year in which they begin the study of
Medicine in order to obtain a license as soon as they graduate from
the University.
C. The Province of Ontario.
Everyone desirous of being registered as a matriculated medical
student in tthe register of the College of Physicians and Surgeons
of this Province, except as hereinafter provided, must present to the
Registrar the official certificate of having passed ‘the “Departmental
Pass Arts Matriculation Examination,’ and in addition Physics and
Chemistry—whereupon he shall be entitled to be so registered upon
the payment of twenty dollars and giving proof of his identity.
Graduates in Arts of any University in His Majesty’s dominions,
are not required to pass this examination, but may register their
names with the Registrar of the College, upon giving satisfactory
evidence of their qualifications, and upon paying the fee of twenty
dollars.
A certificate from the Registrar of any chartered University con-
ducting a full Arts course in Canada, that the holder thereof matricu-
lated prior to his enrolment in such University. and passed the
examination in Arts prescribed for students at the end of the first
year, shall entitle such student to registration as medical student
under The Ontario Medical Act.
Every medical student, after mtriculating, shall be registered in
the manner prescribed by the Council, and this shall be held ‘to be
the beginning of his medical studies, which shall date from that
registration. To become a Registered Practitioner in this province
four years’ attendance at a recognized Medical School is required
ald a fifth year to be spent in hospital or laboratory work must
elapse before the final examination is granted.
Students are examined in all the subjects of a medical curriculum
by the Examining Board of ithe C. P. & S. of this province at three
examinations, a primary (II. year), an intermediate (IV. year), and
a final (V. year).
Full details may be obtained on application to Dr. R. A. Pyne,
Registrar, Cor. Bay and Richmond Sts., Toronto.
D. The Province of New Brunswick.
The matriculation requirements of this province are:—
1. ENGLISH GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION, LITERATURE AND RHETORIC.
9. ARITHMETIC, including vulgar and decimal fractions, extraction
of the square and cube root and mensuration.
3. ALGEBRA, to ithe end of quadratic equations.
4, GEOMETRY, first three books of Euclid.
5. Lavin, first two books of Vingil’s Adneid, or three books of
Ceesar’s Commentaries, translation and grammar.
a
-
͵
"
;
ri
᾿
245
6. ELEMENTARY MeEcHANIcS of solids and fluids, comprising the
elements of statics, dynamics and hydrostatics.
7. ELEMENTARY CHEMISTRY.
8. CANADIAN AND BRITISH History, with questions in modern
geography. ᾿
9. TRANSLATIONS and grammar of any two of the following lan-
guages: Greek, French and German.
In order to pass, a candidate must make an average of sixty par
cent., with a minimum of forty per cent. in any one subject.
Dr. Stewart Skinner, of St. John, N.B., is the Registrar of the
Council of Physicians and Surgeons of this province, and will furnish
details on application.
To become registered as a practitioner in this province it is now
necessary to pass examinations in all the Professional Branches.
E. Province of Nova Scotia.
The regulations of the Provincial Medical Board of this province
for 1902-1903 are as follows: ;
PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION AND REGISTRATION.
1. No person shall begin or enter upon the study of medicine, for
the purpose of qualifying himself to practice the same in this pro-
vince, unless he first produces to the Registrar a certificate from the
examiners appointed by the Board to show that he has passed the
Preliminary Examination in the subjects prescribed by the Rules and
Regulations of the Board, or evidence of having passed such equiva-
lent examination as is accepted by the Board, and unless he causes
his name to be forthwith entered in the Medical Students’ Register as
hereinafiter specified (Rule 15).
2. No candidate shall be admitted to the Preliminary Examination
unless at least fourteen days previous to such examination he has
given notice to the Registrar of the Board of his intention to present
himself for such examination, and unless he has produced to the
Registrar satisfactory evidence that he has completed his sixteenth
year and has paid a fee of ten dollars ($10.00) to the Registrar.*
3. The Preliminary Examination + will embrace the following sub-
jects, viz.:—
(1) EnGuisH. (a) Language: Grammar, Analysis, Parsing.
(b) Rhetoric and Composition including an essay on one
of several set subjects from prescribed authors. ξ
(c) Literature: History of English Literature; critical
study of prescribed authors. ἢ
(2) ARITHMETIC. Complete.
(8) ALGEBRA. Simple Rules; Rules for the ttreatment of Indices;
Surds: Extraction of Square and Cube Roots; Equations of
the First Degree; Quadratic Equations of one unknown
quantity.
(4) GEOMETRY. Euclid, Books 1.,11., III., with easy deductions.
(5) HistoORY AND GEOGRAPHY. British and Canadian History with
questions in General Geography.
* This fee shall not be returned in case of failure.
+ For copies of previous examination papers ($1.00 one entire set) apply to Registrar
Provincial Medical Board.
1 English authors for 1903. DeQuincy, Joan of Arc; Tennyson, The Princess;
Dickens, Christmas Carol; Scott, Lady of the Lake,
244
(6) LaTIN. (a) Translation from prescribed books with questions
arising out of those books, and translation of easy
passages not taken from such books.*
(b) Grammar.
(c) Composition.
(7) One of the following:
GREEK. (a) Translation from prescribed books, with questions
arising out of those books, and translation of easy
passages not taken from such books. +
(b) Grammar, as in Elementary Grammars.
(c) Composition, as in Frost’s Greek Primer.
FrencH. Translation from prescribed books with Grammar Ques-
tions limited to the Accidence, and based upon the passages
prescribed for translation. τ
GreRMAN. Translation and Grammar, as under French. ||
4. Ex.minations take place twice a year, beginning on the first
Thursday in May and the last Thursday in August.
On the same dates local examinations will be held, on application,
at Sydney, C.B., Pictou, N.S., and at Yarmouth, N.S. Candidates
taking local examinations are required to pay an additional fee of
$2.00.
5. Except where otherwise specified, the books prescribed by the
Council of Public Instruction for the course leading to the grade B
or High School Junior Leaving Examinations are recommended.
6. In order to pass, a candidate must make fifty per cent. of marks
in each subject.
7. If fifty per cent. is made in all subjects but one. and if in that
subject the candidate shall have made at least 25 per cent. he may
begin study, and attend for one medical year at any medical college
recognized by the Board, and thereafter present himself for examina-
tion in that subject alone, without payment of any additional fee,
except in cases of candidates taking local examinations, who will be
required to pay the usual $2.00 fee for such examination.
8. A candidate failing in more than one subject, or failing to make
25 per cent. in any subject, may not begin professional study; he
will, however, at any Subsequent examination, be exempted from all
subjects in which he has already passed and shall for such examina-
tion pay an additional fee of $5.00, (or $7.00 if a local examination be
taken). :
9. Certificates will be issued to successful candidates, showing the
subjects in which they have passed, and the extent to which their
knowledge of these subjects was tested.
10. Candidates who have passed the above examination will be
admitted without further preliminary examination at all Canadian
and American Colleges.
11. This examination also satisfies the requirements of the General
Medical Council of Great Britain as to the preliminary examination
which must be passed by persons wishing to register as medical
students, provided the candidate shall have passed in all subjects
at one examination.
* Latin for 1903, Ceasar, De Bello Gallico, Book V, with Virgil, Aineid, Book II.
+ Greek for 1908. Xenophon. Anabasis, Book 111.
{ French for 1903. Voltaire, Charles XII, Bcoks I, II, III.
\| German for 19)3, Buchheim, German Reader, Part I,
245
EXEMPTIONS.
12. Graduates in Arts or Science of any recognized College or Uni-
versity, also persons who have passed the entrance examination of
the Nova Scotia Barristers’ Society, are not required to submit to
this examination.
13. The ‘Medical Board will. 8150 recognize pro tanto the following
examinations:
(1) The Matriculation or the Sessional Examinations of any char-
tered University or College approved by the Board, including
McGill University.
(2) The Examinations for Teachers’ Licenses, Grade A or B of Nova
Scotia, with 50 per cent. in required subjects.
(3) The ‘Examinations for Junior or Senior High School Leaving
Certificates of Nova Scotia, with 50 per cent. in required sub-
jects.
(4) The Examinations for Honour, First or Second Class Ordinary
Diplomas, as issued by the Prince of Wales College, P.E.I., with
50 per cent. in required subjects.
(5) The Examinations for First or Second Class Teachers’ Licenses
of Prince Edward Island, with 50 per cent. in required subjects.
(6) The Examinations for First Class, or Grammar School Licenses
of New Brunswick, with 50 per cent. in required subjects.
(7) The Examinations for corresponding Licenses or Leaving Exami-
nation Certificates issued by the Education departments of the
other provinces of Canada, with 50 per cent. in required sub-
jects.
(8) The Matriculation or Preliminary Examinations of any Medical
Licensing Board or Council authorized by law in His Majesty’s
Dominions, with 50 per cent. in e€ach subject.
14. After passing his preliminary examination, the medical student
may then enter upon ‘his professional course at any University,
Medical School or College approved by the Board.
REGISTRATION.
15. Immediately after entering upon his course every person engaged
in the study of medicine for the purpose of qualifying himself to
practice in the Province of Nova Scotia shall forthwith cause to be
entered in the register of the Beard kept by the Registrar, and called
the Medical Students’ Register, his name, age, place of residence,
date and particulars of his preliminary examination, and place and
date of his commencement of the study of Medicine.
16. The fee for such registration is ten dollars ($10.00), except that
candidates who already have paid $10.00 for the Matriculation Ex-
amination are not required to pay any additional fee.
17. Every sstudent must spend a period of at least four years in
actual professional study subsequent to his having passed the pre-
liminary or Matriculation Examination and bing registered as a
medical student; and the prescribed period of study shall include
four collegiate sessions of at least eight months duration each year.
18. Professional examinations will be held twice during the year,
one beginning in the month of April, the other in September.
19. Notwithstanding the Regulations (Chap. III.—Professional Ex-
aminations) during the year 1902 and until further notice, any can-
didate for the License of the Board who produces to the Registrar
satisfactory certificates of having passed in the subjects of first and
second Professional Examinations at a regular Medical College or
University recognized by the Board, will be exempted from further
examinations in such subjects, and Shall be required to pass only
the subjects of the third Professional Examination (Chap. III., Sec.
16-22).
The fee for the third Profesional Examination under the above
conditions will be thirty-five dollars ($35.00), which will entitle suc-
cessful candidates to the benefits of Chap. III., Sec. 22 equally and
to the Same extent as is provided in said section for candidates who
have taken all the examinations and paid the usual fees.
20. Any person who produces to the Registrar satisfactory evi-
dence to show that as a student in Arts or Science connected with
any recognized University or College, he has attended a satisfactory
course in Physics, Chemistry or Practical Chemistry, previous to his
registration as a medical student, such course or courses will be ac-
cepted by the Board as exempting from further attendance in such
subject or subjects and a certificate of having as such Arts or
Science Student previous to his registration or as a regular medical
student subsequent to such registration, passed an examination in
either or all of these subjects equivalent to that required by the
Board, will be accepted as exempting from further examination in
any or all of said subjects.
21. With regard to hospital attendance the requirement has been
reduced from twenty-four to eighteen months, and six months at-
tendance on the out-patient department of a general hospital or on
the practice of a recognized dispensary will be accepted as an equi-
valent portion of such eighteen months.
NOTICE.
The attention of Graduates in Medicine who may be think-
ing of registering in the Province of Nova Scotia is called to
the fact that notwithstanding the requirements of the recent
Medical Act, Chap. 103, R.S. (N. S.), 1900, any person who at
any time before the first day of July, A.D. 1899, commenced
the study of medicine for the purpose of qualifying himself
to practice the same in this Province, and who at any time
before the first day of July, A.D. 1902, complies with the condi-
tions and provisions in that behalf contained in the revised
statutes, fifth series, Chapter twenty-five, and Acts in amend-
ment thereof, and in the rules and regulations made there-
under and now in force, shall be entitled to registration under
this Chapter, 1889, c. 32, s. 39, (2).
AW. cH. GUND SAY.
Reg. and Sec’y. P. M. Bd., N. 8.
Prince Edward Island.
The requirements of this province are the same as for New Bruns-
wick and there is reciprocity with both New Brunswick and Nova
Scotia.
241
The subjects of the examination are as follows:—
1. ENGLISH GRAMMAR, COMPOSITION, LITERATURE AND RHETORIC.
2. ARITHMETIC, including vulgar and decimal fractions and extrac-
tion of the square and cube root and memnsuration.
3. ALGEBRA, to the end of quadratic equations,
4. GEOMETRY, first three books of Huclid.
5. LATIN, first two books of Virgil’s Atneid, or three books of
Cesar’s Commentary, translation and grammar.
6. ELEMENTARY MECHANICS of Solids and fluids, comprising the
elements of statics, dynamics and hydrostatics, and elementary
chemistry.
7. CANADIAN AND BRITISH History, with questions in modern
geography.
8. TRANSLATION and grammar of any two of the following subjects:
Greek, French, German.
Fifty per cent. of the marks in every subject shall be required for
a pass, and 75 per cent. for honours.
Province of Manitoba.
The matriculation examination of McGill University is accepted
by this province. The province holds an examination twice per year.
The following are the fixed requirements:—(1) LATIN, (2) MATHEMA-
Tics, (3) ENGLISH, (4) History, (5) Botany, (6) PHysics. Subjects 1,
2, 3, 4 the same as required for the Arts Matriculation of Manitoba
University, Parts I. and II., and the same standard shall be required
to enable the candidate to pass.
Details of this examination can be obtained from the Registrar of
the University of Manitoba.
British Columbia.
The College of Physicians and Surgeons of the province does not
hold an examination in general education but accepts the examina-
tions recognized by ‘ithe various boards and universities of the Do-
minion.
This province examines all candidates for a license in the profes-
sional branches ,both primary and final. For dates of these exami-
nations see almanack at beginning of the Medical Calendar. Dr. C.
J. Fagan, Victoria, B.C., is the Registrar and Secretary of the
Council.
North-West Territories.
The College of Physicians and Surgeons of the North-West Terri-
tories has no standard of matriculation. It accepts that of any
Canadian Board or University.
According to the Amended Medical Ordinances (1900), a licentiate
of any province in Canada may register and practice in the North-
West Territories on payment of the special fee and without exami-
nation. The College reserves th right of examining graduates of
411 Universities.
J. D. Lafferty, M.D., Calgary, Alberta, is the Registrar. The dates
fixed for examinations will be found in the almanack.
248 -
Newfoundland.
The Newfoundland Medical Board has a standard of preliminary
education equivalent to that required by the General Council of
Medical Education of Great Britain.
The examinations for 1902-03 will consist of:—
Compulsory.
ENGLISH LANGUAGE.—Including grammar, composition and literature.
ARITHMETIC.—Including vulgar and decimal fractions, and the ex-
traction of the square root.
ALGEBRA.—To the end of simple equations.
GEOMETRY.—Euclid, books i, ii, iii, with easy questions on the sub-
ject matter of the same.
LATIN.—Including grammar, translation from specified authors, and
translation of easy passages not taken from such authors. f
ELEMENTARY MeEcHANIcS of Solids and Fluids. Ὁ
Optional. §
HiIsToRY OF BRITISH AMERICA.—With questions in modern geography.
HIsToRY OF ENGLAND.—With questions of modern geography.
FRENCH.—Translation and grammar.
GERMAN.—Translation and grammar.
GREEK.—Translation and grammar. ||
MAGNETISM AND ELECTRICITY.
CHEMISTRY.
(a) The Board will not, in future, accept any certificate of passing
the matriculation or preliminary examination in general education,
unless the whole of the subjects included in the matriculation or
preliminary examination required by the Council for registration of
students of medicine have been passed at the same time.
(b) Provided ithat a certificate of having passed a University
examination required for graduation in Arts, or a senior or a higher
local University examination, or an Intermediate grade examination
of the Council of Higher Education of Newfoundland, or of the Grade
I license for teachers of Newfoundland, wherein the specified sub-
jects of general education are included, may be recognized for the
purpose of registration.
In order to pass a candidate must make fifty per cent. of marks in
each subject.
Certificates will be issued to successful candidates showing the
subjects in which they passed, and the extent to which their know-
ledge of these subjects was tested.
Candidates who have passed the above examination will be ad-
mitted without further preliminary examination at all Canadian and
American Colleges.
TrpxtT-Booxks.—Except when otherwise specified the books pre-
scribed by the Council of Higher Education are recommended.
+ Latin for 190%, Cesar Gallic War, Book I, or Virgil, Aineid Book I.
t As in Blackie’s Elements of Dynamics, or an equivalent.
2In commnnicating with the Registrar, students will pleaze state the optional subject
chosen.
|| Greek for 1903, Xenophon, Anabasis, Book I; or Hellenica, Book I
249
Il
1
TIME TABLES FOR SESSION 1902-1903.
Time Tables for the Session of 1903-1904 will be issued to each student with his
Lecture Room ticket enregistration.
TIME TABLE OF FIRST YEAR.
| ony | | Tae : zi Lecture
LECTURES. | Mon. | Tues.| Wed. ; Thur.| Fri. | Sat. Mientras
Glee. ΕΞ Ἂν ᾿Ξ: - ἘΞΞΞ Ξ τ} 9 ΣΡ ΞΟΒΕΡΒΕ
t -
*Anatomy Demonstrations...| 9 9 | Ὁ Bes ist) Val SORE erate. enon
|
i ore corn at | pea Asset τὸς πε onl 9», te IPS. Mays (ore Winter & Spring
PPAYSIOIO Pye t olave we ee 0.8 | alse ope 4 3 Bier eee
Bo AS obe 2 ΑΘ ΤΟ ΕΣ ὗ Autumn Term
Chemistry | | No
ea SLAC Pas sg {ie ἀπ 9] 9 9 DES oa calpain loathe Winter & Spring
} | a j Terms No. III.
|
i | Ve Drag ΑΣ ΟΣ ΕΡ δον Ὁ | et orctets Autumn Term
BHO Sagoo S60naC C6 OSCR hbo .- τοῦ οἷς ΕΣ - ᾿ Redpath Museciat
IBACTETIOIO LY crow cice) se eins = | 335" ||seedGnlloaceools obocc leabodcllirgauor Spring Term No. I.
LABORATORY WORK. | |
Practical Anatomy.......... LOO Oat 10=01 10-1 9-L | Aut. & Win, Terms
prac. ΠΝΒΙΘΙΟΡ acces scree ΟΣ τος BA in | Bal) Hooahca feaeous οὐ δ oe Win, & Sp. Terms.
| | |
]
piace ΕΠ Ξ ΤΟΙ ΟΡν iss safe ts. ΠΠΠ πὴπΠ:-Ὁ; "4 0} τ 4-6 | 9-12 | win. & Sp. Terms.
*Prac, Chemistry..........-.--| 10-12] 10-12} 10-12] 10-12) 10-12} 9-11 Winter Term.
!
|
Ξ | ( Biological Labora-
ΕΓ Cem ES 1O OP yee. ts cous teteler eile ἢ ΞΘ ΕΙΣ 9-θ0΄ [sie τον}. --- « ο- ΘΞΘΝ τ 5 τος: ] ' tory, Arts Bld’g.
Autumn Term.
*Prac. Bacteriology. κου ΣΟΥ sis 3-5 Ια ρα ον Spring Term. —
* Class taken in divisions.
TIME TABLE OF SECOND YEAR.
ἜΣ: ae 2D eee ΤῈΣ ieee . δῇ Lecture
LECTURES. Mon. | !ues. | Wed. ΤΩΣ -|, Eri. | Sat | Theatre.
> πῇ - αὐ oe so ὩΣ a ἅτ. π᾿ | a ]
| | |§ Aut & Wint
AMatoniy ἜΤ es ἢ 9 | gr i20410 9 On (Geet att sqeahe Noe nce
hy siolomyssicaer tesa ose θεν eee 7 5 2 Mesh ΡῈ Deals τ τς Νο.1.
ASHE TIS thy ες τ πα a Ome] ἐς ποτ © Roe: ἢ costo’ 9 9 ete ols No. ΠῚ
Pharmacology |
; 4 ΣΌΝ Aa aie he oes oie’, onl ΝΣ ee No. If
and Therapeutics.... } | |
LABORATORY WORK. |
- ] § Autumn & Winter
Practical Anatomy.........-| 10-1- 10-1 | 10-1 | 10-1 | 10-1 | 10-1 |; Terms.
ΠΕ τα ΘΕ ΘΙΤΩΙΣΞΈΣψ εν τον lees τς | 9-11 | 9-11 | 9-11 9-11) 9-11 | 9-11 Spring Term.
¢Prac. Physiology........se.|ss+e0: [RR ar Bee Re IO ie ele a ΣΈΡΡ .. Throughout Session.
| | |
Hs rAG ELISTOIOP τ τις a) προς | ἀΞ et ee 7 6 Στ ον | 9-12. Autumn Term.
+ Demonstrations and Labor- | |
atory Work, Pharmaco- "πο ο μοὺς στ: | BT Ne hes ΤΣ | Throughout Session.
Ἰορ τ 52... ὦ το οτ ἃ
|
+ Half the class only.
Norz.—Students of the second year are required to attend Medical and Surgical Clinics and Demon-
strations at Μ ἃ. H. and R. V. H. spring term in groups,
Certificates required for graduation.
Ὁ wt ee a Ἂς Ns oh se
250
TIME TABLE OF THIRD YEAR.
LECTURES. Mon. | Tues. | Wed. | Thur. | Fri. Sat. Lecture Theatre.
| = Ξ-Ξ- ----. .-Ὀ.-.-
Obstetrics and*Gynezcology. OM aes ΠΟ RRE Bos aacy ond a cdoaoee No. III
* * = |
Ἰ ΘΟΙΟΙΤΙ ΘΙ saG6d5 065 000)llopanues 10. | ¥11-12 dL Ome | ete estetscarctal Sissaieioxe st No. IV
Surgery ........cee sees ees ΤΟΥ ΣΝ cD an aes Beare ΠΟΥ Πρ. τ ὐ 6 No. IV
Jurisprudence: 2 ..cce ere TD, 08 |e cra ἡ ἀρϑον [ra LIT ΣΟ BPA RRCMT ater oceans ot FalléW. Term No.IV
Pharmacology and | |
Therapeutics ..... Adiga ullecadodot στ Wi looses coulloannacco No. III
General Pathology =f |... τ ND Piha ips 9 | Win. ἃ Sp, No. IIT
and Bacteriology.... See κοῖς τὰς wise Qiao ee Osea ΘΝ sions Aut, Term No. III
| | | δ Mon: 11ὴ 8.
ΕἸ ριον ora: De Aleck aie es ee ee Win. ratio ee ἱ T
* Morbid Anatomy.........0..) 0 ἈΠ κε τ ΠΣ β10-1ὸ |Win. & Sp. Term
se cme 2 ἢ πο νεο ἡ ΠΟ τον | 2p.m. | ἜΝ πο σα
Clinical Medicine........ { RVH | MGH: |.1...... | RVH | M@H :::....:
oa) it. | Dy ἘΠ δ ] ie el) Oogles goose
Clinical ς | TH |
Surgery. +++) |MGH | RVH || MGH | RVH |........ {Winter Tern,
Practical Pathology........| 4-6 436. Ἐπ ἢ: 4-6 4-6 Path. Lab.
{ Clinical and Sani | § Autumn Term,
: anitary 4-6 4-8 πο lin eas ah Gen erences ἡ Chem. Lab.
Chemistry. .... See | ] § Autumn Term,
{Bacteriology a ek ger 4-6 | τον τα) 4-6 | 4-6 je eeeeeee ὶ Path. Lab,
13 ΠΥ re : | | | Spring Term,
tClinical Microscopy..... +. 4-6 ἼΞΟΗ scene: | 4-6 4-5 ).. weed Q Path. Lab,
ν᾽ 5, ee ice aed oa Α 5.8 5-6 |) Dissecting Room,
{+ Operative Surgery Se το τὴς ἜΣ 5-6 5-6 5-6 5-6 a ? Spring Term.
* Alternate weeks, M.G.H. and R.V.H.
§ Weekly for alternate months R.V.H. and M.G.H
TIME TABLE OF F OURTH YE AR LE CTURES AND CLINICS.
+ Optional.
{ Classes taken in groups.
Ι, ΒΟ ‘TURES. Ἶ Mon. | Tues. Wed, | Thur Fri | Sat. Lecture Theatre.
Obstetrics and Gynecology .|......| 9 | 9 9 Pt kee tae No. IV
Medicine...... ay eed srarexettevalslersie, tote es LOE {πιο 10... 7-Ὸ τς ἐκκκεεεν No, III
UDP ERY τ τον ἐν aloes ‘ ΤΟΥ ΕΣ LOS TEM ΤΟΣ ΔΌΣ | eRe eae No. III
Med, and Sur, Pathology....| 9 | ..... seb seed epbce lionel aan: ΕΣ No. IV
Ophthalmology...... aos ἀπ ΙΝ tape eal eee Deseo tee Part” ain ae sare ol rate ΤῊΣ No. IV
Medical and Surgical TAT ome eh AL cS | oe ar a Ea ba a eas ie Autumn Term
AMatomy,.-.\osacaisclere No. IV
Children’s? Diseases mrcceey πεν, πΠρηπος ete ciel cere eel letanetra πρὸ δι «εὐ. eee Win. Term No. IV
* 11-12, | 11-12" |) 1315. Π1|0 11-12 | M. G. H.
Out Patients’ Clinics.... “4 Ds Galler sb vind ae 12-1 | | R V_H.
J ao: LM ava Soexerate| ΟΣ σοῸ tS ler Bos RV. Η.
Clinical Medicine......... ὶ ΡΠ ΤῚΝ bee BeG eric. |) aadaees | M.G. H.
Cae 5 ee ἡ | \crcietersceree|relebetecer- ἐν ΡΟΣ M.G.H
Clinical Surgery........ «ἡ Cha ΡΥ ΠΡ ΘΑ ee 2 ae R.V.H
5 pes Agel Spt Rag | he oem Pea sericea Meucrasal anon ὃ M. G. H.
Gynecological Operations. { Eis DL icy | eee Perce es ee eal erate R. V. H.
ΕἾ oi το 3 Sheek Dit eliversheretepe rs ve ee | «| M.G, H.
Clinical Ophthalmology... { ΚΟΤΕ Σ 3.30 ἀπο ΠΗ ἢ 5:90. τεὸν | R.V.H.
i rane Wretotal| se ἐν Moles crate Ὁ rat πο οξολα σοι -@ ἘΝ,
Τανπεοοϊορίςαὶ Clinics.. { ἀν ΡΣ, eet ae Bee Pepe Ste [ain ee |e νὴ π᾿ v. i.
Morbid VAR αοτΩν πειὸ τε Sort ah ρρο τ | §9-11 | Maternity
Clinical Obstetrics.......... { Perera Ἐπ τόπο μα ὁ δ δ, cho cos:'-iannduds ὁ 1-8.80 | Hospital.
Dermatolopical Clinic. peels ae seas 2. Javeeeeee|cecceee leet | M.G.H.
#Genito-Urinary Clinic. 20)... | cc, ses |ssee ens eeemctc) ie seeiem eames | Eye | ἘΠῊΝ ΤΕ.
Diseases of Children Clinic. . ΡΥ πούς ὑπ ΞῸς ΠΣ ΠΣ doo Μ. 6. Η.
* ( 4 ες ΡΈΕΙ etafore | a tee ἐξ δοσύς. | M. G. H.
Laryngology.....-........ ἡ Rae ried ee oe ape | os ieee | ἘΠ ΝΈΕΣ:
* In groups of eight or ten.
+ In groups of four.
§ Weekly for alternate months M.G.H. and R.V.H.
{ Alternate weeks M.G,H. an
a
R.V.H.
a ee ee ee ee ΨΎΝΝ Ὁ-
lo
Or
ἘΞΙ
ΤΩ.
COURSES OF LECTURES.
The Corporation of the University on the recommendation
of the Faculty of Medicine, in 1894, consented to the extension
of the courses of lectures in medicine over a period of about
nine months instead of six.
By this means, (1) The students of the primary years have a
more ample opportunity of becoming acquainted, by laboratory
work, with those branches of study which form the scientific
basis of their profession, and (2) the final students will be en-
abled to utilize to better advantage the abundance of clinical
material provided in the two Hospitals.
By this arrangement the actual number of didactic lectures
per session was decreased, but a corresponding increase was
made in the amount of tutorial work and individual teaching
in the laboratories for Chemistry, Physiology, Anatomy, Path-
ology, and Bacteriology, as well as giving more time for clinical
work in the Royal Victoria and Montreal General Hospitals,
and a greater number of ward classes were also made possible
during the session.
The Faculty expects, by thus increasing the time that the
different professors, lecturers and demonstrators devote to each
student, to accomplish two very important ends: first, to do
away with the injurious effects which result from attempting
to condense the teaching of medicine and surgery into four or
even five sessions of six months; second, to give each student a
sounder and more thoroughly practical knowledge of his pro-
fession than could be obtained by attending during even five
sessions of six months each.
22
Anatomy.
PROFESSOR:—F'RANCIS J. SHEPHERD.
LECTURER, APPLIED ANATOMY:—J. A. S?2INGLE.
LECTURER AND SENIOR DEMONSTRATOR:—J. G. MCCARTHY.
| R. Tait McKENZIE.
J. A. HENDERSON.
deg Je ROSS!
DEMONSTRATORS :— |
A. E. ORR.
/ R. A. WESTLEY.
| H. M. CHURCH.
| A. T. Bazin.
A. MACKENZIE FORBES.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATORS :—
Anatomy is taught in the most practical manner possible,
and its relation to Medicine and Surgery fully considered.
The lectures are illustrated by the fresh subject, moist and
dry preparations, sections, models, plates and drawings on the
blackboard. Frequent examinations are also held.
A course of practical demonstrations in Medical, Surgical
and ‘Topographical Anatomy is also given in the final year of
the course.
The department of Practical Anatomy is under the direct
control and personal supervision of the Professor of Anatomy,
assisted by his staff of Demonstrators.
The methods of teaching are similar to those of the best
Kuropean schools, and students are thoroughly grounded in
this branch.
Every student must be examined at least three times on each
part dissected, and no certificate is given unless the examina-
tions are satisfactory.
Special Demonstrations on the brain, thorax, abdomen,
bones, etc., are frequently given. Prizes are awarded at the
end of the Session for the best examination on the fresh sub-
Teck.
The Dissecting Room is open from 9 a.m to 6 p.m. In con-
sequence of the excellent Anatomy Act of the Province of
Quebee, abundance of material can always be obtained.
es ἁ
ΠΥ ἡ ὦ t
TS
ics —
a
—— ἢ
Medical Buildings.—Laboratory of Chemistry.
Laboratory of Pharmacology.
253
Chemistry.
PROFESSOR:—R. F. RUTTAN.
DEMONSTRATOR:—J. R. ROEBUCK.
ιν. K. BRowNn.
\H. Ὁ. IRvINE.
LABORATORY ASSISTANT:—R. O. MABEE.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATORS:—
The Department of Medical Chemistry is situated on the
ground floor of the laboratory wing of the new building. The
Students’ Laboratory, 80 by 45 feet, with ceiling 22 feet high,
has recently been completely equipped, and has benches and
sets of apparatus for 180 students. Adjoining this Laboratory
is ἃ smaller one for post-graduate teaching in medical
chemistry and for advanced work, and a balance room in which
is a reference library for the use of the staff and graduates
employed in special work.
The lecture room for chemistry on the opposite side of the
hall has four rooms connected with it, in which lecture experi-
ments are prepared, and which are used for storing appara-
tus, preparations, etc., required for the lectures on chemistry
and physics.
The course in medical chemistry is a graded one.
First Year:—During the autumn term of ‘the first year a
short course of lectures in medical physics is given. These lec-
tures are fully illustrated by experiments. The students, taken
in groups, are required to study by experiments in the laboratory
the more important phenomena of heat, sound, light and
electricity. Lectures and demonstrations on the principles of
chemistry are given three times per week during the winter
and spring terms. Examinations are held at Christmas on
medical physics, and in June on the theory of chemistry.
Laboratory instruction in practical chemistry is given during
the winter term, six hours per week. This course includes
the experimental study of the laws of chemical action, the
properties of typical elements and compounds, and a short
course in qualitative analysis. Special attention is directed
to instructing the students in keeping an accurate record of
his observations and conclusions. These notes are examined
daily and criticised.
Second Year:—A course of lectures and demonstrations,
three per week, is given on Organic Chemistry in the autumn
254
term, and an examination is held at Christmas. During the
winter and spring terms lectures and demonstrations are given
on the application of chemistry to clinical diagnosis, sanita-
tion and medical jurisprudence.
Laboratory work in clinical and applied medical chemistry
is required during the spring term. An examination in
apphed medical chemistry, practical and theoretical, is held
in June.
Students will find it greatly to their advantage to thave a
knowledge of elementary chemistry before entering upon the
study of medicine. Graduates in arts of recognized uni-
versities, on presenting certificates of having taken courses in
theoretical and practical chemistry and physics, and of having
passed examinations in the same, may be exempted from the
chemistry of the first year.
Physiology.
THE JOSEPH MORLEY DRAKE PROFESSOR:—WESLEY MILLS.
LECTURER:—W. S. Morrow.
{ A. A, ROBERTSON.
DEMONSTRATORS :— Ae Tr eon
The purpose of this course is to make students thoroughly
acquainted, as far as time permits, with modern Physiology;
its methods, its deductions and the basis on which the latter
rest. Accordingly a full course of lectures is given, in which
the physical, the chemical, and other aspects of the subject -
receive attention.
In addition to the use of diagrams, plates, models, etc., every
department of the subject is illustrated experimentally. The
laboratory work for students has been greatly increased and
during the season of 1901-1902 apparatus to the value of over
three thousand dollars was added to the students’ laboratory.
Laboratory work for Senior Students :—
(1.) During a part of the Session there will be a course on
Physiological Chemistry, in which the student will, under di-
rection, investigate food stuffs, digestive action, blood, and the
more important secretions and excretions, including urine. All
the apparatus and material for this course will be provided.
(2.) The remainder of the Session will be devoted to the
performance of experiments (other than chemical) to illustrate
important physiological principles.
4
en. SP.
~~ α 4
—
3
δ
/
ἐν
᾿.
;
;
|
,
᾿
᾿
4
255
Laboratory work for Junior Students :—
This will be somewhat similar to the course for Senior stu-
dents, but simpler and anatomico-physiological rather than
chemical; like the work for Second Year Students its main
object will be the illustration of principles.
The new Physiological Laboratory has been fitted up so as
to permit of eighty students engaging in work at onc time.
The fittings and equipments of each bench are of the latest
designs and are well adapted to their purpose. The apparatus
was especially made by the best American and European makers
and thoroughly tested before being accepted.
Each pair of students is supplied with all the apparatus
necessary to carry out the work of verifying a large number
of the leading principles of physiology and registering the re-
sults by the graphic method.
Provision is also made for a course in Physiological Chem-
istry, covering foodstuffs, digestion, the animal fluids, ete.
The experience of the past session has fully justified expec-
tations in regard to the Laboratory and the courses prescribed.
For the purposes of group and class demonstration, other
and more complicated apparatus is available, and will be added
to as necessity requires.
Additional rooms are provided, seven in number, for a de-
partmental library and professor’s office, for preparation apart-
ments, and workshop, and for physiological research.
Histology.
PROFESSOR:—GEO. WILKINS.
LECTURER:—N. D. GUNN.
HuGcH B. FRASER.
{ WALTER B. FISKE.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATOR:—H. B. CUSHING.
DEMONSTRATORS :—
The teaching of Histology and Microscopical Methods 1s
spread over two years. During both years practical instruc-
tion will be given upon the preparation and mounting of speci-
mens. Students will also be required to make drawings of the
specimens prepared by them.
For the First Year students, work will commence immedi-
ately after the Christmas holidays and continue until the end
of the session. The course will consist of laboratory work and
demonstrations, with occasional lectures upon elementary and
250
systematic histology up to and including the digestive system.
At the end of the session a practical examination will be held
on the work done.
During the Second Year a course of demonstrations and
laboratory work together with lectures will be given on more
advanced histology and an examination held at Christmas.
Pharmacology and Therapeutics.
PROFESSOR:—A. D. BLACKADER.
LECTURER:—J T. HALSEY.
DEMONSTRATOR:—R. A. KERRY.
The lectures on this subject are graded in the following
manner:—For students of the Second Year, there is (1) a
three months’ course on Practical Materia Medica and Phar-
macy, with demonstrations and exercises in the laboratory.
Prescription writing and the various modes of administering
drugs are explained and illustrated; (2) a six months’ course on
the physiological action of drugs, with practical demonstration
of the action of the more important ones. In the Third Year
attention is directed to the Therapeutie Application of all the
more important drugs and remedial measures, including Elec-
tricity, Hydrotherapy and Climatotherapy.
The Eddie Morrice Laboratory, comprising pharmacological
and chemical research rooms, has, through the liberality of Mr.
Morrice, been fully equipped, and in it during the session 1903-
1904 an optional course of practical exercises in pharmacology
will be given to advanced students.
Medicine.
PROFESSOR:—JAMES STEWART.
[ I’, G. FINLEY.
Ἢ. A. LArLEUR.
ASSISTANT PROFESSORS :— J
le. I’. MARTIN.
While the lectures on this subject are mainly devoted to
Special Pathology and Therapeutics, no opportunity is lost of
illustrating and explaining the general laws of disease. With
the exception of certain affections seldom or never observed
in this country all the important internal diseases of the body,
except those peculiar to women and children, are discussed, and
their Pathological Anatomy illustrated by the large collection
of morbid preparations in the University Museum, and by fresh
specimens contributed by the Professor of Pathology.
ee ee χὑψὺι
———
.
The College possesses an extensive series of plates and
models illustrative of the histological and anatomical ap-
pearances of disease, and the wards of the General and Royal
Victoria Hospitals afford the lecturers ample opportunities to .
refer to living examples of very many of the maladies de-
scribed, and to demonstrate the results of treatment.
Clinical Medicine.
PROFESSOR:—JAMES STEWART.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSORS:—F. G. FINLEY AND H, A. LAFLEUR.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—C. F MARTIN.
ὴ [(. GORDON CAMPBELL.
LECTURERS:— 4
lw. EF. HAMILTON.
DEMONSTRATOR:—S. RIDLEY MACKENZIE.
The instruction in Clinical Medicine is condueted in the
theatres, wards, out-patient rooms and laboratories of the
Royal Victoria and Montreal General Hospitals.
The courses include :—
I. The reporting of cases by every member of the Gradu-
ating Class, a certain number of cases being assigned to each
student.
II. Bedside instruction for members of the Graduating
Class.
III. Clinics weekly in each hospital.
TV. Tutorial instruction for the Junior Classes, in the wards
and out-patient rooms of both hospitals.
VY. Instruction in Clinical Chemistry and Bacteriology.
Surgery.
PROFESSOR:—THOMAS G. RODDICK.
ASSISTANT PROFESSOR:—J. M. ELDER.
LECTURER:—A. E. GARROW.
This course consists of the principles and practice of Sur-
gery and Surgical Pathology, illustrated by a large collection
of preparations from the Museum, as well as by specimens ob-
tained from cases under observation at the hospitals. The
greater part of the course, however, is devoted to the Practice
of Surgery, in which attention is constantly drawn to cases
which have been observed by the class during the session. The
various surgical appliances are exhibited, and their uses and ap-
plication explained. Surgical Anatomy and Operative Surgery
form special departments of this course.
5
258
Clinical Surgery.
PROFESSOR:—JAMES BELL.
ASSOCIATE PROFESSOR:—GEORGE E. ARMSTRONG.
A. E. GARROW.
LECTURERS :— J. A, HUTCHISON.
7: M. ELDER.
DEMONSTRATOR:—KENNETH CAMERON.
The teaching in Clinical Surgery is conducted at the Mont-
real General and Royal Victoria Hospitals.
I. In the amphitheatre of each of these hospitals, demon-
strations are given and operations are performed before the
Senior and Junior Classes on alternate days.
II. Small ward classes of about ten men in each are taken
through the wards by the surgeon in attendance, and instruc-
tion given at the bedside concerning the nature and manage-
ment of surgical cases, in each hospital, at least once per week.
Similar classes are also taken into the wards daily by the Sur-
gical Assistants for instruction in diagnosis and reporting.
111. Beds are assigned to students in rotation, and each
student is required to carefully study and report cases and to
assist in the surgical dressing of the same. Certificates of
case reporting are given, and are essential to graduation.
1V. In the Out-patient department students have an excep-
tionally good opportunity to study a great variety of injuries,
to witness operations in minor surgery, to come into personal
contact with patients and to take part in the application of a
variety of surgical dressings and appliances.
Obstetrics and Diseases of Infants.
PROFESSOR:—J. CHALMERS CAMERON.
LECTURER:—D. J. EVANS.
DEMONSTRATOR:—JAMES BARCLAY.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATOR:—H. R. D. GRAY.
This course will embrace: (1) Lectures on the principles
and practice of the obstetric art, illustrated by diagrams, fresh
and preserved specimens, the artificial pelvis, complete sets of
models illustrating the deformities of the pelvis, wax prepara-
tions, bronze mechanical pelvis, ete. (2) Bedside instruction
in the Montreal Maternity, including external palpation, pel-
vimetry, the man*gement and after-treatment of cases. (8)
259
A complete course on obstetric operations with the Tarnier-
Budin phantom. (4) The diseases of infancy. (5) A course
of individual clinical instruction at the Montreal Maternity.
The course is carefully graded and instruction is given sep-
arately to students of the Third and Fourth Years.
Particular attention is given to clinical instruction, and a
clinical examination similar to that held in Medicine and Sur-
gery, now forms an important part of the Final examination.
A short course of lectures on diseases of infancy is given,
supplemented by clinical demonstration and ward work. The
demonstrators give special demonstrations from time to time
and take the students in groups for the purpose of examination
and review.
Gynzecology:-
PROFESSOR:—W™M. GARDNER.
LECTURERS:—F. A. M. LOCKHART AND W. W. CHIPMAN.
DEMONSTRATOR:—J. Ὁ. CAMERON.
The didactic course is graded, and consists of from forty to
forty-five lectures given at intervals alternating with the lec-
tures on Obstetrics and extending throughout the session.
The anatomy and physiology of the organs and parts concerned
are first discussed. Then the various methods of examination
are fully described, the necessary instruments exhibited, and
their uses explained.
The diseases peculiar to women are considered as fully as
time permits, somewhat in the following order:—Disorders
of Menstruation; Leucorrhoea; Diseases of the External Gen-
ital Organs; Inflammations, Lacerations and Displacements of
the Uterus; Pelvic Cellulitis and Peritonitis and Inflammation
of the Ovaries and Fallopian Tubes; Benign and Malignant
growths of the Uterus; Tumours of the Ovary; Diseases of the
Bladder and Urethra. ‘The lectures are illustrated as fully as
possible by drawings and morbid specimens.
Clinical teaching, including out-patient and bed-side in-
struction is given at both the Royal Victoria and Montreal Gen-
eral Hospitals by Professor Gardner and Doctors Lockhart,
Chipman and Cameron. A large amount of Clinical material
is thus available for practical ‘nstruction in this department
of medicine. Numerous operations are done before the class
and made the subject of remarks. In addition to the ward-
200
patients, each hospital conducts a large out- -patient Gynaeco-
logical Clinic, to w ‘hich advanced students are admited in rota-
tion, and Hisnaied in digital and bi-manual examination and
in fhe use of instruments for diagnosis.
Particular attention is thus given to Clinical instruction,
and a Clinical examination in Gynaecology similar to that held
in Medicine and Surgery, now forms part of the Final exam-
ination.
Medical Jur!sprudence.
PROFESSOR:—GEO. WILKINS.
This course is treated of in its medical as well as medico-
legal aspects. Special attention is devoted to the subject of
blood stains, the chemical, microscopical and spectroscopic tests
for which are fully described and shown to the class. The
various spectra of blood in its different conditions are shown
by the microspectroscope, so well adapted for showing the re-
actions with exc ecdingly minute quantities of suspected mate-
rial. Recent researches in the diagnosis of human from ani-
mal blood are alluded to. In addition to the other subjects
usually included in a course of this kind, Toxicology is taken
up. The modes of action of poisons, general evidence of pois-
oning and classification of poisons are first treated of, after
which the more common poisons are described, with reference
to symptoms, post-mortem appearance and chemical tests. The
post-mortem appearances are illustrated by plates, and the tests
are shown to the class.
Ophthalmology and Otology.
PROFESSOR:—F. BULLER.
J. J.. GARDNER.
J. W. STIRLING
DEMONSTRATOR:—W. G. M. BYERS.
LECTURERS :—
This will include a course of from twenty-five to thirty di-
dactic lectures on Opthalmology and Otology, delivered at the
college buildings. In these will be discussed especially the
methodical, clinical examination of the organs of sight and
hearing, the classification and pathology of the diseases affect-
ing them, and the general principles underlying the diagnosis
and treatment of affections of the eye and ear.
aes be
a εὐ Ὸ ἡ νῷ. ΓΌΝΟΥ ΤΑ ΤᾺ . ¢
ἢ
‘
261
Systematic clinical instruction will be given at the bi-weekly
clinics in the out-patient departments of the General and
Royal Victoria Hospitals where students have unexcelled op-
portunities for thoroughly grounding themselves in the work
of these branches. The operative work of eye and ear surgery
is fully open to undergraduates on days set apart for the pur-
pose, and special courses for instruction in refractive work
and the use of the opthalmoscope can also be arranged for
times convenient to the teachers and students.
Biology.
D. P. PENHALLOW:—PROFESSOR OF BOTANY.
HE. ΝΥ. MacBrRIDE:—PROFESSOR OF ZOOLOGY.
The course in elementary Biology is designed to prepare
for special study in medical subjects. Under the supervision
of the professors of Botany and Zoology it will be given dur-
ing the autumn term—Zoology first eight weeks ; Botany last
four weeks
A.—Animal Biology.
In this course the furdamental preperties of protoplasm will
be discussed; the principles of the formation of tissues; the for-
mation of organs; an outline of vertebrate structure and func-
tion, as exemplified by Paramoecium and Vorticella, Hydra,
Lumbriecus and the Dog-fish.
Two lectures and one laboratory period each week.
An optional course in Embryology, especially designed for
medical students, is given by the Professor of Zoology, and
is open to the students of the Medical Faculty.
B.—Plant Biology.
The course in Plant Biology will deal chiefly with the gen-
eral properties of cytoplasm; the structure and nature of the
plant cell; movement; nutrition; respiration; fixation of car-
bon; division of labor and origin of 6rgans; evolution of plant
forms. These principles will be illustrated in their more
simple forms by a Myxomycete, Pleurococcus, Spirogyra and
Oedogonium, Fucus, Saccharomyces and Pteris.
Two iectures and one demonstration each week, beginning
on Monday, November 25rd, 1903.
202
Pathology and Bacteriology.
PROFESSOR:—J. G. ADAMI.
LECTURER:—A, G. NICHOLLS.
GapeA. CHARLTON.
FELLOWS:— - H. W. THOMAS.
LEO LOEB.
D. P. ANDERSON.
DEMONSTRATORS IN PATHOLOGY:— J. McCRAR.
τ. Ὁ. MacTAGGART,
DEMONSTRATOR IN BACTERIOLOGY:—H. B. YATES.
DEMONSTRATOR IN NEUROPATHOLOGY:—D. A. SHIRRES.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATOR IN PAaTHOLOGY:—E. A. ARCHIBALD.
ASSISTANT DEMONSTRATOR IN BACTERIOLOGY:—J. A. WILLIAMS.
The teaching, both didactic and practical, in the subjects of
Parhology and Bacteriology, are given by the Professor of
Pathology and his staff.
For the use of this Department an extensive series of lab-
oratories has been set aside and are now in active use on the
top floor of the new wing of the Faculty, and inasmuch as the
old Pathological Laboratory was established and equipped by
the late J. H. R. Molson, these new laboratories retain the
name of the J. H. R. Molson Laboratories.
They consist of a large and admirably lighted class room
for general classes capable of accommodating with ease 70
students at a time, so arranged that each student in the bac-
teriological and pathological courses does the microscopical
work at one table and immediately behind him is his locker
and bench for the preparation of material, preparation of cul-
ture media, etc. In this room at one end there is also a small
demonstration theatre or quarter circle capable of accommo-
dating the whole class at work in the laboratory at one time
and used for demonstration purposes, and at the other end a
service department from which are given out materials. Fur-
ther arrangements are installed for lantern demonstrations for
the whole class. The large laboratory is so arranged that the
students can perform their practical work with the least amount
of moving about the room, the students working in pairs and
having all the necessary apparatus, reagents, etc., immediately
by them.
Laboratory of Pathology and Bacteriology.
tt οἷς τῳ
a. Bi ir
In the Laboratory of Hygiene.
263
The following courses constitute the teaching in these sub-
jects :—
1. A course of General Pathology for the students of the
Third Year; optional for those of the Fourth Year. Lec-
tures are delivered twice weekly throughout the winter and
spring terms.
2. A coursé of Elementary Bacteriology for students of the
First Year—eight lectures with demonstrations being given
during the spring term.
3. A course of lectures upon Bacteriology in Relation to
Disease, for students of the Third Year, given three times
weekly ‘during the autumn term.
4. A course of Demonstrations in the Performance of Autop-
sies to students of the Third Year. The demonstrations are
held weekly from October until Christmas.
5. Demonstrations upon the Autopsies of the week to stu-
dents of the two Final years. These are given during the
Session by Drs. Adami and Nicholls at the Royal Victoria
Hospital, and Drs. MacTaggart, Anderson and McCrae at the
Montreal General Hospital.
Practical Courses.
6. The performance of Autopsies. Each student is required
to take an active part in at least six autopsies. These are con-
ducted at the General and the Royal Victoria Hospitals. In
addition to the actual performance of the sectio cadaveris, the
students are expected to attend practical instruction given with
each autopsy in the method of preparation and microscopical
examination of removed tissues, so as to become proficient in the
methods of preparation, staining and mounting.
7. A practical course in the Bacteriology of Infectious Dis-
eases, for students of the Third Year. This course is held
twice weekly during the autumn term. A deposit is required
in connection with each practical course to cover cost of break-
age and loss, subject to refund of balance at the close of the
session,
8. A practical course in Morbid Histology to students of
the Third Year. This is held twice weekly during the winter
term. Students are instructed in the staining and mounting
of specimens, and as a rule six sections are distributed at ener
POO ONSITE, Ea)! eee age yt eS ae eee
264
meeting of the class so that each student obtains a large repre-
sentative series of morbid tissues, altogether about 120 in num-
ber.
9. A course of demonstrations upon Morbid Anatomy, mu-
seum specimens, once weekly during the autumn and winter
terms to students of the Fourth Year.
In addition to the above the staff of the department gives
instruction to the more advanced students who desire to take
any special work in the laboratories, this more especially dur-
ing the vacations.
For this purpose a special set of rooms has been set apart
for Post-Graduate and Advanced Instruction. Accommoda-
tion has been provided for classes of twelve to fifteen. In con-
neciion with these laboratories for advanced work there is a
departmental reference library, rooms for photography, οἷς.
Optional courses are conducted by the demonstrators of Path-
ology and the demonstrator of Neuro-pathology during the Ses-
sion. Classes in Clinical Pathology and Microscopy are given
at the General and Royal Victoria Hospitals under the direc-
tion of the professors and lecturers in Clinical Medicine.
In connection with this Department, two Research and
Teaching Fellowships have been established, one by the Faculty
of Medicine and one by the Governors.
Hygiene.
STRATHCONA PROFESSOR:—T. A. STARKEY.
Owing to the endowment of the Department of Hygiene by
the Right Honorable Lord Strathcona, a teaching Laboratory
hes been established in connection with the Chair of Hygiene.
The compulsory course in Hygiene consists of three lessons
per week during the winter and spring terms. The course in-
cludes the hygiene of air, soil; water and climate; health re-
sorts, personal hygiene, bathing: exercise, clothing, hygiene of
special life periods; food and diet;food supply; food diseases
and adulterations; hygiene of dwellings; heating, hghting and
ventilation; sanitary fittings; municipal sanitation; water sup-
vly; sewage; drainage; refuse disposal; burial of the dead;
hy giene of occupation; offnsive trades; hygiene of hospitals,
prisons, ete.; preventive medicine ; methods of dealing with in-
tectious diseases and epidemics ; communicable diseases of ani-
mals; organization of health boards; sanitary law and admin-
265
istration in relation to the medical practitioner; vital statistics
in relation to the healthfulness of communities.
The museum, model room, and laboratory are equipped with
working models and apparatus illustrative of application of
hygienic principles.
An optional practical course will be open to students wish-
ing to undertake more advanced work.
Special courses of instruction are given to graduates wish-
ing to qualify themselves in sanitary work, or to obtain the
diploma in Public Health. “See ‘Post-Graduate Practical
Courses.”
The Laboratory has been equipped with the apparatus
needed in giving practical illustration in Hygiene either as
demonstrations to large classes of students, or as practical
work for smaller groups.
The arrangement 15. as follows :—
The Hygiene Department occupies the entire north end of
the building on the mezzanine floor, having the floor space cor-
responding with that of the Department of Histology. The
main laboratory is 60 x 50 feets and it is well equipped with
apparatus for demonstrations and practical work in Hygiene.
Adjoining it is a balance room and private laboratory, 13 x 15
feet. Opening off the main laboratory is the model room,
about 45 x 30 feet, part of which can also, be used as additional
laboratory space for the carrying out of special experiments
and researches, which it would be inconvenient to carry on in
the main laboratory. The corridor, 40 x 15 feet, leading to
the main laboratory, has been fitted up with cases for the
smaller museum specimens and models, lantern slides, ete.
Laryngology and Rhinology.
PROFESSOR:—H. S. BIRKETT.
DEMONSTRATOR:—H. D. HAMILTON.
This course will consist of practical lessons in the use of
the Laryngoscope and Rhinoscope. The instruction will be
carried cn with small classes, so that individual attention may
be insured. A limited number of clinical lectures bearing
upon interesting cases atending the clinic will be delivered
during the session. These lectures will be, however, of an
eminently practical nature.
ΡΥ MT ts Nara) ll
ἀκ κουνῶ ἫΝ δος ων rote ae ΝΣ ἰδ νον Aa ) ἸΡῚ
200
Mental Oiseases.
PROFESSOR:—T. J. W. BURGESS.
This course will comprise a series of lectures at the Uni-
versity on Insanity in its various forms, from a medical as
well as from a medico-legal standpoint. The various types of
mental diseases will be illustrated by cases in the Verdun Hos-
pital, where clinical instruction will be given to visiting groups
of Senior students at intervals throughout the session.
Diseases of Infants and Children.
A. D. BLACKADER.
Bifelgeh seis a ἡ J. C. CAMERON.
Although this subject does not constitute a special chair in
the University, systematic instruction is given (a) in connec-
tion with the chair of Obstetrics and Diseases of Infants, by
Prof. Cameron; (Ὁ) by a course of lectures, clinical and didae-
tic, by Prof. Blackader; and (6) through the Children’s Clinic
at the Montreal General Hospital, at the Infants’ Home, and
at the Montreal Foundling and Baby Hospital.
Clinical Microscopy.
This course, which is given during the Spring Term of the
Third Year, is essentially a practical one and is in charge of
Professor C. F. Martin, assisted by Drs. W. F. Hamilton, G. G.
Campbell, Ridley MacKenzie, C. F. Wylde and F. B. Jones.
It is a Isboratory course forming part of the Third Year in-
struction in medicine and is held in the Pathological Labora-
tory of the Medical Building. The classes are held twice
weekly, each demonstration lasting two hours.
Students are given instruction in the microscopic appear-
ances of normal and abnormal sediments in the urine, me-'
thods of examination of the blood in the fresh and dried state
of preparation; minute appearances of the sputum, stomach
contents and fwces, as well as of the various animal parasites
of the alimentary tract.
In addition to this the student is given an opportunity of
examining the various bacteria of importance/in clinical med-
icine and surgery. :
Various specimens of special interest which are found in
the hospitals from time to time, are examined as occasion
arises at the demonstrations.
201
ἊΣ
DOUBLE COURSES.
B.A. and M.D.
By special arrangement with the Faculty of Arts , it is now
possible for students to obtain the double degree of B.A., and
M.D., C.M., and also B.Se. and M.D., after only six years of
study.
Course Leading to B.A. and M.D.
It has been decided to allow the Primary subjects (Anat-
omy, Physiology and Chemistry) in medicine to count as
subjects of the Third and Fourth Years in Arts. . It fol-
lows then that at the end of four years’ study a student may
oltain his B.A. degree and have two years of his medical
course completed.
The remaining two years of study are devoted to the Third
and Fourth Year subjects in Medicine,
The special provisions for Medical Students in the Arts
course are as follows:—
During the first two years in the Faculty of Arts students
taking the double course will complete their studies in Biol-
ogy, Physics and Elementary Chemistry.
I.—In the Third Year:—
(a) Anatomy and Practical Anatomy, Histology and
Physiology, of First Year Medicine.
(b) Two of the courses which are not placed under the
heading “Science” in the Arts curriculum. The
time tables of the two Faculties allow the following
to be chosen :—
(1) French or Moral Philosophy or Economics.
(2) Political Science.
(c) Either one or two hours weekly in English Com-
position.*
II.—In the Fourth Year:—
(a) Anatomy and Practical Anatomy, Histology,
Physiology, Chemistry, of Second Year Medicine.
(6) One hour week'y in English Composition, if only
one has been taken in the Third Year.
*,Nors.—Students are recommended to distribute their English composition over
twolyears, @ =e
το κι Ud ee SIN i Meat τον το VR pn is) ine
- 4 shetty a, "
268
B. Sc. (Arts) and M.D.
The Faculties of Arts and Medicine have organized a course
of six years’ study leading to the double degrees of Bachelor
of Science (Arts) and Doctor of Medicine.
The requirements of this course are as follows :—
Matriculation—The student who proceeds to the Double
Course must pass a matriculation examination consisting of
English, History, Mathematics (Part (1), French, German,
and Latin.
first Year. ae es the First Year the course will include
English, French, German, Mathematics and Physics, of the
first year of the B.A. Course.
Second Year.—During this year English of the second
year B.A. Course, lbrench, German, Chemistry and Elemen-
tary Biology. The course in Chemistry consists of three lec-
tures per week and two laboratory periods of three hours.
The Biology will consist up to Christmas of the Zoology of the
Second Year in the Faculty of Arts, which is the same as that
required of First Year students in Medicine with the mor-
phology of the frog in addition. After Christmas (spring term
Arts), the student may proceed either to a continued course
in Animal Biology comprising the osteology of the rabbit and
the histology of its tissues, or he may proceed with the Botany
of the Second Year in the Faculty of Arts. This course in
Botany is dpa ese) io the more Spe work of the
Third Year, and will be represented by a number of types,
including the flowering plants and the determination of spe-
cies. Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week
during spring term.
In the event of a student selecting Animal Biology after
Chrisimas, he must have taken before Christmas the course.
in Biology as laid down for medical students, 1.6., both Zoo-
logy and Botany. If the student select Botany after Christ-
mas, he must have taken Zoology of the second year in the
B.Sc. Course, 1.6., the anatomy of the frog, in addition to that
required of medical students.
Third Year.—The student will enter in the Third Year of
_ his course upon the study of medical subjects proper, having
a good theoretical and practical knowledge of Tnorganic
Givcence stry, and will have had a more thorough training in
Biology than at present can be given the regular aden in
medicine. The time, therefore, during this year, which in
the regular medical curriculum is devoted to Chemistry, Prac-
tical Chemistry and Biology, will be available for Science sub-
jects of the B.Sc. Course; and a student will have the option
of four different branches of science, which shall in each case
consist of a full regular course, together with one-half an
honor course, the honor course to be given between Septem-
ber and Christmas.
(I) Zoorocy.—Two lectures during the week, and two lab-
oratory periods of about two hours. This course takes up the
study of parasitic forms, of comparative osteology and embry-
ology. In addition to this is a half Honor Course, which will
consist of a critical study of some such work as Verworn’s
General Physiology, or Spencer’s General Biology.
(11) Prystcs.—Two lectures and one period of three hours
laboratory work per week. The student may proceed either
with Heat and Light, as in the third year Physics Course in
Arts, or with Electricity and Magnetism constituting the
fourth year Physics in Aris; or he may take a portion of each
of these courses, and in addition would do advanced work con- ,
stituting a half honor course from September to Christmas.
(III) Curmistry.—Two lectures per week and two labora-
tory periods—the time before Christmas to be devoted to
Physical Chemisiry, and during the second term to Organic
Chemistry, including organic preparations, with advanced work
constituting a Half Honor course from September to Christ-
mas.
(IV) Borany.—This course is designed to give a compre-
hensive knowledge of plant structure and relationships. The
principles of devlopment will be illustrated by type studies,
which may also serve as the basis for more special work in
Bacteriology, Physiology, Ecology or Paleobotany. It com-
prises:—(a) Microscopy, including determination of ampli-
fications, micrometry, drawings, section cutting and prepara-
tion of microscopic objects. This work presupposes famil-
iarity with the optics of the microscope as given in Physics
“3” of the second year Arts; (b) critical studies of the Thal-
lophyta and Pteridophyta, as illustrated by selected types.
Two lectures and two laboratory periods each week through-
out the session.
270
Students will also be required to take one-half of the honor
work of the Fourth Year Arts in experimental plant Physi-
ology,.as based upon the following works :—
Pfeffer, Plant Physiology; MacDougall, Experimental Plant
Physiology; Darwin and Acton, Practical Physiology of
Plants. One lecture and four laboratory hours per week during
autumn term.
It will be permitted also if a student so desires it, to substitute
a half honour course in Chemistry, Physics, or Geology, for the
half honour course in Botany.
In the fourth year of this six years’ course, Wednesday after-
noon and Saturday morning of each week will be available for
laboratory work in connection with still more specialized study
in the subject which has been selected during the third year;
or a student may proceed with a branch of science other than
the one selected for his third year work, provided he is sufficiently
well grounded to enable him to do the special work which may
be assigned to him.
Thus the first two years of the six years’ course are dcroted
entirely to the Faculty of Arts, the student taking the option of
Biology instead of Mathematics for the second year.
In the Third and Fourth Years work will be given partially
in the Faculty of Arts and partially in the Faculty of Medicine.
In the Third Year the studies in the two Faculties will be
nearly equal; in the Fourth Year they will be almost entirely
in the Medical Faculty.
The Fifth and Sixth Years will be occupied by the regular
curriculum of the Third and Fourth Years in Medicine.
To secure privileges connected with either of the double
courses described above, certificates of registration in the Medical
Faculty must be presented at the beginning of each year to the
Dean of the Faculty of Arts; and at the end of each session in
the first two years certificates of attendance on lectures and of
passing the corresponding examinations must also be presented.
At the end of the Third and Fourth Years certificates must be
presented to show that the full curriculum of the Medical Fa-
culty for the year has been completed.
A certificate of Licentiate in Arts will be given along with
the professional degree in Medicine to those who, previous to
entrance upon their professional studies proper, have completed
δ Ὁ
211
two years in the Faculty of Arts, and have duly passed the pre-
scribed examinations therein.
The Faculty of Medicine strongly recommends students to take
an Arts course before beginning Medicine whenever possible,
dey oting special attention to Chemistry, Biology, Physics, and
German. Should a student have but one year at his disposal he
is advised to take Chemistry, Biology and Physics of the Faculty
of Arts as a preliminary training for Medicine.
Vie
GRADUATE AND ADVANCED COURSES.
The Faculty of Medicine in 1896 established post-graduate
and special courses in connection with the Montreal General and
Royal Victoria Hospitals and the various laboratories in the
University buildings. These courses will be continued in 1903-
1904.
There will be two distinct sets of courses, one a short practical
and clinical course for medical men in general practice who
desire to keep in touch with recent advances in Medicine, Sur-
gery and Pathology, and who wish special clinical experience in
Gynecology, Ophthalmology, Laryngology, ete. This course
will last four weeks, beginning on the first of June.
A special detailed programme will be prepared, and will be
sent on application in February next. The fee, including hos-
pital fees for both hospitals, is forty dollars.
The other courses will be for those who have just completed
their regular course in Medicine, and desire special Laboratory
or Clinical teaching before beginning practice.
Arrangements have also been made to accommodate a limited
number of such graduates who desire advanced and research
work.
Commodious laboratories for advanced work have been
equipped in connection with the Pathological and Clinical de-
partments of both the Royal Victoria and Montreal General
Hospitals, and in connection with the general laboratories for
Pathology, Pharmacology, Physiology and Chemistry, recently
altered and extended, in the new buildings of the Faculty.
Recent graduates of recognized universities desiring to qual-
ify for examinations by advanced laboratory courses, or who
wish to engage in special research, may enter at any time by
ἢ
a δαί
giving notice, stating the courses desired and the time at
their disposal.
All the regular clinics and demonstrations of both hospitals
will be open to such students on the same conditions as under-
graduates in medicine of this University.
These laboratories have been open for graduates since May Ist,
1896. ᾿
Further details regarding courses, fees, etc., may be obtained
on application to the Registrar. |
The Graduate Course of 1903.
The eighth regular course of instruction for General
Practitioners will be conducted as before by the Faculty of
Medicine of McGill University.
The course for 1903 begins Monday, June Ist, and will be
continued for four weeks, closing June 27th. Time-Tables are
issued each week, giving the place and hour for clinics,.
demonstrations and laboratory work.
The course is essentially a practical one, and every facility
will be afforded for the study of the abundant clinical material
in the outdoor and indoor departments of the Montreal
General and Royal Victoria Hospitals. There are no under-
graduate students atiending the practice of the Hospitals
during the month of June, so that members of the post
graduate class will have the whole of this clinical field to
themselves,
The two hospitals have accommodation for four hundred
indoor patients, and the aggregate number of consultations in
the outdoor departments is approximately five thousand per
month.
While a full course of clinical and laboratory instruction
has been arranged, members of the post graduate class should
not feel it incumbent upon them to attend all of these courses
unless they so desire; the somewhat full programme having
been designed to afford room for selection. The experience
of the Faeulty in the past has been that some members of the
post graduate class wish to give the whole of their time to
Medicine, others to Surgery, while a few are particularly
interested in the Specialties and in Clinical and General
Laboratory work. It is with the view of meeting these various
218
demands that the Faculty this year has decided to make the
subjects on the programme largely optional. ἢ
(a.)—Laboratory Instruction.—Systematic Laboratory instruc-
tion is given from 9 to 10.30 every morning, on Microscopical
Methods, Clinical Microscopy, Clinical Chemistry and
Urinalysis, Analysis of Stomach Contents .and Clinical
Bacteriology; including the diagnosis of Diphtheria, Tuber-
culosis, ete., the Histology of the blood in disease, and Serum
Diagnosis. These courses are conducted under the direction
of Professors Ruttan and Adami. A course of’ Operative
Surgery on the cadaver is given from 8 to 9 a.m. by Dr.
Kenneth Cameron, during the second and third weeks of the
course.
(b.)—Special Demonstrations.—These demonstrations “are
given daily from 10.30 to mid-day, and will consist of one or
more of the following:—Operative Gynecology, Prof. Gardner;
Operative Midwifery, Professor Cameron; Sanitary Topics,
Protessor Starkey; Clinical use of the Roentgen Rays, Pro-
fessor Girdwood; Demonstrations on post mortem specimens,
Professor Adami and Dr. McCrae; Treatment of Deformities,
Dr. Tait McKenzie; and Medical Examination for Life
Insurance, Prof. Wilkins.
(c.)—Medical and Surgical Clinics —For four days each week
during the first two hours of the afternoon, there are theatre
clinics or classes-on groups of cases in the wards of the
Montreal General and Royal Victoria Hospitals. Those in
Medicine at the Montreal General Hospital are given by Pro-
fessors Blackader and Lafleur; in Surgery, by Prof. Armstrong
and Dr. Hutchison: at the Royal Victoria Hospital in
Medicine, by Prof. Stewart and Dr. Hamilton; in Surgery, by
Prof. Bell and Drs. Archibald and Keenan.
(d.)—Clinics in Special Departments of Medicine and Surgery.—
One or more of these clinics are given in the Hos-
pitals each afternoon after the regular medical or surgical
chnic. In Opthalmology, including demonstrations in the
use of the Opthalmoscope, Prof. Buller and Drs. Gardner,
Stirling and Byers; Dermatology, Dr. G. G. Campbell; Genito-
Urinary Surgery, Prof. Bell and Dr. Springle; Orthopedics,
Dr. Gilday ; Larnygology, Prof. Birkett and Dr. H. D. Hamilton;
Gynecology, Prof. Gardner and Drs. Lockhart and Chipman;
PN es "a ah, ae “ΚΤ ἐδ
5 it og Hoe
: be
᾿
214
Obstetrics, Prof. J. C. Cameron and Dr. Evans; Diseases of
Children, Prof. Blackader and Dr. G. G. Campbell.
The fee for the course including Hospital fees is $40.00.
Diploma Course in Public Health.
The Faculty of Medicine in the session 1899-1900 instituted
a gradate course in Public Health and Sanitary Science. This
course will be given each year and the diplomas conferred at
the annual convocation.
Candidates undertaking this course must have possessed a
degree in Medicine or other qualification of practice for at
least twelve months before he is competent to receive the di-
ploma. The following are the courses requisite :—
1. Course of lectures in Public Health (to be omitted in
the case of candidates who have attended such a course before
graduation).
2. A three months’ course in Bacteriology, special attention
teing directed to the pathogenic organisms and parasites—such
course to be omitted on presentation of proof that it has pre-
viously been taken.
3. A six months’ course of practical study of outdoor sani-
tary work under a medical officer of health (to be omitted in
the case of medical health officers holding appointments prior
to the establishment of this diploma course).
<. Three months’ attendance and clinical instruction at a
hospital for infectious diseases (unless such course has already
been taken prior to graduation).
5. Three months’ instruction in sanitary Chemistry and
Physics, with practical work in a chemical laboratory.
Examination for Diploma shall cover the following subjects :—
1. Examination of clinical cases at an infectious hospital.
x. The drawing up of outlines for annual and other reports
ot officers of health.
3. Report upon the sanitary condition of some actual lo-
cality.
4. The chemical analysis of liquids and gases and of speci-
mens of food.
5. Demonstration of the consideration and use of meteor-
clogical hygienic and sanitary apparatus.
€. Microscopical examination of specimens submitted.
.Y Description of specimens of human and other diseased
tissues.
hy Re ee
275
8. Practical examination in the employment of the usual
bacteriological methods.
9. The inspection of carcasses of animals to be used for
food.
The above examination shall be written and oral and prac-
tical, and shall extend over a period of four days.
The following is a list of subjects included in the curricu-
luin of study :—
(a) Sanitary Chemistry:—Examination of air, gases, water,
the action of water on metals; milk, food and beverages;
detection of poisons in articles of dress and of decoration;
ihe chemistry of sewage.
(b) Sanitary Physics:—Principles of statics, pneumatics,
hydraulics, light, light and photometry, heat and thermometry,
the principles of hygrometry, (only in their application to hy-
giene).
(c) Sanitary Legislation:—Statutes and by-laws relating to
public health; the powers of public sanitary authorities.
(d) Bacteriology and Parasitology:—Modes of propagation
of disease and transmission of disease between man and man,
and man and animals; bacteriological analysis in relation to
public health matters; natural history of microbes and animai
parasites.
(e) Vital Statistics:—Caleulation and tabulation of returns
of births, marriages, deaths and diseases.
(f) Meteorology and Climatology:—Including the geograph-
ical and topographical distribution of disease.
(g) Preventive Medicine and Practical Sanitation.
The fee for the Diploma shall be $20.
VII.
Qualification for the Degree.*
1st. No one entering after September, 1894, will be admitted
to the Degree of Doctor of Medicine and Master of Surgery who
shall not have attended Lectures for a period of four nine
months’ sessions in this University, or some other University,
College or School of Medicine, approved of by this University.
* It shall be understood that the programme and regulations regarding courses of
study and examinations contained in this calendar hold good for this calendar year
only, and that the Faculty of Medicine, while fully sensible of its obligations towards
the students, does not hold itself bound to adhere absolutely, for the whole four years
of a students’ course, to the conditions here laid down,
2nd. Students of other Universities so approved and admitted
on production of certificate to a like standing in this University
shall be required to pass all Examinations in Primary and
Final Subjects in the same manner as students of this Uni-
versity.
3rd. Graduates in Arts who have taken two full courses in-
General Chemistry, including Laboratory work, two courses in
Biology, including the subjects of Botany, Embryology, Ele-
mentary Physiology and dissection of one or more types of
Vetebrata, may, at the discretion of the Faculty, be admitted
as second-year students, such courses being accepted as equiv-
alent to the first year in Medicine. Students so entering will,
however, not be allowed to present themselves for examination
in Anatomy until they produce certificates of dissection for two
sessions.
4th. Candidates for Final Examination shall furnish Testi-
monials of attendance on the following branches of Medical
Education. { } viz.:
΄
Anatomy.
Practical Anatomy,
Physiology.
Chemistry,
Pharmacology and Therapeutics.
Principles and Practice of Surgery,
Obstetrics and Diseases of Infants.
Gynzecology.
Theory and Practice of Medicine,
Clinical Medicine.
Clinical Surgery,
Of which Two
. full Courses
will be re-
quired,
Medical Jurisprudence.
General Pathology.
Hygiene and Public Health,
Practical Chemistry.
Ophthalmology and Otology,
ae
|
Of which One
full Course
will be re-
quired.
Histology.
Pathological Anatomy. Of which One
Bacteriology. Course will
rm nok ae be required.t
eal ᾿
Medical and Surgical Anatomy.
{ Provided, however, that Testimonials equivalent to, though not precisely the same
as those above stated, may be presented and accepted.
ἡ Students enregistered i in the Province of Quebee are required to attend and pass ex-
aminations in Laryngology and Minor Surgery.
He must also produce Certificates of having assisted at six
Autopsies, of having dispensed Medicine for a period of three
months, and of having assisted at tw enty Vaccinations.
5th. Courses of less | length than the above will only be received
for the time over which they have extended.
6th. No one will be permitted to become a candidate for the
degree who shall not have attended at least one full Session at
this University.
7th. The candidates must give proof of having attended during
at least twenty-four months the practice of the Montreal Gen-
eral Hospital or the Royal Victoria Hospital or of some other
hospital of not fewer than 100 beds, approved by this University.
Undergraduates are required to attend only the practice of the
Out-Patient departments of the Hospitals during their second
year.
8th. He must give proof of having acted as Clinical Clerk for
six months in Medicine and six months in Surgery in the wards
of a general hospital recognized by the Faculty, of having re-
ported at least 10 medical and 10 surgical cases.
9th. He must also give proof by ticket of having attended
for at least nine months the practice of the Montreal Maternity
or other lying-in-hospital approved of by the University, and of
having acted as assistant at least six cases.
10th. Every candidate for the degree must, on or before the
15th day of May, present to the Registrar of the Medical Faculty
testimonials of his qualifications, entitling him to an examina-
tion, and must at the same time deliver to the Registrar of the
Faculty an affirmation of affidavit that he has attained the age
of twenty-one years.
11. The trials to be undergone by the candidate shall be in the
subjects mentioned in Section 4.
12. The following oath of affirmation will be exacted from
the candidate before receiving his degree:
Sponsio Academica.
In Facultate Medicine Universitatis.
Ego, A B , Doctoratus in Arte Medica titulo jam donan-
dus, sancto coram Deo cordium scrutatore, spondeo:—me in omnibus
grati animi officiis erga hance Universitatem ad extremum vite hali-
tum perserveraturum; tum poro artem medicam caute, caste, et
probe exercitaturum; et quoad in me est, omnia ad egrotorum
corporum salutem corducentia cum fide procuraturum; que denique
inter medendum, visa vel audita silere conveniat. non sine gravi
causa vulgaturum. Ita praesens mihi spondenti adsit Numen.
278
13th. The fee for the Degree of Doctor of Medicine and
Master of Surgery shall be thirty dollars, to be paid by the suc-
cessful candidate to the University Bursar immediately after
examination.
VI.
Examinations.
Frequent oral examinations are held to test the progress of the
student, and occasional written examinations are given through-
out the Session.
The Pass and Honor examinations at the close of each
Session are arranged as follows :—
FIRST YBAR.
Examinations in Biology, Histology, Physiology, Anatomy,
Chemistry, Practical Chemistry and Elementary Bacteriology.
Students who have taken one or more university courses in
Biology or Chemistry before entering may be exempted from
attendance and examination. Students exempted in these First
Year subjects are allowed only a pass standing, but may present
themselves for examination if they desire to attain an honour
standing. Students exempted from First Year Chemistry must
take Second Year Chemistry in their First Year.
SECOND YEAR.
Examinations in Anatomy, Chemistry, Practical Chemistry,
Physiology, Practical Physiology, Pharmacology and Histology.
THIRD YEAR.
Examinations in Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Medical
Jurisprudence, Public Health and Preventive: Medicine (in_
cluding Bacteriology), General Pathology, Mental Diseases,
Clinical Chemistry, Clinical Microscopy, Obstetrics, Medicine
and Surgery.
FouURTH YEAR.
Examinations in Medicine, Surgery, Obstetrics, Gynzecology,
Ophthalmology, Clinical Medicine, Clinical Surgery, Clinical Ob-
stetrics, Clinical Gynzecology, Clinical Ophthalmology and
Practical Pathology.
By means of the above arrangement a certain definite
amount of work must be accomplished by the student in each
oe
a οὐδ α
nt a = να." . ΓΝ
ὶ
-
-
1
219
yeer, and an equitable division is made between the Primary
and Final branches.
A minimum of 50 per cent. in each subject is required to pass
and 75 per cent. for honors.
Candidates must pass in all the subjects of each year; those
vho fail to pass in not more than two subjects of either the
lizsi, Second or Third Years, may be granted a supplemental
examination at the beginning of the following session.
Supplemental examinations will not be granted, except by
special permision of the Medical Faculty, and on written ap-
plication stating reasons, and accompanied by a fee of $5.00
for cach subject.
No candidate will be permitted, without special permission
of the Faculty, to proceed with the work of the Final Year
until he has passed all the subjects comprised in the Primary
examination.
No student will be allowed to present himself for his Final
examinations who has not certificates of having passed all his
Primary examinations in this University.
Candidates who fail to pass in a subject of which practical
courses are required may, at the discretion of the Faculty, be
required to repeat the course, and furnish a certificate of at-
tendance thereon. A course in Practical Anatomy will %e
accepted as equivalent to a third course of lectures in Gen-
eral and Descriptive Anatomy.
IX.
Fellowships, Medals and Prizes.
i. Friuowsurrs.—The Faculty has begun to establish
Teaching and [esearch Fellowships in connection with the
various laboratories.
These fellowships are of a value of five hundred dollars per
annum, are open only to graduates in Medicine, and are ten-
able for three years.
Two are now established in connection with the depart-
ment of Pathology—a Governor’s Fellowship endowed by one
or two of the Governors of the University, and a Faculty
Fellowship established by the Faculty. Other Fellowships will
be announced as they are established.
2. Mepats.—The ‘* Holmes Gold Medal,’’ founded by the
Medical Faculty in the year 1865, as 2 memorial of the late
280
Andrew Holmes, Esq., M. D.,-.L.D., late Dean of the Faculty
of Medicine. Jt is awarded to the student of the graduating
class who receives the highest aggregate number of marks
in the different branches comprised in the Medical Curricu-
hun.
The student who gains the Holmes’ Medal has. the option
ot exchangirg it for a Bronze Medal, and the money equiva-
lent of the Gold Medal.
“The Sutherland Gold Medal,’ founded in 1878 by the
late Mrs. Sutherland in memory of her jate husband, Wil-
liam Sutherland, M.D., formerly Professor of Chemistry in
this Faculty. It is awarded for the best examination in Gen-
eral and Medical Chemistry, together with creditable exam-
ination in the Primary branches. The examination. is heid
at the end of the Third Year.
3. PrizEs.—The Final Prize. —A Prize in books (or a Mi-
crescope of equivalent value) awarded for the best examina-
tion, written and oral, in the Final branches. The Holmes’
medalist is not permitted to compete for this prize.
The Third Year Prize.—A Prize in books awarded for
the best examination, written and oral, in the branches of the
Third Year.
The Second Year Prize —A Prize in books for the best ex-
amination in all the branches of the Second Year in course.
The First Year Prize—A Prize in books for the best ex-
amination in all the branches of the First Year in course.
The ‘' Clemesha Prizein Clinical Therapeutics,’’ founded in
188 by John W. Clemesha, M.D., of Port Hope, Ont. It is
awarded to the student making the highest marks in a special
clinical examination.
X
Fees.
See page 31.
XI.
Text Books.
ANATOMY.—Gray, Morris, Quain (Eng. Ed.) Gervish and Cunningham.
PRACTICAL ANATOMY.—Cunningham’s Practical Anatomy, Ellis
Demonstrations, Holden’s Dissector and Landmarks
PuHrysics.—Carhart and Chute; Medical Physics, Daniel; Ref. Medical
Electricity, Turner.
281
“NORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—Holleman, Richter 5th ed., Remsen.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—Remsen.
D PHARMACOLOGY AND ‘THERAPEUTICS.—Butler, Hare and Wood,
4 Sollmann, Cushing.
Ὦ Puys1oLtocy.—Foster and Shore’s Physiology for Beginners, Mills’
Text-Book of Animal Physiology, Foster’s Physiology, G. N.
{ Stewart’s Physiology, Mills’ Class Laboratory Exercises.
᾿ς. PATHOLOGY.—Zeigler, Coats’, American Text-book of Pathology,
E Stengel.
PRACTICAL PATHOLOGY.—Mallory and Wright, Delafield & Prudden,
y Boyce.
-
BACTERIOLOGY —Muir & Ritchie, Abbott.
HistoLtocy.—Klein’s Elements, Schafer’s Essentials of Histology,
Stohr, Szymonowicz.
SURGERY.—Holmes, Moullin, Walsham, Erichsen, Treves, American
Text-Book of Surgery, Da Costa.
PRACTICE OF MEDICINE.—Osler, Tyson, Wood and Fitz.
CLINICAL MEpICcINE.—Musser’s Medical Diagnosis; Simon, Klemperer,
Rainy and Hutchison, Vierort’s Medical Diagnosis.
J MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE.—Reese, Guy and Ferrier, Mann.
MENTAL DISEASES.—Insanity and its Treatment, Blandford, 4th Ed.
NERVOUS AND MENTAL DISEASES.—Church and Paterson, 2nd ed.
OBSTETRICS.—Jewett, Hirst, American Text-Book and Evans’ Pocket
Text-Bcok.
DISEASES OF CHILDREN.—Holt, Rotch, Smith and Starr.
GYN2ZcoLocy —Hart and Barbour, Garrigues, Webster, Dudley on
- Diseases of Women.
. HYGIENE.—Davies, Wilson; Rohe; Whitelegge, Harrington, Abbott’s
Transmissible Diseases.
Ἶ ΒΙΟΙΟΟΥ, Borany.-—-Gray’s Text-Book of Histology and Physiology;
f Zoouoey, Shipley and MacBrides’ Introduction to Zoology.*
; OPTHALMOLOGY.—De Schweinitz, Nettleship and Swanzy.
- OToLoGy.—Pritchard, Dalby.
LARYNGOLOGY.—Watson Williams, Grumwald’s Atlas of Diseases of
5 Larynx, Gradle.
OPERATIVE SURGERY.—Jacobson, Treves, Kocher.
DERMATOLOGY.—Malcolm Morris, Hyde, Crocker, Stellwagon.
j MepicaL DIcTIONARY.—Gould, Dunglison, Hoblyn.
ἡ
᾿ ele:
|
ἢ Museums.
The Faculty has during recent years devoted special attention
to the development of its museums in the several departments in
which objective teaching is of especial value in the education of
the student.
There are now four museums in the Medical Building: (1)
the Museum of Pathology, (2) the Anatomical Museum, (3) the
Museum of Public Health and Preventive Medicine, (4) the
ἱ Museum of Pharmacy.
* Fach mindent will be required to pay $2.50 in arder tocover the cost of a class book,
dissecting instruments and other neeessaries which are supplied tohim aid become his
property.
cd aaa
989
Each collection is arranged and selected with the primary
object of making it a teaching museum. ‘The several collections
are open to students and the public between 9 a.m. and 5 p.m.
Pathological Museum.
PrRoF. J. G. ADAMI, DIRECTOR.
MAUDE E. ABBOTT, B.A., M.D., ASSISTANT CURATOR.
M. JULES BAILLY, OSTEOLOGIST AND ARTICULATOR.
For the past fiftv vears the rich Pathological Material fur-
nished by the Montreal General Hospital has been collected
here. The Faculty is also greatly indebted to many medical
men throughout Canada and different parts of the world for
important contributions to the Museum.
During the past few years, numerous and extremely important
additions have been made to the Medical Museum.
It is particularly rich in specimens of Aneurisms. In addition
to containing a large number of the more common varieties of
these formations, there are specimens of such rare conditions
as Aneurism of the hepatic and superior mesenteric arteries,
traumatic aneurism of the vertebral together with several of
the cerebral and pulmonary arteries. The most important col-
lection probably in existence of hearts affected with “ Malignant
Endocarditis” is also found. The Faculty are indebted to
Prof. Osler, late of this University, for this collection.
The Museum contains also a very large collection of different
forms of caleuli. The Faculty are mainly indebted to Prof.
Fenwick for this collection.
During the past ten years, M. Bailly, osteologist and articu-
lator (lately with Tramond of Paris), has been engaged in
arranging and mounting the very large number of specimens of
disease and injuries of bones which have been accumulating for
years. In this collection are to be found examples of fractures
and dislocations of the spine, osteoporosis, congenital dislocation
of the hip, fracture of the astragalus, multiple exostoses, etc.,
Lc.
The Pathological Museum has recently undergone complete
alteration. All the old fixtures have been removed, a new gal-
lery has been erected about both rooms, reached by a single
staircase in a small intermediate room in which is placed the
medico-legal collection.
ee Sere
Se ee ee, ee ee ee Poe
283
The first room on entering contains the extensive bone col-
lection and calculi. The second and larger room is reserved for
the moist preparations, which are arranged so as to be of easy
access for the student. Water color drawings made from the
fresh specimens are mounted on swinging frames, and also form
a frieze at the ceiling. These serve to recall the fugitive colors
of those preparations which become more or less altered on
keeping.
Numerous specimens have been contributed from the surgical
and medical wings of the Royal Victoria Hospital, and from
the different departments of the Montreal General Hospital.
Museum of Hygiene.
DIRECTOR, PRor. T. A. STARKEY.
This Museum has been established from the interest accruing
through the endowment of the Chair of Hygiene by Lord Strath-
cona and Mount Royal in 1893.
In order to facilitate study and reference, the specimens in the
Museum have been all classified upon a decimal system under
the following sections :—
1. External Hygienic Conditions.—Air, Soil, Meteorology,
Climate.
2. Personal Hygienic.—Food and Diet, Bathing, Clothing,
Special Life Periods.
3. Analytical Hygiene.—Apparatus, etc., for Sanitary Analy-
sis.
4, Architectural Hygiene-—House Sites, Plans, Materials,
Construction, Ventilation, Heating and Lighting, Sanitary
Fittings.
5. Municipal Hygiene and Sanitary Engineering.—Water
Supply, Sewage, Drainage, Refuse, Disposal, Street Hygiene,
Disposal of the Dead.
6. Collective Hygiene—Hygiene of Occupation, Offensive
Trades, Accident Prevention, Hygiene of Schools, Prisons, Asy-
lums, ete.
7. Infectious Diseases—Pathogenic Bacteria and Fungi, Ani-
mal Parasites, Public Diagnosis and Care of Infectious Diseases,
Quarantine, Disinfection, the Communicable Diseases of Ani-
mals.
7. Sanitary Administration.
9. Vital Statistics.
284
In addition to the regular Museum Exhibit, there is a col-
lection of over 1,000 lantern shdes illustrative of phases of
Hygiene. ‘The slides have been so arranged as to be available
for demonstrations as hand specimens. These slides as well
as all the specimens in the Museum are card catalogued, and a
projecting lantern is available for their demonstration.
The following are some of the principal exhibits:—Set of
Knight’s diagrams and models; working models illustrating
house drainage, closets, ete., sewer air, movements of soil air;
Doulton’s models, of drainage, damp proof construction, absorp-
tion of moisture in building materials, ventilation appliance,
combined heating and ventilation, automatic regulation of heat-
ing and ventilation; building materials; fire proofing; estima-
tion of carbonic acid and moisture in the air; meteorological
observation; water supply, water piping; water filtrations of
public and domestic supplies; pollution of water supplies;
ground water leyel; sewage and refuse disposal; food supply;
food adulteration; examination of milk supplies; disinfection,
disinfectants.
The following donations have been received during the
year :—
Johnson Electric Service Company of Buffalo—Model of
Automatic Heat Regulator.
Ogilvie Brothers, Montreal
of closets, traps, ete.
Frank-Jenner Fire-Proofing Company, New York—Specimens
of Lignolith.
J. W. Hughes, Montreal—Sample of defective plumbing.
Canadian Asbestos Goma et of covering for steam
pipes.
Apparatus for testing efficiency
Anatomical Museum.
DIRECTOR, PROFESSOR F. J. SHEPHERD.
M. JuLes BaiuLy, OSTEOLOGIST AND ARTICULATOR.
This Museum occupies a large room on the same floor and
adjoining the Anatomy Lecture Room and Dissecting Room.
Smaller apartments in connection are used for private research,
which is encouraged in every way by the Faculty.
The Museum is well furnished and comfortable, and students
have every opportunity of studying Human, Comparative and
Applied Anatomy.
og
Σ
og
4
>
285
This department has during the past few years added a very
complete collection of plaster and papier maché models by
Steger, after the well-known works of His and Braune, com-
prising :
“ (a) A complete set of Steger’s brain sections.
(b) Models of the cerebro-spinal and sympathetic nervous
systems.
(c) Professor Cunningham’s well-known and beautiful casts
of the head showing the relation of the cerebral convolutions to
the skull and its sutures.
A large collection of human brains, made by Professor Osler,
formerly of this University, exhibiting the various types and
extremes.
A large and rare collection of anomalies of the renal vessels
and ureter, and the aorta and its branches.
In Comparative Anatomy the student will find a fair amount
of material, the study of which will greatly aid him in the
elucidation of many points in Human Anatomy.
Some beautiful dissections of the semicircular canals of the
ears of fishes and also specimens showing the nervous system of
fishes. Made and presented to the Museum by Dr. Cresswell
Shearer.
Many skeletons mounted by Mons. Jules Bailly, Articulator
to the University, representing the various classes, orders, gen-
era and species of the animal kingdom may be consulted.
A large collection, showing the pectoral girdle in birds, has
been prepared under the supervision of the Professor of Ana-
tomy.
Moist and dry preparations of dissections, a large collection
of frozen cross sections of the human body, showing the normal
relations of the viscera, etc., will be found convenient for study.
XII.
Library.
LIBRARIAN:—PROF. F. G. FINLEY.
ASSISTANT LIBRARIAN:—MIss M. R. CHARLTON.
The Library of the Medical Faculty now comprises upwards
of twenty-three thousand volumes, the largest special library
connected with a medical school on this continent.
᾿ς eS “ἀν Me ee ow. a
286
The valuable libraries of the late Professors Robert Palmer
Howard, George Ross, Richard L. MacDonnell, T. Johnston
Alloway and of Dr. Allen Ruttan have been donated to the
Medical Faculty.
The standard text-books and works of reference, together with
complete files of the leading periodicals, are on the shelves.
Students may consult any work of reference in the library be-
tween 9 a.m. and 6 p.m., and from 7 to 10 p.m. A large library
reading-room for the use of students is provided.
Extracts from the Library Regulations.
I. During the College Session the Library is open daily (ex-
cept Sundays and general public holidays) from 9 a.m. till
6 p.m., and from 7 to 10 every evening. During vacation from
9a, Τῆς to 5-p.m.
II. The stack room is not open to students or to the public.
III. The books in the Library are classed in two divisions:
1st, those which may be taken from the Library; 2nd, those
which may not, under any circumstances, be removed from the
Library. The latter class includes all catalogues, dictionaries
and encyclopedias.
IV. Students will be allowed to use regular text-books only
in the Library. Any other book may be taken out at 5.30 p.m.
to be returned the next day. If books so removed from the
Library are not returned punctually, a fine will be imposed,
and if the delay be serious the student may be suspended from
use of the Library at the discretion of the Librarian.
V. Students may take out books, subject to the above regula-
tions, to the number of three volumes at one time.
VI. Books may be taken from the Library only after they
have been especially asked for and charged at the delivery desk ;
borrowers who cannot attend personally must sign and date an
order, giving the titles of the books desired and the name of the
person deputed to procure the same.
VII. Damage to or loss of books shall be made good to the
satisfaction of the Librarian and of the Library Committee.
Writing or making any mark upon any book belonging to the
Library is unconditionally forbidden. Any persons found
guilty of wilfully damaging any book in any way shall be ex-
cluded from the Library, and shall be debarred from the use
thereof for such time as the Library Committee may determine.
281
VIII. Silence must be strictly observed in the Library.
IX. Infringement of any of the rules of the Library will
subject the offender to a fine or suspension of his privileges, or
to such other penalty as the nature of the case may require.
The number of volumes presented to the Library from
πῶ πε WO to ον πὸ 190229 so. 1 Meee eS 828
Whosepaddedaby=purchasevs. 2%, (ates. cess ee ---- 150
Total additions to November, 1902. .. .: .. 1,973
Mheranpemdanice or eadeloumuct-c oeatedesr dee cw ee τ 950
June 15th, 1901, has been.. .. . Meany on wereiopar TAO) G0)
The attendance from June 2nd, 1897, ws May 14th,
VOOR Wasa. eae wee bre ταν he ia Pea ee tes GOW
The τρῶσαι peau anes oe ae to June Ist,
RBS nWidSenk-.e= Ὁ sees Se OL oO)
The ΠΣ ron Mine tet, 1895, ft June Ist,
SOG WAS. 5 chris : 4,875
The number as books faker out ΤᾺ home use, ΔῸΣ ike
1901, to Ock sist, O02. τ te 2. Ae Ey Pare ay gla)
The number of journals and Pumphie " ἐ | jeemier τς 951
This does not include the works consulted in the Library.
The Faculty has endeavored to make the Library as complete
as possible for research work. Complete files of almost all the
important periodicals are now on the shelves, including foreign
as well as English and American journals. A large number
of transactions of various societies have recently been acquired,
and also the Berlin and Paris theses.
Arrangements have been made whereby practitioners both in
the city and country can avail themselves of the library, the only
conditions being the payment of express charges and a guarantee
for the safe return of books borrowed.
NL.
McGill Medical Society.
This Society, composed of enregistered students of the
Faculty, meets every alternate Saturday during the Autumn
and Winter Terms, for the reading of papers, case reports and
discussions on medical subjects. A prize competition has been
established in Senior and Junior subjects, the Senior being open
288
to all to write upon, while only the ist, 2nd and 8rd year stu-
dents are allowed to compete in the Junior subjects. The papers
are examined by a board elected from the. Professoriate, and a
first and second prize in each division of subjects is awarded to
the successful candidates.
Names of competitors and titles of papers shall be sent to
the Chairman of the Programme Committee before September
Ist, and all papers shall be subject to the call of the Committee
on October 1st. ΑἸ] papers shall be handed in for examination
on or before January 10th.
The students’ reading room has been placed under the control
of this Society, in which the leading English and American
Medical Journals are on file, as well as the leading daily and
weekly newspapers of the Dominion.
The annual meeting is held the first week of the Spring Term,
when the following officers are elected: Hon. President (elected
from the Faculty), President, Vice-President, Secretary, As-
sistant Secretary, Treasurer, Reporter, Pathologist, and three
Councilmen (of whom two shall be elected from the Faculty).
XV.
Hospitals.
The City of Montreal is celebrated for the number and
importance of its public charities. Among these its public hos-
pitals are the most prominent and widely known. Those in
which medical students of McGill University will receive clinical
instruction are: (1) The Montreal General Hospital. (2) The
Royal Victoria Hospital. (9) Montreal Maternity Hospital.
The Montreal General Hospital has for many years been the
most extensive clinical field in Canada. The old buildings,
having proved inadequate to meet the increased demand for
hospital accommodation, have been increased by the addition
of two surgical pavilions, the Campbell Memorial, and the
Greenshields Memorial, and of a new surgical theatre. The
interior of the older buildings now has been entirely recon-
structed on the most approved modern plans.
The Royal Victoria Hospital at the head of University Street,
which in structure and arrangements ranks among the finest
289
modern hospitals of either continent, was opened for the recep-
tion of patients the first of January, 1894, and affords excep-
tional opportunities for clinical instruction and practical train-
Montreal General Hospital.
This Hospital consists of a Surgical, a Medical and a Patho-
logical Department.
The Surgical Department has two large pavilions, containing
four wards 135 feet long by 35 feet broad. with an intervening
and connecting building in which is a large operating theatre
of the most modern type, capable of seating over 350 students.
In connection with this are preparation, etherising, instru-
ment, steriliising and surgeons’ rooms, also smaller operating
rooms. The surgical pavilions accommodate over one hundred
patients.
The old part of the hospital, consisting of the Reed, Rich-
ardson and Morland wings, has been completely rebuilt and
remodelled, and forms the Medical Department. This part
certains four wards, 100 feet by 40, and is arranged for 159
keds. In this building there are wards for gynaecological
and opthalmological patients, and a number of private wards
and laboratories for Clinical Chemistry. ‘There is also a med-
ical amphitheatre capable of seating 150 students and a gynae-
cological operating room fitted up in the most modern mannet.
The central part of the old building is for administration
purposes.
A ‘completely new and commodious out-door patient de-
partment has been provided on the ground floor of the R'ch-
ardson wing, and there is ample accommodation for the vari-
ous special departments as well as large rooms for general
medical and surgical patients.
The Pathological Department is a completely new building
in which are the post-mortem theatre and rooms for micro-
serpical and bacteriological work, and also a mortuary and
chapel. In this building students are offered every oppor-
tuniiy of perfecting their knowledge of morbid anatomy and
pathological histology.
‘The cld Fever Wards on the grounds of the Hospital have
been completely remodelled, and are now used as a laundry and
litchen.
A much larger number of patients receive treatment in the
Montreal Gencral Hospital than in any other Canadian hos-
10
pital. Last year’s report shows that over three thousand
Medical and Surgical cases were treated in the wards, and the
great proportion of these were acute eases as may be gath-
cred from the fact that the average duration of residence was
only 24.02 days. There are upward of forty thousand con-
suliations annually in the out-door department of this’ Hos-
pital.
The Royal Victoria Hospital.
This Hospital is situated a short distance above the Uni-
versity Grounds on the side of the Mountain, and overlooks
the city. It was founded in July, 1887, by the munificence
of Lord Mount Stephen and Lord Strathcona, who gave one
million dollars for this purpose.
The buildings, which were opened for the reception of pa-
tients on the first of January, 1894, were designed by Mr.
Scxon Snell of London, England, to accommodate between
250 and 300 patients.
The Hospital is composed of three main buildings connected
together by stone bridges; an Administration Block in the
e-utie and a wing on the.east side for medical patients, in
immediate connection with which is the Pathological wing
and mortuary, and a wing on the west side for surgical pa-
tients.
The “dministra‘ion block ccntains ample accommodation
Yor the resident medical staff, the nursing staff and domes-
tics. The. patients’ entrance, the dispensary and admission
rooms are also situated in this building. ‘To the north of the
Administration block has been erected a large out-patients’
department, in which are special departments for Minor Sur-
gery, Opthalmology, Laryngology, and Gynaecology. This
wing was opened for patients during the winter of 1899-1900.
The Medical wing contains three large wards, each 123 feet
long by 26 feet 6 inches wide, one ward 40 feet by 26 feet 6
inches, and 15 private and isolation wards averaging 16 feet
by 12 feet; also a medical theatre with a seating capacity for
250, and three rooms adjacent to it for clinical chemistry,
and other purposes. North of this wing and in direct con-
nection with it are the Pathological laboratories and mortuary.
In this wing are situated the mortuary proper, the chapel,
a post mortem room capable of accommodating 200 students,
end laboratories for the microscopie and bacteriological study
a a σα
a “- ΄.
291
of morbid tissues, some designed for the use of students and
others for post graduation courses and special research.” Spe-
cial laboratories for Pathological Chemistry, Experimental
Pathology, Bacteriology .and Photography are also provided.
The Surgical wing contains three large wards, each 123 feet
long by 26 feet 6 inches wide, four wards each 40 feet by 32
feet, and seven private and isolation wards, averaging 16 feet
by 12 feet; also a surgical theatre with a seating capacity for
250, with six roonis adjacent for preparation of patients.
In this wing are also the wards for Gynaecology and Oph-
thalmology. There is also an Isolation Pavilion for infectious
diseases.
XVI.
CLINICAL INSTRUCTION.
During the Session of 1903-1904, three Medical, three Sur-
gical, two Gynaecological and two Opthalmological clinics will
be held weekly in both the Montreal General and Royal Vic-
toria Hospitals.
In addition, tutorial instruction will be given in these dif-
ferent departments in the ward, out-patient rooms and labor-
atories. Special weekly clinics will be given in the Montreal
General Hospital on Dermatology and Laryngology and in the
Royal Victoria Hospital on diseases of the Genito-Urinary sys-
tem, Laryngology and Neurology.
CLinicaL Cuirerks in the medical and surgical wards of both
Hospitals are appointed every three months, and each one during
his term of service conducts, under the immediate directions of
the Clinical Professors, the reporting of all cases in the ward
allotted to him. Students entering on and after October, 1893,
are required to show a certificate of having acted for six months
as clinical clerk in medicine and six months in surgery, and are
required to have reported at least ten cases in medicine and ten
in surgery. ‘The instruction obtained as clinical clerk is found
to be of the greatest possible advantage to students, as affording
a true practical training for his future professional life.
Dressers are also appointed to the Out-door Departments.
For these appointments, application is to be made to the Assis-
tant Surgeons, or to the resident surgeon in charge of the out-
patient department.
msl
‘
292
The large number of patients affected with diseases of the eye
and ear, now attending the special clinics at both hospitals affor |
ample opportunity to students to become familiar with all the
ordinary affections of those organs, and to make themselves pro-
ficient in the use of the ophthalnioscope ; and it is hoped that
every student will ihus seek to gain a practical knowledge of
this important branch of Medicine and Surgery. Operations
are performed on the eye by the Ophthalmic Surgeons after the
outdoor patients have been seen, and students are invited to
attend the same, and as far as practicable to keep such cases
under observation so long as they remain in the Hospital.
‘here are also special departments in both Hospitals for
Gynaecology and Laryngology, directed by Specialists in these
branches. Students are thus enabled to acquire special tech-
nical knowledge under skilled direction. The plan of teaching
practical gynaecology for the past five years with marked suc-
cess has been the limitation of the number of students attend-
ing each chnic to four.
The Clinics at the Montreal General Hospital in Dermatology
amd in both hospitals in Laryngology are very large, and afford
a practical training in affections of the skin and throat rarely
obtained by medical students.
A special clinic for diseases of the Genito-Urinary Organs has
been established at the Royal Victoria Hospital.
Infectious diseases and Insanity will also be taught clinically,
the former in the special wards for infectious diseases and the
latter at the Verdun Hospital for the Insane.
ΚΠ
The Montreal Maternity.
The Faculty has great pleasure in announcing that the Cor-
poration of {he Montreal Maternity has in contemplation the
erection of a large rew building fitted with the most modern
appliances. The ncw hospital will be situated at the corner of
Prince Arthur and St. Urbain streets. Plans and_ specifica-
tions for it are now about complete. Students will therefore
have greatly increased facilities for obtaining a practical know-
ledge of obstetrics and diseases of infancy. An improved
‘Tarnier-Budin phantom is provided for the use of the students,
and every facility afforded for acquiring a practical knowledge
299
of the various obstetric manipulations. The Institution 15
under the direct supervision of the Professor of Midwifery, who
devotes much time and attention to individual instruction.
Students who have attended the course in Obstetrics during the
winter and spring terms of the Third Year will be furnished
with cases in rotation, which they will he required to report
and attend till convalescence.
An outdoor service in connection with the Maternity has been
established, the resident physician and a nurse beg sent out
to attend deserving cases in their own homes. Students who
have had six cases in the hospital are sent out with the resident
physician to such cases whenever it is possible,
Clinical Obstetrics has been placed upon the same basis as
Cunical Medicine and Surgery, and a final clinical examination
has been instituted. Every student must give in two complete
clinical reports of cases observed by himself before presenting
himself for the final clinical examination. Marks ate given for
these reports in the Final examination for degree. Regular
courses of clinical lectures are given throughout the session,
special attention being paid to the important subject of infant
feeding. The Walker-Gordon process of modifying milk is ex-
plained and demonstrated. At the regular Saturday clinic the
work of the past week is reviewed, and an opportunity is given
for the examination of patients and the discussion of points of
interest in diagnosis and treatment.
During the autumn and winter terms the Lecturer and De-
monstrators of Obstetrics give a palpation course, clinical de-
monstrations in the wards and instruction in operative work on
the phantom. Students will find it very much to their advan-
tage to pay special attention to their clinical work during the
spring term of the Third Year and the following summer.
One resident medical ofiicer is appointed yearly to hold office
for a period of nine months, and one for a period of three
months.
Itee for twelve months, $12; payable at the Maternity Hos-
pital.
Hospital Appointments.
The Resident Medical and Surgical Staff of the Montreal
General, the Royal Victoria and the Maternity Hospitals, is
selected by examination from the members of the graduating
class of each year. There are from fifteen to twenty such ap-
294
pointments made annually which are tenable for from one to
three years, while a number of them carry a small salary with
them. The following students of the graduating class of 1902
received hospital appointments :—
R0YAL VicroriA HOosritaL:
Surgical Side: Drs. J. D. Dixon and J. I. D. Mason,
Medical Side: Drs. J. R. Byers and J. C. Colby.
Ophthalmology: Dr. N. C. Jones.
Anaesthetist: Dr. L. C. Harris.
Locum Tenens: Drs. H. 1K. Stockwell and J. A. Mac-
Naughton.
MONTREAL GENERAL HOSPITAL:
Drs. W. A. Gardner, R. C. Paterson, J. W. Manches-
ter, J. A. E. Campbell, W. E. Dixon, W. HE. McKee.
Eocum. Tenens: Drs. J. F. C. Foster, F. C. Mason,
S. Evans.
MATERNITY HOSPITAL:
Dr.'C. W. Hopkins.
Locum Tenens: Dr. Geo. Moffat.
“AIBIQIT AJISIAATUE
ἐν
The Miiversity Library.
C7 Ho. Gouup ἘΣ ΑΞ Librarian.
The various libraries of the University now contain about
97,000 volumes, and a large number of pamphlets.
In addition to the general works selected with a view to illus-
trating the several courses of University study, the Com-
mittee has latterly been enabled through generous gifts to
acquire many sets of serials and monographs which are indis-
pensable for research, and to provide for the symmetrical
growth of the Library.
There are now on the shelves more than 250 complete fyles
of periodicals and transactions of various literary and
scientific societies, many of which have been added during the
past year through the liberality of Sir W. C. MacDonald.
Among the special collections exclusive of departmental
libraries, mention should be made of the Redpath [Mistorical
Collection, formed by the late Mr. Peter Redpath some years
before his death. This is still being added to by Mrs. Peter
Redpath, is now of great valuc, and affords unusual opportunities
for the study of English History. The most prominent part
of the collection—a series of political and religious tracts—
has been greatly enlarged by Mrs. Redpath, and now comprises
about 9,000 brochures, dating from 1600 to the middle of the
last reign.
Abundant materials, bearing upon the History of Canada,
have been gathered together. Of these the nucleus is formed
by the entire library of the late Mr. Frederick Griffin, whose
choice books were, some years ago, bequeathed to the Uni-
versity. This branch of the library is being steadily augmented,
and includes interesting Canadian portraits and autographs.
The Medical Library, directly controlled by the Faculty of
Medicine, is the largest of the departmental libraries, and is
one of the most complete collections of its kind in the
Dominion.
290
About 250 current periodicals, literary and scientific, are
subscribed for through the various departments of the Uni-
versity. Besides these, the library regularly receives Serials,
Transactions and Proceedings of. Societies. The list of both
periodicals and serials is being extended yearly.
The generosity of the family of the late Mr. Hugh McLennan
has enabled the Library Committee to establish and operate
for the past two years a system of travelling lbraries. These
are sent on application, and the payment of a nominal fee of
$3, to any point in Canada. The regulations and full parti-
culars may be obtained from the Librarian of the University.
Although the library is maintained primarily for members
of the University, the Corporation has provided for the admis-
sion, upon certain conditions, of such persons as may be
approved by the Library Committee. It is the desire of the
Committee to make the library as ueful to the entire com-
munity as is consistent with ,the safety of the books and the
general interests of the University.
Extract from the Library Regulations.
1. During the College Session the Library is open daily
(except Sundays and general public holidays), from 9 a.m. till
5 p.m.; and the Reading Room from 9 a.m. till 6 p.m., and
also from 7.30 till 10.30 p.m. On Saturdays, both Library
and Reading Room close at 5 p.m. During vacations, both
Library and Reading Room close at 5 p.m., and on Saturdays
αὖ 1 ptm.
2. Students in the Faculty of Arts, of Law, and of Applied
Science are entitled to read in the Library, and may borrow
books (subject, to the regulations) to the number of three
volumes at one, time.
3. Students in the Faculty of Medicine, who have paid the
Library fee to the Bursar, may read in the Library, and on
depositing the sum of $5 with the Bursar, may borrow books
on the same conditions as students in other Faculties. They
are required to present their Matriculation Tickets to the
Bursar and to the Librarian.
4+. Graduates in any of the Faculties, on making a deposit
of $5, are entitled to the use of the Library, subject to the
same rules and conditions as students in Arts, Law, or Apphed
Science.
“
297
5. Books may be taken from the Library only after they
have been charged at the Delivery Desk; borrowers who can-
not attend personally must sign and date an order, giving the
titles of the books desired. i
6. Books in the Reference Library must not be taken from
the Reading Room; and, after they have been used, they must
he returned promptly by readers to their proper places upon
the shelves.
7. Before leaving the Library, readers must return the books
they have obtained to the attendant at the Delivery Desk.
8. All persons using books remain responsible for them so
long as the books are charged to them, and borrowers return-
ing books must see that their receipt is properly cancelled.
9. Writing or making any mark upon any book belonging to
the Library is unconditionally forbidden. Any person found
guilty of wilfully damaging any book in any way shall be
excluded from the Library; and shall. be debarred from the
use thereof for such time as the Library Committee may
determine.
10. Damage to or loss of books, maps, or plates, and injury of
Library fixtures, must be made good to the satisfaction of the
Librarian and of the Library Committee.
Damage, loss or injury when the responsibility cannot be
traced will be made good out of the caution money deposited
by students with the Bursar.
11. Should any borrower fail to return a book upon the
date when its return is due, he may be notified by postal card
of his default, and be requested to return the book. If the
loan is not renewed, or the book returned, after a further delay
of at least three days, it may be sent for by special messenger,
at the borrower’s expense.
12. Before the close of the session, students in their final
year must return uninjured, or replace to the satisfaction of
the Librarian, all books which they have borrowed.
13. Silence must be strictly observed in the Libraries.
14. Infringement of any of the rules of the Library will
subject the offender to a suspension of his privileges, or to such
other penalty as the nature of the case may require.
McGill College Book Club.
ESTABLISHED, A.D. 1869.
This Club is in the 385th year of its existence and has for its
two-fold object to procure an early supply of new books
(novels excluded) for its members, and the increase of the
Library. By this means an. addition has already been made
to the Library of not less than 4,000 volumes in special and
general literature.
Membership in the Club is open to all, at an annual sub-
scription of ten dollars.
Apart from the advantages to be directly derived from mem-
bership, there is the special privilege accorded to members of -
using the College Library on the same conditions as graduates,
without being required, however, to make a deposit when
books are borrowed.
The members of the Executive Committee are Dr. Johnson,
Rev. Dr. Murray, Mr. W. M. Ramsay, Mr. Henry Fry, Mr.
G. B. Cramp, and Mr. G. A. Farmer, to any of whom applica-
tion for membership may be addressed, or to Mr. E. M. Renouf,
Secretary, at the Club’s Depository, 2238 St. Catherine Street.
AUcGill HNormal School,
The McGill Normal School, in the city of Montreal, is
established chiefly for the purpose of training teachers for the
Protestant population, and for all religious denominations of
the Province of Quebec, other than the Roman Catholic. The
studies in this school are carried on chiefly in English, but
French is also taught.
Government of the School.
The Corporation of McGill University is associated with
the’ Superintendent of Public Instruction in the direction of
the McGill Normal School, under the regulations of the Pro-
testant Committee of the Council of Public Instruction, and
it i8 authorized to appoint a standing committee consisting of
five members, called the “Normal School Committee,’ which
shall have the general supervision of the affairs of the Normal
School. The following members of the Corporation of the
University constitute the committee of the Normal School for
the Session of 1903-1904.
Normal School Committee.
Pror. W. PETERSON, C.M.G., LL.D., Principal of the University,
Chairman.
Mr. SAMUEL FINLEY, Governor of McGill College.
REv. JAMES BaRcLAy, M.A., D.D. | tg ae
tries apace ae mies MA { McGill University.
J. A. NicHOLSON, M.A., Secretary.
Officers of Instruction.
McGitL NORMAL SCHOOL.
SAMPSON PauL Ropins, M.A., LL.D., D.C.L., Principal and Lecturer
on Art of Teaching.
300
ABNER W. KNEELAND, M.A., B.C.L., Ordinary Profezsor of English
Language and Literature.
MADAME SOPHIE CoRNU, Ordinary Professor of French.
Mr. Henry F. ARMSTRONG, Professor of Drawing.
Miss LILIAN B. ROBINS, B.A., Assistant to the Principal and In-
structor in Classics.
Mr. W. H. Smiru, Instructor in Vocal Music.
Mr. JOHN P. STHPHEN, Instructor in Elocution.
Miss CARRIE M. Derick, M.A., Lecturer on Botany.
Pror. NEvit N. Evans, M.A.Sce., Lecturer on Chemistry.
Mr. JAMES WALKER, Instructor in Penmans: nip and Book-keeping.
Miss Louise: Derick, Instructor in Kindergarten Methods.
Mr. 1. W. ArtruHy, Lecturer in the Theory of Kindergarten and
Transition Work.
Miss JESSIE Y. CHISHOLM, Instructor in Kindergarten History and
Principles.
Miss V. M. Houtmsrrom, Instructor in Calisthenics.
J. A. WiLtuiaMs, M.D., Lecturer on Physiology and Hygiene.
H. L. Barnes, D.Sce., Lecturer on Physics.
Mr. Cart JOHANSSON, Director of Manual Training, McDonald
Endowment.
Mr. G. E. EMBERLEY, Teacher of Manual Training.
Miss JOSEPHINE T. Dow, Instructor in Cooking.
Miss M. J. Connor, Instructor in Sewing.
Miss ΜΑΤΙᾺ. CARDEN, Principal’s Secretary and Librarian.
.
Model Schools of the McGi!l Normal School.
E. MONTGOMERY CAMPBELL, B.A., Head Master of Boys’ School.
Miss Mary I. Pemsurs, Head Mistress of Girls’ School.
Miss SELINA F. SLoaAN, Head Mistress of Primary School.
Announcement forthe Session 1903-1904.
This Institution is intended to give a thorough training to
teachers, by instruction and training in the Normal School
itself, and by practice in the Model Schools: and the arrange-
ments are of such a character as to afford the greatest possible
facilities to students from all parts of the province. The
Protestant Central Board of Examiners for the Province of
Quebec grants diplomas only to teachers-in-training of this
Institution and to graduates of British or Canadian Univer-
sities.
Δ τον: ἢ {
501
The forty-eighth session of this School will commence on
the second of September, 1903, and close on the twenty-seventh
of May, 1904. The students are graded as follows :—
1.—Elementary Class—Studying for the Elementary
Teh ee
Advanced Elementary Class.—Studying for the Adyanced
_ Elementary Diploma.
3.—Kindergarten Class—Studying for the Kindergarten
Diploma.
4.—Model School Class.—Studying for the Model School
Diploma.
5—Class in Pedagogy.—Preparing for the Academy
Diploma.
Detailed information respecting the courses of the four
erades first enumerated above may be obtained on application
to the Principal of the oe at 32 Belmont St., Montreal.
Academy Diplomas to Graduates.
All holders of model school diplomas that have been granted
by the MeGill Normal School or that shall hereafter be granted
by the Central Board of Examiners shall be entitled to receive
Bs Academy diplomas on graduating in Arts at some Canadian or
_. * other British university, provided that they pass in Mathemat-
τ ies, Latin, Greek and French at the degree examinations, or,
failing this in any subject or subjects of this group, pass in such
alee or subjects examinations that are certified by the uni-
versities to give to the graduate concerned a standing not lower
than that of second class at the end of the Second Year. But
ὍΩ graduates who substitute German for Greek, on fulfilling all
=a other conditions, may receive modified Academy diplomas,
a which will not authorize the holders to become principals of
Academies.
i. All graduates in Arts of Canadian or other British univer-
ἭΝ ι sities who have passed in Mathematics, Latin, Greek and French
i. as above defined and have taken a course and have passed sat-
isfactory examinations in Education and Practical Teaching
under the control of the Universities or of the McGill Normal
School as approved by the Protestant Committee of the Coun-
cil of Public Instruction, shall be entitled to receive Academy
diplomas. The Central Board of Examiners shall determine
who have passed satisfactory examinations in Education and in
902
Practical Teaching in view of the results, which, including ex-
amination questions and answers, shall be remitted Lom tie
Board by the university examiners, and in view of the recom-
mendations of the professors of education. The Central Board
of Examiners is empowered to set one-half of the questions in
Edueation, and to prescribe the tests of ability to teach and to
govern which must be followed in such examinations.
To meet the requirements of graduates and undergraduates
in Arts, who, not having previously 1 taken a Normal School
course, desire to receive Academy diplomas, and until the Uni-
versities themselves undertake the work, provision has been
made for the delivery of a course of lectures on pedagogy in
the Normal School and for practice in teaching in the
McGill Model School for fifty half days, open to graduates in
Arts of any British or Canadian university, to undergraduates
of the Third Year, and with the permission of the Faculty and
the concurrence of the Principal of the Normal School, to those
of the Fourth Year. The hours assigned for these lectures
are from ὃ to 4 p.m. on each Tuesday and Friday on which lec-
tures are given in the Faculty of Arts. An examination on
this course of lectures is held annually on the 20th day of May,
or on the school day next succeeding that date; the hours are
from 10 a.m. to 12 noon.
Undergraduates will be permitted to teach the fifty half
days referred to above, during the months of December and
Mav cf the Third and Fourth Years of their college course.
Graduates will be permitted to teach in the Model Schools at
such times as may be agreed on with the Principal. Thos:
who teach in the Model Schools are expected to prepare all
lessons and discharge all duties assigned them with faithful-
ness. Failure to teach or to govern in the Model Schools, as
indicated by the percentage of marks taken, no less than fail-
ure to pass the examination on the course of lectures, en-
dangers the Academy diploma.
Jach person desiring to take this course of study in the
Normal School must make appheation for permision to enter
to the Secretary of the Central Board of Examiners, on the
authorized form, remitting to him at the same time all neces-
sary certificates of s tanding and character, and a fee of $4.00.
While in attendance on this course each person is subject to
the regulations of the said school, and is under the super-
vision and eontrol of its Principal.
Exemption from Matriculation Examinations in McGill
University.
_ Holders of Model School diplomas of the McGill Normal
School who are certified by the Principal of the Normal School
to have taken 75 per cent. cf the total marks at their final ex-
aminations, with not less than 60 per cent. of the marks in
Mathematics, French, Le*in and Greek respectively, will be
admitted without further examination to the First Year in Arts
of McGill University ;-but all such students must make good
their standing at the Christmas examinations of the Univer-
sity. :
Guiwersity Examinations,
SESSION 1901-1902.
Faculty of Law.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF B.C.L.
(In order of merit.)
Wainwright, A., B.A.
Astle: “Dei.
Cotton, (Ga Me Ba
Gariépy, W., B.A.
Πα ἈΞ ΠΣ ΒΌΑΣ
Brown ἘΝ, ἜΡΑΝ
Couper, W. M.
ἌΓΟΙ ΕΠ. Wen ἘΣ
Ogden, C. G., aegrotat.
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF D.C.L. (IN COURSE).
William John White, M.A., B.C.L.
Faculty of Arts:
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF B.A.
IN HONOURS.
(In Alphabetical Order.)
First Rank. —D1xon, Jennie Ὁ
Munn, W. Clement.
Nouan, Annie W.
Second Rank.—ADAMS, Chauncey A.
BICKERDIKE, May C.
CLoace, Vivian ἘΣ.
IRVING, Elizabeth.
Munn, Emma M.
WARRINER, J. Eva.
ORDINARY B.A.
(In order of merit. Students of equal standing are bracketed
together.)
Class JI.—Crowell, Sam. G.
Harris, Spencer.
Plant, Verner L.
Jack, Milton.
{ Reid, Allan 8.
| Brcedie, Hugh ΕΠ
os *
SL eR eee oe pee ΡΡ ροοι
=— 2
*
ἱ
[
τοὺς ἌΡ Υ ΤΥ ΒΡ
ie "ae a Ἔν,
Class I1.—Pruyn, Wm. G.
Blagrave, Robt. C.
Smith, Miriam.
McDonald, John A.
Carson, Hermon A.
Irving, Geo.
Cole, G. Edwards.
Walker, John J.
Class [I1].—Crothers, Harold R.
Day, Daisy.
Greenleese, Mary 8S.
(In Alphabetical Order.)
Boulter, Jas. Hy.
Brown, Albert Victor.
Mount, Hector P.
Scott, Wm. Jas.
White, D. Roderick.
Aegrotat. —Hitchcock, Caroline L.
STUDENT IN ARTS REGISTERED IN THE MEDICAL FACULTY WHO
OBTAINED THE DEGREE OF B.A., IN JUNE, 1902, ON COM-
PLETING HIS MEDICAL YEAR.
Murphy, Herbert H.
BACHELOR OF SCIENCE ADMITTED *‘ AD EUNDEM GRADUM.”
McIntosh, Douglas.
BACHELORS OF ARTS PROCEEDING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A. IN COURSE.
Rexford, Elson I.
Munn, D. Walter.
Rorke, Helen.
Woodley, Edward C.
Millar, Wm. Kinloch.
BACHELORS OF ARTS PROCEEDING TO THE DEGREE OF M.SC. IN COURSE.
LeRoy, Osmund E.
Reid, Lena McK.
McIntosh, Douglas.
PASSED THE INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
(1).—FOR COURSE LEADING TO B.A.
(In order of merit. Students of equal standing are bracketed
together.)
Class I.—Rose, Herbert J.
Archibald, John G.
Sheldon, Ernest W.
{ Lomer, Theodore A.
(Simpson, Edith P.
506
Class JII.--Hart, E. Muriel.
Mackenzie, Catherine I.
{ Hindley, J. George.
(McKenzie, Angus Ὁ. M.
{ Lathe, Frank E.
ι Shanks, George.
Dickson, Ada D.
{ Brown, William Gordon.
| Griffin, Grace L.
| Gurd, Fraser B.
| MeGougan, Edward.
{ McCallum, Orrick B.
4 Rubinowitz, Israel ἘΝ
| Wickware, Francis G.
{Campbell, D. Grant.
| McDonald, Geo. C.
| Mingie, Geo. W.
| Papineau, Talbot M.
Class IIT. { Freeze, Helen L.
(McCally, M. Kathleen.
(Henry, A. O. Edna.
{ MacLeod, Annie L.
| Marshall, Wm. W.
{ Draper, Madolin A.
(Gardner, Helen Ivy L.
Chandler, Arthur B.
Wilson, Alice M.
{ Robertson, Ethel C.
(Stewart, Lillian J.
Craig, Bessie.
MacMillan, Henry Hind.
Bell, Ruth.
Bouchard, Myra ΜΟΙ, (s).
*Findlay, Delmer C. (s).
Mozan, David. Οὐ "08.
MeDiirmid, James S. (s).
MacFarlane, Charles M. (s).
Molson, Walter. (s).
Faculty of Applied Science.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE.
(In order of merit.)
CIVIL ENGINEERING.
Heaman, John Andrew, London. Ont.
Shaw, Herbert Harold, Brackley Point, P.E.I.
Bigger, Howell, Ottawa, Ont.
Borden, Henry Percy, Kentville, N.S.
Cameron, Kenneth McKenzie, London, Ont.
* Stanstead Wesleyan College.
(s) With supplemental in one subject (arranged alphabetically).
307
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
Scott, Harry Evart, Napanee, Ont.
Dunfield, John Collier Withers, St. John’s, Newfoundlana.
Franklin, Emerson Loran (B.A.), Wolfville, N.S.
Maxwell, Marshall Andrew, St. Stephen, N.B.
Hicks, Thomas Norman, Perth, Ont.
Smith, James Macdonald, Petitcodiac, N.B.
Jackson, Philip T., Toronto, Ont.
Murphy, William Edward, Shelhurne, N.S.
Boyd, Hugh Harkness, Montreal, Que.
Higman, Ormond, Ottawa, Ont.
Forman, Andrew Shearer, Montreal.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
Sterns, Frank Ernest, Morrell, P.E.I.
Smith, Gerald Meredith, St. Johns, Que.
Fry, David Merner, Bright, Ont.
Newton, Samuel Robert, Drummondville, Que.
Addie, Thomas Heriot, Sherbrooke, Que.
Baird, Alexander, Sherbrooke, Que.
MINING ENGINEERING.
Corless, Charles Vandyke, New Durham, Ont.
DePencier, Henry Percy, Vancouver, B.C.
Campbell, Charles McKinnon, Winnipeg, Man.
McBride, Wilbert George, Inglewood, Ont.
Coulson, John Leys, Toronto, Ont.
Burchell, George Bartlett, New Campbellton, N.S.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
Labatt, John Sackville, London, Ont.
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF SCIENCR.
(In Course.)
Burson, Herbert Arthur, B.Se., St. Catharines, Ont.
Clement, Sheldon Byrne, B.Se., Kingsville, Ont.
Edwards, William Muir, B.Se., Montreal.
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE.
(In Course.)
Adams, Frank Dawson, B.A.Sc., M.A.,Se., Ph.D., Montreal.
Dawson, William Bell, B.A., M.A., Ma.E., Ottawa.
Faculty of Medicine.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINE AND
MASTER OF SURGERY.
Cn alphabetical order.)
Ames; ©) “At, Field, B.C.
Anthony, T. B., Berwick, N.S.
ἜΒΗ Sy At SB Ara Ero yar ΝΟΥ.
908 ;
Blair, H. ἜΣ Ashten, Ont
Brennan, FE. A.; St. Albans, Vt., U.S) As.
Byers, J. R., Gananoque, Ont.
Campbell,. A., Souris. W., P.E.1.
Camptell, J. A. E., B.A., Westmount, Que.
Cantlie, F. P. L., Montreal, Que.
Carter, W. LeM., B.A., Quebec City, Que.
Christie, F. J., Martintown, Ont.
Codrington, R. F., Montreal, Que.
Colby, J. :C.; BuA., Stanstead: ΘΟ:
Coleman, C. E., Chatham, N.B.
Cox, Rab: Collinsville Sonn. Wass
Crozier, J. A., Ashburn, Ont.
Cullen, W. H., Montreal, Que.
Curren, L. M., Springfield, N.B.
Currie, -W. D:,~B..A\., Halifax; IN US:
Dixon, J. D., B.A., Montreal, Que.
Dixon, W. E., B.A., Montreal, Que.
Dorion, W. A., Montreal, Que.
Hastman, ἜΣ. B:, Portsmouth; N. H:, U.S.A:
Evans, 8., Ottawa, Ont.
Featherston, H. C., Hamilton, Ont.
Folkins, H. G., Millstream, N.B.
Forster, J. F. C., Dorchester, N.B.
Gardiner, R. J., Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Gardner, W. A., B.A., Huntingdon, Que.
Green, eos Eictous Nes:
Halliday, J. LeR., Sawyerville, Que.
Harris; τ, τ Moneton,. -aNaB:
Hart, FE. W., B-A., Sackville; N.B.
Harvie; ss K:, BLA. sNewport;. Nis.
Eenry. τς VE; Palmer? ΘΙ ΠΑ,
Hollingsworth, J. E., Ottawa, Ont.
Hopkins, C. W., Aroostook Junction, N.B.
Hyatt, A., B.Sce., Dickinson Centre, N-Y., UsS:A.
Irwin, F., Shelbourne, N.S.
Johnson,. J. A., B.A., Lachine, Que:
Johnson, G. R., B.A., Annapolis, N.S.
Jones, N. C., B.A., Gananoque, Ont.
Leney, J. M., B.A., Montreal, Que.
Lidstone, A. E., Aylmer, Que.
Lomas, A. J., Montreal, Que.
MacCarthy, ἜΝ H., Ottawa, Ont.
Macdonald, A. A., B.A., St. Andrews; P.E.f.
MacKinnon, G. ἘΣ L., Alexandria, Ont.
‘Maclaren, A. H., B.A., Huntingdon, Que.
MacNaughton, J. A., Salisbury, N. B.
MeGibbon, D., Arkona, Ont.
MecGibbon, S., Arkona, Ont.
McGrath, R. H., Dorchester, N.B.
McKee, W. E., Coaticooke, Que.
McKenzie, J. B., B.A., Campbellton, N.B.
McNeill, J. ἘΠῚ Kensington, P.B.1.
Manchester, J. W., St. John, N.B.
Martin, H. E., Chatham, Ont.
Mason, E. G., Westmount, Que.
Mason; Ἂς ο΄; Plattsbures NGY:
309
Mason, J. LeD., B.A., Montreal, Que.
May, lL. W., Oltawa, Ont.
Menzies, J. E., New Bedford, Mass., U.S.A.
Moffatt, Geo., Inker man, Ont.
Morrison, J. F., Copleston, Ont.
Morse, W. R., BAY. Laurencetown, N.S.
Εν Mothersill, G. S., Ottawa, Ont.
by Palmer, G. H., Dorchester, N.B.
XS Paverson,mk. Ὁ: B.A., Montreal, Que.
# Peters, O. R., Gagetown, N.B.
pe: 5 Pickard, L. N., Charlottetown, Ρ. ΕΣ. Ὁ.
i Pratt, €. M., St. John, N.B.
τ" Ritchie ὡς ἘΠ P. B.A., Montreal, Que.
on Roberts, A. B., Lanark, Ont.
oe SJaiey, Wily, IBA Montreal, Que.
: Smith, T. W., Hawkesbury, Ont.
τς Stockwell, H. K., Danville, Que.
x > Tolmie, J. A., Moose Creek, Ont.
ἔσταν, Hine Atm eAue Lancaster, N.H., U.S.A.
* VanWart, R. IVE CTs Aves Fredericton, N.B.
Walker, H., Jr., B.A., New ΠΟΥ ΝΟΥ, {Π8|53. AL
Williams, R. G., Meaford, Ont. -
Faculty of Comparative Medicine and Veterinary
Science.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF LD SVES:
Cn alphabetical order. )
fe Blair, W. Reid.
7 Douglas, Alexander R.
Hadwen, Seymour.
Harrington, A. D.
Kennedy, G. A.
Manchester, W.
Spear, W. H.
Symes, J. W.
PS ΨΥ ΨΨ
at ren, ia sie Bd
Scholarships and £xhibitions,
SESSION 1902-1903.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
Ξ ᾿- ἘΠῚ
τ ‘ , | SUBJECT OF | ANNUAL
NAMES OF SCHOLARS. | τις FOUNDER OR Donor.
| EXAMINATION, VAILUE.
Sheldon, Krnest W. Mathematics. $125.0" | sir W. C. Maedonald,
McCally, M.Kathleen....) Mathematics. g1.50 57 ets Macdonald and Molson
Simpson Edith P. .... | Mathematics. TE ar hh ra es RC temas et
Lathe, Frank E ..... «- Nat. Science. IARI ΟΣ ἐπ σα στον τ ὅποι, Poni bOoc as anes πος,"
Rose, Herbert J Classic Tend Mod), 195.00 | Sir W- C. Macdonald.
guages.
McKenzie, Angus Ὁ. M Beene Cena | 25.00 | Mackenzie Scholarship.
Exhibitions. (Tenable for one vear).
JANNUAL
VALUE.
SUBJECT OF
NAMES OF EXHIBITIONELS. :
EXAMINATION.
FounDrER OR DONOR
McDiarmid, James S....| Nat. Science SCO" O04 seers cee eae Aen ec eet earns Soe hace
McGougan, Edward. ... Nat, Science 100.00
|
|
|
tt. Second Year Exhibitions. (Tenable for one year).
ANNUAL |
NAMES OF KH XHIBITIONERS,. τ
VALUE.
FOUNDER OR Donor
Hea SCrs GE OTYGlAt a ch ΣΝ chen steiers $125.00 | George Hague, 1054.
LG Wey ate Ἀν (CA erie sage codiodardon 125.00 | Sir W. C, Macdonald.
Macmillan, George E., ....... Sect 75.60 | Mrs. Redpath.
Bursaries.—Second Year.
Curtiss wWraltersMenn ss tence eel $62.50 Sir W. C. Macdonald.
Wales, Osgood H Ooh Ae enor os | 62.50 Sir W. C. Macdonald.
ee ee ΝΣ
a δι.
ΡΤ ρ. ΚΟ ΡΥ eee
>
9511
It. First Year Exhibitions. (Tenable for one year).
| ANNUAL
NAMES OF FE XHIBITIONERS. | “Vanover. FounpDER.
Garmin war το Stopes κεἰς τὰ ERIS EITO Oo Once ον
Freedman, Abraham, .... .. “Εν ἴσο Ὁ | 100.00 | ἀπο σα HHO Dan DOOD CORO COBOL OUOR aa aan
Wielieo ds eAWlexacR sy eras τ’ προ vista cies a ste | 125.00 | Sir W. C. Macdonald.
Naylor, R. Kenneth, ohatetsl stein cles stare 100,00 oper Vs istavaleelefeiotehere4l ois nfs eveia/as
Rorke: Mabeledus ἡ ιν το «εἰς See eae 125200 | ΘΝ τι τ ΝΕ τ
Ἢ oy plaka γος. fo Srase och 125.00 | Sir W. Ο. Macdonald.
Bursary.— First Year.
GmsinaConstancey ΜῈ: τς τιν 2-6 τ νον] FO 0200 Ὁ cesvols Hotere cy atccine tacts ἀτιονοι εν πο eee ores
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
Exhibitions and Prizes.
STUDENTS ENTERING THE FOURTH YEAR.
Foreman, Alvah E., British Association Exhibition,
Hall, Oliver. British Association Prize.
STUDENTS ENTERING THE THIRD YEAR.
Lawrence, William D., First Mathematical Prize.
Cole, George H. Second ue “
Chaplin, Charles J., Vhird τς τ
Dutcher, Howard K., Third oe ἐς
STUDENTS ENTERING THE SECOND YEAR.
Fyshe, Thomas M., Scott Exhibition.
Boyle, Robert W., First Scott Prize.
Blanchet, Guy H., Second Scott Prize.
PRIZES FOR SUMMER THESES.
In the Hlectrical Engineering Course: Greenshields Prize, divided
equally between R. T. Conklin and A. E. Foreman, Fourth Year,
In the Mechanical Engineering Course: The Crosby Steam Gauge &
Valve Company’s Prize, to F. A. McKay, Fourth Year.
In the Mining Engineering Course: The Drummond Prize, divided
equally between R. A. Chambers, Third Year, and O. Hall,
Fourth Year.
Students of the Wuiversity.
SESSION 1902-1903.
McGILL COLLEGE.
Faculty of Law.
FIRST YEAR.
Coulin, James E., Montreal.
Duffy, Fabian J., Montreal.
Greenshields, Charles G., Montreal.
Harris, Spencer D., Ottawa, Ont. :
Mathieu, Alexandre P., Montreal. Ε
MeMorran, Thomas &., Cttawa, Ont. y
Morin, Louis S. R., St. Hyacinthe, Q. :
Wallace, Richard P., Coaticook, Q. ]
SECOND YEAR.
3rodie, Hugh H., Westmount, Q.
Brosseau, Bernard L., Montreal.
Chipman, Warwick F., Montreal.
Cotton, Wm. Ulric, B.A., Sweetsburg, Q. }
DeWitt, Jacob, B.A., Montreal.
Dickson, Norval, Allans Corners, Q. |
Drouin, Joseph, Montreal.
Ker, Thomas R., Montreal.
Lafond, Elsée, La baie du Febvre, Q.
McDougall, Malcolm E., Mattawa, Ont.
Mackie, Henry A., Cookshire, Q.
Ogilvie, William Prescott, Montreal.
Phelan, M. A., Montreal.
Pope, Charles Alex., Quebec, Q.
Stephens, L. DeK., Montreal.
Vineberg, Abraham Halmer, Montreal.
Wadleigh, Wilfred William, Kingsay, Q.
Williams, Henry Stevens, B.A., Knowlton, Q.
THIRD YEAR.
Angus, David James, Montreal.
Bergeron, Patrick John, Beauharnois, Q.
Blaylock, Harry W., Danville, Q.
Casgrain, Alex. Chase, Montreal.
Gosselin, Louis, Notre Dame de Stanbridge, Q.
Madore, Louis. Montreal.
Mackinnon, Cecil Gordon, Sherbrooke, Q. :
Orr, Henry Stanley, Cookshire, Q.
Rankin, Arthur G. Ernest, Montreal.
Rugg, Frederick S., Stanstead, Q.
Tansey, Thomas M., Montreal.
Theberge, Albert, St. Jerome, Q.
Vipond, Herbert, Montreal.
Weinfield, Henry, (B.A.), Montreal.
he eRe Riemer κόνει καὶ τὸν
επηταεπεβενν χὴν ἐγ θοῦ ν
° ὙΠ] 3 Ἵ
The Smithy.
The Foundry.
ΟΣ ΠΣ
Faculty of Arts.
FIRST YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
(MeGill College.)
Barclay, MacG., Abingdon School, Montreal.
Carr, Wm. L., Huntingdon Academy, Trout River, Q.
Cousins, Geo. V., Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
Drew, John M., Lachute Academy, Beech Ridge, Q.
Fisher, Simeon W., Dundas High School, West Flamboio, Ont.
Freedman, Abraham, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Garvin, Arthur C., Stanstead Wesleyan College, Odelltown, Q.
Gibb, Robertson W., Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
*Hendry, And. W., Liverpool Academy, Liverpool, N.S.
Henry, Robt. A. C., Westmount Academy, Montreal.
Housser, Geo. E., Portage La Prairie Collegiate, Portage La Prairie,
Man.
Hutchinson, Jas. J., Congregational College, Montreal, Craigsholme,
Ont. ‘
*Kirsch, Simon, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Lewis, David S., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Lyman, C. Sydney, Montreal High School, Montreal.
McCann, Walter E., M. Dioe. Theol. College, Aylwin, Q.
McLeod, Alex R., Prince of Wales’ Coll., P.E.I., Uigg, P.E.I.
Marcuse, Otto, Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
Martin, Lewis G., St. John’s School, Montreal, Montreal.
Mundie, Gordon S., Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
Naylor, R. Kenneth, Shawville High School, Shawville, Q.
Newman, Harry, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Pease, ἘΣ Raymond, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Rogers, David B., M. Dioc. Theol. College, Watford, Cnt.
Ross, Allan, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Scott, C. Hope, Abingdon Scheol, Montreal, Montreal.
Shearer, Jas. R., Ottawa Collegiate, Sherbrooke, Q.
Silcox, Albert B., Montreal High School, Winnipeg, Man.
Stafford, F. Montague, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Sutherland, O. W. D., Upper Canada College, Montreal.
Vineberg, Solomon, Sherbrooke Academy, Sherbrooke, Q.
Waugh, Oliver S., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Royal Victoria College.
Blakemore, Clarisse M., McGill Normal School, Montreal.
Clark, Birdena M., Harbord St. Coll. Inst., Toronto, Montreal.
Douglas, A. Lilian, Ottawa Coll. Inst., Ottawa.
Fraser, Mabel G. S., Girls’ High School, Quebec, Quebec, P.Q.
Gillmor, Blanche C., Trafalgar Institute, Montreal.
Griffin, Constance, Alma Coll., Toronto.
Holway, Ruth, Decorah High School, Decorah, Iowa, U.S.
Massy, Muriel A., Gilman School, Cambridge, Mass., Summerside,
ἘΣ ΒΣΣΙΕ \
Rorke, Mabele L., St. Thomas Coll. Inst., Montreal.
Ryan, Esther L. M., Montreal Girls’ High School, Montreal.
Tully, May G., Victoria High School, B.C., Dawson City, Yukon Terr.
* Double Course.
Pale Δί
oak Oe Be ΣΦ, le τὸ i tia Mea MN Po ic Ak I - br?
914
CONDITIONED STUDENTS.
( MeGill College.)
Churchill, Lewis P., Lockeport Academy, Lockeport, N.S.
Crocker, Stanley, Collegiate Inst., St. Thomas, Ont.
Gale, Wm. Hy., Ormstown Academy, Ormstown, Q.
*Healy, Jas. J., Smith’s Falls High School, Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Kiely, Philip G., Goderich Coll. Inst., Goderich, Ont.
*MeCallum, Jno. S., Smith’s Falls High School, Smith’s Fails, Ont.
atrick, Frank A., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Payne, Chester H., Ottawa Collegiate Inst., Ottawa, Ont.
Shaw, Herbert T., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Stackhouse, Russell T., Lachute Academy, Lachute, Q.
Thomson, Jos. O., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Vassie, Wm., Ridley College, St. John, N.B.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Carter, Helen M., Trafalgar Inst. & Royal Victoria Coll., Montreal.
Engelke, Minnie E., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Mowatt, E. L. Rae, Montreal Girls’ High School, Montreal.
Taylor, Eliz. I., Wells Coll., Rochester, N.Y., U.S.
Tighe, M. Winnifred, Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
Trench, Nora O., Richmond High School, Va., U.S., Montreal.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
(MeGill College.)
Allison, Wm. S., St. John, N.B.
Archibald, B. P., Westmount, Q.
Armstrong, Geo. D., Ottawa, Ont.
Barrett, Chas. W., Newcastle, Ont.
Bates, Fred. W., Wolford Centre, Ont.
(2) Cordner, Jos., Derryall, Ireland.
Haskell, L., St. J., Montreal.
Howe, Jno. F., Pembroke, Ont.
Hennah, Rich. M., Copper Cliff, Ont:
Jornston, David E., Coleraine, Ont.
Kennedy, H. F., Chatham, Ont.
McCrimmon, Jno. R., Vankleek Hill, Ont.
Mackay, Robt.
Mather, Wm. A., Rat Portage, Ont.
Maver, Alex. M., Montreal.
(2) Morgan, W. Burton, Hartland, N.B.
Peterson, Wm. Gordon, Montreal.
Phillips, Thos. N., Rat Portage, Ont.
tichards, Wm. A., Pembroke, Ont.
Robb, Fred G., Montreal.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Baker, Marjorie H., Montreal.
Bell, Muriel G., Montreal.
Bell, Sarah L., Montreal.
Blakemore, Jessie M., Montreal.
(2) Braidwood, H., Montreal.
(2) Brodie, Mary R., Smith’s Falls, Ont.
* Double Course.
The figure (1), (2), (8) or (4) prefixed to a name, indicates that the
student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
Where the name is found.
ΡΥ ΜΡ i Paar eta a a i as a ΡΠ ΡΠ ΡΥ 3 ™~ =»
B15
Brotherhood, E. M., Montreal.
Brown, ΕΣ. M., Montreal.
Bulmer, Gertrude, Montreal.
(4) Cox, Rachael E., Montreal.
Chapman, G. O., Amherst, N.S.
Cross, Margt, Montreal.
Draper, E. Kath., Montreal.
Durant, Marion, Montreal.
Eaton, Mary J., Montreal.
Edgar, L. M., Montreal.
Emmans, H., Montreal.
Fitzgibbon, O., Montreai.
Fogarty, Amy, Montreal.
Fogarty, Lena M., Montreal.
Forbes, M. H., Montreal.
Fortier, Aimée, Montreal.
Gibb, M. Helen, Montreal.
(2) Gilmour, Mary E., Waterloo, Q.
Gnaedinger, Ruby A., Montreal.
Harris, Mary E., Moncton, N.B.
Hewat, H. Beatrice, Montreal.
Hodge, L. Ethel, Montreal.
Lachance, Maud M., Montreal.
Learmonth, F. Win., Montreal.
(2) Lomer, Elfreda, Montreal.
(2) Lomer, Katharine, Montreal.
Lyster, Alice G., Montreal.
McNally, Gertrude, Montreal.
Macfarlane, E. J., Montreal.
Mackay, Cairine, Montreal.
) Mitchell, Florence E., Sherbrooke, Q.
Mole, Harriet J., Montreal.
Robb, E. Vera, Amherst, N.S.
Robertson, Marjorie B., Montreal.
Smith, Mabel C., Montreal.
(2) Smith, Jennie C., Morrisburg, Ont.
(4) Taylor, Agnes D., Edinburgh, Scotland.
Vipond, Constance, Montreal.
Williams, Ethel S., Montreal.
Williamson, F. I., Montreal.
Williamson, H. J., Montreal.
Young, Hazel E., Montreal.
SECOND YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
(MeGill College.)
Adams, Claude A., Huntingdon Acad., Franklin Centre, Q.
Blanchard, Charles H. £., Upper Canada Coll., Toronto, Winnipeg,
Man.
Cameron, A. W., Mon;+real High School. Montreal.
Chodat, Henri, Normal School, Switzerland, Pointe-aux-Trembles, Q.
Cotton, Thos. F., Montreal High School, Cowansville, Que.
Cousineau, Victor M., Ontario Public Schools and M. Dioc. T. Coll.,
Spragge, Ont.
Crane, Chas. W., Toronto University, Montreal.
Cross, C. Ernest, St. Francis Coll. Gram. School, Melbourne, Q.
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
Where the name is found.
ΣΝ ΤῊΝ ae τἀν δ ΡΥ ΕΛ ὑόν ΜΑΤΗ ἢ soy x Ἄν Pt ae
316
*Curtis, Walter E., Prince of Wales Coll., P.E.J., Milton, P.E.I.
Cushing, R. Macaulay, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Dawson, Ernest E., Lachute Acad., Stonefield, Q.
Dey, W. Fred., Simcoe High School, Simcoe, Ont.
Edwards, Lyford P., Central High Scheol, Grand Rapids, Grand
Rapids, Mich., U.S.A.
Featherston, J., University Coll., Toronto, Ont.
Fraser, Geo. A., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Graham, Jno. H., Manitoba Coll., Winnipeg, Man.
Greenshields, C. G., Bishop’s Coll. School, Lennoxville, Montreal.
Halpenny, T. A. Sydenham High School, Bear Brook, Ont.
Howitt, Hy., Montreal High School, Guelph, Ont.
Hyde, G. Gordon, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Jenkins, Jos., Montreal High School, Montreal.
King, Louis V., Montreal High School, Montreal.
*Locke, Ernest E., Westmount Academy, Westmount, Q.
McCuaig, Douglas R., Crichton School, Montreal.
McFee, M. C. C., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Macmillan, G. E., Prince of Wales Coll., New Haven, P.E.I.
McMurtry, R. O., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Macnab, Norman, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Manley, R. W., M. Dioc. Theol. Coll., Buckingham, Q.
Nicholson, Jno. C., Owen Sound, Lucknow, Ont.
Ower, Jno. Jas., Smith’s Falls High School, Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Perry, K. M., Regina High School, Regina, Assa.
*Rabinovitch, M., Montreal High School, Montreal.
Robinson, F. G.,Bishop’s Coll. Scheol, Lenn’le, St. John, N.B.
tobinson, W. W., Bishop’s Coll. School, Lenn’le, Granby, Q.
Ress, Daniel, Montreal High School, Montreal.
Roy, Philias R., Feller Insit., Grande Ligne, Q., Sabrevois, Q.
Stewart, Thomas 8., Crichton School, Montreal.
Stewart, Willie, Crichton School, Montreal.
“Tannenbaum, D., High School, Montreal.
Tupper, Chas. S., Upper Canada School, Private Tuition, Winnize,g
Man.
Wales, Osgood H., Danville Acad., Robinson. Q.
ἘΞ ΡΞ ΟΡ. ἘΣ
rT. +>
Se Las a ee ἘΠ ΑῪ Π ΎΦ
(Royal \ictoria College.) 3
Bowman, Nora ἘΝ G., Glencoe Eigh School, Ont., Montreal.
Featherstonhaugh, M. R., M. G. High School, Montreal.
Fraser, Amy, M. G. High Schocl, Montreal.
Gillean, A. Muriel, M. G. High School, Montreal. Ξ
Healy, Rose E., Smith’s Falls High School, Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Hepburn, Flora EH., M. GC. High School, Lachine, Q.
Hill, Julia M., St. Stephen’s High School, St. Stephen, N.B.
Hitchcock, Mary A., Stanstead Wesl. Coll., Compton, Q.
Idler, S. Mary, M. G. High School, Montreal. j
Lyman, Ruth D., Trafalgar Institute, Montreal. :
McCoy, Isabel, Montreal Girls’ High School, Montreal. |
Michaels, R. F., M. G. High School, Montreal.
Moule, Frances S., Westmount Acad., Westmount, Q. ,
Munn, Laura A., M. G. High School, Montreal. ; :
Pearson, Mary F., Edgehill. Windsor, N.S., Emscote, Halifax, N.S.
(Sc.) Sharp, F. Evelyn, London University Coll., London, Southfield,
Jamaica, W.I.
Smith, Ella L., Grammar School, St. John, St. John, N.B.
Smith, May, M. G. High School, Montreal.
Taber, Marion M. D., Stanstead Wesleyan 'Coll., South Granby. Q. 7
Vineberg, Malca, M. G. High School, Montreal. -
* Double Course.
- ee =) δὰ
I NP eee es ee he ere ΤῊΝ
. lard
317
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
(MeGill College.)
Bourgoin, Samuel, Pointe-aux-Trembles, Q.
Foote, Jas., Varna, Ont.
Gurd, Walter.
Halpenny, Wes., Tucker, Mont: eal.
Joliat, Henri, Montreal.
Lancaster, Chas. F., Bethany, C.
Mackenzie, Jno. D., Inverness, Q.
Mackay, Jas., St. Davids, Ont.
Mathieson, Peter, Forester’s Falls, rnb
Molson, Herbert W., Montreal.
Montgomery, Isaac, Pleasant Valley, Cnt.
Ormiston, Albert, Columbus, Cnt.
Robinson, Jas. C., Nobleton, Ont.
Raymond, Wm. O.
Stewart, Jno. A.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Armstrong, Beatrice, M., Montreal.
Binks, Isabel B., Montreal.
(4) Boulter, O., Montreal.
Demole, A. M., Montreal.
Jackson, E. M., Montreal.
Kerr, Vera O., Montreal.
Knox, M. Gertude, Montreal.
Lewis, Edith B., Westmount, Q.
(3) (4) Logan, Winnifred, Montreal.
(3) Murray, Bessie C., Montreal.
Murray, Grace P., Montreal.
Prendergast, F. M., Montreal.
Schoenthal, Y. E., Westmount, Q.
THIRD YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
(MeGill College.)
Archibald, John G., -.ontreal.
Brown, Wim. G., Montreal.
Campbell, D. Grant, Montreal.
Chandler, Arthur B., Montreal.
*Dickenson, John D., Hazel Hill, N.S.
*Fripp, Geo. D., Ottawa, Ont.
=Gray, Edwin H., Montreal West, Q.
=Gurd, Fraser B.. Montreal.
“Harvie, Robt., Westmount, Q.
Hindley, J. Geo., Guelph, Ont.
Lathe, Frank E., Lacolle, Q.
Logan, David C., Montreal.
*Lomer, Theodore A., Montreal.
MacFarlane, Charles McK., Aubrey, Q.
*McDiarmid, J. S., Ingersoll, Ont.
* Double Course.
The figure (1), (2). (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
4)
(4)
(4)
δ er Yo Φ ΑΔ Sts TAR ον ἀν
518
McDonald, George C., Montreal.
McGougan, Ed., Glencoe, Ont.
McKenzie, Angus Ὁ. M., Hartsville, P.E.I.
Marshall, Wm. W.. Montreal.
Mingie, Geo. W., Point St. Charles, Q.
Molson, Walter, Montreal.
Papineau, Talbot M., Montreal.
Rose, Herbert J., Ottawa.
Rubinowitz, I., Vancouver, B.C.
Shanks, George, Howick, Q.
Sheldon, Ernest W., Westmount, Q.
Stewart, J. Ure., Goderich, Ont.
Walker, H. Earle, Westmount, Q.
*Wickware, Francis G., Easton’s Corners, Ont.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Bell, Ruth, Westmount, Q.
Bouchard, Myra MclL., Montreal.
Craig, Bessie, Montreal.
Dickson, Ada, Pembroke, Ont.
Draper, Mandolin A., Montreal.
Ellison, Ada A., Cowansville, Q.
Freeze, Helen L., St. John West, N.B.
Gardner, H. Ivy L., Montreal.
Griffin, Grace L., Toronto.
Hadrill, Margaret ἘΠ, Montreal.
Hart, E. Muriel, St. Lambert, Q.
Henry, A. E. Edna, Tamworth, Ont.
Kimber, Victoria C., Montreal.
McCally, M. K., St. Thomas, Ont.
Mackenzie, Catherine I., Montreal.
MacLeod, Annie L., Glace Bay, C.B.
tobertson, Ethel C., Westmount, Q.
Simpson, Edith P., Montreal.
Stewart, Lillian J., Ottawa.
Wilson, Alice M., Montreal.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
(McGill College.)
Dunlop, Alan C., Montreal.
McLeod, N. V., Granby, Q.
May, Wm. H., Forester’s Falls, Ont.
2oss, Walter G., Upter Grove, Ont.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Armstrong, H. Evelyn, Montreal.
Baird, I. Lena, Andover, N.B.
Molson, E., Montreal.
Murray, Greta, Montreal.
Newman, J. G., Montreal.
Patrick, Agnes B., Montreal.
Reekie, I. G., Montreal.
Scrimger, E. Muriel, Montreal.
(4) Stanway, H. Winifred, Montreal.
The
* Double Course. δῶσι
figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
iy ee
Ἵ
Re ORT) PRONE ORE a ee ὙΠ
9519
Spencer, Lilian E., Montreal.
Stewart, G. Grace, Belleville, Ont.
Sutherland, Alice D., Montreal.
(4) Walker, Gladys, Toronto, Ont. \
FOURTH YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
(McGill College.)
Ascah, R. G., Peninsula, Gaspe, Q.
Bovey, F. H. Wilfrid, Montreal.
Cameron, Dakers, Montreal.
Couture, Gui. C., Montreal.
Davidson, Macfarlane B., Ottawa.
Dutaud, Gustave, St. Blaise, Q.
Fee, James E., Farnham, Q.
*Harris, Alan Dale, Ottawa.
Holman, Wm. L., Summerside, P.E.I.
Johnson, Walter S., Montreal.
Lockhart, A. R. B., Stanstead, Q.
Lomer, Gerhard R., Montreal.
MacKay, Eric B., Montreal.
MeMorran, T. S., Ottawa.
Parkins, Edgar R., Montreal.
Seaman, Jno. C., Otter Lake, Q.
Simister, Warren, Montreal.
Troop, G.Wm. H., Montreal.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Belyea, Marion E., St: John, N.B.
East, Edith M., Maisonneuve, Q.
(Sc.) Gass, Helen, Montreal West, Q.
Griffin, A. Gertrude, West Newton, Mass., U.S.A.
Lundie, Helen, Montreal.
Lunny, Rosemary, Smith’s Falls, Ont.
McLeod, Euphemia L., Montreal.
Parkin, Maude E., Toronto.
Wales, Grace Julia, Robinson, Q.
Wisdom, Katherine F., St. John, N.B.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
(MeGill College.)
Tippett, E. H., Montreal.
(Royal Victoria College.)
Blackader, E. M., Montreal.
Fyshe, Anna, Montreal.
Gates, Fanny C., Baltimore, Ind., U.S.
Hickson, B., Montreal.
Robinson, F. P., Bristol, England.
White, Ada W., Montreal.
* Double Course.
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a: name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
ε,
320
GRADUATES.
Clogg, Vivian E., B.A., Montreal.
Cameron, Susan E., M.A., St. John, N.B.
Dalgleish, R. W., B.A., Huntingdon, Q:
Mitchell, Sydney, B.A., Montreal.
Nolan, A. Winifred, B.A., Montreal.
Pearson, Katie C., B.A., Montreal.
Shaw, S. Louise, B.A., Montreal.
Faculty of Medicine.
FIRST YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Allen, Hanson, C.B., Cape Tormentine, N.™,
Baird, Walter S., Brucefield, Ont.
Bayley, Alexander H., Bridgetown, Barbados, PR.W.T.
Budyk, James S., Montreal.
Burke, George H., Ogdensburg, IN SYS Oe Ae
Chandler, Arthur B., Montreal.
Christie, Hugh H., Martintown, Ont.
Clarke, Frederick C., Coverley Plantation, Barbados, B.W.1.
Cole, William H., Westmount. Ο.
Crowe, Henry S., Central Onslow, N.S.
“Curtis, Walter E., Milton, P.B.I.
Dearborn, Henry F., Lawrence, Mass., U.S.A.
Des Isles; ‘Charles J, Ri, Montreal.
Donnelly, James H., Troquois, Ont.
Elliott, Milton H., Prescott, Ont.
Field, Burton R., Port Elgin, N.B.
Flagg, Robert F., Ottawa, Ont.
Fraser, David R., Montague Rridge, P.E.I.
Fraser, Thomas B., Liverpeol, N.S.
“Fripp, George D., Montreal.
Gillies, George E., Teeswater, Ont.
Gourlay, Henry B., Ph.B., Montreal.
“Gray, Edwin H., Montreal West, Q.
Green, Thomas B., B.A., Virden, Man.
Groves, Osler M., Carp, Ont.
Gunn, Alexander R., Laneaster, Cnt.
*Gurd, Fraser B., Montreal.
*Healy, James J., Smith’s Falls, Gnt.
Henderson, Smith, Ottawa, Cnt.
*Hendry, Andrew W., Liverpool, N.S.
Hillman, Oliver S., Hamilton, Ont.
Hils, Herman, B.L., Woonsocket. R.I., U.S.A.
Hollbrook, Robert ἘΣ, Boissevain, Man.
Holden, Charles P., St. John, N.B.
Howlett, George P., Ottawa, Ont.
Hunter, Archibald W., Durham, Cnt.
Hunter, Thomas V., Florenceville, N.B.
Huycke, Austin H., Warkworth, Ont.
Johnson, Brougham F., Midland, N.B.
Keddy, Owen B., Milton, N.S.
Kelly, Arthur E., Meaford, Ont.
Kennedy, William, Bradalbane, P.E.I.
Kerfoot, Herbert W., Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Kinloch, Charles A., Martintown, Ont.
*Kirsen, Simon, Montreal.
Lahey, John. J., Southboro, Mass:- USA.
Lewis, Henry R., Hillsborough, N.B.
* Double Course.
oe eS
2
_Lindsay, Edwin A., Banff, Alta. i
“Locke, Ernest E., Westmount, Q. i
*Lomer, Theodore A., Montreal.
Lyon, George R. D., Ottawa, Ont. ᾿ i
ἢ MacArthur, Reginald S., Summerside, P.E.I.
MacDonald, Purdy A.; Alma, N.B. a hr
MacNaughton, Alexander, North Lancaster, Ont.
*McCallum, John S., Smith’s Falls, Ont.
McCormick, Alexander S., Westmount, Q.
*McDiarmid, James S., Ingersoll, Ont.
McDonald, John N.., Shelburne, N.S.
McGarvey, Owen, Ottawa, Ont.
McLeod, John M., Quincy, Mass., U.S.A.
: McMillan, John Α., Finch, Ont.
McNaughton, George K., Black River, N.B
McPhee, Judson T., Courtenay, B.C.
Mabee, Oliver R., Ph.B., Vittoria, Ont. αἱ
Mair, William L., Clinton, Ont. Fi
Malcolm, Donald C., St. John, N.B. ᾿
᾿ Michaud, Napoleon, Camphellton, N.B.
Monahan, Richard J., Montreal. ;
Muir, David H., Jr., Truro, N.S
*Muir, Walter L., Truro, N.S. Rh,
Munroe, Alex. R., Woodstock, Ont.
Munroe, Frederick D., Moose Creek, Ont.
Parsons, William H., Harbour Grace, Nfld. oe
Patterson, William J., B.A., Moncton, N.B - τ
Payne, Gerard A. Τὰ, Georgetown, British Guiana.
Peat, Gilbert B., Andover, N.B.
*Rabinovitech, Max, Montreal. . F
Ralph, Albert J., Montreal. ᾿ :
Ritchie, Charles A., B.A., ‘Winnipeg, Man.
Rodrigues, Emanuel T., St. IAItES, SWiek,
Rothwell, Oswald E., B.A., Regina, N.W.T.
Ryan, Edward J., St. John, N.B. ἣν
Scott, Walter H., Edmonton, N.W.T.
Shaw, Robert MclL., B.A., Penobsquis, N.B.
Sheahan, John J., Haley’s Station, Ont.
Sims, Herbert L., Ottawa, Ont. (
Smith, Arthur B., Montreal. ὃ ν᾽.
Stewart, Robert L., Pembroke, Ont.
Strachan, Ernest D., Montreal. :
*Tannenbaum, David, Montreal. mt
Thomson, George D., Montreal. 3
Tilley, Alexander R., Ottawa, Ont.
Walker! dno:; J:, BA, Ormstown, Q.
Wallace, Carl T., Eureka, Cal., U.S.A.
Weldon, Richard C., Jr., Halifax, N.S.
White, John H., Ottawa, Ont.
Williams, Cyril S., Tyne Valley, P.E.I.
Wilson, Arthur A., Perth, Ont.
Wolff, Edward K., Montreal.
*Wright, Robert P., Montreal.
CONDITIONED STUDENTS.
Bonness, Elmond J.. St. Stephen. N.B.
ἡ es.
Gabie, William G., Kazubazua, Q. ᾿ ν
Gross, Charles J., Montreal. ‘i se
Hammond, James F., Ironside, Q. . Ἵ
McArthur, Clarence O., Summerside, ἜΣ ΠΣ
Shipley, Charles E., East Amherst, N.S. ue ci
Turnbull, James W., Springhill, Ont. - Seer . ‘
* Double Course. είς ‘
1 ἘΞ ΤΩΣ 4
322
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
Kelsea, William H., Lansdowne, N.S.
Ross, Colin E., Westmount, Q.
Ship, Abraham P., Montreal.
Sparks, John J., St. John’s Nfld.
SECOND YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Alguire, Alexander R., Cornwall, Ont.
Auld, John W., Vancouver, B.C.
Bonelli, Vincent, Jr., B.A., Vicksburg, Miss., U.S.A.
Bromley, John E., Pembroke, Ont.
Brown, Fred. F., Cornwall, Ont.
Brown, Gordon T., Danville, Q.
Burgess, Harry C., Sheffield Mills, N.S.
Cameron, Allan B., Lancaster, Ont.
Chisholm, Hugh A., B.A., Linwood, N.S.
Connor, Edward L., Waterloo, Ont.
Costello, Joseph W. W., B.A., Montreal.
Covernton, Charles F., Montreal.
Cumming, Alison, B.A., Scotsburn, N.S.
Dalton, James T., St. John, N.B.
Dougan, Benjamin H., St. John, N.B.
Dowler, William H., Billings Bridge, Ont.
Dudderidge, Charies R., B.A., Winnipeg, Man.
Duggan, Richard G., Hamilton, Ont.
Dykes, J. Watson, Nanaimo, B.C.
Ewart, David, Billings’ Bridge, Ont.
Fairie, James A., Montreal.
Finigan, Joseph F., Oshawa, Ont.
Garcelon, William S., B.A., Lewiston, Maine, U.S.A.
Gaudet, Elzear A., B.A., Moncton, N.B. -
Gill, Frederic D., St. John’s, Newfoundland.
Greene, Henry B., Lyndhurst, N.S.
Grimmer, Ray D., St. Andrews, N.B.
Hanington, Darrell P., Victoria, Bic:
Hanington, John W. B., Victoria, Bee:
Heagerty, John J., Montreal.
Henderson, Ernest H., B.A., Huntingdon, Q.
Henry, Edward G., B.A., Lennoxville, Q.
Hewett, Thomas J., Montreal.
Hume, Gordon M., Leeds Village, Q.
Joughins, James L., Los Angeles, Cals
King, James L., Barbados, B.W.I.
King, Shenton S., Albert, N.B.
Leslie, Howard A., Souris, P.E.I.
Likely, David S., B.A., St. John, NEB;
Loggie, William S., Chatham, N.B.
MacDermot, John H., Kingston, Jamaica.
MacDonald, John P., Ste. Agathe des Monts, Q.
MacKay, Malcolm E., Cape Breton, N.S.
MacLean, John D., Culloden, P.E.I.
‘McDonald, John A., B.A., Valleyfield, Q.
McDonald, John C., Peake’s Station, ἜΣΕΣΤ:
McDougald, Wilfred L., Cornwall, Ont.
McIntosh, Gustavus J., Dalkeith, Ont.
MeMeekin, Robert J., M.D., Plattsville, Ont.
McMicking, Antony E. T., Victoria, B-C.
MeMurtry, Shirley O., B.A., Montreal.
McMurtry, Walter C., Port Hope, Ont.
McNaughton, William B., St. Raphael, Ont.
928
Margolese, Oscar, Montreal.
Mason, James H., Lachute Mills, Q.
Mercer, Thomas C., Chilliwack, B.C.
Mersereau, Harris C., Doaktown, N.B.
Miller, Allan P., Chatham, Ont.
Mohr, Frederick W.C., Arnprior, Ont.
Moffatt, Charles F., Montreal.
Morrison, John C., Nanaimo, B.c.
Muckleston, Harold S., M.A., Perth, Ont.
Mulligan, James W., Omemee, Ont.
Munro, John Α., Pugwash, N.S.
Nelles, Thomas R., Simcoe, Ont.
Petersky, Samuel, Vancouver, B.C.
Prendergast, Archer R., B.A., Montreal.
Pruyn, William G., Napanee, Ont.
Raftery, Charles R., Montreal.
Richards, Ernest T. F., St. Vincent, B.W.I.
Robertson, Alexander R., Victoria, B.C.
Robertson, Beverley W., St. John, N.B.
Rommel, Ernest, Alma, N.B.
Ryan, Florance McD., B.A., Newburgh, Ont,
Sawyer, Alpha R., Roslindale, Mass., U.S.A.
Scott, William J., B.A., Montreal.
Scrimger, Francis A. C., B.A., Montreal.
Sinclair, Ernest E., Summerside, P.E.I.
Soady, John H., B.A., Toronto, Ont.
Somerville, Harry A., Waterville, Q.
Styles, William <A, L., Montreal.
Sullivan, James A., Arnprior, Ont.
Sweeney, John L., B.A., Dover, N.H., U.S.A.
Tees, Frederick J., B.A., Montreal.
Tierney, James E., Niagara ἘΠΕ INGYe. ἘΠ ἊΣ
Tull, John A. C., Antigua, B.W.I.
Turnbull, Ernest G., Branchton, Ont.
Valin, Romuald E., Ottawa, Ont.
Viner, Norman, B.A., Montreal.
Waterman, Chester, Ogdensburg, INES; UG SLA.
Wilkinson, William M., Woodstock, Ont.
Wood, Gilbert O., Kenmore, Ont.
Wotherspoon, Hugh C., Montreal.
Young, Charles A., Ottawa, Ont.
PARTIAL STUDENT.
Cunningham, Frederick J., Montreal.
THIRD YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Ainley, Lawrence T., B.A., Almonte, Ont.
Ainley, William E., B.A., St. George, Bermuda.
Alford, John H., Ottawa, Ont. .
Anton, Duncan L. S., Montreal.
Arnold, Duncan R., B.A., St. John, N.B.
Atkinson, Hubert S., Hanits Harbour, Newfoundland.
Bentley, John S., B.A., Truro, N.S.
Black, John C., Oxford, Ont.
Boire, William E., Manchester, N.H., U.S.A.
Bonin, Raoul P., Montreal.
Charman, Frank D., Wallace, N.S.
Chipman, William W., Ottawa, Ont.
Coffin, John W., Mt. Stewart, P.E.I.
Cook, William J., Coboconk, Ont.
Crack, Isaac E., B.A., Kingsbury; Q.
Crosby, Perey C., Marshfield, P.E.I.
Crowell, Bowman C., B.A., Yarmouth, N.S.
Davidson, Harry, D. J., Sherbrooke, Q.
Dillon, William P., Iroquois, Ont.
Douglas, Edgar, B.A., Halifax, N.S.
Dunn, John F., Elgin, Ont.
Eaton, Charles E., Stanbridge East, Q.
Ernandez, Joseph A., Spanish Town, Jamaica, B.W.I.
Faulkner, James A., B.A., Stirling, Ont.
Fisher, Ernest M., Blue Bonnets, Q.
Folkins, Clarence G., Millstream, N.B.
Ford, Henry S., Vancouver, B.C.
Fraser, Samuel, Leeds, Q:
Fyshe, James C., A.B.
Gibson, Gordon M., Huntingdon, Q.
Gibson, Richard, Nanaimo, B.C.
Gillis, John E., Darlington, P.E.I.
Gilroy, James R., Springhill, N.S.
Gormely, Joseph C., Finch, Ont.
Graham, Richard W., Sawyerville, Q.
Grant, Nelson P., Woodstock, N.B.
Greenwood, William T., St. Catharines, Ont.
Harrison, Laurie L., B.A., Maceau, N.S.
Hogan, Frederick J., Tignish. 9. ἘΠῚ:
Hotchkiss, Ernest A., Collinsville, Conn., U.S.A.
Howitt, Henry O., Guelph, Ont.
Inksetter, Frank S., Dundas, Ont.
Johnson, John G. W., B.A., Montreal.
Judson, Arthur H., Lynn, Ont.
Kerr, Harry H., Washington, D.C., U.S.A.
Keys, James M., Hulbert, Ont.
Lauchland, Lyman. C., B.A., -Cshawa, Ont.
Lincoln, William A., Stanstead, 9.
Lippiatt, Havelock T., Abbotsford, Q.
Losier; Arthur J., Tracadie, N-B.
MacKenzie, Angus B., Springfield, P.E.I.
» MacKid, Ludwig S., Calgary, Alta.
McIntosh, Lorne DeC., Dundela, Ont.
MckKenty, Esau R., Bath, Ont.
McKenzie, Robert P., Plainfield, Ont.
McLachlan, Donald C., Lochaber Bay, Q.
McLeod, William A., Finch, Ont.
Markson, Simpson M., Glen Robertson, Ont.
Martin, John C., Whitechurch, Ont.
Meakins, Jchn C., Hamilton, Ont.
Miller, Clarence, Stellarton, N.S.
Miller, Verum L., Bear River, N.S.
Murphy, Herbert H., B.A., Antrim, Ont.
Nagle, Sarsfield M., Almonte, Ont.
Nutter, John A., B.A., Montreal.
Pavey, Charles A., London, Ont.
Preston, Charles E., Ottawa, Ont.
Price, Joseph, Campbellton, N.B.
Quain, Bernard~P., Brushton, N.Y.
Rankin, Allan C., Montreal.
Reford, Lewis L., B.A., Montreal.
Richardson, Charles A., East Jefferson, Me., U.S.A.
Richardson, Cheslie A. C., B.A., Sydney, C.B.
2ilance, Charles D., Montreal.
Robinson, John L., St. Mary’s, Ont.
Rogers; James “D., 7B Ae, Montreal.
Sellery, Albert C., Kincardine, Ont.
“Shillington, Richard N. W., Ottawa, Ont.
“ims, Haig A., Montreal.
é
“ἢ
;
“
a. ͵
ee ὁ, ἢ ἘΚ πάν τὶ νιν -
y ‘ = pi,
ine pate rt Ἂς ἥ
ιν ἢ ἌΣ ᾿
Sere 38 yc ae Gat
<4y a peaches , of Ὅν. νὰ
£6) pa ; "
sc ty Ἵ » γ᾿
Π ἃ ! a
“A μον 9 AD
Smith, William A., B.A., Almonte, Ont.
Stewart, John A., Norborough, P.#E.I.
Warwick, Wm., St. John, N.B. -
White, Percival G., Woodstock, Ont.
Wigle, Charles A., Wiarton, Ont.
Willmore, James G., Montreal.
Wilson, Omar M., Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Wilson, Thomas R., B.A., Carp, Ont.
Winder, John B., Compton, Q.
Wood, Harry G., Faribault, Minn., U.S.A.
Wood, William H., Montreal.
Wright, George A., Stony Creek, N.B.
Yorston, Frederic P., M.A., Montreal.
CONDITIONED STUDENT.
Briggs, John A., New Westminster, B.C.
PARTIAL STUDENT.
Bullock, Curtis C. A., Roxton Paut, Vt., U.S.A.
FOURTH YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Allan, Robert, Montreal.
Allum, Arthur W., Renfrew, Ont.
Anderson, Charles W., B.A., Halifax, N.S.
Andrews, Jobn J., St. Lambert, Q.
Bailey, George W., Fredericton, N.B.
Bishop, George A., Kinburn, Ont.
Bishop, Leslie C., Mableton, P.Q.
Blakeman, Fred. W., Stratford, Ont.
Blair, Alexander K.. Chicoutimi, Q.
Boulter, James H., B.A., Picton, Ont.
Boyd, Oliver, Russell, Ont.
Boyd, Robert M., Belleville, Ont... -
Brooks, John E., B.A., Eastport, Maine, USA.
Campbell, Walter G., Brantford, Ont.
Carnochan, William L. Ὁ, Montreal.
Chamberlain, Harry B., Perth, Ont.
Chandler, Ernest C., Montreal.
Chaplin, Herbert Τὶ. &., St. John’s, Newfoundland.
Church, Harry C., Ghelseas7Q. > = ;
Cowperthwaite. Hugh H., St. John’s, Newfoundland.
Cram, William J., Carleton Place,’ Ont.- )
Croft, Laurance V., B.A., Middleville, Ont.
Cumming, William G., *B.A., Montreal.
Dickson, Archibald J., B.A., Goderich, Ont.
Dickson, William H.,’ Pembroke, Ont.
Donnelly, William H., Ogdensburg, N.Y., U.S.A.
Douglas, Frederick C., Montreal.
Dowson, Charles K., Montreal.
Doyle, Francis H., Natick, Mass., U.S.A. _
Ebbett, Percy L. B., Gagetown, N.B.
Elder, Robert, B.A., Trout River, Q.
Ells, Robert H., B.A., Ottawa, Ont.
English, John M., New Westminister, B.C.
Ferguson, William H., St. Thomas, Ont.
Forbes, Robert D., Stratford, Ont.
Fortin, Claude ἘΣ. T., B.A., Winnipes, Man.
Winfrey, William C., B.L., Sault Ste. Marie, Mich., U.S.A.
Burns, Arthur 5., B.A., Newton Highlands, Mass., UissoAs
920
Freeze, Edwin, Penobsquis, N.B.
Frost, Anson C., Montreal.
Gale, Withall P., Quebec, Q.
Gilmour, Clifford R., Brockville, Ont.
Gow, Robert J., Pevey, Ont.
Hansen, Niels C., M.A., Portland, Maine, U.S.A.
Hardisty, Richard H. M., B.A., Westmount, Q.
Horsfall, Frank L., B.A., Montreal.
Hynes, William T., Darnley, P.E.I.
Igoe, Owen A., Tarrytown, N.Y., U.S.A.
Kenny, Richard W., Ottawa, Ont.
King, Robert, B.A., Sackville, N.B.
Kissane, John W., Chateauguay, N.Y.
Lamb, Warwick V., St. Andrews, N.B.
Laurie, Ernest, B.A., Montreal.
Lundie, John A., B.A., Montreal.
Lyman, Warren S., Ph.B., Knoxville, Tenn., U.S.A.
Lynch, Arthur L., Ottawa, Ont.
Macdonald, Ronald St. J., Bailey’s Brook, N.S.
Mackenzie, William A., Wood Islands, P.EH.I.
Mackinnon, Ivan W., Charlottetown, P.E.I.
McCulloch, Joseph M., Durham, Ont.
MeDiarmid, Colin A., Kemptville, Ont.
McDonald, Stephen H., B.A., St. John, N.B.
McDonald, Paul Alex., Dundee Centre, Q.
McEachern, Isaac W. T., Rockland, Ont.
McEwen, John R., B.A., Dewittville, Q.
McGrath, Francis C., Norway, P.E.I.
McGuigan,, James D., Kelly’s Cross, P.EH.I.
McKechnie, David W., Dundas, Ont.
McIntosh, H. H., Montreal. Q.
McIntosh, James A., Vankleek Hill, Ont.
McLaren, Daniel D., Felton, Ont.
McLaughlin, Edmund M., Winona, Minn., U.S.A.
McPherson, Thos., B.A., Stratford, Ont.
Maby, William J., Cohoes, N.Y., U.S.A.
Magee, Charles F., North Gower, Ont.
Meindl, Alexander G., Mattawa, Ont.
Mitchell, Isaiah E., B.A., Sherbrooke, Q.
Montgomery, Charles H., St. John, N.B.
Morris, Samuel C., Wallace, N.S.
Moses, Harry C., Caledonia, Ont.
Munroe, Harrington B., B.A., Almonte, Ont.
Munroe, Hugh E., St. Elmo, Ont.
Munro, James H., Maxville, Ont.
Murray, James 5., St. John, N.B.
Nelson, James S., Ottawa, Ont.
Nelson, William E., Montreal.
Ness, Wm. Howick, Q.
O’Brien, Clarence W., B.A., Noel, N.S.
O’Neill, James M., Massena, N.Y., U.S.A.
Park, Andrew W., Durham, Ont. :
Parris, Norman D., Barbados, W.I.
Patch, Frank S., B.A., Montreal.
Pavey, Harry L., London, Ont.
Peterson, George R., Tay’s Hill, Ont.
Puddington, Berton A., St. John, N.B.
Rehfuss, Wallace N., B.A., Bridgewater, N.S.
Robertson, William G., Westmount, Q.
Saunders, William Edward, Woodstock, N.B.
Scott, Walter, Montreal.
Secord, Wesley H., Brantford, Ont.
Shaw, David LeB., Portland, Me., U.S.A.
Slack, Malcolm R., Farnham, Q.
Smith, Charles M., Red Mountain, Q.
ὯΝ 921
fg Steeves, Elmore O., Upper Sackville, N.B.
a) Stowell, Frank E., Worcester, Mass., U.S.A.
; Strong, Norman W., B.A., Cambria, Q.
δε Symmes, Charles Ritchie, Aylmer, Q.
k Taggart, Edmund A., Ottawa, Ont.
Tanner, Charles A. H., Windsor Mills, Q.
Thomas, Stanley B., Barbados, W.I.
Townsley, Robert H., Montreal.
Truax, Windsor, Farnham, Θ᾽
Turner, George H., B.A., Baie Verte, N.B.
Warren, John G., Montreal.
White, Samuel G., Ottawa Fast, Ont.
} Wilkins, Fred. F., Montreal.
cs Wilson, Arthur, Russell, Ont.
a ο ----».
τ SPECIAL STUDENTS.
Disbrow, John R., M.D., Jacquet River, N.B.
Hitel, Adam J., M.D., Montreal.
Hutchinson, John W., Westmount, Q.
Faculty of Applied Science.
FIRST YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
“9 Anderson, Frederic W., Ottawa, Ont.
se Baylis, Harold A., Montreal.
Beaudry, Abel C., Montreal.
Bell, George E., St. Thomas, Ont.
Benedict, Elmore M., Brantford, Ont.
Black, Douglas E., Montreal.
Blackader, Gordon H., Montreal.
Boyd, Alfred M. S., Westmount, Q.
Brady, James C., Victoria, B.C.
Brennan, George E., Ottawa, Ont.
ἡ Brown, William G. B., Quebec, Que.
Carlyle, Russell, Woodstock, Ont.
Conway, Edmund J., Chemainus, ἘΞ OF
. Corrigan, Thomas L., Brockville, Ont.
ἊΣ ‘ Cowen, Reginald P., Dalston, Cumberland, England.
Daly, William J., Montreal.
Davidson, Thomas R., Montreal.
(2) *Dickenson, John G., Hazel Hill, N.S.
Durland, Royden K., Yarmouth, N.S.
reg Ewens, W. Sydney, Owen Sound, Ont.
Forbes, John McNeil, Bonavista, Newfoundland.
Frith, George H., Cummings’ Bridge, Ont.
Gaunt, Reginald T., Montreal.
Greenshields, John G., Montreal.
Grier, Arthur H., Montreal.
Gurd, A. Douglas, Montreal.
Hadley, Harry, Montreal.
Harding, Winthrop K., Derby Line, Vt., U.S.A.
Harry, Archippus C., Kingston, Ja., B.W.1.
Harvie, James, Westmount, Q.
*Harvie, Robert, Westmount, Q.
* Double Course.
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
Hibbard, Melville L., Farnham, ΘᾺ
(2) Hodgson, Cassels V., Montreal. ‘
Howell, Edgar N., Westmount, Q. -
Jackson, Maunsell B., Toronto, Ont. +
(2) Jardine, Ernest I. W., Manitou, Man.
Jones, Andrew U., St. John, N.B.
Kirkpatrick, Everett C., Montreal West, Q.
Landry, A. Raymond, Dorchester, NB
Lea, William S., Victoria, P.E.T, ‘
Lemoine, Louis, B.A., Montreal, Q.
Leonard, Albert P., Westmount, Q. °
Lynch, Francis C. C., Carillon; Q.
Macdonald, Peter J., Winnipeg, Man.
McCuaig, G. Eric, Montreal.
McDonald, Harold F., Fort Qu’Appelle, Assa., IN, WE.
McLachlan, D. William, Lochaber Bay, Q.
McLachlin, Dan., Arnprior, Ont.
McMeekin, Albert, Bright, Ont.
Mudge, Reginald, Montreal.
Newton, Stephen G., Drummondville, (Σ
Νογίομ, Thomas J., B.A., Montreal.
Pedley, Norman F., Montreal.
Pickard, Herbert G., Exeter, Ont.
Pillow, Howard, Montreal.
Poupore, Leo, Montreal. a)
Presner, Joseph, Montreal.
Roger, Alec., Billings Bridge, Ont.
(2) Rolland, Robert, Montreal.
Ryan, Frederick G., St. Lambert, Q.
Scott, W. Gordon, Valleyfield, Q.
Sharp, Lester A., Summerside, P.E.I. :
(2) Skelton, Henry M., Stoneycroft, Rosemere, Q.
Slavin, Reginald V., Deseronto, Ont.
Small, James D., Westmount, Q.
Steedman, William F., Montreal.
Taylor, Allan H., Ottawa, Ont.
Tupper, Frederick McD., Truro, N.S.
Turley, Edward J., Frankford, Ont.
Walker, Cecil W., Kensington, P.E.I.
Waterous, Logan M., Brantford, Ont.
Winter, Elliot E., Georgetown, British Guiana.
*Wickware, Francis G., Easton’s Corners, Ont.
‘
CONDITIONED STUDENTS.
Bellasis, Brian M., Montreal.
Burnett, Archibald, Montreal.
Cattanach, Frederick W. C., Newport, Vt., U.S.A.
Cole, L. Heber, Montreal.
(2) Dickson, Wallace, Montreal.
Harmer, C. Gerald, Toronto, Ont.
Graham, Wendell 5., New Glasgow, N.S.
Hodge, William J. R., Capleton, Q.
Loudon, Andrew C., Ottawa, Ont.
Macdonald, R. Ross, Hamilton, Ont.
Mackay, Robert M., New Glasgow, N.S. ᾿
Mackay, George W., New Glasgow, N.S. f
Mackinnon, Hugh D., Finch, Ont.
* Double Course. ;
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
» «it Any ᾿ ῥΑ, Ὁ. δὲ Ὁ re a ee
SR ὁ Noe Sec hats Wes aR Ὁ
᾿ Bt Bee ae ty ey ae it gee :
/ S i Ἦ ΤΑῚ ΕΣ
7 ; :
x
Beoreve a es Prevost, Armand, Ottawa, Ont.
: Robb, Roland W., Amherst, N.S.-
Shorey, Harold E., Montreal.
Simard, Joseph W., Montreal.
Slater, Nicholas J., Ottawa, Ont. ;
Smith, Kenneth H., London, Ont
Wilson, Starr R. L., Lunenburg, N.S.
Wheaton, Isaac, Sackville, ἼΝΞΒ.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
Browne, Robert Russell, Montreal.
Haskell, Ludlow St. J., Montreal.
Hassberger, James S., Westmount, Q.
Howe, John Parnell, Pembroke, Ont.
Johnson, R. Ernest, Montreal.
Lantier, Jean O., Montreal.
Mather, William A., Rat Portage, Ont.
(8) Morris, Hugh B., Dorval, Q.
Pease, Harold McK., Montreal.
Phillips, Thomas N., Rat Portage, Ont.
Richards, William A., Pembroke, Ont. /
Wright, James V., Montreal. B
SECOND YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Anderson, Lewis B., Lunenburg, N.S.
Archibald, Hiram H., Harbour Grace, Nfld.
Bain, James W. L., Montreal.
ν᾿ Baker, C. Stanley H., Hampstead, London, England.
Barclay, Charles H., Ξί. Paul, Minn., U.S.A.
Batchelder, Charles K., Newport, Vt., U.S.A.
Belanger, Victor E..A., L’Orignal, Ont.
Blackadar, Thomas B., Hebron, Yarmouth, N.S.”
Blanchet, Guy H., Ottawa.
Bowness, E. W., Kensington, Powers
Boyle, Robert W.., Carbonear, Nfld. ᾿Ξ
Bray, Raymond P., Campbellton, N.B. :
Burpee, Lockwood, Gibson, N.B.
Campbell, John A., Cheltenham, Ont.
Churchill, Cecil A., Hantsport, N.S. Σ
Cockshutt, Harvey W., Brantford, Ont. ,
Cropper, William C. McL., Kingstown, St. Vincent, W.1.’
Cunha, S. H. Stanley, Kingston, Jamaica, W.1!.
- Dickson, George Τὰ (M.A.), Truro, N.S.
Drinkwater, Kenneth E., Montreal.
Badie, George H. H., Montreal.
Eaton, ἘΣ. Courtlandt, Montreal.
Findlay, Delmer C., Danville, Q.
(3) Fraser, Donald MaclI., Montreal.
Fraser, Thomas C., New Glasgow, N.S.
Fyshe, Thomas M., Montreal.
Gibbs, Harold E., Port Arthur, Ont.
Gillespie, William K., St. Stephen, N.B.
Gillis, Hugh B., Sydney, N.S.
Glassco, Gordon B., Bamilton, Ont.
(3) Hamilton, Alfred McL., Westmount, Q.
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefixed to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
swhere the name is found.
ι
ON, Petar Bat he i by
330
(3) Hamilton, Wilfrid, Montreal.
*Harris, Alan D., Ottawa, Ont.
Higgins, Benjamin H., London, Ont.
Hogan, John, Westmount, Q.
Idsardi, Harold, St. Thomas, Ont.
Jewett, F. Coburn, Sheffield, N.B.
Johnstone, George A., Rednersville, Ont.
Joseph, A. Pinto, Quebec. @.
Jost, Edward B., Guysboro, N.S.
Kydd, George, Montreal.
Livingston, Douglas C., Corfield, B.C.
Lockerby, Robert A., Montreal.
MacDermot, Sidney G. F., Gordon Town, Jamaica, W.lI.
MacMillan, Henry H., Alberry Plains, P.E.I.
Macnab, John J., Elsinore, Bruce Co., Ont.
(3) Martin, Edward N., York, Ont.
McIntosh, Robert, Newcastle, Ont.
McLean, Donald, B.A., Campbellton, N.B.
McLeish, Ian, Montreal.
Miner, R. Herbert, Cowansville, Q.
Mooney, Chester A., Ausable Chasm, N.Y., U.S.A.
(3) Mundy, Oswald A., Hamilton, Ont.
Pattison, Albert M., Clarenceville, Q.
(3) Piché, Ernest A., Montreal.
(3) Price, Herbert L., Montmorency Falls, Q.
Pinch, Harry H., Owen Sound, Ont.
Redpath, William, Montreal.
Ritchie, A. Bruce, Halifax, N.S.
Robertson, Arthur F., Montreal.
Robitaille, Henry, Quebec, Q.
Ross, Walter G., Port Perry, Ont.
Ryan, John H., Prescott, Ont.
Scouler, Gavin T., New Westminster, B.C.
Sharpe, George P., Agassiz, B.C.
Shaughnessy, William J., Montreal.
Small, Edward A., Montreal.
Smith, Ralph E., Windsor, N.S.
Sutherland, Charles, New Glasgow, N.S.
Sutherland, Daniel H., River John, N.S.
Turnbull, Harvard, Montreal.
Weagant, Roy A., Derby Line, Vt., U.S.A.
Wheaton, Hazen A., Elgin, Albert Co., N.B.
Willard, Charlie, Morrisburg, Ont.
Wright, Clifton ἘΠ Barbadoes, W.I.
Young, Horace G., Oznabruck, Ont.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
Eve, A. S., B.A., Cambridge, Eng.
Irving, Thomas C., Toronto, Ont.
Rheaume, Herman C., Montreal.
THIRD YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
Atkinson, M. Brodie, Montreal.
Blumenthal, Samuel, Montreal.
Cameron, John A., Toronto, Ont.
* Double Course.
The figure (1), (2), (3) or (4), prefiexd to a name, indicates that
the student takes a class in the corresponding year as well as in that
where the name is found.
551
"tae Campbell, Colin St. G., Aldershott, Ont.
Cardew, John H., Youngs Point, South Beach, Q.
r ‘Carlyle, Ernest J., Woodstock, Ont.
Chambers, Robert A., Montreal.
Chaplin, Charles J.. Westmount, Q.
Cole, George H., Ottawa, Ont.
Crichton, Gordon L., Halifax, N.S.
Davis, Patrick, Windsor, Ont.
Dawe, Robert G., Bay Roberts, Nfld.
Devlin, Cecil G., Mohawk, Ont.
Deyell, Harold T., Port Hope, Ont.
Drysdale, William F., Montreal.
Dutcher, Howard K., Charlottetown, P.E.I.
Ells, Sidney G. (B.A.), Ottawa, Ont.
Gillies, George A., Carleton Place, Ont.
Gnaedinger, Ernest C., Montreal.
Greey, John W. G., Toronto, Ont.
Grice, J. H., Bootle, Cumberland, Eng.
Harvey, John B., Lyndhurst, Ont.
Healy, Frederick E., Picton, Ont. -
Johnson, Frederick M. G., Montreal.
Kemp, Robert A., Seaforth, Ont.
Kent, George M., Truro, N.S.
Lambart, Howard F., Ottawa, Ont.
Lawrence, William D., Maitland, N.S.
LeMaistre, Frederick J., Westmount, Q.
MacNaughton, W. G., B.A., Huntingdon, Q.
Marrotte, Louis H., Westmount, Q:
McCloskey, Frederick W., Boiestown, N.B.
ξ McDougall, Clarence H., South Maitland, N.S.
a, McDougall, George K., Montreal.
- McPhee, James C., Loch Katrine, Ant. Co., N.S.
ee McMurtry, Gordon O., B.A., Montreal.
ἴοι Parlee, Norman W., Rossland, B.C.
Be Roffey, Miles H., Braintree, Essex, Eng.
Bh Scott, George W., Montreal.
Teas Sullivan, Michael H., Ottawa, Ont.
ὙΨΩ͂Ν Taylor, Reginald F., Gananoque, Ont.
Su Webster, George B:, Montreal.
a Wenger, John A., Ayton, Ont.
~ Fa Wilkes, Frederick C..D., Brantford, Ont.
πε Wilson, William D., Hamilton, Ont.
Wurtele, John S. H., Acton Vale, Q.
PARTIAL STUDENTS.
a Robinson, Harold G., Bristol, Eng.
os Robinson, Kenneth S., Bristol, Eng.
ε"- Spencer, Arthur G., B.A., Truro, N.S.
τ ae FOURTH YEAR.
yy ΝΑ Baker, William E., Montreal.
yi Beck, Alfred E., Penetanguishene, Ont.
ae Blatch, Harry E., St. John’s, Nfid.
Boright, Sherman H., Sutton, Q.
Brown, Frederick B., Montreal.
Cohen, Harris, Montreal.
Cole, G. Percy, Montreal.
Conklin, Roscoe, M.A., Winnipeg, Man.
Crawford, Stuart, Montreal.
Cumming, Rutherford, Scotsburn, Pictou Co, N.S.
μα! ena Br Ae Vine
a Sra s NG ek
ae ᾿ ea {
‘ Lary Ζ -"
4 ᾽ > OS be
( rite Riba. WEE Les yt
;
Edgar, John H., Montreal. |
Hgleson, James E. A., Ottawa, Ont. ;
Foreman, Alvah E., Vancouver, B. Cc: ‘iat
Gale, George G., Quebec, Q. |
Hall, Oliver, Washing gton, Ont,
Haskin, Laurence 5. (M.E.), Waterford, Conn., melissa
James, Bertram, eae Content, Nfld.
Jones, Harold W., Ottawa, Ont. ;
Keith, Wraser &., "Smith’s Falls, Ont. ;
Ixendall, George, Vancouver, B.C.
Landry, Pierre A. (B.A.), Dorchester, N.B
Langley, Albert G., Victoria, B.C.
Lucas, Allen 5. B. ‘8.A,.). Hamilton, Ont.
Maclaren, Francis F., Huntingdon, Q.
McCaskill, Kenneth, Vankleek Hill, Ont.
McDonald, James F., Westville, N.S.
McKay, Frederick A., Montreal.
McKergow, Charles M., Westmount, Q.
Millar, James L.; Fembroke, Ont.
Musgrave, Robert, Duncans, B.C.
Musgrave, William N., Duneans, B.C.
Pemberton, William Pp. D., Gonzales, Vancouver, B. Cc.
Porcheron ,Alphonse, Montreal.
Reynolds, Leo B., Waterford, Ont.
Roberts, Arthur R., Montreal.
Robertson, John F., Charlottetown, P.E.L
Rodger, Herbert F., St. John’s Nfid.
Ross, James (ens Embre, Ont. r,
Rowlands, Charles, Albany, N.Y., U.S.A.
Rowley, Lorne E., M.A., Marysville, N.B.
Savage, George M.,Montreal.
Stokes, Chas. W., Waodstock, N.B.
Stovel, Joseph H., Tarento, Ont.
Thorpe, William H., Montreal.
Tilt, Edwin B., Goderich, Ont.
Trimingham, Charles L., Barbadoes, W.I.
Facuity of Comparative Medicine.
FIRST YEAR.
Barnett, E., Montreal.
Cawsey, H., Halifax, N.S. 2
Gale, E., Quebec, Q. :
Grignon, R., St. Adéle, Q.
Maguire, F. H., Waterloo, Q.
Miller, W., Rouse’s Point, N.Y., U.S.A.
Morgan, H., Mantreal.
Moriarity, Ed., East Hampton, Conn., U.S.A.
Morris, A. S., Jersey City, New Jersey, U.S.A.
Thurston, 5., Sydney, C.B.
SECOND YEAR.
Carroll, F. F., Boston, Mass., U.S.A.
Gauvin, N., Quebec, Q.
Gray, F., Antigonish, N.S.
Meakings, E. A.. Montreal.
Stoute, C. P., Belleville, Barhados, W.I.
Se i ὦ ΑΝ, δ , ‘ ' 333
‘THIRD YEAR.
Gaw, Hugh, Clinton, Mass., U.S.A.
Halcro, Geo., Hudson, Q.
Henderson, C. M., Vancouver, B.C.
Littlehales, J. E., Montreal. aaa
Paterson, H., Montreal. ὁ
COLLEGES ASSOCIATED: IN ARTS.
Stanstead Wesleyan College.
FIRST YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES.
t ,
Cass, Frank O. Edwards, William.
Flanders, Arlington. Williams, C. Louise.
CONDITIONED STUDENTS.
Phelps, M. Gertrude. Stanton, R. Gertrude.
PARTIAL STUDENT.
Stanton, M. Charlotte.
Vancouver College.
FIRST YEAR.
j UNDERGRADUATES.
Anstie, Jennie. : McLean, Margaret.
Brydone, Jack F. W. McPhalen, Mary M.
Davidson, Gwladys D. McQueen, Kate H.
Foreman, Nina B. McTaggart, Donald E.
Langley, Celia G. Smith, Arthur N.
Loat, Kathleen B. Stewart-Hamilton, Evelyn dBm
*.
CONDITIONED STUDENTS.
Bethune, Katherine. , Copeland, Lydia B.
. Ellis, Robert W.
SECOND YEAR.
UNDERGRADUATES,
Bajus, William P. Milne, Helen B.
DeBeck, Edwin K. . Price, Thomas E.
Donaldson, William A.
SPECIAL STUDENT.
. Laverock, Lily J.
Students” im Li Wh peppers crete -te ersten wi clave orate mie toleheile aidoko wi elaielae σοι. Οδ0 δόδδοξι)
Mp “« Arts, McGill oe rape ---
Men—Graduates.. .. .. ὌΝ ἀν Creator ie
Wndergradiwaves sy. yer mcs πρέποι. 122
Gonditioneds. 2-8 fakes ote Ἐπ Δ
Partials... πον ene da
Women GEAGUATCS ey no) προ ie -cl.-/ iene moe oD)
Underesraduates.- py ewan eek enna OL
Gonditioneds. 38 Mia coe ae ee ee 10
Partialin sox ΟΣ eee OO
Students in Arts, Vancouver College.. Sit cia 4 SE ee eae tia!
se 4 scCaiStanstead: Collezen. οι τ ΣΝ ΤΠ ee
---- 856
Students in Μοαϊοϊηθ.. .. . PINE: gO Sgt LOPE eae MU Se tern cea
Students in Applied Science το ΘΟ ΠΤ hee
ἸΒβοζο τ τ ες δεν τ ον πὸ ΤῸ sete ἀν πο οὐ ὅς ταὶ
Conditioned τς ΚΡ το πεν τ 5 2.
Partials. sees eke ΣΑΣ oe: ον τς τα ΣΝ
Students in Veterinary Science.. ..
Deduct repeated in different Faculties.. .. .. .. .. 18
Total «5: hsv λέν ον Sethe 5 SRC= ἘΠῊΝ Coan eae OOS
Wniversity and Graduates’ Societies.
McGill Physical Society.
President—Prof. E. Rutherford.
Vice-President—Prof. J. Cox.
Rec. Secretary—Dr. H. T. Barnes.
Asst. Rec. Secretary—H. Lester Cooke, B.A.
Executive Committee—Dr. J. Wallace Walker, Dr. A. Stansfield,
Dr aCoker.
Undergraduates’ Literary Society.
CONSTITUTED 1880.
Hon. President—Principal Peterson.
President—E. McGougan, Arts, 04,
1st Vice-President—A. D. McKenzie, Arts, 4.
Qnd Vice-President—C. Adams, Arts, ᾽05.
Secretary—L. P. Edwards, Arts, ᾽05.
Vreasurer—J. C. Nicholson, Arts, 705.
Committee—W. S. Johnson, Arts, Ὃ8 ; G. Ὁ. Couture, Arts, 08 ; J.
DeWitt, Law, 05; W. L. Carr, Arts, Ὅδ; T. M. Papineau, Arts, 04.
Reporters—A. W. Cameron, Arts, 705; R. P. Wallace, Law, 06.
Delta Sigma Society.
ESTABLISHED 1884.
President—Ada Dickson.
Vice-President—Rosebud Michaels.
Secretary-l'reasurer—Mabele Rorke.
Committee—Catherine Mackenzie, Marion Taber, Clarissa Blakemore.
McGill Historical Ciub.
President—Talbot M. Papineau, Arts, ᾽04.
Vice-President—Grant D. Campbell, Arts, ’04.
Secretary—Gordon Brown, Arts, ’04.
Treasurer—L. P. Edwards, Arts, 705.
Executive Committee—Prof. C. W. Colby, M.A., Ph.D. ; W. J. Healy,
Arts, '04; O. B. McCallum, ATTSH 205.
Reporter—E. W. Sheldon, Arts, 4.
McGill Applied Science Society.
(Officers, 1902.)
Hon. President—Dr. H. T. Bovey.
President—H. P. Borden, Civ. Eng., ’02.
Vice-Presidents—C. M. Campbell, Mining Engineering, 702; T. W.
Hicks, Mechanical Engineering, 2: J. H. Edgar, Mech. Eng., 702.
Secretary—J. G. Ross, ’03.
Treasurer—O. Hall, 703.
Ond Year Representatives—E. J. Carlyle, 704: G. O. McMurtry, B.A.,
704; J. J. McNab, 705.
Reporters—C. Rowlands, 703: J. E. A. Egleson, ’03; F. ἘΣ. Sterns,
02; H. Biggar, ’02.
” a 3. Pe ὶ "
4 , n ΣΝ λ ἣ ᾿
Τῷ ΝΥ πα κὰ ἢ ΒΡ ἂν a¥9 fi πὰ
% Z ΕΝ ate) «4
νον ab i Fae 9 ψ'
ἐφ vay Δ εὖ
ἡ. ὃ 2 by c
᾿ > " A.
; ἢ ἕ ἢ ᾿ th 3 te 4
{ Ι ῥὲ # wor ἢ
- 12 ν OG ὦ, ΚΝ
, 336 ν oF ἽΝ - ὮΝ
The McGill Mining Society.
ORGANIZED 1891. :
Hon. President—Dr. J. B. Harrington.
President—Robert A. Chambers, App. Sci.. ’04.
Vice-President—W. Parker, App. Sci., ’05.
Seeretary-Treasurcr—D. C. Livingstone, App. Sci., ’05.
McGill University Chemical Society.
President—B. J. Harrington, M.A., LL.D.
Vice-President—R. F. Ruttan, B.A., M.D.
Secretary-Treasurer—N. N. Evans, M.Sc.
Hzecutive Committec—B. J. Harrington, M.A., LL.D. ; R. F. Ruttan,
B.A., M.D.; J. Wallace Walker, MA., Rb Hes Barnes DSC." INES
N. Evans, M.Sc.
McGill Medical Society.
Hon. President—Dr. F. W. Hamilton.
President—V. IL. Miller, B.A...
Vice-President—J. Appleton Nutter, B.A.
Secretary—Alison Cumming, B.A.
Assist. Secretary—H. H. Christie.
Pathologist—lL. L. Harrison, B.A.
Treasurer—E. J. Tees; B.A.
Reporter—A. C. Sellery. ; ;
Councillors—Dr. Shepherd, Dr. Mills, W. 5. Patterson, B.A.
Young Men’s Christian Association of McGill
University. Hee
OBJECT—To promote the Christian character of its members and
the cause of Christianity in the University,
MEMBERSHIP—The active membership of the, Association consists
of graduates and students of the University who are members of
some evangelical church. Any graduate and student of gcod moral
character may become an associate member. <A social reception is
given to new studenis at the beginning of- the session. ;
Full particulars regarding regular religious services and Bible
Study Classes are given in the Hand Book of the Association.
Hon. President—Alex. Johnson, M.A., Τὰ. Ὁ... D.C.L.
President—G. H. Cole, Sci., ᾽04.
1st Vice-President—A. D. Mackenzie, Arts, ’04.
2nd Vice-President—L. C. Lauchland, Med., ’04.
Ree. Secretary—W. G. MacNaughton, B.A., Sei., ’04.
Treasurer—S. O. McMurtry, B.A., Med., 705.
Asst.-Treasurer—E. M. Benedict, Sci., ’06.
Representative from Law—W. U. Cotton, B.A.
General Secretary—George Irving, B.A.
CHAIRMEN OF COMMITTEES. !
Religious Mectings—A. D. Mackenzie, Arts, ’04.
Bible Study—E. W. Sheldon, Arts, ’04.
Social—D. E. Black, Sci., ’06.
Membership—W. J. Paterson, B.A., Med., ’06.
New Students and Handbook—General Secretary.
Builetin and Reading Roem*-R. A. Kemp, Sci., °04’.
ee We oe υρλσὺν
‘ δ ον 3 ΝΜ é
y ον a ig ; my z
ne
ΠῚ
Cini cay “Ἢ ᾿ »
ag ae ΕΝ } ὸ ) ay ΓΞ Μ ,
ΡΥ ἊΣ ta ES μὰ ον Τρ eee ars to 7. ee ,"
Υ ΟΣ , ν᾽ ‘ " ; -,
Missionary—F. J. LeMaistre, Sci., 04.
-~Musical—V. Τὶ. Miller, B.A., Med., ’04.
Building—G. H. Cole, Scei., ’04.
"Ἂ Finance—S. O. McMurtry, B.A., Med., Ὃδ.
City Missions—John A. McDonald, B.A., Med., °05.
; New Students—George Irving, B.A. E
Young Women’s Christian Association.
. ESTABLISHED 1887 (As THEO DoRA SOCIETY).
OBsJECT.—The development of Christian character in the members,
and the development of active Christian work, particularly among
the young women’ of the University. _Cpnen for membership to
students of the Royal Victoria Cellege for Women.
President—Ivy Gardner.
Vice-President—Nora Bowman.
Ree. Secretary—is.anel Fraser:
Cor. Secretary—Kathleen McCaily.
T'reasurer—Birdena Clark.
McGill University Athletic Association.
ESTABLISHED 1884.
Hon. President—R. Tait MacKenzie, B.A.. M.D.
Hon. Treasurer—Prof. C. H. McLeod, Ma.E.
: Presideni—G. M. Kent, Sci., ᾽04.
Vice-President—W. P. Ogilvie, Law, ’04.
οὐ, Treasurer—W. Stewart, Arts, 705.
Secretary—R. O. McMurtry, Arts, ’05.
Representatives:—Law—E. McDcugall, ’04; Arts—T. M. Papineau,
704; Medicine—R. N. W. Shillington, ’04; Science—E. N. Martin, ᾽04;
Football—l. Lb. Reford, B.A., Med., 04; Cricket—Prof. C. E. Moyse;:
Skating and Hockey—S. H. Maclaren, Science, ‘03: Basketball—A. E.
Foreman, Science, ’63; Tennis—R. N. Hickson, B.A.
McGill University Football Club.
Hon. Przsident—Dr. ΝΥ. Turner.
Hon. Treasurer—Dr. R. Tait MacKenzie.
President—Lewis L. Reford, B.A., Med.. ’04.
Vice-President—S. M. Nagle, Med., ’04.
Necretary—W. Wilson, Sci., 704
Tireasurer—H. N. Martin, Sci., ’04.
Manacer—Gordon Gikson, Med., ’04.
. Committee :—Arts—W. Molson, ’04 ; T. M. Papineau, ’04 ; Medicine—
G. A. Wright, ’04; P. C.’Crosby, ’04 ; Science— — Hamilton, 704; J.
McPhee, ’04.
McGili University Association Football Club.
Hon. President—Prof. McLeod.
President—R. W. Boyle. Sci., ’05.
Vice-President— ——- Richards.
Secretary—A. McMeekin, Sci., ’05.
‘ Treasurer—E. McGouean, Arts, ’04.
Committee—Max Fyshe, Science, 05; J. M. Forbes, Science, 06;
J. E. Featherston, Arts, ’0o.
308
McGill University Cricket Club.
Hon. Presidents—Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal,
Principal Peterson
President—Prof. C E. Moyse.
Vice-President—A. R. Oughtred, B.C.L.
Secretary-Treasurcr—W. C. Baber.
Assist. -Secretary—J. J. Lomax.
Captain—W. W. Walker.
Captain Second EKleven—W. Robinson.
: Committee—H. C. Hill, F. W. Hibbard, F. L. Gunter, 5. B. Thomas,
W. Robinson.
McGill Lawn Tennis Club.
Hon. President—Mr. H. M. Jaquays.
President—J. D. G. McCallum.
Vice-President—T. M. Fyshe.
Secretary—G. C. McDonald.
T'reasurer—W. Molson.
Committee :—Graduates—P. Molson,; Arts:—J. ὦ, Dickenson ;
Science—G. M. Savage; Medicine—D. P. Hannington ; Law—H. S.
Williams.
McGill University Skating and Hockey Club.
Hon. President—Prof. 5. H. Capper.
President—J. H. Maclaren, Sci., ’03.
Vice-Presidext—G. McDonald, Arts, ’04.
Secretary—L. 5. Mackid, Med., ’04.
Treasurer—K. Drinkwater, Sci., ’05.
Committee: —Law—C. G. Mackinnon, ’03; W. P. Ogilvie, 704; S. Dale
Harris, 05; Medicine—K. Blair, 03; H. O. Howitt, ’04; C. Young, 05;
BE. A. Lindsay, δ: Arts—A. Dunlop, ’03; F. Gurd, *04; R. O. Mc-
Murtry, °05; F. A. Patrick, ‘06; Science—G. G. Gale, ’03; BE. G.
Gnaedinger, 704; R. A. Lockerby, ’05; F. G. Wickware, ’06.
McGill Basket Ball Club.
Hon. President—Dr. R. Tait McKenzie.
President—A. EX. Forman, Sci.
Vice-President--—D. Ross, Arts.
Secretary-Treasurer—A. McKergow, Sci.
Captain—B. H. Higgins, Sci.
Member of Executive Committee:—G. M. Gibson, Med.
R. V. C. Athletic Club.
President—Catherine McKenzie.
Vice-President—Ruth Lyman.
Secretary-Treasurer—Ruth Holway.
Manager of Basketball Club—Kathleen McCally.
Manager of Hockey Club—Helen Freeze.
McGill Glee and Banjo Club.
Hon. President—T. G. Roddick, M.D., LL.D.
President—F. C. Douglas, Med., ’03.
Vice-President—R. A. Chambers, Sci., 704.
Business Manager—W. H. Dickson, Med., ’03.
Secretary—F. B. Brown, Sci., ’03.
Ezecutive Committec—A. B. Silcox, Arts, 06; Hal. White, Med., ’06;
S.C. Bils: ΟΞ ΟῚ» Ὁ:
4
ΡΥ, re Tee Ee ae Ὁ Ἢ
wet ς
Fe ac tlt sulla ee ies
eo ee es
y
¥
WE ΟΣ mee ee
SEE ere ΝΩ͂Ι
PETE νι
“lla
v
4
\
“οἷ
pay tte
av
i”
Δ.
>
339
Graduates’ Society of McGill University.
(Officers, 1901.)
INCORPORATED 24TH JULY, 1820.
President—Malcolm C. Baker, D.V.S.
Vice-Presidents—Charles W. Wilson, M.D.; Miss Helen R. Y. Reid,
B.A.; Archibald MacArthur, B.A.
Secretary—J. Claud Hickson, B.A., B.C.L.
Treasurer—Francis Topp, B.A., B.C.L.
Resident Councillors—A. Rives Hall, B.A., B.C.L.; Frank D. Adams,
M.A., Ph.D. ; Homer M. Jaquays, M.A.Sc. ; E. Fabre Surveyor, B.A.,
B.C.L.; Howard M. Church, M.D.; W. F. Angus, B.A.Sc.
Non-Resident Councillors—The Presidents of the British Columbia
Graduates’ Society, the New England Graduates’ Society, the New
York Graduates’ Society, the Maritime Graduates’ Society, and the
Hon. W .W. Lynch, D.C.L,. Knowlton, Que.
Alumnze Society of McGill University.
President—K. Campbell, B.A.
Vice-Presidents—S. E. Cameron, M.A.; G. Hunter, B.A.; Jane V.
Palmer, B.A.; Eleanor Tatley, B.A.
Treasurer—M. Watson, B.A.
Assist. l'reasurer—J. Eva Warriner, B.A.
Rec. Secretary—Vivian E. Clogg, B.A.
Assist. Rec. Secretary—Annie W. Nolan, B.A.
Cor. Secretary—E. A. Hammond, M.A.
Assist. Cor. Secretary—E. Armstrong, B.A.
Ottawa Valley Graduates’ Society of McGill University.
ORGANIZED 1890.
Hon. President—The Right Hon. Sir Wilfrid Laurier, P.C.,
K.C.M.G., LL.D.
President—H. M. Ami, LL.D.
Vice-Presidents—G. H. Groves, M.D. (Carp.); G. C. Wright, B.A.,
B.C.L.; Rev. N. A. McLeod, B.A.
Secretary—J. F. Argue, M.D. (127 Bank St., Ottawa.)
Treasurer—W. Gamble, B.A., B.C.L.
Council—S. P. Cook, M.D.; R. W. Ells, M.A., LL.D.; Τὸ. B. Dowling,
‘B.A.Sc.; A. W. Duclos, B-A., B.C.L.; J. A. Robert, B.A-Se.
New York Graduates’ Society of McGill University.
President—Wolfred Nelson, M.D., C.M., F.R.GS.
1st Vice-President—jJames Albert Meek, M.D., ΟΜ.
Qnd Vice-President—Hiram N. Vineberg, M.D., ΟΜ.
8rd Vice-President—Harcourt Bull, B.A.
: Treasurer—M. Casewell Heine, B.A.
Secretary—R. A. Gunn, B.A.Sc. 45-47 Wall St., New York).
Chaplain—Rev. J. J. Rowan Spong, M.A., B.C.L., LL.B.
Executive Committee—James Douglas, B.A., LL.D.; J. B. Harvie,
M:.D:, G-M:, Troy, N.Y¥.; George H. Erost, C.E.
Non-Resident Councillors—Wm. Osler, M.D., C.M., F.R.C.P. (Lond.),
F.R.S. (Baltimore, Md.); Prof. the Rev. J. C. Bracq, M.A., Vassar
College, N.Y.; The Right Rev. J. D. Morrison, M.A., D.D., Bishop of
Duluth; ἘΠ᾿ T. Irvine, M.D., C.M., Ossining, N.Y.; James J. O’Dea,
M.D., C.M., Stapleton, Staten Island ; H. Holton Wood, B.A., Boston,
Mass.
540. τς δὴ Ph
New England Society of McGill Graduates.
President—Arthur KE. Childs, M.Sc. (Boston. Mass.).
Ist Vice-President—George A. Fagan, M.D. (North Adams, Mass.).
2nd Vice-President—Ambrose Choquet, B.C.L. (Central Falls, R.I.).
38rd Vice-President—H. Holton Wood, B.A. (Boston, Mass.).
Secretary-Treasurer—Joseph Williams, M.D. (Boston, Mass.;
45 Monument Square). iy
Councillors—T. G. McGannon, M.D. (Lowell,.Mass.); Miles Martin,
M.D. (Boston, Mass.); W. W.. Goodwin, M.D. (Hast Beston,. Mass.);
R. T. Glendenning, M.D. (Manchester-by-the-Sea, Mass.); Joseph C.
Pothier, M.D. (New Bedford, Mass.); J. G. Pfersick, D.V.S. (Shelburn
Falls, Mass.).
McGill Graduates’ Society of the District of Bedford.
ORGANIZED 1898.
Hon. President—Hon. W. W. Lynch, D.C.L. (Knowlton).
President—R. T. Macdonald, M.D. (Sutton).
Vice-Presidents—D. Stevens, M.D. (Missisquoi); M. N. Harris,
M.D. (Brome); Charles McBurney, B.A. (Shefford).
Secretary-Treasurer—
The British Columbia Society of Graduates of McGill
University.
President—D. H. Harrison, M.D. (Vancouver).
Vice-Presidents—G. H. Manchester, M.D. (New Westminster); J.
M. McGregor, ΒΑ. B.A.Sc., (Slcean> City);. A. RR.) Raymond, «M.D:
(Seattle, Wash.);Rosalind Watson, M.A. (Victoria): Walter Hunter,
B.A., B.C.L. (Nanaimo); J. 5. Gordon, B.A. (Vernon).
Secretary—W. J. McGuigan, M.D., LL.B. (Vancouver). Ὦ
Treasurer—Simon J. Tunstall, B.A., M.D. (Vancouver). ;
Maecutive Committee—W: A. Bennett, M.D. (Vancouver); R. W.
Suter, B.A., B.Se. (Vanceuver); J: B. Hart, D.V.S.. (Vancouver); G.
W. Boggs, M.D. (New Westminster); A. D. Taylor, ΒΑ. B.C.L.
(Vancouver); D. B. Holden, B.A., M.D. (Victoria). 3
NicGill University Alumni Association of Chicago.
ORGANIZED 1900.
President—H. J. Burwash, M.D.
Ist Vice-President—Chester B. Reid, B.A.Sc.
2nd Vice-Presideni—John Ryan, M.D.
Secretary-Treasurer—Thomas A. Woodruff. M.D.
Councillors—Kenneth Moedie, B.A.Se.; Ὁ. R. MacMartin, M.D.;
J. Brown Loring, M.D.
MeGill Graduates’ Society of Toronto.
(Officers, 1802.)
ORGANIZED 1896.
President—A. R. Lewis, K.C.
Ist Vice-President—Rev. Canon Sweeny, M.A., D.D.
2nd Vice-President—H. C. Burritt, M.D.
Secretary-Treasurer—R. B. Henderson, B.A., 42 King Street, West.
Cominittee—Hamilton Cassels, B.A.; Willis Chipman, B.A-Sc.; P.
, ἘΣ. Ritchie, B.A.
‘
‘Maritime Graduates’ Society of McGill University.
(Officers, 1902.)
Hon. President—John McMillan, M.D. (Pictou, N.S.).
-President—Alex. McNeil, M.D. (Kensington, P.E.I.). t
- Vice-Presidents—J. H. Scammell, M.D. (St. John, N.B.); Henry S.
D. Johnson, M.D. (Charlottetown, P.E.I.); J. G. Macdougall, M.D.
(Amherst, N.S.). ~ :
Secretary-Treasurer—F. A. Corbett, M.D. (Parrsboro, N.S.).
-Baecutive Committee—Geo. Carruthers, M.D, (Charlottetown, P.E.I.);
Jas. A. Johnson, M.D. (Emerald, P.H.I.); G. A. B. Addy, M.D. (St.
John, N.B.); J. B. Travers, M.D. (St. John, N.B.); J. J. Doyle, M.D.
(Halifax, N.S.); H. H. Mackay, M.D. (New Glasgow, N.S.). ,
Benefactors οἵ
McGill University, Montreal.
|. ?General Endowments and Subscriptions.
1. Original Endowment, 1811.
THE HONORABLE JAMES McGILL, who was born at Glasgow,
6th Oct., 1744, and died at Montreal, 19th Dec., 1813, by his last
will and testament, under date 8th of January, 1811, devised the
estate of Burnside, situated near the city of Montreal, and con-
taining forty-seven acres of land, with the Manor House and
Buildings thereon erected, and also bequeathed the sum of ten
thousand pounds in money unto the “Royal Institution for the
Advancement of Learning,’? a Corporation constituted in virtue
of an Act of Parliament passed in the Forty-first Year of the
Reign of His Majesty, King George the Third, to erect and estab-
lish a University or College, for the purpose of Education and
the advancement of learning, in the Province of Lower Canada,
with a competent number of professors and teachers to render
such Hstablishment effectual and beneficial for the purposes in-
tended; requiring that one of the colleges to be comprised in
the said University should be named and perpetually be known
and distinguished by the appellation of ‘‘McGill College.”’
The value of the above mentioned property was estimated at the
date D Of. ‘thie, δα δα τ δ Wea τ τς ΤῊ, πε τ ntaieiet tere tol ate $120,000
2. University Buildings, Etc.
THE WILLIAM MoLson HALL, being the west wing of McGill College
3uildings, with the connecting Corridors and Class Rooms, was
erected in 1861, through the munificent donation of the founder,
whose name it bears.
THre PETER REDPATH MusEuM, the gift of the donor whose name it
bears, was announced by him as a donation to the University in
1880, and formally opened August, 1882.
Lots for University buildings adjoining the College grounds con-
fronting on McTavish St., presented by J. H. R. Molson, Esq.,—
$42,500.
THE UNIVERSITY LIBRARY BUILDING, the gift of Peter Redpath, Esq.,
announced by him as a gift to the University in 1891, and for-
mally opened October 31st, 18938. Enlarged by Mrs. Peter Redpath
in 1900.
UNIVERSITY OFFICES, Rooms in Fast Wing, remodelled and furnished
for offices of Principal and Secretary and for a Board Room, by
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, in 1895.
3. Endowed Chairs, Etc.
THE JOHN FROTHINGHAM PRINCIPAL FUND, to be invested for /the
endowment of the Principalship of the University; founded in
1889 by the Rey. Frederick Frothingham and Mrs. J. H. R. Mol-
son,—340,000.
THE MACDONALD AUXILIARY Funp, founded in 1897 by Sir Wm. C.
Macdonald, the interest to be used solely to maintain the income
of certain of his endowments on a five per cent. per annum basis,
—$361,250.
4. Endowments and Donations of Medals and Prizes.
1883. a Gold, a Silver and a Bronze Medal were given by R. J. Wick-
steed, Esq., M.A., LL.D., for competition in “Physical Culture,”
by students in the Graduating Class and second year of any
Faculty, who have attended the University Gymnasium. The
Gola Medal was continued to 1889, and the Silver and Bronze
have been continued to date.
045
Ottawa Valley Graduates’ Society’s Exhibition. For competition by
candidates from the Ottawa Valley at the June matriculation
examinations of any Faculty. Value, $50.00. Given annually,
1895 to daie.
A Prize given by the British Columbia Society of Graduates of Mc-
Gill University to be divided amongst the five Faculties. Annual
value $50.00 Given annually, 1896 to 1898.
5. Subscriptions to General Endowment.
John Frothingham, Esq.. ..$2000 | ΠΟΥ ΠΟ i cictista ee chan ἄλυτα
John Torrance, Esq. .. 2000 | Moses E. David, Esq.. .. .. 600
James B. Greenshields, Esq. 1200 Wins (Carterveh Scie. eee ame. O00
Wm. Busby Lambe, Esq.. .. 1200 Thomas: Patton, Esq... —.. 600
Sir George Simpson, Knight. 1000 Wm. Workman, Hsq... .. .. 600
Henry Thomas, Esq. .. .. .. 1000 | Hon. Luther H. Holton.. .. 600
John. Redpath, Esq. .. .. .. 1000.| Henry Lyman, Esq. .. .. .. 600
James McDougall, Esq. .. .. 1000 | Davids LOLrrance-. SOc ce 2 000
James Torrance, Esq.. .. .. 1000 Edwin Atwater, Esq... .. .. 600
Hon. James Ferrier .. .. .. 1000 | Theodore Hart, Esq. .. .. .. 600
Harrison Stephens, Esq. .. .. 800 | Wm. Forsyth Grant, Esq. .. 600
Henry Chapman, Esq.. .. .. 600 | Robert Campbell, Esq. .. .. 600
Hione Peter McGill... =.2 .. -- 600) | Alfred Savage, Hsq. .......- 600
John James Day, Esq. .. .. 600 James Ferrier, jun., Esq. .. 600
Thos. Brown Anderson, Esq. 600 Wim. Stephen, BHsq.-:.i.... . 600
Peter Redpath, Esq. .. .. .. 600 ΝΘ ΠΗ παν, ΒΠΙΞΟ το tar. O00
Thomas M. Taylor, Esq... .. 600 William Dow, ΞΟ: πος πα ἢ. 9600
Joseph Mackay, Esq.. .. 600 William Watson, Esq. .. .. 600
Donald Lorn McDougall, Es. 600 | Edward and Alicia Major .. 600
HOM a SLn ee OhMeEOSe) ie. er 000 le Voios, Ashe. JAG ΓΕ πο cor 900
Charles Alexander, Esq... .. 600 | John R. Esdaile, Esq.. .. .. 200
|
Hanwancdesa tae ee ΒΕ) NO tcl ees ne ge AGE SOUS BOO
1871.
John Frothingham, Esq.. ..$5150 | HOGLWaALG: ss = fesse 24,000
William Molson, Esq.. .. 5000 TE Wie IRLtChte.selSOee ene 900
Sir William C. Macdonald... 5000 _ Messrs. Sinclair, Jack & Co. 250
Thomas Workman, Esq.. .. 5000 | John Reddy, M.D.. .. .. .. 100
ΠΕ VGlsonkeESdee ieeee 2000) [πὶ ὙΠΙΠΠ, SC ote fa one LOO
John McLennan, Esq. .. .. 1000 | Hon. F. W. Torrance.. .. .. 60
B. Gibb, Esq.. .. A eh HO Wiis EROS -HISQ «2 Κη δὶ τὴς 50
Messrs. A. & Ww. Robertson. 600
MOGWAT:G see wise τ 9»455ὴ ENO Cal eee το aces ako oOTe LO
mn 1881-82.
2 Hugh McLennan, Esq. .. ..$5000 ἘΠ ΟΣ ewes a4 ce 2» 1 000
Ἢ LOT GAS Drummond ΜΠ, | Or Sa, νοοῦν ἩΙΞΟ- ὡς τ πὴ: 1000
-΄.- George Hague, Esq. .. .. .. 3000 | J. B. Greenshields, Esq.
es" Men BeaGault.+HiSq to. το ἘΞ δ 22000 (London) .. .. ee =e at 000,
ν΄. Andrew Robertson, Esq.. .. 1000 Warden King, Esq. eee are COU,
x Robertson Campbell, Esq... 1000 We Les (Cummins. sg. 2.1... 1000
-Ἔ Sir Jos. and Lady Hickson.. 1000 Mrs. Hew Ramsay .. .. .. 500
Mrs. Andrew Dow.. .. .- -. 1000 | R. A. Ramsay, Esq. ..... .. 500
a Alexander Murray, Esq.. .. 1000 EE OEE ONWOOds -HISG esas. 3.8000
ia Miss Orkney.. .. i=). 1000 dames Burnett; ΞΕ ΞΕ τ 7. 600
iz Hector McKenzie, Esq. ἘΝ 1000 sGharlesGib by Esqmeen= 5.294. 5.500
a J. Ἐς McLachlan, Hsq. .. .. 200
4 BGG ee eet coe $2 72000- πέσ τὶ τὺ
ἦν 1883-84.
ι Edward Mackay, Esq.......... $5,000.
4
ts
ἫΝ ἥν σῶν hk ἔν re, i
" ἣν % 5 ‘ Ἷ sag) + ὌΝ stad ὰ ᾿ς an Ἢ j ν i Δ
4 nh aH at ὰ P ‘i et ": ὍΝ
) ee ον τ" ‘
: ey ie ιν oe a t
| | PA TEN hae ree
6. Endowment Fund for General Purposes.
1897.
Bequest of the late John H. R. Molson, Esq., $100,000.
7. Subscription for Improvements to College I856
Hom n@harles! Dewey ayers--5. 22 -ecee aer Paste τὰ $200.
8. Subscriptions for Current Expenses, I881-82.
Principal Dawson...
J. see Re Molson... “31000 per annum, 5 years, “being. Ε
Lord Mountstephen.. το τος L000 τ
Lord Strathcona and Mount
Oya. on. ὩΣ . 1000 ὗ 9 "0
David Morrice, ‘Esq.. at 200 ; i αἱ
Messrs. Gault Brothers & Co.. 200 - ᾿ κὰ ᾿
Messrs. 5. H. & A. S: Ewing .. 200 ; νὴ ᾿
Hon. Robert MacKay wah 300 fo 3 Ca
Jonathan Hodgson, Esq.. 100 4 Bae ss
Geo M. Kinghorn, Hsq.. .. 100 Hi ee
David J. Greenshields, Esq.. οἰς
Thomas Craig, Esq.. > 2100 poe te
John Rankin,
John Duncan, Mifare ΤΌΣ
oe George Brush, Esq., $25 for
Robert Benny, Esq..
\ Miss* ii A. (Ramsay 2...
} Hugh Paton, Esq.,. $50 for
J- Mo DouglasilHsas.
εν James! δῦ ΕΟ τς
Sq.
five years, being...
two years, being...
Total
1887-88.
John H. R. Molson, Esq..
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald . ‘1000
Peter Redpath, Esq.. - 1000 3g ab τ
Lord Strathcona and ‘Mount
ro Royal. . oe ὅς . 1000 Φ ἐς és
το Hon. James Ferrier.. 500 “ “ :
Sir Joseph Hickson 500 “ ee δ
Hugh McLennan, Esq.. .. 250 “ ‘e oy
Wy 5. Greenshields, Esq.. 250 “ τ &
George Hague, Esq.. bea 250 “ “ “
John Molson, HEsq.. 250 “ et τ
Samuel Finley, Esq.. 250 “ ie δ
Mrs. Mackay, $100 annually, 1889 to 1893.. yeh
Total
9. Subscription by Miembers of Board of Governors, in
1898-99. — $191,090.
. 31000 per annum, 3 years, being. 3
..519,550.
$1000
5000
5000
$3000
9000.
3000
3009
1500 |
1500
τοῦ
730
τοῦ
750
750
500 —
on . ; ‘ ’
᾿ς Ὗ τα: : τ ahaa i
10. Subscriptions for a Building for the Carpenter Collection
of Shells.
— 1868. ,
Peter Redpath. Esq. .. -. «Ὁ 500 | ΕΘ ΞΟ Cleese mre 1p en ods O00
William Molson, Esq... .. -. 500 | Geo. H. Frothingham, Esq. 100
Harrison Stephens, Esq.. ... 1€ WV tila αν ΘΟ tate awe) 100
Robert J. Reekie, Esq. .. -. 100 Thomas Rimmer, Esq. .. -. 100
John H. R. Molson, Esq.... 100 | Andrew Robertson, Esq.. .. 100
Sir Wm. E. Logan, F.R.S... 100 Marsh sea patlyedi2 cat wees) et OO)
τ ΠΟΙ πα τὸν τῆς ta ONT Benaiah Gibb, Hsq. 9). . τς 50
Thos. Workman, Esq., M.P. 100 | Fron JohmsROsers osu τ σον, DO
WOTMWAG! cee fetes oo sed, 600 POLAR kn sae ene. text ae aOU
11. Subscriptions for the Erection of the Lodge and Gates.
William Molson, Esq.. .. ..$ 100 | Worwamd) 22> as esos eo L00
John H. R. Molson, Esq.. .. 100 John Frothingham, Esq.. .. 100
William Workman, Esq.. .. 100 James A. Mathewson, Esq.. 100
Joseph Tiffin, jun., Esq... .. 100 Peter Redpath, Esq.,..... .. 100
PHOS Jee Olaxcton. ΕΞ" - so. 100 G. H. Frothingham, Esq. .. 100
ames πε ὯΝ waSGomsems, aa. 100) G D!oFerrier; Esa. 77. -- 4100
William McDougall, Esq. .. 100 | John Smith, Esq. .. .. .. .- 100
Charles J. Brydges, Hsq.. .. 100 Charles Alexander, Esq.. .. 100
- Hon. George A. Drummond. 100 A pMIDh bese ΠΟ ΕΘ τῆ, το Δ Ὑτπὺ0
Thomas Rimmer, Esq. .. .. 100 Henry Lyman, Hsq. .. .. .- 50
William Dow, Esq. .. +. τ 100 Ξ
: by Faia eae yee POW eter Urs omer id erge 36)
OMA ee nom cronel ss) ail tL OO
12. Library and Museum.
Special Collections of Books Presented to the Library.
1. The Peter Redpath Collection of Historical Books, presented by
Peter Redpath, Esq., of Montreal, 3,500 Volumes, with subse-
quent additions.
iene Robson Collection of works in Archeology and General
Literature, presented by Dr. John Robson, of Warrington, Eng-
land, 3,486 Volumes.
3. The Charles Alexander Collection of Classical Works, presented
by C. Alexander, Esq., of Montreal, 221 Volumes.
4, Frederick Griffin, Esq., Q.C., Collection of Books, being the whole
of his Library, bequeathed by his will, 2,695 Volumes.
5. The Hon. Mr. Justice. Mackay, Collection of Books, being the
6
bo
whole of his Library, 2,007 Volumes.
_The “T. Ὁ. King Shakespeare Collection,” presented by Lord
Strathcona and Mount Royal and Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, of
Montreal, being 214 Volumes.
7. The Ribbeck Library of Classical Literature, presented by Sir
W. C. Macdonald, about 4,000 works.
8. The ‘Mendelssohn Choir Memorial Collection,’’ presented by
Joseph Gould, Esq., 200 Volumes. -
9. he “John Horne” Collection of Canadian Portraits and Auto-
graphs, 177 in all. . :
10. The Sir J. W. Dawson Collection of works in Geology and
Paleontology, presented by the Board of Governors.
Endowments or Library.
Wm. Molson, Esq., for Endowment of a Library Fund (1871)..$ 4,000
Hon. F. W. Torrance for Endowment of Mental, Moral and
Political Philosophy Book Fund (1876) .. .. .- τ. ++ +: =:
Mrs. Redpath, for the Endowment of the Wm. Wood Redpath
Memorial Fund (1881).. ΡΟ πὰ Wie ENA ΣΝ Αι EY
1,000
1,000
ἜΘ FGA hs ON tO eae Κα
ΑΝ ᾿
940
A Friend, by the Hon. F. W. Torrance, for Endowment of a
Library Hund (ἰδ eter tsa $400
Hugh 5. McLennan, Library ‘Endow ment, a gift ‘from "Bstate
late Hugh S. McLennan to the Library of McGill ὍΡΠΕΒΟ,
the income to be applied to binding (1892).. .. . 250
Mota. Picci ass ΠΣ eee ale ee EST ORGDO)
Subscriptions, Etc., to Library.
John Thorburn, for purchase of Books.. .. Ae She eR ethene 90
Andrew Drummond, do., for Applied Science ss 25
The Graduates ‘in Ar ts and applied Science of 1885 for pur chase
OLS BOOKS δα δα sec 4c DOMaGHOe “ae 91
Ditto, ditto, of 1886. ὌΠ 28
The late R. A. empanee Esq., Bequest. for purchase ‘of. books
GiS8i) eae 5715000
Andrew Drummond, “Esq., ‘to Library Fund “of Faculty of
Applied Science... . 25
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, ‘for pur chase of books fr om
the R. W. Boodle Library... .. 200
Ottawa Valley Graduates’ Society, ‘for. binding books in ‘the
University Library.. .. 25
Peter Redpath, Esq., in ‘aid of. the new ‘catalogue of the Library
G@i892) se! 500
Mrs. Peter Redpath, ‘for ‘maintenance of Librar y, 1894. to. date.. 40,500
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, donation for the purchase
of books for the Library, particularly in the French De-
PARLMENE MISO TD) ere, we. fo Ate αν τ eae cee cs ae oe, weet nae 250
John H. R. Molson, donation for eee: of books for the
Bibrany (1807). «Ὁ Ὁ SSW Reraght cava tenet hate Το, ΤῊ ΟΣ 195
Hon. Treas. Redpath Memorial Fund, ‘London, England. The
balance remaining over of the above fund to be used for
purchase of beoks for the Library .. . 47
Estate late Hugh McLennan, for support of Travelling Librari ies 1,500
Sir W. C. Macdonald, for purchase of books and for cataloguing
S02) ieee rd Naraith ors Δαν τὸν ΚΝ Ὁ sense Gea tetea meer de deta) a PRT MONA LEN Tana E ΠΟ)
Tele Ble Wood, for ‘the DuTrchasewatmbookste- ἐς μὴ Ἀπ σου τυ ἢ 100
TO CES ec se Ἐκ ΥΡ ΕΧΕ δ SRE EL CSN ΤΥ ΤῊΝ SaaS OE OIG
Special Collections Presented to the Museum.
The Holmes Herbarium, presented by the late Andrew F. Holmes,
M.D.
. The Carpenter Collection of Shells, presented by the late P. P.
Carpenter, Ph.D.
The Collection of Casts of Ivory Carvings, issued by the Arundel
Society, presented by Henry Chapman, Esq.
The McCulloch Collection of Birds and Mammals, collected by
the late Dr. M. McCulloch, of Montreal, and presented by his
heirs.
5. The Logan Memorial Collections of Specimens in Geology and
Natural History, presented by the heirs of the late Sir W. E.
moran, Wi. D.. ΤΕΣ RS!
6. The Dawson Collection in Geology and Paleontology, being the
Private Collections of Principal Dawson, presented by him to
the Museum.
7. The Bowles Collection of Lepidoptera, presented by Sir Wm. C.
Macdonald and J. H. Burland, Esq.
8. R. Morton Middleton, Jr., London, Eng., Collection of Plants.
9. Collection of Butterflies, presented by the Members of the Board
of Governors of the University.
10. Collection of Lepidoptera, presented by Sir 'W. C. Macdonanld.
(See also “List of Donations to the Museum,” printed in the An-
nual Reports of the University.)
Po pf
πος,
Bee
347
Endowment for the Museum.
Wm. Molson, Esq., for the Endowment of a Museum Fund
(1873) ιν πο ἐν ς οὐ νον τὴς πέτα Ὡς ..5 2,000
Subscriptions, Etc., for the Museum.
Tt. J. Claxton, Esq., for purchase of Specimens for Museum...$ 250
Peter Redpath, Esq., for Museum expenses, $1,000 per annum
πε ΤΟΣ LO SOS ere oe oe ἘΣ ἘΣ ein) Soden ad wring OOD
Mrs. Peter Redpath, for Museum expenses, 1594 to OO ΣΡ eho, 000
Mrs. H. G. Frothingham, for the arrangement of Dr. Carpen-
ter’s Collection ‘of Mazatlan shells... .. .. -- «τ ς- 233
Peter Redpath, Esq., for improvements to Museum {991 2 πὶ Ποῦ
A Lady, for Museum expenses from 1882 to 1894.. Beirne se 000
A Friend, for the purchase of specimens for the Museum .. .. 4,300
John H. R. Molson, Hsq., for the purchase of books on “Butter-
fies of Eastern United States and Canada... .. .. .. -- 50
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, for mounting skin and
sien, Gre hb te (Ob <BR Vga Uoal ian oa oc. bom acum Gn το δ 6, aor 150
Mrs. J. H. R. Molson, for the purchase of specimens .. .. -- 1,000
MOLE Fa tae Re ita Lan tear hbo Ἐν τοῖι. se poowoe
13. Miscellaneous.
Chas. T. Blackman, Esq., of Montreal, the gift of a Telescope
and Astronomical Instruments called after his name.
J. J. Arnton, bequest to McGill University (1895) .. .. .. .- τ 9090
R. A. Ramsay, M.A., B.C.L., to defray the expenses of re-
erecting the tomb of the late Hon. James McGill CSTD i= τς 150
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, contribution to cover cost of illustrating
calendar, (1899) $586.66, (1900) $433.20, (1902), $391.54.. .. .. 1,411.40
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, for granolithic sidewalks (1902).. .. 2,800
14. University Portraits and Busts.
ponent of the Founder, presented by the late Thomas Blackwood,
sq.
Portrait of William Molson, Esq., presented to the University.
Bust of William Molson, Esq., by Marshall Wood, presented by
Graduates of the University.
Portrait of Peter Redpath, Esq., painted by Sydney Hodges, pre-
sented by Citizens of Montreal.
Portrait of Rev. Dr: Leach, by Wyatt Eaton, presented by Friends
and Graduates of the University.
Portrait of Sir William Dawson, by Wyatt Eaton, presented by
Friends and Graduates of the University.
Portrait of Hon. James Ferrier, by Robert Harris, presented by
Friends and Graduates of the University.
Portrait of Peter McGill, presented (through Mr. A. T. Taylor), by
Judge Parker, of Edinburgh.
Portrait of Dr. William Robertson, founder of the\ Medical Faculty,
presented in loving remembrance by his family and descendants.
Bust of Peter Redpath, Esq., by Reynolds Stephens, presented by
Mr. Redpath’s personal friends in England. \
Portrait of Peter Redpath, Esq., by Robert (Harris, presented by
Friends and Undergraduates of the University.
Portrait of Mrs. Peter Redpath, by Robert Harris, presented by the
Governors of the University.
Portrait of John H. R. Molson, by,Robert Harris, presented by the
Governors of the University.
Portrait of Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, by Alphonse Jongers,
presented by the Governors of the University.
ed ΡΥ Nore Wb ἐν στ! ἀν τ τ χοῦ μον
sone ὁ Wetton gy Oth el i HAE Dee) gery My Bie
᾿
\ Mig i a
‘
348 Ye
il. Endowments and Subscriptions for the Faculty
of Arts.
1. Buildings, Chairs, Etc.
Endowment Fund, 1856.
John Gordon McKenzie, Esq... .. ..$2,000
Mirai: Grom Gd ae HIS Oi. se alec hee ares . 2,800—Total, $4,300
THE MOLSON CHAIR OF ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE, in 1856,
endcewed by the Honorable John Molson, Thomas Molson, Esq.,
and William Molson, Esq.—$20,000; and supplemented in 1892 by
John H. R. Molson, Esq., with a furcue> sum of $20,000. Total,
$40,000.
THE PETER REDPATH CHAIR OF PURE MATHEMATICS (founded as
Chair of Natural Philosophy), in 1871, endowed by Peter Red-
path, Esq., $20,000.°
THE LOGAN CHAIR oF GEOLOGY, in 1871, endowed by Sir W. EB. Logan,
LL.D., F.R.S., and Hart Logan, Esq.—$20,600.
THE JOHN FROTHINGHAM CHAIR OF PHILOSOPHY, 1873, endowed by
Miss Louisa Frothingham,—$20,000; and supplemented in 1891 with
a further sum of $20,000. Total, $40,000.
Tur Masor Hiram Mints CHAIR oF CLASsIcs, in 1882, endowed by
the last will of the late Major Hiram Mills, of Montreal,—$42,000.
THE Davip J. GREENSHIELDS ASSOCIATE PROFESSORSHIP OF ENG-
-LISH LITERATURE, endowed by the last will of the late David J.
Greenshields, Esq., of Montreal, with the sum of $40,000.
THE MACDONALD CHAIRS OF PuHysics, in the Faculties of Arts and
Applied Science, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald,—$120,000.
THE MacDONALD CHAIRS OF CHEMISTRY, in the Faculties of Arts and
Applied Science, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald, in 1897
and 1801,—$110,000.
THE MACDONALD CHAIR OF BOTANY, endowed by Sir William C. Mac-
donald, in 1901,—$50,000.
THE WILLIAM Dow CHaiIR OF PoLiTicaL Economy, 1901, endowed by
the Misses Dow,—$60,000. :
THE MacponaLtp CHaink oF MoraL PHILOosopHy, endowed by Sir
William C. Macdonald in 1903,—$50,690. ᾿
THE CHARLES GIBB BOTANICAL ENDOWMENT, subscriptions received.
to date:— Ἷ
ἌΜΕ ΘΙ ΙΣ ΡΟ ΟΝ ΤΩ ἡ πο O00 ᾿
Mrs: Catherinembilleai& . 3.) shee s., . 200—Potaleasoe200
THE MACDONALD PuHysics BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT, in the Faculties
of Arts and Applied Science. The gift of Sir William C. Mac-
donald,. announced by him as a gift to the University in 1890,
and formally opened February, 1893. :
THE MACDONALD PuHysics BUILDING MAINTENANCE FUND in the Facul-
ties of Arts and Applied Science, endowed by Sir ‘William C.
Macdonald, in 1892 and. 1896, $150,000.
THE MacbdONALD CHEMISTRY AND MINING BUILDING AND EQuIP-
MENT, given to the University by Sir William ©. Macdonald, in
1896, $267,141.80.
THE MACDONALD CHEMISTRY AND MINING BUILDING Μαῖν-
TENANCE FUND, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald, in 1897
and 1899, $225,000. eee ;
THE MACDONALD CHEMISTRY ENDOWMENT FUND, endowed by Sir
William C. Macdonald, in 1890, $135,000. ; :
THE IKXINGSFORD CHAIR OF HisToRy, endowed by Sir Wm. C. Mac-
donald, in 1898, $50,000.
THE DAWSON CHAIR OF GEOLOGY, endowed by Sir Wm. C. Macdonald
in 1899, $50,000.
THE MACDONALD BUILDINGS REPAIR FUND,. endowed in 1900 by Sir
William C. Macdonald, $15,000.
Baar) νς .
2. Endowment for Pension Fund.
This endowment was given in 1894 to be invested, and|the revenue
used exclusively for providing Pensions or Retiring Allowances
for members of the teaching staff of the Faculties of Arts and
Applied feience:
Lord Strathcona and Mount Ro er . .$50,000
_ John H. R.. ἘΝ ΠΟ ΘΙ ΟΤΙ τς τς τ ΠΟ 000
Sir William C. Macdonald . .. .. .. .. 50,000—Total, $150,000
᾿ 3. Exhibitlons and Se poiarchige: Ete:
THE JANE REDPATH EXHIBITION, in the Faculty of Arts,—founded in
1868, by Mrs. Redpath, of Terrace Bank, Montreal, and endowed
with the sum of $1,667.
Tue MAcDONALD SCHOLARSHIPS AND EXHIBITONS, 10 in number, in
the Faculty of Arts—founded in 1871, and endowed in 1882 with
the sum of $25,000 by Sir William C. Macdonald.
THE CHARLES ALEXANDER SCHOLARSHIP, for Classics—founded in 1871
by Charles Alexander, Esq. Endowed in 1893 with the sum of
$2,000.
THE BARBARA Scott SCHOLARSHIP FOR CLASSICAL LANGUAGE AND
LITERATURE—founded in 1884 by the last will of the late Miss
Barbara Scott, of Montreal, and endowed with the sum of $2,000.
THe GEORGE HaGuE EXHIBITION—founded in 1881—Annual value, $125.
Terminated’in 1901.
Tue Masgor Hiram Mitts MepAL AND SCHOLARSHIP.—founded by the
will cf the late Major Hiram Mills, of Montreal, and endowed
with the sum of $1,500. ~
T, M. THompPson, Esq.—$250 for two Exhibitions in September, 1871;
$200 for two Exhibitions in 1872,—$450.
Rey. Coun C. StuartT—for the “Stuart Prize in Hebrew’’—$60.
Ture TAYLOR SCHOLARSHIP—founded in 1871, by T. M. Taylor, Esq.—
Annual value $100—terminated in 1878.
PROFESSOR ALEXANDER JOHNSON—for Scholarship for three Sessions,
terminated 1886-87—$350.
Her MagseEsty’s ComMMIssIon for the Exhibition of 1851—Nomination
Scholarships for 1891, 1893, 1895, 1897, 1899, 1901 and 1803—value £150
annually, tenable for two years
THE PHILIP CARPENTER FELLOWsHIp—founded by Mrs. Philip Car-
penter, for the Maintenance of a Post-Graduation Teaching Fel-
low ship or Scholarship in Natural Science or some branch there-
of in the Faculty of Arts in McGill College, endowed in 1892
with the sum of $7,000. -
THE ALEXANDER MACKENZIE MEMORIAL FUND, founded by the
friends of the late Hon. Alex. Mackenzie, for the maintenance
of fellowships or scholarships in Political Science, $9,534.05.
A Lapy, to provide for three tuitions in the Faculty of Arts for
sessions 1882-93, 1883-94.
THe New York GRADUATES’ Soct=Tty EXHIBITION—for an Exhibition
in the Faculty of Arts to be associated with the name of Sir
William Dawson—Annual value, $60—given in 1897, 1898, 1901, 1903.
To provide Bursaries in the Faculty of Arts, subscriptions from
WwW. W. Ogilvie .. .-1898 and 1899....$2,000
Hugh McLennan.. ..1898 and 1899.... 240
Da WMiacmasternd Gt ἘΞ Leos ator 4 δ Ὁ 120
4. Edowments and Donations cf Medals and Prizes.
In 1856 Henry Chapman, Esq., founded a gold medal, to be named
the ‘Henry Chapman Gold Medal,’’ to be given annually in the
graduating class in Arts. This medal was endowed. by. Mr.
Chapman in 1874 with the sum of $700.
In 1860 the sum of £200, presented to the College by H.R.H. the
Prince of Wales, was applied to the foundation of a Gold Medal,
to be called the ‘“‘Prince of Wales Gold Medal,’’ which is given
P in the graduating class for Honour Studies in Mental and Moral
Philosophy.
900
In 1864 the ““Anne Molson Gold Medal’ was founded and endowed
by Mrs. John Molson, of Belmont Hall, Montreal, for an Honour
Course in Mathematics and Physics.
In the same year the “Shakespeare Gold Medal,’ for an Honour
Course, to comprise and include the works of Shakespeare and
the Literature of England from his time to the time of Addi-
son, both inclusive, and such other accessory subjects as the
Corporation may from time to time appoint, was founded and
endowed by citizens of Montreal, on occasion of the three hun-
dredth anniversary of the birth of Shakespeare.
In the same year the “Logan Gold Medal’ for an Honour Course
in Geology and Natural Science was founded and endowed by
Sir William Logan, L.LD., F.R.S., F.G.S., ete.
In 1874 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Earl of Dufferin, Governor-General of Canada, for competition
in the Faculty of Arts, and continued till 1878.
In 1875 the “Neil Stuart prize in Hebrew’? was endowed by Neil
Stuart, Esq., of Vankleek Hill, in the sum of $340.
In 1880 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Marquis of Lorne, Governor-General of Canada, the former for
competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in
the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1883.
In 1884 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Marquis of Lansdowne, Governor-General of Canada, the former
for competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition
in the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1888.
In 1889 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency
Lord Stanley, Governor-General of Canada, the former for com-
petition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in the
Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1893.
THR “CHALES G. CosTeR MEMORIAL PRIZE’ for general proficiency
—given annually by Colin H. Livingstone, Esq., B.A.; founded
in 1889,
In 1894 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Earl of Aberdeen, Governor-General of Canada, the former for
competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in
the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1898.
In 1899 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
(Karl of Minto, Governor-General of Canada, the former for
competition in the Faculty of Arts, the) latter for competition in
the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued to date. r
5. Subscriptions for the Support of the Chair of Botany.
1883-84.
Sir Wm. Dawson .. . τς $500 per annum, 5 years, being.. $2500
Lord Strathcona and ‘Mount
Royall ic ; 250 4 τ GE Eee Vb45{1)
ἘΠῚ ΕΠ RS Molson, Esq. apes ete ae OO as ss fe St B00
Mrs J: ΝΠ ehtes ViOlSOn wee. pete LOU) ce “e iar 500
Gre EAS ues MAIS ie clot ΣΝ ΚΣ 100 Sy οἷς EY Pitan 500
IMirsseRted path cis anes 2 LOO ἐς “ LE ἀπ Il)
Hugh McKay, Esq. Secs OO τ cs rt se 00
Robert) Moat, Msqs-. 7 =... 2.) 100 ἐν τε JF en Se
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald.. oe eee O00 cs sé πὰ 500
Gharles* ΟἸΌ ἬΘΟΥ ἘΠῚ 4: τ᾿ AG a i. te 250
Miss” ΟΥ̓ ΟΕ tent ἘΠ DO τ sf Sree OO,
Robert: Mackay. SHS ai.) oc ace. 0 δῦ τ ss wey to dao DO
Mrs! vim. ΜΟΙ ΟΣ ποι 2 ee πῇ es μῷ πέος τὰ 50
Mrs! John) ΦΙΟΙΊΒΞΟΙ Πρ τ 3 0 i τ Malt ΣΡ τ)
John Stirline ΘΕΟΊ ὅπ τοὺ. ὅτ ο΄ τι} τ oc Sty Ve ered
Wiarden, Keine ΕΞ oe) wae eD0 τ a Cea 50)
MiISS# ἘΠ] ον τἀ et OO Ἢ ἧς δ οι π 2600
351
Robert Angus, Esq.. .. .. .. $d0 per annum, 5 years, being $250
Pe Ate) γνοτε, PHISOletu ac Sack se τοδ0 ef i “ 250
Hugh McLennan, Esq... .. .. 25 fs τ ee 125
Sir Joseph Hickson.. A eens Kl) Ne “ Pe aie 50
ΕΗ ἘΠ ΠΡ COMO OE 5 OU OCOn? cries SRC mea arr rnycarinin Cin 20
OLA ον ΡΣ πο doe Ee enka, OOS 940
6. Botanic Garden, Etc.
Subscriptions, 1890-91.
Hugh McLennan, Esq. ..$ 100 Horward .. . Lx $ 900
Gilman Cheney, Esq.. 100 | Jonathan Hodgson, sq. 100
James Johnston, Esq.. 100 | Robert Mackay, Esq.. 100
James Slessor, Esq. 100 ἘΠ ΘΙ ΠΌΡΕ I DRClian ae ton eo) pole Es!)
ASH riend ---ς- 100 Jey Sse SHNEATer CSO em se. oases tO
Hugh Graham, Esq. 100 Geom Sumner ἩΠΞῸ πολ 90
A. F. Gault, Esq. 20 100 ACMA SARs Oy © Ome mano 71: 25
Wiser. Costigan, HISd.. 100 ΘΒ ΠΣ ΘΟ sau τ Pte 2 eee
Jonathan Brown, Esq. 100
Forward .. . $ 900 | Total $1,275
To Erect Plant House in Botanic Garden.
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal .-$ 362.00
John H. R. Molson, Hsq.. .. 4 361.51
Sir William C. Macdonald .. 361.02
Total .. . $1,084.53
For Support of Botanical Laboratory.
Sir W. C. Macdonald (1900).. ἐνῷ 300.00
7. Subscriptions in Aid of the Chair of Hebrew.
Warden King, Esq. ..in 1889 $50 per annum, 9 years, Petree = 150
Sir William Dawson... .. 50 150
Eon. Hugh Mackay .. 2. * 50 ἐν ss fA Py 150
AR se Gaulte. ΟΞ ΕΗ ata <a oe 25 τς a Δ τον
George Hague, Esq .. .. i 25 e Se Datebae LDA
Ta As Dawes, ἘΠ 56. a) Ἢ 25 SS Bf ENE 75
Sa Garsley-sehisg: sets μπς ον 25 = εἰς ἀν ΤΣ 75
Soe) AV a SoS Peed Ἐπ ce LID POO cre tohcts nrc ΤΣ ΟΣ ails 20
Warden King, Esq.. Sate ats 50 per annum for 3 years 150
ἌΣ ἬΝ GAUlt esas 2 τος ἐς 50 ss 150
Robert Mackay, Esq.. τε 50 <¢ go ee eae LOO,
Hugh McLennan, Esq. .. “* 25 τ τ ΑΕ ἘΜ OD
George Hague, Esq.. .. ee 25 δ ‘ede ΜΉΤΡΑ 75
ΠΣ ΔΑ DA WeSs SHiSCics scl esc. = ἐν 25 = ot ΧΕ τἀ ΠῸ
S. Carsley, Esq.. Be ce Pe ac Rai ἘΝ Ee to a ee ems
J. Murphy, Esq. δ SN Pe Eo. 7 7 By oto ΕΣ icles ΉΤΟ ἘΝ ΤῊΝ ΤΩ͂Ν 25
TOCA rs teat eee nw ΡΟΣ as, va tas © sete ool O5
8. Subscriptions to Provide Sessional Lecturers, Etc.
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, sessions 1891-92 to 1898-99. .$42,000
Mrs. John H. R. Molson, sessions 1891-92 to 1899-1900.......... 8,300
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, to provide for certain salaries in the
Department of Physics, etc., sessions 1894-95 and 1895-96.. 2,627
Total’... . $52,927
902
9. Endowments for Apparatus
The Local Committee of the British Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science to found the British Association
Apparatus Fund in the Faculties of Arts and Applied sci-
ence, in commemoration of the meeting of the Association
ins Montel, in 1584. a: koe τ ΟΝ pa το ΡΣ ΤΉΝ ΟΠ
10. Subscriptions, Etc., for Apparatus.
Philosophical Apparatus, 1867, | Horward .. th Baer ΣΟ
William: Molson, Esq... -:.$ 500 Sim Wane (ὦ: Macdonald, fit-
John H. R. Molson, Esq... a00 tings of Upper Chemical
Peter Redpath, Hisq.... .. 500 | Maboratory... Ὁ δα ee ΕΣ
George Moffat. Esq. .. .. DEO Mt ΠΑ ΤΠ Lawson, a Dynamo
Andrew Robertson, Hsq.. 100 | Benjamin Dawson, 3 Micro-
John Frothingham, Esq.. 100 SGODESi ue F ;
David Torrance, fisq:.. ... 100 | Botanical Appar: atus.
hos ds) Barron an BeAr 50 Sir τη. Ὁ. Macdonald -. 720
J. H. R. Molson, Hsq., Dy- Hugh McLennan, Esq. - 111
namo, Gas Engine and | samuel Finley; Hsq. .: 6. 21
J ste ea bint ators Ben ent AA Uh Alda LA IE Le A 12 Aa AG aut ee SG), vce ΜΠ
Mrs. Seat Storage Bat- fir W. C. Macdonald, Bio-
Be Toys ἐπ ee i el se eee eee OO) legicalyHquipment σον 1750
et |
ROG Wand: he pee tke endo as MO ΘΙ νον node ἂν πὰ ΟΠ Ὁ
1. Miscellaneous.
Hugh McLennan, Esq., subscription toward expense of table at
the Biological Station, Woods Holl, Mass., for McGill’ Pro-
fessor of Botany 896 to 1899); 22 2.58 POO a Ee eee een UO
A Friend, subscription toward above, 1900- 1902 cme Pau He rete) net ΤΉ)
Sir W. C. Macdonaid, donztion. towards Maintenance of Phy-
SIGS Building ee hee MAR πο ρον το τ τον χὰ ον oh we wey ΟΠ
itl. Royal Victoria College:
I. The Donalda Endowment for the Higher Education of
Women.
This endowment, given by Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal
of Montreal, is to provide for the education of women in
the subjects of the Faculty of Arts, up to the standard of
the examination: fons ΒΑ pint A8845 πο τ δ ..$ 50,000
ATVI TSG Se sae πύον. yeh ΤΣ τα ΝΡ τ οἷν USN)
TO EET ara OS etal ἀράν εὐχῶν, ΤΟΎ ΔΕ TA ἀνα DOR ὦν τ rae ream ele (NNN Op
2. Miscellaneous Subscripticns.
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, for musical instruction in
SESSLONS 1889-90 raid ASSO sO ns ote τε νον bee ted τον $400
Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal, for appliances in Zoology :
in the special interest of Donalda classes in 1895.......... 100
Lord Strathcona and Mount Rova!l. for maintenance of Royal
Victoriam @allese: iS99=19020 5 way wc epee eee sot a0)
353
3. Endowments Held in Trust by the Board of Royal
Institution.
The “Hannah Willard Lyman Memorial Fund,” contributed by
subscriptions of former pupils of Miss Lyman, and invested as 4
permanent endowment to furnish annually a Scholarship or Prizes
in a “College for Women,” affiliated to the University, or in classes
for the Higher Education of Women, approved by the University.
The amount of the fund is at present $1,100.
The “Annie McIntosh Prize,’ contributed by pupils and friends
of the late Miss Annie M. McIntosh, of Bute House, Montreal. The
income to be given as a prize to women in the Faculty of Arts, $425.
IV. Endowments and Subscriptions for the Faculty of
Applied Science.
1. Buildings, Chairs, Etc.
THE WILLIAM Scotr ΟἬΛΙΕ oF Crvii ENGINEERING, in 1884, endowed
on the last will of the late Miss Barbara Scott, of Montreal,—
$30,000 Z
THE THOMAS WORKMAN DEPARTMENT OF MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
—founded in 1891 under the last will of the late Thomas Work-
man, Esq., who bequeathed the sum of $117,000—$60,000 for the
maintenance of a Chair of Mechanical Engineering, with the
assistance, shops, machinery and apparatus necessary thereto,
$57,000 to be expended in provision of necessary buildings, ma-
chinery and apparatus.
SIR WILLIAM C. MACDONALD, in 1890, towards erection of Thomas
Workman Workshops, $20,000.
THE MACDONALD ENGINEERING BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT—announced
by Sir Wm. C. Macdonald as a gift to the University in 1890, and
formally opened February, 1893.
THD !MAacDONALD PHYSICS BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT in the Faculties
of Arts and Applied Science, the gift of Sir William C. Mac-
donald announced by him as a gift to the University in 1890, and
formally opened February, 1893.
Tus MAcDONALD CHAIRS OF Puysics, in the Faculties of Arts and
Applied Science, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald—$120,000.
THE MacpDONALD CHAIR OF ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING—endowed by
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, in 1891, with the sum of $40,000; in 1898,
With the additional sum of $10,000. Total, $50,000.
THH MACDONALD ENGINEERING BUILDING MAINTENANCE FUND,
endowed by Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, in 1892 and 1896.—$85,000.
THE MACDONALD PHYSICS BUILDING MAINTENANCE FUND in the Fa-
culties of Arts and Applied Science, endowed by Sir Wm. C.
Macdonald, in 1892 and 1896—$150,000.
THE MACDONALD CHEMISTRY AND MINING BUILDING AND EQUIPMENT,
given to the University by Sir William C. Macdonald, in 1896.—
$267,141.80.
THE MACDONALD CHEMISTRY AND MINING BUILDING MAINTENANCE
FUND, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald, in 1897 and 1899—
$225,000.
THE MACDONALD CHAIR OF MINING ENGINEERiNG, endowed in 1896
and 1903 by Sir William C. Macdonald, with the sum of $62,500.
THB MACDONALD CHAIR OF ARCHITECTURE, endowed in 1896 by Sir
William C. Macdonald, with the sum of $50,000.
THE MACDONALD CHAIRS OF CHEMISTRY, in the Faculties of Arts and
Applied Science, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald, with the
sum of $110,000.
12
354
THE MACDONALD ARCHITECTURAL DEPARTMFNT MAINTENANCE
FuND, endowed by Sir William C. Macdonald, in 1898.—$10,000.
ΤῊ MACDONALD MINING AND METALLURGICAL DEPARTMENT EN-
DOWMENT FUND, endowed by Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, in 1899.—
$55,000.
THR MACDONALD CHEMICAL DEPARTMENT ENDOWMENT FUND, en-
dowed by Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, in 1900.—$135,000.
THp MaAcDONALD BUILDINGS REPAIR FUND, endowed in 1900 by Sir
William C. Macdonald.—$15,000.
2. Endowment for Pension Fund.
This endowment was given in 1894 to be invested and the revenue
used exclusively for providing Pensions or Retiring Allowances
for members of the teaching staff of the Faculties of Arts and
Applied Science.
Lord Strathcona and Mount oes - $50,000
Johny ἘΠῚ ἘΠ Molson! τ΄. + eee ee 05000
Sir William C. Macdonald ~ we ae we ee 00,000—Total, $150,000
3. Exhibitions and Scholarships.
THE Scott EXHIBITION.—Founded by the Caledonian Society of
Montreal, in commemoration of the Centenary of Sir Walter
Scott, and endowed in 1872 with the sum of $1,100, subscribed by
members of the Society, and other citizens of Montreal. The
(Exhibition lis given annually in the Faculty of Applied Science-—
Annual value, $50.
THE BURLAND SCHOLARSHIP, founded 1882 by J. H. Burland, B.A.Sc.,
$100 for a Scholarship in Applied Science for three years, being
$300.
HER MaAJsEsStTY’s COMMISSION for the Exhibition of 1851—Nomination
Scholarships for 1891, 1893, 1895, 1897, 1899, 1901 and 1903; ‘value,
£150 annually, each tenable for two years.
THE Dr. T. STERRY HUNT SCHOLARSHIP.—Founded in 1894 by the will
of the late Dr. T. Sterry Hunt, and endowed with the sum of
$2,082, the income to be given and paid annually to a student or
students of Chemistry.
THE CANADIAN GENERAL ELECTRIC Co. SCHOLARSHIPS, given in 1900-
1903.—$1200.
“7 4. Medals and Prizes.
fn 1880 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Marquis of Lorne, Governor-General of Canada, the former for
competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in
the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1883.
In 1884 ἃ Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Marquis of Lansdowne, Governor-General of Canada, the former
for competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition
in the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1888.
In 1885 the British Association Gold Medal, for competition in the
Graduating class in the Faculty of Applied Scienice, was founded
by subscription of members of the British Association for the
Advancement of Science, and by gift of the Council of the Asso-
ciation, in commemoration of its meeting in Montreal in the year
1884.
In 1889 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency Lord
Stanley, Governor-General of Canada, the former for competition
in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in the Faculty
of Applied Science. Continued till 1893.
In 1894 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
Farl of Aberdeen, Governor-General of Canada, the former for
competition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in
the Faculty of Applied Science. Continued till 1898,
Ἷ
θοῦ
In 1899 a Gold and a Silver Medal were given by His Excellency the
‘Earl of Minto, Governor-General of Canada, the former for com-
petition in the Faculty of Arts, the latter for competition in the
Faculty of Applied Science. Continued to date.
5. Endowment and Subscriptions for Maintenance of
Faculty.
Endowment Fund. , Graduates’ Endowment Fund.
Daniel Torrance, Esq. .. ..$5,000 Graduates’ Endowment Fund—
Charles J. Brydges, Esq. .. 1,000 Class 1890, $70 a year for
ie Jewheckio: ΠΒΙΘΟ "22025 4. 1100 | 5 years, $350; received to
| Gate eer ea nee eee LS SSF
ROCA το Swi a sO 00."
Annual Subscriptions, 1871-1879.
Hon. James Ferrier ($100 per annum for 10 VEALS) iW Saat scre $ 1,000
Peter Redpath, Esq. ($400 per annum for 10 years) por ie 4,000
John H. R. Molson, Esq. ($400 per annum for 10 years)...... 4,000
George H. Frothingham, Esq. ($400 per annum for 7 years).. 2,800
T. James Claxton, Esq. ($100 per annum for 6 Years) 600
Donald Ross, Esq. ($50 per annum for 5 ΘΈΕΙΝ, πὸ ΤΥ 200
Miss Mary Frothingham ($400 per annum for 3 years)........ 1,200
H. McLennan, Esq. ($100 per annum for 5 years) 500
A. F. Gault, Esq. ($100 per annum for 5 years) 500
Gilbert Scott, Esq. ($100 for 2 ViCAES)) Meee ΣΡ iit Sheets f ἘΜ ΤΣ othe 200
Joseph Hickson, Esq. ($100 for 2 ViCALS) i peace et ccte notre 200
Sir William Dawson, ($300 for 2 VCS δε τ otc ere an. eee 600
iis Hxcellency, theaMarquis) of ΠΟΥ -s.n)).2. cee τὸ τ 500
Mir Seed pach Clerrace ΒΗ tein: si caste ek eee es 100
Ota ee PIN ake de ohh ee he τ 6 abt
Subscriptions towards Maintenance of Engineering Department.
Sir Wm. C. Macdonald, sessions 1891-92 to 1897-98.. ete ΑΕ Σ es pO OL OLE
do LOTACVELtSINS trea ex ke ee 675
do to cover certain salaries, session 1894-
: Soman R189 7-98 Πρ ee ee 52} 1,920
do ᾿ to meet the expenses of the course of
summer work for Mining Engi-
neering Students (1898).. Fes εἰς 825
do Electric Light Re-installation in Engi-
Meerinewds ui dine 1899 ee ee 6,000
do to cover salary of Assistant in Chemi-
cal Department, session 1898-99 and
SESSION STS 99-1 00) pet) aes ee a eed 1,000
do Electric Storage Batteries, Reinstalla-
tion of Electric Lighting in Physics
Buildings ΘΕΟΣ G01 το eee en τλη το 30,000
A Friend, towards maintenance of Electrical Engineering
Department, 1901 and 41902.. ROA ot ene Spl pen are 800
OLAS: τ meee: ee ate stl oe ee τς .- $97,561
Subscriptions to Provide Lectures in Mechanical and Sanitary
Engineering.
E. B. Greenshields, Esq. ...$ 50 HOE Wander tse ese ad . 3161
Jimbs Bovey, )iSd\ a. 226...) 250 | Jeffrey H. Burland, B.A.Sce.,
$100 for 2 years .. .. ...... 200
Professor H. T. Bovey .. .. 61 | Smaller amounts .. .. ae 40
MONWaNG . cere ai a S16L
POAT ας σον τς ἢ
356
Subscriptions for Maintenance of Chair of Practical Chemistry, 1862.
Eons. Dunkin; WMP et ome Amol ea00
Sin MWillliamssOAwWSOM 0. cn eke mee aera ΤΠ Ρ00
Peter, Redpath; yHisdis som nul cay (cehees ΠΤ 296
TOE Pia tess πρώ Maney. ΟΣ,
For Maintenance of Chair of Mining Engineering and Metallurgy, 1891.
R. B. Angus, Esq.. ..$2,000 Forward .. .. ..$4,000 $6,200
Mrs. “DOW. =: Be ete LOO.) E. K. Greene, Esq.. .. 750
Hugh McLennan, Esq. 1,000 Dre le VS Cainerdkae: ss moO
Miss) Benny ssc oe) ἀν 15000 AVE Gault. ΞΟ tare ἡδὺ
tT. A. Dawes; Hsq.. .. © 750 Messrs. H. & A. Allan 750
HAL ΤΑῚ ἌΘΥ; ΘΟ fice ein 1200 Hector Mackenzie, Esq. 750
GW.) Reid, σον ες ¥100 Peter Lyall Esq. .. .. 750
Van Sous COS jus anh tee 00 James Ross, Esq. .. .. 600
$ 6,200 A. Robertson, Esq... .. 300
John Duncan, Esq. .. 300
Payable in Three Years. George Hague, Esq. .. 300
Jonathan Hodgson, Esq. 300
Sir W. Dawson.. .. .. 1,000 James Moore, Esq. .. 200
Alex. Stuart, Esq. Messrs. Ames & Holden 150
(London, Eng.).. .. 1,500 James Cooper, Esq. ,: 150
ἘΣ Cl ECLO ΞΟ τὸς wer LOO 10,800
Forward .. .. ..$4,000 $6,200 Motale seer ose ἘΣ ΠΕ SLA OOO
Remodelling East Wing for Class Rooms for Faculty of Applied
Science, 1888.
Johnny He IRs Molson HIS 0a.) aoa at eter. son ee eee OS OO
Sin Wan. Ὁ i Macdonald ve m0 eebeslecener, nao, 000.
Totals ce ih Rater ee πο πριν ed OS O00
6. Endowments for Apparatus.
The Local Committee of the British Association for the Ad-
vancement of Science, to found the British Association |
Apparatus Fund in the Faculties of Arts and Applied sei-
ence, in commemoration of the meeting of the Association
invavontreal an ΠΕ oc, Mien Ie, eves Sieh Pre tates © ene mateo e OO)
7. Subscriptions, etc., for Apparatus.
A: lady, for the purchase of Mining Models .. .. .. .. .. .. ..$1,00U
Mhoss McPougall’shsaq:,, forthe same a ase. one eee ns 25
J. Livesey, Esq., through Dr. Harrington, for the same.. .. .. 50
Geo. Stephen, Esq., for the same.. .. < 50
Chas. Gibb, Esq., donation for Apparatus - in “Applied ‘Science.. 50
The Local Committee for the reception (1881) of American
Society of Civil Engineers for the purchase of Appliances
for the department of Civil ee a ae in Faculty of
Applied Science .. . ener eine Sor Met gis occa ad, MENS
Capt. Adams, Chemical “Apparatus.. ites see Sit See ce 10
J. H. Burland, B.A.Sc., Chemical Apparatus Nelo. αὐ PLE eee 25
Sir Wm. C. Macdonala—
For Surveying and Geodetic Apparatus in 1890.. .. .. .. .. .. 1,500
For new apparatus, ete., in the Mechanical Department, 1900. 5,000
Totaly τον cies sae toes alee at τι δον chee Poe Res ae AOR 750
357
8. List of Subscribers and Donors to the Equipment of the
New Engineering Buildings of McGill University
to May, 1902.
θοῦ Wie. --
ΑΙ ΤΩΣ ΘΕΌΣ, Εἰ Cre erie ncyeriskar ee ales
Mining Photographs
Mocomotive ‘Co..2....-
Drawings
American. Bridge Co...Drawings
American Steam Gauge Co. (Bos-
OTA) pei e mcr ene etn aka’ Indicator
ΟΕ ΕΙΣ το. ciao ee Books
Ashton Valve Co. (Boston)......
Sectional Valve
Aurora Metal Co...... Specimens
Bellerielephone: (CO sie πο ςτὸ
Telephone Apparatus
Bertram & Sons, J. (Dundas)....
24 in. Planer
Bethlehem Iron Co....Specimens
Birch: ὁ Cos J. Gangland )cscs. «..
Hydraulic Tubes
American
BIPkKs pel CMI Vase ΠΡ Ὁ. Clock
Bishop, George ......Equipment
Blackwell, Kennet ...Equipment
Blake Mnfg. Co., The George F.
Blue Prints of Pump
Blake Pump Co., The Geo. (New
YOGIC ἀν ΠΕ OSTON) τοι... Pump
Bluenose Mining Co.......... Ore
SEEMING?) eAte ep εν το δὲ σον τὸ bias $50
Brockhaus, Herr F. A..... Books
ISTO m Some ElATay. CVin so ssc ieee $50
Brunners. Mond: ὦ Πού," Ore
ES GUSTI Am Grew pe haloes τὰν seers Se Boiler
Cameron, General...Rotary Drill
Campbell Tile Co. (England),
per Jordan & Locker...........
Equipment
Campbell, Kenneth ...........: $50
Canada Switch Co......Castings
Canadian General Electric Co.
(Toronto), per F. Nicholls.....
Equipment
Canada General Electric Co.....
Electric Drill, Edison Genera-
tor, Dynamo, Motor
CanadagRand Orillia. aoe oe
Rock Drill
Carnegie Steel Co..... Specimens
Caimslenee ISE tobcbts das ashe bee Lea
Carus-Wilson, Prof. G. A..%....:
Equipment
Cary,
Photographs of Boilers
Chadwick, aH. s. Truss Models
Chanteloup, E. ΡΥ 6 oe a EDO
Claxton, T. J...Timber Beams of
large Scantling for Testing
Laboratory
CoOstizanyvdie screen Equipment
Cowen, Amos..Samples of Bricks
Cowper ΣΕΥ, Els s Sacer aon
Model of Steam Engine
Craig, Messrs. J. & M. (Kilmar-
nock, Scotland)—Sanitary Sec-
tions (full size) and models
Crocker-Wheeler Electric Motor
Co., The (New York)....Motor
Armature, Prints
Crosby Steam Gauge and Valve
Co., The (Boston)..Gauge and
Valve, Indicator and Valves
Cumberland Ry. & Coal Co..Ore
Darling, Brown & Sharpe (Provi-
MEIC CHORE ΚΟ ἐν τ tek 6 in. Rule
Dates ΕΠ ΠΣ Ws. ee aac Σ Equipment
Dawson,
Books and Specimens
Dolworth Mining Co...5 tons ore
Dominion Coal Co..Miners’ Tools
Dominion Wire Manfg. Co., per
yu aimee πος eee, ee Shaper
IDYOWEM NSH) τ ΠΡ ΘΕ ἧς Ore
Drummond, Hon. G. A.....Prism
Drummond Goh) Sess) ευ Ore
Ry Scales Bt) IS py phe hae Tools
ΠΥ ΞΟ ales: ἘῸΝ one Tools
Marlee. Ras Air Injector
Edison General Electric Co......
Two 450 light dynamos, Brake
Shoe and Dise
Egieston, Dr. (New York).......
Framed Photographs of the
Moon, Books, Photos, ete.
Electric Welding Company (Bos-
COTM) PV τ pa ee Equipment
* Engineering Magazine’ (New
York City) Mining Illustrations
and Photographs
Eureka Tempered Copper Co....
Equipment
HustisaMinine! Com... 12 tons ore
BMepTae gene
Helton &sGuilleaumes-1a sae. cee
Samples of Cable Wire, ete.
I OGS Viti eee ον Hquipment
Frothingham & Workman..Tools
ΕΟ ΟΥ̓ Ἐπ (ει. ΝΕ ν᾿ ἘΣ ΑΝ ΠΝ πὰ
Specimens of Pine and Wood
bored by Teredos
Gardner; ἀν Sons Ri Wea... cee.
16 in. Lathe
Gardner wok. τς πο ΠΝ εἰς: Equipment
(γα τ COt pas hase ane eee $500
rari a eblenrive τ ook Equipment
Girdlestone Jeera. aint ο΄ κ᾿ Plans
308
Government of New South Wales
Collection of Australian Timbers
Government of Queensland, Aus-
tralia..Collection of Queensland
Timbers
CROW ETS ΝΗ τ ΚΡ ς
(GheNatehae Sly 5 sag ono oun dono $100
(Cpa Cn AW AspoeopauT Equipment
Guggenheim Smelting Co.........
Specimens
Gurney & Co., BE. & C.:.:..:.$604
Hadfield, Messrs. (Sheffield).....
Equipment
Hamilton Bridge Works Co......
A Model of the Stoney Creek
Arch
Hamilton Powder Co., Electrical
Blasting Machine, and Appli-
ances, etec., for blasting.
Hearn & Harrison, per L. Har-
TISOME Ὁ δες Barometer & Clock
ET eErSGiyseaEey fe τος crteiebeitis πον: $1200
ἘΠΟΟ ΞΟ ΕΠ OMEN Meters erste $200
OMe Tet A vite cr ereue ont (onePoyetic Equipment
Hosoki, Dr., of Tokio, Japan.....
Collection of Japanese Wood
Hoyt Metal Co........Specimens
Hughes & Stephenson.Equipment
ἘΠΙῚΡΠΘΝ ΝΕ ΕΠ ΠΥ eters Equipment
Illinois Steel Co..... Photos, etc.
Ingersoll Rock Drill) Cosn5...2. sa:
Rock Drill
Irwin & Hopper...... Equipment
IRVacpl ei ny πο ἐλ neds Cupola
VOY. CO; ΡΩΝ ᾧ εἴτ et ois Το ὁ πο ΣΟ Η $50
Jordan & Locker...... Equipment
AGNI eE Gives OMT Werverassicts Equipment
Kennedy = W'S) SONS: cries eels τς
American Turbine
Kennedy, W. (Owen Sound).....
Pump
CTS HER ARNOT VMs το ὉΠ» Tools
King & Son, Warden......... $534
Laughlin-Hough Drawing Table
COR Shs cor seen Drawing Tables
Machines RaApids= Cows sk Asters seats -
Electrical apparatus and power
WAIT LOU des ERO rdlee dete tec oer
Compound Engine
Ἐπ ΟΣ, AGE is dete etctepeteds Equipment
Lehigh Zine & Iron Co..Franklin
Furnace, N.J., Mining Speci-
mens and Photographs.
Lindsay & Co., C. F..Equipment
Lovell? & Son, John......3..; Books
ΠΡ δ. cA SG oe Ὁ Drawings and
Sketches of London and Liver-
pool Docks.
MGI RETSOTMsARN fever. leleisisteteisree Tools
MASON τῆς ater Equipment
Maxwell ἃ Co., E. J..Equipment
McCarthy, D. & J. (Sorel)....$300
VEC OW eal ΡῈ $4000
McLachlin Bros. (Arnprior)......
Timber
ΜΟΙ en” sD) ΕΣ $100
ἈΠΟ ΡΒ ΕΟ te acs Timber
MeNalily ΘΟ ΝΎ eter $100
McPherson Sand Box Co. (Troy,
N. Y.)......Model of Sand Box
| Midvale Steel Co...... Specimens
Miller Bros. & Sons..... Elevator
Mitehelli iP see ct Equipment ($300)
Mitchell & Cos, iRise. wee Equipment
INGISMIths. seein SACS chee
Specimens
Nalder Bros. & Co. (England)...
Standard Cell
| National Electric Mfg. Co....100
Volt Transformer, Transformers
|-National Lead Co..... Specimens
| Nicholson, peetens cee eee $100
Norton A. O.,. Boston, Mass..Two
Norton Ball-bearing Lifting-
Jacks.
Norton Emery Wheel Co. (Wor-
Gester, PUSS wie Mewes cee Equipment
Notman, Wm. %... Photographs
ΘΠ ΟΣ Srasse Costa eee Fittings
Osilvie Wt le τ nut $500
Ontario. Graphite rCose.. το ποτε, Ὁ
Graphite Rock
Packard Elec. Co..Transformers
ἜΣΘ ΠΟΥ, Ane ΠΣ ΠΥ ΡΣ Equipment
Parker vive cies acetals Equipment
ἘΡΕΕΟΤ vals ΡΝ τὶ Equipment
Peckham Motor Truck and
Wheel Co. (Kingston, N.Y.)....
Model of Motor Truck
Pelton Water Wheel Co. (New
ΠΟΙ ΕΟ δον τ τας caret Two Motors
| Pennsylvania Railroad, Co...:....
Working Drawings of Locomo-
tives (32)
Perrinec: Con ἄν ἘΠΕ ΝΟ, τὸ
| Phelps
Press and force pump
Engine Co., per A. R.
Williams & Co....Dake Steam
Engine, 4 Horse Power Engine
PaHlOw,, 2d) Act te ne eemintien cine $250
Pittsburgh Reduction ‘Cows... ts.
Specimens
Pratt & Whitney (Hartford
Conn.)..Epicycloidal Gear Model
Prowse: Grek τὶ Ὁ Equipment
Queensland Government, per Sir
Thos. McIlwraith..Collection of
Timbers.
Radiator’ Co.i(horonto) ieee: $500
PVA MAS Aly? “Soy OTe Ateneo eat $100
Rathbun eh Wieser Samples of
Fire-proof Construction ($112)
| Reddaiways ὅσ, Con Ἐπ ὰ-
Belt (value $50)
᾿ ἜΦΗ
359
ἘΣΘ ΒΗ ΤῊΝ i... s 556. Equipment , Smith, R. Guilford......... Books
Ved paths PEGS: Tete 14504) stare $100 Stanley Elect. Co..... Wattmeter
lexeyaol, (C8 AW iaeaetoeoc sao os one $100 Steels Cov ΘΕ scotland, ΘΟ τ το
PEREH@ TG sce ἘδῚ ἘΠῚ sla ie coco) τονε εἰν οτος $1000 Samples of Cable Wire, etc.
ἜΣΘΊΩΙ Sic, ἘΠῚ stetaidaiars = tele Equipment | St. George, Ἐς W...2...... Models
ROUGE = GratgtaBicceisiete clekors: clare cto $1000 | Stirling Co., The..Sectional Blue
TRASIOKO ORE pl ha Dae ee BOloe Books Prints of Boilers
Rhode Island Locomotive Works Sturtevant Co., The B. P. (Bos-
Photos of Locomotives EON) Bad pete tak skates erevense ace Blowers
Rife’s Hydraulic Engine Mfg. Co.
GROAN OKET NVia ΤΙΣ τ) tare ©
Hydraulic Ram
EOD DIN Ge ArIMStnOne rss oe τειν δ ραν ον
80 H.P. High Speed Engine
IRODELESON GL ds) ia sie Equipment
Rogers, Professor (Waterville,
IMITUG i τοῖος οὐδε core Equipment
VOSS ΠΕ ioy vec oni Mewes setae eames $500
VOC GETI τ τλο εξ ις Equipment
OVA ἘΠ ΘΟ Τ᾽ | CO ma-s. sere Motors,
Dynamos, Transformers, Coils,
Condensers
5 eee Equipment
G. (Robin & Sadler).....
Belting ($400)
Secleyse δι Κλ ον αι ΩΣ te ae Insulators
Schaeffer & Budenbery (Brook-
ΠΝ). τ DOUDLes Indicator
ΠΟΘΙ ΘΟ ΚΗ le iene ccislias caciser $100
Scoville Mito Co... sce. Equipment
Sharp, Stewart & Co. (Manches-
Rutherford, W.
Sadler,
CERES) Mero sire sere ..Equipment
ΞΠΘΕ ΘΙ ΙΒ ΘΕ τ τπρ γι eee $200
SheppandayChaseuesstyacncen cs $200
Siemens Bros. (London, Eng.)...
Cable Samples
Syoguilahe( Cake) 514 Vibe heehee eae Ae “ἀν Ὁ ἐπι ἢ
Framed Photos of Bridges (2)
ἘΣΤΕ ΤΕΣ ΣΝ ταν pate ον Equipment
Spence, J. P., C.E..Specifications
and drawings, showing con-
struction of Sault Ste. Marie
Canal Locks.
Swan Lamp Mfg. Co...... Lamps
Marv OT eA ce rae ἘΠ ΣΤ εν cove ateke ele $300
MEGS Ge CO. es oe sbetee Equipment
Thomas, R. & Son....: Insulators
Thomson-Houston Co. (Boston).
Incandescent Dynamos
DWV LOR ἐς CO! ete «cise Equipment
ΓΕ ΞΕ ΝΘ (COnSte DCD ter. το τς ω--
Drawings, ete.
Stephen....... Piece of first
Telegraph Wire Used
Walker & Co., James...... Tools
ΚΕ στ Wel ΤΟ ote Equipment
ΘΟ ET OT sex deg scam nels pint cers 00
Warnringtone Wire ΘΟ ΣΝ ἘΞ
| Cable Samples
EW aterous HneinerCOnacm.. 22. seer
Drawings,
| Westinghouse Air Brake Co......
Drawings,
lowWestonblect. Instr Co-se.....-
Ammeters,
Wetherill Separating Co.........
Ore Samples
Machine Co. (Boston)..
Electric Elevator
Wiley & Sons, John (New York)
Books
| Yale & Towne Mfg. Co. (Stam-
i tord, — Conn) scqseaer : Equipment
ΙΒ μεν Gael Orie esee ee ete
Blue Prints of Machinery
| Vail,
Whittier
The above representing a total of about $80,000.
9. Faculty of Applied Science Library Endcwment, 1893.
Hugh Paton.. ἘΝ πὸ Ἔχ ἢ
ET OMCC Mer ΜΉ eaten ΔΤ Sof NED
R. Gardner.. Ad
ἘΠῚ Garth: 6 an el OO
Hughes & Stephenson. . 100
ee MiFtChell: τς ci = tl,
Forward.. $600
50 |
| Forward.. ἐν $600
W. Rodden 25
Mesearken sea. 25
Robin & Sadler.. 50
J. Robertson, Eisq.. . 50
Mrs. John McDougall (1895)... 20
Total.. ἘΦ
360
Vv. Endowments and Subscrptions in Aid of the
Faculty of Medicine.
1. Leanchoil Endowment, 1884,
Το Strathconavand ΜΘ ον. skeet. ees ae Lap ete OO L000
2. Campbell Memorial Endowment, 1884.
Established to commemorate the service rendered to the Faculty
during 40 years by the late Dean, George W. Campbell, M.D., LL.D.
Mrs. G. W. Campbell. .. ..$ 2000 MOLWALGN Se achat eee δοθεῇη
ἘΠῚ ὯΝ ‘Allan, WSQ.iee . 1500 Jonathan Hodgson, Esq. .. 500
Lord Strathcona and Mount | (George: 4ROSS:;, EAD. τ΄ we 00
Royal.. .. is. 1500" ΤῊΝ G ΕΘ ΠΟΙ ΝΠ. sauce ee ee DOU
Lord Mount Stephen.. Be ae ἘΠ 0) Wim. Gardner, MSD: 22 32s. 500
Res. wAN SUS HSC cette e000 Messrs. Cochrane, Cassils
Hon. Geo. A. Drummond τς 1000 Sa Cow me ἘΞ αν a 500
ἌΜΕ Marra ΕΠ a6 rim L000) Sir Joseph Hickson fee reeeenn (0)
Robert Moat, Esq. .. .. .. 1000 | Allan Gilmour, Esq., Ottawa 500
Sir W. οὐ Macdonald.. ..:.. 1000 | R. W. Shepherd, Hsq. .. .. 500
ASCE TT ETUC ce τ τ LOO, ΘΟ ΕΣ sMenwiek. IMD iia. 300
Dunean McIntyre, Esqa.. .. 100) | Miles Williams, Esq. .. .. 300
AC MRR Galt, is@qsctlar a.) - π|0 00 Ge Pe Gindwoodss MED isa uc δοὺ
Me ΕΓ δα ΕΞ hit cece ees 2000 Charles F. Smithers, Hsq.. 250
Gaws)Sitephens,7 Hsoeas-aecés 10007 ΤΟ τ πού, me Scien ac ete OO
as Benning, Esq.. :. .- 1000 | A. Baumgarten, Hsq.. .. .. 2850
ΕΣ ΕΟ πα, Miers... . 1000 R. W. Elmenhorst, Esq.. .. 250
e B. & J. H. Burland, Esqs. ΠΟ ΕΣ uewis, UHISGe cme s er τοῦ
Miss Elizabeth C. Benny .. 1000 George Armstrong, Esq. .. 250
Jk S AWiLSON ΒΞ peace O00) J. M. Douglas, Esq.. 1 ὦ 250
Mrs. John Redpath .. .. .. 1000 Messrs. H. epg Sons &
Hon. John Hamilton:. .. .. 1000 | Come es 250
Vasy Omlemeyecee tl et ele ae LO OOM ἘΠΕ Shepherd, ἽΝ τοὶ. ΠΥ τὴν 250
Hugh Mackay, Esq. .. .. ... 1000 | Duncan McEachran, " sq.
Hector Mackenzie, Esq.. .. 1000 un Cave ΤΩΣ Wea ἘΝ. 200
Thomas Workman, Esq. .. 1000 | Benj. Dawson, Esq. Os ayes eae 00
ἘΠΙΡΉ Mel-snnan, sHisqese'. 81000) RA Wolfe, -HSQiy 2a: Ho ee lO
OSS Woods sane cate 000M Πα δε ΞΕ ον ie Dist τον ale
Brank) Buller, ΤΣ ie 2 4p00 VW ANT Patersony ἘΠΘΟΙ ΤῊΣ 100
James (Burnett, Fisqes 22.3 500 H. W. Thornton, M.D. “(New
Andrew Robertson, Esq.. .. 500 | Richmond, Q.) .. 100
Robert. Mackay, Esqi. .. °. 500 Cc. B. Harvey, M.D. (Yale,
ΠΟ ΕΠ, HSqe jh τ πα DOOM ΒΘ: 100
AMlex<sUreuharts MESO. τ τ νος: 500 | D. Cluness, M.D. (Nanaimo,
Pe eA ΞΘ ΠΝ ΞΟ. ewes Sy ΠΡ ake 500 | Bee): Waser ΤΥ Ike)
George Hague, Esq... .. .. 500 | W. Kinlock, Esq. Rae te 100
Se KES Wi PLES Gene s.e: Norse tenes 500 Hua, Richardson & Co Ψ 100
Warden! Kenos ΕΞ ΟΣ πον 0 500 Mrs. Cuthbert (New Rich-
JOHNS SLIBMMNS ΕΠ ΘΟ: πο te 500 MONG! @:) 2 eh - jeans, Bole 100
TLohn™ RamMikiNs HSC 2%.0 uke ees 500 J. M. Drake, M. coy tank ΒΟΥ, Ἢ 100
Robert Reford, Esq... . 5005) Shivehw Paton σον cee enna O00
Messrs. Cantlie. Ewan ὮΣ Co. 500 | R. T. Godfrey, Mids. ie oan LOO,
Messrs. ΠΩ NAV Oya hake Σ 500 TT. PAs HROdgers eis Ds sce ee 100
Randolph Hersey, Esq... .. 500 W: A. Dyer, Hsq:. .: 100
jon Ae Pillow, wise ees 500 Geo. W. Wood, M.D. (Fari-
Ss. Carsley, ἢ το αν, Hic. Neve eae 500 bault MViliny) αὐ eee : 100
τ: ΟΣ ΘΟ ΘΠ πὴ MaDe. ts. 500 | A. A. Browne, M.D. ae Seas 100
Messrs. S. Greenshields, Son ΘΕΟΣ νὴ ΜΕ: 100
ἀπ CO ce aie ere tale, ake, os 500 | R. L. MacDonnell, M.D. .. 100
Morwardleas || 039,000 MOnWaALbd emer e oe400
9501
IDOLWaAT ee ack) iss aeons bo 0,400) 1 Forward .. . .. »+-$48,821
Jos. Workman, M.D. (Tor- J. W. Oliver, M.D. (Clifton,
ΘΟ ας... Wi δος aes τὰ 90 ΘΝ -- τὸ
Henry Lunam, BVA Σ M.D. [PD AS McDougall, "M.D. ‘(Ot-
(Campbellton) N-B.))..c—.% 50. | taware δον τως 10
ἘΠ ΞΡ" ΠΟΥ ἀτς Σ ate 50! | A. Poussette, M. ὍΣ (Sarnia,
ee ἢ ΑἸ νον, IMUSID Aas. sce 30 | ODE 10
Reads ἘΣ ΕΟ τας, MRD. = ς- 25 A. R uttan, “M.D. (Napanee,
Louis T. Marceau, M.D. | (OD liane 10
Naperville (@s)t vole Ὡς 25 | James Gunn, M. D. (Dunham,
Grifith Evans, M.D. (Vet. Oe) rad ot 10
Dept. Army)... 26 JE McDiarmid, ND» (Hen-
Jon. Harleys.) MED. (Belle- | Sal OU wee oe t teale se eae 5
vali Ke) Yee es 3 25 Wa idle Derby, M.D. (Rock-
Henry R. Gray, ‘Esq.. a 25 Janda ©>) ie a eg Bal ας Ἧς 5
J. E. Brouse, M.D. (Pres- | J. Gillies, M.D. ‘(Teeswater,
ον. -. ἮΝ 20...} ΟΝ ας τος Rear. αν. 5
ἘΣ ING Rinfret " (Quebec) ΠΣ 20 djs IS; Benson, M.D. (Chat-
Robert Howard, M.D. (St. ham ΝΕ rw tele) eee 5
Alan gis) Ἐπ" aac 20 ΠΕΡῚ Ae Sorter. ΡΠ: Ὁ 09;
IDES Hh "ἊΣ ΤΟΣ “McIntosh DACA. CUayic ponies 25s δ ον 5
ἈΠ ΘΟ ki EL) Prac, seat. « 20 | J. A. McArthur, M.D. (Fort
ΕΠ MICs eae ΜΕ ces 15 | BY UTS AG)s) ee ee ebetaran Mees neh: 5
J. C. Rattray, M.D. (Cob- | John Campbell, M.D. (Sea-
den iO%)2 eae τς το λων 10 | nivOy gat] Oe Chae rnp aeew one eee 5
Dee dele Howard, “M.D. (La-
CHINE) tess te See aA ea es 10
, | ERO tails Δ ΣΕ ΕΣ ee ne P4079 00
HOGWaANGy fo τὴ Se eae ook
3. Endowed Chairs, Donations, Etc.
LorRD STRATHCONA AND Mount Royal CHAIR OF PATHOLOGY,
endowed in 1893 by Lord Strathcona and Mount Royal
With the sum of.. .. MUA) FOS 000)
LorRD STRATHCONA AND Mount ᾿Ηότγατ, “ENDOWMENT. FOR THE
DEPARTMENT. OF HYGIENE, endowed in 1893 by Lord
Strathcona and Mount Royal with a sum of .. . 50,000
Mrs. Mary Dow BEQUEST—Bequest by ΠΣ will of the late Mrs.
(Mary Dow for the Faculty of Medicine, 1893, $10,000 less
Governimenterlax soOfe 10, pen ΘΗ tase sack fee ey cs Peet os listen) cies iata 000
JOHN H. R. MoLtson DONATION—In 1893, $25,000 for the purchase
of land, and $35,000 for additional building and equipment. 60,000
WALTER DRAKE, EsqQ., for benefit of Chair of Physiology, an
annualydonationyof 6500, siven ΠΟΙ 1Ὸ 1897s το 2. 55... 8 3,500
Dr. ROBERT CRAIK FUND—
Mrs. John McDougall, toward formation of above
(1898-94) .. ς πο ραν, ἢ ses be)
Jane F. Learmont, ‘pequest, do. do. (1894). oe τὰν 3000
: 4,000
JOSEPH MORLEY DRAKE CHAIR OF PHYSIOLOGY, endowed in 1898
by Walter Drake, Esq., with the sum οὗ... .. . 25,000
Lapy STRATHCONA AND Mount RoyaL Donation ‘for. erection
and equipment Additional Buildings (1899) .. .. .. . 50,000
Hon. Mrs. Howarp Donation for erection and equipment “Addi-
tional Buildings (1899) .. .. .. . 50,000
D. Morricrk, Esqa., Donation for equipment ‘of. Pharmacology
THAD OTATOM ECS ee cach cece, ccadete ER OSU το τῶ hog Se πο ge +508
3. Medals and Scholarships.
In 1865 the ‘‘ Holmes Gold Medal’? was founded by the Faculty of
Medicine as a memorial of the late Andrew Holmes, Esq., M.D.,
LL.D., late Dean of the Faculty of Medicine, to be given to the
best student in the graduating class in Medicine, who should
undergo a svecial examination in all the branches whether
Primary or Final.
362
In 1878 the “‘ Sutherland Gold Medal’’ was founded by Mrs. Suther-
land of Montreal, in memory of her late husband, Prof. William
Sutherland, M.D., for competition in the classes of Theoretical
and Practical Chemistry in the Faculty of Medicine, together
with creditable standing in the Primary Examinations.
THE Davip MorRRICE SCHOLARSHIP—in the subject of Institutes of
Medicine, in the Faculty of Medicine—founded in 1881—value
$100. (Terminated in 1883.)
5. Library, Museum and Apparatus.
For the Fittings of the Library and Museum of the Faculty of
Medicine, 1872.
G. W. Campbell, A.M., waa ΠΟΥ αν. τὴν le 0)
WEMERUS Cott, ΜῈ 10. τ sec 200 Robert Craik, M.D. πο ΠΣ 00
ΤΩΣ Winleht, ἈΠ τ 00 Geo. EL Fenwick, M.D. τ 200
Robert P. Howard, M. De : 200 Joseph M. Drake, M.D... .. 200
Duncan C. MacCallum, M. Τ᾽. 200 George Ross, M.A., M.D. .. 50
HOnwand ὁ ἘΠῚ ἘΣ τ Ὁ ΡΠ) ΠΟΘΙ, ees, ae τὴ τς ke Resa ODU
The Professors and Lecturers in { Donation to Apparatus, Museum
the Summer Sessions of the, Library, ete., of the eto $2,205
Faculty of Medicine.......... Faculty, 1887, $1,182; 1888, $1,028
For Physiological Laboratory of Faculty of Medicine, 1879.
IDI CE Ory Tago SVE Cie Nog. ase oe 3 100 IMOr ward 42) 4s oe aie
ΤΟΥΣ WELTON OM gears Serer ee (00 DPE VOSS! “ie tee, tae Gia eA
Dr Ora Wh ae ee, Gen eet een eal OO Dr; ΕΘ ΘΙ ΘΙ τ τ χοῦ
Dr sMiacGallumit δον corre lOO Dr Buller’ #5 a4 τυ θῇ
DIE ΣΕ ΘΟ, in, bre ues ee eet. lOO Dre Gardnersa ας wee ee.
Drs GOdinre yes. ΕΚ ee OO, Dr Osler? tier cere ee eee ee OL
Dr. McEachran, F.R.C.V.S.. 100
ΗΟ ΠΥ fen COO MOAT [oe Sa eee Ὁ ODL
Cameron Obstetric Collections.
Dr Cs CanienGiiar wen, Ba mele st weak ete ee, Ce ule Uae a ΤῸ ΓΑ emer ΙΕ
6. Miscellaneous.
Anonymous Donor toward Expenses of Pathology for Session
TROD CS: se Neh Cee COL ls AS σον AeA τὴν el το a OO
Contributors Towards Ρ ΔΕΙ͂Ν of Research Fellow in the Departmeut
Pathology, 1900.
James Ross, 10: πῶ ΠΣ Ἂν i Meat Nees ae αν τὸς ee ee ETN LC)
ἘΣ ΒΑΡ Shans gene. ocean aed cena nee eer ee TOO,
EOLA etic. ns dale ον O00,
VI. Endowments and Subscriptions for the Faculty
of Law.
(1. Endowed: Chairs, Etc.
THE GALE CHaiR, in the Faculty of Law, endowed in 1884 by the late
Mrs. Andrew Stuart (née Agnes Logan Gale), of Montreal, in
memory of her father, the late Hon. Mr. Justice Gale,—$25,000.
THE MACDONALD FACULTY OF LAW ENDOWMENT, founded by Sir Wm.
C. Macdonald, in 1890—$150,000. Supplemented in 1897 by $50,000.
Total $200,000.
Sir Wm. C. MACDONALD, remodelling part of the East Wing in 1895 for
Class Rooms, Lecture Rooms, etec., for Law Faculty.
Str WM. C. MACDONALD, Travelling Scholarships in Law, 1901—$3,600;
1902,— $1,800.
Ἂν»
ΠΥ
3638
2, Medals,
In 1865 the “ Elizabeth Torrance Gold Medal,’’ was founded and en-
dowed by John Torrance, Esq., of St. Antoine Hall, Monireal, in
memory of the late Mrs. John Torranee, for the best student in
the graduating class in Law, and more especially for the highest
proficiency in Roman Law.
Vii. Graduates’ Funds.
1, The Fund for the Endowment of the Library.
The Graduates’ Society of the University, in 1876, passed the fol-
lowing Resolution :—
Resolved :—‘‘ That the members and graduates be invited to sub-
_ ““seribe to a fund for the endowment of the Libraries of the Univer-
“sity; said fund to be invested and the proceeds applied under the
“supervision of the Council of the Society in annual additions to the
“Libraries; an equitable division of said proceeds to be made by the
“Council between the University Library and those of the Profes-
“sinal Faculties.”’
In terms thereof subscriptions have been paid in to the Graduates’
Society, amounting in all to $3,120; the interest on which is annually
expended in the purchase of books for the several libraries, under
the direction of a special committee appointed for that purpose.
2, The Dawson Fellowship Foundation,
The Graduates’ Society of the University, in 1880, and in com-
memoration of the completion by Dr. Dawson of his twenty -fifth
year as Principal, resolved to raise, with the assistance of their
friends, a fund towards the Endowment of the Fellowship under the
above name.
Details of the scheme can be had from the Treasurer, Francis
Topp, B.A., B:C.L. The following subscriptions have been announced
to date, Jan. 1st, 1902. They are payable in one sum, in instalments,
without interest or with interest till payment of capital as subscribers
have e'ected.
Alphaleicaliy airanged.
IAD DOLE Ww Ew .e.19.. ἘΣΣῚ 100 MORWardui.. πὸ πὸ τς Φήη190
Archibald, H., σῦν ΕἸ: ΠΤ MAS ee ee LOD
Garter Cy ἘΣ eee τὺ | vic Cormick yD): Cdue gee LOM
Cruikshank, W. ΜΕΥ Ti, 100 | McGibbon, R. D., B.A., B.C.L. 100
Dawson, W. B., M.A., Ma-E. 50 | McGoun, A., jun., M.A.,
B. AS (Op ἀξ
-Bethune, M. B., M.A., B. ὩΣ ἘΠ Oe haleey-iteirig ΑΞ ΟΣ ΜΊΑ ΕΣ ΣΉ δὴ
ἜΣ ΟἿΣ
G
ΠΡ yds, WWeAnee Ss Sy. . 2250 IBY Galata δ εν ΚΤ tee, MOO
Guill ΟΣ ἜΣΑΝ ὅτ ee ΠΌΣΟΙ ΘΠ ΠΡ wien, 2,0 ΠΕΡ ΆΣ a | ie 5) LOD
Hall, Rev. WwWm., M. ae Sov ee LOU Ramsay, R.JA., M-A., “B.C... 50
Hall; Js S:; 16:5 of AL HBC: Th 100 | Spencer, J. W. B.A.Sc., Ph.Ds οὐδ
Harrington, B. J., Beas PhD ΡΟ isStephentaG.v ble ws: Clg. τ ὐ 00
Hutchinson, M., B.C.L. PAN Stewarts Ac (Be ΑΘ We 20
Το ΠΤ De i),0Cl. vee S50r | Stewart, J... MD: τς. τὸ το δ᾿ 60
Kerans, 9 Revie ise tele oMicAS | Tait, ™M. M., 258 Opiate ar 100
IPIDPIDE) hee ree 100 eaylong ΣΎ ΒΡΩ͂ ΕΚ BiG: 100
Meche sates ἜΡΟΝ : 100 | Trenholme, N. W., M.A.,
Lighthall, WADE BG ΤΕ 0 ἐν CT rons, le ae ieee ers og 240
MODWAGOe toda ei yas πιΦ750 Motaleto, date: sie sescos LO
Gin eae
ὌΝ ak Se,
Laie. tee
Pe oY
May
My
yi)
os
So 4
ny
ve
hae
McGill University
SESSION. 1902-1903
DEGREE AND SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS
LISTS OF STANDING, HONOURS AND PRIZES
CONTENTS
τὰ
Faculty of Law
Faculty of Arts
~ Faculty of Applied S
‘ience |
nm
v
Faculty of Medicine
Faculty of Law.
THIRD YEAR ‘GRADUATING CLASS).
HONOURS.
(In order of merit. Students of equal standing are bracketed
together.)
GOSSELIN, Louis, B.A.—First Rank Honours, Elizabeth Torrance Gold
Medal and Prize of $50.
CASGRAIN, A. CHASE, B.A.—Second Rank Honours and Prize of $25.
MacKINNON, CEcIL G., B.A.—Second Rank Honours and Prize of $15.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF B.C.L.°
(In order of merit.)
Gosselin, Louis, B.A.
Casgrain, A. Chase, B.A.
MacKinnon, Cecil G., B.A.
Rugg, Frederick S.
Vipond, Herbert S.
Madore, Louis, B.A.
Theberge, Albert.
Blaylock, Harry W., B.A.
Bergeron, Patrick John.
Tansey, Thomas M.
Orr, Henry Stanley, B.A.
Weinfield, Henry, B.A.
Rankin, Arthur G. E., B.A.
STANDING IN THE SEVERAL SUBJECTS
(Subjects alphabetically arranged.)
AGENCY, PARTNERSHIP AND CORPORATIONS.
Theberge and Vipond and Madore, equal; Gosselin, Weéinfield,
Casgrain, Rugg, Bergeron, Rankin, Tansey ; Blaylock and MacKin-
non, equal; Orr.
COMMERCIAL LAW.
Casgrain, Rugg, Theberge, Blaylock, MacKinnon; Tansey and
Gosselin, equal; Bergeron, Vipond, Madore, Orr, Weinfield, Rankin.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
MacKinnon; Rugg and Vipond, equal; Weinfield, Blaylock, Ber-
geron, Orr, Rankin; Theberge and Gosselin, equal: Madore, Cas-
grain, Tansey.
4
CRIMINAL LAW.
Casgrain; Madore and Tansey, equal; Rugg and Theberge,
equal; Bergeron, MacKinnon, Gosselin; Blaylock and Orr, equal;
Vipond, Rankin, Weinfield.
INTERNATIONAL. LAW.
Vipond, Tansey, Casgrain, Orr; Theberge and Gosselin, equal;
MacKinnon, Madore, Weinfield, Rugg, Blaylock, Bergeron, Rankin.
MARRIAGE COVENANTS, PRESCRIPTION, ETC .
Gosselin, Rugg, Bergeron, Blaylock, Theberge, Vipond, MacKin-
non, Madore, Orr, Casgrain, Weinfield, Tansey, Rankin.
OBLIGATIONS.
Gosselin, Orr; Casgrain and Madore, equal; MacKinnon and
Vipond, equal; Blaylock, Rugg; Rankin and Theberge, equal; Wein-
field and Bergeron, equal; Tansey.
PROCEDURE.
Gosselin, MacKinnon, Rugg, Weinfield, Bergeron; Blaylock and
Casgrain and Vipond and Rankin, equal; Tansey; Theberge and
Madore, equal; Orr.
REAL .PROPERTY LAW.
Theberge, Bergeron; MacKinnon and Vipond, equal; Madore,
Casgrain; Gosselin and Tansey, equal; Orr; Blaylock and Rugg,
equal; Weinfield, Rankin.
ROMAN LAW.
Gosselin and MacKinnon, equal; Madore and Casgrain, equal;
Blaylock, Orr, Bergeron, Vipond; Rugg and Theberge, equal; Tan-
sey, Rankin, Weinfield.
SUCCESSIONS, GIFTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS.
Casgrain and Vipond, equal; Orr; Blaylock aud Madore and
Rugg, equal; Bergeron and Tansey and Rankin, equal; Gosselin,
Theberge, MacKinnon, Weinfield.
SECOND YEAR.
HONOURS.
Dickson, N.—First Rank General Standing and Prize of $50.
WILLIAMS. H.S., B.A.— First Rank General Standing and Prize of $25.
Corron, W. N., B.A.—First Rank General Standing.
Drouin, J.—First Rank General Standing.
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATION.
(In order of merit).
Dickson. Williams. Cotton, Drouin, Brodie, Phelan, McDougall,
DaWitt, Ogilvie, Pope, Vineberg, Mackie, Stephens.
5
STANDING IN THE SEVERAL SUBJECTS.
(Subjects alphabetically arranged.)
CIVIL PROCEDURE.
Dickson ; Phelan and Williams, equal; Brodie and Cotton. equal ;
McDougall ; Mackie and Stephens and Drouin, equal; Ogilvie and DeWitt
equal ; Pope and Vineberg, equal.
COMMERCIAL LAW.
Dickson, Williams. Drouin, Phelan, Cotton, Brodie and McDougall,
equal; DeWitt, Vineberg; Mackie and Pope, equal; Ogilvie.
CORPORATIONS.
Cotton, Dickson, Williams. Drouin, Brodie, Phelan, McDougall,
De Witt, Ogilvie; Pope and Vineberg, equal; Stephens, Mackie.
CRIMINAL LAW.
Cotton, Williams, Dickson, Pope; Brodie and Drouin, equal; Ogilvie
Phelan, De Witt, McDougall, Stephens, Mackie, Vineberg.
INTERNATIONAL LAW.
Drouin. Dickson, Cotton, McDougall, Williams, Brodie, De Witt,
Ogilvie and Phelan, equal; Vineberg, Pope, Mackie and Stephens, equal.
PRESCRIPTION, LEASE OR HIRE, MUNICIPAL LAW.
Dickson, Drouin, Williams, De Witt, Brodie, McDougall, Cotton
Mackie, Phelan, Vineberg, Stevens, Pope and Ogilvie.
REAL PROPERTY LAW.
Dickson, Williams, Drouin, Cotton, Brodie, Phelan, Ogilvie, Vineberg
McDougall, Mackie, Pope, Stephens, De Witt.
SUCCESSIONS.
Brodie and Cotton, equal; Drouin; Dickson and Ogilvie, equal:
Williams, Pope, Vineberg, McDougall, Phelan, De Witt, Mackie, Stephens.
FIRST YEAR.
HONOURS.
HARRIS, SPENCER Dawe, B.A.—First Rank General Standing and
Scholarship of $100.
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATION.
(In order of merit.)
Harris, Spencer, Dale, BA.; Greenshields, Charles G.: Coulin,
James E.; Wallace, Richard P.; Morin, S..R., B.A.; Duffy, Fabian J.
0
STANDING IN THE SEVERAL SUBJECTS.
(Subjects alphabetically arranged.)
CIVIL PROCEDURE.
Harris, Greenshields, Coulin, Duffy, Wallace, Morin.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
Harris, Wallace; Morin and Coulin, equal; Greenshields, Duffy.
LEGAL HISTORY.
Harris, Coulin, Greenshields, Wa!lace, Morin, Duffy.
OBLIGATIONS,
Harris and Greenshields, equal; Morin and Coulin. equal; Wal-
lace and Duffy, equal.
PERSONS.
Greenshields, Coulin, Harris; Morin and Wallace, equal; Duffy.
REAL RIGHTS.
Harris; Morin and Greenshields, equal; Wallace, Duffy, Coulin.
ROMAN LAW.
Harris Coulin, Greenshields, Wallace, Morin, Duffy
.
|
|
1
Faculty of Arts.
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF B.A.
IN HONOURS.
(In Alphabetical Order.)
First Rank. —BELYEA, MARION E.
Bovey, F. H. WILFRID.
CoutuRE, Gui. C.
East, EpvirH M.
JOHNSON, WALTER S.
LOMER, GERHARD R.
LUNDIE, E. HELEN
PARKIN, MAUDE E.
WALES, JULIA G.
Second Rank.—FEE, Jas. E.
LocKHART, ARTHUR R. B.
WiIsboM, KATHERINE Εἰ.
ORDINARY B.A.
(In order of merit’ Students of equal standing are bracketed
together).
Class T.—Davidson, Mac. B.
MecMorran, Thomas 8.
Class I1.—Griffin, Gertrude
; Harris. Alan Dale
Dutaud, Gustave
§ Lunny, Rosemary
ὶ Parkius, Edgar R.
(Cameron, Dakers
\ Mackay, Eric B.
Seaman, Jno. C.
§{ Holman, William L.
\ Troop, George W. H.
Class IIT.—Simister. Warren.
Ascah, Robert G.
SPECIAL EXAMINATION.
Ireland, F. Charles
Parker, Dan T.
ORDINARY B. SC.
Class II.—Gass, Helen
Class IIT.—McLeod, Euphemia ἃ.
8
THE ΝΕΙΙ, STEWART PRIZE.
Reid, Allan S., B.A.
BACHELORS OF ARTS PROCEEDING TO THE DEGREE OF M.A. IN COURSE.
Cooke, Hereward Lester, B.A.
Craig, William Woodham, B.A.
Johnson, John Guy Watts, B.A.
MeMillan, Cyrus J., B.A.
BACHELOR OF ARTS PROCEEDING TO THE DEGREE OF M.SC. IN COURSE.
Marcuse, Bella, B.A.
MASTER OF ARTS PROCEEDING TO THE DEGREE OF D.SC. IN COURSE.
Tory, Henry M. J., M.A.
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF LL.D., HONORIS CAUSA.
Mackenzie, Sir Alexander ( vampbell, Mus.Doc., LL.D. (Glasgow).
Moyse, Charles E., B.A. (London).
Parkin, George R., LL:D., C.M.G.
PASSED THE INTERMEDIATE EXAMINATION.
(1).—FQR COURSE LEADING TO B.A.
(In order of merit. Students of equal standing are bracketed together.
Class I.—King, Louis V.
Idler, S. Mary
Michaels, Roeebad ἨΣ
Macnab, Norman
Class II.—Cushing, R. Macaulay
Sharp, Florence E.
{ Chodat, Henri
ἢ Laber, Marion Μ. Ὁ.
Fraser, Geo. A,
ἘΠΕ May
Edw ards, Lyford P.
McFee, M. C. Coll
( Bowman, Nora F.
, Curtis, Walter E.
| Perry, Kenneth M.
(Roy, Philias R.
Class ITI,—H alpenny, Thomas A.
Hitchcock, Mary A.
Laverock, + Lily J.
( Adams, Claude A
] Hill. Julia M.
\McCuaig, Douglas R.
McMurtry, Rennie O.
ΐ Nicholson, John C.
Moule, Frances S.
Cameron, A. W.
{ Lyman, Ruth D.
Wales, Osgood H.
Gillean, A. Muriel
{ Hyde, G. Gordon
Stewart, William
Stewart, Thomas S.
1 Vancouver College.
s With supplemen’ al examination in one subject.
τὰ ee a
Ms ἫΝ
tr Pan eee reg Ne ὟΝ
y o_o » 7
Bajus, William P. (5) =
Cotton, Thomas F. (5)
@raness ©. W...(8)
Cross, C. Ernest (s)
DeBeck, Edwin Κα. 1 (5).
Hepburn. Flora E. (5).
Howitt, Henry (s).
Jenkins. Joseph (s).
Locke, Ernest (s).
McCoy, Isabel (5).
Munn, Laura A. (s).
Ower, John J. (5).
Price, Thomas John ἢ (5).
Rabinovitch Max (5).
Robinson, Wiitliam W. (5).
Smith, Ella (s).
Tannenbaum, David (s).
FOURTH YEAR (GRADUATING CLASS).
" HONOURS.
In Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Lunpir, E. Heten—First Rank Honours and Anne Molson Gold Medal
In Classics.
Bovey, F. H. Witertp—First Rank Honours and Chapman Gold Medal-
In Mental and Moral Philosophy.
East, Epira M.—First Rank Hononrs and Prince of Wales Gold Medal.
LomMER, GERHARD R.—First Rank Honours and Medal Prize.
LocKHART, ARTHUR R. Β.-- Second Rank Honours.
FEE, J AMES E.—Second Rank Honours.
In English Language and Literature.
WaALEs, Jutia G.—First Rank Honours and Shakspere Gold Medal.
BELYEA, MARION E.—First Rank Honours.
JOHNSON, WALTER S.—First Rank Honours.
In Modern Languages and History.
WispoMm, KATHERINE F.—Second Rank Honours.
In History.*
Couture, Gur. C.—First Rank Honours and Medal Prize.
PARKIN, MAuUDE E.—First Rank Honours.
First Rank General Standing.
Davinson, Mac. B.—Special Certificate.
McMorran, THOMAS S.—Special Certificate.
THIRD YEAR.
HONOURS.
δ .
SHELDON, ERNEST ὟΥ. - First Rank Honours and Prize in Mathematics
and Natural Philosophy.
Roser, Hersert J.— First Rank Honours-in Classies; Prize in Latin ;
Prize in Greek.
ARCHIBALD JoHN G.—First Rank Honours in Classies ; Prize in Latin.
+ Vancouver College.
s With supplemental examination in one subject.
*No medal offeréd for this subject.
10
HINDLEY, J. Geo.—First Rank Honours and Prize in History and
Economics.
CAMPBELL, DONALD G.—First Rank Honours and Prize in History and
Economics.
HADRILL, MARGARET.—First Rank Honours in History and Economics ;
Prize in Economics.
SHANKS, GEO.—First Rank Honours in Mineralogy.
Brown, Wo. G.—First Rank Honours and Prize in Chemistry.
LATHE, FRANK E.—First Rank Honours in Chemistry.
Mc LEop, ANNIE.—-First Rank Honours in Chemistry.
Hart, E. Murre..—First Rank Honours in English Language and
Literature.
Srupson, Epirn B.—Second Rank Honours and Prize in Mathematics
and Natural Philosphy.
MaAcKENZIE, CATHERINE I.—Second Rank Honours in History and Econo-
mies ; Prize in History.
Rusprnowitz, IsRAEL.—Second Rank Honours in History and Economics.
GRIFFIN, GRACE L.—Second Rank Honours in History and Economics.
FREEZE, HELEN L.—Second Rank Honours in Chemistry.
GARDNE rR, H. Ivy L.—Second Rank Honours in English Language and
Literature. 4
Dickson, ADA.—Second Rank Honours in English Language and Liters
ature.
McKenzik, ANeus Ὁ. M.—Second Rank Honours in History and Economics.
McGouGan, Ep.—Second Rank Honours in Philosophy.
Μοολι. M. V.—Second Rank Honours in Modern Languages.
Lomer, Theo. O.—Prize in Modern Languages.
STEWART, J. URE.—Prize in Hebrew.
PASSED THE THIRD YEAR EXAMINATIONS.
(Arranged in alphabetical order.)
Archibald, Bell, Bouchard, Brown, Campbell, Craig, Dickenson,
Dickson, Draper, Freeze, Gardner, Griffin, Hadrill, Hart, Harvie, Henry,
Hindley, Lathe, Logan, MecCally, McDonald, MacFarlane, McGougan,
Mackenzie (C.I.), McKenzie (A.D.), MacLeod, Marshal!, Mingie, Molson,
Papineau, pera Rose, Rubinowitz, Shanks. Sheldon, Simpson,
Stewart (J.U.), Stewart (L.J.), Walker, Wickware, Wilson.
Ἐπ ΤῊ in Arts, registered in Medical Faculty, who will be qualified
to enter the fourth year Arts on completing their medical year:
Chandler, Gray, Gurd, Lomer, McDiarmid.
SECOND YEAR,
HONOURS:
Kine, Louis V. (Montreal High School)—First Rank Honours and Prize
in Mathematics; First Rank Honours and Prize in Latin , First
Rank General Standing.
IpLer. 5. May (Montreal High School)—First Rank Honours and Prize
in Latin: Second Rank Honours in Mathematics; First Rank
General Standing; Prize in Philosophy ; Prize in German; Annie
McIntosh Prize.
PreRRY, Kenneth M.° (Regina High School) — First Rank Honours and
Prize in Mathematics.
CusHING, R. Mac. (Montreal High School) — First Rank Honours and
Prize in Latin.
Epwarps, L. P. (Central High School, Grand Rapids, Mich.)—Second Rank
Honours in Latin.
FRASER, Gro. A. (Montreal High School)—Second Rank Honours in Latin.
SmitH, May (High Schbol, Montreal)—Second Rank Honours in Latin.
Hircncoc kK, Mary E. (Stanstead Wes. Coll.)— Second Rank Honours in
Philosophy.
Tt
MicHasE.s. R. F. (High School. Montreal)—First Rank General Standing.
Macnap, NoRMAN (Montreal High School)—First Rank General Standing.
CHopaAtT, Henri (Montreal High Schoo!)—Prize in Modern Languages.
HALPENNY. T. ANSON (Montreal High School)— Prize in Biology.
SHARP, F. EVELYN (Private Tuition)—Prize in Logic. Prize in English.
TABER, MARION, M.D. (Stanstead Wes. Coll.)—Prize in Botany.
Roy, P. R.—Prize in Hebrew.
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
(1) FOR COURSE LEADING TO B.A.
Class I.—King, Idler, Michaels, McNab. ee tite
Class II.—Cushing, Chodat and Taber, equal ; Fraser (G.A.) and
Smith, May, equal; Edwards, McFee ; Bowman and Curtis
and Perry and Roy, equal. :
Class IIT.—Halpenny, Hitchcock, Laverock = ; Adams and Hill and
McCuaig, equal; McMurtry and Nicholson, equal ; Moule,
Cameron; Lyman and Wales. equal ; Gillean ; Hyde and
Stewart W., equal; Stewart. Τὶ S., Bajus ἢ (5), Cotton (s),
Crane (s), Cross (s), DeBeck = (s), Hepburn (s), Howitt
(s), Jenkins (s), Locke (s), Munn (s), Ower (s), Price =
(s), Rabinovitch (s), Robinson, Ww. W. (9), Smith Ella (s),
Tannenbaum (s).
(2) FOR COURSE LEADING TO B.SC.
Class II.—Sharp.
Class III.—McCoy (s).
FIRST YEAR.
HONOURS.
McLeop, ALEX. R. (Prince of Wales College. Charlottown, P.E.I.)—First
Rank Honours in Latin; Second Rank Honours in Mathematics ;
First Rank General Standing; Pr.ze in Latin; Prize in Greek ;
Coster Memorial Prize.
Carr, Wo. L. (Huntingdon Academy)— First Rank Honours and Prize in
Mathematics.
ΚΊΗΒΟΗ, Simon, (Montreal H gh School)—First Rank Honours in Mathe-
maties ; Second Rank Honours in Latin.
Rogers, Davin B.—First Rank Honours in Mathematics.
Cousins, GEO. V. (Westmount Academy)—First Rank Honours in Latin.
RorKE, MABLE—Second Rank Honours in Mathematics.
Nayior, R. ΚΈΝΝΕΤΗ (Shawville Academy)—Secoud Rank Honours in
Latin.
GIBB, opened W. (Westmount Academy)— Second Rank Honours in
atin.
ΣΝ ΕΒΕΤΟΙ SoLomon (Sherbrooke Academy)—Second Rank Honours in
Latin.
f{ Lewis, Davin S. (Montreal High School)—First Rank General Standing.
\SHaw, Herpert T. (Montreal High School) — First Rank General
Standing ; Prize in English.
Ryan, EsrHer L. M. (Montreal High School)—Second Rank Honours in
Latin; Prize in French.
t Vancouver College.
(s) Supplemental in one subject.
12
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
(In alphabetical order.)
(1).—FOR COURSE LEADING TO B.A.
McLeod ; Lewis and Shaw, equal; Kirsch, Holway; Naylor and Ryan,
equal; Carr; Flanders + and Freedman and McTaggart t and Rorke,
equal; Gibb; Clark and Cousins and Douglas, equal; Vineberg ;
Scottand Smith} and Lully, equal; Griffin and Ross, equal; Lyman ; ©
Fraser and Phelps + and Rogers, equal ; Payne, Mundie, Barclay and
Henry, equal; Mowatt, Newman, Brydone-Jack+ (s), Drew (s),
Edwards Τ (s), Gillmor (s), Housser (s}, Martin (s), McCallum (s),
McQueen } (s), Massey (s), Shearer (5). Sutherland (5).
(2).—FOR COURSE LEADING TO B.SC.
Waugh (5).
STANDING IN THE SEVERAL SUBJECTS.
(Subjects alphabetically arranged.)
FOURTH YEAR (GRADUATING CLASS).
ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.
Class I.—Walker, Harris. Class IJ.—Couture.
BOTANY.
Class I.—Gass. Class IT.—McLeod.
CHEMISTRY (ORGANIC).
Class I1I].—¥Fripp.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
Class I.—McMorran.
COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.
Class I.—Bovey. Olass II.—Wisdom. Olass III.—Pearson GREG);
B.A.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Class I.—Belyea. Johnson. ‘Wales, Davidson. Class IT.—Lunny,
MeMorran, Griffin, Simister. Class III.--Troop, Harris, Parkins, Hol-
man, Cameron, Dutaud, McKay ; Seaman and Ascah, equal; Fripp.
ENGLISH LITERATURE: POETS OF THE 19TH CENTURY.
Class T.—Davidson, Wales, Belvea. Johnson. Class II.—Dutaud.
Holman, Troop, Parkins. Class IT7.—Simister.
ENGLISH LITERATURE: PROSE FICTION.
Class I.—Belvea, Johnson, Wales, Davidson. Class II.—Simister,
Parkins, Dutaud, Troop, Fripp.
+ Stanstead College.
{ Vancouver College.
(s) Supplemental in one subject.
ENGLISH: EIGHTEENTH CENTURY LITERATURE,
Class I.—Lunny. Class III.—Ascah.
ENGLISH: THE ELIZABETHAN DRAMATISTS.
Class I.—Lunny. Ciass I[J.—Holman. Class III.—Ascah.
FRENCH.
Class I.—Dutaud, Wisdom.Class IJ.—Lunny.
GERMAN.
Class I.—Wisdom. Class [7J.—Lunny, Griffin.
GEOLOGY.
Class I.—Davidson, Griffin. Class IJ,—Seaman, Mackay, Gass, Troop,
Class IJJ.—Parkins, Dutaud, McLeod.
GREER.
Class I.—Bovey. Class IJ.—Pearson (K.C.), B.A.
HEBREW.
Class I.—Mackay, Seaman.
HISTORY OF MODERN PHILOSOPHY.
Class 1.—East, Lomer, Cameron. Class II[.—Lockhart, Fee.
HISTORY.
Class I.—Harris. Class [I1.—Simister.
LATIN.
Class I.—Bovey.
MORAL PHILOSOPHY.
Class I.—East, Lomer, Fee, Lockhart. Class [J.—Cameron, ‘Troop,
Mackay.
METAPHYSICS.
μ Class II.—Ascah, Seaman.
PHYSICS.
Class T.—Lundie, Harris.
POLITICAL SCIENCE.
Class I.—Davidson, McMorran. Class IJ.—Griffin, Holman. Class
III.—Cameron, Fripp.
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
Class IJ.—Parkins. Class III.—Ascah, Simister.
14
ROMAN LAW.
Class 1.—McMorran, ε
ZOOLOGY.
Class I.—Holman. Class 11.—McDiarmid.
THIRD YEAR.
ART AND ARCHAEOLOGY.
Class 11.—Draper.
BOTANY.
Class II.—MacFarlane.
CHEMISTRY.
Class I.—Shanks. Class 1/.—Marshall, Walker. Class III.—Fripp.
COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.
Olass I.—Archibald, Rose. Class II7.—Henry (A.E.E.) and Mc-
Cally, equal.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Class I.—Lomer; Logan and Bouchard and MacFarlane, equal.
Class II.—Papinean : McDiarmid and Stewart J. (U.) and Henry and
Wickware, equal; Wilson, Dickson; Hart and Gardner and Dickenson,
equal; Gray and McDonald, equal; Mingie; Draper and Robertson
and Kimber, equal. Class [J].—Craig; Chandler and Molson, equal;
Walker, Bell, Marshall, Stewart, Gurd, Harvie.
ENGLISH: EIGHTEENTH CENTURY LITERATURE.
Class I.—Lomer, Hart. Class [J].—Gardner and Dickson, equal;
Logan, Bouchard, Marshall. Class. III.—Craig, Mingie.
ENGLISH: THE ELIZABETHAN DRAMATISTS.
Class I.—Walker, Draper, Lomer, Hart; Gardner and Papineau,
equal; Dickson, McDonald. Class IJ.—Stewart, Henry. Class ITI.—
Logan, Craig, Bouchard; Marshall and Molson, equal; Mingie,
Kimber.
ENGLISH LITERATURE: POETS OF THE 19TH CENTURY.
Class I.—Walker, Stewart. Class IJ.—Draper, McDonald, Papi-
neau, Henry. Class [IJ.—Molson, Fripp.
FRENCH.
Class I.—Lomer, Simpson. Class II.—McCally, Henry, Draper,
Wilson. Class IJ7.—Robertson, Craig. .
GEOLOGY.
Class I.—Freeze, Brown, Shanks. Class IZ.—Lathe, Draper and
Mackay, equal; Mingie, Walker. Class IIT.—Stewart.
15
GERMAN,
Class IJ.—Gardner and McCally, equal; Henry, Robertson. Class
/11.—Dickson, Bell, Bouchard, Kimber.
GREEK.
Class I.—Rose (prize), Archibald. Class I[I.—Wilson.
HEBREW.
Class 1.—Stewart (prize).
HISTORY.
Class 1.—Walker, Mackenzie, C. I. (prize), Campbell, McDonald;
Griffin and Hadrill, equal; Papineau and Stewart, equal. Class 1].--
Hindley, McKenzie (A. D.), Rubinowitz, MacFarlane, Molson, Ellison,
Logan. Class [J].—Bell and Dickenson, equal.
LATIN.
‘Class 1.—Archibald (prize), and Rose (prize), equal; Hart. Class
[I.—Bouchard, Bell, Craig, and Wilson, equal; Robertson. Class RTE
—McCally.
MORAL PHILOSOPHY.
Class [J.—Chandler; Gurd and Mingie, equal; Gray. Class III.—
May, Ross. .
METAPHYSICS.
Class IJ.—McGougan. Class I/I.—Logan, Stewart.
MECHANICS AND HYDROSTATICS.
Class I.—Sheldon. Class III.—Simpson, Stewart.
PHYSICS (EXPERIMENTAL.)
Class 1.—Lathe, Sheldon, Brown, Freeze, Simpson. Class II.—
Marshall. Class [JIJ.—MacLeod.
Be Honours in Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
First Rank:—Sheldon, E. W. (prize).
Second Rank:—Simpson, Edith P. (prize).
POLITICAL ECONOMY.
Class I.—Hadrill (prize), Hindley, Griffin, McKenzie, A. Ὁ.
Class II.—McDonald, Mackenzie, C. I., Campbell, Rubinowitz, Molson.
POLITICAL SCIENCE.
Class I.—Hindley (prize). Class IJ.—Campbell, McKenzie, Rubino-
witz, Hadrill, Papineau, Griffin, Wickware, Mackenzie, Gurd, Chand-
ler. Class IJJ.—Walker, McGougan, Harvie, Dickenson.
ZOOLOGY.
Class I.—MacFarlane and Shanks, equal.
10
SECOND YEAR.
BIOLOGY (ELEMENTARY.)
Class T.—Halpenny and Taber (Prizes), equal. Class II.—Fraser,
Sharpe, McNab: Lyman and Ower, equal ; Locke ; Edwards and McCoy,
equal ; Curtis, Howitt, Cross, Armstrong, Cotton, Nicholson, Tannenbaum.
BIOLOGY, (CONTINUATION COURSE.)
Class I]].—Wright.
CHEMISTRY.
Class I.—King, McNab. Class IJ.—Curtis and Fraser and Perry,
equal; Michaels and Sharpe, equal; Cameron and Cushing and McCoy
and McFee, equal. Class J/J.—Gillean and Hill and Fraser and
Fetherstonhaugh and Locke and Wright, equal; Cross and Μο-
Murtry and Manley and Rabinovitch and Robinson and Ross and
Stewart, equal; Cotton and Dawson and Howitt and Lyman and
Nicholson and Cwer and Tannenbaum, equal; Hyde and Pearson,
equal; Graham.
ENGLISH.
Class I.—Sharp (prize), Idler, King, Taber, McNabb, Laverock.t
Class IJ.—Blanchard and Bowman and Cushing and Michaels, equal;
Smith, (M.), Price,f Milne,t Curtis, Howitt, Bajus,i McCuaig, Hitch-
cock, Pearson, Edwards, Montgomery, Hill, Robinson (W.), Fraser
(G.), Adams, Moule, McFee. Class I[JI.—Chodat,. Halpenny, Gilmour,
Roy, Cameron, Donaldson,t Robinson (F. G.), Wright, Ross, Graham,
Fraser (A.), Nicholson, Tannenbaum, Stewart (T.), Jackson, DeBeck,t
McMurtry, Stewart (T.), Manley, Mackay, Jenkins, Smith (E. L.),
Cotton, Dawson, Rabinovitch, Munn, Perry, McCoy, Locke, Foote,
Lyman, Crane, Ower, Hepburn, Gillean, Fetherstonhaugh, Hyde, Morgan,
Cousineau, Wales.
FRENCH.
Class I.—Chodat; Idler and Michaels, equal; King, Smith (M.),
Sharpe. Class IJ.—Roy, Adams, Perry; Fraser and McFee, equal;
Cushing, Prendergast, Bowman; Blanchard and Clogg, equal. Class
TII.—Dey and McMurtry, equal; Cameron and McCuaig, equal;
Healy; Hepburn and Munn, equal; Moule; Cotton and Hill, equal;
Tannenbaum and Hitchcock, equal; Robinson and Stewart and
Fraser, equal; Hyde, Jenkins, Bajust; Gillean and McCoy, equal ;
De Beckt, Pearson, Wales ; Locke and Stewart, equal ; Cousineau.
GERMAN.
Class I.—Idler, Michaels. Class [J.—Binks, Chodat, Rabinovitch,
Smith (J), Laverockt. Class J/7.—Smith (M.), Sharpe.
GREEK.
Class I.—Smith (E.). Class I[J.—Nicholson and Taber and Mc-
Cuaig and Edwards, equal; Hepburn. Class J/I].—Cross, Halpenny,
Crane, Wales.
HEBREW.
Class I.—\Waneaster and Joliat, equal. Class JZ.—Ormistony Ray-
mond (B.A.), Roy (prize), Halpenny, Cross, Manley, Laverock.t
+ Vancouver College.
Peer ea tga Tee ἘΦ Υ Ξ >
ie rs
17
LATIN.
Class I.—King, Idler, Cushing, Fraser, Michaels, Edwards and
Smith, equal. Class IZ.—Munn; Curtis and Rabinovitch, equal ;
Smith, Wales, Blanchard, McNab, Taber, Perry, Price,t Hill, Roy ;
Chodat and Hepburn and _ Hitchcock. equal ; Laverock.t Class
IiI.—Gillean, Adams, Hyde, Bowman; Manley and McFee, equal;
Moule, McMurtry; Jenkins and Lyman, equal; Cameron and Bajus,t
equal; DeBeck,t Donaldson, Ower, Dawson; Crane and Healy and
Stewart (W.), eaual; Stewart (T.).
LOGIC.
Class I.—Idler and Sharpe, equal (prizes); Macnab, Cushing.
Class II.—Hitchcock, McMurtry, Taber, Bowman; Howitt and Mont-
gomery, equal; Crane. Class IIT.—Curtis and Lyman and Roy,
equal: Hill; Moule and Smith, equal; Milne,t Smith: Edwards and
Nicholson, equal; Laverock.? Fraser and Stewart (W.), equal; Hal-
penny and Foote, equal; Munn, Cameron, Hyde; Graham and Pricet
and Stewart, equal.
MATHEMATICS.
(1). Spherical Trigonometry and Algebra.
Class I.—King, Wales. McFee, Chodat. Bowman. Class IT.—
Perry, Ross. Class ITIT.—Hitehcock and Bajust and Donaldson, equal ;
Robinson, Price; MecCuaig and Smith, equal; DeBeck,t Healy, Moule,
Gillean ; Milne and Jenkins. equal ; Munn.
(2). Solid Geometry, Conic Sections, Dynamics.
Class I.—King, Price,t Perry. Class IJ.—Robinson; DeBeck? and
Milne,z equal; McFee, Chodat, McCuaig; Bowman and Smith (M.),
equal; Adams. Class IJI.—Donaldson, Healy; Cushing and Braid-
wood, equal ; Bajus.{ Ross and Gillean. equal ; Hitchcock, Moule, Tup-
per ; Jenkins and Hepburn, equal ; Wales.
(3). Advanced Section.
First Rank Honours.—Wing, Perry.
Second Rank Honours—Idler.
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISH.
Class I.—Shaw (prize), Lewis, Gibb, McLeod, McCallum, Barclay,
McTaggart,i Cousins, Robertson, Rorke, McQueen,= Flanders.7
Class I].—Ryan, Payne; Tully and Douglas, equal; Kirsch, Vineburg,
McPhalen,: Naylor, Thomson, Newman, Rogers, Clarke, Phelps,7
Freedman, Housser, Ross, Blakemore. Class III.—Gillmor and Carr,
equal; Anstie,i Crocker, Henry, Griffin, Fraser, Brydon-Jack,?
Mowatt; Drew and Trench, equal ; Fitz-Gibbon, Lyman, Mundie,
Stafford, Holway, Healy; Martin and Marcuse, equal; Ellis,t Massee,
Smith,t Kiely, Scott, Sutherland, .Vassie, Cordner, Edwards,t Peas,
Patrick, Shearer, Stanton.7
LITERATURE AND HISTORY.
Class [.—Peterson.
= Vancouver College.
ἡ Stanstead College.
18
FRENCH.
Class I.—Ryan; Douglas and Vineburg and Gibb, equal; Freed-
man, Kirsch. Class [/.—Gillmor, Lewis; Robertson and Rorke, equal;
Blakemore, Clark, Shaw; Smith and Cousins, equal ; McTaggart, t
Phelps,t Carr; Fraser and Scott, equal; Flanders; and McQueen,t
equal; Griffin, Lyman. Class [J].—Barclay and Henry and Naylor,
equal; Stanton; (G.) and Williams, equal; Smith and Ross, equal;
Langley and Waugh, equal; Mitchell, Mowatt; Haskell and Payne
and Trench, equal; McCallum and Tully, equal; Sutherland, New-
man; McPhalent and Garvin, equal ; Thomson, Mundie, Massey.
GERMAN.
Class I.—Holway. Class IJ.—Ryan; Clark and Douglas, equal;
Rorke, Stanton.; Class [//.—Fraser, Griffin.
GERMAN (BEGINNERS.)
Class I].—\kirsch. Class 111. — Bowman, Armstrong, Lewis,
Trench, Vineburg, Waugh.
GREEK.
Class I.—McLeod (prize), Naylor, Freedman, Gibb. Class IJ.—
Shearer; Housser and McCann, equal. Class III.—-Drew, Rogers,
Martin, Thomson, Edwardsj.
LATIN.
Class I.—*McLeod (prize), Naylor, Cousins, Flanders ;+ Kirsch and
Douglas, equal; Vineburg, Gibb; Holway and Housser and McTag-
gartt and Rvan, equal. Class IJ.—Clark, Smith ; Freedman and Μο-
Queen,t equal; Lewis, Shaw, Shearer, Drew, Carr, Ross; Fraser and
Lyman, equal; Edwards and McCallum and _ Scott, equal; Phelps.
Class 111. —Henry, Tully, Brydon-Jack;+ Langley and Rogers, equal;
Rorke; Anstiet and Barclay and Braidwood, equal; Davidson and
~antont and Stanton,+ equal; Mundie; McCann and Payne, equal ;
Griffin and Martin, equal; Gillmor and Loat,t equal; Massey ; Carter
and Williams, equal; Mowatt and Newman, equal; Hendry.
GEOMETRY AND ARITHMETIC.
Class I.—Shaw. McLeod, Ellis, Loat.t Class IT.—Lewis; Kirsch
and Crocker, equal; Holway and Healy, equal; Williams; Cousins
and Rogers and Brydon-Jack,t equal; Waugh; Carr and Howe and
Griffin, equal; Pease, Ross; Housser and Sutherland and Patrick and
Clark and Rorke, equal; Naylor; Tully and Smith,t equal. Class IJI.—
Sileox; Seott and Ryan, equal; Flanders ;+ Gibb and Stanton,t equal ;
Hendry and Kiely, equal; Freedman and Mundie and McCallum,
equal; Shearer; Drew and Lyman, equal; Phillips and McQueen? and
Davidson, equal; McTaggart,t Barclay; Henry and Douglas, equal;
Marcuse and Stafford and Gale and Payne and Chapman, equal;
Hutchinson and Vineburg and Stackhouse and Thomson and Fraser,
equal; Garvin; Newman and Massey and Phelps,} equal; Copeland,
Edwards,7 Gillmor, Mowatt, Anstied.
* Mark of Distinction.
+ Stanstead College.
+ Vancouver College.
Ν
-
ells
se
j
a
i
ὰ
RE ah eT Ot Thy
wd > arte
ee
Oe ied, ee ae
ae a =F
‘ es
Wiss wv ἔε γι
19
TRIGONOMETRY AND ALGEBRA,
Class I.—Lewis, Rorke. Class IJ.—Shaw, Ryan, Carr; Naylor and
Crocker, equal; Holway; Scott and Flanders,f equal; Clark; Freed-
man and Douglas. equal; Ellis and Loat,t equal ; Griffin; McLeod and
Phelps, 7 equal ; Garvin and Healy and Mowatt, equal; Gibb. Class III,
—Mundie and Silcox, equal; Davidson, Mather; Gale and Fraser and
Smithi, equal; Kirsch and Gillmor, equal; Tully and Langley, equal;
Drew and Rogers, equal; Lyman; Hendry and Waugh and Payne,
equal; Shearer; Brydon-Jackit and McTaggartt and Hutchinson and
Marcuse and Ross and Vassie aud Williams, equal; Kiely; Stafford
and Howe, equal; Barclay and Pease and Sutherland, equal;
Stantony and Anstie,t equal, Chapman, Henry, Cousins, Newman.
ADVANGED SECTION, MATHEMATICS.
First Rank Honours.—Carr, Kirsch, Rogers.
Second Rank Honours.—Rorke, McLeod.
PHYSICS.
Class I.—Carr; Lewis and Shaw, equal; Kirsch; McTaggarti and
McQueen,i equal; Cox, McLeod, Rogers, Healy, Holway. Class II.—
Crocker and Kiely, equal ; Brydon-Jack = Smith t Ryan; Housser and
Lyman and McCallum, equal; Barrett and Douglas and Flanders, +
and Freedman and Tully, equal; Naylor, Rorke. Class III.—ULang-
leyi; Griffin and Payne, equal; Ross and Scott, equal; Clark and Sil-
cox, equal; Cousins and Pease, equal; Hutchinson and Shearer, equal;
Mundie and Vineburg and Waugh, equal; Blakemore and Gibb and
Sutherland, equal; Hendry; Henry and Marcuse and Stackhouse,
equal; Johnston and Stanton, equal; Kennedy and Martin, equal;
Gale; Fraser and Newman and Phelps,f equal; Garvin, Stanton,7
McCann, Barclay, Edwardsj; Chapman and Trench, equal; Massey
and Stafford, equal; Mowatt.
= Vancouver College.
Faculty of Applied Science.
FOURTH YEAR (GRADUATING CLASS).
HONOURS.
(In alphabetical order.)
BoRIGHT, SHERMAN HENRY.—Honours in Mining Laboratory Work.
Brown, FREDERICK BAyuiis.—Honours in Designing, Mechanical En-
gineering, Thermodynamics and Hydraulics.
CoLE, G. Percy.—Honours in Electrical Designing and Electrical Engi-
neering Laboratory Work.
CONKLIN, Roscor YEO, B.A.—Prize for Summer Thesis.
EpWarpbs, WiLtit1aAM Muir, M.Sc.—British Association Medal and Prize;
Honours in Designing, Geodesy, Graphical Statics, Hydraulics, Rail-
way Engineering and Theory of Structures.
EGLESON, JAMES ERNEST AIKEN.—British Association Medal and Prize :
Honours in Mineralogy, and in Mineral and Physical Chemistry.
FoREMAN, ALVAH ERNEST.—British Association Exhibition; British
Association Medal and Prize; Prize for Summer Thesis ; Honours in
Alternating Currents and Alternating Current Machinery, Electric
Power and Distribution, Electric Traction, Electrical Designing,
Electrical Laboratory Work and Hydraulics.
HALL, OLIVER.—British Association Prize; Allis-Chalmers Scholarship;
Second Carlyle Prize; Prize for Summer Thesis ; Honours in Mining
Laboratory Work and Mining Designing.
JONES, HAROLD, WILLIAM.— Honours in Railway Engineering.
ΚΈΙΤΗ, FRASER SANDERSON.—Can. Soc. Civil Eng. Prize; Prize for
Summer Thesis; Honours in Electrical Designing and Electrical
Engineering Laboratory Work.
McCaskILL, KENNETH.—-Honours in Electric Traction, Electrical Design,
Electrical Engineering Laboratory Work.
McDOoNAtbD, JAMES FINLAY.—Honours in Electric Traction.
McKay, FREDERICK ALEXANDER.—Can. Soc. Civil Engineers Prize ;
Prize for Summer Thesis ; Honours in Designing.
McKercGow, CHARLES MILLER.—Honours in Designing.
MUSGRAVE, RoBERT.—Honours in Mining Laboratory Work.
ROBERTS, ARTHUR REGINALD.—British Association Medal and Prize;
Honours in Designing, Hydraulics, Dynamics of Machines, Machine
Design, Mechanical Engineering and Thermodynamics.
ROBERTSON, JOHN FERGUSON.—British Association Medal and Prize ;
Dawson Fellowship in Mining; First Carlyle Prize; Honours in
Mining Laboratory Work, Metallurgy, Ore-dressing, Designing and
Hydraulics.
ROWLEY, LORNE ELpon, M.A.—Honours in Mining Laboratory Work.
SAVAGE GEORGE Munro.—Honours in Organic Chemistry.
ΡΥ BS RR ge ee Te
21
PASSED FOR THE DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF SCIENCE.
(In order of merit).
CHEMISTRY.
Egleson, James Ernest Aiken, Ottawa, Ont.
Savage, George Munro, Montreal, Que.
Musgrave, William New come, Duncans, Vancouver Island, B.C.
Crawford, Stuart, Montreal, Que.
CIVIL ENGINEERING.
Edwards, William Muir, M. Sc., Montreal, Que.
Jones, Harold William, Ottawa, Ont.
Beck, Alfred Edward, Penetanguishene, Ont.
Cohen, Harris, Montreal. Que.
Landry, Pierre Alfred, Dorchester, N.B.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
Foreman, Alvah Ernest. Vancouver, B.C.
McCaskill, Kenneth, Vankleek Hill, Ont.
Conklin, Roscoe Yeo, B.A., Winnipeg, Man.
Cole, George Percy, Montreal, Que.
McDonald, James Finlay, Westville, N.S.
Keith, Fraser Sanderson, Smith’s Falls, Ont.
Thorpe, William Horseman, Montreal, Que.
Stokes, Charles William, Woodstock, N.B.
James, Bertram. Heart’s Content, Newfoundland.
Trimingham, Charles Loch, Barbados, West Indies.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
Roberts, Arthur Reginald, Montreal, Que.
Brown, Frederick Baylis, Montreal, Que.
McKay, Frederick Alex: under, Montreal, Que.
McKergow, Charles Millar, Westmount, Que.
Edgar, John Hamilton, Montreal, Que.
MINING ENGINEERING.
Robertson, John Ferguson, Charlottetown, P.E.I.
Hall, Oliver, Washington, Ont.
Tilt, Edwin Bingham, Goderich, Ont.
Boright, Sherman Henry, Sutton, Que.
Lucas, Alan Stanley Bruce, B.A., Hamilton, Ont.
Rowley, Lorne Eldon, M.A., Marysville, N.B.
Pemberton, William Parnell Despard, ae ie ase B.C.
Rowlands, Charles, Albany, N.Y., U.S
Musgrave, Robert, Duncans, Vancouver Taland: B.C.
Gale, George Gordon, Quebec, Que.
Stovel, Joseph Hodder, Toronto, Ont.
Langley, Albert Godwin, Victoria, B.C.
Reynolds, Leo Bowlby, Waterford, Ont.
Ross, James Gordon, Embro, Ont.
Maclaren, Francis Harold, Huntingdon, Que.
292
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF MASTER OF SCIENCE.
(In Course).
Cameron, Kenneth MacKenzie, B.Sc., London, Ont., Can. Soc. C.E. Prize.
Corless, Charles Vandyke, B.Sc., New Durham, Ont.
DePencier, Henry Percy, B.Sc., Vancouver, B.C., Can., Mining Jnst. Prize.
Frechette, Howells, B.Se., Ottawa, Ont.
Newton, Samuel Robert, B.Se., Drummondville, Que.
Paterson, Charles Stiven, B.Sc., Montreal, Que.
Smith, Gerald Meredith, B.Sc., St. Johns, Que.
Sterns, Frank Ernest, Morrell, P.E.I.
ADMITTED TO THE DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF SCIENCE.
(In Course.)
Owens, Robert Bowie, M.A., E.E. (Columbia, Johns Hopkins), M Se.
(MecGill.)
THIRD YEAR.
PRIZES.
(In alphabetical order.)
BLUMENTHAL, SAMUEL.—Prizes for Structural Engineering, Graphic#l
Statics and Geology.
CHAMBERS, ROBERT A.—Prize for Summer Thesis.
CHAPLIN, CHARLES J.—Third Mathematical Prize; Prizes for Theory
of Structures, Machine Design and Mechanical Drawing.
CoLE, GEORGE H.—Can, Gen. Elect. Scholarship; Second Mathemati-
cal Prize; Prizes for Dynamics of Machines, Calculus and
Electrical Measurements.
DuTcHER, Howarp K.—Can. Gen. Hlect. Scholarship; Third Math-
ematical Prize; Prize for Theory of Structures.
GRICE, JAMES H.—Prizes for Mechanics and Graphical Statics.
JOHNSON, FREDERICK M. G.—Prizes for Determinative Mineralogy,
and Organic Chemistry.
LAWRENCE, WILLIAM D.—First Mathematical Prize; Second McCar-
thy Prize for Fieldwork.
LEMAISTRE, FREDERICK J.—Hunt Scholarship.
McCLoskEy, FREDERICK W.—Can. Gen. Elect. Scholarship; Prizes
for Mechanics and Calculus.
McDouGauL, GEORGE K.—Can. Gen. Elect. Scholarship.
McDovuGALL, CLARENCE H.—Prize for Theory of Structures.
McPuHer, JAMES McD —Pr‘zes for Quantitative Analysis, Ore Dressing
Machine Design and Metallurgy.
PARLEE, NORMAN W.—Second McCarthy Prize for Fieldwork.
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
(In order of merit.)
CIVIL ENGINEERING.
Blumenthal, Samuel, Montreal, Que.
Lawrence, William D., Maitland, N.S.
Harvey, John B., Lyndhurst, Ont. ᾿
Σ ΧῈ ἃ ore
23
*Lambart, Howard F., New Edinburgh, Ont.
*Healy, Frederick E., Picton, Ont.
*Kent, George M., Truro, N.S.
*Dawe, Robert G., Bay Roberts, Nfid.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
*McDougall, George K., Montreal, Que.
fear George H., Ottawa, Ont.
McCloskey, Frederick W., Boiestown, N.B.
Dutcher, Howard K., Charlottetown, P.E.I.
Cardew, John H., South Beach, Young’s Point, Ont.
{*Marrotte, Louis H., Westmount, Que.
\*Wenger, John A., Avrton. Onr.
Scott, George W., Montreal, Que.
*Wurtele, John S. H., Acton. Que.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
Chaplin, Charles J., Westmount, Que.
Drysdale, William F., Montreal, Que.
Kemp, Robert A. Seaforth, Ont.
’ Wilkes, Frederick C. D., Brantford, Ont.
*Greey, John W. G., Toronto, Ont.
MINING ENGINEERING.
McPhee. James McD., Lobh Katrine. N.S.
Grice, James H., Bootle, Cumberland, England.
Parlee, Norman W., Rossland, B.C.
*Chambers, Robert A., Truro, N.S.
McDougall,.Clarence H., South Maitland, N.S.
*Hlls, Sydney, B.A., Ottawa, Ont.
*Carlyle, Ernest J., Woodstock, Ont.
*Gnaedinger, Ernest G., Montreal, Que.
Taylor. Reginald F . Gananoque, Ont.
*Davis, Patrick, Windsor, Ont.
McMurtry, Gordon O., Montreal, Que.
*Atkinson, Marshall B., Montreal, Que.
*Webster, George B., Brockville, Ont.
*Deyell, Harold J., Port Hope, Ont.
*Campbell, Colin St. G., Aldershott, Ont.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
LeMaistre, Frederick J., Westmount,, Que.
{ Johnson, Frederick W. G., Montreal.
Spencer, Arthur G., Truro, N.S.
*McNaughton, William G., Huntingdon, Que.
SECOND YEAR.
PRIZES.
(In alphabetical order.)
Blanchet, Guy H.—Second Scott Prize: Can. Soc. Civil Eng. Prize.
Boyle, Robert W.—First Scott Prize; Prizes for Calculus, Chemistry,
Experimental Physics, Kinematics of Machines, and Descrip-
tive Geometry.
*To pass Supplemental Examination.
Υ ᾽ ‘ aa aie wi τάς ὦ Oe ee Ee my ι΄ ee” Le "»
"hd P AS ear ha Ne Mi AW ἈΉΡ VR 7 SM a reg
᾿ ‘i ὃν. 2
24
Churchill, Cecil A.—Prize for Mapping.
Cropper, William C.—Prize for Analytic Geometry.
Fyshe, Thomas M.—Scott Exhibition.
Jewett, F. Coburn.—Prize for Surveying.
MacDermot, Sidney α. F.—Prize for Physical Laboratory Work.
MacMillen, Henry H.—Prize for Mechanics.
Pattison, Albert M.—Prize for Freehand Drawing.
Sutherland, Charles H.—Prize for Mechanical Drawing.
PASSED THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATION.
(In order of merit.)
ARCHITECTURE.
Pattison, Albert M., Clarenceville, Que.
CIVIL ENGINEERING.
Jewett, F. Coburn, Sheffield, N.B.
Fyshe, Thomas M., Montreal, Que.
Kydd, George, Montreal, Que.
*Jost, Edward B., Guysboro, N.S
Macnab, John J., Elsinore, Bruce CosmnrOnt:
*Tdsardi, Harold, St. Thomas, Ont.
*+Hamilton, Wilfrid, Montreal, Que.
*McIntosh, Robert, Newcastle, Ont.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
Boyle, Robert W., Carbonear, Nfld.
Cropper, William C McD., Kingston, St. Vincent, W.I.
ane mot, Sidney G. F., Gordon Town, Jamaica, W.I.
Willard, Charlie, Morrisburg τ ΤΠ τς
Scouler, Gavin T., New Westminster, IBCs
Redpath, William, Montreal, Que.
McLeish, Ian, Montreal, Que.
Bowness, E. W., Kensington, P.E.I.
Cunha, Staton H. S., Kingston, Jamaica, W.I.
Wheaton, Hazen A., Elgin, Albert Co., N.B.
Findlay, Delmer C., Danville, Que.
f Archibald, Hiram H., Harbour Grace, Nfld.
| Glassco, Gordon B., Hamilton, Ont.
Campbell, John A., Cheltenham, Ont.
JIchnstone, George A., Rednersville, Ont.
Drinkwater, Kenneth E., Montreal, Que.
Weagant, Rov A., Derby Line. Vt.. U.S A.
Mundy, Cswald A., Hamilton, Ont.
*Burpee, Lockwood, Gibson, N.B.
Piché, Ernest A., Montreal, Que.
*McLean, Donald, B.A.. Campbellton, N.B.
Wright, Clifton H., Barbados, W.I.
Harris, Alan Dale, Ottawa, Ont.
*Joseph, A. Pinto, Quebec, Que.
*HMaton, ἘΣ Courtlandt, Montreal, Que.
Price, Herbert L., Montmorency, Que.
*Ross,. (Walter.G:, Port Perry. Ont.
*Dickson, George L., Truro, N.S.
*To pass Supplemental Examination.
+Conditioned in First Year Subjeet.
20
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
MacMillan, Henry H., Alberry Plains, P.E.I.
Cockshutt, Harvey W., Brantford, Ont.
Sutherland, Charles H., New Glasgow, N.S.
*Mooney, Chester A., Ausable Chasm, N.Y.
*Fraser, Donald M., Montreal, Que.
Turnbull, Harvard, Montreal, Que.
MINING ENGINEERING.
Blanchet, Guy H., Ottawa, Ont.
Churchill, Cecil A., Hantsport, N.S.
Livingston, Douglas C., Corfield, B.C.
Sharpe, George P., Agassiz, εν 0 ς
Martin, Edward N., York, Ont.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
Robertson,, Arthur F., Montreal, Que.
*Baker, Charles C. Stanley, Hampstead, London, England.
FIRST YEAR.
PRIZES.
(In alphabetical order.)
Bell, George E.—Prizes for Mathematics, English and Lettering.
Brennan, George E.—Prize for Freehand Drawing.
Cattanach, F. W. C.—Prize for Physics.
Durland, Royden K.—First Fleet Workshop Prize.
Forbes, John McN.—Prize for Mathematics.
Harvie, Robert.—Second Fleet Workshop Prize.
Lea, William S.—Prize for Descriptive Geometry.
McLachlan, D. William.—Prize for Mathematics . :
Presner, Joseph.—Prize for Lettering.
PASSED 'THE SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
(In order of merit. Students of equal standing are bracketed
together.)
Bell, George E., St. Thomas, Ont.
(Durland, Royden K., Yarmouth, N.S.
| McLachlan, D. William, Lochaber Bay, Que.
Lea, William S., Victoria, P.E.I.
Brennan, George Ἐν, Ottawa, Ont.
Forbes, John McN.—Bonavista, Nfid.
Jones, Andrew U., St. John, N.B.
Sharp, Lester A., Summerside, P.E.I.
Jackson, Maunsell B., Toronto, Ont.
Walker, Cecil W., Kensington, P.E.I.
Pedley, Norman F., Montreal, Que.
fey Frederic W., Ottawa, Ont.
Cattanach, Frederick W. C., Newport, Vt.
Blackader, Gordon H., Montreal, Que.
Macdonald, Peter J.—Winnipeg, Man.
Kirkpatrick, Everett C., Montreal West, Que.
Winter, Elliott E., Georgetown, Brit. Guiana.
*To pass Supplemental Examination.
20
Ewens, W. Sydney, Owen Sound, Ont.
y+Wilson, Starr ἘΠ Τὼ Lunenburg, N.S.
Roger, Alec, Billing’s Bridge, Ont.
MeMeekin, Albert, Bright, Ont.
+Loudon, Andrew C., Ottawa, Ont.
Hadley, Harry, Montreal, Que.
*Turley, Edward J., Frankford, Ont.
{*Benedict, Elmore M., Brantford, Ont.
| Harding, Winthrop K., Derby Line, Vt.
fee G. Eric, Montreal, Que.
Presner, Joseph, Montreal, Que.
*;+Burnett, Archibald, Montreal, Que.
*+Cole, L. Heber. Montreal, Que.
{ Boyd, Alfred M. S., Westmount, Que.
| Howell, Edgar N., Westmount, Que.
*Davidson, Thomas R., Montreal, Que.
Steedman, William F., ‘Montreal, Que.
*Tupper, Frederick McD., Truro, N.S.
*Gurd, A. Douglas, Montreal, Que.
*Brady, James C., Victoria, B.C.
*Leonard, Albert P., Westmount, Que.
Pickard, Herbert G., Exeter, Ont.
{*Conway, Edmund J., Chemainus, B.C.
| Hibbard, Melville L., Farnham, Que.
Scott, W. Gordon, Valleyfield, Que.
**Macdonald, R. Ross, Hamilton, Ont.
Landry, A. Raymond, Dorchester, N.B.
*Black, Douglas E., Montreal, Que.
*McDonald, Harold F., Fort Qu’Appelle, Assa.
*Taylor, Allan H., Ottawa, Ont.
*Corrigan, Thomas L., Brockville, Ont.
*Harvie, James, Westmount, Que.
**Slater, Nicholas J., Ottawa, Ont.
*Mudge, Reginald, Montreal, Que.
*Norton, Thomas J., ‘Montreal, Que.
*Newton, Stephen G., Drummondville, Que.
*Greenshields, John G., Montreal, Que.
*Grier, Arthur H., Montreal, Que.
**MicKinnon, Hugh D., Finch, Ont.
**Smith, Kenneth ἘΠ: London, Ont.
*Baylis, Harold A., Montreal, Que.
*Frith, George H., Cummings’ Bridge, Ont.
STANDING IN THE SEVERAL SUBJECTS.
(Subjects alphabetically arranged.)
ALTERNATING CURRENT AND ALTERNATING CURRENT MACHINERY.
FourTH YEAR.—Class [.—Foreman. Class IT.—McCaskill, McDonald,
Stokes, Conklin, Thorpe. Class [/[.—Trimingham, Cole, Keith;
Baker and James, equal.
ARCHITECTURAL DRAWING AND DESIGN.
SrconD YEAR.—Olass [II.—Pattison.
*To pass Supplemental Examination.
+¥Matriculation conditioned,
τ ΟΣ Δ Ἀν σαν σὸς
} >
27
.
ARCHITECTURE (ELEMENTS OF).
SEconD YEAR.—Class [[[.—Pattison.
ARCHITECTURE (HISTORY OF).
SECOND YEAR.—Class I[J.—Pattison.
ASTRONOMY.
THIRD YEAR.—Olass [.—Grice, Harvey; Lawrence and McPhee, equal.
Class IJ.—Parlee, Blumenthal; Dawe and Taylor, equal. Class
IiI.—Carlyle, Healy, McMurtry, Sullivan, McDougall (C. H.),
Lambart, Wilson; Ells and Hogan and Reynolds, equal; Cham-
bers and Davis, equal; Deyell, Webster; Campbell and Cameron
and Gnaedinger, equal.
CHEMISTRY (THEORETICAL).
SECOND YEAR—Class I.—Bovle. Fyshe. Class II.— Willard, MacDer-
mot, Wheatcn, Jewett; Campbell and Cunha and Kydd and
McLean, equal; Blanchet, Robertson; Cropper and Macnab,
equal. Class IJ7.—Bowness, Johnstone, Findlay, Livingston,
Archibald, Redpath; Bray and Churchill, equal; Sutherland
(C. H.), Scouler; Ritchie and Ryan, equal; Baker and Dickson
(G. L.), equal; Cockshutt and Wright, equal; Piche, Ross;
Fraser (D. M.) and Glassco and Mooney and Sharpe, equal;
Drinkwater and Idsardi and Martin, equal; Burpee and Mundy,
equal; Small, Pinch; Jost and Turnbull, equal; McIntosh and
Young, equal.
CHEMISTRY (PRACTICAL).
SECOND YEAR.—(Civil, Electrical and Mechanical Engineering Courses.)—
Class I.—Boyle and Willard, equal; Campbell and Jost and Mac-
Dermot and Wheaton, equal; Fyshe and Jewett and Kidd,
equal; Cropper and Idsardi, equal; Glassco, Gillespie. Class II.
—Barclay and Macnab’ and Scouler, equal; Bowness and Dick-
son (G. L.) and Findlay and Ross, equal; Bray and Burpee and
Fraser (D. M.) and McIntosh, equal; Cockshutt, Cunha; Eaton
and Higgins and Smith, equal; Johnstone and Sutherland (C.),
equal; Archibald and Gibbs and Redpath and Wright, equal.
Class IIJ.—McLean, Pinch, Drinkwater, Weagant; Batchelder
and Ryan, equal; Miner and Mooney, equal; Eadie; Anderson
and Bain and Blackadar and Rheaume and Shaughnessy and
Small and Turnbull, equal. (Mining Engineering Course.)—Class I.
—Hodgson, Churchill, Livingston, Blanchet, Ritchie. Class 1].
—Young, Sharpe. Class IJJ.—Belanger; Hamilton (A. M.) and
Martin, equal. (Practical Chemistry Course.)—Class I.—Robertson.
CHEMISTRY—ORGANIC (PRACTICAL).
Tutrn YEAR.—Class J.—WeMaistre and Robinson (K.°S.,) equal;
Johnson and Spencer, equal.
CHEMISTRY—ORGANIC (THEORETICAL). 3
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Johnson. Class IJ.—Robinson (K. 5.), Spen-
eer. Class IIIT.—LeMaistre.
CHEMISTRY—PHYSICAL (PRACTICAL).
FourtH YEAR.—Class [.—Egleson. Class I[7.—Crawford. Class III.—
ἢ Musgrave (W. N.) and Savage, equal; McNaughton,
28
CHEMISTRY—PHYSICAL (THEORETICAL),
FourtTH YEAR.—Class [.—Egleson. Class II.—Musgrave (W. N.),
Crawford. Class [/I.—Savage, MacNaughton.
CHEMISTRY (INDUSTRIAL).
THIRD YEAR.—Olass [.—Spencer, Johnson, WeMaistre. Class II.—
Robinson (K. 58...
CONTINUOUS CURRENT AND COMMUTATING MACHINERY.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—McDougall (G. K.). Class II.—Wenger, Mc-
Closkey. Class []I.—Drysdale, Cole, Chaplin, Dutcher, Scott,
Marrotte, Cardew, Kemp, Wurtele, Wilkes.
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.
THIRD YEAR.—Class J7.—Blumenthal. Class [[.—Lawrence, Healy,
Harvey. Class III.—Kent, Dawe.
Smconp Yuar.—Class J.—Jost, Boyle; Cropper and McLeish and Piché,
equal; Fyshe, Redpath, Johnstone; Archibald and Willard,
equal. Class I[.—Findlay, Churchill, Burpee, Blanchet, Kydd;
Drinkwater and Sharpe, equal; Macnab; Harris and Jewett and
Scouler, equal; Bowness and Idsardi and MacMillen, equal; Liv-
ingston and Wheaton, equal. Class J/7.—Sutherland (C. H.),
Pattison, McLean, Moody, MacDermot, Eadie; Cockshutt and
Hamilton (A. M.), equal; Glasseco and Hamilton (W.) and
Weagant, equal; McIntosh; Miner; Campbell and Cunha and
Eaton and Fraser (Ὁ. M.) and Martin and Turnbull and Wright,
equal.
First YEAR.—Class I.—Lea, Durland, McLachlan (D. ‘W.), Bell,
Walker; Brennan and Wilson, equal; Sharp, Blackader, Forbes,
Cattenach, Jackson; Black and Kirkpatrick and Roger, equal;
Fwens and Jones, equal; Gurd. Class I/.—Burnett and Wick-
ware, equal; Cole, Turley, Anderson; Conway and Loudon,
equal; Davidson; Boyd and Tupper, equal; Newton, Benedict;
Macdonald (R. R.) and Pedley, equal; Hadley; Macdonald (P. J.)
and Skelton, equal; Harding, Leonard, Presner, Winter,
Wheaton, Harvie (J.). Class [[T.—McCuaig; Hibbard and Mc-
Donald (H. F.), equal; Baylis, Small, Corrigan; Howell and
McMeekin and MacKay (G. W.), equal;'Grier and Slater, equal;
MeKinnon. Howe and Seott (W.G.) and Steedman equal;
Brady, Norton; Daly and Shorey, equal ; Carlyle and
Mudge, equal; Frith, Landry; Greenshields and MacKay (R. M.)
and Pickard and Slavin and Smith and Taylor, equal.
DESIGNING.
FourtH Year —(Civil Engineering Course.)—Olass I.—FEdwards, Beck,
Jones. Class II.—Cohen, landry. (Blectrical Engineering
Course.)—Class T.—Cole and Foreman, equal; Keith, McCaskill.
Class IT.—Conklin, McDonald, Thorpe; Baker and Stokes, equal.
Class TII.—James, Blatch, Rodger. (Mechanical HEnaineering
Course.) —Class I.—Roherts; Brown and McKay and McKergow,
equal. Class IIT.—None. Class IIIT.—Millar, Edgar. (Mining
Engineering Course.)—Class I.—Hall, Robertson, Boright. Class
TI.—Kendall and Rowlands and Tilt, equal; Reynolds; Porcheron
and Ross and Rowley, ecual; Langley and Lucas and Mus-
grave (R), equal. Class IIT.— Pemberton, Gale; Maclaren and
Stovel, equal.
DYNAMICS OF MACHINES,
FourtH YEAR.—Class I.—Roberts, Brown, McKay. Class I[J.—McKer-
gow, Edgar. ;
THIRD YEAR.—Class IJ.—Cole. Class [J.—Chaplin, Scott, Fraser (D.
M.); Drysdale and McDougall (G. K.), equal;' McCloskey, Wen-
ger. Class 11].—Cardew and Dutcher, equal; Wurtele, Wilkes,
Greey; Kemp and Marrotte ,equal; Devlin, Roffey.
ELECTRIC LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRIBUTION.
FourtH YEAR.—Class I.—Foreman. Class [J.—McCaskill, Cole, Mc-
Donald, James. Class I[JI].—Keith; Baker and Conklin, equal;
Stokes, Rodger; Thorpe and Trimingham, equal.
ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS.
THIRD YEeAR.—Class I.—Cole and McDougall (ἃ. K.), equal. Class ITI.
—Cardew and McCloskey and Marrotte, equal; Dutcher and
Scott and Wenger and Wurtele, equal; Devlin and ‘Price, equal.
Class III.—Roffey.
ELECTRO-METALLURGY.
FourtTH YEAR.—Class J.—Robertson, Rowlands; Rowley and Stovel,
equal. Class JJ.—Hall and Lucas, equal; Boright and Gale,
equal; Langley and Pemberton, equal; Musgrave (R.).
ELECTRIC TRACTION.
FourtTH YEAR.—Class J.—Foreman, McCaskill, McDonald. Class II.—
Baker, Conklin, Cole. Class. /[/.—Keith, Thorpe, James, Stokes,
Blatch; Rodger and Trimingham, equal.
ELECTRO -CHEMISTRY,
FourtTH YEAR.—Olass J.—Conklin; Keith and McDonald, equal, Class
I7T.—Cole; Baker and McCaskill, equal; Blatch. Class 11].--
Thorpe.
ENGLISH.
First YEAR.—Olass J.—Bell, Steedman, Durland; Brady and Jackson,
equal; Tupper. Class IJ.—Cole and Conway and Jforbes, equal;
Loudon and McDonald (H. F.), equal; Hadley, McMeekin, Win-
ter, McLachlan; McCuaig and Mudge and Scott, equal; Pedley,
Ewens, Brennan, Black, Taylor; Hodge and MacKinnon, equal;
Anderson and Corrigan, equal; Blackader and Jardine and Mac-
donald (P. J.) and Pickard, equal. Class [JI.—Boyd and Kirk-
patrick and Presner and Shorey, equal; Howell and Mackay (G.
W.), equal; Jones; Cattanach and Leonard and Sharp, equal;
Baylis and Greenshields, equal; Daly and Harmer, equal; David-
son and Dickson and Harding and Lea and Turley, equal; Gurd
and Harvie (J.) and Slavin, equal; Brown and Frith, equal;
Mackay (R. M.) and Wilson, equal; Burnett and Newton and
Smith, equal; Macdcnald (R. R.); Howe and Prevost, equal;
Grier, Wheaton; Benedict and, Small, equal; Carlyle; Bellasis
and Lemoine and Pillow, equal; Cowen and Slater, equal.
90
ENGLISH SUMMER READING.
SECOND YEAR.—Class J.—Jewett; Boyle and Cropper, equal; Camp-
bell and Fyshe and Wheaton, equal. Class IJ.—Bowness, Mc-
Leish; Blanchet and Kydd, equal; Small, MacDermot, Redpath,
Livingston, Ross. Class [/[.—Wright; Greenshields and Scouler,
equal; McIntosh; Glassco and Ritchie, equal; Roger; Burpee
and Findlay and MacMillen, equal; Cockshutt and Willard,
equal; Eaton, Robertson, Sutherland (D. H.), Churchill, Jost;
Idsardi and Pinch, equal; Belanger and Blackader and Cunha
and Drinkwater and Mooney and Ryan and Young, equal.
FIRE ASSAYING.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—None. Class I[.—Parlee, McPhee; Carlyle
and Chambers, equal; Campbell and McDougall (C. H.) and
McMurtry, equal; Atkinson and Baker, equal. Class III.—
Cameron and Grice, equal; Davis and Deyell and Spencer and
Taylor and Wilson, equal; Ells, Webster; Gnaedinger and Sulli-
van, equal; LeMaistre.
FREEHAND DRAWING.
First YEAR.—Class J.—Brennan; Durland and Harding and Loudon,
equal; Bell and Cattanach and Leonard, equal; Shorey; Mac-
donald (R. R.) and Presner, equal: Anderson and Blackader and
Cole and Ewens and Mudge and Tupper, equal; Dickson and
Forbes and McCuaig and McLachlan (Ὁ. W.) and Smith and
Wright, equal. Class [J.—Baylis and Hadley and Harvie (J.)
and Hassberger and Hodge and Jardine and Prevost, equal;
Grier and Howe and Jones and Roger, equal; Boyd and Burnett
and Gurd and Howell and Kirkpatrick and Newton and Sharp,
equal; Black and Cowen and Davidson and Landry and Norton
and Ryan and Walker and Wickware, equal; Hibbard and
Jackson, equal; Daly and Haskell and Pickard and Skel-
ton and Steedman, equal; Benedict and Carlyle and
McDonald (ΗΠ. ἘΠῚ and McMeekin and Wheaton, equal ;
Dickenson and Johnson and Lea and Small and Wilson and
Winter, equal. Class IJ[.—MacKay (ΒΕ. M.) and Slater and
Slavin and Turley, equal; Brady and Conway and Macdonald
(P. J.) and Scott, equal; Corrigan; Brown and Lynch and Pou-
pore, equal;'Pedley; Frith and Gaunt, equal; Bellasis and Pil-
low and Taylor, equal.
SECOND YEAR.—Class J.—Pattison.
GAS ANALYSIS.
FourtH YEAR.—Class J.—Egleson. Class II.—Savage, Crawford,
Musgrave (W. N.).
GEODESY.
FourtH YERAR.—Class I.—Edwards. Class IJ.—Jones and Landry,
equal. Class III.—Cohen, Beck.
GEOLOGY AND ORE DEPOSITS.
Fourtu YEAR.—Olass I.—Robertson. Class IT.—Hall, Rowlands, Tilt;
Gale and Lucas equal: Rowley; Boright and Musgrave (R.),
equal: Stovel. Class IIT.—Revnolds, Langley; Maclaren and
Pemberton, equal; Ross, Kendall.
θά;
91
GEOLOGY AND MUSEUM WORK.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Blumenthal. Class II.—Spencer, McPhee;
Grice and Parlee, equal; Johnson; Gnaedinger and Harvey,
equal; Campbell and Carlyle, equal. Class IIlI.—LeMaistre,
Lawrence, Chambers, McDougall (C. H.), Cameron, Taylor;
Kent and McMurtry, equal; Webster, Deyell, Healy ; Atkinson,
and Lambart and Sullivan, equal.
GRAPHICAL STATICS.
FourtH Yrar.—Class [.—Edwards, Jones. Class II.—Beck and
Cohen, equa;. Class I[I[.—Landry.
THIRD YEAR.—OClass J.—Blumenthal and Grice, equal; Chaplin; Greey
and Lawrence and Scott, equal; Dutcher, Chambers; Carlyle
and Drysdale and McDougall (G. K.), equal; Wilkes; Cardew
and Cole and Gnaedinger and Kemp and Marrotte, equal.
Wenger, equal; Dawe and Lambart and Parlee, equal; Klls;
Class II.—Healy and Harvey, equal; Davis and Deyell and
| McDougall (C. H.). and Wurtele, equal; McMurtry: Hogan and
4 Webster, equal; McPhee and Wilson, equal; McCloskey.
Class IIJ.—Atkinson; Cameron and Taylor, equal; Campbell
and Kent, equal; Roffey.
HYDRAULICS.
FourtH YEAR.—(Ffull Course.)—Class I.—Brown, Foreman, Edwards,
᾿ Roberts. Class IJ.—Tilt, McKergow. Class I[J.—Edgar, Stokes;
‘ Cohen and (McKay, equal; Landry and Reynolds, equal; Beck
and Maclaren and Ross, equal; Jones, James; Kendall and
Millar and Porcheron and Rodger, equal; Trimingham.
(Partial Course.)—Class I.—Robertson, Rowley, Hall. Class IJ.—
Conklin and Lucas, equal; Boright and Cummings and McDon-
ald, equal; Gale and Pemberton, equal; Stovel, Musgrave Gs;
Keith and Rowlands, equal; McCaskill, Baker, Thorpe, Cole;
Blatch and Langley, equal.
HYDRAULIC MACHINERY.
| FourtH YEeAr.—Olass J.—Roberts; Conklin and Foreman and Robert-
‘Ke son, equal; Brown. and Edwards, equal; McCaskill, Cole.
Class I7.—Hall: Baker and Edgar and Langley and McKay,
equal; McKergow and Pemberton and Rowley, equal; McDon-
ald, Tilt; Boright and Rowlands, equal; Thorpe; Beck and
; Kendall and Lucas, equal. Class III.—Jones and Keith and
Ἂς Musgrave (R.) and Stokes, equal; Blatch and Gale, equal;
; Maclaren, Millar; Cohen and Reynolds and Stovel, equal;
Landry; James and Ross, equal; Porcheron. Aegrotat:—Trim-
j ingham.
KINEMATICS OF MACHINES.
| SEconD YEAR.—Class I.—Boyle. Glassco. Class IT.—McUeish ; Crop-
i per and Cunha, equal; Burpee and Harris and Price, equal;
νὰ Archibald and Mundy, equal; Scouler; Campbell and Drink-
; water, equal; McDermot and Willard, equal; Piché, McMillen;
Mooney and Wright, equal; Wheaton; Bowness and Cockshutt
and Findlay, equal: Sutherland and Turnbull and Weagant,
ΤῊΝ equal. Class III.—Redpath, Johnstone, Eaton; Gillespie and
a. Joseph, equal; Dickson (G. L.), Ross; Gibbs and Higgins,
equal; Barclay; Batchelder and Pinch, equal; Bain.
.82
LABORATORIES.
FourtH YEAR.—(Chemical Laboratory.)—(Mining Engineering Course.)
—Olass I.—Robertson. Class II.—Lucas, Pemberton, Tilt; Row-
ley and Langley, equal; Rowlands, Gale, Musgrave (R.).
Class III.—Stovel; Porcheron and Reynolds, equal; Boright,
Hall, Ross, Maclaren. (Chemistry Cowrse.)—Class I.—Kgleson.
Savage. Class I7.—Musgrave (W. N.), Crawford.
THIRD YEAR.—(Chemical Laboratory.)—(Mining Engineering Course.)—
Class I.—McPhee; Atkinson and Chambers and Parlee, equal;
Campbell and Carlyle, equal. Class II.—Deyell, Grice, McDou-
gall (C. H.); McMurtry and Taylor, equal; Ells; Cameron and
Gnaedinger and Wilson, equal; Davis. Olass JII.—Irving,
Webster. (Chemistry Course,)—Class J.—LeMaistre, Spencer,
Johnson. Class III.—*McNaughton.
FourtH YErar.—(Hlectrical Hngineering Laboratories.)—Olass I.—Cole
Foreman and Keith and McCaskill, equal. Class I7.—Conklin
and McDonald, equal; Baker and James, equal; Thorpe. Class
II7I.—Blateh and Stokes and 'lrimmingham, equal; Rodger.
THIRD Year.—(Llectrical Engineering Laboratories.)—(Electrical En-
gineering Course,)—Class I.—McDougall (G,H,) McCloskey
Robinson (H.G.), Robinson (K. S.). Class II,—Cardew, Mar-
rotte, Dutcher, Wenger, Scott. Class JJI.—Cole, Devlin, Wur-
tele, Roffev. (Mechanical Engineering Course).—Class I. Chaplin,
Kemp. Class I].—Drysdale. Class III.—Wilkes, Greey.
FourRtTH YEAR.—(Geodetic Laboratory.) — Class I1—Beck and _ Jones,
equal. Class [I.—Edwards, Landry, Cohen.
FourtH YEAr.—(Hydraulic Laboratory.)—Class [.—Brown and Roberts,
equal; Conklin and Foreman and McKay and McKergow,
equal; McCaskill and Rowlands, equal; Hall and McDonald and
Rowley and Tilt and Thorpe, equal; Gale and Musgrave (R.),
equal. Class II.—Cole and Keith and Robertson and Stokes,
equal; Baker and Boright and Jones and Stovel, equal; Cum-
ming and James and Kendall and Landry and Lucas and
Maclaren and Rodger and Millar, equal: Blatch and Cohen
and Langley and Pemberton and Ross and Trimingham, equal;
Beck. Class I/I.—Jennings and Reynolds, equal; Porcheron.
FourRTH YEAR.—(Mechanical Engineering Laboratory.)—(Klectrical Engi
neering Course)—Class I[.—Baker and Conklin, equal; Foreman
and Keith, equal. Class I7.—McCaskill and McDonald, equal;
Cole and Trimingham, equal: Thorpe, Stokes. Class III.—
Blatch and James, equal; Rodger.
FourTH YHAR.—(Mining and Metallurgical Laboratory.)—Class I.—Hall,
Robertson, Rowley, Musgrave, (R); Boright. and Stovel, equal,
Kendall; Lucas and Tilt, equal. Class II.—Porcheron, Row-
lands; Langley and Ross, equal; Pemberton; Gale and Mac-
laren, equal; Reynolds.
SECOND YEAR.—( Physical Laboratory.)—(Civil, Mechanical, Mining and
Chemistry Courses.) Class IT.—Belanger and Blanchet and Fyshe
and Gillepsie and Idsardi and Jewett and Jost and Kidd and Living-
ston and MacMillen and Macnab and Pattison and Spencer, equal ;
McIntosh, Young; Churchill and Pinch and Ryan and Turnbull,
equal ; Cockshutt ; Gibbs and Ritchie, equal. Class I7.—Miner,
Sutherland (C. H.); Eadie and Mooney, equal; Sharpe, Gillies,
Shaughnessy. Class III. Robertson. (Electrical Engineering
Course.) Class I.—MacDermot: Boyle and Scouler, equal ; Burpee ;
McLean and Redpath and Willard, equal; Cunha, Glassco; Drink-
water and McLeish, equal; Cropper, Harris, Findlay, Bowness ;
Archibald and Small and Weagant, equal; Wheaton, Johnstone;
Campbell and Piché, equal. Class I7.—Bain and Eaton and Joseph,
equal; Wright, Ross, Dickson (C.L.), +Bray, Higgins, }Batchelder.
Class TIT.—Anderson.
*Supplemental in Iron and Steel Analysis.
+ Supplemental in Paper.
ἂν “χε --
99
First YEAR.—(Physical Laboratory. )—(Alphabetical Order) Anderson,
Baylis, Beaudry, Bell, Bellasis, Benedict, Black, Blackader, Brady,
Brennan, Brown, Burnett, Carlyle, Cattanach, Cole, Conway, Cor-
rigan, Cowen, Daly, Davidson, Dickenson, Dickson, Durland, Ewens,
Forbes, Frith, Gaunt, Graham (W.S ), Grier, Gurd, Hadley, Harding,
Harmer, Harvie (J.), Harvie (R.), Hibbard, Hodge, Howe, Howell,
Jackson, Jardine, Jones, Kirkpatrick, Landry, Lemoine, Lea,
leonard, Loudon, Lynch, Mather, Macdonald (P.J.), Macdonald
(R.R.), Mackay (C.W.), Mackay (R.M.), McCuaig, McDonald (H.F.),
MeKinnon, McLachlan (D.W.) McMeekin, Mudge, Newton, Norton,
Pedley, Pickard, Pillow, Poupore, Presner, Prevost, Ryan (F.G.),
Scott (W.G.), Sharp, Shorey, Simard, Skelton, Slater, Slavin, Small,
Smith, Steedman, Taylor, Tupper, Turley, Walker, Wilson, Wick-
ware, Winter, Wheaton.
FourtH YEAR.—(Testing Laboratory.) Class I.—Edwards. Class I1.—
Beck and Cohen and Jones, equal. Class [I/.—ULandry.
THIRD YEAR.—(Testing Laboratory.) (Full Course.) Class 1.—McDougall,
(G. K.), Drysdale, Wilkes ; Chaplin and Greey, equal; Marrotte ;
Cole and McCloskey, equal; Dutcher and Cardew, equal. Class
II.—Kemp, Irving, Wenger, Wurtele; Devlin and Scott, equal.
(Partial Course.) Class I.—Harvey, McPhee, Blumenthal. Class
IT.—McDougall (C. H.), Parlee, Lawrence ; Deyell and Taylor,
equal ; Dawe and Chambers and Lambart, equal ; Campbell, Kent ;
Atkinson and Webster, equal; Carlyle. Class I/I.—El\|s, Wilson ;
Healy and McMurtry, equal; Davis; Grice and Sullivan, equal ;
Cameron and Hogan, equal ; Gnaedinger, Roffey, Martin.
FourtH YEAR.—(Thermodynamic Laboratory.) Class II.—Roberts,
McKay ; Brown and McKergow, equal. Class 111.-- ραν, Millar.
LETTERING.
First YEAR.—Class I.—Bell and Presner, equal; Cole and Lea and
McKinnon, equal; Durland and Kirkpatrick and Mudge and Prevost
and Tupper, equal; Harding, Brady and Brennan and Conway and
Loudon, equal; Black and Blackader and Dickenson and Leonard,
equal; Beaudry and Hadley and McCuaig and Norton, equal ; Hib-
bard and Hodge and Howell. equal; Harvie (J.)and McLachlin (D.),
equal; Forbes and Gurd and Shorey, equal. Class 77.—Cattanach
and Macdonald (R. R.) and Roger, equal; Daly and Grier and Hass-
berger and Sharp and Walker, equal; Baylis and Burnett and
Pickard and Winter, equal; Anderson and Davidson and Jardine
and Landry and Skelton, equal; Haskell and Macdonald (P. J.) and
McMeekin and Newton and Pedley and Wilson, equal; Ewens and
Robb and Smith, equal; Benedict and Jackson, equal; Boyd and
Jones and Small, equal; Carlyle and Howe and Pillow and Taylor
and Wheaton, equal; Bellasis and Brown and Cowen and Rolland,
equal. Class IIJ.—Frith and MacKay (R. M.) and Richards and Scott
and Steedman, equal; Corrigan and McDonald (H.F.), equal;
Harmer and Slavin, equal; Simard, Turley, Slater,Ryan, Wickware.
MACHINE DESIGN.
Fourta YeEraAR.—[Electrical Engineering Course.|—Class I.—Foreman.
Class IIT.—Conklin, McCaskill. Class II7J.—Baker, Thorpe, Cole ;
McDonald and Stokes, equal; Blatch and James and Keith, equal ;
Trimingham. Mechanical Engineering Course.—Class I.—Roberts.
Class II.—Brown. Class III.—McKay, McKergow, Millar, Edgai
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Chaplin, McPhee, Cole ; Grice and McCloskey,
equal ; McDougall [G. K.] and Wenger, equal. Class 7I.—Chambers
and Fraser [D. M.] and Webster, equal; Kemp, Cardew and Greey
and Parlee, equal; Dutcher. Class IJIf[.—Drysdale and Marrotte
and McDougall [C. H.] and Scott, equal; Davis and Ells, equal ;
Atkinson and Wurtele, equal ; Campbell and Price and Wilkes,
equal ; Deyell ; Gnaedinger and MeMurtry, equal ; Taylor.
94
MAPPING.
THIRD. YEAR—Class I.—WHarvey, Blumenthal. Class JJ. — Lambart,
Dawe, Hogan, Lawrence, Healy, Kent.
SECOND YEAR—[Civil Engineering Course]—Class I.—Jost. _Cluss II.—
Jewett, Fyshe, McIntosh, Lockerby, Idsardi. Class III.—Kydda,
Macnab. [Mining EngineeringCourse.|—Class I.—Churchill. Class
7TI.—Livingston, Blanchet. Class J/I.—Young, Sharpe, Belanger,
Ritchie. ἢ
MATHEMATICS.
THIRD YEAR.—(Calculus, etc.) Class I.—Cole, McCloskey, Dutcher, Law-
rence, McPhee, Drysdale. Class [J.—McMurtry; Cardew and Wenger,
equal; Blumenthal and Davis, equal; McDougall (C.-H.), Carlyle,
Grice, Harvey, Chaplin. Class III.—Chambers, Taylor, Parlee ;
Kemp and Wilkes, equal; Wiirtele; Devlin and *Roffey and Sulli-
van, equal; Gnaedinger and Lambart, equal; Greey, Campbell ;
*Ells and *Kent, equal; Atkinson.
(Mechanics.)—Class I.—Grice and McCloskey, equal; Blumenthal ;
Drysdale and Lawrence, equal; Cole (G. H.) and Davis, equal.
Class II1.—Marrotte and McDougall (G. K.) and McPhee, equal ;
Dutcher ; Chaplin and Parlee, equal. Class /J/J.—Chambers ; Carlyle
and Scott, equal ; Lambart and Roffey, equal; Cardew and Harvey
and Kent and McDougall (C. H.), equal; Dawe and McMurtry,
equal; Taylor; Atkinson and Ells and Kemp and Wilkes, equal.
(Special Examination in Calculus, etc.) Class III.—Deyell.
SECOND YEAR.—(Analytic Geometry.)—Class IJ.—Cropper, Boyle, MceMil-
len; Jost and McLeish, equal; Cunha and Jewett, equal; Fyshe ;
Blanchet and Scouler, equal; MacDermot. Class IJ.—Archibald,
Drinkwater ; Miner and Willard, equal; McLean; Bowness and
Mundy, equal; Churchill, Baker, Wheaton, Harris; Johnstone and
Kydd and Livingston and Sutherland (C.) and Weagant, equal ;
Glassco. Class I/I.—Cockshutt and Findlay and Pattison and
Ryan, equal; Rray; Macnab and Price and_Koss, equal; Campbell
(J. A.) and Robertson, equal; Redpath; Eadie and Higgins aud
Martin and Wright, equal; Piché, Mooney ; Batchelder and Burpee
and Fraser (1). M.) and Mackintosh, equal; Turnbull, Hamilton (W.),
Eaton ; Barclay and Sharpe, equal; Dickson (ἃ. L.) and Gibbs, equal.
Caleulus.—Class I.—Boyle, MacDermot, Fyshe, McLeish,
Blanchet. Class JII.—MacMillen, McLean, Willard,| Cropper,
Livingston; Glassco and Sharp, equal; Drinkwater, Findlay.
Class IIT.—Redpath: Archibald and Cockshutt and Jewett,
equal; Cunha and Harris and Sutherland (C.) and Weagant,
equal; Pattison, Miner; Johnstone and Mundy and Scouler,
equal; Campbell and Churchill and Joseph and Wright, equal;
Hamilton (W.) and Turnbull, equal; Price; Baker and Martin,
equal; Kydd, Robertson; Eaton and Piché, equal; Fraser (D.
M.) and Macnab, equal; Mooney, Bowness; Bray and Eaton and
Wheaton, equal.
Mechanics.—Class I.—MacMillen, Kydd, Jost, Willard, Boyle,
McLeisn; Blanchet and McLean, equal; Cropper, Bowness.
Class If.—Glassco, Scouler; Mundy and Redpath and Weagant,
equal; Cunha and Johnstone, equal; Churchill; Archibald and
Livingston, equal; Sharpe; Cockshutt and Fyshe and MacDer-
mot, equal; Jewett; Drinkwater and Macnab, equal; Piché and
Sutherland (C. H.), equal: Burpee, Harris, Bain, Findlay. Class
IIT.—Pattison, Price, Campbell; Harvie (R.) and Robertson,
equal; Wheaton, Eaton, Dickson (G. L.); Hamilton (A. M.) and
Hamilton (W.) and Miner, equal; Eadie, Joseph; Batchelder
and Idsardi and Ross, equal; Turnbull; Martin and Wright,
equal.
*Supplemental in Analytic Geometry
ῷ.
J. ——
a a ad
on ἐδ a
35
First YEAR. (Algebra).—Class I.—Bell; Lea and McLachlan (D.W.),
equal ; Durland ; McMeekin and Walker, equal ; Wilson, Brennan,
Jones ; Howell and Tupper, equal ; Pedley and Sharp, equal ; Ewens
and MacDonald (P.J.), equal; Anderson. Class [].—Turley and
Winter, equal ; Forbes, Jackson ; Gurd and McCuaig and Presner,
equal ; Landry ; Roger and Taylor, equal ; Blackader and McDonald,
(H.F.), equal; Boyd and Scott, equal; Benedict and Cattanach,
equal ; Davidson and MacDonald (R.R.), equal; Cole. Class III —
Slavin; Brady and Hibbard, equal; Frith and Harding, equal :
Newton, Norton, Pickard ; Hadley and Slater, equal; Cowen;
Burnett and Kirkpatrick and MacKinnon, equal ; Hodgson; Black
and Corrigan, equal; Loudon and Smith, equal; Leonard ; Grier
and Mudge and Steedman, equal ; Mackay, (R.M.) ; Conway and
Rolland, equal ; Harmer, Small.
Dynamics.—Class I.—Forbes and McLachlan (D.W.). equal: Lea,
Tupper, Bell, Durland, Brennan ; Burnett and Jones, equal; Pedley ;
Kirkpatrick and Turley, equal ; Benedict and Steedman, equal. Class
IT.—Cattanach, Loudon, Sharp ; Roger and Walker, equal ; Winter,
Jackson, Hadley, Davidson ; Anderson and Brady, equal ; Blackader ;
Pickard aud Slater, equal ; Macdonald (R.R.) : Ewens and Wilson,
equal. Class IiI.—Harvie (J.), Corrigan ; MacKinnon and
Presner, equal; Conway, Leonard; Greenshields and Macdonald
(P.J.) and Mudge, equal; Landry and Smith, equal ; Cole, Lemoine,
Black, McCuaig and McDonald )H. F.) and McMeekin and Norton,
equal; Boyd and Scott, equal; Gurd and Harding and Newton,
equal ; Cowen and Taylor, equal ; Hibbard and Howell, equal.
Geometry—Class I.—Bell, McLachlan (Ὁ. W.), Lea, Jones,
Durland, Walker, Brennan, Boyd. Class II.—Jackson and Ped-
ley, equal: Macdonald (P. J.); Anderson and Sharp, equal;
Newton; McCuaig and McLachlin (D.), equal; McMeekin,
Forbes, Cattanach, Loudon, Eiwens, Kirkpatrick. Class IIT.—
Hibbard and Howell and Landry, equal: Blackader and Wil-
son, equal; Roger, Leonard; Harding and Winter, equal; Dick-
son, Grier; Greenshields and Scott, equal; *Benedict and Brown,
equal; Presner, Conway; *Burnett and Davidson and jMacKay
(R. M.) and Pickard, equal; Corrigan and *Gurd and Steedman,
equal; Frith and Robb and Taylor, equal; Baylis and Harvie
(J.), equal; Hadley and Macdonald (R. R.), equal.
Trigonometry.—Class I.—Bell, McLachlan (D. W.), Lea, Dur-
land. Class II,—Anderson, Macdonald (P. J.), Forbes, Jones,
Walker, Sharp, McMeekin; Brennan and Pedley, equal; Bene-
dict. Class IIJ.—Harding; Hibbard and Turley, equal; Jackson,
Cole; Landry and Wilson, equal; Blackader and Brady and
Macdonald (R. R.), equal; Boyd and Steedman, equal; Ewens
and Roger and Tupper, equal: Burnett and Kirkpatrick and
Presner, equal; Greenshields and Hadley and Norton and Pick-
ard, equal; Cattanach and Grier and McDonald (ΕΠ ἘΠῚ and
Taylor and Winter, equal; McCuaig and Scott, equal; Howell,
Loudon; Mudge and Slater, equal.
MECHANICAL DRAWING.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Chambers, Chaplin, Gillies; Cole and McPhee?
equal; Kemp and Marrotte and Scott, equal. C’ass I7.—Gnaedinger
and Wurtele, equal; McCloskey and McDougall (C.H.) ana Parlee,
equal; Hamilton (A.M.); Dutcher and Piche, equal; McDougall
(G.K.), Mundy, Price, Fraser (D.M.) and Wilkes, equal; Drysdale
and Ells and Rheaume, equal; Wenger, Cardew, Davis, Greey.
Class III.—Campbell, Devlin, Deyell; Atkinson and Roffey, equal ;
Taylor, McMurtry, Martin, Wilson, Sullivan; Carlyle and Grice,
equal.
* Supplemental in Plane Geometry.
+ Supplemental in Solid and Conies.
90
SEcoND YEAR.—Class I.—Sutherland (C.), Cropper, Archibald, Burpee,
Class II.—Jost, Mooney, Gillespie, Johnson; MacDermot and Wil-
lard, equal; Boyle and Eaton and Fyshe, equal ; Turnbull; Bianchet
and Macnab, equal; Churchill and Wheaton, equal ; Eadie and
Higgins and McMillen, equal ; Bowness and Pinch, equal ; Cockshutt
and Scouler, equal: Cunha and Glassco and Gibbs and Redpath,
equal. Class [/I.—Sharpe ; McLean and Ross, equal; Batchelder
and Joseph, equal; Barclay and McLeish and Wright and Young,
equal; Livingston ; Dickson (G.L.) and Drinkwater, equal ; Camp-
bell; Findlay and Weagant, equal ; Miner; Bray and Harris, equal;
Ho ‘gson, Irving, Bain, Ritchie, Belanger.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
FourtH YEAR.—(Civil, Electrical and Mining Engineering Courses.)
Class 1.—Foreman and Robertson, equal ; Boright and Gale, equal.
Class IJ.—Cumming and Ross, equal; Conklin, Rowlands ; Kendall
and Lucas, equal ; McCaskill ; Hall and Stovel equal ; McDonald
and Pemberton, equal. Class J/IJ.—Langley, Maclaren ; Cole and
Rowley and Stokes aud Thorpe, equal ; Baker and Jones, equal ;
Cohen and Jennings and Keith and Porcheron, equal; Beck ; Blatch
and James and Landry and Musgrave (R.), and Reynolds and Rodger
and Tilt and Trimingham, equal. (Mechanical Engineering Course. )
Class I.—Roberts, Brown. Class II[.—Edgar, McKay, McKergow.
Class ITI.—Millar.
METALLURGY.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—McPhee ; Grice and Spencer, equal ; LeMaistre.
Class II.—MaeNaughton ; Atkinson and McDougall (C.H.), equal ;
Parlee. (lass I7I.—Carlyle and Gnaedinger and McMurtry and
Taylor, equal ; Webster, Sullivan ; Ells and Johnson, equal ; Cam-
pbell and Davis, equal ; Devell.
METALLURGY (ADVANCED).
FourtH YeAR.—Class I.--Robertson. Class IT.—Tilt ; Hall and Row-
lands, equal ; Pemberton, Kendall.
METALLURGY (IRON, STEEL AND COPPER).
Fourta YEAR.—Class I.—Robertson, Tilt ; Hall and Rowlands, equal.
Class IIT.—Boright, Stovel, Lucas; McLaren and Gale, equal;
Langley. Class II/I.—Kendall and Pemberton and Ross, equal ;
Cumming and Porcheron and Reynolds, equal ; Rowley, Musgrave
(R.)
METALLURGY (SILVER, GOLD AND LEAD).
Fourtr YEAR.—Class [.—Rowlands, Tilt. Class I7.—Boright and Hall
and Reynolds and Robertson and Rowley, equal ; Lucas, Pemberton
and Stovel, equal ; Galeand MacLaren and Musgrave (R.), equal ;
Porcheron, Langley. Class II7T.—Kendall, Ross.
MINERALOGY.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—LeMaistre, Grice, McPhee. Class IT,—John-
son, Spencer, Parlee, McDougall (C. H.), Ells. Taylor, Chambers.
Class I[IT.—Gnaedinger; Carlyle and Devell, equal: Webster;
Davis and McMurtry, equal; Campbell, Sullivan, Wilson, At-
kinson.
“=
ἷ-
ru 5S oa
a a
eee
μ-»
ΕΥ͂
MINERALOGY (ADVANCED).
FourtH YrEar.—Class I.—Egleson and Robertson, equal. Class 11.--
Lucas and Rowlands, equal; Musgrave (W. N.); Langley and
Rowley, equal; Hail; Gale and Pemiberton and Stovel and Tilt,
equal; Savage, Crawford. Class IIJ.—Maclaren, Musgrave ΕΣ
Boright, Porcheron, Ross, Kendall, Reynolds.
MINERALOGY (DETERMINATIVE).
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Jonnson, Deyel!, LeMaistre; Carlyle and
McPhee, equal; Chambers. Class II.—Parlee; Spencer and
Sullivan, equal; Gnaedinger and Webster, equal; McMurtry;
Grice and McDougall (C. H.), equal; Wilson. Class III.—Ells,
Davis; Cameron and Campbell, equal; Atkinson and Taylor,
equal.
MINING.
Fourtu YEAR.—Olass [.—Robertson. Class I7.—Tilt, Boright, Pem-
berton, Reynolds, Hall, Stcvel, Lucas; Gale and Kendall and
Musgrave (R.) and Rowlands, equal. Olass III.—Maclaren,
Ross, Rowley, Porcheron, Langley.
MINING MACHINERY. ALLOYS AND PROBLEMS.
FourtH YEAR.—Olass J.—Hall, Robertson, Boright. Class IT.—
Stovel, Reynolds, Rowlands. Class III.—Rowley; Lucas and
Tilt, equal: Langley; Musgrave (R.) and Ross, equal; Maclaren
and Pemberton, equal; Gale, Porcheron, Kendall.
MUNICIPAL ENGINEERING.
FourtH Ye1r—Class T—Non>. Class II.—Edwards, Jones. Class
III.—Cohen, Landry.
THrrp YEAR.—Class I.—Hogazn: Blumenthal and Lawrence, equal;
Class II,—Harvey, Healy. Class [/IJ.—Dawe, Kent, Lambart.
ORE DRESSING.
FourtTH YEAR.—Class J].—Robertson. Class I[J.—Hall, Boright, Tilt.
Class I1].—Lucas and Musgrave (R.) and Pemberton, equal;
Porcheron; Gale and Rowley, equal; Maclaren and Reynolds,
equal; Kendall and Rowlands, equal; Ross; Langley and Stovel,
equal.
THIRD YEAR —Class I.—McPhee. Class IJ.—Parlee; Chambers and
Atkinson and Taylor, equal; Grice, Gnaedinger, Carlyle, McMur-
try. Ells. Webster, Campbell; McDougall (C. H.) and Wilson,
equal; Davis, Sullivan. Class IJ].—Cameron and Deyell, equal.
PETROGRAPHY. \
FourtH YEAR —Class I.—None. Class J7.—Robertson, Hall. Rowley.
Class [1T.—Boright and Gale and Musgrave (R.) and Rowlands,
equal; Langley and Lucas and Pemberton, equal; Stovel, Tilt,
Maclaren, Ross; Kendall and Reynolds, equal.
PHYSIOGRAPHY.
Fourtu YEAR —Class 1.—None. Class II.—Rowley, Ross, Reynolds.
Class I1J.—Boright; Lucas and Stovel, equal; Musgrave (R.);
Gale and Maclaren, equal; Langley.
38
PHYSICS.
Srconp YEAR.—(Electricity and Magnetism.)—Class I.—Boyle, Fyshe
Harris, Redpath, Scouler; Findlay and MacDermot, equal.
Class IJ.—Johnstone and McLeish and Weagant, equal; Crop-
per, ‘Kydd, Willard, Archibald, Blanchet; Burpee and Piché,
equal; McLean, Mundy; Bain and Jewett and Small, equal;
Cunha and Joseph, equal; Drinkwater and Macnab, equal; Spen-
cer and Sutherland (C.'H.), equal; Bowness and Eaton and
Jost, equal; MacMillen and Robertson, equal; Campbell and
Hamilton (W.), equal; Glassco. Class [1J.—Churchill, Wheaton,
Bray; Gibbs and Ross and ’Wright, egual; Baker and Dickson
(G. L.), equal; Turnbull, Livingstone, Pattison, Sharpe; Batch-
elder and Idsardi, equal; Belanger and Cockshutt and Eadie and
Gillespie and Higgins and Mooney, equal.
First Year.—(Sound, Heat and Light.)—Class [.—Cattanach; Jones
and McLachlan (D. W.), equal; Bell, Jackson, Durland, Turley;
Landry and Walker, equal; Hibbard and Winter, equal; David-
son and Pedley, equal; Sharp. Class [J.—Macdonald (P. J.) and
Tupper, equal; Brennan; Presner and Wickware, equal; Black-
ader and Boyd and Corrigan and Forbes and Lea, equal; Gurd
and Kirkpatrick, equal; Black and Hadley and Leonard, equal;
Cowen; Biady and Burnett, equal; Anderson and Cole and Pick-
ard, equal; Roger, Steedman; Dickenson and Harding and Mc-
Meekin and Taylor, equal; Dickson and Greenshields and Har-
vie (R.), equal. Class I[IJ.—McDonald (H. F.) and Norton,
equal; Frith and Slater, equal; Benedict and Ewens and Hodge,
equal; Harvie (J.); Baylis and Wilson, equal; Howell and Scott,
equal; Newton; Conway and Loudon and McCuaig, equal;
Shorey, Howe; Brown (W. G. B.) and McKinnon and Smith,
equal; MacKay (G. W ) and MacKay (R. M.), equal.
RAILWAY ENGINEERING.
FourtuH Yrear.—Class I.—Jones, Edwards. Class I7,—Landry. Class
TTT.—Cohen, Beck.
THIRD YEAR.—Olass I.—Blumenthal. Class II.—Hogan. Class ITI.—
Harvey, Lawrence; Dawe and Healy, equal;
SHOPWORK.
FourtH YEAR.—Olass I.—McKergow; Brown and McKay and Ro-
berts, equal. Class IJ.— Edgar.
THIRD YEAR.—Olass I.—Cole and McCloskey, equal; Chaplin, Wenger,
Drysdale, Scott; Cardew and Dutcher and Marrotte and Wilkes
and Wurtele, equal. Class IJ.—Kemp, McDougall (G. K.);
Devlin end Roffey, equal; Greey and Piché, equal
Srconp YuArR.—COlass I.—Jost; Barclay and Fraser (Ὁ. M.) and Wea-
gant, equal; Burpee and Jewett and Johnstone and Wheaton,
equal; Macnab and Pattison and Sharpe, equal; Belanger and
Moeney, equal; Gibbs and Gillis and McLean, equal; Fyshe
and Kydd and Idsardi and Livingston and McIntosh and Skel-
ton, equal. Class I7.—Higgins and Redpath and Willard, equal;
Archibald and Findlay and Wright and Young, equal: Harris
and Ross and Turnbull, equal; Bain and Bowness and Churchill
and MacDermot, equal; Dickson and Gillespie and Pinch and
Sutherland (C. H.), equal; Boyle and Campbel! and Cropper and
McMillen and Scouler, equal; Cockshutt and Roger and Shaugh-
nessy, equal; Blanchet and Cunha and Drinkwater and Eadie
and Joseph and Small and Smith, equal; Bray and Glassco and
Miner, equal. Class ITI.—Ryan; Ritchie and Rolland, equal ;
Eaton.
39
First Year.—Class [.—Harvie (J.); Conway and Harvie (R.) and
Sharp and Tupper, equal; Dickenson and Durland and Jackson,
equal; Forbes; Black and Dickson and Kirkpatrick, equal;
Class I[.—Davidson and Greenshields and Hassberger and
Hodge and Small and Winter, equal; Blackader and Boyd and
Brennan and Brown (W G. B.) and Carlyle and Howe and
Jardine and Johnson and Jones and Leonard and Loudon and
Macdonald (P. J.) and McMeekin and Newton and Presner
and Richards end Walker and Wilson and Wickware and
Wheaton, equal: Benedict and Brady and Cattanach and Cole
and Corrigan and Prevost and Turley. equal; Anderson and
Bell and Hadley and Hardng and McCuaig and McKinnon
and Pickard and Shorey and Taylor. equal: Daly and Ewens
and Frith and Gurd and Hibb?rd and Howell and Mather and
Macdonald (R. R.) and Norton and Pedley and Poupore and
Slater avd Slavin, equal; Beaudry and Cowen and Gaunt and
Haskell and Landry and Lea and Lynch and McDonald (H. ἘΝ)
and McLachlan (Ὁ. W.) and Rvan and Scott (W. G.) and
Smith. equal; Baylis and Grier and McKay (ΕΒ. M.) and Phillips
and Wright, equal. Class IJ].—Harmer and Simard and Steed-
: man, equal; Burnett, Roy, Robb.
STRUCTURAL DESIGNING.
FourRtTH YEAR —Class I.—None. Class IJ.—Jones, Beck, Edwards.
Class IIT.—Cohen and Landry, equal.
THIRD YEAR —Class I.—Lambart, Blumenthal, Harvey, Lawrence.
Class II.—Irving, Dawe, Kent. Class IJ].—Healy, Hogan.
a : , STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING.
FourtH YEAR —Class [.—None. Class I7.—None. Class IIT.—Cchen;
Beck and Edwards, equal; Jones, Landry.
THIRD YEAR —Class [.—Blumenthal, Lawrence. Class [[.—Harvey,
Kent, Hogan. Class III.—Dawe, Healy, Lambart.
3 SUMMER WORK (ESSAYS).
FourtH YEAR.—Class [.—Conklin and Foreman and Keith and Mc-
Kay, equal; Rrown and Cole and McCaskill and Roberts and
Hall, equal; Egleson and Musgrave (R.) and Robertson, equal;
Savage. Class I7.—Boright and Jones and McKergow and Row-
lands and Rowley, eaual; Baker and Kendall and Lucas and
Musgrave (ὗν. N.) and Ross and Tilt, equal; Beck and Gale and
tl ail
Ἢ James and Stokes, eaual; Langley and Cohen and Crawford,
ν" equal. Class 111.---ΜΟ Ομ δ ἃ and Reynolds and Thorpe and
τ Trimingham, equal; Edgar and Landry and Maclaren and
: Porcheron, equal; Pemberton, Stovel.
s
δ THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Chambers and Scott. equal; Carlyle and Mc-
; Dougall (G. K.), equal; Cardew and Drysdale and Harvey and
3 Lambart. equal. Class JJ.—Chaplin and Dutcher and Greey and
ee, Kemp and Pinpy. erual; Blumenthal and Ells and Gnaedinger
δ and Marrotte and Parlee. equal; Kent and McCloskey, equal;
+ Davis and McPhee and Wenger and Wilkes, equal. Class ITT.—
ἢ Cole; Gillies and Lawrence and McDougall (6. H.), equal;
ey Dawe; Atkinson and Johnson and LeMaistre, equal.
4 δι
- * Supplemental in Field work only.
per
40
SURVEYING.
THIRD YEAR.—Class J.—McPhee, Lawrence. Class II.—McMurtry;
Blumenthal and Grice, equal; Kent, Gnaedinger, Healy, Atkin-
son. Class II1J.—Chambers, Davis, Taylor, Webster,| Harvey,
Ells, Carlyle, McDougall (C. H.), Parlee; Hogan and Wilson,
equal; *Deyell.
SECOND YEAR.—Class I.—Jewett, Kydd; Fyshe and Jost, equal;
Churchill. Class [7.—Qivingston, Blanchet, Martin. Class I/I.—
Sharpe; Hamilton (A. M.) and Idsardi, equal; Macnab, McIn-
tosh, Lockerby, Hamilton (W.), Ritchie.
SURVEYING FIELDWORK.
Sreconp YxEAR.—Class J.—Jewett, Blanchet, Jost. Class 1].--
Churchill, Livingston, McIntosh, Idsardi, Sharpe, Kydd; Belan-
ger and Young, equal; Bowness, Ritchie. Class III.—Miner,
Shaughnessy, Rolland.
THEORY OF STRUCTURES.
FourtHu YEar.—Class I.—Edwards. Class [I.—Cohen, Jones, Landry,
Beck.
THIRD YE‘R.—Olass I.—Dutcher, McDougall (C. H.), Chaplin, Grice;
Cardew avd Lawrence and McDougall (G K.), equal. Class
Ii.—Cole: Parlee and Taylor, equal; Ells and Lambart, equal;
Greey and Harvey, equal; Drysdale, McCloskey, Davis, Mar-
rotte; Carlyle and Kent, equal; Healy, Blumenthal. Class III.—
Chambers and McPhee and Wilson, equal; Wenger, Wilkes,
Gnaedinger, Scott, Deyell, Kemp: Roffey and Wurtele, equal;
Campbell and Webster, equal; McMurtry, Devlin, Atkinson,
Dawe.
THERMODYNAMICS.
FourtH YEArR.—Oliss I.—Roberts, Brown. Class II.—McKergow.
Class JIiI.—Edgar, McKay.
THIRD YE\R.—Class I.—Kemp Class II.—Drysdale; Chaplin and
Greey and Robinson (H. G.), equal. Class LI1.—Wilkes.
TRANSPORTATION.
THIRD YEAR.—Class I.—Grice, McPhee; Davis and MeDougall (C. H.),
equal; Chambers and Sullivan, equal; Webster. Class 11.---
Taylor, Martin; Ells and Cnaedinger, equal; Wilson. Class
III.—Campbell; Atkinson and Parlee, equal; Cameron and
Deyell, equal; Carlyle, McMurtry.
—= ΣΡ ἢ
Faculty of Medicine.
eI Ae, εν.
PRIZE LIST.
HOLMES GOLD MEDAL, for highest aggregate in all subjects
forming the Medical Curriculum.
ἘΣ. M. McLAvuGHLIN,, Winona, Minn.
FINAL PRIZE for highest aggregate in the Fourth Year subjects,
EH. S, PatcH, -B:A., Montreal, Que.
FOURTH YEAR.
AONOURS IN AGGREGATE OF ALL SUBJECTS.
ἼΣ: Pateh, ἘΠ 5., Β:Α, 0. McCulloch, J. M.
rep Parris, Nae; ΠΕ i<ing, ἜΝ B.A.
33. Nelson, W. E. δ ἘΠ ΘΟ ἘΝ ΒΑ
4. McLaughlin, ἘΣ. M. 9 Burns, AG S3..B.A.
ἘΝ ΠΕΡ, Go ἘΠ BuA: 10. Bishop, L. C.
SURGERY—HONOURS.
1 Pacha (HESS be tee Douglas) ΤῊΣ sc:
z esha IN, IDE ts Macdonald, R. St. J., B.A.
McLaughlin, HE. M. - Rehfuss, W. N., B.A.
4. McCulloch, J. M. LOE His; JRe “EL:
ἘΣ ἘΣ ΕΠ 5; ἈΠ SAG 20. Kissane, J.W.
6. Cowperthwaite, H. H. Elder R., B.A. -
ion. Melaren; Dy Ὁ: 2k yneh, Ax VL:
8. ΠΟΥ KO a, laloy ΒΒ. Ἂς Slack, M. R.
9. Ebbett, P. L. B. 24 Montgomery, C. H.
Bishops 4.) _C- 25. Kang, RR. BeA.
S75 English, J. M. 26 Anderson, C. W., B.A.
Nelson, W. BH. Lamb, W. V.
Townsley, R. H. v Magee, C. F.
14. Thomas, S. B. 28. Forbes, R. D.
75). McKechnie D. W. - Secord, W. H.
MEDICINE AND CLINICAL MEDICINE.
HONOURS.
1 McCulloch, J. M. : 16. Forbes, R. D.
2. TMITNner Εἰ ΕΠ ἘΠ: ἊΣ ΠῚ: Bishop, L. C.
ce McLaughlin, ἘΣ. M. aly Nelson, W. E.
4 atch wh eis.) aA atch Anderson, C. W., B.A.
ἘΞ Thomas, 5. Β. Laurie, E., B.A.
6. Strong, N. W., B.A. Munro, J. H.
: Macdonald, R. St. J. 16. Burns») Aves: ΒΑ.
Semaine: Fis, > Bike: Views Eiders (RBA:
Parris, N. D. 18, McEachern, I. W. T.
wd μα
wwii
oe
Sa oe Salts ok ες
oe
nh. τ τὸ
42
CLINICAL SURGERY—HONOURS.
McLaughlin, ἘΣ M. 8. Burns, A. S.
Nelson, W. E. Forbes, R. D.
(Parris, NeW: 10. Magee, Ὁ. F.
Turner Goblin eA 11. Freeze, E. H.
Thomas, 5. B. Macdonald, R. St. J-, B uA:
Patch, ΒΞ, ἜΣΑΝ Townsley, R. H.
Rehfuss, W. N., B.A.
OPHTHALMOLOGY AND OTOLOGY—HONOURS.
RarrisseNee Ds: 6. Nelson, W. E.
Patch, FEF. S., B.A. 7 Taggart, H. A.
Churchsee, (Σὲ 8. Maby, W. J.
Montgomery, C. H. 9. McEwen, J. R., B.A.
Donnelly, W. H.
SPECIAL PATHOLOGY—HONOURS.
1<Gbal=g, ata ἘΞ ἊΣ 9; McCulloch, J. M.
Strong, N. W., B.A. Patch, ἘΠ᾿ §., B.A.
Elder, R., B.A. atite O’Neill, J. M.
lambs Wi: V5 12. Parris) ΚΝ 7 ἣν;
Morris; “S.:G: ils Truax, W.
McLaren, D. D. 14. Allan, R.
Ebbett, Ἐς L. B. ἘΠῚ ΞΕ RS ΕΠ MS aAS
McEwen, J. R,. B.A.
GYNAECOLOGY—HONOURS
Turner.) Gaels oissA:. 9. Elder, R., B.A.
Nelson, W. E. 16. Anderson, C. W., B.A.
Parris; Ni =D: Freeze, E. H.
English, J. M. 12: Townsley, R. H.
Patch, (hess BAe 79. Mortin, ον ΠΡ ἘΣ ἜΑ,
ΕΟ» 1" ὋΣ: 14 Slack, M. R.
Kins Ἐς: BA. lise ἘΠῚ ἘΣ ΕΠ BeAs
Wiarrent ὦ, τ’
°
OBSTIEETRICS—HONOURS.
Bishops C- 6. Munro, J. H.
Campbell, W. G. ae McCulloch, J. M.
Chiunchssebes Cc: 8. Patch, ES, B:A.
Cumming, W. G., B.A. Peterson, G. R.
Nelson, W. E.
= ats Maccoll
τ
Le ee le eae
t
oA
PASS LTS.
FINAL SUBJECTS.
The following gentlemen, 100 in number, have fulfilled all the
requirements to entitie them to the degree of M.D., C.M.,.from the
University. In addition to the primary subjects they have passed a
satisfactory examination, both written and oral, in the following
subjects:—Principles and Practice of Surgery, Theory and Practice
ef Medicine, Obstetrics and Diseases of Women and Children, Phar-
macology and Therapeutics, Medical Jurisprudence, Practical and
General Pathology, Bacteriology ands Hygiene; and also clinical
examinations in Medicine, Surgery, Obstetrics, Gynecology
Ophthalmology conducted at the bedside in the hospital:—
and
PANT αν PEM stan su te ine bas
PATER: ACG VV ise «νὰν:
Anderson, (Cj °Ws, ἜΑΣΙ. τος
Andrews;: J. J..°..
Bishop, G. A..
BISHOP yy lity Cece
.- Montreal.
.. Renfrew.
Seb alihaxeseNeas:
.. st. Lambert,
Que.
.- Kinburn, Ont.
.. Marbleton, Que.
ἘΣ ΘΙ τον Ate Hee, Soe ὑπ .. Chicoutimi, Que.
BOULLE Rie piles 5 eS Ary. .. Picton, Ont.
lsxenice Wl ΟἿΝ ἐν πο γος -- Russell, Ont.
ἜΘ, tas Misi. περι: . .- Belleville, Ont.
BROOKS jae ce ΕΑ se ..EHastport, Maine.
IBUnITS ἈΠ S.ulssAee .. Boston, Mass.
Campbell, W. G.. .. Brantford, Ont.
Chamterlain, H. B.. .. ..Montreal, Que.
Chandler, EH. C.. .-Montreal, Que.
Chapline7 ola).
Ghurch ἘΠΡ Cs.
Cowperthwaite, H. H...
Crote eVes BoA
Cumming, W.
Dickson, A. Je, °BiAY.
Donnelly, W. H..
Douglass Hs C:.
ΤΟ ΘΕ ΕΡ.-
ἘΣΘ ΕΙΣ Ἐν 95.
Elder, R., B.A..
THiS ἘΠ ἘΠΕ BAN Se
αἷς Ἐξ ae
--St. John’s, Newfoundland.
.. Chelsea, Que.
.-St. John’s, Newfoundland.
.. Middleville,
Ont.
.. Montreal, Que.
.. Goderich, Ont.
..Ogdensburgh, N.Y.
.. Montreal,
Que.
.. Natick, Mass.
..Gagetown, N.B.
.. Trout River,
Ota,
Que.
Ont.
:
’
44 ,
English, J. M.. ..New Westminster, B.C.
Ferguson, W. H.. - Steebhomas, Ont
Morbes; eRe, Die a . Stratford, Ont.
Hortins ΟΕ Ἢν, BeAa. .. Winnipeg, Man.
Freeze, ἘΣ. H.. .. Penobsquish, N.B.
ἘΠΡΟΞ ΑΘ © x. .. Montreal, Que.
Gale, Wi Pas. - Quebec, Que.
ΘΙ τ ὦ aR: scot Ὁ .. Brockville, Ont.
ἘΠ ΞΘ ΤΙΝ ΜΊΑ Ἐπ oaks Portland, Maine.
Hardisty, R. ἘΠῚ M., B.A.. .. Montreal, Que.
Horsfall, EH. L., B.A... .. Montreal, Que.
ELYMES; SWE. Lye 2. Darnley, ‘PB...
i<enny, Ἐν: Wi... .. Ottawa, Ont.
Kaine, Re eAwr .. Sackville, N.B.
ἘΞ ΞΘ 6. Hie eA Wad) Moe ames ocyoouind πο ύοσθν; ΝΕ:
Lamb, W. V.. wees: .St. Andrews, N.B.
Laurie, Ernest, B.A.. ..Montreal, Que.
Lundie, J. Az, BAG. s .. Montreal, Que.
yiman,,Wreas.,, eh: .. Knoxville, Tenn., U.S.A.
ΤΠ ΘΟ Ane late ΡΣ Tate .. Ottawa, Ont.
Macdonald, R. St. J., B.A.. . Bailey’s Brook, N.S.
Mackenzie, W. A..
MacKinnon, I. W.
McCulloch, J. M..
McDiarmid, C. A..
MeDonald, Ps A., “BVA...
McDonald, S. H., B.A..
McEachern, I. W. T...
McEwen, J. Ἐπ B.A..
McGrath, F. C..
McGuigan, J. D..
McKechnie, Ὁ. W..
McIntosh, H. H..
McIntosh, J. A...
McLaren, D. D..
MGIgatis hii ssHs Vibra rae
McPherson, Thos., B.A.. ..
Maby, W. J..
Magee, C. F..
Meindl, A. G.: .. Sie
Mitchell, I. E., B.A..
Montgomery, C. H..
Morris, S.2C.. a
Munroe, H. B., B.A..
Munroe, H. E..
* Durham,
*“*Kemptville, Ont.
* Dundee Centre, Que.
Site Johns ΝΕ:
** Rockland, Ont.
“Dewittvills,
>> Norway, P.E.I.
--Kelly’s Cross, P.H.1.
- Dundas, Ont.
-- Montreal,
-- Vankleek Hill, Ont.
-- Russell,
-- Winona, Minn.
-- Stratford, Ont.
-- Cohoes, N.Y.
-- North Gower,
-Mattawa, Ont.
-- Sherbrooke, Que.
-- St.
-- Wallace, N.S.
-- Almonte, Ont.
.. St. Elmo, Ont.
-- Wood Islands, P.E.I.
“harlottetown, P.E.I.
Ont.
Que.
Que.
Ont.
Ont.
John, N.B.
ail
πο, da Els τὸς.
Murray, J. S..
Nelson, J. S..
Nelson, W. E..
Θ᾿ ΕΘΝ ἜΡ ΑΙ".
ONeill, ἀν ΜΕ
Parris. ΝΕ 19)...
Fateh) Ἐπ S., BLA:
Pavey, ἮΙΣ En.
Peterson, G. R..
Puddington, B. A..
Rehfuss, W. N., B.A...
Saunders, W. E..
Scott, W.. ae
Secordsy we. tel.
Shaw, D. Le B..
Siaicksa Me EG...
Steeves, E. O..
Stowell, F. E..
Strong, N. W., B.A..
Taggart, E. A..
Thomas, S. B..
Townsley R. H..
ΠΟ WW a at eet os, pare
ΠΥ (Gs ἘΠ ἜΣΑΝ,
Wehaidi, Ab ΟΣ eee fe
White, S. G..
Wilson, A..
45
.. Maxville, Ont.
Sot John, Ns.
pi@ttawa,. Ont
.. Montreal, Que.
Montreal, Que.
Eoavialssenany Ne Ye
.. Highlands, Barbadoes, W.I.
Montreal, Que.
.- London, Ont.
: hoy S soil ΘΗ:
-~st. John, N.B.
.. Bridgewater, N.S.
.. Woodstock, N.B.
.. Montreal, Que.
.- Brantford, Ont.
τις Portland, Me.
..Marnham, Que.
.. Upper Sackville, N.B.
.. Worcester, Mass.
..Cambria, Que.
.. Ottawa, Ont.
.. Barbadoes, B.W.I.
.. Montreal, Que.
..Farnham, Que.
..Baie Verte, N.B.
.. Montreal, Que.
..Ottawa, Ont.
.. Russell, Ont.
COUR HS COM ΕΘ. r=
bo μ᾿
ΕΠ ΤΕ NACE AS
PIZE LIST.
THIRD YEAR PRIZEMAN,
J. L. ROBINSON, of St. Marys, Ont.
SUTHERLAND MEDALLIST,
J. GRAHAM WILLMORE, of Montreal, Que.
McGILL MEDICAL SOCIE_Y
W. G. CAMPBELL,
SENIOR PRIZES:
D. W. McKECHNIB, First Prize.
Second Prize.
HONOURS IN AGGREGATE OF ALL SUBJECTS.
Robinson, J. L.
Nutter, J. A. B.A.
Hyshens. Ὁ ἘΣ
Willmore, J. G.
Chanman, By).
6.
8.
9
Atkinson, H. S.
Yorston, Ἐπ’ P., M.A.
Sellery, A. C.
Chipman, W. W.
HONOURS IN CLINICAL CHEMISTRY.
Miller, V. L., B.A.
Sellery, A. C.
Wood, W. H.
Douglas, H., B.A.
Fisher, E. M.
Greenwood, W. T.
McLachlan, D. C.
Yorston, FE. P., M.A.
Stewart, J. A.
Lincoln, W. A.
Robinson, J. L.
Arnold, D. R,, B.A.
Black, ΟΣ
Lauchliand, L. C.; B.A.
McLeod, W. A.
INielles ti Tam tas:
Richardson, C. A.
Rogers, J. T., B.A.
Wood, H. G.
20.
Ainley, W. E.
Charman, F. D.
Folkins, C. G.
Fraser, Κ΄.
Graham, R. W.
Hogan, BY J.
Keys, M. J.
MacKid, L. S.
Nutter, J. A., B.A.
Styles, W. A. L.
“Winfrey, “Wi: G.; Bila:
Wright, Ὁ. A.
Chipman, W. W.
Coffin; -J.. We:
Fy shet ΟΣ 2 Aub:
Hotchkiss, E. A.
lippiatt, “A. Σ
MckKenty, F.
Richardson; Ὁ vA. Co. 3B 5
Wihite;, P2'G:
ls
τι
11.
13.
SOEA CON (Ste Clo) nti ΠΣ ΤΩ Nah
SE DSC OSA Sr Be
HONOURS IN
Chipman, W. W.
Willmore, J. G.
ΠΡ ΓΕ Ji: Av, BB At
Robinson, J. L.
McIntosh, L. de C.
NOrStOn. By tes; MAS
Lincoln, W. A.
hippiatt, ie ἘΣ
McKenty, F.
Stewart, J. A.
HONOURS IN GENERAL
IB yiShie die ©=, ache
αν, τ τ A, ΒΊΑ:
Robinson, J. L.
Willmore, J. G.
Charman, ἘΝ,
Faulkner, J.
Cofhin.s J. We
‘VOrSEON; Hie VAs
Crowell, ΒΘ BoA:
19.
Α.
HONOURS
ΠΡ" eee. ΕΞ ΑῚ
Atkinson, H. S.
Coffin, J. W.
Robinson, J. L.
Sellery, A. C.
Stewart, J. A.
CharmanwE- Db:
Crowell) Sb. ΟΥ̓ ΤΑΙ
Gibson, G. M..
Gillis, J. E.
*Fraser, S.
Hyshe, ἢ» C3) ΑΞ ἘΣ
Alford, J. H.
Dillon, W. P.
Hotchkiss, E. A.
Rankin, ΑἸ Cz
Ainley, W. E., B.A.
Chipman, WwW. W.
Keys, M. J.
mippiatt. Hy ow.
McIntosh, L. de C.
40
HYGIEN}Y.
11: MilleriWie Ls MBA.
12. Chisholm, H. A.
13. Dt Mons Wie
14. Cook, Wz: ἢ:
McLachlan, D. C.
16. Charman, F. D.
Rankin, A. C.
18. Howitt, H. O.
19. Markson, S. M.
10.
11.
12.
13.
PATHOLOGY.
Fern poe ἘΠῚ
Grant, N. P.
Chipman, W. W.
Alfords 1 ΕΠ
ἹΜΈΓΕ J:
Meakins, J. C.
Murphy, H. H., B.A.
Howitt, H. O.
Sellery, A. C.
IN OBSTETRICS.
28.
37.
44.
45.
ἜΠΕΙΤ» ἐν Ae. PES A
Fisher, E. M.
Gibson, R.
Harrisons ΠΤ Ἐς Db AS
Johnson, J. G. W., M.A.
White, P. G.
Grant seNee:
Price, Jos.
WOrStony ἘΠῚ ἘΠῚ VL AS
Cook, W. J.
Greenwood, W. T.
ena ΚΕΙ͂ ele
Nutter, J. A., B.A.
Preston, C. E.
ROerS, J, πὸ, ΘΕ ΑΞ
Wilson, O. M.
Douglas, Ey, B.A.
Bonin, bts ἘΣ
Howitt, H. O.
Richardson, [Οὐ As ©. BA.
Smith, W. A., B.A.
20.
Ss
11.
por
13.
14.
48
HONOURS IN OBSTETRICS.
McKenty, F. 49.
weLachlan, D. C.
Mantine © Ji, C.
Gilroyee Jeb:
Losier, A. J.
Warwick, W.
ΤΌΤ, ἢ leh
Gormely, J. C.
Willmore, J..G.
Wood, W. H.
Wright, G. A.
HONOURS IN CLINICAL SURGERY.
Willmore, J. G. 24.
McKenty, ΕΣ
Sorston, Heb. ΝΑ
Dillon, Wie es
Eaton, C. E.
Faulkner, J. A., B.A.
Mord, (2s:
ἘΣΘ Wem C. mess:
Losier, A. J.
Wilson, T. R., B.A.
Charman, FEF. D.
Crowell} Ἐ tG.,ei55A5
Douglas, E., B.A.
Fraser, S.
PALS ON ἘΠ 15. Ἂς.
Keys, M. J.
Lincoln, W.. A.
MackKid, L. S.
Miller, V. L., B.A.
Nutter; J. As,’ BUA’
Reford; ib.) Gi, BA.
Robinson, J. .L
Wright, G. A.
Crack) ἘΠΒΡΑΝ
ID bpal aby cl J lake
Gibson, R.
Gillis; J. E.
Gormely, J. C.
Lippiatt ἘΠῚ I:
Martin, J. C.
Meakins, J. C.
Miller, C.
IM Gobe laniy eal} ἘΞ ΑΣ
Rogers, J. T., B.A.
Stewart, J. A.
Wood, H. G.
Wood, W. H.
HONOURS IN CLINICAL MEDICINE.
Robinson, J. L. kay
Atkinson, H. S&S.
White, P. G. NCE
Yorston, Ἐς iP); MisA.
Ainley: Tu. T., SBcA;
Nutter, J. A., B.A.
Reford, L. L., B.A.
Wood, H. G. 22.
Charman, EF. D. 23.
Coffin, J. W. 24,
Rankin, A: C:
Rogers, J. T., B.A.
Sellery, A. C.
Chipman, W. W.
Grant, N. P.
Richardson, C. A.
Gibson, G. M.
Gillis, J. E.
Graham, R. W.
Harrison,, 2G ls ΕΣ Ac
Meakins 1 JecG@:
Howitt, H. O.
Stewart, J. A.
Cook, W. J.
@rack,. gh ΕΣ ἊΣ
Fraser, S.
McKenty, F.
Preston, C. E.
Boke,
oO
a
bo
49
HONOURS IN BACTERIOLOGY.
ΤΊ.
Eyshe, J. C., A.B.
Lippiatt, H. T. 13.
ΠΝ ΡΈΘΙΣ Ἢ. AL, ἘΞΑ:
Alford, J. H.
Sellery, A. C. 16.
Robinson, J. L. 17.
Coffin, J. W.
McIntosh, L. de C. 19.
Atkinson, H. S.
Miller, Vi Πρ, B.A:
Dillon, W. P.
Igyorexeyess ΠΤ eyes
Faulkner, J. A., B.A.
McKenty, F.
Worston, hb vex.
Wood W. H.
Lincoln, W. A.
Stewart, J. A.
arr Sons la laser. AS
Reford, L. L., B.A.
HONOURS IN PHARMACOLOGY.
Robinson, J. L. 10.
Eyshe, J. C., A.B.
Atkinson, H. S. 12.
Nutter, J. A., B.A. 13.
Miller, V. L., B.A. 14.
Charman, F. D. 15.
Ernandez, J. A.
Lincoln, W. A. 17.
McKenty, F. 18.
HONOURS IN MEDICAL
INUtter, Wi. ἈΠ 824A: 10.
Atkinson, H. 38.
Willmore, J. G.
WYSE ede Cs ΠΑΣ ΕΣ:
Rankin, A. Ὁ.
Chipman, W. W.
Gillis, J. ἘΣ
ΤΠ Piaete ΚΕ ἘΠῚ
Robinson, J. Τὰ.
McKenzie, R. P.
White, P. G.
Chipman, W. W.
Richardson, C. A.
Cook, W. J.
Fraser, S.
Grant, N. P.
Rankin, A. C.
Stewart, J. A.
JURISPRUDENCE
Charman, F. D.
Coffin, J. W.
Haulknery J. “Ac. BAA.
Gibson, G. M.
Harriscay, Tas: BA.
Markson, S. M.
Millers Vi Li, BoA:
Murphy, ἘΠῚ ἘΠ B.A.
RoZerss dee ley ΒΑ:
Sellery, A. C.
ο0
THIRD YEAR PASS LIST
All Subjects.
The following students, 106 in number, have passed in all the sub-
jects of the Third Year, viz.:—Pathology, Pharmacology and Thera-
peutics, Hygiene and Bacteriology, Medical Jurisprudence, Medicine,
Surge. y, Clinical Chemistry and Obstetrics.
Ainley, L. T., B.A.
Ainley, ὟΝ. E., B.A.
Alfonds) Jk cet:
Allum, A. W.
Atkinson; ἯΙ:
Bailey, G. W.
Bentley, J. S., B.A.
Black, Jkece:
Blair, A. K.
Blakeman, F. W.
Bonin, ΠΕΣ ῈΣ
Boyd, Ο.
Boulter, J H., B.A.
Briggs, J. A.
Brooks, J. E., B.A.
Carnochan, W. L.
Chamberlain, H. B.
Chandler; Az C:
ὉΠ Οὐ συ ἘΠῚ δ sy,
Charman, —-. D.
Chipman, W. W.
Church) ἘΠῚ ΟΣ
Coffins: Jim VWs
Cook, W.. Jd:
Craciwl the ΕΣ
Cram, W:.1 Je
Crowell, B. C., B.A.
Cumming, W. G.
Davidson, ΕΙΣ -D.- J.
Dickson, W. H.
Dylon. ον ἘΣ
Douglas, E., B.A.
Maton (" ΤΈΣ.
Faulkner, J. A., B.A.
Fisher, E. M.
Folkins,-C. G.
Bord, ἘΠ ΩΣ:
Fraser, 5.
Kerr, H. H.
Keys, M. J.
Lauchland, L. C., B.A.
Lincoln, W. A.
Ποῦ ἘΠῚ ΜΠ
Losier, A. J.
Macdonald) iResSt Je 5: ἈΦ
Mackenzie, A. B.
MacKenzie, W. A.
McDiarmid, C. A.
McDonald, S. H.
McHachern, I. W. 'T.
McGuigan, J. D.
McIntosh, L. de C.
Mckeuty, Ἐπ᾿
MeKenzies ἜΣ ΕΣ
McLachlan, D. Ὁ.
Martini pG.
Meakins, J. C.
Miller, C.
Miller, V. L., B.A.
Munro, J. H.
Murphy ἘΕΠῚ ΕΠ ἜΑΣΙ
Murray, 9.) 5.
Nagle, S. M.
Nelson, ‘J. 5:
Ness, W.
INTEC ΠΑ ΤΕ ἊΝ
Parke Ay, iW.
Preston; ΟἹ ΠΣ
Ouain Boe:
Rankin, A. C.
ἘΣ ΘΕΟΣ ΟΣ ἘΠῚ Le ΣᾺΣ
Richardson, C. A.
RichardsouleCa A mG. ΕΑΝ
Robinson, J. L.
ἘΣΤΙ. Ἂν
51
Fyshe, J C., A.B. Rogers, J. T., B.A.
Gibson, G. M. Scott, Walter.
Gibson, R. Sellery, A. C.
Gillis, J. E. Smith, C. M.
Gilmour, C. R. Stewart, J. A.
Galroy,. Je. Ἐν: Steeves, E. O.
Gormeley, J. C. Stowell, F. E.
Gow, R. J. Warren, J. G.
Grant. N., 2 Warwick, W.
Greenwood, W. Ὁ. White, P. G.
Harrison, 1. Ἔν, B.A: Willmore, J. G.
Howitt, H. O. Wilson, A.
Hutchinson, J. W. Wood, H. G.
Johnson, J. G. W., M.A. Wood, W. H.
Judson, A; H: Wiriehts Ὁ ἈΞ
Kenny, R. W. Yorston, F. P., M.A.
In addition to those whose names appear on the above list, as
having passed in all the subjects of the Third Year, the following
have passed in:—
PHARMACOLOGY,
AT NOL: ΣΝ ἘΠῚ 65 ΤΑ s ELOkam. ahead. Sat ν Ase aAe
DUNN, owe. Hotchkiss, E. A. Wigle, ὦ. A.
| Ernandez, J. A. Markson, S. M. Walson 5 eR. ars A
: Gillis, J; E. Price, Jos. Winfrey, W. C., B.L.
PATHOLOGY.
ἢ Arnolds) Rene bsAs Hotchkiss, ἘΣ. A. Sims ἘΠ AS
G Crosby, P. C. Inksetter, F. S. Smith, W. A., B.A.
° Dunn, J. F. MacKid, L. 5. Wigle, C. A.
ὲ Gillis, ἢ. Π: Markson, 5. M. Wilson, O. M.
Graham, R. W. Price, Jos. Wilson, T. R., B.A.
| is Koy=¢:) oe eee Rilance. C.D;
HYGIENE.
Chisholm, H. A. McLeod, W. A. Smithy wi. 2AG, | BUAG
ὉΙΠΟΞΌΝ ἘΣ Markson, 5. M. Wigle, C. A.
Graham, R. W. Rilance, C. D. Wilson, O. M.
‘4 Hogan, F. J. Sims,- ἘΠ ἈΝ Wilson, T. R.. B.A
Ἐς
Hotchkiss, ἘΣ. A.
52
MEDICAL JURISPRUDENCE.
Arnoldi ἘΠῚ bes
Dunn, Ji.) ΤΕΣ
Ernandez, J. A.
Gir ἘΝ Di:
Hogan, HJ.
Hotchkiss, E. A.
‘Inksetter, ἘΠ SE
Arnold, 19. Ἐς ἜΑ.
Crosby. ἘΦ ΟΣ:
απ σοῦ: ἘΠ
Ernandez, J. A.
Giaham, R. W.
Arnold, D.*R., B:A.
Crosby, ἘΠ Ὁ:
Dinnssd., ΕΣ
Ernandez, J. A.
Granam, Ἐν. W.
Hogan, F. J.
Arnold), Rs, ἘΠ ἊΣ
Chisholm; Ἢ- ἊΣ
Dunn eda.
EHrnandez, J. A.
Gill, FE. D. B:
Gourley, H. B., B.A.
Graham, R. W.
lelayedsiavy rita din
Hotchkiss, E. A.
APnolds Os Rebel.
ΟΥΡΟΘΌΝ ἘΝ sce
Dunn, J. F.
Ernandez, J. A.
Graham, R. W.
Hogan, F. J.
Hotchkiss, E. A.
McDonaid, J. C.
MacKid, lL. S.
McLeod, W. A.
Markson, 5. M.
Price, Jcs:
Rilanee, C. D.
Sims, H. A.
Smith, W..A:, B: ἊΝ
Waterman, C.
Wigle, ©. A.
Wilson, O. M.
Wilson, I Ry BsA°
Winder, J. A., B.A.
CLINICAL MEDICINE.
Hotchkiss, E. A.
MacKid, L. 5.
Price, Jos.
Rilance, C. D.
NWantrey, Wao iC: .e bls
Sims, H. A.
Shillington, R. N. W.
Wilsoa, O. M.
Winfrey, W. C., B.L.
CLINICAL SURGERY.
MackKid, L. S.
McLeod, W. A.
Markson, S. M.
Price, Jos.
Rilanee;, 6.9:
Shillington, R. N. W.
Smith, W. A., B.A.
Wigle, C. A.
Wilson, Ὁ. M.
Wilson, D2 Re, BvAS
Winder, J. B., B.A.
ἈΠΟ ΝΣ Ὁ, Sela
CLINICAL CHEMISTRY.
McDonald, J. C.
Mackid) Τ,. S:
McLeod, W. A.
Markson, S. M.
Nelles, T. R. B.
Prices wos:
Rilance, C. D.
Simiss ἜΤ Ἃ-.
Smith, W. A., B.A.
OBSTETRICS.
Inksetter, F. S.
MackKid, L. S.
McLeod, W. A.
Markson, S. M.
Price, Jos.
Rilance, C. D.
Sim ΞΕ AL
Sweeney, J. L., B.A.
Styles, W. A. L.
Waterman, C.
Wigle, C. A.
Wilson, O. M.
Wilsons Git OR ἜΑ:
Winder, J. B., B.A.
ἌΝ ΠΈΓΕν, ἦν. Ὁ ΤΕΣ
Smith,aw. ΤᾺ ἢ ἘΔ.
Wigle, C. A.
Wilson, O. M.
Wilsons, Ta ἘΣ B.A:
Winder: J. 3B: BYAS
Winfrey, W. C., B.L.
WU πεν ἘΠ
Ernandez, J. A.
Graham, R. W.
Foran, heeds
Hotchkiss, E. A.
ἈΠΟ Tas is:
59
BACTERIOLOGY.
McLeod, W. A.
Markson, S. M.
Price, Jos.
Rilance, C. Ὁ.
Sims; EE A.
ΤΕ, Ἀν ἈΠ ἜΑ,
Sweeney, J. L., B.A.
Styles, W. A. i.
Wilson, O. M.
Wilsons SR. eB lA.
Winder: ΒΒ. ἘΞΑ.
Winfrey, W. C., B.L.
κα ὧν op ow μα
mo bw κα
2 oF
SEC OND ὙΞἘὼ τ τς.
PRIZES AND HONOURS.
SECOND YEAR PRIZEMAN,
H. C. MERSEREAU, Doaktown, N.B.
SENIOR ANATOMY PRIZE,
. H. C. MERSEREAU, Doaktown, N.B.
McGILL MEDICAL SOCIETY JUNIOR PRIZES:
Die. Θ᾿ ΠΕΣ ΕΑΝ, JhirstSerize;
L. DE C. McINTOsH, Second Prize.
HONOURS IN AGGREGATE OF ALL SUBJECTS.
Mersereau, H. C. 8. Nelles;, “RR? ΤΕΣ
MacDermot, J. H. 9: Henderson, E. H., B.A.
MeCS' AM) 78.» Ἐ. ἊΣ 10. Burgess, H. C.
Scrimger, F. A. C., B.A. ible Soady,.J. ἘΠ BA:
Leslie, H. A. 2 Likely, D. S., B.A.
Moffatt; Co ἘΣ ἜΑ: HS: Robertson, B. W.
Dykes, J. W.
PHYSIOLOGY—HONOURS.
Leslie, H. A.
τὶ
Mersereau, H. C.
MEGS aii) shies ΤΑΣ 8. Burgess, H. C.
MacDermot, J. H. 9. Cumming, A., B.A.
Moffatt, C. F., B.A. Dykes, J. W.
Nelles, T. R. B. Hanington, J. W. B.
Serimeery ΗΝ ΑἸ BAS
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY—HONOURS.
MacDermot, J. H. 14. McMeekin, R. J., M.D.
ὙΠΟ), CG. Ἂς Robertson, A. R.
Leslie, H. A. 16. Moffatt, Ἐς F., B.A.
, Munro, J. A. 17. Dowler, W. H.
Sullivan, J. A. Keddy, O. B.
Tees ἘΠ J.,/ B.A. 19! Burgess H. C.
Dougan, B. H. 20. Serimger, H, A. ©.) B.A.
Lindsay, HE. A. Die Waterman, C.
Mason; J. H. 22. Ralph, A‘ J:, Ph-B:
Wilkinson, W. M. Qo. Mersereau, H. C.
ΩΝ
ΨΥῚ
11.
SOT aca tae
12.
dD
PRACTICAL HEMISTRY—HONOURS.
Cumming, A., B.A.
Henderson, ἘΣ. H., B.A.
Weldon, RR: C2, Jr:
28,
Dykes, J. W.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Miller, A. P.
Pruyn, W. G., B.A.
Mulligan, J. W.
HISTOLOGY—HONOURS,
Tees, I. J:; B.A.
MacDermot, J. H.
Cumming, A., B.A.
Brown, G. T.
Alguire, A. R.
Leslie, H. A.
McMeekin, R. J., M.D.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Mersereau, H. C.
Moffatt, C. F., B.A.
Scrimger, F. A..C., B.A.
McLean, J. D.
Tas Ὁ ΚΑ:. ΟἿΣ
14.
Brown, F. EF.
Dougan, B. H.
Dykes, J. W.
EHanington, DD: ἜΣ:
Henderson, E. H., B.A.
Nelles, T. R. B.
Robertson, B. W.
Sullivan, J. A.
Turnbull, EH. G.
likely! Ss BaAS
Miller, A. P.
Moni wh Wines
Muckleston, H. S., M.A.
Petersky, 5.
Robertson, A. R.
Ryan. Hh. sMcbDaeBrA.
Soadi den be ΒΊΑΣ
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY—HONOURS.
Likely, D. S., B.A.
Pruyn, W. G., B.A.
Mersereau, H. Ὁ.
Moffatt, C. F., B.A.
MacDermot, J. H.
Shaw, R. M.
Viner, N., B.A.
Dykes, J. W.
Paterson, W. J., B.A.
Mees ἘΝῚ ΤΠ ΈἜΞΑ..
Leslie, H. A.
SOdGi ΝΣ ἘΠΡ ἜΑ,
Hanington, J. W. B.
McNaughton, W. B.
Wil ers dice di.) SAL
Brown, G. T.
Cumming, A., B.A.
ive)
oo
McMurtry, S. O., B.A.
Dudderidge, C. R., B.A.
Wood, G. O.
Minican,, Jie Hy
Henderson, E. H., B.A.
Robertson, B. W.
Sullivan, J. A.
Scott, W. J., B.A.
Tierney, J. E.
Weldon, R. C.
Chandler, H. B.
Mabee, O. R., Ph.B.
Muckleston, H. 5., M.A
Tal hele dey ees:
Sinclair, E. C.
Valin, R. E.
ΠΟΘ © eA
10:
τ oa Ole ἩΣ ον ἘΣ ἐπὶ
μ᾿
o 9 7%
μι
bo
oon
σι
σι a
56
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY—HONOURS.
Scrimeger, FE. A: C., BoA: 40.
Loggie, W. 5.
Burgess; Ἡ. Ὁ. 42,
Mercere.
Πα Ἀτ| 6;
Hume, G. M.
Miller, A. P.
McDonald, J. A., B.A.
ἜΣΘ ἘΠ VIC DS ἜΣ ἊΣ.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY—HONOURS.
MacDermot, J. H. 13,
Leslie, H. A. 14.
Scrimger, F. A. C, B.A. ibe
Likely, D. S., B.A.
McDonald, J. A., B.A. ue
IPG YN νν: τ eA 18.
Mersereau, H. C. ig),
Dudderidge, C. R., B.A. 20.
Robertson, B. W.
Sullivan, J. A. 22:
Turnbull, E. G.
Tees, F. J., B.A.
Soady, J. Et; B.A.
McNaughton, W. B.
Henderson, ἘΣ. H., B.A.
Valin, R. E.
Muckleston, H. S., M.A.
Dykes, J. W.
Mofiatt ΟΣ ἮΠ ἜΣ Α-
ἘΠΕ ΘΠ, Jk ὧν: ub:
McMurtry, S. O., B.A.
Mercer, T. C.
Ryan, Ε΄. McD.
ANATOMY—HONOURS.
Mersereau, H. C.
MacDermot, J. H. th
Burgess H. C. 8.
McMeekin, R. J., M.D. 9:
Scrimeger, ἘΠ ΓΑ ΝΟ {B:A. 10.
ZIM ἈΣ Ὁ:
Henderson, E. H., B.A.
Dykes, J. W.
Mees> sh Jt sca
Muckleston, H. S8., M.A.
PHARMACOLOGY—HONOURS.
Moffiatt; Cs H:, BoA} 16.
Dykes, J. W. alee
Soady, J. H., B.A.
Nelles, T. R. B.
Robertson, B. W.
Mees) ἘΠῚ Je, iseA miles
Alguire, A. R.
Henderson, E. H., B.A.
Leslie, H. A.
Mersereau, H. C.
Tull ee Ay Ce 26.
Mercer, T. (C.
Viner, N.
Young, C. A.
Richards, E. T. F.
McMeekin, R. J., M.D.
Burgess, H. C.
Likely, D. 5.
Mackay, M. E.
Serimeer; ΒΒ. ΑΙ Ὁ ΒΑΣΙ
Dudderidge, C. R., B.A.
Hume, G. M.
MacDermot, J. H.
Margolese, O.
Ryan, F. McD.
Covernton, C. F.
Hanington D. P.
Mason, J. H.
Scott; W.4.J.
SECOND YEAR PASS LIST.
All Subjects.
The following gentlemen, 82 in number, have completed their Se-
cond Year Examinations, which comprise the following subjects:--
Anatomy, Practical Anatomy, Chemistry, Practical Chemistry, Phy-
siology, Practical Physiology, Histology and Materia Medica.
PGK ἘΞ sl
Alguire, A. R.
Brown, ἘΠ᾿ F.
Burgess, H. C.
Carnochan, W. L. C.
Chisholm, ΕΙΣ Ae BA;
Connor υ ἘΠ Τὼ;
Costello, J. W. W. B.A.
Crosbyinees 7c:
Cumining, A., B.A.
Davidson, H. D.
Dougan, ἘΞ Ee
Dowier, W. H.
Dudderidge, C. R., B.A.
Dykes, W.
Ferguson, W. H.
Miniean, Ji. Ee:
ἘΠΟΤ ΘΝ ΤῊΝ ΤΕ IS AY,
Gibson, G. M.
Gibson, R.
Gilroy, J. R.
Graham, R. W.
Grimmer, R. D.
Hanimgton, D. ἘΣ
Harrison, L. L., B.A.
Heagerty, J. J.
Henderson, Ἐπ. H:, B.A.
Efoganhe Hand.
Horstall, “fy Πρ, 5. A-
Hume, G. M.
Hynes, W. T.
Judson, A. H.
Leslie, H. A.
παν, Ὁ. Ξ S24
Lundie, J. A.
MacDermot, J. H.
McNaughton, W. B.
Markson, S. M.
Margoilese, O.
Mason, J. H.
Mercer ela. ©.
Mersereau, H. C.
Miller, A. P.
Mohr, F. W. C.
Moftatt. Cr hy. ΕΑΝ
Muckleston, H. S., M.A.
Mulligan, J. W.
Munro, J. A.
Nagle, 5. M.
Nelles, T. R. B.
Prendergast, A. R., B.A.
Pricen J5.03
Ἔν τ Wis Gres, ose
Richards, H. T. F.
Richardson, C. A. C., B.A.
Robertson, A. R.
Robertson, B. W.
Ryan, EF. McD., B.A.
Scott, WWind=,),beA°
Serimeer, BY As (5. ἘΞΑ
Sima spel ΤΑῚ
Sinclair, E. E.
Soady, J. H., B.A.
Styles, W. A. L.
Sullivan, J. A.
ΠΡ ΕΝ ΕΣ ΠΡ ἘΜᾺ:
Tierney, J. ἘΣ.
ΠΣ ete MOr
Turnbull, E. G.
ἈΞ ΤΙ “Ἐν, JH:
Viner, N., B.A.
Warwick, W.
McDonald, J. A., B.A.
McIntosh, G. J.
McMeekin,
McMurtry, S.
Wilson, O. M.
Re es VERDE
Oe Bans
McMurtry, W. C.
58
Wilson, T. R., B.A.
Winder, J. B., B.A.
Winfrey, We: Θὲ, Bib.
Wood, H. G.
POU Ss) Clas
In addition to those whose names appear on the above list, as
having passed in all the subjects of the Second Year, the following
have passed in:—
Bonelli, J. V., B.A.
Brown, G. T.
Cameron, A, B.
Covernton, C. F.
Duggan, R. G.
Gaudet, E. A., B. A.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Henry, ©. G., ,B.A.
Covernton, C. F.
Ewart, D.
Folkins, C. G.
Hanington, J. W. B.
lalepabad Dee yi lores
Auld, J. W.
IBonelised ΒΌΑΣ
Brown, G. T.
Covernton, C. F.
Duggan, R. G.
Gaudet, E. A., B.A.
Gill; BY ΘῈ
Manineston, wou...
AUIS SAW).
Brown, G. T.
Cameron, A. B.
Ewart, D.
Fairie, J..A.
PHARMACY.
Hewitt, T. J.
Kine San.
King, S. S.
Loggie, W. S.
MacDonald, J. P.
MacKay M. E.
Machean; 0. (Dia) τς
MeMicking, A. E. T.
PHARMACOLOGY.
King, S. 8.
Loggie, W. 5.
Mackay, M. H.
McMicking, A. BH. T.
Rilanee; C.D:
HISTCLOGY.
Henry, E. G., B.A.
Joughins, J. L.
SIMS ts ay
King, 8S. S.
Loggie, W. S.
MacDcuald, J. P.
MacKay, Μ. ἘΣ
MacLean, J. Ὁ.
ANATOMY.
King 5, 5.
ἸΟΟΘΡΊ Θ᾽ Wir.
MacDonald, J. P.
MacLean, J. D.
Petersky, S.
Ratterya. Οὐ Ἐν:
Rommel, ἘΣ.
Sawyer, A. R.
Somerville, H. A.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Wood, G. O.
Wotherspoon, Η. C.
Rommel, E.
Sawyer, A. R.
Somerville, H. A.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Wood, G. O.
McLeod W. A.
McMicking, A. E. T.
Petersky, S.
Rommel, E.
Sawyer, A. R.
Somerville, H. A.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Wood, G. O.
McDonald, J. C.
McMicking, A. E. T.
Petersky, S.
Wood, G. O.
PATI). 1 ὖν-
Brown, G. T.
Covernton, C. F.
59
PHYSIOLOGY.
Leggie W. 9.
MacDonald, J. P.
MacKay, M. ἘΣ
MackKid, L. 5.
MacLean, J. D.
McDonald, J. C.
McLeod, W. A.
Petersky, S.
Rommel, E.
Sawyer, A. R.
Somerville, H. A.
_ Sweeney, J. L., B.A.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Wood, G. O.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Ewart, D.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Henry, E. G., B.A.
Hewitt, T. J.
King, S. S.
Ewart, D.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Henry, E. G., B.A.
Loggie, W. S.
MacKay, M. E.
MacLean, J. D.
Paterson, W. J., B.A.
Petersky, S.
Ralph, A. J., Ph.B.
Rommel, E.
Somerville, H. A.
Waterman, C.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Wood, G. O.
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
Auld, J. W.
Brown, G. F.
Ewart, D.
Folkins, C. G.
Garcelon, W. S., B.A.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Hewitt: “Ld.
Keddy, O. B.
Lindsay, H. A.
' ORGANIC
Ss sSonelli, cds ν, B.A:
Brown, G. T.
Budyk, J. S.
Cameron, A. B.
Chandler, A. B.
Hatton, J. LE:
Duggan, R. G.
Ewart, D.
Fairie, J. A.
Gaudet, Ἐπ. A., B.A.
Greene, H. B.
Hanington, J. W. B.
Henry, .E G., B.A.
Hewitt, T. J.
MacDonald, J. P
MacKay, M. ἘΣ
MacLean, J. D.
McDonald, J. C.
McLeod, W. A.
McMicking, A. E. T.
Raftery, C. R.
Ralph ΧΑ. 1 phyB:
Rommel, E.
ship; Ax ἘΣ
Smith, W. A.
Somerville, H. A.
Waterman, C.
Weldon, R. C.
Wigle, C. A.
Wilkinson, W. M.
CHEMISTRY.
Keddy, O. B. Ralph, A? J. hss.
TAINS de ΠΣ Ritchie, C. A.
King, S. 5. Rothwell, O. E.
Lindsay, A. E.
Loggie, W. S.
MacDonald, J. P
MacKay, M. E.
MacLean, J. D.
McDonald, J. C.
McLeod, W. A.
McMicking, A. Ἐπ T.
Mabee, O. R., Ph.B.
Paterson, W. J., B.A.
Fetersky, 5.
Rommel, E.
Shaw R. M.
Somerville, H. A.
Sweeney, J. L., B.A.
Walker, J. J., B.A.
Waterman, C.
Wilkinson, W. M.
Weldon, C. R.
Wood, G. O.
Wotherspoon, H. C.
PAR wt κὶ
bo
τὸ σύ Es
6
10.
12.
14,
10.
EVR he NG EAC ES:
PRIZES AND HONOURS.
FIRST YEAR PRIZEMAN,
Cc. S. Wiuutams, of Tyne Valley, P.E.I.
JUNIOR ANATOMY PRIZE,
P. A. MacDONALD, Alma., N.B.
HONOURS IN AGGREGATE OF ALL SUBJECTS.
Williams, C. S. 8. Hillman, O. 5.
Donnelly, J. H. 9; Mair, W. L.
Crowe, H.S.; B.A. 10. Sheahan,;: J. J.
MacDonald, P. A. της Sims, Hi. ZL.
Hunter, A. W. 12. PNM, ἘΠῚ ΟΣ ἸΒ:
nraser: UIDs ΜΕΝ ΩΣ Flegg, R. F.
McArthur, R. L. 14. Turnbull, J. W.
PRACTICAL CHEMI
STRY—HONOURS.
Fraser, R.-D. 20. Sheahan ἡ J. J
Patterson, W. J., B.A. pale Malcolm, IDCs
Crowe, H.S., B.A. 22. Turnbull, J. W.
Michaud, N. aoe Dearborn, H. F.
Williams, C. S. Flege, R. F.
Groves, O. M. Mair, W. L.
Donnelly, J. H. 26. Kinloch, C. A.
Elliott, M. H. Wilson, A. A.
McNaughton, G. K. 28. Clarkes HG;
VANete El Crass: Henderson, S.
McLeod, J. M. 30. McNaughton, A.
MacDonald, P. A ἘΠ
MeMillan, J. A. 32. Hollbrook, R. E.
Hillman, O. 5: Kelly, A. E.
ἘΠῚ ΘΠ Vj. Wolff, ἘΣ. K.
Greene, T. B., B.A.
Hunter, A. W.
Payne, Ga An Lk:
White, J. H.
bo Dok
w ht Re
10.
11.
uh
61
BACTERIOLOGY—HONOURS.
MacArthur, R. S. 6.
Budyk; J. S. ΤΩ
Lomer, T. A.
MacDonald, P. A. 8:
Williams, C. 5.
Hillman, Ὁ. 5.
Sims, H. L.
Thomson, G. D.
Crowe, H. 8S. B.A.
Lindsay, HE. A.
BIOLOGY—HONOURS.
MacDonald, P. A. iG
Crowe, H.S., B.A.
Williams, C. 5.
Clarke, F. C.
Hillman, Ὁ §S.
McMeekin, J. R., M.D.
2 9
Lindsay, E. A.
Turnbull, J. W.
MacArthur, R. S.
Sheahan, J. J.
Sim ΕΝ ἘΠῚ ΤΠ
PHYSTOLOGY—HONOURS.
MacArthur, R. S. 11:
Donnelly, J. H.
Sims, ἘΠ᾿ ὙΠ 13.
Williams, C. S.
Weeldon, R. C.; In 15.
Fraser, D. R.
MacDonald, P. A.
McDiarmid, J. 5.
Clarke, F. Θὲ
momer;, TA.
Crowe, H. S., B.A.
Shaw, Ἐς. Mc.L.,B.A.
Christie, H. H.
Greene, T. B., B.A.
ΤΑ τ ἘΠ ΟΣ ἘΣ
ΕΟ ΠΟ ΤΕΥ ἘΣ
Hunter, A. W.
En n ter, alas ὟΣ
Walker, J. J., B.A.
HISTOLOGY—HONOURS.
Alien wr Ὧν ἘΣ
MacDonald, P. A. 20.
MeMillan, J. A.
Ray Wem Gaels elas
Lomer, T. A. 23.
McArthur, C. O.
Gurds ἘΠ 3B.
Enliman. Of. 5: 26.
Weldon, R. C., Jr.
Sims, H. S.
Hunter, A. W.
Kerfoot, H. W.
Lindsay, E. A., B.A.
Patterson, W. J., B.A.
Thomson, G. D.
Williams, C. 5.
Greene, T. B., B.A.
Munro, A. R.
Peat, 1G. B:
Clarke, “HC:
Hammond, J. F.
Mair, W. L.
MacArthur, R. S.
Malcolm, D. C.
Shaw, R. MclL., B.A.
Baird, W. 8S.
Budyk, J. S.
Hollbrook, R. E.
Johnson, B. F.
Kinloch, C. A.
Mabee, O. R., Ph.B.
Rothwell, O. E., B.A.
Sheahan, J. J.
Wilson, A. A.
fet de
12.
bo
14.
1:
PON [ὶ
-"
PRACTICAL
MacDonald, P. A.
Williams, C. 5.
Allen, Je. Θ᾽ ἼΒ.
Bairdww. 5:
Mair, W. L.
Lomer, T. A.
Sheahan, J. J.
Donnelly, J. H.
Shaw, R. MclL., B.A.
Rothwell, ΟἹ ἘΠ B.A.
Wilson, A. A.
Clarke, hs *C.
62
ANATOMY-—HONOURS.
16.
19.
21,
Gourley, Ha Be, Pbhe/Be
Hunter, A. W.
Keddy, O. B., B.A.
Christie, H. H.
lahbuayiere,, Abs We
MacArthur, R. S.
Gillies, G. E.
Hollbrook, R. E.
lindsay, ἘΣ CAS ἘΞΑ:
Malcolm, Ὁ. C. :
Ralpb, A. J., Ph. B. .
PHYSICS—HONOURS.
Hunter, A. W.
Crowe: HS. BZ Ac
Donnelly, J. H.
Tilley, A, R.
Weldon, R. C., Jr:
Williams, C. 5.
Sheahans. 4: di
Greene, T. B., B.A.
Sims, H. L.
Turnbull, J. W.
Walker, ὦ. 1. 5A.
lbraser, Ds ππὺ;
Hillman, O. S.
Christie, H. H.
MacArthur, R. 5.
Wilson, A. A.
Flegeg, Ἐν. F.
Kelly, A. ἘΣ
Munroe, F. D.
Kerfoot, H. W.
Wolff, E. K.
Thomson, G. D.
Holden, C. P.
Kinloch, C. A.
Payne, G. A. L,
Howlett, G. P.
MacDonald, P. A.
Mair, W. L.
McNaughton,
Gillies, G. E.
Ryan, ΕΣ J.
McPhee, J. T.
White, J. H.
Clarke SHC
Hunter, T. V.
Monahan, R. J.
Johnson, B. F.
Cope Ese
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY—HONOURS.
Donnelly, J. H.
Eraser, D: R.
Flegg, R. F.
Shaw, R. MclL., B.A.
Crowe, H. S., B.A.
Williams, C. §.
Christie; ἘΠ:
Hunter, A. W.
Mair, W. L.
Weldon, R: C.;:5r.
Walker, J. J.; B.A.
Patterson, W. J., B.A.
13.
14.
15.
ΠΟ ἌΡ Εὺ:
Keddy, O. B., B.A.
Munroe, F. D.
Turnbull, J. W.
Mabee, O. R., Ph.B.
Gillies, G. E.
Allen ἘΠ Cass:
Hield=.B. Re
Hillman, O. 8.
Sheahan, J, J.
MacDonald, P. A.
63
FIRST YEAR FASS LIST.
All Subjects.
The following students, 87 in number, have passed the examina-
tion in all the subjects of the First Year, viz.:—Anatomy, Chemistry
and Physics, Physiology,
and Bacteriology.
PAC erie ἘΠῚ Ge ibs:
Auld, J. W.
Bayley, A. H.
Bonelli, V.
Budyk, J. 8S.
Chandler, A. B.
Clarke, F. C.
Cole, W. H.
Crowe, Η. S.. B.A.
Dearborn, H. F.
Donnelly, J. H.
Duggan, R. G.
IMEI 1839 1568
Flegg, R. F.
Fraser, D. R.
na Sei. ames
ΕΠ 9; (Cy 19:
Gaudet, E. A., B.A.
Gillies, α. E.
Gourley, EB: Ph-B:
Green, T. B., B.A.
Grimmer, R. D.
Groves, Osler M.
ΘΟ ἘΠῚ ΜΕ:
Gunn, A. K.
Hammond, J. F.
Hewitt, T. J.
Hillman, O. 5.
Hollbrook, R. E.
Eoldens (Cs ἘΣ
Howlett, G. P.
Hunter, A. W.
ἘΠ. τ ον Whee svi
Huycke, A. H.
Johnson, B. ἘΝ,
Joughins, J. L.
Keddy, O. B.
Kerfoot, H. W.
Histology,
Biology, Practical Chemistry
LGD Sh USE
Kinloch, 6. A.
Lindsay, ΕΣ A.
Lomer, T. A.
MacArthur, R. L.
MacDonald, P. A.
McArthur, C. Ὁ:
McCormick, A. 5.
McDiarmid, J. ἘΝ
McDougall, W. L.
McIntosh, G. J.
McLeod, J. M.
MeMillan, J. A.
McNaughton, G. K.
McPhee, J. T.
Mackid, L. S.
Mabee, O. R., Ph.B.
Mair, W. L.
Malcolm, D. C.
Michaud, N.
Monahan, R. J.
Wii VV" las ΕἜΥΑῚ
Munroe, A. R.
Munroe, ἘΠ, Ὁ.
‘Parsons; Wi. EL.
Patterson, W. J.
Payne, G. A. L.
Peat, G. B.
Reaiteny., (Ck:
Ralph, A. J., Ph.B.
Rilance, C. D.
Robertson, A. R.
Bothwell, O. F., B.A.
Sawyer, A. R.
COL Weds, ssA:
Scott, W. H.
Shaw, R. McL.
64+
Sheahan, J. J. Turnbull, J. W.
Sims, ἘΠῚ L. Walker: Jz, J:,) BA:
Somerville, H. A. Wallace, C. T.
Thomson, G. D. Weldon, R. C.
Tierney, J. E. White, J. H.
παν a Ave. Williams, C. S.
FIRST YEAR.
In addition to those whose games appear on the above list, as
having passed in all subjects of the First Year, the following have
passed in:—
HISTOLOGY.
Baird, W. 5. Gray, HE. H. Ritchie; -C. A. ΤΕ As
Burke, G. H. Henderson, E. Shipley, C E.
Clarke, ἘΠῚ C. Kelly, A. E. να. Bs
Connor, EH. L. von TGs ID: Wilson, A. A.
Elliot, M. H. IMG 11: IDB ἘΠῚ Ape, Wolff, E. K.
ANATOMY.
Baird, W. S. Henderson, E. McDonald, J. N.
Burke, G. H. Hils, H. O. Muir, D. H., dr.
Christie, H. H. Kelly, A. E. Ritchie, C. A., B.A.
Garcelon, W. 5. B. A. Kelsea, W. ΕΠ Wilson, A. A.
Green, H. B. Ty Ones Gate): Wolff, E. K.
Gross;iG. 0. MacNaughton, A.
PHYSIOLOGY.
Baird, W. 8S. Gray, E. H. McDonald, J. N.
Burke, G. H. Henderson, E. Ritchie, C: A., B.A.
Cameron, A. B. Kelly, ἃ. ἘΣ Wilson, A. A.
Ghristie; H.-H. lyon, ἘΠ ΕΣ 9: Wolff, ἯΙ K.
Elliot, M. H.
PHYSICS:
Baird, ‘WW. S. Henderson, E. Morrison, J. C.
Burke, G. H. Hils, H. 0. Muir, D. H., Jr.
Cameron, A. B. Kelly, A. E. Ritchie, C. A., B.A.
Christie, H. H. Kelsea, W. H. Ryan, E. J.
Connor, E. Τὰ. Tahey ΠΤ Shipley, C. E.
Elliot, M. H. Lyon, G. R. D. Smith, A. B.
Gabie, W. G. MacNaughton, A. Wilson, A. A.
Gray, EH. McDonald, J. N. Wolff, E. K.
Gross; C.J:
65
PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY.
Bards Wess Henderson, ἘΣ. Ritchie, C. A., B.A.
Burke, G. H. Kelly, A. EH. ἘΣΘ; Ἢ dls
Christie. H. H. Lahey, J. J. Shipley, C. E.
Elliot, M. H. τοῖν (ἘΣ ΤΣ Smith, A. B.
Gray, ἘΠ ἘΠ MacNaughton, A. Wilson, A. A.
GrossaiC.7 J; McDonald, J. N. Wolff, D. K.
INORGANIC CHEMISTRY.
Burke, G. H. Gray, Ἐπ ΕἸΣ McDonald, J. Ν.
Christie, H. H. Henderson, E. Wilson, A. A.
Elliot, M. H. Kelly, A. E.
BOTANY.
Baird, W. S. Pils He @: Ritchie, C. A., B.A.
Bonness, E. J. Kelly, A. E. Rodrigues, ἘΠῚ T.
Burke, G. H. Kelsea, W. H. Ryan, E. J.
Christie; ΕΠ. ἘΠ Lyon, G. R. D. Shioley, C. E.
Elliot, M. H. MacNaughton, A. Smith, “A: 5:
Gabie, W. G. McDonald, J. N. Wilson, A. A.
Gray, E. H. McMeekin, R.J.. M.D. Wolff, E. K.
Gross, C. J. Muir, Ὁ. H., Jr. Wright, R. P.
Henderson, E.
ZOOLOGY.
Baird; ὧν Ἐς Gray, ἘΠῚ H. McDonald, N. J.
Bonness, E. J. Gross, C. J. McGarvey, O.
Burke, G. H. Henderson, E. McMeekin, R. J., M.D
Christie, H. H. nas, ἘΠῚ Ὁ: Ritchie; Οὐ Ανςΐ Α
Connor, E. L. Kelly, A. E. Ryan, E. J.
Elliot, M. H. Lyon, G. R. D. Wilson, A. A.
Gabie, W. G. ΜΠ Ὁ. ἘΠ᾽ ὅτ. ἈΝΤ ΡΣ ἘΣ ΕΣ
Gill, ES 10: MacNaughton, A.
BACTERIOLOGY.
Bonness, E. J. Gti-0Ssy) (Ὁ a. Ryan, E. J.
Christie, H. H. Hils, H. O. Smith, A. B.
Elliot. M. H. lyon, Οἱ Re Db: Wallace, C. T.
Garcelon, W.S., B.A. Muir; Ὁ. Bes τ: Wolff, E. K.
Gray, E. H. Ritchie, C. A., B.A.
Ἕ
τα
Ν
avy
""
a
Sali’
Whe
ay
pep
PINGS ΠΣ,
IL—MATRICULATION PAPERS.
SEPTEMBER, 1902.
; PAGE
Matriculation Examinations.
YMA EGE) Ore 1 E22 Ws dV SES en Yi ey eS oa Mee a 1
τ Δ i ete t triste Cost rent oe Rie ese ais hen PLO
ATICMIME YI Chaat a ielaricree cee ΚΕΝ lel sia lrariiors 8
FS OUA MYM set Paste OHTA ssh ear shel ΡΟ Ὁ:
CHEMIIStnVer eee coe Area Ee See aoe sha τῶν aS
English Composition. . 5
τᾷ Dictation .. AR oh He a Neve: Man na tae ate he 18
a (ΓΑ ΤΠ TR sty eee Mare RSLs ee aNd teal catia Nite: ἐς Ἐπὶ 8 ee 4
nN History.. 5
ν᾿ Literature. . SMe Aad ira oy he ὁ ονοῦ Ἂς be] vagetate ἢ 5
ERT OT CI sitar yahoo es ae Sec ee Moselle πρώ altorciwve es rs, LO
GeEOMELE VA AT Gols oye naan eNotes ἢ ἘΦ 19
(ΓΘ τος eects απ eens ὦ δι sare leew. tal
ΘΟΕ ΑΒΗ ΟΥ̓ warnils tiles abe. wyehr ase ptetheo ed fove)) Li
[ἢ Grammar and Composition <=. 2. τ τος 14
ran Slanlomya uote ti. «as dae S50 ected γὴν γῆς 14
EVGA ULM OS Wacwiet tabs te sces tied ade ΣΤ eo. aL
ἜΣ (ΠΕ Τ Ors Re Ri ea ke a RA Sn Ly
(MT ELOSCA COMPOSE Oss νον λέχος, Sods do. ἡ
SP OCAM SALON Ac OTe ek re teavelltch! Barolo: Reta) Seno
ἜΣ ΞΘ eMac ΣΝ πον A aketr te ha eid the Ope
BDYSiOfTaDhivestns cect etd wot oc ook ste a Ihe selenite mane
i FONOMetiYer a ehh ks ΡΠ ie Lee sro ODO
II—EXHIBITION AND SCHOLARSHIP
PAPERS, ,
FACULTY OF ARTS.
SEPTEMBER, 1902.
Exhibitions—First Year.
PE Trae ey tin erence: Riu Ail WAN ogra ed eee δός LS woeet | ΕΞ
: ΠΣ Se Pen Na ten, Ἂν ἄτερ ΠΡ Wore eG Satay SE)
ΠΡ ΞΡ Compositlonwwiterar...ei. woe ele Nola sish) νὸς τὴν A48
il : INDEX.
| μ PAGE
English Grammar. DN cnet ΡΣ eae ate
neue Titers, (Mtnentitey’ Stop degeth ot ΝΣ πο β τυ μον ἀπ 07
a Ὁ ΘΗ) Tas eh re od
τὸ ων (Morley) ΤΣ προ λυ τάδ σῶν, ΤΩ
EEN CONG visi ee ἀν συ ἢ ΣΡ ee ek We ee ues
Geometry, Part I .
_German. . eel fevetviehe MalaMiorcs Cromer weptetsy dosh ted eittee OO
* Greek Renae pen ee rae sdok dead τὴν (cea Teh Reta sida ον 590
Comp. and ene at Sight (alternative) 42
Grammar, Comp., Higher Comp. and Sight
Translation ya ty. τ Oe Reed ee cee a eee)
_Dranslationeateslhituest.crvu tw saa ine ere 1
Tae Authors. .
“
“ce
bo
~o
Grammar. . tee 3 32
i rose Campocinen ae : 32
“Translation at Sight.. 91
5 τ: Ἢ (alternative) 34
+ Ἢ “and Comp. (additional) 33
5
ΠῚ ΡΟ ΠΟΙ στ nee oe
fw
Exhibitions—Second Year..
AT ZO DIAM. a πόνος Son RSE RCI Hees ee CEG
κι ΟΠ ΘΟ οἷν Hquations) +s acs τ eos
ἘΣ ΡΊ ΒΡ ΡΟ. «Drench i. 2. eens ae τὺ
i Literature and Composition...«.., ..'.. .. 69
HT CMC plete Waren cet rhE nae besoin See δ angel eee pane ἢ
GeOMeLTy οὐ <inhe fon. ecclyoray aia? sepals aus OE ee OD aD
Germanic A eee ewok cee τη γεν ee ea ene eee Tall
Greek ΚΑ ΠΟΘ εν τ τε eee ea Ν
τανε ΤΩ ΟΞ ΙΟ ΤΣ τ τ τον ΡΝ ἢ
ΕΘΗ ee ἢ ens εν εν eG)
eave StOLVE Aa eee eee eee a Hee, Ale Pee NU
Translation at sient CAEN τε ΑΕ ate: erat ἘΣ ee ΜΠ)
Historya(Churchy jc seyret sik te ΤΥ ἢ
2: FROM A og o)0 BM ence ae a ee aga eae 3
Matin’ Authorstse. ces Στ Wp eee ee eh δ᾽ OL
oat COMP: and Cone MAT ας as remem OS
Translation at Sight. Wilitshe aetebene tical eee
ROMAN ELIStOMY eevee cesta Δ Σ ee teas eos Pee GS
Theory ol Hquationse. i mace ness cd ΡΥ ΤΉ ὉΠ Π|6Ὁ
TTiISONOMEtHY Aas SA hy ee ee ee Eo ee eG
“ce
INDEX.
Scholarships—Third Year.
Algebra, Higher... .. .. etd Nop ie Mehep eas ee Od
Ὧν (Theory of τς ΓΙ έν, LIF ey eras) COL
CAT ΟΞ ee eee li πο τ ae τινος Oe ay OO
@hemistryhers- eemee Med es Be CO Ot
Constitution and Core of Bngland:. PL Bae Sea ας ἡ 00
Dns Cerne an igh conoe Lowde bet Gow ob
τ Ἐπ ρα δ ΒΤ προ] προ ete wee Ὁ
oy = (Nit) tae ae eee pac eters, 899
oe by (Shakespeare)iecen ads ue cn ee
πο ρους λυ ΜΔ, ia ae Re A adits)
(Cerone, Anes. saab orocebor Gouoo sep) lace belies ake)
German Ἐπ ee ee oe ee NRO απ lt soe vot ED
Greeks Ate ΠΟΘ rin as ere mie ἐν cet eitralenbroreel bee oi 298
Cat COMPOSICLOM sm basal se ccs eee ister τας τ Ὁ 87
SEG AIStOGY wa eases Le St NE ee OIL
Translation: at Sight: Whey AN ΡΜ ΥΩ
Eieh en vA ec hracn aense set. uk ΤΣ cca Sih
ἘΠΙΒΡΟΥ ΘΒ cen wea Woe g sent esis Pouce Motel em) ole Oe
τς Greakyataca tags Oe τ ekg re tO tate. anim! Oil
ERO TIME ayy ado ae oo hal a os cease Ac oe
TED tITPANTEM OLS! carder tert ee coe ora boise Geta tora Mavens Serato OS
<n COMPOsitione.er . cio Ie Goh Oleg vat once ὰ ἂς 90
Translation at Sight. . Spon Pere Se AO εν 9.0)
ILC ea ores Meacbee SO = RAS hie A Oe ΑΡΙΣ 82
Political eeenoniy RO τὰ eeget MERGE, tN Settee Pd 99, 100
Political Science, Migments Arad Speke hoe ae Weta Δ,
ΠΟΤ ΘΙ LIS COT Vers Sethe sae oP han woe More. instyld hives un ayer ois 2
Theory of Equations. . PNAS ty Cee eS A OY oe Re 81
ΠῚ ΡΟΝ ΤΟΥ τῷ ἀπ νον ἀ cet ea ara men eee oe eget ΘΟ
“
IlI—EXHIBITION AND PRIZE EXAMINA-
TIONS
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
SEPTEMBER, 1902.
Exhibition and Prize Examinations.
WESCriIpEIVenGeOME ἡ wae crak Wee Mercy scenes, Tere oubeve ΤΩ
Bnslish Summers Readinesein . weysy ee tela lem. 100
MANEATIS ΞΘ ΟΠ Mie ΤΥ Mata mwutcse bere pees ant Oo
Ἔ ΠΤ cand Hounthierears seh. u . Ya. ἸὉΡ
RHNCOL RO ORC HUMES wks teen octet civines Melty in ae ener LOS
lv INDEX
Δ
IV.—SESSIONAL EXAMINATION PAPERS,
ΑΘ ΘΕ" ARTS:
APRIL, 1908.
PAGE
Algebra.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Anglo-Saxon.—See English Horours.
Arithmetic.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Ari History and Archaeology.
Art History and Classical Archaeology... .. .. 231
Hiology.
Continuation sBiolosy, Wes. τ thet beret eee eeebo Looe
Elementary “Plant.Biology-.: 2s. ¥k* 2. e-ee Jee 590
a Animal) Bi0looyee was er a cel |e 9.29
ες Animal Biology (Supplemental) .. 332
Botany.
Botan y.e ΗΓ Ὑ Caries on. πεν tte Uetoi ieee ΠΕ 554
HMOULEHSMCAl\. 4 cake a δ eee ie ee Σὰ OSD,
(Plant BRyaioloey): Hourthe Vear.. 99} 595
(Systematic);, Fourth. Year). .-- .: TOO
Calculus.—See Mathematics and Natural Phiosopliy?
Chemistry.
Chemistry-“Second AViear. eh ck a teens ete ely. 5.90
Organic Chemistry, Third Year ΤῊΝ πον MO Os ee
Classical Literature and History.
ComparativesPhilolofyte-.e oo ee: oF τ - πὴ
Greek Authors, First Ton. RA ders soem aoe HIS)
= ‘ Second went Ἐν oss CHUL,
Second Year (Aas Section).. .. 129
cs τῷ Third and Fourth Years .. .: .. 159
. Compositions Shinst )viear. ππΠοΠο4ὁερῷ πε πὸ
τς ti Second Vea: ἜΘΟΣ Oe Seema
ἐν es Third and Fourth vous bs a LEAS
ve History, HirstwYears. τς: area hay hel LEE
τὰ = and Liter ee a Shoond. Mehr Nodes ΠΩΣ
“ec “sc
Third. and HMourth: Wears. See seed
+ <i. aie
2 ae
» : INDEX. τ
& PAGE
Greek Translation at Sight, I irst Year.. ΤΉ 10
ς τ ie ΞΟΘΟΠῸ Θέ τιν. 1931
“a ἐν oa es Third and Fourth
δ᾽: ς Years.. 126
§ Latin Authors, First Year 151
Second Year 157
a ἐς Third Year ae 162
ΓΝ ps Third and Fourth Venice i 165
Prose and Unseen, First Year. 5D
es ey Second Year i, ASL
i i rs τ Third and Proust Years 166
Roman History, First Year.. Ἔα ε Sin ΝΣ ae ae al!)
; τᾷ and Quintilian, Seccnd Year.... 161
; Third and Fourth Years.. 167
Classical Hovours
Greek. Pindar. . i at te BaP 134
: ἐξ Plato, Forman’s Selections ἘΣ 98
* Private Readings (Sophocles, etc.).. 131
a ¥ ᾿ (Prose).. ee 145
» ὧ ao (Aristophanes, etc.). 149
; He Prose Composition 144
᾿ . Third and Fourth Years 140
: ἔχ Translation at Sight.. 142
> Latin, Cicero’s Verrine Oratons .. 176
: - Plautus and Terence.. 179
Private Readings. . spear 185
Ε i Private Readings, Plautus, etc 188
Ἢ s Ἂς Virgil, etc.. 170
| ᾿" Prose Composition .. 174
Special Payper.. ἜΣ 168
Translation at Sight.. ΝΣ
Virgil, Lucan. ; 3 182
᾿ Comparative Philology. cs ‘Glassi@ Bi ἜΝ
3 Dynamics.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Υ Economics and Political Science.
Economic History of England, Third and Fourth
ἶ Years .. 229, 230
: Political Economy.. Bape
, Political Science .. 228
ἱ Re τ frien cits). 2295
a
vi INDEX.
PAGE
English Language and Literature.
Blizabethan Drama, Third Year .. .. .. .. .. .. 200
English Composition, Second Year .. .. .. .. .. 196
τ (Affiliated Coll.), Sec. Year 198
TPIT Vier Shite sec eee oD
Mourtheavican- ns. seen OS
Language and Composition, First Year.. 194
literatures, HirSstwvecanws: . ie t oo Cem eL OS
SeCCONG: (Nica; eesti ee ee
(Affiliated Golleses Second
VCATIS Oo cee eee LORE MLO S
Third gviear Ss 2k, eae ae, ee OS
Third and fourth Wears ares. «200
(History of Fiction), Fourth Year .. .. 202
iteratures, Hourthe Vea. eet Σ 907)
History ὉΠ ΟΠ Mount eyeaine.) πὰ sees
English Honours.
Anglo-Saxon, ΤΠ ΠΤ ΘΕ. 2 “2 os ssrape DUS Pa0gpaeta:
Brownines/ Hourthwveanry.. 2. seat ΠΡ
ΘΙ ΘΟ ΠΤ δ: aration yeccemtet cians cme ium oie ae 0
Histornywor iteratuinesa a: Δ τ 8. πὰ aed τι
History of Shaksperean7Griticism. ποὺ en oe ΙΝ
Middle English. . ee Mere Ay Reser Geiser) ΠΣ
Modern Prose .. .. . Ἐς Wt ae cts OA a
Prose Writers before nya ‘Third Year....206, 208
Spenser andpMilton: ον e205
Experimental Physics.—See Mathematics and Natural Philo-
sophy.
French.—See Modern Languages.
French Honours.—See Modern Language Honours.
Geology.
Geology.’ Thirdtand Mourth Yearsso. ees to 5345
Geolcgyvy Hononrs.
Determinative Mineralogy, Third Year.. .. .. .. 344
Geology and Mineralogy, Third Year.. .. . .. o49
Geometry.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosooh®:
German.—See Modern Languages.
German Honours.—See Modern Language Honours.
Greek.— ‘See Classical Literature and History.
Greek History.—See Classical Literature and History.
INDEX
Greek Honours.—See Classical Honours.
Hebrew.—See Semitic Languages.
History.
English Constitutional History, Third and Fourth
.α 219
ΕΠ 05
Years.
History, Firs st Year.
Third and Fourth “vente
History Honours.
Arnold, Parkman,
Manan, Fourth Year..
Bagehot, Bryce, Fourth Year. RU ety
Clarendon, Macaulay, Burke Rourth Year,
Gibbon, Stubbs, Langlois, Fourth Year..
Greek Authors, Third Year. ἐ
History Honours, Third ἘΠ ἘΝ Yeas
Feuugal History of the American Colonies ..
of the United States.
Tacitus, Third Year..
Polybius, Livy,
Latin.—See Classical Literature and History.
Latin Honours.—See Classical Honours.
Logic.—See Mental and Moral Philosophy.
Mathematics and Naturai Philosophy.
Algebra (Advanced Section), First Year
Analytic Geometry (Advanced Section), Second
Year.
bo
bo
bo bo bk bo ES bo bk kb bo
bo
bo po b&b bw bo
Vii
PAGE
. 218
bo bo
ak >
ol
WwW bo
em OO
. 300
..302, 303
Weicougnis and antics: “Third and ΘΗ Weare.
Calculus (Advanced Section), Second Year
Experimental Physics
Third Year..
(Sound, Heat and Light),
Experimental Physics (Electricity and Magnet-
ism), Third and Fourth Years .. :
Geometry and Arithmetic, First Year ..
Geometry (Advanced Section), First Year ..298, 2
Mechanics and
Years.
Hydrostatics, Third and Fourth
Physics, First vente ie
Plane and _ Spherical
Section). .
Solid Geometry,
ond Year..
Conic
Trigonometry (Advancd
Sections, Dynamics, S2c-
295
304
Vill
INDEX.
PAGE
Spherical Trigonometry and Algebra, Second
Year.. oe Gs oh wt ai Mi nid ἄς ME evs oS ΡΟΝ OSD,
Theory of Equations _ (Advanced ᾿ Section), First
Year. Ἢ: 900
‘Trigonometry Ana ΤΩΣ First Rete : 290
Mathematics and Natural Philosophy How
Astronomy, Third and Fourth Years 313
Calculus and Theory of Plane Curves .. ond
Differential Equations, Third and Fourth youre 313
Dynamics, Third Year 309
unarecheonyste st we. 316
Optics, hind Yearz 307
Quaternions.. 315
Statics, Third Moat 311
Surfaces, Fourth ΠΟ Ὶ 319
Mental and Moral Philosophy.
‘History of Modern Philosophy 274
Logic, Second Year. . Peay ice rato Reem ate PA)
Logic and Psychology (Advanced Section), S°c-
ond Year Bsn aaa aes
Mental Philosophy: Third satel moar venss: 273
Moral Philosophy, Third and Fourth Years .. 272
Psychology, Second Year.. 270
Mental and Moral Philosophy Honours..
Epistemology (General).. 279
(Historical).. 278
Greek Philosophy, Third Year.. ; jell 282
Locke, Berkeley, Hume, Third Year 280, 281
Philosophy of Kant, Fourth Year.. 282
Plato and Aristotle... ἐπε dts Nee ΩΨ ΠΗ,
Principles and Methods of E tics orotate Year. .
Grn 2) aye a ec Ce a Las 288. 285
Schopenhauer, Fourth Year.. 286
Spinoza’s Ethics, Fourth Year.. Beh ee tre eth:
Watson’s Outline of Philosophy, Fourth Year.... 287
Modern Languages.
French, First Year 955. 95
French, Second Year.. BL EBL
Third and Fourth Venrs®.
INDEX. ix
PAGE
German, Beginners .. 241, 243
ea First Year 245, 248
: Second Year. wits 250, 252
My Third and Pourth. wears Ἢ τον ΘΑ ΠΝ
ttakan. ἘΠ ΠΗΡ and Pournth Years: τον os. λιν τ 26). 533
Modern Language Honours.
ἘΠΕΊ ΟΕ ee ARAN Pr aaey ao, Sos he err eand™ Nope ste ve 240
oe ΠΕ ΘΡ ΕΠ Ὁ ΠΤ. το, 4) Mine “ee el:
German .. . Fe ee oe edt en oe ee eee ODS
# ἘΣ ἘΝ hse Se 259
Optics.—See Mathematics: and Nati pHildeophss “Edo
Physics.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Physiography. See Geology Honours.
Psychology.—See Mental and Moral Philosophy.
Roman History.—See Classical Literature and History.
Semitic Languages.
Hebrew, Second Year... .. .. Sew. Re ena) ae so08
es Third and nourth Wears. WATE Pee ei he aA er
hee wECNet Stewarts Ἐπί, tno su oo 4267, 268
Statics——See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy Honours.
Trigonometry.—See Mathematics and Natural Philosophy.
Zoology.
Advanced Zoology, Fourth Year..-.. .. .. ..341, 342
Zoology, Third and Fourth Years.. 340
Zoology Honours.
Spencer's: Principles of ,Biology.. ..'.. .. <. .. 342
V.—SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
APRIL, 1903.
Architecture. ς
Elements of Architecture, Second Year.. .. .. -- 349
History of Architecture, Second Year .. .. .. .. 349
Χ INDEX.
PAGE
Chemistry and Assaying.
Analy tie +Ghemistry, sUhirdsaviear. mare see eee Sa
ὰ “5 Hourthy Year apni. omens πὴ. δ
Assayiney hind: Wearis.£ rad |. setter eee ne eS OT
Chemistry; ‘Second! ‘Year. sas oa cen aan eee Ὁ}
EXlectro-Chemistry,>,Pourth Wear. 2.9 2) se a9
Gas Analysis:«Hourth’ Vearete ok τΠΠΡ eee OO)
Industrial, Chemistry. ΤΉ Vear!-8.. eee ἢ
Mineral Analysis, Hourth Years. πὸ 4. j28..8 ceuobs
Organic’Chemistry, “Thind Wears bee eee ea DS
Physical Chemistry, Hourth Years. oo) 5s bee BDO
Qualitative Analysis, Third Year.. .. .. .. .. .. 354
Civil Engineering and Applied Mcchanics.
Graphical Statics) Thind vNeanecn 2. eis | oases OF
Ely. draulicss, ΠΟ ΕΗ θα see tere. ci oo set, ocean oil ener ee
Hydraulics’ Machinery, HournthawWeanse προέοΨΠὋΕοὭΠῆ͵ς τ Ἐπ 917
ey Laboratory, Fourth Year ..:.. . 918
Municipal Engineering, Third and Fgura eis 366
Structural Engineering, Third and Fourth Years 367
Testing Laboratory, Third Year .. .. . 363
Theory of Structures, Third and ἘΠ τ Youre 369
ce “eae Hourth), Year..." 0 soot, 983
os Hrd ΘΒ as sms fae ΠΥ 959
Descriptive Geometry.
Descriptive Geometry, First "Year... 4. so...) 4..8. 580
ἐς ἐξ ΟΟΟΟΠΟΥΎ ΒΥ τ, Ὑπὸ se ΟΝ
Dhindweicate se see eee SS
Electrical Engineering.
Alternating Currents, Fourth Year.. .. . 5S OB
Alternating Current Machinery, fourth ae: 395
Continuous Current Machinery, Third Year .. .. 391
Blectric’ Lighting; Wourth pY¥ear 2) τ Π ΠΠ τ noon
Electrical Measurements, Third. Y-ar .... .. .. 392
Blectric: Traction. Fourth Years ssss2) spl) eee OOS
Biectro-Magnetism, ‘Third: Year 32 22.925) -5) το
Physical Laboratory, Second Year .......;.. .. 390
English.
English Composition First Year.. .. .. .. 2. 400
INDEX.
PAGE
Geology and Mineralogy.
Canadians Geology, Fourth, Year >. 2... .. --/-. 402
ἘΠΕ ΟΡ ΠΗ ΓΙ ΘΟ 45 amos nies! cats .sute.” dew oie 40
ΕΘ ΣΤΡ ΟΠ ΡΠ δῆ. 5 νὰ τ 8405
Physiography, Fourth esr) i en a a eas MIS Sain’ Se 0
Practical Geology and Ore Deposits. oe Year 405
Mathematics.
Mathematics, First Year .. .. .. ..406, 407, 409, 410
Second Caracas wee 2 9 144
ΠΝ ΔΉ, Ve ieeen pe- τι τς el rock ΕΠ Kin a bye
Mechanical Engineering.
ID SSizaathaven. INC yeueel See NOMS Nees A Ὁ Gk ede digo o oar 240
Dynamics of Machinery, Third Year .. .. .. .. 420
~ ΒΟ vicars ας, ποῦ 42
Kinematics of Machines, Second Year .. .. .. -- 419
fachinesDesionye bind Meats tas ose. 412.) see toe
ἘΠΕ ΘΉΓ ρὸν 425,540
Mechanical Drawing, Second Year Nee tee LAU),
zs . hind wearers ΜΆ ὦ tele ner ace
Mechanical Engineering, Fourth Year.. .. ..432, 433
τ laboratory Work ..°.. 435
Mhermodynamics ΠΗ δι. τ΄ Ὁ τ 7 424
τι ἘΝ weaiy seme. cies ee ieee jen od
Metallurgy.
Advanced Metallurgy, Fourth Year.. .. ..... .. 441
Electro-Metallurgy, Fourth Year.. .. .. .. .. .. 440
Gold=Silversand iLead; Hourth® Wear. =... ὦ. 441
Mineralogy.
Manes lovee hin dMMear snes tee ike 2 oo selel ἘΠῚ 413
Mining Engineering.
Milling and Ore Dressing, Fourth Year.. .. .. .. 446
ὙΠ ΠΝ ΘΕ eerie oS hoes cho el ciabe, χουν Ὁ. 141
τ ἘΠ ΙΗΥΘΕΙΤ ὙΠ Mok mer ioe dae cee rhe 44
Mining and Metallireical’ Machinery, Fourth
Year... fed Ree AA iy OS tn ait ee AAO
Ore Dressine: “Third veut Αναν πε Ύετας cults, sintiane! teak [Ὁ
ΧΙ}
INDEX.
Physics (Experimental).
Electricity and Magnetism Second Year
Physical Laboratory, Second Year
Sound, Light and Heat First Year..
Surveying Geodesy and Transportation.
Geodesy, Fourth Year 5
Practical Astronomy, Third hee
Railway Engineering, Third and που ἐπ Verner
. 456
. 458
Surveying, Second Year..
Transportation, Third Year
VEi--SESSIONAL EX, \AMINATIONS.
FACULTY OF LAW.
APRIL, 1903.
Civil Procedure, First Year
Cw Procedure, Second Year wh Sone ree
Ἷ and Evidence, Third Year
Commercial Law, Second and Third Years
+ Third Year..
Constitutional Law, First Year..
Constitutional Law and Obligations, Third Year
Criminal Law, Second and Third Years...
Gifts and Suecessions, Second and Third Years..
History of Law of Lower Canada, First Year..
History, Agency and Corporations, Third Year..
International Law, Third Year..
Law of Corporations, Second Year
Law of Obligations, First Year..
Law of Persons, First Year.
Marriage Covenants, etc.. Third Year :
Prescription, Lease—Municipal, Second yea.
Public International Law, Second Year..
Real Property Law, First Year
Ὁ τὰ Second Year
oe Third Year..
Roman Law, First Year..
Third Year..
PAGE
.. 454
. 390
. 453
. 460
. ADT
459
INDEX.
xiil
VIIL—MATRICULATION AND A.A. . EXAMINA-
TIONS.
JUNE, 1908.
AGE
Preliminary Subjects..
Arithmetic. . 494
English CHinmouttion:.< 491
7 Dictation. . 491
ἐς Grammar 492
7” History.. 493
Optional Subjects.
Algebra, Part I.. edie, Bits ax She ΠῚ ΠΑ oi 507
ss ῬΈΑ τ obs. ΔΙ τ σἢ τὸ at 508
Botany.. 519
Chemistry.. 518
Drawing .. 519
English ΝῊ ἐπ ρὲ 510
* Literature .. 511
French.. τι 503
Geometry, Part I.. 508
τ Parte Le 508
German. ; γι 505
Great Ἐν δες οἵ Ἐποιδε: dt pA ee oO Le
Greekiss or eae ἀν A, PRO nr, 40 IO
Greek and onan ΉΣΑΝ Se er Re pe ΤΌΤ
που ee Cae wer ae oe int cles. Qe th 49 GE 498
Physics. . Bia Vee 516
Physiography.. .. 515
Trigonometry Sas el 509
—>—
Vil =FI RST. YRARCE XH PBI EIONS:.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
JUNE, 1908. '
B. Exhibitions. !
Algebra.. Ae 534
MetiShit a fel ας 523
Mreneh... <: 529
Geometry... . 534
German... . 530
χὶν INDEX.
PAGE
Greeker ks ΤΑ creer αν ἀν τ, Mea Oe oe
DAUM yichage she's oo like CHEN Aad gh Sie SL on ae oe ΎΡΡΗ
TRYISONOMEtTY,.iyie cae) aes Sele GM ore eee eee ee OE
C. Exhibitions.
English History.. .. oan Oca)
Panes set Composites”
Literature... .
Bibl is} 6X0) ον 3. GE rele Lowi cl. Bs BAO
Germans’. 8/5 Hye havegite seaeged aetna betas ae ἔθ κῶν τι:
"ΕΠ ΠΑΝ ΠΡ are, Cee istaw ie Oe gh ede eae evel ΘΟ ἀπε em
IX.—MATRICULATION, SECOND YEAR EXHI-
BITION AND SCHOLARSHIP , FE XAMINA-
: TIONS:
SEPTEMBER, 1903.
Matriculation Examinations.
ATITNM CEC tee oop oe rae evs ον ον ae IO
AlvebrasPartalc oe asin con eae encis Ape eC erate
ΞΕ PATE ἢ ΠΑ δος ἀτον ΤΥ gee a Strats σι τ δίς ἢ
Botany..
Chemistry..
English Gontositione: Sig eg ioe eee ae
τῇ οι ΟΝ SE ὙΠ ΠΥ ἘΣ ΒΗ:
ἐς GramMMared Στὴν setco ee. ΣΤ ΘΕ
΄σι
“ +1 σὺ
Co CO re CO
Ov δι δι
δὶ ἘΠ
δι
μι
ie FRISTOLY: Soy clams rit. ΟΣ ΟΠ
vs iterates. 95 cts ἡ προ ke cea ana ae er αἴ:
BrenGhiik % OS es. ecko eee OD)
Goometny, Part I woh δ eh allege 5 Chaka, Wate eet eee amr TKO)
τ ΤΆ τὴν ΟΡ ΠΝ
German el cet. est tes oc ee ee ee ore oe δ oa Ol
Greek τες εν ee ΤΥ TD DUPED OS
Latins. a5 ia peg cies τ ΡΟ cue
δ ee Ee aut eet ole ΠΟ Ue eee ns meet ee
Phy SiO rap ayers. secretes oh tose onc te aes mest emt δὲ 37
Trigonometry .. 572
Second Year Exhibitions.
INE oie ROR tte ide doe ok: dG cc) Gato Be Sd eacet). sel
English ΕΟ ἢ Ἐν τ νι τῶν teeny OTT
INDEX.
English Literature and Composition, .
French... .
Geometry ..
German.. uae
Greek Authors. .
ἐς
ςς
Comp., Grammar Re paistory =:
Translation at Sight ..
History (Church)..
ἐς
oe
Latin
.
Koman..
Greek. . :
Authors, and ΠΝ ἘΝ
Comp. Grammar ae History...
Roman Huistory.. ..
Theory of Equations..
MriZonometry.'.27 4.26
Third Year Scholarships.
Algebra.. ἐς
Analytic Gaohatey ay.
Biolog
{ς
Calculus.
y (Plant)..
(Animal)..
oo ee #8 #0
Goustitution and Nseuerimnenit of meter
Elements of Economic Theory .
Elements of Political Science ..
English Composition. .
ee
“e
Literature (lamb). ς΄
κ᾿ (Milton)
μὰ Shakspere..
French.. ial
Geometry, Analy tic ae
@ermante haat Cae oe eh
Greek
“e
ςς
“cc
Authors .
Composition..
IStOLVsest
Translation at ‘Sight.
History of Economic Theory ..
History (Meyer’s)..
. History (Myers).. ..
Greek .. ..
Latin
se
“ce
Authors. .
Composition. .
Translation at Sight. .
. 088,
. 601,
xvl INDEX.
PAGE
LO ZI CT NS Re Chiles Mae) ate Pas ee 1 odin eos OOO
Oman EMIStOry: ah) ose es ΚΙ ἐν Mes eiseistale erties Pee OLS
MHeory ΠΟΙ Hd UaLIONS au ΡΣ ise 9004
MrigOnOMetly 4, bon cesta tele dee Cae peek) tose haste OU:
et
X —EXHIBITION AND PRIZE EXAMINATIONS
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
SEPTEMBER, 1903.
Exhibition and Prize Examinations.
Descriptive’ Geometry... eye eels une teas
English: -SummereReadings. cee.ciaect se eines ers OSL:
Mathematics ce ene ee 0 }| en -eeee ae Ὁ ΡΟ bo0)
Theory:.Of StructUurestrl.t usmle a eel eee RODD
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS.
FACULTY OF ARTS
1903
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY
FIRST YBAR.
GREEK AUTHORS.
TuEspAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, Ὁ TO 12.
(Answers to A, B and C are to be shown up in separate
books.)
A.—XENOPHON, THE Story oF CyRuUws.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
\ \ a 7 ΄ a Cas
(1) καὶ τὰς ἀρχὰς οὗτοι πάσας αἱροῦνται: καὶ ἐάν
τις ἢ ἐν ἐφήβοις ἢ ἐν τελείοις ἀνδράσιν ἐλλίπῃ τι τῶν
νομίμων. φαίνουσι μὲν οἱ φύλαρχοι ἕκαστοι. οἱ δὲ γεραίτεροι
΄ e \ [Ave eee a
ἀκούσαντες ἐκκρίνουσιν. ὁ δὲ ἐκκριθεὶς ἄτιμος διατελεῖ τὸν
λοιπὸν βίον.
\ \ a τ nD ”
(2) καὶ τὸ μὲν πρῶτον οἱ παῖδες ἔσκωπτον αὐτόν,
4 “ 9 al ? / / > \ \ b Vanes
λέγοντες ὅτι ἡδυπαθεῖν ἐν Mnédows μεμαθήκοι: ἐπεὶ. δὲ αὐτὸν
Ν 7 % ar CANA a 7,
ἑώρων ὥσπερ καὶ αὐτοὶ καὶ ἐσθίοντα ἡδέως καὶ πίνοντα καὶ
ΔΛ γ “ Lal \ / “
πολλὰ κρατιστεύοντα ἑαυτῶν. ἐνταῦθα δὴ πάλιν ὑπέπτησσον
αὐτῷ οἱ ἥλικες.
(3) ᾿Επεὶ δ᾽ ἦλθον οἴκαδε, ἔλεγον τοῦ Κύρου ὁ μέν
᾿ Ν 7 ξ \ \ , ΄
τις τὴν σοφίαν. ὁ δὲ τὴν καρτερίαν, ὁ δὲ τὴν πρᾳότητα, ὁ δέ
\ \ / \ \ / θ 7 θ ὃ) ἐς Ay /
τις Kal TO κάλλος Kal τὸ μέγεθος. ἔνθα δὴ ὁ Τιγράνης
’ / ἈΝ A s \ / 37) > > / \
ἐπήρετο τὴν γυναῖκα. Ἢ καὶ σοί, ἔφη. ὦ ᾿Αρμενία, καλὸς
lal +) > \ \ ‘> 4 - lal
ἐδόκει ὁ Κῦρος εἶναι; ᾿Αλλὰ pa Δί, ἔφη. οὐκ ἐκεῖνον
\ ͵΄ ” ΄ , ’
ἐθεώμην. ᾿Αλλὰ τίνα μήν ; ἔφη ὁ Τιγράνης. Tov εἰπόντα
\ » G \ id a \ Xx ὃ “ ee Pp. ὃ ΄
νὴ Δία ὡς τὴν αὑτοῦ ψυχὴν ἂν δοίη ὥστε μή με δουλεύειν.
» \ , c -“ ? D1 ae 2 a
(4) προσέτι δὲ κάμηλοι ἡμῖν εἰσιν ἐφ᾽ ὧν προσελῶμεν,
Ν ivf > x /
ὧν μίαν ἑκάστην ἑκατὸν ἵπποι οὐκ ἂν ἀνάσχοιντο ἰδόντες"
uM > 9 = “ \ an
ἔτι δὲ πύργους πρόσιμεν ἔχοντες ἀφ᾽ ὧν τοῖς μὲν ἡμῶν
114 FACULTY OF ARTS.
> τ ͵ \ / , "τος ἘΞ
ἀρήξομεν, ἐκείνους δὲ βάλλοντες κωλύσομεν τοῖς ἐν τῳ
5 / 5 \ DY ty rn δ lal
ἰσοπέδῳ μάχεσθαι. ἀλλ᾽ οὐ χρὴ φοβεῖσθαι ὅτι Kpotcos
\ “ a e ΄
μὲν ἥρηται τῶν πολεμίων στρατηγός. οὗτος γὰρ καὶ Σύρων
κακίων ἐγένετο:
\ \ \ , ΄ > , τὶ > \
OAS) mormous δὲ μὴ νόμιξε φύεσθαι ἀνθρώπους ἀλλὰ
τοὺς πιστοὺς τίθεσθαι δεῖ ἕκαστον ἑαυτῷ: ἡ δὲ κτῆσις
» κα » > rn \ rn , > \ a \ rn
αὐτῶν ἔστιν οὐδαμῶς σὺν τῇ Bla, ἀλλὰ μᾶλλον σὺν τ
εὖ / b) A fa) be i " he 4 ἧς JON M > Le ξ Xx 1
ἐργεσίᾳ. ἐπιμέλεσθε δὲ καὶ ὅπως ἀεὶ ἀνυπέρβλητος
” ” emit , / \ \ a a > A
ἄλλοις ἔσται ἡ ὑμετέρα φιλία. Kal πρὸς τῶν θεῶν, ὦ παῖδες,
Qn 79) a WT s ” \ lal \ fe 7 ΄ ~~
τιμᾶτε ἀλλήλους. εἴ TL καὶ TOD ἐμοὶ χαρίζεσθαι μέλει υμῖν.
B.—EURIPIDES, HERACLEIDAE.
Translate with notes on words underlined :—
(a) Bla νιν οὗτος τῆσδ᾽ ἀπ᾽ ἐσχάρας ἄγειν
ζητῶν βοὴν ἔστησε. κἄσφηλεν γόνυ
γέροντος. ὥστε μ᾽ ἐκβαλεῖν οἴκτῳ δάκρυ.
καὶ μὴν στολήν γ᾽ “Ελλην»» καὶ ῥυθμὸν πέπλων
ἔχει: τὰ δ᾽ ἔργα βαρβάρου, χερὺς τάδε.
σὸν δὴ τὸ φράζειν ἐστὶ μὴ μέλλειν T ἐμοὶ
ποίας ἀφῖ ίξαι δεῦρο γῆς ὅρους λιπών.
(b) 1Ο. ἀλλ᾽ οὖν honoured γ᾽ “ἀριθμὸν οὐκ ἐλάσσοσι.
@E. σμὶκρὸν τὸ σὸν σήκωμα ᾿προστίθης φίλοις.
10. μή τοί w ἔρυκε δρᾶν παρεσκευασμένον.
OE. δρᾶν μὲν σύ γ᾽ οὐχ οἷος τε, βούλεσθαι δ᾽ ἴσως.
1O. ὡς μὴ μένοῦντα τἄλλα σοι λέγειν πάρα.
OE. πῶς οὖν ὁπλίτα! ς τευχέων ἄτερ φανεῖ:
(ἡ δισσὼ γὰρ ἀστέρ᾽ ἱππικοῖς ἐπὶ ζυγοῖς
— σταθέντ᾽ ἔκρυψαν ἅρμα λυγαίῳ νέφει:
σὸν δὴ λέγουσι π΄ παῖδά γ οἱ σοφώτεροι
Ἥβην 0: ὁ δ᾽ ὄρφνης ἐκ δυσαιθρίου νέων
βραχιόνων ἔδειξεν ἡβητὴν τύπον.
αἱρεῖ δ᾽ ὁ κλεινὸς ᾿Ιόλεως Se ae
τέτρωρον ἅρμα πρὸς πέτραις Σκειρωνίσι.
(d) ἔστιν ἐν οὐρανῷ βεβακὼς
τεὸς γόνος. ὦ γεραιὰ.
φεύγω λόγον ὡς τὸν “Ada
δόμον κατέβα. πυρὸς
i ——
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. TES
:. dea φλογὶ copa dao bets.
‘ (6) καὶ yap πατρὶ τῶνδ᾽ ᾿Αθάναν
! λέγουσ᾽ ἐπίκουρον εἶναι,
; καὶ τοὐσὃ-: θεᾶς πόλις
: καὶ λαὸς ἔσωσε κείνας,
ἔσχεν δ᾽ ὕβριν ἀνδρὸς. ᾧ θυ-
μήποτ᾽ ἐμοὶ φρόνημα
ψυχά τ᾽ ἀκόρεστος εἴη.
C:—Homer, Ovyssty I.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
(1) πῶς ἂν ἔπειτ᾽ ᾿Οδυσῆος ἐγὼ θείοιο λαθοίμην.
& \ \ / > oo) an \ ὃ᾽ ey a
Os περὶ μὲν νόον ἐστὶ βροτῶν. περὶ δ᾽ ἱρὰ θεοῖσιν
» / \ > \ > \ ,
ἀθανάτοισιν ἔδωκε. τοὶ οὐρανὸν εὐρὺν ἔχουσιν:
δ »
ἀλλὰ [Ποσειδάων γαιήοχος ἀσκελὲς αἰὲν
Κύκλωπος κεχόλωται. ὃν ὀφθαλμοῦ ἀλάωσεν,
τ 2 Pa Te 7 , ev , ,
ἀντίθεον Πολύφημον. Gov Kpatoy ἐστὶ μέγιστον
πᾶσιν ἱΚυκλώπεσσι:
/ ; > lo \ ’ \ /
(2) κήρυκες 5 αὐτοῖσι Kat ὀτρηροὶ θεράποντες
la >) Φ / \ rn \ ΄
οἱ μὲν ἄρ᾽ οἶνον ἔμισγον ἐνὶ κρητῆρσι καὶ ὕδωρ.
οἱ δ᾽ αὗτε σπόγγοισι πολυτρήτοισι τραπέζας
νίζον καὶ πρότιθεν. τοὶ δὲ κρέα πολλὰ δατεῦντο.
’ ͵7ὔ \ A 7 \ / > /
(3) εἰ μέν κεν πατρὸς βίοτον καὶ νόστον ἀκούσῃς
ἢ τ᾿ ἂν τρυχόμενος περ ἔτι τλαίης ἐνιαυτόν:
εἰ δέ κε τεθνηῶτος ἀκούσῃς μηδ᾽ ἔτ᾽ ἐόντος.
, = ee ape / > ~ κ
νοστήσας δὴ ἔπειτα φίλην ἐς πατρίδα γαῖαν
lat £ ΄ Lal \ f of.
σῆμα τέ οἱ χεῦαι Kal ἐπὶ κτέρεα κτερεΐξαι
\ ~~) ore ” NV / / rn
TOAAA μαλ΄. οσσα EDLKE, καὶ ἀνέρι μητέρα δοῦναι.
Γ᾽ (4) -Τηλέμαχ᾽. ἢ τοι ταῦτα θεῶν ἐν γούνασι κεῖται,
; ε , - , , - =
ὅς τις ἐν ἀμφιάλῳ ᾿Ιθάκῃ βασιλεύσει ᾿Ἀ χαιῶν:
pais , , Ph EE 58. Ὁ δ.
κτήματα δ᾽ αὐτὸς ἔχοις καὶ δώμασι σοῖσιν ἀνάσσοις
\ \ fad 3s Ἅ > Vea “ / 3 IE /
μὴ yap ὅ γ᾽ ἔλθοι ἀνὴρ ὅς τίς σ᾽ ἀέκοντα βίηφι
͵ ’ d¢ : / , ie eee Π
κτήματ᾽ ἀποῤῥαίσει, ᾿Ιθάκης ἔτι ναιετοώσης.
110 FACULTY OF ARTS.
FIRST YEAR.
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION AND TRANS-
LATION AT SIGHT.
TurEspAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.30.
1. Translate into Greek :-—
(a) When the ships had sailed away, the city was
betrayed to the enemy.
(b) Those who were conquered in this battle were
all killed.
(c) The messengers, after announcing this, went
away home.
(d) He said that his friends were giving gifts to
the boys.
(ec) They asked how many men were crossing that
river.
(f) Did you not see that the houses were burning?
(5) If you do not condemn the traitors, you will
greatly injure the state.
(i) If we had marched more quickly, we should
have reached the sea on the same day.
(ἢ 1 ordered him to set out at once, that he might
report what had happened.
(k) He spoke so wisely, that he persuaded all who
were present.
2. Translate into English :—
΄ , al x
O Νηλίδης, ὥς φασιν, τεκμήρια πολλὰ ETL παῖς ὧν
r ει Ἂ ld
παρεῖχεν. ὅτι ἔσται ποτε ἀνὴρ ἀγαθὸς καὶ TOAMNPOS. πέντε
Ν lol 3 \ > ,
yap ἔτη μάλιστα γεγονὼς ἀπὸ τῆς οἰκίας μακρὸν ἐπλανήθη.
“ A « /
πεινῶν δὲ ἐν τῇ ὅδῳ οὐδὲν ἐταράχθη, ἀλλὰ, συλλέξας
rf a ? ἣν
ἀγρίους τινὰς καρποὺς, ἐκ τούτων δεῖπνον ἐποιεῖτο, ἐς δὲ
\ > / “ δι y > > fol \ \ > /
τὴν οἰκίαν, ὅθεν ἐξωρμήθη, οὐκ ἐπανῆλθε πρὶν νὺξ ἐγένετο.
“ = a9 / « ,
ἰδοῦσα οὖν αὐτὸν ἡ μήτῃρ, “ὦ παῖ." ἔφη, “θαυμάζω ὡς οὔ
f “- > 99 - SY “
σε ἠνάγκασεν ὁ φόβος θᾶσσον ἐπανιέναι." ὁ δὲ παῖς
> A ἘΣ Oe > a Pees ς Bo A on s é o}
ἀντεῖπεν, “ἀλλ᾽, ὦ μῆτερ, τίς ἐστιν ὁ φόβος; ov yap ἐμ
VL 3
γνώριμος ἐστιν.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 117
FIRST YEAR.
GREEK HISTORY.
TurspaAy, APRIL 14TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 5.30.
1. Where are the causes of the Persian wars to be
sought? What incident directly led to the great strug-
gle? How is the name of Solon connected with this
latter?
2. How is the name of Hippias associated with that
of the Spartan King Cleomenes and the Ionic Revolt?
3. Describe in detail the attempt of Athens to make
an alliance with Persia. What were the events leading
to it? How is the result of significance ?
4. Describe fully the great battle which ended so fitly
the work begun at Marathon. Give the date and con-
sequences.
5. By the settlement of what question, after the bat-
tle of Mykale, was the future course of Athenian his-
tory determined ?
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK AUTHORS.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answers to A, B and C to be shown wp in separate books.)
A.—SOPHOCLES, AJAX.
1. Translate, with notes on words and phrases un-
᾿ derlined :—
3 / lal , “
(a) οὐκέτι λαμπρᾶς γὰρ ἄτερ στεροπῆς
" ? \ / cay /
ἄξας ὀξὺς νότος ὡς λήγει.
»“ τ »
καὶ νῦν φρόνιμος νέον ἄλγος ἔχει"
\ ΄ A
TO yap ἐσλεύσσειν οἰκεῖα πάθη,
Ἂν >
μηδενὸς ἄλλου παραπράξαντος,
/ > ΄ e a
μεγάλας ὀδύνας ὑποτείνει.
b \ \ \ Ὁ A ” ,
(6) καὶ τὸν μὲν ἧστο πλεῖστον ἄφθογγος χρόνον"
ἔπειτ᾽ ἐμοὶ τὰ δείν᾽ ἐπηπείλησ᾽ ἔπη,
’ fol Ν /
εἰ μὴ havoiny πᾶν τὸ συντυχὸν πάθος,
> / Se Ya; ele / -“ ,
κἀνήρετ᾽ ἐν τῷ πράγματος κυροῖ ποτέ.
118
(A)
(e)
(7)
FACULTY, OF ARTS.
Kayo, φίλοι, δείσασα τοὐξειργασμένον
ἔλεξα πᾶν ὅσονπερ ἐξηπιστάμην.
ὁ δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐξώμωξεν οἰμωγὰς λυγρά
ὁ δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἐξῴμωξεν οἰμωγὰς Nuypds,
ἃ > > rn 9
ἃς οὔποτ᾽ αὐτοῦ πρύσθεν εἰσήκουσ᾽ ἐγώ.
πρὸς γὰρ κακοῦ τε καὶ βαρυψύχου γόους
΄ Pet) / 3.1.3 \ 3 PP)!
TOLOVTO αξι TOT ἀνδρὸς ἐξηγεῖτ EN ELV"
ΑἹ. κομιζέ νύν μοι παῖδα τὸν ἐμόν. ws ἴδω.
TE. καὶ μὴν φόβοισί γ᾽ αὐτὸν ἐξελυσάμην.
Al. ἐν τοῖσδε τοῖς κακοῖσιν, ἢ τί μοι λέγεις :
TE. μὴ σοί γέ που δύστηνος ἀντήσας θάνοι.
ΑἹ. πρέπον γέ τὰν ἣν δαίμονος τοὐμοῦ τόδε.
TE. ἀλλ᾽ οὖν ἐγὼ ᾿φύλαξα τοῦτό γ᾽ ἀρκέσαι.
ΑἹ. ἐπήνεσ᾽ ἔργον καὶ πρόνοιαν ἣν ἔθου.
TE. τί δῆτ᾽ ἂν ὡς ἐκ τῶνδ᾽ ἂν ὠφελοῖμί σε:
Al. δός μοι προσειπεῖν αὐτὸν ἐμφανῆ τ᾽ ἰδεῖν.
TE. καὶ μὴν πέλας ye προσπόλοις φυλάσσεται.
ΑἹ. τί δῆτα μέλλει μὴ οὐ παρουσίαν ἔχειν:
\ See , \ oR
ἐγὼ δ᾽ ὁ τλάμων παλαιὸς ἀφ᾽ οὗ χρόνος
Ἰδαῖα μίμνων λειμώνι᾽ ἔπαυλα μηνῶν
ἀνήριθμος αἰὲν εὐνῶμαι.
χρόνῳ τρυχόμενος.
Mss. ᾿δαία μίμνων λειμωνίᾳ ποίᾳ μήλων
> 9. > /
ἀνήριθμος αἰὲν evvomat.
οἴμοι, τί δράσω: πῶς σ᾽ ἀποσπάσω πικροῦ
τοῦδ᾽ αἰόλου κνώδοντος. ὦ τάλας, ὑφ᾽ οὗ
φονέως ap ἐξέπνευσας : εἶδες ὡς χρόνῳ
ἔμελλέ σ᾽ "Extop καὶ θανὼν ἀποφθίσειν:
σκέψασθε. πρὸς θεῶν. τὴν τύχην δυοῖν βροτοῖν.
“Ἑκτω / τ ὃ) O° 26 40. /
p μέν, ᾧ δὴ τοῦδ᾽ ἐδωρήθη Tapa,
Qn \ ΄ lal » 4
ζωστῆρι πρισθεὶς ἱππικῶν ἐξ ἀντύγων
3 / 3 Ly »” 9 > / /
ἐκνάπτετ᾽ αἰέν, ἔστ᾽ ἀπέψυξεν βίον:
οὗτος δ᾽ ἐκείνου τήνδε δωρεὰν ἔχων
πρὸς τοῦδ᾽ ὄλωλε θανασίμῳ πεσήματι.
ἐκεῖνος οὔτε στεφάνων
οὔτε βαθειᾶν κυλίκων
lal ’ \ , Ὁ lal
νείμεν ἐμοὶ τέρψιν ομιλεῖν,
\ ’ Aa tor
οὔτε γλυκὺν αὐλῶν ὄτοβον,.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 119
δύσμορος. οὔτ᾽ ἐννυχίαν
τέρψιν ἰαύειν'
2. Comment on:—
(a) θαρσῶν δὲ μίμνε μηδὲ συμφορὰν δέχου
τὸν ἄνδρα.
(δ) οὐκέτ᾽ ἄνδρα μὴ τόνδ᾽ ἴδητε.
(c) ἀνδρί τοι χρεὼν
μνήμην προσεῖναι, τερπνὸν εἴ τί που πάθοι.
1,πάθῃ: other Mss. πάθοι.
(α) τήνδε δ᾽ ἔξοδον
ὀλεθρίαν Αἴαντος ἐλπίζει φέρειν.
(6) κοὐδεὶς ἐπίσταταί με συμμαθεῖν τόπος.
(f) ἀλλ᾽ ἄνδρα Χρή. κἂν σῶμα γεννήσῃ μέγα.
δοκεῖν πεσεῖν ἂν κἂν ἀπὸ σμικροῦ κακοῦ.
πα Lauer pres. Vil:
1. Translate with notes on words underlined :-—
(a) καὶ ἅμα ἑώρων τοὺ: Πελοποννησίους τὴν πρὸς
Κιθαιρῶνα καὶ Δρυὸς κεφαλὰς τὴν ἐπ᾽ ᾿Αθηνῶν φέρουσαν
μετὰ λαμπάδων διώκοντας. καὶ ἐπὶ μὲν ἕξ ἢ ἑπτὰ στα
δίους οἱ Πλαταιῆς τὴν ἐπὶ τῶν Θηβῶν ἐχώρησαν. ἔπειθ᾽
ὑποστρέψαντες ἦσαν τὴν πρὸς τὸ ὄρος φέρουσαν ὁδὸν ἐς
"EpvOpas καὶ Ὑσιάς, καὶ λαβόμενοι τῶν ὀρῶν διαφεύγουσιν
. ἐς τὰς ᾿Αθήνας. ἄνδρες δώδεκα καὶ διακόσιοι ἀπὸ πλειόνων.
(Ὁ) οἱ δὲ Λακεδαιμόνιοι δικασταὶ νομίζοντες τὸ ἐπερώ-
τημα σφίσιν ὀρθῶς ἕξειν, αὖθις τὸ αὐτὸ ἕνα ἕκαστον παρα-
γαγόντες καὶ ἐρωτῶντες, εἴ τι Λακεδαιμονίους καὶ τοὺς
ξυμμάχους ἀγαθὸν ἐν τῷ πολέμῳ δεδρακότες εἰσίν. ὁπότε
μὴ φαῖεν. ἀπάγοντες ἀπέκτεινον, καὶ ἐξαίρετον ἐποιήσαντο
οὐδένα.
c ΄ \ , ΄ ͵ , e \
(ἡ τς: Ἡμῶν δὲ τὸ τε UTAPKOV πρότερον. ᾧπερ Kal
ἀνεπιστήμονες ἔτι ὄντες ἀπετολμήσαμεν. “βεβαιότερον νῦν:
καὶ τῆς δοκήσεως “προσγεγενημένης αὐτῷ, τὸ κρατίστους
εἶναι. εἰ τοὺς κρατίστους ἐνικήσαμεν. ee ἢ ἑκάστου ἡ
3 στα τ \ \ \ XN 5) ΄, ΄ /
ἐλπίς. τὰ δὲ πολλὰ πρὸς TAS ἐπιχειρήσεις ἡ μεγίστη
3 \ / \ ΄ὔ
ἐλπὶς μεγίστην καὶ τὴν προθυμίαν παρέχεται.
120 FACULTY OF ARTS.
wT \ ᾽ a a, rs ὁ Ὁ - «
(4) “Ἔτι καὶ ἐκ τῶν παρὔντων, ὦ ᾿Αθηναῖοι καὶ
/ ’ / \ ” »Μ \ \ 3, /
ξύμμαχοι. ἐλπίδα χρὴ ἔχειν (ἤδη τινὲς Kal ἐκ δεινοτέρων ἢ
τοιῶνδε ἐσῴθησαν). μηδὲ καταμέμφεσθαι ὑμᾶς ἄγαν αὐτοὺς
μήτε ταῖς ξυμφοραῖς μήτε ταῖς παρὰ τὴν ἀξίαν νῦν
κακοπαθείαις.
(e) τὸ γὰρ ἀποκινδυνεύειν πρὸς ἀνθρώπους ἀπονενοη-
μένους οὐ πρὸς ἐκείνων μᾶλλον ἣν ἔτι ἢ πρὸς TOV’ Αθηναίων,
καὶ ἅμα φειδώ τε τις ἐγίγνετο, ἐπ᾽ εὐπραγίᾳ ἤδη σαφεῖ, μὴ
προανολωθῆναι τῳ. καὶ ἐνόμιζον καὶ ὡς ταύτῃ τῇ ἰδέᾳ
καταδαμασάμενοι λήψεσθαι αὐτούς.
C.—HomErR, Opyssey X.
Translate, with brief notes on words underlined :—
5 7, \ ” a
(a) ἔνθ᾽ ἐπεὶ ἐς λιμένα κλυτὸν ἤλθομεν, ὃν πέρι πέτρη
, /
ἠλίβατος τετύχηκε διαμπερὲς ἀμφοτέρωθεν,
ἀκταὶ δὲ προβλῆτες ἐναντίαι ἀλλήλῃσιν
by Ἂν >) , /
ἐν στόματι προὔχουσιν, ἀραιὴ δ᾽ εἴσοδος ἐστιν.
” b] “ 3 yy , ” / » vA
ἔνθ᾽ οἵ γ᾽ εἴσω πάντες ἔχον νέας ἀμφιελίσσας.
€ \ S/O. 9" a9? θ / / δέδ
au μὲν ap ἔντοσθεν λιμένος κοίλοιο δέδεντο
, 4 a “ 3 an
πλησίαι: οὐ μὲν yap ToT ἀέξετο KUMAa γ᾽ ἐν αὐτῷ,
» / 9 v . ’ 4 Ν 3 4s > \ /
οὔτε μέγ᾽ οὔτ᾽ ὀλίγον, λευκὴ δ᾽ ἣν ἀμφὶ γαλήνη.
Ἂ Gy lol /
αὐτὰρ ἐγὼν οἷος σχέθον ἔξω νῆα μέλαιναν,
a Pate yee / ,
αὐτοῦ ἐπ᾽ ἐσχατιῇ. πέτρης ἐκ πείσματα δήσας"
ἔστην δὲ σκοπιὴν ἐς παιπαλόεσσαν ἀνελθών.
« ΑΕ δὰ » , \ a
(b) ὡς δ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἂν ἀγραυλοι πόριες περὶ βοῦς ἀγελαίας,
4 / ’ \
ἐλθούσας ἐς κόπρον. ἐπὴν βοτάνης κορέσωνται,
πᾶσαι ἅμα σκαίρουσιν ἐναντίαι: οὐδ᾽ ἔτι σηκοὶ
ἴσχουσ᾽, ἀλλ᾽ ἁδινὸν μυκώμεναι ἀμβιθέουσι
7, a \ aA ’ a
μητέρας: Ws ἐμὲ κεῖνοι, ἐπεὶ ἴδον ὀφθαλμοῖσι,
, 9 vv
daxpusertes ἔχυντο: δόκησε δ᾽ ἄρα σφίσι θυμὸς
δ » . ’ ΄ ΄ 7 \ ?
ὡς ἔμεν ὡς εἰ πατρίδ᾽ ἱκοίατο καὶ πόλιν αὐτὴν
, 760 , τ τ woo mes) tegen a eZ,
τρηχειὴς AKNS, LUA T ἔτραφεν ω) εγένοντο
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 121
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK PROSE COMPOSITION AND SIGHT
TRANSLATION.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.30.
1. Translate.into Greek :—
The custonts of the Indoi differ greatly from those
in Greece. For there, if anyone owes money, the one
to whom it is owed does not bring an action or en-
deavor by means of the law to force the other to pay;
nor again does he threaten to kill the man, or to burn
his house, or anything of the kind, as is the custom
among some of the barbarians. On the contrary,
when, after often coming to him and asking him to pay,
he obtains nothing of what he desires, he sends a mes-
sage that if the other does not pay, he will kill himself
at his door. And the debtor, fearing that, if he should
do so, the dead man’s spirit would come to him in his
sleep and make him live a wretched life, at last pays his
debt. .
2. Translate into English :—
(a) Battle in the harbour of Pylos.
καὶ οἱ μὲν Λακεδαιμόνιοι οὔτε ἀντανήγοντο οὔτε ἃ
διενοήθησαν. τὰ; ἔσ πλοὺς φυλάξαι, ἔτυχον ποιήσαντες,
ἡσυχάζοντε; δ᾽ ἐν τῇ γῇ τάς τε ναῦς ἐπλήρουν καὶ παρεσ-
κευάζοντο. ἢν ἐσπλέῃ TIS, ὡς ἐν τῷ λεμένι ὄντι οὐ σμικρῷ
ναυμαχήσοντες. οἱ δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναῖοι Ὑνόντες καθ᾽ ἑκάτερον τὸν
ἔσπλουν ὥρμησαν ἐπ᾽ αὐτοὺς. καὶ τὰς μὲν πλείους τῶν
νεῶν ἐς φυγὴν κατέστησαν, καὶ ἐπιδιώκοντες ἔτρωσαν μὲν
πολλὰς, πέντε δ᾽ ἔλαβον, καὶ μίαν τούτων αὐτοῖς ἀνδράσι.
ταῖς δὲ λοιπαῖς ἐν τῇ γῇ καταπεφευγυίαις ἐνέβαλλον. αἱ δὲ
καὶ πληρούμεναι ἔτι πρὶν ἀνάγεσθαι ἐκόπτοντο' καί τινας
καὶ ἀναδούμενοι κενὰς εἷλκον, τῶν ἀνδρῶν ἐς φυγὴν ὡρμη-
μένων.
(Ὁ) Disaster has befallen the Trojans.
κακῶς πέπρακται. κἀπὶ τοῖς κακοῖσι πρὸς
αἴσχιστα: καίτοι δὶς τόσον κακὸν τόδε:
θανεῖν γὰρ εὐκλεῶς μὲν, εἰ θανεῖν χρεὼν,
122 FACULTY OF ARTS.
λυπρὸν μὲν οἶμαι τῷ θανόντι. πῶς γὰρ οὔ ;
τοῖς ζῶσι δ᾽ ὄγκος καὶ δόμων εὐδοξία.
ἡμεῖς δ᾽ ἀβούλως κἀκλεῶς ὀλώλαμεν.
ὀδύνη με Telper, κοὐκέτ᾽ ὀρθοῦμαι τάλας.
καὶ ξυμφορὰν μὲν 010’ ὁρῶν, τρόπῳ δ᾽ ὅτῳ
τεθνᾶσιν οἱ θανόντες οὐκ ἔχω φράσα".
SECOND YEAR. °
GREEK HISTORY AND LITERATURE.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—4.30 TO 5.30 P.M.
(Answers to A and B to be shown up in separate books.)
A.—HistTory.
1. What was the origin of the Confederacy of Delos?
What event marked the change to an Athenian Empire?
Indicate briefly the connexion of this with other events
of the same period and show how far it may be con-
sidered as marking the culmination of Athenian power.
Give dates.
2. What were the chief constitutional changes at
Athens during the ascendancy of Pericles? Give
dates. How far were these inevitable ,and how far the
results of a deliberate policy? Give a brief sketch of
the Athenian constitution in 432 B.C.
3. With what events are the following names con-
nected? Give dates. Ithomé, Thasos, Nisaea, Coro-
nea, Gylippus, Brasidas, Delium, Sybota, Mantinea.
B.—LITERATURE.
(Not more than three questions to be attentpted.)
1. What is meant by the “originality” of Greek liter-
ature? Illustrate by reference to its several branches,
giving names in each.
2. Give a short description of Homeric Society.
_ 3. Write a. brief note on each of the following :—
Alcaeus, Solon, Tyrtaeus, Aristarchus, Thespis. Who
were the Rhapsodists? What was a Trilogy?
4. Give a short sketch of the origin and growth of
Comedy.
5. Describe briefly the moral and religious teaching
of Ancient Greek Tragedy.
ἐλ
5",
TT
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 123
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GREEK AUTHORS.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MorNING, Q TO 12
(Answers to A,B and C to be shown up in separate books.)
A.—DEMOSTHENES.
Translate, adding a brief note where you think it
desirable :—
(a) Οὐ yap οὕτω γ᾽ εὐήθης ἐστὶν οὐδείς, ὃς ὑπολαμ-
βάνει τὸν Φίλιππον τῶν μὲν ἐν Θράκῃ κακῶν (τί yap ἂν
ἄλλο τις εἴποι Δρόγγιλον καὶ Καβύλην καὶ Μάστειραν καὶ
ἃ νῦν ἐξαιρεῖ) τούτων μὲν ἐπιθυμεῖν καὶ ὑπὲρ τοῦ ταῦτα
λαβεῖν καὶ πόνου: καὶ χειμῶνας καὶ τοὺς ἐσχάτους κινδύ-
νους ὑπομένειν. τῶν δ᾽ ᾿Αθηναίων λ'μένων καὶ νεωρίων καὶ
τριήρων καὶ TOY ἔργων τῶν ἀργυρείων καὶ τοσούτων
προσόδων οὐκ ἐπιθυμεῖν ἀλλὰ ταῦτα μὲν ὑμᾶς ἐάσειν ἔχειν
ὑπὲρ δε τῶν μελινῶν καὶ τῶν ὀλυρῶν τῶν ἐν τοῖς Θραᾳκίοις
σιροῖς ἐν τῷ βαράθρῳ χειμάζξειν.
(b) Ὁρῶν δὲ ταῦθ᾽ ὁ δῆμος ὁ τῶν ᾿Ωρειτῶν ἀντὶ τοῦ
τῷ μὲν βοηθεῖν τοὺς δ᾽ ἀποτυμπανίσαι τοῖς μὲν οὐκ
ὠργίζετο τὸν δ᾽ ἐπιτήδειον ταῦτα παθεῖν Ebr κἀπέχαιρεν.
(c) Οὐκοῦν ἐνόμιζον ἐκεῖνοι τῆς πάντων τῶν λλήνων
σωτηρίας ἑαυτοῖς ἐπιμελητέον εἶναι: οὐ γὰρ ἂν αὐτοῖς ἔμελ᾽
εἴ τις ἐν ᾿Πελοποννήσῳ τινὰς ὠνεῖται καὶ διαφθέιρει μὴ
- τοῦθ᾽ ὑπολαμβάνουσι.
(7) Ei δὲ ἐκ τούτων τὰ δίκαια τίθενται καὶ τὴν
εἰρήνην ταύτην ὁρίζονται ὅτι μὲν δήπουθεν οὔθ “dav οὔτ᾽
Ι] \ / Wf) £ o > fol A , 2 e >
ἀνεκτὰ λέγουσιν οὔθ᾽ ὑμῖν ἀσφαλῆ. δῆλόν ἐστιν ἅπασιν. οὐ
r a
μὴν arr ἐναντία συμβαίνει ταῖς κατηγορίαις as Διοπείθους
κατηγοροῦσι καὶ αὐτὰ ταῦτα λέγειν αὐτούς.
> y etd / Ψ lal Ὥ ΄’΄ a \
(0) ᾿Εγὲ δ᾽ ὅσα μέν τις αἰτιᾶταί τινα τούτων ovs κατὰ
\ , 2 9 ςε al > oe ΄ / x
τοὺς νόμους ἐφ᾽ ὑμῖν ἐστιν. ὅταν βούλησθε. κολάζειν, κἂν
ἤδη δοκῇ κἂν ἐπισχοῦσιν περὶ αὐτῶν σκοπεῖν ἐγχωρεῖν
ἡ γοῦμαι.
124
- FACULTY OF ARTS.
Β. — AHSCHYLUS, PROMETHEUS VINCTUS
1. Translate, with note on words and phrases under-
lined :—
()
()
(c)
(d)
(e)
KP. καὶ τήνδε viv πόρπασον ἀσφαλῶς. iva
μάθῃ σοφίστης ὧν Διὸς νωθέστερος.
ΗΦ. πλὴν τοῦδ᾽ ἂν οὐδεὶς ἐνδίκως μέμψαιτό μοι.
ΚΡ. ἀδαμαντίνου νῦν σφηνὸς αὐθάδη γνάθον
στέρνων διαμπὰξ πασσαλευ᾽ ἐρρωμένως.
H®. αἰαῖ, ἹΠ]ρομηθεῦ. σῶν ὑπὲρ στένω πόνων
KP. σὺ δ᾽ αὖ κατοκτεῖς τῶν Διός τ᾽ ἐχθρῶν ὕπερ
στένεις : ὅπως ae σαυτὸν OLKTLELS ποτέ.
οἶδ᾽ ὅτι τραχὺς καὶ παρ᾽ ἑαυτῷ
τὸ δίκαιον ἔγνων: ἔμπας ὀίω
μαλακογνώμων
ἔσται ποθ᾽ ὅταν ταύτῃ ῥαισθῇ:"
τὴν δ᾽ ἀτέραμνον στορέσας ὀργὴν
εἰς ἀρθμὸν ἐμοὶ καὶ φιλότητα
σπεύδων σπεύδοντί ποθ᾽ ἥξει.
τρόπους O€ πολλοὺς μαντικῆς ἐστοίχισα,
κἄκρινα πρῶτος €& ὁ ὀνειράτων ἃ χρὴ
ὕπαρ γενέσθαι. κλῃδόνας τε δυσκρίτους
ἐγνώρισ᾽ αὐτοῖς ἐνοδίους τε συμβόλους.
γαμψωνύνων τε πτῆσιν οἰωνῶν σκεθρῶς
διώρισ᾽. οἵτινές τε δεξιοὶ φύσιν
εὐωνύμους τε, καὶ δίαιταν ἥντινα
ἔχουσ᾽ ἕκαστοι. καὶ πρὸς ἀλλήλους τινες
ἔχθραι τε καὶ στέρ γηθρα καὶ συνεδρίαι"
σπλάγχνων τε λειότητα, καὶ χροιὰν τίνα
ἔχοντ᾽ ἂν εἰ Ἢ δαίμοσιν 1 πρὸς ἡδονὴν,
χολῆς λοβοῦ τε ποικίλτν εὐμορφίαν.
τέλος δ᾽ ἐναργὴς βαξις ἦλθεν ᾿Ινάχῳ
σαφῶς ἐπισκήπτουα καὶ μυθουμένη
ἔξω δόμων τε καὶ πάτρας ὠθεῖν ἐμέ.
ἄφετον ἀλᾶσθαι γῆς ἐπ᾽ ἐσχάτοις ὅροις"
Ket μὴ θέλοι, πυρωτὸν ἐκ Διὸς μολεῖν
κεραυνὸν, ὃς πᾶν ἐξαϊστώσει γένος.
Διὸς δέ τοι
πτηνὸς κύων. δαφοινὸς ἀετὸς, λάβρως
διαρταμήσει σώματος μέγα ῥάκος,
Σ πάν
1 CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 125
ἄκλητος ἕρπων δαιταλεὺς πανήμερος,
κελαινόβρωτον δ᾽ ἧπαρ ἐκθοινάσεται.
2. Annotate :—
(a) δολῷ δὲ τοὺς ὑπερσχόντας κρατεῖν.
(Ὁ) οὐκ ἔστιν ὅτῳ μείζονα μοῖραν νείμαιμ᾽ ἢ σοί.
(0) πάντων μετασχὼν καὶ τετολμηκὼς ewok,
(d) ὡς τἀποκλαῦσαι κἀποδύρασθαι τύχας
ἐνταῦθ᾽ ὅπου μέλλοι τις οἴσεσθαι δάκρυ
πρὸς τῶν κλυόντων, ἀξίαν τριβὴν ἔχει.
(6) τοιοῦτο μέν σοι τοῦτο φρούριον λέγω.
(7) οὐ γὰρ δή που τοῦτο γε τλητὸν παρέσυρας ἔπος.
3. Comment on the following readings of the Me-
dicean MS :—
(a) ὑπαίθριος δεσμοῖς πασσαλευμένος"
(Ὁ) μόνον δὴ πρόσθεν ἄλλον ἐν πόνοις
δαμέντ᾽ ἀκαμαντοδέτοις
Τιτᾶνα λύμαις εἰσιδόμαν θεὸν,
Ατλανθ᾽ ὡς αἰὲν ὑπέροχον σθένος
κραταιὸν οὐράνιόν τε πόλον
νώτοις ὑποστενάΐζει.
βοᾳ δὲ πόντιος κλύδων
ξυμπίτνων στένει βαθύς
κελαινὸς 0” Aidos ὑποβρέμει μυχὸς γᾶς.
(c) ἀλλά μοι τορῶς
τέκμηρον ὅ τι μ᾽ ἐπαμμένει
παθεῖν τί μὴ χρὴ φάρμακον νόσου
(-- γεγυμνάκασιν, οὐδ᾽ ἔχω μαθεῖν ὅπᾳ)
(d) ἑκηβόλοις τόξοισιν ἐξηρτημένοι.
. (6) ἐνταῦθα δή σε Ζεὺς τίθησιν ἔμφρονα
ἐπαφῶν ἀταρβεῖ χειρὶ καὶ θιγὼν μόνον.
ἐπώνυμον δὲ τῶν Atos γεννημάτων
τέξεις κελαινὸν "Επαφον.
4. Indicate, with a sketch-map, the course of Io’s
wanderings.
5. What are to be the conditions of Prometheus’
release?
C.—Kywaston’s GREEK ELEGIAC Poets.
Translate :—
(1) ἀλλὰ Ζεὺς πάντων ἐφορᾷ τέλος. ἐξαπίνης δὲ
ὥστ᾽ ἄνεμος νεφέλας αἶψα διεσκέδασεν
ἠρινὸς, ὃς πόντου πολυκύμονος ἀτρυγέτοιο
126 FACULTY OF ARTS.
πυθμένα κινήσας. γὴν κατὰ ᾿πυροφόρον
δῃώσας καλὰ ἔργα. Θεῶν ἕδος αἰπὺν ἱκάνει
οὐρανὸν, αἰθρίην δ᾽ αὖθις ἔθηκεν ἰδεῖν"
“λάμπει δ᾽ ἠελίοιο μένος κατὰ πίονα γαῖαν
\ > Ν > Ν 3....5 5 \ ’ a
καλὸν. ἀτὰρ νεφέων οὐδὲν ἔτ᾽ ἐστὶν ἰδεῖν"
, r . , ͵ 5...» "shyla ee ,
τοιαύτη Ζηνὸς πέλεται τίσις, οὐδ᾽ ἐξ᾽ ἑκάστῳ,
of \ > \ / 3) ,
ὥσπερ θνητὸς ἀνὴρ, γίγνεται ὀξύχολος.
lal a \ 4 Ν
(2) Στᾶλαι καὶ Σειρῆνες ἐμαὶ καὶ πένθιμε κρωσσε,
ὅστις ἔχεις “Aida τὰν ὀλίγαν σποδίαν,
τοῖς ἐμὸν ἐρχομένοισι παρ᾽ ἠρίον εἴπατε χαίρειν,
ait’ ἀστοὶ τελέθωντ᾽, al ἑτεροπτόλιες"
” ΄ ry Y f f Ν ‘
yore pe νύμφαν μ᾽ ἐΐσαν ἔχει τάφος, εἴπατε καὶ TO
” / 399) , "ὃ ” ΄
yore πατήρ μ᾽ ἐκάλει Βαυκίδα, χώτι γένος
΄ e an 0 \
Tyvia, ὡς εἰδῶντι: καὶ ὅττι μοι a συνεταιρὶς
τ > ΄ ,
Ἤρινν᾽ ἐν τύμβῳ γράμμ᾽ ἐχάραξε τόδε.
ε Υ \ or Wess
(3) εἶπεν. ὁ δὲ σκίπωνα, γεροντικὸν ὅπλον, ἀείρας,
9 rn an eg ”
ἤνιδε, KELVOL TOL πᾶν ἐρέουσιν ἔπος.
c 5, ἴω / v
(οἱ δ᾽ ἄρ᾽ ὑπὸ πληγῇσι θοὰς βέμβικας ἔχοντες
»“, Ψ ΤΑ ἴω ’ \ &
ἔστρεφον εὐρείῃ παῖδες ἐνὶ τριόδῳ).
f > \ 3 /
κείνων ἔρχεο, φησὶ, MET ἔχνια᾽ χὠ μὲν ἐπέστη
΄ . \ δ.
πλησίον. οἱ δ᾽ ἔλεγον τὴν κατὰ σαυτὸν ἔλα,
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GREEK PROSE AND TRANSLATION AT
SIGHT.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 15TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Translate into Greek :—
The consuls immediately moved the army to the
neighbourhood of Hannibal, with the intention of offer-
ing battle. But when Paullus observed the open plain,
he was desirous to put off an engagement, and man-
ceuvred so as to draw the enemy into ground less favour-
able for the action of cavalry. Varro, however, thought
otherwise; and now appeared the evil of both Consuls
being joined in command of the same army. The
Consuls were, by the constitution, equal, and Varro was
far too confident of success to give way to his more
experienced colleague. Paullus felt bitterly the truth
of Fabius’ parting injunction; “Remember that you
will have to oppose not only Hannibal, but also Varro.”
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. Ἐ27
2. Translate into English :—
>
ae pe \ ἜΣΕΙ) a t a SE
(a) οὐδὲν yap αὐτοῖς ἀποστᾶσι γέγονεν ὧν προσεδό-
? > 5 ~p \ \ a > ΄ > / 7, » ,ὕ
κησαν, ἀλλ᾽ ἀντὶ μὲν τῆς ἐλευθερίας τοὐναντίον ἀποβέβη-
» tg Ni e ὉᾳἭ3 \ f 5 \ r
Kev: ἀπολέσαντες yap αὑτῶν τοὺς βελτίστους ἐπὶ τοῖς
cal lal \ lol
χειρίστοις τῶν πολιτῶν γεγόνασιν. ἀντὶ δὲ τῆς αὐτονομίας
εἰς πολλὰς καὶ δεινὰς ἀνομίας ἐμπεπτώκασιν, εἰθισμένοι
Ν Ν BA / 9 e “ 3 7, e / If. r \
δὲ Tov ἄλλον χρόνον μεθ᾽ ἡμῶν ἐφ᾽ ἑτέρους ἰέναι, νῦν τοὺς
ἄλλους ὁρῶσιν ἐφ᾽ αὑτοὺς στρατευομένους. καὶ τὰς στάσεις.
/ ς la 2 r
as ἐπυνθάνοντο πρότερον παρ᾽ ἑτέροις οὔσας. νῦν παρ᾽ αὑτοῖς
a / ei
ὀλίγου δεῖν καθ᾽ ἑκάστην THY ἡμέραν γιγνομένας. οὕτω δ᾽
r “ > cf fr
ὡμαλισμένοι ταῖς συμφοραῖς εἰσὶν ὥστε μηδένα διαγνῶναι
/ , lal
δύνασθαι τοὺς κάκιστα πράττοντας αὐτῶν: οὐδεμία γὰρ ἐστι
τῶν πόλεων ἀκέραιος.
(0)
᾽ \ 33 ” 3 3 , ,
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἐν οἴκοις ἦμεν. ἐννέπει τάδε:
λούτρ᾽ ὡς τάχιστα τοῖς ξένοις τις αἰρέτω
ε » \ > ~ Me /
ὡς ἀμφὶ βωμὸν στῶσι χερνίβων πέλας.
» >] > 3.9 / > / id 4
ἀλλ᾽ εἶπ᾽ ᾿Ορέστης-: ἀρτίως ἡγνίσμεθα
λουτροῖσι καθαροῖς ποταμίων ῥείθρων ἄπο.
εἰ δὲ ξένους ἀστοῖσι συνθύειν χρεών.
Αἴγισθ᾽, ἕτοιμοι κοὐκ ἀπαρνούμεσθ᾽, ἄναξ.
Τοῦτον μὲν οὖν μεθεῖσαν ἐν μέσῳ λόγον:
/ \ /- / /
λόγχας δὲ θέντες δεσπότου φρουρήματα
δμῶες πρὸς ἔργον πάντες ἵεσαν χέρας.
οἱ μὲν σφαγεῖον ἔφερον, οἱ δ᾽ ἦρον κανᾶ,
BA \ nr > fol > / 5 > /
ἄλλοι δὲ πῦρ ἀνῆπτον ἀμφί τ᾽ ἐσχάρας
λέβητας ὥρθουν: πᾶσα δ᾽ ἐκτύπει στέγη.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GREEK HISTORY.
FROM THE ACCESSION OF ALEXANDER THE
GREAT.
AND GREEK CONSTITUTIONAL HISTORY.
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answers to A and B to be shown up in separate books.)
A.—GreEK History, 336 B.C.-281 B.C.
N.B.—Dates should be given where possible.
1. Draw a sketch map to shew the line of Alexander's
march from Europe to India and back to Babylon.
9
128 FACULTY ‘OF ARTS.
2. Sketch the career of Demosthenes from the in-
vasion of Asia to his death.
3. Give a brief account of the history of the Greek
world from the death of Eumenes in 316 B.C. to 301
Be
4. What are our principal authorities for the history
of Alexander and the period immediately succeeding?
5. Give a short account of the condition of philosophy
and literature in the time of the first two Ptolemies.
6. What do you know of Eubulus, Hyperides, Jerome
of Kardia, Arrian, Demetrius Phalereus, Bessus, Clitus,
Lycurgus, Peukestas, Stratocles, Jachares, Dromo-
kleides?
B.—GREEK CONSTITUTIONAL HisrTory.
1. Note the chief differences between the state of
societv depicted in Homer and early Greece as known
from recent investigations. Indicate the main lines of
race-difference. What is meant by the term Pelasgi?
2. How far have the successive stages of constitu-
tional development, indicated in Plato’s Republic, their
counterparts in History? Indicate these stages in the
history of Athens, with dates.
3. What is meant by the “Epoch oi the tyrants’?
Show the causes of the phenomenon, illustrating from
modern parallels. Indicate the value of “tyranny” as a
stage in development.
4. What were regarded by the Greeks as the charac-
teristic features of Democracy? Give the dates at
which each of these became true of the Democracy of
Athens.
5. Compare and contrast the constitutions of Sparta
and Crete. Which lasted longest, and why? Illus-
trate from Roman and English History.
6. Explain:—Aisymnetes, Apagoge, Proedri, Trier-
arch, Eisphora, Hypomosia, Dokimasia, Euthyna,
Nomothetae, Epobelia.
,
a
᾿
ΛΝ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 129
SECOND YEAR.
GREEK—ADVANCED SECTION.
TuurRsDAY, APRIL 23RD :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
PrLato, LACHES.
1. Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
(a) ἀλλ᾽ εἴ τι Kai σύ, ὦ παῖ a a ἔχεις τῷδε
τῷ σαυτοῦ δημότῃ ἀγαθὸν συμβουλεῦσαι, χρὴ συμβουλεύειν.
δί >] mp \ \ N ΄ “ , / x
ίκαιος δ᾽ εἶ: καὶ yap πατρικὸς ἡμῖν φίλος τυγχάνεις ὧν.
NS ENE OTe ag NER Ege ἘΝ \ ε / \ “ Ω )
ἀεὶ yap ἐγὼ Kal ὁ σὸς πατὴρ ἑταίρω τε Kal φίλω ἦμεν, κα
πρότερον ἐκεῖνος ἐτελεύτησε, πρίν τι ἐμοὶ διενεχθῆναι.
a ΟΣ \ ΄ τ ας τον (29 σις ae Ἀν
περιφέρει δέ τίς με καὶ μνήμη ἄρτι τῶνδε λεγόντων" τὰ γὰρ
μειράκια τάδε πρὸς ἀλλήλους οἴκοι διαλεγόμενοι θαμὰ
ἐπιμέμνηνται Σωκράτους καὶ σφόδρα ἐπαινοῦσιν" οὐ μέντοι
πώποτε αὐτοὺς ἀνηρώτησα, εἰ τὸν Σωφρονίσκου λέγοιεν.
5 a4 ΄ \ , ς \ - > rn ΄ AN , 7,
(ὁ) ἣν δὲ γέλως καὶ κρότος ὑπὸ τῶν ἐκ τῆς OAKMOOS επί
“ 7 > ΄ Ν 5 Ὧν / a f \
TE τῳ σχήματι AVTOV, καὶ ἐπειδὴ βαλόντος τινὸς λίθῳ παρὰ
τοὺς πόδας αὐτοῦ ἐπὶ τὸ κατάστρωμα ἀφίεται τοῦ δόρατος,
TOT ἤδη καὶ οἱ ἐκ τῆς τριήρους οὐκέτι οἷοί T ἦσαν τὸν
γέλωτα κατέχειν. ὁρῶντες αἰωρούμενον ἐκ τῆς ὁλκάδος τὸ
δορυδρέπανον ἐκεῖνο.
(c) εἰ δ᾽ αὐτοὶ εὑρεταὶ γεγονότε τοῦ τοιούτου, δότε
παράδειγμα. τίνων ἤδη ἄλλων ἐπιμεληθέντες ἐκ φαύλων
καλούς τε κἀγαθοὺς ἐποιήσατε. εἰ γὰρ νῦν ἄρξεσθεπρῶτον
παιδεύειν, σκοπεῖν χρὴ μὴ οὐκ ἐν τῷ Καρὶ ᾿ ὑμῖν ὁ κίνδυνος
κινδυνεύηται, ἀλλ ᾿ἐν τοῖς ὑμετέροις τε καὶ ἐν τοῖς τῶν
φίλων παισί, καὶ ἀτεχνῶς τὸ λεγόμενον κατὰ τὴν παροιμίαν
ὑμῖν συμβαίνῃ ἐν πίθῳ ἡ κεραμεία γιγνομένη. λέγετε οὖν
τί τούτων ἢ φατὲ ὑμῖν ὑπάρχειν τε καὶ Tipe cian: ἢ ov φατε.
(α) ΣΏ. Καὶ τὸν μετ᾽ ἐπιστήμης ἄρα ἱππικῆς καρτεροῦντα
ἐν ἱππομαχίᾳ ἧττον φήσεις ἀνδρεῖον εἶναι ἢ τὸν ἄνευ
ἐπιστήμης.
ΛΑ. “Epouye δοκεῖ.
ΣΩ. Καὶ τὸν μετὰ σφενδονητικῆς ἢ τοξικῆς ἢ ἄλλης
τινὸς τέχνης καρτεροῦντα.
ΛΑ. Ilavvu γε.
Oe. sae ere τοι
190 FACULTY OF ARTS.
TQ. Kai ὅσοι δὴ ἐθέλουσιν εἰς φρέαρ καταβαίνοντες καὶ
κολυμβ ὥντες καρτερεῖν ἐν τούτῳ τῷ ἔργῳ, μὴ ὄντες δεινοί, ἢ
ἔν τινι ἄλλῳ τοιούτῳ ἀνδρειοτέρους ide τῶν ταῦτα δεινῶν.
ΛΑ. Τίέγὰρ ἂν τις ἄλλο φαίη, ὦ Σώκρατες :
LQ. Οὐδέν, εἴπερ οἴοιτό γε οὕτως.
ΛΑ. ᾿Αλλὰ μὴν οἱμαί γε.
ΣΏ. Καὶ μήν που ἀφρονεστέρως γε, ὦ Λάχης, οἱ
οἱ
μετὰ τέχνης
Ἃ
τοιοῦτοι κινδυνεύουσίν τε καὶ καρτεροῦσιν ἢ
/
αὐτὸ πράττοντες.
ΛΑ. @aivortat.
ΣΩ. Οὐκοῦν αἰσχρὰ ἡ ἄφρων τόλμα τε καὶ καρτέρησις
ἐν τῷ πρόσθεν ἐφάνη ἡμῖν οὗσα καὶ PraPepa ;
AA. Ilavu ye.
(ec) SQ. Δῆλον δή, ὦ Νικία, ὅτι οὐδὲ τὴν Κρομμυ-
wviav bv πιστεύεις σύ γε ἀνδρείαν γεγονέναι. τοῦτο δὲ
λέγω οὐ παίζων, ἀλλ᾽ ἀναγκαῖον οἶμαι τῷ ταῦτα λέγοντι
μηδενὸς θηρίου ἀποδέχεσθαι ἀνδρείαν, ἢ συγχωρεῖν θηρίον
τι οὕτω σοφὸν εἶναι, ὥστε ἃ ὀλίγοι ἀνθρώπων ἴσασι διὰ τὸ
χαλεπὰ εἶναι γνῶναι, ταῦτα λέοντα, ἢ πάρδαλιν ἢ τινα
, 5) > > ς 7 \
κάπρον φάναι εἰδέναι: ἀλλ᾽ ἀνάγκη ὁμοίως λέοντα καὶ
ἔλαφον καὶ ταῦρομ καὶ πίθηκον πρὸς ἀνδρείαν φάναι
πεφυκέναι τὸν τιθέμενον ἀνδρείαν τοῦθ᾽ ὅπερ σὺ τίθεσαι.
2. Indicate the general plan of the dialogue and give
an outline of the course of the argument.
3. Translate into Greek :—
When we reached home, we began to discuss the
nature of virtue. And Pearson was of opinion that
one might define it as the giving up of one’s own in-
terests. But Mansel asked “Is it then virtue, if a man
deliberately die of hunger?” Of course all agreed not.
And Pearson then said, “I mean, to give up one’s own
interests for the benefit of another.” ‘But,’ asked
Mansel, “if the one for whom one gives up is a thief,
or a drunkard, or a worthless man of any sort, what
then? Is it still virtuous to give up one’s own welfare
on his behalf?” After some discussion, all agreed that
one ought to consider the comparative worthiness of
the two, so that at last virtue appeared to be as Ben-
tham long ago said, nothing but the greatest happiness
of the greatest number.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 131
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
THIRD YEAR.
PRIVATE READINGS.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—Mornine, 9 To 12.
A.—SOPHOCLES, ANTIGONE.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
> \ fi a \ / /
ov yap τάφου νῷν Tw κασιγνήτω Κρέων
τὸν μὲν προτίσας, τὸν δ᾽ ἀτιμάσας ἔχει:
" / 4 6 / \ /
Ereoxr€a μέν, ws λέγουσι, σὺν δίκης
*vonoe δικαίᾳ καὶ νόμου κατὰ yOovo
χρήσει δικαίᾳ καὶ νόμ ατὰ χθονὸς
ἘΠΕ ΞΕ ΕΓ το ΒΗ Ὁ SP ” A
ἔκρυψε τοις ἔνερθεν εντιμον Ψνέεκροις"
καὶ φθέγμα καὶ ἀνεμόεν
φρόνημα καὶ ἀστυνόμους ὀργὰς ἐδιδάξατο, καὶ
δυσαύλων
πάγων ἐναίθρεια καὶ δύσομβρα φεύγειν βέλη,
παντοπόρος" ἄπορος ἐπ᾽ οὐδὲν ἔρχεται
τὸ μέλλον" “Avda μόνον φεῦξιν οὐκ ἐπάξεται-
νόσων δ᾽ ἀμηχάνων φυγὰς ξυμπέφρασται.
KP. κλαίων φρενώσεις. ὧν φρενῶν αὐτὸς κενός.
Al. εἰ μὴ πατὴρ ἢσθ᾽, εἶπον ἄν σ᾽ οὐκ εὖ φρονεῖν.
ΚΡ. γυναικὸς ὧν δούλευμα μὴ κώτιλλέ με.
ΑἹ. βούλει λέγειν τι καὶ λέγων μηδὲν κλύειν.
ΚΡ. ἄληθες ; ἀλλ᾽ οὐ τόνδ᾽ "Ολυμπον, ἴσθ᾽ ὅτι,
χαίρων ἐπὶ ψόγοισι δεννάσεις ἐμέ.
παρὰ δὲ Κυανεᾶν Ἐπελάγει διδύμας ἁλὸς
*axta Βοσπορίᾳ ἰδ’ ὁ Θρῃκῶν «κλήζεται":-
Σαλμυδησσός, ἵν᾽ ἀγχίπολις ”Apns
δισσοῖσι Φινεΐδαις
εἶδεν ἀρατὸν ἕλκος
τυφλωθὲν ἐξ ἀγρίας δάμαρτος
ἀλαὸν ἀλαστόροισιν ὀμμάτων κύκλοις,
Ἐἀραχθέντων ὑφ᾽ αἱματηραῖς
χείρεσσι καὶ κερκίδων ἀκμαῖσιν.
132. FACULTY ‘OF ARTS.
\ Ν / » / ’ / XN
(5) καὶ τὸν μέν, αἰτήσαντες ἐνοδίαν θεὸν
Πλούτωνά τ᾽ ὀργὰς εὐμενεῖς κατασχεθεῖν,
λούσαντες ἁγνὸν λουτρόν, ἐν νεοσπάσιν
θαλλοῖς ὃ δὴ ᾿λέλειπτο συγκατήθομεν,
καὶ τύμβον ὀρθόκρανον οἰκείας χθονὸς
χώσαντες, αὖθις πρὸς λιθόστρωτον κόρης
r e r ’ 7]
νυμφεῖον Αἰδου κοῖλον εἰσεβαίνομεν.
φωνῆς δ᾽ ἄπωθεν ὀρθίων κωκυμάτων
κλύει τις ἀκτέριστον ἀμφὶ παστάδα,
Ν , Yr 4 sf ,
καὶ δεσπότῃ ἹΚρέοντι σημαίνει μολών.
B.—TuucypIpEs VI.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
(1) καὶ μὴ ὑμᾶς ἡ Νικίου τῶν λόγων ἀπραγμοσύνη
καὶ διάστασις τοῖς νέοις ἐς τοὺς πρεσβυτέρους ἀποτρέψη.
τῷ δὲ εἰωθότι κόσμῳ, ὥσπερ καὶ οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν ἅμα νέοι
γεραιτέροις βουλεύοντες ἐς τάδε ἦραν αὐτά. καὶ νῦν τῷ
αὐτῷ τρόπῳ πειρᾶσθε προαγαγεῖν τὴν πόλιν, καὶ νομίσατε
νεότητα μὲν καὶ γῆρας ἄνευ ἀλλήλων μηδὲν δύνασθαι,
ὁμοῦ δὲ τό τε φαῦλον καὶ τὸ μέσον καὶ τὸ πάνυ ἀκριβὲς
x \ / 9 oN > 4
av ξυγκραθὲν μάλιστ᾽ ἂν ἰσχύειν.
(2) ξυγκατέβη δὲ καὶ ὁ ἄλλος ὅμιλος ἅπας ὡς εἰπεῖν
ees a , ves n \ t € \ ᾽ τισι πε στα ΛΟ
ὁ ἐν τῇ πόλει καὶ ἀστῶν καὶ ξένων. οἱ μὲν ἐπιχώριοι τοὺς
σφετέρους αὐτῶν ἕκαστοι προπέμποντες, οἱ μὲν ἑταίρους, οἱ
δὲ ξυγγενεῖς, οἱ δὲ ὑεῖς. καὶ μετ᾽ ἐλπίδος τε ἅμα ἰοντες καὶ
ὀλοφυρμῶν, τὰ μὲν ὡς κτήσοιντο. τοὺς, δ᾽ εἴ ποτε ὄψοιντο,
> Z. .“ “ 5 fel / IS Oe
ἐνθυμούμενοι ὅσον πλοῦν ἐκ τῆς σφετέρας ἀπεστέλλοντο.
rs) \ / / 4 \ A ss
(3) καὶ δέδοικα μέντοι μήποτε πολλὰ πειρῶντες Kal
κατορθώσωσιν: ἡμεῖς δὲ κακοί πρὶν ἐν τῷ παθεῖν ὦμεν
2 / \ > / > lal /
προφυλαξασθαί τε καὶ αἰσθόμενοι ἐπεξελθεῖν. τοιγάρτοι
δι᾿ αὐτὰ ἡ πόλις ἡμῶν ὀλιγάκις μὲν ἡσυχάζει, στάσεις δὲ
πολλὰς καὶ ἀγῶνας οὐ πρὸς τοὺς πολεμίους πλείονας ἢ πρὸς
αὑτὴν ἀναιρεῖται, τυραννίδας δὲ ἔστιν ὅτε καὶ δυναστείας
ἀδίκους.
(4) ᾿Ετείχιζον δὲ καὶ οἱ Συρακόσιοι ἐν τῷ χειμῶνι
n \ > x / A
πρός τε TH πόλει, TOY Τεμενίτην ἐντὸς ποιησάμενοι, τεῖχος
a PLA \ /
Tapa Tay τὸ πρὸς τὰς ᾿Επιπολὰς ὁρῶν, ὅπως μὴ dv ἐλάσ-
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 133
y , Ξ 4
σονος εὐαποτείχιστοι ὦσιν, ἢν ἄρα σφάλλωνται, καὶ τὰ
Μέγαρα φρούριον καὶ ἐν τῷ ᾿Ολυμπιείῳ ἄλλο: καὶ τὴν
θάλασσαν προεσταύρωσαν πανταχῆ 7 ἀποβάσεις ἦσαν.
Draw explanatory map.
(ΩΣ ἡμεῖς δὲ τοῦ ξύμπαντος προέστημεν, δικαιοῦντες
ἐν ᾧ σχήματι μεγίστη ἡ πόλις ἐτύγχανε καὶ ἐλευθερωτάτη
οὖσα καὶ ὅπερ ἐδέξατό τις, τοῦτο ξυνδιασῴζειν. ἐπεὶ
δημοκρατίαν γε καὶ ἐγυγνώσκομεν οἱ φρονοῦντές τι (καὶ
αὐτὸς οὐδενὸς ἂν χεῖρον. ὅσῳ κἂν λοιδορήσαιμι: ἀλλὰ περὶ
© / > / 7Q\ x Χ ΄, \ \
ὁμολογουμένης ἀνοίας οὐδὲν ἂν καινὸν λέγοιτο) Kal TO
μεθιστάναι αὐτὴν οὐκ ἐδόκει ἡμῖν ἀσφαλὲς εἶναι ὑμῶν
πολεμίων προσκαθημένων.
C.—PLaATO, PURVES’S SELECTIONS.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined indicating also connection with context :—
(1) διδάσκων οὗν pe τό τε φάρμακον καὶ Tas ET OAS;
Ὅπως, ἔφη. τῷ φαρμάκῳ τούτῳ μηδείς σε πείσει τὴν αὑτοῦ
κεφαλὴν θεραπεύειν, ὃς ἂν μὴ τὴν ψυχὴν πρῶτον παράσχῃ
τῇ ἐπῳδῇ ὑπὸ σοῦ θεραπευθῆναι. καὶ γὰρ νῦν, ἔφη, TOUT’
ἔστι τὸ ἁμάρτημα περὶ τοὺς ἀνθρώπους. ὅτι χωρὶς ἑκατέρου
ἰατροί τινες ἐπιχειροῦσιν εἶναι. καί μοι «πάνυ σφόδρα
ἐνετέλλετο μήτε πλούσιον οὕτω μηδένα εἶναι μήτε γενναῖον
f , ἃ 2 X f ” lal
μῆὴτε καλον, OS EME πείσει ἄλλως ποιεῖν.
(2) εἰ δὲ μή. ὅρα, ὦ μακάριε. μὴ περὶ τοῖς φιλτάτοις
-KuBevns τε καὶ κινδυνεύης. καὶ γὰρ δὴ καὶ πολὺ "μείζων
a
κίνδυνος ἐν τῇ τῶν μαθημάτων ὠνῇ ἢ ἐν TH τῶν σιτίων.
σιτία μὲν γὰρ καὶ ποτὰ πριάμενον παρὰ τοῦ καπήλου καὶ
ἐμπόρου ἔξεστιν ἐν ἄλλοις ἀγγείοις ἀποφέρειν. καὶ πρὶν
δέξασθαι αὐτὰ εἰς τὸ σῶμα πιόντα ἢ φαγόντα, καταθέμενον
οἴκαδε ἔξεστι συμβουλεύσασθαι. παρακαλέσαντα τὸν
ἐπαΐοντα.. ὅ τι τε ἐδεστέον ἢ ποτέον Kal ὅ TL μή. καὶ
ὁπόσον καὶ ὁπότε: ὥστε ἐν τῇ ὠνῇ οὐ μέγας ὁ κίνδυνος.
(9) ἢ οὕτως εἶ σοφός, ὥστε λέληθέ σε ὅτι μητρός τε
Ἂς Leal e ’ὔ ,
Kal πατρὸς Kal TOV ἄλλων προγόνων ἁπάντων τιμιώτερόν
3 ee
ἐστιν ἡ πατρὶς Kal σεμνότερον Kal ἁγιώτερον Kal ἐν μείζονι
μοίρᾳ καὶ παρὰ θεοῖς καὶ παρ᾽ ἀνθρώποις τοῖς νοῦν ἔχουσι.
134 : FACULTY ‘OF ARTS.
ν᾿ / al = “ id
καὶ σέβεσθαι Sei καὶ μᾶλλον ὑπείκειν καὶ θωπεύειν πατρίδα
/ BY , a
χαλεπαίνουσαν ἢ πατέρα, Kai ἢ πείθειν ἢ ποιεῖν a ἂν
΄ \ . / oy df / r
κελεύῃ. καὶ πάσχειν, ἐάν τι προστάττῃ παθεῖν, ἡσυχίαν
ἄγοντα.
\ ΄ \ G \ \ Rad 3:
(4) καὶ κινδυνεύουσι καὶ οἱ τὰς τελετὰς ὑμῖν οὗτοι
΄, > ἴω / 4 > \ Levey 1 /
καταστήσαντες οὐ φαῦλοί τινες εἰναι, ἀλλὰ TH OVTL πάλαι
αἰνίττεσθαι ὅτι ὃς ἂν ἀμύητος καὶ ἀτέλεστος εἰς “Αἰδου
ἀφίκηται, ἐν βορβόρῳ κείσεται, ὁ δὲ κεκαθαρμένος τε καὶ
Σ » lal >
τετελεσμένος ἐκεῖσε ἀφικόμενος μετὰ θεῶν οἰκήσει. εἰσὶ γὰρ
/ \ e \ x / tf \ /
δή, φασὶν of περὶ τὰς τελετάς, ναρθηκοφόροι μὲν πολλοί,
βάκχοι δέ τε παῦροι: οὗτοι δ᾽ εἰσὶ κατὰ τὴν ἐμὴν δόξαν οὐκ
5 is / ? rn
ἄλλοι ἢ οἱ πεφιλοσοφηκότες ὀρθῶς.
f le ft
(5) αἱ δὲ δὴ ἄλλαι γλιχόμεναι μὲν ἅπασαι τοῦ ἄνω
ἕπονται; ἀδυνατοῦσαι δὲ ὑποβρύχιαι ξυμπεριφέρονται.
r > / \ Ψ / € le ἣν an
πατοῦσαι ἀλλήλας Kal ἐπιβάλλουσαι, ἑτέρα πρὸ τῆς
e / / / / i \ “ \
ἑτέρας πειρωμένη γενέσθαι. θόρυβος οὖν Kat ἅμιλλα καὶ
© Χ » / e \ / € , \ Ν
ἱδρὼς ICON OOS eT ov δὴ ἐπα ἃ ἡνιόχῶν πολλαι μὲν
χωλεύονται, πολλαὶ δὲ πολλὰ πτερὰ θραύονται: πᾶσαι δέ,
\ ” a > fn GN ΤῊ / > !
πολὺν ἔχουσαι πόνον, ἀτελεῖς τῆς τοῦ OVTOS θέας ἀπέρχον-
ται, καὶ ἀπελθοῦσαι τροφῇ δοξαστῇ χρῶνται.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
PINDAR.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Translate with notes on words and phrases underlined-
(a) ἔχει δ᾽ ἀπάλαμον βίον τοῦτον ἐμπεδόμοχθον,
μετὰ τριῶν τέταρτον πόνον, ἀθανάτων ὅτι κλέψαις
ἁλίκεσσι συμπόταις
νέκταρ ἀμβροσίαν τε
δῶκεν, οἷσιν ἄφθιτον
ἔθεσαν. εἰ δὲ θεὸν ἀνήρ τις ἔλπεται λελαθέμεν
ἔρδων, ἁμαρτάνει.
Mes. €éoav attov. λαθέμεν.
eS
(0)
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 135
»Μ A , ’ /
(Ὁ) ἴσαις δὲ νύκτεσσιν αἰεί
v7 εν τε mene Ὁ ” ) ,
ἴσον ἐν ἁμέραις ἅλιον ἔχοντες, ἀπονέστερον
ἐσλοὶ δέκονται βίοτον, οὐ χθόνα ταράσσοντες ἐν
χερὸς ἀκμᾷ
οὐδὲ πόντιον ὕδωρ
ΓΑ
κεινὰν παρὰ Siafrav’ ἀλλὰ παρὰ μὲν τιμίοις
θεῶν, οἵτινες ἔχαιρον εὐορκίαις, ἄδακρυν νέμονταί
αἰῶνα" τοὶ δ᾽ ἀπροσόρατον ὀκχέοντι πόνον.
ὅσοι δ᾽ ἐτόλμασαν ἐστρίς
ἑκ ττέρωθι μείναντες ἀπὸ πάμπαν ἀδίκων ἔχειν
ψυχάν, ἔτειλαν Διὸς ὁδὸν παρὰ Κρόνου τύρσιν'
” x ΄ Semele Tag OF ΣΕ Oy. oF,
Mss. ἔσαις δὲ νύκτεσσιν αἰεί, ἴσαις δ᾽ ἐν ἀμέραις.
> ͵ ΄ὔ \ 7, B t 4.5 > 7
ἀλλα κέκρυπτο γὰρ σχοίνῳ βατίᾳ τ ἐν ἀπειρίτῳ,
ἴων ξανθαῖσι καὶ παμπορφύροις ἀκτῖσι βεβρεγμένος
ἁβρόν
σῶμα" τὸ καὶ κατεφάμιξεν καλεῖσθαι νιν χρόνῳ
σύμπαντι μάηρ
τοῦτ᾽ ὄνυμ᾽ ἀθάνατον. τερπνᾶς δ᾽ ἐπεὶ χρυσοστε-
φάνοιο λάβεν
καρπὸν Ἥ Bas, ᾿Αλφεῷ μέσσῳ καταβὰς ἐκάλεσσε
Ποσειδᾶν᾽ εὐρυβίαν,
ὃν πρόγονον καὶ τοξοφόρον Δάλου θεοδμάτας πκοπόν
αἰτέων λαοτρόφον τιμάν τιν᾽ ἑᾷ κεφαλᾷ,
νυκτὸς ὑπαίθριος. ἀντεφθέγξατο δ᾽ ἀρτιεπής
“ » Ul ,ὕ / ” /
TaTpia occa μετάλλασέν TE νιν' Ορσο, τέκος,
᾽
δεῦρο πάγκοινον ἐς χώραν ἴμεν φάμας ὄπισθεν.
aN \ ΄, \ ΄ > , ΄,
ἐπὶ πὰν βαίνει τι καὶ λάθας ἀτέκμαρτα νέφος,
καὶ παρέλκει πραγμάτων ὀρθὰν ὁδόν
ἔξω φρενῶν.
\ \ ἈΝ ’ 4 » / Ϊ᾿ > ΄
καὶ τοὶ γὰρ αἰθούσσας ἔχοντες σπέρμ᾽ ἀνέβαν φλο-
γὸς οὔ: τεῦξαν δ᾽ ἀπύροις ἱεροῖς
” 2 > , / ς Ἂν \ > \
ἄλσος ἐν ἀκροπόλει. κείνοις ὁ μὲν EavOav ἀγαγὼν
νεφέλαν
ν - / FEN ΄, ” ΄
πολὺν ὗσε χρυσόν" αὐτὰ δέ σφισιν ὥπασε τέχναν
πᾶσαν ἐπιχθονίων Τ'λαυκῶπις ἀριστοπόνοις χερσὶ
κρατεῖν.
ἔργα δὲ ζωοῖσιν ἑρπόντεσσί θ᾽ ὁμοῖα κέλευθοι φέρον"
ἣν δὲ κλέος βαθύ. δαέντι δὲ καὶ σοφία μείζων
ἄδολος τελέθει.
Mss. κείνοισι μέν.
136
(e)
(f)
FACULTY OF ARTS.
καιρὸν εἰ φθέγξαιο, πολλῶν πείρατα συντανύι AS
ἐν βραχεῖ, μείων ἕπεται μῶμος ἀνθρώπων, ἀπ᾽, γὰρ
κόρος ἀμβλύνει
αἰανὴς ταχείας ἐλπίδας"
ἀστῶν δ᾽ ἀκοὰ κρύφιον θυμὸν βαρύνει μάλιστ᾽
ἐσλοῖσιν ea ἀλλοτρίοις.
ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως, κρέσσὼν γὰρ οἰκτιρμοῦ φθόνος͵
μὴ maple καλά. νώμα δικαίῳ πηδαλίῳ στρατόν.
ἀψευδεῖ δὲ πρὸς ἄκμονι χάλκευε γλῶσσαν.
εἴ τι καὶ φλαῦρον παραιθύσσει., μέγα τοι φέρεται
παρ σέθεν. πολλῶν ταμίας ἐσσί πολλοὶ μάρτυρες
ἀμφοτέροις πιστοί.
ἄμαχον κακὸν ἀμφοτέροις διαιβολιᾶν ὑποφάτιες;,
3 a > x >» “ Μ
ὀργαῖς ἀτενὲς ἀλωπέκων ἴκελοι.
r Ν Νὴ fi a / 4 -
κερδοῖ δὲ τί μάλα τοῦτο κερδαλέον τελέθει ;
ἅτε γὰρ εἰνάλιον πόνον ἐχοίσας βαθύ
(σ)
σκευᾶς ἑτέρας, ἀβαπτιστοός εἰμι, φελλὸς ὡς ὑπὲρ
ἕρκος ἅλμας.
», a \ ? > c
ἀδύνατα δ᾽ ἔπος ἐκβαλεῖν κραταιὸν ἐν ἀγαθοῖς
͵ » , ev \ 4 A Ul »
δόλιον ἀστόν' ὅμως μὰν σαίνων ποτὶ πάντας ἄγαν
πάγχυ διαπλέκει.
οὔ οἱ μετέχω θράσέος. φίλον εἴη φιλεῖν'
Ὁ > \ ¢ Ν
ποτὶ δ᾽ ἐχθρὸν ἅτ᾽ ἐχθρὸς ἐὼν λύκοιο δίκαν ὑπο-
θεύσομαι,
ἄλλ᾽ ἄλλοτε πατέων δδοῖς σκολιαῖς.
ἐν πᾶντα δὲ νόμον εὐθύγλωσσος ἀνὴρ προφέρει.
« >, > U
ὁ δ᾽ dpa χρόνῳ
“ > ’ rn 7 > \ ” 3 4
ἵκετ᾽ αἰχμαῖσιν διδύμαισιν ἀνὴρ ἔκπαγλος" ἐσθὰς
δ᾽ ἀμφότερόν νιν ἔχεν,
Ὁ ΄ ᾽ , e Keo el. ἥδ ει τ- = /
ἅ τε Μαγνήτων ἐπιχώριος ἁρμόζοισα θαητοῖσι γυίοις,
ἀμφὶ δὲ παρδαλέᾳ στέγετο φρίσσοντας ὄμβρους"
γον an , (SEP τς CET es ee τ Τὴν δ᾿
οὐδὲ κομᾶν πλόκαμοι κερθέντες ᾧχοντ᾽ ἀγλαοί,
ἀλλ᾽ ἅπαν νῶτον καταίθυσσον. τάχα δ᾽ εὐθὺς ἰὼν
σφετέρας
ἐστάθη γνώμας ἀταρμύκτοιο πειρώμενος
ἐν ἀγορᾷ πλήθοντος ὄχλου.
Mss. ἀταρβάκτοιο.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 137
(h) εἰ δ᾽
apeTe κατάκειται πᾶσαν ὀργάν,
ἀμφότερον δαπάναις τε καὶ πόνοις,
χρή τιν εὑρόντεσσιν ἀγάνορα κόμπον
μὴ φθονεραῖσι φέρειν
γνώμαις ἐπεὶ κούφα δόσις ἀνδρὶ σοφῷ
ἀντὶ μόχθων παντοδαπῶν, ἔπος εἰπόντ᾽ ἀγαθὸν Ev-
νὸν ὀρθῶσαι καλον.
μισθὸς γὰρ ἄλλοις ἄλλος ἐφ᾽ ἕργμασιν ἀνθρώποις
γλυκύς,
λοβό ᾿ ἀρότᾳ 7 ὀρνιχολόχῳ ὶ ὃν πὸ
μηλοβότᾳ τ᾽’ ἀρότᾳ ρνιχολόχῳ τε καὶ ὃν πόντος
τραφει.
γαστρὶ δὲ πᾶς τις ἀμύνων λιμὸν αἰανὴ τέταται"
2. Comment on:
(4)
()
(0)
(ὦ
()
f)
(9)
(h)
ἐν δὲ Πυθῶνι χρησθὲν παλαίφατον τέλεσσεν.
ἑπτὰ δ᾽ ἔπειτα πυρᾶν νεκρῶν τελεσθέντων Ταλαιο-
νίδας εἶπεν. -.-.....
ὄφρα κελεύθῳ τ᾽ ἐν καθαρᾷ
βάσομεν ὄκχον, ἵκωμαΐ τε πρὸς ἀνδρῶν καὶ γένος.
Φοίβου γὰρ αὐτὸν φᾷ γεγάκειν πατρός.
μνασθέντι δὲ Ζεὺς ἀμ warov μέλλεν θέμεν.
εἰ δὲ σὺν πόνῳ τις εὖ πράσσῃ μελυγάρυες ὕμνοι
ὑστέρων ἀρχὰ λόγων τέλλεται
ἔλπομαι μὴ χαλκοπάραον ἄκονθ᾽ ὡσείτ᾽ ἀγῶνος
βαλεῖν ἔξω παλάμᾳ δονέων,
μακρὰ δὲ ῥίψραις ἀμεύσεσθ' ἀντίους.
? δὲ ὙΠ ὃς Geov οὐκ Ἑ ΤΑ
XP?) pP Pes
Cs ” > [+ \ / “ ,
(4) ἔνθ᾽ ἁγνὸν Ἰ]οσειδάωνος ἕσσαντ᾽ εἰναλίου τέμενος.
2. )]
(α)
(0)
scuss the following MS. readings :—
>
τραπέζαισί T ἀμφιδεύτατα κρεῶν
ΤΟΣ διεδάσαντο καὶ payov.
Θήρωνα δὲ TE τραορίας ἕνεκα “νικαφόρου
γεγωνητέον, ὄπιν δίκαιον ξένων.
τὰ γλυκέα γίνεται πάντα βροτοῖς
& ἐν μελέταις τ᾽ ἀείδων ἔμολον)
εὐναὶ δὲ παράτροποι ἐς κακότατ᾽ ἀθρόαν
ἔβαλον ποτὶ καὶ τὸν ἵκοντ᾽, ἐπεὶ.........
138 : FACULTY OF ARTS.
(6) οὐδ᾽ ἀπίθησέ νιν, ἀλλ᾽ HPWS.++00008
(f) Αἴσονος γὰρ παῖς ἐπιχώριος οὐ ξείναν ἱκόμαν
γαῖαν ἄλλων.
(where for ἱκόμαν is wanted ὦ --- —)
4. Discuss Pindar’s treatment of the myth, indicating
some of the various ways in which it is related to the
main subject.
5. Make a short list of the chief normal differences
between Pindar and Attic prose in. Accidence and
Syntax.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
PLATO, ΕΘ ΑΝ SHEECLIONS:
TUESDAY, APRIL 21ST, 1903:—MorRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Translate, with notes on words and phrases un-
derlined, indicating also, except in (9), connection with
the context :—
(a) εὐθὺς οὖν με ἰδὼν ὁ Κέφαλος ἠσπάζετο τε καὶ
+) > νι , Ψ δὲ θ / ς rn / ’ Ν
εἶπεν Ὦ, Σώκρατες, οὐ δὲ θαμίζεις ἡμῖν καταβαίνων εἰς τὸν
rn fol , 3
Πειραιᾶ: χρῆν μέντοι" εἰ μὲν yap ἐγὼ ἔτι ἐν δυνάμει ἣν
aA e ie ΄ὔ \ Ἂς ” Oe ” ES
τοῦ ῥᾳδίως πορεύεσθαι πρὸς TO ἄστυ, οὐδὲν ἄν σε ἔδει
5 rs 7 > >, ες a x \ \ oT COED E. \
ευρο ἰέναι, ἀλλ᾽ ἡμεῖς ἂν παρὰ σὲ MEV’ VUV O€ σε χρὴ
πυκνότερον δεῦρο ἰέναι.
eo} \ > ἊΝ \
(b) ἔστι δὲ τοῦτο τυραννίς, ἣ OV κατὰ σμικρὸν
“ \ € \
τἀλλότρια καὶ λάθρᾳ καὶ βίᾳ ἀφαιρεῖται, καὶ ἱερὰ
᾿ \ / "
καὶ ὅσια καὶ ἴδια καὶ δημόσια, ἀλλὰ ξυλλήβδην
‘2 3:.,.3 ς ΄ / “ +6 ΄ \ NY (0
ὧν ἐφ᾽ ἑκάστῳ μέρει ὅταν τις ἀδικήσας μὴ λαθῇῃ,
rn / \ \
ζημιοῦταί τε Kal ὀνείδη ἔχει τὰ μέγιστα: Kal yap
\< ΤᾺ \ >
ἱερόσυλοι Kal ἀνδραποδισταὶ καὶ τοιχωρύχοι Kal ἀπο-
στερηταὶ καὶ κλέπται οἱ κατὰ μέρη ἀδικοῦντες τῶν
Trey) rae lal ’ \ / \
τοιούτων κακουργημάτων καλοῦνται" ἐπειδὰν δέ τις πρὸς
a a a \ μ
τοῖς τῶν πολιτῶν χρήμασιν καὶ αὐτοὺς ἀνδραποδισάμενος
ce ’ lal ’ / ’ tf
δουλώσηται, ἀντὶ τούτων τῶν αἰσχρῶν ὀνομάτων εὐδαΐί-
μονες καὶ μακάριοι κέκληνται.
Q ε , \
(c) ὁ yap νέος οὐχ οἷόστε κρίνειν ὅ TL TE ὑπόνοια καὶ
ἃ le > DIA REA “ Ἂ ι > a 60 ὃ ,
ὃ μή. ἀλλ᾽ ἃ ἂν τηλικοῦτος ὧν λάβῃ ἐν ταῖς δόξαις, δυσέ-
A ͵ : \
κνιπτά τε Kal ἀμετάστατα φιλεῖ γίγνεσθαι. ὧν δὴ.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 139
ἴσως ἕνεκα περὶ παντὸς ποιητέον, ἃ πρῶτα ἀκούουσιν ὅτι
A
κάλλιστα μεμυθολογημένα πρὸς ἀρετὴν ἀκούειν.
/ > ” Ἁ Μ B) / ? \
(d) Tiva οὖν ἄλλον σοφιστὴν οἴει ἢ ποίους ἰδιωτικοὺς
λόγους ἐναντία τούτοις τείνοντας κρατήσειν; Οἶμαι μὲν
οὐδένα, 7 δ᾽ ὅς. Ov yap, ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, ἀλλὰ καὶ τὸ ἐπι-
lal » 7
χειρεῖν πολλὴ ἄνοια. οὔτε yap γίγνεται οὔτε γέγονεν
οὐδὲ οὖν μὴ γένηται ἀλλοῖον ἦθος πρὸς ἀρετὴν παρὰ τὴν
τούτων παιδείαν πεπαιδευμένον, ἀνθρώπειον, ὦ ἑταῖρε.
θεῖον μέντοι κατὰ τὴν παροιμίαν ἐξαιρῶμεν λόγου.
΄ lal /
(ὁ) Τί δέ; ἡ πραότης ἐνίων τῶν δικασθέντων οὐ
, ΕἸ A “, a > , ͵7 > ,
κομψή; ἢ οὔπω εἶδες ἐν τοιαύτῃ πολιτείᾳ, ἀνθρώπων
καταψηφισθέντων θανάτου ἢ φυγῆς οὐδνέδττον αὐτῶν
ν ΄ \ ον τε Mee
μενόντων τε καὶ ἀναστρεφομένων ἐν μέσῳ, καὶ ὡς οὔτε,
φροντίζοντος οὔτε ὁρῶντος οὐδενὸς περινοστεῖ ὥσπερ ἥρως :
\ , >
Kai πολλούς γ᾽, ἔφη.
rn , ΄ en Ἐν , \ 7ὔ
(5) ταῦτα εἰπόντα ῥῖψαι ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς κλήρους.
Ἂν \ x © a δ
τὸν δὲ Tap αὑτὸν πεσόντα ἕκαστον ἀναιρεῖσθαι, πλὴν οὗ,
é δὲ οὐκ ἐᾶν: τῷ δὲ ἀνελομένῳ δῆλον εἶναι, ὁπόστος
’ Ν ral lal yy meee τ
etAnxelv’ μετὰ δὲ τοῦτο αὖθις τὰ τῶν βίων παραδείγματα
μετ τιν τ a - oN \ a \ ΄ a
εἰς TO πρόσθεν σφῶν θεῖναι ἐπὶ τὴν γῆν, πολὺ πλείω τῶν
παρόντων, εἶναι δὲ παντοδαπά: ζῴων τε γὰρ πάντων
βίους καὶ δὴ καὶ τοὺς ἀνθρωπίνους ἅπαντας. τυραννίδας
τε γὰρ ἐν αὐτοῖς εἶναι, τὰς μὲν διατελεῖς, τὰς δὲ καὶ
μεταξὺ διαφθειρομένας καὶ εἰς πενίας τε καὶ φυγὰς καὶ εἰς
πτωχείας τελευτώσας.
(σ) ΣΏ. ἼΑθρει δὴ περισκοπῶν, μή τις τῶν ἀμυήτων
» ,΄ SUN \ - ς OX ” JES by Xx ΑΒ.
ἐπακούῃ. εἰσὶν δὲ οὗτοι οἱ οὐδὲν ἄλλο οἰόμενοι εἶναι ἢ οὗ
x ΄ > \ na val / / \ \
ἂν δύνωνται ἀπρὶξ τοῖν χεροῖν λαβέσθαι, πράξεις δὲ καὶ
γενέσεις καὶ πᾶν τὸ ἀόρατον οὐκ ἀποδεχόμενοι ὡς ἐν οὐσίας
μέρει.
@EAI. Καὶ μὲν δή, ὦ Σώκρατες, σκληρούς γε λέγεις
καὶ | ἀντιτύπους ἀνθρώπους.
YQ. Εἰσὶν γάρ, ὦ παῖ, μάλ᾽ εὖ ἄμουσοι.
2. Comment οὐ :--
ς , \ > i e A
(a) ὡς τοίνον μὴ ἀκουσομένων, οὕτω διανοεῖσθε.
(Ὁ) οἱ δ᾽ ἀρχόμενοι ποιοῦσιν τὸ ἐκείνου ξύμφερον
κρείττονος ὄντος.
140 ἱ FACULTY! OF ARTS.
(c) τοὺς ἐπιτυχόντας ὑπὸ τῶν ἐπιτυχόντων μύθους
πλασθέντας.
(ὦ) Παραδείγματος ἄρα ἕνεκα, ἣν δ᾽ ἐγώ, ἐζητοῦμεν
αὐτό τε δικαιοσύνην οἷόν ἐστι, καὶ ΠΝ τὸν τελέως δίκαιον.
() ἐν γυναιξὶ δὲ πρὸς ἄνδρας: καὶ ἀνδράσι πρὸς γυναῖκας
ὅση ἡ ἰσονομία καὶ ἐλευθερία γίγνεται, ὀλίγου ἐπελαθόμεθ᾽
εἰπεῖν.
({) καὶ ἀναλώσει τῆς οὐσίας καθ᾽ ὅσον ἂν οἷός τ᾽ ἢ.
0) τῶν δὲ εὐθὺς “γενομένων καὶ ὀλίγον χρόνον βιούντων
πέρι ἄλλα ἔλεγεν οὐκ ἄξια μνήμης.
(h) Οὐχ ἥκει, φάναι, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἥξει δεῦρο.
3. Explain the general scheme of the “Republic.”
Criticize the model state from the point of view of
modern political theory.
4. In what connection are the following mentioned:
—Agamemnon, Achelous, Thamyras, Niobe, Pandarus.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
. Translate :—
(a) Τί οὖν ἔσθ᾽ ὃ πέπονθε: Μεγάλην vn AG ὦφλε
δίκην καὶ τοσαύτην ὥστ᾽ ἀποστερεῖσθαι τῶν ὄντων. ἀλλὰ
χιλίων ἡ δίκη μόνον ἣν δραχμῶν. ἸΠάνυ γε: ἀλλὰ δάκνει
καὶ τοῦτο φαίη τις ἂν ὅταν ἐκτίνειν ἀδίκως δέῃ: συνέβη δὲ
ὑπερημέρω γενομένῳ λαθεῖν ἀυτῷ διὰ τὸ ἀδικηθῆναι. ἀλλ᾽
αὐθημερὸν μὲν ἤσθετο: ὃ καὶ μέγιστόν ἐστι τεκμήριον τοῦ
μηδὲν ἠδικηκέναι τὸν ἄνθρωπον: δραχμὴν δ᾽ οὐδέπω μιαν
ἐκτέτικεν. ἀλλὰ μήπω τοῦτο. ἀλλὰ τὴν μὴ οὖσαν ἀντι-
λαχεῖν αὐτῷ ἐξῆν δήπου καὶ πρὸς ἐμὲ τὸ πρᾶγμα καταστή-
σασθαι πρὸς ὅνπερ ἐξ ἀρχῆς ἣν ἡ δίκη. ἀλλ᾽ οὐκ ἠβούλετο.
(b) Καὶ εἰ μὴ Τηλεφάνης ὁ αὐλητὴς ἀνδρῶν βέλτι-
στος περὶ ἐμὲ τότε ἐγένετο καὶ τὸ πρᾶγμα αἰσθόμενος τὸν
ἄνθρωπον ἀπελάσας αὐτὸς συγκροτεῖν καὶ διδάσκειν WETO
δεῖν τὸν χορὸν, οὐδ᾽ ἂν ἠγωνισάμεθα, ὦ ἄνδρες Αθηναῖοι"
δὰ.
ees.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 141
ἀλλ᾽ adidaxtos ἂν εἰσῆλθεν ὁ χορὸς Kal πράγματα
ἄισχιστα ἂν ἐπάθομεν. καὶ οὐδ᾽ ἐνταῦθ᾽ ἔστη τῆς ὕβρεως
ἀλλὰ τοσοῦτον αὐτῷ περιῆν ὥστε τὸν ἐστεφανωμένον
ἄρχοντα διέφθειρε: τοὺς χορηγοὺς συνῆγεν ἐπ᾽ ἐμέ: βοῶν
ἀπειλῶν ὀμνύουσι παρεστηκὼς τοῖς κριταῖς τὰ παρασκήνια
φράττων, προσηλῶν, ἰδιώτης ὧν τὰ δημόσια κακὰ καὶ
πράγματα ἀμύθητά μοι παρέχων διετέλεσε.
(c) Τοσούτων τοίνυν καὶ τοιούτων ὄντων ἃ τῷ βδελυρῷ
τούτῳ καὶ ἀναιδεῖ βεβίωται, ἔνιοί μοι προσιόντες, ὦ ἄνδρες
δικασταὶ, τῶν χρωμένων αὐτῷ, πτπαραινοῦντες ἀπαλλαγῆναι
καὶ καθυφεῖναι τὸν ἀγῶνα τουτονὶ, ἐπειδὴ με μὴ πείθοιεν,
ὡς μὲν οὐ πολλὰ καὶ δεινὰ πεποίηκεν οὗτος καὶ δίκην
ἡντινοῦν ἂν δοίη δικαίως τῶν πεπραγμένων οὐκ ἐτόλμων
λέγειν, ἐπὶ ταῦτα δὲ ἀπήντων ὡς ἥλωκεν ἤδη καὶ κατεψή-
φισται. τίνος τιμήσειν αὐτῷ προσδοκᾷς τὸ δικαστήριον ;
οὐχ ὁρᾷς ὅτι πλουτεῖ καὶ τριηραρχίας ἐρεῖ καὶ λειτουργίας ;
σκόπει δὴ μὴ τούτοις αὑτὸν ἐξαιτήσηται καὶ ἐλάττω πολὺ
τῇ πόλει καταθὲις ἢ ὅσα σοι δίδωσι, καταγελάσῃ. ἐγὼ δὲ
πρῶτον μὲν οὐδὲν ἀγεννὲς ὑμῶν καταγιγνώσκω οὐδ᾽ ὑπο-
λαμβάνω τιμήσειν οὐδενὸς ἐλάττονος τούτῳ ἢ ὅσον καταθεὶς
οὑτωσὶ παύσεται τῆς ὕβρεως.
Add a note on the mood of πείθοιεν.
(dy Ἦν δ᾽ οὗτος ὁ τοῦ βελτίστου πατὴρ Χαρικλείδου
τοῦ ἄρξαντος καὶ μέγα γ᾽ ὑμῖν TOUT’ ἐδόκει δίκαιον ἔχειν ὁ
προβαλλόμενος λέγειν" εἰ κατελάμβανον, ἄνθρωπε, θέἔαν,
εἰ μὴ τοῖς κηρύγμασιν, ὡς σύ με NS, ἐπειθόμην, τίνος ἐκ
Le) / 5 Α Ν e A > fe “ Ὁ /
TOV νόμων εἶ κύριος Kal ὁ ἄρχων αὐτύς ; τοῖς ὑπηρέταις
ἐξείργειν εἰπεῖν, οὐκ αὐτὸς τύπτειν. οὐδ᾽ οὕτω πείθομαι"
ἐπιβολὴν ἐπιβάλλειν, πάντα μᾶλλον͵ πλὴν αὐτὸς ἅψασθαι
τῇ χειρί. πολλὰ γὰρ πρὸ τοῦ μὴ τὸ σῶμα ἕκαστον ὑβρί-
ζεσθαι πεποιήκασιν οἱ νόμοι.
2. Translate the following and add a word of com-
ment or explanation where necessary :—
νύκτωρ, (pounvia, πρόεδρος, σκότους (Gen. ), ἐξούλης,
ἀγωνιῶντας, ἀπεδιήτησε, καταβραβευθέντα, κονιορτός,
κέρματα. πρόσφατος, τετύφωσθε. ἀνηρπάσθαι, ἀσχάλλειν,
ἔθνος. κύμβια, φθείρεσθαι πρὸς πλουσίους, ᾽᾿Ολυμπίασιν,
ἀντίδοσις, σκῦτος, ἐκλώζετε, ἔνη καὶ νέα, Σκιροφοριών.
4. Compare the rules which Demosthenes observes
for the rhythm of the final syllables of his sentences
with those preferred by Cicero.
142
FACULTY OF ARTS.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Translate into English :—
(1) ὡς δ᾽ ὅτ᾽ ἐν αἰγιαλῷ πολοηχέ! κῦμα θαλάσσης
()
ὄρνυτ ἐπασσύτερον, Ζεφύρου i ὕπο κινήσαντος"
πόντῳ μέν τε πρῶτα κορύσσεται, αὐτὰρ ἔπειτα
χέρσῳ ῥηγνύμενον μεγάλα βρέμει, ἀμφὶ δέ 7 ἄκρας
κυρτὸν ἰὸν κορυφοῦται͵ ἀπυπτύει δ᾽ ἁλὸς ἄχνην"
ὡς ToT’ ἐπασσύτεραι Δαναῶν κίνυντο φάλαγγες
νωλεμέως πόλεμονδε. ςέλευε δὲ οἷσιν ἕκαστος
ἡγεμόνων" οἱ δ᾽ ἄλλοι ἀκὴν ἴσαν (οὐδέ κε φαίης
τόσσον λαὸν ἕπεσθαι ἔχοντ᾽ ἐν στήθεσιν αὐδήν)
σιγῇ δειδίοτες σημάντορας" ἀμφὶ δὲ πᾶσιν
τεύχεα ποικίλ᾽ ἔλαμπε, τὰ εἱμένοι ἐστιχόωντο.
Τρῶες δ᾽, ὥστ᾽ ὄιες πολυπάμονος ἀνδρὸς ἐν αὐλῇ
μυρίαι ἑστήκασιν ἀμελγόμεναι γάλα λευκόν,
ἀξηχὲς μεμακυΐαι, ἀκούουσαι ὄπα ἀρνῶν"
ὧς Τρώων ἀλαλητὸς ἀνὰ στρατὸν εὐρὺν ὀρώρει.
ἔλθ᾽ ὦ διὰ ξουθᾶν γενύων ἐλελιζομένα,
θρήνοις ἐ ἐμοῖς ζυνεργὸς,
“ὠλένας μελέας πόνους,
τὸν ᾿Ιλιάδων τ᾽ ἀει----
δούσᾳ δακρυόεντα πόνον
᾿Αχαιῶν ὑ ὑπὸ λόγχαις,
ὅτ᾽ ἔμολεν, ἔμολε πεδία βαρβάρῳ πλάτᾳ,
ὃς ἔδραμε ῥόθια, μέλεα Ἰ]ριαμίδαις ἄγων
Λακεδαίμονος ἄπο λέχεα
σέθεν, ὦ ᾿λένα, lapis αἰνόγαμος
πομπαῖσιν ᾿Αφροδίτας.
πολλοὶ δ᾽ ᾿Αχαιῶν" ἐν δορὶ καὶ πετρίναις
ῥιπαῖσιν ἐκπνεύσαντες “Atdav μέλεο» ἔχουσιν,
τάλαιναν ὧν ἀλόχων κείραντες ἔθειραν.
(9) καὶ οὐκ ἂν μείζω πρὸς τοῖς ὅρκοις βεβαίωσιν
λάβοιτε, ἢ οἷς τὰ ἔργα ἐκ τῶν λόγω» ἀναθρούμενα δόκησιν
> f e / e ΄ «
ἀναγκαίαν παρέχεται ὡς καὶ ξυμφέρει ὁμοίως; ὡς εἶπον. εἰ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY, 143
δ᾽ ἐμοῦ ταῦτα προϊσχομένου ἀδύνατοι μὲν φήσετε εἶναι,
εὗνοι δ᾽ ὄντες ἀζιώσετε μὴ κακούμενοι διωθεῖσθαι καὶ τὴν
ἐλευθερίαυ μὴ ἀκίνδυνον ὑμῖν φαίνεσθαι, δίκαιόν τε εἶειν,,
οἷς καὶ δυνατὸν δέχεσθαι αὐτὴν, τούτοις καὶ ἐπιφέρναι
ἄκοντα δὲ μηδένα προσαναγκάζειν, μάρτυρας μὲν θεοὺς καὶ
ἥρωας τοὺς ἐγχωρίους ποιήσομαι ὡς ἐπ᾽ ἀγαθῷ ἥκων οὐ
πείθω, γῆν δὲ τὴ" ὑμετέραν δήων πειράσομαι βιάζεσθαι.
(4) ἐγὼ μὲν οὖν, ὦ Καλλίκλεις, ὑπὸ τούτων τῶν
λόγων πέπεισμαι, καὶ σκοπῶ ὅπως ἀποφανοῦμαι TH κρίτῃ
ὡς ὑγιεστάτην τὴν ψυχήν" χάιρειν οὖν ἐάσας τὰς τίμας
τὰς τῶν πολλῶν ἀνθρώπων͵ τὴν ἀλήθειαν σκοπῶν πειρά-
σομαι τῷ ὄντι ὡς ἂν δύνωμαι βέλτιστος OY καὶ ζῆν καὶ
ἐπειδὰν ἀποθνήσκω ἀποθνήσκειν. παρακαλῶ δὲ καὶ τοὺς
ἄλλους πάντας ἀνθρώπους, καθ᾽ ὅσον δύναμαι, καὶ δὴ καὶ
σὲ ἀντιπαρακαλῶ ἐπὶ τοῦτον τὸν βίον καὶ τὸν ἀγῶνα
τοῦτον, ὃν ἐγώ φημι ἀντὶ πάντων τῶν ἐνθάδε ἀγάνων εἶναι,
καὶ ὀνειδίζω σο., ὅτι οὐχ οἷός T ἔσει σαυτῷ δοηθῆσαι,
ὅταν ἡ δίκη σοι ἢ καὶ ἡ κρίσις ἣν νυνδὴ ἐγὼ ἔλεγον, ἀλλὰ
ἐλθὼν παρὰ τὸν δικαστὴν τὸν τῆς Alyivns bov, ἐπειδάν
σου ἐπιλαβόμενος ἄγῃ, χασμήσει καὶ εἰλιγγιάσεις οὐδὲν
ἧττον ἢ ἐγὼ ἐνθάδε σὺ ἐκεῖ, καί σε ἴσως τοπτήσει τις ἐπὶ
κόρρης καὶ πάντως προπηλακιεῖ.
(5) καίτοι καὶ περὶ τῆς φωνῆς tows εἰπεῖν ἀνάγκη
πανυ γὰρ μέγα καὶ ἐπὶ ταύτῃ φρονεῖν αὐτὸν ἀκούω, ὡς
καθυποκρινούμενον ὑμᾶς. ἐμοὶ δὲ δοκεῖτ᾽ ἀτοπώτατον
ἁπάντων ἂν ποιῆσαι, εἰ, ὅτε μὲν τὰ Θυέστου καὶ τῶν ἐπὶ
Τροίᾳ κάκ᾽ ἠγωνιζετο, ἐξεβάλλετ᾽ αὐτὸν καὶ ἐξεσυρίττετ᾽
ἐκ τῶν θεάτρων καὶ μόνον οὐ κατελεύετ᾽ οὕτως, ὥστε
“ fal lal 4 Q
“TENEUTWVTA τοῦ τριταγωνιστεῖν ἀποστῆναι, ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ οὐκ
ἐπὶ τῆς σκηνῆς ἀλλ᾽ ἐν τοῖς κοινοῖς καὶ μεγίστοις τῆς
πόλεως πράγμασι μυρί᾽ εἴργασται κακὰ, τηνικαῦθ᾽ ὡς
καλὸν φθεγγομένᾳ προσέχοιτε. μηδαμῶς. μηδὲν ὑμεῖς
ἀβέλτερον πάθητε, ἀλλὰ λογίζεσθ᾽ ὅτι δεῖ κήρυκα μὲν ἂν
δοκιμάζητε, εὔφωνον σκοπεῖν, πρεσβευτὴν δὲ καὶ τῶν
κοινῶν ἀξιοῦντά τι πράττειν δίκαιον καὶ φρόνη μ᾽ ἔχονθ᾽
ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν μέγα, πρὸς δ᾽ ὑμᾶς ἴσον: ὥσπερ ἐγὼ Φίλιππον
μὲν οὐκ ἐθαύμασα, τοὺς δ᾽ αἰχμαλώτους ἐθαύμασα, ἔσωσα,
οὐδὲν ὑπεστειλάμην. οὗτος δ᾽ ἐκείνου μὲν προυκαλινδεῖτο
καὶ τοὺς παιᾶνας δεν, ὑμῶν δ᾽ ὑπερορᾷ.
10
144 } FACULTY OF ARTS.
(6) ILovAvrov aypevoas ποτὲ 'Τύνυιχος, ἐξ ἁλὸς εἰς γῆν
ἔρρεψεν, δείσας θηρὸς ἱμαντοπέδην.
ἀλλ᾽ oy ἐφ᾽ ὑπανώοντα πεσὼν συνέδησε λαγωόν,
φεῦ, τάχα θηρευτὰς ἄρτι φυγόντω κύνας.
ἀγρευθεὶς ἤγρευσεν,. ὁ δ᾽ εἰς ἅλα Τύννιχος ἰχθὸν
ἧκε πάλιν ζωὸν, λύτρα λαγωὸν ἔχων.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
GREEK PROSE.
TuESDAY, APRIL 2IST, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
In discussing each particular transaction in the life
of Charles, as of any other Sovereign, it is required by
the truth of history to spare no just animadversion
upon his faults; especially where so much art has been
employed by the writers most in repute to carry the
stream of public prejudice in an opposite direction.
But when we come to a general estimate of his char-
acter, we should act unfairly not to give their full
weight to those peculiar circumstances of his condition
in this wordly scene, which tend to account for and
extenuate his failings. The station of kings is, in a
moral sense, so unfavourable, that those who are least
prone to servile admiration should be on their guard
against the opposite error of an uncandid severity.
There seems to be no fairer method of estimating the
intrinsic worth of a sovereign than to treat him as a
subject, and to judge, so far as the history of his life
enables us, what he would have been in that more pri-
vate and happier condition, from which the chance of
birth has excluded him.
1
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 145
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
FOURTH YEAR.
GREEK, PRIVATE READINGS (PROSE).
Monpay APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
A.—HeEropotus VII.
Translate :-—
(1) ἐπειδὴ δὲ ἐγεφυρώθη ὁ πόρος, κορμοὺς ξύλων
κιταπρίσαντες καὶ ποιήσαντες ἴσους τῆς σχεδίης τῷ εὔρεϊ
κόσμῳ ἐτιθεσαν κατύπερθε τῶν ὅπλων τοῦ τόνου. θέντες δὲ
ἐπεξῆς ἐνθαῦτα αὖτις ἐπεζεύγνυον. ποιήσαντες δὲ ταῦτα
ὕλην ἐπεφόρησαν, κόσμῳ δὲ θέντες καὶ τὴν ὕλνη τῆν
ἐπεφόρησαν, κατανάξαντες δὲ καὶ τὴν γῆν φραγμὸν παρεί-
ρυσαν ἔνθεν καὶ ἔνθεν, ἵνα μὴ φοβέηται τὰ ὑποζύγια τὴν
θάλασσαν ὑπερορῶντα [καὶ οἱ ἵπποι]. ὡς δὲ τά τε τῶν
γεφυρέων κατεσκεύαστο καὶ τὰ περὶ τὸν ἴΛθων, οἵ τε χυτοὶ
περι τὰ στόματα τῆς διώρυχος, ob τῆς ῥηχίης εἵνεκεν
ἐποιήθησαν, ἵ ἵνα μὴ πίμπληται τὰ στόματα τοῦ ὀρύγματος,
καὶ αὑτὴ ἡ διῶρυξ παντελέως πεποιημένη ἀγγέλλετο, ἐν-
σαῦτα χειμερίσας ἅμα τῷ ἔαρι παρεσκευασμένος ὁ στρατὸς
ἐκ τῶν Σαρδίων ὁρμᾶτο ἐλῶν ἐς ΓΑ βυδον.
(2) Oc δὲ στρατευόμενοι οἵδε ἦσαν, Πέρσαι μὲν ὧδε
ἐσκευασμένοι" περὶ μὲν τησι κεφαλῃσι εἶχον τιάρας καλεο-
μένους, πίλους ἀπαγέας, περὶ δὲ τὸ σῶμα κιθώνας χειρι-
δωτοὺς ποικίλους. λεπιδος σιδηρέης ὄψιν ἰχθυηειδέος. περὶ
δὲ τὰ σκέλεα ἀναξυρίδας, a ἀντὶ δὲ ἀσπίδων γέρρα ὑπὸ δὲ
φαρετρεῶνες ἐκρέμαντο: αἰχμὰς δὲ βραχέας εἶχον, τόξα δὲ
μεγάλα, οἵστοις δὲ καλαμίνους, πρὸς δὲ ἐγχειρίδια παρὰ
τὸν δεξιὸν μηρὸν παραιωρεύμενα ἐκ τῆς ζώνης.
(9) σὺ δὲ ἐπεὶ ἠνάγκασας λέγειν τῶν λόγων τοὺς
ἀληθεστάτους. ἔλεγον τὰ κατήκοντα Σπαρτιήτῃσι. καίτοι
ὡς ἐγὼ τυγχάνω τὰ νῦν τάδε ἐστοργὼς ἐκείνους. αὐτὸς
μάλιστα ἐξεπίστεαι, οἵ με τιμήν τε καὶ γέρεα ἀπελόμενοι
πατεώια ἄπολίν τε καὶ φυγάδα πεποιήκασι, πατὴρ δὲ σὸς
ὑποδεξάμενος. βίον τέ μοι «αἱ οἶκον ἔδωκε. οὐκ ὧν οἰκός
ἐστι ἄνδρα τὸν σώφρονα εὐνοίην φαινομένην διωθέεσθαι
ἀλλὰ στέργειν μάλιστα.
140 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(4) ἡ δὲ Αἰγιναίη. τῆς ἐτριηράρχεε ᾿Ασωνίδης, Kai
τινά σφι θόρυβον παρέσχε {υθέω τοῦ ᾿Ισχενόου ἐπιβατε-
ύοντος, ἀνδρὸς ἀρίστου γενομένου ταύτην τὴν ἡμέρην' ὃς
ἐπειδὴ ἡ νηῦς ἡλίσκετο ἐς τοῦτο ἀντεῖχε μαχόμενος ἐς ὃ
κατεκρεουργήθη ἅπας. ὡς δὲ πεσὼν οὐκ ἀπέθανε ἀλλ᾽
ἣν ἔμπνοος, οἱ Πέρσαι, οἵ περ ἐπεβάτευον ἐπὶ τῶν νεῶν,
ὁι᾿ ἀρετὴν τὴν ἐκείνου περιποιῆσαί μιν περὶ πλείστου
ἐποιήσαντο. σμύρνῃσί τε ἰώμενοι τὰ ἕλκεα καὶ σινδόνος
βυσσίνης τελαμῶσι κατειλίσσοντες" καί μιν ὡς ὀπίσω
ἀπίκοντο ἐς τὸ ἑωυτῶν στρατόπεδον, ἐπεδείκνυσαν ἐκπαγ-
λεόμενοι πάσῃ τῇ στρατιῇ. περιέποντες Ev" τοὺς δὲ ἄλλους
τοὺς ἔλαβον ἐν τῇ νηὶ ταύτῃ περιεῖπον ὡς ἀνδράποδα.
(5) ἣν δὲ λόγος οὐδεὶς τοῦ ἀπολλυμένου. ἅτε γὰρ
ἐπιστάμενοι τὸν μέλλοντα σφίσι ἔσεσθαι θάνατον ἐκ τῶν
περιιόντων τὸ ὄρος. ἀπεδείκνυντο ῥώμης ὅσον εἶχον μέγισ-
τον ἐς τοὺς βαρβάρους. παραχρεώμενοϊ τε καὶ ἀτέοντες.
δόρατα μέν νυν τοῖσι πλέοσι αὐτῶν τηνικαῦτα ἤδη ἐτύγ-
χανε κατεηγότα, οἱ δὲ τοῖσι ξίφεσι διεργάζοντο τοὺς
ἸΙέρσας.
B=Agrrrc + ORATORS,
Translate, with any necessary explanations :—
(1) αὐτῶν δὲ τούτων ἕνεκα οἵ τε νόμοι Kai αἱ διωμο-
σίαι καὶ τὰ τόμια καὶ αἱ προρρήσεις, καὶ τἄλλα ὁπόσα
γίγνεται τῶν δικῶν ἕνεκα τοῦ φόνου, πολὺ διαφέροντά
ἐστιν ἢ ἐπὶ τοῖς ἄλλοις, ὅτε καὶ αὐτὰ τὰ πράγπατα, περὶ
πλείστου ἐστὶν ὀρθῶς γιγνώσκεσθαι" ὀρθῶς μὲν γὰρ γνωσ-
θέντα τιμωρία ἐστὶ τῷ ἀδικηθέντι, φονέα δὲ τὸν μὴ αἴτιον
ψηφισθῆναι ἁμαρτία καὶ ἀσέβειά ἐστιν ἐΐς τε τοὺς θεοὺς
καὶ εἰς τοὺς νόμους. καὶ οὐκ ἴσον ἐστὶ τόν τε διώκοντα μὴ
ὀρθῶς ἀιτιάσασθαι καὶ ὑμᾶς τοὺς δικαστὰς μὴ ὀρθῶς
γνῶναι. ἡ μὲν γὰρ τούτων ἀιτίασις οὐκ ἔχει τέλος. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν
ὑμῖν ἐστι καὶ τῇ δίκη. ὅ τι δ᾽ ἂν ὑμεῖς ἐν αὐτῇ Ty δίκῃ μὴ
ὀρθῶς γνῶτε, τοῦτο οὐκ ἔστιν ὅκοι ἄν τις ἀνενεγκὼν τὴν
ἁμαρτίαν ἀπολύσαιτο.
(2) “Edn γὰρ εἶναι μὲν ἀνδράποδόν οἱ ἐπὶ Λαυρίῳ,
δεῖν δὲ κομίσασθαι ἀποφορᾶν. ἀναστὰς δὲ πρῷ ψευσθεὶς
τῆς ὥρας βαδίξειν' εἶναι δὲ πανσέληνον. ἐπεὶ δὲ παρὰ τὸ
προπύλαιον τοῦ Διονύσου ἦν, ὁρᾶν ἀνθρώπους πολλοὺς
ἀπὸ τοῦ ὠδείου καταβαίνοντας εἰς τὴν ὀρχήστραν" δεῖσας
δὲ αὐτοὺς, εἰσελθὼν ὑπὸ τὴν σκιὰν καθέζεσθαι πεταξὺ τοῦ
κίονος καὶ τῆς στήλης ἐφ᾽ ἡ ὁ στρατηγός ἐστιν ὁ χαλκοῦς.
ey => 6a.
=, the
ἢ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 147
(3) ἐμὲ τοίνον οὐδεὶς ἂν ἀποδείξειεν σὔτ᾽ ἀπενεχθέντα
ὑπὸ τῶν φυλάρχων οὔτε παραδοθέντα τοῖς συ"ο“ίκοις οὔτε
κατάστασιν παραλαβόντα. καίτοι πᾶσι ῥόδιον τοῦτο
γνῶναι, Oot: ἀναγκαῖον ἣν τοῖς φολαρχοις, εἰ μὴ ἀποδεί.
ξειαν τοὺς ἔχοντας τὰς καταστάσεις, αὐτοῖς ζημιοῦσθαι"
ὥστε πολὺ ἂν δικαιότερον ἐκείνοις τοῖς γράμμασιν ἢ
τούτοις πιστεύοιτε: ἐκ μὲν γὰρ τούτων ῥᾷδιον ἣν ἐξαλειφ-
θῆναι τῷ βουλομένῳ, ἐν ἐκείνοις δὲ τοὺς ἱππεύσαντας
ἀναγκαῖον ἣν ὑπὸ τῶν φυλάρχων ἀπενεχθῆναι.
(4) πάντες οὖν ἀγνσοῦντες τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ, ἀκριβέ.
στατα ἂν ἔφασάν με πυθέηλιθόμνέ τρα ιεἰς τὴν χλωρὸν
τυρὸν τῇ ἔνῃ καὶ νέᾳ: ταύτῃ αἡέα aséaa θτοῦ μὸνὸς ἐκάσ-
του ἐκεῖσε συλλέγενθαι τοὺτ᾽ Χρα!|σγ τς
(5) ἐκεῖνοι γὰρ οὐκ ἐν μὲν ταῖς παιδείαις πολλοὺς
τοὺς ἐπιστατοῦντας εἶχον, ἐπειδὴ δ᾽ εἰς ἄνδρις δοκιμασ-
θεῖεν. ἐξῆν αὐτοῖς ποιεῖν ὅτι βουληθεῖεν. ἀλλ᾽ ἐν αὐταῖς ταῖς
ἀκμαῖς πλέονος ἐπιμελείας ἐτυγχανον ἢ παῖδες ὄντες" οὕτω
γὰρ ἡμῶν οἱ πρόγονοι σφόδρι περὶ τὴν σωφροσύνην
ἐσπούδαξον, ὥστε τὴν ἐξ᾽ Ἀρείου πάγου βουλὴν ἐπέστησαν
ἐπιμελεῖσθαι τῆς εὐκοσμίας, NS οὐχ οἷον T ἣν μετασχεῖν
πλὴν τοῖς καλῶς γεγονόσι καὶ πολλὴν ἀρετὴν ἐν τῷ βίῳ
καὶ σωφροσύνην ἐνδεδειγμένοις. ὥστι εἰκότως αὐτὴν διενε-
γκεῖν τῶν ἐν τοῖς Βλλησι συνεδρίων.
(0) σὐκοῦν δεινὸν ἐμοὶ μὲν διαρρήδην οὕτω τῶν νόμων
δεδωκότων τὴν κληρονομίαν, τούτους δ᾽ ἔξω τῆς ἀγχιστείας
πεποιηκότων, τολμᾶν τουτονὶ συκοφαντεῖν, καὶ διαγωνί-
σασθαι μὲν, ἡνίκ᾽ ἐγὼ τοῦ κλήρου τὴν δίκην ἐλάγχανον,
ἮΝ lo Wl ~
«μὴ οἴεσθαι δεῖν μηδὲ παρακαταβάλλειν, οὗ περὶ τῶν
΄ ὙΦ. % “ rn -
τοισύτων εἴ τι δίκαιον εἶχεν εἰπεῖν διαγνωσ θῆναι προσῆκεν,
2) τὴν ὮΝ τῆς \ " , ΄ ᾽ ᾽ \ / \
ἐπὶ δὲ τοῦ παιδὸς ὀνόματι πράγματ᾽ ἐμοὶ παρέχειν καὶ
περὶ τῶν μεγίστων εἰς κίνδυνον καθιστάναι.
ΘΑ ΞΘ πὶ ΉΤΟ bell, Oe:
Translate, and explain in reference to context :—
(1) οἱ δὴ κομίσαντες τὴν δόξαν ταύτην οὐκ ἐποίουν
ἰδέας ἐν οἷς τὸ πρότερον καὶ ὕστερον ἔλεγον, διόπερ οὐδὲ
τῶν ἀριθμῶν ἰδέαν κατεσκεύαζον: τὸ δ᾽ ἀγαθὸν λέγεται καὶ
ἐν τῷ τί ἐστι καὶ ἐν τῷ ποιῷ καὶ ἐν τῷ πρὸς TL, τὸ δὲ καθ᾽
αὑτὸ καὶ ἡ οὐσία πρότερον τῇ φύσει τοῦ πρὸς τι (παρα
148 FACULTY OF. ARTS.
7 \ nw 9 , Lal
φυάδι yap τοῦτ᾽ ἔοικε καὶ συμβεβηκότι τοῦ οὔντος)" ὥστ
᾽ a , ΄
οὐκ ἂν εἴη κοινή τις ἐπὶ τούτοις ἰδέα.
: TAN τα A ΝΣ tins κα \
(2) εἰ δὴ τὸ τελος ὁρᾶν δεῖ καὶ τότε μακαρίζειυ ἕκαςτον
> € y , ) " oo > 5
οὐχ ὡς ὄντα μακάριον ἀλλ᾽ OTL προτέρον ἦν, πῶς οὐχ UTO-
3. Aba) » > “
πον, εἰ ὅτ᾽ ἔστιν εὐδαίμων, μὴ ἐληθεύσεται κατ᾽ αὐτοῦ τὸ
ε ͵ ὃ \ \ \ \ θ \ na ᾽ ΄
ὑπάρχον διὰ τὸ μὴ βούλεσθαι τοὺς ζῶντας εὐδαιμονίζειν
διὰ τὰς μεταβολάς, καὶ διὰ τὸ μόνιμόν τι Tlir εὐδαιμονίαν
ὑπειληφέναι καὶ μηδαμῶς εὐμετάβολον, τὰς δὲ τύχας πολ-
λάκις ἀνακυκλεῖσθαι περὶ τοὺς αὐτοώς : δῆλεν γὰρ ὡς εἰ
συυακολουθοίημεν ταῖς τύχαις. τὸν αὐτὸν εὐδαίμονα καὶ πά.
λιν ἄθλιον ἐροῦμεν ποάλάκις. χαμαιλέονιά τινα Tov εὐδαί-
μονα ἀποφαίνοντες καὶ σαθρῶς ἱδρυμένον.
(8) περὶ δὲ τιμὴν καὶ ἀτιμίαν μεσότης μὲυ μεγαλο-
ψυχία, ὑπερβολὴ δὲ χαυνότης τις λεγομένη. ἐλλείψεις δὲ
μικροψυχία: ὡς δ᾽ ἐλέγομεν ἔχειν πρὸς τὴν μεγαλοπέπειαν
τὴν ἐλευθεριότητα. [τῷ] περὶ μικρὰ διαφέρουσαν. οὕτως ἔχει
τις καὶ πρὸς τὴν μεγαλοψυχίαν. περὶ τιμὴν οὖσαν μεγάλην.
αὐτὴ περὶ μικρὰν οὗσα: ἔστι γὰρ ὡς δεῖ ὀρέγεσθαι τιμῆς καὶ
μᾶλλον ἢ δεῖ καὶ ἧττον, λέγεται δ᾽ ὁ μὲν ὑπεβάλλων ταῖς
ὀρέξεσι φιλότιμος, ὁ δ᾽ ἐλλείπων ἀφιλότιμος. ὁ δὲ μέσος
ἀνώνυμος. ἀνώνυμοι δὲ καὶ αἱ διαθέσεις, πλὴν ἡ τοῦ
φιλοτίμου φιλοτιμία. ὅθεν ἐπιδικάζοντια οἱ ἄκροι τῆς
μέσης χώρας.
(4) τέλειόν τε τἀγαθὸν τιθέντες. τὰς δὲ κινήσεις καὶ
τὰς γενέσεις ἀτελεῖς, τὴν ἡδονὴν κίνησιν καὶ γένεσιν ἀπο-
φαίνειν πειρῶνται. οὐ καλῶς δ᾽ ἐοίκασι λέγειν οὐδ᾽ εἶναι
κίνησιν. πάσῃ γὰρ οἰκεῖον εἶναι δοκεῖ τύχος καὶ βραδυτής,
καὶ εἰ μὴ καθ᾽ αὑτὴν. οἷον τῇ τοῦ κόσμου. πρὸς ἄλλο: τῇ δ᾽
ἡδονῇ τούτων οὐδέτερον ὑπάρχει. ἡσθῆναι μὲν γὰρ ἔστι
ταχέως ὥσπερ ὀργισθῆναι, ἥδεσθαι δ᾽ οὔ, οὐδὲ πρὸς ἕτερον,
βαδίζειν δὲ καὶ αὔξεσθαι καὶ πάντα τὰ τοιαῦτα.
(5) ἔτι δὲ καὶ διαφέρουσιν αἱ Kav’ Ecactov παιδεῖᾶι
τῶν κοινῶν, ὥσπερ ἐπ᾽ ἰατρικῆς" καθολοῦ μὲν γὰρ τῷ πυρέτ-
τοντι συμφέρει ἡσυχία καὶ ἀσιτία. τινὶ δ᾽ ἴσως οὔ, ὅ τε
πυκτικὸς ἴσως οὐ πᾶσι τὴν αὐτὴν μάχην περιτίθησιν.
ἐξακριβοῦσθαι δὴ δόξειεν ἂν μᾶλλον τὸ καθ᾽ ἕκαστον ἰδίας
τῆς ἐπιμελείας γινομένης: μᾶλλον γὰρ τοῦ προσφόρου
τυγχάνει ἕκαστος. ἀλλ᾽ ἐριμελ’ θείη μὲν ἂν] ἄριστα καθ᾽
ἕν καὶ ἰατρὸς καὶ γυμναστὴς καὶ πᾶς ἄλλος ὁ καθόλου
εἰδώς. τί πᾶσιν ἢ τοῖς τοιοισδί (τοῦ κοινοῦ γὰρ αἱ ἐπιστῆμαι
λέγονταί τε καὶ εἰσίν.)
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 149
FOURTH YEAR.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
PRIVATE READINGS.
ARISTOPHANES RANAE, SOPHOCLES
TRACHINIAE, THEOCRITUS.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
ἘΣ
ω
(b)
(¢)
(d)
©
Translate adding a note where necessary :—
Παιδίον, παῖ nui, παῖ.
« lal
Ὡς κενταυρικῶς
ἐνήλαθ ὅστις.
᾿Αλλ᾽ οὐχ οἷός 7 εἴμ᾽ ἀποσοβῆσαι τὸν γέλων,
ὁρῶν λεοντῆν ἐπὶ κροκωτῷ κειμένην.
/ © na / / NPs ,
τίς ὁ vous; τί κόθορνος καὶ ῥόπαλον ζυνηλθέτην ;
Οὐ πρίν γ᾽ ἄν ᾿Ιοφῶντ᾽ ἀπολαβὼν, αὐτὸν μόνον
ἄνευ Σοφοκλέους ὅ τι ποιεῖ κωδωνίσω.
, a b) r
ΠΑ. Πλαθάνη. Πλαθάνη, δεῦρ᾽ ἔλθ᾽. ὁ πανοῦργος
οὑτοσί,
a ’ \ ΄ ΠῚ ,
ὃς εἰς τὸ πανδοκεῖον εἰσελθών ποτε
ἑκκαίδεκ᾽ ἄρτους κατέφαγ᾽ ἡμῶν. ILA. νὴ Δία.
> la > Χ A \ e /
ἐκεῖνος αὐτὸς δῆτα. ΘΑ. κακὸν ἥκει τινί.
ΠΑ. καὶ κρέα γε πρὸς τούτοισιν ἀνάβραστ᾽ εἴκοσι"
ede a ΄ j
av ἡμιωβολιαῖα. OA. δώσει τις δίκην.
ΠΑ. καὶ τὰ σκόροδα τὰ πολλά. ΔΙ. ληρεῖς, ὦ γίναι.
κοὺκ οἶσθ᾽ ὅ τι λέγεις. ΠΑ. οὐ μὲν οὗν με
προσεδόκας,
ς \ / “. x ΨᾺ aff ἌΝ
ὁτιὴ κοθόρνους εἶχες, ἂν γνῶναί σ᾽ ETL;
τί δαί; τὸ πολὺ τάριχος οὐκ εἴρηκα πω.
ΠΛ. μὰ Δί, οὐδὲ τὸν τυρόν γε τὸν χλωρόν. τάλαν,
> A = ΄ ,
ὃν οὗτος αὐτοῖς τοῖς ταλάροις κατήσθιεν.
ΠΑ. κἄπειτ᾽ ἐπειδὴ τἀργύριον ἐπραττόμην
ἔβλεψεν εἴς με δριμὺ κἀμυκᾶτο γε.
(ἢ) Τί δέ; μειαγωγήσουσι τὴν τραγῳδίαν ;
(9) Νὴ τοὺς θεούς, νῦν γοῦν ᾿Αθη---
ναίων ἅπας τις εἰσιὼν
κέκραγε πρὸς τοὺς οἰκέτας
ζητεῖ τε ποῦ ᾽στιν ἡ χύτρα;
i, \ \ 2 ΄
τίς τὴν κεφαλὴν ἀπεδήδοκεν
τῆς μαινίδος ; τὸ τρύβλιον
160
FACULTY OF ARTS.
τὸ περυσινὸν τέθνηκέ μοι'
ποῦ τὸ σκόροδον τὸ χθιζινόν ;
τίς τῆς ἐλάας παρέτραγεν ; ;
τέως δ᾽ ἀβελτερώτατοι
κεχηνότες Μαμμακύθιοι
Μελιττίδαι καθῆντο.
2. Translate, commenting where necessary on the
read
α)
()
(c)
(a)
(e)
(δὰ
(J)
(0)
(1) ἡ
(ὦ)
(ἢ
Ν
ing or construction :—
Λόγος μέν ἐστ᾽ ἀρχαῖος ἀνθρώπων φανείς,
ὡς οὐκ ἂν alo” ἐκμάθοις βροτῶν πρὶν ἂν
θάνῃ τις οὔτ᾽ εἰ χρηστὸς οὔτ᾽ εἴ τῷ κακός ; :
Λέχ ος yap‘ Ηρακλεῖ κριτὸν
ξυστᾶς᾽ ἀεί τιν᾽ ἐκ φόβου φόβον τηέφω
κείνου προκηραίνουσα.
Πολλὰ γὰρ ὥστ᾽ ἀκάμαντος ἢ νότου ἢ βορέα τις
κύματ᾽ ἐν evpet πόντῳ βάντ᾽ ἐπιόντα T ἴδῃ.
οὕτω δὲ τὸν καδμογενῆ τρέφει τὸ δ᾽ αὔξει βιότου
πολύπονον ὥσπερ πέλαγος Κρήσιον.
Οὐ τἄρα τῷ γε πρόσθεν οὐδὲν ἐξ ἴσου
χρόν"» διοίσει γλῶσσαν.
Τῆς ἐκεῖνος οὐδαμὰ
βλαστας ἐφώνει δῆθεν οὐδὲν ἱστορῶν.
Ην δ᾽ ἀμφίπλεκτοι κλίμακες.
‘Hie’ my μέσῳ πόρῳ.
'“Ἔχριον ¢ ἀργῆτ᾽ οἰὸς εὐέρου πόκῳ.
Ἕως ἂν ἀρτίχριστον ἁρμόσαιμί που.
Πλευραῖσι γὰρ προσμαχθὲν ἐκ μεν ἐσχάτας
βέβρωκε σάρκας πνευμύνων τ᾽ ἀρτηρίας
ῥοφεῖ ξυνοικοῦν" ἐκ δὲ χλωρὸν αἷμα μου
πέπωκεν ἤδη καὶ διέφθαρμαι δέμας
τὸ πᾶν ἀφράστῳ τῇδε χειρωθεὶς πέδῃ.
"Os ἐργασείων οὐδὲν ὧν λέγω θηοεῖς.
3. Translate :—
(4)
(0)
Πὰρ δὲ οἱ ἄνδρες
καλὸν eBeapdbovres ἀμοιβαδὶς ἄλλοθεν ἄλλος
νεικείουσ᾽ ἐπέεσσι. τὰ δ᾽ οὐ φρενὸς ἅπτεται αὐτῶς"
ἀλλ᾽ ὅκα μὲν τῆνον ποτιδέρκεται ἄνδρα “γελᾶσα,
ἄλλοκα δ᾽ αὖ ποτὶ τὸν ῥιπτεῖ νόον. ol δ᾽ ὑπ᾽ ἔρωτος
δηθὰ κυλοιδιδωντες ἐτώσια μοχθίζοντι.
Νῦν δ᾽ ἴα μὲν φορέοιτε βάτοι φορέοιτε δ᾽ ἄκανθαι
ἁ δὲ καλὰ ναρκισσος ἐπ᾽ ἀρκεύθοισι κομάσαι"
|
!
᾿
q
!
CLASSICAL ΠΡ ΈΞΑ ΘΕ AND HISTORY. 151 -
πάντα © ἔναλλα γένοιντο Kal a πίτυς ὄχνας ἐνείκαι,
Δάφνις ἐπεὶ θνάσκει καὶ τὰς κύνας ᾿ὥλαφος ἕλκοι
᾿ κὴξ ὀρθῶν τοὶ σκῶπες ἀηδοσι goog 6
) (ὁ) Νῦν δὴ μούνα ἐοῖσα πόθεν τὸν ἔρωτα δακρύσω.
: ἐκ τήνω δ᾽ ἀρξῶ, τίς μοι κακὸν ἄγαγε τοῦτο
ἦνθ᾽ ἃ τῶ Εὐβόυλοιο καναφόρος μιν ᾿Αναξώ
' ἄλσος ἐς ᾿Αρτέμιδος τᾷ δὴ τόκα πολλὰ μὲν ἄλλα
θήρια πομπεύεσκε περι Τα ἐν δὲ λέαινα.
(α) Ὦ λευκὰ Γαλάτεια τί τὸν φιλ οντ᾽ ἀποβάλλῃ
, μόσχω γαυροτέρα, ᾿σφηλωτέρα ὄμφακος ὠμᾶς,
φοιτῇς δ᾽ αὖθ᾽ οὑτῶς, ὅκκα γλυκὺς ὕπνος “ἔχῃ με,
οἴχῃ δ᾽ εὐθὺς t toto’, ὅκκα γλυκὺς ὕπιος ἀνῇ με,
φεύγεις δ᾽ ὥσπερ ὄϊς πολιὸν λύκον ἀθρήσασα: F
ἠράσθην μὲν ἔγωγα. τεοῦς κόρα, ἁνίκα πρᾶτον
ἦνθες ἐ ἐμᾳ σὺν ματρὶ θέλοισ᾽ ὑακίνθινα φύλλα
ἐξ ὄρεος δρέψασθαι, ἐ ἐγὼ δ᾽ ὁδὸν ἁγεμόνευον.
ΡΜ λΨΟΑΣ ΤΡ ΎΕυνυ.
FIRST YAR.
LATIN BOOKS.
FRIDAY, APRIL 3RD, 1903:— MORNING, 9 TO 12.
ae ee ee χρρο
N.B.—A, B and C to be done in separate books.
- A.—OVvID.
Translate, adding an explanatory note where
necessary :—
(a) Impositamque sibi qui non bene pertulit Hellen
tempora nocturnis aequa diurna ἴδοι.
Scan these two lines.
(b) Editus hic ego sum; nec non ut tempora noris
cum cecidit fato consul uterque pari.
Where was Ovid born, and in what year? Who
were the two consuls?
152 FACULTY .OF ARTS.
hoc tamen asperitas indice nota loci est.
(d) ‘Quid vult palma sibi rugosaque carica, dixi,
et data sub niveo candida mella cado ?’
(c) Neve graves cultis Cerealia dona cavete
agmine laesuro depopulentur aves.
vos quoque formicae subiectis parcite granis;
post messem praedae copia maior erit.
(f) Nunc quoque per pueros iaculis incessitur index
et pretium auctori volneris ipsa datur.
(g) Ossa tegit tumulus tumulus pro corpore ma-
genus |
quo lapis exiguus par sibi carmen habet.
(h) Quicquid aget cum te scierit venisse relinquet
nec mora quid venias quidve requiret agam;
vivere me dices sed sic ut vivere nolim
nec mala tam longa nostra levata mora.
(Ὁ Ter quater evolvi signantes tempora fastos
nec Sementiva est ulla reperta dies.
What work of Ovid is this taken from?
2. In the following lines do not translate but parse
the words in italics :—
°
(a) Tum deus incumbeus baculo quem devxtra gere-
bat.
(b) Tum patitur cultus ager et renovatur aratro.
Bi=—CIicERo:
I. Translate with notes on the words printed in
italics :—
(a) Ad me autem Iitteras quas misisti quamquam
exiguam significationem tuae erga me voluntatis habe-
bant, tamen mihi scito iucundas fuisse. Nulla enim
re tam laetari soleo quam meorum officiorum conscien-
tia, quibus si quando non mutue respondetur, apud me
plus offici residere facillime patior.
(b) Et simul, si uno argumento unaque in persona
ἰ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 153
mens tua tota versabitur, cerno iam animo quanto
omnia uberiora atque ornatiora futura sint. Neque
tamen ignoro quam impudenter faciam, qui primum tibi
tantum oneris imponam, deinde etiam ut ornes me
postulem. Sed tamen qui semel verecundiae finis
transierit, eum bene et naviter oportet esse impuden-
tem.
Explain carefully why postulem is Subjunctive.
(c) Martis vero signum quo mihi, pacis auctori?
Gaudeo nullum Saturni signum fuisse, haec enim duo
signa putarem mihi aes alienum attulisse. ἰδία qui-
dem summa ne ego multo libentius emerim deverso-
rium Tarracinae, ne semper hospiti molestus sim.
(d) Hoe tibi tam ignoscemus nos amici quam igno-
verunt Medeae, “quae Corinthum arcem altam habe-
bant, matronae opulentae, optimates,” quibus illa ma-
nibus gypsatissumis persuasit ne 5101 vitio illae verterent
quod abesset a patria.
Where is the above line quoted from?
(e) Tu autem hoc tibi persuade, si coinmodo vale-
tudinis tuae fieri possit, nihil me malle quam te esse
mecum ; si autem intelleges opus esse te Patris conva-
lescendi causa paulum commorari, nihil me malle
quam te valere.
2. State to whom the pieces (a), (b), (d) and (e) in the
above question were addressed. State the year of the
birth, consulship and death of Cicero. Of what pro-
vince was he governor?
3. Do not translate the following passage, but parse
the words in Italics and explain clearly their construc-
tion:—Itaque te plane etiam atque etiam rogo ut et
ornes ea vehementius etiam quam fortasse sentis et
in eo leges historiae neglegas gratiamque illam de qua
suavissime quodam in prooemio scripsisti a qua te
154 FACULTY OF ARTS.
flecti non magis potuisse demonstras quam Herculem
Xenophontium illum a Voluptate, eam, si me tibi ve-
hementius commendabit ne aspernere.
Parse XNenophontium and translate it into English.
C.—SALLUST OF CATILINE.
1. Translate, with brief notes on italicised words:
(a) Nam et priusquam incipias consulto, et ubi con-
sulueris mature facto opus est.
(b) Tum Catilina polliceri tabulas novas, proscrip-
tionem locupletium, magistratus, sacerdotia, rapinas,
alia omnia quae bellum atque lubido victorum fert.
(c) Compertum ego haboo, milites, verba virtutem
non addere, neque ex ignavo strenuum neque fortem
ex timido exercitum oratione imperatoris fieri. Quanta
cuiusque animo audacia natura aut ‘Mmoribus inest,
tanta in bello patere solet: quem neque gloria neque
pericula excitant, nequiquam hortere: timor animi
auribus obficit.
(d) Sed ea malo dicere, quae maiores nostri contra
lubidinem animi sui recte atque ordine fecere. Bello
Macedomco, quod cum rege Perse gessimus, Rhodiorum
civitas magna atque magnifica, quae populi Romani
opibus creverat, infida atque advorsa nobis fuit. Sed
postquam bello confecto de Rhodiis consultum est,
maiores nostri, ne quis divitiarum magis quam iniuriae
causa bellum inceptum diceret, impunitos cos dimisere.
2. (a) To what speakers does Sallust attribute the
words in the last two extracts?
(6b) Write brief notes on: pecuniae repetundae,
quaestor pro praetore, senati decretum, ex libris
Sibyllinis, pedibus in sententiam Ti.-Neronis iturum se
dixerat.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 155
FIRST YEAR.
LATIN PROSE AND TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
| Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :— AFTERNOON, 2 TO. 4.30.
N.B.—A and B to be sent up in different books.
A.—LATIN COMPOSITION.
Translate :—
(a) The Romans could not be persuaded to ask
Caesar to attack the camp.
(b) Having remained at Miletus for three years,
he returned to Athens; his brother lives at Puteolt.
(c) He often asks me why I did not go with you
to the city.
(d) Will you assist me or not?
(e) Do not spare the citizens.
(f) He had departed from the camp in order to set
out for Rome on the following day.
(g) He returned to the city for the purpose of
praising the citizens.
(h) Having arrived at Syracuse he promised that
reinforcements should be sent.
(i) He said that his son had been injured (noceo).
(k) He repents of his crime.
(1) Seizing a sword he defended his master.
(m) After saying (loquor) this he became silent
(conticesco).
(n) Caesar ought to command (impero) the sold-
iers to advance as quickly as possible.
(0) This will be a proof (documentum) of your
valour.
156 FACULTY~ OF ARTS.
. a”
See oe te
BT RANSLATION- ATE SIGHT
1. Multa exstant facete ab eo dicta. Cum Lentulum,
generum suum, exiguae staturae hominem, vidisset
longo gladio accinctum, “Quis,” inquit, ‘“‘generum
meum ad gladium adligavit?”
Matrona quaedam, iuniorem se quam erat simulans,
dictitabat se triginta tantum annos habere; cui Cicero,
“Verum est,’ inquit, “nam hoc viginti annos audio.’
Caesar, altero consule mortuo die Decembris ultima,
Caninium consulem hora septima in reliquam diei par-
tem renuntiaverat; quem cum plerique irent salutatum
de more, “Festinemus,”’ inquit Cicero, “priusquam
abeat magistratu.” De eodem Caninio, scripsit Cicero:
“Fuit mirifica vigilantia Caninius, qui toto suo consu-
latu somnum non viderit.”
2. Lenis adhuc somnus placidis Erysichthona pennis
mulcebat: petit ille dapes sub imagine somni,
oraque vana movet dentemque in dente fatigat
exercetque cibo delusum guttur inant,
proque epulis teneras nequicquam devorat auras
ut vero est expulsa quies, furit ardor edendi,
perque avidas fauces immensaque viscera regnat.
nec mora: quod pontus, quod terra, quod educat
aer,
poscit ; et appositis queritur ielunia mensis,
inque epulis epulas quaerit; quodque' urbibus esse,
quodque satis populo poterat, non sufficit ‘uni.
FIRST YEAR.
ROMAN HISTORY.
Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 5.15.
N.B.—Brevity should be studied.
1. Explain the following terms:—dictator, praetor,
tribunus plebis, concilium plebis, comitia centuriata,
populus, plebs.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 1017
2. Where are the following and with what events are
they connected :—Mylae, Panormus, Metaurus, Sagun-
tum, Cannae, Trasumene, Luceria, Demetrias, Pydna?
Add dates where you can.
3. Write two or three lines on each of the following:
—Antiochus Magnus, M. Fulvius Nobilior, Elder Cato,
Philopoemen, Popilius Laenas, Flamininus, Aemilius
Paulus, Mummius.
SECONDTYVEAR.
LATIN:
Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :— MORNING, 9 TO 12.
τ Bikes ἘΠ
A, B, C and D to be written in separate books.
aN
1. Translate with notes on the words printed in
italics :
(a) Cum hostes adessent, pro se quisque in urbem
ex agris demigrant, urbem ipsam saepiunt praesidiis.
Alia muris, alia Tiberi obiecto videbantur tuta. Pons
sublicius iter paene hostibus dedit, ni unus vir fuisset
Horatius Cocles: id munimentum illo die fortuna urbis
Romanae habuit.
(b) Tum vero plebs incerta qualis habitura con-
sules esset, coetus nocturnos, pars Esquilus pars in
Aventino, fecere, ne in foro subitis trepidaret consiliis
et omnia temere ac fortuito ageret. Eam rem con-
sulis rati, ut erat, perniciosam, ad patres deferunt, sed
delatam consulere ordine non licuit.
Β.
Bo branslate :
Certatum eo quoque anno cum tribunis est. Vana
lex vanique legis auctores iactando inritum munus
facti. Fabium inde nomen ingens post tres continuos
consultatus unoque velut tenore omnes expertos tri-
buniciis certaminibus habitum. Itaque ut bene locatus
mansit in ea familia aliquamdiu honos. Bellum inde
158 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Veiens initum: et Volsci rebellarunt. Sed ad bella
externa prope supererant vires abutebanturque 115 inter
semet ipsos certando.
4. Translate, with explanatory notes:
(a) Optabitis, me dius fidius, propediem ut mei simi-
les Romana plebs patronos habeat.
(b) In exeuntem e curia impetus factus esset, ni
peropportune tribuni diem divissent.
(c) Signa referunt, maestique—crederes victos—
exsecrantes navatam ab equite operam redeunt in castra.
(d) Matura res erat, tergiversantur tamen.
5. Translate:
Varia fortuna belli atroci discordia domi forisque
annum exactum insignem maxime comitia tributa
efficiunt, res maior victoria suscepti certaminis quam
usu: plus enim dignitatis comitiis ipsis detractum est
patribus ex concilio submovendis, quam virium aut
plebi additum est aut demptum patribus.
II]. Horace, SELECTED ODES.
CG
1. Translate:
(a) Crescit occulto velut arbor aevo
Fama Marcelli; micat inter omnes
Iulium sidus velut inter -ignes
Luna minores.
(b) Destrictus ensis cui super impia
Cervice pendet, non Siculae dapes
Dulcem elaborabunt saporem,
Non avium citharaeque cantus
Somnum reducent. Somnius agrestium
Lenis virorum non humiles domos
Fastidit umbrosamque ripam
Non Zephyris agitata tempe.
(c) Ut mater iuvenem, quem Notus invido
Flatu Carpathii trans maris aequora
Cunctantem spatio longius annuo
Dulci distinet a domo,
Votis ominibusque et precibus vocat,
Curvo nec faciem litore dimovet;
Sic desideriis icta fidelibus
Quaerit patria Caesarem.
re
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY, 159
(d) Nos manet Oceanus circumvagus; arva beata
Petamus, arva divites et insulas,
Reddit ubi Cererem tellus inarata quotannis
Et imputata floret usque vinea,
Mella cava manant ex ilice, montibus altis
levis crepante lympha desilit pede.
2. (a) Write brief notes on italicized words.
(0) Give the scheme of the metre in which each. of
the various extracts is written.
(c) Remark on the common characteristics which
unite the six odes with which the third book opens,
and show by internal evidence the time of their com-
Position.
BIT? Virern,.Aened, VIL, VILL,
IDE
Fe Eransiate-——
(a) Mittitur et magni Venulus Diomedis ad urbem,
qui petat auxilium et Latio consistere Teucros
advectum Aenean classi victosque Penates
inferre et fatis regem se dicere posci
edoceat, multasque viro se adiungere gentes
Dardanio et late Latio increbrescere nomen;
quid struat his coeptis, quem si Fortuna sequa-
tur
eventum pugnae cupiat, manifestius ipsi
quam Turno regi aut regi adparere Latino.
Explain the construction of struat and apparere; 1.e.,
what verbs do the sentences in which they respectively
stand depend upon?
(b) Quanta per Idaeos saevis effusa Mycenis
tempestas ierit campos quibus actus uterque
Europae atque Asiae fatis concurrerit orbis
audiit et si quem tellus extrema refuso
submovet Oceano, et si quem extenta plagarum
quattuor in medio dirimit plaga solis iniqui.
2. Translate, adding where necessary a brief note on
the grammar or allusion :—
(a) Proxima Circaeae raduntur litora terrae.
(b) Fata per Aeneae iuro dextramque potentem
sive fide seu quis bello est expertus et armis.
State carefully what this latter sentence depends
upon.
1l
100 ; FACULTY OF ARTS.
(c) Idem Atlas generat caeli qui sidera tollit.
(d) Non secus ac si qua penitus vi terra dehiscens
infernas reseret sedes et regna recludat
pallida.
(e) Te filia Nerei
te potuit lacrimis Tithonia flectere coniunx.
What are the two allusions here?
(f) Ille inter caedem Rutulorum elapsus in agros
confugere et Turni defendier hospitis armis.
A note on the form defendier.
(g) Hoe tune ignipotens caelo descendit ab alto.
A note on any peculiar grammatical form.
(h) Tanta mole viri turritis puppibus instant.
3. Quote any lines you can remember—not more
than 5—of any one of the following: (a) The story of
Hippolytus, (b) the story of Hercules and Cacus, (c)
the description of the arms of Vulcan.
SECOND YEAR.
LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION, AND FRANS-
LATION AT. SIGH,
FRIDAY, APRIL 3RD, 1903:— AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.30.
Write I. and 11. in separate books.
J. Latin Prose COMPOSITION.
Then King Tarquinius sent to Rome, to ask for all
the goods that had belonged to him; and the senate
after a while decreed that the goods should be given
back. But those whom he had sent to Rome to ask
for his goods, had meetings with many young men of
noble birth, and a plot was laid to bring back the king.
Now a slave happened to overhear them talking to-
gether, and when he knew that the letters were to be
given to the messengers of Tarquinius, he told all that
he had heard to the consuls. Then they came and
seized the young men and their letters, and so the
plot was broken up. ARNOLD.
se re
—— ae
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 161
Il. TRANSLATION. AT SIGHT.
(a) Illum equitem aiebant sex dierum_ spatio
transcurrisse longitudinem Italiae, et eo die cum Has-
drubale in Gallia signis collatis pugnasse, quo eum
castra adversus sese in Apulia posita habere Hannibal
credidisset. Nomen Neronis satis fuisse ad continen-
dum in castris Hannibalem; Hasdrubalem vero qua
alia re quam adventu eius obrutum atque exstinctum
esse? itaque iret alter consul sublimis curru multtugis,
si vellet, equis; uno equo per urbem verum triumphum
vehi Neronemque, etiam si pedes incedat, vel parta eo
bello vel spreta eo triumpho gloria memorabilem fore.
(b) Aesopo quidam scripta recitarat mala,
in quis inepte multum se iactaverat.
scire ergo cupiens quidnam sentiret senex,
“numquid tibi” inquit “visus sum superbior?
haud vana nobis ingeni fiducia est?”
confectus ille pessimo volumine
“ego” inquit “quod te laudas vehementer probo,
namque hoc ab alio numquam continget tibi.”
5 SECOND YEAR.
ROMAN HISTORY AND QUINTILIAN.
_Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 5.30.
I. Roman History. (B.C. 133-31)
Write upon any three of the following subjects:
1. The causes of the civil troubles at the beginning of
tis period.
2. The war with the Cimbri and Teutones (B.C.
113-101).
ge Chichevents: irem<B, C..70 t0-B..C.72.
4. The banishment of Cicero.
Oe ee ee ee ΨΥ 9 oe ee ee
II. QUINTILIAN X., §§ 37-131.
(Not more than three questions to be attempted.)
1. Briefly describe the character of Pindar’s poetry.
Add a short note tracing the connection between the
Ivric poetry of Greece and Roman lyric poetry.
102 FACULTY OF ARTS.
2: What type of literary composition 15 represented
by Theocritus? Can you say anything of its later his-
tory?
3. Write a short note on each of the following :—
Pt ae Menander, Isocrates, Lucan, Seneca, Asinius
ollio.
4. How does Quintilian classify Roman poetry?
Mention names in connection with each branch of his
classification ?
5. What does Quintilian say of Roman satire, and
how do you explain his statement ?
THIRD YEAR.
LATIN.
PLINY “AN De LUCK ΠΕ:
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MorRNING, 9 TO 12.
(Write A and B in separate books.)
ἊΣ
t+ ranslates==
(a) Quo modo te veteres Marsi tui? quo modo
emptio nova? Placent agri, postquam tui facti sunt?
Rarum id quidem: nihil enim aeque gratum est adeptis
quam concupiscentibus. Me praedia materna parum
commode tractant, delectant tamen ut materna, et
aliogui longa patientia occalui. Habent hunc finem
adsiduae querellae quod queri pudet. Vale.
2. Translate with explanatory notes:
(a) Ecce tht Regulus ‘quaero’ - inquit, Secunde,
quid de Modesto sentias.’
(b) O mare, o litus, verum secretumque μουΐοσνε,
quam multa invenitis, quam multa dictatis!
(c) Mirum est quam singulis diebus in urbe ratio
aut constet aut constare videatur, pluribus iunctisque
non constet. Nam si quem interroges ‘hodie quid
egisti?’ respondeat ‘officio togae virilis interfui, spon-
salia aut nuptias frequentavi, ille me ad signandum
testamentum, ille in advocationem, ille in consilium
rogavit.’
ὰ
᾿
'
᾿
j
ἢ"
Vad
.
γι
:
Ἷ
:
joe hee
wa Pe
ἴ
ee ls alt hw Se
ie De
ow
a, Fes
—-
-
vO TS ee τ ΡΝ ον
>a
eT AL Se Ὑ ey ee
Lee, sy
5
f x
1
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND ,HISTORY. 163
(d) Circumtulit oculos et ‘cur’ inquit ‘me putas
hos tantos dolores tam diu sustinere? ut scilicet ists
latroni vel ἀπὸ die supersum.’ Dedisses huic animo
par corpus, fecisset quod optabat. Adfuit tamen deus
voto, cuius ille compos, ut iam securus liberque mori-
turus, multa illa vitae sed minora retinacula abrupit.
3. Write brief notes on: (a) relegatio; (b) the court
of the centumviri; (c) flamen Augustalis; (4) xystus;
(e) tutor relictus; (f) Pliny’s style.
-4. Give the substance of Pliny’s remarks on the death
Virginius Rufus (Ep. IL. 1.).
ἘΣ
(Candidates are requested to answer questions 3 and 4 before
attempting 1 and 2 and 2 before attempting 1.)
1. Translate :—
Assem para et accipe auream fabulam, fabulas immo:
nam me priorum nova admonuit nec refert a qua po-
tissimum incipiam. Verania Pisonis graviter iacebat
-huius dico Pisonis quem Galba adoptavit. Ad hanc
Regulus venit. Primum impudentiam hominis qui vene-
rit ad aegram cuius marito inmicissimus ipsi invisissimus
fuerat. Esto si venit tantum; at ille etiam proximus
toro sedit, quo die qua hora nata esset interrogavit.
Ubi audiit, componit vultum, intendit oculos, movet
labra, agitat digitos, computat; nihil; ut diu miseram
expectatione suspendit, ‘habes’ inquit ‘climactericum
tempus sed evades.
2 Eranslate ——
Cuius ego ingressus vestigia dum rationes
persequor ac doceo dictis quo quaeque creata
foedere sint in eo quam sit durare necessutm
nec validas valeant aevi rescindere leges,
quo genere in primis animi natura reperta est
nativo primum consistere corpore creta
nec posse incolumis magnum durare per aevum
sed simulacra solere in somnis fallere mentem,
cernere cum videamur eum quem vita relinquit,
quod superest, nunc huc rationis detulit ordo,
ut mihi mortali consistere corpore mundum
nativumque simul ratio reddunda sit esse;
164 ἘΠ ΑΘ OF ARTS:
et quibus ille modis congressus materiai
fundarit terram caelum mare sidera solem
lunaique globum; tum quae tellure animantes
extiterint et quae nullo sint tempore natae.
3. Translate, adding a word of comment where ne-
cessary :—
(a) Inde boves Lucas turrito corpore taetras
anguimanus belli docuerunt volnera Poeni
sufferre.
(b) Nam fovea atque igni prius est venarier ortum
quam saepire plagis saltum canibusque ciere.
(c) Ne quid ab admissum foede dictumve superbe
poenarum grave sit solvendi tempus adultum.
(d) *Protraxe:
(ec) Proinde sine incassum defessi sanguine sudent.
(f) Corde vigebant.
(g) Viva videns vivo sepeliri viscera busto.
(h) Saetigerisque pares subus silvestria membra.
What other reading is there?
(ὃ Ut propagando possint procudere saecla.
(k) Quidquid id est nilo fertur maiore figura
quam nostris oculis qua cernimus esse videtur.
(1) Quo volvenda micant aeterni sidera mundi.
(m) Omne genus de principiis.
(x) Omnimodis.
(0) Inde suum per iter recreavit cuncta gubernans.
(p) Sicut summarum summa est. What is the
‘Summarum summa?’
(7) Denique iam tuere hoc.
(r) Quare proporro sibi cumque senescere credas.
What other readings are found?
(s) Nam primum quicquid fulgoris disperit ei
quocunque accidit.
(t) Privas mutatur in horas.
(uw) Denique non armis opus est non moenibus altis
qui sua tutentur.
(x) Notities divis hominum unde est insita primum
quid vellent facere ut scirent animoque viderent?
(vy) Propter Atlanteum litus pelageque sonora.
2. Either draw a map showing the division of Asia
Minor into provinces in the Ist century A. D. or say
a few words on the MSS. and editors of Lucretius. Ὁ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE “AND HISTORY. 165
THIRD’ AND FOURTH YEARS.
LATIN.
PACKLUS, HISTORIES, BK. 1
Frrpay, APRIL 17TH, 1903 :—MOoRNING, 10.30 TO 12.
1. Translate:
(a) Nec diutius Galba cunctatus speciosiora stla-
dentibus accessit. Praemissus tamen in castra Piso
ut iuvenis magno nomine recenti favore et infensus
Tito Vinio, seu quia erat, seu quia irati ita volebant;
et facilius de odio creditur.
(b) Curam navium Moschus libertus retinebat ad
adservandam honestiorum fidem immutatus. Peditum
equitumque copiis Marius Celsus, Annius Gallus rec-
tores destinati. Sed plurima fides Licinio Proculo
praetorii praefecto. Is urbanae militiae impiger, bel-
lorum insolens, auctoritatem Paulini, vigorem Celsi,
maturitatem Galli, ut cuique erat, criminando, quod
facillimum factu est, pravus et callidus bonos et mo-
destos anteibat.
2. Translate, with explanatory notes:
(a) Si inmensum imperi corpus stare ac librari sine
rectore posset, dignus eram a quo res publica inciperet:
nunc eo necessitatis iam pridem ventum est, ut nec
mea senectus conferre plus populo Romano _ posset
quam bonum successorem nec tua plus iuventa quam
bonum principem. Sub Tiberio et Gaio et Claudio
unius familiae quasi hereditas fuimus: loco libertatis
erit quod eligi coepimus, et finita Iuliorum Claudiorum-
que domo optimum quemque adoptio inveniet.
(b) Repetundarum criminibus sub Claudio ac
Nerone ceciderant: placuit ignoscentibus verso nomine,
quod avaritia fuerat, videri maiestatem, cuius tum odio
etiam bonae leges peribant.
3. Translate, with brief notes on italicised words:
Opus adgredior opimum casibus, atrox praeliis,
discors seditionibus, ipsa etiam pace saevom. Quattuor
principes ferro interempti: trina bella civilia, plura ex-
terna ac permixta. Jam vero Italia novis cladibus
vel post longam saeculorum seriem repetitis afflicta:
haustae aut obrutae urbes, fecundissima Campaniae ora.
160 FACULTY OF ARTS.
4. Define the following words or phrases: procura-
tor; praefectus legionis ; principia castrorum ; potentia,
potestas, principatus; basilicae; precarium seni impe-
rium; delatores.
5. What were the sources of information on which
Tacitus must have drawn in the composition of his
Histories?
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
LATIN COMPOSITION AND UNSEEN.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
(4 and B to be sent up in separate books.)
A.—LATIN PROSE.
As soon as news was brought that the troops were
coming the Emperor went out of the city to meet
them, and having mounted a throne which had been
placed outside the gates, delivered a short speech
to the soldiers. He said that they knew what his own
feelings were towards those who had fought in his
cause and whose labours he himself had shared; and
that while he lived, the honour which they had deserved
would be theirs; but he asked them to remember that
his life was uncertain and to obey another ruler who-
ever he might be, as faithfully as they had obeyed him
for their own and their country’s sake. “Let them be
faithful to their country ; let them put ier welfare above
the interests of any party or leader whatever, so as
not to bring upon their fellow-citizens the miseries of
civil war.
B.—TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
STORM OF CREMONA.
Incipere obpugnationem fesso per diem noctemque
exercitu arduum et nullo iuxta subsidio anceps: sin
Bedriacum redirent, intolerandus tam longi itineris
labor et victoria ad inritum revolvebatur: munire cas-
tra, id quoque propinquis hostibus formidolosum, ne
dispersos et opus molientes subita eruptione turbarent.
quae super cuncta terrebat ipsorum mules periculi quam
4
q
᾽
4
Ὺ
a
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 167
morae patientior: quipne ingrata quae tuta, ex temeri-
tate spes; omnisque caedes et vulnera et sanguis
aviditate praedae pensabantur.
Huc inclinavit Antonius cingique vallum corona
iussit. primo sagittis saxisque eminus certabant, maiore
Flavianorum pernicie, in quos tela desuper librabantur ;
mox vallum portasque legionibus attribuit, ut discretus
labor fortes ignavosque distingueret atque ipsa con-
tentione decoris accenderentur. proxima Bedriacensi
viae tertiani septimanique sumpsere, dexteriora valli
octava ac septima Claudiana; tertiadecumanos ad
Brixianam portam impetus tulit. paulum inde morae,
dum ex proximis agris ligones, dolabras, et alii falces
scalasque convectant: tum elatis super capita scutis
densa testudine succedunt. Romanae utrimque artes:
pondera saxorum Vitelliani provolvunt, disiectam flui-
tantemque testudinem lanceis contisque scrutantur,
donec soluta compage scutorum exsangues aut. laceros
prosternerent multa cum strage.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
FripAay, APRIL I7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 10.30.
ROMAN HISTORY—THE LAST CENTURY OF
EERE PUBIC Les
1. How far did the legislation of Gaius Gracchus re-
semble, and in what respects did it differ from, that of
his brother Tiberius?
2. Sketch the subsequent history of the Tribunate at
Rome.
3. Describe the Sullan constitution. ΤῸ what causes
do you attribute its overthrow?
4. Give a brief account of the state of parties at Rome
at the time of Cicero’s entrance on political life.
ἘΝ What led to the civil war between Caesar and
Pompeius ?
6. Trace the steps by which Octavianus rose to
supreme power. How far is it true to say that his rule
was a masked despotism ?
108 ‘FACULTY OF ARTS.
FIRST YEAR.
LATIN (HONOURS).
SPE CTA sR ERS
-Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
A.—GRAMMAR.
1. Translate :—
(a) It was folly to hope, effrontery to urge.
(b) A few pence.
(c) Where in the world are we?
(d) Prayer to the gods.
(c) And I shall never forget that night.
(f) With no auspices or favourable sacrifice.
(g) I care not a straw.
(h) More than seven hundred were taken.
(1) To form an alliance.
(k) Where can I get a stone?
(1) Whose surname was Africanus.
(m) He thought nobody a man in comparison with
himself.
(x) Good heavens!
(0) Looking cruelly.
(p) Nor did the wiles of Juno escape the notice of
her brother.
2. Translate the following and comment on the use
of the cases :—
(a) Animi pendeo.
(0) Neque cernitur ullt.
(c) Proxime deos accessit Clodius.
(d) Ouid tibi hance tactio est?
(e) Virile secus.
(f) Ollam denariorum implere.
(¢) Postridie.
(h) Ut a Mutina discederet.
(1) Tota Sicilia (Abl.).
(k) Excessus e vita.
B.—TRANSLATION.
τ. Translate idiomatically :—
(a) But Rome never produced a succession of not-
able historians; because the more ability a Roman dis-
So
ΡΥ ΡΥ ee i Υ Ὗ Ό ΎΥΤ Οὖὐ
a ay ee ΣΝ
-
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 169
played the more busily he was engaged in active enter-
prises. :
(Ὁ) The most convincing proof of this 1 consider
to be the fact that in time of war it was more frequently
found necessary to punish those who had attacked the
enemy without orders than those who had committed
the crime of abandoning their post or retreating before
an onslaught of the enemy.
(c) For avarice proved fatal to loyalty, honesty
and all other virtues; in their place it introduced pride,
cruelty, irreligion and unbounded venality.
(4) To my much belauded consulship I owe the
loss of brother and children, country and happiness,
and I can only hope that you in your turn have suffered
nothing worse than the loss of me.
(ὁ) 1 want you to write me a long letter containing
all the political news, for I shall always regard you as
my most reliable source of information.
(f) For these reasons, although it was a great trial
to me not to have seen you, nevertheless it would have
caused us greater pain to have met and still more to
have separated.
C==ViIRGIE. | BUCOLICS.
Foul translate ——
(a) Tum Phaethontiadas musco circumdat amarae
corticis atque solo proceras erigit alnos.
tum canit errantem Permessi ad flumina Gallum
Aonas in montes ut duxerit una sonorum
utque viro Phoebi chorus adsurrexerit omnis;
ut Linus haee illi divino carmine pastor
floribus atque apio crines ornatus amaro
dixerit : hos tibi dant calamos, en accipe, Musae,
Ascraeo quos ante seni, quibus ille solebat
cantando rigidas deducere montibus ornos.
(b) Teque adeo decus hoc aevi, te Consule, inibit,
Pollio et incipient magni procedere menses ;
te duce si qua manent sceleris vestigia nostri
inrita perpetua solvent formidine terras.
ille deum vitam accipiet divisque videbit
permixtos heroas et ipse videbitur illis
pacatumque reget patriis virtutibus orbem.
at tibi prima, puer, nullo murfuscula cultu
te
170 FACULTY OF ARTS.
errantes hederas passim cum baccare tellus
mixtaque ridenti colocasia fundet acantho.
2. What do you know of the Phaethontiades, Senex
Ascraeus, Pollio?
3. Quote not more than 10 consecutive lines from
the Bucolics of Virgil.
TER RID YEAR:
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
LATIN:
PRIVATE READINGS. d
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 :—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Ae VIRGIN = AND iZOALEUST:
1. Translate, with explanatory notes:
(a) Virgil, Aeneid, Bk. VI-, vs. 724-735.
(b) oallust,. Catiline sucht (200/98) Ὁ 512. ΟΡ στ,
4, 5.
2. Write down a few lines, commencing with excudent
alii, in which Virgil compares the Roman destiny with
the Greek.
3. Mention at least three passages in the sixth book
of the Aeneid which have been suggested by the
eleventh book of the Odyssey.
4. Write notes, grammatical and general, on the
following passages:
(a) torva tuentem lenibat animum.
(b) Viden’ ut geminae stant vertice cristae,
Et pater ipse suo superum iam signat honore?
(c) Aspice ut insignis spoliis Marcellus opimis
Ingreditur !
(d) Quaesitor Minos urnam movet.
(6) quisque suos patimur manes..
(f) Ea potestas per senatum more Romano ma-
gistratui maxuma permittitur, exercitum parare, bel-
lum gerere, coercere omnibus modis_ sociis atque
civis, domi militiaeque imperium atque iudicium sum-
mum habere; aliter sine populi iussi nullius earum re-
rum consuli ius est. (Also translate).
Mieke eS
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 111
5. What is Quintilian’s estimate of Sallust as an
historian ?
Describe the main characteristics of Sallust’s style.
B.—HoracE AND CICERO.
Translate, adding a brief note where required :-—
1. (a) Non possis oculo quantum contendere Lyn-
ceus:
non tamen idcirco contemnas lippus inungi;
nec quia desperes invicti membra Glyconis,
nodosa ‘corpus nolis prohibere cheragra.
(b) Nam cur
quae laedunt oculum festinas demere: si quid
est animum differs curandi tempus in annum?
(c) Non tu corpus eras sine pectore.
To whom is this addressed ?
(d) Tu quotus esse velis rescribe et rebus omissis
atria servantem postico falle clientem.
(e) Caerite cera
digni.
(f) Quinque dies tibi pollicitus me rure futurum
sextilem totum mendax desideror. atqui
si me vivere vis recteque videre valentem
quam mihi das aegro dabis aegrotare timenti
Maecenas veniam, dum ficus prima calorque
designatorem decorat lictoribus atris
dum pueris omnis pater et matercula pallet
officiosaque sedulitas et opella forensis
adducit febres et testamenta resignat.
g) Smyrna quid et Colophon? maiora minorane
fama?
(h) Pernicies et tempestas barathrumque macelli.
(ἢ Qui melior servo qui liberior sit avarus
in triviis fixum cum se demiitit ob assem
non video.
(Rk) Aut tineas pasces taciturnus inertes
aut fugies Uticam aut vinctus mitteris Ilerdam.
ad
2. (ec) Ut fueris dignior quam Plancius—de quo ipso
tecum ita contendam paulo post ut conservem digni-
tatem tuam—sed ut fueris dignior, non competitor a
quo es victus sed populus a quo es praeteritus in culpa
est.
ἐν ὶ FACULTY OF ARTS:
κ΄ (δὴ) Quare noli me ad contentionem vestrum vocare
Laterensis.
(c) Deinde tui municipes sunt illi quidem splendi-
dissimi homines sed tamen pauci, si quidem cum Atina-
tibus conferantur.
(d) Vitia me hercule Cn. Plancii res eae de quibus
dixi tegere potuerunt ne tu in ea vita de qua iam dicam
tot et tanta adiumenta huic honori fuisse mirere.
(c) O adulescentiam traductam eleganter, cui qui-
dem cum quod licuerit obiciatur tamen id ipsum
falsum reperiatur.
(f) Quae obtinebatur a C. Vergilio quocum me
uno vel maxime cum vetustas tum amicitia cum met
fratris conlegia tum rei publicae causa sociarat.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS,
CLASSICAL, HONOURS.
LATIN—TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Translate:
(1) Oraque magnanimum spirantia paene virorum
In rostris iacuere suis: sed enim abstulit omnis,
Tamquam sola foret, rapti Ciceronis imago.
Tune redeunt animis ingentia consulis acta
Iurataeque manus deprensaque foedera noxae
Patriciumque nefas extinctum: poena Cethegi
Deiectusque redit votis Catilina nefandis.
Quid favor aut coetus, pleni quid honoribus anni
Profuerant? sacris exculta quid artibus aetas?
Abstulit una dies aevi decus, ictaque luctu
Conticuit Latiae tristis facundia linguae.
Unica sollicitis quondam tutela salusque,
Egregium semper patriae caput, ille senatus
V index, ille fori, legum ritusque togaeque,
Publica vox saevis aeternum obmutuit armis.
Informes voltus sparsamque cruore nefando
Canitiem sacrasque manus operumque ministras
Tantorum pedibus civis proiecta superbis
Proculcavit ovans nec lubrica fata deosque
Respexit. Nullo luet hoc Antonius aevo.
ὃ
:
Stee
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 173
Hoc nec in Emathio mitis victoria Perse,
Nec te, dive Syphax, non fecit in hoste Philippo;
Inque triumphato ludibria cuncta lugurtha
Afuerant, nostraeque cadens ferus Hannibal irae
Membra tamen Stygias tulit inviolata sub umbras.
(2) Verum opinaris: destringor centumviralibus
causis, quae me exercent magis quam delectant. Sunt
enim pleraeque parvae et exilis : raro incidit vel per-
sonarum claritate vel negotii magnitudine insignis.
Ad hoc pauci cum quibus iuvet dicere: ceteri audaces
atque etiam magna ex parte adulescentuli obscuri ad
declamandum hue transierunt, tam inreverenter et
temere ut mihi Atilius noster expresse dixisse videatur
sic in foro pueros ἃ centumviralibus causis auspicari
ut ab Homero in scholis. Nam hic quoque ut illic pri-
mum coepit esse quod maximum est. At Hercule
ante memoriam meam (ita maiores natu solent
dicere) ne nobilissimis quidem adulescentibus locus erat
nisi aliquo consulari producente: tanta veneratione
pulcherrimum opus colebatur. Nunc refractis pudoris
et reverentiae claustris omnia patent omnibus, nec in-
ducuntur sed inrumpunt. Sequuntur auditores actori-
bus similes, conducti et redempti: manceps convenitur :
in media basilia tam palam sportulae quam in triclinio
dantur: ex iudicio in iudicium pari mercede transitur.
(3) Dictum, iudices, est de decumano frumento, dic-
tum de empto, extremum reliquum est de aestimato,
quod quum magnitudine pecuniae tum iniuriae genere
quemvis debet commovere, tum vero eo magis, quod
‘ad hoc crimen non ingeniosa aliqua defensio, sed im-
probissima confessio comparatur. Nam quum ex
senatus consulto et ex legibus frumentum in cellam et
sumere liceret, idque frumentum senatus ita aesti-
masset, quaternis HS tritici modium, binis hordei, iste
numero ad summam tritici adiecto tritici modios sin-
gulos cum aratoribus ternis denariis aestimavit. Non
est in hoc crimen, Hortensi, ne forte ad hoc meditere,
multos saepe viros bonos, fortes et innocentes, cum
aratoribus et cum civitatibus frumentum, in cellam
quod sumi oporteret, aestimasse et pecuniam pro fru-
mento abstulisse. Scio quid soleat fieri, scio quid
liceat. Nihil quod ante fuerit in consuetudine bono-
rum, nunc in istius facto reprehenditur.
174 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(4) Optima nutricum nostris Lupa Martia rebus,
Qualia creverunt moenia lacte tuo!
Moenia namque pio conor disponere versu:
Heu mihi, quod nostro est parvus in ore sonus!
Sed tamen exiguo quodcunque e pectore rivi
Fluxerit, hoc patriae serviet omne meae.
Ennius hirsuta cingat sua dicta corona:
Mi folia ex hedera porrige, Bacche, tua,
Ut nostris tumefacta superbiat Umbria libris,
Umbria Romani patria Callimachi.
Scandentes si quis cernet de vallibus arces,
Ingenio muros aestimet ille meo.
Roma fave, tibi surgit opus: date candida cives
Omina, et inceptis dextera cantet avis.
Sacra diesque canam, et cognomina prisca locorum:
Has meus ad metas sudet oportet equus.
(5) Nec cogitandi, Sparse, nec quiescendi
In urbe locus est pauperi. Negant vitam
Ludimagistri mane, nocte pistores,
Aerariorum marculi die toto.
Hine otiosus sordidam quatit mensam
Neroniana nummularius massa;
Illine palucis malleator Hispanae
Tritum nitenti fuste verberat saxum.
Nec turba cessat entheata Bellonae,
Nec fasciato naufragus loquax trunco,
A matre doctus nec rogare Iudaeus,
Nec sulphuratae lippus institor mercis,
Numerare pigri damna qui potest somni,
Dicet quot aera verberent manus urbis,
Cum secta Colcho Luna vapulat rhombo.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
CLASSICAL, HONOURS:
LATIN PROSE, COMPOSITION:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
A.
I am charged with being an American. If warm
affection towards those over whom I claim any share
of authority be a crime, I am guilty of this charge. But
I do assure you (and they who know me publicly and
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 110
privately will bear witness to me) that if ever one man
lived more jealous than another for the supremacy of
parliament and the rights of this imperial crown, it was
myself. Many others, indeed, might be more knowing
in the extent of the foundation of these rights; 1 do
not pretend to be an antiquary, a lawyer, or qualified
for the chair of professor in metaphysics. I never
ventured to put your solid interests upon speculative
grounds. My having constantly declined to do so has
been attributed to my incapacity for such disquisitions ;
and I am inclined to believe it is partly the cause. I
never shall be ashamed to confess that where I am
ignorant I am diffident. I am, indeed, not very soli-
citous to clear myself of this imputed incapacity; be-
cause men, even less conversant than I am in this kind
of subleties, and placed in stations to which J ought
not to aspire, have, by the mere force of civil discretion,
often conducted the affairs of great nations with dis-
tinguished felicity and glory.
iB:
But while superstition is thus the inevitable and there-
fore the legitimate condition “οἱ an early civilization,
the same causes that make it necessary render possible
the growth of political liberty.. Neither the love of
freedom nor the capacity of self-government can exist
in a great nation that is plunged in ignorance. Poli-
tical liberty was in ancient times almost restricted to
cities like Athens and Rome, where public life, and art,
and all the intellectual influences that were con-
centrated in a great metropolis, could raise the people
to an exceptional elevation. In the middle ages ser-
vitude was mitigated by numerous admirable institu-
tions, most of which emanated from the Church; but
the elements of self-government could only subsist in
countries that were so small that the proceedings of
the central government came under the immediate
cognisance of the whole people.
12
176 FACULTY OF ARTS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
CLASSICAL HONOURS—CICERO’S VERRINE
ORATIONS.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:
AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Translate :-—
(1) Itaque magnus ille defensor et amicus eius tibi
suffragatur, me oppugnat; aperte ab iudicibus petit ut
tu. mihi anteponare, et ait hoc se honeste sine ulla in-
vidia ac sine ulla offensione contendere. ‘Non enim’,
inquit, ‘illud peto quod soleo, cum vehementius con-
tendi, impetrare; reus ut absolvatur non peto, sed ut
potius ab hoc quam ab illo accusetur, id peto. Da
mihi hoc; concede quod facile est, quod honestum,
quod non invidiosum; quod cum dederis, sine ullo tuo
periculo, sine infamia illud dederis; ut is absolvatur
cuius ego causa laboro.’ Et ait idem, ut aliquis metus
adiunctus sit ad gratiam, certos esse in consilio quibus
ostendi tabellas velit; id esse perfacile; non enim sin-
gulos ferre sententias, sed universos constituere; cera-
tam uni cuique tabellam dari cera legitima, non illa
infami ac nefaria. Atque is non tam propter Verrem
laborat quam quod eum minime res tota delectat ; videt
enim, si a pueris nobilibus, quos adhuc elusit, si a qua-
druplatoribus, quos non sine causa contempsit semper
ac pro nihilo putavit, accusandi voluntas ad viros fortes
spectatosque homines translata sit, sese in iudiciis
diutius dominari non posse.
(2) ‘Fecit fecerit’? quis umquam edixit isto modo?
quis umquam eius rei fraudem aut periculum proposuit
edicto quae neque post edictum reprehendi neque ante
edictum provideri potuit? lure, legibus, auctoritate
omnium qui consulebantur, testamentum P. Annius
fecerat non improbum, non inofficiosum, non inhu-
manum: quodsi ita fecisset, tamen post illius mortem
nihil de testamento illius novi iuris constitui oporteret.
Voconia lex te videlicet delectabat. Imitatus esses
ipsum illum Voconium, qui lege sua hereditatem ade-
mit nulli neque virgini neque mulieri: sanxit in poste-
rum, qui post eos censores census esset, ne quis here-
dem virginem neve mulierem faceret. In lege Voconia
non est ‘Fecit fecerit’, neque in ulla praeteritum tempus
ΠΝ ee
ΠΡ Υ
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 177
reprehenditur nisi eius rei quae sua sponte scelerata et
nefaria est ut, etiamsi lex non esset, magnopere vitanda
fuerit. Atque in his ipsis rebus multa videmus ita
sancta esse legibus ut ante facta in iudicium non vocen-
tur.
(3) Videte maiorum diligentiam, qui nihildum
etiam istius modi suspicabantur, verum tamen ea, quae
parvis in rebus accidere poterant, providebant. Ne-
minem, qui cum potestate aut legatione in provinciam
esset profectus, tam amentem fore putaverunt, ut
emeret argentum: dabatur enim de publico: ut vestem:
pracbebatur enim legibus: mancipium putarunt, quo et
omnes utimur et non praebetur a populo. Sanxerunt,
ne Quis Emeret Nisi in Demortui Locum. Si qui
Romae esset demortuus? Immo, si quis ibidem. Non
enim te instruere domum tuam voluerunt in provincia,
sed illum usum provinciae supplere.
(4) Urbem Syracusas maximam esse Graecarum,.
pulcherrimam omnium, saepe audistis. Est, iudices,
ita, ut dicitur. Nam et situ est quum munito tum ex
omni aditu, vel terra vel mari, praeclaro ad aspectum,
et portus habet prope in aedificatione aspectuque urbis
inclusos: qui quum diversos inter se aditus habeant, in
exitu coniunguntur et confluunt. Eorum coniunctione
pars oppidi, quae appellatur Insula, mari disiuncta
angusto, ponte rursus adiungitur et continetur.
Ea tanta est urbs, ut ex quattuor urbidus maximis
‘constare dicatur: quarum una est ea, quam dixi, Insula,,
quae duobus portibus cincta, in utriusque portus ostium
aditumque proiecta est, in qua domus est, quae Hieronis
regis fuit, qua praetores uti solent.
(5) Locutus erat liberius de istius improbitate atque
nequitia. Quod isti simul ac renuntiatum est, hominem
iubet Lilybaeum vadimonium Venerio servo promittere.
Promittit. Lilybaeum venitur. Cogere eum coepit,
quum ageret nemo, nemo postularet, sponsionem
[duorum] milium numum facere cum lictore suo,
ni Furtis Quaestum Faceret. Recuperatores se de
cohorte sua dicebat daturum. Servilius et recusare et
deprecari, ne iniquis iudicibus, nullo adversario, iudi-
cium capitis in se constitueretur. Haec quum max-
ime loqueretur, sex lictores circumsistunt valentissimi
et ad pulsandos verberandosque homines exercitatis-.
178 *-FACULTY OF ARTS.
simi: caedunt acerrime virgis: denique proximus lictor,
de quo iam saepe dixi, Sextius, converso baculo, oculos
misero tundere vehementissime coepit. Itaque 1116,
quum sanguis os oculosque complesset, concidit: quum
illi nihilo minus iacenti latera tunderent, ut aliquando
spondere se diceret. Sic ille adfectus illim tum pro
mortuo sublatus perbrevi postea est mortuus. Iste
autem homo Venerius, adfluens omni lepore ac venus-
tate, de bonis illius in aede Veneris, argenteum Cu-
pidinem posuit. Sic etiam fortunis hominum abute-
batur ad nocturna vota cupiditatum suarum.
2. Translate with any necessary notes :—
(1) Sin praetermittes, qualis erit tua ista accusatio,
quae domestici periculi metu certissimi et maximi cri-
minis non modo suspicionem verum etiam mentionem
ipsam pertimescat.
(2) Quartum quem sit habiturus non video, nisi
quem forte ex illo grege moratorum, qui subscriptio-
nem sibi postularunt, cuicumque vos delationem de-
dissetis: ex quibus alienissimis hominibus ita paratus
venis ut tibi hospes aliquis sit recipiendus.
(3) Nunc id quod facimus, si ea ratione facimus
ut malitiae ilorum consilio hostro occurramus, neces-
sario fieri intellegat.
(4) Accessi enim ad invidiam indiciorum levandam
vituperationemque tollendam ut, cum haec res pro
voluntate populi Romani esset iudicata, aliqua ex parte
mea diligentia constituta auctoritas iudiciorum vide-
retur, postremo ut esset hoc iudicatum, ut finis ali-
quando iudiciariae controversiae constitueretur.
\
(5) Verum, ut opinor, Glaucia primus tulit ut com-
perendinaretur reus; antea vel iudicari primo poterat
vel amplius pronuntiari.
(6) Si habuisset iste edictum, quod ante istum et
postea omnes habuerunt, possessio Minuciae genti esset
data: si quis testamento se heredem esse arbitraretur,
quod tum non exstaret, lege ageret in hereditatem, aut,
pro praede litis vindiciarum cum satis accepisset, spon-
sionem faceret et ita de hereditate certaret.
(7) Refert rem ille ad senatum: vehemeter undiaue
reclamatur. Ne multa, iterum iste ad illos aliquanto
post venit, quaerit continuo de signo. Respondetur ei
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. {9
senatum non permittere: poenam capitis constitutam,
si iniussu senatus quisquam attigisset: simul religio
commemoratur.
. (8) Cognoscentur enim omnia istius aera illa vetera,
ut non solum in imperio, verum etiam in stipendiis
qualis fuerit intelligatis.
(9) Ut adeas, tantum dabis: ut tibi cibum ves-
titumque intro ferre liceat, tantum. Nemo rectsa-
bat. Quid? ut uno ictu securis adferam mortem filio
tuo, quid dabis? ne diu crucietur? ne saepius feriatur ?
ne cum sensu doloris aliquo spiritus auferatur?
3. Give the meaning of vasa colligere, sarta tecta
exigere, absentis nomen recipere, litterae commendaticiae,
obtundere aures, gramineae hastae, argentariam facere, m
suis nummis esse, lex maicstatis, de consilii sententwa,
idiotes, lautunuae, mystagogus.
4. Discuss briefly the use and limits of conjectural
emendation.
THIRD'AND FOURTH YEARS.
LATIN (HONOURS).
Piautus: Captives and Rudens; TERENCE: Andria and
Phormuio.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9. TO I.
Lranslate :
(a) ER. Ain tu? dubium habebis etiam, sancte
quom ego iurem tibi?
Postremo, Hegio, si parua iuri iurandost fides,
Vise ad portum. HE. Facere certumst: tu in-
tus cura quod opus est:
Sume, posce, prome quiduis: te facio cellarium.
ER. Nam hercle, nisi ego manticinatus probe
ero, fusti pectito.
He. Aeternum tibi dapinabo uictum, si wera
autumas.
ER. Vnde id? He. A me meoque gnato. ER.
Sponden tu istut? HE. Spondeo.
—CAapTIVEs, 892-900.
180
()
FACULTY OF ARTS.
AMP. Quid mihi meliust, quid magis in remst,
quam corpore vitam ut secludam?
Ita male vivo atque ita mihi multae in pectore
sunt curae exanimales:
Ita res se habent: vitae hau parco: perdidi®
spem qua me oblectabam.
Omnia iam circumcursaui atque omnibus late-
bris perreptavi
Quaerere conservam: voce, oculis, auribus ut
uestigarem.
Neque eam usquam invenio neque quo eam ne-
que qua quaeram consultumst,
Neque quem rogitem responsorem quemquam
interea convenio.
Neque magis solae terrae solae sunt quam hace
loca atque haec regiones.
Neque si uiuit eam uiua umquam quin inveniam
desistam.
—RUDENS, 220-228.
CH. Hoccinest credibile, aut memorabile ;
tanta vecordia innata cuiquam ut siet,
ut malis gaudeant, atque ex incommodis
alterius sua ut comparent commoda? Ah
idne est verum? Immo id est genus hominum
pessumum, in
denegando modo queis pudor paulum adest:
post ubi tempus promissa iam perfici,
tum coacti necessario se aperiunt:
et timent: et tamen res premit denegare:
ibi tum eorum inpudentissima oratio est:
quis tu es? quis mihi es? cur meam {101}
Heus, proxumus sum egomet mihi.
Attamen, ubi fides, si roges,
nil pudet: hic, ubi opust, non verentur: illic ubi
nil opust, 10᾽1 verentur.
Sed quid agam? adeamne ad eum, et cum eo
iniuriam hance expostulem?
ingeram mala multa? Atque aliquis dicat, nihil
promoveris.
—ANDRIA, 625-640.
wn
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 181
ANTIPHO.
(d) Laetis sum, ut meae res sese habent, fratri
obtigisse quod volt.
Quam scitumst, eiusmodi parare in animo cupt-
ditates,
quas, quum res adversae sient, paulo mederi
possis?
Hic simul argentum repperit, cura sese eXx-
pedivit :
ego nullo possum remedio me evolvere ex his
turbis,
quin si hoc celetur, in metu, sin patefit, in pro-
bro sim.
Neque me domum nunc reciperem, ni mi esset
spes ostenta
huiusce habendi. Sed ubinam Getam invenire
possim, x
ut rogem, quod tempus conveniundi patris me
capere iubeat?
—PHORMIO, 820-828.
2. Write critical and explanatory notes on the fol-
lowing passages:
(a) Eiulatione haud opus est; multa oculis multa
miraclitis.
(b) HE. Facito ergo ut Acherunti clueas gloria,
TYN. Qui per virtutem peritat, non interit.
HE. Quando ego te exemplis pessimis cru-
ciavero
Atque ob sutelas tuas te Morti misero
Vel te interiisee vel periisse praedicent.
(c) Nominandi istorum tibi erit magis quam edundi
copia.
(d) Neque exitium exitiost neque adeo spes, quae
hunc me aspellat metum.
(c) PH. At quem virum! Quem ego viderim in vita
optumum.
GE. Videas te atque illum, ut narras!
(f) Homo confidens: qui illum di omnes perduint!
(σὺ Di tibi omnes id quod es dignus duint!
(h) Interea mulier quaedam abhinc triennium
Ex Andro commigravit huc viciniae.
(i) Egon propter me illam decipi miseram sinam,
182 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Quae mihi suom animum atque omnem vitam
credidit,
Quam ego animo egregie caram pro wuxore
habuerim.
(k) Facile omnes, quom valemus, recta consilia
aegrotis damus.
Tu sic hic sis, aliter sentias.
(ἢ Adeo videmur vobis esse idoneti,
In quibus sic inludatis.
(m) Nimio hominum fortunae minus miserae me-
morantur
Quam qui sciunt experiundo eis uis datur acer-
bum.
(n) Equidem me ad velitationem exerceo;
Nam omnia corusca prae tremore fabulor.
3. What were the Greek originals of the Rudens and
the Andria? Quote in proof, one or more lines from
the prologues.
4. What was the origin of the didascaliae prefixed to
the plays of Terence?
Translate and explain:
Acta Ludis Romanis L. Postumio Albino L. Cor-
nelio Merula Aedilib. Curulib. Egere L. Ambivius
Turpio, L. Atilius Praenestinus. Modos fecit Flaccus
Claudi tibiis inparib, Tota graeca Apollodoru Epidi-
cazomenos. Acta est IIII. C. Fannio M. Valerio Coss.
To which of the plays was this notice prefixed?
5. Determine the metres of I. (a), τὸ (b) lines 220,
230;,1. (0) lin'es:625,,626; ΘΟ Δ ΠΏ 1 (a):
Remark on the influence of accent upon Comic
poetry.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
EPIC’ POLIT RY: ΝΕ SAN DAE UCAN:
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Translate :-—
At vero ingentem quatiens Mezentius hastam
turbidus ingreditur campo. quam magnus Orion
cum pedes incedit medii per maxuma Nerei
stagna viam scindens, humero supereminet undas,
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND. HISTORY. 183
aut summis referens annosam montibus ornum
ingrediturque solo et caput inter nubila condit:
talis se vastis infert Mezentius armis.
huic contra Aeneas speculatus in agmine longo
obvius ire parat. manet imperterritus ille
hostem magnanimum opperiens et mole sua stat;
atque oculis spatium emensus quantum satis hastae ;
dextra mihi deus et telum quod missile libro
nunc adsint. voveo praedonis corpore raptis
indutum spoliis ipsum te, Lause, tropaeum
Aeneae. dixit stridentemque eminus hastam
iecit, at illa volans clipeo est excussa proculque
egregium Antoren latus inter et ilia figit,
Herculis Antoren comitem qui missus ab Argis
haeserat Euandro atque Itala consederat urbe,
sternitur infelix alieno volnere, caelumque.
aspicit et dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos.
2. Translate, adding a brief comment or quoting
parallel passages where necessary :—
(a) Cuius olorinae surgunt de vertice pennae,
crimen amor vestrum formaeque insigne pa-
ternae.
(b) Totumque adlabi classibus aequor.
(c) In manibus Mars ipse viris.
(d) Sed non et figere contra
est licitum magnique femur perstrinxit Achatae.
(e) Aspera quis natura loci dimittere quando
suasit equos.
(f) _ Pelagus Troiamne petemus.
(g) Quadriiugis in equos adversaque pectora tendit.
(h) Si mora praesentis leti tempusque caduco
oratur iuveni meque hoc ita ponere sentis,
tolle fuga Turnum atque iustantibus eripe fatis
(1) Quod ut o potius formidine falsa
ludar et in melius tua qui potes orsa reflectas.
(k) Ille pedem referens et inutilis inque ligatus.
(ἢ Ingentem gemitum tunsis ad sidera tollunt
pectoribus,
(m) Cui neque fulgor adhuc necdum sua forma
recessit.
(x) Vixet cui vitam deus aut sua dextra dedisset.
(0) Meritis vacat hic tibi solus
fortunaeque locus.
184 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(p) Devictam Asiam subsedit adulter.
(4) Spem si quam adscitis Aetolum habuistis in
armis
ponite. spes sibi quisque; sed haec quam an-
gusta videtis.
(r) Sat funera fusi
vidimus. \
(s) Proinde tona eloquio, solitum tibi.
(t) Cetera, qua iusso, mecum manus inferat arma.
(w) Prospexit tristi mulcatam morte Camillam.
3. Translate :—
Hae facient dextrae quidquid non expleat aetas
ulla nec humanum reparet genus’omnibus annis
ut vacet a ferro. gentes Mars iste futuus
obruet et populos aevi venientis in orbem
erepto natale feret. tunc omne Latinum
fabula nomen erit; Gabios. Veiosque Coramque
pulvere vix tectae poterunt monstrare ruinae,
Albanosque lares Laurentinosque penates
rus vacuom quod non habitet nisi nocte coacta
invitus questusque Numam iussisse senator.
non aetas haec carpsit edax monumentayue rerum
putria destituit: crimen civile videmus
tot vacuas urbes. generis quo turba redacta est
humani? toto populi qui nascimur orbe
nec muros implere viris nec possumus agros;
urbs nos una capit: vincto fossore coluntur
Hesperiae segetes: stat tectis putris avitis
in nullos ruitura domus: nulloque frequentem
cive suo Romam sed mundi faece repletam
cladis eo dedimus ne tanto in tempore bellum
iam posset civile geri.
4. Translate, adding a comment or parallel passage
where necessary :—
(a) crastina dira quies et imagine maesta diurna
undique funestas acies feret undique bellum.
(b) Pura venerabilis aeque
quam currus ornante toga.
(c) Hoc pro tot meritis solum te, Magne, precatur
uti se Fortuna velis.
(d) Et trabibus mixtis avidos Pythonas aquarum
detulit.
— as. es
Ἀν λον ΣῊ» ον ΜΡ Ὁ δή τ ΣΤ rip ΣΝ pe ἔξω lt
eC pee ee
2 gp
4
ἥ
4
4
a
Ἵ
᾽,
3
=
.
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 185
(e) Impia tam saeve gesturus bella litasti.
(f) Eripe victori gentes et sanguine mundi
fuso, Magne, semel totos consume triumphos.
(2) S55
Formidine mersa.
prosilit hortando melior, fiducia volgo.
(h) Invidia regnate mea.
(i) Ignoti iugulum tamquam scelus imputat hostis.
(k) De Brutis, Fortuna, queror.
(ἢ Nondum attigit arcem
iuris et humanum culmen quo cuncta premuntur
egressus meruit fatis tam nobile letum.
(mm) Ora parentis
quis laceret nimiaque probet spectantibus ira
quem iugulat non esse patrem.
(1) Felix se nescit amari.
(0) Invidet igne rogi miseris.
(p) Hesperiae clades et flebilis unda Pachyni
et Mutina et Leucas puros fecere Philippos.
FOURTH YEAR.
CLASSICAL HONOURS.
LATIN—PRIVATE READINGS.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
N.B.—(4 and B to be shown up in separate books.)
A.
1. Translate :—
(a) Quamvis copiose haec diceremus si res pos-
tularet quam multa quam varia quanta spectacula ani-
mus in locis caelestibus esset habiturus. quae quidem
cogitans soleo saepe mirari non nullorum insolentiam
philosophorum qui -naturae cognitionem admirantur
elusque inventori et principi gratias exsultantes agunt
eumque venerantur ut deum; liberatos enim se per
eum dicunt gravissimis dominis terrore sempiterno et
diurno ac nocturno metu. quo terrore? quo metu?
quae est anus tam delira quae timeat ista quae vos
videlicet si physica non didicissetis timeretis? ‘“Ache-
runsia templa Orci pallida leti obnubila tenebris loca.”
180 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Non pudet philosophum in eo gloriari quod haec non
timeat et quod falsa esse cognoverit? E quo intelligi
potest quam acuti natura sint quoniam haec sine doe
trina credituri fuerunt. Praeclarum autem _ nescio
quod adepti sunt quod didicerunt se cum tempus mortis
venisset totos esse perituros. quod ut ita sit, nihil enim
pugno, quid habet ista res aut laetabile aut gloriosum ?
(d) Ego vero illi maximam gratiam habeo qui me
ea poena multaverit quam sine mutuatione et sine
versura possem dissolvere.
(c) Suum illud nihil ut adfirmet tenet ad extremum.
(d) Rationem illi sententiae suae non fere redde-
bant nisi quid erat numeris aut descriptionibus expli-
candum.
2. Quote the epitaph on Ennius and discuss any
various readings.
B.
1.. Translate:
Atque idem quanto in odio postea suis illis ipsis fuit,
per quos in altiorem locum adscenderat! Neque iniu-
ria. Facite enim, ut non solum mores eius et arrogan-
tiam, sed etiam vultum atque amictum, atque illam
usque ad talos demissam purpuram recordemini. Is,
quasi non esset ullo modo ferendum, se ex iudicio
discessisse- victum, rem ab subselliis in Rostra detulit.
Et iam querimur saepe, hominibus novis non satis ma-
nos in hac civitate esse fructus? Nego usquam umquam
fuisse maiores: ubi, si quis ignobili loco natus ita vivit,
ut nobilitatis dignitatem virtute tueri posse videatur,
usque eo pervenit, quoad cum industria eum innocentia
prosecuta est; si quis autem hoc uno nititur, quod sit
ignobilis, procedit saepe longius, quam si idem ille esset
cum iisdem suis vitiis nobilissimus. Ut Quintius (nihil
enim dicam de ceteris) si fuisset homo nobilis, quis
eum cum illa superbia atque intolerantia ferre potuisset ?
Quod eo loco fuit, ita tulerunt, ut, si quid haberet a
natura boni, prodesse ei putarent oportere, superbiam
autem atque arrogantiam eius deridendam magis arbi-
trarentur propter humilitatem hominis, quam pertimes-
cendam.
δὲν my
-
«
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 187
2. Translate, with any necessary notes :—
(1) Neque umquam illa ita de suo scelere et im-
manitate audiet, ut naturae nomen amittat. — ἶ
(2) Ex petulanti atque improbo scurra, in discor-
diis civitatis, ad eam columnam, ad quam multorum
saepe conviciis perductus erat, tum suffragiis populi
pervenerat. ; fo
(3) Atque etiam ipse conditor totius negotit Guttam
adspergit huic Bulbo. é
(4) Si ideo quia subscripserint: videte, quid agatis,
ne censorium stilum, cuius mucronem multis remediis
maiores nostri retuderunt, aeque posthac atque illum
dictatorium gladium pertimescamus.
(5) Habitus ne hoc quidem umquam recusavit, quo
minus vel ea lege rationem vitae suae redderet, qua non
teneretur.
3. Translate :
Sed et illa ex Latinis conversio multum et ipsa con-
tulerit. Ac de carminibus quidem neminem credo du-
bitare, quo solo genere exercitationis dicitur usus esse
Sulpicius. Nam et sublimis spiritus attollere oratio-
nem potest, et verba poetica libertate audaciora non
praesumunt eadem proprie dicendi facultatem; sed et
ipsis sententiis adicere jicet oratorium robur et omissa
supplere et effusa substringere. Neque ego paraphra-
sin esse interpretationem tantum volo, sed circa eos-
dem sensus certamen atque aemulationem. Ideoque
ab illis dissentio qui vertere orationes Latinas vetant,
quia optimis occupatis, quidquid aliter dixerimus, ne-
cesse sit esse deterius. Nam neque semper est des-
perandum aliquid illis quae dicta sunt melius posse
teperiri, neque adeo ieiunam ac pauperem natura
eloquentiam fecit ut una de re bene dici nisi semel non
possit: nisi forte histrionum multa cirea voces easdem
variare gestus potest, orandi minor vis, ut dicatur ali-
auid post quod in eadem materia nihil dicendum sit.
Sed esto neque melius quod invenimus esse neque par,
est certe proximis locus.
4. Translate with any necessary notes :—
(τ) Ceterum nitor et summa in excolendis operibus
mans magis videri potest temporibus quam ipsis de-
faicse: virium tamen Attio plus tribuitur, Pacuvium
videri doctiorem qui esse docti-adfectant volunt.
a
188 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(2) Ideoque qui horride atque incomposite quidlibet
illud frigidum et inane extulerunt, antiquis se pares cre-
dunt; qui carent cultu atque sententiis, Attici sunt scili-
cet; qui praecisis conclusionibus obscuri, Sallustium
atque Thycydiden superant; tristes ac ieiuni Pollionem
aemulantur; otios et supini, si quid modo longius cir-
cumduxerunt, iurant ita Ciceronem locuturum fuissc.
(3) Sed si forte aliqui inter dicendum offulserit extem-
poralis color, non superstitiose cogitatis demum est
inhaerendum. Neque enim tantum habent curae ut
non sit dandus et fortunae locus, cum saepe etiam
scriptis ea quae subito nata sunt inserantur.
5. Give the meaning of the following words and
phrases :—
Multam committere, sequester, advocatus, aucupari,
decuriae iudicum, imagines, litis aestimatio, obsigna-
tores, verbis conceptis peierare, aerarius, aliud agere,
calumnia, edictum praetoris, subsortitio, praevaricari
accusationi, vetustatem perferre, altercatio, dilectum
agere, communes loci, circulatoria volubilitas, cothur-
nus, pedestris oratio.
FOURTH YEAR.
CLASSICAL HONOURS:
ΠΑ ΡΕΝ:
PRIVATE READINGS: PLAUTUS, LIVY AND
MERRY’S FRAGMENTS.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Ἄς
I. PLautus, TRINUMMUS.
1. Translate :—
(a) vs. 198-205.
(b) vs. 998-1007.
2. Translate and comment,on the following passages.
(a) Nam hic nimium morbus mores invasit bonos
Ita plerique omnis iam sunt intermortul.
(b) Multas res simitu in meo corde vorso,
Multum in cogitando dolorem indipiscor.
Egomet me coquo et macero et defetigo:
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 189
Magister mihi exercitor animus nunc est.
(c) Sed Campans genus
Multo Syrorum iam antidit patientia.
(d) Nam beneficium homini proprium quod datur,
prosum perit. .
3. How is the term “prologue” defined by Aristotle?
What two purposes did the prologue serve in Roman
Comedy? Remark on the character of the prologues
to the Trinummus.
II. Livy, Book II.
1. Translate ch. 58, §§ 3-9.
2. Translate :—
Quattuor et viginti lictores apparere consulibus, et
eos ipsos plebis homines. Nihil contemptius neque
infirmius, si sint contemnant; sibi quemque ea magna
atque horrenda facere. His vocibus alii alios cum in-
citassent, ad Voleronem, de plebe hominum, quia, quod
ordines duxisset, negaret se militem fieri debere, lictor
missus est a consulibus.
(a) Distinguish between lictor and viator.
(b) Remark on the meaning of apparere.
3. Comment on (a) primo pugnatum ad S*pei sit aequo
Marte, iterum ad portam Collinam: (b) Chap. 27, cum..
..dicere, (81), tergiversari (§3), dixisset (810): (c) Ile
primum dicitur wvindicta liberatus: (4) Ludi forte ex
instauratione magni Romae parabantur: (6) His civitas
data agerque trans Anienem; vetus Claudia tribus,
additis postea novis tribulibus, qui ex eo venirent agro
appellata.
4. Point out some inconsistencies in Livy’s narrative
(Bk. 11... How may they be accounted for?
B.
MERRY’S FRAGMENTS.
1. Translate, adding a line of comment where neces-
sary :—
(a) Simul ac dacrimas de ore noegeo detersit.
(b) Ingenio arbusta ubi nata sunt, non obsita.
190 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(c) Scopas atque verbenas sagmina sumpserunt.
(d) Priamo vi vitam evitari.
(ec) Haec tu etsi perverse dices facile Achivos flexe-
Liss
nam opulenti cum locuntur pariter atque igno-
biles
eadem dicta eademque oratio aequa non aeque
valet.
(f) Paula mea, amabo, pol tuam ad laudem addito
- praefiscini.
Can you quote a parallel?
(g) Praeterea omne iter est hoc labosum atque
lutosum.
Emend this line.
(i) O lapathe ut iactare.
(i) Acipensere cum decumano.
(Rk) Hoc nolueris et debueris te
si minus delectat quod τεχνίον Isocratium est
ληρῶ desque simul totum et συμμειρακιῶδες
non operam perdo.
What is the meaning?
2. Translate, adding where you can a philological
note:—topper, homones, (what other spelling is
found’), manubias, redhostis, puer, casci, stlataria, in-
sece, falae, vitulans, obbitere, praeterpropter, nepa,
florus, averruncassint, calvitur, incilet, spisse, lactat,
inibi, numero, bulga, scriblitarius, caperata, ericius,
casnares.
3. State whence the following quotations are taken :—
(a) Oderint dum metuant.
(b) Dimidiate Menander.
(c) Laetus sum laudari me abs te pater a laudato
viro
(d) Male vincit quem post paenitet victoriae.
(e) Quae Corinthi arcem altam habetis matronae
opulentae optimates.
multi suam rem bene gessere, etc.
Can you quote the original of the last?
Ane sb
CLASSICAL LITERATURE AND HISTORY. 191
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
COMPARATIVE PHILOLOGY.
-Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
N.B.—A and Β to be sent up in different books.
ἊΣ
(N.B.—Full marks may be obtained in this section by cor-
rect answers to 5 questions of which, however, No. 3
must be one.)
τ. Divide the two Indo-European languages into
groups and introduce the following Prussian, Welsh,
Roumanian, Gothic, modern Norwegian, Slovakian.
Name any characteristic features of Sanskrit, Greek,
Latin, Celtic, Slavonic.
2. Write out the Pres. and Perfect of “bhid” in Sans-
krit and of the corresponding root in Germanic; also
in Germanic the primitive Pres. and Perfect of root
“lith” “to go,” and show how Verner’s law is illustrated
thereby. Give other illustrations of the same law.
3. State what are the most recent views about Ablaut
in the Indo-European languages. Shew how the fol-
lowing words are connected :—
(a) βέλεμνον + βλῆγναι.
(6) γόνυ + Gothic kniu (for kneu).
(c) Sinn (Germ.) + vovs.
(4) ἔλαφος + lamb.
(e) ἐλάτη + O. H. 6. linda.
(7) ἄργυρος + rajatam (skr.—silver).
(9) εὔκηλος + ἕκηλος.
(1) augere + wax (=to grow).
(1) ἐγώ + μέ.
(k) εὔχομαι + voveo.
(1) φεύγω + φέβομαι.
(m) ἄσχετος + ἑκτός (why not σχετός ?)
(72) ἄλευρον + meal.
4
(0) πῖθι + πέπωκα.
(p) nOi— wv + suade-re.
13
192 FACULTY OF ARTS,
4. Comment on the influence of analogy in the fol-
lowing forms :—
ἡδέσι, φεροίατο. ἑσπόμην, ποθέσομαι, πολίτου. πόδεσσι.
πηγαίνω, ὁκτώ (Greek Dial.), ἑξακόσιοι, πόληος, νύμφησι,
voster, noctu, μηκέτι. ἔρρηξα, ἁλκυών, μήτηρ, one ; what
would you expect in each case?
s. Describe with examples the treatment of short ὁ in
atin.
Connect the vocalisation of the following words :—
(a) ἀἁγέομαι + seek.
(b) haedus + goat; give the Ags. and Gothic.
(c) death + Tod (Germ.); what is the Gothic?
(d) duco + tiuha (Goth.).
(e) rex + rajan.
(f) needle + Nadel (Germ.). Distinguish this ee
from ee in Seek.
(g) hostis + gesti. (Pl. O.H.G.).
(h) Statio + sthitas (Skr.).
6. Explain what is meant by Sandhi and give ex-
amples of double forms in Greek which may be ex-
plained thereby.
9:
τ. Remark on the origin of the following forms:
elves, τρεῖς, δήμου, coalesco, claudo, κτείνω, ἐλαχύς.
κάββαλε, attigi, semestris, παίς, πᾶς, βροτός, sumpsi,
nouos, ero, Ζεύς.
2. οἶκος Give the root of this word, its stem, and the
origin of the various case-forms in the plural.
3. What explanations have been offered of the short
a in the termination of the nom. sing. of A-stems?
4. In what forms does the original locative case ap-
pear in Greek and Latin?
5. Explain the origin of the stem and termination in
the following forms: honor, miles, sermo, πόδα, πεδεμ,
πατρί, patri, πολιεσσίῖ, vews, navis, ille, hic; vellem,
moneam, οἶδας, ἔδωκα. dixi, ἐλύσατε. amabam, sumus,
ἔμεν, sequeris.
6. Remark on the formation of the Latin perfect in
its various forms.
7. What is the probable origin of the stem of the
Greek subjunctive in thematic and unthematic verbs?
8. Enumerate, with explanation where possible, the
forms of the operative in Greek and Latin.
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
FIRST YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND HISTORY.
THuRsDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
(Parts A and B must be written in separate books.)
A,
1. Give a short account of the origin of the English
essay and its development up to the time of Dryden.
Note any foreign influences which helped to aetermine
this development.
2. Give the substance of any one of Bacon’s essays,
and make this the basis of a criticism of his style.
3. What special contribution to English essay liter-
ature was made by each of the following? Give some
leading characteristic of the style of each, and say how
he influenced later writers: Sir Thomas Browne,
Bishop Hall, Sir William Temple, Oliver Goldsmith.
B
Answer any three of the first five questions. The sixth
question 1s to be answered without alternative.
1. Describe the career and conquests of Alexander
the Great or the last age of the Roman Republic.
2. What do you know of the relations between Em-
pire and Papacy during the Middle Ages?
3. Indicate the nature of the chief changes which
followed the Crusade or give some account of the
struggle between England and France, 1338-1453.
4. Discuss the rise of Holland or the character of
the Thirty Years’ War.
5. Outline the career of Peter the Great or that of
Napoleon I.
6. Make brief notes on: the reforms of Solon; the
battle of Leuctra, the second Samnite War: the Roman
Empire under Diocletian; Theodoric; the Third Cru-
sade; the Great Schism; the Confession of Augsburg :
the Congress of Vienna; the Revolution of 1848.
194 FACULTY OF ARTS.
FIRST YEAR. |
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMPOSITION.
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903 :—2.30 TO 5.30 P.M.
1. Write out the following in modern English, ad-
ding explanatory notes where they are required :—
ἊΣ
On this ger werd the king Stephen ded & beby-
ried ther his wif & his sune weron bebyried et
Fauresfeld. that minstre hi makeden. Tha the king
was ded. tha was the eorl beionde se. & ne durste nan
man don other bute god for the micel eie of him.
Tha he to Engleland com. tha was he underfangen
mid micel wurtscipe. & to king bletced in Lundene
on the Sunnendzi beforen midwinterdei, & held theer
mice Curt:
Be
Where is it groundid expressli in scripture, that
men mowe lete schaue her berdis? and how dare thei
so lete, sithen it can not be founde expressli in hol
scripture that thei oughten so lete, and namelich
sithen it is founde in holi scripture that men leten her
berdis growe withoute schering or schauyng, and also
sithen it was the oolde usage ‘thorugh al the world in
cristendom ?
(:
Now the thunder-thumping [ove transfused his dotes
into your excellent formositie, which have with your
resplendent beames thus segregated the enmity of
these rurall animals.
19:
He that commeth lately out of France, will talke
Frenche Englishe, and never blush at the matter. An-
other choppes in with English Italianated, and ap-
pleth the Italian phrase to our English speaking. 1
know them that thinke Rhetorike to stand wholie
upon darke wordes, and he that can catche an ynke-
horne terme by the taile, hym thei compt to be a fine
Englishman, and a good Rhetorician.
ee
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 195
ἘΣ
In al the gramerscoles οἱ Engelond children leueth
Frensch & construeth &)lurneth an Englysch, & hab-
beth ther-by avauntage in on syde & desavauntage yn
another; here avauntage ys that a lurneth here gra-
mer yn lasse tyme than children were ywoned to do—
disavauntage ys that now children. of gramerscole
conneth no more Frensch than can here lift heele, ἃ
that ys harm for ham, & a scholle passe the se & tra-
vayle in strange londes, & in meny caas also. Also
gentil men habbeth now moche yleft for to teche here
childern Frensch.
2. State what you know of the date and authorship
of the passages quoted. ;
3. Explain what is meant by Latin words of the
First, Second, Third, and Fourth Periods, and give
examples selected from the above extracts.
COMPOSITION.
(Write this part of the Paper in a separate book.)
1. Explain and illustrate:—Simple Barbarism, Col-
loquialism, Localism, in the use of words.
2. State clearly the nature and use of the Balanced
Sentence. Give an example.
3. Correct, or improve, the expression of each of the
following examples:
(a) That, and the society of evil companions, was
the cause of his ruin.
(b) River-bed diggings is an important branch of
placer-mining that has been worked only within the
past year.
(c) I received the letter you wrote yesterday, and
without a moment’s delay, proceeded at once to our
agent’s office, though it was raining at the time, and
the clerk said he had just telegraphed his acceptance.
(d) Youth is delighted with applause, because it
is considered as'the earnest of some future good, and
because the prospect of life is far extended; but to me,
who am now declining to decrepitude, there is little
to be feared. from the malevolence of men, and yet less
to be hoped from their affection or esteem.
4. Write-an essay of not less than two pages on any
one of the following subjects :—
a iiien laters
B. Plagiarism.
C. Dreams.
190 FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
THURSDAY, APRIL OTH, 1903 :—MorRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe the hall Heorot.
2. Write on Mérlin in connection with Nennius and
Geoffrey of Monmouth.
3. Describe Arthur’s appearance, character and daily
life, and also the customs of his court as given in
French Chivalric romance.
4. Mention comic episodes in the Mysteries. Con-
nect with precision the Mysteries with the Moralities,
Give an outline of some Moral play.
5. State and illustrate (avoiding a narrative outline
of any one piece) the various features of Chaucerian
vision-poetry.
6. Give some account of Petrarch. Make a note on
Boccaccio and “tragedies.”
7. What does the Chasteau d’Amour illustrate? Enter
into some particulars.
8. Glance at Roger’.Bacon’s-reading and write a
paragraph on his scientific views and the inventions
attributed to him.
9. (a) Describe Chaucer’s Knight ov Monk and make
a note when you think one necessary, (b) write on the
Romaunt of the Rose and also on its connections with
Chaucer. '
10. Confessio Amantis: its relation to (a) Chaucer, (Ὁ)
the Romaunt of the Rose, (c) Brunetto Latini. Com-
ment on: its framework. Was Gower an accurate
scholar?
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND COMPOSITION,
THURSDAY, APRIL OTH, 1902: NOON, 3 TO 6.
Give some account of the author of the Vision of
Piers the Plowman and of his views.
2. (a) Give a list of English and Scotch Chaucerians,
name one work of each and very briefly indicate its
character.
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND. LITERATURE. 197
(b) Treat the Spenserians in the same way.
3. Write on the Renaissance movement at the Eng-
lish Universities.
4. Write on Tottel’s Miscellany.
5. Write on Spenser as reflecting;
(a) Italian influence ;
(b) Contemporary history.
%
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
(To be written in a separate book.)
Write an essay of about two pages on one of the
following subjects:
(a) The French period of our Literature.
(b) One of Tennyson’s Arthurian Idylls.
(c) The study of English Literature.
SECOND YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE
(For Affiliated Colleges.)
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Into what great periods may English Literature
be divided? Give the subdivision of one of them.
2. Write about a page on Beowulf, confining yourself
as little as possible to an outline of the poem. What
do you know concerning Cynewulf?
3. Trace the development of the Arthur story.
4. Give some account of Chaucer’s life. Show that
the pilgrims of the Canterbury Tales reflect Chaucer's
England.
5. Write a few notes (three or four lines in each case)
on Gower, Occleve and Lydgate.
6. Give proofs of the influence of Italian Literature
on English with regard to matter and form.
7. Give some account of Shakspere’s predecessors in
the English drama.
8. Write about a page on one of Shakspere’s plays
Contrast Shakspere and Ben Jonson.
198 )FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR
ENGLISH LITERATURE AND ‘COMPOSITION.
(For Affiliated Colleges.) |
THurspaAy, APRIL 9TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 3 TO ©.
1. Notice Spenser’s minor poems. Give a list of
English Spenserians who lived in the time of Spenser
and subsequently, and name a poetical work (or a
poem) of each. Who was the leading Scotch Spen-
serian? Give some account of his work.
2. Write on the Essay prior to 1660 or on the drama
between 1750 and 1800.
3. Name the authors and indicate the character of—
Hesperides, Arcades, Euphues, Joseph Andrews, The
Duchess of Malfi, Areopagitica, The Rape of the Lock,
Tom Jones, Apologie for Poetrie, Mirror for Magis-
trates, Ecclesiastical Polity, New Atlantis, Ormulum,
Tale of a Tub, The Excursion, Rasselas, Annus Mira-
bilis, Satire of the Three Estates.
COMPOSITION.
(To be written in a separate book.)
Write an essay of not less than two pages on one
of the following subjects:
Patriotism.
Travel.
Sport.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HISTORY OF LITERATURE.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL ‘I5TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Write a short account of the nature and purpose
of Jeremy Collier's A Short View; and express an in-
dependent judgment on the controversy.
2. State clearly the leading characteristic features
of the Heroic Play, as composed by Dryden.
Bes
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 199
3. Outline ‘the plot of Addison’s Cato; and note the
chief features of the kind of tragedy to which this play
belongs. Wherein lies the dramatic weakness of Cato?
4. Write notes on -—Religio Laict, Eloisa to Abelard,
Pantheism in An Essay on Man, The Vanity of Human
Wishes, The Castle of Indolence, Fingal. .
s. Distinguish the forms of the Heroic Couplet used
by Dryden and Pope, respectively. ᾿
6. Write a short account of the literary career of
Cowper. 3
7. What are the principal points of interest in the
poetry of Crabbe?
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
THURSDAY, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
(N.B.—High marks will be given for excellence m
arrangement and ex pression.)
τ. Examine the adequacy of the definition of style
as “proper words in proper places.”
2. “It's pronounced by Dryden that a line of mono-
syllables is almost always harsh.” (Johnson.) Discuss
this point.
3. Explain the importance, according to Taine’s
theory, of the action of the milieu in affecting the nature
of literary work; original illustration preferred. Note
carefully the ‘limited applicability of this principle.
4. What distinction is involved in Prof. Saintsbury’s
recent deélaration that the critic should direct his at-
tention chiefly “to questions of form, expression, result,
rather than to questions of matter, conception, plan?”
«$5: Write an essay on any one of the following sub-
jecrs -——
4.'Everyman: A ‘morality.
B. A Recent work of Prose Fiction.
C. Dreams.
200 FACULTY OF ARTS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
ELIZABETHAN DRAMA.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Discuss the relation of the Miracle and Morality
Plays to the Regular Drama.
2. ΤῸ what extent was the drama developed by (a)
Lyly, and (δ) Marlowe?
3. To what periods of Shakspere’s career would you
ascribe the following plays, and on what grounds :—
(a) Hamlet; (b) A Midsummer Night’s Dream; (b) The
Tempest.
4. State your own view of the characters of Juliet
and Hamlet.
5. Write on (a) the construction of ‘‘Macbeth”; (6)
the ethics of “King Lear.”
6. Show the relation of “Henrv V.” to the spirit of
the Elizabethan Age.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.—(First Paper.)
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
‘1. Write on Wordsworth’s Prelude as describing his
school-boy days and the growth of his poetical power.
2. Indicate the poetical characteristics of The Ancient
Mariner. What was Wordsworth’s opinion of The
Ancient Mariner?
3. State (very briefly), and illustrate, the leading
characteristics of Tennyson’s early poems,
4. What preliminary views regarding the lover in
Maud are necessary to the true conception of the
poem? Examine Tennyson’s use of Nature in Maud.
5. Trace Shelley’s main line of thought in Adonats.
Examine Thyrsis.
6. Indicate the general structure of In Memoriam.
Examine the second division of the poem.
$s ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 201
7. Write a short and pointed paragraph, explanatory
or otherv ise, on each of the following subjects:
(a) Coleridge’s views of Wordsworth’s poetry.
(b) The Pantisocracy.
(c) Burke’s Reflections.
(4) Wordsworth as Tennyson’s forerunner.
(6) Southey’s epics.
8. Illustrate:
(a) Exaltation and depression of character in the
course of the Arthur saga;
(b) Idealism in some one of the /dylls.
g. Write a page on some topic discussed in the lec-
tures and not touched on in the foregoing questions.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.—(Second Paper.)
Ἢ WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
N.B.—Answer the first three questions and any two in
addition. Illustrate as far as possible from the poems
read.
I. Refer each of the foilowing extracts to its context ;
and discuss in each case how far the lines indicate the
special field of the poet quoted.
(a) The moving accident is not my trade;
To freeze the blood I have no ready arts:
Tis my delight alone in summer shade,
To pipe a simple song for thinking hearts.
(b) I played a soft and doleful air,
I sang an old and moving story—
An old rude song that suited well
That ruin wild and hoary.
Nor would my flesh have shrunk
From seconding my soul, with eyes uplift
And wide to heaven, or, straight like thunder,
sunk
To the centre, of an instant: or around
Turned calmly and inquisitive, to scan
The license and the limit, space and bound,
, Allowed to truth made visible in man.
(c
——
202 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(4) 1 wait thy breadth, Great Parent, that my strain
May modulate with murmurs of the air,
And motions of the forest and the sea,
And voice of living beings and woven hymns
Of night and day, and the deep heart of man.
(e) Behold I dream a dream of good,
And mingle all the world with thee!
2. Refer to their context, and make short notes upon
the following:
(a) Pride! bend thine eye from heaven to thine estate,
See how the mighty shrink into a song!
(b) There is no other crime, no mad assail
To make old prose in modern rhyme more sweet.
(c) You are the men and wisdom shall die with you.
(d) To that high Capital, where Kingly Death
Keeps his pale court in beauty and decay.
(e) Like that great dame of Lapidoth she sang.
3. Make notes on Coleridge as a revolutionist ; Ten-
nyson’s treatment of nature in Jn Memoriam; the pic-
torial power of Scott; the melancholy note in Shelley;
Browning's knowledge of the Renaissance.
4. Write on the autobiographical element in Byron’s
poetry.
. Discuss Browning’s treatment of Theology.
. Write on Browning as the poet of Art.
. Write a criticism of Saul.
. The Princess has been called “A splendid failure.”
Justify or refute this criticism.
CONE OUI
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH.
HISTORY 4OF ICEION,
Monpay, APRIL ‘6TH, 1008 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Under the ‘influence of what causes has the Novel
risen to its important position in modern literature
and life?
2. What distinction is drawn by Hawthorne between
the Novel and the Romance? Give examples, and
discuss Hawthorne’s view independently. ὃ
yr
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 203
3. State the purpose of Sir Charles Grandison; and
explain why this novel failed to fulfil it.
4. “The manners of every rank must be seen in order
to be known.” (Fielding.) Is the author of this say-
ing true to his own maxim?
5. What points of resemblance have been noted be-
tween Candide and Rasselas?
6. Write notes on:—The Castle of Otranto, Caleb
Williams, Anastasius, La Princesse de Cvées.
7. Discuss the position of Lytton as a writer of his-
torical fiction, and refer to his works in support of
your views.
8. Discuss, in detail, the pre-eminence of Jane Austen
in her own field of fiction.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
(N.B.—High marks will be given for excellence in
arrangement and expression.)
1. Give, in outline, the theory of Brunetiere regarding
the evolution of literary genera or species. Discuss
and illustrate any one of its subdivisions.
2. Distinguish, with the help of specific illustrations,
between simplicity and complexity in the substance of
a dramatic story.
3. “All casual events are unpleasant in _ fictitious
writing, when they are employed as contrivances to
bring about the catastrophe.” (Dugald Stewart.)
Comment on this assertion, and give illustration in
support of your own view.
4. Explain carefully the generally accepted meaning
of the term Form, as applied to Poetry.
5. Explain and illustrate with original examples, the
followine technical terms:—Culmination of tragedy,
Alliteration in modern verse, Rhythm as distinct from
formal metre.
_ 6. Write an essay on any one of the following sub-
5.6 Ὲ9:-- Ὁ
A. “The Scipionism of Scipio is precisely that part
he could not borrow:” | Emerson.
204 ,FACULTY OF ARTS.
B. “No art is easy, least of all the art of letters :”
Raleigh.
C. “Imaging is, in itself, the very height and life
ep
of poetry:” Dryden.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH HONOURS.
CHAUCER:
TuHurspay, Dec. 18TH :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Divide Chaucer’s career into periods, and show by
reference to his works the influences predominant in
each. -
2. Give as accurately as you can Chaucer’s descrip-
tion of the Parson and the Ploughman. What conclu-
sions may be drawn as to the poet’s religious and poli-
tical opinions?
3. Illustrate from the Prologue to the Canterbury
Tales Chaucer’s (a2) humour; (6) satirical power; (c)
felicity of phrase.
4. Outline in your own words the story of the
Knighte’s Tale or the Parlement of Foules, comment-
ing on Chaucer’s use of his material. ;
5. Explain the following passages, and state clearly
their context, giving full particulars as to persons, cir-
cumstances, etc.:—
(a) For par amour 1 loved hir first er thow.
What wiltow seyn? thou wistest nat yet now,
Whether she be a woman or goddesse!
Thyn is affecioun of holinesse,
And myn is love, as to a creature.
(b) Now draweth cut, er that we ferrer twinne ;
He which that hath the shortest shal biginne.
(c) Wel coude he rede a lessoun or a storie,
But alderbest he song an offertorie.
(d) Ther saugh I pleyen jogelours,
Magiciens and tregetours,
And phitonesses, charmeresses,
Olde wicches, sorceresses,
That use exorsissaciouns,
And eek thise fumigaciouns.
(e) A man may serven bet and more to pay
In half a yere, al-thouch hit were no more,
Than som man doth that hath served ful yore,
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 205
(f) ‘Lo here! a parfit reson of a goos!’
Quod the sperhauk; ‘never mot she thee!
‘Lo swich hit is to have a tonge loos!’
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE (HONOURS).
SPENSER AND MILTON.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO
540.
1. In what poems does Spenser refer to (a) his wife ;
(0) Lord Burghley; (c). Sir Walter Ralegh; (4) Sir
Philip Sidney?
2. “Among the Renascence poets, Spenser repre-
sents the transition from medizvalism.” Discuss this
statement.
3. In which of Milton’s minor poems does he show
sympathy with Puritanism? Illustrate with quotations.
4. Narrate the incident of Una and the lion, and ex-
plain its allegorical significance.
5. Illustrate from Paradise Lost, Bk. I., Milton’s
view of heathen mythology. Describe the Council of
the Fallen Angels. ‘
6. State precisely where the following passages occur
and give as full an account as you can of the context :—
(a) By that he ended had his ghostly sermon,
The Foxe was well induc’d to be a Parson.
(b) But now my task is smoothly done.
I ean fly, or I can run
Quickly to the green earth’s end,
Where the bowed welkin slow doth bend.
(c) Fame is the spur that the clear spirit doth raise
(That last infirmity of noble mind),
To scorn delights and live laborious days.
(d) Phyllis, Charillis, and sweet Amaryllis.
Phyllis, the faire, is eldest of the three;
The next to her is bountiful Charillis:
But the youngest is the highest in degree.
(e) The Babe yet lies in smiling infancy
That on the bitter cross
Must redeem our loss,
So both himself and us to glorify.
(f) There let the pealing organ blow,
206 FACULTY OF ARTS.
To the full-voiced quire below,
In service high and anthems clear.
(g) And let the roring Organs loudly play
The praises of the Lord in lively notes;
The whiles, with hollow throates,
The choristers the joyous Antheme sing.
(h) He hates fowle leasings, and vile flatterie,
Two filthie blots in noble gentrie.
(Ὁ He told of Senates and Popes and evermore
He strowd an Ave-Mary after and before.
(7) What though the field be lost?
All is not lost.
(k) Bring the rathe primrose that forsaken dies,
The tufted crow-toe and pale Jessamine.
(ἢ Tell me, ye merchants’ daughters, did ye see
So fayre a creature in your towne before?
THIRD Y BAR:
ENGLISH (HONOURS.)
PROSE WRITERS BEFORE DRYDEN.—(First
Paper.)
Books: More, Utopia; Bacon, New Atlantis; LopGE,
Rosalynd.
FRIDAY, APRIL ARD, 1903 :--MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Write briefly on literature in England before
Chaucer, noting specially those writers who laid the
foundations of English prose.
2. Discuss Utopia as a piece of literature.
3. Mention the chief social reforms suggested by
More in his Utopia and show how far these seem jus-
tifiable. Compare his social’ ideal with that of Bacon,
as seen in The New Atlantis.
4. Discuss the plot, characters and style of Lodge’s
Rosalynd.
5. Name the authors and define the periods of the
following extracts. Note the points which distinguish
the two styles, and state clearly what influences pro-
duced the change.
(a) And by sodeyne aduenture ther was an hor-
ryble lyon kepte in a stronge Toure of stone and it
happend that he at the tyme brake loos, and come hur-
-
hi
t
¢
5
ἃ
:
4
4
᾿.
é
E
> δα ὄ- 4 ee
tain Nn in
-- συν.
<4
— ae
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 207
lynge afore the Quene & her Knyghtes. And whanne
the Quene sawe the lyon, she cryed and fledde, and
praide her Knyghtes to rescowe her, and there was none
of hem alle but twelve that abode, and alle the other
fledde, Thenne saide La cote male taile; Now 1 see wel
that alle coward knyghtes ben not dede, and there with
alle he drewe his swerd, and dressed hym afore the
lyon, and that lyon gaped wyde and came upon hym
raumppynge to have slayne hym, and he thenne smote
hym in the mydde of the hede suche a myghty stroke,
that it clofe his hede in sonder, and dasshed to the
erthe. Thenne was it tolde the Quene how the yonge
man named by scorne La Cote male tayle hadde slayne
the lyon. With that the Kyng came home, and whanne
the Quene told hym of that aduenture, he was wel
pleased and saide, upon payne of myn hede he shalle
preue a noble man and a feythful Knyghte and true of
his promyse thanne the Kyng forth with al madde hym
Knyghte.
(b) 1 am, sir (whatsoever thou art) a forrester and
a ranger of these walkes, who, following my deere to
the fall, was conducted hither by some assenting fate,
that I might save thee, and disparage myselfe. For
comming into this place, I saw thee asleepe, and the
lyon watching thy awake, that at thy rising he might
pray uppon thy carkasse. At the first sight I con-
jectured thee a gentleman (for all men’s thoughts
ought to bee favourable in imagination) and I counted
it the part of a resolute man to purchase a stranger’s
reliefe, though with the losse of his owne blood, which
I have performed (thou seest) to mine owne prejudice.
lf. therefore, thou be a man of such worth as I value
thee by thy exteriour liniaments, make discourse unto
me what is the cause of thy present misfortunes; for by
the furrowes in thy face thou seemest to be crost with
her frownes; but whatsoever, or howsoever, lett mee
crave that favour, to heare the tragick cause of thy
estate.
14
208 FACULTY OF ARTS.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH (HONOURS.)
PROSE WRITERS BEFORE DRYDEN.—(Second
Paper.)
Books: SIDNEY, An Apologie for Poctrie; EARLE,
Microcosmographie; MiLton, Areopagitica.
FriIpAy, APRIL 3RD, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Compare, in their general outlines, dn A pologie
for Poetrie and An Essay of Dramatic Poesy; and ac-
count for the differences which you find.
2. Make notes on the following: Sidney's debt to
Aristotle ; to Scaliger; effect of ballad poetry; in despite
of Pallas; blind crowder.
3. What special contribution was made by each of
the following to the development of English prose:
Roger Ascham, Thomas Cranmer, John Earle, Sir
William Temple, John Bunyan?
4. Give some account of Milton’s work in prose, and
discuss his style. I[lustrate by quotétion or direct
reference.
5. Write on Seventeenth Century Ideals, or The
Literary Position of Dryden.
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH (HONOURS).
ANGLO-SAXON—(Grammar and Plulology).
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 10.15.
Ι. Name the non-W.S. dialects and give characteristic
marks of each.
2. Take the Indo-Germanic ablaut-series e; 0; —;
and transfer it to Primitive Teutonic, Mceso-Gothic
and Anglo-Saxon (explain all varieties). Similarly
transfer the two Indo-Germanic diphthongal series.
3. Define umlaut and illustrate fully its various forms.
4. Decline, hus, sunu, thu (all numbers), god (all
numbers).
Conjugate a weak verb of the second conjugation
and decline its past participle.
ΕΣ Ὁ» Ἔ
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 209
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH (HONOURS).
ANGLO-SAXON (TEXTS).—(Furst Paper.)
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 10.15 TO 12.
Translate -—
(a) Ond ic bebiode on Godes naman thet nan
monn thone zxstel trom there bec ne do, ne tha boc
from them mynstre; uncuth hu longe ther swe gelx-
rede biscepas sien, swe swe nu, Gode_ thonc, wel
hwer siendon. For thy ic wolde thette hie ealneg et
there stowe weren, buton se biscep hie mid him habban
wille, oththe hio hwer to lene sie, oththe hwa othre
bi write.
(Ὁ) Tha weron hie to them gesargode thet hie ne
mehton Suthseaxna lond utan berowan, ac hira ther
tu se on lond wearp; ond tha menz mon ledde to
Winteceastre to them cynge, ond he hie ther ahon
het; ond tha men comon on Eastengle the on them
(c) Ic Ine mid Godes gife Wesseaxna kyning, mid
getheahte ond mid lare Cenredes mines feeder, ond
Heddes mines biscepes, ond Eorcenwoldes mines bis-
cepes, mid eallum minum ealdormonnum, ond them
ieldstan witum minre theode, ond eac micelre gesom-
nunge Godes theowa, wes smeagende be there helo
urra sawla, ond be tham stathole ures rices, thette ryht
τὸν ond ryhte cynedomas thurh ure fole gefeestnode ond
getrymede weron, thette nenig ealdormonna ne us
undergetheodedra efter tham were awendende thas ure
domas.
(d) Andlang dic to tham wege the scyt# up to tham
hricgge. Andlang hricgges to tham wege the scytt
fram Fealuwes-lea to Baddan-by ane lytle hwile.
Thonne of there apuldre the stent with westan tham
wege thurh thone lea to tham miclan heslwride. Of
tham heslwride adun on tha blacan rixa. Of tham
rixun on tha lytlan hecggan ext tham wege the scytt
fram Baddan-by to cearwyllun.
(e) Stod under linde, under /Jeohtum scylde,
ther tha mihtigan wif hyra megen bereddon
and hy gyllende garas sendan;
ic him otherne eft wille seendan
fleogende flan forane togeanes.
(f) Thet gesyne wearth,
210 FACULTY OF ARTS.
widcuth werum, thette wrecend tha gyt ;
lifde efter /athum, /ange thrage,
efter guthceare: Grendles modor, |
ides aglecwif yrmthe gemunde, .
se the weteregesan wunian scolde, ;
cealde streamas. ὶ
(5) Ne nom he in them wicum, Wedergeata leod,
mathmehta ma, theh he ther monige geseah,
buton thone hafelan and tha hilt somod,
since fage; sweord xr gemealt,
forbarn broden mel: wes thet blod to thes hat,
acttren cllorgzst, se ther-inne swealt. 4
(i) To heanlic me thinceth
thet ge mid urum sceattum to scype gangon
unbefohtene, nu ge thus feorr hider
on urne eard inn becomon ;
ne sceole ge swa softe sinc gegangan:
us sceal ord and ecg r geseman,
grimm guthplega, zr we gafol syllon, |
anum scipe weron swithe forwundode.
(1) Me hafath hringa gespong,
slithhearda sal sithes amyrred,
afyrred me min fethe, fet synt gebundene,
handa gehefte; synt thissa heldora
wegas forworhte; swa ic mid wihte ne meg ;
οἱ thissum liothobendum.
(7) Mec se weta uong, wundrum freorig,
ob his innathe acrest cend|z}].
Ni uuat ic mec bivorhte wullan fliusum,
herum therh hehcreft /[y]gido[n]cum [mi-
num |.
Uundnz me ni biath weflz, ni ic warp hefe,
ni therih threa[t]un githrec thred me hlimmith,
ne me /irutendum /risil scelfeth,
ni mec ou[ua|n[a] aam sceal cnyssa. ᾿
Uyrmas mec ni awefun wyndicreftum, :
tha thi geolu goduebb geatum frztuath.
Uil mec hudre suze theh uide ofer eorthu
hatan mith helithum /yhtlic giuzde.
Ni ancegnu ic me acrigfere egsan brogum,
theh thi nifmen flanas frac]adlicee ob cocrum.
Scat): ΙΓ
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 201
THIRD YEAR.
ENGLISH (HONOURS).
ANGLO-SAXON TEXTS—(Unseen) AND
LITERATURE.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. Translate:
(a) Tha ongunnan twa theoda Pyhtas northan ond
Scottas westan hi onwinnan ond heora ehta niman ond
hergian; ond hi fela geara yrmdon ond hyndon. ‘Tha on
there unstilnysse onsendon hi xrendwrecan to Rome
mid gewritum ond wependre bene; him fultumes bedon,
ond him gehetan eathmode hyrnysse ond singale under-
theodnysse, gif hi him gefultumadon thet hi mihton
heora fynd oferwinnan. ‘Tha onsendan hi him mycelne
here to fultume. Ond sona thes the hi on this ealond
comon, tha compedon hi with heora feondum, ond him
mycel wel ongeslogan, ond of heora gemerum adrifon
ond aflymdon. Ond lerdon thet hi festen worhtan
him to gebeorge with heora feondum: ond swa mid
mycele sige ham foran.
O. E. Trans. oF BEDE.
(b) ANiter thison gelamp thet thes cyninges meg,
Nicanor, wearth gescoten mid anre fla on tham cneowe
zt sumon gefeohte, swa thet nan man hi ne mihte of
tham bane ateon; ac se eadiga apostol Simon, on
Cristes naman, hi ut-adyde, swa hrathe swa he hi
hrepode; and seo wund wearth therrihte geheled, swa
- thet ther nan dol-swathu nes gesyne. Eac siththan
gelamp thet twa hrethe deor, the sind tigres eehatene,
ther urnon, and abiton swa hwet swa hi gemetton.
Tha fleah thet fole eal to tham apostolum, and hi,
thurh Godes mihte, tha deor swa getemedon, thet hi
him fyligdon to heora inne, and mid him unsceththige
wunedon. Tha cwedon tha apostoli to tham folce,
“Thas rethan deor gehyrsumiath Godes mihte, and sind
eow to gewitnysse thet he is Imihtig God, sethe eow
gesceop, and sylth eow renas of heofenum, and hlaf
of eorthan, win and ele of treowum, and eac othre
westmas. Nu mynegiath thas deor eow, mid sumon
gemete, thet ge nenne otherne ne wurth'on eow to
Gode. butor thone the we bodiath. thurh thes naman
sind thas. rethan tigres betwux eow swa tame swa scep.
212 FACULTY OF ARTS.
We scelon nu faran to othrum scirum, godspel bodi-
gende, and thone sothan geleafan.
ALLFRIC.
(c) Him se yldesta ondswarode,
werodes wisa word-hord onleac:
“We synt gum-cynnes Geata leode
ond Higelaces heorth-geneatas.
Wes min fader folcum gecythed,
ethele ord-fruma Eegtheow haten;
gebad wintra worn, er he on weg hwurfe
gamol of geardum; him gearwe geman,
witena wel-hwylc wide geond eorthan.
We thurh holdne hige hlaford thinne,
sunu Healfdenes, secean cwomon,
leod-gebyrgean ; wes thu us larena god.
BEOWULF.
11. Translate: .
Mec feonda sum feore besnythede,
woruldstrenga binom, weette siththan,
dyfde on wetre, dyde eft thonan,
sette on sunnan, ther ic swithe beleas
herum, tham the ic hefde. Heard mec siththan
snath seaxes ecg sindrum begrunden,
fingras feoldan ond mec fugles wyn
geondsprengde speddropum, spyrede genneahe
ofer brunne brerd, beamtelge swealg,
streames dele, stop eft on mec,
sithade sweartlast. Mec siththan wrah
heleth hleobordum, hyde bethenede,
gierede mec with golde: forthon me gliwedon
wretlic weore smitha wire bifongen.
III. (1) Write on (a) Runes; (δ) Runic inscriptions,
with especial reference to the Ruthwell cross and the
Franks’ casket.
(2) Describe an Anglo-Saxon charter.
(3) Write on Cynewulf.
(4) Give the principal parts of all the strong verbs
π| 6b
THIRD ΕΑ:
ENGLISH (HONOURS).
MIDDLE ENGLISH.
TUESDAY, APRIL 21ST, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO II.
τ. What is meant by the term Middle English? Give
- ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 213
some account of the locality and history of the chief
Middle English dialects.
2. Translate:
(a) The king Willam, uorto wite the wurth of is londe,
Let enqueri streitliche thoru al Engelonde,
Hou moni plou lond & hou moni hiden al-so,
Were in euerich ssire ἃ wat hii were wurth ther-to;
& the rentes of ech toun & of the wateres echone
Thet worth, & of wodes ek that ther ne bileuede
none,
That he nuste wat hii were worth of al Engelonde,
& wite al clene that worth ther-of, ich vnder-stonde,
& let it write clene ynou & that scrit dude iwis
In the tresorie at Westminstre there [as] it yut is.
(b) Of Lauerd es land and fulhed his;
Ertheli werld, and alle thar-in is.
For ouer sees it grounded he,
And ouer stremes graithed it to be.
Wha sal stegh in hille of Lauerd winli,
Or wha sal stand in his stede hali?
Vnderand of hend bidene,
And that of his hert es clene;
In vnnait that his saule noght nam,
Ne sware to his neghburgh in swikedam.
(c) And wanne hi crisneth ine the fougt,
The prestes so thries duppeth,
In the honur of the Trinité,
Ac gode yeme kepeth
The ned;
On time a clothe that water ikest,
Ac ope the heuede te bede.
(d) Ich y-zeg the apostles ine tronen zittynde. the
tribz / and the tongen / alle preste. and of poure /
and of zyke; zuo blisuolle and holy / of oure Thord
iesu crist-“and zuo hege “ ynog alneway ich am
wondrinde. Ich y-zegac / uollyche ich ne my[g]te
al yzy / the innumerable uelagrede of the holy mar-
tires / mid blisse and worthssipe “ y-corouned. thet
be the pinen of thise time 7 huyche hi beren to tho
blisse / thet wes ysseawed ine ham: hy come therto.
Hyre holynesse / and hyre blysse: long time ich me
Ivkede. Ich yzeg to the blyssede heape of confessors,
amang huam / men apostles / and techeres / thet holy
eherche mid hare techinge wereden. and alsuo uram
alle heresye / wy[th]-oute wem habbeth yclenzed:
214 FACULTY OF ARTS.
sseaweth. and hy uele habbeth y-tagt. ssyneth ase
sterren / ine eurelestynde wy|th]-oute ende. Ther
byeth Monekes thet uor claustres / and ποῦ strayte
cellen. wel moche / an clyerer thanne the zonne:
habbeth wonyinges. Vor blake and uor harde kertles
/ huyter thane the snaw. and of alle zofthede / and
nesshede / clothinge habbeth an. Vram here egen
7 god wypeth alle tyeres. and thane kyng hy ssolle
ysy ine hys wuayrhede. Alast / to the uelagrede of
maydynes ich lokede. of huychen blysse ssepthe /
agraythinge / and melodya. huyche none mannes
speche: dingnelyche may telle. And hy zonge thane
zang: thet non other ne may zynge.
ENGLISH (HONOURS).
HISTORY OF) LIFERATURE:
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
i. Discuss the principal causes which, during the
seventeenth century, prevented English Literature from
influencing its nearest continental neighbors.
2. State clearly the points emphasized by Saint-Evre-
mond in contrasting the tragedies of England with
those of France.
3. Explain carefully the position of Voltaire in regard
to the fundamental conception of tragic treatment in
the drama. Criticise his view independently.
4. In what respects may it be said that English life
and literature influenced the work of Prévost?
5. Give some account of the effect produced by the
Ossianic poems on Chateaubriand, Lamartine, and
Musset.
6. Establish the literary relations between the play
of Hamlet and either Lorenzaccio, or Andr .Cornéalis.
7. Indicate the character in the work of Scott that
appealed to’ the Romantic imagination in France about
the year 1830.
8. Give a short account of Obermann.
9. What literary relations have been traced between’
Young and Novalis?
.
͵
\
fi
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. 215
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH HONOURS.
HISTORY OF SHAKSPEREAN CRITICISM.
‘Time: THREE Hours.
Fripay, Dec. 19TH :—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Discuss the “Unities” ascribed to Aristotle, and
show how they affected French and English dramatic
criticism in the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries.
2. In what esteem was Shakspere held by his con-
temporaries? Discuss Ben Jonson’s attitude towards
him.
3. State clearly Lessing’s contributions to Shak-
sperean criticism, and their effect upon European
thought.
4, Compare German and English criticism of Shak-
spere at the beginning of the nineteenth century.
5. Illustrate by the detailed discussion of an issue of
your own choosing the methods of recent Shaksperean
criticism.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE (HONOURS).
BROWNING.
WEDNESDAY APRIL 22ND, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. Outline the story of “The Ring and the Book;”
explain the significance of the title; comment upon
Browning’s use of his material.
2. “Browning unites Classicism and Romanticism.”
Give reasons for modifying, supporting, or denying
this statement.
3. Where did Browning spend most of his life, and
what influence had his place of residence on his poetic
development ?
4. State precisely where the following passages occur
and give as full an account as you can of the context,
210 FACULTY OF ARTS.
outlining the whole poem if it is necesary in order to
bring out the significance of the quotation. Illustrate
the ideas set forth by parallel passages in other Brown-
ing poems :—
(a) There was place and to spare for the frank
And the red young mouth, and the hair's
young gold.
(b) Now I may speak: you fool, for all
Your lore! Who made things plain in vain?
(c) On the earth the broken arcs; in the heaven,
a perfect round.
(d) Ah, but a man’s reach should exceed his grasp.
(e) Friends—lovers that might have been.
(fF. Rather 1 prize; the, doubt
Finished and finite clods, untroubled by a cone
(g) Oh, a crime will do
As well, I repiy, to serve for a test,
As a virtue golden through and through.
(h) “Therefore she is immortally my bride;
Chance cannot change my love, nor time im-
airs”
(i) And you, great sculptor—so, you gave
A score of years to art, her slave,
And that’s your Venus, whence we turn
To yonder girl that fords the burn!
(7) The love which to one and one only has refer-
ence
Seems terribly like what perhaps gains God’s
preference.
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH. LITERATURE (HONOURS).
MODERN PROSE.—(First Paper.)
Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Estimate the influence of French models on Eng-
lish prose after the Restoration.
2. Point out the leading characteristics of the prose
styles of (a) Defoe, (b) Swift, and (c) Burke. Give a
short account of the literary activity of each.
3. Discuss the relations between journalism and
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE. ru lif
literature in the first half of the nineteenth century.
4. Who is in your opinion the greatest master of
prose of the nineteenth century? Give reasons for
your preference:
FOURTH YEAR.
ENGLISH LITERATURE (HONOURS).
MODERN PROSE.—(Second Paper.)
TugespAyY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Discuss the character, extent and permanence of
Carlyle’s influence. Summarize his lecture on “The
Hero as Man of Letters.”
2. Illustrate from “The Crown of Wild Olive” Rus-
kin’s peculiarities of thought and style.
3. What do you regard as Matthew Arnold’s pre-
eminent excellences as a critic? Illustrate from the
essays you have read.
4. In what way do the essays included in “Virginibus
Puerisque” reflect Stevenson’s personality? How far
do you think the effect he obtains is due to deftness of
literary craftsmanship ?
HISTORY
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
HISTORY.—(First Paper.) .
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Write a short essay on any one of the political or
ecclesiastical institutions which were established in
Europe during the whole, or any portion, of the period,
400-1050.
2. Describe the relations of the Germans with Rome
prior to 378.
3. Why is the 4th century an age of particular im-
portance ἢ
4. Trace the historical development of the Gothic
race in all its branches.
5. Illustrate as fully as possible the greatness of the
House of Landen prior to the accession of Charle-
magne.
6. Indicate on the map the location of the following
places and districts: Dalmatia; the field of battle be-
tween” Actius) and: Attila; Verona; Pisa>~ Poitiers;
Strassburg; Lorraine; Laon; the stem duchies; Rouen.
7. Make brief notes on the following subjects: The
worship of Mithra; Decius and the Church; St. Je-
rome; the descendants of Theodosius in the eastern
branch; the greatest of the Lombard queens; the
battle of Testry; the Ommiad dynasty; the Capitulary
of Kiersy; the ancestors of Hugh Capet; the political
ideal of Otto III.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
HISTORY.—(Second Paper.)
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Indicate and comment upon the chief features of
French history during the 12th century.
2. Examine the feud of Guelf and Ghibelline in all
its bearings.
HISTORY, 219
3. Show at length why the 13th century is a great
era in the history of the Latin Church.
4. Discuss the intellectual and artistic eminence of
Italy during the 15th century, or, describe the political
condition of the peninsula during the same period.
5. Why was Luther led into conflict with other
antagonists of Rome, and who were his chief opponents
among them, 1517-1530?
6. Indicate on the map the location of the following
places and districts: the kingdom of Leon; Compos-
tella; Cordova;. Toulouse; Avignon; Orleans; Cler-
mont; Bologna; the original possessions of Rudolf of
Hapsburg; Savoy.
7. Make brief notes upon the following subjects:
the intellectual position of Abelard; the criminal juris-
prudence of Louis IX.; the character of Frederick II.;
the bull, Ausculta Fili; the battle of Crecy, considered
from the military standpoint; Gregory XI.; Charles
VIII. at Milan, 1494; the League of Cambrai, 1508;
the Christian Prince; Luther and Miltitz.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
PNGEISEH -CONSTITUBRIONAL HISTORY:
TuEspAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Illustrate the fact that the institutions of England
during the period of the Heptarchy possessed a Ger-
manic character,—having in mind the primitive insti-
tutions of the Germans, and also the customs of Ger-
man tribes on the continent during the period 400-
800.
2. Sketch the history of Christianity in Britain from
its origin to the Council of Whitby.
3. Describe the composition and functions of:
(a) The Witan;
(b) The Curia Regis.
4. Investigate the relations of crown and_ nobles
during the reigns of:
(a) William I.;
(ὁ) Elenty: J;
(c) Henry II.
In answering this question be careful to mark flue-
tuations in the power of the baronage.
. 220 FACULTY OF ARTS.
5. What was the constitutional status of the towns
during the early Angevin period?
6. Discuss the antecedents of Simon de Montfort’s
Parliament, with special reference to the years 1250-
1265.
: 7. (a) What were the chief fiscal measures of Edward
>
(b) Make brief notes on: The ransom of Richard
I; the Carucage of 1198; sections 12-15 of Magna
Carta; distraint of knighthood; the Parliament of 1275.
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY, (HONOURS):
GREEK AUTHORS.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer seven questions.)
1. Compare the historical spirit and method of
Herodotus with that of Modern History generally, or
of any individual modern historian.
_ Give a condensed account of the chief events in the
a Persian War (479 B.C.), basing your version
on those of Herodotus and Plutarch.
3. What part do the following individuals play in
history, according to your authorities 2
Miltiades, Leonidas, Pausanias, Lamachus, Hermo-
crates.
4. Describe the causes, real and apparent, which led
either to the Peloponnesian War, or to the Sicilian ex-
pedition, noting the influence of powerful individuals.
5. How are the following topics treated in the
speeches of Thucydides (Books I., II., 1-65, VI. and
WiLL):
(1) Relation between Mother Country and Col-
onies.
(2) Empire and the position of an Imperial City.
(3) Democracy.
(4) Contrast between Athens and Sparta.
6. Illustrate Plutarch’s view of the purpose and use
of biography, from his lives of Timoleon, and of Aris-
tides.
ve
“πον pa gee
7. Mention the chief definitions of justice given in.
HISTORY. 221
Plato’s Republic. Show that justice is the basis of the
Ideal State.
8. How does Plato characterize democracy, oligarchy
and tyranny in his account of the decline of states
(Republic VIII. and IX.)?
g. What views may be found in the Republic on the
following subjects:—War, Private Property, Slavery,
Education?
THIRD YEAR.
HISTORY (HONOURS):
Powers 7) Lis! Wes, Livy, onl. Xe LL. > TACITUS :
Annals 11., Agricola, Germama.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MoRNING 9. TO I2.
Answer any three of the first four questions, any two of
_ questions 5-7, and question ὃ.
1. Comment on:
(a) The two Achaean Leagues;
(b) The main episodes of the Cleomenic War;
(c) The attitude of Polybius towards Phylarchus.
2. Give some account of:
(a) The career of Regulus.
(b) The career of Hamilcar Barca.
3. Polybius indicates certain motives which dominate
his first and second Books. Name these, and express
any opinion which you may have formed regarding
his arrangement of material.
4. (a) Describe Philip’s invasion of Aetolia.
(b) Discuss the plundering of Thermus, and state
the nature of the reflections which it calls forth from
Polybius.
5. Give a list of the speeches which occur in the
twenty-first and twenty-second Books of Livy, and
write a general criticism of them.
6. Sketch that portion of the Second Punic War
which falls within the Dictatorship of Fabius Maximus.
7. Make notes on: Hannibal’s dream; The Battle of
the Trebia; Carthaginian tactics at Lake Trasumen-
nus; The advice of Maharbal after Cannae: The pro-
test of Manlius Torquatus.
222 FACULTY OF ARTS. 3
8. (a) What do you know concerning Arminius?
(b) What information regarding Britain and its
inhabitants have you gathered from the Agricola? ἷ
(c) Single out the chief tribes mentioned in the
Germama, indicating their geographical location and
specifying their leading characteristics.
;
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
HISTORY (HONOURS):
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Name the literary opponents of the Papacy during .
the first half of the 14th century, indicating the nature
of their opinions and establishing their connection
with contemporary politics.
2. Sketch the constitutional history of Venice from
the changes of Piero Gradenigo to the death of Marino
Faliero.
3. (a) Examine, the «career of* Gian: Galeazzo)V is:
conti ;
(b) Give some account of Italian warfare, 1350-
1450, with names of the leading condottiert.
4. What were the chief economic conditions which
affected the Renaissance?
5. Indicate the main characteristics of Italian art
from Giotto to Brunelleschi.
6, Name the most important problems which y,.
presented to the Council of Constance, and~ dise:.s5
any two of them.
7. Write briefly on any two of the following subjecis:
(a) Albornoz in the Romagna;
(b) Latin scholarship in the early Renaissance:
(c) The rule of Cosimo de’Medici at Florence,
1434-1447 ;
(d) Benedict XIII and the movement for refor::;
(c) The agenda of the Council of Basel;
or
Give a detailed list of Italian despots, 1300-147,
with indication in each case of the territories whi)
they controlled.
bo
nN
Oo
HISTORY.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY (HONOURS).
THE POLITICAL HISTORY OF THE AMERI-
CAN COLONIES.
τ. Outline the history of the relations of Church and
State in the American colonies.
2. Tabulate the chief events in the struggle betweem
France and England for supremacy in North America.
3. State the case for England in her controversy with
the American colonies.
4. Shew the bearing of the history of the United
States under the confederation on the formation of the
Constitution of 1787.
FOURTH YEAR.
ἘΠ Εν GIONOURS).
THE POVTICAL- HISTORY OF ΗΕ UNITED
STATES.
1. Outline the course of federal and state legislation
in reference to slavery and its interpretation by the
courts, from the adoption of the constitution of the
‘United States till the passage of the thirteenth amend-
ment (1865).
2. Discuss the effect of economic factors on the de-
velopment of political institutions and national charac-
teristics in the United States in the nineteenth century.
3. State briefly the leading facts in connection with
the following:—Hamilton’s Finance Measures, Jeffer-
son’s Embargo, The Hartford Convention, Nullifica-
tion, The Annexation of Texas, The Trent Affair.
4. Explain in a few words the allusions of the follow-
ing historical catchwords: The ‘X. Y. Z.’ Despatches,
the ‘Blue Light’ Federalists, the ‘Kitchen’ Cabinet, the
‘Come-Outers,’ ‘Know-Nothingism, ‘Fifty-four-forty:
or Fight,’ ‘King Cotton.’
15
294 ὁ Ὁ FACULTY OF ARTS.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY (HONOURS).
ΒΑΘΕΗΟΤ: The English Constitution; Bryce: The
American Commonwealth, Wolele
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Answer the first three questions and any five of the
remainder.
I. Enumerate the main functions of the English
monarchy, following Bagehot’s conception of them.
2. At what points does Bagehot bring the political
ideas of England and the United States into compari-
son?
3. Indicate the nature of those political arrange-
ments which are bound up with a change of ministry.
4. Examine the nature of federal government in the
United States.
5. Describe the functions of the Senate or the House
of Representatives.
6. What are the relations af Congress to the Pres-
ident ?
7. What are the working relations of the national |
and state governments? ὲ
8. How has the constitution of the United States i
developed by usage?
g. Discuss the nature of the American state. f
10. What is the status of the territories? ἢ
11. Give some account of city government in the ᾿
United States. ;
FOURTH YEAR. $
HISTORY (HONOURS). ᾿
MattHew ArNoLp: Pagan and Mediaeval Religious ἦ
Sentiment; PARKMAN: Montcalm and Wolfe; Manan:
The Influence of Sea Power on History.
: ᾿ΕΝ TING f
THuRSDAY, APRIL QTH, Los: MorRNING, 9 TO 12. "
Answer the first four questions and any three of the others. ἢ
τ. Contrast the fifteenth idyll of Theocritus with the
Canticle of the Sun.
—
HISTORY. 225
2. Sketch the relations of English and French in
America during 1755 and 1756.
3. Describe the siege of Louisbourg, 1758, or the
Ticonderoga campaign of the same year.
4. Make notes on: Céleron de Bienville; the capture
of Oswego; Montcalm and Vaudreuil; the battle of
Ste. Foye.
5. Write an estimate of the naval importance which
was possessed by Holland in the second half of the
17th century, having especially in mind the career of
De Ruyter.
6. What naval engagements or operations took
place in the Mediterranean during the 18th century?
7. How has sea power affected the position of Eng-
land in India?
8. What part did sea power play in the War of the
American Revolution prior to 1781?
FOURTH YEAR.
HISrORY (HONOURS).
Gipson: Decline and Fall, Caps. XLIV., L., LI,
LXVI.; Stusss: Select Charters, Introduction;
LANGLoIs and ΒΕΙΟΝΟΒΟΒ: Introduction to the
Study of History.
Frrpay, APRIL 17TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Follow the development of Roman jurisprudence
from the Decemvirs to Justinian.
2. Trace the career of Mahomet during the last ten
years of his life.
3. Describe the conquest of Syria by the Moham-
medans.
4. What points does Gibbon chiefly accentuate in his
account of the Revival of Learning?
5. (a) Describe the judicial system as it was under
Henry II.
(b) “The idea of constitutional government, de-
fined by the measures of Edward I., and summed up
226 =; FACULTY OF ARTS.
in the legal meaning of the word parliament, implies
four principles.” vine
What are these?
6. Indicate, with comment, the sciences which are
auxiliary to History.
7. What are the main processes of external criticism?
8. What views does M. Seignobos express regarding
the object of historical exposition?
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY (HONOURS).
CLARENDON: History of the Great Rebellion, Book X1.;
BurKE: Reflections on the French Revolution;
MacauLay: History of England, Cap. 111.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. What part does Cromwell play in the eleventh
book of Clarendon?
2. Outline the negotiations between Charles I. and
the Commissioners for the treaty in 1648.
3. Explain Burke’s attitude towards the English
Revolution of 1688.
4. Illustrate Burke’s feelings towards the Old Re-
gime in France.
5. Follow Burke’s criticism of:
(a) the departmental system;
(b) the King’s position under the National As-
sembly ;
(c) the financial expedients of the National As-
sembly.
6. Write an account of London as it was in the reign
or, CharlesmT
7. What was the condition at the same period:
(a) of the navy;
(b) of the common people.
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL ΦΟΙΕΝΟΕ
THIRD. AND FOURTH YEARS.
BOLRITICAT, ECONOMY.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Six questions to be answered.
1. Explain what is known as the “Wages Fund” doc-
trine and compare it with modern views as to how the
level of wages is related to the supply of capital.
2. What meaning do you assign to the phrase “‘pro-
ductivity of capital?’ Show from what causes this pro-
ductivity takes its rise.
3. For what economic function do “profits” afford
the remuneration? Trace the general nature of the
evolution of the relation of capitalists to industrial
enterprise.
4. Carefully distinguish between the qualities which
are required of money as a medium of exchange and
a value-denominator respectively. Illustrate and com-
ment on the separation of these functions in modern
trade.
-5. Discuss the following:
“Credit is not a productive power in itself, but,
without it, the productive powers already existing could
not be brought into complete employment,’ and ex-
explain the functions of credit in relation to production.
6. Two countries, A and B, are isolated from the rest
of the world., A trade has been established between
them, A exporting corn and importing timber and
hides. Coal being discovered in B, large quantities
are exported from B ‘to. A. How; /if at all; will .this
discovery affect the prices of corn, timber and hides in
the two countries respectively ?
7. “Exports and imports pay for each other.” How
then do you account for the fact that, both in the fore-
228 FACULTY OF ARTS.
ign trade of individual countries, and in the interna-
tional trade of the whole world, imports. are found to
considerably exceed exports?
8. Explain what is meant when it is said that the
foreign exchanges are unfavourable to a country; and
show in what way an unfavourable exchange encour-
ages the exportation of commodities and discourages
their importation.
g. Trace the economic effects of a bountiful harvest
in an advanced country.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
ΘΙ ΘΙ sCle NCE
Monpay, APRIL 6TH; 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Omit one of the first four questions.
1. Give a short account of Austin’s theory of Sov-
ereignty. What does Sir Henry Maine mean by say-
ing that it is the “result of abstraction”?
2. Explain and contrast the relation of the courts
of law to the other branches of the Government in
England and in the United States.
3. State accurately the composition of the following
political bodies: the French Senate, the Hungarian
Diet, the Swiss Federal Council.
4. Describe the constitutional position of (1) the
German Emperor, (ii) the Supreme Court of the United
States.
5. Explain clearly the political status of Cuba.
6. Discuss the relative’ constitutional powers of the
two British Houses of Parliament.
7. Write a paper (not more than nine hundred words)
on :—
The Relation of Government to Trade and Industry.
Ι
β
ὐ δ weal
a ee
> m
aN
ee ee νον,
Γ
- ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE. 229
FOURTH YEAR.
ROLITICAL SCIENCE: (HONOURS:)
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MoORNING,. 9 TO 12.
1. State and criticize Herbert Spencer’s views in
reference to the economic functions of Government.
2. Shew the practical difficulties that would attend
any attempt. to “nationalize the means of production.”
3. Discuss the chief points in the political philosophy
of Humboldt, Karl Marx, Bastiat.
4. What legislative policy would you recommend in
reference to the Trusts in the United States?
5. Shew the very extensive interpretation that may
be given to the idea of Government as a “producer of
security.”
6. Write short papers on each of the following
topics :—
(a) English legislative policy in reference to trade
and industry during the Peace Era (1815-1850).
(b) State Socialism in Germany.
ECONOMIC HISTORY OF ENGLAND.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH: MORNING, 9 to 12.
τ. Describe “the colonial system” (on its economic
side) as practiced in England, and estimate the econ-
omic results to England of the possession of colonies
so long as the system lasted.
2. Contrast the economic aims and the methods of
trades unions with those of craft gilds.
2: “An agrarian revolution plays as large part in the
industrial change of the eighteenth century as does the
revolution in manufacturing industries to which atten-
tion is more usually directed.”—(Toynbee).
What were the leading features of the agrarian re-
volution referred to?
4. What points in the English poor law, before its
reform in 1834, specially affected for ill the situation of
the working classes? On what principles was the Act
of 1834 mainly founded?
230 FACULTY OF ARTS.
5. In what principal directions was reform effected in
English taxation during George III.’s reign? What
great hindrance to equitable readjustment οἱ tax
burdens existed during the first part of that period?
6. Contrast the methods of public borrowing em-
ployed in England a couple of centuries ago, with
those generally followed nowadays. State especially
the relation of the South Sea Company to the public
debt.
ECONOMIC HISTORY OF ENGLAND.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH: AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I- By what steps were the textile industries trans-
formed during the period covered by “the Industrial
Revolution”?
2. Show the intimate connection between the 1m-
provement of transportation and the development of
industry. Sketch the course of improvement in Eng-
land for the century following 1750.
3. Trace the changes in the legal status of workmen’s
combinations in England in the 18th and oth
centuries. ,
4. What evils were principally aimed at in the early
factory legislation? Trace the general course of legis-
lation on this subject in England, and compare with the
situation in Canada.
5. Write notes on the following :—
(a) The Eden Treaty.
(b) The Sinking Fund.
(c) The Speenham Land Act.
(4) The Dorsetshire Laborers.
(ec) The Chartist Movement.
(f) The Penny Post- xO
ART HISTORY AND ARCHAEOLOGY
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
ART “HISTORY AND “CLASSICAL
ARCHAEOLOGY.
WeEpNEspDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903: AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
(N.B.—Five questions only required).
I. Give some account of Myron’s works, with a '
critical estimate of his place in the development of
Greek sculpture.
2. Discuss the “Scribe” of the Louvre Museum and °
the statute of Khafra (Cizeh Museum) as masterpieces
of early Egyptian sculpture, comparing them re-
spectively with primitive Greek work, and with the
ideal sculpture of the fifth century, B.C-, in Greece.
3. Give an account of the Pergamene school of
sculpture, and of the principal works now extant
which are attributed to it; adding a note as to subse-
‘quent works in sculpture that may be held to carry
on the Pergamene tradition.
4. Enumerate the chief characteristic features of
Greek Doric architecture, illustrating (if possible) by
sketches (pencil or ink, left rough, but clear). Dis-
cuss the origin of the characteristic forms, and esti-
mate critically the artistic qualities of the style and its
aesthetic significance, as perfected in the age of
Pericles.
5. Describe the Acropolis at Athens, giving a brief
architectural account and historical notice of the
classical buildings upon it, and mentioning some of
232, FACULTY OF ARTS. .
the more famous of the works of sculpture which, in
ancient times were dedicated there.
Or (alternatively),
Give a similar description and account of the Pala-
tine Hill, Rome, and the Imperial buildings and
dedications upon it.
6. Give a general account of ‘the ancient Greek
theatre, with a special note as to the existing remains
of the Theatre of Dionysus at Athens.
Discuss Dr. Doerpfeld’s theory as to the original ar-
rangement of the stage of the Greek theatre and its
subsequent modifications:
MODERN LANGUAGES
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.—(First Paper.)
Monpbay, APRIL OTH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Questions asked in French must be answered in French.)
1. ‘Iraduire en francais:
(a) An Italian inn is a habitation tolerable enough
in summer; but in winter it is something of which one
cannot conceive an idea.
Why have you not sent for him? Because we were
waiting for his return.
What is he looking for? He is looking for his spect-
acles; I told him they were in the case, but he will not
listen to me.
(b) If anyone tells you that you can get rich other-
wise than by work and economy do not listen to him,
he is a corrupter.
Do not trust a friend who flatters you; he who flat-
ters you is not really your friend. He is really your
friend who does not conceal the truth from you.
Nothing prevents us so much from being natural as
the desire to look so.
(c) The Lion, the Ass and the Fox.—A lion, an ass
and a fox entered into partnership, and went hunting.
When they had killed a great quantity of game the
lion ordered the ass to apportion it. The latter made
three equal parts, and asked the lion to choose. The
lion, who wanted to receive a larger share than the
two others, flew into a passion and killed the ass. He
then ordered the fox to make a new division. The
latter gave the lion almost everything, and kept but
very little for himself. “Who has taught thee to divide
thus?” the lion asked him. “The accident which hap-
pened to the ass,” replied the fox.
Other people’s misfortunes ought to make us wise.
234 FACULTY OF ARTS.
2. Donner en anglais les équivalents des gallicismes
suivants :
(a) Y va-t-il de la vie? (ὁ) Comme vous y allez!
(c) Que voulez-vous, quand je m’y mets, je n’y vais
pas de main morte. (d) De grace, ne m’en veuillez
pas! si nous en venons aux gros mots, ce sera a nen
plus finir! (e) Sur quoi la conversation a-t-elle roulé?
Belle demande! sur la pluie et le beau temps. (f) De
quoi s’agit-il? Il s’agit de savoir a quoi nous en tenir.
(g) Ainsi, vous ne serez pas des notres ce soir? Mais
si, votre bon conseil m’a fait changer d’avis. A la
bonne heure!
3. (a) What are the disjunctive personal pronouns,
and (b) when are they used in French?
4. State (a) general principles and (b) special rules
concerning the place of adjectives.
5. What are the different ways to translate in
French, the English possessive pronoun or adjective?
Give examples.
6. Explain the use of c’est and il est (impersonal).
7. Traduire en anglais:
(a) Je souffre beaucoup de chanter ainsi. Cela
me rappelle tous nos malheurs. Demain j’en serai
malade: mais il le faut. Permettez-le-moi, mon frére.
Souvenez-vous qu’a Ajaccio vous m’avez dit d’impro-
viser pour amuser cette demoiselle anglaise qui se
moque de nos vieux usages. Ne pourrai-je done im-
proviser aujourd’hui pour de pauvres gens qui m’en
sauront gré, et que cela aidera a supporter leur cha-
grin? :
Allons, fais comme tu voudras. Je gage que tu as
déja composé ta ballata, et t ne veux pas la perdre.
Non, je ne pourrais pas composer cela d’avance,
mon frére. Je me mets devant le mort, et je pense a
ceux qui restent. Les larmes me viennent aux yeux,
et alors je chante ce qui me vient a l’esprit.
(b) N’ayez peur de rien, Ors’ Anton, dit le vieillard ;
Ils n’oseraient se montrer aujourd’hui. [ἃ souris
rentre dans son trou lorsque revient le matou.
Matou toi-méme, vieille barbe blanche! dit Orso.
Comment t’appelles-tu Ὁ
== cee
MODERN LANGUAGES, 235
Eh quoi! vous ne me connaissez pas, Ors’ Anton,’
moi qui vous ai porté en croupe si souvent sur mon
mulet qui mord? Vous ne connaissez pas Polo
Griffo? Brave homme, voyez-vous, qui est au-dela
Rebbia corps et ame. Dites un mot, et quand votre
gros fusil parlera, ce vieux mousquet, vieux comme
son maitre, ne se taira pas. Comptez-y, Ors’ Anton.’
Bien, bien; mais, de par tous les diables! allez-vous
en, et laissez-nous continuer notre route.
8. Raconter (a) la rencontre d’Orso et de Colomba,
(b) leur départ d’Ajaccio et (c) leur voyage a Pietranera.
9. Décrire briévement le role de Gaston ou d’Antoi-
nette dans “1.6 Gendre de M. Poirier.”
το. Ecrire quelques détails sur (a) la vie et (b) l’oeu-
vre de Prosper Mérimee.
FIRST YEAR.
FRENCH.—(Second Paper.)
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. La captivité de Louis XVI. et de sa famille.
ou
Le procés de Louis XVI.
(environ 200 mots.) :
2. Raconter une des fables suivantes:
Le meunier, son fils et l’ane.
Les animaux malades de la peste.
Le chéne et le roseau.
For students of McGill College and the R.V.C.
3. Raconter la visite de Germain chez la veuve Gue-
rin (de 200 a 250 mots).
For students of Affiliated Colleges.
4. Raconter le “Siége de Berlin” (Daudet).
ou
Raconter l’histoire intitulée “Prix de gymnastique”
dans les Historiettes Modernes.
τῷ
ew
σ-
FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.—(First Paper.)
Monpay, AprIL 6TH, 1903 :—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
(Toutes les réponses doivent se faire en francais.
1. Traduire:
La vieille obéit en toute hate.
1 ne lui fit aucune recommandation; il était bien
sur qu’elle le garderait mieux qu'il ne se garderait lui-
meme.
On n’a jamais su comment il avait réussi a pénétrer
dans la cour sans faire ouvrir la porte cochére. Il
avait, et portait toujours sur lui, un passe-partout qui
ouvrait une petite porte latérale; mais on avait dt le
fouiller et lui prendre son passe-partout. Ce point
n’a pas été éclairci.
Π monta Vescalier qui conduisait a sa chambre,
Arrivé en haut, il laissa son bougeoir sur les derniéres
marches de l’escalier, ouvrit sa porte avec peu de bruit,
et alla fermer a tatons sa fenétre et son volet, puis il
revint prendre sa bougie et rentra dans sa chambre.
LES MISERABLES.
2. Raconter la conduite de l’évéque Myriel envers
Jean Valjean et celle de Jean Valjean envers Fantine.
3. Traduire:
In his interesting work entitled “The Story of
Africa,’ Dr. Brown relates a most romantic tale about
Campagnon, a French trader and explorer, who flour-
ished at the beginning of the eighteenth century. One
day, as he was returning from fort St. Louis, at the
mouth of the river Senegal, Campagnon found a lioness
dying outside the walls of the town. The poor beast
had been kept in captivity, but, having been attacked
by a disease of the jaw, which is usually fatal, and
being unable to eat, she had been abandoned to perish.
Though her eyes were shut and her mouth was full of
ants, Campagnon, thinking he saw signs of life, wash-
ed her mouth with water and poured milk down her
throat. Ultimately she got better, and such was the
affection the grateful animal felt towards her friend
=o
ree
; MODERN LANGUAGES, 2371
that she would take no food but from his hands and
followed him like a dog up and down the Isle of St.
Louis.
4. (a) Traiter de la position des adjectifs et (0) don-
ner la syntaxe de nu, demi, few et des adjectifs desi-
gnant les couleurs.
5. Donner les régles relatives a (a) quelque, (Ὁ) u est
et εἶδέ, (c) tout autre, (d) travers et au travers.
6. Faire une bréve analyse du Cid.
7. Donner des explications sur les sujets suivants:
(a) Mots populaires et mots savants, (b) Role de l’ac-
cent tonique dans la transformation des mots latins
en mots francais. (c) Loi de la chute des atones.
8. Expliquer phonétiquement (a) ᾿ς. comme signe du
pluriel en francais, et les locutions (b) grand’mere, (c)
3achelier es-lettres.
g. (a) Indiquer queiques particularités relatives au
pronom dans le vieux irangais, (b) et les principaux
changements qu’a subis la conjugaison latine pour
former les verbes francais.
10. Rendre en anglais les expressions suivantes,
prises de Pécheur A'Islande:
(a) Accoudés a boire
(b) Un bon sourire a dents blanches.
(c) En plein sommeil.
(d) Elle avait été ramenée pour tout-a-fait au pays
de ces pecheurs.
(6) Il faisait les cent pas en fumant sa pipe.
(f) De loin en loin.
(zg) A tue-téte.
(h) Elle n’en pouvait plus.
(ἢ) Crest. ἔριδι]:
(7) Faire son entendu.
SECOND YEAR.
FRENCH.—(Second Paper.)
AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:
τ. Donner un résumé de l’intrigue du Bourgeois
Gentilhomme.
2. Ecrire (environ 200 mots).sur un des sujets sut-
vants:
288 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Les rapports entre Louis XLV. et Saint Simon.
Louis XIV comme roi,
La mort de Louis XIV.
3. Traduire en anglais:
(a) 11 ne me parlait guére de ces choses-la, parce
que je prenais la liberte de lui en faire honte. Je pris
celle de le gouailler a ce récit, et de lui dire ce que je
crus le pouvoir détourner d’ajouter foi et de s’amuser
aces prestiges, dans un temps surtout ot il devait avoir
lesprit occupé de tant de grandes choses.
(b) Son premier saisissement des rénes de l'empire
fut marqué au coin d’une extreme dureté et d'une ex-
treme duperie. Fouquet fut le malheureux sur qui
éclata la premiere; Colbert fut le ministre de l’autre,
en saisissant seul toute l’autorité des finances, et lut
faisant accroire quelle passait entre ses mains par les
signatures dont il l’accabla a la place de celles que
faisait le surintendant, dont Colbert supprima la
charge, a laquelle il ne pouvait aspirer.
(c) Le roi voyait l’extrait de toutes les lettres ot
il y avait des articles que les chefs de la poste, puis le
ministre qui la gouvernait, jugeaient devoir aller jus-
quasliifeteles lettres entieres quand elles en valaient
la peine par leur tissu ou par la considération de ceux
qui étaient en commerce. Par la les gens principaux
de la poste, maitres et commis, furent en état de sup-
poser tout ce quiil leur plut, et a qui il leur plut.
4. Expliquer en francais les termes suivants:
Tragedie, comédie de meceurs, comédie de caractere,
ἘΣ unités, préciosité, jansénisme, siecle de Louis XIV.
QOu’y a-t-il de nouveau (a) dans la tragédie de
Corncie (b) dans: celle de Racine?
6. Raconter la vie de Moliere.
δ Le roman francais au XVIIE siécle.
8. Donner dans Vordre chronologique les principales
tragédies de Corneille.
9. Parler de importance de Malherbe et de Boileau.
POUR LA/SECTION AVANCEE:
τ. Parler du caractére et du style de Saint Simon.
2. Traduire en francais:
The French Revolution broke out in 1789, and the
ὧν a
MODERN LANGUAGES, ‘239
disorders which marked its beginning spread even into
the theatres. One evening, at the Theatre Francais,
an encounter took place in the parterre between the
patriot party and the aristocratic party, and as it was
thought that the boxes were filled mainly by the aris-
tocrats, apples were thrown at several. The Duchesse
de Biron, who was struck on the head by one, sent it
the next day to Monsieur de la Fayette, with these
words: “Allow me, sir, to offer you the first fruits of
the Revolution which have reached me.”
POUR LES ETUDIANTS DES COLLEGES
AFFILIES:
1. Raconter la vie de Jean Jacques Rousseau; don-
ner une liste de ses principaux ouvrages et parler de
son influence.
2. Donner l’analyse de “Zaire.”
3. Ecrire (environ 200 mots) sur l’Encyclopédie et
les Encyclopédistes,
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
FRENCH:
FripAy, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1., Faire analyse de Britannicus.
2. Examiner ce que Moliére, Racine, Bossuet, Ma--
dame de la Fayette doivent a leur temps et établir en
quoi leurs ceuvres sont classiques, c’est-a-dire de tous
les temps.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
FRENCH.—(Second Paper.)
Fripay, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :— AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Gaston Paris.
ou
L’histoire de l’alexandrin dans la poésie francaise.
16
A
240 FACULTY OF ARTS.
2. L7influence du midi sur le cycle breton.
Ou
Montrer que les chansons de geste et les romans de
la table ronde correspondent a deux états successifs
de la civilisation en France.
3. Lorigine du drame médieéval.
ou
La mise en scene des mysteres.
4. Les réformes proposées par du Bellay dans sa
Défense et Illustration de la langue fran aise.
ou
La vie de Montaigne.
5. Commenter les vers suivants de l’Art Poetique:
(a) Gardez donc de donner, ainsi que dans Clélie,
L/air ni l’esprit francais a l’antique Italie,
Et, sous des noms romains faisant notre por-
trait,
Peindre Caton galant et Brutus dameret.
(0) Aimez donc la raison; que toujours vos écrits
Empruntent d’elle seule et leur lustre et leur
Prix
(ὦ Evitons ces excés: laissons a I’Italie
De tous ces faux brillants l’éclatante folie.
MODERN LANGUAGE (HONOURS).
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 6.
Le DRaAME.
1. (a) Discutez la nature de l’émotion dramatique;
(b) dites ce qu’est en soi le drame, et (c) quelle est sa
place parmi les arts.
2. Parlez du théatre comique en France au XVe
siecle, des trois genres principaux de pieces 4111} com-
prend.
3. Quelles furent les tentatives de renouvellement
dramatique au XVIIlJe siécle?
4. Esquissez a grands traits l’histoire du théatre au
temps de la Révolution et sous l’Empire.
acy δ χὴν = κι om .
MODERN LANGUAGES, 241
5. Faites connaitre le théatre de l’école romantique,
(a) ses principes, (b) ses défauts, (c) ses principaux re-
présentants, (d) ses succes, (0) sa chute.
6. (a) Faites Vanalyse de Chatterton.
(b) Quelle thése de Vigny y soutient-il?
(c) Faites-en la critique.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
MODERN LANGUAGE HONOURS.
LIT PeRATURE.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Faites connaitre (a) les caractéres du classicisme, et
(b) l’ceuvre particuliére de chacun des précurseurs aux-
quels on peut faire remonter le mouvement dot la
littérature francaise contemporaine est sortie.
2. Qu’entendez-vous par les pseudo-classiques? Fai-
tes-en l’histoire.
3. Dites en quoi le romantisme a renouvelé
(a) la langue et la métrique,
(b) Vhistoire,
(c) la critique,
(d) le roman.
4. Parlez de Evolution réaliste (a) en poésie, (b)
dans le roman.
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.
(Beginners’ Class.)
THURSDAY, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
ie ehranislaie:——=
(az). Mirhjant erhob fich der Pfarrer von feinem Sechreefen und
ibergeugte fic) allmablich, dab er einen ganz gebildeten mmd
twohlivollenden jungen Mann vor fich habe, den nur die Not und
Der witfte Brauch des Krieges zur Gewaltthat tried, und den er
Flitglich gut feinem Echus im Gauje mitjfe gu feffelt fuchen. Das
242 FACULTY OF ARTS.
ward ibn nicht fehiver : Denn er Durfte Den Pifenier mur anf die
Gefchichte Dev Matfel feines Lebensganges bringen, die derjelbe ja
jon anjpielend berithrt hatte, und es erqab fic) Wiros bald
behaglichem Erzahlen und Plaudern, felber froh, wieder einnral
einer feiner qearteten Natur zu beqeqnen.
(6) Und wenn ev an fie zuritefgedacht, dann fei es ihm
qeiwejen, als bliihe ihm das verlorene Paradies der 1{π| Ὁ
wieder auf in ihrer trenen Seele. Wllein e8 twundere ihn, wie
Marthe auch ibrerfeits jo fefte Liebe ihm bewahrt, die fie doch nic
ausgefproden und nie erividert gefunden Habe. Marthe aber
berichtete ihm fajt mit den qleichen Worten, dap fie in all der
Not dev Sehrecfensjahre mit derfelben ziellos febnfichtigen Liebe
3 ihm fich Hinitber getraumt, in welder man der unfehuldigen
Kindheit als cines nie mehr 211 gewinnenden und doc) unverlor-
enten Kleinodes gedenfe.
(c) Als Wmios eben in einer Dorfidhente die Frithfuppe as,
jebte jich cin bewarfneter Mann πόθοι ihn, dev halb einem
Soldaten, Halb einem Landftreicher abntich fah. Der Htann
fant von Der Dill, und anos fuchte deshalb das Gefprac ἢ 7}
behutjam fo 211 drehen, Dap der Fremde von felber vom General
Mamfay zu erzahlen begaun. Es werde dem General jest bald
an Den Kragen gehen, meinte jencr; Der Kaijer Drange den
Grafen, dap er furzen Prozep mache, anc) habe man bereits
einen Sefrettr Mamjay s eingefangen und auf farjerfichen
Befehl gefoltert. Mean tpitre nach Geftandniffen itber den
geheimen Bricfivedjel Mamfjay's, nach Wftenjtitefen, die wider
ihn zeugten, ancy nach allerlet Kojtbharfeiten, die der fchlane
Schotte bei Seite qetehaift habe.
Anros erfehraf nicht wenig und qelobte fich doppelte Woryicht.
ι. SOdchit bebutjam Give other superlatives of be-
butjam. Distinguish them and show by sentences how
they are used.
3. How are “point of time,” “duration of time,” “in-
definite time’ and “measure,” expressed in German?
Illustrate with brief examples.
4. Give the plurals and meanings of Sand anf,
Mann, Thor.
MODERN LANGUAGES, 243
5. Explain the ambiguity in Sch babe ihn ruefn horen
6. Would you say , dc) weif das Gedidt” or ,, Sch fenne
das Gedicht 2” Explain.
7. Translate :-—
(a) On a Saturday evening not long ago—it was
the 7th of March—a bright red light was suddenly
seen in the sky about half past eight, and everyone
knew there was a big fire somewhere near the river.
(b) Thousands of people hastened to the place and
found that the fine new steamboat that had been named
after the City of Montreal was burning from one end
to the other.
(c) It was hopeless to try to put such a fire out;
one could only let it burn, and save all that was near
it.
(d) Many persons had climbed on to ἃ shed
(Schauer, n.) in order to see better; but the roof fell
in, and some were killed and many were injured (ver-
letzen), both of those who were inside the shed and of
those who were outside it.
8. What do you know about the author of Dev δι)
δεῖ Schdnheit? What is a Novelle and what charac-
‘terizes it?
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.
(Beginners’ Class.)
Tuurspay, APRIL 16TH, 1903 :— AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Translate -—
; (2) Der Doktor hatte aber um feinen Preis der Welt der
jungen Dame gegeniiber etwas von der Sieqenbocangeleqenheit
berlauten laffen mogen, dabher beqnitgte er fich τι faqen ᾿ ᾿ Qafen
wir Die Sache ruben,’ und ging mit jeiner Peqleiterin in das
endere Simmer τυ
244 /FACULTY OF ARTS.
(6) Der ungarifehe Graf jah den Doftor anf den Boek
flettern, miachte aber feine Wiene zuritefsutreten, jondern zrvdngte
fic) fo gut eS ging in den vollgejtopften Wagen. Daf feine
Miwefenheit Ctorung verurjachte wd bei dem qroperen Teil der
Gejellfechaft cine Verftimmung hevorgerufen hatte, fchien ifm
qanzlic) gu entgeben. Unbefangen fubr er fort von Ungarngs
Serrvlichfeit zu erzablen, wndin der gunehmenden Duneelheit
bemerfte ev den Mipmiet nicht, der fich anf das Geficht Mariens,
an twelche er Dauptiachlich feine Worte vichtete, oclagert hatte.
t
(ὦ Mit Serzflopfen und bangen LOnungen war er die fanz-
[τα πε Trevpe Hhinaufgesrieaen und mit frendeftrahlendem
Gejidht fam er wieder hernnter. Seine Bofitrehtungen batten
jid) alg unbegrimdet eriviejen ; die Kanslerrdtin hatte, cin paar
Dice Shranen vergichend, ihr jehdnes Kind in Die Wrnie des
qliclicjen Doftors gefihrt, und der Nangfeirat hatte por Nihrung
fam feinen Gegen fprechen finnen. Freilich, wenn der
Brautigant qehort hatte, nuit welche Worten die Kangicivatin
Das Siviegefprady beendigte, welches fie nach des Doeftors
Cutfernung mit ihrem Theodor hielt, fo wiirde feine Frets
einigermapen getrubt tworden fein. Cie hatte namlich qefaat .
,Sin Sperling tm der Hand ijt beffer als cine Taube auf dem
Dach.”
(4) vjehienen nach und nach. Es waeGaHe 1Π| nirereaherbee
Gejelljchaft, die Clite der Yackelburger Burgerjcayt. Die Herren
trugen jamt und jonders das jehwarz-weipe Habit, dicke Ubrtetten
und goldene Kndpfeden in allen Semdfnopfldcdern. Die Damen
ranjehten herein in fritternder Sede und glangten bon Gejdrreide,
als ob fie cinen Siuvelierladen geplimdert batten.
2 ranslate:——
There was once a wise merchant who had so much
money that he could have covered the streets with it,
had he wished to, but he made a better use (Gebrauch,
m.) of it. When he died, his son got the money, and
lived so merrily that it was soon all gone. As he had
no more money and no more fine clothes, none of his
friends remembered (gedenken) him. One of them,
MODERN LANGUAGES, 245
however, gave him an old trunk (Koffer, m.) and ad-
vised him to pack up. As the poor fellow had nothing
to pack, he crawled into the trunk himself. Hardly
had-he closed the lock (Schloss, n.) when the trunk flew
up above the clouds, and carried him safely to a far
country.
ANDERSEN.
3. Translate (at sight) :—
(a) Was wollen dic, dachte ich, 3u Diefer Stunde nod) draugen
m Garten? tich fchauderte, denn es fielen mir alle Mord
gefchichten cin, Die ich in meinemt Leben gebdrt hatte. Sndem
id) noch fo naddenfe, fonrmen Menichentritte, erft die Treppe
heranf, Dann auf dem langen Gange ganz leije, feije auf meine
Thitr zu, Dabei war eg, als wenn gutveilen Stinrmen Heintlid)
mit einander wifperten. Sch fyrang fehnell an das andere Ende
Dev Stube Hinter einen grofen Tijd, den ich, fobald jemand
eintrat, bor mir aufheben, und fo mit aller Gewalt auf die Thi
fosrennen tvollte. Wher in der Ainfternis wart ich cinen Stubl
Mt; Da wurde es anf οεἴπππια gan3 fill draufer.
(ὁ) Mit Sonen tritt meine lange, gqlitetliche Kimderzett me
wieder vor Die Wagen ; Wlles, was fie von Freude und Schmerz
gebracht, fithle ich fo [ebhaft wieder, als ware ich nod) dev Knabe,
Der cinjt fiir Sie in Den Wald ging und Bdgel fing. Und dod)
ijt Die fehone Gejftalt, welche ich vor mir febe, von der Sugend-
jreundin fo verfchieden, Daf ic) mevfe, es ijt nur ein holder
ταῖσι, den ich traume. 3) Wiagen glangen fo freundlid), wie
fonft, aber ic) babe faum nod) das echt, an alte Traume ju
ienfen,
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.—(First Paper.)
THURSDAY, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 fo 12:
1. Translate :-—
(a) Adelheid. Weft di was? Wir wollen witnjden, Dab
fie beide Durchfalien. Diefe Politifer !—Es war feline qenug
fitr Dich, als nur einer Politif tried ; jest, da fie beide von Dem
finnbetjorendeu Tran€ trinfen, ΟΠ Du auf alle Falle geltefert.
mem
ed <p ce nad
246 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Wenn ich) jemals in die Lage fame, einen Meum zu meinem
HSerru gu ntauchen, ich witrde ihm nur eine Bedingurrg ftellen, die
weife Ledensregel meiner alten Tante: Maucden Sie Taba,
mein Gemabhl, fo viel Sie tvollen, er verdirbt hoehjtens die
Tapeten, aber unteriteben Sie .fich nicht, jemals eine Scitung
amujebhen, Das verdirdbt Shren Charafter.
(6) Piepenbrinf. Da haben Sie ganz Mecht αὐδαθί,
Und Cie haben Dhre brave Gejinnung auch berwiejen. Bei jeder
Geleqenheit. Boi Yrmut, bet Teuerung, in Bormumd/chaften, |
auc bei unferm Sehitbenteft, iiberall, wo uns Biirgern ein
teens wud quter Mtann Freunde machte oder nislich war,
Da find Sie boran gewejen. Smmer ee und treubersig, one
chnurrba: eae Wren und Hocpmut. Daher fommet es denn,
daw wir Sie allgement lieden und cea
2. Comment briefly on: (a) Montecchi und Capuletti;
(b) Das ware abgemacht (“I suppose that’s settled”);
(c) Redaktionszimmer, Weihnachtsfest, des Nachts;
(4) Gnadices Fraulein.
3. Show that Freytag (an ex-professor) betrays his
personal sympathies in his portraits of the two principal
characters.
ΟΥ̓
Give a brief account of Freytag’s life up to the time
of publication of Die Tournalisten..
4. ‘Translate :—
(a) Midts Keindliches war awijchen uns αὐ οι,
Da fiindigte mir Cuer Ohm, dev ftolze,
Servjchwiit qe PBriefter, Der die Freche Hand
δα allen RKvonen ftrecft, die Fehde an,
ότι (διά, mein Wappen angunehmen,
Src) meine Konigstitel zuzueiqnen,
Muf Tod und Leben in den Kampf mit mir
3 achn—Wen rief er gegen mich nicht auf ?
Der Pu Zrirnejteqen und der Volfer Schwert,
Des fronmmen Wahnjinns filrehterliche Warten ;
Sier jelbjt, im Friedensjibe meines Reichs,
Blies er mir der Emyporung Flammen ar—
MODERN LANGUAGES, 247
Doch Gott ijt mit mir, und der ftolze Priefter
Behalt das Feld nicht-—meinem Haupte war
Der Streih gedrohet, und das Cure fallt :
(6) Die Natur
Warf diefe Leiden feur’ gen Volferjichaften
Muf diejes Brett im Ocean ; ungleidh
Perteilte fies, und hie fie darunt ἔπι ρει,
Der Tiweede jchmales Vette trennt allein
Die heft’ gen Geifter ; oft vermifdyte 11)
Das Blut der Kampfenden in ihren Wellen.
Die Hand am Schwerte, fehanen jie 114] drohend
Von beiden Ufern an, feit taujend Sabren.
Kein Feind bedranget Engelland, dem nicht
Der Schotte fic) znm Helfer zugejellte ;
Kein Biirgerfrieg entziindet Schottlands Stadte,
3u Dem Der Britte nist den Sunder trug.
Und nicht erldjchen wird der Sap, bis endlich
Cin Parlament fie briderlic) vereint,
Cin Scepter waltet Durd) die ganze Inijel.
5. Comment on two of the four following points:
(a) Mortimer’s words: 8 hapt die Kirche, die mich
auferzog, der Sinne Meiz. (6) Es wurde vorgeftellt die ferfd)
Kejtung dev Schinheit. (c) Es leben Gotter, die den Hodmu
radjen taken in conjunction with Sebht! Sch will alles
eine Schickung nennen. (ad) The syntax and terminations
in ein qrimmig iwiitend Schiejal, ein lobensiwitrdig menjehlides
Gefithl, von rithrend wiunderjament Metz.
6. What in your opinion is the proper attitude of a
professional critic to the metrical irregularities of such
a genius as Schiller?
or
Write on the use of IJambic Pentameter in German
and English poetry.
7. Write on Schiller’s expressed preference for his-
torical subjects, his free manner of treating them, and
the expedients to which he resorts in order to bring
action into a play dealing with a person already con-
demned to death.
2.8 FACULTY ΟΕ ARTS.
FIRST YEAR.
GERMAN.—(Second Paper.)
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:— AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Translate into English:
(a) (δὲ ΠῚ etwas Groges,” fagte er, wenn man bedentt,
Dab, Damit ich hierin aller Mubhe meinen Thee fehliirfen und du
Deine Breife rauchen fannft, der fleibiqe Chinefe in jenem fernen
Vande fitr uns prlangt und der Neger fiir uns unter der Tropen-
ἴθ πὸ arbeitet. Xa, das nicht allein, die qrofen Dampfer
Durchbraujen fiir uns in Sturm und Wogenfehwall Den machtigen
Ocean und die Karawanen jiehen dure) die brennende Wiryte
Der ftolye millionenreiche Sandelsfinig, der im Hamburg in
einem Balajte wobnt und am Ufer der Elbe einen fitritlichen
Yandii® fein nennt, ΠῚ uns einen Teil jeiner Gorge suvenden
Und wenn int Handelsconjuneturen fehlaflofe Nachte machen, fo
flegen wir bebaglich hingeftrecft und traumen von fehdnen DQingen,
und faffen ibn [1 qualen, damit wir yn unferem Thee und
unferent Saba gqelangen. Cs [πο mir noc) cinmal jo gut,
wenn ic) Daran Denke.”
(b) (At sight.)
Du weift, dap icy von Augend auf mein qanzes Sutereffe
jenen Organismen survendete, rwelcye die δι Welenge de
niederen‘‘nennt. Dein Werf Die Grenge gwifehen Tier-und
PBrlanzenleben’’ hat mir einen berithmten Mamren qemacdt nnd
meine Berufung an unfere Utiverfitat zur Folge gebabt. Meir
it Dieje Welt des Wingigfleinen immer viel munderbarer
erfcjienen, als die Welt des Gropen, und der Baw und die
Yebensduperungen Diejers unfeheinbaren Sudividuen fehienen mir
viel funftreicher, ratjelbafter und manntafaltiger als jene der
ogenannten Hdher entivicfelten Prlangen und Tiere wand jene der
WMenfehen.
2. Translate into German:
(a) A.—I can recommend the berries out in front
of the shop. You will not find better ones in town.
They are twelve cents a basket.
Σ
Zo
ὃς
ΤΣ ΤῊ ὙΦ ΊΌΡΥ ἐν Αι Εν op he I ae ΣΑ
~ MODERN LANGUAGES. 249:
B.—Very well; let me have six baskets. You may
also send me ten pounds of sugar, a pound of good
coffee, and half a pound of black tea. Will you be
able to send them soon?
A.—Yes; the boy will go in half an hour. Is there
anything else you would like?
B—No; that is all for the present. How much do
I owe you altogether?
A.—Two dollars and twenty-one cents.
B.—Can you change a bill?
A.—I am very sorry; I haven’t quite enough change.
B.—It doesn’t matter; I will pay the boy when he
brings the things. My husband will be sure to have
change.
(b) (At sight.)
An old friend of mine has just came back from the
South. I met him this morning in the street and
asked him if he had had an agreeable winter. He
answered that snow-storms were more to his liking
than orange blossoms, and that he did not wish to see
the face of a black for the next twenty years. We in
the North, said he, have no idea of the situation down
there. Ladies do not dare to go out unprotected at
night. The blacks were much more reliable before the
war than they are at the present time.
(c) He undressed hastily, sprang into the water,
and drew out the sinking boy.
‘The countess considered it folly to travel with so
large a body of servants.
After I have read the first chapter, I shall be in a
better position to express an opinion.
We read in the fable that a lion once deemed a hare
worthy of his friendship.
The entire army has fallen into the hands of the
enemy.
The king must respect him, for he has just appoint-
ed his son an officer.
We were just about to start, when we received news
of the death of a near relative.
Although the hotel was very bad, we should have
remained in it, if the landlord had been more polite.
250 FACULTY OF ARTS.
3. Write on one of the following subjects, giving
examples:
Partitive genitive.
Agreement of subject and predicate.
Syntax of the definite article.
4. Give the principle parts of the strong and mixed
verbs in I (a) and (δὴ:
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
TuEsDAY, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Translate and briefly explain the context and the
allusions marked with a *:—
(a) MOG. Bijt Ou nicht eben fo frei, jo edel geboren als
ciner-in Deutichland ; unabhangigq, dem RKaijfer unterthan, und
Du fehmiegit dich unter Bajallen? δου οι] den Wert eines
freien Mittermanns,* der nur abbangt von Gott, feinent Kaijer
und jich jelbjt! Werfriechit dich gum erften Hoffehranzen eines
eiqnfinnigen, neidijecen Praffen | *
Weislingen. Du fieft die Fitrjten an, wie der Wolf den
Sirten. Und doch, darfit du fie febelten, dag fie ihrer Yeut und
Vander Beftes wahren? Sind fie denn einen Wugenblic vor
Den iungerec)ten Mittern* ficher, die ihre Unterthanen auf allen
Stragen anfallen, ihre Dorfer und Schloffer verheeren 2 Wenn
MUM auf Der anderen Seite wunferes teuren Kaijers Lander der
Geiwalt des Crbfeindes* ausgefest find, er von den Standen
Hilfe beqehrt, und jie fich fawum ibres Lebens erivebhren : ijt’ ὃ
nicht cin αὐτὸν Geift, der ihnen einrat, anf Metittel aun denfen
Deutfehland yu berubigen? Und ans verdentjt dus dah wir
uns in ihren Schubs begeben, deren Hilfe uns nab ijt, ftatt das
Die entfernte λα] τὰ ΓΕ 11 jelbjt nicht befehiiben fann ?
(6) Sauptmann} Sch moeht’ euch alle mit eiqner Sand
umbringen | Was, fortlaufen * Cr hatte feine Sandvoll Yeute
mehr!—Meit herumt, iby, undibr, undibr. Wo ihr von unfern
Zerftreuten Knechten findt, bringt jie guvite oder jtecht fie nieder.
ae
MODERN LANGUAGES. 251
Wir miiffen dieje Scharten ausweben, und wenn Die Klingen
Dritber zu Grunde gehen follten.
(c) Mat. Ginem Rauber find wir feine Treuc jehuldig.
Gig. Triigit du nicht das Chenbild des Kaijers, das id) in
Dem gejudeltiten Konterfei verehre, du folltejt mir den Mauber
freffen oder Dram ertviirgen! Sch bin in einer ehrlichen δ θ᾽
beqriffen. Ou fonutejt dic) vor Der Welt groB machen, wenn du
in Deinem Leben cine jo edle That * gethan hattet, wie die iff,
um welder willen ich gefangen jibe
2. Translate :—
Whenever a soldier appeared in a regiment of King
Frederick the Great for the first time, the latter always
put (richten) three questions to (an) him, and usually
in the same order. Firstly, he asked how old the
soldier was; secondly, how long he had been in the
service; and thirdly, if he was satisfied with his pay
(Sold) and rations (Brot). One day the King espied
a young Frenchman on parade whom he had not
seen before. The soldier, being unable to speak Ger-
man, had been advised by his captain to learn the an-
swers to the questions by heart. This time, however,
the King began by asking him how long he had served.
The soldier replied, ‘“T'wenty-one years.” Then he in-
quired how old he was, whereupon he received the
answer, “Three months.” ‘Well,’ exclaimed the King,
“either you are a fool or I am one!” The soldier
thought of course that was the third question, and
answered promptly, “Both, your Majesty.” The King
was not a little surprised at the answer, and inquired
of the soldier if he had understood the questions at
all. The man replied in French that he did not know
a word of German. Frederick at once perceived how
amusing the incident (Vorfall) was, and laughing
heartily told him he had made a good beginning with
the language and should go on studying it with the
same diligence.
3. Explain Grimm’s Law. Give English cognates
of kriechen, Pfatfe, Fiirst, schelten, Dorf, Hilfe, statt,
Knecht, wetzen, Unterthan, with any remarks you think
needful.
252 FACULTY OF ARTS.
4. (i) Comment on use of welcher in I (c). (11.) What:
is the force of prefix in verkennen, verkriechen, verheeren,
verehren, verachten?
5. Render the following into English :—
Sr sieht den Kitrzern—Wor Jahr und Tag—Cr hat es ihm eis
gemacht—Cs macht alles hoble PBroteen—Cr hat ihn beim
Yappen—Cs wird fehiver halten—Cie fommmen mit Hellem Hauj
—Diesmal αὐ ὁ. δα feblte noch—Was [1] widerfest,
niedergejtochen !
6. In how many ways may a command be expressed
in German? Examples.
7. Express in German: He has gone away for three
days. He has not been here for a week. I have
known her for a year and a half. What do you take
me for? He will not return for an hour, will you wait
for him?
8. Geben Sie furze Erflarungen itber:—Faujtrecht, Urfehde,
Yandfrieden, Fehmygericht, Bauernfrieg, dev wilde Sager.
SECOND YEAR.
GERMAN.
TuEsDAY, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
τ Translate :-—
Die Wchtung vor fremdem Cigentum verjehwand. Im
Anfange des Krieqes waren die Nachbardorfer cinander hilfreie
qejiint. Wenn die Soldaten in dem einen Dorfe Vieh forttrieben
und dagfelbe bet der nachften Nachtrajt wieder verfauften, fo qaben
Die Kaufer den nenen (δ θοῦ θ᾽ oft den friihern Cigentiimern um
den Cinfanfsprets zurite. Wilmablig aber beqann der Landmann
au fteblen und yu ranben wie der Soldat. Berwaffnete Saufen
rotteten fich zujammien, jzogen tiber die Landesgrenze in andere
Dorfer und entfithrten, was jie bedurften. Gie lanerten den
Nadhziiglern der Meqimenter in dichtem Walde oder in Gebirgs-
pajfen auf und nabmen oft nach hartem Kampf an dent Leben
Der Vezwungenen eine rohe Mache, ja fie itberboten die Soldaten
MODERN LANGUAGES, 253
in Erfindung von Todesqualen, und es wird wenige Waldhigel
geben, in deren Schatten nicht greuliche Unthat von jolden verwbt
ift, welche Dort frither als friedliche Holsraller und Steinbreder
ihe funjtlojes Lied gejungen batten.
2. Erzablen Sie ausfithrlich Caivenigitens 2 Seiten) den
Snbhalt der Balladen, in welchen folgende Worte fic) finden ;
(a) , Des Lebens ungemijdte Freude
Ward feinem Srdifeen yu Teil.”
(6) ,, Dev ijt bejorgt und anfgeboben, —
Der Graz wird feine Diener loben.”
(c) “Und der Mtenfeh verjuche die Gotter nidht,
Und begehre nintmer und nimmmer 21: fdauen,
Was jie quadig decken mit Nacht und Grauen.”
3. Answer three of the following :—
(i) What is a ballad? When were most of Schil-
ler’s ballads written? What is their general character?
(1) Into what periods may German Literature be
divided? Give the dates of each and write briefly on
the author you think the most important and give an
outline of his principal work.
(ii) When did “Gee von Berlichingen” appear?
What led Goethe to write it? Discuss its literary
value, and the character of the hero.
(iv) Name the \uthors and indicate generally the
‘nature of the following works, with approximate
dates: —
Trijtan und Sjolde, Hildebrandslied, Cimpliciffimus
Mefias, Nathan der Weite, Stimmen der Bolfer in Liedern,
Volfsbucd von Dr. Fart, Wallenftein, Wilhelm δ) οἰ Ποῦ ὃ
Lehrjabre, Oberon, Harold.
4. Translate (at sight) :—
Des Whends fomme ic) gurite gu Tiche, es waren nod
Wenige in der Gajtitube ; die witrfelten auf ciner Cele, hatten
Das δια zuritegefehlagen. Da fommet der ehrliche WM. .
hinein, legt feinen Sut nieder, tdent ev mich anjiebt, tritt zu mir
und jagt leije: Du hajt Verdrup gehabt?” 3h?” fagte
ΜΝ “rx
204 FACULTY OF ARTS.
id. Der Graf hat Dich ans der Gejellichajt geiwiefen.”—
dole fie Der Tempel!” fagte id) ; mir war's lieb, dap ich in
Sie freie Lut fam.” —, Gut,” fagte er, Dap Ou cs any die
feichte Achjel nimmyt! Nur verdrieptmich’s, es tft fehon iberall
herum.”—Da jing mich Das Ding evjt zu wurmen an. AWAlle, :
Die au Tijce Famen und mich anjahen, dachte ich, die jehen Dich
Darumt an! Das qab bdjes Blut.
Und da man nit heute gar, wo τῷ bintrete, mich bedanert;
δα ich Hore, Dap meine Meider triumphieren und jagew: da fahe
man’s, wo es mit Den Uebermitiqen Hinausginge, die fich ihres
Rischen Kops itberhdben und glaubten fic) darun ither alle
Vor jaltnitfe hinausfebert 211 ditrvfeu, und was des Hundegeyeywmages
mer ift—Dda mote near fich ci Melejfer ins Herz bohren. Denn
mat rede von Selbjtandigfert, was mean twill, den will ich fehen,
Der Dulden faun, Dap Echurfen ber ihn reden, wenn fie cinen
Vorteil ber yn haben. Wenn the Gejdhiwdsbe leer ijt, ach, da
fann mart jie [οἰ 0 Lajjen.
—Goethe ; Werth
ers VetDen.
{
ιν
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GERMAN.
TuEspAy, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Marunr denn jest, dev du fo oft gewalt’ ge Sorgen gleich
Seifenblajen dir vom Haupte weggerwiefen, warum bvermagit du
Micht Die WHurung gu verfeheuchen, die taufendfach tn div {1 any
und wieder treibt? Seit wann begegnet der Tod div furdterlich, mit
Deffen weehfeluden Bildern, wie mit den Ubrigen Gejtalten der
gewohnten Erde, du gelajfen lebteft 2? Wuch ijt ev’s nih, der rafde
Feind, Dem die gefunde Bruft wetteifernd fic) entgegegenfehnt ; der
Kerker ijt’s, des Grabes Vorbild, Dem Helden wie dem Feigen
widerlich. Unleidlic) ward mir’s fon auf meinem gepolfterten
Stuble, wenn in ftattlicher Verfammliung die Fitrjten, was leidt zu
entideiden war, mit wiederfehrenden Gefpraden iwberlegten und
sWwifchen diiftern Wanden eines Saals die Balfen der Dece mid)
erdriidten. Da eilt’ id) fort, fobald e8 moglic) war, und τα)
αἰ ὃ Bferd mit tiefem WAtemguge. Und frifeh hinans, da wo wir
hingehoren! i’s Feld, wo ans der Erde dampjend jede nadie
Wohltat der Natur, und dure) den Simmel wehend alle Gegen der
Geftirne uns unuvittern.
΄ a
Pe
MODERN LANGUAGES, 255
Lberjegen Sie diefe Rede Egmorts und erldutern Sie den Su-
ammenhang. Was Haben Sie itber die Sprache zu bemerfen ἢ
2. Ernit ijt der Anblic dev Nothwendigfeit.
Nicht ohne Sd rauder αὐοῖ des Meeufhen Had
Mt des Gejehies qebcimmnisvolle Urne.
Ju meiner Brujt war meine That nod) mein ;
Cinmal entlaffen aus dem fichern Wineel
De$ Serzens, ihrem miitterlichen Boden,
Hinausgegeben in des Lebens Fremde,
Gehort pre jenen tie’pehen Meachten an,
Die feines Menjehen Kunft vertraulicy macht.
Sn welchem Zujamneenhang jpricht Wallenftein die obigen
Morte? Was ijt Wallenjteins Idee vom Sehicfjal? Welchen
Cinflus (01 dieje Bdee auf Wallenfteins Handlungsrweije aus?
Ait die Molle des Wear nothwendig ?
3. Ucberjesen Sie:
Der Sonne Licht ijt unter,
Herab fteigt cin verhingnisvoller Whend—
Sie macht ihy Diintel ficher. Webrlos gibt fie
Ahr bojer Stern in unfre Hand, und mitter
St ihrem trunfnen Glitefeswabhine joll
Der jcharfe Stahl ihr Leber rajch zeriehneiden.
Cin groper Rechenfitnftler war dev Firjt
Von jeher, alles wupt er zu berecdnen,
Die Menjehen wupt’er, gleich) des Brett}piels Steinen,
Nach feinem Srocel grt feber und Zu fchieben,
Nicht Wujtand nahm er, audrer Chr’ und Witrde
Und guten if zu witrfelu und gu jpielen —
Gerechnet hat ex fort, und fort, und ἐπ
Wird dod) dev Kalful ivrig jeim ; ev tvird
Sein Leben felbft hineigerecyuet haben,
Wie fener Dort in jeinem Sirfel fallen.
Welcher Buttler haben wir hier?
4, Ucberjepen Sie:
Seit ciniger Seit trug fic) Herr Meyhofer mit gropen Planen.
Er hatte entdect, dab das Torfmoor, weldes Das Heidegehoft in
17
200 FACULTY OF ARTS.
tweitem Bogen unijparnte, einen ficheren Berdienft zu geben im
ftande war. Shon giwei oder drei Mal, wenn ibm das Weejfer an
Det Keble fap, hatte er als duperften Nothbebelf TorF jtechen lafien
Und je flnf einfpaunige Fuhven nad der Stadt αὐ δι. GSeimlich
ganz Heimlic)—denn —wwar 21: ftolz, wm fitr εἴποι ganz gewobn-
jichenZorfbanern qebhrlten gu iwerden> Seine Leute Hatten dann
ledes Meal swanzig bis fiinTundzwangig Maré Barerlss Heimgebradt
Und erzaHlt, δὰβ noch weit mehr anf dieve Wet gu gewimren ware
weil fewarzer, fefter ὁ οὐ auf vem Wrarfte cin febr begeorter Wrtifel
fel.
, Sudermanns Chavaftere find giemlicy gujammenhangslos aug
interejfanten Mlomenten zujammengefest.” Geben Sic Beijpiele
us ,grau Gorge.”
5. Goethe als Dichter der Liebe.
6. Ueberfeben Sie :
Dem Verehrer Goethes yt das Studiunt diejer Cigebheiten des
Alters, Das die Oinge nicht beim rechten Namen nennen mag und
deShalb umegeht und umjehreibt, immer interejfant, wenn aud
wentig [ohnend getwejen, dagegen Hat Der Dichter fiir die
Schopfungen ans diejer Periode, mit Wusnahme von Dicdhtung und
Wahrheit und allenfalls der Wabhlverivand/caften, zweier Werke
bei Denen Das allegorijche YWerftecfenjpielen durd) die Yatur die
Sache ansgejchlojfen war, bei dem groperen PBublifum weder Theil:
nahme vorausgefebt nod) gefunden. Der Lejerfreis feiner eingeln
neu erjdeinenden Schriften wirde immer zerjtreuter und. enger
wabhrend die gejammelten Werfe in immer tveitere Kreije Drangen
Die Gefammterjcheiniung trat bedeutungsvoller, Chrfurcyt gebietend
hervor ; die wiffenjdaftlichen Michtungen und die Liebhaberein an
lic) fonnten uur bejehranttiwirfen. Sn den Sabren 1806 bis 1808
war Die Sammlung von Goethes Werfen in gwolf Banden er-
jchienen, die nach gewiffen innerei Beziehungen qeordnet, das Nerefte
neben dem Arithejten, ohne Mitejicht ant die Cutftehungszert, vor
Die Wuigen des Lejers brachten und in diejen wenigen Banden die
Wusbeute cines fajt fechziqgabrigen Lebens und fat viergigiahrigen
ichriftftellerifecben WSirferns aufftellter.
οἷ Φ᾽
ot
MODERN LANGUAGES, 257
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GEKMAN.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO δ.
‘
| Se
THE CONVERSION OF CLOVIS.
Till the thirtieth year of his age Clovis continued to
worship the gods of his ancestors, but his subjects of
Gaul enjoyed complete religious liberty. The Mero-
vingian prince had contracted a fortunate alliance with
the fair Clotilda, the niece of the king of Burgundy,
who, in the midst of an Arian court, had been educated
in the profession of the Catholic faith. It was not only
: her interest, but her duty to convert her pagan hus-
band, and Clovis insensibly listened to the voice of love
and religion. He consented to the baptism of his eldest
son; and though the sudden death of the infant excited
some superstitious fears, he allowed himself to be per-
suaded, a second time, to repeat the dangerous experi-
ment. In the distress of the battle of Tolbiac, Clovis
loudly invoked the God of Clotilda and the Christians ;
and victory disposed him to listen with respectful gra-
titude to the eloquent Remigius, bishop of Reims, who
made clear to him the temporal and spiritual advan-
tages of his conversion. The king declared himself
satisfied of the truth of the Catholic faith, and the
political reasons which might still stand in the way of
his public profession were removed by the acclamations
of his loyal Franks, who showed themselves alike pre-
pared to follow their heroic leader to the field of battle
or to baptism.
Be
1. Das Verhaltnis ywifehen Goethe und Sehiller und deffen
Cinflup auf die literarijche Thatigfcit der beiden Dichter.
2. Die Leiden des jungen Werther.
3. Goethe als dramatijcdher Dichter.
4. Die Hervorragendjten Cehriftiteller der Momantifecen
Saute.
5 Grillparzer als Erbe Goethes.
6. Welche Cinfliiffe haben auf Seine eingewirft ?
258 FACULTY OF ARTS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GERMAN (HONOURS).
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—AFERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Uberjesen Sie forgraltig ins Cuglijehe, und bejprechen Sie
Furz Den Sujammenbhang folgenden Yirs3zugs :
Bedenfe ic) es aber jest qenaner, fo finde ich Hier den
Keim Der Michtachtung, ja der Berachtung des Publifums, die
mir eine ganze Zeit meines Lebens anhing und mur ppat durd
Cinfiht nud Bildung ins Gleiche gebracht werden fonnte.
Genug, fon damals tar das Eewahriverden partetifder Un-
qerechtiqfcit Dem RKnaben fehr unangenehm, ja jehadlich, indent es,
ihn gewobhnte, fic) von geliebten und gejchasten Perjonen zn
entfernen. Die inmmer auf emmander folgenden Krieqsthaten und
Begebenheiten lieben den Parteien weder Mahe nod) Maft. Wir
fanden ein verdrieplices Behagen, jene cingebildeten Uebel und
willfitrlichen Sandel immer von Frijehent wieder zwerreqen und 211
{harfen, und fo fubren wir fort, uns unter cinander 21: qualen. .
2. Sit der Titel | Dichtung und Wahrheit” treffend? Wann
und warunt fehrieh GoetYe feine Wutobiographie ?
3. Welche Uniitinde itbten den grépten Cinflup auf die Bild-
ung Des Charafters des jungen Goethe ?
4. Geben Sie Crlauterungen iter -—Pyeifergericht, Kauder-
το, Charfreitag, Echlendrian, Bolfsbitcher.
5. Behandeln Cie drei der folgenden Gegenjtande -—
(1.) Der Cintlug Franfreidhs auf δ]. Didhtung und
Sprache imt 12ten. und 13ten. Jp.
(11.) Die Klojterliteratur vor der erften Blitezeit.
(iii. ) Die Urfachen des Verfalls der Dichtung im 13ten Bh.
(iv.) Der fittliche Wert des | Pargival ”
(v.) Hartmann von We oder Walther von der Bogel-
tweide
pale tat.
te
Lop A aes
te
ΕΣ
it,
ae
ἝΩΣ
MODELN I.\NGUAGES, 259
GERMAN HONOURS.
PHILOLOGY.
SaTuRrRDAY, APRIL LITH:—MORNING, 9 TO I.
I. (a)
(0)
Do truoc man der frouwen swaere unde groz,
einen vil scherfen gér, dens zallen ziten schoz,
starc und ungetuege, michel unde breit,
der ze sinen ecken vil Ireisiichen sneit.
Prunniide sterke groezlichen schein.
man truoc ir zuo dem ringe einen swaeren
stein,
groz, und ungeftlege, michel unde wel:
in truogen kume zwelve der kuenen helde
unde snel.
An ir vil wize arme si die ermel want,
si begunde vazzen den schilt an der hant,
den ger si hohe zucte: do gie an den \strit.
die ellenden geste vorhten Prinhilde nit-
Unde waere im Sifrit niht da ze helfe
komen,
so hete sie Gunther sinen lip benomen.
er gie dar tougenliche und ruort im_ sine
hant.
Gunther sine liste harte sorclich ervant.
Der Kunic von Burgonden klagete sinen
tot.
do sprach der verchwunde: daz ist ane not,
daz der nach schaden weinet, der in da
hat getan.
der dienet michel schelden; ez waere bezzer
verlan.
Do sprach der grimme Hagene: jane weiz
ich, waz ir kleit.
ez hat nu allez ende unser sorge und unser
leit:
wir vinden ir vil wenic, die geturren uns
bestan.
wol mich, deich siner hérschaft han ze rate
getan !
Ir muget iuch lihte ruemen, sprach dé
Sifrit.
het ich an iu erkennet den mortlichen sit,
260
(d)
FACULTY OF ARTS.
ich hete wol behalten vor iu minen lip.
mich riuwet niht sO sére sO vrou Kriemhilt
min wip.
Nu muteze got erbarmen, deich ie gewan
den sun,
dem man daz itewizen sol nach den ziten
tuon,
daz sine mage iemen mortliche han erslagen.
moht ich, sO sprach Sifrit, daz sold ich
pilliche klagen.
Do sprach vil jaemerliche der verchwunde
man:
welt ir, ktnic edele, triuwen iht began
in der werlt an iemen, lat bevolhen sin
uf iuwer genade die lieben triutinne min.
Ir sult sprechen willekomen:
der iu maere bringet, daz bin ich.
Allez daz ir hapt vernomen,
daz ist gar ein wint: nt fraget mich.
Ich wil aber miete:
wirt min lon iht guot,
ich sage iu vil lihte, daz iu sanfte tuot.
seht, waz man mir éren biete.
ich wil tiuschen frouwen sagen
solhiu maere, daz si deste baz,
Al der werlte suln behagen:
ane groze miete tuon ich daz.
Waz wold ich ze lone?
si sint mir ze her;
so bin ich geftlege und bites mihtes mér,
wan daz si mich gruezen schone.
Ich han lande vil gesehen
unde nam der besten gerne war:
Ubel mueze mir geschehen,
kunde ich ie min herze bringen dar,
Daz im wol gevallen
wolde fremeder site.
nai waz hulfe mich, ob ich unrehte strite?
tiuschiu zuht gat vor in allen.
Dem maere gienc si lange nach.
eins tages si in kapfen sach
af die boume nach der vogele schat.
si wart wel innen, daz zeswal
von der stimme ir hindes brust
μ᾿
oe
ἷ
MODERN LANGUAGES, 61
des twanc in art und sin gelust.
frou Herzeloyde kert ir haz
an die vogele, sme wesse um waz:
si wolt ir schal verkrenken.
ir buliute unde ir enken
die hiez si vaste gahen, vogele wurgen und
vahen.
die vogele waren baz geriten:
etsliches sterben wart vermiten:
der bleip da lebendic ein teil,
die sit mit sange wurden geil.
Der knappe sprach zer ktnegin:
waz wizet man den vogelin?
er gert in frides sa zestunt.
sin muoter kust in an den munt,
diu sprach: wes wende ich sin
gebot,
der doch ist der hochste got?
suln vogele curch mich freude
lan?
der knappe sprach zer muoter san:
Owé, mueter, waz ist got?
sun, ich sage dirz ane spot:
er ist noch lichter denne der tac.
der antlitzes sich bewac
nach menschen antlitze.
(ce) (unseen)
is mals ein jude welte gan
dur einen walt, dO mvest er han
geleite, wan der walt was vol
morder:; daz wist der jude wol.
zuo dem ktinge er do kan,
und bat geleit. daz solt du han!
sprach der ktinic und gebot
sinem schenken tf den tot,
daz er in solt geleiten wol.
daz tuon ich, als ich billich sol,
sprach der schenke, do zehant
nam er den juden an sin hant
und vuort in tif die straze.
der jude trrcc unmaze
vil soldes tf der selben vart-
der schenke des wel inne wart.
in sinem muote er sére vaht
202 ( FACULTY OF ARTS.
(wan stunt and stat vil dieben macht)
wie er dem juden taet den tot.
er gedaht: du kunst tz aller not,
wirt dir daz golt, wer wil ez sagen,
oder wer mac tf dich denne
klagen?
du bist allein; hab gueten muet!
umb disez mort dir niemen tuot.
do der jude daz ersach,
vil tief er siufzet unde sprach:
ich zwivel niht, und weiz ez wol,
daz disez mort got offnen sol.
€ daz ez wurd verswigen gar,
die vogel machtenz offenbar,
die hie vliegent, samer got!
(f) Was haben Sie iiber die unterstrichenen
Worter zu bemerken?
(9) Was ist die geschichtliche Grundlage des
Nibelungenlieds ?
2. Was wird aus germanischem au, ai, ὃ, 6 und iu
im ahd? ἶ
3. Auf welche mhd. Vokale gehen die nhd. Vokale
zuruck ?
4. Was versteht man unter grammatischem
Wechsel?
5. Was is Hochdeutsch ?
6. Was ist die zweite Lautverschiebung? Haben
sich die hd. Consonanten noch weiter verandert?
7- Geben Sie die Geschichte der wichtigsten Di-
clinationsformen im Deutschen?
8. Wie erklaren Sie den Umlaut in alter?
9. Was versteht man unter Brechung und Rickum-
laut ?
το. Auf welche Weise bildete das Germanische das
Preteritum ἢ
11. Was sind Preterita-Presentia?
12. Was haben Sie iiber das t in folgenden Wortern
zu bemerken: bist, einst, wert?
SEMITIC LANGUAGES
SECOND’ YEAR.
HEBREW.
FRIDAY, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :—
AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. Translate literally :—
Tn ἢν oe 93) AIT yw) 799 TN
*D. TOT? W991 Y¥AD CATT ee ΞΟΠ ΘΝ TNA
iv OWN PTI aya oyay 729) pocop ovnyae/
ay 2, ΓΦ Ves NID) [3 TA) ALCAN
3) NY 8 yp 199 713.930 ATA INN yor Toy
DYa NIP? OMIT IN LN TOUS NIN 139: NAT
min
1. Parse five weak verbs in tha. section.
2. Characteristics of δ΄ 22 verbs in Hophal.
Meaning of the proper names found in those verses.
4. Describe the various kinds of Paralielism in Hebrew
poetry.
or
tend: r into Hebrew: (a) Cain built the city Enoch.—(d)
Lamech had two wives,— (c)Adam was the father of Abel
and Abel was the brother of Cain.
(I. Translate literally :—
STON TIA? PS IWAN ws Mavs ONAN Tie
‘IST OM INIT. Own Typ op owe
MAN ΠΟΝ 5.9. AYYON? THIN mi? i nae
ADIT) 175: AT) JOON) ΣῈ qn ape)
264 FACULTY OF ARTS.
P99 FON) ΤῚΣ» mys? yyw ἼΩΝ py
TON TIA ANS DISD PANDA Tay> AIN
PIM TMA PY 55 ν AM Yo APN 3 ow
ΡΝ ΠῚ TANTAN ZI Ὁ nae TOWN nivyd
S00” 1». τῦϑ' IN py) aN in? πὴν AWD
: 12 Ἐπ: as ἯΙ ea : MINT IY 12
1. Compare the fourth commandment in that section and in
Exodus xx.
2. Parse WIP, TS, ΠΩ
3. Inflect ΓΤ) in the Niphal Imperfect.
4. Inflect Tay (singular and plural).
5.. Name and ἘΣ of accents In the first verse.
6. Parse the irregular nouns found in that section.
III. Translate literally :-—
PINIIID AIIM PT VND OI wT 9
“AN APA ame Man oy ana 37)
ὈΠΙ᾽ paws awry ὙΠ Ψ ups movin nino
915) ΠΥ IDND 17H TAT IN $1772? ITN,
POON TIBON | EIT SY 355. 302 "ΜῈ
299. NEF TINT ONT AN YB DN TON TT
YPINTDEN ADIN NIT. a TaN
1. Explain the anomalous form ἢ 37)
2. Parse fully (DJ; Mn: AID.
3. Characteristics of ¥’8 verbs in Niphal and Hiphil.
4. Inflect naa in the Piel Imperfect.
5. Inflect wd in the singular. - Plural of Sn
ΘΕΜΙΤΙΟ LANGUAGES, 265
IV. Point and translate: \§% n50Ds DVS ΘῈ Ν Vey
JV DO oy OPN. oN) ODP wD)
V. 1. Explain the nature of the FADD.
2, Explain the letters 552, DoD.
3. Explain the terms Keri velo Chethib, Chethib velo Keri,
Keri ouchethib.
4 Ponslate rmuitiaad D}H, WO. VSM. VAVW ID PID
VOID, 1D.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
HEBREW.
FRIDAY, APRIL 3RD, 1903 :—
AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Translate literally Isaiah 55, 1 to 6 inclusive.
1. Inflect the Kal Imperative of le
2. Meaning of the root male)
3. Inflect pm? i in the singular.
4. Analyze ὅτ parse DIY)"
5. Principle of Syntax applying to Pir 2) Wow
6. Parse ΙΓ] and state the principles edreniine that form
i. ΠῚ verbs with a vowel and ἃ Consonant termination.
8. Write down the full form of TW
9. Comment on the expression [YD as
10. Greek and Latin for nv and ὈΞῚ»
11. What kind of Genitive is J) DM
12. Point and translate the ἡ note in OND
13. Tabular view of 733 in the Hiphil.
14. Parse and analyze IND, INS "3112. wv.
15. Render into Hebrew: When the wicked forsake hisway
the Lord has mercy upon them.
260 FACULTY OF ARTS.
11. Translate hterally Job 14, 7 to 11 inclusive.
1. Parse np
2. Account for the vowels in SINT
3. Plural of wey ics
4. Analyze apy
5. Inflect the Eph Imperfect of PA"
6. Comment on verse 10.
II. Translate Job 19, 21 to 27.
1. Parse zaalal and translate it into Latin.
2. Comment on the various translations of verses 25 to 27.
oo
Render into Hebrew: His words are engraved in the rock
with an iron stylus.
IV. Translate Psalm 23, with notes on the uncommon forms and
unusual weak verbs.
V. Point and translate the the Masoretic notes at the end of the
Book of Job.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
ARAMAIC AND SEMITIC LITERATURE.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. Translate literally :—
1. Targum of Onkelos, Genesis I, 2; II, 7, 8
TE ese eV. 5.253. 10 20 ;
2. Daniel II, 5 to 10 inclusive.
11. Parse and analyse NIDN | NIVSN | ἸΌΝ ᾿
Ὁ 388
III, Make notes on δ Ἴ 1." DOD | pd
[331
IV. Give a short history of the Decipherment o- |
Assyrian.
SEMITIC LANGUAGES, 26
Compare briefly the Hebrew, Aramaic, Sac
Arabic and Assyrian verbs.
Main features of the Rabbinic dialect.
Describe the ὙΠΟ of the 397M and the
contents of the DIAN 9075.
What is to be inferred from the inscription
on the Cylinder of Cyrus?
What is the probable reading of the recently
found Pheenician inscription of ΠΣ) 2
HEBREW.
THE NEIL STEWART PRIZE.
TRANSLATION.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Translate literally in Exodus :—
Ti
2
2
4
θυ CO aie OVE
IO.
11.
VII, 13, 14,—with notes on pin and 735)
VLD 2. τὸ
IXGEE2.
XII, 11. Parse the dual nouns. Make a note
on MD».
XV, 1, 2. Account for the tense in V0”
XXI, 23.. Remark on that law.
XXV, 10 Comment on D5.
OX WLS Ts
XXIX, 38.
XXX, 18.
X XXIII, 14, 15. What. does 0°35 represent
here?
208 FACULTY OF ARTS.
12, XXXIV, 35. Give the translation of the Vul-
gate for WY ΣΡ and its influence on Art.
12... KOKI LZ 0/00 335
TA.) MK KIX; 2031. Watse iss
II. Translate literally in /sazah :-—
1.) 3X1. 30; 31; >? Parse Ὗ'
σι SEI S74) arses Os
3. XLII, 18. Explain the form Vv.
a0) XIV. τὸ. τη.
5. XLV, 1,-with note’on ζ 7.19).
ΘΠ:
7, 111.9814. ΠΟ ΞΕ ΠΣ way &
8. 21,6.) ParseNSDigo. .
9. LVI, 10. Parse 1\D$ with the Masoretic note.
10. LVII, 14. Parse 19D.
τι Peon 2: 7
12. Translate the Masoretic note at the end of Ἷ
Isaiah. ᾿
HEBREW.
THE NEIL STEWART PRIZE.
GRAMMAR.
Tuurspay, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. Peculiarities of the grammatical structure of the
Semitic languages.
2. Give the names of the first grammarians among
the Jews and among the Christians,
3. Write out a table of the accents called emperors
and kings, with their respective value.
IO.
SEMITIC LANGUAGES.
When does the shortening of vowels take place?
Comparative table of the personal pronouns in
Hebrew, Aramaic, Assyrian and Arabic.
A comparative view of the Niphal and Hiphil
perfect (first form), and Infinitive Construct of
y’y 1D ἦν and ΤΡ 7 verbs.
Formation of the plural, absolute and construct,
in the five classes of masculine nouns.
Use of the article with numerals.
How is the apodosis of a conditional sentence in-
troduced ?
What are the general principles of agreement o
number and gender ?
| ad
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
SECOND YEAR.
ELEMENTARY -PSYCHOLOGY.
DECEMBER, 1902.
Answer only eight questions.
1. Define subject and object, and mention other
terms used to denote the same contrast.
2. Explain how Psychology is aided by other studies.
3. Distinguish special and general senses, and men-
tion the most prominent under each class.
4. Give some account of the muscular sense and its
sensations.
5. Define the terms, presentation, representation, as-
sociation, suggestion.
6. State the two primary laws of suggestion, and
illustrate their operation in some simple perception.
7, Illustrate the operation of these laws in suggestion
by contrast.
8. Explain the distinction between the primary and
the secondary laws of suggestion.
9. Explain how the direction of thought in study illus-
trates the first of the secondary laws.
10. Explain the futility of the process called cram-
ming for permanent mental acquisition.
τι. Write a note on the psychology of habit.
12. Distinguish comparison from association, and
state the three laws of thought.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC:
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. (a) In what respect do the aims of Psychology and
Logic differ? :
(b) In how far, if at all, is the validity of logical
principles affected by the number of persons by whom
they are accepted?
ιν.
~
δὰ
rr. | Ce ‘ oa pt i ee “““.π ¢
"Sa ¥ τ Ἐ ee aly | 4
κ τα ae
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. ὁ 271
2. (a) Is every object of experience capable of defini-
tion? "Ἂς
(b) Can there be more than one definition for the
sane object of thought?
3. Either compare (with illustrations) the use of genus
and species in Logic with the use of these concepts in
Botany or Zoology; or explain what is meant by a
Natural Kind and the value of a Theory of Natural
Kinds for purposes of Classification.
4. Discuss the relative values for scientific purposes
‘of the A. E. L O. propositions.
5. (a) Shew that the major premise in the second
figure must be universal.
(b) Prove that the minor premise in the third
figure must be affirmative.
(c) In what figures are the moods AOO, EAO,
EIO and IEO valid?
6. (a) If (1) it is false that whenever X is found, Y is
found with it, and (2) not less untrue that X is some-
times found without the accompaniment of Z; are you
justified in denying that (3) whenever Z is found there
also you may be sure of finding Y? And, however,
this may be, can you in the same circumstances judge
anything about Y in terms of Z? :
(b) In what respect would Mill’s objection to the
usefulness and validity of the syllogism hold good of
all inference whatever?
7. Classify and examine the following arguments:
(a) All that perceives is mind; the existence of.
- objects consists in being perceived; theretore the exist-
ence of objects necessarily depends on mind.
(b) Every attempt to interpret the succession of
mental phenomena by means of theorems originally
devised to interpret the movements of matter involves
materialism; the assertion of materialism involves the
denial of personal immoftality; the denial of personal
immortality deprives morality of its principal sanction
and prevents us from having any higher ideal of life
than the gratification of egoistic desires; ergo we are
justified in insinuating that philosophers who inter-
pret mental manifestations by a reference to material
structure are likely to be men of loose morals.
(c) Men are not brutes; brutes are irrational; all
18
272 τ τ EACULTY OF ARTS.
irrational beings are irresponsible; therefore, men are
not free from responsibility.
(d) Whatever had a beginning in time has limits
in space; the universe has no beginning in time, aie
fore the universe has no limits in space.
(e) The professor did well to lay stress, not on
the material triumphs of electricity which are obvious
to the most superficial observer, but on the improve-
ment in social conditions resulting from material ad-
vantages. It may be doubted whether engineering is
entitled to the credit Mr. ————— was inclined to give
it of up-lifting legislative aims and political ideals.
We have not noticed any improvement in our legisla-
tors or aldermen since the horse-cars gave way to the
trolley.
(f) Dr. Johnson remarked that ‘a man who sold a
penknife was not necessarily an ironmonger?’ What
is the nature of the fallacy against which the remark
was directed? ;
8. Describe (with examples) either the Fallacy of the
Burden of Proof: or the principal forms of the Falla-
cies of Accident.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
MORAL, PHILOSOPHY:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Answer only eight ‘questions.
1. Give a brief sketch either of Plato’s or of Aris-
totle’s Ethics.
2. Compare the ethical theories of Clarke and of
Wollaston.
3. How far does the uncertainty of speculative
theories affect the certainty of the practical rules of
morality ἢ
4. In what sense may society be described as an
organism?
5. Discuss the ethical aspect of Absolutism in the
state:
6. What is the rational origin of real rights?
7. Explain the change in the interpretation both of
obligations and of rights on advancing from the stand-
point of justice to that of benevolence.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 273
8. Discuss Aristotle’s question: Can a man be unjust
to himself?
9. Describe the faults of character which result from
with strong will, (b) with weak will.
10. Illustrate the value of religious ideas for the
moral life by some features in modern theories of an
Agnostic type.
11. What place should emotion hold in the virtuous
character ?
12. Discuss the value of fasting and penance as dis-
ciplines for the moral life.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
MENTAL PHILOSOPHY.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Answer only eight questions.
1. Explain fully what is meant by the associability
and the comparability of sensations.
2, Explain those perceptions of the ear, which do
not necessarily imply its musical sensibility.
3. Prove that we cannot perceive the size or shape
of bodies by sight alone.
4. Explain how the distance and solidity of bodies
are perceived in binocular vision.
5. What is abstraction?
6. Explain psychologically the logical rule, that a
‘proximate genus and its differentia.
7. Write a note on the relation of thought and lan-
guage.
8. How far do the arguments by which we defend
our convictions represent the process by which they
were originally formed?
9g. Define idealization and distinguish its different
forms, showing how they become united in one; or
describe the visual arts both in their common charac-
teristic and in their distinctive peculiarities.
το. Write a note on dreaming or on hypnotism.
11. Distinguish the terms a priori and a posteriori as
applied to cognitions, and mention some of their equi-
valents.
12. Discuss the so-called antinomies in our ideas of
space and time.
214 FACULTY OF ARTS.
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY OF MODERN PHILOSOPHY.—
(Paper I.)
From the Renaissance to Kant.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Answer seven questions.
t. Describe briefly the differences between the philo-
sophical modes of thought of (a) Antiquity, (Ὁ) Scho-
lasticism, and (c) the Modern Period.
2. Either explain the significance of Giordano Bruno
in the history of thought, and say whether and how he
is related intellectually to any later thinkers; or com-
pare the Monism of Bruno with that of Spinoza.
3. Compare the scientific: aims and methods of
Galileo, Bacon and Descartes, expressing an opinion
as to their respective values.
4. Either compare the general trend of Hobbes’
philosophy with Descartes’; or explain in what respect
Descartes may be regarded as the founder of modern
metaphysics.
5. What were the fundamental problems left un-
solved by Descartes and how did the Occasionalists
and Spinoza respectively endeavour to resolve them?
6. “Substantia absolute infinita est indivisibilis.”
Why? And what are the difficulties resulting from
this doctrine?
7. Explain what Leibnitz hoped to achieve by his
doctrine of the Monads and Pre-established Harmony,
and express an opinion as to how far he was success-
ful.
8. (a) State your opinion regarding the significance
of Locke’s Essay in the history of speculation.
(b) How far is Locke supplemented by Hume?
—s
FOURTH YEAR.
HISTORY OF MODERN PHILOSOPHY.—
(Paper 11.
From Kant to about the year 1860.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Answer seven questions.
1. In what respect does Kant belong to the Age of
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 275
Reason and Enlightenment.
2. (a) Describe carefully the differences between the
aim and method of the Critical Philosophy and those
of Ontology and Empiricism. a
(b) Does Criticism give any support to Scepticism ?
3. Explain the relation of Ethics to Religion in the
Kantian Philosophy.
4. Explain the aim of Fichte in the “Wissenschafts-
lene.
5. Explain the aim and significance of the Hegelian
Dialectic and express an opinion as to how far Hegel
has made an advance on the Kantian position.
6. Discuss the question whether there is any similar-
ity in the attempts of Hegel and Comte to formulate
a general law of intellectual and social development,
and add any critical remarks (you may consider desir-
able) on such general historical constructions.
7. Give a short account of either Schleiermacher’s
or Herbart’s position in the ‘History of Philosophy.
8. Either state and justify your opinion of the value
of Schopenhauer’s Theory of Knowledge, or discuss the
opposed views of Hegel and Schopenhauer regarding
the meaning and value of history.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC AND- PSYCHOLOGY (ADVANCED
SECTION).
ELEMENTARY INTRODUCTION TO
PHILOSOPHY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer four questions in A and four in B.)
ja
1. How would you distinguish Philosophy from
Science? Give and explain one or more definitions of
Philosophy.
2. What general tendency of thought leads to the
philosophical theory of Monism? Illustrate this ten-
dency in simpler processes of reflection.
3. What was the Socratic conception of definition?
Give examples from any of Plato's Socratic dialogues.
4. Show by reference to. logical processes that it is
the nature of thought; (1) To assert or refer to reality;
(2) To demand a Reason.
276 FACULTY OF ARTS.
5. Briefly explain (1) Generalisation ;
(2) Inductive Inference.
6. What is meant by “Practical Philosophy,” and
what branches does it include?
Β.
τ. For what ideas is Modern Psychology mainly in-
debted to Berkeley ἢ
2. How does Berkeley treat the idea of cause? Give
his view of Laws of Nature.
3. Show how Philonous meets the main objections
urged against Idealism.
4. How does Berkeley explain the perception of Dis-
tance? Has any addition been made to his argument
by modern experiment ?
5. Of what realities does the world consist according
to Berkeley? Does he make good his contention, “I
only reject the philosophic sense of the word Sub-
stance.”
6. Make any remarks of your own on the Dialogues.
SECOND YEAR.
LOGIC AND: PSYCHOLOGY (ADVANCED
ΘΗ ΤΟΝ:
GENERAL ‘PSYCHOLOGY. AND ‘THE
ELEMENTS(OB PSYCHOPHYSICS:
TUESDAY, APRIL 2IST, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. What is the meaning of the distinction between
subject and object?
2. Describe the methods of Psychology.
3. Either give a careful account of the characteristics
of consciousness, or state what is meant by the “ Mind-
Dust” Theory and point out the objections to which it
is exposed.
4: State and examine the arguments for the existence
of unconscious mental states, and show how this hypo-
aes is connected with the hypothesis of a Soul-Sub-
stance.
;
Ι ς
’
MENTAL AND MORAL. PHILOSOPHY. 277
_ Give a summary of the arguments for and against
Parallelism and explain the interpretation of Parallelism
ἣ put forward in the lectures.
6. Either explain Weber’s law and discuss Fechner’s
interpretation of it, or describe the various psycho-
| physical methods and explain how, when the discrimin-
‘ative sensibility is small, the least discernible difference
is large.
THIRD_YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
PLATO-AND ARISTOTLE.
TUESDAY, APRIL 21ST, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
᾿ (Answer seven questions-)
τ. What is the modern view of the Order of Plato's
dialogues, and on what grounds is it based?
: 2. What place is given to Dialectic in Plato’s system ἢ
_ Trace the origin of the conception. :
; 3. Explain in detail the Analogy in the Republic be-
> tween the Individual and the State, and show how it
A determines the treatment of the State.
4. Comment on the following:
. (a) “The Noble “Lie.”
¢ (b) “Justice the Health of the State.”
ϑ (c) “Justice the Interest of the Stronger.”
ἊΣ (4) “Theory of Reminiscence.”
is 5. What influences can be traced on the philosophy
of Plato and of Aristotle from the circumstances of
their lives and conditions of their age ?
Ἢ 6. In what sense is Aristotle the originator of Scien-
Z tific Method?
5 7. Explain Aristotle’s conceptions of
(a) Nature;
(b) The Four Causes;
(c) The Potential and the Actual ίδυναμ - usévepyea)
8. Contrast the treatment of Practical Philosophy by
ae |
Ἰ
νι. ἄνω, ee (ας ~
Ge Ag OES ΦΑῸΝ
ee ἀνὲν
by:
᾿ ἊΝ > 4
’
τῶν
278 FACULTY OF ARTS. ἫΝ
᾿ς |
Aristotle with that more usually adopted in Modern
times.
9. How does Aristotle treat the following subjects’
(a) The institution of Private Property ;
(b) The origin of the State;
(c) Slavery; (4) Money-
10. Write a short essay either on Plato’s Theory of
Education or on The main Elements of Aristotle’s
Political Theory.
THIRD YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
EPISTEMOLOGY (HISTORICAL).
SATURDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer question 10 and § others, or 7 questions not
including 10.)
1. Fully discuss the treatment of the doctrines, (a)
Knowledge is Sensible Perception, and (b) All is Flux,
in the Theetetus.
2. What germs of later thought may be found in the
Theetetus ?
3. Show how Plato’s Theory of Ideas was intended
to reconcile previous opposing doctrines: Give the
main points of the Criticisms directed against the Ideal
Theory, in the Parmenides.
4. Explain Aristotle’s view of the Relation between
the Universal, and the Individual.
5. What do you understand by the following state-
ments of Aristotle?
(1) In a certain sense knowledge is the things
known, perception the things perceived.
(2) Prior in the order of our knowledge are the
things nearest the senses, prior in the order of nature
are the things farthest from the senses.
6. What has been the significance of “Categories” in
philosophy?
«4
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 279
7. Give Reid’s doctrine of the “original principles of
human nature,” showing its relation to views of Hume
on the one hand, and of Kant on the other.
8. Illustrate Seth’s statement, “In English philoso-
phy, we can trace the evolution and Self-Refutation of
the Two-Substance doctrine, and the Complementary
Theory of Representative Perception.”
g. Explain the Kantian or Critical view of Experience.
10. Write a short Essay on the Relativity of Know-
ledge taking as text, Protagoras’ dictum “Man is the
Measure of all things.”
THIRD YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL, PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
EPISTEMOLOGY (GENERAL)
ἘΈΙΡΑΥ, APRIL I7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer six questions:)
1. Examine the relations of Psychology to Episte-
mology, with special reference to Psycho-Physics.
2. What Metaphysical view does the study of Epis-
temology tend to produce? Indicate the course of
reasoning involved?
3. Discuss the following statements :—
(a) All Universal Judgments are hypothetical ;
(b) Our waking thought is one continuous judg-
ment ;
(c) Increase of Thought is Increase of Reality.
4. State the general law of Inférence and give some
of the main types. Show that they cannot all be re-
duced to syllogistic form.
5. Explain and illustrate the Unity of Thought,
through the processes of Concept, Judgment, and In-
ference.
6. Point out all the bearings of Bosanquet’s account
of the three characteristics of judgment, as, Necessary,
Universal, Constructive.
280 FACULTY OF ARTS,
γ' Criticise the ordinary logical treatment of Induc-
‘tion, from the stand-point of Epistemology.
8. Consider the distinction between the a priort and
the Empirical Elements and Methods in Knowledge,
and their relation to each other. Make some reference
to Lotze’s views.
g. Indicate the various considerations which give rise
to philosophical scepticism.
THIRD YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL, PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
LOCKE, BERKELEY AND HUME.—(First Paper.)
THurspAy, APRIL 9TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer seven questions.)
I. State Locke’s arguments against innate ideas and
principles and point out the sense in wien they may, be
considered valid.
2. Discuss the place of Reflection in Locke’s Essay,
supporting your interpretation by reference to definite
a
(a) Is the distinction between the primary and
Ἀν ρηα ἔν qualities an original feature of Locke’s
Theory of Knowledge?
(b) Is it hable to any fundam: ental objection ?
(c) Would Berkeley’s dictum, “an idea can be like
nothing but an idea,” present a difficulty for it?
4. State. Locke's doctrine regarding the conception
of the Infinite and show how he applies it in the dis-
cussion of the concept of Space.
5. Summarize as concisely as possible the result A
Locke’s investigation .of the concept of Substance,
pointing out at the same time how it illustrates the
limitations of the method of the Essay.
6. Describe with critical comments either Locke’s
views on the degrees of knowledge ov on the reality of
knowledge.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 281
7. Either explain how sensation is both a positive
and negative limit of knowledge or discuss the state-
ment: “motion is able to produce nothing but motion.”
8. Discuss the doctrine that Moral Science is capable
of being treated demonstratively.
THIRD YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
: (HONOURS).
LOCKE, BERKELEY AND HUME,.—(Second
Paper.)
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
U
(Answer questions I, 2, and four others.)
I. Compare the positions of Locke, Berkeley and
Hume regarding (a) the origin of ideas, (b) the concept
of substance.
2. State carefully the main contentions of Berkeley’s
Idealism and examine it with reference to its premises
and consequences.
3. What is the value of Hume’s fundamental proposi-
tion considered as a criterion of truth?
4. Explain the foundation of Hume’s distinction be-
tween Relations of Ideas and Matters of Fact. Is there
anything corresponding to it in Locke’s Classification
of Knowledge?
5. “If we reason a priori anythiny may appear able to
produce anything.” Point out the ground and discuss
the correctness of this view.
6. (a) With what effect does Hume apply his concept
of causation in the discussion of the Problem of the
Freedom of the Will?
(b) With what result is the Principle of Causation
applied in the discussion of the question of miracles?
7. How is Hume’s Scepticism to be interpreted?
ὃ. “Philosophical decisions are nothing but the re-
flections of common life. methodized. and corrected.”
Give your reasons either for. assenting to or dissenting
from this view.
282 FACULTY OF ARTS.
THIRD YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
GREEK ‘PHIV@SOPHY.
FRIDAY, APRIL 3RD, 1903:— MORNING, 9 TO 12.
τ. Describe the condition of the Greek colonies in
which philosophy originated.
2. Give a brief outline of the Pythagorean philosophy
or of the arguments of Zeno the Eleatic.
3. Compare the doctrines of Empedokles, Anax-
agoras and Demokritos with regard to the elementary
substance of things.
4. Give an account of the Sophists, both on their
favourable and on their unfavourable side.
5. Tell the leading facts in the life of Sokrates, and
describe his peculiar method of teaching.
6. Explain the modifications which the Cyrenaic
doctrines received from Annikeris, Hegesias and
Theodoros respectively.
7. Sketch the Ethics either of the Stoics or of the
Epicureans.
8. Give a brief account cither of the Pyrrhonists or of
the New Academv.
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
THE PHILOSOPHY OF KANT.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
(Answer nine questions.)
τ. Give a brief account of the relation of Kant to his
predecessors.
2. “The Critique of Pure Reason is not a Critique of
books or systems.” Explain this and state carefully
the aim of the Critical Philosophy.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 283
3: Explain the “Idealism” of Kant, showing that the
‘“+ranscendental ideality of space and time involves the
reality of things.’ '
4. State and discuss the arguments for the a priori
intuitive character of space.
5. Explain either the meaning and value of the “syn-
thetic unity of apperception,” or the deduction of the
categories.
6. (a) What is the significance of the synthetic pro-
positions a priori of experience?
(b) Discuss the proof for the Principle of Persis-
tence.
7. Examine the objection that the introduction of
the thing-in-itself into Kant’s Theory of Knowledge
involves an illicit application of the Principle of Cau-
sation.
8. Explain the importance of Kant’s criticism of Ra-
tional Psychology and point out how Kant here ap-
proaches to a monistic interpretation of the relation
between the Physical and the Psychical.
9. Either comment on the utterance: “I had to re-
move knowledge in order to make place for faith”; or
express an opinion as to how far the results of Kant’s
theoretical and practical philosophy are mutually com-
patible.
10. What is Kant’s conception of the value of Teleo-
logy in Philosophy and Science? Does modern
Biology give support to or conflict with Kant’s inter-
pretation?
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL, PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
PRINCIPLES AND METHODS: OF ETHICS.—
(First Paper.)
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer six questions-)
1. Compare the treatment of the Will in the Ethics
of Aristotle, and of Green. What is Sidgwick’s view?
2. “The Ethical Systems of Ancient Philosophy are
284 ‘FACULTY OF ARTS.
all alike intellectualistic.” Examine this statement in
reference to the Ethics of Aristotle generally, and to
the treatment of φρόνησις (Practical Reason) es-
pecially.
3. Discuss the relations between Ethics and Politics
in connections with the following :—
(a) “If the end be the same for the individual, and
for the State; greater and more complete will be that
of the State.” Aristotle.
(b) “It would be too paradoxical to say that the
whole duty of man is summed up in the effort to attain
a right state of social relations.” Sidgwick.
4. What hints of the Method he follows are given
by Aristotle? Examine his treatment,
(a) of common opinion;
(b) of the Philosophie views of other thinkers.
5. Comment on the following :—
(a) The Doctrine of the Mean;
(b) The Practical Syllogism ;
(c) Equity ἐπιείκεια).
(d) High mindedness (μεγαλοψυχία).
6. What elements of Social and of Ethical Value may
be found in Aristotle’s treatment of friendship?
7. Analyse Aristotle’s treatment of the good (τὸ aya-
Gov) with some reference to Greek thought:
What is the modern attitude towards this con-
ception ?
8. Do you consider Aristotle’s Ethics a philosophical
treatise? In which portions is the philosophical spirit
most marked?
g. Mention the chief features distinguishing the books
books of Eudemus from those of Aristotle? Illus-
trate, from the treatment of one or more than one
subject.
a
fog ees Oe re eee ee ee ee εἔσοὶς.
ως
or
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 28
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
PRINCIPLES AND METHODS OF ETHICS.—-
(Second Paper.)
SATURDAY, APRIL 18TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer six questions-)
I. Suggest some comprehensive classification of
Ethical Systems. Define the theories brought under it.
2. Consider the practical value of Ethical Theory in
general, and of any one type of Ethical Theory.
} 3. Estimate the value of Green’s view of the develop-
ment of the moral ideal, through history.
4. Why does Green begin his Ethics with a Meta-
physic of knowledge? Compare the view leading to
this method, with Sidgwick’s conception of Ethical
Method.
5. What are the chief difficulties attaching to Green’s
doctrine of the Spiritual Principle in Nature and Life?
6. Give some account of Sidgwick’s treatment of
Utilitarianism. Are the criticisms of Green valid
against the theory, in this form?
7. “The Christian Ideal is self-denial.
“The Greek Ideal is Self-preservation.
“The Christian Ideal is Negation of the World.
“The Greek Ideal is Affirmation of the World.”
Paulsen.
How would Green deal with these oppositions ἢ
8. What does Green signify by,
(a) The Personal Character of the Moral ideal;
(b) Reason as source, of the idea of Common Good?
9. Write a short essay on any question which seems
to you of fundamental interest in Ethics.
280 FACULTY -OF-ARTS.
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
| (HONOURS).
SCHOPENHAUER’S PRINCIPLE OF SUFFI-
CIENT REASON AND WORLD AS WILL
AND IDEA.
TUESDAY, APRIL 21ST, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer seven questions; the last to be attempted by all.)
t. How comes it according to Schopenhauer that the
Principle of Sufficient Reason has a fourfold root?
Comment on this view.
2. Compare the use of the following terms by Scho-
penhauer and Kant respectively: objective, a priort, phe-
nomenon, idea. In answering, make reference to cor-
responding doctrines of these thinkers:
3. State and discuss the nature and value of Scho-.
penhauer’s proof of the Principle of Causation.
4. Examine the procedure by which Schopenhauer
reaches the fundamental proposition of his Metaphysic.
5. Point out the difficulty of reconciling the funda-
mental proposition οἵ Schopenhauer’s Theory of
Knowledge with the fundamental proposition of the
Metaphysic.
6. Compare briefly the Idealism of Berkeley and
Schopenhauer.
7. (a) What does Schopenhauer mean by the Platonic
Tdeatan. πον
(b) Why does salvation consist in aesthetic con-
templation?
8. Explain the origin of Schopenhauer’s Pessimism
and express an opinion as to its ethical value.
g. Express an opinion on “sympathy as the founda-
tion of ethics.”
το. (a) Is Denial of the Will logically possible?
(b) Can there be any Freedom of the Will.
(c) Is Schopenhauer’s argument against suicide
valid?
soe
Ot a oe
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY. 287
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
WATSON’S OUTLINE OF PHILOSOPHY, AND
KULPE’S INTRODUCTION TO PHILOSOPHY.
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12,
\
(Answer six questions.)
1. Examine the principal views which have been held
as to the problem of philosophy, including that of
Comte.
2. Mention and discuss some of the questions raised
for philosophy by theories of Natural Evolution,
3. Summarise and.criticise Watson's account ot Spen-
cer’s philosophy of Mind.
4. Discuss the respective claims of Dualism and of
Monism to our acceptance.
5. Criticise Mill’s views regarding the Axioms of
Mathematics and the Laws of Nature.
6. Examine the following statements :—
(a) Dogmatism is most generally found in con-
nection with rationalism:
(b) Dogmatism sets no limits to knowledge; Scep-
ticism sets no limits to ignorance. Kulpe.
7. Give some account, with criticism, of.
(a) Kant’s Philosophy of Rights;
(b) Kant’s Philosophy of Art as presented by Wat-
son. d
8. What do you understand by the following:
(a) Relativity of Knowledge;
(b) Speculative Idealism?
g. Give a full account of the sphere, either of Epis-
temology, or of Psychology.
19
288 FACULTY OF ARTS.
FOURTH YEAR.
MENTAL AND MORAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS).
SPINOZA’S HDHEICS.
Fripay, APRIL 23RD, 1903 :— MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Give Spinoza’s definition of Substantia, Attribu-
tum, and Modus. ;
2. How does Spinoza identify Substance with God;
and what view does he take of individual things gen-
erally, of individual minds and bodies in particular?
3. Wherein does the Occasionalism of Spinoza ap-
proach, at times, that of modern Agnostics, at other
times, that of the old religious Occasionalists ?
4. Wherein does Spinoza’s Psychology show a ten-
dency to Sensationalism; wherein, an opposite ten-
dency? Explain particularly, in this connection, his
distination between “‘tria cognitionis genera.”
5. Explain Spinoza’s doctrine of causality, and his
distinction between adequate and inadequate causes,
between action and passion. ;
6. Define Affectus, and distinguish the affectus pri-
mutivos.
7. Explain the definition of Perfection and its iden-
tification with Reality.
8. Explain the relation of action, virtue, the third
kind of knowledge, and the intellectual love of God.
ae et
me i FF
<tr
|
a i ial he
.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOCOPHY
FIRST YEAR.
GEOMETRY—ARITHMETIC.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
A,
1. Explain the meaning of the words “similarly
situated” in Prop. 18, Bk. VI, by reference to the pro-
blem. “On a right line whose length is 6 construct a
triangle similar and similarly situated to a triangle
whose sides are 3, 4 and 5 respectively.”
2. From a point B tangents are drawn to a circle,
touching it at the points A and D; B, A and D are
joined to the centre C; prove that
1°. The tangents are equal.
2°. If A be joined to D, cutting B C in E, the
triangles CAE and BC A are similar.
3°. The area of the rectangle contained by BC
and C E is always the same, wherever the point may
be, from which the tangents are drawn.
3. Show how to construct on a given straight line a
rectangle equal to a given square, stating the enuncia-
tions of the propositions in the First Book that are
needed.
4. If the mud in the streets be on the average 2
inches deep, find in cubic metres the volume of mud
on 80 miles of streets, the average width of the street
being assumed to be 30 feet.
B.
biglé, the: exterior: vertical® angle ofsa triangle. be
bisected by a straight line which also cuts the base,
the base shall be divided externally into segments
which have the same ratio as the sides of the triangle.
290 = FACULTY OF ARTS.
6. Show that the lengths of the sides of an equi-
lateral triangle, square, and regular hexagon inscribed
in a circle are proportional t to
V3, Vv Ze V Mi
7. Find the locus of points from which the tangents
to two given intersecting circles are equal.
8. Which is the most productive investment, bank
stock paying ΤΟ p.c. at 234% or 3 p.c. bonds at 92%?
C.
g. Similar triangles are to one another in the dupli-'
cate ratio of their homologous sides.
10. The sides of a triangle are 14, 15 and τό. Find
the length of the bisector, from vertex to base, of the
angle between the sides, whose lengths are 14 and 16.
11. Inscribe in a given circle a triangle equiangular
to a given triangle.
12. If 5 men and g boys could do a piece of work in
17 days, how long would it take 9 men and 12 boys to
do it, the work of 2 men being equal to that of 3 boys.
FIRST YEAR.
TRIGONOMETRY—ALGEBRA.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
TaN
1. Find the three angles and the area of the triangle
whose sides are 3, 4 and 5 respectively.
2: Prove
sin A + sin B= 2 sin 4 (4 + B) cos % (A — B)
n 34 = 3 sin A — 4 sin? A.
3. Find the yee hour after 6 o'clock at which the
two hands of a watch are at right angles to each other.
4. Prove that if
b
acs : ma + ne + pe.
~ mb + nd + pf
‘MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 291
B.
5. Prove the following relations :—
tan 4 + tan B
(CEN Ca aes 1—tan 4 tan B.
tan* α — tan’ y
a τς ταὶ Ἐξ ε a , t AS
(6) τ Ἐπ τα τη tan (x + y) tan (x --- y)
cos 27° — sin 27°
(¢) cos 27° 5 Ons
Tue stl
6. Prove that in any triangle :—
ets ERO oO ai
(a) cos Ad = Pa © 73a
tan 18°
(4) cos Ξ- τ--
7. In a triangle given
Ὡ ΞΘ ab —— 83.46 —-87,455- nd and B:
8. A line AB length 400 yards is measured close by
the side of a river, and a point C close to the bank on
the other side is observed from A and B. The angle
CAB is 50°.40’ and CBA 60°.30’. Find the perpen-
‘dicular breadth of the river.
€.
g. (a) The sum of the first ten terms of an G. P.
equals 244 times the sum of the first five terms. Find
the ratio of the fourth to the sixth term.
(b) Insert four harmonic means between 1 and 2.
BON (Ch) 1h, a 270 —— On
prove a+ c? :ab+ cd=abt+cd: b+ a.
(b) y varies as the sum of two quantities of which
the first is constant and the second varies as x. If
sr Oewhen ns Ξ ΤΡ ΠΟ γ ΞΞΞ mwhen + —— 2 find ywhen
Coe
202 FACULTY OF ARTS.
n+1 “n—-1
rah Simplify a) 9 ae ΟΝ
Buy MO) Cae ἐπε ma ΡΟ
(Ὁ) Find the square root of Io — 2 ‘21.
12. (a) Given log 2 = .30103, log 3 = .47712, log
Ὁ = 1.84510 and log 1262 = 3.101059 find ν 105.
(b) Show how to transfer logarithms from one
base: to another.
SECOND YEAR.
SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY—ALGEBRA.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MOoORNING, 9 TO 12.
A.
1. The sides of a spherical triangle are
C=] 702) 14920"
Des AQ- “2 τοι
C==138*. AGe 10%
find the angle 8.
2. Prove that the inclination of the ecliptic to the
equator (two great circles on the celestial sphere) is
equal to the angle subtended at the centre of the
sphere by the arc joining the poles of the ecliptic and
equator.
2 ΕΣ
ltx—x’?
powers of + as far as χῦ by the method of Indeter-
minate Coefficients.
4. 13 persons take their places at a round table,
show that the chances against two particular persons
sitting together are 5 to 1.
B.
3. Expand
in a series of ascending
5. Prove that in any spherical triangle
21 sin s sin (s—a) sin (s—é) sin’ (s—ce)
(a) sin: A= :
sin b sinc
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 293
a—b
tan 4“.-.- B cos
cos a+? 2
2
6. In a right angled spherical triangle (the right angle
at C) prove,
(a) c@ssc' —="cos ia :cos:b.
; sin a
(Desir A sor
sin ¢
tan b
G) .cos'e4. —
(c) tan c¢
7. State Napier’s rule for the solution of right an-_
gled triangles and solve the right angled triangle,
C=— 40; 12050. ==530730':
8. The sides and angles of the polar triangle are the
supplements respectively of the angles and sides of
the primitive triangle.
6:
9. (a) ΠῚ cid ye 20C,-10 find ΧΕῚΡ:
(0) Find the number of permutations that can be
made by using all the letters of the word Kennebecasis.
το. (a) Find the coefficient of + in the expansion of
2 a\14y
( ae τι
(Ὁ) A man has a capital of $100,000 for which he
receives interest at 3% p.c.; if he spends $7,000 per
_ annum out of his money, find in what year he will have
slostvall his ‘capital, “siven log 2.== 201, ΟΡ Ὁ ‘== '477;
log 252. ΞΞΞ T1302.
11. Without solving test the nature as to reality and
rationality of the roots of the following equations:
(1) 747° — 134 +6=0.
VR T3% 3 7 550:
(3) 72? — τΆ} αὶ πο 7 ΞΞ ο.
@@+b+o2—2(4+s)r+@+b—d=0.
12: ὦ) Solve the equation - [ὦ ἘΠῚ, τὺ 2
Tee BOs Aa Os | te ΟΣ
Th aperen Spree sy
(δὴ) Show that the value of a three-row determinant
is zero if tw> rows are identical.
294 FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR.
SOLID GEOMETRY—CONICS—DYNAMICS.
THuRSDAY, APRIL 16TH, 1903: |
' Αἱ
AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. If a straight line be perpendicular to each of two
intersecting straight lines at their point of intersection
it will be perpendicular to the plane which contains
them.
2. Define the angle between two planes.
3. In the parabola the square of the ordinate at any
point is equal to the rectangle contained by the abs-
‘cissa and the latus rectum.
4. In the parabola the tangent at any point P bisects
the angle between the focal distance of P, and the
perpendicular from P on the directrix.
ley
5. If two straight lines are parallel and one of them
is perpendicular to a plane, the other will be also per-
pendicular to that plane.
6. The sum of the face angles of any convex a
hedral angle is less than four right angles.
7. Tangents to a parabola from any point subtend
equal angles at the focus and have equal projection
on the Directrix.
8. If two chords of a parabola PP,, and QQ, inter-
sect.in Ὁ; PO.0P |: Q00:00-sin-the ratio-of thepara-
meters of the diameters which bisect the chords.
C
g. A shot is fired from a gun on the top of a cliff 400
feet high, with a velocity of 768 feet per second at an
elevation of 30°. Show that the horizontal distance,
from the vertical through the gun, of the point where
the shot strikes the water at ‘the foot of the cliff is
3200 \/3 yards.
10. A ball of mass 2 lbs. impinges directly on a ball
of mass 1 Ib. which is at rest; shew that if the velocity
with which the larger ball impinges be equal to the
velocity of the smaller ball after impact, then the co-
efficient of restitution is %.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. _ 295
Describe and explain an experimental arrangement
for determining the coefficient of restitution of ivory.
11. A body describes a circle of radius r with uniform
velocity v. Shew that the acceleration to the centre
ee
ms
The sails of a windmill are 29 feet long and it re-
volves once in 6 seconds. Shew that a man caught up
and carried round on the end of a sail might let go for
a short time at the top, and then catch hold again with-
out falling.
12, Explain how the time of oscillation of a pendu-
lum or other suspended system may be determined with
great accuracy either by the method of coincidences,
or by use of a telescope and scale, as in the case of
Maxwell’s Needle. 2
A cylinder with horizontal cross-arm is suspended
by a vertical wire, and the time of oscillation found to
be 6.84 seconds. ‘Two equal weights, each of 84.2 gms,
are attached to the ends of the cross-arm, the distance
of the weights from the wire being 12.7 cms. The time
of oscillation is now found to be 8.76 seconds. Find
the moment of inertia of the system without the
weights.
THIRD AND : FOURTH “YEARS.
ASTRONOMY—OPTICS.
‘WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
A,
τ. In what manner is the presence of new heavenly
bodies detected by means of photography.
2. Name the astronomical instruments and state the
observations required in order to ascertain the posi-
tions of the stars so as to form a celestial globe,
(a) In the Nautical Almanac the “Apparent places
of the Stars” are given for every tenth day. How do
you account for this when these stars are also called
“Fixed Stars.” ;
2. Describe the method by which the longitude of
McGill College observatory has been ascertained.
296 FACULTY OF ARTS.
4. Describe any one method for finding the latitude
of a place.
5. Assuming that the diameter of the Sun is 100 times
the diameter of the Earth, and that the distance of the
Sun from the Earth is 92% millions of miles, find the
length of the Earth’s shadow. How does this question
enter into the consideration of eclipses?
6. Describe the method of finding the diameter of
the Earth.
Be
7. Describe the Sextant and explain the optical prin-
ciple upon which it depends.
8 State the Laws of Refraction, and find a formula
for the focus of a pencil of rays after refraction through
a lens.
g. A convex lens of crown glass (index of refraction
1.5) has surfaces of radius 10 and 15 inches respectively.
Calculate its focal length.
το. The lens of question 9 is to be achromatized by
atlens of flint glass (refractive index 1.58), one of whose
surfaces is to fit the 10-inch surface of the crown glass
lens. What must be the radius of the other surface?
11. A short-sighted person sees most distinctly at a
distance of 5.4 inches. What should be the nature and
focal length of his spectacles?
12. Describe the Astronomical Telescope, and find
an expression for the field of view by whole pencils.
The focal lengths of the objective and the eyepiece of
a telescope are 3 feet and % inch respectively. It is ad-
justed by a long-sighted person who sees most dis-
tinctly at a distance of 2 feet.so as to view a meter scale
distant 24 feet from the objective. Find the distance
of the eyepiece from the objective and the magnifica-
tion.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
MECHANICS AND HYDROSTATICS.
FripAy, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Show how to find the resultant of any number of
forces in one plane acting upon a particle.
ee)
|
δ,
ἵ
a hte Χ eS Sy,
te at
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 297
Forces of 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 lbs. weight act at one of
the angular points of a regular hexagon towards the
other five points; find the direction and magnitude of
their resultant.
2. State and prove Lami’s Theorem.
A heavy uniform beam of weight W rests with its
extremities on two smooth inclined planes, which meet
in a horizontal line, and whose inclinations to the
horizon are a and #; find its inclination to the horizon
in the position of equilibrium, and the reactions at the
_ planes.
3. Find the centre of gravity of a plane triangle.
Particles of 1, 2, 3 and 4 lbs. weight are placed at
the angular points of a square of side τὸ inches. Find
the distance of their centre of gravity from the centre
of the square.
4. State and prove in any manner the Principle of
the Inclined Plane.
A body of weight 4 lbs. rests in limiting equilibrium
on a rough plane whose slope is 30°; the plane being
raised to a slope of 60°, find the force along the plane
required to support the body.
a U
5. Prove the formulae, s = — and — —as for a
2 2
body under uniform acceleration.
After a body has been falling for 5 seconds it passes
through a pane of glass and loses half its velocity; if
it now reach the ground in 1 second, find the height of
the glass above the ground. ἔ
6. State the Second Law of Motion and explain how
the unit of force must be chosen in order that it may
Ρ
be expressed by the formula a = —.
M
A string hung over a pulley has at one end a weight
of τὸ lbs., and at the other weights of ὃ and 4 lbs.;
after being in motion for 5 seconds the 4 lb. weight is
taken off; find how much further the weights go before
they first come to rest.
7. On the moon gravity has about one-sixth of its
value at the surface of the earth. Find the maximum
2
298 FACULTY OF ARTS.
range of a lunar gun which could project a shot with
a velocity of 1600 feet per second.
8. A train of 150 tons, moving at 50 miles an hour,
has its steam shut off and the brakes applied, and is
stopped in 363 yards. Supposing the resistance to its
motion to be uniform, find its value, and find also the
mechanical work done by it measured in foot-pounds.
g. Describe and explain the use of Nicholson’s
Hydrometer.
When a certain solid is placed in the upper cup, it is
found that 18 grains are required to sink the instrument
to the mark; when it is in the lower cup, 23 grains are
required, and when it is taken away altogether, 33
grains are required. Find the specific gravity of the
solid.
10. A mixture is made of two substances in the pro-
portion of 2 to 1, first by volumes, and next by weights.
The specific gravity of the mixture is in the first case
1.3, and in the second 1. Find the specific gravity
of the substances.
11. At the sea-level the barometer stands at 760
mim., and the temperature is 18°C., while at the top of
a mountain the barometer stands at 400 mm. and the
temperature is 3°C. Compare the weights of a cubic
metre of air at the two places.
12. A cylindrical diving bell, 10 feet high and 6 feet.
in diameter, is sunk till its top is 59 feet below the sur-
face of water. If the water barometer stands at 34
feet, how many cubic feet of air at ordinary pressure
must be pumped into the bell to prevent the water from
rising more than one foot within it?
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section).
GEOMETRY—(First Paper).
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Ἂς
1. The middle points of the three diagonals of a com-
plete quadrilateral are collinear.
Bey 4
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 299
2. Divide a line into two parts such that the difference
oF their squares shall be equal to the square of a given
ine. :
3. Given the base of a triangle, the vertical angle, and
the rectangle under its sides, construct the triangle.
4. If the base AB of a triangle ACB be divided in ἢ)
so that 2 AD = 3 DB, prove that
2AC* ἘΣ ΒΘ. == 2 AD? ΞΡ ΤΠ BD?" 5 -CP?.
5. Describe a circle having its centre at a given point,
and cutting a given circle orthogonally.
6. A point inside a triangle is joined to the vertices.
and the lines thus drawn are produced to cut the sides;
prove that the ratio of the segments of any side is the
same as the ratio compounded of the ratios of the
segments of the other two sides.
B.
7. In a given line find a point such that the sum of
its distances from two fixed points shall be a minimum.
8. Three times the sum of the squares of the sides
of a triangle is equal to four times the sum of the
squares of the lines bisecting’ the sides of the triangle.
9. Through one of the points of intersection of two
given circles draw a line, the sum of whose segments
intercepted by the circles shall be a maximum.
10. The locus of the intersection of tangents to a
circle at the extremities of a chord which passes through
a fixed point, is the polar of the point.
11. The Arithmetic mean is to the Geometric mean
as the Geometric mean is to the Harmonic.
12. State and prove Pascal's Theorem.
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section).
GEOMETRY—(Second Paper).
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
A.
1. Reciprocate the theorem :—
If two vertices of a triangle move on fixed lines, while
the three sides pass through three collinear points, the
locus of the third vertex is a right line.
300 FACULTY OF ARTS.
2. Given the base and ratio of the sides of a triangle,
find the locus of the vertex.
3. Given the first, third and fourth rays of a pencil,
and its anharmonic ratio, construct the pencil.
4. lf two triangles have lines joining corresponding
vertices concurrent, the intersections of corresponding
sides are collinear.
5. The direct common tangent of two circles passes
through their external centre of similitude.
6. If from every point in a given line tangents be
drawn to a given circle, the chords of contact passes
through the pole of the given line.
Bs
7. Any two circles can be inverted into themselves.
8. Any line cutting a circle, and passing through a
fixed point, is cut harmonically by the circle, the point
and the polar of the point.
g. If the three sides of a triangle be cut by any
transversal, prove that the ratio of the segments of
the side which is cut externally is equal to the ratio
compounded of the ratios of the segments of the other
two sides.
το. The feet of the-three perpendiculars let fall on
the sides of a triangle from any point in the circum-
ference of the circumscribed circle, are collinear.
t1. In equiangular triangles the rectangles under the
non-corresponding sides about equal angles are equal
to one another.
12. Through a given point draw a line which shall
form with two given lines a triangle of minimum area.
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section).
THEORY OF EQUATIONS—ALGEBRA.
THURSDAY, APRIL 23RD, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Α.
τι ἘΠ πα δ
2. χ — 15 #7 + 24 x» + 25
laying down ten points and note the greatest and least
values of the polynomial.
γ᾿ a)
ee δ δῆ
'
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 301
2: Show. that
Te B= FG) τ pe) b+ (x) ey ας
i, 22
‘(a) Apply this to the polynomial in question 1
when x becomes + + ὦ
3. Solve the equation
347—4x7+ 4+ 88=0 ῷ
one root being 2 + ν' — 7.
4. Expand (1 — -r)3 to 5 terms.
5. Find the sum to » terms of
SE sit ΑΝ ae Verma ;
Aa + B
(a—a) (a—b) (x—e)
partial fractions.
6. Resolve
into
ΒΕ
7, If the expression a + 8B ν -ιἰ be a root of the
equation ‘ (7) =o, then a -- 8 \V/ —1 is also a root.
Solve the equation +4 + 2x73 — 542? + 64 + 2=0,
one root being — 2+ V3.
8. Every equation of an even degree whose last term
is negative, has at least two real roots, one positive
and the other negative.
g. Between two consecutive real roots, a and ὃ of ‘the
equation F (x) — o there lies at least one real root of
the equation /+ (7) =.0.
10. By means of Sturm’s theorem find the number
and situation of the real roots of the equation
B—7r +70.
{τι Prove a? = 14+ + Logoa - x*
12
12. Prove that the number of combinations of m things
r at a time is
I
If the number of combinations of things r — I ata
time is the same as the number r + 1 at a time, find 2.
(Logs a)? Τὰ etc
902 ᾿ FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR—(Advanced Section).
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY—(First Paper).
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
AS
1. Find so that the following equation may repre-
sent right lines :—
et 2hry +y?— καὶ -- γγ- 6 ΞξΞο.
2. Given 4 points, A, B, C, D, find the locus of a point
P such that
PA? ΖΓ PB? + 3 PC? +. 4 PD? = Constant.
3. Find the equation of the circle through the origin
and the points (2\,3), (3,"'4)-
4. Find the most general form of the equation of a
circle in polar co-ordinates.
5. Given the vertical angle and area of a triangle,
find the locus of the point where the base is cut in a
given ratio. |
6. Find by transformation the equation in polar co-
ordinates of the line
«cos a+ y sina = p.
B.
7. Shew that the lines dx +4y + το, ἡ, οι
C ,= 0 are perpendicular to one another when Ad
+ BB, =o.
8. Given three fixed lines OA, OB, OC, meeting in a
point, if the three vertices of a triangle move one on
each of these lines and two sides of the triangle pass
through fixed points, prove that the remaining side
passes through a fixed point.
g. (a) Find the distance from the intersection of the
lines 34 + 2y + 4=—0, 24 + 5y + ὃ —0, to the line
y = 54 + 6.
(b) Find the area of the quadrilateral whose ver-
tices are (0,0), (0,5), (11,9), (7,0).
10. Find the equation of the tangent to the circle
(x — a)? + (y—é ? =r at the point x, y,.
11. Find the equation of a straight line touching the
circle +? + 4% = r? and also,
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 303
(b) perpendicular to the line 4.7 —- By +C=0;
(c) making an angle of 45° with the axis of +;
(d) making with the axes a triangle who searea is 7”.
12. Given a point, and a right line or a circle; if on
OP the radius vector to the line or circle a part OQ
be taken inversely as OP, find the locus of Q.
SECOND YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section). -
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY—(Second Paper.)
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. If any line cut two similar and concentric conics,
its parts intercepted by the conics will be equal.
2. If normals be drawn at the extremities of any
focal chord of an ellipse, a line drawn through their
intersection parallel to the axis major will bisect the
chord.
3. Find the locus of the centre of a circle which
makes given intercepts on two given lines.
4. Taking the equation
(ax + by + 2g +2fyte=o
(a) Give its geometrical interpretation.
(b) Show that, by transformation, it can be reduced
readily to the form
TS
(c) Find the new axes for this reduction, so that
they shall be rectangular.
5. Drawing the normal at any point of an ellipse to
cut the axis major, find the distances of the point of
section to the two foci, and show that they are in the
same ratio as the lines joining the foci to the point on
the ellipse.
6. The area of the parallelogram formed by drawing
four tangents to an hyperbola parallel to two conjugate
diameters is constant. ὃ
20
304 FACULTY OF ARTS.
7. Prove geometrically, by the method of infini-
tesimals, that the tangent at any point of an ellipse
makes equal angles with the focal radii to that point:
8. The equation of a conic being expressed in its
most general form, find the locus of the middle points
of all chords parallel to y = mx.
g. In any conic the rectangles under the segments
of two chords which intersect are to each other as the
squares of the diameters parallel to those cords.
10. If the equation of a conic be transformed from
one set of rectangular axes to another, prove that the
value of ab —/? remains unchanged. What is the
geometrical meaning of this?
11. Find the polar equation of the ellipse, the focus
being the pole.
12. Prove that the farther a point on the hyperbola
is removed from the centre, the nearer the hyperbola
is to its asymptote, but that the curve can never meet
the asymptote.
SECOND YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section).
CALCULUS:
THURSDAY, APRIL 23RD, 1903 :—.AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. If a function consist of several terms prove that
its first derived function is the sum of the first derived
functions of its several parts, taken with their proper
signs.
2. Find the differential of the product of three func-
tions
3. Given w— p(y) y= Tt (*)
du du. dy
Ax: | Wait dee
prove that
ax
and thence show that ἌΣ ΝΣ
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 305
ΤᾺ aN
4. Prove geometrically that FTG )y=cos Ὁ
5. Differentiate
(a + b23)!, cos mx cos nx, sin? (1 — 4°).
1 —cos + ἘΝ I
.liy=log +~/——— Prove ie
ΠΤ Ξ : + cos x ax sin x
7. In a triangle, if the vertical angle be infinitely
small, the other angles remaining finite, prove that
the difference between the sides is infinitely small com-
pared with either of them.
8. If f (x) and ¢ (+) both vanish when + = a, prove
that the limiting value of ᾿ = is in this case the same
f° (4)
φ' (x)
9. Explain what is meant by maximum or minimum
value of a function, and investigate the tests by which
these may be found by means of the Calculus.
as that of
10. Integrate
f ae al ax f ax Ἢ dx
a ae τῶ} a? Pe 02" να. ax
7
eer 7-:
me
x sin «dx
2
3 χ"- τὴ dx
12. Integrate Cth) ae
α"--5 α - 2
ἱ
13. Show how to integrate {τῶν 4 combdé
when either m or nm in an odd positive integer.
14. Apply the Integral Calculus to find the area of
a circle. ay ee
306 FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR.
MATHEMATICS—(Advanced Section).
PLANE AND SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY.
THuRspDAy, APRIL 23RD, 1903 :—MorNING, ΟΥ̓́ΤΟΙ 52;
A.
I. Solve the equation
2 sin 6 + 2 cos 0@— 12
2. Prove that tana -- tan?! 6 = tan! -
-- ἃ
3. Prove
simi Ὁ, == 0 OU 99> ag:
17 ΕΞ Τὴ
4. The angle between two great circles on a sphere
is equal to the angle subtended by the arc intercepted
by them on the great circle to which they are second-
ance.
5. If a point O be taken inside any closed surface,
the sum of the solid angles subtended at O by all the
element of the surface is 4 7
6. In a spherical triangle prove (adopting the usual
notation) that
cos 4 + cos Bcos C
SUS a sin & sin Ὁ:
B.
'G + ¢-16
θέον that -cosiasd— Ep masa ἄν
2
lf — 2: ἢ
Sing; jee
2:7
8. Find the quadratic factors of
a" —2cosna-+ x", n being a whole number. Hence
derive De Moiores property of a circle.
g. Derive the expressions :—
(Cy a ὥϑος τὶ χος
=f
4 9
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 307
T I ἘΓῚ
ὦ) Φ. --, [Ξ- ἸΞ,
4 re
I
ΡΣ 305 239°
10. Prove that in a spherical triangle
(2) tan A+B _ cos % (a—6) cot Εν,
2 cos % (a+6) 2
cos % (A-B) tan c_
(2) tala τ Β΄ --: costa (ACB) 5
2
11. In a spherical triangle
A δ. OD 1720 tC i=— 83: 10!
Find a and ὃ.
-12. The angular distances of three points A, B, C,
on the same great circle and any other point P, on the
sphere are connected by the relation.
sin BC .cos AP + sin CA cos BP + sin AB
cos 1 Ξ-- Ξ 0)
THIRD YEAR.
HONOUR MATHEMATICS.
OPTICS.
THURSDAY, APRIL 23RD, 1903 :— AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO
5.40%
1. Find a formula for the geometrical focus of a pencil
of rays after direct refraction through a thin lens.
The focal length of a double equiconcave lens, whose
refractive index is 1.5, is five inches; prove that the
distances from the lens of the images of a distant object
formed (1) by reflection at the first surface, (2) by one
reflection at the second surface, (3) by two reflections
at the second surface, are 2% inches, 1% inch, and
γᾷ inch respectively.
2. The focal length of a lens in vacuo is five feet.
The refractive indices of glass and water being 3/2 and
4/3 respectively, find the local length of the lens when
placed in water.
908 FACULTY OF ARTS.
3. Describe the Astronomical Telescope, and find an
expression for the field of view by whole pencils.
The focal length of the object glass of an astrono-
mical telescope is 20 feet and its aperture 15 inches.
The eyeglass has a focal length of one inch and an
aperture of half an inch. What proportion of the
moon’s disc can be seen at once in the telescope, the
angular apparent diameter of the moon being half a
degree?
4. Describe the Ramsden and the Huyghens eye-
pieces, and contrast their advantages.
5. Prove that for minimum deviation a ray must pass
through a prism symmetrically.
The minimum deviation for a prism is 90°. Shew
that the least value possible for the refractive index
1S) A/ 2:
6. Explain the formation of primary and secondary
focal lines when a pencil is obliquely reflected at a con-
cave spherical mirror.
Find a formula for the distance of the primary focal
line from the mirror.
7. What is meant by spherical aberration?
Find a formula for the aberration in the case of re-
flection at a concave spherical mirror.
8. A small plane area is placed parallel to a plane
lamina of intrinsic brightness I, of breadth 2a, and of
infinite length, at a distance c from the centre of the
lamina in a line perpendicular to the lamina. Prove
that the illumination at the centre of the plane area is
Tal
ν deo C
9. Obtain the differential equation to the path of a
ray in a medium whose refractive index is proportional
to the distance from a fixed plane.
10. The refractive indices of one medium for three
particular rays of the spectrum are 1.628, 1.642, and
1.660 respectively. "Those of another medium for the
same rays afe 1.525, 1.533,.and 1.541 respectively.
Shew that these values exhibit a difference of dispersive
power, and also the irrationality of dispersion.
Ε
Me
&
ee
ke
fe
ee
.
εὐ λό ὡς eS eet ne — Si
Ἂν
ΡΟΣ TL tts ἘΝ
ΞΡ ΣΌΣ ΤῸ Eee ΤΥ aa
ἘΞ, ee ee
>, «κω,
Ne Oe eae Tae
eyes Pe. ee
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 309
THIRD YEAR.
HONOUR MATHEMATICS.
DYNAMICS.
Monpbay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9.30 TO 12.30.
1. The resistances to motion of a train being 14 lbs.
per (English) ton weight, if the train going 40. miles
an hour come to the foot of an incline of I in 168, the
steam being turned off, find how far it will run up the
incline. Jf it had come to the top of the incline, how
far would it have descended before stopping?
2. A body describes a circle with uniform velocity.
Find an expression for the acceleration to the centre.
In a centrifugal railway the cars, after descending
a steep incline, run round the inner side of a vertical
circle 20 feet in diameter, making a complete turn over.
Shew that, neglecting friction, they must start from a
point not less than 5 feet vertically higher than the
top of the circle.
3. A train weighs 120 tons including the engine.
The resistances to motion on a level are equivalent to
a retarding force of 16 lbs. per ton weight. Find the
greatest speed at which the engine can keep it running,
if it is of 150 horse power.
If the train is moving at 20 miles an hour, and the
engine is working at full power, find the acceleration.
4. Shew that the time of descent down all chords of
a vertical circle terminating in the highest or lowest
points is the same.
Find the shortest time in which a ring can be made
to slide down a wire to a vertical wall from a point
distant 20 feet from the wall.
5. Explain how to calculate the velocities of two
smooth spheres after direct impact.
A train of cars loaded to equal weights is standing
at rest with a space of 3 inches between each car and
the next. the utmost the couplings will allow. An-
cther car of equal weight is shunted on to it from
behind at one mile an hour. Shew that if the buffers
are perfectly elastic and the couplings inelastic, a
passenger will experience two forward jerks before
810 FACULTY OF ‘ARTS.
getting into uniform motion, and that if each car is
60 feet long, the mean speed with which the first im-
pulse travels through the train is 241 miles an hour.
Find the interval between the two jerks for a passenger
in the sixth car from the front; and the velocity with
which the train finally starts off if there are 20 cars.
6. A particle moves under an acceleration directed
towards a fixed point and proportional to its distance
from the point. Shew that its motion is Simple Har-
monic, and find expressions for the time of vibration
and for the velocity at any distance from. the centre of
attraction.
In aS. H. M. the velocities at distances 5 and 12 feet
from the centre are 36 and 15 feet per second respec-
tively; find its period and the acceleration at the great-
est distance from the centre.
7. \ bullet is fired from a rifle 4 feet above the ground
with a velocity of 2,000 feet per second so as to strike
a target.at 1,000 yards at the same height of 4 feet.
Shew that the rifle must be sighted for an.elevation
of about 20’, and that a man 6 feet 2 inches in height
could stand half way between the rifle and target with-
out being hit.
8. Find expressions for the accelerations along and
perpendicular to the radius vector in polar co-ordin-
ates.
9g. Obtain the equation for a central orbit
Qa ix
Nd eC ΕΙΣΞ
θ΄ 52).
10. Find the moment of inertia of a sphere about a
diameter.
11. Explain D’Alembert’s Principle and employ it to
find the time of oscillation of a compound pendulum.
12. Prove that the centre of oscillation and the centre
of suspension are convertible, and point out how Kater
emploved this fact in the determination of gravity.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 311
THIRD YEAR.
HONOUR MATHEMATICS.
SEATICS:
TuHurspAy, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9.30 TO
12 130¢
1. The beam of a balance is 18 inches long, and an
object appears to weigh 20.34 gms. in one pan, and
20.87 gms. in the other. How much must the fulcrum
be shifted to make it true?
2. Define a Couple, and shew that the effect of a
Couple is not altered by shifting it to any other point
in the same plane.
3. Shew how to reduce any number of forces acting
in one plane to a single force and a Couple.
Forces of 3, 5, 7, and g lbs. weight act along the
sides AB, BC, CD, DA of a square, each side being 1
foot long. Find the magnitude and position of the
resultant.
4. State the Laws of Friction.
A ladder 20 feet long and weighing 70 Ibs. rests,at
an angle of 45° against a rough vertical wall. A man
weighing 140 lbs. climbs up it. If the coefficient of
friction at each end be .5, shew that the ladder will slip
when he has gone up 13 feet.
5. Define the efficiency of a machine, and shew that
1 the efficiency is less than one-half, the machine will
not run backward when the power is withdrawn.
6. State and prove the principle of Virtual Work for
any number of forces acting at a point.
7. The sides of a triangular framework are 13, 20,
and 21 inches long. The longest side rests on a
smooth horizontal table, and a weight of 63 Ibs. is
suspended from the opposite angle. Find the tension
in the side on the table.
8. Find the centre of gravity of
(a) a pyramid on a triangular base.
(b) the area included by a loop of the curve
Ὁ —"a, COS ἢ
312 oii FACULTY OF ARTS.
g. Find a formula for the tension at any point of a
string stretched round a rough curve, neglecting gra-
vity.
10. Investigate the equation to the Catenary.
Shew that the least length of chain which can rest
in equilibrium over two smooth pegs in the same
horizontal line is e times the distance between the pegs.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY
(HONOURS). .
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
DIFFERENTIAL EQUATIONS.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MOoRNING,, 9 TO 12.
I. Show the manner in which a differential equation
Pp + Qq = R is obtained by the elimination of the
arbitrary function from ᾧ (uv τ) =o and thence derive
a rule for its solution.
(a) Solve the equation a? p —ayq+ εξ ο
2. Solve the equation 9 (2 2 + 4) = 4.
3. Solve the simultaneous equations
— = ax + by
yee et
| dy Pa ΩΣ | by
CaF
“- 55 ry=e
(4) 1
egy ee
ax dy ;
(c) aE α + 722 ΑΙ ΞΞΞ Ὸ
| a’ ie a Ἡ ax ms Ryeaes
4 dE Re) ἘΠ ἢ
4. Find the condition of integrability of
Pdx¥+Qdy+Rdz=—o
and thence obtain a rule for its solutions.
ἢ
4
ἱ
Ὶ
4
3
Γ
eee wie ΡΝ
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY.
(a) Apply it to the equation
(y dx + x dy) (α -- 5) + ry ds=
6. Solve (09 + 5 D? + 6) y=o0.
7, Prove that f (D) e” = f (a) e™.
(a) In applying this to the solution of the equation
ΓΕ ΞΞΞῸ
investigate the form the solution takes when two of
ἔπε roots of
F(a)—=—0
are equal.
& Prove: {ν ἢ) 2" — Pian) a™.
9. Solve x + y p = af’.
10. Solve
(2) (y—x) (x + αὐ = ty)
-
9% dy ?
γι Τὴ Be — xy = ary’
; ; dy
(c) Sire | FF: eae
dy) (x + a)
=e Ly =
Aes, (2 x* + 2ax
HONOURS IN MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL
PHILOSOPEY.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
ASTRONOMY.
TuEspAy, APRIL 14TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. If the distances of the Moon and Sun from the
centre of the Earth be respectively 60 r and 23,000 r
(where r — radius of Earth) and if the masses of the
Moon and Sun be respectively 4 and 322,000 E
80
(when E = mass of Earth), prove that the effect of
the Moon in producing tides is approximately 2.2 times
the effect of the Sun.
314 FACULTY OF ARTS.
2. Prove the following formula for the parallax in
the hour-angle (a), where P is the horizontal parallax,
I the latitude and h the hour-angle, the declination
P cos /sin (Λ + ad)
a =
cos 6
3. If @ be the geographical latitude of a place and
the geocentric latitude prove that, approximately
@—$'=csin2¢
Oe
where. Ὁ ΞΞ πον
4. Find the general differential equation for refrac- ;
tion ?
dr? I Po a Sin Z
dis te oe Ι
μ
NV “4° .
5. Find the time of the year when the twilight is
shortest for a given place.
6. Find the R. A. and Decl. of the Sun when his |
longitude was 59° 33’ 42”.5 and the obliquity of the Ἢ
ecliptic was'23° 27’ 20/7.06.
ΟΝ => αν ΘΠ Ζ
7. Examine the varying relations between the mo-
tions of the mean and the true sun arising from the
obliquity of the ecliptic alone, and show that the equa- 3
tion of time vanishes four times a year.
8. If v be the true anomaly and w the excentric |
anomaly, prove
{
|
tan 1 UN tan 32
9. Find the length of time a star whose N. P. D. is
81° 29’.5 will be above the horizon at a place whose
latitude is 51° 45/.5.
10. At a place in lat. 42° 34’ N. the altitude of Alde-
baran (Dec. 16° 12’ 36” N.) was found by observation
to be 30° 2’ 10”, find its hour angle.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 315
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL
PHILOSOPHY (HONOURS).
QUATERNIONS.
TuuRspDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Define Vector, Unit Vector, Tensor, Scalar, Ver-
sor, giving examples. How are the positions of a
point, right line (length indefinite), plane, laid down in
the Science of Quaternions. Explain the meaning of
p= «a+ yi t+ ak.
2. lf Sap) =o, SBp =o be two planes through
the origin, show that
p — x VaB is the equation of the line of intersec-
tion of the two planes.
3. Find by quaternions the locus of the middle points
of all right lines which are terminated by two given
right lines not in the same plane.
4. If through a given point (vector 8), any num-
ber of planes be drawn cutting the sphere p? = — a?
and cones be constructed touching the sphere along
the circles of intersection; prove that the locus of the
vertices of the cones is the plane S Bp = — αϑ.
(a) If the point be on the sphere what does this
equation become, and what does it mean?
5. Give the geometrical definition of the cissoid; find
its equation in Cartesian co-ordinates; and show that
its quaternion equation is
!
(p* +32 Sap) Sap = 2 a’p’.
6. If points P, Ο, R, S be taken in the sides AB, BC,
CD, DA of a parallelogram, such that AP: AB::
BQ: BC, etc., prove that PQ R.S is a parallelogram.
7. lf m,, m,, m,, etc., be the masses of particles at
the points A, B, C, etc., in space, p,, p,. p, the vectors
to these points, and p the vector to the point G (the
centre of mass) prove that
p RE ΒΕ ΣΡ ΡΤ ΟΝ.
EE ef Merde 2M PORE ZA OM
316 FACULTY OF ARTS.
Out GA be a vector (for example ( p, — ἢ ), and
GA the corresponding line prove that
GA? = — GA?
and hence show using the notation of the previous
question, that for masses m , 72,» etc., as there given,
AD a at, (GBI ΘΟ CEC k= 8710 A 22
OB +m, OC” δέοι (My ἢ Mes 010) OG
where O is any point whatever.
9. If a, 8, y, are co-initial, coplanar vectors ter-
minating in a right line, prove that the same values, of
a, 6,c, which makeaa + 68 + cy = o will also make
abd -+-\¢——-0
10. If a, @ are two vectors not at right angles to
one another prove that
ἃ 3. ΞΞΞ Sa8 + Vas
explaining the meaning of the equation and expressing
it more definitely whena β are not unit vectors.
(a) Show that Ba = SaB — VaB
(6) Show that (a—f8)* = αὐ — 2S a8 + BP’.
B.A. HONOUR EXAMINATIONS.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL
PHEsOSORERY:
LUNAR THEORY.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
ee Express definitely the object of the Lunar Theory,
and state briefly the several steps, considering it as the
solution of a dynamical problem.
2. If two bodies attract one another according to
the law of gravitation, determine the orbit of one rela-
tively to the other.
3. Investigate the expression for the mean anomaly
in benim of the true anomaly.
nt +e—a= 6—a—2esin (θ---α)- e’ sin 2 (@— ca)
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 317
4. Give and prove a construction for the disturbing
force of the Sun on the Moon, when the Moon is not
far from opposition. Compare the effects in opposition
and quadrature.
5. Explain the resolution of the forces on the Moon
used in the Theory, and calculate the value of P ap-
proximately to the second order.
; ΕΝ :
6. Find the value of ny? ἴο the third order of ap-
proximation, given
iE eta mlb ae ee
ἘΠ ei a)
hw 2
7. Assuming
ds* 3 ς
-ΞΞ ιν SS ink sin (σ6--- γ)
df? 9 2 (so
_2m’k sin }(2—2m-—g)0—26+y}
- Ξ
find s.
8. Given the form of the expansions for the Moon’s
co-ordinates at any time, explain any one method for
finding the numerical values of the coefficients.
9. Explain the physical meaning of the term
ΠΤ εν τ
τ τ΄ sin } (2 — 2m) pt 2B\
in the expression for the Moon’s longitude and show
that the period of the inequality is 1434 days.
10. Prove that the Moon’s orbit is everywhere con-
cave to the Sun.
HONOUR EXAMINATIONS.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL
PHILOSOPFY.
CALCULUS AND THEORY OF PLANE
CURVES.
WepNEsDAY, APRIL 22ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Eliminating the arbitrary functions from
2 f (X)+ iy
318 FACULTY OF ARTS.
show that the result is
vr—yt+txrp—yq=o.
2. If the independent variable in the equation
a*y dy ae ay
5a eT 2x = ue as a=
i RO Ne ob ee rae sO
: ἐ I
be, changed: irom το ΟΦ, ‘bein, given a —— τ, (shows
~
Φ
that the transformed equation is
Ee ey => ays =O
We
3. Prove that the moment of inertia of a plane lamina
relative to any line drawn through the origin varies
inversely as the square of a radius vector of a certain
ellipse, and find the equation of the momental ellipse.
4. li r be the distance of any point of a closed surface
from the origin, Ὑ the angle which + makes with the
wmternal normal, and dS the element of the surface,
prove that
pee ΠΕΣ ἢ πὸ Seely Ὅτ
Je 75:
according as the origin is inside, on or, outside the sur-
face.
5. Prove that the volume included within the surface
a γ a
Sa eae ΏΞΞΞ Ὁ
eH anh d, c )
is abc Χζ the volume of the surface
a (a2) FO
6. Find the volume of the surface generated by the
revolution of the cycloid.
4 — 7 (0— sin?) :y. = α (@ — cos)
round its base.
7. Prove that the rectification of the limacen
¥ == a cos 1 Ὁ
depends on that of ti.c ellipse whose semi-axes are
a+ band a— 6.
8. Assuming the formula for the radius of a curvature
of a curve y = f (τ), find the expression for it when the
turve is given as f (x, y) =0, 1, u =O.
9. (1) Trace the cubical parabola
We wee a).
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 319
(2) Trace the limacon. When does it become a
cardioid ?
10. Find the envelope of the line
x pees
a
aan ee ye)
given qi -τς bm — cm
11. Find the asymptotes of
y (αὐ — 3 bx + 2 65) = χῇ — 3 ax’? 4+ αϑ.
12. Find the nature of the double point on the curve
πε χε
ὌΝ — ae
13. Show that the origin is a point of inflexion on
the curve
a® y = bry + cx? + drt,
14. Prove the expression for the perpendicular on
the tangent to a curve given in polar co-ordinates
Deane LON
τι
FOURTH YEAR.
HONOUR EXAMINATIONS.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHI-
LOSOPHY.
SURFACES.
THURSDAY, APRIL 23RD, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. A long line of curvature the variation in the angle
between the tangent plane to the Surface and the os-
culating plane to the curve is equal to the angle be-
tween the two osculating planes.
2. Find the partial differential equation of conoidal
Surfaces.
3. Find the cylinder the direction cosines of whose
edges are /, m, 1, and which envelopes the quadric
x? v 2
4. If there be three systems of Surfaces such that
every surface of one system is cut at right angles by
all the surfaces of the other two systems, then the in-
920 FACULTY OF ARTS.
tersections of two surfaces belonging to different sys-
tems is a line of curvature on each.
5. If D be the diameter of a quadric parallel to the
tangent line at any point of its intersection with a
confocal and p the perpendicular on the tangent plane
at that point; then p D is constant for every point on
that curve of intersection.
6. If there be a plane curve common to three qua-
drics, each pair must also have another common plane
curve, and the three planes of these last common cur-
ves pass through the same line.
7. Find the equation of the line whose vertex is +},
y', z!, and which stands on the conic in the plane of
τ, y;
1
2 2
aly amas
8. Two planes mutually perpendicular pass each
through a fixed line; find the surface generated by
their line of intersection.
9. Any two circular sections of an ellipsoid belonging
to opposite systems lie on the same sphere.
10. The sum of the squares of a system of three con-
jugate semi-diameters of an ellipsoid is constant.
τι. Find the condition that the plane
Ax + By + Cz + D=o0
should touch a quadric given by the general equation.
12. Find the condition of intersection of the two
lines
a, ὁ. ε,
αν ἀρῆς τ we) ot Ὁ ἐν ἘΣ ΞῈ
ΝΟ τά On aE ance
FIRST YEAR.
REMY SICS:
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MOoORNING, 9 TO 12.
τ. A train of 360 tons running at 40 miles an hour is
brought to rest by the brakes (1) 1n 70 seconds, (2) in
x
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 321
zoo yards. Find the retarding force exerted in each
case.
2. State the Principle of the Inclined Plane.
What must be the Horse-Power of an engine which
can keep a train of 200 tons running up an incline of
1 in 200 at 30 miles an hour (1) neglecting friction, (2)
supposing the resistances to motion to be equivalent to
a retarding force of 16 lbs. per ton?
3. Describe the mercury barometer, and explain how
it measures the pressure of the atmosphere.
If the barometer goes up one inch, what difference
will it make in the pressure of the air on one square
foot, supposing mercury to have a specific gravity of
13.6 and a cubic foot of water to weigh 1000 ounces?
4. A substance weighs 8.17 gms. in air and 7.74 gms.
in water. What is its specific gravity ?
5. In a certain experiment 380 cc. of a gas are given
off when the thermometer reads 21°C and the baro-
meter is at 772mm. What will be the volume of the
gas at o°C and 760mm?
6. Explain what is meant by the statements :—(1)
the Specific Heat of ice is .5; (2) The latent Heat of ice
is 80.
τ tb. of ice at -12°C is placed in 10 lbs. of water at
18°C. What will be resulting temperature?
7. Give a formula for the number of vibrations per
second made by a stretched string.
A string is to be made to give a note one octave
higher by altering either its length or its tension.
What must be done in each case?
8. Describe and explain the construction of a teles-
cope.
A telescope is turned on a moderately distant object
and focussed by a rather short-sighted person so that
the image appears to be only a foot or two away.:
Mark on a diagram the relative positions of (1) the
focus of the object-glass, (2) the image formed by the
object-glass, (3) the focus of the eye-piece.
9. Contrast the advantages of the Corpuscular and
the wave theories of Light in one of the two following
points :—
(a) Explanation of the high velocity of light which
as the same for light from all sources. :
892 FACULTY OF ARTS.
(b) Explanation of Refraction.
10. Describe and explain the action of the Electro-
phorus. Briefly indicate how electric machines have
been built on this principle.
11. Describe any 'wo-fluid Primary Battery. What
was the object of their construction?
Six Daniell cells of E. M. F. 1.079 are connected in
series to a line of 182 ohms resistance. If each cell
has a resistance of 6.2 ohms, express the current that
flows in thousandths of an Ampere.
12. Describe the essential parts of a Dynamo, ex-
plaining the purpose of each and the action of the whole
machine.
"THIRD? ΕΑ ΝΣ
EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS—SOUND, LIGHT
AND E AT:
TuEsDAy, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Find the absoiute zero on the Fahrenheit and on
the Réaumur Scale.
2. How would you determine the latent heats of
water and steam? It is found that a kilogramme of
water at 100°C. mixed with a kilogramme of melting
ice without loss of heat, gives two kilogrammes of
water at the temperature 10.36°C.; find the latent heat
of water.
3. Describe the Regnault hygrometer. How would
you calculate the relative humidity from a knowledge
of the dew point?
4. Explain what is meant by critical temperature and
pressure. How were the permanent gases liquified,
and what are the necessary conditions for obtaining
liquid air in quantity?
5. Find the quantity of heat conducted per hour
through each square meter of the surface of an iron
steam boiler 0.8 cm. thick, when the temperature of the
inner surface of the boiler is 120°C. and that of the
outer 119.5°C. The conductivity of the iron may be
takenjas-o:or in: C. Ca Seunits:
᾿ NS ty τ᾿ νος,
Fig >
y
ΔΑ
Ὁ
Ψ
᾿
Υ
τ
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 323
6. Describe and explain the action of (a) Crooke’s
radiometer, (b) Boy’s radiomicrometer.
7. State the first and second laws of thermodynamics,
8. How would you calculate the maximum work
that could be obtained from a perfect heat engine?
9g. Describe the method of comparing the values of
the velocity of sound in different gases by means of
Kundt’s Tube, explaining the principles on which it
depends. Could this method be adapted to compare
the velocities in wood, glass, and the different metals?
10. Given a Spectrometer, a prism, and a sodium
flame. Describe carefully (a) the preliminary adjust-
ments to be made, (b) the method of finding the angle
of the prism, and (c) how to measure the minimum
deviation for sodium light. Give the formula by which
you could then calculate the index of refraction of the
prism for sodium light.
11. Describe some form of Photometer, and explain
the principle on which it depends.
12. The length of a violin string is 33cms. and its
mass is: 524gm. What tension must be applied to it to
make it vibrate 280 times per second?
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS.
ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MorNING, —)) TO +12.
τ, State what you know of the Leyden Jar discharge.
How would you measure the period of oscillation of
the discharge? Describe the arrangement of the
Leyden jars and connections in the experiment of the
“alternative path.” )
2. Define the term “surface density of electricity.”
How does the distribution of electricity depend on
the shape of a conductor? |
Explain the discharging action of points and its
application to protection of buildings from lightning.
3. Describe the action of (1) a simple type of Hertzian
vibrator, (2) a coherer.
324 FACULTY OF ARTS.
4. Show by careful diagrams the distribution of mag-
netic lines of force round (a) a long straight wire, (0),
a circular coil, (c) a solenoid through which electric
currents pass.
Find the strength of the magnetic field, (a) at the
axis, (b) at the end of a solenoid 50 cms. long, 2 cms.
in diameter wound with 1000 turns of wire and carrying:
a current of 5 amperes.
5. Show how the magnetism developed in iron de-
pends on the strength of the magnetizing current. :
What is meant by magnetic hysteresis?
Contrast the magnetic properties of soft iron and
steel.
6. What is the effect of temperature on the electrical
resistance of metals, alloys and electrolytes? How
would you determine the temperature coefficient “of
copper wire between οὐ. and 100°C?
7. Four- large storage batteries in series. E.M.F. of
each 2.2 volts and internal resistance of each .0o02 ohms,
send a current through two external resistances of «1
and ΟἹ ohms arranged first in series and then in parallel.
Find in each case the current drawn from the cells and
the watts absorbed in the resistances.
8. State Faraday’s laws of the induction of electric
currents.
An earth coil mounted on a horizontal axis placed τη
the meridian is rotated at a uniform speed. Find
(a) The E.M.F. induced in the coil at each position
in its revolution ;
(b) The average E.M.F.
g. Find (a) the magnitude and direction of the force
experienced by straight vertical wire 20 cms. long
carrying a current of 20 amperes in a uniform horizon-
tal north and south field of 6000 lines per square cen-
timetre.
(b) The E.M.F. produced in the same wire when:
it is carried due east in the field at a rate 5 metres per
second.
10. Describe the construction and action of an alter-
nating current transformer.
MATHEMATICS AND NATURAL PHILOSOPHY. 325
What type of transformer is used for electric weld.
ing?
11. Describe and explain the action of any two of the
following: ,
(a) Electromagnetic interrupter of an induction
coil;
(b) Wehnelt interrupter ;
(c) Telegraphic relay. ἘΣ
GHEMISTRY
SECOND YEAR.
CEE NETS DRAG.
Ti ae ον ὃ @) Bs : Αι
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 :—/AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Give a brief account of the preparation and pro-
perties of nitric acid. Explain its use as an oxidising
agent.
2. Enumerate the various oxides of nitrogen and
describe for each a method of preparation.
8. How, and from what sources, is phosphorus ob-
tained? Give an account of the halogen compounds
of phosphorus.
4. Describe a method by which the atomic weight of
an element may be determined.
5. Enunciate and give a short account of the Periodic
Law.
6. Give a brief account of the general physical and
chemical properties of the elements of the first group.
7. Describe a method of preparing aluminium, and
indicate its chief chemical reactions.
8. What is bleaching powder? Mention some of its
industrial applications and tell how it is prepared.
g. What do you know about the modern theory of
solutions Ὁ
10. Describe the preparation and the uses of potas-
sium permanganate.
PER NAR:
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—(First Paper.)
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MOoORNING, 9 TO II.
Note.—Candidates in Applied Science and in Arts Honours
will substitute questions 7 and § for 1 and 2.
1. Explain and exemplify the meaning of isomerism
by reference to (a) the paraffins, (b) the amines, (c) the
cyanogen compounds.
CHEMISTRY. 327
2, Distinguish between primary, secondary. and ter-
tiary alcohols, and explain the behaviour of each on
oxidation.
3. By what methods would you prepare a primary
alcohol from
(1) An alkyl bromide;
(2) An amine;
(3) An ester?
Discuss the constitution and general reactions of
this class of organic compounds.
4. What is meant by an unsaturated compound?
Give an account of the chemistry of the acetylene series
of hydrocarbons.
5. Tell what you know of the methods of formation
and of the products of decomposition of the dibasic
acids.
6. What are the Lactic acids? Indicate their chem-
ical behaviour, and explain how the peculiar variety
of isomerism met with here is accounted for.
7. Give an account of the method of preparation of
acetoacetic ether and of its applications in organic
synthesis.
8. Starting from ethylene how could you prepare
(1) oxalic acid, (2) succinic acid, (3) tartaric acid?
THIRD YEAR.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—(Second Paper.)
WEDNESDAY, ApRIL 8TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO II.
Note.—Candidates in Applied Science and in Arts
Honours will substitute questions 7 and 8 for 1 and 2.
1. Give in outline the products obtained from coal
tar and the methods employed in their isolation.
2. Illustrate with reference to toluene how the ac-
cepted structural formula accounts for its various
mono- and di-substitution products.
3. Compare the observed properties of benzene with
those which analogy with the aliphatic series would
suggest for the substance C
4. Give a detailed account of the “Sandmeyer” reac-
tion. f
328 FACULTY OF ARTS.
5. Given a specimen of dinitrobenzene, how would
you proceed to determine whether it possesses the
ortho, meta or para formula?
6. Describe three reactions which illustrate the ex-
treme reactivity of the para hydrogen atom in a phenol
or in an aromatic amine.
7. Describe the method which has been employed in
deducting the symmetry of the benzene molecule.
8. What reactions are made use of in establishing
the constitutional formula of naphthalene, and how
does this formula agree with the observed number of
mono- and di-substitution products?
-- ve er
ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY
SECOND YEAR.
ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY.
ANIMAL BIOLOGY.
DECEMBER, 1903.
Time: Two Hours For MEDICAL STUDENTS.
THREE Hours FOR STUDENTS IN ARTS.
Students belonging to the Faculty of Medicine must only
attempt SIX questions, which are to be selected from Nos.
1-7. Students belonging to the Faculty of Arts may at-
tempt NINE questions, of which THREE are to be select-
ed from Nos. 8-11.
1. Give a short description of the physical structure
and chemical composition of living substance. Show the
bearing which the structure you describe has on the
performance of the functions of assimilation and res-
piration.
2. Describe carefully the process of sexual union as
it occurs in Hydra, and compare it, point for point, and
its results, with the process of conjugation and its re-
sults observed in Paramoecium.
3. Define carefully the terms excretion and secre-
tion. Describe the means by which excretion is per-
formed in the worm, explaining the structure of the
organs which perform it.
4. Describe the origin, function and structure of the
blood-vessels in the worm, and give the arrangement
of the principal vessels.
5. Describe the principal glands which open into the
alimentary canal of the dog-fish, explaining the func-
tions of each.
6. Describe the development and structure of the eye
of the dog-fish, including in your description the mi-
330 FACULTY OF ARTS.
croscopic structure as well as the gross anatomy. Ex-
plain the functions of the parts you describe.
7. Describe the microscopic structure of the spinal
cord and attached nerves of the dog-fish as seen in
transverse section, showing how the cells composing
the organs you describe are related to the primary lay- .
ers (1.e., ectoderm and endoderm) of the dog-fish.
Show how the phenomenon of referred pain is to be
explained by the facts you have described.
8. Describe and compare the skeletons of the fore-
limb of the frog and of the pectoral fin of the dog-fish.
9. Describe, so far as you know them, the muscular
and skeletal arrangements which subserve respiration
(expiration and inspiration) in the frog. Compare
them with corresponding arrangements in the dog-fish.
10. Describe and compare the venous systems of the
frog and the dog-fish.
11. Gjve a description of the female reproductive
organs and their relations to the kidney in the dog-fish
and in the frog, in each case tracing the fate of the egg,
from its first origin till the birth of the young animal.
SECOND YEAR.
ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY.
BOTANY.
Fripay, APRIL I7TH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe fully a typical unicellular alga, noting
the functions of each part.
2. Give an account of the sexual reproduction of
Oedogonium, and compare it with that of Spirogyra.
3. Discuss the nature and function of the apophysis
of Polytrichum, showing to what structures in higher
plants it is physiologically equivalent.
4. Compare the gametophytes of Pteris, Selaginella
and Pinus.
5. Give an account of the functions of the vascular
system of plants and compare that of a fern, a mono-
cotvledon and a dicotyledon. Ἅ
Βοος ΡΥ ον Ἢ ἈΈΡΑ μμ
Oe. as ΦΡΤῸ
στὸ ἜΑ
ὙΦ gt, Ps
ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY. 331
6. Discuss the origin of the sporophyte, and note
its relative importance in the Bryophytes, Pterido-
phytes and Spermaphytes.
7. Describe, giving examples, some of the chief
methods of securing cross fertilization in the seed
plants, and explain the value of such cross fertilization.
8. Compare the gametophyte of a fern, a gymno-
sperm and a dicotyledon with respect to phases in pro-
gressive degeneracy, and show how such alterations
are related to higher types of development.
g. State what you know of the nutritive processes in
plants.
SECOND YEAR.
CONTINUATION BIOLOGY.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe the skull of the Rabbit showing how the
essential parts of the typical skull (cranium, sense-cap-
sules and visceral arches) enter into its composition.
2. Describe the brain of the Rabbit and compare it
with that of the Dog-fish.
3. Describe the salivary glands of the Rabbit, giving
both their appearance as seen in dissection, their posi-
tion and their minute structure as seen by the mi-
croscope. State what you know as to the character of
their secretions.
4. Describe the kidney of the Rabbit giving the
minute histological structure of the organ and includ-
ing in your description the ducts which evacuate its
secretion. Show how far the organ and its duct are
represented by the similarly named organs in the Dog-
fish.
5. Carefully describe the structure of a bone as seen
in longitudinal and transverse section. Explain how
bone replaces cartilage in growth.
6. Describe carefully a tranverse section through the
spinal cord of the Rabbit at the region where the ner-
ves are given off to the fore limbs, explaining so far as
you can the significance of the cells seen in.the section
and the destinations of the various bands of fibres.
232 FACULTY OF ARTS.
SECOND YEAR.
CONTINUATION BIOLOGY (PRACTICAL).
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Describe the bones submitted.
2. Stain, mount, draw and describe the histological
section provided.
3. Identify the preparations submitted,
SECOND YEAR.
SUPPLEMENTAL EXAMINATION IN ANIMAL
BIOLOGY:
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Eight questions only to be attempted.
1. Describe carefully the cells by which movement is
effected in Hydra, the Worm and the Dog-fish. Show
how the more complicated types of cell which you de-
scribe may be supposed to have developed from the
simpler ones.
2. Describe carefully the processes of igestion and
defaecation as observed in the case of Paramoecium.
Point out in what respects they are differently per-
formed in Amoeba, and explain the reasons for tue
difference between Amoeba and Paramoecium 1n tiits
respect.
3. Explain exactly what is meant by the term “‘fer-
tilization of the ovum.” Describe carefully the repro-
ductive organs of the Worm and explain the part which
each organ has to perform in the processes leading up
to and culminating in fertilization,
4. Define the term respiration. Describe carefully
the structures concerned in respiration in the Worm
and the Dog-fish.
5. What exactly are the functions of the central ner-
vous system? Describe the structure and developmen?
of the central nervous system of the Dog-fish.
ὗ
"5
;
ἃ
‘
ν᾽
Re Δ αλλ δι νὰ Χμ, γον:
Ἂν gett MAhd «ἐν
ΑΨ ῬΑ ΔῊΝ. |
ee Ὁ ὙΦ ΕΑ Ὁ ΘΟ ny eee
ELEMENTARY BIOLOGY. oe
6. Describe carefully with diagrams the structure and
development of the ear of the Dog-fish.
7. Describe the structure of the heart and arrange-
ment of the main arteries in the cases of the Dog-fish
and of the Frog and show how the two animals are
related to one another in this respect.
8. Explain the meaning of the terms cartilage-bone
and membrane-bone. Draw the skull of the Frog as
seen from above, naming the bones and cartilages and
indicating which are membrane-bones and which cartil-
age-bones.
g. Describe the arrangement of the veins which
return the blood to the heart from the part of the body
lying behind the heart in the Frog and the Dog-fish,
and show how the arrangement in the former animal
has been derived from that in the latter.
BOTANY
THIRD, YAR!
BOTANY.
SPECIAL MORPHOLOGY.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe the structure and method of reproduc-
tion of Calothrix.
2. Discuss the origin of sex in plants and the dif-
ferentiation of the gametes.
3. Give an account of the development of the vege-
tative organs of Laminaria.
4. Describe the reproductive processes of Albugo
portulacea. In what particulars does Albugo ΠῚ
differ from the former:
5. State what you know of Symbiosis, and give ex-
amples of various kinds of symbiotic relations.
6. Give an account of Ricciocarpus natans and com-
pare its structure with that of Anthoceros.
7. Compare briefly fossil Equisetineae with modern
forms.
8. Write a full description of Isoetes, and discuss the
probable relationships of the group.
9. Compare the vascular systems of Angiopteris and
Lycopodium.
10. Discuss “Alternation of Generations,” and the
origin and development of the sporophyte.
5 ae
gets ΘῈΣ
νῦν
Me eS See we Pe Ue aga ν nay Bi" :
: OP oat eg a Bee gr etd ee a i Bx,
AP tight 6 ἢ
εἶτ ῇ " - ΠΣ l 4
Nein Z ν
BOTANY. 335
FOURTH YEAR.
BOTANY.
SPECIAL MORPHOLOGY.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
τ. Compare the Gametophyte of the Gymnosperms
with that of the ferns and of Selaginella, showing the
significance of progressive degradation.
2. Describe fully the sequence of events in the devel-
opment of the egg and prothallus in Angiosperms,
and show what variation occurs between the Mono-
cotyledons and Dicotyledons. —
3. Discuss fullv the structure and distribution of
the resin canals in the Coniferae.
4. Describe a vascular bundle of the open collateral
type; show what plants it is characteristic of and how
it is related to secondary growth of the stem.
s. Describe in full the structural characteristics and
reactions of collenchyma, its distribution in plants, and
its probable purpose.
6. Discuss as fully as you can, the various phases
in mitotic division of the nucleus, and the significance
of reduction in the chromosomes.
7. Describe as fully as you can, the structure of a
leaf of a normal Dicotyledon, and show what struc-
tural alterations may arise in adaptation to environ-
ment, especially with reference to light and moisture.
Compare with the structure of the leaf of a Conifer.
8. Discuss the structure of a root, comparing it with
that of a stem of the endogenous type; and show fully
what features of development and structure distinguish
the two organs.
g. Discuss the structure, origin and purpose of len-
ticels.
29
336 FACULTY OF ARTS.
FOURTH YEAR.
BOTANY.
SYSTEMATIC.
TuESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Give as full a statement as you can of the sys-
tematic position of the genus Cordaites and its relation
to existing types. Of what geological periods is it
characteristic?
2. Describe the general characteristics of the Cyca-
daceae; give an account of their phylogenetic rela-
tions and show their distribution in geological time.
3. Give as full an account as you can of the charac-
teristics of the Angiosperms, and bring out their con-
trasts with the Gymnosperms.
4. State what you can respecting the characteristic
features of a grass (vegetative organs and flower), and
discuss its systematic position.
5. Discuss the morphological features of the Lilia-
ceae and compare with the Amaryllidaceae. Give an
example of each family.
6. Discuss some of the more notable adaptations to
cross fertilization, showing what agencies are involved
and the methods developed for the prevention of close
fertilization.
7. Discuss the Leguminosae with respect to the char-
acter of the flower, special adaptations to dispersion
and its economic uses.
8. Discuss the Ranunculaceae with respect to the
character of the inflorescence, and the development of
useful or injurious properties.
g. Discuss the Monocotyledons and Dicotyledons as
a. whole, comparing them with reference to general
characteristics, relative development and distribution
in geological time.
BOTANY. 337
FOURTH YEAR.
BOTANY.
PLANT PHYSIOLOGY, 1.
TurEspAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Give a concise account of Cytoplasm respecting ;
ἜἝ (a) Its chemical and physical properties.
Ἂ (0) Its general relation to external influences.
(c) Its distribution in and relation to living tissues.
2. Give as full an account as you can of the process
of respiration and the special conditions which influ-
ence its operation.
3. Describe the process by which plants obtain their
carbonaceous food; the special conditions by which it
‘is promoted or controlled; the extent of its occurrence
in plants and the relation which it establishes between
plants and other forms of life.
4. Describe the process of transpiration and show
(a) Its relation to body temperature and movement
of nutrient fluids.
(b) Some of the special structural adaptations by
which it may be controlled.
5. Give an account of the special functions of the
root as to
(a) The mechanism of root pressure.
(0) Its relation to nutrition and movement of nu-
trient fluids.
6. How many chemical elements enter into the com-
position of plants and what are they? State how,
from what source and in what forms they are obtained.
Explain why the same element is found in varying
proportions in different plants.
7. Give an account of the circumnutation of a tendril
as to
(a) Its purpose.
(b) The way in which it is performed.
(c) The external conditions which serve to modify
the particular direction of movement.
998 FACULTY OF ARTS.
8. What is the purpose of sleep movements in plants?
Show how they are expressed and explain the me-
chanism by which they are accomplished in Robinia.
g. Give as concise and full an account as you ean
of the laws of inheritance and the medium of transmis-
sion, with special reference to Mendel’s Law.
FOURTH -YEAR.
BOTANY.
PLANT, PHYSIOLOGY ir
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
t. Describe carefully a method by which the Root
Action may be indicated and measured. How may
such action be shown by artificial cells?
2. Give a method for determining the absolute trans-
piration of a plant as expressed in terms of grammes
per square decimetre of surface.
3. Show how the relative transpiration of different
surfaces may be proved, in relation to distribution of
stomata and other structural modifications.
4. Give a method for determining the rate of move-
ment in a transpiration current. Show (a) what rate
may be developed, (b) how the rate may be influenced
by external conditions and by structurai modifications.
5. What do Hales’ experiments prove with respect.
to the vertical growth of plant organs, and how are
such experiments conducted? Give an experimental
proof that such growth is not merely passive.
6. Describe a method for determining the respira-
tion of plants, and show to what extent the products
may be developed.
7. Give a method for determining the etfect of elec-
trical stimulus upon a living cell, and describe the
exact nature of the resmis.
8. How may experimental results be exnibited
graphically in such a way as to show their relations to
temperature and moisture?
Ss Fae
Drea ris er peo
nyt Ra Sve ANG δ BOTANY... : eas 5:59
9. Give a method for Ce eeminine the circumnutation
figure of a gruwing stem; and show how this figure
is to be interpreted with respect to (1) growth of lateral
members, (2) unequal tension of tissues, (3) geotropism
and (4) heliotropism.
ZOOLOGY
THIRD AND ‘POURTH:- YEARS:
ZOOLOGY
TurEspAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Describe the anatomy and reproduction of Polys-
Aa pointing out the meaning of its dimorphism.
2. Describe the development of Aurela, showing
how each part in the adult is formed.
3. Describe the various forms of mouth-parts met
with amongst Insecta and show how they all may be
regarded as modifications of a single type.
4. Compare the structure of a typical lamellibranch
molluse like Unio with that of a pulmonate gastropod
like Helir accounting so far as you can for the differ-
ences between them.
5. Describe the hydrocoele (including all its out-
growths) in the Starfish, and show how it is related to
the coelom.
6. Write a complete zoological account of Am-
phioxrus.
7. Compare the visceral skeletons of Amiurus and
Lepus.
THIRD: "AND VFOURT EH “YEARS:
ZOOLOGY VCR RACTICAI):
TurspAy, APRIL IA4TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Dissect the specimen A (mytilus edulis) so as to
show the greatest possible number of organs, marking
their positions with fleg labels. Sketch your prepara-
tion.
2. Stain, mount and identify the specimens B (Obe-
lia) and C (Daphnia), giving in each case reasons for
your conclusion.
5.
ZOOLOGY. : - B41
3. Refer the specimens D... .H as nearly as possible
to their places in the general scheme of zoological
classification.
Acmsea
Gorgonocephalus
Pluteus ~
Ascidia
Timanda
4. Sketch and name the bones /, IJ, etc....
Sacrum
Humerus
Lumbar Vertebra
Mandible. |
ΔΒΓ,
ZOOLOGY.
ADVANCED COURSE.
TouEspDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe completely the life history of any one
species of Cestode.
2. Name and classify as many parasitic insects as
you can. What other group of the Arthropoda in-
cludes many parasitic species?
3. Describe the various forms of paired fin found
in living and fossil fish, tracing the evolution of the
modern type as found in the Cod from the most pri-
mitive forms.
4. Describe the process by which the notochord has
become replaced by a bony vertebral column.
(1) in a Urodele Amphibian such as Necturus.
(2) in the Frog; p
(3) in the Rabbit.
Point out-how far the vetebrae and their outgrowths
in these three animals correspond to one another.
5. Give a full account of the skeleton of one of the
older Dinosauria such as Compsognathus.
6. Describe the various forms of palate met with in
birds.
7. Describe and compare the method of “formation
of the layers” in the eggs of a Sea Urchin and a Bird
respectively.
3425. FACULTY OF ARTS.
ZOOLOGY (PRACTICAL).
ADVANCED COURSE.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Dissect and mark with flag labels, showing in
each case both origin and insertion, the following
muscles of the Rabbit provided:
(a) Sternomastoid.
(b) Rhomboideus cervicalis.
(c) Biceps brachii.
(d) Gluteus maximus.
(ce) Soleus. ;
(f) Extensor communis digitorum.
2. Draw the skull provided (of a Lizard) marking in
your sketch the following bones (a) ectopterygoid, (b)
quadratojugal, (c) pro-otic.
3. Stain, mount and indentify the specimen 4 (Dis-
tornum varicum), giving reasons for your conclusions.
ZOOLOGY (HONOERS:
THE PRINCIPLES OF BIOLOGY, BY HERBERT
SPENCER.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Give Spencer’s formula of evolution from which
he tries to deduce the laws of biology.
2. Give an account of Spencer’s analyses of the
various kinds of Growth and Development which occur
in the animal kingdom. How does he discriminate
between Growth and Development?
3. Give an account of the evidence which Spencer
adduces to show that acquired qualities may be in-
herited, and criticize this evidence.
4. Give an account of Spencer’s criticism of the spe-
cial creation hypotheses pointing out how far it is sound.
5. Give an account of Spencer’s theory of physio-
logical units, adducing any reasons for or against this
hypothesis which may present themselves to vou.
“Oaks ae ee
|
GEOLOGY
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
GEOLOGY.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12
AND 2 P.M.
1. What do you understand by the term Metamorph-
ism? State what you know concerning its causes and
results.
2. State what you know concerning the distribution
of Volcanoes upon the present surface of the earth.
Describe the recent volcanic eruptions in Martinique
and compare them with the eruption of Vesuvius in
tire year 79 Al):
3. Show how the geological structure of a country
influences its topography. Give examples.
4. Outline the conditions which are necessary for
the accumulation of beds of coal in the earth’s crust.
Where are these conditions now most nearly repro-
duced in eastern North America? Describe two typi-
cal coal plants of the Carboniferous.
5. The Trilobites. Their place in the zoological
classification. When do they first appear and what
is the last system in which they are found? Describe
and figure any three genera and in each case ‘state its
range.
6. Describe briefly the following geological forma-
tions, in each case state their age and name any econo-
mic products which they afford :—
Mountain Limestone, Utica, Clinton, Grenville, Trenton.
7. Draw a sketch map of the Continent of North
America and show what portions of it were dry land
after the Appalachian Revolution.
8. State what you know concerning the Mesozoic
Reptiles. :
344 FACULTY OF ARTS.
9. State the mineralogical composition, the structure,
the origin and the mode of occurrence of the following
rocks :—
Shale, Syenite, Trachyte, Arkose, Grit, Peridotite.
το. State what you know concerning the Cretaceous
System as developed in Canada.
2 O CLOCK P.M.
tt. Name the fossils exhibited. State their position
in the zoological classification and mention the geolo-
gical formation to which they belong.
12. Name and describe the mineral and rock spe-
cimens.
THIR DEY EARS
DETERMINATIVE MINERALOGY (HONOURS).
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe the production of the oxidising and re-
ducing flames; and point out their distinguishing
characteristics.
2. Explain the terms decrepitation, intumescence,
gelatinisation, fluorescence, deflagration, exfoliaton.
3. Make notes on the determination of (a) lustre,
and (b) fusibility of minerals.
4. What are the principal uses of the following re-
agents in determinative mineralogy: Potassium bisul-
phate, potassium iodode and sulphur, metallic tin,
cobalt nitrate, fluor-spar, microcosmic salt?
5. What is the object of roasting; how is the opera-
tion carried out; and what are the principal chemical
changes involved?
6. Mention the more important results obtained upon
heating minerals in the closed tube:
7. What are the more important phenomena to be
observed in the action of hydrochloric acid on various
minerals, and what precautions are to be taken in
making these observations ?
8. Give the reactions of the following elements:
=
aR NEST? LARS
GEOLOGY. 345
7
Antimony, boron, calcium, manganese, nickel, silicon.
g. Give the blowpipe characters of: Arsenopyrite,
calamine, celestite, chromite, franklinite, serpentine.
10. Give a sketch of the course to be followed in the
determination of a mineral which is unknown to you.
THIRD YEAR.
HONOURS IN GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
SATURDAY, APRIL 18TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO I.
1. Explain the relationship of the different Hex-
octahedrons in the Isometric System.
2. Give the symbols of Naumann and indices of
Miller for the various type forms in the Triclinic Sys-
tem.
3. Explain carefully the nature of twin crystals,
describing some of the principal types of twinning.
State also what you understand by parallel grouping.
4. Give the indices of the six upper faces of the unit
Hexagonal Pyramid.
5. Give spherical projections of any two of the three
crystals (or models) marked A, B, C.
6. What are the principal surface and internal im-
perfections of crystals?
7. State what you know with regard to the sources,
mode of occurrence and characters of native Platinum.
8. Give brief descriptions of each of the following
species :—Millerite, Pyrrhotite, Pyrargyrite, Corundum,
Rutile, Gothite.
9. Give the composition of each of the following :—
Hessite, Sylvanite, Jamesonite, Gahnite, Iimenite, Po-
lianite, Brookite.
10. Calculate the formula of each of the minerals A
and B which gave respectively on analysis the following
percentage composition :—(A) Lead 50.42, Copper 0.26,
Antimony 29.25, Arsenic 0.23, Sulphur 19.75; (B) Ferric
Oxide 85.20, Manganic Oxide 0.35, Water 14.28.
11. Name -and describe the mineral specimens ex-
hibited. Describe also any three of the crystal models,
giving symbols of planes.
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
1903
ARCHITECTURE
SECOND YEAR.
EEEMENTS OF ARCHITECTURE.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
1. In a lofty boundary-wall an Entrance is to be
made; dimensions of opening, not less than ten feet
high by five feet wide.
Sketch two designs, the one, square-headed, the
opening flanked by Greek [onic columns; the other,
arched, forming a Roman composite arcade, of either
the Doric or the Ionic order.
Elevation and Section of each are required, to half
inch scale, in pencil (on tracing-paper, if preferred),
with a half-plan, which may be hatched in on elevation.
2. Sketch the profile of the Greek Doric capital;
criticize the design of the capital, adding a note on the
chief modifications of form adopted in the Roman
order.
SECOND * YEAR.
HISTORY OF ARCHITECTURE.
FRIDAY, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Five questions only to be attempted.)
1. Give a brief description of the Acropolis, Athens,
and the classical buildings upon it, with a fuller architec-
tural account, with sketch-plan of either the Propylaea
or the Erechtheum. ;
2. Give an account, with special reference to its
constructive design, of the Basilica of Constantine,
Rome, with sketch-plan and section, as illustrating
Roman Imperial architecture.
350 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
3. Contrast the entrance-front of a French Gothic
cathedral with the east front of the Parthenon,
Athens, discussing the two types of architecture with
reference to (1) structure; (2) decoration; (3) aesthetic
effect and significance.
4. Trace the development of Gothic vaulting from
Romanesque sexpartite to late Gothic fan-vaulting im
England, giving diagram-sketches, and explaining the
terms: “lierne,” -“‘tierceron,” “severey,” “ridge-rib,”
“four-centred atch.”
5. Give an account, historical and structural, of the
dome of the cathedral at Florence, comparing it with
Santa Sophia at Constantinople.
6. Give a diagram-section of the Great Pyramid,
describing it briefly, and, adding its principal dimen-
sions.
Write a note on the mathematical ratios that seem
established as the basis of its design. What do we
know as to the mechanical methods of its builders, and
their organization of labour?
7. Give a brief account of a mediaeval abbey, and
estimate the influence of the Cistercian Order upon
the development of early Gothic architecture.
> aes ee
CHEMISTRY
SECOND YEAR.
CEE MES ERY:
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Give a brief account of the preparation and pro-
perties of nitric acid. Explain its use as an oxidising
agent.
2. Enumerate the various oxides of nitrogen and
describe for each a method of preparation.
3. How, and from what sources, is phosphorus ob-
tained? Give an account of the halogen compounds
of phosphorus.
4. Describe a method by which the atomic w eight of
an element may be determined.
5. Enunciate and give a short account of the Periodic
Law
6. Give a brief account of the general, physical and
chemical properties of the elements of the first group.
7. Describe a method of preparing aluminium, and
indicate its chief chemical reactions.
8. What is bleaching powder? Mention some of its
industrial applications and tell how it is prepared.
g. What do you know about the modern theory of
solutions ?
10. Describe the preparation and the uses of potas-
sium permanganate.
4
THIRD YEAR.
ASSAM UNG:
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Make a careful sketch (which may be diagram-
atic) of the essential parts of a balance for weighing
gold and silver beads.
902 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
What degree of sensitiveness is required in a balance
for assaying gold ores. On what does the sensitiveness
of a balance depend.
2. What is the weight of an assay ton. How 15 this
weight obtained. When would you use the assay ton
and when the gram weights.
3. Mention some reducing reagents used in fire-
assaying. Explain their action and state how you
could compare the reducing power of these reagents.
4. How would you obtain samples for assaying :—
(1) Of bars of gold containing silver and copper;
(2) Of pigs of lead containing gold and silver.
5. State exactly how you would proceed to obtain
accurately the percentage of gold and of silver in the
samples referred to in question 4.
6. Give the charge suitable for determining the lead
in a galena. Describe in detail the manner in which
you would carry out the assay.
7. What examination οἱ a silver ore would you make
before assaying it by a crucible method. How would
you modify your charge as the result of this examina-
tion.
8. What is the usual amount of loss in cupelling sil-
ver with lead. What is the cause of this loss and how
is it affected by the presence of copper, the amount of
lead, and the temperature of the cupellation.
[
᾿
Ι
—
OO RR ee ee ee Oe ee eee ee ee eee
eee
-
a dita ee
ΝΡ aia i es SS ee ee συ
CHEMISTRY. 253
THIRD YEAR.
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—(First Paper.)
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO II.
Note.—Candidates in Applied Science and in Arts
Honours will substitute questions 7 and 8 for 1 and 2.
1. Explain and exemplify the meaning of isomerism
by reference to (a) the paraffins, (b) the amines, (c) the
cyanogen compounds.
2. Distinguinsh between primary, secondary and ter-
tiary alcohols ,and explain the behaviour of each on
oxidation.
3. By what methods would you prepare a primary
alcohol from
(1) An alkyl bromide; a
(2) An amine;
(3); An ester?
Discuss the constitution and general reactions of
this class of organic compounds.
4. What is meant by an unsaturated compound?
Give an account of the chemistry of the acetylene series
of hydrocarbons.
5. Tell what you know of the methods of formation
and of the products of decomposition of the dibasic
acids.
6. What are the Lactic acids? Indicate their chem-
ical behaviour, and explain how the peculiar variety of
isomerism met with here is accounted for.
7. Give an account of the method of preparation of
acetoacetic ether and of its applications in organic
synthesis.
8. Starting from ethylene how could you prepare (1)
oxalic acid, (2) succinic acid, (3) tartaric acid?
LHIRD ; YEAR:
ORGANIC CHEMISTRY.—(Second Paper.)
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO ΤΙ.
Note.—Candidates in Applied Science and in Arts
Honours will substitute questions 7 and § for 1 and 2.
τ. Give inoutline the products obtained from coal
tar and the methods employed in their isolation.
2. Illustrate with reference to toluene how the ac-
cepted structural formula accounts for its various
354 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
mono- and di-substitution products.
3. Compare the observed properties of benzene with
those which analogy with the aliphatic series would
suggest for the substance C ,//, .
4. Give a detailed account of the ‘“Sandmeyer” reac-
tion.
5. Given a specimen of dinitrobenzene, how would
you proceed to determine whether it possesses the
ortho, meta or para formula?
6. Describe three reactions which illustrate the ex-
treme reactivity of the para hydrogen atom in a phenol
or in an aromatic amine.
Describe the method which has been employed in
decneeme the svmmetry of the benzene molecule.
8. What reactions are made use of in establishing the
constitutional formula of naphthalene, and how “does
this formula agree with the observed number of mono-
and di-substitution products?
THIRD YEAR.—(Mining Course.)
QUALITATIVE ANALYS
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 -—Mornine, OQ. TO2
1. Define the terms: Reagent, precipitant, incinera-
tion, solvent.
2. Describe the following operations: Filtration,
evaporation, ignition.
3. Give an outline of the methods usually employed
for effecting the solution of unknown substances sub-
mitted for qualitative analysis.
4. A solution contains silver, lead and copper as
nitrates; describe the method of determining the pres-
ence of these metals.
In the usual course of analysis, a precipitate has
ne produced by H,,S in acid solution, and it is found
to be completely soluble in (ΝῊ ,), S;. What metals
may this indicate, and how would one proceed to de-
termine which of these are present?
6. Give in tabulated form the “short process” for the
separation of aluminium, iron, manganese and zinc
(in absence of chromium and phosphates).
. How may barium, strontium and calcium be tested
ΓΝ in the filtrate from the precinitate of the iron group
produced by (VH,) OH and (NH ,),S?
ἮΝ
7
te δα .ὦ δὰ.
ee
σαν ee eS ey ; et
4 a ee ae, e, ὌΨΑ ἘΝ Ree
CHEMISTRY. 355
8. What are the principal wet reactions of the follow-
ing metals: Bismuth, chromium, lead, magnesium, po-
~ tassium, zinc?
9. Mention the best dry tests ior the following: Ar-
senic, barium, calcium, cobalt, manganese, nickel.
το. What are the most common causes of inaccuracy
in qualitative analysis, and how may they be avoided?
THIRD YEAR.—(Practical Chemistry Course-)
INDUSTRIAL CHEMISTRY.
Monpay, APRIL 13PH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Describe the filter press as employed in industrial
chemical manufactures.
> Describe the ordinary vacuum pan, or the Yaryan
evaporator.
3. Give an outline of one of the principal methods of
refrigeration. —
4. State what you know about gaseous fuels, their
manufacture and use.
5. Give an account of the principal operations em-
ploved in the manufacture of sulphuric acid by the new
“contact process.”
6. What are the more important processes for the
commercial production of chlorine? What raw ma-
terials are employed in these?
7. What is the principal commercial source of am-
monia, and how is it obtained from this source?
8 What are the chief requisites of a good artificial
fertilizer? Mention some of the more important ar-
tificial fertilizers.
9g. How is Portland Cement manufactured ?
το. What are the principal kinds of glass, and from
what materials are they produced?
356 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCR.
THIRD YEAR—(Practical Chemistry Course).
ANALYTICAL, CHEMISTRY.
Turspay, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. How may phosphorus be estimated volumetrically
in iron and steel?
. How would vou estimate the proportion of tungs-
ten in tungsten steels?
3. Give a sketch of the apparatus that you would
employ for the estimation of carbon in steel by com-
bustion in oxygen, explaining carefully the use of each
part.
4. Give the principal evolution methods for the es-
timation of sulphur in steel, illustrating by means of
chemical equations. Point out any sources of error in
the methods.
5. Briefly describe the acetate method for the deter-
mination of manganese in iron and steel, calling atten-
tion to the principal sources of error.
6. Discuss the relation between the chemical and
bacteriological examination of potable waters.
7. How is chlorine determined in potable waters?
Explain the significance of the determination.
8. Explain the estimation of organic nitrogen in
waters by means of the Kjeldahl method.
9. What is meant by a normal solution? How may
a deci-normal solution of sodium carbonate or of sul-
phuric acid be prepared ?
10. Give an outline of the methods of determining
any two of the following: Mercury in mercuric chloride,
NO, ina nitrate; silica in an insoluble silicate.
11. 1 gram of Κα, SO, is weighed out, dissolved in
water, and the SO, ececoreted in the usual way with
Ba Cl,; the precipitate is filtered out, washed, dried,
ignited, and found to weigh 1.327 germ., after deducting
the filter-ash. Calculate the theoretical percentage of
SO, in A’,.SO,, and also the percentage found by the
ΕΣ ταν analysis.
ἔς διὰ μι
π
:
7
;
CHEMISTRY. 357
FOURTH YEAR—(Mining Course).
ANALYTICAL CHEMISTRY.
SaturDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO £2.
1. Discuss the methods employed to reduce Ferric
to Ferrous compounds in the volumetric estimation of
Iron. Illustrate by means of equations.
2. In the analysis of a specimen of Chrome Iron Ore
the decomposition was effected by means of Sodium
Peroxide and the titration carried out by the Todine
method. 0.5 grms. of the ore was used, the solution’
of chromate obtained was made up to 500 c.c., and 30
c.c. of Thiosulphate solution (1 c.c. = 0.0127 Iodine)
were required to discharge the blue colour from 100
c.c. of the chromate solution. What percentage of
Cr, O, would the ore yield?
3. Explain carefully the estimation of Copper by pre-
cipitation with Ammonium Thiocyanate. Point out
any special advantages which the method possesses.
4. Give reasons for the various steps involved in the
volumetric determination of Zinc by means of Potas-
sium Ferrocyanide.
=. In the volumetric estimation of Calcium in a slag,
0.50 grm. of the powder was treated in the usual
way. 40c.c. of Potassium Permanganate solution
(I c.c. = 0.0146 Fe.), were required to oxydise the
Oxalic Acid. What was the percentage of Lime in the
slag. ;
6. How would you determine Antimony electrolyti-
cally (a) in a sample of Stibnite, or (b) in a sample of
Antimonial Lead?
>. Under what conditions may Copper and Lead be
estimated. simultaneously by means of electrolysis?
8. Describe the colorimetric estimation of Copper
by means of Potassium Ferrocyanide.
9. How would you determine the Phosphorus in a
sample of Steel?
10. In what conditions does Sulphur occur in Coal?
Discuss the principles involved in the estimation of
total Sulphur, and briefly describe one method for car-
rving this out.
908 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
FOURTH YEAR—(Chemistry Course).
MINERAL ANALYSIS.
SATURDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903:—MOoORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer any ten questions.)
Ι. Deduce-a formula for a mineral which gave on
analysis the following percentagt composition :—
Silica 35.68, Alumina 5.88, Ferric Oxide 23.70, Ferrous
Oxide 3.05, Manganous Oxide 0.81, Lime 29.64, Mag-
nesia 0.35. —
2. What constituents are lable to be present in
Magnesites? Give concisely a scheme for their deter-
mination.
3. Describe the estimation of Titanium (a) in an Iron
Ore, and (δ) in an insoluble Silicate.
4. How may Fluorine be estimated in an insoluble
Silicate ?
5. Discuss the precautions to be taken in the separa-
tion of Iron and Manganese by the basic Acetate pro-
cess.
6. Explain the employment of Standard Solutions of
Sodium Thiosulphate in the estimation (a) of Chrom-
ium, and (b) of Copper.
7. How may Nickel and Cobalt be estimated electro-
lytically? How separated by means of Potassium
Nitrite ?
8. How would you determine the flash-point of a
mineral oil with Abel’s apparatus ?
9. Explain Lawrence Smith’s method for the estima-
tions of Alkalies in insoluble Silicates.
10. How would you determine (a) the Copper, and
(b) the Arsenic in a sample of commercial Copper con-
taining the latter element?
It. What weight of crystallized Sodium Thiosulphate
(Na, S,O,. 5 :+H,O) should be dissolved in water and
made up to a litre in order that 1 c.c. of the solution
should be equivalent to 0.015 gramme of Copper?
12. Explain carefully the theoretical points involved
in the estimation of Zinc by means of a standard solu-
tion of Potassium Ferrocyanide.
13. How would you make an analysis of a sample of
Coal? Call attention to the principal sources of error.
CHEMISTRY. 359
ELECTRO-CHEMISTRY.
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903 :—MOoRNING, 9 ἜΘ᾽ 12:
(Seven questions to be answered.)
1. How would you measure a current by means of a
silver voltameter? What volume of hydrogen at 10°C.
and 750 mm. is obtained by passing a current of 3 am-
péeres through a dilute solution of sulphuric acid for
an hour?
2. What is meant by osmotic pressure, and how can
it be measured? What class of substances give an
abnormal value for the osmotic pressure ?
3. What are the principal standard cells used? How
would you make, and how use one?
4. What is the electro-chemical theory of the action
which takes place in charging and discharging a lead
accumulator? Draw the discharge curve.
5. Write notes on the Lippmann electrometer, and on
transference ratios.
6. 25 οἷο. of a normal hydrochloric acid solution
exactly neutralize 11.4 c.c. of a potassium hydroxide
solution. What is the strength of the latter?
7. How are lead and copper extracted from their
ores by electrolysis?
8. Write notes on concentration cells and gas bat-
teries. Calculate the E.M.F. of the battery Hf (elec-
trolyte) O.
( FT, -& O\= AT; Ob 468,000: calories) )
at :
= IAOOTAL OL «αὐ ΝΟ].
at
PHS ICAL -CHEMISTRY:
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
I. What is the Phase Rule? Draw and explain the
pressure-temperature curve for sulphur or water.
2. Write a note on the Periodic Law.
3. Deduce Van der Waals’s equation. Calculate the
value of Καὶ in calories in the equation PV = RT.
360 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
4. Describe carefully the determination of molecular
weights by the freezing or boiling-point method.
3. How would you prepare a standard cell, and how
compare its E.M.F. with that of an accumulator?
6. Write a note on transference numbers.
7. What thickness of copper would be deposited on
a cathode of one square metre surface, by a current of
ten amperes flowing for one hour?
8. What are balanced reactions? Deduce the formula
for a mono-molecular reaction.
g. Write a note on calalytic reactions.
το. Deduce the formula for the E. M. F. of a rever-
sible cell. Calculate the E.M.F. of the battery H
(Electrolyte) Cl.
H + Cl = 'HCi + 20,000 calories
HCI + aq = HClaq + 17,000 calories
-
ὅτ 85 volt
we - 0.000 55 VO
CHEMISTRY.
GAS ANALYSIS.
Turespay, APRIL I4TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
t. Discuss some of the precautions one should take
when working with gases; as in the collecting of a
sample for analysis, the keeping and storing of gases,
ete:
2. Describe in some detail how you would determine
when the right proportion of air was being supplied to
a furnace.
3. How would you determine the percentage com-
position of the Atmosphere as regards the following
constituents :—Oxygen, Nitrogen, Carbon dioxide and
water vapour.
4. Describe in detail the analysis of illuminating gas
with Hempel’s apparatus.
“XULSINGAHOD 361
[δ
5. ΠῚ in the above analysis you found the decrease in
volume after combustion to be 18 c.c., and 6 c.c. of
CO* were absorbed by the ‘KOH, how many c.c. of
methane and of hydrogen were present in the sample
of residue taken?
6. Discuss the relative advantages and disadvantages
of Orsat’s and of Hempel’s apparatus for absorbing
gases in volumetric gas analysis.
>. A determination of the water vapour in the al-
mosphere gave the following data:—Volume of air
drawn into aspirator 2 litres, weight of water
found — 0.0272 gms, Barometer = 765.6 m.m. temp.
Sissi inv aspirator — 19 ©. outside temp; — 20°C.
What is the weight of water in one litre of the moist
air?
Tension of Aqueous vapour at 20° = 17.4
7 * ; 10. — 16.3
8. What effect will a change of 1 degree of temp.
have on the volume of 500 c.c. of gas measured over
water, will the actual pressure and temperature chosen
have any effect on this change of volume?
9. Briefly describe the Kyeldahl method for deter-
mining nitrogen.
10. Discuss the burette known as the “compensation
burette’” where the volume of gas read off gives directly
the volume at 760 mm. P and o°T.
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS
THIRD “YEAR
GRAPHICAL STATICS.
DECEMBER, 1902.
(Seven questions only may be attempted, the marks obtain-
able are attached to cach question.
Compression members it beth the frame diagram and the
stress diagram are te be marked by thick black lies.
The stresses need not be tabulated.)
A factory roof of the type shown by Figure 1 is
loaded as shown, determine the stresses in all the mem-
bers. (20)
2. Determine all the stresses in the power-house roof
shown in Figure 2, when in addition to the loads on
the upper c chords there are two loads of 4,000 pane
on the lower chords as shown. (25)
3. Determine by. the method’ voi “sections ally the
stresses in the truss loaded in the manner shown by
Figure 3. (30)
4. A plate girder is loaded with a number of con-
centrated loads as shown in Fig. 4. Draw the shear-
ing force and bending moment diagrams for the grven
system of loading and draw a scale for your bending
moment diagram, (30)
5. A girder of fifty foot span carries a wall one foot
thick and of varying height as shown in Fig. 5. The
material of the wall weighs 120 pounds per cubic foot.
Determine the shearing force and bending moment
diagrams and mark on your drawing the scales νοῦ
have used. (40)
An overhanging roof is supported on columns and
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 363
loaded as shown in the diagram Figure 6. Determine
the stresses in the columns and in all the members οἵ
the roof truss. (35)
7. A roof having a roller support at one end 15
dressed by a wind load whose effect may be represented
by the forces marked on the diagram Figure,7. ;.De-
termine the stresses in all the members of the truss.
(40)
8. A cast iron channel with inclined sides is supported
by a bulb tee iron, a section of the arrangement being
shown in Figure 8.
Determine the centre of gravity of the section. (30)
9. A cantilever truss, Fig. 9, ishinged to a wall at its
upper extremity and supported below by a bearing
which gives a horizontal thrust. Determine — the
stresses in the members of the frame when loaded as
shown. (40)
10. A ship’s gangway is loaded in the manner shown
by. Fig. 10. Determine the stresses in all the members.
(40)
11. A lattice work arch having the dimensions shown
in Fig. 11 is pin jointed at the supports and carries the
system of loading shown in the Figure. Determine
the line of resistance which will pass through the pin
joints and also through the point where the greatest
load intersects the upper chord of the arch. Also
determine the horizontal thrust of the arch under the
given systems of loading. ; (55
THIRD YEAR. :
TESTING LABORATORY.
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
(Sia questions only to be attempted.)
1. Describe one form of extensometer used in deter-
mining the alterations in length of a tension specimen
before it reaches the yield point and show how you
would proceed to calibrate the instrument.
364 τ PACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
2. What rough tests would you make to find out
whether a bar of metal was iron or steel, and how
would you confirm your opinion by experiments in the
testing laboratory.
3. Show how to determine the moment of resistance
of an irregular section graphically, and illustrate your
answer by considering the case of a rail section for a
street railway.
4. Describe the apparatus in the laboratory for test-
ing to destruction short examples of wire and sketch
typical stress strain diagrams for (a) steel, (b) wrought
iron, (c) brass, and (d) copper.
5. Describe the apparatus used in the laboratory for
determining the deflections of large beams supported
at each end.
A steel I. beam, 6 inches deep and 60 inches span,
was loaded by weights applied at the centre and gave
the following deflections :—
| Loadat centre | Deflections
| in pounds. in ins.
2000 .0057 |
4000 0116
6000 10173 | J == 56 in inch units.
8000 .0230
T0000 0288
Calculate the value of Ε΄ and also the greatest stress
in the beam for the final load.
6. Describe the construction of one of the torsion
testing machines in the laboratory.
Draw a probable stress strain diagram for a solid
steel specimen of circular section and also for a thin
tube of the same material.
In a test of a specimen of mild steel of diameter 0.47
inches and length 8.00 inches the following results were
obtained :—
| Twisting moment Angle of twist
_ | ininch pounds. τὴ in degrees.
| 50 | 0.35 te Ey ae
| 100 ie! 0.72 |
! 150 | T.08
200 | 1.44 |
| 250 | 1.78 |
eer
Yee ΔΩΣ ΩΣ
2
γα, ae
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 365
Calculate the value of the modulus of rigidity and
the greatest stress in the shaft for the final twisting
moment.
7. What tests would you subject a sample of a
cement to in order to determine its quality. Give
typical results for (a) a very good specimen, (Ὁ) a fair
specimen, (c) a bad specimen.
8. In testing granular materials, such as cement,
brick, stone and the like, in compression, the ends are
usually faced with a thin layer of Plaster of Paris or
cardboard. Explain why this is done and describe
what differences you would expect to get if thin sheets
of lead were used instead.
9. Explain how you would test the coefficient of
friction of a piece of leather belting.
A leather belt is wrapped round a fixed cast-iron
pulley and the ends of the belt hang vertically. Three
determinations of the load at which the belt began to
slip were made as follows :—
ΠΥ (eel eee |
Ibs, | Ibs. |
ἜΝ 2.8.
Bie le ΕΞ Ἢ
ΠΕ ΔΕ τῇ
From these values calculate the
mean coefficient of friction of the
belt.
to. Show how to determine the modulus of rigidity
of the wire composing a spring and obtain a formula
for it in terms of the dimensions of the spring and the
deflection due to a given load.
A steel spring, composed of wire % of an inch in
diameter is coiled on a cylindrical surface of mean
diameter of 2% inches and its effective length is 80
inches. The mean deflection for a load of 10 pounds is
found to be .155 of an inch. Calculate the value of
the modulus of rigidity of the wire.
900 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS—(Civil).
MUNICIPAL ENGINEERING.
WATER SUPPLY.
SATURDAY, APRIL 18TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Discuss the following: :
(a) Fire streams.
(b) The location of hydrants.
(c) The quality of surface water supplies.
2. Sketch, with principal dimensions, a longitudinal
section of a joint in a 12 inch cast iron water pipe.
3. Describe a process for coating cast iron water
pipes.
4. State the general principles which would guide you
in laying out the distributing system for a town of
eight or ten thousand inhabitants.
5. Explain the purpose of a distributing reservoir.
6. Make a sketch, with dimensions, showing a ver-
tical section of a slow sand filter-bed.
State the changes which impure water undergoes in
passing through the bed, and explain how these changes
are effected:
7. What are the principal determinations in a che-
mical analysis of drinking water? Explain the signi-
ficance of any two of them.
8. Name the various influences which affect the dis-
charge of streams.
g. A standpipe is to be 30 feet in diameter and 50
feet high. Write a short specification for (a) the ma-
terial to be used, (b) the painting. What would be the
proper thickness for the plates next to the bottom?
10. A is a pumping station.
AC is a pumping main 12 inches in diameter and
20,000 feet long.
B is a distributing reservoir connected to the
pumping main at C by a 14 inch pipe 4,000 feet long.
The elevation of the pump 15 90.00
᾿ τ: point C 100.00
“ τ water surface in B 270.00
If the pump is working under a head of 210 feet, and
2,000 gallons of water per minute are being withdrawn
at C, find (a) the quantity discharged per minute by
the pump, (0) the pressure at C.
Note.—Third Year students may omit either 9 or ro.
j
i
|
᾿
:
)
;
)
4
;
ὌΧ
ὌΨΙ ΟΣ 2 er
367
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING.
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5:
(Ten “questions only may be attempted.)
1. What steps would you take to thoroughly inspect
a finished hollow cylindrical cast irou column ?
2. Is it more economical to use a deep or a shallow
} beam for a given span? Why?
When a beam is to support a plastered ceiling, what
is the greatest allowable deflection ?
3. Discuss the effect of excentric loading on columns.
‘A column 7” square, with a moment of inertia. ——" 40;
and area = 4.5 sq.” will carry 40,000 Ibs. if loaded con-
Genttically.. What load will “it carry if the load. be
applied at a distance of 27 from the neutral axis.
4. What are the commonest forms of separators?
State their relative advantages?
5. Deduce a formula for pitch of rivets in the top
flange of a plate girder, where the load is uniformly
distributed and applied directly on the flange.
6. Discuss fully the shrinkage of timber. What de-
fects would be found in badly kiln-dried timber? Why?
7. What points should guide you in selecting any
particular species of wood for a given structure.
8. Describe and discuss three different systems of
pile-caping. What precautions are to be taken in each
system?
(1) As to alignement of piles.
(2) As to cutting off the heads of piles.
(3) As to the position of the piles with regard to
the level of continually moist ground.
g. In the same building, on a soil of uniform bearing
power, should the load per unit of area on the found-
ation bed be the same?
(1) Under a brick wall. (Lime mortar.)
(2) Under a stone wall. (Large stones.)
(3) Under a pier supporting tiers of cast iron
columns. Give reasons in each case.
24
368 EACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
το. Distinguish between dead and live loads in build-
ings.
For what portion of the live load should (1) the floor
beams (or joists), (2) the main beams, (3) the columns
and (4) the footing, be figured.
(a) In an office building?
(0) Torayiheatte:
(c) In a storage warehouse?
Give reasons in each case.
11. What should be the relative position of the centre
of pressure and centre of base under a footing of an
exterior wall?
Discuss the effects of the relative positions of the
above points on the stability of the building.
12. In localities where the building laws do not allow
the footing courses to project beyond the lot line, what
special precautions are to be taken when building side
walls on the lot lines?
13. A warehouse, brick wall, 20” thick weighing 6
tons per lineal foot, and supporting a floor and roof
load of 12 tons per lineal foot, is to be built on a soft
soil, the safe bearing power of which is only 1% tons
per square foot. The bottom course of the wall is built
of stone blocks 2’ 6” wide.
Design an economical concrete and steel beam foot-
ing making a dimensioned sketch of cross-section of
same.
Depth of excavation not taken in consideration. /
Cost of Concrete, in’ place, ‘$3.60 a cubicyard: Cost
of steel beams in place 2%4c. a pound.
᾿ The following steel beams are available to choose
rom —
8 TP a8. lbs. Hlange: 4 Moment Ree rye
Ὁ: asOL aa ie ig dee “ + 18.9
(ole ae neanea AROO ee = 24.4
Ι 209 ἐς 6c 4 Q”/ “ ike
” Pe ΖΕ: ΞΞΞ 26:8
ΤΟ 14 35 3 « 4.9” ες --- 20.3
ι 40 SECS OO ΚΤ στο ΞΟ
κι
<a
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 369
Γι eh et res al τ Ξε
TA I 35 «ς oe 5.0 tf oe πῇ 3 ᾧ
} ae {ς ae 525 oe ar 44.8
WAS ae al D530 = 47.6
Aleta is, ae O59 Ss,
iM [πὴ 45 ce {{ 5:59 ἢ ΤῈ 60.8
pio ips aw BiO4e = 64.5
55 cay alae = 68.1
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS.
THEORY*O SlLRUCTURES:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Candidates may attempt eight questions only.
1. Define generally the meanings of the terms stress,
strain, modulus of elasticity, limit of elasticity, and
plasticity, and show what your definitions mean when
applied to the case of a bar subjected to gradually in-
creasing tensile stress until it breaks.
2. Prove that the work which can be stored up in
a member of uniform section under simple tension or
simple compression is f?| 2 per unit volume, where f
is the allowable stress and E is the modulus of elasticity.
A steel eye-bar 30 feet long, ὃ inches broad and τά
inches thick is stretched .19 of an inch by a load of
168,000 pounds applied axially. Find the intensity of
stress on the cross section, the value of E and the
amount of stored up energy in the member.
3. Prove that a beam subjected to transverse loading
has a moment of resistance (121) expressed by the for-
mula
Meee sy
ἫΝ
where pf is the greatest allowable stress at the distance
y from the neutral axis, and / is the moment of inertia
(second moment of area) of the section.
Determine the moment of resistance of the built up
section shown up in Figure 1; (a) about the axis 4B,
(b) or about the axis CD.
370 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
4. State the conditions of equilibrium for a retaining
wall or reservoir dam, and discuss the three cases
Obs See! eget Find the stress at the extreme edges
of a joint AB of the dam shown by Figure II; (a) when
the reservoir is empty, (b) when it is full of water. The
weight of the masonry may be assumed to be 128
pounds per cubic foot.
-, Prove the Rankine-Gordon formula for the safe
or
load on a column in the form
W apy a oe
ταῦ ἘΞ V2 4
A It Se τ τ
and state what assumption is made in your proof.
Explain the connection between this formula and a
straight line formula of the general form.
1
= ὁ -- ς
6. Show that the twisting moment which can be
transmitted by a hollow shaft 1s expressed by the for-
mula
where f is the allowable stress, dy is the external dia-
meter and d, is the internal diameter of the shaft.
Find the twisting moment which can be transmitted
by a hollow shaft 16 inches in diameter with an.8 inch
hole running through it, if the allowable stress 1s 12,-
000 pounds per square inch.
7. Prove that the horse-power which can be trans-
mitter by a solid shaft of radius 1. when the allowable
stress is g lbs. per square inch is given by the formula
flee tO RIN Ὁ»
where N is the number of revolutions per minute and
c is a constant.
Determine the value of the constant and calculate
the horse power which can be transmitted by a shaft
4 inches in diameter when turning at the rate of 20
ΒΥ os ὐ-
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 371
revolutions per minute, if the allowable stress is 12,000
pounds per square inch.
8. Show that the defection (5), the slopé (9) and the
bending moment (77) at any point of a beam can be
expressed approximately by the relations
flee OO eee
ee ax ESL
and explain what are the approximations made.
From these relations show that the slope at the ends
of a beam of length / uniformly loaded with τὸ lbs. per
foot run and supported at both ends is given by the
Tie
wl
"2g El
ἴ 5 wit ΄
the expression A EI
9. Show that a beam with ends fixed horizontally
and loaded by a central weight His subjected to a
+
expression and the deflection at the centre by
bending moment of τ in numerical measure at the
€
the centre and at the ends.
Oe ow, eV
Also show that the slope at “4 span 18 64 EI
10. If a plate of uniform thickness be subjected to
unit stresses p, and p, acting at right angles, prove
that the stress on any plane whose normal is inclined
at an angle ahas a normal component of p 3 P and
a component pete, inclined at an angle 2a,
2
The principle unit stresses at a point of a strained
solid are a tension of 4 tons per square inch and a
compression of I ton per square inch.
Find the resultant intensity of stress on a plane
inclined at 60°, also find the position of the plane
upon which the stress is wholly a shear and determine
the magnitude of this shear.
11. Obtain a formula for the simple equivalent twist-
ing moment on a shaft when exposed to uniform twist-
ting and bending stress.
372 FACULTY OF, APPLIED SCIENCE:
Calculate the diameter of a shaft exposed to a twist-
ing moment of go,000 inch pounds and a bending mo-
ment of 120,000 inch pounds when the allowable stress
is 10,000 pounds per square inch.
12. What is meant by a continuous girder. Prove
that for a continuous girder of two spans loaded
uniformly the centre prop carries five-eights of the
total load. Make diagrams to scale of the shearing
force and bending moments for a two span continuous
girder when each span is 40 feet.
13. Deduce a general expression for the Theorem
of three moments.
A continuous girder of three equal spans is uniform-
ly loaded. By how much must the two intermediate
supports be depressed to produce the same reactions
at all the supports.
AV RAW ΘΕ
WEDNESDAY, DECEMBER I17TH:—MORNING, 9 TO I.
(Candidates may attempt all or any of the questions.)
1. Deduce an expression for the time required to
empty or fill a canal lock.
The horizontal section of a lock chamber has an
area Of 12,000 square feet and the difference of level
between the surface of the water in the lock and the
ipper reach is 9 feet: Each leat of they gate is,.sup-
olied with one sluice, which is completely submerged,
and the water is levelled up in 4 minutes. Determine
the proper area of the sluice opening, the coefficient
of discharge being .625.
2. Explain what is meant by “loss of energy in shock,”
and deduce an expression for the loss in the case of a
small pipe discharging into a larger pipe across an
abrupt change of section.
A 3% in. pipe discharges into a 7 in. pipe, the quan-
titv of flow being 1,925 cubic feet per hour. Find the
loss in shock at the change of section.
2. Water from a reservoir flows through a triangular
notch. Determine the discharge per second.
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 373
If the supply entering the reservoir ceases and if the
horizontal sectional area of the reservoir is 26,400 sq.
ft., in what time will the depth of water in a go” notch
fall from 4 ft. to 1 ft., the coefficient of discharge being
{ORF
4. Write down an expression for the discharge over
a weir and describe the modifications introduced by
Francis. .
5. A stream, roo ft. wide and 4 ft. deep, has a velocity
of 4 ft. per second. Find the height of the weir which
will increase the depth by 25 p.c.
5. Give a short description of Darcy's experiments.
6. Water flows steadily through a pipe of constant
diameter. Deduce an expression for the loss of head
in frictional resistance.
A pipe, 5,000 ft. long, discharges 7,200 gallons per
minute and the loss of head in friction is 80 ft. If the
coefficient of friction is .007, find the diameter.
7. The water surface of a reservoir is 400 ft. above
datum and is connected by a 4 in. pipe, 1,000 ft. long,
with a turbine 100 ft. above datum. Determine the
velocity of the water in the pipe at which the power
obtained from the turbine would be a maximum and,
if the efficiency of the turbine is 85 p.c., determine the
power, f being .006.
8. Three reservoirs at different levels are connected
by a branched pipe. Given /,, 2... 43, %; %., 7%, Show
how to determineQ,, Q,, Q,, v,, v., ¥,;,and the height
of the discharge above datum. —
9. Write down a general expression giving the
velocity of flow in an open channel in terms of the
mean hydraulic depth and the slope, assuming the flow
to be steady, and deduce the conditions (a) for the
maximum velocity of flow; (b) for the maximum dis-
charge.
A circular aqueduct, faced with brick, has a diameter
of 9 ft. and a slope of 15 in 10,000. The water line
subtends an angle of 240° at the centre. Taking
b = .00006, determine the quantity of water conveved
in gallons per day.
το. Describe a Borda turbine and show that the best
speed of such turbine is given by the relation
@ Uv, cot y— gi
374 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
A Borda turbine, of 5 ft. mean diameter and 4 ft.
depth, works under a total head of 20 ft. The direc-,
tion of the jet before impact is inclined to 30° to the
horizon and the angle of exit is 20°. The jet delivers
3 cubic feet of water per second and |’, =u. Find (a)
the best speed of the turbine in revolutions per minute,
(b) the inlet lip angle and the hydraulic efficiency.
Also, if the actual efficiency of the turbine is 75 p.c.,
find its power.
11. A series of curved vanes in the form of arcs of
circles subtending an angle of 60° at the centre and
following each other at short intervals, receive without
shock at the edge a stream of water’ of. 11.52’ sq.\ in.
area, flowing at the rate of 32’ft. per second, which
drives the vanes with a velocity of 12 ft. per second in
a direction making an angle of 60° with the receiving
edge. Find the pressure on a vane and the useful work
done. Also find the direction and magnitude of the
actual velocity of the water as it leaves the vane.
12. Show how to determine the useful work done by
a centrifugal turbine.
B.Sc. EXAMINATION.
HYDRAULICS, IL,
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Candidates may answer eight questions only.)
1. Prove from first principles that the useful work
done by a jet of water impinging perpendicularly upon
a flat vane moving in the same direction, is given by
the formula
w ἢ
ἜΣΕΙ ΠΡ Vea τ τς
oO
ζω
where τ, = velocity of the impinging jet
1 == velocity of the vane.
Deduce an expression for the useful work when there
&
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 375
are a series of vanes moving in the line of the jet’s
eee
Point out the essential difference between reaction
anid impulse turbines and between downward flow and
radial flow turbines. Show how to determine the
actual path of a fluid particle between the inlet and
outlet surfaces of a turbine.
τ νά τ
3. Deduce the expression ek ( ΞΕ ὡς 3) - for
g ἐπ
the useful work done by the water in passing between
the inlet and outlet surfaces cf a turbine.
4. Deduce the expression uv, cosy for the best speed
of a Borda turbine.
A Borda turbine of 5 f-11 feet mean diameter, is
found to work at the best advantage when making 120
revolutions per minute.
The outlet lip angle is 2 cosec “.8 and the direction
of the inflowing water 15 ἘΠΕΊ ΤΙΣ at 30° to the vertical.
lf the hydraulic efficiency fs .g, find the total head
under which the turbine works, assuming uv = V,
5. In the preceding example, 1f the hydraulic resis-
tances are to be taken into consideration and if
I
2) == ind the totalsloss’ Gf head:
0
6. In a downward flow impulse turbine of 53ἐν feet
mean diameter, the lip angles are vertical at the inlet
(a= 90°) and inclined at 60° to the vertical at the eut-
let. The turbine passes 11 cub. ft. of water per second.
The direction of the water on entering the wheel
makes an angle of 60° with the vertical and the total
head over the outlet is 84 feet. Find the number of
revolutions per minute, the efficiency and the useful
work done, disregarding hydraulic resistances. v” ¥=o.
>. What are the fundamental considerations which
govern the design of a water wheel?
A breast wheel of 28 feet in diameter receives at a
point 60° from the lowest point of the wheel, which
makes 5 revolutions per minute. The total available
fall is t1 feet and the direction of the impinging water
376 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
makes an angle of 30° with the wheel’s periphery.
Find the mechanical effort and the best position of the
sluice.
8. In a centrifugal pump deduce the relation
2 “
Cae uy V.+2Vv, [- v.}—¥2 Bg = 2, COS, Y.
9. A centrifugal pump, of 63 inches diameter, makes
120 revolutions per minute and discharges 22 cubic
feet of water per second. The radial velocity of flow
(v’’,. ) at outlet is 6 feet per second. The lip angle at
4
outlet is cot-’’ — and the velocities of flow in the volute
and in the 24 inch discharge pipe are the same. 17)15-
regarding hydraulic resistances, find the actual lift ἘΣ
the efficiency. If the pump has six blades, each of 3
inch in thickness, find the outlet breadth of the εἴ οἷν
το. Explain what advantages are gained by adding
a whirlpool chamber to a centrifugal pump.
If a 7 foot whirlpool chamber is added to the pump
in the preceding example, determine the corresponding
gain of head in this chamber and the actual gain of
heed in the volute.
. Prove that the difference of ea H between the
inlet and outlet surfaces of a turbine wheel can be ex-
pressed in terms of velocities of the water and the
wheel in the form
29 25
Hence show, in the case of an inward flow turbine,
with uniform radial flow that if the velocity v is radial
and a is large, the expression reduces to
fee
12. In an outflow turbine of the impulse type the lip
angles at inlet and outlet are equal. Assuming. that
τι, — V, show that the efficiency of the turbine is equal
YX?
eS ( Ξὴ
Ta
to
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED ἘΠ 377
FOURTH YEAR.
FLY DRAULIC “MACHINERY,
TurEsDAy, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Candidates may attempt seven questions only.
Note.—(The answers to the questions should be, as far
as possible, illustrated by good sketches, for which a pro-
portion of the marks will be allowed.)
Describe one form of accumulator for obtaining
ei under very high pressures. An_ intensifying
accumulator is worked from a water-supply service giv-
ing a pressure of 125 pounds per square inch. The
smaller diameter of the ram of such an accumulator is
4 inches and the higher pressure is to be 5000 pounds
per square inch. Calculate the larger diameter of the
ram neglecting the loss due to the cup leathers. What
energy can be stored up in the machine if it has an
effective stroke of 5 feet?
2. Describe one form of rotary hydraulic engine
worked from a high pressure main, and point out in
what way it differs in construction and action from a
steam engine of the ordinary reciprocating type.
3. Describe one form of portable hydraulic riveter.
Draw a probable indicator diagram for the machine,
and account for the peculiarities of form which it pre-
sents. Also briefly describe the special features of ad-
vantage which this mode of riveting possesses.
4. Describe one form of impulse turbine of modern
type and point out its special advantages over turbines
of the pressure type.
5. The speed of a turbine may be regulated by (a)
throttling the head, (b) varying the openings between
the guide passages simultaneously, (c) closing some
of the guide passages
Give instances of each method of regulation and
discuss their relative advantages and disadvantages.
6. An inward flow turbine of the Thomson type is to
work under a nett head of 36 feet and the supply of
water is 1,500 cubic feet- per minute. Assuming the
918 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE,
radial velocity of the water through the wheel as 6 feet
per second, calculate the dimensions of the wheel and
the angles of the blades at inlet and outlet respectively.
7. What essential difference is there between the gov-
erning machanism for a steam engine and that for a
turbine.
Illustrate your answer by reference to the case of a
turbine having an hydraulic form of governor.
8. Describe two separate devices which have been
used for equalizing the work done by the steam cylin-
ders in a direct acting pumping engine.
9. Describe the principal hydraulic features of a
power station of modern type operating under a head
of not more than forty feet.
10. Describe the apparatus used on some locomotive
engine tenders for picking up water while running. If
the lift is 9 feet and the coefficient of hydraulic resist-
ance is 0.6, calculate the speed at which the apparatus
will begin to supply water to the tender. *
11. An hydraulic engine has three single acting
cylinders, 6 inches in diameter and 8 inches stroke, it
is supplied with water at a pressure of 700 pounds per
square inch, and, neglecting the effect of the length
of the connecting rod, the inertia of its reciprocating
parts is such that at the beginning of the stroke, the
effective working pressure is reduced to 450 pounds,
while at the position of mid-travel of tne prston the
effect of fluid friction is to cause a loss of 500 pounds
per square inch. Draw the indicator diagram and find
the mean effective pressure. Also find the horse power
exerted when the engine makes 75 revolutions per
minute.
FOURTH YEAR.
HYDRAULIC LABORS LORY,
DECEMBER, 1903.
Candidates are to attempt five questions only. A
proportion of marks will be awarded for good sketches.
τ. Describe by aid of sketches the arrangements used
for determining the coefficient of discharge of a rect-
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 919
angular notch or weir and obtain a formula for the
discharge. Deduce the value of the coefficient of dis-
charge from the following data obtained from a sharp
edged rectangular weir one foot in breath.
Mean head at hook gauges == 1653 inches:
Total discharge = 675.4 gallons.
Total time of discharge — 629 seconds.
2. Describe the arrangements used in the laboratory
for testing the performance of a Pelton wheel. In a
test of the large Pelton wheel in the laboratory under
a head of 230 feet the total number of revolutions was
3641 in 8 minutes 26 seconds and the discharge was
668 gallons. The mean load on the brake was 54.3
pounds, the brake wheel was 18 inches in diameter and
the rope forming the brake was 8. inches in diameter.
Calculate the horse-power supplied, the horse-power
given out on the rim of the brake wheel and the effi-
ciency.
3. Describe the construction and action of a Venturt-
meter, and obtain a formula for the flow through it per
second. Ina test of the Venturimeter in the laboratory
the following data were obtained :—
PRESSURES,
Upstream Centre vacuum
gauge gauge in
Time— Minutes, fu inches
pounds. of mercury.
I 20 DT 2
3 20.5 91:9
5 20.5 2. 1Έ9)
7 19.5 20.8
[ 21.0 22.0
Total time of run g minutes T4 seconds.
Total discharge 204.4 gallons.
Diameter of meter at inflow 1.63 inches.
᾿ “eat throats 350, ches:
Calculate the coefficient of the meter.
4. State the laws of friction for liquids against solid
surfaces and deduce an expression for the coefficient
of friction for a liquid flowing through a pipe in terms
of the dimensions of the pipe and the velocity. In an
experimental pipe in the laboratory, 72 inches in length
and 3 inches in diameter, the mean heads at the up-
stream and down-stream gauges were 9.97 and 2.59
980 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
inches of mercury respectively, and the discharge ob-
tained during a period of 305.6 seconds was 3904.2
cubic inches of water. Assuming that the friction
varies as the ἢ power of the velocity 1 being equal te
1.73. Calculate the coefficient of friction.
5. Describe the arrangements in the laboratory for
testing the efficiency of hydraulic rams.
In a test of the Rife hydraulic ram in the laboratory
the following data were obtained :—
Head of water on ram 6.0 feet.
Total height to which discharge
water was raised 22-0eek
Total quantity of water supplied 13.8 cubic feet,
oe
| |
discharge 141 pounds.
time of run —= ΤΟΙ minutes:
Calculate the horse-power supplied, the horse-power
given out and the efficiency.
ve
6. Describe the apparatus in the laboratory used for
impact experiments on vanes and like surfaces.
In an experiment upon a rough hemispherical vane
the following data were obtained :—-
Oritice—
Diameter Y inch.
Coefficient of discharge == On
Coefficient of velocity =O
Head over orifice == 20. tet.
Vane— 1
Horizontal distance from orifice == τ᾽ ΠΟΙ ΘῈΣ
Vertical distance below orifice ΞΞΞ MSS ee
Balance— ‘ed
Horizontal arm == 24 inches.
Vertical arm ==. 36) inches.
Balance weight in pan ΞΞ- 4 pounds 6 ounces.
From these figures calculate the efficiency of the vane
as compared with the theoretical type.
7. Describe the arrangement of the gear used for
testing the Gilkes radial out-flow turbine used in the
laboratory. Find the horse-power supplied, the horse-
power developed at the brake wheel and the efficiency
of the turbine from the figures obtained below in an
experimental run.
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 381
Mean pressure head on wheel 39.3 pounds.
Total revolutions 2130.
discharge 745 gallons.
>) time ΟἹ run 3: 5 seconds.
Mean load on the brake 36.7 pounds.
Diameter of brake wheel 18.1 inches.
Diameter of rope on brake wheel 0.5 Ἢ
Height of pressure gauge above inflow 20
B.Sc. EXAMINATION.
THEORY OF STRUCTURES.
TurEspAy, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
Parr;
1. A roof over the stage of a theatre is of the form
shown by Fig. 1, and in addition to the usual weights
of the roof covering on the top chord, there 1s an ad-
ditional load on the bottom chord due to the weight
of the scenery, etc. The loads are represented by con-
centrated weights at the joints in the diagram. Deter-
imine the stresses in all the members.
A pin-connected bridge has stringers spaced δ΄ 0”
apart. Design the flooring for this bridge for a maxi-
mum axle concentration of 54,000 pounds, which is
assumed to be distributed over three ties. The safe-
working stress for the ties may be taken as 1,800 pounds
ae r square inch.
A pin-connected 4 truss, of the dimensions shown
by ἜΠΞ 2, is to be designed for-Cooper’s standard load-
ing E4s. Determine the live load stresses and the int
pact stresses on all the members of the frame.
4. A masonry arch is subjected to the. system of
loading shown by Fig. 3. Determine the least uniform
thickness of the arch ring, so that a line of resistance
shall be in the centre half.
5. A stringer for a single line railway bridge is 30
feet long and is to be designed for a live load of 4,000
pounds per foot run of stringer. The estimated weight
of the stringer is 2,500 pounds. Determine the prin-
cipal dimensions of the stringer and design as much
of it as vou are able in the time allowed.
982 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
6. Design the bearing plates for the lower end of the
inclined post of a truss, shown in Fig. 4, when the total
compression load is 650,000 pounds and the pin is 6%
inches in diameter.
Part I].—2 To 5.30 P.M.
7. A truss of 210 foot span, Fig. 5, 15 subjected to a
moving wind load which is equivalent to 500 pounds
per foot run of the bottom chord. Determine the
stresses in the main lower chords and in the lateral
bracing.
8. In the previous question, if the stringers are 8’ 0”
feet part, design the wind bracing in the end panel, and
show the connections to the main members and to the
stringers.
g. The truss shown by Fig..5 is subjected to a live
load of 5,500 pounds per foot run. Determine which of
the members are subject to reversion and the variation
of the stress.
ΤΟ. A masonry dam, of the section shown by Fig. 6,
is composed of masonry weighing 120 Ibs. per cubic
foot. Determine the line of resistance of the dam (1)
when subjected to its own weight, (2) when water is up
to the level of the top of the dam.
if. JA. cantilever “truss; Pie." 7,16 subsected toa Mive
load of 3,600 pounds per foot run. Determine the
stresses in all the web members and calculate the im-
pact allowance for each member using the formula
30000
L-+ 300
Where L is the length of the bridge loaded to give t
maximum stress for the members in question.
13. A three-hinged truss, Fig. 8, has a load of 4 tons
at each panel point. Determine the stresses in every
member.
If a load of 4 tons is concentrated at each of the
points 4 and B, find the stresses developed in the mem-
bers x; also find the position of the load on each side
of the central hinge, which will produce no stress in
the members marked y.
Impact percentage
᾿
j
4
᾿-
i
͵
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. 383
B.Sc. EXAMINATION.
THEORY OF STRUCTURES.
Monpbay, APRIL 13TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
(NotEeE.—At least three examples must be selected from each
section.)
SeEcTION I.
τ Erove that in the case of a beam loaded trans-
versely, the bending moment (/), the shear (S) and the
load W at every place, are connected by the relations
aR dS,
av ax
and illustrate your answer by reference to the case of
a beam supported at each end and loaded uniformly.
2. Show that the distribution of shearing stress over
the cross section of a beam is expressed by the equa-
tion ;
ΞΞΞΞ τῇ
and deduce the ratio of the maximum shear stress to
the mean shear stress for a beam of rectangular sec-
tion.
3. Show that if the plane of bending of a beam is
inclined at 4 to the principal axis, the neutral axis is
inclined at an angle ¢ given by the equation
tan? = 1 tan θ.
ἢ
2
and the moment of resistance M is given by the ex-
pression
( Y cos Ὁ AX sin 4
i PON ETT, a. yi a
( I 2
where X and Y are co-ordinates of the extreme point.
25
984 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
Calculate the value of ¢ and WM for the case of a rect-
angular pine beam, 12 inches deep and 6 inches wide,
when the plane of bending is inclined at 30° and the
allowable stress is 900 pounds per square inch.
4. Prove that a long thin pillar with free ends will
collapse when the load W reaches the value
a
ΡΣ ἢ
and show what effect fixing the ends will have on the
load causing collapse.
Point out the application of the formulae in deter-
mining the value of the constant in the Rankine Gordon
formula for the strength of columns.
5. Write down the general equations connecting
stress and strain for an elastic body, and determine the
particular relations between them in the case of a thick
cylinder with ends free. Also show that the hoop
stress pv in a thick cyunder is connected to the radial
vat a radius r by the relation
2 ad oar
y dr (7. )
6. Show that the rigidity modulus (C) and the mo-
dulus of cubical compressibility (D), are related to
Young’s modulus & by the formulae
I σ
( = E
2. Or. I
Oo
D = 2
BNO a2)
x
where o is Poisson’s ratio.
Hence show that o can be expressed in terms of C
and PD in the form
2( G+ -3))
Oi ee πτοπονς
3D — 2¢
7. Prove the theorem of tiree moments for the case
where the loads on each span are wntform over the
span.
Apply your results to determine the reactions at all
the supports and the bending moment over the central
CIVIL ENGINEERING AND APPLIED MECHANICS. ὅδ
support for a continuous girder of 2 spans, each of 50
feet length, and one of which is loaded with 2 tons per
foot run and the other with I ton per toot run.
SEcTION’ II.
8. The cables for a suspension bridge of 210 feet
clear span are suspended from piers which are 25 feet
and 4 feet respectively above the lowest point of the
cables.
The top of the lowest pier is anchored by a back-
stay applied at 60° to the vertical while the higher pier
is anchered by a backstay inclined at 45° to the ver-
tical. Determine (a) the length of the cable between
the piers, (b) the horizontal pull on the cable, (c) the
tensions in the cable at the tops of the piers when the
load on each cable is half a ton per linear foot of span.
g. For an arched rib of uniform section and hinged
at both ends deduce the conditions
COL eT Ra s\y=
10. A flat arched rib with free ends in the form’of a
parabola of 80 feet span and 20 feet rise carries a load
of 10 tons at-20 feet from the support measured
horizontally. Find the horizontal thrust, also find the
axial thrust just above and below the point at which
the weight is concentrated, clso find the maximum
bending moment to which-the rib is subjected.
ΓΙ. Show how the results will be affected in the ex-
ample of the preceding question when b6th ends are
fixed.
12. Explain the advantages of the auxiliary truss of
a suspension bridge. ;
The platform of a suspension bridge of 300 feet span
1s suspended by vertical rods spaced ro feet apart and
the platform is also provided with an auxiliary truss.
Determine the puil on a suspender when one half the
bridge carries a line load of half a ton per foot run.
Also find the maximum bending moment and maximum
shear ta which the auxiliary truss is subjected.
jae Show that the bending moment at any point of
pe ae gee i ἐπε product of the horizontal
rts ἢ distance l.etween the axis of the
ΤΊ] eral the linear arch at the point in question.
14.~state the theory of the transformed catenary
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY
FIRST YEAR.
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY—PROJECTIONS:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, Ὁ TO ΤΡ.
1. A iriangle ABC, AB 2%”, BC 2”, AC 3/4” has
AY above ΠΕΡ hand 1727 τὴν ΡΟ Vers
B on the H.P. and 4%” in ¥ront of V-P-
ange ΤΡ above der.
Show plan and elevation of the triangle, and the
HT: and Vv, lof-the plane ofthe: tioure:
2. A rectangle 2%” X 1%’ has its long edges parallel
to the V.P.-and at 45° τὸ the H:Ps The nearest-lone:
edge to the V.P. is Ὁ in front of ΝΣ ‘The; short
edges of the figure are at 25° to the V.P. Show plan
and elevation of the figure.
3. A> right circular cone-2” ~“basesrests on-the, Eiee
and has its apex in the V.P.’while its axis, 3” long, is
at 65° to the H.P. and is in a plane perpendicular to
the planes of projection. Show the plan and elevation
of the solid.
4. A square right pyramid, edge of base 172’, axis
24" has one diagonal of its base horizontal and the
other at 40° tosthe: H.PB. andizo° to the V-B: {Show
plan and elevation of the solid.
5. A right circular cylinder has its axis 3%” long
parallel to both planes of projection and 2” from each
of them. Diam. of end 1%”. A right prism with end
an ‘equilateral triangle, 1%’ side, stands vertically on
H.P. and is 3%” high. The rectangular face nearest
the V.P. is at 25° to the V.P. and the axis of the prism
is 1%” from the V.P. Show the development of the
surfaces of both solids marking the lines of intersec-
tion,
6: A right rectancular. prism 37° DC 122 τ has
ite long edges at 40° to the V.P. and one of them in the
H.P. and a diagonal of the end is horizontal. Show
ΡΥ ΨΥ
a_i ee
+
ee ee a ee se ee
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY. 387
the plan and elevation of this solid and the true form
of section by a plane perpendicular to the H.P. and
at 30° to the axis of the solid and cutting it in a point
1” from the end of the solid.
7. An equilateral triangle 1%4’’ edge with one edge at
45° to XY is the plan of a triangle ABC. The heights
olan C ρονε, πὸ! ἘΠ ΙΡῚ are: 27%, 44” and. %4’" se-
spectively.. Find the true form by rabatment.
SECOND YEAR.
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, Ὁ TO 12.
1. A isphere ot 272’’ .diam. rests on the ἘΠῚ Εν ,and is
cut by a plane whose 77 and HT make angles of 60°
and 45° respectively with the XY, and its HT is one
inch from the plan of the centre of the sphere. Draw
the plan and elevation of the section.
2. Draw a plan and elevation of a regular tetrahe-
dron of. 2” edge when three angular points are 1”,
1%” and 24” respectively above the ΕΠ.
3. A sphere 1% in. diam. has its centre I in. from
both planes of projection. A straight line whose plan
is % in. from the plan of the centre of the sphere and
inclined to the XY at 30° has its elevation inclined to
the XY at 60°.” Show ‘the traces of the ‘planes con-
taining the given line and touching the given sphere.
4. The height of a regular hexagonal pyramid is 3
and the edge of its base τ΄. Find its plan when the
base is contained in a plane inclined at 45° to the H.P.
and 60° to the V.P. and one triangular face makes an
angle of 75° with the H.P.
s. A cylinder has for its VT a circle 1% in. diam.
whose centre is 1 in. above YY. Immediately opposite
this circle a second circle, on the H.P., having a diam.
1% in. and centre 1% in. from XY, is the H.T. of a
second cylinder.
The elevation of a generator of the first cvlinder has
an inclination of 30° to XY and the plan of the same
generator is at 45° to XY.
7,
Joo FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
The elevation of a generator of the second cylinder
is at 60° to XY and its plan is-at-15° τ Αγ Show
the plan and elevation of the lines of intersection of
their surfaces.
6. A square prism -faces' 2% wide by. 3” high is sur-
mounted by a right cylinder 3” diam. and /%” high.
The axes of the solids are vertical and coincide in plan.
The faces of the prism. are at=45°sto ithe VPs ime
the shadows cast on the prism and on the H.P., and
the V.P. by the solids when the rays are directed to-
wards the V.P. and their plans and elevations are at
60° to the XY. The centre of the» base’ of the prism
15. 2 ihOtny es es
7. When the inclinations of two of the axes of an
axometric projection are at 30° and 45° respectively,
find the inclination of the 3rd axis and project a cube
of 3” edge having these inclinations for its edges.
THIRD YEAR—(Civil Engineering Course).
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.
Turspay, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
τ. Plot the following notes on a Mercator’s projec-
tion, taking the equatorial radius as 3962.8 miles and
using a scale of 500 miles to the inch. The latitude
is south and the longitude east.
35 ΤΙ) 56. 4 Ta 135 SOC BOR 146° 30°
35: ΤΟ 105-300) 2138. 38° P41 °
32. .30΄. ΤΙ 45. TZ ag) ΤῸ 33. .30. 137
27° τ 30 2410 208" Ie Boma 136°
2220 4 iT T Bua, ΤΩΣ 146 ΣΟΥ τ i220 1338
20° 120° 25 i 30° 153” 31° 30° 129°
ae ᾿ - , -
14" 127° 2g 58, 430% 823 125
ΤΕ 129° 4 S2iE208 #12 BBO nasal 123 30)
T1730" 151" 30"| 37°30" 149° BON. 34; 120°
1293078 1377
2. Draw a perspective projection from the accom-
panving plan. Place the centre line of the object at
30° to the picture plane. Choose the positions of eye
and picture plane so as to show the object to the best
advantage.
τον ἘΞ ie TRE UATE Leta ye ρας τ ον ἀν
gr, Pika Se Ἧ an
“iy τ { or mi ay
We 4 - nN !
= . Ϊ ᾿
ptr
20
- ppsoriprive GEOMETRY, - 389
j % f i 4 ‘ 4 kc
Brig: +5. The sun, (decl. N. 10°) was observed in latitude
᾿ς 45° N. when his hour angle was 3%. Determine his
altitude and azimuth graphically.
ELEGTRICAL ENGINEERING
SECOND YEAR.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
PHYSICAL) EABORAL ORE
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. A bar magnet is placed in the meridian with its
South pole pointing North. ‘The neutral points are
found to be 31.5 cms. from the centre of the magnet.
The magnet is 16 cms. long. Find its magnetic mo-
ment taking H as .150.
2. How does the compass-box variometer measure
the variation in the horizontal component ?
3. How would you determine the moment of a mag-
net by (a) the torsion balance, (Ὁ) the deflection method
using a telescope and scale.
4. The deflection on a differential galvanometer is
to divisions to the right for a resistance of 125 ohms
and 17 to the left for a resistance of 124 ohms. Find
the sensitiveness of the galvanometer, and the value of
the unknown resistance. How would you test the ratio
coils.
5. State Joule’s law, and describe the continuous-flow
method of measuring Joule’s equivalent.
6. Ten volts through a Megohm gave a deflection
on a galvanometer of 200 scale divisions. One hun-
dred volts through the insulation of cotton covered
twin wire gave 16 divisions. The resistance of -the
galvanometer was found to be 5000 ohms. Find the
insulation resistance.
7. Describe the Carey-Foster method of comparing
resistances.
ὃ. A τὸ wire potentiometer is connected with a 2
volt storage cell. If each wire is 1 meter long where
would a Clark cell balance. Show a diagram of con-
nections. (Clark cell — 1.433 volts.)
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING. 391
Show what effect on the balance point the following
changes would produce; a Megohm put in series with
the galvanometer and Clark cell, a diminution of cur-
rent from the storage cell, and a drop in temperature
~of the Clark cell.
g. A resistance coil is measured at 20° and found
to be 1.023 ohms. Calculate the shunt necessary to
bring it to 1 ohm even at 16° taking the temperature
coefficient of the wire as .00025.
THIRD YEAR.
ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL ENGINEER-
ING.
CONTINUOUS CURRENT MACHINERY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. The data and dimensions of the magnetic circuit
of a continuous current dynamo are given (Fig. 1).
How many ampere turns per pole are required to
produce a flux of 11 megalines through the air gap.
Coefficient of leakage 1.15.
lige a
2. A 15 kilowatt, 4 pole, 250 volt dynamo with series
wound armature has 640 conductors in 40 slots. A
lead of 9 degrees is given to the brushes at full load
output. °
How many demagnetizing turns are thereby pro-
duced per pair of poles?
3. Discuss fully the losses occurring in continuous
current machines and what is usually done to control
such losses?
4. A 12.5 kilowatt, 125 volt, 1200 r.p.m. generator
has an armature resistance of .o15 ohms at 60 degrees
Fah. Resistance of brush contact .00o5 ohms at same
temperature. The bearing friction and windage loss
at rated speed is 250 watts. Armature iron loss 135
watts, Field loss 225 watts. Calculate the efficiency
at 25, 50, 75 and το per cent. full load at 60 degrees
Fah.
392 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
Ι
If after an 8 hours’ run full load the temperature rise
in armature and field is 55 degrees Fah. Correct the
full load efficiency.
5. Find an expression for the true density of magnetic
flux in the teeth of a slotted armature, if the total flux
in the air gap is known, also dimensions of tooth, slot,
and air spaces given.
6. Discuss fully method used for predetermining the
pressure drop under load in designing continuous cur-,
rent dynamos?
7. A motor is tested with a rope brake on a 2 feet
diameter wheel. When running at I100 r.p.m., the
scale reading was 50 lbs., with 1 lb. hanging free on
the other side of the rope. The motor input is τοῦ
amperes at 110 volts. What is the efficiéncy?
8. State how you would test a continuous current
generator for capacity, efficiency and regulation?
How would you separate eddy and hysteresis losses
in the armature?
9. Draw an end view and development for a 4 pole
drum armature with parallel grouping of circuits, there
being 48 conductors and 34 commutator bars?
THIRD YEAR ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING.
© EX BE RIVE DA (Pia Si@s:
ELECTRICAL MEASUREMENTS.
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Describe a form of potentiometer suitable for
comparing small electromotive forces.
Describe in detail, the experimental arrangements
required to calibrate accurately a Weston millivolt-
meter of range 50 millivolts and internal resistance I
ohm. f
2. Explain how to obtain the figure of merit of a high
resistance astatic galvanometer. How is the sensibility
varied by the control magnet? What relations exist
between the sensibility of the galvanometer and the
period of swing of the needle?
ELECTRICAL ENGINEBRING, 3U3
3. Give the simple theory and arrangement of Lord
Rayleigh’s current balance in his determination of the
electrochemical equivalent of silver.
4. How could you construct and test standard re-
sistances of t ohm and .oot ohm respectively ?
5. Show how to determine the constant of a ballistic
galvanometer :
(a) By induced currents ;
(b) By discharge of a condenser.
6. Given a plate of transformer iron, explain clearly
how you would proceed to test its magnetic qualities.
7. Explain clearly why the area of the hysteresis loop
in iron is a measure of the energy dissipated per cycle
Perie-c
Calculate the horse power wasted in hysteresis in
passing 1 ton of iron through 60 cycles per second.
Given the hysteresis loss per cycle = 15000 ergs and
the specific gravity of iron is 8.
8. Describe the action of a lead accumulator during
charge and discharge. How would you conduct a test
on the capacity and efficiency of a storage battery of
50 cells?
g. State what you know of dielectric absorption in
condensers. How is it determined?
Explain how to compare the capacity of two con-
densers by the method of mixtures.
THIRD YEAR.
ELECTRO-MAGNETISM.
DECEMBER, 1903.
1. A bar magnet has north and south poles (assumed
at ends), of strength + 160 and — 160. Cross-section
of bar % square centimeters, length of bar 20 centi-
meters.
A.—What is the magnetic moment of the bar?
B.—The magnetic induction B.
C.—What is the magnetic potential at a point P.,
294 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
10 centimeters from the north pole and 20 centimeters
from the south?
D.—What is the direction and intensity of the
magnetic force at P.?
E.—Draw a line of force from the north pole to
south pole through P.
2. A coil of wire of 120 turns (ends of coil open) 18
revolving at 1,200 R.P.M. in a uniform field of mag-
gnetic intensity 8,000. Area of coil 240 sq. centimeters.
A.—What is the average E.M.F. induced in τῆς
coil? ‘
B.—What is the maximum E.M.F. induced?
ΟΞ ΤΕ an electrostatic voltmeter is connected to
the ends of the coil, what will it read?
3. An anchor ring coil of mean radius, 5 centimeters,
consisting of Io turns, carries a current of 2 amperes.
What is the force acting on a unit pole placed on the
axis of the coil at a distance of 10 centimeters oa the
centre of the coil?
4. A current is sent through a long solenoid (with;
out iron), of known dimensions. A small secondary
coil is wound on the centre of the solenoid, and the
current induced in it by making or breaking the primary
current is measured by a ballistic calvanometer.
Show why the throw of the ealvanometer, within
certain limits, is proportional to the induction thread-
ing the solenoid.
5. A horseshoe magnet of dimensions shown in fig
I., is requred to lift a maximum weight of 60c pounds.
The number of turns on the exciting coils = 800.
ate current required. B. and H. curves given.
». Two parallel copper conductors in air, %4 inch dia-
Mine 1,000 feet long, interaxial distance 12 inches,
carry a current of 10 amperes.
What is the total flux set up between these wires?
7. A straight conductor carries a current of 20 am-
peres, with what force, and in what direction will it
move a unit positive pole at a distance of 12 centimeters
from the conductor?
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING. 399
8. A wooden anchor ring, inside diameter 15 centi-
meters, outside diameter 19 centimeters, is uniformly
wound with 300 turns of wire. What is the magnetizing
force in the core per unit current? Ifa wrought iron
core of permeability 1,200, be substituted, what will be
the total flux set up by a current of 10 amperes?
FOURTH YEAR.
ALTERNATING CURRENTS AND ALTERNAT-
ING CURRENT MACHINERY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO I.
τ. The field spools of a 20 pole alternator are series
connected and contain 616 turns each. The resistance
per spool is 1.66 ohms and 6.95 amperes produce 6.4
mega lines per pole. Required the total inductance
of field.
Applying a d.c.e.m.f. of 230 volts, required the
time for the current to reach one half of its final value.
When current has reached its final value, what energy
in watt seconds is stored in the field?
2. Given a parallel pair of No. 2 Ὁ. and 5. copper con-
ductors, insulated with vulcanized rubber of specific in-
ductive capacity 2.9, 5/32” thick, immersed in water.
Each cable is ten miles long and cables are distant apart
300 feet.
Required the coefficient of self induction per mile,
the magnetic reactance volts per ampere, at a frequency
of 350 p.p.s.; the capacity of cable in m.f per mile ;
the charging current per cable, far end insulated; when
1000 volts at a frequency of 350 periods is applied be-
tween core and water.
With 25 amperes at 350 p.p.s. flowing in each cable,
required the e.m.f. induced in a coil of wire of mean
area 6 sq. ft. and containing 500 turns, placed midway
between cables, the plane of coil coinciding with plane
of cables?
2. Given the circuit shown in Fig. 1.
An e.m.f. E = 1000 at 60 cycles is applied.
Required-1, I,, 1,,1,,1;,) E,,.&E,; the phase relations of
I, E,, E,, to E, the phase relations of I, & I, to E,, and
Per&e Teton
3/6 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCH. /
4. Given an a. c. generator, armature resistance
Oo = 0.1 ohms, synchronous reactance +, — 5 ohms.
li the terminal ὁ. m. f. 1s to be 1000 volts when the out-
put 1s 100 amperes energy current, and p.t. 80 p.c
what is the nominal induced e. m. f.?
Using the same machine as a synchronous motor
and applying 1000 volts to armature, what will armature
current be, “when motor is developing go k. w. and the
held so excited that the motor counter e.m.f. is 1500
volts ἢ
5. Assuming the constants of a transformer, show
to what extent the primary e.m.f. must be raised to
maintain constant secondary e.m.f. as a given load of
known p.f. is put on the secondary.
Discuss e.m.f. and current relations in a 6 phase
gee ΠΣ converter ?
. What tests would you submit the following pieces
of ee. to, in order to form an intelligent opinion
as to the proper limits of their use? A soft iron am-
meter; an integrating wattmeter; a polyphase a.c. gen-
erator; a - polyphase pene motor; a synchronous
converter. Describe methods of making tests?
᾿
μα
᾿
3
-
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING. 397
FOURTH YEAR.
ELECTRIC LIGHTING AND POWER DISTRI-
BUTION.
DECEMBER, 1003.
1. An are light dynamo supplies a current of 98
amperes through 6 miles of wire, to a series of 95 arcs,
each adjusted to 45 volts. Ascertain the size ot con-
ductors, the line emciency to be 96 p.c.
lf the resistance of the dynamo is 20 ohms, what is
the total voltage generated by the machine?
2. A lighting circuit consists of 20 groups of lamps
in multiple; three wire distribution, the groups are 300
feet apart and each group of lamps takes 6 amperes.
Size ot mains No. Ὁ. Β. ἃ S. Feeders trom the station
are connected half-way in the circuit. If the station
maintains a potential of 220 at the feeding point, what
’ will be the voltage at each group of lamps? If power
at the generating station costs $20 per kilowatt per
annum and copper is worth 20 cents a pound, deter-
mine the economical section of the feeders?
Distance from station to feeding point 2,000 feet.
3. A pair of No. O. B. ἃ 5. mains, 1,000 feet long, is
fed at both ends by a pair of feeders No. oo B. ἃ 5., re-
spectively 1,800 and 1,200 feet long. The load dis- -
tribution is given in Fig. τ.
Ascertain the current in each feeder, difference of
potential at feeder points and loss in feeders. Voltage
at generating station 125 volts.
4. Show how to ascertain by a graphical method, the
proper station site to make the weight of conductors
a minimum, the ioad distribution of the territory to be
served having been ascertained.
5. With a given maximum voltage between lines,
what is the relative copper economy of single phase,
2 phase with common return and 3 phase tratfismission
lines?
6. Discuss the use of a Storage battery in connection
with a plant whose load curve is given in Fig. 2.
How is the proper size of the battery determined ἢ
Show switchboard connections for booster charging.
7. Discuss fully the different svstems in use for trans-
forming A. C. constant potential to A. C. constant cur-
rent for series distribution.
398 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
FOURTH YEAR.
ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING: >
ELECTRIC TRACLIGN:
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9. TO 12.
τ. An electric road, single track, 5 miles long, 15
equipped with No. o trolley wire and a main No. 00
running parallel to it and connected to the trolley every
half mile.
Feeders 3 miles length and of section equivalent to
1,000,000 ¢.m., are connected half way in the line.
Assuming six cars at equal distances as shown in Fig.
1, and taking average current of 40 amperes per Car,
assuming resistance of track return negligible. What
is the voltage at cars 1 and 6?
Station voltage 550.
No. 0 wire = 133,00 c.m. sectional area.
No. 00 wire = 167,000 c.m. sectional area.
Pre? Sas GAttached:)
2. In Problem I. assuming the track resistance to be
032 ohms per mile and a station return feeder of 1,000,-
000 c.m. connected at feeder point.
(a) What is the voltage at cars 1 and 6? '
(b) What is the average loss in K. W. in overhead
and return?
3. An electric road 7,000 feet long, double track,
125,000 c.m. trolley wire has two feeders, one of 750,-
000 c.m. sectional area and 2,000 feet long, the other
1,000,000 c.m. 3,500 feet long.
Fifteen cars equally distant are on the road with an
average current per car of 40 amperes. Assuming the
track resistance negligible. Find the maximum volt-
age drop. Station voltage 550. Cars are situated as
per Pig! 2)..\( Attached.)
4. 500 Nilowatts average power are to be transmitted
a distance of six miles to feed an Electric Railway Sys-
tem at 600 volts.
Line efficiency 00 per cent.
_If power at the generating station costs $18.00 per
K. W. per annum and copper erected 25 cents per Ib.
J
BLECTRICAL ENGINEERING. 399
(interest and depreciation 10 per cent).
What will be the cost of the energy delivered?
5. A car weighing Io tons is drawn by 4 gearless
motors at 10 miles an hour up a grade of 0.8 per cent.
The resistance to traction taken at 12 lbs. per ton, dia-
meter of wheels 27 inches. What torque must be ex-
erted by each motor, and what is the work done?
If the coefficient of rail friction be taken at .2 of the
pressure of the wheels upon the rails. |
What is the maximum grade that can be ascended?
6. An electric car of weight 8 tons is driven by two
motors, the maximum torque that can be exerted by
each motor is 2,800 Ibs. at 1 inch radius.. Wheels are
33 inches diameter and ratio of gear to pinion 4.78.
If friction and other retarding forces are taken at 12
Ibs. per ton, and allowing a mechanical efficiency of
85 per cent.
Find the maximum acceleration that can be given
to the car?
7. Electric Power has to be transmitted a given dis-
tance from the generating station to operate a number
of cars. The average power per car being known.
Discuss fully the conditions of economy that will
govern the establishment of:
(a) An all copper transmission ;
(b) Boosters in the generating station;
(c) Substation with rotary converters ;
(d) Batteries in substation.
8. A car must cover a certain distance from start to
stop in a given time. The resistance to traction being
‘assumed and also the braking effect.
Show how the ratio of tractive force to weight of
car can be ascertained also the maximum speed re-
quired, and time from start at which the brakes should
be applied?
ὃ
26
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND LITERATURE
ἘΠΕ ΘΗ YEA Re
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
TurspAy, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO ΤΙ.
1. Explain the main principles of paragraph and
sentence construction.
2. Draw up outline plans for essays on the following,
subjects :—(a) Bridges; (0) The Lachine Canal; (c) The
Fast Atlantic Service.
3. State clearly the difference in usage between will
and shall, ie and lay.
4. Write six sentences illustrating the correct use
of the colon, semi-colon, and comma.
5. Correct the mistakes in the following sentences :—
(a) Either of we three could fill the place.
(b) Every one of the inhabitants feel that it is a
slur upon them personally.
(c) He would neither give it to you or I.
(d) He went a different way than 1 did.
(c) It is an interesting book, and which holds the
attention to the very end.
(f) There is no sense in me going.
(σὴ) I did not intend to have missed him, but being
late for my appointment, it could not be helped.
(h) The spring flowers look beautifully, and smell
sweetly.
(i) The president, whom, they said, was expected
to have been present, was out of town at the time.
(j) Will I be expected to write like him?
GEOLOGY
THIRD YEAR
GEOEOGY:
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12
AND 2 P.M.
1. What do you understand by the term Metamorph-
ism? State what you know concerning its causes and
results.
2. State what you know concerning the distribution
of Volcanoes upon the present surface of the earth.
Describe the recent volcanic eruptions in Martinique
and compare them with the eruption of Vesuvius in
the year 79 A.D.
3. Show how the geological structure of a eountry
influences its topography. Give examples.
4. Outline the conditions which are necessary tor
the accumulation of beds of coal in the earth’s crust.
Where are these conditions now most nearly repro-
duced in eastern North America? Describe two typi-
cal coal plants of the Carboniferous.
52 lhe Trilobites.* Their, iplace “in “the zoological
oO:
classification. When do they first appear and what
is the last system in which they are found? Describe
and figure any three genera and in each case state its
range.
6. Describe briefly the following geological forma-
tions; in each case state their age and name any econo-
mic products which they afford :—
Mountam Limestone, Utica, Clinton, Grenville, Trenton.
Draw a sketch map of the Continent of North
pee and show what portions of it were dry land
after the Appalachian Revolution.
8. State what you know concerning the Mesozoic
Reptiles.
9. State the mineralogical composition, the structure,
the origin and the mode of occurrence of the following
LOcks ---
402 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE. ς
Shale, Syenite, Trachyte, Arkose, Grit, Peridotite.
το. State what you know concerning the Cretaceous
System as developed in Canada.
2 O'CLOCK P.M.
Φ .
11. Name the fossils exhibited. State their position
in the zoological classification and mention the geolo-
gical formation to which they belong.
12. Name and describe the mineral and rock spe-
cimens.
FOURTH YEAR.
GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
CANADIAN GEOLOGY .—(First Paper.)
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903 :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
I. (a) State what you know concerning the develop-
ment of the Carboniferous System in Acadia.
(b) What are the important economic products of
the Carboniferous in Acadia?
2. State what you know of the stratigraphical posi-
tion, petrographical character and economic import-
ance of the following formations :—
(i.) Atlantic Oe: Series.
(11) Salina.
Git) ) Helen Iron Formation.
(iv.) Shuswap.
(v.) Corniferous.
3s) AGiye sas Dien sketch of the geology (including
economic geology). of any one of the following pro-
vinces:—Nova Scotia, New Brunswick, Ontario.
4. Describe the principal physical and geological
features of the Cordilleran region of Canada.
5. (a) What geological formations are developed in
the Interior Continental region of Canada?
(b) Describe briefly their area and distribution.
(c) What are their principle economic products?
aM ΚΕ δον wy Dey | νὰ ἡ μων) ead ys we
ee ee ee eee eee a, a Ἅ.:
‘
.
3
Ὶ
Ὶ
r
ΨΥ
GEOLOGY. 403
6. State what you know concerning the distribution
and character of the Pleistocene deposits in the pro-
vinces of Ontario and Quebec.
7. State what you know concerning the gold deposits
of the Yukon District.
8. State what you know of the Bog and Lake Ores
of Canada.
g. Where is Chromite found in Canada? Describe
its mode of occurrence.
FOURTH YEAR.
GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
PHYSIOGRAPHY.—(Second Paper.)
Monpay, APRIL I3TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. (a) Describe the features characteristic of a belted
coastal plain, and explain how they originate.
(b) Explain what influence topographic features of
this type will have upon the human occupation of such
a district; and upon the development of lines of trans-
portation. (This question may be answered by dis-
cussing a concrete example, ancient or modern).
2. Explain what is meant by the “Geographic Cycle.”
In this connection discuss briefly the following topics:
-—Development of Drainage, Graded Streams, Develop-
ment and Shifting of Divides, Development of Mean-
ders, Maturity, Old Age.
3. Give a sketch of the Physiography of Palestine
illustrative of the development of certain types of topo-
graphy. Indicate the types.
4. (a) What is meant by “Physiographic Controls” ?
(b) What is meant by “Climatic Controls of Land
Form”?
Illustrate in each case (a and b) by at least three
examples. ’
5. Describe the following, as to origin and phy-
siographic development, indicating in each case the
class of land form represented in the locality indicated:
(1) Black Hills of Dakota, (ii.) Mount Monadnock,
404 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
(iii.) Point Pelee, (iv.) Jura Mountains, (v.) The Escarp-
ment between Niagara Falls and Collingwood, Ontario.
6. Give in some detail a description of the origin and
structure of the Physiographic features of Acadia or
of Ontario west of the Frontenac axis.
7. Classify the Land Forms represented on the Maps
A, Band C. Discuss their probable origin and relative
ages.
FOURTH YEAR.
GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
(THIRD PAPER) PETROGRAPHY.
THuRSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
1. Describe the optical characters of Hornblende,
Olivine and Andalusite. In what class of rocks does
the latter mineral usually occur?
2: What are Spherulites and Pseudospherulites? In
what class of rocks do they occur?
3. Describe any case of differentiation in a rock
magma.
4. State what you know concerning the, origin and
geological relations of Serpentine.
5. Describe briefly:—Basalt, Ditroite, Greissen,
Gabbro, and Hornstone. Refer these to their places
in the petrographical classification.
6. Describe in detail the appearance presented under
the microscope by each of the following rocks :—the
Syenite from Plauen: the Baveno granite; the Apor-
hyolite from South Mountain, Pennsylv yania.
7. Diorite and Liparite. Their essential and more
commonly occuring accessory constituents. Their
structure and subdivisions. Are they more or less acid
than Limburgite?
8. Name and classify the twenty-five hand specimens.
What structures are exhibited by Nosiy2ii '22: 236 24
and 25?
9g. Examine the four thin sections under the micro-
scope. State in each case what minerals are present as
well as the name and structure of the rock.
GEOLOGY. "Ὁ 405
FOURTH YEAR.
GEOLOGY AND MINERALOGY.
(FOURTH PAPER) ORE DEPOSITS AND PRAC-
KCN GEOLOGY.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
τ. State what you know concerning the mode of oc-
currence and genetic relations of Native Platinum.
2. What do you understand by the term Paragenesis?
Give examples.
3. What changes are brought about in bodies of me-
_tallic sulphides above the water level? Trace the pro-
bable changes in the case of an ore body originally
composed of Auriferous Pyrite, Blende, Quartz and
Rhodochrosite.
4. Give an account of the mode of occurrence and
origin of the lead and zine ores of the Mississipp1
Valley.
5. Describe briefly the deposits at Potosi, Broken
Hill and Leadville.
6. Give an account of the theory of Lateral Secretion
including a brief history of its development. What
facts are adduced in its favour?
7. Describe the geological occurrence of Tin Ores.
8. What do you understand by Vertical and Hori-
zontal Sections respectively? Explain their uses and
their relative advantages.
9. How would you proceed to make a detailed mag-
netic survey of a small area known to contain a nearly
vertical body of magnetic ore? Note particularly the
adjustments of the Thalen-Tiberg instrument, the
observations taken, the methods of recording and plot-
ting results and their interpretation.
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, IL.
DECEMBER, 1902.
. Circumscribe a circle about a given regular penta-
ἘῸΝ
Prove that the square on the diameter of this circle
is equal to the square on a side of the pentagon to-
gether with the square on the diameter of the inscribed
eincle:
2. The rectangle contained by the diagonals of a
quadrilateral inscribed in a circle is equal to the sum of
the two rectangles contained by its opposite sides.
3. If a series of triangles of equal perimeter are de-
scribed about the same circle they are equal in area.
4. The difference of the squares on the tangents from
any point to two circles is equal to twice the rectangle
contained by the line joining their centres, and the per-
pendicular from the point on their radical axis.
5. Find the locus of a point if the sum of the squares
of its distance from two fixed points is constant.
6. Points Ai 5. C! are taken'inithessides of actrianele
ACE DB As WCEP
Bet ΤΟΣ ΠΣ OB eae
Prove that! 4A}, BB!, CC! are concurrent:
Hence show that the bisectors of the angles of a tri-
angle mect intone pomte
If a straight line is perpendicular to each of two
τ ὡς straight lines at their point of intersection
it will be perpendicular to the plane which contains
them.
8. From a point P, PB and PC are drawn perpendi-
cular to two planes which intersect in ΠΗ, meeting them
in Band C. From B, BK is drawn perpendicular to
FHT, Prove that CK will also be perpendicular to FH.
ΒΘ ΞΟ shat
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 407
g. Find the volume of the frustum of a triangular
prism in terms of (a) the area of one end and the
heights above it of the angular points of the opposite
end, (b) a right section and the parallel edges.
10. A solid cylinder 36 inches long and 2 inches in
diameter is melted and cast into a sphere. Find the
diameter of the sphere and its surface.
11. In a parabola show that the locus of the inter-
section of tangents which are perpendicular to each
other is the directrix.
Hence show how to construct a parabola having
given two tangents at right angles to each other, and
their points of contact.
12. Through a point P on a parabola, a diameter is
drawn. Show that it bisects all chords which are
parallel to the tangent at P.
13. Find the locus of the centre of a circle which
passes through a given point and touches a given circle
internally.
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, II.
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 ΤΟ I.
1. Show that
3 Ξ a
(α--ὀγὲκ ' igh al ἢ οὐδ τὰ he
{πέντ τς oy
Les Sey
3 ntI n—1
(2) Sean ee,
LOR ae τὸς te att
27
(3) or sth a ς +°C Ἔτους
2. Solve: i
GQ*+ty+Vr+y=6
2 — y= 8
COS rN lige end fea Σ
x? — 6 CZ
(Sess eh eta Ee 6
oN Ne <p RY BAe τ ae Ὁ δι ΣΝ =
408 FACULTY .OF APPLIED SCIENGE.
3. If y varies as the sum of three quantites of which
the first is constant, the second varies as +, and the
third varies as) 47, andi ἢ ---- Oewhen τ τ tere at
when 4w— 2, and ΤΙ, ΞΞΞΞ
Aswhen 7.3} find yowhent ΞΞ ἡ:
a. heart bf =o) sedeprove tthat
a—c :b —d=V@te:VP+ ὩΣ
5) bind. the: sum*ot the series: 3 ny Selene
(a)-to (8; terms:
(b) to infinity.
6. The last term of an A. P. is ten times the first, and
the last but one is equal to the sum of the fourth and
fifth. Find the number of the terms and show that the
common difference is equal to the first term.
7. Show that the roots of (x — a) (x — b) = /? are
real.
If a and β are the roots of χ᾽ -- δ + g =o show
(s—® A ere wilt es 4)
Bu ar αὶ ΨῸΣ ΠΕΣ
8. A boat’s crew consists of 8 men, 3 of whom can
only row on one side and 2 can only row on the other.
Find the number of ways in which the crew can be
arranged.
*
U5
: AN : I
9. Find the coefficient of 2%? in (xc! ἘΞ τ
10. Show that {πὸ (r + 1) term of (1 — x)
(7
(rh) (a2) ee 188)
{5:7
J
eh
11. Find the value of ὃ, 1003 to 5 places of decimals.
12. Find the three cube roots of 1.
(cos ΠΡ ἘΣ τι =) a,
13. Show that 6 6 aid
{ 7 δὲ 1} τὲ ἐπ τ
ΠΟΘ ΡΟΣ ΘΙ
\ 6 a
14. Show by DeMoivre’s Theorem that
sin 3 06 = 3 sin 6 — 4 sin 0,
᾿
BD
|
4
4
᾿
i
f
“MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 409
15. Find by determinants the value of y in:
(2) 35 —2y 1 4 - -- 21
2x —y-+ 5s = 13 \
Tossolve. | <3 ΑΔ |
I 5 O Ξε 5
Ae aren ar seme
17. Show that | Pe ty is tg 8 ag ay |
4-3 8)- 2|2 3 8:
hy One. Soir Oh κυ es eg
ΕΠ ΠΡ ΘΠ ARs
MATHEMATICS, ITI. }
TuurspDAy, APRIL I6TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO I.
t. Show that the radian measure of an acute angle
is intermediate in value between the sine and the tan-
gent of the angle.
2a Prove:
(1) cos*@ + sin*@ — 1—3 cos’6 sin’O
(2) cot*@ + cot?@ — cosec 19 — cosec?d
(3) cosec 24 + cot 44 + cosec 44 = cot 4
tan 50 + tan 36
Che eens
Υ ats cos 24 cos 44
tan 54 — tan 34 ᾿ :
3. Find all the values of 6 from the equations:
(nr) "tane.=see"7- = 7
(2) 4-cos 36 sin 26 —2 sin 20 — 2 cos 30 + 1 =o.
4. In any plane triangle 4 BC:
(1) (α - δ) sin C =c cos 4 (A — B).
2NESith 244 —
(2) sin } +
: : 2 185
(3) sin 4 + sin B + sin C = 4 cos = cos 00s -
ἢ τῇ Given a, ὃ and A in any plane triangle, show that
if a < 6b, the number of solutions depends on the
valu f iva
een ayer
410 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
6. In any right angled spherical triangle (C = 905),
{1} ΘΒ ΞΞΞ σοῦ ae copie.
(2) 1510 5. sin 2, ΞΞΞ sin“exsin 28.
(3) The hypotenuse is less than go° only when
both the other sides are in the same quadrant.
7. In any spherical triangle,
cos (S—B) cos (S—C)
(1) cosd4.a= :
3 sin & sin C
(2) li (6 + c)-= 90°
cos @ = Sin 2¢ cos* 4°A.
(3) The half sum of any two sides and the half
sum of the opposite angles are of the same species.
8. The angles and sides of a spherical triangle are
the supplements of the sides and angles respectively
of its polar.
9. If two angles of a spherical triangle are right
angles, show that the sides opposite to them are right
angles, and that the third angle has the same measure
as its opposite side.
10. The area of an equilateral spherical triangle is
one-fourth the area of the sphere. Find its sides and
angles.
11. In the plane triangle A BiG.
ὦ == 500.6, b= 32568,.C. = 108° 38 finds
12. In the spherical triangle in which
a == 84° 14’ 29”, ὃ = 44° 13” 45”,
AL. \1205 S422a'e)showathat
C2 2054465 256.
FIRST YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, IV.
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
t. A balloon is 125 ft. from the ground, and ascend-
ing at the rate of 50 ft. per second. In what time would
a body fall from it to the ground?
2. A body is projected on a horizontal floor with a
velocity of 20 ft. per second, and the coefficient of fric-
toin is 14.
a
er 7
4 ty - Ὡ
Ω
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 411
(1) How far will the body move in two seconds?
(2) How much longer and how mych farther will
it move?
3. The acceleration of the weights of an Atwood
machine is one-tenth that of gravity. Find the ratio
of the masses.
4. Half of the length of a cylinder is sharpened into
a cone, the axis remaining unchanged. Show that the
centre of gravity of the solid divides the axis in the
ratio 11 2 21:
5. A carpenter’s rule 2 ft. long is bent into two parts
at right angles, the shorter part being 6 in. long. lf
this part be placed on a smooth horizontal table, what
is the length of the least portion of it which must be
on the table that it may remain in equilibrium ἢ
6. A horizontal force of 7 pounds supports a weight
of 24 pounds on a smooth inclined plane.
(1) Find the pressure on the plane.
(2) What would be the pressure on the plane if the
weight were suported by a force parallel to the plane?
7. An engine’ weighing 40,000 pounds moves at 15
miles per hour round a curve of rroo ft. radius.
(1) The road-bed being assumed level transversely,
find (in pounds) the transverse pressure on the rails.
(2) Show that the inclination of the road-bed that
there may be no transverse pressure is tan*! (.01375).
8. The magnitudes of two components are P and Q,
and the angle between them is @ ; find the resultant.
If the components be 4 each and the angle 30°, show
that the resultant — 2 (6 — V2):
g. A piece of lead (sp. gr. 11) weighing 136 pounds
is suspended in water by a string. Find the tension of
the string.
το. Equal volumes of two fluids whose specific gra-
eVities are I and 1.7 contract when mixed by one-tenth
of their original volume. Find the specific gravity of
the mixture.
412 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
SECOND YEAR.
MATHEMATICS; I.
DECEMBER, 1903. ;
1. The angular points of a triangle ABC are (2, 5),
(—1, 1), (— aE 13), find :—
(1) The tangent of the angle J.
(2) The equation of the bisector of the angle B.
(@) siihe sanea:
Given the circle 1? + y? + 2r — 6y + 2—0,-
and: —
(1) The lengths of the tangents from the origin.
(2) The equations of these tangents.
(3) The polar of the point ( : with respect to
Bua
the given circle.
3. The circle of question 2 is cut by the line + — 2y
+ i= οἵα {πὸ points. .O = Πα:
(t) The length of PQ.
(the equations of the two circles which pass
through P and Ὁ, and also touch the axis of ἐς
4. (1) Transform the equation
a2 4+ 3 xy — 2? + x + 7y—8=10
to parallel axes through the point (—1, 1).
(2) Turn the new axes through the angle tant
oo fH
and show that the reduced equation is 17 — 4? = 2.
5. Find the equation of the straight line which touch-
es the parabola Vo — dpe and makes an angle tan-lin
with the axis of +.
6. What are the co-ordinates of the vertex of the
parabola +? — ὅν + 4y — 3 =o? What is the equa-
tion of the directrix?
7. Show that the eccentric angle at the end of the
latus rectum in the first quadrant of an ellipse is cose.
What is this angle in the case of the ellipse 3.2 +4
4) = 1?
8. Prove that the equation of the normal at any point
of an ellipse is
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 413
g. Find the eccentricity and also the equations of the
asymptotes and directrices of the hyperbola 17 — 4°
==
10. Prove that the rectangle contained by the per-
pendiculars let fall from any point of a hyperbola on
» z
8 a
asymptotes is constant and equal to 72 4B?
SECOND‘YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, IL.
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9 TO [2.30.
Fe 1 ΞξΞ 5 - COS"),
δ ite mea _ du du eat
2. liu = meets ΣΚΈΣΕΡΑ ΠΣ τὴν
3. Show that (given log 2 = .693)
So 6 (G6 Οὐχ Ἔν Oe
(1) ,..--- = 898,07 11) ifsc Cou dd, ΞΞ “2a
el
Ὅν ΩΤ : { aL :
SS aia, ΓΕ “ ρροἰἶθαθ Ξε 21
(2) eens ὅπ) ‘OP ἀπ 5
eno ε a dar
(3) 13 tes ae = *420, (6) { cot a0. dd 153.
Ἢ « One ΞΙ- 4 sya
4. Also that
8 (x—1) dx ae Ξ
= 4 1) da: ΞΟ = ae es tart
Ε oD = <3 +
Gc XK gat At
5. By integrating by parts (or otherwise) show that
1
Ny} eS
hae waa fe Ta”
7 Ὁ Vay ah 4
log 4 I
6. Show that the greatest value of τ ἜΝ τε
a” 2G
7- A high vertical wall is to be braced by a beam
which has to pass over a parallel wall 8 ft. high and 27
ft. distant from the other. Show that the beam must
be at least 13 V/13 ft. long.
414
8.
. 19 ——
oe
ae V 10:
and the asymptotes is 24.
revolving this area about the axis of Δ ΙΒ. ΕΖ πος i.
9. Prove that the moment of inertia of a uniform
2 ne ee
sphere about a diameter = mass * , (τ 115)",
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.. +
I
>
a
re)
. The velocity-time curve of a moving point being
given, prove a graphical method of finding the accelera-
tion at any instant.
_ A wheel of a moving carriage is 3 feet -in dia-
meter and makes one revolution per second. Find in
magnitude and direction the velocity of a point on the
rim at the instant when it is on a level with the axle.
. A point starts from rest with a constant accelera-
tion, show that in the second half of any interval of
time it describes three times the distance it does in the
first half.
4. Show that the time of descent from a given point
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
The equation of a curve is ae. 3; =I.
Ys
(1) Find the tangents at the origin.
(2) Find the asymptotes.
d°y 36x
; ESM ΝΕ ae) ae aN
(3) Show that ie Ἐπ Τὴν
(4) Where are the points of inflexion?
(5) Show that the radius of curvature when * = 1
(6) Prove that the whole area between the curve
(7) And that the volume of the solid formed by
~.
SECOND YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, III.
ee a ee ee ee ee
— Se ee ee
Te a aS Ψ 9,
Se
ee
to the centre of a circle vertically below it, is the same
as that to the circumference down a tangent.
5. A 50 ton engine pulling four 20 ton cars starts
pT tes 24,
from rest with an acceleration of 5 feet per second,
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 415
find the pull on the draw bar of the engine. When the
speed has reached 30 miles per hour steam is shut oft
and the train is stopped in half a mile by the engine
brakes, find |
(a) The opposing force exerted by the brakes.
(b) The stress in the coupling between the middle
cars.
6. Find the equation of the path of a particle pro-
jected with a velocity of u feet per second at an angle
to the horizontal. What is the hodograph?
Determine the angle of elevation so that the hori-
zontal range may be equal to the space through which
a body must fall in order to acquire the velocity of
projection.
7. Prove that the velocity-time curve of a point mov-
ing with simple harmonic motion is a sine curve.
The maximum velocity of a point moving with
S. H. M. is 4 feet ver second, the period is 7 seconds;
find :— A
(a) The amplitude.
(δ) ΤῊς velocity when at 1 foot distance from the
mean position.
(c) The acceleration at the same time.
8. Prove that the resultant of a number of forces
acting in one plane passes through the point of inter-
section of the first and last sides of the funicular poly-
gon.
9. Forces 1, 3, 5 and 7 pounds act along the sides of
8 square of 12 inches side. Find the resultant in mag-
nitude and position.
10. Find the centre of gravity of the accompanying
figure. ora
TT: Draw the stress diagram for the accompanying
fieure indicating the nature of the stresses. see
Find the reaction R at O. and the tension T.
27
410 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
THIRD YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, I.
DECEMBER, 1903.
1. Find the equation of the plane which passes
through the point (2, —1, 3) and is parallel to the
plane 3% — 12y + 4g= 5. What angle does the plane
make with the plane of ry?
2. Prove that the centre of any conic u = 0 is found
. P : au d:
by solving the simultaneous equations — = 0, C4 = 0.
ax dy
3. Given the conic
αἰ + 34y— 2.) Ἐπ + zy t+ 2=0,
(1) Find the centre.
(2) Find the tangent of the angle which the prin-
cipal diameters make with co-ordinate axes.
(3) Reduce the equation to the principal diameters,
and draw the curve.
4. What are conjugate diameters? Show that the
length of the equal conjugate diameters of the ellipse
3x? + 455 == 12 is ν14.
5. Show that
Ft LORNSeCLL I
{τ} OB Sea =—,whenx = 0,
OS 2,
Sie
(2) (a? —'1) x = loga, when x— <x.
6. Prove that the vertical angle of the cone of great-
est volume, which can be described by a right-angled
triangle of given hypothenuse is 2 tan “!\/2.
7. Show that the radius of curvature of the curve
ee, Ee
(y —x*)? =25 at the origin is =
8. Show that log sec x =—+ SS oe
—— a Ὁ
>|
MATHEMATICS AND MATHEMATICAL PHYSICS. 417
g. By the substitution + ΞΞΞ sec @ (or otherwise),
show that
dx I vg
i ἘΞ see tx
Ea x? I of Nae ae. )
10. Show that
τ᾿ 2 ax
"ἢ ἐπὴν ϑ =< αὐτὸ; (2) Ϊ a .740;
‘ Ἣν Teale eT
τ [τς :
(3) i; cos’ 6 sin®-0 Ὁ = οἵ.
0
11. An ellipse revolves about its major axis, Show
that the volume and surface of the prolate spheroid
thus formed are, respectively,
4 27 ab
* or a6” and 27 6? +
where ὁ is the eccentricity.
sin ~'é,
THIRD YEAR.
MATHEMATICS, II.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL I5TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. A rigid circular disc, of radius 2 ft. and mass 5
Ibs., turning about a horizontal tangent falls from rest
from its highest position.
(1) Show that when it becomes horizontal the
: LO ---
_velocity of the centre is —- \/Io ft. per sec.
(2) That the vertical and horizontal pressures on
the axis are I pound and 8 pounds, respectively.
(3) If the centre is suddenly fixed when the disc is
horizontal, show that the impulses at the centre and
Bue τ» - ie :
the axis are ~ ψίοΟ and -- a \V/10 pound-second units,
8
respectively.
(4) If the disc be lowered and allowed to make
small oscillations, show that the time = = γ΄ 5 seconds.
2. A ladder is to rest with its extremities A and B
against a vertical and a horizontal plane. The co-
efficient of friction at A and B ist.
418 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
(1) Show that the least inclination to the horizon
will be tane =.
(2) If from this position the ladder be allowed to
slide down, what will be the ratio of the velocities of
A and B when the inclination is 30°?
3. A car comes to rest after moving 192 ft. on a level.
track where the resistances amount to ΤῸ pounds per
ton. How far would it have gone up a one per cent.
grade where the resistances are 12 pounds per ton?
4. In testing an engine running at 100 revolutions
per minute, the lever-arm of the friction brake em-
ployed was 10% ft. and the weight attached 2,000
pounds. Find the horse power expended on the fric-
tion.
5. A ball weighing 2 105. strikes with a velocity οἱ
4 ft. per sec. an 8 lb. ball at rest. The coefficient of
restitution is 1. Find the velocities after the impact,
the latter being (1) direct, (2) at an angle 45°.
6. Find the centre of pressure of a triangle immersed
vertically with one side in the surface of the fluid.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING
SECOND YEAR.
KINEMATICS OF MACHINES.
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO I2.
(Figures give proportional marks. Use sketches to
tllustrate your answers. Ten questions may be
attempted.)
1. Distinguish between a Structure and a Mechanism.
Define :—Closed pair, Spheric motion, Simple chain.
(10)
2. Explain the following statement:—The two cen-
trodes corresponding to the relative motion of two
bodies always touch at a point. (10)
3. A body moves with variable linear velocity. What
is meant by the instantaneous velocity of the body, and
how can that velocity be determined from observations
of the times in which the body describes various known
distances measured from a given point on its path? (10)
4. Show how to draw a curve of acceleration on a
time base, if a curve of velocity on a time base 15 given.
(10)
5. What is a change-point? Give an example of a
mechanism in which such points occur. (8)
6. The swinging-block slider-crank chain is uulized
as a quick-return motion. Show how to find the an-
gular velocity of the swinging block for any given
position of the mechanism. (12)
7. Show that in a double slider-crank chain, a point
on the link which carries an element of each of the two
turning pairs will describe an ellipse with regard to
the link carrying the two sliding pairs. (12)
8. Give two examples of the closure of incomplete
chains. (8)
420 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
g. Ina pair of toothed wheels, having given the tooth-
outlines, show how to find graphically the relative
sliding velocity of the teeth. (10)
10. What is an epicyclic wheel-train? Show how to
determine the velocity ratio in such a train, (12) 3
ΤΙ. What is an escapement? How are escapements ;
classified ? (10) ;
12. Explain how to determine the velocity ratio in a d
pair of screw-wheels. (12)
τ
:
SECOND YEAR. ᾿
MECHANICAL DRAWING. ἶ
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO I. 2
The accompanying blue-print shows an elevation and
section of stub for main crank pin and knuckle joint ;
of a locomotive.
(a) Draw in pencil details of,
(1) end of coupling rod marked “A”
(2)*brass.marked i; Be
(3) δι τίς Cy
(4) outside bush marked “F.”
Scale % size. :
(b) When all pencil work is finished ink in;
(c) When all the drawings are inked in, dimension. Ἷ
THIRD YEAR.
DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY.
THURSDAY, APRIL QTH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Nore.—Only ten questions are to be attempted. The figures
atter the questions show proportionate marks awarded.
1. A horizontal double acting steam engine has the
following dimensions :—
Cylinder ‘diameters 2%.) 2 32 -J τυ ποῖος
Stroker 5. 2 ole. τας ne eee Mea τ β
The connecting rod is six cranks long. |
If the initial steam pressure be 100 Ibs. per sq. in.
lanl
iS)
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 421
‘gauge) and the exhaust pressure atmospheric, find
the torque on the crank shaft when the crank makes an
angle of 60° with the horizontal. (15)
2. Prove any formulae that you may employ in ques-
tion one. (10)
3. li the engine of question one be making 300 r.p.m. ;
find what proportion of the total force acting on the
piston is required to accelerate the reciprocating parts
at the ends of the stroke.
The weight of the reciprocating parts is 200 Ibs. (20)
4. lg the mean effective pressure acting on the piston
of the engine of question one be 40 lbs. per sq. inch, find
the J.-P. -at 300+f:p.m. (10)
(a) If the fluctuation of energy be 20 per cent. of
the energy of one revolution, find the weight of such a
flywheel, six feet in diameter, that the fluctuation in
speed may not exceed 3 per cent. (20)
5. State as concisely as you can the laws of friction
as derived from experiments on unlubricated sliding
bodies. (15)
6. From two to three horse power is transmitted by
a belt, and an accurate determination of the power
transmitted is desired. Describe any form of dynamo-
meter you would employ for this purpose.
Point out the frictional and other losses in the
dynamometer. (15)
7. Find the pitch of a screw thread of maximum
efficiency. (20)
8. A rope makes two complete turns around a snub-
post, and a man exerts a pull of 100 Ibs. on one end of
it. If the coefficient of friction be 0.33 find the pull on
the other end of the rope that will just overcome that
of the man. (15)
9. The taper of a cotter is 1 in 6; what must be the
coefficient of friction so that it will just slack back when
not held in place. (20)
ro. A vertical shaft, 4 inches diameter, rests in a flat
pivot bearing, over the whole surface of which the pres-
sure is uniform. The weight on the bearing is 1,000
Ibs.
Find the work done in overcoming the frictional re-
sistances when the shaft is making 300 r.p.m.
/
422 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE,
Take 0.01 as the value of the coefficient of friction.
(15)
11. A horizontal shaft, 4 inches diameter, rests in a
bearing 6 inches long. If the weight on the bearing
be 1,000 Ibs., and the intensity of the normal pressure
uniform over the whole surface, find the work done in
overcoming the frictional resistances when the shaft 15
making 300 r.p.m.
Take o.or as the value of the coefficient of friction.
(15)
THIRD YEAR.
MACHINE DESIGN.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Note.—Notes, reference books, etc., may be consulted.
Only ten questions to be attempted. The figures after the
questions show the proportionate marks awarded.
1. A cylinder 24 ins. in diameter is to be subjected
to a steam pressure of too lbs. per sq. in. (gauge).
Find bolt diameter and number of bolts required to
fasten on the cover. The bolt circle is 28 ins. in dia-
meter and the circumferential pitch is six times the bolt
diameter. (10)
2. Find the diameter of a short, wrought iron pump
rod, the bucket being 20 ins. in diameter and the water
pressure 25 lbs. per square inch (gauge). (10)
3. A crane chain has links made of iron % inch dia-
meter. What load will it safely bear. (10)
4. A steel Lancashire boiler, 8 ft. diameter, has-a
working pressure of 100 lbs. per sq. in. (gauge). Find
the thickness of the plate and design the longitudinal
joint.
(a) Show by means of freehand sketches the ar-
rangements of the plates at the intersection of the
longitudinal with the circumferential seam. (20)
5. Two lengths of mild steel tie rod, 7 ins. by 1 in.,
are connected as shown by Fig. 1. Find the efficiency
of this joint. (20)
6. Find the relative weights of two round shafts of
equal strength, the one solid and the other hollow, with
a hole the diameter of which is equal to one half the
outside diameter. (re)
cholate aes
2 stipe θθυβοα»:
_—
BOR ney δ
Ὁ
ate 2X ee
ee
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 423
7. A shaft pulley is 8 ft. from one bearing and 2 it.
from the other. The weight of the pulley is 100 lbs.
and its diameter is 3 ft. The total belt tension (down-
wards) is 200 lbs.
The pulley rotates at 200 r.p.m. and 5 horse power
is being transmitted by the belt.
Find the diameter of the shaft (mild steel). (20)
8 ‘The flat ends of a boiler are stayed together by a
number of horizontal stays, 20 ft. long and 2 ins. dia-
meter. Each stay supports a flat area of 15 sq. in.
The working pressure is 120 lbs. per sq. in. (gauge).
Find the maximum stress in the stays due to combined
tension and bending, if the material of the stay weighs
0.29 Ibs. per cub. in. (15)
9. Design a cast iron, flange, coupling for a mild steel
shaft, 3 inches diameter. Make freehand sketches and
fully dimension. (20)
το. A double acting steam engine has the following
dimensions :—
Diameter of cylifider ro’ inches
Length of stroke 12 =
The connecting rod is six cranks long.
Distance from centre to centre of main bearings, 3
Eee
The initial steam pressure is 125 lbs. (abs.).
(a) What diameter would you make the piston rod?
(b) What diameter would you make the crank
shaft ? (20)
11. Design a suspension link as shown in Fig. 2.
The load on the link is t,000 lbs. Make freehand
sketches and fully dimension. (20)
THIRD YEAR.
MECHANICAL DRAWING.
TUESDAY, APRIL I4TH, 1903:—MorRNING, 9 TO 1.
«Lhe accompanying blue-print shows a plan and sec-
i447
tion of a 5%” & 6” Duplex. Pump.
424 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
SECTION A.
(For Mechanical Engineering Students only.)
Draw a section through the other cylinder and valve
from that shown on the blue-print, also show valve
gear in position.
The drawing need only be penciled in.
Scale % size
SecTIon B.
(For Electrical and Mining Students only).
(a) Draw details of piston and of the links marked
SAG SE andatk 2 Scale" \size:
(b) When all pencil work is finished ink in;
(c) When all the drawings are inked, dimension.
THIRD YEAR.
THERMODYNAMICS.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Nore.—Only ten questions to be attempted of which two
must be from section B.
The figures after the questions show the proportionate
marks awarded.
SECTION A.
1. How much heat is required to convert one lb. of
water (from 32°F .)*into steam at, t50, lbs) per sqsiane
pressure (abs.) and superheat it to 400° Fahr.? (το)
2. How much external work is done by the working
substance during the process described in question one?
(10)
3. A vessel of 10 cub. ft. capacity has in it four pounds
of a mixture of steam and water at 100 lbs. pressure;
twenty-five pounds of water at 60°F. are pumped into
the vessel. What is the resulting temperature, assum-
ing that there is no radiation of heat. (20)
4. If 10 pounds of air at 200°F. occupy 120 cub. ft.
what must be the pressure? (10)
5. How much heat is required to raise 15 cub. ft. of
*
ὡν
ΠΥ
“Δ
"ὦ ρὲ γον
δ.
Ὧν
Ὁ ΡΨ
ἄν, ἰφετε
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 425
air at 100 lbs. pressure per sq. in., from 60°F. to 100°F.
at constant volume. (10)
6. Define entropy. Calculate the increase of entropy
of one pound of water when heated from 520 FY to
760°F. (abs.). Find the further increase in entropy if
the water is completely evaporated at the higher tem-
perature. (20)
7. An engine, under ideally favourable conditions,
takes steam from a boiler at a temperature of 327.6°F.
and restores condensed water to the boiler at a tem-
perature of 212°F. What is the greatest amount of
work that such an engine can do per Ib. of steam? (20)
8. How would you calculate the volume of 1 Ib. of
steam? State the advantages of your method. (15)
g. State the laws of the permanent gases. (10)
10. Deduce! an expression which will show the work
done by a perfect gas when it expands isothermally
froma pressure P toa pressure P,. (15)
SECTION B.
11. In a test on a Peabody throttling calorimeter,
to obtain the dryness of steam, the following readings
were taken :—
Pressure in steam pipe (gauge) 85 lbs. per sq. in.
“in calorimeter (gauge) ie Seer ἐν τς
Temperature in calorimeter oe fad
Barometer reading 15 lbs. per sq. in.
Find the dryness of the steam.
12. In a test on a double acting Blake steam pump,
the following figures were obtained :—
Diameter of steam cylinder 4.5 inches.
3 of water cylinder ag ke
Length of stroke Head:
Average mean effective pressure
acting on steam piston 31.3 Ibs. per sq. in.
Average mean effective pressure
acting on pump plunger Se a eee
Duration of test 30 mins.
Total number of strokes 4200
ce
weight of steam used by engine 63 Ibs.
water pumped SOO
“ec
420 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE,
Find :—
(2); Thea EP ot ssteamvend:
(6) The ΠΡ of pump end:
(c) The mechanical efficiency.
(d) The volumetric efficiency.
(ὁ) The steam used per I.H.P. per hour.
TABEE OF PROPERTIES, OF SATLURALED
STEAM.
se eee alee op epee:
Sm oulyitae ct. Maken = δὲ Be Δὲ
mle Ha | aA | =| a7 =H he
τ 721.9911" 70.0" γι] ΠΟ Ὁ, τ 1820 9210
55 126:27 ἘΠ ΟΠ ἢ ἐπ 2: ΕΝ ΤΌΣΟ | Oty ἢ 173.6
3. | τὰ 2 ἢ 10G.84| ΕΘ Τ᾿ |S TORS 250.2012 τ ΗΟ,
A) τοσοῦ, |) 2 τ el 1128.67 L007-2 Ὁ: 20 9.51
Be ἡ τό2.22.} 130174 πγ1ῆ- WE ΤΟ ΘῈ ΚΟΥ, 3.5
6, 176.144) 28:6. 1 5.8 Ὁ = 005:22| οήϑοι ἢ 2161.67
20.) '227.95 1\\,196-0)3\ E151, 501 sO54:6) 140.8363 => το
66 | 2909.0 | 268.3 | 1173.0 | 904.7 | 0.4350 | 6.490
100 | 337,58) |/20710 |-1TSL.OM; (664.00) ΘΠ aos
μι
Sal
ro)
ios)
ty -t
oe)
lip
OV
Ww
ww
le)
O
ΤΟΥ τ ἡ ΝΘ ΤΕ 3, One ἢ 2 Θ ΤῈ
119 95 k
B.Sc. EXAMINATION.
DESIGNING.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO I
.
Ι. The air compressor in the thermodynamic labor-
atory has the following dimensions and particulars :— ;
High pressure, cylinder-diameter’..” 27, 10 ΠΕ: %
Low ‘pressure cylinder! diameter 2 er) ;
Length of stroke...’ v. Wis Oy hve eee ;
The main bearings ATS Stains: centre to centre 3
The cylinders are 40 ins. centre to centre. :
Maximum speed 8o r.p.m.
The cranks are overhung.
=|
A?
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 42
Design :-—
(a) Piston rod.
(b) Crank shaft.
(c) Main bearings.
(d) Connecting rod.
(6) Crank pin.
Assume that the maximum pressure on H.P. piston
rod is equal to the maximum pressure on L.P. piston
rod and that the discharge from L.P. cylinder is 40 lbs.
per sq. in. pressure (gauge).
Make pencil sketches of and dimension the parts de-
signed.
B.Sc. EXAMINATION.
DYNAMICS OF MACHINERY.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. How would you proceed to balance a horizontal,
compound steam engine with cranks at right angles?
2. A steam engine develops 1,000 H.P. at 100 r.p.m.
The flywheel weighs 40 tons and has a radius of gyra-
tion of 15 ft. Neglecting all hurtful resistances, and
assuming that the indicator cards have the same area
at all speeds, find how long the engine will take to get
up speed from rest.
3. In a loaded centrifugal governor, the pendulum
arms and the sleeve rods are of equal length. Find an
expression which will show the relation between the
‘speed of rotation and the radius at which the balls
rotate.
4. Explain a method of drawing a curve of control-
ling force for a pendulum governor, which also shows
the revolutions and radius at which the pendulum acts.
5. In a governor similar to that in question two, each
ball weighs six pounds and the sleeve weighs 40 lbs.
If the arms are each six inches long, find at what speed
the governor must rotate to be in equilibrium, when
the centres of the balls are three inches distant from
the centre line of the spindle.
6. A horizontal shaft, 4 inches diameter, rests in a
bearing six inches long. If the weight on the bearing
be 1,000 lbs. and the normal pressure uniform at all
423 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
points, find the work lost in overcoming the frictional
resistance when the shaft is making 300 r.p.m.
Assume 0.01 to be the value of the coefficient of iric-
tion.
7. A vertical shaft, 4 inches diameter, rests in a flat
pivot bearing, over the whole surface of which the
pressure is uniform. The weight on the bearing 15 1,000
Ibs. Find the work lost in overcoming the frictional
resistances when the shaft is making 300 r.p.m.
Assume 0.01 to be the value of the coefficient of
friction.
8. The time of a small oscillation of an engine con-
necting rod is second. The centre of mass is 20
inches from the point of suspension. Find the moment
of inertia of the rod.
g. An empty elevator car weighs 10,000 Ibs., and its
balance weights weigh 12,000 lbs. The four wheels
over which the rope runs weigh 500 Ibs. each, have a
radius of 2 ft. 3 in., and a radius of gyration of 2 it.
Find the torque which must be applied to the driving
pulley to make the elevator descend with an accelera-
tion of 4 ft, per sec.
10. A locomotive is rounding a curve of 400 ft. radius
at the rate of 4o miles per hour. The rails are 4 ft.
τὸ inches apart centre to centre. Find the effect on
the rails due to the gyrostatic action of the four driving
wheels. Each wheel is 5 ft. diameter, has a radius of
evration of 2 ft. 3 ins. and weighs 1,000 lbs.
FOURTH YEAR.
MACHINE DESIGN.
(Course for Students in Electrical Engineering.)
WeEpDNEspDAY, DEc. 17TH :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
(Figures in brackets give proportional marks. Avy
seven questions may be attempted.)
ety Explain with sketches the right method of caulk-
ing boiler seams and rivets. Discuss briefly the effect
of friction on the strength of riveted joints. (15)
J
«
"
ᾧ
»»--.--:-
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 429
2. Two bars of mild steel, 7” + τ΄, are to be con-
nected by a butt joint having a cover plate on each side.
Sketch the joint you would propose, and calculate its
percentage strength. Take diameter of rivets as 178”,
and ratio of tensile to shearing stress as 1.2: 1. (20)
3. Find an approximate expression for the tension at
the ends of a stretched wire of uniform section, in
terms of the sag, weight of unit length, and span.
Ends of wire are at same level. (15)
4. The main shaft of a steamship transmits 1,000
H.P. at 80 R.P.M., and is of mild steel 9/2” diameter.
It is subjected to a longitudinal thrust of 25,000 Ibs.
Find the resultant simple tensile or compressive stress
due to the combined torsion and compression. (20)
5. A pair of cast iron bevel wheels transmit 100 ἘΠΕῚ»
between shafts at right angles, which run at 200 and
too R.P.M. respectively. The smaller wheel is 30” in
greatest diameter of pitch circle. Find the numbers
of teeth, and show how to find the forms of the pitch
surfaces. Allowable stress 2,500 lbs. sq. inch. Pres-
sure per inch width of tooth not to exceed 300 Ibs. (20)
6. A cast iron pulley, 24” diameter, transmits 200
H.P. at 750 R.P.M., and has six arms. Find suitable
dimensions for these (assume rectangular section,
I
thickness == — > breadth, stress 2,000 lbs. per sq.
inch). (20)
Neglect stresses due to casting, or to centrifugal
force.
9. 1»
7. A slide valve has 2” travel, τε lap, and --
lead. Draw a Zeuner valve diagram, find the angular
advance of the eccentric, and mark the crank positions
at admission, cut off, release and compression. (20)
8. Describe the Renold high-speed chain, and explain
its action when worn. (15)
9. Discuss briefly the conditions under which worm
gearing may be expected to attain high efficiency . (15)
430 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
FOURTH YEAR.
MACHINE DESIGN.
ἀν. γὴν APRIL I7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Figures give proportional marks. Seven questions may
gi
be attempted).
1. In designing machine parts which are to be of
cast metal, certain limitations are imposed by the nature
of the material, and by the difficulties of moulding and
casting. Discuss briefly the various ways in which
these considerations affect the ‘design. (10)
2. Give some account of the methods adopted in
staying flat surfaces in boilers (such as the crown sheet
of a locomotive fire box), and explain how to work
out the strength of the stays required. (10)
A bar of mild steel (weight 0.3 Ibs. per cubic inch)
of uniform cross section, has one end attached to a
shaft whose axis is at right angles to the length of the
bar. Find an expression for the increase in length of
the bar under the action of centrifugal force, if the
shaft rotates with known angular velocity. (15)
4. The driving wheel axle of a locomotive has the
following particulars :—
Load on each wheel 18,000 lbs.
Distance between centres of wheels Aleta
δ sf Ξ of axle“boxes! 346%
Maximum value of coefficient of friction
between wheel and rail 0.3
Diameter of journals δ΄,
Diameter of wheel gee 6
Find the stress due to combined bending and torsion,
supposing the axle has to transmit the torque to one
wheel. (20)
A worm driven elevator hoists 2 tons at 100 feet
per minute. The hoisting rope is coiled on a barrel
19 inches diameter, secured to a worm wheel 24 inches
diameter, making one revolution for 20 revolutions of
the worm. The efficiency of the whole is 0.7. If the
worm shaft is 1% inches diameter, find the stress in it
due to combined thrust and torsion. (25)
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 431
6. Sketch the form of groove suitable for the rim
of a pulley driven (a) by a manilla rope, (0) by a wire
rope. Give some account of the causes which limit
the power transmitted by a rope in these two cases.
(15)
7. Show that in a spring ring of uniform thickness,
as used for piston packing, the diameter of ring when
unstrained should be from 1/7 to 1 25 greater than
the diameter of the cylinder bore. (15)
8. Find the thickness of the barrel of a steam cylinder
1&8 inches diameter by 15 inches stroke. Test pressure
200 lbs. per sq. inch. Give reasons for adopting the
formula you use. (15)
9g. Explain how to draw an-oval valve diagram.
Sketch such a diagram for a valve having 2” travel,
7/16” steam lap and 3/16” lead. Neglect the obliquity of
the connecting rod. (20)
10. During experiments on the torsional vibration
of the shaft of a certain steamship the following figures
were obtained :—
Effective length of shaft 3800 cm.
Diameter of shaft Best
Revolutions per minute 105
Mean relative angular displacement of
forward end of shaft relatively to
after end 0.118 radian
Maximum τ ude ὉΠ 2 105"
Modulus of rigidity of material of
‘shatt 828,000 kg/cm?
I.H.P. of engines (metric) iipt0. Ode
(One metric H.P. = 7500 kilogram-centimetres per
second.)
Find (1) the maximum stress due to torsion (in
kg /cm?),
(2) The mechanical efficiency of the engine. (30)
Ἢ 7 RED ONS JER GR ee eS RE κε YS a oe ae
432 , FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
FOURTH YEAR.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
(Course for Civil, Electrical and Mining Students.)
DECEMBER, 1902.
(Nine questions may be attempted.)
1. In testing the economy of performance of a boiler
installation, what measurements have to be made?
Explain how to determine from such measurements
(a) the efficiency of the boiler and (b) the efficiency of
the furnace. ey
2. Find the probable coal consumption for heating
purposes in a building requiring 10 million lbs. of
steam per annum, having given the following data :—
Average steam pressure (gauge), 5 lbs. per sq. in.
Average feed temperature, 140°
Average equivalent evaporation per
ΤΌΣ Ὁ coalyirom and, at 2122s 8.0 lbs.
Latent heat of steam at 20 lbs. per
sq. inch (absolute), 955° ΒΡ
Temperature corresponding to that
pressure, 227, Ὁ:
Latent “heat of%steant αὐ 2. 966 4B TAs
3. Describe the functions of the various valves and
fittings attached to an ordinary steam boiler.
4. Describe briefly some one form of mechanical
stoker.
5. A single cylinder non-condensing steam engine,
working at τοῦ lbs. per sq. inch (gauge), cuts off at
0,66 stroke when working at maximum power. The
cylinder is 13” dia. & 14” stroke. Assuming a diagram
factor of 0.8, and a mechanical efficiency of 0.85, es-
timate the probable BeH.Ps at250 ὉΠ ΝΠ
ΤΟ H5i—"O4055.
6. Discuss briefly the two methods of governing
steam engines.
7. A single cylinder gas-engine giving 10 B.H.P. at
200 R.P.M. has one impulse every two revolutions,
and overcomes a uniform resisting torque. Assuming
that the torque exerted by the engine is uniform dur-
ing one-half-revolution and is then zero during three
Pe να τὺ γὴν
ἫΝ
oa
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 433
half-revolutions, find the coefficient of fluctuation of
speed. The fly-wheel weighs 2,500 Ibs., and has a ra-
dius of gyration of 2.5 feet.
8. A gas engine uses 60 cub. ft. of producer gas per
I.H.P. perhour. Find the cost (for fuel only) of one
I.H.P. per year of 3,000 working hours, having given,
‘Thermal efficiency of producer, 0.80
“ value of coal per Ib., τ ΘΟ B21 Ui:
δ value of gas per cu. ft., ΠΡῸΣ Bb. 1 .U:
Cost of coal per long ton, $5.50
g. Sketch the form of indicator diagram obtained
from a pump in good working order, drawing from a
tank, and discharging into a pipe under pressure.
What information can be gained from such a diagram?
10. What are the chief points upon which the good-
ness, or otherwise, of an air compressor depends?
Explain how the merit of the compressor from a ther-
modynamiec point of view may be expressed numeri-
cally?
POURTH™® YEAR.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING.
Monpay, APRIL 6TH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9. TO 12.
(Ten questions may be attempted.)
(Figures give proportional marks.)
1. Give a brief account of the nature and causes of
_the various corrosive _actions occurring in steam
boilers. (10)
2. Describe the construction and working of a Green's
Economizer.
A Boiler Installation burns 100,000 Ibs. of coal per
day of τὸ hours. The actual evaporation at 125 155.
per sq. inch by gauge is ὃ lbs. per lb. of coal, from a
feed temperature of 120°. If an economizer is fitted
which will raise the feed temperature to 220°, but which
necessitates the use of mechanical draft supplied by a
fan using 1200 lbs. of steam per hour, find the increase
in the capacity of the plant.
κι τῆ ρον «sq, inchyabs., 4— 865
corresponding temperature == 353. (55)
434 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
3. Explain how to find the “Referred Mean Pressure”
in a multiple-expansion engine.
A triple expansion condensing Corliss engine is to
be directly coupled to a generator giving 1000 K. W.
at go revolutions per minute. The working pressure
is 180 lbs. per sq. inch (gauge). Find suitable dimen-
sions for the three cylinders, assuming that at full load
the cut off in the H. P. cylinder is at 0.4 stroke, and
taking a piston speed not exceeding 600 ft. per minute
the Referred Mean Pressure will be about 33 lbs. per
sq. inch. The total rate of expansion may be 12. (15)
4. Under what conditions would you recommend (a)
a surface condenser, or (b) a jet condenser for a steam
power plant? Give your reasons. (10)
5. What are the various methods of igniting the
charge in gas engines? Discuss briefly the practical
difficulties met with in the operation of large gas en-
gines. (10)
6. Describe the nature of the chief chemical. actions
occurring in the Dowson gas-producer. (10)
7. Having given the working pressure and sizes of
cylinders in a locomotive, show how to determine the
weight required for adhesion. (10)
8. Explain the various ways in which the power of a
locomotive is expended when hauling a train. How is
the mechanical efficiency of the engine determined?
(12)
9. What are the functions of the “Engineer’s Brake
Valve” in operating the Westinghouse Air Brake? (10)
10. Describe the method of determining the resistance
of a proposed ship by means of model experiments.
(12)
τι Give a typical account. of the expenditure of
power in the case of a marine engine.
A proposed ship will have a total resistance (at 25
knots) of about 430,000 lbs. Find the approximate
LHP. of the-main eneines. (12)
12. Describe the Parsons Steam Turbine, and explain
briefly the leading advantages and disadvantages of
this type of machinery as compared with the reciprocat-
ing engine. (12)
:
¥
ν᾿
aa
τ
i
ἐς ζῶν,
a
7 υ.'
? ὍΝ
“MECHANICAL ENGINEERING, 435
FOURTH YEAR.
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY
WHO 2
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 -—-MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
(Figures give proportional marks.)
(Seven questions may be attempted.)
1. How is the viscosity of a lubricating oil expressed
numerically? Describe the method of determining
this quantity experimentally. (10)
2. Give a general account of the results you have
obtained in a series of trials on a simple non-condens-
ing engine either (a) with a fixed cut off and variable
speed or (b) at constant speed with various rates of
expansion, stating the conclusions you draw as to the
variation in the economy of such an engine. (12)
3. In a certain gas engine trial the following figures
were obtained :—
Ανεγασε [ΠΠ|.Ρ. 98.0
Total gas per hour 1236 cubic feet
Calorific value of do. goo B.T.U. per cu. ft.
Total jacket water per hour 4170 Ibs.
Rise in temp. of do. 85.1° Fah.
Make a heat account for the trial and state what fur-
ther information would be required in order to render
such an account complete. (15)
4..In a test of a Lancashire boiler fitted with an
economizer the following were the results :—
Average absolute steam pressure 93.8 10: per sq. in.
temp. corresponding 39a ὁ. Bah!
temp. of feed entering
economizer 83.5°
“temp. of feed entering boiler 226.3° “
~
‘ weight of water evaporated
per hour 3,552 lbs.
weight of coal fired per hour 336 Ibs.
calorific value of do per lb. 14,200 B.T.U.
temp. of air in boiler room 98° Fah.
temp. of gases entering econo-
mizer 566° ©
“
ce
“ce
{{
Δ 50 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
Average temp. of gases leaving
economiser ΟΣ
“ weight of air used per lb. of
coal f 27.21 DS:
“ Radiation loss per hour 242.0008 Bel-U;
Value of Kp. flue gases O2320 8,
‘fi SO. HOP τ 887.307 t
Find (a) the efficiency of the furnace, (b) the efficiency
of the boiler alone, and (c) the efficiency of the econo-
mizer. (20)
5. A triple expansion pumping engine having three
single acting pump plungers gave these figures :—
1.H.P. of steam cylinders 783
Area of each pump plunger 855 sq. in.
Stroke of each pump plunger 60 in.
Average revolutions per min. 21.18
Water pressure in discharge pipe 81.5 lbs. per sq. in.
Vacuum in suction pipe 2.8 lbs. per sq. in.
Height of disch. pipe gauge above
suction gauge 9.8 feet
Find the mechanical efficiency of the engine, if the
slip of the pump is neglected. (15)
6. In a calorimetric test of a sample of coal the fol-
lowing figures were obtained :—
Weight of water in calorimeter 5.5 lbs.
Water equivalent of calorimeter 0.5 105.
Temp. of water at beginning of ignition 30.0°C.
Temp. of water at end of ignition ΠΟΥ Ge
Time taken to burn sample 10.0 min.
Mean radiation loss ‘ 0.03°C. per min.
Original weight of crucible and dry
coal 8.984 grammes
Weight of crucible, ash and unburnt
coal after burning 8.579
Find the calorific value of the coal in B.T.U. per
pound. (15)
7. The belt and brake pulleys of the belt tester are
27% inches diameter. During a run, the torque meas-
ured on the dynamometer was 1450 lbs. ins. and the
effective load on: the weighing machine was 97% Ibs.
The sum of the pull on the tight and slack sides of the
belt was 110 lbs.
Find the efficiency of the transmission.
be
6g 2 Cn et heh,
ὙΠ,
MECHANICAL ENGINEERING. 437
f
If, during the above test, the belt was on the point
‘of slipping, find the coefficient of friction between the
belt and the rim of the pulley.
Take the arc of contact as one half the pulley cir-
cumference. (20)
8. How would you make tests as to the relative ex-
cellence of two samples of piston-rod packing ¢ (12)
g. An air compressor requires 2 effective ἘΠΕ Sper
pound of air compressed per minute. The air is used
in a motor furnished with a gas-fired preheater and
giving the following results :—
B.H.P. of meter 10.2
Air used per minute - 9.85 lbs.
Temp. of air entering preheater 180° Fah.
Temp. of air leaving preheater ROO Tae
Gas used per minute 1.68 cu. ft.
Calorific value of do. per cu. ft. 350 B. LU.
Kp. for air 0.238) di,
What is the efficiency of the whole system, and what
is the efficiency of the preheater? (15)
FOURTHS YEAR:
THERMODYNAMICS.
‘THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Figures give proportional marks. Eight questions may
be attempted).
1. State and prove Carnot’s Principle. (10)
2. Explain by the aid of a diagram the various ways
-in which energy is expended when heat is emploved
in warming and evaporating water. (10)
3. Find an expression for the greatest amount of
work which can be done, per Ib. of steam, under ideally
favourable conditions, by an engine taking steam from
a boiler at temperature 7, and restoring condensed
water to the boiler at temperature Τὸ (12)
4. Steam of 97 p.c. dryness at a pressure of 115 Ibs..
per sq. in. abs. is throttled and reduced in pressure to
80 Ibs. abs. without loss or gain of heat. What will
be its final dryness?
438 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
DL =='87033 805-0 2 1808.7 Is ΞΘ EO)
5. An ammonia compression refrigerating machine
(having no expansion cylinder) works with adiabatic
compression. The temperature limits are 10° and 80°
Fah. Draw a temperature = entropy diagram for the
cycle, and calculate approwimately from it the cooling
effect per (compressor) I.H.P. per hour. Assume that
the ammonia is dry saturated vapour at the end of
compression.
Entropy of liquid at 80°F. = + 0.1023
i ip “ LOE, == 0/0501
ἣ vapour “80. Ἑ. = - 0.9193 (20)
6. In a gas engine receiving and rejecting heat at
constant volumes /’, and V,, and having adiabatic
expansion and compression, show that the efficiency is
V.\ y—1
i pel!
( = (10
. On the supposition that the specific heats of a gas
ae NOOR OE AC. by the expressions
A, ἐπι a HOR cis 308 ae —$s5f
(where a, ὃ and s are constants.)
show that for any adiabatic change
Fy 7)
οὖ Da πὸ ΞΞΞ Constant: (15)
8. A slab of metal of known conductivity and capacity
for heat has one face subjected to a simple harmonic
fluctuation of temperature. Sketch a diagram showing
the temperature of the metal at any instant at various
depths. Prove that at any instant the rate of change
of the temperature gradient as the depth increases, is
proportional to the rate of increase of temperature
with respect to time. (20)
9. Explain how to determine the “missing quantity”
in the trial of a steam engine. What causes influence
the magnitude of this quantity? (15)
10. Show that in a perfect gas the molecular kinetic
i
. . . ἴθ .
energy of translation in unit mass = CT (15)
METALLURGY
FOURTH YEAR:
ELECTRO-METALEURGY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 15TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12,
. What is the main principle on which the electro-
ly ἘΝ refining of metals is based. How is it, for example,
that although from a sulphuric acid solution, silver is
deposited more readily, and iron less readily than cop-
per, we can yet obtain pure copper at the cathode from
an anode containing these three metals.
2. Describe generally the plant and conduct of an
electrolytic copper refinery. Give some idea of the
size, output and electrical power of a modern refinery.
3. What is the usual current density and voltage
employed in copper refining, and what would be a
suitable composition and temperature for the electro-
lyte. Discuss shortly the effect of a considerable in-
crease or decrease in the current density and mention
a case in which a very high current density is employed.
4. Compare the cost of electrical heating in a furnace
having an efficiency of 70% with that of coal heating
in a furnace having an efficiency of 20 %. _ Electrical
energy costs $20 per horse-power year of 8000 hours.
Coal of 7600 centigrade calories costs $4 per short
ton.
I Joule = 0.24 gram centigrade calories.
r horse power == 7464 Watts? πὶ 115. ΞΞΞ Asagorams:
Describe carefully how you would obtain, by an
electroly tic method, commercially pure gold and silver
from an alloy containing ΤῸ gold, 85 %__ silver
the remainder copper with a little lead.
σι
METALLURGY: 441
FOURTH YEAR.
METALLURGY.
GOLDS SIPVERIAND BAD.
; SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Mention any important differences between the
roasting of lead and of copper ores, and between the
furnaces employed for roasting lead and copper ores.
@. Describe with sketches a blast furnace for smelting
lead ores. Mention any important differences between
a lead and a copper blast furnace and give reasons for
these differences.
3. Under what conditions would you smelt lead ores
in a reverberatory furnace. Describe with equations,
the reactidns that take place during the different stages
of the operation.
4. Enumerate the different commercial methods of
extracting silver and gold from lead bullion. Describe
each in a few words and give a clear account of one of
these processes.
5. Represent, by means of diagramatic schemes, three
of the more important methods of “parting” alloys
of gold and silver.
What are the relative advantages of the methods
you indicate?
6. Represent fully, by means of a diagram, the
Russell process for extracting silver from its ores.
Give in writing some further particulars with regard
to the roasting and leaching of the ores.
FOURTH YEAR.
METALLURGY (ADVANCED).
Monpay, APRIL 13TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Mention the more important chemical and physical
properties of zinc which render difficult the extraction
of this metal from its ores. State how these diffcul-
ties are overcome in the ordinary method of treating
442? FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
zinc ores and give a clear description of the operations
involved in obtaining zine from blende.
2. Write a short account of the metallurgy of tin.
3. Give an account, illustrated by a diagramatic
scheme, of the Mond process for extracting nickel from
Sudbury nickel copper matte.
4. Describe carefully the method of obtaining mer-
cury from its ore; sketch and describe a good form of
furnace for this purpose.
5. Obtain a formula for the velocity of flow of hot
air up 4 chimney, neglecting friction. How many
cubic feet per second of furnace gases will pass up a
chimney 100 feet high and 4 feet internal diameter sup-
posing that the gases are at 300°C., the external air
at 15°C. and the frictional resistance of the furnace
and flues are equivalent to a pressure of 0.5 inches of
water opposing the passage of the gases.
One cubic foot of air weighs 0.081 105. at o°C.
One cubic foot of furnace gas weighs 0.084 lbs. at
o°C.
One cubic foot of water weighs 62.4 lbs.
Make the usual allowance for the friction of the
gases in the chimney.
it eT
tx ἘΣ
£
aot ρον τὰ Sree
ν SD
nye tee
|
4
q
.
:
s
ῃ
MINERALOGY
THIRD YEAR—(Chemistry and Mining Courses).
~ MINERALOGY.
SATURDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903 :—MoRNING, 9 TO I.
1. Give the symbols of Naumann and the indices of
Miller corresponding to each of the following expres-
sions :—
OSM, OSA. cs 1a S.C τ Ὁ GSE
Ὁ ὮΝ ΟΝ ΘῈ MOGs
2 .
pen SON 3
2
2. Explain the relationship of unit, brachy and
macropyramids and prisms in the Orthorhombic sys-
tem.
3. Give the characters of the Monoclimic system of
Crystallography.
4. Explain any five of the following terms :—Hemi-
morphism, Isomorphism, Centrosymmetry, Dendritic,
Botryoidal, Biaxial.
5. Give a classification of the Natural Oxides, naming
the principal members of each group.
6. Name some of the principal Sulpharsenites and
Sulphantimonites, and briefly describe one member of
each group. ;
7. Briefly describe Sphalerite, Pyrrhotite, Cuprite,
Spinel, and Limonite.
8. Describe the principal reactions obtained by heat-
ing minerals in closed tubes, or in open tubes, and state
what they indicate.
9g. What are the principal reactions of the following
elements, as employed in determinative mineralogy :—
Arsenic, Calcium, Fluorine, Manganese, Sulphur,
Titanium ?
10. Give the blowpipe reactions οἵ᾽ each’ of the fol-
lowing minerals :—Stibnite, Cinnabar, Chromite, Cas-
siterite, Manganite.
11. Describe two of the crystal models shown, giving
the notation of the faces. Name also and describe
any five of the mineral specimens.
MINING ENGINEERING
THIRD, YEAR.
MINING. -
APRIL, 1903.
1. Describe and sketch some well-known form of
percussion rock drill which uses steam or compressed
air for power.
2. Name and describe briefly the general types of
valve mechanism used-on rock drills, and state the
characteristics of each (rate of stroke, force, etc.).
3. Describe very concisely one of the best recent
forms of rock drill, and state the present status of
electric drills as compared with air drills.
4. What are the important points of difference be-
tween high and low explosives? What is the nature
of an explosion in each, and at what rate does the
shock pass through the substance of the explosive in
each case?
5. What is the difference between Gelignite and or-
dinary 40 p.c. dynamite? What is the strongest ex-
plosive used in mining?
6. What is a detonator, and what are its functions
in blasting? Why are larger detonators required in
some cases than others?
7. If you were sinking a rectangular shaft 6’ X I0’
in cross section, through hard homogeneous rock,
how would you place the blast holes and in what order
would you shoot them?
8. Describe the construction, use and “clean up” of
a sluice in Hydraulic Mining and state the conditions
under which one or more drops and under-currents
could be added with advantage.
9. Give detailed description of the machinery of a
modern gold dredge, and explain the devices ordinarily
used to catch the gold.
το. Explain the method in which the above described
dredge would be used on a group of claims situated
in a gravel flat one mile from a river and 20 feet above
the mean level of the water in the river.
ra,
te ὁ ἐν υ et
PEAS Tes
ty re
MINING ENGINEERING. 445
THIRD YEAR.
ORE DRESSING.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
¥ . . τ ᾿ .
Figures in [ | show the maximum mumnber of marks which
may be given for each question.
τ. Define Ore Dressing and show why it is usually
necessary to dress minerals. [5].
2. Enumerate in the order of their usefulness the
characteristics which are of considerable importance in
separating minerals, and explain briefly the method of
making use of each. [5].
3. Show the derivation of the so-called Rittinger for-
mula for the free fall of spheres in still water, and ex-
plain why it is only approximately true for spheres of
mineral or ore. [Io].
4. Show why this free sphere formula is not directly
applicable to ore-dressing problems.
State the conditions which really exist in classifying,
and state the approximate relation of actual results to
the theoretical tree’ sphere.” ΤῸ]
5. Describe in detail the experimental determination
of the size and velocity ratios of two minerals as re-
cently carried out in the laboratory. [10]
6. lf galena of an average diam. of 0.6 mm. just set-
tles in an upward current of 140 mm. per sec., and
calcite of an average diam. of 0.8 mm. just settles in
a current of 68. mm. per sec., what are the largest
grains of calcite that can be separated from galena
grains ranging from 4 mm. diam. to I mm. diam. [10].
7. Describe some well-known form of jaw rock-
breaker, explain its action in detail and state the ap-
proximate capacity per horse power. [5].
8. Compare breakers having overhung jaws with
those having underhung jaws (Dodge type) in re-
spect to quantity and quality of output, consumption of
power and wear and tear per ton of rock crushed. [5].
g. Describe a steam stamp, and state approximately
its consumption of water and power, its output and the
cost of crushing per ton. [5].
440 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE. -
10. Describe two fine crushers, one especially effec-
tive on hard rock, the other on soft, and show that
each would be unsatisfactory for crushing rock of the
Stheresont.. {{3||-
11. Compare jaw. and spindle breakers and show the
advantage of each. [5].
12. Show the relations that exist between the dia-
meters of a pair of rolls, the diameter of the maximum
rock fed and the diam. of the max. lumps produced.
[7].
13. Two similar crushers may be run on the same
rock, one fed free and the other crowded full; show
what happens in each case and compare the work done
in quantity and quality, and the power consumption.
[5]:
14. Describe very concisely the different kinds of
screens commonly used and the most important me-
chanical devices for operating them, and state the ap-
proximate max. and min. dimensions of each kind of
screens. [8].
15. What is the practical minimum size of screen?
Why is this the case and what device is used on finer
material? -.[5].
FAGULTY OF] APPELED SCIENCE:
FOURTH YEAR:
ORE DRESSING AND MILLING.
WEDNESDAY, DEc. 17TH :—AFTERNOON,
1. Describe the action and discuss the governing
principles in the case of a multiple compartment jig
working on an ore with two valuable minerals in a
simple gangue.
Compare this case with that of simple jigging with
one mineral in a simple gangue.
2. Describe some form of quick return slime table,
name the several adjustments and state and discuss
the effect of each.
3. Given a silicious ore containing ΤΟ p.c. of copper
iron sulphides with some free gold. (Cu. 3 p.c. Au.
O:30Z.):
Outline a concentrating mill of about 200 tons capa-
MINING ENGINEERING, 447
city and state the several pieces of apparatus, their
sequence, and the approximate sizes and quantities of
material going to each.
» 4. Given 100 tons a day of an ore of quartz with con-
siderable clayey material. The whole assaying 0.8 oz.
gold.
The ore yields 50 p.c. of its gold to stamp milling
without concentration and 30 p.c. to direct cyaniding
of the mill tails.
Outline the whole plant and describe in detail the
leaching method employed.
5. Give a concise but comprehensive description of a
typical case of either hydraulic mining or gold dredg-
ing.
FOURTH RY EAR:
MINING.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO I.
1. In the following case of prospecting by deep dril-
ling, what kind of a drill would you use, how many
holes would you plan, how would you lay them out,
and how much would you expect them to cost per foot.
Assume a property 1000 ft. square supposed to lie
centrally over the axis of a saddle ceef. The country
is moderately hard slate and the axis of the reef 18
supposed to be about 300 ft. below the surface and
almost horizontal, while the sides, after rounding, are
supposed to dip about 60° on each side of the center
line.
2. What is the difference between gelatine dynamite
and ordinary 40 p.c. dynamite, and what are the con-
ditions under which each may be used with great ad-
vantage? What is detonation and how does it differ
from a lower order of explosion?
3..In a mine 1000 ft. deep and lable to encounter
heavy rushes of water, what type of pumps would you >
recommend and what would be your method of guard-
ing these pumps against drowning. You may assume
an ample steam plant at the surface near the shaft.
29
448 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
4. Compare tail rope and endless rope haulage and
set forth the advantages and disadvantages of each.
5. Explain the parts played by gas and coal dust in
mine explosions and show the value of “safety” ex-
plosives in this connection.
6. In the case of a coal seam 6 ft. thick lying 500 ft.
deep under the western boundary of a property one
mile square. If the coal dips 5° to the east and the
surface of the property is approximately flat, and 15
barren and not very wet,
(a) Where would you place your shafts; (b) what
would be the diameter of the shaft and barrier pillars;
(c) describe in detail the complete method of working
out one group of rooms or section of long wall.
7. In the case of a mine on a large mass of rather
soft ore in country which will not stand well, show how
you would work the deposit by the method of square
setts or by some modification of this method which
will require less timber.
8. In a Jarge mine as above, in which three levels 100
ft. apart are all being worked at once, show how and
to what extent a system of ore pockets at each level
may increase the hoisting capacity of a given set of
engines, as compared with direct loading at the same
three levels.
g. In the case of a mine already developed to 500 ft.
on a chute of concentrating ore. Assume the mine to
be in operation with an equipment of good second rate
machinery capable of putting out 150 tons a day.
Assume also a fairly good concentrator belonging to
the mine with sufficient capacity to handle the full out-
put.
What would be your procedure if called upon to ex-
amine, assay, and report on the mine and mill with a
view to valuing the property for clients holding a three
months’ option.
10. Assume that your examination above shows 100,-
ΟΟΟ tons of ore “in sight” and that drill holes and “one
sided” exposures show what will probably develop into
another 100,000 tons, and that you have no present
means of judging of the more remote prospects of the
mine.
:
'
;
d
q
MINING ENGINEERING. 449
If the ore assays $13, the tails assay $1.50 and the
operating costs are $3 for mining, $2 for milling, $1.60
for freight and smelter charges, and 4oc. for general
expense and profit and loss,
(a) What sum would you think a fair price for the
mine?
(b) If it could be shown that 60 cents a ton could
be saved in operating costs and better recovery, by
spending $100,000 in renewing and remodelling mine
and mill machinery, what would you advise the owners
and why?
FOURTH YEAR.
MINING AND METALLURGICAL MACHINERY
AND MINING vs. METALLURGY OPTION.
THURSDAY, APRIL 9TH, 1903:—MORNING, Ὁ TO I.
Notre.—Students who have taken the Mining option are
to answer questions I-10 inclusive.
Students who have taken the Metallurgy option are to an-
swer questions 1-6 inclusive and r1-14 inclusive.
A.
Assume the case of a mine on a large body of
silicious pyrrhotite and chacopyrite in somewhat shat-
tered ground. Development has proceeded to 500 ft.
and has proved 750,000 tons of shipping ore. Drilling
below 500 ft. has given evidence of the continuity of
the ore body to 800 ft. at least, but a characteristic of
the locality is that ore bodies seldom hold their size
below 1000 ft.
The mine which makes 200 gallons of water per
minute had been laid out for a daily output of 500 tons
on a system of square setts combined with filling, but
a fire destroyed the whole surface plant and caused a
complete temporary abandonment.
The mine produces smelting ore only, and lies in
rough country 4 miles from and 1000 feet above a river
450 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
along which runs a railway. At a point 5 miles from
the mine it is practicable to build a dam and generate
sufficient power to operate the mine at all seasons.
The problem is to equip the mine for a daily output
of 600 tons, to provide a line of transportation from
mine to rail, and to build a power plant and electric
transmission line sufficient to serve the whole property.
The solutions must be given under the following 6
heads :-—
1. Specify the general features of the hoisting plant,
the types of engines used and the approximate power
consumption.
2, (a) State the probable number of rock drills re-
quired and specify the type of air compressors and the
approximate power consumption.
(b) Specify the type of pumps used and their ap-
proximate power consumption.
3. Specify the general features of the transportation
line from mine to rail, and describe briefly the loading
and: unloading stations and the ore pockets at the rail:
State also the approximatt power consumption of the
transportation system.
4. Assume the dam and hydraulic plant completed
and specify the general features of the electric plant,
namely, the type and approximate size of the dynamos
and their voltage, the general features of the’ trans-
mission linc, the tvpes of the several main motors re-
quired, etc. State also the approximate efficiencies of
the several parts of the system.
5. Explain briefly the method of wiring of some one
of the important motors used and show its advantage
as compared with those of some other well known type
which might be used for the same service.
6. Assume what ever drop you consider commer-
cially justifiable and determine the size of wire needed
for the transmission line.
MINING OPTION.
7 and 8. Asume the practicability in the above case of
eetting an ample supply of good steam coal delivered
by rail atys¢ dollars. per: ton rand «take. the’ cost oma
Ὕ ΤᾺΝ
τῶ
ὌΝΟΝ
el ΨΨΒΣ σὰς pe es
MINING ENGINEERING. 451
boiler plant at 30,000 dollars (not including engines)
whereas the water power plant and dam would cost
250,000 dollars (exclusive of dynamos and other elec-
trical machinery).
Compare steam power with hydraulic electric power
and demonstrate the superiority of one to the other
under the circumstances named.
ἘΣ
Ὁ and 10. Assume the case of a coal mine requiring a
total air current of 90,000 cu. ft. per minute. Split into
three courses, 4, B, and C, which require 40,000, 20,000
and 30,000 cu. ft. of air respectively.
iar is: ἢ X 9 ft. 5,000 ft. long, B is 6 X 8 ft. 8,000
ft. long, and Cis 5 XX 10 ft. 3,000 ft. long which splits
must be regulated and what peal openings must be
used in the “box regulators?
METALLURGY OPTION.
11. Give a concise description and specify the ap-
proximate dimensions of a blowing engine capable of
supplying air for an iron blast furnace making 120 tons
of pig iron per day from average ores of about 55 apsGe
iron.
Assume the steam pressure to be 120 Ibs. per sq. in
and deliver the air to the stoves at 12 lbs. per sq. in
12. In what way has information been obtained with
regard to the constitution of alloys. Draw complete
equilibrium curves (1) for a series of alloys which fornr
simple solutions; (2) for a series of alloys containing
one or more compounds. (Take an ideal case if you
cannot give an actual one.) Explain carefully what
the different lines in the diagram represent and show
what happens during the cooling of an alloy.
13. Enumerate the different microscopic constituents
that exist in steel. ‘How would you recognize them
under the microscope? Draw the equilibrium curves
as fully as you can for the carbon iron series, and ex-
plain as far as you are able, by means of this diagram,
the manner in which the constityents of steel are form-
ed. In what class of steel and after what kind of-treat-
452 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
ment would you expect to find each of these constitu-
ents?
14. For what purposes are chrome steels, nickel steels,
and manganese steels specially suited. Give a short
account of the composition and of the mechanical and
physical properties of these steels.
PHYSIGS (EXPERIMENTAL)
FIRST YEAR.
EXPERIMENTAL PHYSICS—SOUND, LIGHT
AND. HEAT.
Turspay, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Find the absolute zero on the Fahrenheit and on
the Réaumur Scale.
2. How would you determine the latent heats of
water and steam? It is found that a kilogramme of
water at 100°C. mixed with a kilogramme of melting
ice without loss of heat, gives two kilogrammes of
water at the temperature 10.36°C.; find the latent heat
of water.
3. Describe the Regnault hygrometer. How would
you calculate the relative humidity from a knowledge
of the dew point?
4. Explain what is meant by critical temperature and
pressure. How were the permanent gases liquified,
and what are the necessary conditions for obtaining
liquid air in quantity?
5. Find the quantity of heat conducted per hour
through each square meter of the surface of an iron
steam boiler 0.8 cm. thick, when the temperature of the
inner surface of the boiler is 120°C. and that of the
outer 119.5°C. The conductivity of the 1ron may be
taken as 0.19 in C. G. 8. units.
6. Describe and explain the action of (a) Crookes’
radiometer, (b) Boys’ radiomicrometer.
7. State the first and second laws of thermodynamics.
8. How would you calculate the maximum work that
could be obtained from a perfect heat engine?
g. Describe the method of comparing the values of
the velocity of sound in different gases by means of
Kundt’s Tube, explaining the principles on which it
depends. Could this method be adapted to compare
the velocities in wood, glass, and the different metals?
454 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
10. Given a Spectrometer, a prism and a sodium
flame. Describe carefully (a) the preliminary adjust-
ments to be made, (b) the method of finding the angle
of the prism, and (c) how to measure the minimum
deviation for:sedium light.. Give the formula by which
you could then calculate the index of refraction of the
prism for sodium light.
tt. Describe some form of Photometer, and explain
the principle on which it depends.
12. The length of a violin string is 33cms. and its
mass is: .524gm. What tension must be applied to it
to make it vibrate 280 times per second?
SECOND YEAR
* EXPERIMEN DAL ΡΝ ΘΙ 5:
ELECTRICITY AND MAGNETISM.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. State what you know of the Leyden Jar discharge.
How would you measure the period of oscillation of
the discharge? Describe the arrangement of the
Leyden jars and connections in the experiment of the
“alternative path.”
2. Define the term “surface density of electricity.”
How does the distribution of electricity depend on
the shape of a conductor?
Explain the discharging action of points and its
application to protection of buildings from lightning.
3. Describe the action of (1) a simple type of Hert-
zian ‘vibrator, -(2) a:coherer,
4. Show by careful diagrams the distribution of mag-
netic lines of force round (a) a long straight wire, (0)
a circular coil, (c) a solenoid through which electric
CULFENTS! pass.
Find the strength of the magnetic field, (a) at the
axis, (b) at the end of a solenoid 50 cms. long, 2 cms.
in diameter wound with 1000 turns of wire and carrying
a current of 5 amperes.
5. Show how the magnetism developed in iron de-
pends on the strength of the magnetizing current.
ee
1
|
,
) }
if
PHYSICS (HXPERIMENTAL). 405
What is meant by magnetic hysteresis?
Contrast the magnetic properties of soft iron and
steel.
6. What is the effect of temperature on the electrical
resistance of metals, alloys and electrolytes? How
would you determine the temperature coefficient of
copper wire between 0°C. and 100°C?
7. Four large storage batteries in series, E.M.F. of
each 2.2 volts and internal resistance of each .002 ohms,
send a current through two external resistance of .I
‘and ΟἹ ohms arranged first in series-and then in paral-
lel. Find in each case the current drawn from the
cells and the watts absorbed in the resistances.
8. State Farady’s laws of the induction of electric
currents.
An earth coil mounted on a horizontal axis placed
in the meridian is rotated at a uniform speed. Find
(a) The E.M.F. induced in the coil at each position
in its revolution; —~
(6) The average E.M.F.
9. Find (a) the magnitude and direction of the force
experienced by straight vertical wire 20 cms. long
carrying a current of 20 amperes in a uniform horizon-
tal north and south field of 6000 lines per square cen-
timetre.
(0) The E.M.F. produced in the same wire when
it is carried due east in the field at a rate 5 metres per
_ second.
10. Describe the construction and action of an alter-
nating current transformer.
What type of transformer is used for electric weld
What type of transformer is used for electric weld-
ing?
11. Describe and explain the action of any fwo of the
following :
(a) Electromagnetic interrupter of an induction
coil;
(6) Wehnelt interrupter ;
(c) Telegraphic relay.
SURVEYING AND GEODESY
SECOND YEAR—(Ciwil and Mining).
SURVEYING.
Tuurspay, APRIL 16TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
A surveyor has two 100 ft. chains of exactly equal
ine one a band and the other a link chain. The
band weighs 2 lbs., and the link chain 11 lbs. Cal-
culate the difference in length, due to sag only, that
he will find when measuring 1500 ft. with both chains,
using a pull of 20 lbs., and lengths of Ioo ft.
2. Prove the general equation of the polar planime-
ter. When does the result obtained from the instru-
ment not give the correct area? Supposing a plani-
meter to be adjusted to measure in units of 1 sq. in.,
what alteration would be necessary to make it measure
in units of 2 sq. ins.?
3. Explain the principle of a vernier. Why is its
use necessary? Determine the total length and num-
ber of divisions on a vernier designed to give readings
to 15 seconds from a circle divided to 20 minutes.
4. Obtain the general equations used in reducing the
observations taken on a stadia survey. (a) The fol-
lowing readings were taken to the corners of a qua-
drilateral with a transit whose stadia constant was 99.0
and whose (f + c) = 1.4 ft. Calculate the area of
the figure.
Bearing. Vert. Angle. Stadia Interval.
282° 35/ + 14° 50’ 2.87
316. χ0 ἐν οτος 1.45
ΒΟ 20 — 2 19 1.32
ΤΩΣ 10 Oe 39 3-99
5. State what adjustments are required to put the
compass given you in perfect working condition.
Mention each test made. State in what direction the
part must be moved when adjustment is required.
SURVEYING AND GEODESY. 457
6. Explain the advantages of using the traverse
method when making a transit survey. The following
bearings were taken with a surveyor’s compass when
the magnetic declination was 9° BON: Give "the
bearings as they would have been read on a transit
traverse, the instrument having been set to read 0°
when pointing in the direction of astronomical north.
ἌΝ τ το a(2)7 Ns 41209 Wi + (3) 55. 7°
γος ὧν (5,9. 72 220 WV,
THIRD) YEAR.
PRACTICAL ASTRONOMY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Find the local mean time corresponding to 114
30” οὗ sidereal time in Montreal on April 7, 1903. (a)
Find the local mean time at the same instant in longi-
tude 4} er East.’ The longitude of Montreal is 4?
54” 18.678
2. What corrections are to be applied to an observed
altitude of the sun at sea? (a) The meridian altitude
of the sun’s lower limb on January 1, 1903, was ob-
served in longitude 3 hours West to be 30° 10’ 15”.
Eve of observer 30 ft. above the level of the sea. Find
the latitude.
3. Polaris was observed to have an altitude of "43"
” 207. on* March %1, 1903,: at 10” 30" sidereal time.
Find the latitude of the place. (N.A. method).
4. Ursae Minoris (p. 418, N.A.) was observed,
from a point in latitude 43° 20’ N., on March 7, 1903,
to have an altitude 40° 11’ 08”. Represent on a dia-
gram the quantities available for ealculating azimuth.
Give the formula you would employ for this purpose
and the values of the angular quantities required for
the calculation.
5. State briefly the method of determining latitude
by the zenith telescope and obtain the formula for the
reduction of the observations.
458 FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
6. Calculate the azimuth of 6. Ursae Minoris when
at greatest elongation on December 20, 1903 (p. 337,
ΝΛ Watitude uN. 455) 30%
7. What is the general equation of the transit instru-
ment in the meridian? State how each of the quanti-
ties in it is to be obtained.
THIRD YEAR—(Mining Engineering Course).
TRANSPORTATION.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Mention what features you would take into con-
sideration when choosing a location for a common
road to a mine.
(a) There are two possible locations for such a
road, one being 4.9 miles long with 5 per 100 grades,
and the other 7.4 miles long with 2 per 100 grades.
The roads would cost $2,500.00 per mile when graded
and finished with a good earth travelling surface.
Assuming the weight of a waggon to be 1,800 lbs. and
the tractive power of a horse to be 125 lbs. at a speed
of 3 miles per hour and to vary inversely as the speed,
calculate which would be the better road to build for
the transportation of 8,800 tons of ore. Wages for
team and driver, $3.50 per day.
2. A locomotive has the following dimensions :—
Diam. of cylinder 20”, stroke 26”, diam. of driving
wheels 72’, weight on driving wheels 123,000 Ibs.,
total weight of engine and tender 258,000 lbs., boiler
pressure 200 lbs., per sq. in.
(a) What is its maximum tractive power? (6)
Assuming that it can develop a mean effective pressure
of 85 p.c. boiler pressure at a speed, of 10 miles per
hour, and that its tractive power varies inversely as its
speed, what is its tractive power at a speed of 35 miles
per hour
3. When relocating a piece of railroad, it was found
that by increasing the length by 2,300 ft. and the cur-
vature by 85°, the summit could be reduced by 55 ft.
The grades at the summit are the ruling grades on the
— γεν —
Gar
SURVEYING AND GEODESYe 459
line and the traffic is 35 trains each way per day.
What amount could profitably be spent in constructing
the new line?
4. What is “momentum?” Give a formula for cal-
culating the equivalent velocity head. (a) Assuming
the locomotive in question (2) to be running up a grade
of o.80 per 100 and around a 2° curve at a speed of
40 miles per hour, calculate how far it would run before
the speed was reduced to 35 miles per hour, the total
weight of the train being 1,100 tons.
s. Give a statement of the principal items in a con-
struction estimate for a Canadian road, with a full
explanation of how you would obtain the quantities
for each item in any particular case.
6. How is the Railway Committee of the Privy Coun-
cil constituted? Mention the engineering questions
that must come before it for settlement.
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS—(Civil Engineering).
RAILWAY ENGINEERING.
Fripay, APRIL 17TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
The blue print shows the condensed profile of an
operating division of a railroad, giving mileage, grades
in feet per mile, and curvature. The freight is prin-
cipally grain and is hauled in freight cars of 60,000
105. capacity and 34,000 105. dead weight. The loco-
motives have the following dimensions: weight on dri-
vers, 123,000 lIbs.; total weight engine and_ tender,
258,000 Ibs.; diameter of driving wheels 72’, stroke
28’: diameter of cylinders 20”; boiler pressure 200 lbs.
with a mean effective pressure of 85 p.c. at τὸ m.p.h.;
weight of caboose 24,000 lbs.
τ. What is the maximum weight of train that one
~ locomotive can haul over the division in both directions
with a minimum speed of τὸ ni.p.h.?
2. If the ruling grade were reduced to 25 ft. per mile
what would the saving in operating expenses be when
hauling 15,000,000 bushels against the mileage and
returning light? Cost of a train mile 85 cents.
400 ἘΑΔΟΌΙΤΥ OF APPLIED SCIENCE.
3. Supposing the ruling grade to have been reduced
to 25 ft. per mile, design a station yard for Beaverton
capable of holding three road trains and 10 cars of
local freight. The town lies to the right of the train
and the total angle of the curve is 60°. Make the
drawing to a scale of roo ft. to the inch showing land,
required position of buildings, arrangement and length
of tracks, position of ‘switches; also a profile to
scate of roo ft. == 1 in. horizontal: and 10 ft. = 1 in.
vertical showing your grade line.
4. Explain why vertical curves are used and give
the theory by which their length is sometimes cal-
culated. Calculate a vertical curve with a rate of
change of 0.12 per 100 ft. connecting the grades at
M.P. 160; these would intersect at sta. 845 + oo with
an elevation of 640.0.
5. It is proposed to cut 16 ft. off the summit at M.-P.
160. Assuming that money can be borrowed at 5 p.c.
and that.there is a daily traffic of 9 trains per day each
way, calculate the amount that can be economically
expended in cutting off the summit.
6. Give a brief description of how you would pro-
ceed to make a railway location between Richmond
and Montreal mentioning all the information that you
would consider to be necessary and explaining how
you would obtain it.
7. Give the general principles upon which an inter-
locking plant is designed and enumerate its principal
parts, explaining the duty of each.
FOURTH YEAR.
GEODESY.
WEDNESDAY, APRIL 8TH, 1903:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
1. Define ‘Probable error of an observation.”
(a) The longitude of the transit pier, McGill Col-
lege, was determined in 1884, from Harvard College
Observatory as 4” 54” 18.54% + *.045. In 1892 the
longitude was found. by direct telegraphic connection
with Greenwich, to be 4” 54™ 18.678 + δος. What
is the “weighted mean” and what.is its probable error?
SURVEYING AND GEODESY. 461
2. Obtain a formula for the correction for sag in the
measurement of a base line by a steel tape, suspended
at intervals.
(a) Assume the modulus of the tape to be 27,000,-
000; the sectional area .0144 sq. in.; the weight per
foot run .0046 lb., and find the pull which will balance
sag in a length of 50 feet.
3. Outline on the accompanying map a system of
primary triangulation for a survey of Canada, having
in view the work already done in the United States.
Give the character of the triangulation which you
would suggest for use along each main chain. Show
the positions of base lines and astronomically deter-
mined stations.
4. If “polaris” were observed at an altitude of 40°,
for azimuth, and the inclination of the horizontal axis
of the transit found to be 35”, what would the cor-
responding correction be?
(a) If the collimation error were 10”, what azi-
muth error would it represent?
5. Prove that in the reversible pendulum the centres
of oscillation and suspension are interchangeable.
6. Give a brief account of the development of know-
ledge as regards the figure of the earth. (a) Upon
what data does the present accepted form HOUT |
7. What are the essential points in which “precise”
leveling differs from ordinary engineering levelling?
8. Adjust the following angles of a ἐν Ξε πρίν τ νς
Ape=— ΟΣ 20 131: Ae Ak Πρ 0, eat ASS
233%, r= OO” 52. “lea = 52" 12’ 44”; OSs be
{τὸ D,. == 30° 34/ 40”. D, = 35° 53’ 08” for the
ee adjustments and derive formulas by which to
adjust them for the side equations, without disturbing
the angle adjustment.
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS
FACULTY OF LAW
1903
Pee
*y
aay)
yar
Garba
Ny RD,
JO tia
A ὧς,
᾿ τ "
Pa: ὠνῇ ᾿
; wa Τ ἢ ᾿
Wilk Peegs, ; ‘
ee
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS
FIRST YEAR.
CIVIL PROCEDURE.
THURSDAY, APRIL 2ND, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiner,. . _.Gorpon ἣν. MacDouGaL.t.
τ. Define an action at law. Explain the nature of
personal, real and mixed actions.
> What are the conditions precedent to a valid ac-
tion?
3. What are the powers and jurisdiction of the Su-
perior Court:
ist. As a Court of first instance ἢ
and. In Review?
4. What cases from this Province are appealable to
the Supreme Court of Canada? Under what circum-
stances can a further appeal be taken to the Privy
Council ?
5. Give the general rules to be followed in the draft-
ing of a declaration.
6. What is the general nature of an affirmative plea
and of a partial demurrer?
7. Describe the different kinds of preliminary ex-
ceptions.
8. What is the nature of a proceeding in warranty?
Describe the different kinds of warranty and explain
the advantages of warranty proceedings.
9. What is examination on discovery? Who are sub-
jected to this examination and when can it be resisted
as of right?
τὸς What is the general nature of:
t. An incidental demand?
. An intervention?
. A commission for the examination of witnesses ?
bo
Ww
400 FACULTY OF LAW.
FIRST YEAR.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
EGAN hie ce eR ad Ripe ROBO AE LOM.
1. Explain the effects of the Cession of Canada upon
the legal system.
2. What steps were taken by Lord Durham or in
consequence of his Report, to remedy: (1) the waste
of public money ; (2) the condition of squatters ; and (3)
the evils due to “Clergy reserves?” Explain these grie-
vances.
3. Compare the influence of the Canadian Senate
with that of the House of Lords and the Senate of the
United States.
4. Can the Lieutenant-Governor of a Province “re-
serve’ a Bill, and, if so, in what circumstances.
5. What are the qualifications of a Senator?
6. It is desirable to make certain clauses form part
of every policy of fire insurance. Can this be done
by the Parliament of Canada? χρ δίῃ.
7. What is direct taxation? Discuss some of the
cases on the subject.
8. What do you mean by conventions of the con-
stitution? Give examples.
g. What is meant by saying that the British Parlia-
ment is ‘sovereign’ ?
το. Explain, very briefly, the constitutional position
of the Cabinet.
FIRST YEAR.
HISTORY’ OF LAW OF LOWER CANADAY
TuESBAY, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
EROIMINET eh Bi deere tees eka et SNe RO Fe ΠΟ ΣΟΥ»
1. Explain briefly the origin of Customary Law in
France, and state in what part of France it chiefly pre-
vailed.
κων.
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. A6T
What other system of law besides customary en-
ὑμὴν into the formation οἱ the Civil Law of France,
and how were the two combined?
What was the Code Michaud, and discuss briefly
ore it was legally binding as law?
What was the name of the Ecclesiastical Courts
in “the old regime, and what was the relation between
civil and ecclesiastical law?
=. What relation does the Code Napoleon bear to
the old French law and to our own law? |
6. Give the substance of the provisions of the Treaty
of Paris 1760 in reference to the religious worship of
the inhabitants
Under what auspices were the first civil and
criminal courts organized after the full establishment
of ON British regime?
Mention certain ordinances between 17 74 and 1701
in ta to law and judicial proceedings
g. When did the Union Act come into ἙΠΤᾺ and state
what important laws were passed in 1854?
10. What tribunal has the right of trying election
contestations, and when was their jurisdiction created ?
FIRST YEAR.
OBLIGATIONS.
THURSDAY, MARCH 26TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiuner,.. 0.0.) wei. vs .. .. Mr. Atme GEOFFRION.
1. When is a stipulation in favour of a third party
invalid? Give examples of valid and invalid stipula-
tions in favour of third parties. What is the effect of
the invalidity when it exists?
2. When, if ever, is such a stipulation revocable? If
it is, who can revoke, and what is the effect of the re-
vocation ?
3. When does a contract for the alienation of a thing
not transfer immediately the ownership (4) between the
parties, (b) as regards third parties? In those cases
what is necessary for such transfer?
408 FACULTY OF LAW.
4. Define a condition. Define the different kinds of
conditions.
5. Give the difference between indivisibility and soli-
darity.
6. What is the effect of impossibility to execute an
obligation ; (1) when it existed when the obligation was
created; (2) when it happened afterwards.
FIRST YEAR.
LAW OF PERSONS.
TuESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO #2.
Examiner,.. .. .. ..... .. GorDoN W. MacDouGALt.
t. Under what circumstances can an alien become a
British subject within Canada? How can he renounce
his British citizenship ?
2. What are the legal effects of civil death?
3. What constitutes legal domicile? What con-
ditions are essential to the acquisition vf a domicile of
choice?
4. What is the meaning of provisional possession in
connection with the property of an absentee? What
are the obligations of those in possession if the ab-
sentee returns?
5. What grounds of absolute nullity can be invoked
to set. aside a marriage’? Ι
6. What parties are considered to have ἃ sufficient
interest to invoke absolute nullity in the case of mar-
riage, and what must be the nature of the interest in
each case?
7. What obligations arise from marriage as between
the consorts themselves?
8. What is the nature of an alimentary debt? Bg-
fween what parties does the debt exist and how can it
be satisfied ?
9. What are the effects, as between consorts. of a
judgment in separation as to bed and board?
το. What measures mav be adopted by the plaintiff
prior to obtaining a final judement in such an action?
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 46.
FIRST YEAR.
REAT PROMERIY AW.
THURSDAY, APRIL I6TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
ἜΑ penne eine ae hen ROR, MARUER!
1. What is ownership? Give some of its attributes.
2. In whose interest is ownership limited? Give
examples.
3. Distinguish between ownership and possession.
4. What is good faith in possession, and what is bad
faith ?
5. How do they differ as regards fruits?
6. What do you mean by fruits? Into what classes
are fruits divided? Give examples of each kind.
What difference is there as to their mode of percep-
tion? Explain the perception of civil fruits by an ex-
ample.
7. For what improvements and expenses, even when
they no. longer exist, is the possessor entitled to be
compensated? What expenses and improvements do
you mean?
8 What is usufruct? What are the rights ot the
usufructuary over mines and quarries?
What inventory is the usufructuary bound to
make? When? How?
το. What is the nature of the security he is bound to
vive?
11. What do you mean by a generat usufructuary,
usufruitier universcl? How does he contribute to thre
debts?
12. What is the object of registration?
12. How it is effected?
14. What are the rights of the Emphyteutic lessor
for the recovery of the rent? Can he act as in ordinary
lease?
470 FACULTY OF LAW.
FIRST YEAR.
ROMAN LAW.
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
AAA ee ee ne ee Wi fle kOe τ ὙΠ ΟΝ
1. Explain briefly the rights of a filius familias as
regards property.
2. What were the several kinds of dos, and what hap-
pened to them at the dissolution of the marriage?
3. What is meant by fructwwmn perceptio as a mode of
acquiring property?
4. Explain clearly the difference between a servitude
and a right under an obligation.
5. What was the right of superficies?
6. What was the Roman Law as to holograph wills ?
7. Explain the law (a) as to a legacy of a res aliena;
(b) of an immoveable which is subject to a hypothec.
8. A. who dies intestate after Justinian, leaves pater-
nal grandfather, a maternal uncle, and a grand-niece,
the grand-daughter of his brother. How is his estate
divided? Is our law the same? Explain.
9g. What was the cautio damni infecti?
το. In the formula what was the intentio?
SECOND YEAR.
CIVIL PROCEDURE.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MOoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiner cs ote. peek og ERC YEG) IN VANCE
1. Outline the procedure necessary to effect the sale
of property belonging to minors.
2. What is meant by submission? Distinguish be-
tween amiables compositeurs (mediators), and ordinary
arbitrators. What general rules must be observed by
each? How are awards attacked?
3. What proceeding should be adopted when a num-
ber of persons act as a corporation without being le-
gally incorporated or recognized? By whom is the
τ
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 471
suit brought? .Draft the first proceeding in the suit.
On whom is it served, and how are costs collected?
4. State the rules governing the grant of prohibition.
5. What are the effects of sheriff's sales? In what
cases can a deposit be exacted from bidders?
6. State what species of bail can be given by persons
arrested under capias. Explain fully.
7. Describe the proceedings in cases of resale for
false bidding. Draft the petition.
8. What persons can be examined, and in what cases,
after judgment, in aid of execution?
g. Draft a complete opposition to withdraw in a
seizure of moveables under execution.
το. Draft a petition for habeas corpus ad subjiciendum.
SECOND YEAR.
LAW OF CORPORATIONS
SATURDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1.»Define a corporation.
2. What were the names used in Roman and in early
French Law for corporations ?
_ What are the leading features of the declaration
of 1743 registered by the Council of Quebec, regarding
Mortmain?
4. What is provided by the General Clauses Acts of
our modern law respecting the right of corporations
governed by them to hold real estate?
5. What are the four important General Clauses Acts
governing corporations organized under our law, and
to what class of corporations do they respectively ap-
ply?
6. What are the formalities for the issue of preference
stock and what. species of preference can be given to
its” holders?
. What are the different remedies given to a Com-
pany to enforce pavment of calls from_ shareholders ?
8. Out of what funds are dividends to be paid, and
what funds are subject to prohibition for the payment
thereof?
412 PACULTY OF LAW.
g. Is it legal to issue shares of a Company at a dis-
count either during the ordinary operation of the Com-
pany or when it is in difficulties, and cannot sell the
stock at par:
10. What is the provision of the Provincial Letters
Patent Act as to subscription and payment of stock at
the outset, and what are the provisions of the Canada
Companies Act, 1902, on this subject.
SECOND YEAR.
PUBLIC INTERNATIONAL IAN?
THURSDAY, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12
Examinenys cone ee) eo a) Sele cae Ie ROR | NES Bienoe
1. What is the effect of a change of international
status on the obligations of states: ,
(a) When a state is extinguished by being divided
mto two or more distinct states?
(0) When one state absorbs another?
(c) When a state, without losing its identity, loses
a portion of its territory which is annexed to another
state ?
(d) When a severed part is erected into an inde-
pendent state?
2. How was the “Monroe Doctrine’. originally for-
mulated in 1823, and what interpretation was given to
it by the United States to justify its intervention in the
delimitation of the boundary between Great Britain
and Venezuela in 1895, and its abstention from in-
tervening in the recent blockade of Venezuelan ports
by Great Britain and Germany? ,
3. Give a brief sketch of the origin and of the pre-
sent position of the controversy between the United
States and Great Britain in regard to the Alaska
boundary.
4. Upon what principles was the violation of territory
excused in the case of the seizure of the “Caroline” in
American waters by the Canadian forces in 1837?
5. Discuss the liability of the United States and
Great Britain respectively for alleged breach of neu-
trality in :—
Ge
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. Αἱ
(a) The Fenian Raid;
(Ὁ) The St. Alban’s Raid.
6. State the “three rules” adopted by the Treaty of
Washington for the detefmination of the Alabama
claims, and examine the question whether they modify
the former practice of nations in regard to the re-
sponsibility of a neutral state for the acts of its subjects
in building and arming ships of war for a belligerent
and in supplying a belligerent with war material.
7. What are the effects of carrying contraband:
(a) On the vessel;
(b) On the innocent cargo?
8. During the Crimean war a French cruiser cap-
tured a Hanoverian ship on a voyage from Lisbon to
Hamburg with a cargo, a portion of which was salt-
petre. The French prize court found upon the evidence
that the real destination of the saltpetre was Russia,
and that it was uncertain whether the saltpetre was to
be forwarded overland to Russia from Hamburg, or
whether the ship, after discharging the rest of her
cargo at Hamburg, would carry the saltpetre to a
Russian port in the Baltic. Was the saltpetre seizable
as contraband upon either theory?
9. Can a blockade be maintained against neutrals
while relaxed against the belligerent? Can an effective
blockade be maintained by a cruising squadron?
SECOND YEAR.
PRESCRIPTION, LEASE—MUNICIPAL.
TuHurspAY, Marcu 26TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. What exceptions are perpetual ?
What prescription applies to interest or revenues
received by an agent guoad his principal?
Ouid of fruits and revenues received by a possessor
in bad faith?
By an heir who is excluded from the succession by
reason of unworthiness ?
2. What are the special elements required in the ten
years’ prescription by subsequent purchasers?
474 FACULTY OF LAW.
Quid if the purchaser becomes in bad faith after the
acquisition ?
Ouid after this prescription has been renounced or
interrupted ?
3. What is the prescription of the action against
architects and contractors, based upon the warranty
of the work they have done or supervised ?
Explain the different systems upon the question.
4. What is the obligation of the lessor as to defects
of the thing leased:
(1) Existing at the time of the lease?
(2) Occuring subsequently ?
5. What is the obligation of the lessor as regards
disturbances caused by third parties, in the exercise of
their rights, or by public authority?
6. W hat are the rights of the lessor and of the lessee,
upon the improvements and additions made by the
latter during the lease?
. What are the obligations of the lessor in a can-
ἘΠΕῚ of lease or hire of work?
Those of the lessee?
8. At whose risk is the thing when the workman fur-
nish labour and skill and materials?
When he furnish only labour and skill?
Ouid of his rights to recover his salary in each case,
when the thing is destroyed?
9. What persons compose a local council? A coun-
ty council? A board of delegates?
10. What is the jurisdiction of the board of dele-
gates? How is the board called upon to exercise their
duties? Who acts as president? As secretary-treas-
urer? :
SECOND YEAR.
REAL PROPERTY LAW.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiner) 00/0 hein Se oe & ote oo BROS NUARDERS
τ. Under what tenures is land in this province held?
Wherein do they differ?
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 479
2. What changes has the Code introduced as to
alienation by Contract? What part does registration
play?
3. What are the various modes of acquiring owner-
ship?
4. What formalities, as to third persons, must be
accomplished in the case of transmission of ownership
by death?
In the absence of these formalities, what effect has
a real right granted by the owner.
5. As regards the transfer of ownership, wherein
does a promise of sale differ from a sale?
6. How is land forming part of an official number
described? What is the effect of the registration of a
deed of sale of land when no official number is given
and the official plan is in force?) Can the defect be
remedied and how? From what time dees the regis-
tration avail?
7. How can a wife sell her own land when her hus-
band refuses to authorize her:
(a) When she is separate as to property ;
(b) When she is common as to property?
8. What claims give a purchaser the right to with-
hold the price? To what extent can he withhold?
9. What security has the Vendor for the payment
of the price due him? How preserved?
10. What is the effect of a Sheriff’s sale on the real
rights upon the land sold?
What rights does it not purge?
11. Of what is the prosecuting creditor the war-
rantor in case of a sheriff's sale?
476 FACULTY OF LAW. ~-
SECOND AND THIRD YEARS.
COMMERCIAL LAW.—(First Paper.)
INSURANCE—CARRIERS—BANKING.
SaturpaAy, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Eramintr oooh Ae Baas oe ee Oba πίον
A merchant, believing his stock to be worth $15,-
000, insures it with each of three Insurance Companies
for $5,000. The stock is in reality worth only $7,500.
By a fire it is damaged to the extent of $4,500.
What is the liability of the several companies
2. A steamer is built for a navigation company and
is to be delivered on the 1st May ensuing. The build-
ers insure it for its full value. A sub-contractor having
a lien upon it for the amount due him, insures it for
the amount of his claim. The navigation company
insures it for the amount of the prospective profits of
the first season’s running. A loan company insures it
for the sum advanced for its construction and secured
by mortgage. The captain appointed to command it
insures it for the amount of three seasons’ salary under
a written engagement. In the month of March the
steamer is totally destroved by fire.
Can all the policies be enforced? Give reasons.
3. When may the insured make an abandonment to
the insurer, and what is its effect?
4. A company refuses to pay a claim under an ac-
cident policy on the ground that the death was not
accidental. When sued, it pleads non-tulfilment of a
condition of the policy requiring immediate written
notice of the accident.
Can the plea be maintained?
5. Who are common carriers, and what is their lia-
bility for loss or damage of things entrusted to them?
Define “‘Charter-party” and “Bill of Lading?”
A ship has just been built.
tate the procedure preliminary to her registration.
Under the Railway Act what should the arbitra-
tors take into consideration in determining the com-
pensation due to an expropriated proprietor ?
INI OD
7
:
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 477
g. What business is a bank specially prohibited from
carrying on, and are there any exceptions ¢
10. What are the provisions of the Bank Act as to
dividends?
SECOND AND THIRD YEARS.
CRIMINAL LAW.
THURSDAY, APRIL 2ND, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiner, .. .. ..THE Hon. Mr. Justice DAvIDsSON.
1. What three elements are essential to the existence
of an extradition crime? What principle is asserted
in the Extradition Act, and generally found in the
Treaties with ‘regard to political offences?
2. Within what time after his committal for surrender
must a fugitive be surrendered and conveyed out of
Canada? Jf the prescribed time is permitted to lapse,
what are his rights and how would you assert them?
3. In respect of questions which may tend to crimin-
ate a witness or to establish his liability to a civil pro-
ceeding,
(a) May he, if compelled to answer, protect him-
self?
(b) Where do you find the law, and is it applicable
to evidence given under any provincial enactment?
4. What are the rights as to giving evidence,
(a)jOf the-aceused person; ©
(b) Of the husband or wife of the accused person.
5. State the classes into which crimes are divided
with respect to the numbers of peremptory challenges,
and how many are allowed in each of such classes?
6. When can a husband or wife steal fro meach other?
7. Explain “doli incapax,” “doli incapax sed malitia
supplet’; “doli capax.”
8 What must be the nature of a threat or induce-
ment, to exclude evidence of the resulting confession ?
Is a confession admissible which has been obtained
by an artifice, as for example by the false statement
that an accomplice has confessed?
478 FACULTY OF LAW.
"9. Draw a plea of justification to an indictment for
libel. By what imperial act was it first made possible
to plead the truth of a libel?
το. State the several methods whereby a bill of in-
dictment may be laid before a grand jury. In. what
respect did the Code change the pre-existing law?
τι. Explain the purpose and extent of the Crown's
right to order a juror to “stand bya’
12. .Define:—‘“Perjury”; “Bigamy”; “Dwelling
house.” : δ
13. Give as nearly as you can the proclamation for
the dispersion of rioters. By whom and how ought it
to be read? What is the punishment for disobeying
its commands?
14. What is homicide? When is it culpable? With-
in what time from the cause of death must death take
place?
16. Give the Code definition of an assault.
16, When is drunkenness an excuse for crime and
when not?
17. Can there be an accessory before the fact to
manslaughter? State reasons and any possible ex-
ception to the rule you assert.
18. Where do you find the law in this Province gov-
erning the writ of Habeas Corpus:—
(a) In relation to criminal or supposed criminal
matters ν ὶ τ
(b) In relation to persons restrained of their liberty
otherwise than for criminal or supposed criminal mat-
ters?
SECOND AND THIRD YEARS.
SUCCESSIONS: [GIFTS ANDESUBSi! DUO:
TurspDAy, APRIL 14TH, 1903:—MoORNING, 9 TO ΓΖ.
Examiner, .......THE Hon: Mr. Justick DoGHERTY.
First eight questions only to be answered by Second Year
Students.
All twelve questions to be answered by Graduating Class.
τ. What is the distinction between the legitimate and
the irregular succession ? 4
'
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 479.
In what respects if any do the positions of the lawful
and the irregular heir differ :
(a) As regards the seizin;
(b) As regards liability for debts of the succession?
2. What limitations does our law impose upon free-
dom of disposal of property by will? What is the
source of our law in this regard? Mention the prin-
cipal difference between it, and the French customary
law.
3. In determining the order in which relatives of a
person deceased are called to his succession, 15 prox-
imity in degree of relationship to him, alone to be con-
sidered? If not, what other matters require to be
taken into consideration?
4. Upon what grounds may an heir who has accepted,
attack his acceptance ?
Upon what grounds may one who has renounced
attack his renunciation?
In what case may the creditors of such heir have his
acceptance or renunciation set aside, and what are their
rights upon such acceptance or renunciation being set
aside?
5. What formalities are essentiat to the validity of the
holograph will?
6. To what extent is the particular legatee liable for
the debts of the testator:
(a) Personally?
(b) Hypothecarily ?
If he be so liable, has he any recourse for such debts
paid by him, and if so what recourse and against whom?
7. What is the extent of the lability for debts of the
succession :
(a) Of the universal legatee;
(b) Of the legatee by general title;
(c) Of the ascendant donor who takes, in an abin-
testate succession, an object by him given to the de-
ceased?
8..Who may demand a partition? Against whom
must it be demanded? When may it be demanded?
What is its effect as regards ownership of the property
partitioned ?
31
480 FACULTY OF LAW.
g. What are the special requirements of law as re-
gards the form of execution ot gifts miter vivos? What
is the effect on non-compliance with such requirements?
10. What conditions, 1f any, permissible in onerous
contracts, are prohibited in gifts wter vivos7
What is the effect of a gift made subject to such con-
ditions ?
11. A substituted immoveable property 1s seized upon
and for-'a debt of the institute: > ‘Thevcuratoreto, the
substitution opposes the seizure.
Is his opposition well founded? Reason for your
answer.
12. A. bequeathes a property to B. in usufruct, pro-
viding that at B.’s death said usufruct shall pass to C.,
that at C.’s death said usufruct shall pass to D., and at
D.’s death the property shall pass to D.’s children.
What is the effect of the disposition? What is the
nature of the right of each of the legatees?
How would B.’s right be affected should C. and D.
die before B., and D. leave no children?
Should C. and D. both die before B., and D. leave
children, what would be the right of such children ?
What would be the right of such children of D.,
should all the legatees take in turn the benefit of the
bequest? Reasons for your answers.
CIVIL PROCEDURE AND EVIDENCE,
THIRD YEAR.
TUESDAY, APRIL 7TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
Examiner? soso, Be hee ee, ΕΝ ον: ΟΝ Aaa Oe
1. Explain the nature of judicial sequestration. In
what cases does it lie and how can it be obtained?
Have courts any power to decree sequestration in cases
other than those specified by law?
2. What is conservatory attachment? ‘Describe the
scope of this remedy, illustrating by typical cases.
Draft the initial proceeding in any case to which it
applies.
3. A., a trader, submitted a statement of his assets
1
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 481
and liabilities to his creditors in April, and showed an
apparent surplus of $15,000. In October of the same
year A. made a judicial abandonment of his property,
ficit of $20,000, and professed inability to
showing a de
account for the shrinkage. What remedy is open to
a creditor, and how would the conduct of A. be qual-
ified in law? Draft the appropriate proceeding.
4. State the rules governing the grant or refusal of
mandamus.
5. Classify judicial admissions, and state when they
can be divided.
6. What is a Petition of Right? In what cases is it
tented ?
7. A..sells B. all the stock in trade and good will of
a grocery, and binds himself not to re-enter the same
business in the same city. Is such a covenant legal?
Explain what recourse B. has in the event of a breach
by A. of such covenant. Draft the first proceeding.
8. What are the use and object of discovery and
inspection of documents? When can they be resisted
and for what reasons?
9. State when appeals lie from interlocutory judg-
ments, and how they are instituted.
10. Before what jurisdiction can suits for the infringe-
ment of letters patent of invention be taken? Draft
an action of this kind. Enumerate the defences to
such actions. When should scire facias be taken?
THIRD YEAR.
COMMERCIAL LAW.—(Second Paper.)
(For Third Year only.)
SALE—BILLS AND NOTES.
SATURDAY, APRIL IITH, 1903 :—MOoRNING, 9 ΤΟ 12.
TOU CLUS 7 gts Nak hy Ll va 2 Toa Tease ERO. SMILE.
Τ᾿ ον: eS the loss in the following cases :—
f a . sells B. a horse having a disease hi
it subsequentlv dies? é pe ΝΕ
(b) Quid if at the time of its death it were too late:
for B. to take a redhibitory action?
[482 FACULTY OF LAW.
(ὦ If the horse have the disease at the time of the
sale, but be killed by a railway train without fault on
the part of B. or the railway company?
(d) If B. be in fault in allowing the horse to stray
on the railway line?
(ὁ) If A. have only promised to sell the horse to
B. but have given delivery of it?
2. At the time of eviction the thing sold has de-
teriorated through the buyer's own neglect.
What has ‘he a right to claim from the seller?
3. When a litigious right is sold, how may the debtor
obtain his discharge from the buyer of the right? Are
there any exceptions?
4. What are the rights of the holder :—
(a) When the drawer of a bill is a fictitious person;
(b) When the payee is a fictitious person?
5. What is meant by an “accommodation party” to
a bill, and what is his liability upon it? Will it be dif-
ferent if the holder, when he took the bill, knew him to
be an accommodation party?
6. When is notice of dishonour dispensed with?
THIRD YEAR.
CONSTITUTIONAL LAW AND OBLIGATIONS:
DECEMBER, 1903.
τ. Describe the conditions which led up to the Que-
bec. Act.
2. What is “responsible government?’ When was
it introduced into Canada and why?
3. What is “direct taxation?” Who can impose it?
Illustrate your answer by cases.
4. In an act it was provided that in every policy of
insurance it should be an implied term that the com-
pany should not be liable if there was a prior insurance
not disclosed and assented to. Could this be done by
the Parliament of Canada or by the Province? Ex-
plain.
s. What is meant by saying that the cabinet is un-
known to the law?
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 483
Answers in separate book.
1. Enumerate and explain fully the different incapa-
cities to contract, giving all the rules concerning them.
2. What is lesion? Give the principal rules of law
on that subject.
3. What is the “actio pauliana”’? Give the conditions
for its existence and its effects.
4. In what cases is a person responsible in damages
towards another, independently of any pre-existing
‘obligation? Explain fully.
5. What is subrogation? When and under what
conditions does it take place? What are its effects?
THIRD: YEAR.
HISTORY, AGENCY AND®°*PARTNERSHIP, AND
CORPORATIONS.
SaTuRDAY, APRIL I8TH, 1903:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. What other system of law besides customary ΘΠ
tered into the formation of the Civil Law of France,
and how were the two combined? we
2. Under what auspices were the first civil and
criminal courts organized after the full establishment
of the British regime?
3. Mention certain ordinances between 1774 and 1791
in relation to law and judicial proceedings °
4. What are the leading features of the declaration
of 1743 registered by the Council οἱ Quebec, regarding
Mortmain ?
5. What are the formalities for the issue of pre-
ference stock and what species of preference can be
given to its holders?
6. Is it legal to issue shares of a Company at a dis-
count either during the ordinary operation of the Com-
pany or when it is in difficulties, and cannot sell the
stock at par?
7. What are the different remedies given to a Cone
pany to enforce payment of calls from shareholders :
484 FACULTY OF LAW.
8 How does the contract of Mandate differ from the
contract of Lease and Hire of services?
9. What are the powers of a commercial agent with
regard to documents of title entrusted to him by the
owner?
10. In case of a dissolution of a partnership, what is
the rule as to the payment of the debts of the firm and
of the debts of the individual partners ?
THIRD YEAR.
INTERNATIONAL LAW—(Public and. Private).
Tuurspay, APRIL 16TH, 1903:—MORNING,'9 TO 12.
Exantncrsac cc ule Sas poe Bees oe ROFS A AELEOR:
1. How was the “Monroe Doctrine” originally form-
ulated in 1823, and what interpretation was given to it
by the United States to justify its intervention in the
delimitation of the boundary between Great Britain
and Venezuela in 1895, and its abstention from inter-
vening in the recent blockade of Venezuelan ports by
Great Britain and Germany ?
2. Upon what principles was the violation of territory
excused in the case of the seizure of the “Caroline” in
American waters by the Canadian forces in 1837?
3. What are the effects of carrying contraband:
(a) ‘On the wessel’;
(b) On the innocent cargo?
4. During the Crimean war a French cruiser cap-
tured a Hanoverian ‘ship on a voyage from Lisbon to
Hamburg with a cargo, a portion of which was salt-
petre. The French prize court found upon the evidence
that the real destination of the saltpetre was Russia,
and that it was uncertain whether the saltpetre was to
be forwarded overland to Russia from Hamburg, or
whether the ship, after discharging the rest of her
cargo at Hamburg, would carry the saltpetre to a
Russian port in the Baltic. Was the saltpetre seizable
as contraband upon either theory?
~
5. Can a blockade be maintained against neutrals
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS. 485
while relaxed against the belligerent? Can an effective
blockade be maintained by a cruising squadron?
6. What are the sources of the rules of Private In-
ternational Law in the Province of Quebec?
7. What is the effect of a consent of the parties that
the foreign law should be ascertained by the Court by
a reference to foreign statutes and authorities?
8. What law will our Courts apply for the deter-
mination of:
(a) The formal validity of a marriage;
(b) The capacity of the parties to marry;
(c) The effect of the marriage on the property of
the consorts in the absence of marriage covenants ;
(d) The capacity of the wife to make contracts?
g. An illegitimate domiciled in England dies intestate
leaving moveable property in this province. Do these
moveables escheat as bona vacantia to the English
Crown, or to the Province of Quebec?
το. A, and B. are both domiciled in the Province of
Quebec. While A. is passing through Vermont, B.
causes him to be arrested for debt and A. obtains his
release by paying the claim under protest. By the
laws of that state a foreigner may be arrested for an
ordinary debt. A. sues B. in this province for damages
for false arrest. Argue the case for the defendant.
ΤΠ ΕΠ ὙΠ ΑΝ:
MARRIAGE COVENANTS, PRESCRIPTION,
LEASE AND HIRE, MINOR CONTRACTS,
MUNICIPAL LAWS.
THurspAY, Marcu 26TH, 1903:—MoRNING, 9 TO 12.
1. An immoveable is given to a husband by his
father, on condition of certain payments to his bro-
thers and sisters and subject to the payment of all the
debts of the donor, the whole amounting to more than
the value of the immoveable. These sums are paid
by the community.
Will the immoveable fall into the community or be
a propre of the husband? Give full reasons.
480 FACULTY OF LAW.
2. The husband makes an endowment:
(a) To a child of his preceding marriage ;
(b) To the child of a friend;
(c) To a child of his present marriage:
Which of these gifts will fall upon him personally or
upon the community and why?
3. At the dissolution of the community, the consorts
are both indebted to it, in the sum of $5,000. The
other assets of the community amount to $5,000, but
it owes the wife $15,000.
Are the consorts bound to return to the community
the amount of their indebtedness, or can they, being
both in same position, retain the same?
Explain the result in either case.
4. What exceptions are perpetual?
What prescription applies to interests or rents re-
ceived by an agent quoad his principal ?
Quid of fruits and revenues received by a possessor
in bad faith?
By an heir who is excluded from the succession by
reason of unworthiness? ;
5. What are the special elements required in the ten
years prescription by subsequent purchasers?
Quid if the purchaser becomes in bad faith after the
acquisitione
Quid after this prescription has been renounced or
interrupted ἢ
6, What is the prescription of the action against
architects and contractors, based upon the warranty of
the work they have done or supervised?
Explain the different systems upon the question.
7. What is the right of the creditor of a life rent
when an immoveable subject to it is judicially sold?’
8, In what case can the surety proceed against the
debtor. before paying the debt?
g. To secure the payment of a debt maturing on the
Ist of May, 1902, a thing has been given in pledge on
the rst of December, roor. + On the 1st of January,
1902, a new debt is contracted in favour of the same
debtor, which becomes due on the 1st of April, 1902.
The first debt has been paid, but the second is still
SESSIONAL EXAMINATIONS 487
due; is the debtor entitled to the return of the pledge?
Give reasons in support of answer.
το. What is the jurisdiction of the board of dele-
gates?
How is the board called upon to exercise their du-
ties? Who acts as president? As secretary-treasurer?
THIRD YEAR.
REAL, PROPERTY- LAW.
Monpay, APRIL 20TH, 1903 :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
τα ae” cee oy ἰδ π᾿ Bae) ROE: MARLER;
1. Under what tenures is land in this Province held?
Wherein do they differ?
2. What changes has the Code introduced as to
alienation by Contract? What part does registration
play?
3. What formalities, as to third persons, must be
accomplished in the case of transmission of land by
death? In the absence of these formalities, what effect
has a real right granted by the owner?
4. How is land forming part of an official number
described? What is the effect of the registration of a
deed of land, when the official number is omitted and
the official plan is in force? Can the defect be re-
medied and how? From what time does the registra-
tion avail?
5. How can a wife sell her own land when her hus-
band refuses his authorization: (a) When she is sepa-
rate as to property; (b) When she is common as to
property ?
6. What claims give a purchaser the right to with-
hold the price? To what extent can he withhold?
7. What security has the unpaid Vendor for security
of the price due him? How does he preserve this
right? Can he dissolve the sale?
8. What rights are not purged by a sheriff’s sale?
9. Of what is the prosecuting creditor the warrantor
in case of a sheriff’s sale?
10. What are the causes of preference among cre-
ditors ?
488 FACULTY OF LAW.
11. What are the rights of the Emphyteutic lessor
for the recovery of the rent due him? Can he ex-
ercise the remedies of an ordinary lessor?
12. What are fruits? How classified? Give ex-
amples of each. What difference is there as to the
mode of their perception?
13. A. grants a hypothec to B. and sells the hypo-
thecated land to C. Neither A. nor C. pays the obli-
gation secured by hypothec. What are B’s remedies?
14. State briefly what defences C. may have to the
action?
15. How do hypothecs rank since the Code? What
change did the Code introduce?
FINAL EXAMINATION.
ROMAN LAW.
DECEMBER, 1903.
1. Explain agnation and indicate how it disappeared.
2. From what books was Justinian’s Digest com-
piled? State, generally, the method of its compilation.
3. Give as many illustrations as you can of the way
in which the praetors modified the jus civile.
4. Why should a possessor in bad faith acquire by
prescription, and a detentor never so acquire?
5. Explain jus ad rem, jus in re.
6. What were the main characteristics of emphyteusis?
7. Give a sketch of the history of the ftestamentum
tripertitum.
8. A, who dies after Justinian, leaves no descendants.
He leaves mother, paternal grandfather, a sister of the
full-blood, a half-brother and two nephews, the sons of
a half-sister deceased. How is his succession divided ?
9g. What was meant in the Roman Law by the causa
civilis of an obligation?
10, In an alternative obligation explain the effects of
the loss of one or both of the objects before perform-
ance. aie
MATRICULATION AND A. A.
EXAMINATION PAPERS
SIN bes 1 SOS!
ve ae
as ae
PRELIMINARY SUBJEGTS
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Monpbay, JUNE 8TH:—MORNING, II TO 12.
Write an essay of not less than one page on any one
of the following subjects:
My Animal Friends.
Courage.
The Story of Jacques Cartier.
ENGLISH DICTATION:
Monpay, JUNE 8TH :—MOoRNING, 10.30 TO II.
They enjoy a superabundance of the necessaries and
conveniences of life, with the security of person and
property, the two great concerns of mankind. The
hides of deer, bears, tigers and wolves, together with
honey, wax, and other productions of the country, they
exchange with the white people for clothing and tools.
They seem to be free from want or desires. They have
no cruel enemy to dread; nothing to give them dis-
quietude, but the gradual encroachments of the white
people. Thus contented and undisturbed, they appear
as blithe and free as the birds of the air, and like them
volatile and active, tuneful and vociferous. The
visage, action and deportment of these Indians form
the most striking picture of happiness in this life; joy,
contentment, love, and friendship without guile or
affectation, seem inherent in them. They are fond of
games and gambling, and amuse themselves like child-
ren, in relating extravagant stories to cause surprise
and mirth.
Note for the Presiding Examiner.—The Deputy Ex-
aminer will read the extract three times, the candidates
writing it out during the second reading. The first and
492 SCHOOL ΠΧΑΔΙΝΑΤΙΟΝΕ,
third readings are respectively intended to give the
candidates a general idea of the character of the
passage, and to guide them in punctuating. As it is of
great importance that candidates should not be left in a
state of uncertaimty, the Deputy Examiner will repeat, on
request, any word or phrase. The Deputy Examiner will
also inform the candidates that obvious attempts to make
letters do double duty (e.g. to make a letter serve for e or i)
will be regarded as mistakes. Full stops and semicolons
are to be indicated by the Deputy Examiner.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
Monpbay, JUNE 8TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 10.30.
(N.B.—Not more than two questions in each section are to
be answered. B 6 and C ὃ are compulsory.)
A.
1. Give the masculine of bride, widow, nun, filly, ewe,
viven; and the possessive plural of goose, Norman, mis-
tress, and lady superintendent.
2. Distinguish clearly between the verbs lie and lay,
and give the past tense and past participle of each,
with examples of their correct use.
3. What is the difference between the Gerund and the
Present Participle? Give two examples of each.
B.
4. Turn the following sentences into the passive
form :—
(a) John was beating the dog with a stick.
(b) The students presented addresses to the retiring
professors.
(c) Give him a crust and send him away.
(d) She had taught him music.
(e) The man looked at the book and threw it down.
5. Define Auxiliary, Impersonal, Strong and Weak
verbs, and give three examples of each.
6. Parse the words in italics in the following sen-
tence :—
On the view of this subject a thousand uses suggest
themselves to a contriving mind.
PRELIMINARY SUBJECTS. 4.93
C
7. Correct the following sentences where you think
it necessary, giving reasons :—
(a) Will we go together ?
(b) Have either of you three a paper?
(c) Between you and I, all he said was “she looked
prettily.”
(d) Being late for the examination, it was no use
for me trying to pass.
(ec) Wanted a boy to run errands with a good
character.
8. Analyse the following :—
I hear it is sometimes given out in France that what
is doing among you is after the example of England.
BRITISEL HISTORY.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE 10TH :—MORNING, 10.30 TO 12.
(In answering the first three questions, any four parts of
each may be selected. On the contrary, the whole of the
fourth question nust be answered.)
I. (a) What was the policy of Henry VII. towards
the nobles?
(b) How were the following persons connected
with the beginning of the Reformation in England:
Catharine of Aragon; Cardinal Wolsey; Sir Thomas
More?
(c) Write what you know about Edward Seymour,
Duke of Somerset, and explain why he was called “Pro-
tector.”
(d) Give some account of religious persecution in
the reigns of Mary I. and Elizabeth.
(ec) What were the main achievements of “Si
Francis Drake?
(f) How did trouble arise in the reign of Elizabeth
over the question of monopolies ?
2. (a) Why is the Hampton Court Conference me-
morable ὃ
(b) Sketch the relations of Charles I with Scotland
prior to the outbreak of the Civil War.
404 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
(c) How did Oliver Cromwell come to be the chief
person in England?
(d) What was the Cabal Ministry?
(6) Under what circumstances did the Trial of the
Seven Bishops take place? What was the result?
(f) Name the chief battles in which England took
part during the War of the Spanish Succession.
3. (a) Give some account of the Jacobite risings.
(b) Sketch the political career of Sir Robert Wal-
pole after he became Prime Minister:
(c) How were the following persons connected with
the American Revolution: George Grenville; Edmund
Burke; Lord North?
(d) Name three battles fought in the wars between
England and Napoleon.
(e) Describe the passing of the First Reform Bill.
(f) Mention the chief stages in the Home Rule
movement.
4. (a) What were the chief terms of the Petition of
Rights?
(0) Give the datés of the Peace of Utrecht, the
accession of George JII., and the Indian Mutiny.
(c) What are the chief claims to remembrance of
the elder Pitt? What title did he choose when raised
to the Peerage?
(4) Sketch the political career of Mr. Gladstone
or Lord Eeaconsfield.
ARITHMETIC:
WEDNESDAY, JUNE I0TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 10.30.
(Answer two questions out of each section.)
Section I.
1. How many bricks 9 inches long, 4% inches wide,
and 4 inches thick, will be required to construct a wall
60 ft. long, 17 ft. high, and 4 ft. thick?
625
2) Hxtract the;square) root of {πὶ 174161; (2) ee
(3) .0000001 33225.
PRELIMINARY SUBJECTS. 495
3. Of two icicles hanging from the edge of a roof,
one is 1.02 inches longer than the other. The shorter
one increases in length at the rate of 3.014 inches in a
minute. Find the rate of increase of the other in
order that they may be the same length in 2 hours 5
minutes.
Section II.
4. Find the difference between the simple and com-
pound interest of $350 for 3 years at 8 per cent.
5. A. can do a piece of work in 6 days of Io hours
each, and B. can do it in 8 days of 9 hours each. For
how many hours a day must A. and B. be engaged to-
gether to do the work in 4 days?
6. A. invests $552 in 3% per cent. stock at g2 ; find
his income.
Section IIT.
7. Find the number of meters in one mile.
8. Find in kilos, the weight of a rectangular block of
gold 20 cm. in length, 5 cm. in thickness and 7 cm. in
breadth, the weight of a mass of gold being Ig times
the weight of an equal bulk of water
9. A cubic foot of water weighs 1,000 oz. Find in
tons the weight of a rainfall of one inch over an acre
of eround.
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS.
LATIN, BOOKS AND SIGHT 7TRANSLATION:
THURSDAY, JUNE IITH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
Ἄν
(a) Translate and explain the construction of the
words written in italics :—
(1)—Nepos, Mirtrapes VII.
Cum iam in eo esset, ut oppido potiretur, procul in
continenti lucus, qui ex insula conspiciebatur, nescio
quo casu nocturno tempore incensus est. Cuius flamma
ut ab oppidanis et oppugnatoribus est visa, uwtrisque
venit in opinionem signum a classiariis regiis datum.
Quo factum est ut et Parii a deditione deterrerentur et
Miltiades, timens ne classis regia adventaret, incensts
operibas, quae statuerat, cum totidem navibus atque
erat profectus Athenas magna cum offensione civium
suorum rediret. :
(b) Parse fully: eo, Quo, Athenas, rediret.
(2).—Carsar, DE BEtto Gattico II., 30.
Bello Helvetiorum confecto’totius fere Galliae legati,
principes civitatum, ad Caesarem gratulatum convene-
runt: Intelligere sese, tametsi pro veteribus Helvetio-
rum injuriis populi Romani ab his poenas bello repe-
tisset, tamen eam rem non minus ex usu terrae Galliae
quam populi Romani accidisse, propterea quod eo
consilio florentissimis rebus domos suas Helvetii reli-
quissent, uti toti Galliae bellum inferrent.
(3).—Ovip. METAMORPHOSES.
Translate with scansion of the first three lines.
At tu, funesti ne sim tibi muneris auctor,
nate, Cave, dum resque sinit, tua corrige vota.
Scilicet ut nostro genitum te sanguine credas,
pignora certa petis? do pignora certa timendo,
et patrio pater esse metu probor. Adspice vultus
ecce meos: utinamque oculus in pectora posses
inserere, et patrias intus deprendere curas!
ee eee οἽ
a ee
συ ΣΎ ΚΝ A ΞΞΨΡΎΥ τ
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 497
B.— SIGHT.
His de rebus Caesar certior factus et infirmitatem
Gallorum veritus, quod sunt in consillis capiendis
mobiles et novis plerumque rebus student, nihil his
committendum existimavit. Est autem hoc Gallicae
consuetudinis, uti et viatores etiam invitos consistere
cogant et quod quisque corum de quaque re audierit
aut cognoverit quaerant, et mercatores in oppidis vul-
gus circumsistat, quibusque ex regionibus veniant
quasque ibi res cognoverint pronuntiare cogant. His
rebus atque auditionibus permoti de summis saepe
rebus consilia ineunt, quorum eos poenitere necesse est,
quum incertis rumoribus serviant et plerique ad volun-
tatem corum ficta respondeant.
ALTERNATIVE PAPER ON LATIN BOOKS
FOR. ONTARIO CANDIDATES.
THURSDAY, JUNE IITH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.
1. Translate with explanatory notes on words printed
in Italics:
(a2) Tamen non effugit civium suorum invidiam.
Namque ob eundem timorem, quo damnatus erat Mil-
tiades, testularum suffragiis e civitate eiectus Argos
habitatum concessit. Hic cum propter multas virtutes
viveret, Lacedaemonii legatos Athenas miserunt, qui
eum absentem accusarent, quod societatem cum rege
‘Perse ad Graeciam opprimendam fecisset. Hoc cri-
mine absens damnatus est.
(b) Eodem die legati ab hostibus missiad Caesarem
de pace venerunt. His Caesar numerum obsidum,
quem antea imperaverat, duplicavit eosque in conti-
nentem adduci iussit, quod propinqua die aequinoctii
infirmis navibus hiemi navigationem subiciendam non
existimabat. Ipse idoneam tempestatem nactus paulo
post mediam noctem naves solvit; quae omnes inco-
lumes ad continentem pervenerunt; sed ex iis onerariae
duae eosdem, quos reliqui, portus capere non potuerunt
et paulo infra delatae sunt.
498 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
(c) Ex his omnibus longe sunt humanissimi, qui
Cantium incolunt, quae regio est maritima omnis, ne-
que multum a Gallica differunt consuctudine. In-
teriores plerique frumenta non serunt, sed lacte et
carne vivunt pellibusque sunt vestiti. Cmnes vero se
Britanni vitro inficiunt, quod caeruleum efficit colorem,
atque πος horridiore sunt in pugna aspectu; capilloque
sunt promisso atque omni parte corpore rasa praeter
caput et labrum superius.
Give the principal parts of serunt, vivunt, rasa.
(4) Vestibulum ante ipsum primoque in limine Pyrrhus
Exsultat, telis et luce coruscus ahena;
Qualis, ubi in lucem coluber, mala gramina pastus,
Frigida sub terra tumidum quem bruma tegebat,
Nunc positis novus exuviis nitidusque iuventa,
Lubrica convolvit, sublato pectore, terga
Arduus ad solem, et linguis micat ore trisulcis.
Una ingens Periphas et equorum agitator Achillis
Armiger Automedon, una omnis Scy ria pubes
Succedunt tecto, et flammas ad culmina iactant.
Ipse inter primos correpta dura bipenni
Limina perrumpit postesque a cardine vellit
Aeratos. :
Scan the first two lines οἱ (d).
2. Give in substance Nepos’ Life of Aristides.
Translate :—
Due quo facilius repellerent, si forte bellum reno-
vare conarentur, ad classes aedificandas exercitusque
comparandos quantum pecuniae quaeque civitas daret,
Aristides delectus est qui constitueret, eiusque arbitrio
quadringena et sexagena talenta quotannis Delum sunt
collata; id enim commune aerarium esse voluerunt.
LATIN GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.
THURSDAY, JUNE IITH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
A.—GRAMMAR.
Decline in the sing. only, marking by the usual
sign, all long vowels; filius, caput, princeps, genus, flos,
vis.
2. Give the genitive (sing. and pl.) of turris, senex,
caro cornu, mare.
"μ᾿. )*
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 499
3. Give the acc. (sing. and pl. all genders) of: vetus
facilis, acer, alius, unus; dat. (sing. and pl. all genders)
of: is, iste, 1116.
4. Give the other degrees of comparison for dives,
vetus, plus, pessimus, magnus, imus.
πο. the Latin ior: Li, Tith;? τῷ, Toth ;'25, 25th:
two thousand soldiers; in the year 1896.
6. Give the principal parts of prosum, facio (passive
voice), eo, aufero, effero, malo, vereor, loquor.
B.—ComMPOSITION.
Translate into Latin :—
When messages had come to Caesar by the Senones
and other Gauls, who were neighbours of the Belgae,
he charged them to find out what the Belgae were
doing. So they found out and informed him that the
Belgae were collecting forces, that they might march
against his army. Then Caesar sent the two legions
lately levied in hither Gaul, early in the summer, under
the command of Pedius, and as soon as there was
forage, went himself; for now he did not hesitate to
march against them immediately.
GREEK AUTHORS AND SIGHT TRANSLATION.
Monpay, JUNE I5TH:—AFTERNOON 2 TO 4.
XENOPHON, ANABASIS I.
A.
1. Translate with notes on the construction of words
underlined :—
(a. “Ev Μιλήτῳ δ᾽ ὁ Τισσαφέρνης. προαισθόμενος τὰ
αὐτὰ ταῦτα βουλευομένους, ἀποστῆναι Tp» Κῦρον. τοὺς
μὲν ἀπέκτεινε. τοὺς δ᾽ ἐξέβαλεν. ὋὉ δὲ Κῦρος. ὑπολαβὸν
τοὺς φεύγοντας. συλλέξας στράτευμα. ἐπολιόρκει Μίλητον
καὶ κατὰ γῆν καὶ κατὰ θάλατταν. καὶ ἐπειρᾶτο κατάγειν
τοὺς ἐκπεπτωκότας.
(b) ᾿Αλλὰ ἐπεὶ ὑμεῖς ἐμοὶ οὐκ ἐθέλετε πείθεσθαι. οὐδὲ
ἕπεσθαι. ἐγὼ σὺν ὑμῖν ἕψομαι. καὶ. ὅ τι ἂν δέῃ. πείσομαι.
500 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
/ OS > \ κι
Νομίζω γὰρ. ὑμᾶς ἐμοὶ εἶναι καὶ πατρίδα καὶ φίλους καὶ
συμμάχους, καὶ σὺν ὑμῖν μὲν ἂν εἶναι τίμιος. ὅπου ἂν ὦ:
ὑμῶν O ΩΣ οὐκ ἂν ἱκανὸς εἰναι οἶμαι. οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἂν φίλον
ἡ ὦ οὔτ᾽ ἂν ἐχθρὸν ἀλέξασθαι.
) Διφθέρας. ἃς εἶχον στεγάσματα. ἐπίμπλασαν
ees cago εἴτα συνῆγον καὶ συνέσπων. WS μὴ ἅπτεσθαι
τῆς κάγφης τὸ ὕδωρ: ἐπὶ τούτων διέβαινον: και ἐλάμβανον
τὰ ἐπιτήδεια. οἶνόν τε ἐκ τῆς βαλάνου πεποιημένον τῆς
ἀπὸ τοῦ φοίνικος. καὶ σῖτον μελίνης- τοῦτο γὰρ ἣν ἐν τῇ
χώρᾳ πλεῖστον.
(1) ᾿Ενταῦθα Τ᾿ αυλίτης παρὼν, φυγὰς Σάμιος, πιστὸἑ
me, > = > rn at Wey.
de Κύρῳ. εἶπε: “Καὶ unv, ὦ Κῦρε. λέγουσί tives, ὅτι
πολλὰ ὑπισχνῇ νῦν, διὰ τὸ ἐν τοιούτῳ εἶναι τοῦ κινδύνου
προσιόντος" ἂν δ᾽ εὖ γένηταί τι. οὐ μεμνῆσθαι σε: ἔνιοι δὲ,
οὐδ᾽ εἰ μεμνῷό τε καὶ βούλοιο. δύνασθαι ἂν ἀποδοῦναι, ὅσα
ὑπισχνῃ."
(6) Ἢ δὲ γνώμη ἣν, ὡς εἰς τὰς τάξεις τῶν ᾿Ελλήνων
ΕῚ an \ if: ἃ / Ate ” “
ἐλῶντα καὶ διακόψοντα. Ὃ μέντοι Kiupos εἴπεν, ὅτε
καλέσας παρεκελεύετο τοῖς Ἕλλησι, τὴν κραυγὴν τῶν
βαρβάρων ἀνέχεσθαι, Εν ου τοῦτο: οὐ γὰρ κραυγῇ.
ΟΣ κα ε » ΔΙ οτεν \ B ys
ἀλλὰ σιγῇ, ὡς ἀνυστὸν, καὶ ἡσυχῇ ἐν ἴσῳ καὶ βραδέως
προσήεσαν.
II. Write the principal parts of: ἀποστῆναι (a),
πείσομαι (lL), ὑπισχνῇ (d), ἐλῶντα (¢). Parse μεμνῴό (a).
or
XENOPHON, ANABasIS II.
Ἂς
Translate with notes explaining the’ construction
of words underlined :—
(a) Πρὸς ταῦτα Φαλύνος εἶπε, “ Βασιλεὺς νικᾷν
ἡγεῖται, ἐπεὶ Κῦρον ἀπέκτονε. Tis yap a'r» ἐστιν,
ὅστις ἀρχῆς ἀντιποιεῖται; Νομίζει δὲ καὶ μα; ἑαυτοῦ
εἶναι. ἔχων « ἐν μέσῃ τῇ ἑαυτοῦ χώρᾳ. καὶ ποταμῶν ἐντὸς
ἀδιαβάτων.
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 501
(b) ᾿Εντεῦθεν δὴ, ἐπεὶ σκότος ἐγένετο, Μιλτοκύθης
μὲν ὁ Θρᾷξ, ἔχων τούς τε ἱππέας τοὺς μεθ᾽ ἑαυτοῦ εἰς
τεσσαράκοντα, καὶ τῶν πεζῶν Θρακῶν ὡς τριακοσίους,
ηὐτομόλησε πρὸς βασιλέα. Κλέαρχος δὲ τοῖς ἄλλοις
ἡγεῖτο κατὰ τὰ παρηγγελμένα. οἱ δ᾽ εἵποντο"
(c) ᾿Απὸ δὲ τοῦ Τίγρητος ἐπορεύθησαν σταθμοὺς
τέτταρας, παρασάγγας εἴκοσιν, ἐπὶ τὸν Φύσκον ποταμὸν,
τὸ evpos πλέθρου: ἐπῆν δὲ γέφυρα. Kai ἐνταῦθα ὠκεῖτο
πόλις μεγάλη. 7 ὄνομα Oris: πρὸς ἣν ἀπήντησε τοῖς “Ὡλλ-
now ὁ Κύρου καὶ ᾿Αρταξέρξου νόθος ἀδελφὸς, ἀπὸ Σούσων
καὶ ᾿Εκβατάνων στρατιὰν πολλὴν ἄγων. ὡς βοηθήσων
βασιλεῖ:
(.) Σὺν μὲν γάρ σοι πᾶσα μὲν ἡμῖν ὁδὸς εὔπορος. πᾶς
δὲ ποταμὸς διαβατὸς, τῶν δ᾽ ἐπιτηδείων οὐκ ἀπορία: ἄνευ
δέ σου πᾶσα μὲν ἡ ὁδὸς διὰ σκότους. (οὐδὲν γὰρ αὐτῆς
ἐπιστάμεθα.) πᾶς δὲ ποταμὸς δύσπορος, πᾶς δ᾽ ὄχλος
φοβερός φοβερώτατον δ᾽ ἐρημία: μεστὴ γὰρ πολλῆς ἀπορίας
ἐστίν.
(ce) Μένων δὲ ὁ Θετταλὸς δῆλος ἣν ἐπιθυμῶν μὲν
πλουτεῖν ἰσχυρῶς, ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ ἄρχειν, ὅπως πλείω
λαμβάνοι: ἐπιθυμῶν δὲ τιμᾶσθαι, ἵνα πλείω. κερδαίνοι-
φίλος τ᾽ ἐβούλετο εἶναι τοῖς μέγιστα δυναμένοις. ἵνα
ἀδικῶν μὴ διδοίη δίκην. “Emi δὲ τὸ κατεργάζεσθαι, ὧν
ἐπιθυμοίη. συντομωτάτην ὁδὸν weTo εἶναι διὰ τοῦ ἐπιορκεῖν
τε καὶ ψεύδεσθαι καὶ ἐξαπατᾷν"
Ii. Write the principal parts of : εἵποντο (b), ὦετο (6).
Parse τὸ εὖρος (c), ἀδικῶν, τοῦ ἐπιορκεῖν (6).
ΕΣ
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
Translate into English :—
Τούτων λεχθέντων ἀνέστησαν. καὶ ἀπελθόντες κατέ.
Kaov τὰς ἁμάξας καὶ τὰς σκηνάς, τῶν δὲ περιττῶν ὅτου
μὲν δέοιτό τις μετεδίδοσαν ἀλλήλοις, τὰ δὲ ἄλλα εἰς τὸ πῦρ
ἐρρίπτουν. ταῦτα ποιήσαντες ἠριστοποιοῦντο. ἀριστο-
ποιουμένων δὲ αὐτῶν ἔρχεται Μιθραδάτης σὺν ἱππεῦσιν ὡς
τριάκοντα, καὶ καλεσάμενος τοὺς στρατηγοὺς εἰς ἐπήκοον
λέγει ὧδε. ᾿Εγώ, ὦ ἄνδρες Ἕλληνες, καὶ Κύρῳ πιστὸς
502 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
= « « κ 5 , θ \ rn ΓΑ ” κ᾿ 9 , >
ἦν. ὡς ὑμεῖς ἐπί τασθε καὶ νῦν ὑμῖν εὔνους: Kai ἐνθάδε ὃ
“τ τὰν \ XAG φ 1 Bor ὃ / 2 5 e ΨΚ. e a wf /
εἰμὶ σὺν πολλῷ φόβῳ διάγων. εἰ οὖν OPO IV ὑμᾶς σωτήριόν
J »” xX Ν € an
τι βουλευομένους. ἔλθοιμι ἂν πρὸς ὑμᾶς Kal τοὺς θεράποντας
/ ~ 5 \ ‘a2
πάντας ἔχων. δλέξατε οὖν πρὸς με τί ἐν νῷ ἔχετε WS φίλον
\ “Ὁ lal
τε Kal εὔνουν καὶ βουλόμενον κοινῃῇ σὺν ὑμῖν τὸν στόλον
ποιεῖσθαι.
GREEK GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.
Monpbay, JUNE I15TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II,
A.—GRAMMAR.
1. Write the accusative singular and dative plural
(with the article) of πολίτης, πλοῦς, πατρίς, σῶμα, EXAHY,
μήτηρ, γένος, βασιλεύς, ἥρως, Bods.
2. Decline in the singular (with the article) γυνή, ναῦς,
υἱός͵, πῦρ, κύων.
3. Decline in the plural (all genders) ἡδύς, μείζων.
4. Write the comparative and superlative of σαφής,
πολύ, σοφή. παλαιός, καλος.
5. Write the present optative passive of tipaw;
the aorist subjunctive active of δίδωμι ; the Ist sing.
present (through all the moods) of οἶδα; the perfect
middle and passive of πλέκω; the imperfect and future
of εἰμί; the imperfect of εἶμι.
B.—ComPOSITION.
Translate into Greek :—
1. This man was made general by the great King.
2. Xenophon was leader during the whole retreat.
κατάβασις).
3. The Greeks heard this before the battle from
deserters.
4. The King will fight within ten days.
5. The arms of the soldiers were carried on waggons.
~
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 503
6. 1 persuaded the soldiers to obey Cyrus.
7. Men and soldiers let us be worthy of the freedom
which we have acquired.
8. The commander-in-chief led his men by the short-
est road, that they might not suffer harm.
9. The Greeks perceived that the enemy were in their
camp.
10. The King thinks the Greeks are his, since he has
them in the middle of his country.
FRENCH.
Fripay, JUNE 12TH:—MoORNING, 9. TO II.
1. Translate into French :—
I leave Paris at half past twelve to-night, and I shall
be away a fortnight. You have very fine roses on this
rose-tree, give me one for her. Why do you not sit
down? I shall see you again to-morrow afternoon.
Go and ask your friend to have the kindness to wait
for me here. Please let me have this book, I really want
it. I cannot give it to you for it has been lent to me.
He is a friend of mine; you are nearly two years older
than he. Whose book is this? I do not know whom
you mean. He who tries to please everybody gen-
erally pleases nobody. Let us start at once, lest we
should miss the train; it will not wait for us.
2. Give the singular of baux, aieux, cieux ; the feminine
of grec, aieu. pécheur, furvori, vieut, ane, Sage, oun,
complet, attentif ; and the plural of anneau, nez, oeil, régal,
salle-a-manger, travail, gouvernail, lieu, clou, général, hétatt,
3. Give the comparative and the superlative of bon,
bien, mal, peu, and translate into french sooner or later ;
One of the finest books I have ever read; Upper and Lower
Canada.
4. Write in full the present indicative, preterite and
the present subjunctive of s’en aller, mourir, saperce-
voir, mettre, faire and dire.
5. Give in English the equivalents of the following
idiomatical expressions :— .
Vous avez tort de m’er vouloir. C’est a lui quil
504 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
faut vous en prendre. J’ai beau chercher je ne vois
rien qui vaille la peine que je me suis donnée, mais je
voulais savoir ἃ quoi m’en tenir. Pouvez-vous yous
passer de lunettes pour lire?
6. Translate into English :—
Le vingt-sept aotit, mil sept cent quatre-vingt-treize,
les royalistes du midi de la France livrérent le port
de Toulon aux Anglais. Pour le reprendre, le jeune
Napoléon y fut envoyé en qualité de commandant
d’artillerie, et apres un siége resté célebre, la ville se
rendit. Ce fut pendant le siege que Napoléon rencon-
tra Junot, qui devait plus tard rendre de grands ser-
vices a lempire. Un jour pendant que le jeune com-
mandant d’artillerie faisait construire une batterie, il
eut besoin d’écrire, et demanda un sergent ou un caporai
qui ptt lui servir de secrétaire. 11 s’en présenta un
aussitot, et Napoléon, le faisant asseoir sur le terrain
méme, lui dicta sa correspondance. La lettre était a
peine terminée qu’un boulet, qui tomba tout pres, la
couvrit de terre. “Bon, dit le soldat écrivain, je n’au-
rai pas besoin de sable.” C’était Junot, et cette preuve
de courage et de sang-froid sufft pour le recommander
a son commandant, qui le poussa depuis aux premiers
grades de larmée.
7. Translate into French :—
The soldiers of Turenne worshipped him and re-
garded him as their father. One day when the army,
in cold weather, was passing through a narrow valley,
the marshal, who was exhausted by loss of sleep and
fatigue, lay down beside a tree and fell asleep. Some
of his soldiers, seeing him there and wishing to protect
him against the cold and the snow, which was falling
heavily, eagerly busied themselves in forming about
him a hut of branches which they hastened to cover
with their cloaks.
8. (Last half hour of the examination).
Reproduce in French the story read by the examiner.
STORY, 10 ‘BEIREPRO DUCE DUN BE NG Ee
N.B.—At the beginning of the last half hour of the
examination the presiding examiner will read distinctly
the following story to the candidates twice. It is not
to be placed in their hands.
Many years ago there lived in the city of Paris a
ae σα πε λῳ
bhai,
A
ee Tt, ee es
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 50d
celebrated physician, who was very fond of animals.
One day a friend of his brought to his house a favourite
dog, whose leg had been broken, and asked him if he
could do anything for the poor creature. The kind
doctor examined the wounded animal, and, prescribing
treatment for him, soon cured him, and received the
warm thanks of his friend, who set a very high value
upon his dog. Not very long afterwards, the doctor
was in his room busy studying. He thought he heard
a noise at the door, as if some animal was scratching
in order to be let in. For some time he paid no atten-
tion to the noise, but continued studying. At last,
however, he rose up and opened the door. To his
great astonishment he saw enter the dog which he had
cured, and with him another dog. The latter also had
a broken leg, and was able to move only with great
difficulty. The dog which the surgeon had cured had
brought his friend to his benefactor, in order that he,
too, might be healed; and, as well as he could, he made
- the doctor understand that this was what he wanted.
GERMAN.
FRIDAY, JUNE I12TH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
1. Translate carefully :—
(a) ,ieber Mann,” fagte die Frau, indem fie nicht wa gte
ihn anzuiehen,” es ΠῚ cin Ungliie pajfiert ; den fleinen Vogel
hat die Kage gefretien. ”
, die Rabe gefrejen ?” rwiederholte’ der Mtann, indem ev ftarr
bor Cntleben wurde ; du ΠῚ ΠῚ Du θα] die Nachtiqall abficht-
ich Fortgelatien ! Das hatte ich dir nie gugetraut. Du bijt eine
fehlechte Frau. Nun ijt es fiir ewiq mit unferer Areundjchatt
2 a
$ |
pug
(ὁ) Wterchen,” erwiderte der Handiwerfsburiche femuungelnd,
,io fragt man Die Bauern aus. Meeinen fehdnen Traunt bebhalte
id) fitr mich ; Das fonnt thr mir mun fehon qarv nicht verdenfen.
Aber Daraus werden thut doc) nichts!” Und das fagte er nich
ΘΓ fo, jondern es war jein Ernit
5U6 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
, 2. Translate into German :—
(a) A king and a queen once had a son, whom
they called Heino. (b) Every day he used to ride into
the forest, but he never brought any animals he had
killed home. (c) He was said to give all he found to
the poor. (d) The truth is that he did not hunt at
all, but visited a little house far away in the woods
where lovely Blue-eyes lived. (6) When she saw him
coming her whole face was filled with joy. (f) One
day, however, the King sent a servent to follow Heino
secretely, ta find out why he never caught anything.
(g)When he knew it, he wanted to have Blue-eyes
killed, but a white dove came and called Heino. (A)
He hastened to the little house and arrived soon enough
to save Blue-eyes.
3. Grammar. (Answer any four questions.)
(a) δα πα (14). What other verbs from the past
participle without ge? What kind of verbs take the
auxiliary jen? Give examples. Express in German :—
“1 have ridden all day-’’
(b) Decline in singular and plural Vieber Yann and
Derjelbe Traum ; and write the nom. plur. of Frau, Nadti-
gall, Sandiwerfsburide, Kae.
(c) Write past (imperfect) indicative, Ist pers. sing.
and past participle of {igen, bebalten, fonnen, verdenfen,
thin; also (with the meaning) of lieqen, leqen, danfen,
fenien, betragen, betritqgen, bitten, bet en, bieten.
(d) Give as many derivative nouns (with meanings)
as you can from the following verbs :—graben, fennen,
Ipreden, binden, flieqen.
(f) How is the German language related to the
English? Explain the general principles of the relation
clearly, and give the English cognates of Soacl, Nabe,
freffen, -jchaft, chen, Darang, jondern, Baum, Knabe, Sabl.
4. Translate (at sight) :—
, Wenn es mie das it,” αἰ Das Weadehen froblich, 10 Fann
ich ihm vielleicht doch helfen. Der alte Mean fehenfte nur cin
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 507
goldenes Serzden, und das habe ich jorgfaltig verborgen.” Als
Der Konig das horte, war er jer erfreut. Du bijt aljo das
Madden mit dem goldenen Herzen, dag ich fehon jo lange juchte 7
vief cr. , Keine andere Durfte id) zur Monigin maden und des-
halb habe ich fo lange warten mitfien. (δὲ fagten zwar mance,
jie Hatten cin goldenes Herz, aber wenn man es genauer anjab, jo
war es Doc) nicht von wirflicbem Golde.”
ALGEBRA, PART L.
TuEsDAy, JUNE 9TH:—MoORNING, 9. TO II.
1. Solve the equations :—
( Ἐ75:: ὌΡΟΣ a2 XG Mat ἡ 5
1 —
x5 2% — 15
(2)e+ y=5,y + 2= 3,4 + 2=7.
Py P| ari ee as
(3) = ae eee Sen
ἜΣ τα τὶ 2% 3
(4) 2x2 — 3y? = 23, ary — 35? = 3.
2. (a) Simplify and express with positive indices
1 ΞΞ γῇ:
i x 64 a 3
- fA ah Pe ee
τ' ὀ α" b 5
(b) Find the value of
4 Ν128 — 5 ντόξ + V338
3. Shew that the difference between
x C3 x a b Cc
Ste, aS and i Ὁ}
x—a' χ--τὸ '\ α- τὸ Ga x—b ἄξϑε
is the same for all values of x.
Ὁ —T11 + 10 255)! ay ae ek
Ee rae
ἘΣ eaaplsty τ ΞΘ w-+1) *-1)(x ἘΠ
(6) Extract the square root of
a§ — 22 et + 34 43 + 12147 — 3742 + 280.
5. A colonel wishing to form his men into a solid
square finds he has 55 men over. If he increases the
508 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
sid: of the square by 1, he has forty men too tew.
How many men are there in the regiment?
6. Lind four consecutive numbers such that the
product of the first and last is less by tg than the num-
ber which has the two middle ones for its digits.
GEOMETRY, Part I.
TUESDAY, JUNE QTH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
1. If a side of a triangle be produced, then the ex-
terior angle shall be equal to the two interior opposite
angles; also the three interior angles of a triangle are
together equal to two right angles.
2. If a parallelogram and a triangle be on the same
base and between the same parallels, the parallelogram
shall be double of the triangle.
3. Describe a right angled isosceles triangle equal to
a given square.
4. Divide a straight line into two parts so that the
rectangle contained by the whole and one of the parts
shall be equal to the square on the other part.
5. The sum of the squares on the diagonals oi a
parallelogram is equal to the sum of the squares on the
sides.
6. Prove that the opposite angles of any quadrilateral
inscribed in a circle are equal to two right angles.
Also state and prove the converse.
7. If from any point without a circle a tangent and
a secant be drawn, then the rectangle contained by
the whole secant and the part of it without the circle
shall be equal to the square on the tangent.
8. If from any external point two tangents be drawn
to a circle, the angle contained by them is double the
angle contained by the chord of contact and the dia-
meter drawn through one of the points of contact.
GEOMETRY, PART II. ΑΝ ALGEBRA, PART IIL.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE IOTH :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
GEOMETRY.
1. Inscribe a regular pentagon in a given circle.
(a) Prove that the intersections of the alternate
——a ee ς
- OPTIONAL SUBJECTS, 509
sides of a regular pentigon are the vertices of another
regular pentagon.
2. (a) Inscribe a circle in a given triangle.
(6) Draw an escribed circle to a given triangle,
that is, a circle touchins one side and the other two
produced.
3. A B Cis a triangle, and the perpendicular A D
drawn from 4 to B& C falls within the triangle. Prove
that if d Disa mean proportional between δ᾽ D and
DC,BA Cisaright angle. Prove also that if d B
is a mean proportional between B Cand B Dthat BAC
is a right angle.
4. Equal triangles, which have one angle of the one
equal to one angle of the other, have the sides about
the equal angles reciprocally proportional.
ALGEBRA.
5. Find the sum of a number of terms in arithmetical
progression. Find the arithmetical progression of
7 terms whose sum is 28 and common difference 3.
6.. The area of a circle varies as the square of its
radius. Given that the area is 154 sq. ft. when the
radius is 7 ft., find the area when the radius is Io ft. 6 in.
7. Find for what value of y the number of combina-
tions of 2 things, 7 at a time, is the greatest,
8. (a) Find the first 5 terms of (1 + x)
(2) Prove log m* = n log m.
g. Find the present value of an annuity to continue
for a given number of years, allowing compound in-
terest.
TRIGONOMETRY.
THURSDAY, JUNE 11TH:—MORNING, I1 TO 12.30.
1. Express all the trigonometrical ratios in terms
of the secant. If the secant = =, calculate the other
ratios.
2. Prove that a radian (the unit of circular measure)
180°
is equal to Find the number of radians in 240°,
510 SCHOOL HXAMINATIONS.
3. Prove the following relations :—
(a) sin (A — 8) = sin A cos B — cos A sin B.
(6) sin A — sin B = 2 cos See sin ao
ὃ sin 2 “4 — sin A eases
cos A — cos 2 “ | 2
4. Solve the following trigonometrical equations and
construct the angles obtained :—
(2) 3 sin A— 2cos A = ὡ.
(6) τη 0. + '3-cot 9 ΞΞ 4.
5. Find all the ratios of 75°.
6, Prove the following ;—
Qe ἘΞ = (sec A — tan A)”
(2) sin (180 + A) = — sin A,
ENGLISH GRAMMAR AND TRENCH—(Study of
Words).
Monpay, JUNE I5TH:—AFTERNOON, 4 TO 5.30.
1. Define the term spirant. Give and classify six
spirants, explaining the terms you use
or
state how compound nouns form their plural.
2. How are adverbs formed? Illustrate.
3. Shall and will as auxiliaries express (1) futurity,
(2) determination: illustrate by writing the future tense
of any weak verb. Illustrate the uses of the word 1s,
and of the verb do as an auxiliary.
4. State and illustrate the uses of (a) what, (Ὁ) the
various verbal forms in ing, (c) elder. Explain what
is meant by the objective genitive and give two ex-
amples.
5. Give the signification of the following italicized
suffixes and state the division (Teutonic or Romanic)
to which each belongs: thimble, actor, vixen, maiden,
verbose, godhead, sweeten, particle, governess.
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 511
6. What do the following words illustrate? Dre-
panum, micher, mob, sovereign, Sussex, quince, Wans-
beck-water, marshal, Quaker, Derby.
7. How do new words arise? Illustrate.
8. Take these sets of synonymous words: contrary,
opposite; education, instruction; interference, interposition ;
and distinguish between the meanings of the words in
each set.
ENGEISE LITERATURE:
Monpay, JUNE 8TH :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 3.30.
Candidates for A. A. will answer three groups, namely:
58. (2) ΟΕ {3}:
Candidates for Matriculation only, two groups, namely:
(Ey Aor Bis(2) °C.
Ontario candidates will find instructions and questions on
the third page.
A.—TENNYSON.
1. Name the poem in which each of the following
extracts is found, and show in a few words how the
passage exhibits the character of the poem :—
(a) And this gray spirit yearning in desire
To follow knowledge like a sinking star,
Beyond the utmost bound of human thought.
(b) We have a voice, with which to pay the debt
Of boundless love and reverence and regret.
(c) Prattling the primrose fancies of the boy,
To me that loved him.
(d) But thy strong Hours indignant work’d their
wills,
And beat me down and marr’d and wasted me.
(ec) All things have rest, and ripen toward the grave
In silence; ripen’ fall and cease:
2. What can you say of Tennyson’s diction?
Illustrate from the poems studied.
3. Put in your own words the story of The Lady of
Shalott. Add a short comment on the meaning and
beauty of the poem.
33
δ12 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
B.—SCoTT.
1. Sketch, in a few lines each, the characters of
Roderick Dhu, Brian the Hermit and Allan-Bane.
With these as examples, discuss Scott’s method of
depicting character.
2. Show how the songs in The Lady of the Lake
assist the action of the poem.
3. Make explanatory notes on the following: A stag
of ten; poor remnants of the Bleeding Heart; Coir-nan-
Uriskin; Kerne; glaive; the wily quarry shunned the
shock; Tine-man; snood; Beltane game; witch-elm.
C.—SHAKSPERE.
1. Describe briefly in your own words the hostile
encounter of Mowbray and Bolingbroke in Act L.
From this quarrel and the King’s termination of it,
what idea do you gain of the three characters con-
cerned ?
2. Make explicit notes on the meaning of italicized
words in the following lines:
(a) To ear the land that hath some hope to grow.
(b) Look on my wrongs with an indifferent eye.
(c) And yet we strike not, but securely perish.
(d) Imp out our drooping country’s broken wing.
(6) The grass whereon thou tread’st, the presence
strewed.
(f) Like to a tenement or pelting farm.
g) Razed out my imprese, leaving me no sign.
3. By whom and in what connection were the follow-
ing spoken?
(a) Thus play I in one person many people,
And none contented.
(b) There is no virtue like necessity.
(c) I speak to subjects, and a subject speaks,
Stirr’d up by God, thus boldly for his King.
(d) Truth hath a quiet breast.
(6) Comfort’s in heaven; and we are on the earth,
Where λυ lives but crosses, cares and
grief.
D.—SToOPFORD BROOKE.
1. What was the most important work of each of the
following? Give approximate dates. Baeda, Wyclif,
<A
eae ae a oe ν
ee Se ee ee
Oo
‘OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 54
Bacon, Bunyan, Johnson,
2. Write briefly on the leading events of Shakspere’s
life, and mention his most important plays in their
order of production.
3. What can you say of the character of Milton?
How is this character reflected in his work?
4. By whom and in what period was each of the fol-
lowing written?
Legende of Good Women; Arcadia; Gulliver’s Tra-
vels; The Spectator; Rime of the Ancient Mariner.
Give in a few lines each, some account of the three last
named works.
FOR ONTARIO CANDIDATES.
CoLeRIDGE, The Ancient Mariner; WORDSWORTH, Selos-
tions; SHAKSPERE, The Merchant of Venice.
τ. What is the moral lesson to be drawn from the
story of the Ancient Mariner? Quote, or give the
substance of the lines in which it is summed up.
2. What do you suppose to be Coleridge’s purpose
in introducing the wedding guest and bridal party?
3. Give in your own words an account of the mari-
ner’s penance. What means does Coleridge use to
heighten its awful effect?
4. Write out any one of Wordsworth’s sonnets, and
add a few lines of comment upon it, or write a short
criticism upon Wordsworth as a writer of sonnets.
5. What qualities characteristic of Wordsworth can
be found in the poem of Michael?
6. In what poem does each of the following passages
occur ?—
(a) A privacy of glorious light is thine.
(b) There is a comfort in the strength of love;
"Twill make a thing endurable, which else
Would overset the brain, or break the heart.
(c) And beauty born of murmuring sound shall
pass. into her face.
(d) For old, unhappy, far-off things
And battles long ago.
(ec) Thou. wander’st the wide world about
TInchecked by pride or scrupulous doubt.
514 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
6. Give the substance of Shylock’s speech beginning:
“To bait fish withal; if it feed nothing else it will feed
my revenge.” Distinguish between what may be jus--
tified in it and what is to be condemned.
7. Name the speaker of each of the following pas-
sages, and give some idea of the context :—
(a) The world is still deceived with ornament.
(b) God made him, and therefore let him pass for
a man.
(c) How many things by season season’d are
To their right use and due perfection!
(d) Let none presume
To wear an undeserved dignity.
(e) The weakest kind of fruit,
Drops earliest to the ground.
COLLIERS “GREALT EVENTS) Om ΘΝ τ
TUESDAY, JUNE 16TH :—MORNING, II TO 12.30.
(Answer any five of the first eight questions, and question 9.)
τ. Describe the war of Titus with the Jews.
2. Discuss the main features of domestic life at Rome
under the Empire.
3. Write on the Holy Roman Empire or the Byzan-
tine Empire.
4. Give some account of the Italian Republics, with
special reference to Venice and Florence.
5. Sketch the rise of the Dutch Republic.
6. Outline the main events of the reign of Louis XIV.,
prior to 1678.
7. Recite the leading achievements of Frederick the
Great.
8. What do you know about the history of France
SINGeWokor
9. Make brief notes on: Valerian’s Edict, 258: Beli-
sarius at Carthage; the Capture of Mecca, 629; Witti-
kind; the Seventh Crusade; Pizarro: the Smalkaldic
War; the Regency of Marie de Medici; the Treaty of
Rvyswick; the Battle of Navarino.
ee wale ea
ΟΡΤΊΟΝΑΙ, SUBJECTS. bili
GREEK AND ROMAN HISTORY.
TuESDAY, JUNE 16TH:—MORNING, II TO 12.30.
PART:
(Answer any two of the first three questions, and question 4.)
1. Write what you know about the history of the
Peloponnesus prior to 480 B.C.
2. Sketch the history of Athens from 480 to 430 B.C.
3. Describe the rise of Macedonia up to 336 B.C.
4. Make brief notes on: Perioeki and Helots; Tribes
and Demes at Athens; the battle of Lade; Dekeleia;
the Peace of Antalkidas.
Part II.
(Answer any two of the first three questions, and question 4.)
1. Give a list of Roman magistracies, mentioning
where you can the circumstances under which each
came into existence, and adding (with dates) the names
of the most illustrious men who at different times filled
these magistracies.
2. Describe in detail the part which Hamilcar Barca
and other members of his family took in the Punic
Wars.
3. Sketch the main features of Roman history from
100 to 44 B.C.
4. Make brief notes on:
The Laws of Lycinius and Sextius; the war with the
Greek cities; the Roman Conquest of Spain; the re-
forms of Caius Gracchus; the evils of Imperial Gov-
ernment.
PHYSIOGRARELY .
Monpay, JUNE &8TH:—AFTERNOON, 3.30 TO 5
tT. Contrast and account for the differences in the
length of day and night (1) in north latitude 40°, (2)
in north latitude 80°.
2. What are the Doldrums, the Trade winds? Ex-
plain their occurrence.
3. Sketch the general course of the currents in the
Indian Ocean (a) in July, (b) in January.
δ10 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
4. Describe and explain the formation of some par-
ticular Coastal Plain such as that of Alabama, or of
Bengal. Give instances of such formations found far
inland.
5. Contrast the character and mode of formation of
the Jura Mountains and the Black Hills of Dakota; or
else write shortly on the origin of mountains.
6. Name and write shortly about a particular instance
of each of the following :—Barrier Reef, Glacier, Hot
Springs, Delta, Alluvial Fan or Cone.
What are the principal agents in Erosion of the
land ?
8. Explain the production of the ‘Tides. Why are
there no tides in the Mediterranean?
g. Name some special forms of animal life charac-
teristic of (1) the Atlantic sea-bottom, (2) the Arctic
circle, (3) tropical South America.
PERYSICS
TUESDAY, JUNE QTH:—AFTERNOON, 4 TO 5.30.
(Candidates may select either the A or the B paper.)
A.
1. Explain the terms:—Vliscosity, Malleability, Adhe-
sion, and give one experimental illustration of each.
2. Describe. the ‘Mercury Barometer; and ‘explain
how it measures the pressure of the atmosphere.
The specific: gravity of mercury 15. 113.60) andeaveabic
foot. of water weighs 1000 ounces. What is the in-
crease of pressure on a square foot exposed to the
atmosphere when the barometer rises one inch?
3. Explain how to find the specific gravity of a solid
by means of the hydrostatic balance.
A substance weighs 24 grams in air and has a spe-
cific gravity of 11.35. What will it weigh in water?
4. Explain how a small force can overcome a greater
one by means of a moveable pulley. Does this enable
a man to double the amount of work he can do?
Define a foot-pound ; a horse-power.
My
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. ἘΠ
5. A force which could sustain a weight of 5 lbs. is
applied to a mass of 20 lbs. for 10 seconds. What will
be the speed at the end of the ten seconds and how
far will the mass have moved?
6. Describe the construction of a mercury thermo-
meter.
If the freezing and boiling points were marked 0°
and 00“ respectively, what would the thermometer read
when a Fahrenheit thermometer read 64°?
7. Explain briefly :—
(a) Why metal objects seem hotter than wooden
ones in the hot room of a Turkish Bath.
(b) The cooling effect when you moisten the back
of the hand and blow upon it.
(c) The system of warming houses by means of
hot water coils.
8. How much ice at οὐ can be melted by 20 kilo-
grams of water at 100°?
B.
GREGORY AND SIMMONS.
1. How would you prove that air contains water
vapour? Describe the method of measuring the re-
lative humidity by means of the wet and dry bulb ther-
mometers.,
2. Describe an experiment to prove that water ex-
pands in cooling from 4°C to the freezing point. .
3. Define the Specific Heat of a substance.
40 gms. of copper (sp. ht. = .09) at 22°C are placed
in 80 gms of water at to0°C. What is the resulting
temperature ?
4. Briefly explain :—
(a) The cooling effect when the back of the hand
is moistened and blown upon.
(b) The use of a flannel “cosy” to keep a teapot
hot and to preserve ice from melting.
(c) The system of heating houses by hot water coils.
5. Two pieces of iron are hung, one in air in a vessel
containing water that has been long boiled, the other
in the water itself. What happens, and why?
6. Describe a method for preparing oxygen, and
give its properties.
518 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
7. How is lime prepared from chalk, and how does
the one differ from the other? Explain how mortar is
made and what goes on when it “‘sets.”
8. What are the causes of permanent and temporary
hardness in water, and how can each be got rid of?
2
CHE MUST Rave
FRIDAY, JUNE I2TH:—AFTERNOON, 4 TO 5.30.
(Answer only two questions in each group.)
Ἂς
1. What are the normal constituents of atmospheric
air, and what the functions of each in nature? How
would you prove experimentally that air has weight?
2. How may oxygen gas be prepared? Distinguish
carefully between its chemical and its physical proper-
ties.
3. Write three equations expressing chemical reac-
tions.
By
1. What is the principal compound of nitrogen and
hydrogen? How is it prepared? What are its pro-
perties?
2. What do you understand by families of elements?
Give a number of illustrations.
3. Explain any four of the following terms :—Kind-
ling temperature, combining weight, valence, acid, base.
G:
1. How is nitric acid obtained from saltpetre? Ex-
plain what takes place by means of an equation. How
much acid could be obtained from 50 grams of salt-
petre?
2. What are hydrocarbons? Describe the prepara-
tion of any one of them.
3. How does bromine occur in nature? How may
it be obtained from sodium bromide? What are its
properties? Compare them with those of chlorine.
+8. enya”
OPTIONAL SUBJECTS. 519
aC nes
WEDNESDAY, JUNE IOTH:—AFTERNOON, 4 TO 5.30.
1. Describe as fully as you can, the special nature
of the subjects treated of by Systematic Botany, Mor-
phology, and Physiology.
2. What part of the plant is represented by the com-
mon potato? State how this structure may be dis-
tinguished from other underground organs.
3. What is the distinction between Cross-pollination
and Self-pollination? Describe some of the more com-
mon methods for securing the former and preventing
the latter.
4. Describe as fully as you can, the differences in
structure of the flower and the leaf, which distinguish
the Monocotyledons from the Dicotyledons.
5. What chemical elements usually enter into the
composition of plant foods? State as exactly as you
can, the various sources from which they are derived.
6. Write a short essay upon the field buttercup, giving
(a) Its scientific name and the name of the family
to which it belongs.
(b) A description of its appearance, mode of growth
and _ habitat.
(c) Any information you possess respecting its uses
and properties.
GEOMETRICAL AND FREEHAND DRAWING.
TUESDAY, JUNE I16TH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
PART
1. The perpendiculars from two points, 4 and B, to
a straight line, measure respectively one inch and one
and one-half inches. A to B measures two _ inches.
Find a point M in the line such that 4M and MB shall
make equal angles with the line.
2. Construct a triangle having a base of 2 inches, an
altitude of 3 inches and an angle of 30° opposite the
base.
3. Inscribe a heptagon in a circle of 3 in. diameter.
520 SCHOOL EXAMINATIONS,
4. A circle of one inch diameter rolls on the outer
circumference of a circle of 3 in. diameter. Find one
loop of the curve traced by a point one inch distant
from the centre of the rolling circle and moving with it.
RART 115
5. Make a copy of the drawing before you, enlarged
to about twice its size.
6. Make a drawing representing a skeleton cube,
when .below the level of the eye and to its left. One
face of the cube is vertical and perpendicular to the
line of sight (the line joining the eye to the centre of
the picture plane).
7, Make an outline drawing of the capital of a column
ator you as it appears from your point of view. (A
drawing in light and shade may be substituted for the
outline drawing.) Make your drawing at least three
inches in its shortest dimension.
Part’ ΤΠ:
8. Make a pencil drawing of the moulding before
you.
g. Make a drawing in water colour of the group of
objects.
Note.—Marks will not be given in the problems of
Part J. 4 instrumentsiare used in the drawing. The
object in question 7 is to be placed at a distance “of four
feet from the eye, resting on a surface one foot above
the level of the eye. The vertical face of the plinth
to the right of the ‘candidate is to make'an angle of 60°
with the vertical plane passing through the eye and
the centre of the object. ij
Pino ὙΕΆΉῊΉΣ Ee: XAIBET ION
(ARTS)
EXAMINATION PAPERS.
JUNE, 19098.
ee =. =
ΗΝ B. EXHIBITIONS.
ENGLISH.
TUESDAY, JUNE 16TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
1. “Latin granum is the same word as the English
corn.’ Explain the significance of this statement as
fully as you can.
2. At what periods have words from the Latin been
‘introduced into English?
3. Outline L’Allegro or Lycidas, and quote from a
dozen to twenty consecutive lines from either poem.
4. State precisely whence the iollowing lines are
taken, and give a short account of the context of
each)
(a) All is, if I have grace to use it so,
As ever in my great Task-Master’s eye.
(Ὁ) But let my\due feet never fail
To walk the studious cloister’s pale.
(c) They also serve who only stand and wait.
(d) License they mean when they cry Liberty.
(e) And the repeated air
Of sad Electra’s poet had the power
To save the Athenian walls from ruin bare.
(f) New Presbyter is but old Priest writ large.
5. Write an essay of three or four pages on ome of
the following subjects :—
(a) Macaulay as an Esssayist.
(Ὁ) The English in India. .
(c) The Character of Lord Byron.
ACE EN.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE 17TH :—MoRNING, 9 TO II.
A.—GRAMMAR.
τ. Decline in the sing. marking by the usual sign all
long vowels:—accipiter, supellex, interpres, Os, OS,
plebs, pecus, Ceres, pedester (all genders).
524 B, EXHIBITIONS,
2. Give the corresponding forms in the other degrees
of comparison for: frugi, nequius, potior, egenus, acre,
idoneus, apertus, tutius, nuper, diu.
Give the Latin for: twenty-one years old; three
thousand three hundred soldiers; many a victim; the
Ubii alone; one camp; who of us; mindful of you; of
what kind; how many ¢
4. Explain, by means of examples, the sequence of
Tenses.
5. Give the principal parts and Ist sing. peri. ind. act.
(all moods) of: edo, memini, domo, sero, iuvo, disco,
emo, obliviscor orior.
B.—COoOMPOSITION.
Translate into Latin :— i
The host of the enemy was so great, and their repu-
tation for courage so pre-eminent, that Caesar refrained
from a general engagement; still he determined to try
skirmishes daily. Seeing, by the cavalry skirmishes,
that his own men were not inferior, after fortifying the
hill on which he had pitched his camp, he drew up six
legions in battle order, no longer fearing that his men
might be surrounded by the host of the enemy. For
on each side of the hill he had drawn wide ditches and
had built redoubts at the ends of them over against
the enemy.
Translate with notes explaining the construction of
words printed in italics :—
C:—HorAce, Opes LI:
(1) Caelo tonantem credidimus lovem
regnare: praesens divus habebitur
Augustus adiectis Britannis
imperio gravibusque Persis.
Milesne Crassi coniuge barbara
turpis maritus vixit et hostium
pro curia inversique mores!
consenuit socerorum iu armis,
Sub rege Medo Marsus et Apulus,
anciliorum et nominis et togae
oblitus aeternaeque Vestae,
incolumi Iove et urbe Roma?
Β. EXHIBITIONS. 525
(2) Scan the first four lines and explain fully the
allusion in Augustus, Persis, Miles Crassi, Marsus et
Apulus, Vestae.
(3) Iam clarus occultum Audromedae pater
ostendit ignem, iam Procyon furit
et stella vesani Leonis,
sole dies referente siccos;
jam pastor umbras cum grege languido
rivumque fessus quaerit et horridi
dumeta Silvani, caretque
ripa vagis taciturna ventis:
4. Explain the allusion in Audromedae pater, Pro-
cyon, Stella Leonis, Silvani.
D.—SI1GHT TRANSLATION.
(1) Quae civitates commodius suam rem publicam
administrare existimantur, habent legibus sanctum, si
quis quid de re publica a finitimis rumore aut fama
acceperit, uti ad magistratum deferat neve cum quo
alio communicet: quod saepe homines temerarios at-
que imperitos falsis rumoribus terreri et ad facinus
impelli et de summis rebus consilium capere cognitum
est. Magistratus quae visa sunt occultant; quaeque
esse ex usu judicaverint, multitudini produnt. De re
publica nisi per concilium loqui non conceditur.
(2) Omnia nunc florent; nunc est nova temporis aetas
Et nova de gravido palmite gemma tumet ;
Et modo formatis amicitur vitibus arbos;
Prodit et in summum seminis herba solum;
Et tepidum volucres concentibus aera mulcent ;
Ludit et in pratis luxuriatque pecus;
Tum blandi soles; ignotaque prodit hirundo,
Et luteum celsa sub trabe fingit opus;
Tum patitur cultus ager, et renovatur aratro;
Haec anni novitas jure vocanda fuit.
GREEK.
THURSDAY, JUNE 18TH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.30.
A.—GRAMMAR.
τ. (a) Give the accusative singular and dative plural
of ποιμήν. δελφίς. πῆχυς. κλείς. ὄρνις. μέλας (all genders),
εὐγενής (all genders), πολύς (all genders).
9
526 B. EXHIBITIONS.
(6) Give the genitive sing. and accusative plural of
γαστήρ, ἥρως, γέρας, οὖς, χρυσοῦς (all genders), ἵλεως
(all genders), διδούς (all genders),
2. Give the other degrees of comparison for paar,
αἴσχιστος, πρῶτος, ἐχθρός, εὔνους, ἐλάττων παλαιός,
πολύν. μέγα, μείζω.
3. (a) Give the 3rd sing. perfect ind. pass.; 2nd sing.
aor. ind. mid.; 3rd pl. imperi..ind. act.; 1st-pl. fut: ind.
mid.; present infin. act.; of διδάσκω, εὑρίσκω, καλῶ
πράττω. φαίνω.
(6) Give the 2nd sing. impf. ind. act ; 2nd pl. fut,
ind, mid.; 3rd sing, aor. ind, pass.; 3rd pl. pf. ind. pass.
aor. infin. pass.; of δείκνυμι. ἔχω, ζεύγνυμι. πίμπλημι
σηνω.
B.—ComMPOSITION.
After this Cyrus marched on to the river Euphrates
which was four stadia wide. When the soldiers heard
that the march would be to Babylon, they said that
they would not go. Cyrus, however, persuaded the
greater part of the Greek army to follow, by pro-
missing to give to each man a large amount of money
as soon as they reached Babylon.
Now Menon wished to persuade his men to cross
the river before the rest of the soldiers decided what
they would do; “for,” said he, “if you begin the passage
of the river, Cyrus will honor you above the rest.
Cyrus was pleased with Menon and his soldiers.
C.—Home_er, OpysseEy, VII.
Translate with notes on words underlined :—
{πὴ αὐτὰρ Οδυσσεὺς
᾿Αλκινόου πρὸς δώματ᾽ ἴε κλυτά. πολλὰ δέ οἱ KAP
"OQpuaw ἱσταμένω πρὶν χάλκεον οὐδὸν ἱκέσθαι.
ev Ν Ψ / »” /, , ,
Qus: τε γὰρ ἠελίου αἴγλη πέλεν ἡ": σελήνης
Adua καθ᾽ ὑψερεφὲς μεγαλήτορος ᾿Αλκινοοιο.
Χάλκεοι μὲν γὰρ τοῖχοι ἐληλέδατ᾽ ἔνθα καὶ ἔνθα,
3 ᾿ ? ’ a NTN eZ) ee , 3
ὃς μυχὸν ἐξ οὐδοῦ, περὶ δὲ θριγκὸς κυάνοιο
Χρύσειαι δὲ θύραι πυκινὸν δόμον ἐντὸς ἔεργον"
πῃ ΨυΨΌΨὉῳ
2
B. EXHIBITIONS. 527
Σταθμοὶ δ᾽ ἀργύρεοι ἐν χαλκέῳ ἕστασαν οὐδᾷ
᾿Αργύρεον δ᾽ ἐφ᾽ ὑπερθύριον, χρυσέη δὲ κορώνη.
\ f ’ /
(2) Avtap ἐπεὶ στόρεσαν πυκινὸν λέγος ἐγκονέουσαι,
n δὶ
Ὥτρυνον ᾿᾽Οδυσῆι παριστάμειαι ἐπέεσιν'
r ΄ 3 /
Ὅρσο κέων, ὦ ξεῖνε" πεποίηται δέ τοι εὐνή.
“Ὡς φὰν, τῷ δ᾽ ἀσπαστὸν ἐείσατο κοιμηθῆναι.
3. Scan the first two lines of (2).
D.—Euvripipes, Hecusa (Sidgwick’s Selections).
(1) ὦ φίλτατ᾽, apa kaw ἐπισφάξαι τάφῳ
—
δοκοῦν ᾿λχαιοῖς ἦλθες ; ws φίλ᾽ ἂν λέγοις.
σπευδωμεν, ἐγκονῶμεν, ἡγοῦ μοι, γέρον.
τί δῆτα θνητοὶ τἄλλα μὲν μαθήματα
μοχθοῦμεν ὡς χρὴ πάντα καὶ μαστεύομεν, ’
πειθὺ δὲ τὴν τύραννον ἀνθρώποις μόνην
οὐδέν τι μᾶλλον ἐς τέλος σπουδάζομεν
μισθοὺς διδόντες μανθάνειν, tv ἣν ποτε
πείθειν ἅ τις βούλοιτο, τυγχάνειν θ᾽ ἅμα ;
τί δ᾽; οὐ γυναῖκες εἷλον Αἰγύπτου τέκνα,
καὶ Λῆμνον ἄρδην ἀρσένων ἐξῴκισαν ;
> wu ἢ. / / \ ; ,
ἀλλ᾽ ὡς γενέσθω: τόνδε μὲν μέθες λόγον,
πέμψον δέ μοι τήνδ᾽ ἀσφαλῶς διὰ στρατοῦ
γυναῖκα. καὶ σύ, Θρῃκὶ πλαθεῖσα ξένῳ,
λέξον. ἱκαλεῖ σ᾽ ἄνασσα δι, ToT ᾿Ιλίου
c ’ X Yj
ExaBn, σὸν οὐκ ἔλασσον ἢ κείνης χρέος,
καὶ παῖδας"
E.—SI1GHT TRANSLATION, XENOPHON.
Translate into English :—
Οἱ δὲ Θηβαῖοι εὐθὺς μετὰ τὴν μάχην ἔπεμψαν εἰς
᾿Αθήνας ἄγγελον ἐστεφανωμένον, καὶ ἅμα μὲν τῆς νίκης
τὸ μέγεθος ἔφραζον. ἅμα δὲ βοηθεῖν ἐκέλευον, λέγοντες
ὡς νῦν ἐξείη Λακεδαιμονίους πάντων ὧν ἐπεποιήκεσαν
αὐτοὺς τιμωρήσασθαι. τῶν δὲ ᾿Αθηναίων ἡ βουλὴ
ἐτύγχανεν ἐν ἀκροπόλει καθημένη. ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἤκουσαν τὸ
γεγενημένον, ὅτι σφόδρα ἐλυπήθησαν πᾶσι δῆλον ἐγένετο"
οὔτε γὰρ ἐπὶ ξενίᾳ τὸν κήρυκα ἐκάλεσαν, περί τε τῆς
βοηθείας οὐδὲν ἀπεκρίναντο. καὶ ᾿Αθήνηθεν οὕτως ἀπῆλ-
θεν ὁ κῆρυξ.
34
528 B. EXHIBITIONS.
GREEK COMPOSITION AND TRANSLATION
AT SIGHT.
THURSDAY, JUNE 18TH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
(Alternative paper for those who do not offer prescribed
authors.)
1. Translate into Greek:
(a) Good citizens give money to the wives of
soldiers who have died for their country.
(b) I heard how large the country was.
(c) He said that the man who was present was his
friend.
(d) Cyrus was a man capable of doing great things.
(ce) The King is afraid that the Greeks will put the
river in their rear.
(f) Cyrus was educated at the King’s court, with
the sons of the nobles. There, all who were person-
ally acquainted with him agreed that he was the best
of all in everything, and that he knew how to rule and
obey. While he was satrap of Lydia and Phrygia,
everybody had confidence in him, because he never
broke his word, if he promised any one anything.
2. Translate into English :—
᾿Επεὶ δὲ οἱ Μαντινεῖς οὐκ ἤθελον καθαιρεῖν τὰ τείχη.
᾿Αγησίπολις πρῶτον μὲν τὴν γῆν ἐδήου: ἔπειτα δὲ τάφρον
ὥρυττε κύκλῳ περὶ τὴν πόλιν, τοῖς μὲν ἡμίσεσι τῶν στρα-
τιωτῶν ἐν τοῖς ὅπλοις προκαθημένοις τῶν ταφρευόντων.
τοῖς δ᾽ ἣμισεσιν ἐργαζομένοις. ἐπεὶ δὲ ἐξείργαστο ἡ τά-
φρος. ἀσφαλῶς ἤδη φκοδόμησε τεῖχος κύκλῳ περὶ τὴν
πόλιν. αἰσθόμενος δὲ ὅτι ὁ σῖτος ἐν τῇ πόλει πολὺς ἐνείη.
ἀπέχωσε τὸν διὰ τῆς πόλεως ῥέοντα ποταμὸν μάλ᾽ ὄντα
εὐμεγέθη. ἐμφραχθείσης δὲ τῆς ἀπορροίας τὸ ὕδωρ ἤρετο
ὑπέρ τε τῶν ὑπὸ ταῖς οἰκίαις καὶ ὑπὲρ τῶν ὑπὸ τῷ τείχει
θεμελίων. βρεχομένων δὲ τῶν κάτω πλίνθων καὶ προδιδου-
σῶν τὰς ἄνω. τὸ μὲν πρῶτον ἐρρήγνυτο τὸ τεῖχος. ἔπειτα δὲ
καὶ ἐκλίνετο. οἱ δὲ χρόνον μέν τινα ἀντήρειδον ξύλα καὶ
ἐμηχανῶντο, ὡς μὴ πίπτοι ὁ πύργος" ἐπεὶ δὲ ἡττῶντο τοῦ
ὕδατος. δείσαντες μὴ πεσόντος πὴ τοῦ τείχους δοριάλωτο
γένοιντο, ὡμολόγουν περιαιρήσειν.
Β. EXHIBITIONS. 529
FRENCH.
THURSDAY, JUNE 18TH :—MORNING, 9 TO II.
(Questions asked in French must be answered in French.)
1. Traduisez en francais :—
I leave Paris at half past twelve to-night, and I shall
be away a fortnight. You have very fine roses on this
rose-tree; give me one for her. Why do you not sit
down? I shall see you again to-morrow afternoon,
Go and ask your friend to have the kindness to wait
for me here. Please let me have this book, I really
want it. I cannot give it to you for it has been lent to
me. He is a friend of mine; you are nearly two years
older than he. Whose book is this? I do not know
whom you mean. He who tries to please everybody
generally pleases nobody. Let us start at once, lest
we should miss the train; it will not wait for us.
2. State clearly the rules and give examples of the
agreement of (a) the past participle of reflexive verbs,
(b) past participles conjugated with avoir, (c) past par-
ticiples before an infinitive.
3. Give five different cases, with examples, in which
the subjunctive in French is used.
4. Write in full the present indicative, preterite and the
present subjunctive of sen aller, mourir, s'apercevoir,
mettre, faire, and dire.
5. Résumez la carriére de Bernard dans Mademoiselle
de la Seigliére.
6. Donnez les équivalents anglais des expressions
suivantes prises du Siege de Paris :—
Ouel peu de fond il faut faire sur son bon sens!
Parti pris de mensonge. Rompre en visicre a quel-
qu'un. On fit fléche de tout bois. La vérité qui se
fit bientot jour, ne laissait pas d’étre inquiétante.
Faites l'appel nominal. C’est la seule souffrance dont
aucun de nous n’ait pris son parti. Ce fut fait d’eux.
7. Faites un bref récit de la vie intime de Paris aux
mois d’octobre et de novembre, pendant le siége:—
Prix des vivres, la charité, les réfugiés.
ν᾿
530 B. EXHIBITIONS.
8. Le Corfiote survint a propos pour me dispenser
de répondre. 1] amenait la femme de chambre de ces
dames. C’était une Albanaise assez belle, malgré son
nez camard. Deux brigands qui rodaient dans la mon-
tagne l’avaient prise tout endimanchée, entre sa mere
et son fiancé. Elle poussait des cris a fendre le mar-
bre, mais on la consola bientot en lui promettant de la
relacher sous quinze jours et de la payer. Elle prit
son parti en brave et se réjouit presque d'un malheur
qui devait grossir sa dot. Heureux pays, out les bles-
sures du cceur se guérissent avec des pieces de cing
francs! Cette servante philosophe ne fut pas dun
grand secours a Madame Simons: de tous les travaux
de son sexe, elle ne connaissait que le labourage.
Quant a moi, elle me rendit la vie insupportable, par
Vhabitude qu’elle avait de grignoter une gousse d’ail
par friandise et par coquetterie, comme les dames de
Hambourg s’amusent a croquer des bonbons.—(Le Rot
des Montagnes.) f
9. Traduisez en francais :—
Turenne, the famous general and marshal of France,
was born in 1611, and was killed by a canon-shot in
1675. When a young man, he was challenged to a
duel by another officer. What was his reply? “I
cannot fight a duel,” he answered, “for the laws forbid
it. But I know as well as you, how to face danger
when duty allows me. There is a bold stroke to be
made, very useful and honourable for us, but very
dangerous: let us go and ask our general for permis-
sion to attempt it, and we shall see which of us two
will come off with the most honour.” ‘The officer who
had proposed the duel considered the scheme so dan-
gerous, in fact, that he refused to submit his valor to
such a test.
GERMAN.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE 17TH :—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
1. Translate two of the following sections :—
(Candidates for C. Exhibitions to take (d) and one other.)
(a) Aber eine dumpfe, qualende Vegier, den Ort des Unheils
bon WAngefidht gu feben, erwadte in ihm und Lieb ihm firrder
i B. EXHIBITIONS. 531
feine Mubhe mehr. Da tberwand er die Wbherglanbifche Edhen,
Die ihn bisher in Banden gehalten, und drang dur) das
Dickicht, weiches den Τα fchiibend verhiillte.
Der Sdnee fuirjehte unter Boleflavs Fitpen. Cein tem
twallte in Lichten Wolfen porihim her. Die Frojtluft that feinem
glithenden Gejichte wohl. Cr fuchte in einfamer Wanderung
δ τ. und Klarheit 3u gewinnen, denn in jeinem Hirne brodelte es
tie im einem Herenfeffel.
Was geihehen war, glic) einer ehernen Kette von Schuld, in
twelcher jeit Sahren ein Glied fic) an das andere reihte. Sn
Dicie Kette hincingefitgt follte alles, was Macht und Sdmeigen
gezengt, in Nacht und Sehweigen beqraben fein. Begraben
416 {01 mit dDiejem Leicynam.
(ὁ) Das Land ift fewer bedrangt—Warum, mem Obeim ὃ
Wer ijt's, Der ec geftiirzt in dieje Mot?
(8 foftete cin eirziq leichtes Wort,
Um argenblicés des Dranges los 31 fein,
Und einen gnad gen Kaijer 211 gewinnen
Weh ihnen, die Dem Wolf die Warrgen halten
Dap es dent wahren Bejten widerftrebt !
Uni eignen Borteils tvillen hindern fie,
Dah die Waldstatte nicht gu Oftreich fchworen,
Wie ringsum alle Lande doch gethan
Der Konig ritt herab vom Stein zu Baden,
Gen Mbheinfeld, wo die Hofftatt war, 31 ziehn,
Mit hr die Fiirjten Hans und Leopold
Ud cn Getoloe Hochqeborner Serren.
Und als fie famen an die δὲ οι}, wo man
Wij einer Hahre fich Lapt woerjegen,
Da drangten fic) Die Mrder in das Schiff,
Das fie Den Kaijer vom Gefolge trennten.
Drauf, als dev Fiirjt Durch cin geackert Feld
Sinreitet, —eine alte grobe Stadt
Soll drunter liege aus der Heiden Seit—
Die alte Fejte Habsburg im Gejidt,
Wo feines Stammes Hobeit ausgegagen—
Stdpt Serzog Hangs den Dolch ihm in die Keble,
Rudolph von Palm dDurechrennt ibn mit dem Speer,
532 B. EXHIBITIONS.
Und Cjhenbach zerjpaltet ihm das Saupt,
Dak er herunterfinft in feinem Blut,
Gemordet von den Seinen, auf dem Seinen.
(cy Arnold fudjte jebt feine Begleiterin, die ifm gar jo ernjt
borfam, aufzubeitern, erzablte ihr pon andern Orten, wo er ge:
Iwefen, UND wie ἐδ Draupen in der Welt ausjahe. Bon den
Lelegraphen hatte fie feine Whnung, und hordyte aufmerfjam
und erftaunt feiner Erflarury ; eben fo wenig von all den neu-
ern Crfindungen, und der junge δῆλα ον. begriff nicht, wie οὗ
Moglic fei, Dap noc) Menjehen in Qeutfehland fo abgefchieden, fo
formlich qetrennt von der Ubrigen Welt und auper der Germain
Verbindung mit hr leben fonnten. ....
Die andern lachten Heimlich mit cinander, der junge Bauer
aber fiihrte Wrnold im gangen Haufe herum, das dicht qedrangt
boll tuftig fchwarmender Gajte war. Crft famen fie δι 3im-
mer, in Denen Kartenfpieler fapen und qrofe Haufen Geldes vor
fich Tieqen Hatten, Dann betraten fie die Kegelbahn, die mit bell-
glanzgenden Steinen ausgelegt war,
(4) Sch bin Shre Gebicterin, Tellheim ; Sie brauchen weiter
Feinen Herr. Cie verabjdhicdet 3n finden, das ΘΠ hatte ich mir
Faum traumen Lajfen !—Dodh Sie find nicht blop verabjehiedet :
Sie find noc) mehr. Was find fie noch mehr? Cin Kriippel fagten
Gie? Nun, der Kritppel ΠῚ doch noch zicmlich ganz und gerade ;
[εἰπε Doch noch ziemlich gejund und ftarf. Lieber Tellheim, tenn
Sie auf den Verlujt Shrev gefunden Gliedmagen betteln zu gehen
denfen, fo propbhezcie id) Shnen, dab Sie vor den twenigften
Thitren ettvas befommen werden; ausgenommen vor den
hirer der qutherzigen Madden, wie id... ..
Sch thue Cuch zu wijfen, dag der Handel, der mich um Cure
Chre bejorgt machte, jich zu Curem Borteil anfgeflart bat.
Wrein Bruder war des YMaheren davon unterrichtet, und fein
Senuqmuip bat Cuch five mebr als unjehuldiq erflart. Die Hof-
jtaatsfajfe bat Ordre, (δια) den berwupten Weehfel wieder auszu-
licfern, und Die qethanen Borfehitfe zu bezablen ; auch habe ich
befoblen, dab alles, was Die Veldfrieqsfaffen vider Cure
Mechnungen urgiren, miedergeychlagen werde. Weeldet mir, ob
(διά Cure Gefundheit erlaubt, wieder Qienjte zu uehmen. δα)
Β. EXHIBITIONS. 533
mochte nicht gern cinen Yann von Curer Bravour und Yent-
ungsart enthebren.
2. Translate into German :—
In ascending the upper half of the Brocken one can-
not help (umbin) thinking of the interesting Brocken
legends (Die Sage) and of the great national tragedy of
Dr. Faust. It seemed to me as though I could hear
“Mephisto with his cloven feet (ferdefup) walking along
by my side. After a long and extremely exhausting
(erjehdprend) ascent (der YWuffteiq) we finally reached
the summit (Der Gipfel) Upon entering the hotel, I
found it full of guests, and, fearing that I should have
to put up (fic) beqniiqen) withy very poor (dinjtiq)
accommodation (das Quartier) for the night, 1 im-
mediately dropped into a chair and with a faint (/cpwad))
voice called for a glass of water ; whereupon the landlord
was sensible (verniinftiq) enough to see that so sick a
man needed (bedirjen)a good bed for the night, even
if someone else had to go (tich bebelfen) without it.
3. Answer any four questions.
(Candidates for C. Exhibitions to take (f) and three others.)
(a) Saufen Geldes (tc) Have you any remark to
make on this construction? Express in German :—The
fear of the enemy—a friend of nune—both of us—none
of them.
(Ὁ) Fithren, dréangen, laeheln, eben, Horcden. What
are these verbs derived from? Are widerftrebt, itber-
eben, (14) separable or inseparable? Explain the rule
-governing such verbs.
(c) Write following in Oratio obliqua:—r jagte ju
iby: | Kontme nicht zu fpat, Denn ich fann micht lange auf dich
warten. Sch fam qeftern fpat an.”
(d) How are the adjectives folch, weld), απ used
in German? Give examples. Translate:—Whoever you
are, it’s the same to me—go away at once (in three ways).
(6) Parse lfaffen in td. Whvis €r bat mich rufen
lajjen’ ambiguous?
2
534 B. EXHIBITIONS.
(f) Explain the allusion in dev bewupte Weebhjel (12)
and its connextion with the plot of the play.
4. Translate (at sight) :—
Dieje Worte famen aus der geriihlvollen Brayt meines Sim-
mergenoffen, des jumgen Kaufmanns. Bc) gelangte dadurd
mieder 1. meiner Werfeltagsitimmumg, war jebt im ftaude, den
Damen ber den Connenuntergang recht viel rtiges 211 fagen,
Und fle rubiq, als ware nichts pafftert, nach) ibrent Simmer 31
fubren. Sie erlaubten mir auch, jie noch eine Stunde yu anter-
θα τι. Wie Die Erde jelbyt, Drehte fich unfere Unterhaltung um
Die Sone. Die Weutter aduperte, die in Nebel verjinfende
Sonne Habe ausgefehen wie cine rotgliihende Moje, die der
qalante Sinrmel Herubgemworfen in den iweitausgebreiteten,
weipen Brautydlerer feimer qeliebten Erde. Die Tochter lachelte
und mleinte, Der OFtere Yarblicf rolcher Naturerfdpeimaungen fehwache
ibren Cindrae.
GEOMETRY, PART II AND ALGEBRA, PART II.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE IOTH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
=
GEOMETRY.
1. Inscribe a regular pentagon in a given circle.
(a) Prove that the intersections of the alternate
sides of a regular pentagon are the vertices of another
regular pentagon.
2.-(a@) -Inscribe a. circle*in a given triangle.
(b) Draw an escribed circle to a given triangle,
that is, a circle touching one side and the other two
produced.
3. ABC is a triangle, and the perpendicular A D
drawn from A to B C falls within the triangle. Prove
that if A D is a mean proportional between BD and
DC,,BAE is a-right angle. .-Prove also-that 11:48
is a mean proportional between BC and BD that BAC
is a right angle.
4. Equal triangles, which have one angle of the one
equal to one angle of the other, have the sides about
the equal angles reciprocally: proportional.
STAY ὅλῳ Salen ie Maen
B. EXHIBITIONS. 535
ALGEBRA.
5. Find the sum of a number of terms in arithmetical
progression. Find the arithmetical progression of
7 terms whose sum is 28 and common difference 3.
6. The area of a circle varies as the square of its
radius. Given that the area is 154 sq. ft. when the
radius is 7 ft., find the area when the radius is Io ft. 6 in.
7. Find for what value of 7 the number of combina-
tions of 1 things, 7 at a time, is the greatest.
8. (a) Find the first 5 terms of (1 + +)?
oy Prove log. 1” ΞΞΞ 1 log Im,
9. Find the present value of an annuity to continue
for a given number of years, allowing compound in-
terest:
TRIGONOMETRY.
THURSDAY, JUNE I1ITH:—MORNING, II TO 12.30.
1. Express all the trigonometrical ratios in terms
of the secant. If the secant = $, calculate the other
ratios.
2. Prove that a radian (the unit of circular measure)
2 ΤΟΣ
3 150”. : : :
is equal to — Ἔ Find the number of radians in 240°.
3. Prove the following relations :—
(a) sin (A — B) = sin A cos B — cos A sin B.
A+ B it A—B
(6) sin A — sin B == 2 cos- ——sin :
sin 2 4 — sin A __ ἀξ (19 A
(¢ > -ῷ οο ο΄
cos 4 — cos 24 2
4. Solve the following trigonometrical equations and
construct the angles obtained :—
(a) 3 sin A — 2 cos? A — 00.
(b) tan 6 + 3 cot 4 = 4.
5. Find all the ratios of 75°.
6. Prove the following :-—
@) I — sin 4
I + sin 4
(2) sin (180 + A) == — sin A.
= (sec. stam
Ο. EXHIBITIONS.
ENGEISH ἘΠ ΘΕ:
Monpay, JUNE 8TH:—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 3.30.
GREEN’s “Short History of the English People.”
Write upon any four of the following subjects:
. Wessex and the Danes, 802-880.
the reign. of Henry It
. English towns in the time of the Three Edwards.
. England and Mary Stuart, 1560-72.
. New England, 1620-1756.
. The second Stuart Tyranny, 1682-88.
. The character and career of the second Pitt.
NOW BW HN "
ENGLISH LITERATURE
Monpay, JUNE 8TH:—MoORNING. ὁ TO 12.
(A and B to be wrt‘ten in separate books.)
A,
SHAKSPERE: Merchant of Venice. As You Like It Tuhius
Caesar.
I. State; as shortly and. ‘clearly. as* youscan. the
sources from which Shakspere drew the plots of the
above plavs
2. Compare the characters of Rosalind and Celia;
give your Own impression of Jacques.
3. Write notes on the songs in The Merchant of
Venice and As You Like It.
4. Explain the following :—‘‘Black Monday,” “Rialto,”
“Tupercal,” “dark as Erebus,” “a quintain,” “the
Ee a δον ee ΝΣ ΟΝ οι
=. 4 Vs ee
C. EXHIBITIONS. 037
golden world,” “swam in a gondola,’ “we are the
Jasons, we have won the fleece,” “hard food for
Midas.” “the Hyranian deserts,” “Hercules and
Lichas.”
5. State precisely where the following passages occur,
giving full particulars of the speaker, occasion and
context :—
(a) I had it of Leah when I was a bachelor: I
would not have given it for a wilderness of monkeys.
(b) Yet am [ inland bred
And know some nurture.
(c) What can be avoided
Whose end is purposed by the mighty gods?
(d) O good old man, how well in thee appears
The constant service of the antique world.
(e) A kind of boy, a little scrubbed boy.
(f) Mistrust of good success hath done this deed.
(g) When love begins to sicken and decay,
It useth an enforced ceremony.
(h) Peace, ho! the moon sleeps with Endymion
And would not be awaked.
(ἢ I see no more in you than in the ordinary
Of Nature’s sale-work.
(7) If thou dost nod, thou break’st thy instrument.
Bi
CoLERIDGE: Ancient Mariner: WWorRDSWORTH:
Selections; TENNYSON: Selections.
1. Make a brief outline of the story of the Ancient
Mariner, and discuss Coleridge’s treatment of it.
2. Judging from the poems studied, what can you
say of Wordsworth’s sympathy with animals; his ideas
on national liberty? Illustrate as far as possible by
auotation.
2. Refer each of the following passages to its context,
and make a note where it seems necessary on the
meaning or significance of the words:
(a) Who with a natural instinct to discern
What knowledge can perform is diligent to learn.
(b) The earth is constant to her sphere
And God upholds them all.
538 Bb. EXHIBITIONS.
(c) And see the children sport upon the shore;
And hear the mighty waters rolling evermore,
(d) Stern law giver! Yet thou dost wear
The Godhead’s most benignant grace.
(e) Of him who walked in glory and in joy
Following his plough along the mountain-side.
(f) And something also did my worth obtain;
For fearless virtue bringeth boundless gain.
4. In what poem is each of the following passages
found? Give some idea of the context and make a
note where the meaning is obscure:
(a) So keep I fair thro’ faith and prayer
A virgin heart in work and will.
(b) Hear me, for I will speak, and build up all
My sorrow with my song, as yonder walls
Rose slowly to a music slowly breathed.
(c) Ask thou not my name:
No one can be more wise than destiny.
(ὦ) This is a shameful thing for men to he.
(e) And drill the raw world for the march of mind,
Till crowds at length be sane and crowns be
just.
(f) But every hour is saved
From that eternal silence, something more,
A bringer of new things.
ENGLISH LANGUAGE AND COMPOSITION.
TUESDAY, JUNE I16TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
(A and B to be written in separate books.)
A.—ENGLISH LANGUAGE: TOLLER’S OUTLINES.
I. Set forth clearly the relations of English to the
other members of the Indo-European family of lan-
guages, and explain what is meant by Grimm’s and
Verner’s “Laws.”
2. Write out the following in modern English, and
add what you know as to the date and authorship,
making also careful notes as to inflectional and dialec-
tical forms :—
Ae
Vor bote a man conne Frenss, me telth of him lute;
Ac lowe men holdeth to Engliss & to hor owe speche
yute.
το Eat toca Stent esate
C. EXHIBITIONS. 539
Ich wene ther ne beth in al the world contreyes none,
That ne holdeth to hor owe speche bote Engelond one.
Ac wel me wot uor to conne bothe wel it is,
Vor the more that a man can, the more wurthe he is.
B.
Englysche men theygh hy hadde fram the bygynnynge
thre maner speche, Southeron, Northeron, & Myddel
speche (in the myddel of the lond) as hy come of thre
maner people of Germania; notheles, by commyxstion
& mellynge furst with Danes & afterward with Nor-
mans, in menye the contray longage ys apeyred, & som
useth strange wlaffynge, chyterynge, harrynge & gar-
rynge & grisbitinge.
ς.
Pers mette upon a day
A pore man by the way,
As naked as he was bore,
That yn the se had alle lore
Pers was of reuful herte,
He toke hys kyrtyl of, as smert,
And ded hyt on the man aboue
And bad hym were hyt for hys loue.
D.
Thanne longen folk to gon on pilgrimages
And palmers for to seeken straunge strondes,
To ferne halwes, kouthe in sondry londes,
And specially from every schires ende
Of Engelond, to Caunterbury they wende,
The holy blisful martir for to seeke,
That hem hath holpen when that they were seeke.
ἘΝ
On this ger werd the king Stephen ded & bebyried
ther his wif & his sune weron bebyried et Fauresfeld.
that minstre hi makeden. Tha the king was ded. tha
was the eorl beionde se, ἃ ne durste nan man don
other bute god for the micel eie of him. Tha he to
Engleland com. tha was he underfangen mid micel
wurtscipe. & to king bletced in Lundene on the
Sunnendxi beforen midwinterdei, & held ther micel
curt.
540. C. EXHIBITIONS.
ἘΣ
Where is it groundid expressli in scripture, that men
mowe lete schaue her berdis? and how dare thei so
lete, sithen it can not be founde expressli in holi scrip-
ture that thei oughten so lete, and namelich sithen it is
founde in holi scripture that men leten her berdis
growe withoute schering or schauyng, and also sithen
it was the oolde usage thorugh al the world in cristen-
dom?
B.—ComposITION.
\
Write an essay of not less than two pages on one of
the following subjects:
1. Moral ideals in Tennyson.
2. Wordsworth and Coleridge as the poets of natural
and supernatural description.
3. The character of Brutus as given by Shakspere.
BATIN:
THURSDAY, JUNE I11TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
I.
LATIN GRAMMAR.
τ. Decline vis, impetus, sol (in the plural), caro (in
the sing.), plus.
2. Give the derivation of the following words, with
explanation of the phonetic variations in each case:
cogo, debeo, cunctus, examen, summus, segmentum,
semestris, meridies.
3. What cases are wanting in most nouns of the fifth
declension ?
4. Give the comparative and superlative of idoneus,
vetus, maledicus, parum.
5. Translate: with a thousand men, with two thou-
sand men, a.d. VIII. Kal, Apr. Cn. Pompeio Magno
M. Licinio Crasso cos. (Express the date according
to our notation).
6. Give the principal parts of desino, veneo, tundo,
tero.
C. EXHIBITIONS. 5.41
7. Illustrate, by examples, in Latin, the principal
forms of conditional sentences.
ὃ. Explain the following constructions: :
(a) sui colligendi facultas; (0) subsequebatur om-
nibus copiis; (c) plus septingenti capti; (d) Gallia est
divisa (Caes. B. G. I. 1); (e) illud erat aptius, aequum
cuique concedere; (f) hoc dum narrat, forte audivit.
11.
CIcERO, CATILINE ORATIONS.
1. Translate:
Sed si quis est invidiae metus, num est vehementius
severitatis ac fortitudinis invidia quam inertiae ac
nequitiae pertimescenda? An cum bello vastabitur
Italia, vexabuntur urbes, tecta ardebunt, tum te non
existimas invidiae incendio conflagraturum? His ego
sanctissimis rei publicae vocibus, et eorum hominum
qui hoc idem sentiunt mentibus, pauca respondebo,
Ego, si hoc optimum factu iudicarem, patres conscripti,
Catilinam morte multari, unius usuram horae gladia-
tori isti ad vivendum non dedissem. Etenim si summi
et clarissimi viri Saturnini et Gracchorum et super-
iorum complurium sanguine non modo se non con-
taminarunt, sed etiam honestarunt, certe verendum
mihi non erat ne quid hoc parricida civium interfecto,
invidiae mihi in posteritatem redundaret. Quod si ea
mihi maxime impenderet tamen hoc animo fui semper,
ut invidiam virtute partam gloriam, non _ invidiam
putarem.
Classify the conditional sentences in this passage,
explaining the mood and tense in each.
2. Give the date of the Second Oration, the cir-
cumstances under which it was delivered, and a brief
outline of the speech.
3. Translate, with brief notes on italicised words:
Introducti autem Galli ius iurandum sibi et
litteras ab Lentulo ad suam gentem data esse dixerunt:
Lentulum sibi confirmasse, ex fatis Sibyllints haruspi-
cumque Tresponsis, se esse tertium illum Cornelium, ad
quem regnum huius urbis atque imperium pervenire
esset necesse; Cinnam ante se et Sullam fuisse ; eundem-
que dixisse fatalem hunc annum esse ad interitum
huius urbis atque imperi, qui esset annus decimus post
542 C. EXHIBITIONS.
virginum absolutionem, post Capitol: autem incensionem
vicesimus.
4: What.were the views expressed by Silanus, Caesar
and Cicero respecting the sentence of the conspirators.
5. Translate:
Quantum facinus ad vos delatum sit videtis. Huic
si paucos putatis adfinis esse, vehementer erratis.
Latius opinione disseminatum est hoc malum: manavit
non solum per Italiam, verum etiam transcendit Alpes,
et obscure serpens multas iam provincias occupavit.
Id opperimi sustentando ac prolatando nullo pacta
potest. Quacumque ratione placet, celeriter vobis
vindicandum est.
6. Write explanatory notes on the following words
or phrases: Jupiter Stator, signa militaria, Allobroges,
Saturnalia, pulvinaria, Seria quaestorii, aras Pena-
tium, Comitia Centuriata, praetor peregrinus, equites
equo publico, intercessio, quadringentiens sestertium,
tabulae auctionariae.
LATIN.
THURSDAY, JUNE IITH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.
A.—VirGIL, AENEID I.-VI.
. Translate :—
τὴ At matres primo ancipites oculisque malignis
Ambiguae spectare rates, miserum inter amorem
Praesentis terrae, fatisque vocantia regna:
Cum dea se paribus per caelum sustulit alis,
Ingentemque fuga secuit suo nubibus arcum.
Tum vero attonitae monstris actaeque furore
Conclamant, rapiuntque focis penetralibus ignem ;
Pars spoliant aras, frondem ac virgulta facesque
Coniciunt. Furit immissis Vulcanus habenis
Transtra per et remos et pictas abiete puppes.
(b) His demum exactis, perfecto munere divae,
Devenere locos laetos, et amoena vireta
Fortunatorum nemorum, sedesque beatas.
Largior hic campos aether et lumine vestit
Purpureo, solemque suum, sua sidera norunt.
Pars in gramineis exercent membra palaestris,
Cc. EXHIBITIONS. 543
Contendunt ludo, et fulva luctantur arena;
Pars pedibus plaudunt choreas, et carmina dicunt:
Nec non Threicius longa cum veste sacerdos
Obloquitur numeris septem discrimina vocum;
Iamque eadem digitis, iam pectine pulsat eburno.
2. Translate with explanatory notes:
(a) Namque umeris de more habilem suspenderat arcum
Venatrix, dederatque comam diffundere ventis,
Nuda genu, nodoque sinus collecta fluentis.
(b) Quod te per stperos et conscia numina veri,
Per si qua est quae restat adhuc mortalibus usquam
Intemerata fides, oro, miserere laborum
Tantorum, miserere amimi non digna ferentis.
(c) Sic denique victor
Trinacria finis Italos mittere relicta.
Huc ubi delatus Cumaeam accesseris urbem,
Divinosque lacus, et Averna sonantia silvis,
Insanam vates aspicies, quae rupe sub ima
Fata canit, foliisque notas et nomina mandat.
Quaecumque in foliis descripsit carmina virgo,
Digerit in numerum, atque antro seclusa relinquit.
(d) Vade age, nate, voca Zephyros et labere pinnis
Dardaniumque ducem, Tyria Carthage qui nunc
Expectat fatisque datas non respicit urbes,
Adloquere et celeris defer mea dicta per auras.
3. Scan the four lines of (d), and remark on any pe-
culiarities of metre.
ΒΞ CaEsAR, ‘DE BELLO GALEICU.
1. Translate:
(a) Cum uterque utrimque exisset exercitus, in
conspectu, fereque e regione. castris, castra ponebant.
Dispositis exploratoribus, ne cubi effecto ponte Romani
copias traducerent, erat in magnis Caesaris difficul-
tatibus res, ne maiorem aetatis partem flumine im-
pediretur; quod non fere ante autumnum Elaver vado
transiri solet.
Explain the construction of castris, partem.
(0) Calones in proximum tumulum procurrunt.
Hine celeriter deiecti se in signa manipulosque coni-
ciunt. Alii, cuneo facto, ut celeriter perrumpant cen-
sent, quoniam tam propinqua sint castra; et si pars
aliqua circumventa ceciderit, at reliquos servari posse
5}
544 ©. EXHIBITIONS.
confidunt; alii ut in iugo consistant atque eundem
omnes ferant casum.
Explain the terms signa, manipulos, and cuneo.
(c)Ab hac repulsi Nervii vallo pedum novem et
fossa pedum quindecim hiberna cingunt. δες et
superiorum annorum consuctudine ab nobis cognove-
rant, et quosdam de exercitu habebant captivos, ab his
docebantur: sed nulla ferramentorum copia quae esset
ad hune usum idonea, gladiis céspitem circumcidere,
manibus sagulisque terram exhaurire nitebantur.
Give the construction of novem pedum, copia, esset,
manibus sagulisque. Derive hiberna, circwneidere.
(d) Et navium figura et remorum motu et inusitato
genere tormentorum permoti, barbari constiterunt, ac
paulum modo pedem retulertint. Atque nostris mili-
tibus cunctantibus, maxime propter altitudinem maris,
qui decimae legionis aquilam ferebat, contestatus deos
ut:ea res legioni feliciter eveniret: Desilite, inquit,
milites, nisi vultis aquilam hostibus prodere: ego certe
meum rei publicae atque imperatori officium praes-
titero. eel
Change the passage from “‘desilite’ into Indirect
Narration,
2. Translate, with brief notes on italicised forms:
(a) Posteaquam in volgus militum elatum est, qua
arrogantia in colloquio Ariovistus usus omni Gallia
Romanis interdixisset, impetumque in nostros_ eius
equites fecissent eaque res colloquium ut diremusset,
multo maior alacritas studiumque pugnandi maius
exercitui iniectum est.
(b) Ubi circumiecta multitudine hominum totis
mociibus undique in murum lapides iaci coepti sunt mu-
rusque defensoribus nudatus est, testudine facta portas
succedunt.
3. Explain the following terms: turma, decumana
porta, soldurii, primipulus, agger, pilum, legatus.
LATIN.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE 17TH :—MORNING, 9 TO II.
ean
Translate into FEinglish :—
_,. Paulo Fabio, L. Vitellio Coss.; post longum saecu-
lorum ambitum avis phoenix in Aegyptum_ venit,
C. EXHIBITIONS. 545
praebuitque materiem doctissimis indigenarum αἱ
Graecorum multa super eo miraculo disserendi: de
quibus congruunt, et plura ambigua_ sed cognitu
non absurda, promere libet. Sacrum Soli id animal,
et ore ac distinctu pinnarum a ceteris avibus diversum
consentiunt, qui formam eius definiere. De numero
annorum varia traduntur: maxime volgatum quingen-
torum spatium: sunt, qui asseverent mille quadrin-
gentos sexaginta unum interici; prioresque alites
Sesostride primum, post Amaside dominantibus, dein
Ptolemaeo, qui ex Macedonibus tertius regnavit, in
civitatem cui Heliopolis nomen advolavisse, multo
ceterarum volucrum comitatu novam faciem mirantium,
Sed antiquitas quidem obscura: inter Ptolemaeum ac
Tiberium minus ducenti quinquaginta anni fuerunt;
unde nonnulli falsum hunc phoenicem neque Arabum
e terris credidere, nihilque usurpavisse ex his, quae
vetus memoria firmavit: confecto quippe annorum
numero ubi mors propinquet, suis in terris struere ni-
dum, ex quo fetum oriri; et primam adulto curam
sepeliendi patris: neque id temere, sed sublato myrrhae
pondere tentatoque per longum iter, ubi par oneri par
meatui sit, subire patritm corpus, inque Solis aram
perferre, atque adolere. Haec incerta et fabulosis
aaicta. Ceterum adspici aliquando in Aegypto eam
volucrem non ambigitur.
B.
Translate into Latin :-—
There was an illustrious Roman, Appius Claudius
by name, who, on account of his creat age and the
loss of his sight, had ceased to attend the senate. But
when he heard of the embassy from Pyrrhus, and the
report prevailed that the senate was going to vote for
the peace, he could not contain himself, but ordered
his servants to carry hin in his chair through the
forum to the senate-house. When he was brought to
the door, his sons and his sons-in-law received him and
led him into the senate. A _ respectful silence was
observed by the whole body in his appearance, and he
delivered his sentiments in the following terms :—
“Hitherto I have regarded my blindness as a misfor-
tune, but now, Romans: Τ wish I had been as deaf as
T am blind: for then I should not have heard of coun-
δ40 C. EXHIBITIONS.
sels so ruinous to the glory of Rome.’ No sooner had
he finished speaking than the senate voted unanimously
for the war.
(Ge
Translate into English :—
Quam bene Saturno vivebant rege, priusquam
Tellus in longas est patefacta vias!
Nondum caeruleas pinus contempserat undas,
Effusum ventis praebueratque sinum,
Nec vagus ignotis repetens compendia terris
Presserat externa navita merce ratem.
Illo non validus subiit iuga tempore taurus,
Non domito frenos ore momordit equus,
Non domus ulla fores habuit, non fixus in agris,
Qui regeret certis finibus arva, lapis.
Ipsae mella dabant quercus, ultroque ferebant
Obvia securis ubera lactis oves.
Immiti saevus duxerat arte faber.
Nunc Iove sub domino caedes et vulnera semper,
Non acies, non ira fuit, non bella, nec ensem
Nunc mare, nunc leti mille repente viae.
FRENCH.
THURSDAY, JUNE 18TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
(Questions asked in French must be answered in French.)
1. Faites bien connaitre les emplois différents du
passé défini et de l'imparfait de lindicatif.
2. Indiquez la différence entre plus et davantage, out
et si (adv.). C'est et il est, avant et auparavant, plus ἰδὲ
et plu tot,
3. Indiquez briévement les régles touchant l’emploi
du subjonctif et donnez des exemples.
4. Traduisez en anglais :—
J'ai causé une fois avec lui chez mon pére, en 1789,
lorsqu’on ne le connaissait que comme un avocat de
l’Artois, tres exagéré dans ses principes démocrati-
ques. Ses traits étaient ignobles, son teint pale, ses
veines d’une couleur verte; il soutenait les theses les
plus absurbes avec un sang-froid qui avait lair de la
©. EXHIBITIONS. 547
conviction; et je croirais assez que, dans les commen-
cements de la Révolution, il avait adopté de bonne
foi, sur l’égalité des fortunes aussi bien que sur celle
des rangs, de certaines idées attrapeées dans ses lec-
tures, et dont son caractére envieux et méchant s’ar-
mait avec plaisir. Mais il devint ambitieux lorsqu’il
eut triomphé de son rival en demagogie, Danton, le
Mirabeau de la populace. Ce dernier était plus spiri-
tuel que Robespierre, plus accessible a la pitié; mais
on le soupconnait avec raison de pouvoir etre corrompu
par l’argent, et cette faiblesse finit toujours par perdre
les démagogues; car le peuple ne peut souffrir ceux
qui s’enrichissent: c’est un genre d’austérité dont rien
ne saurait l’engager a se départir.
(Le Directoire.)
5. Dites ce que vous savez de l’Artois, de Danton, de
Mirabeau.
6. Donnez en anglais les equivalents des expres-
sions suivantes prises des Recits Merovingiens ;—
Les provisions en nature qui s’y trouvaient amas-
secs De Ια sre. tis marchérent sur Paris a
grandes journées. Le roi, sorte d’esprit fort a demi
sauvage. Il s’avisa de lui courir sus. Les gens de
Sigulf se mirent a les poursuivre avec acharnement,
animés soit par l’espérance de prendre a merci et de
ranconner un fils de roi, soit?...Un homme de rien
Son indignation fut celle d’un homme simple de cceur
{εὶς fougueux de caractére qui découvre qu’on s’est joue
de sa bonne foi.
7. Résumez la carriére de Frédégonde d’apreés les:
Recits Mérovingvens.
8. Traduisez en francais :—
One of the greatest pleasures of life is conversation ;
—and the pleasures of conversation are of course en-
hanced by every increase of knowledge: not that we
should meet together to talk of alkalies and angles, or
to add to our stock of history or philology—though
a little of these things is no bad ingredient in conver-
sation; but let the subject be what it may, there is
always a prodigious difference between the conversation
of those who have been well educated and of those
who have not enjoyed this advantage. Education gives
fecundity of thought, copiousness of illustration, quick-
, 548 C. EXHIBITIONS.
ness, vigour, fancy, words, images and illustrations,
it decorates every common thing, and gives the power
of trifling without being undignified and absurd. The
subjects themselves may not be wanted upon which
the talents of an educated man have been exercised;
but there is always a demand for those talents which
his education has rendered strong and quick.
SYDNEY SMITH.
GERMAN.
WEDNESDAY, JUNE 17TH :— AFTERNOON, 2 TO 4.
See ‘‘B’’ Exhibition Papers, page 86.
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS.
SEPTEMBER, 1903
FACULTIES OF ARTS, APPLIED SCIENCE AND
MEDICINE.
Papers arranged in the order of subjects as
stated in the Calendar.
RL a μὰ
ΠΡ Σὺ
ΤΣ ἀν.
y ξ ΣΝ
“9.
MATRIGULATION EXAMINATIONS
ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—MORNING, II TO 12.
Write an essay of not less than one page on any one
of the following subjects:
Camp life.
Ambition.
The Spanish Armada.
ENGLISH DICTATION.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 9TH:—MORNING, 10.30 TO II.
This manner of life grew so exquisitely pleasant, that
he never had a moment heavy upon his hands; his
nights were untroubled, and his days joyous, from the
practice of temperance and exercise. It was his man-
ner to use stated hours and places for exercises of
devotion, which he performed aloud, in order to keep
up the faculties of speech, and to utter himself with
greater energy.
When I first saw him, I thought, if I had not been
let into his character and story, | could have discerned
that he had been much separated from company, from
his aspect and gesture; there was a strong but cheer-
ful seriousness in his look, and a certain disregard to
the ordinary things about him, as if he had been sunk
in thought. When the ships which brought him off
the island came in, he received them with the greatest
indifference with relation to the prospect of going off
with them, but with great satisfaction in an oppor-
tunity to refresh and help them. The man frequently
bewailed his return to the world, which could not, he
said, with all its enjoyments, restore him to the tran-
quillity of his solitude.
552 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
ENGLISH GRAMMAR.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 9TH :—MORNING, 9 TO 10.30.
(N.B.—Not more than. two questions in each section are
to be answered. B ὁ and ( δ᾽ are compulsory, how-
ever, as failure i Analysis or Parsing will cause
the rejection of the paper.)
ἌΣ
1. Give the feminine of marquis, fox, duke, author,
wolf; and the possessive plural of o1, wharf, princess,
lady, statesman.
2. Turn the following sentences into the passive
voice :—
(a) John was rowing the boat against a heavy
wind.
(b) Do nothing without consideration.
(c) He had given a great deal of time to the
work.
(d) He offered me a book, but I refused it.
(e) He has taken a step which he will always
Peo ner. τὸ
3. Give three examples each of (a) the Gerund; (0)
the Present Participle; (c) the Past Participle.
ΜΠ:
4 Explain as clearly as you can the relation of the
English Language (a) to Latin; (b) to German.
5. State the main uses οἱ shall and will, with: ex-
amples. 6!
6. Parse the words in italics in the following sen-
Lence.——
But thou, that didst appear so fair
To fond imagination,
Dost rival in the light of day
Her delicate creation.
(::
7. Correct the following sentences where you think
it necessary, giving reasons :—
(a) Arthur, with his aunt and uncle, have gone te
the country. Neer ΤῈ
wt
— |
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 553
(b) Every passenger taking the ferry is requested
to have their money ready.
(c) The flowers smelt sweetly, the birds sang
gaily, and everything looked beautifully.
(d) He intended to have left earlier, but being in-
terested, the time passed without him noticing it.
(e) This is the man as makes boats like you do,
8. Analyse the following :—
We can hardly at the present day understand what
Menander meant, when he told a man who inquired
as to the progress of his comedy that he had finished
it, not having yet written a single line, because he had
constructed the action of it in his mind.
ENGLISH HISTORY.
FRIDAY, SEPT. 11TH :—MorNING, 10420150 12.
I. What were the main events in the history of Eng-
lish discovery and colonization from 1497-1700?
2. Indicate the causes of conflict between Charles I.
and:
(a) The English Parliament ;
(b) Scotland.
3. What were the chief stages in the conflict between
England and Napoleon?
4. Sketch the industrial and economic history of
England from 1770-1846.
5. sketch the political career of George Canning, or
Sir Robert Peel, ov Lord Palmerston.
ARITHMETIC.
FRIDAY, SEPT. IITH:—MORNING, 9 TO 10.30.
S83, ee oe 0!
71
1 Simplify
to
—
σι
9.7 τ. ἡ
554 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
2. If by selling an article for $38.25, 8 per cent. is
lost, what per cent. is gained or lost by selling it for
$57°
3. How may $564 be divided among .7 men, 9
women, and 13 children, so that each man may re-
ceive twice as much as each woman and five times as
much as each child?
4. (a) Find the present value of $295.60 due 3 mos.
hence, interest being at 4 per cent. per annum. (0)
Also find in what time any sum will double itself at
4 per cent. simple interest.
5. The adjacent sides of a rectangle are 8% and
13% inches. Find in centimetres one side of a square
which has the same area as the rectangle.
ENGLISH, LITERATURE:
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.
(Candidates will answer A or Boand C ; Ontario
Candidates, D.)
A.—TENNYSON.
1. Discuss the qualities of Tennyson’s poetry illus-
trated by the following poems: Dora; Recollections of
the Arabian Nights; The Revenge.
2. Write on the character of Ulysses, as represented
by Tennyson.
3. Name the poem in which each of the following
quotations is found, and give some idea of the con-
text:
(a) The gods are hard to reconcile;
‘Tis hard to settle order once again.
(b) For tho’ the giant ages heave the hill
And break the shore, and evermore
Make and break, and work their will.
(c) Dash’d on every rocky square
Their surging charges foam’d themselves away.
(d) In our school books we say,
Of those that held their heads above the crowd,
They flourish’d then or then.
(6) All its allotted length of days,
The flower ripens in its place.
᾿
'
|
4
;
ΐ
;
;
a <—-
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 555
B.——Se0Tt.
I. Write on Scott’s power of painting landscape.
Illustrate freely by quotation.
2. Judging from Scott’s account in The Lady of the
Lake. what can you say of the state of the Scottish
Highlands in the time of King James V.?
3. Name the speaker and give the context of each
of the following:
(a) “Peace! peace! to other than to me,
Thy words were evil augury.”
(b) "I'were worth ten years of peaceful life,
One glance at their array!
(c) Who o’er the herd would wish to reign,
Fantastic, fickle, fierce, and vain?
(d) I cannot sleep on Highland brae,
I cannot pray in Highland tongue.
(e) To assail a wearied man were shame,
And stranger is a holy name.
C.—SHAKSPERE: Richard II.
Quote or give the substance of John of Gaunt’s
asec on the greatness and degeneration of England.
Sct esc: δὴ
Px eee the speakers of the following passages;
give some idea of the context; and make brief notes
on italicized words :—
(a) My comfort is that heaven will take our souls
And plague injustice with the pains of hell.
(0) Who are the violets now
That strew the green. lap of the new come
spring?
(c) Within my mouth you have engaol’d my ton-
gue,
Doubly portcullis’'d with my teeth and lips.
(d) Thy very beadsmen learn to bend their bows
Of double-fatal yew against thy state.
(c) With Cain go wander thorough shades of night.
3. Show the various steps by which King Richard
was put down and Bolingbroke ascended the throne.
Give your opinion as to the justice of these proceed-
ings.
δδ0 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
D.—For ONTARIO CANDIDATES.
COLERIDGE: The Ancient Mariner; WWworDSswoRTH:
Selections; SHAKSPERE: The Merchant of Venice.
1. Compare the poetic quality of Coleridge with that
of Wordsworth, illustrating your statements by direct
references to various poems.
2. Discuss (a) Coleridge’s use of colour; (6) his
similes. Illustrate by quotations from The Ancient
Mariner.
3. State the poem and the connection in which each
of the following is found:
(a) True to the kindred points of Heaven and
Home!
(b) The stream will not flow, and the hill will not
rise.
(c) And they like Demi-gods are strong
On whom the Muses smile.
(d) A Lite; a, Presence like the “Aur;
Scattering thy gladness without care.
(e) He heard the South
Make subterraneous music, like the noise
Of bagpipes on distant Highland hills.
(f) There lives who can provide
For all his creatures.
(¢) In our halls is hung,
Armoury of the invincible knights of old.
4. Write out any one of Wordsworth’s sonnets or
twelve consecutive lines of The Ancient Mariner; and
add a few lines of comment.
5. Examine the character of Portia, chiefly by means
of quotation or direct reference, and pass your own
judgment upon it.
6. State the speaker and connection of each of the
following :
(a) To do a great right, do a little wrong.
(b) The fool hath planted in his memory
An army of good words.
(c) All things that are,
Are with more spirit chaséd than enjoy’d.
(d) You teach me how a beggar should be an-
swer'd.
(c) Thus ornament is but the guiléd shore
Ou
σι
-τ
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS.
To a most dangerous sea.
7. Comment on the following:
(a) Therefore, Jew,
Though justice be thy plea, consider this,—
That in the course of justice, none of us
Should see salvation.
(b) There’s not the smallest orb which thou be-
hold’st
But in his motion like an angel sings,
Still quiring to the young-ey’d cherubins.
GREEK GRAMMAR AND COMPOSITION.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 16TH :—MORNING, 9 TO II.
A.—GRAMMAR.
1. Decline tr7evs, γένος, πατήρ, Lada, λαγώς.
2. Give the dative and vocative singular, and the
dative and accusative plural of γυνή. Ζεύς. θυγάτηρ.
κύων «λέων.
3. Compare ταχύς. αἰσχρός, ἡσυχός and ῥάδιος.
4. Decline οὗτος, ὅστις, σύ.
5. Give in all numbers the present imperative of
᾿ εἰμί, οἶδα, inuc; the perfect indicative passive of τύπτω
φαίνω. σπείρω : the first person singular in all moods of
the 1st Aorist passive of εὑίρσκω. ἔχω. καλέω and
λαμβάνω.
B.—ComMPOSITION.
Translate into Greek :—
1. The Greeks are braver than the barbarians.
ὺ
2. Orontas has long been plotting against Cyrus.
3. The soldiers of Menon were the first to cross the
river. :
4. The generals were jealous, it seemed, of Clear-
chus.
δδ8 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
5. I will not injure you or despoil you of your pro-
perty.
6. It is impossible to escape without his knowledge.
7. It is evident that while you live you will make
war upon me.
ὃ. It is best to send some persons to ask him, in
order that you may know clearly what his intentions
are.
g. I will take such precautions that you shall no
longer be able to do me any harm.
τὸ. He was afraid that if he did what Cyrus hau
ordered, the King’s army would surround the Greeks
on both sides.
GREEK AUTHORS:
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 16TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
(Candidates will write on either A or B, and C.)
A.—XENOPHON, ANABASIsS I.
1. Translate, with notes on the construction of words
underlined :—
‘ > 10’ Μ e a \ ΄ \ e 4
(2) ᾿Ενταῦθ᾽ ἔμεινεν ὁ Κῦρος καὶ ἡ στρατιὰ ἡμέρας
c Len aS
εἴκοσιν οἱ γὰρ στρατιῶται οὐκ ἔφασαν ἰέναι TOD
ΤΙΣ να τ τ, )Ὸ , \ ” STEN te ὙΠ, τες
πρόσω: ὑπώπτευον γὰρ ἤδη ἐπὶ βασιλέα ἰέναι.
μισθωθῆναι δὲ οὐκ ἐπὶ τούτῳ ἔφασαν. ἹΠρῶτος δὲ
Κλέαρχος τοὺς αὑτοῦ στρατιώτας ἐβιάζετο ἰέναι.
c 7 ‘
οἱ δ᾽ αὐτόν τε ἔϑαλλον καὶ τὰ ὑποζύγια τὰ ἐκείνου
ἐπεὶ ἤρξατο προϊέναι. Κλέαρχος δὲ τότε μὲν
, ΄“ - >
(ὁ) “Ore μέντοι ἀδικεῖσθαι νομίζει ὑφ᾽ ἡμῶν οἶδα" ὥστε
\ of > fal > > f > r Ν \
καὶ μεταπεμπομένου αὐτοῦ οὐκ ἐθέλω ἐλθεῖν, TO μὲν
, ’ , A ,ὔ > ha, bee
μέγιστον αἰσχυνόμενος. OTL σύνοιδα ἐμαῦτᾳ πάντα
Pe τ ’ , , \ Le AVG CN τῶν LNG C= Spa
ἐψευσμένος αὐτον ἔπειτα [δὲ] καὶ δεδιὼς μὴ λαβών
= > a e rn fl
pe δίκην ἐπιθῆ ὧν νομίζει ὑπ᾽ ἐμοῦ ἠδικῆσθαι.
᾿Βμοὶ οὖν δοκεῖ οὐχ ὥρα εἶναι hut θεύδειν. οὐδ᾽
ὺμ χ ὥρα εἶναι ἡμῖν καθεύδειν, ο
“ a 3 n “
ἀμελεῖν ἡμῶν αὐτῶν, ἀλλὰ βουλεύεσθαι ὅ τι χρὴ.
ποιεῖν ἐκ τούτων͵
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 559
(ὦ “Avépes, ἐὰν ἐμοὶ πεισθῆτε. οὔτε κινδυνεύσαντες
οὔτε (igen: τῶν ἄλλων πλέον προτιμήσεσθε
στρατιωτῶν ὑπὸ Κύρου. Τί οὖν κελεύω ποιῆσαι :
Νῦν δεῖται Κῦρος ἕπεσθαι τοὺς “Ελληνας ἐπὶ βα-
σιλέα: ἐγώ οὖν φημί ὑμᾶς χρῆναι διαβῆναι τὸν
Εὐφράτην ποταμὸν πρὶν δῆλον. εἶναι ὅ τι οἱ ἄλλοι
Ἕλληνες ἀποκρινοῦνται Κύρῳ. Ἢν μὲν ‘yap
ψηφίσωνται ἕπεσθαι, ὑμεῖς δόξετε αἴτιοι εἶναι,
ἄρξαντες τοῦ διαβαίνειν"
(d) Πρὸς ταῦτα ὁ Κῦρος εἶπε τοῖς παροῦσιν᾽ Ὃ μὲν
ἀνὴρ τοιαῦτα μὲν πεποίηκε, τοιαῦτα δὲ λέγει" ὑμῶν
δὲ σὺ πρῶτος, ὦ Κλέαρχε, ἀπόφηναι γνώμην εἴ τί
σοι δωκεῖ. Κλέαρχος δὲ εἶπε τάδε: Συμβουλεύω
ἐγὼ τὸν ἄνδρα τοῦτον ἐκποδὼν ποιεῖσθαι ὡς Reon
ὡς μηκέτι δέῃ τοῦτον φυλάττεσθαι. ἀλλὰ σχολὴ ἢ
ἡμῖν τὸ κατὰ τοῦτον εἶναι τοὺς ἐθελοντὰς φίλους
τούτους εὖ ποιεῖν, Ταύτῃ δὲ τῇ γνώμῃ ἔφη καί
τοὺς ἄλλους προσθέσθαι. Μετὰ ταῦτα, ἔφη)
κελεύοντος Κύρου, ἔλαβον τῆς ἕώνης τὸν ᾿᾽Ορόντην
ἐπὶ θανάτῳ ἅπαντες ἀναστάντες καὶ οἱ συγγενεῖς.
εἶτα δὲ ἐξῆγον αὐτὸν οἷς προσετάχθη. ᾿Επεὶ δὲ
εἶδον αὐτὸν οἵπερ gp peaces προσ κυ ΟΣ καὶ τότε
ev
προσεκύνησαν, καίπερ εἰδότες ὅτι ἐπὶ θάνατον
ἄγοιτος
(6) "Τὰ a ee τὰ μὲν δι᾿’ αὐτῶν τῶν πολε-
μίων, τὰ δε καὶ διὰ τῶν Ἑλλήνων, κενὰ ALON ey
Οἱ δ᾽ ἐπεὶ “εἰ προΐδοιεν, διίΐσταντο" ἔστι δ᾽ ὕστις καὶ
κατελήφθη ὥσπερ ἐν ἱπποδρόμῳ ἐκπλαγείς: καὶ
οὐδὲν μέντοι οὐδὲ τοῦτον παθεῖν ἔφασαν: οὐδ ἄλλος
δὲ τῶν Ελλήνων ἐν ταύτῃ τῇ μάχῃ ἔπαθεν. οὐδεὶς
οὐδέν, πλὴν ἐπὶ τῷ εὐωνύμῳ τοξευθῆναί τις ἐλέγετο.
2. Write the principal parts οἱ ἐψευσμένος, ἐπιθῆ,
ἁλώσοιντο, πεισθῆτε.
Jibs 90
500
ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
B.—XeEnopuon, Anasasis II.
1. Translate with notes on the construction of words
underlined :—
an > ΄ «- \ \ e ”
(a) Ταῦτα ἀκούσαντες οἱ στρατηγοὶ Kal οἱ ἄλλοι
“Ἕλληνες βαρέως ἔφερον. Κλέαρχος δὲ τάδε εἶπεν,
᾿Αλλ᾽ were μὲν Κῦρος ζῆν" ἐπεὶ δὲ τετελεύτηκεν;
ἀπαγγέλλετε ᾿Αριαίῳ ὅτι ἡμεῖς γε νικῶμεν βασιλέα,
καί, ὡς ὁρᾶτε, οὐδεὶς ἔτι ἡμῖν μάχεται" καὶ εἰ μὴ
ὑμεῖς ἤλθετε ἐπορευόμεθα ἂν ἐπὶ βασιλέα. Ἔπαγ
γελλόμεθα δὲ ᾿Αριαίῳ, ἐὰν ἐνθάδε ἔλθῃ, εἰς τὸν
θρόνον τὸν βασίλειον καθιεῖν αὐτόν' τῶν γὰρ
μάχην νικώντων καὶ τὸ ἄρχειν ἐστίν.
(6) ᾿Εγώ, ὦ ἄνδρες “Ἕλληνες, γείτων οἰκῶ τῇ Ελλαδι-
(d)
Ν > Ἃς c “ °° , A Ν » 4 9
καὶ ἐπεὶ ὑμᾶς εἶδον εἰς πολλὰ κακὰ καμήχανα εμ-
πεπτωκότας. εὕρημα ἐποιησάμην εἴ πως δυναίμην
“ ’ / rn > a
παρὰ βασιλέως αἰτήσασθαι δοῦναι μοι ἀποσῶσα-
ὑμᾶς εἰς τὴν Ελλάδα, Οἶμαι γὰρ ἂν οὐκ ἀχαρίσι
τως μοι ἕξειν οὔτε πρὸς ὑμῶν οὔτε πρὸς τῆς
Ἑλλάδος ἁπάσης.
Πρῶτον μὲν γὰρ καὶ μέγιστον οἱ θεῶν ἡμᾶς ὅρκοί
κωλύουσι μὴ πολεμίους εἶναι ἀλλήλοις: ὅστις δέ
4 e Ὁ“ . ΄ = lal
τούτων σύνοιδεν αὑτῷ TAPNMEANKWS, τοῦτον ἐγὼ
» » ἃ > / Ta Ty 6 rn ’
οὔποτ᾽ ἂν εὐδαιμονίσαιμι. Tov yap θεῶν πόλεμον
Ὃ ΄ δ
οὐκ οἶδα οὔτ᾽ ἀπὸ ποίου ἂν τάχους οὔτε ὅποι ἄν τις
΄ Ψ ᾽ - Xn ΕΣ
φεύγων ἀποφύγοι, οὔτ᾽ εἰς ποίον [ἂν] σκότος ἀπο-
ΣΤΡ ΠΕΣ σ᾽ > ’ ’ \
Spain, οὔθ᾽ ὅπως ἂν εἰς ἐχυρὸν χωρίον ἀποσταίη"
. r lal ‘A “ lol
Ildvtn yap πάντα τοῖς θεοῖς vroxa, Kai πανταχῆ
\ cr
πάντων ἴσον οἱ θεοὶ κρατοῖσι.
Τοῦτο δ᾽ ἐποίει ἐκ τοῦ χαλεπὸς εἶναι: καὶ γὰρ ὁρᾶν
στυγνὸς ἣν, καὶ τῇ φωνῇ τραχύς" ἐκόλαζέ τε αἰεὶ
ἱσχυρῶς, καὶ ὀργὴ ἐνίοτε, ὥστε καὶ αὐτᾷ μεταμέ
λειν ἔσθ᾽ ὅτε. Καὶ γνώμῃ δὲ ἐκόλαζεν" ἀκολάστου
γὰρ στρατεύματος οὐδὲν ἡγεῖτο ὄφελος εἶναι, ᾿Αλλὰ
καὶ λέγειν αὐτὸν «ἔφασαν ὡς δέοι τὸν στρατιώτην
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. P61
φοβεῖσθαι μᾶλλον τὸν ἄρχοντα ἢ τοὺς πολεμίους.
(e) Στέργων δὲ φανερὸς μὲν ἣν οὐδένα, ὅτω δὲ φαίη
φίλος εἶναι τούτῳ ἔνδηλος ἐγίνετο ἐπιβουλεύων.
Καὶ πολεμίου μὲν οὐδενὸς κατεγέλα, τῶν δὲ συνόν-
των πάντων ὡς καταγελῶν ἀεὶ διελέγετο. Καὶ τοῖς
μὲν τῶν πολεμίων κτήμασιν οὐκ ἐπεβούλευε:
χαλεπὸν γὰρ weTo εἶναι τὰ τῶν φυλαττομένων
λαμβάνειν"
κα, Write the principal parts οἵ ἔλθη, δοῦναι, ἀποφύγοι»:
διελέγετο.
ΘΟ ERANSLATION. AT. SIGHT.
Translate into English :—
Q, ἄνδρες Μοσσύνοικοι, ἡμεῖς διασωθῆναι βουλόμεθα
πρὸς τὴν Ελλάδα πεζῇ" πλοῖα γὰρ οὐκ ἔχομεν: κωλύουσι
δὲ οὗτοι ἡμᾶς OVS ἀκούομεν ὑμῖν πολεμίους εἶναι. Εἰ οὖν
βούλεσθε, ἔξεστιν ὑμῖν ἡμᾶς λαβεῖν ξυμμάχους καὶ
τιμωρήσασθαι εἴ τι πώποθ᾽ ὑμᾶς οὗτοι ἠδίκησαν, καὶ τὸ
λοιπὸν ὑμῶν ὑπηκόους εἶναι τούτους. Ed δὲ ἡμᾶς ἀφήσετε,
σκέψασθε πόθεν αὖθις ἂν τοσαύτην δύναμιν λάβοιτε
ξύμμαχον. Ilpos ταῦτα ἀπεκρίνατο ὁ ἄρχων τῶν Moo-
συνοίκων OTL καὶ βούλοιντο ταῦτα καὶ δέχοιντο την
ξυμμαχίαν.
LATIN—(First Paper).
MonDAY, SEPT. I14TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II. *
I. LATIN GRAMMAR.
1. Decline (marking by the usual sign all long
vowels): templum, ager, nubes, calcar, gradus, acies.
Decline together : equus acer, uxor fida. Decline in
all genders and both numbers; miser, melior, duo,
iste.
02 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
2. Give the gender, genitive and ablative sing., and
gen. pl. of: puer, liber (a book), iudex, aestas, virtus,
domus.
3. Give the comparative and superlative of: audax,
tener, similis, celeber; graviter, saepe.
4. Express in Latin the following cardinal numbers,
giving the corresponding Roman symbols: 19, 90, 314,
1903.
5. Write down the fut. indic. of sum, pres. subj.
act. of moneo, imperative act. of audio, all the par-
ticiples of hortor, gerund and gerundive of rego.
6. Principal parts of timeo, nascor, ulciscor, cano,
divido, gaudeo, iaceo.
7. Give the Latin for: the rest of the army; it is
my interest; | envy you; I am persuaded; he was
killed by a sword by Milo.
II. LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION.
1. Father and sister were killed.
2. All good citizens will obey the laws of the Roman
people.
3. He says that you made him consul.
4. When Caesar was in Gaul the Belgians began to
conspire against the Romans.
5. Caesar, because he remembered that the consul
Crassus had been slain, and his army routed and sent
under the yoke by the Helvetians, did not think that
the request ought to be granted; nor, moreover, did
he believe that men whose feelings were hostile, if
given leave to march through the province, would
refrain from injury and evil-doing.
LATIN—(Second Paper).
MonpDAy, SEPT. I14TH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
I. Nepos, MILTIADES AND EPAMINANDOS.
1. Translate, explaining fully the construction of
italicized words:
(a) Huius cum sententiam plurimi essent secuti,
Miitiades non dubitans tam multis consctis δὰ regis
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 563
aures consilia sua perventura, Chersonesum re: quit
ac rursus Athenas demigravit. culus ratio etsi nua va-
luit, tamen magno op-re est laudanda, cum amicior
omnium libertati quam suae fuerit dominationi.
(b) Huius de virtutibus vitaque satis erit dictum,
si hoc unum adiunxero, quod nemo ibit infitias,
Thebas et ante Epaminondam natum et post eiusdem
interitum perpetuo alieno paruisse imperio, contra ea,
quamdiu ille praefuerit rei publicae, caput fuisse totius
Graeciae.
HAACAESAR DE BELLO GALETco Le:
Translate, with notes on italicized words:
(a) Bows petentibus Aeduis, quod egregia wirtute
erant cogniti, ut in finibus suis collocarent concessit
quibus illi agros dederunt quosque postea in parem
iuris libertatisque conditionem atque ipsi erant rece-
perunt.
(b) Ad haec Caesar respondit: Se magis consue-
tudine sua quam merito eorum civitatem conserva-
turum, 51 prius quam murum aries attigisset se dedi-
dissent; sed deditionis nullam esse conditionem nisi
armis traditis. Se id quod in Nerviis fecisset factu-
rum finitimisque imperaturum, ne quam dedititiis po-
puli Romani iniuriam inferrent.
ΤΠ ΤΌΣ
=. Translate:
Quem procul a patria diverso maximus orbe
Excipit Eridanus fumantiaque abluit ora.
Naides Hesperiae trifida fumantia flamma
Corpora dant tumulo, signant quoque carmine saxum?
‘Hic situs est Phaethon, currus auriga paterni
Ouem si non tenuit magnis tamen excidit ausis.
4. Scan the first two lines of the last extract.
5. Translate with brief notes:
(a) Finierat Paean. Factis modo laurea ramis
Adnuit utaue caput visa est agitasse cacumen.
(b) Non impune tamen scelus hoe sinit esse Lyacus:
Amissoque dolens sacrorum vate suorum,
Protinus in silvis matres Edonidas omnes.
Quae videre nefas, torta radice ligavit.
o ᾿
564 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE,
IV. TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
Cum iam muro turres appropinquassent, ex captivis
Caesar cognovit Vercingetorigem consumpto pabulo
castra movisse propius Avaricum, atque ipsum cum
equitatu expeditisque, qui inter equites proeliari con-
suessent, insidiandi causa profectum quo nostros pos-
tero die pabulatum venturos arbitaretur. Quibus
rebus cognitis media nocte silentio profectus ad hos-
tium castra mane pervenit. | Illi celeriter per explo-
ratores adventu Caesaris cognito carros impedimen-
taque sua in silvas abdiderunt, copias omnes in loco
edito atque aperto instruxerurt. Qua re nuntiata
Caesar celeriter sarcinas conferri, arma expediri iussit.
ALTERNATIVE POR, SECTIONS i EA ND iis
OF LATIN—(Second Paper.)
Candidates taking this option are required to do Section IV.
(Translation at Sight) of the regular paper.
Translate, explaining fully the syntax of italicised
words:
(a) Huius rex animi maenitudinem admirans cu-.
piensque talem virum sibi conciliari veniam dedit. Tle
omne ilud tempus litteris sermonique Persarum se de-
didit: quibus adeo eruditus est, ut multo commodius
dicatur apud regem verba fecisse, quam 11 poterant, qui,
in Perside erant nati. Hic cum multa regi esset polli-
citus gratissimumque illud, si suis uti consiliis vellet,
illum Graeciam bello oppressurum, magnis muneribus
ab Artaxerxe donatus in Asiam rediit domiciliumque
Maenesiae sibi constituit.
‘h) Hie qua fuerit abstinentia, nullum est certius
indicium quam quod, cum tantis rebus praefuisset, in
tanta paupertate decessit, ut qui efferretur vix relique-
rit. Quo factum est ut filiae eius publice alerentur et
de communi aerario dotibus datis collocarentur.
(c) Caesar cognito consilio eorum ad flumen Tame-
sin in fines Cassivellaunt exercitum duxit, quod flumen
uno omnino loco pedibus atque hoc aegre transiri po-
test. Eo cum venisset animum advertit, ad alteram
fluminis ripam magnas esse copias hostium instructas:
δ Re
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 565
ripa autem erat acutis sudibus praefixisque munita,
elusdemque generis sub aqua defixae sudes flumine
tegebantur. His rebus cognitis a captivis perfugisque
Caesar praemisso equitatu confestim legiones subsequi
iussit. Sed ea celeritate atque eo impetu milites ierunt,
cum capite solo ex aqua exstarent, ut hostes impetum
legionum atque equitum sustinere non possent ripas-
que dimitterent ac se fugae mandarent.
(d) Diverso interea miscentur moenia luctu;
et magis atque magis, quamquam secreta parentis
Anchisae domus arboribusque obtecta recessit,
clarescunt sonitus, armorumque ingruit horror.
Excutior somno, et summi fastigia tecti
adscensu supero, atque arrectis auribus adsto,
in segetem veluti cum flamma, furentibus Austris,
incidit, aut rapidus montano flumine torrens
sternit agros, sternit sata laeta boumque labores,
praecipitesque trahit silvas, stupet inscius alto
accipiens senitum saxi de vertice pastor.
Tum vero manifesta fides, Danatmque patescunt
insidiae.
Scan the first two lines.
FRENCH.
TUESDAY, SEPT. 15TH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
A,
Translate:
Enfin, a force de courage, je suis a une heure de
Pont-a-Mousson, dont je vois la cote surmontée de
ruines. Prés de la route, s’éléve un mur, bordé de
quelques noyers et de gazon é€pais. C’est mon affaire,
car il est temps de prendre un peu de repos. Le
soleil est au-dessus de ma tete; mon estomac me dit
quwil est midi, mais il faut jetiner jusqu’a la ville ott
jespere trouver quelques ressources. Je dispose
done mon sac, et je m’en sers comme d’un oreiller
pour reposer ma téte. Bientdt le sommeil me saisit.
Je ne sais depuis combien de temps je me livrais au-
repos, quand ma tete, dans un brusque mouvement,
frappa un corps dur. Je me léve aussitdt, et jugez.de
566 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
ma surprise, en voyant que mon sac a disparu: en
vain je regarde a droite, ἃ gauche, rien; mon sac
avait bien change de maitre. Sur la route fuy ait rapi-
dement vers Nancy une de ces voitures a deux roues,
couvertes d’une longue toile grise et trainée par un
mulet, comme on en a vu beaucoup, a la suite de l’ar-
mée prussienne. Poussé par je ne sais quel pressen-
timent; je courus aprés cette charrette, et je vis mon
sac preécieusement installé sur les genoux d’un soldat..
2. Give the whole of the present indicative, and the
3rd person singular only of the present subjunctive
and the future of voir, prendre, dire, ‘espérer, servir;,
savoir, disparaitre, couvrir.
3. Give the whole of the plupertect indicative of
s’asseoir.
4. Give the adverbs of the following: languissant,
lent, généreux, frais, bon, mauvais, nouveau, pire,
meilleur, précis.
5. Give a list of the conjunctions governing the
subjunctive.
6. Translate:
Which of the servants will go? Some of the finest
houses in this town have been burnt. The traveller
had to return. He thought he was right. Are you
looking for your book? Do you know French?
You may go as soon as you have finished your work.
I have not seen very many horses that I like better
than these. What are you talking about? What do
you want? What prevents you from answering my
question? 1 know what you bought a fortnight azo. .
It has been snowing since last week.
7. Translate: ͵
Malec had just obtained a victory over the Greeks,
and had taken their emperor in battle. Having had
this prince brought into his tent he asked him what
treatment he expected from the conqueror. “If vou
make war like a king,” answered the emperor, “send
me back again; if you wage it like a merchant, sell
me: if you wage it like a butcher, slaughter me.”
B.
8. Reproduce in French the story read by the ex-
aminer.
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 567
At 10.30 the presiding examiner will twice read the fol-
lowing passage to the candidates. 1 ts on no account
to be placed in their hands, nor will the candidates
be allowed to take notes during the reading.
Reproduce in French:
Henry V.’was as brave a King as ever sat on the
English throne, and gained one of the greatest vic-
tories ever’ won ‘by English soldiers. But when he
was Prince of Wales, he was a very wild and riotous
youth. He mixed with low companions, who led
him to do many base and foolish acts, quite unworthy
of a prince. On one occasion, one‘of his friends was
tried for some offence before a judge. He was
found guilty, and was ordered to be sent to prison,
When the Prince, who was in court, heard the sen-
tence, he fell into a great rage. He spoke very read-
ily to the judge, and commanded him to let his friend
Of, Erison, he said, “is4 no: place. ior; ἃ Prince’s
friend. [ forbid you to send this man to prison like
a*common thief.” “Prince or no Prince,” replied, the
judge, “you have no right to speak thus to the King’s
judge. I have sworn to do justice; and justice I shall
do.” The Prince, getting more enraged, then tried
to set the prisoner “tree ΠΣ εἴς But the judge told
him it was none of his business, and ordered him to
leave the court. The calmness with which the judge
spoke made the Prince still more angry; and he
rushed up to the bench, and struck the judge a severe
blow on the face. For this, the judge ordered the
officers of the court to seize the Prince and take him
to prison with his friend. “TI do this,” he said, “not
because he has done me harm,.but because he has in-
sulted the honour of the law.”
GERMAN.
TUESDAY, SEPT. I5TH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
1. Franslate: ‘—
Die zweite Prinzessin. als er die namliche Frage an
sie richtete, schnalzte mit der Zunge und sagte arger-
lich: “asst mich mit euren Albernheiten paredent
568 ‘ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
Prinzessinnen, welche Pfeffernusse backen konnen,
giebt es nicht.”
Am schlimmst en ging es aber dem Konig bei der
dritten, ‘obwohl sie die schonste und klugste war.
Denn sie liess ihn gar nicht bis zu seiner Frage
kommen, sondern, ehe er sie noch hatte thun kénnen,
fragte sie selbst, ob er wohl auch das Brummeisen
zu spielen verstiinde. Und als er dies verneinte, gab
sie ihm einen Korb und meinte, es thue thr herzlich
leid. Er gefalle ihr sonst ganz gut; aber sie hore
das Brummeisen tur ihr Leben gern, und habe sich
vorgenommen, keinen Mann zu nehmen, der es nicht
spielen konne.
(Traumereien)
_ 2, Give the Ist sing. of present and imperfect, and
the past participle of richten, lassen, gehen, fragen, tra-
gen, verstehen, thun, gefallen, nehmen, reden, bitten, beten.
3. What nouns form their plural by adding er?
Decline in full:— Kleiner Korb; sein Haus.
4. Give the rules of the declension of proper names.
5. Give in full the present indicative of sonnen,
mogen, aurten
6. Give the degrees of comparison of susz, stark,
gross, gut, viel, gern, klar, hoch.
7. Decline in full der (rel. pron.).
8. What co-ordinating and what subordinating con-
junctions are there in the passage of Question 1?
When is the order of subject and verb inverted in
German? Give illustrations from the same passage.
Owl ranslate=—
[ was once young, but now I have grown old.
What has become of his children? You may believe
it. We are richest when we are most contented.
We arrived on the 14th of October, at 3 o’clock in the
afternoon. Carthage was destroyed by Scipio.
Which is your friend? This is my friend, The pic-
tures you have sent me are not those I wanted. He
who lives virtuously is happy. The king is said to
be ill. When I was travelling I saw two old lions
and two voung ones. He ought to have written this
letter. He has been unable to come. Tf T had seen
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 569
him, I should have told him. How long have you
been here? Take another glass of wine. When the
soldiers had carried the officer out of the battle, they
washed his wounds. I accept your offer with great
pleasure. What business have you undertaken. Do
you wish to sign this paper? You have been entirely
mistaken.
ALGEBRA, PART I.
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—MORNING, 9 TO II.
1. Find the value of
5 (2#+3) 7. 12 (35 + 1)
Ir (6x?-+a—1) τῇ δ πε ee 28a ἢ
2. Solve the following equations
Lara. τητ δ ἈΞ τὸ acon,
(5 Ξο-
oe +6 x+9 ea 5a. 8
(6) = += apd
3. A train on the C. P. Railway passes from Mort-
real to Ottawa in 3 hours; a train on the Grand Trunk
line which is 15 miles longer, travelling at a speed
which is less by 1 mile per hour, passes from one place
to the other in 3% hours; find the length of each line.
4. Solve the following
Gry nee S Lt
) x-2 x X43
ea — 57 — 28
349 — 4% = ὃ
| 2
(3) V Me = V Ὁ Ἐς --5:- 8 —— = 3
5. Simplify 1 a
pig ha
\\y xia ee Fe)
570 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
(*) ν 252 — V29q-— 48 V2
6. Two rectangles contain the same area, 480 yards.
The difference of their length is to yards and of their
breadth 4 yards: find their sides.
7. Find the square root of
ox — 12%4 + τὸ —4x “τῇ al,
GEOMETRY +PARG Si
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
I. To a given straight line apply a parallelogram
which shall be equal to a given triangle, and have one
of its angles equal to a given angle.
2. Divide a straight line so that the square on one
part shall be double the square on the other.
3. If a straight line be divided equally and also un-
equally, the sum of the squares on the two unequal
parts is twice the sum of the squares on half the line
and on the line between the points of section.
4. Describe a square which shall be equal to a
given rectilineal figure.
5. Three times the sum of the squares on the sides
of a triangle is equal to four times the sum of the
squares on the lines joining the vertices to the middle
points of the opposite sides.
6. Equal chords in a circle are equidistant from the
centre:
7. In any quadrilateral circumscribed about a circle,
the sum of one pair of opposite sides is equal to the
sum of the other pair.
8. If a straicht line touch a circle, and from the
point of contact a chord be drawn, the angles which
this chord makes with the tangent shall be ecual to
the angles in the alternate segments of the circle.
9. Two straight lines 4B, CD intersect in FE so that
the rectangle AE, EB is equal to the rectangle CE, ED;
shew that the four points 4, B. C, D, lie on a circle.
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 511
ALGEBRA, Part 11.. AND GEOMETRY, Part 1].
Frrpay, SEPTEMBER IITH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
ALGEBRA.
If a, b, c, dare in continued proportion, prove that
c is a mean proportional between @ "Ὁ b and
d.
Between a and ὃ there are to be inserted » arith-
metical means. Prove that the first of these will be
an+h
7 -Ἕ"
3. Show that 3600 words, each containing 3 con-
sonants and 2 vowels, can be formed from 5 consonants
and 3 vowels.
4. Show that
I.
Bale
c+
(a—2x) 2 = a2 (1+ 2+ es
( 2a
5. Prove that the logarithm of a fraction is equal
to the logarithm of the numerator minus the logarithm
of the denominator.
Given log 3 = .477, find log (2.7).
6. Find the amount of an annuity left unpaid for a
given number of years, allowing compound interest.
GEOMETRY.
1. About a given regular pentagon to describe a
circle.
2. In a given circle to inscribe a regular polygon
of thirty sides.
3. Prove that a parallelogram may be inscribed in
any quadrilateral by joining the middle points of the
sides.
4. Find a mean proportional between two given
straight lines.
Are there any other mean proportionals in the
figure?
s. Any rectilinear figure described on the hypo-
tenuse of a right-angled triangle is equal to the sum of
the similar and similarly described figures on the sides
containing the right angle.
572 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
TRIGONOMETRY.
Monpbay, SEPTEMBER 14TH :—MORNING, II TO 12.30.
1. Express the angle of a regular pentagon in radians
(circular measure).
2. Prove that cos (180° — A) = — cos J, first when
A is a positive acute angle, and secondly, when 4 is
a negative acute angle.
3. Find the values of (1) sin 150°, (2) cos 225 Ὁ, (2)
tan 330°, (4) sec 480°.
4. Solve the equation
sec? 0+ 2 tan d —4,
for positive values of @ less than 180°. Draw the two
angles obtained.
5. Show that
I+ cos: A τ 605. 5
(1])]---- — ———__ > y, cot A cosec A
“1 -- οο 4 Ι cos A + ΚΟ ΕΑΝ:
(2) cos (4A ---᾽ ΒΥ = cos A cos B + sin A sin δ.
sin A 4 sin B A+B.
τ πές τ ἦτ ἠδ
᾿Ξ ΘΠ 2.4
(4) 1+cos 2.4
ΞΞ- tan A.
PHYSIOGRAPHY: ς
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 9TH :—AFTERNOON, 4 TO 5.30.
1. Describe and account for the order of the Seasons
in the North Temperate Zone.
2. What are the Monsoons, the Horse-Latitudes?
Explain their occurrence. ;
3. Indicate the chief features of the water circulation
in the North Atlantic.
4. Explain why a coast line sometimes consists of
bold headlands and deep bays, and sometimes has
extensive belts of low plains more or less parallel to
the shore. Describe in detail some particular instance
of each type.
5. Describe the Grand Canon of Colorado, and
account. for its formation.
6. Explain, giving an instance of each, the terms :—
Mesa, Moraine, Atoll, Bore, Geyser.
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 573
7. What is a Folded Mountain Range? Describe
some instance.
8. Describe and explain the differences of climate on
the western and eastern sides of the mountain ranges
along the Pacific Coast of North America. Does the
same hold good for Central America?
g. Illustrate the effects of Climate on the habits,
character and development of mankind.
BOTANY.
FrIDAY, SEPTEMBER IITH:—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 6.
I. State what you know of the effects of fertilization
upon an ovule.
2. Describe various kinds of metamorphosed leaves
and stems, noting the function of each form.
3. Outline the life-history of a typical flowering
plant.
4. Give an account of the different ways in which
transpiration is regulated.
5. Describe those modifications of the flower which
prevent self-fertilization, giving an example of each.
6. Tell what you know concerning the nutrition of
plants, describing simple illustrative experiments.
7. Write an account of the respiration of plants, and
describe an illustrative experiment.
8. Describe fully, giving the scientific names of the
families, the genera and the species, two of the follow-
ing plants :—
(a) The Apple.
(b) The Pine.
(c) The Dandelion.
CHEMISTRY.
TUESDAY, SEPTEMBER I15TH:—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 6.
᾿ς Το What do you understand by neutralization?
Illustrate by means of equations.
2. How is nitric acid prepared? What are its pro-
perties? Why is it called an oxidising agent?
O74 ARTS, SCIENCE AND MEDICINE.
3. Explain any four of the following terms :—ele-
ment, symbol, formula, atomic weight, valence.
4. How does iodine occur in nature? State what
you know with regard to its properties and uses.
5. State and explain the laws of combining propor-
tion.
6. How many litres of carbon dioxide could you
obtain by dissolving 520 grams of calcium carbonate
in hydrochloric acid?
7. State what you know with regard to ozone and
its properties.
8. In what respects do ordinary and red, or amor-
phous, phosphorus differ from one another?
9. What takes place when iron sulphide is treated
with dilute sulphuric acid? Write the equation.
What are the properties of the compounds produced?
PHYSICS:
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 6.
1. Explain the terms:—liquid, gas, molecule. State
your idea of the condition of the molecules (1) in a
liquid, (2) in a gas.
2. Describe the Aneroid Barometer.
3. Describe the Hydraulic Press. If the large piston
has an area of 49 sq. in., what must be the area of the
small one in order that a force of 12 Ibs. may τες:
a pressure of 228 lbs.?
4. A solid weighs 10 gms. in air and 8 gms. in water.
Find (a) the weight of an equal bulk of water, (b) the
specific gravity of the solid, (c) its volume.
5. A mass of 4 lbs when acted on by a certain force
travels 64 feet from rest in 8 seconds. What weight
could the force support?
6. What is meant by the “centre of gravity” of a
body ? What is necessary in order that a body may
rest in equilibrium when supported on a certain base?
Explain how a bicycle rider recovers his balance by
turning towards the side on which he is falling.
MATRICULATION EXAMINATIONS. 579
7. Convert 80°C to Fahrenheit. What would it cor-
respond to on ἃ thermometer whose freezing and
boiling points were marked τοῦ and 110° respectively ?
8. Explain :—
(a) the action of freezing mixtures.
(b) the formation of dew.
(c) how to make water boil at a low temperature.
a
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS
SEPTEMBER, 1903.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
The papers follow the order of subjects as stated
in the Calendar.
> te
Ε -
‘ ay
᾿ when
‘
r% :
᾽ν ‘
- i
'
. .
=
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS.
GREEK AUTHORS.
WEDNESDAY, SEPTEMBER I6TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined :—
A.—LvucIan: CHARON AND SOMNIUM.
I Kah τε , ὃ , x Sees ὁ oh A 5) εκ ὃ
i ὃ πόσῳ δικαιότερον av ἐμέ. ὦ “Epun, ἐπαινοῖεν, ὃς
Sas \ EVs \ = Ree toa
αὐτὸν σοι τὸν Μίλωνα μετ᾽ ὀλίγον ξυλλαβὼν ἐνθήσομαι ἐς
Ν ΄ εξ “- \ r > ,
TO σκαφιδιον. ὁπόταν ἥκῃ πρὸς ἡμᾶς ὑπὸ τοῦ ἀναλωτοτάτου
nr MS eae ae ΄σ a / \
TOV ἀνταγωνιστῶν καταπαλαισθεὶς τοῦ Θανάτου. μηδὲ
\ id ’ \ > Ψ ΄ ΄ “ \
ξυνεὶς ὅπως αὐτὸν ὑποσκελίζει : KaTa οἰμώξεται ἡμῖν δηλαδὴ
/ a / “ / rn \
μεμνημένος τῶν στεφάνων τούτων Kal τοῦ κρότου" νῦν δὲ
μέγα φρονεῖ θαυμαζόμενος ἐπὶ τῇ τοῦ ταύρου φορᾷ. τί δ᾽
ya dp μαζόμ ῇ ρου φορᾷ.
Ss > nr > 7 \ 2
οὖν οἰηθῶμεν : ἄρα ἐλπίζειν αὐτὸν καὶ τεθνήξεσθαί ποτε:
’ ΄ Qs Ss a> ¢ fq ᾽ rc - 4 ΄
2. ἐθέλω δ᾽ οὖν σοι. ὦ Epp, εἰπεῖν, WTLVL EOLKEVAL μοι
ya es ΄ ΄, “ » κα ” \
ἔδοξαν οἱ ἄνθρωποι καὶ ὁ Bios ἅπας αὐτῶν. ἤδη ποτὲ
πομφόλυγας ἐν ὕδατι ἐθεάσω ὑπὸ κρουνῷ τινι καταράττοντι
. " > - ͵ c
ἀνισταμένας ; Tas φυσαλίδας λέγω, ἀφ᾽ ὧν ξυναγείρεται o
’ ΄ e ΄ 7 ᾽ \ > /
ἀφρός: ἐκείνων τοίνυν al μέν τίνες μικραί εἰσι καὶ αὐτίκα
> A > / , c Εν ΄ Q “- \
ἐκραγεῖσαι ἀπέσβήσαν, αἱ δ᾽ ἐπὶ πλέον διαρκοῦσι καὶ
προσχωρούσων αὐταῖς τῶν ἄλλων [αὗται] ὑπερφυσώμεναι
> / ν᾿ > / » al ΄
ἐς μέγιστον ὄγκον αἴρονται. εἶτα μέντοι κἀκεῖναι πάντως
> ΄ , > \ er “ t θ a
ἐξερράγησαάν ποτε: ov yap οἷον Te ἅλλως γενέσθαι. τοῦτο
> € ΄ δ . Ν ΄ >
ἐστιν ὁ ἀνθρώπου Bios, ἅπαντες ὑπὸ πνεύματος ἐμπε-
. ; e \ , \ c \
φυσημένοι οἱ μὲν μείζους. οἱ δὲ ἐλάττους: καὶ OL μεν
bs SE ΄ Ν ΄ ΄ Ses.
ὀλιγοχρόνιον ἔχουσι καὶ ὠκύμορον TO φύσημα, οἱ δὲ ἅμα
Ὁ“ / lal " Ss > Lal
τῷ ξυστῆναι ἐπαύσαντο πᾶσι δ᾽ οὖν ἀπορραγῆναι
ἀναγκαῖον.
580 FACULTY OF ARTS.
3. δύο γυναῖκες λαβόμεναι τοῖν χεροῖν εἷλκύν με πρὸς
/ / \ Les al ral
ἑαυτήν ἑκατέρα μάλα βιαίως καὶ καρτερῶς" μικροῦ γοῦν
pe διεσπάσαντο πρὸς ἀλλήλας φιλοτιμούμεναι: καὶ γὰρ
ἄρτι μὲν ἂν ἡ ἑτέρα ἐπεκράτει καὶ παρὰ μικρὸν ὅλον εἶχέ
", > ΩΝ id \ lal δ. / ’ ͵ » / A
με, ἄρτι δ᾽ ἂν αὖθις ὑπὸ τῆς ἑτέρας εἰχόμην. ἐβόων δὲ
πρὸς ἀλλήλας ἑκατέρα, ἡ μέν. ὡς αὐτῆς ὄντα με κεκτῆσθαι
Ω rs e / e / / “Ὁ > / > val 4
βούλοιτο. ἡ δέ, ὡς μάτην TOV ἀλλοτρίων AVTLTOLOLTO. ἣν
δὲ ἡ μὲν ἐργατικὴ καὶ ἀνδρικὴ καὶ αὐχμηρὰ τήν κόμην,
τὼ χεῖρε τύλων ἀνάπλεως. διεζωσ μένη τὴν ἐσθῆτα, τιτάνον;
καταγέμουσα, οἷος ἦν ὁ θεῖος, ὁπότε E€ou τοὺς λίθους" ἡ
ἑτέρα δὲ μάλα εὐπρόσωπος καὶ τὸ σχῆμα εὐπρεπὴς καὶ
κόσμιος τὴν ἀναβολήν.
Β.--ΕΕΙΡΙΡΕΒ: MEDEA.
tT δεινὰ τυράννων λήματα, καί πως
’ > > / \ Lal
ὀλίγ ἀρχόμενοι, πολλὰ κρατοῦντες,
χαλεπῶς ὀργὰς μεταβάλλουσιν.
τὸ γὰρ εἰθίσθαι ζῆν ἐπ᾽ ἴσοισιν
κρεῖσσον" ἔμοιγ᾽ οὖν ἐπὶ μὴ μεγάλοις
ὀχυρῶς εἴη καταγηράσκειν.
τῶν γὰρ μετρίων πρῶτα μὲν εἰπεῖν
” Ἂν a ΄ὔ ΩΝ
τοὔνομα νικᾷ, χρῆσθαί τε μακρᾷ
“ἡ lal Ἂς \ > e \ 9
λῷστα βροτοῖσιν: Ta δ᾽ ὑπερβᾶλλοντ
οὐδένα καιρὸν δύναται θνητοῖς"
μείζους δ᾽ ἄτας ὅταν ὀργισθῃ
,ὔ , 7
δαίμων οἴκοις ἀπέδωκεν.
2. ΜΗ. ὦ χαῖρε καὶ σὺ, παῖ σοφοῦ 1] ανδίονος,
Αἰγεῦ. πόθεν γῆς τῆσδ᾽ ἐπιστρωφᾷ πέδον ;
Al. Φοίβο» παλαιὸν ἐκλιπών χρηστήριον.
ΜΗ. τί δ᾽ ὀμφαλὸν γῆς θεσπιῳδὸν ἐστάλης :
ΔΙ. παίδων ἐρευνῶν σπέρμ᾽ ὅπως γένοιτό μοι.
ΜΗ. πρὸς θεῶν, ἄπαις γὰρ δεῦρ᾽ ἀεὶ τείνεις βίον
Δ]. ἀἄπαιδές ἐσμεν δαίμονός τινὺς τύχῃ.
‘ee
MH. δάμαρτος οὔσης, ἢ λέχους ἄπειρος ὦν;
ΑἹ. οὐκ ἐσμὲν εὐνῆς ἄζυγες γαμηλίου.
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 581
MH. τί δῆτα Φοῖβος εἶπέ σοι παίδων πέρι ;
ΑΙ. σοφώτερ᾽ ἣ κατ᾽ ἄνδρα συμβαλεῖν ἔπη.
3. ΜΗ. δράσω τάδ᾽" οὔτοι σοῖς ἀπιστήσω λογοις"
γυνὴ δέξθῆλυ, κἀπὶ δακρύοις ἔφυ.
> COR τοὶ ee τι 57 τ TON oS ,
AXX ὦνπερ οὕνεκ᾽ εἰς ἐμοὺς ἥκεις λοόγοῦς,
ai a SVU ne A bo eS \ /
Ta μὲν λέλεκται, τῶν δ᾽ ἐγὼ “μνησθήσομαι.
ἐπεὶ τυράννοις γῆς μ᾽ ἀποστεῖλαι δοκεῖ,
κἀμοί TAO’ ἐστὶ λᾷστα, γιγνώσκω καλῶς,
μήτ᾽ ἐμποδὼν σοί μήτε κοιράνοις χθονὸς
ναίειν, δοκῶ γὰρ δυσμενὴς εἶναι δόμοις,
ἡμείς μὲν ἐκ γῆς τῆσδ᾽ ἀπαίρομεν φυγῇ,
παῖδες δ᾽ ὅπως ἂν ἐκτραφῶσι σῇ χερὶ,
> Ὄπ συν. ES eS EEO aa ,
αἰτοῦ Kpéovta τήνδε un φεύγειν χθόνα.
C.—DEMOSTHENES: Otynruiacs I. anp II.
\ \ > Lal
1. ἀλλὰ μὴν εἰ τοῦτο γενήσεται. δέδοικα. ὦ ἄνδρες “AON
lat \ XN " ᾽ \ ,ὔ “ e ὃ ζό [4 δέ 2 \
vatol, μὴ τὸν αὐτὸν τρόπον ὥσπερ οἱ δανειζόμενοι ῥᾳδίως ἐπὶ
\ πη ee °
τοὶς μεγάλοις τόκοις μικρόν εὐπορήσαντες χρόνον ὕστεροι
καὶ τῶν ἀρχαίων ἀπέστησαν. οὕτω καὶ ἡμεῖς ἐπὶ πολλᾳ
lal >) / \ ef \ ΄ \ »"»
φανῶμεν ἐρρᾳθυμηκότες͵ καὶ ἅπαντα πρὸς ἡδονὴν ζητοῦντες
πολλὰ καὶ χαλεπὰ ὧν οὐκ ἡβουλόμεθα ὕστερον εἰς ἀνάγκην
»” »“ \ / \ lal , ’ “ ,
ἔλθωμεν ποιεῖν, Kal κινδυνεύσωμεν περὶ τῶν ἐν αὐτῇ τῃ- χώρᾳ"
ef 3 \ ΄ὔ » / [2 / 4 ὥ
2. ὥσπερ οὖν διὰ τούτων ἤρθη μέγας, ἡνίκα ἕκαστο
72 > \ [2 » » ,ὔ Tie ta > S/R LEON
συμφέρον αὐτὸν ἑαυτοῖς WovTo τι πράξειν, οὕτως ὀφείλει διὰ
lal 3, »-“ Ἂ \ fal / > \ / 9
τῶν αὐτῶν τούτων» καὶ καθαιρεθῆναι πάλιν. ἐπειδὴ πάνθ
-“ « a a ) ΄ “ \ \ > ν
ἕνεκα ἑαυτοῦ ποιῶν ἐξελήλεγκται. καιροῦ μὲν δὴ. ὦ ἄνδρες
κ n \ (La /
᾿Αθηναῖοι. πρὸς τοῦτο πάρεστι Φιλίππῳ τὰ πράγματα: ἢ
παρελθῶν τις ἐμοὶ. μᾶλλον δὲ ὑμῖν δειξάτω ὡς οὐκ ἐ ληθῆ
PIs .5 \ / ΕῚ ΄ ς \ fal ’ Ἄ \ \
ταῦτ᾽ ἐγὼ λέγω, ἢ ὡς οἱ TA πρῶτα ἐξηπατημένοι τὰ λοιπὰ
΄ x e [2 Ν Ἁ ig lal > / /
πιστεύσουσιν, ἢ ὡς οἱ Tapa τὴν αὑτῶν ἀξίαν δεδουλωμένοι
5 lal 2 x ? 7 f ”
Θετταλοὶ νῦν οὐκ av ἐλεύθεροι γένοιντο ἄσμενοι.
3. ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐν τοῖς σώμασιν. ἕως μὲν ἂν ἐρρωμένος 1,
τις. οὐδὲν ἐπαισθάνεται τῶν καθ᾽ ἕκαστα σαίζρῶν ἐπὰν ὃ
582 τ PACULTY OF ARTS.
> r re an a
ἀρρώστημά τι συμβῇ. πάντα κινεῖται. κἂν ῥῆγμα Kav
J x ” an Ὁ / θ Ν > Ὑ ὶ
στρέμμα κἂν ἄλλο τι τῶν ὑπαρχόντων σαθρὸν ἢ. οὕτω κα
τῶν πόλεων και τῶν τυράννων, ἕως μὲν ἂν ἔξω πολεμῶσιν:
Σ lel r lal Ἴ “4
ἀφανῆ τὰ κακὰ τοῖς πολλοῖς ἐστιν, ἐπειδὰν δὲ ὅμορος
t ἊΨ f ’ / ”
πόλεμος συμπλακῃ. TAVTA ἐποίησεν ἔκδηλα.
TRANSLATION AT SIGHT.
Translate into English :—
/ 9 »” >, \ ΄ nr 8 Δ. lal 74
θαυμάζω δ᾽ ἔγωγε. εἰ μηδεὶς ὑμῶν μήτ᾽ ἐνθυμεῖται μήτε
λογίζεται. ὁρῶν, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι, τὴν μὲν ἀρχὴν τοῦ
πολέμου γεγενημένην περὶ τοῦ τιμωρήσασθαι Φίλιππον, τὴν
δὲ τελευτὴν οὖσαν ἤδη ὑπὲρ τοῦ μὴ παθεῖν κακῶς ὑπὸ
Φιλίππου. ἀλλὰ μὴν ὅτι γ᾽ οὐ στήσεται. δῆλον. εἰ μήτις
κωλύσει. εἶτα τοῦτ᾽ ἀναμενοῦμεν, καὶ τριήρεις κενὰς και τὰς
\ ΄ε a > / x > / id aa v
παρὰ τοῦ δεῖνος ἐλπίδας ἂν ἀποστείλητε, πάντ᾽ ἔχειν οἴεσθε
“ ’ 2 é ’ Μ > \ / - f
καλῶς : οὐκ ἐμβησόμεθα: οὐκ ἔξιμεν αὐτοὶ μέρει γέ τινι
στρατιωτῶν οἰκείων νῦν, εἰ καὶ μὴ πρότερον: οὐκ ἐπὶ τὴν
ἐκείνου πλευσόμεθα: ποῖ οὖν προσορμιούμεθα : ἤρετό τις"
c / \ X Ὅ» ” 9 lal [οἱ > , -
εὑρήσει τὰ σαθρὰ, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Αθηναῖοι. τῶν ἐκείνου “πραγ
Ν e , 5) - Ἂ fire
μάτων AUTOS ὁ πόλεμος. ἂν ἐπιχειρῶμεν: ἂν μέντοι καθώ
μεθα οἴκοι. λοιδορουμένων ἀκούοντες καὶ αἰτιωμένων
ἀλλήλους τῶν λεγόντων, οὐδεποτ᾽ οὐδὲν ἡμῖν μὴ γένηται
τῶν δεόντων. ;
GREEK COMPOSITION, GRAMMAR AND
HISTORY:
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. I6TH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
A,
Translate into Greek :—
I will not dwell upon the formidable power of the
Emperor by way of urging you to do your duty. That
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 583
would be too much compliment to him and too much
disparagement to you. I should, indeed, myself have
thought him truly formidable if he had achieved his
present eminence by means consistent with justice.
But he has risen to greatness partly through negli-.
gence and folly on your side, partly by treachery on
his, by taking into his pay corrupt partisans among
ourselves, and by cheating successively all his own
allies. These allies have now found him out. The
ministers of his aggrandisement will be the means of
his downfall. His empire rests on rotten foundations ;
at a touch it will crumble away.
B.
1. Inflect the future optative active of νέμω, te
first aorist imperative passive of τίθημι. the ,erfect in
dicative active of θνήσκω. the perfect indicative passive
of τάσσω and ὀρύσσω the perfect optative passive of
μιμνήσκω. ἢ
2. Give the various ways of expressing ἃ wish in
Greek.
3. Explain the use of ov μὴ with the future indica-
tive and with the subjunctive.
CG.
I. Describe the founding of a Greek colony. In
what relation did the colony stand to the mother-city ?
Give a list of the Greek Colonies in Sicily, dividing
then according to race.
2. Give some account of the reforms of Solon.
3. Show how the Confederacy of Delos originated,
and indicate the steps by which it passed into an Athe-
nian empire.
-4. Write short notes on the following names: Hip-
pias, Histiaetts, Phalaris, Pausanias, Artemisia, Aris-
tides.
584 FACULTY OF ARTS.
LATIN BOOKS AND UNSEEN.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(N.B.—Question 5 is not to be attempted till the candidate
has done what he can of the rest of the paper.)
I. ‘Lranslate:—
Est enim sapientis iudicis cogitare tantum sibi a
populo Romano esse permissum, quantum commis-
sum sit et creditum et non solum sibi potestatem da-
tam, verum etiam fidem habitam esse meminisse:
posse quem oderit absolvere, quem non oderit con-
demnare et semper non quid ipse velit sed quid lex
et religio cogat cogitare: animadvertere qua lege reus
citetur, de quo reo cognoscat, quae res in quaestione
versetur. Cum haec sunt videnda, tum vero illud est
hominis magni, iudices, atque sapientis, cum illam
iudicandi causa tabellam sumpserit, non se reputare’
solum esse neque 5101 quodcunque concupierit licere,
sed habere in consilio legem, religionem, aequitatem,
fidem; libidinem autem, odium, invidiam, metum,
cupiditatesque omnes amovere maximique aestimare
conscientiam mentis suae, quam ab dis immortalibus
accepimus, quae a nobis divelli non potest: quae si
optimorum consiliorum atque factorum testis in omni
vita nobis erit, sine ullo metu et summa cum hones-
tate vivemus.
2. Explain very briefly the allusion in the following:
(a) Longe sonantem natus ad Aufidum.
(b) Stesichorique graves Camenae.
(c) Ouas aut Parrhasius protulit aut Scopas.
(d) Levis Agyieu.
(e) Testis Metaurum flumen. (Can you quote the
whole of the stanza in which this occurs ?)
(f) Ouae Tibur aquae fertile praefluunt.
(¢) Ityn flebiliter gemens.
3. Complete the stanza commencing “verum pone
moras.” ΤῸ whom is this addressed?
4. Translate :—
Manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studium
et industria, nec ea solum in claris et honoratis viris,
sed in vita etiam privata et quieta. Sophocles ad
summam senectutem tragoedias fecit, quod propter
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 53)
studium cum rem negligere familiarem videretur, a
filiis in iudicium vocatus est, ut, quem ad modum
nostro more male rem gerentibus patribus bonis in-
terdici solet, sic illum quasi desipientem a re familiari
removerent iudices. Tum senex dicitur eam fabulam,
quam in manibus habebat et proxime scripserat, Oedi-
pum Coloneum recitasse iudicibus quaesisseque num
illud carmen desipientis videretur. Quo recitato sen-
tentiis iudicum est liberatus.
5
Ge licanslate 2)"
(a) Conchyliatis Cn. Pompeii peristromatis ser~
vorum in cellis lectos stratos videres.
(6) Non enim iam inter latera nostra sica illa
versabitur.
c) Itaque alii cives Romani, ne cognoscerentur,
capitibus obvolutis e carcere ad palum atque ad necem
rapiebantur.
(d) Vidit Homerus probari fabulam non posse si
cantiunculis tantus vir irretitus teneretur.
(c) Est mihi nonum superantis annum .
plenus Albani cadus; est in horto
Phylli, nectendis apium coronis.
(f) Delectabatur crebro funali et tibicine.
(g) Semper enim boni adsiduique domini referta
cella vinaria, olearia, etiam penaria est villaque tota
locuples est, abundat porco, agno, gallina, lacte, caseo,
melle.
6. For Unseen Translation.
(τ) Dedemus ergo Hannibalem? dicet aliquis:
Scio meam levem esse in eo auctoritatem propter pa-
ternas inimicitias: sed et Hamilcarem eo perisse lae-
tatus sum, auod si ille viveret bellum iam haberemus
cum Romanis et hunc iuvenem tanquam furiam fa-
cemaue huius belli odi ac detestor; nec dedendum
solum ad piaculum rupti foederis sed si nemo deposcat
devehendum in ultimas maris terrarumque oras, able-
gandum eo unde nec ad nos nomen famaque eius acci-
dere neaue ille sollicitare auietae civitatis statum possit.
(2) Sic prior Aeneas; sequitur sic deinde Latinus,
suspiciens ς caelum, tenditque ad sidera dextram ;
‘Haec eadem, Aenea, Terram, Mare, Sidera, iuro,
Latonaeque genus duplex, Ianumque bifrontem,
vimque deum infernam te duri sacraria Ditis;
586 PAGULTY OF. ARTS. Ὁ
audiat haec Genitor, qui foedera fulmine sancit ;
tango aras, medios ignes et num.na testor;
nula dies pacem hance Italis nee 1oedera rumpet,
quo res cumque cadent; nec me vis ulla volent.m
avertct, non, si tellurem effundat in undas,
diluvio miscens, caelumque in ‘Lartara solvat.
LATIN COMPOSITION, GRAMMAR AND
HISTO RYE cos
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
A.—LATIN PROSE.
(a) For Latin Prose:
However, betore these works were carried quite
round, the townsmen sent deputies to Hannibal, to
complain of his abandoning Capua and delivering
it in a manner into the hands of the Romans: and
to beseech him now at least, when they were not
only invested but even pent up, to bring them
relief. The consuls received a letter from Publius
Cornelius the praetor to say that before they com-
pleted the circumvallation of Capua, they shou'd give
leave to such of the Campanians as chose it, to retire
from the town and carry away their effects with them.
That as many as wthdrew before the Ides of March
should enjoy their liberty and_ their: property entire;
but that both those who withdrew after that day, and
those who remained in the place, should be treated as
enemies.
(b) Sentences.
1. We asked them who they were, where they lived,
where they came from, and where they were now go-
ing.
2. Ariovistus replied that he did not dare to come
into those parts of Gaul which Caesar possessed.
3. He said that the king could easily be persuaded to
set out at davbreak.
B.—LATIN GRAMMAR.
τ. Write grammatical notes on the following sen-
tenceés =—
(a) Ventum erat ad Vestae. Hor.
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 587
(b) Illa furia, qui non pluris fecerat. Cic.
(c) Triste lupus stabulis. Virg.
(d) Eri semper lenitas verebar quorsum evaderet,
ep
(e) Carbonis eodem illp die mors. Cic.
(f) Quibus, Hector, ab oris exspectate venis? Virg.
(5) Maiores augebantur copiae. Sell. Hisp.
(h) Quid tibi hunc receptio ad test meum virum?
Plautus.
(i) Flagitium hominis. Plautus.
(k) Vir litterarum.
(ἢ Cunctas provinciarum. Pliny the Elder.
(m) Non habeo nauci Marsum augurem. Cic..
(ἡ) It clamor caelo. Virg.
(0) Tota urbe trepidatum est.
(p) Die proximi. Claud Quad.
(q) Da mihi fallere. Horace. ©
(r) Minas quas mihi dare pollicitust. Ter.
(s) Vxor invicti Jovis esse nescis. Hor,
(t) Celeriter factost opus. Plautus.
(u) Lapides iaci coepti sunt. Caes.
(+) Expleri potestur. Sallust.
(vy) Di duint tibi quaecunque optes. Plautus.
(z) Qui meus amor in te est, confecissem. (εἰς:
C.—Roman HIsToRY.
(N.B.—The answers should be brief.)
1. Describe the constitution of the Roman Legion
at the time of the 2nd Punic War.
2. Trace the progress of the 2nd Punic War from
218 to 216.
3. Describe briefly the course of political events
during the tribuneship of Ti Gracchus.
4. Write a line or two on each of the following :—
Scipio. Nasica, Metellus Numidicus, Cn. Papirius
Carbo. M. Livius Salinator, LL. Anicius C. Flavits
Fimbria. Glaucia, Massinissa, Scipio Africanus the
Younger.
588 PACULTY OF ARTS.
GEOMETRY.
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
A,
1. Define inverse points, and prove that the inverse
of a circle is either a line or a circle, according as the
centre of inversion is on the circumference of the circle
Onenok
2. If four points be collinear their anharmonic ratio
is equal to the anharmonic ratio of their four polars.
3. Given the base of a triangle, the perpendicular,
and the sum of sides, construct it.
4. Prove that the straight lines joining the opposite
angles of a hexagon described about a circle are con-
current.
5. Describe a circle passing through a given point
and touching a given circle.
6. lf through a fixed point two transversals be
drawn intersecting two given straight lines, and if the
_ points of section be joined transversed, find the locus
of the point of intersection of the joining lines.
B.
7. Draw a common tangent to two given circles.
8. If two triangles upon the same base have the
middle points of their sides joined, the figure formed
by the joining lines shall be a parallelogram, equal
in area to half the sum or half the difference of the
triangles according as the triangles are on opposite
sides or the same side of the base.
9. Given two intersecting straight lines 4B, AC, and
a point P between them; shew that of all straight lines
which pass through P and are terminated by 4B and
AC, that which is bisected at P cuts off the minimum
triangle.
10. Prove that the locus of the intersection of tan-
gents drawn to a circle at the extremities of all chords
passing through a given point within the circle is the
polar of that given point.
11. If three concurrent straight lines are drawn from
the angular points of a triangle to meet the opposite
4
ὃ
|
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 589
sides, then the product of three alternate segments
taken in order is equal to the product of the other
three segments.
12. The six centres of similitude of three circles lie
three by three on four straight lines.
MATHEMATICS.
THURSDAY, SEPT. 10TH :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
GEOMETRY.
1. Triangles which have the same altitude are to one
another as their bases.
2. In a triangle ABC the bisector of the vertical
angle BAC meets the base at D and the circumference
of the circumscribed circle at E. Shew that BA, AD,
EA, AC, are four. proportionals,
3. Similar triangles are to one another in the du-
plicate ratio of their homologous sides.
4. Describe a rectilineal figure which shall be equal
to one and similar to another rectilineal figure.
ALGEBRA.
5. simplify
ax*-b 2 (bx tax?) ΠΣ πὸ
2x—I ee ee aa | 220 aE
6. Solve the equations
(a) x+3 ᾿ x+6 = x+2 La ats
. xt+t6 xtg x«t5 2«x+8
Or — 1273 + 10 — 4τ. ἃ - τί
(b) Simplify and express with positive indices
# la + gore SL / aV x a
Vx 4 a—? | are
8. Two rectangles contain the same area, 480 sq.
yds. The difference of their lengths is ΤῸ yds. and of
the breadths 4 yds. Find their sides.
590 FACULTY OF -ARTS.
TRIGONOMETRY.
9. In any triangle prove (a) cos 4 = |
aA δ
(b) cos - =, |” Sires 4
ΩΝ bc
10. In any triangle prove
Aer asa) , 244
AQ tan ——= 5 Payee ἦ
4.-- »
COSS
a ath Ξ
ὩΣ ΕΣ ΠΡ ΞΖ)
COS 5
The sides of a triangle are a = 450, b = 470,
ἐδ e Hind 4.4. Ὁ
12. Derive and explain the formula...
a
A eas ,
=e
—_————_——
THEORY OF EQUATIONS—ALGEBRA.
TUESDAY, SEPT. 15TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
aN
I. Solve the equation
+ 3r = 3
2. Find a superior limit to mo positive roots of
| Ao AP 354 Oe gs = By oe as
proving the method you employ.
3. Find the number and situation of the real roots of
2 —7r +7 =—O0,
4. Find the one whose roots are those of
54+ 42 — 22 + 11 =O
each diminiched iba foes
5. A multiple root of the order m of the equates
f(x) =o is a multiple root of the order m — τ of the
first derived equation f (1) — ο.
6. Apply Newton’s method to calculate a root of the
eauation «ἢ + 37 —5 =o.
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 991
B.
7. If an equation f(x) = 0, whose coefficients are
all real quantities, have for a root the imaginary ex-
pression a+f \/—1, it must also have for a root the
expression « — 8 V—1.
8. Transform the equation
at — 43 — 1872 — 3x + 2 = 0 into one wanting the
third term.
g. Solve the equation
etq4r+tr=o
το. The equation 21 — 8517 — 85+ — 87 =o has
a nositive root between 40 and 50; find it.
11. Find the amount of an annuity left unpaid for
a given number of years, allowing compound interest.
12. Resolve into partial fractions
Ap. Oe
(x? +7 για -- 4)
ENGLISH.
TRENCH: Study of Words.
TUESDAY, SEPT. 15TH :—AFTERNOON, 4.30 TO 6.
1. Write on the following words: Irenzus, Port
Natal, Gaza, Labarum, Hapsburg, Althorp.
2. Give the etymology of tinsel, tawdry, tdiot, and
show that those words have deteriorated in meaning.
Show that angel, martyr, paradise, marshal have become
ennobled in meaning, and give the etymology of any
two of them.
3. (a) In what way is reference made, under “poverty
of language,’ to “Him that is above’’ and to our word
“thanks ?”
(Ὁ). How is the poetry in words illustrated by
terms applied to waves? Who use them?
(c) Give the etymology of caprie and deduce the
meaning of the word from it.
(d) Illustrate the history in words from algebra.
archimandrite.
4. What is said regarding the etymology of peacoch.
pavo, Drepanum, Morea, girl, apis?
>
>
= »)
592 FACULTY OF ARTS.
_ §. Write without any comment, two words illustrat-
ing each of the following heads:
(a) Fair words for ugly things.
(b) The Norman was the ruling race.
(c) Characters in books as the source of words.
(d) French vocabulary dating from the reign of
Louis XIV.
(ec) The coining of comic terms in Latin.
6. (a) What do miscreant and Saviour illustrate? Give
details. :
(0) How are the following statements supported ?
Man had from the beginning ithe power of naming.
The protest of the Quakers against the use of the
the names commonly given to the days of the week was
absurd.
(One argument is sufficient.)
A very notable fact about new words is the difficulty
which is so often found in tracing their pedigree.
(Two examples are sufficient.)
(c) State any three causes of synonyms. Illus-
trate two of them. ᾿
ENGLISH.
A.—TeEnnyson: Selections.
FRIDAY, SEPT. IITH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
t. Give the connection, and explain the following:
(a) “My youth,” she said, “was blasted with a curse:
This woman was the cause.”
(b) Ere I saw her, who clasp’d in her last trance
Her murder’d father’s head.
(c) Shot like a streamer of the Northern Morn,
Seen where the moving isles of winter shock
By night, with noises of the Northern sea.
(d) A white-hair’d shadow, roaming like a dream
The ever-silent spaces of the Fast.
(ce) Such times have not been since the light that led
The holy Elders with the gift of Myrrh.
(f) The Abominable, that uninvited came
Into the fair Peleian banquet hall,
And cast the golden fruit upon the board.
‘c) Sore task to hearts worn out by many wars
"And eves grown dim with gazing on the pilot-stars.
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS. 593
2. Write briefly on (a) Tennyson's Classicism; (Ὁ)
his use of similes; (0) his metres.
3. What can you say of ‘Tennyson’s portraits of
women? Illustrate by quotation.
B.—SpensErR: Faerie Queene, Bk. 1.
1. Explain Spenser’s scheme for the Faerie Queene.
How far did he succeed in carrying it out?
2. Give instances from Book I. (a) of archaic dic-
tion; (b) of the luxuriance and melody of Spenser’s
verse.
3. Set forth Spenser’s conception of the character
of Una with special reference to its spiritual signifi-
cance.
4. Explain the historical allegory of Book I., giving
as full particulars as you can of persons and incidents.
C.—ENGLISH COMPOSITION.
Write an essay of not less than three pages on any
one of the following subjects:
Spenser’s Puritanism.
The Ideal of Sir Galahad.
King Arthur.
HISTORY.
CuurcHu: The Beginning of the Middle Ages.
TUESDAY, SEPT. I5TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 4.30.
yl: Write a detailed account of Teutonic settlements
in the western part of the Roman Empire.
2. By what influences were the Teutonic settlers
chiefly affected? Answer this question at length and
with illustrations.
3. Notice briefly:
(a) The Eastern Emperors from Justinian to the
Macedonian dynasty ;
(b) The Greek Church;
(c) The contest of Constantinople with the Mo-
hammedans:
4. Discuss the consolidation and unity of the Eng-
lish people.
594 FACULTY OF ARTS.
5. What main results followed from the breaking
up of the Frankish Empire?
6. Make brief notes on:
Alaric and Stilicho; the battle οἱ Testry; the de-
position of Childeric III.; Charlemagne and the
Saxons; the Lugenfeld.
FRENCH.
Monpay, SEPT. 14TH :—MORNING, 9 TO I2.
I. Traduire en frangais:
(a) An old Frenchman asked an Englishman, “Sir;
if you were not an Englishman, to what country would
you choose to belong?” The Englishman, wishing
to be polite, replied, “If I were not an Englishman, 1
should like to be a Frenchman;” whereupon the old
gentleman retorted, “But I, sir, if I were not a French-
man: I would like to become a Frenchman.” He was
very Chauvinist, this old man; he liked to quote the
old French saying that a Frenchman understands
before one speaks, an Italian while one is speaking, an
Englishman after one has spoken:
(b) He sends fifty boys every year to Canada, and
is thus helping to solve the great difficulty of providing
for (pourvoir a) the future of the enormous poor popu-
lation of the east of London. Instead of being here-
after a source of weakness and danger by becoming
beggars, or even criminals, in London, these boys will
become healthy, strong men, and good citizens, the
firm friends of England in the New World. He has
succeeded in enlisting in his enterprise several friends
of the same stamp (trempe, f.) as himself, who are
helping him in every kind of work in the interest of the
honest poor. At first people spoke with pity of “these
young fanatics,” but it was vain for people to prophesy
failure.
11. FUGENIE GRANDET:
Le caractére de Grandet ow de Charles.
Ia concurrence entre les des Grassins et les Cru-
chot pour la main d’Eugénie.
JACK?
ὧν
oo
or
UND YEAR EAHIBITIONS.
La premiére année que Jack passa a Indret.
on
Le caractére de Labassindre.
PaGES CHOISIES DE MICHELET:
Faire une analyse des chapitres sur la Mer ou sur
kes Femmes de la Révolution.
GERMAN.
Monpay, SEPT. 14TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
I. Translate into English :—
(a) Nicht Worte sind’s, die diesen traur’gen Streit
Erledigen. Hier ist das Mein und Dein,
Die Rache von der Schuld nicht mehr zu son-
dern.
Wer mochte noch das alte Bette finden
Des Schwefelstroms, der glithend sich ergosz?
Des unterird’schen Feuers schreckliche
Geburt ist alles, eine Lavarinde
Liegt aufgeschichtet uber dem Gesunden,
Und jeder Fusztritt wandelt auf Zerstorung.
(b) So nahe glaubt’ ich mich dem sichern Hafen,
So fest vertraut’ ich auf des Gtuckes Pfand,
Und alle Sttirme glaubt ’ich eingeschlafen,
Und freudig winkend sah ich schon das Land
Im Abendglanz der Sonne sich erhellen ;
Da kommt ein Sturm, aus heitrer Luft gesandt,
Und reiszt mich wieder in den Kampf der
Wellen.
ic) Gr betrachtet die Frauen wie untergeordnete Wefen, etvn
wie feine Sehitler, —vermutlich ftehen in einem diejer altea
Richer folehe verwitnichte Grundfage. Cr weift mich in di
echledhtejten Sinumer jeiner Wobhnung, die faum mit dem Not
Dilritiqiten ausgeftattet find, ev will von den Gerwohnbeiten jeines
Hageitolzenlebens nicht abgehen und jtellt dieje als Michticnur
fiir unjer ebeliches Leben aut—fann fich dabei eine wirtlide Che
qejtalten ?
(4) Er hatte fich einen ritterlicen Krieg qetraumt, wo er πώ mit
dem Mute feines EChrqcizes und dem Glany jeiner Crfcheinung
dG FACULTY OF ARTS.
rajey zum Ritter wollte emporfampfen, und man firbrte wm zum
Maujfen, Maubern und Mlordbrennen, yume Leutepcinden und
eLandveriwiften. Sn der Schlacht vielleicht dev erjte, war
roi jenen HSeldenthaten doch allezeit dev febte unter ΤΊ πο}:
RKameraden, und obgleich er, nad) damatiger Wert, feine Haut
Unt Gftern einem anderen Kricqsherrm verfaufte, fant ev demmnod)
Hie In eine ordentliche Sehlacht. 5
II. Translate into English (at sight) :—
Seit wir in die heife Sone eingetreten waren, fonnten wir jede
Macht die Schonheit des idliehen Himes nicht qenugfam be-
wundern, welcher in dem Maas, als wir nach Siden vorvite ten,
ποι Sternbilder unfern atqen entfaltete. Wlan hat em rwim-
Derbar befanntes Gefithl, wenn man bet dev Wnnabhering gegen
Den Aequator und befonders, wenn man vor der einen Hemijphare
in Die andere tiberqeht, allmablich Die Sterne medever iverden
mid τ {081 verfehwinden fiebt, welche man von feiner ersten Kid-
heit an fennt. Nichts crinnert einen Meifenden lebhafter an die
unermtebliche Cntfernung jemes Waterlandes als der YWnblicé
eines ποῖοι Simmels. Die Gruppirung der qropen Sterne, eine
ige zerftreute Nebelfterne,, welche an Slang mit dev Meilehftrag-
Wwetteijern, und Mame, welche δι) eine auperordentliche
Schwarze ausgezeienet find, geben dent fudlichen Hinimel εἰπὲ
cigenthiimliche Phyfiognomic. Diejes Schaujpiel jest jelft die
Sinbildungstraft derjeniqen m Bewegung, welche, ohne Unter-
irht in Den Hdbern Wiffenfeharten, das Oinumelsgewolbe gern
betrachten, wie man cine Τ᾿ πιο Landjchart oder cine majetatifee
δ ποτ bewundert.
III. Translate into German (at sight) :--
A lady had a little daughter about five years old,
who loved her mother and grandmother equally well.
On the birthday of the latter, the mother asked her
little daughter Emma (that was her name) to pray to
God that he would bless her grandmother, and that
she might become very old. Her grandmother was
quite old already, and the little girl knew enough to
see it. She, therefore, looked at her mother with sur-
prise at this request. The mother noticed the look
all
<
dats.
ui apes os. λύκοι
μυὸς
Ae ναὸ =)
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITIONS, 597
of her child, and asked again: “Well will you not
pray to God that your grandmother may become
older?” The little girl answered with childlike sim-
plicity: “Dear mother, grandma is already very old,
I would rather pray to God that she may become
young again.”
IV. Discuss Der Neffe als Onkel either as a transla.
tion oras a play of the Mexaechmi type.
V. Describe the transition period in the life of
Schiller or Goethe, indicating also the means and
methods by which the second poetic personality dis-
engaged itself from the earlier.
VI. Write on the syntax of the definite article,
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS
FACULTY OF ARTS.
SEPTEMBER, 1903.
The papers follow the order of subjects
as stated in the Calendar.
= ΞΞ
-- α == ST =
= ~ =
=
wgdy ®
ΩΝ
δ:
; ι
Cera
==
: ‘
᾿
υ
χ -
.
Ψ ν
γ΄ ~
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY—(First Paper).
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 9TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
ie
1. Find the locus of the middle points of chords,
parallel to a given line, of a curve of the second degree.
2. The polar of any point with regard to a conic is
parallel to the ordinates of the diameter passing
through the point.
3. If abe the angle made with the axes of x by the
perpendicular (length ΞΞΞ Ὁ) from the centre of an
ellipse on a tangent prove that
p? = a cos? a + B sin*a
4. Prove that a line drawn from the centre of an
ellipse parallel to a focal radius vector to a point, and
terminated by the tangent at the point is equal to the
semi-axis major.
5. Find by the method of infinitesimals the area of
an ellipse.
6. Prove by the method of infinitesimals that the
tangent at any point of an ellipse makes equal angles
with the focal radii vectores to the point.
Bs
7. Given the vertical angle and the sum of the sides
of a triangle, find the locus of the point where the base
is cut in a given ratio.
8. Prove that the three perpendiculars of a triangle
all meet in a point.
9. Find the equation of the tangent at the point +! y
to the curve ax? + 2hry + by + 2agr + 2fy +c =o.
to. Given the vertex and vertical angle of a triangle
and the rectangle under the sides; if one extremity of
the base describe a right line or a circle, find the locus
described by the other extremity.
602 FACULTY OF ARTS.
11. Given any two points A and B, and their polars
with respect to a circle whose centre is O; let fall a
perpendicular AP from A on the polar of B, and a
perpendicular ΒΟ from B on the polar of A, then
OA Ὁ»
AP, BO,
11. In an ellipse the sum of two focal chords drawn
parallel to two conjugate diameters is constant.
ANALYTIC GEOMETRY—(Second Paper).
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—MORNING, 9. TO 12.
Lip So=— "Oe ands St ἘΞ 20) represent two conics,
prove that there are three values of K for whch
SK St=—.0- represents a ‘pair of right lines. What
relation do these lines bear to the given conics?
2 Form the equation of the conic passing through
the points (Ge 2), (3, 5), {Ἐπ 4), Gace Ξ 1); 4 3):
3. Show that ᾿
Τὴ he CE ye
he get ee ee me)
is the most general equation of a conic osculating at
: ΤΉ ΟΝ Y>
the point x y'the conic=s ++ 2 ΞΞΞ vandrinedetie
values of / and m so the osculating conic be a circle.
4. Prove that
Paz + m2 62 = ney? wR
denotes a conic with respect to which == 0, Ba = 0,
—= 0 are the sides of a self-conjugate triangle.
5. Show that the focus of any conic may be regarded
as an infinitely small circle, touching the conic in two
imaginary noints situated on the directrix.
_6. The locus of a point, the sum or difference of
whose tangents to two given circles is constant, is a
conic having double contact with the two circles.
7. Prove that at any point in the parabola the foca!
chord of curvature is equal to the parameter of the
diameter passing.
8. Find the locus of the foot of the perpendicula~
from the focus of the parabola on the normal at anv
oint.
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 603
g. Find the locus of the intersection of normals at
the extremities of a focal chord of a conic.
10. Find the locus of the perpendicular from the
focus on any tangent to a central conic, with the radius
vector from the centre to the point of contact.
_11. Two vertices of a triangle move along fixed
right lines; find the locus of the third.
12. Find the condition that two conic sections, given
by the general equations, should be similar, even
though not similarly placed.
CALCULUS:
Monpay, SEPT. 14TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
A.
1. If two curves whose equations are uw = ὁ and
μ — ο intersect at right angles at a point x, y, prove
that
du. du’ , du au’
dx dx dy dy Fe
(a) Find the condition that the curves
oO
2 yy? x ν᾽
Ἢ 7: ΞΞΞ Τὰν: Ξ τσ I
Xx
a
should intersect at right angles.
2. Find an expression for the radius of curvature in
polar co-ordinates.
3. Define the evolute of a curve and prove that the
length of any arc of the evolute is equal, in general,
to the difference between the radii of curvature at its
extremities.
4. In polar co-ordinates prove that the perpendicu
lar on the tangent is given by the equation
I ie Y (aZ x
ep OL, + Wi",
[« πὶ) I ap
7 τ-- — τῇ Ξ
(a) Hence shew that 760: +us= Fa ae
5. Given the angle C of a triangle, prove that
004 FACULTY OF ARTS.
sin? 4A + sin? B is a maximum; and cos? A + cos? B
is a minimum; when A = B.
6. Given ὥξεξε α - ὁ x", find the expansion of 2
by Lagrange’s theorem.
ἘΣ
iP Cr
7. Integrate J ἜΠΤΡΣ Εἢ -- : Sas. [ΣΈν τ τ᾽ 2tx?
8. Integrate
Ἵ Sin’ 6 Cos’ 6 dé ; ale cos x dx ; [τ Feos*e ax
g. Integrate ;
ax ie (342—2)dx
seers, ΞΕ: ὃ {τε *Ytan κα τὸν force τ -,
10, Shew that
T Sin# ao em ora: m
a ——== ἃ Sires G2 “sin mx dx=—>——
WER ΕΞ Θ V2 Tes ι ὦ a =" mn
2 ΤΡ ΤΟΝ
i -.. n -
(3) Si Spy ss 3 Ve 3/
IT. Shew that the whole area of the curve
a? 2 == s8(2a — x) is Ta’.
12. Shew that the length of an elliptic arc is re-
presented by
Ara ero}
2___ tan? :
PAE oN dx, where a is
i ee
the semi-axis major and e the eccentricity.
ALGEBRA—THEORY OF EQUATIONS.
TRIGONOMETRY.
Jae
τι Prove that the square of a determinant is a svm-
metrical determinant.
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS.
2. Calculate the value of the determinant.
PRO7 ΤΟΣ 21). "|
50. Ἢ ΓΕΖ |
ΘΗΝ 5, .20
by transformation into determinant with lower num-
bers.
3. Define the reciprocal of a given determinant, and
express the first minors of the reciprocals in terms of
the original co-efficients.
4. Find the positive root of the equation
4x? — 134% — 31” — 275 = 0.
5. Solve the equation +7 — τ = 0.
6. Find by Newton’s method an approximate value
of the positive root of the equation α 5 — 21 —5 ΞΞΞ Ο.
ZV Prove
7u( 2-1) (22-2)
5
(a) Sin xO ΞΞ cos θ sin@--
οοϑῖ θ sin’ @-+ etc
(Ὁ) (2 cos@)"=2 cos 26-2. 2 cos'(x—2)0-+
γι (72-1).
-.2 cos (z—4)@+ etc.
|2
8. Prove (a) cos 0= 1 ss ΠΡ etc
(2 ea:
Goad πα + ue
ΒΞ)
oe
9. Resolve into factors
xm — 24% cos nO + τ.
το. In a spherical triangle prove
a—b
cos ——
A+B Cc
(a) tan a = Ἐπ Cot —
“ ) “
cos ἮΝ
os aS
οο5-- -
(6) tan cane ee AOE oy Pe
A+B
11. In a spherical triangle, given
= Οο ’, ,
a OA- 240, B= 42... 301, € == "58°" 40’, find’ A and ἢ
12. Express the area of aspherical triaugle in terim-
of its angles.
»-"
000 , FACULTY OF ARTS.
LOGIE,
FRIDAY, SEPT. IITH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Answer questions 8 and 9 and any other six.)
1. Explain the significance of Definition for Science,
and the relation of the doctrine of Definition to that
of the Predicables.
2. What do you understand by Inference? Give
some account of the main forms.
3. To what fallacies of argument is ordinary thought
most lable? Give some account of them with illus-
trations.
4. “It is not difficult to see that the a priori method
is equivalent to the synthetic method considered in
intension, the a posteriori method of course being
equivalent to the analytic method. But the same
difference is expressed by deductive and inductive.”
Explain and discuss, with examples other than those
employed by Jevons:
5. Comment on the following, with some illustration;
(a) Symbolical and Intuitive Knowledge (Leib-
nitz).
(b) Method of concomitant variations.
(c) Use of Analogy in Scientific investigation and
proof.
(d) Perfect Induction.
6. (a) Which of the Figures of the Syllogism are
most useful and why?
(b) Show that Cesare, Disamis, Camestres can be
proved per impossibile.
7. Show the importance of classification for know-
ledge, and explain the principles of a good classifica-
tion.
8. (a) What is the difference between the causal and
casual happening of events, if, as is generally postu-
lated, not even a dead leaf falls to the ground without
sufficient causes to determine the precise moment of
its falling, and the precise spot upon which it falls?
(b) “Brewster accidentally took an impression
from a viece of Mother-of-vearl in a cement of resin
and beeswax, and finding the colours repeated upon
the surface of the wax, proceeded to take other im-
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 607
pressions in balsam, lead, gum-arabic, etc., and always
found the irridescent colours the same. He _ thus
proved that the chemical nature is wholly a matter of
indifference, and the form of the surface is the con-
dition of such colours.” What method was employed?
g. Analyse, and test the reasoning of the following
examples: “
(a) Matter in thin films or in fine streams does
not behave like matter in bulk; new properties are
observed, which are not to be accounted for by the
reduction of the old properties, in proportion to the
scale of reduction. If the structure is atomic, we can
imagine how these new properties will come in when
the films, or streams, are but a few atoms thick. If
matter is continuous. we have, as yet, no kind of ex-
planation of such properties.
Prof. J. A. Poynting
(b) Dr. Wallace’s argument (to prove that the
Earth is the only planet in the whole Universe on
which humanity has been developed) stands thus:
Life is impossible at the uttermost boundaries of
the Universe—
Therefore, it is only possible at the exact centre.
Prof. H. Hi. ‘Turner.
(c) The more correct the Logic, the more cer-
tainly the conclusion will be wrong if the premises are
false: therefore, where the premises are wholly uncer-
tain the best logician will be the least safe guide.
PLANT. BIOLOGY.
Fripay, SEPT, I1ITH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5:30.
1. Discuss as fully as you can, Homologous and
Antithetic Alternation of Gererations. and show which
accords more closely with observed facts, and serves
9
608 FACULTY OF ARTS.
to explain more clearly the various phases in pro-
gressive development.
2. Discuss the influence of light in determining the
position of organs.
3. Discuss the so-called “reversions” in flowers, and
interpret them in the light of Bower’s theory of the
origin of the sporophyte. comparing with Goethe’s
theory of Metamorphosis.
4. Discuss “Arrest” in the development of organs
as to kind and mode of development, and interpret
such phenomena in relation to the general course of
evolution.
5. Discuss the division of labour in plants through
the formation of organs, comparing, in this respect,
Coenobia and Cell Dominions.
6. Discuss the special influence of the medium (en-
vironment) upon the modification of form and struc-
ture- ;
ANIMAL BIOLOGY.
HUXLEY’S’ LESSONS INS BEE MENTARY
PHYSIOLOGY.
THURSDAY, SEPT. I0TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Explain with diagrams the structure of the human
heart, and explain also the method of its action and
the general course of the circulation.
Account for the sounds made by the heart, and
explain the relation between the beat of the heart and
the pulse. Why is there no pulse in the veins?
2. Describe the structure of the human kidney and
the ducts which lead from it, pointing out the function
of each part in detail.
3. Draw a diagram of the bones of the arm and hand,
and explain the various movements of which they are
capable.
4. Describe the structure of the larynx—giving the
cartilages and muscles—and explain how the various
notes are made in singing.
5. Describe the structure and the functions of the
ear, following the sound from its entrance into the
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 609
internal ear till the production of the sensation of
hearing.
6. Briefly describe the brain, making use οἱ dia-
grams, and say what you know of the functions of the
various parts.
What are the functions of the sympathetic system?
ANIMAL BIOLOGY.
VERWORN’S GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY.
TurEspay, SEPT. I5TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
I. Give an outline of Verworn’s proof that the cell
is the final unit of living matter. Can you suggest
any criticism of this view?
2. Give Verworn’s argument in favour of the liquid
character of living substance.
3. Describe the structure of cross-striated muscle,
and explain how its changes on contraction may be
made to harmonize with the phenomena of the con-
traction of Amoeba.
4. Describe experiments to show what is the essen-
tial chemical compound in living matter. What is
Verworn’s theory as to the function of carbohydrate?
5. Define a stimulus.
Briefly discuss the stimulating effects of cold, heat
and pressure. ;
6. Describe Verworn’s theory of the mechanism by
which animals are directed to and from various sub-
stances.
Give in detail his analysis of the mechanism of the
motion of Amoeba.
FACULTY OF ARTS.
GREEK AUTHORS.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 16TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
Translate, with notes on words and phrases under-
lined: —
(1)
_—~
No
WwW
ee
A.—SOPHOCLES, ANTIGONE.
οὐκ ἔστιν. ἀλλὰ ταῦτα Kal πάλαι πόλεως
ἄνδρες mds φέροντες ἐρρόθουν ἐμοί.
“a / / 7209 ig Ν ™
κρυφῇ Kapa σείοντες. οὐδ᾽ ὑπὸ ζυγᾷ
λόφον δικαίως εἶχον, ὡς στέργειν ἐμέ.
ἐκ τῶνδε τούτους ἐξεπίσταμαι καλῶς
παρηγμένους μισθοῖσιν εἰργάσθαι τάδε.
οὐδὲν γὰρ ἀνθρώποισιν οἷον ἄργυρος
Ν 9" la \ ,
κακὸν νομισ μ᾽ ἔβλαστε: τοῦτο καὶ πόλεις
πορθεῖ, τόδ᾽ ἄνδρας ἐξανίστησιν δόμων"
τόδ᾽ ἐκδιδάσκει καὶ παραλλάσσει φρένας
χρηστὰς πρὸς αἰσχρὰ πράγμαθ᾽ ἵστασθαι βροτῶν.
7 >» > ͵ E/T ae
πανουργίας δ᾽ ἔδειξεν ἀνθρώποις ἔχειν
\ \ » fe , > ΄,
καὶ παντὸς ἔργου δυσσέβειαν εἰδέναι.
ἘΣ Wiese sie
καὶ φθέγμα Kal ἀνεμόεν
i \ > / 3 Ν ’ /
φρόνημα Kal ἀστυνόμους ὀργὰς ἐδιδάξατο,
ay γι ae he. eee
Kal δυσαύλων
πάγων ἐναίθρεια καὶ δύσομβρα φεύγειν Bern,
παντοπόρος: ἄπορος ἐπ᾽ οὐδὲν ἔρχεται
τὸ μέλλον: “Avda μόνου φεῦξιν οὐκ ἐπάξεται:
/ + ag) ee aa \ / ῬΑ τὰ Ἔν ae
νόσων δ᾽ ἀμηχάνων φυγὰς ξυμπέφρασται.
dots & ὑπερβὰς ἢ νόμους βιάζεται,
ἢ τοὐπιτάσσειν τοῖς κρατύνουσιν νοεῖ.
οὐκ ἔστ᾽ ἐπαίνου τοῦτον ἐξ ἐμοῦ τυχεῖν,
ἀλλ᾽ ὃν πόλις στήσειε. τοῦδε χρὴ κλύειν
καὶ σμικρὰ καὶ δίκαια καὶ τἀναντία"
\ “ xn XN 7 / ’ \
καὶ τοῦτον ἂν Tov ἄνδρα θαρσοίην ἐγὼ
καλῶς μὲν ἄρχειν, εὖ δ᾽ ἂν ἄρχεσθαι θελειν,
δορός τ᾽ ἂν ἐν χειμῶνι προστεταγμένον
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 011
μένειν δίκαιον κἀγαθὸν παραστάτην.
ἀναρχίας δὲ μεῖζον οὐκ ἔστιν κακον.
αὕτη πόλεις τ᾽ ὄλλυσιν. ἥδ᾽ ἀναστάτους
οἴκους τίθησιν: ἥδε συμμχου δορὸϑ
τροπὰς καταρρήγνυσι. τῶν Oo ὀρθουμένων
σῷζει τὰ πολλὰ σώμαθ' ἡ πειθαρχία.
(4) βωμοὶ yap ἡμῖν ἐσχάραι τε παντελεῖς
πλήρεις UT οἰωνῶν τε και κυνῶν βορᾶς
τοῦ δυσμόρου πεπτῶτος Οἰδίπου γόνου.
KaT οὐ δέχονται θυστάδας λιτὰς ἔτι
θεοὶ παρ᾽ ἡμῶν οὐδὲ μηρίων φλόγα.
οὐδ᾽ ὄρνις εὐσήμους ἀπορροιβδεῖ βοάς,
Ὁ Τ g TPO! ᾿βεβρῶτες αἵματος λίπος.
ταῦτ᾽ οὖν, τέκνον, φρόνησον. ἀνθρῶποισι γὰρ
τοῖς πᾶσι κοινόν ἐστι τοὐξαμαρτάνειν'
ἐπεὶ δ᾽ ἁμάρτῃ, κεῖνος οὐκέτ᾽ ἐστ᾽ ἀνὴρ
ἄβουλος οὐδ᾽ ἄνολβος. ὅστις ἐς κακὸν
πεσὼν ἀκεῖται μηδ᾽ ἀκίνητος πέλει.
B.—THucypipEs, VI.
(1) Kai o pev “Ἑρμοκράτης τοσαῦτα εἶπε. τῶν δὲ
Συρακοσίων ὁ δῆμος ἐν πολλῇ πρὸς ἀλλήλους ἔριδι ἦσαν.
of μὲν ὡς οὐδενὶ ἄν ΠΡ ΠΣ ἔλθοιεν οἱ ᾿Αθηναῖοι. οὐδ᾽
ἀληθῆ ἐστὶν ἃ λέγοιτο, οἱ δέ, εἰ καὶ ἔλθοιεν, τί ἂν Seagal
αὐτοὺς OTL οὐκ ἂν μεῖζον ἀντιπάθοιεν : :- ἄλλοι δὲ καὶ πάνυ
καταφρονοῦντες « ἐς γέλωτα ἔτρεπον τὸ πρᾶγμα. ὀλίγον δ᾽
ἣν τὸ πιστεῦον τῷ ᾿Ἑρμοκράτει καὶ φοβούμενον τὸ ᾿μελλον.
(2) Τοιούτῳ μὲν τρόπῳ ov ἐρωτικὴν λύπην ἥ τε ἀρχὴ
τῆς ἐπιβουλῆς καὶ ἡ ἀλόγισδος τόλμα ἐκ τοῦ παραχρῆμα
περιδεοῦς ᾿Αρμοδίῳ καὶ ᾿Αριστογείτονι ἐγένετο. τοῖς δ᾽
᾿Αθηναίοις χαλεπωτέρα μετὰ τοῦτο ἡ τυραννὶς κατέστη.
καὶ ὁ Ἱππίας διὰ οὐ τ ἤδη μᾶλλον @Y τῶν τε πολιτῶν
πολλοὺς ἔκτεινε καὶ πρὸς τὰ ἔξω ἅμα διεσκοπεῖτο, εἴ ποθεν
> , ΄ ΄ ΄ὔ fol , c , , ΄
ἀσφαλειαν τινα ορῳὴ μεταβολῆς γενομένης ὑπάρχουσαν οι.
612 FACULTY OF ARTS. ἢ
(3) καὶ παρελθὼν αὐτοῖς ᾿Ιὑρμοκράτης 6° Eppwvos. ἀνὴρ καὶ
ἐς τἄλλα ξύνεσιν οὐδενὸς λειπόμενος. καὶ κατὰ τὸν πόλεμον
> / ¢€ Ne / ze / > "ὃ ἘΚ ᾽ ἧς
ἐμπειρίᾳ τε ἱκανὸς γενόμενο;ξ καί ἀνδρείᾳ ἐπιφανὴς.
30 / , ζὰ δῇ το / ’ 5 ὃ Les A ἣν Ν Ἂς
ἐθάρσυνέ τε οὐκ εἴα τῷ γεγενημένῳ ἐνδιδόναι" τὴν μὲν Yap
; Ξ A ,
γνώμην αὐτῶν οὐχ ἡσσῆσθαι, τὴν δὲ ἀταξίαν βλάψαι. οὐ
΄ la , an “ ΙΝ 5 ”
μέντοι TOTOUVTOU YE λειφθῆναι ὅσον εἰκὸς εἰναι. ἄλλως TE
\ ε , ΣΤΟΝ: , ey Se ae ng ae, , a 5) na
καὶ τοῖς πρώτοις τῶν Βλλήνων ἐμπειρίᾳ, ἰδιώτας ὡς εἰπεῖν
χειροτέχναις, AVTAYOVLT A MEV OUS.
δ » iv, ’ \ ἊΝ ἴω \ .
(4) ὥστε καὶ τἀνθάδε εἰκὸς πρὸς τὸ λυσιτελοῦν, καὶ. ὁ
λέγομεν, ἐς Συρακοσίους δέος καθίστασθαι. ἀρχῆς γὰρ
ἐφίενται ὑμῶν καὶ βούλονται ἐπὶ τῷ ἡμετέρῳ ΤΡ ΕΣ ΤῸ
ὑμᾶς ὑπόπτῳ. βίᾳ ἢ καὶ κατ᾽ ἐρημίαν. Ἔα 7 Ὁ ἡμὼν
ἀπελθόντων, αὐτοί ἄρξαι τῆς Σικελίας. ἀνάγκη δέ, ἢν
ξυστῆτε ΤΡ αὐτούς: οὔτε γὰρ ἡμῖν ἔτι ἔσται ἰσχὺς
τοσαύτη ἐς ἕν ξυστᾶσα εὐμεταχιείβίσπιος, οὔθ᾽ οἵδ᾽ ἀσθενεῖς
ἂν ἡμῖν μὴ παρόντων πρὸς ὑμᾶς εἶεν.
) )
ἘΞ Ξ-ΡΡατο,; .SELECTIONS,
v > ἣν > ΄ > γ' 5 A ΄
(1) "Eveta, ὦ Λυσίμαχε. οὐ πάνυ ολίύγοις ἐγὼ τουτῶν
παραγέγονα ἐν αὐτᾷ τᾷ ἔργῳ. καὶ ὁρῶ οἷοί εἰσιν. ἔξεστι
\ \ b) / ς lal ΄ ef Nig ta oF / ’ \
δὲ καὶ αὐτόθεν ἡμῖν σκέψασθαι: ὥσπερ γὰρ ἐπίτηδες οὐδεὶς
πώποτ᾽ εὐδόκιμος γέγονεν ἐν τᾷ πολέμῳ ἀνὴρ τῶν τὰ
ς \ 2 ΙΒ , vy aN “ >
ὁπλιτικὰ ἐπιτηδευσάντων. καίτοι εἰς γε τάλλα πάντα EK
τούτων οἱ ὀνομαστοὶ γίγνονται, ἐκ τῶν ἐπιτηδευσάντων
Ὁ e , e ” \ \ ” “ /
ἕκαστα, οὗτοι δ᾽, ὡς ἔοικε, παρὰ τοὺς ἄλλους οὕτω σφόδρα
εἰς τοῦτο δεδυστυχήκασιν.
, \ \ κ r > ΄ «“ > ”
(2) πέπονθα δὲ πρὸς τοῦτον μόνον ἀνθρώπων, ὃ οὐκ ἂν TIS
” > > \ y fal \ ’ ΄ ig a Sarg N δὲ
οἴοιτο ἐν ἐμοὶ ἐνεῖναι, τὸ αἰσχύνεσθαι ὁντινοῦν" εγὼ OE
a / ’ ΄ Pa \ > md ns. ,ὔ
τοῦτον μόνον αἰσχύνομαι. ξὕνοιδα yap ἐμαυτᾷ. ἀντιλέγειν
\ > c ’ “ r a a Ἁ
μὲν οὐ δυναμένῳ ὡς οὐ δεῖ ποιεῖν ἃ οὗτος κελεύει, ἐπειδὰν
δὲ » id / rn fol rn {τ \ “ an
€ ἀπέλθω, ἡττημένῳ τῆς τιμῆς τῆς VITO τῶν ποόλλῶων,
9 \ , .“ e ΄
δραπετεύω οὖν αὐτὸν καὶ φεύγω. καὶ ὅταν ἴδω. αἱσχύνομαι
Ν e / \ / \ id / a ” ’ ἊΝ
τὰ ὡμολογημένα. καὶ πολλάκις μὲν ἡδέως ἃν ἴδοιμι αὐτὸν
\ ” , , . > as 5 5 γῶν
μὴ ὄντα ἐν ἀνθρώποις: εἰ δ᾽ αὖ τοῦτο γένοιτο, εὖ οἶδα ὅτι
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 61
\ r x > vA ef > »” ce ,
πολὺ μεῖζον av axOoiun. ὥστε. οὐκ EXD ὁ τὸ χρήσομαι
sp td τος;
τούτῳ τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ.
“ “
(3) ‘Qs ἅτοπον. ἔφη, ὦ ἄνδρες, Youcé TL “εἶναι; TOUTO, ὃ
rn Cus ες 7 ΄ ΄ ΄ Ν \
καλοῦσιν of ἄνθρωποι ἡδύ: ὡς θαμμασίως πέφυκε πρὸς τὸ
n > 5 \ an \ \
δοκοῦν ἐναντίον εἶναι, TO λμπηρῦν, τῷ ἄμα μὲν αὐτὼ μὴ
5 / “ , aN , κει
ἐθελειν παραγίγνεσθαι τῷ ἀνθρώπῳ. ἐὰν δέ τις διώκῃ τὸ
ἕτερον καὶ λαμβάνῃ. σχεδόν τι ἀναγκάζεσθαι λαμβάνειν
ty
\ Ἀν a ὺ εἰ rn A ΄“"
καὶ τὸ ἕτερον. ὥσπερ ἐκ μιᾶς κορυφῆς συνημμένω δύ᾽ ὄντε.
Ὶ \ ἊΝ “ \
(4) Νὴ τὴν Ἥραν, καλή γε ὴ καταγωγὴ. ἣ τε γάρ
, δ , s “ἢ r
πλάτανος αὕτη par ἀμφιλαφὴς TE καὶ ὑψηλή, τοῦ τε
” \ “ \ Nita aR el ‘ « » \
ἄγνου τὸ ὕψος Kal TO συσκιον πώγκαλον. καὶ ὡς ἀκμὴν
»” “ Υ 2 3
ἔχει τῆς ἄνθης. ὡς ἂν εὐωδέστατον παρέχοι τὸν τόπον.
a > a n ae τοῦ ον. ea) ,
ἥ τε av πηγὴ χαριεστάτη ὑπὸ τῆς πλατάνου ῥεῖ μᾶλα
ψυχροῦ ὕδατος, ὥστε γε τῷ ποδὶ τεκμήρασθαι:
|
!
GREEK COMPOSITION AND TRANSLATION
AT SIGHT.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 16TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
1. Translate into English :—
(uw) ᾿Εἰκεῖνος yap, ὦ ἄνδρες ᾿Δθηναῖοι λέγεται, πρὸς πατρὸς
μὲν ᾿Αλκμεωνιδῶν εἶναι (τούτους δέ φασιν ὑπὸ τῶν τυράννων
ὑπὲρ τοῦ δήμου στασιάζοντας ἐκπεσεῖν, καὶ δανεισαμένους
χρήματ᾽ ἐκ Δελφῶν ἐλευθερῶσαι τὴν πόλιν καὶ τοὺς
Πεισιστράτου παῖδας ἐκβαλεῖν), πρὸς δὲ μητρὸς ἵππο-
νίκου καὶ ταύτης τῆς οἰκίας. ἧς ὑπάρχρυσι πολλαὶ καὶ
μεγάλαι πρὸς τὸν δῆμον εὐεργεσίαι. οὐ μόνον δὲ ταῦθ᾽
ὑπῆρχεν αὐτῷ, ἀλλὰ καὶ αὐτὸς ὑπὲρ τοῦ δήμου θέμενος τὰ
ὅπλα δὶς μὲν ἐν Σάμῳ. TpiTOV δ᾽ ἐν αὐτῃ τῇ πόλει, TE
σώματι τὴν εὔνοισαν,. οὐ χρήμασιν οὐδὲ λόγοις ἐνεδείξατο
τῇ πατρίδι. ἔτι δὲ ἵππὼν ᾿᾽Ολυμπίασιν ἀγῶνες ὑπῆρχον
αὐτῷ καὶ νῖκαι, καὶ στρατηγὺς ἄριστος. καὶ λέγειν ἐδόκει
πάντων, ὥς φασιν, εἶναι δεινότατος. ἀλλ᾽ ὅμως οἱ KAT
014 PACULTY OF ARTS. '
ἐκεῖνον ὑμέτεροι πρόγονοι οὐδενὸς τούτων ANT » συνεχωρησαν
ὑβρίζειν αὑτοὺς ἀλλὰ ποιήσαντες φυγάδα ἐξέβαλον. καὶ
Δακεδαιμονίων ὄντων ἰσχυρῶν τότε καὶ Δεκελείαν ἑαυτοῖς
ἐπιτειχισθῆναι καὶ τὰς ναῦς ἁλῶναι καὶ πάντα ὑπέμειναν,
ὁτιοῦν ἄκοντες παθεῖν κάλλιον εἶναι νομίζοντες ἢ ἑκόντες
ὑβρίζεσθαι συγχωρῆσαι. i
(b) ὦ παγκακίστη καὶ φίλων διαφθορεῦ.
ot εἰργάσω με. Ζεύς σε γεννήτωρ ἐμὸς
πρόρριζον ἐκτρίψειεν οὐτάσας πυρί.
οὐκ εἶπον οὐ σῆς προϊνοησάμην φρενός.
σιγᾶν ἐφ᾽ οἷσι νῦν ἐγὼ κακύνομαι :
σὺ δ᾽ οὐκ ἀνέσχου. τοιγὰρ οὐκέτ᾽ εὐκλεεῖς
θανούμεθ᾽. ἀλλὰ δεῖ με δὴ καινῶν λόγων.
οὗτος γὰρ ὀργῇ συντεθηγμένος φρένας
ἐρεῖ καθ᾽ ἡμῶν πατρὶ σὰς ἁμαρτίας.
ἐρεῖ o€ ΠΠιτθεῖ τῷ γέροντι συμφοράς.
πλήσει τεπᾶσαν γαῖαν αἰσχίστων λόγων.
ὄλοιο καὶ σὺ YMOTIS ἄκοντας φίλους
προθυμός ἐστι μὴ καλῶ; εὐεργετεῖν.
2. Translate into Greek :—
The foreign lords of Bengal were naturally objects
of hatred to all the neighbouring powers, and to all
the haughty race presented a dauntless front. Their
armies, everywhere outnumbered, were everywhere
victorious. “It must be acknowledged,” says the
Mussulman historian of those times, “that this
nation’s presence of mind, firmness of temper, and
undaunted bravery, are past all question. They
join the most resolute courage to the most cautious
prudence; nor have they their equa! in the art of
ranging themselves in battle array and fighting in
order. If to so many military qualifications they
knew how to join the arts of government—if they
exerted as much ingenuity and solicitude in relieving
the people of God as they do in whatever concerns
their mil'tary affairs, no nation in the world would be
preferable to them or worthier of command: but the
people under their dominion groan everywhere and
are rediiced to poverty and distress. O God! come to
the assistance of thine afflicted servants, and deliver
them from the oppression they suffer.”
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 615
ΤΑΊ ΗΙΝΙΣ
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—MORNING, 9. TO 12.
I. Horace, Epistles, Boox I.
1 Translate: ἡ
(a), Ep: TL, γε: 59-07.
(b) Ep. VI., vss. 49-55.
(c) ΡΥ CL, vss. 25-30.
(d) Ep. XIX., vss. 6-14.
2. Write brief notes on: (a) Ianus summus ab imo;
(6) curatus inaequali tonsore; (c) di tibi divitias dede-
runt artemque fruendi (scan); (d) ait esse paratus; (e)
leges iuraque; imus lectus; haec tibi dictabam post
fanum putre Vacunae excepto quod non simul esses,
cetera laetus (remark on words italicized); quo mihi
fortunam si non conceditur uti? (What other reading
has good Ms. authority? Discuss the syntax and
metre in case of either reading.).
IT. CicEro’s LETTERS (TYRRELL).
3. Translate, with brief comments:
(a) Apud matrem recte est, eaque nobis curae est.
L. Cincio HS xxcp constitui me curaturum Idibus
Februariis. Tu velim ea, quae nobis emisse te et
parasse scribis, des operam ut quam primum habea-
mus, et velim cogites, id quod mihi pollicitus es, quem
ad modum bibliothecam nobis conficere possis. Om-
nem spem delectationis nostrae, quam, cum in otium
venerimus, habere volumus, in tua humanitate positam
habemus.
(Ὁ) Roma et maxime ... et Appia ad Martis mira
alluvies; Crassipedis ambulatio ablata, horti, tabernae
plurimae, magna vis aquae usque ad piscinam publi-
cam. Viget illud Homeri:
Ἤ ματ᾽ ὀπωρινῷ. ὅτε λαβρότατον χέει ὕδωρ
4 v / > A . / ,
Ζεύς, OTe δή ῥ᾽ ἄνδρεσσι κοτεσσάμενος γχαλεπήνῃ.
Cadit enim in absolutionem Gabinii:
a “4 " » σι \ / /
Οἱ βίη εἰν ἀγορῃ σκολιὰς κρίνωσι θέμιστας.
"Ex δὲ δίκην ἐλάσωσι, θεῶν ὄπιν οὐκ ἀλέγοντες.
Sed haec non curare decervi. Roman cum venero,
quae perspexero, scribam ad te et maxime de dic-
616 FACULTY OF ARTS. -
tatura, et ad Labienum et ad Ligurium litteras
dabo. Hane scripsi ante lucem ad lychnuchum ligne-
olum, qui mihi erat periucundus, quod eum te aiebant,
cum esses Sami, curasse faciendum. Vale, mi sua-
vissime et optime frater.
(c) Quod ad Caesarem, crebri et non belli de eo
rumores, sed susurratores dumtaxat veniunt: alius
equitem perdidisse, quod, opinor, certe fictum est:
alius septimam legionem vapulasse, ipsum apud
Bellovacos circumsederi interclusum ab reliquo ex-
ercitu: neque adhuc certi quidquam est neque haec
incerta tamen vulgo iactantur, sed inter paucos, quos
tu nosti, palam secreto narrantur: at Domitius, cum
manus ad os apposuit.
4. Explain the following words and _ phrases: (a)
diplomate; (b) ne in quartam hebdomada incideres;
(c) Iovem lapidem iurare; (d) indices; (e) exhedrae.
ITI, Vircir, AENEID, Br. IX.
5. Translate:
(a) vss. 25-31.
(b) vss. 295-302.
(c) vss. 525-520.
6. Write explanatory notes on the following lines:
9 (Ὁ scan); 41 (also scan); I40-I41, 315; 527-528;
656 Η : 80: i
Tidy SarvcusneCatinine,
7. Translate with notes on italicized words:
(a) Igitur senati decreto, Ὁ. Marcius Rex Faesulas,
©. Metellus Creticus in Apuliam circuwmque ea loca
missi; hi utrique ad urbem imperatores erant; impediti,
ne triumpharent, calumnia paucorum, quibus omnia
honesta atque inhonesta vendere mos erat.
(b) Tum D. Junius Silanus, primus sententiam
rogatus, quod eo tempore consul designatus erat, de>
his, qui in custodiis tenebantur, praeterea de L.
Cassio, P. Furio, si deprehensi forent, supplicium su-
mundum decreverat; isque postea, permotus oratione
Caesaris, pedibus in sententiam Tib. Neronis iturum se
dixerat, quod de ea re praesidiis additis referundum
censerat. A ai le
¢
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 617
LATIN,
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. QTH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
1. Translate into English :—
Erat in castris Percennius quidam, dux olim thea-
tralium operarum, dein gregarius miles, procax lingua
et miscere. coetus histrionali studio doctus. Is im-
peritos animos, et quaenam post Augustum militiae
condicio ambigentes impellere paulatim nocturnis col-
loquiis aut flexo i in vesperam die, et dilapsis melioribus
deterrimum quemaue congregare. Postremo promp-
tis iam et aliis seditionis ministris, velut contiona-
bundus interrogabat: cur paucis centurionibus, pau-
cioribus tribunis, in modum_ servorum obedirent?
quando ausuros exposcere remedia, nisi novum et
nutantem adhuc principem precibus vel armis adirent?
satis per tot annos ignavia peccatum, quod tricena aut
quadragena stipendia senes, et plerique truncato ex
volneribus corpore tolerent: ne dimissis quidem finem
esse militiae, sed apud vexillum retentos alio vocabulo
eosdem labores perferre: ac si quis tot casus vita
superaverit, trahi adhuc diversas in terras ubi per
nomen agrorum uligines paludum vel inculta montium
accipiant. Enimvero militiam ipsam gravem infruc-
tuosam: denis in diem assibus animam et corpus
aestimari: hinc vestem arma tentoria, hinc saevitiam
centurionum et vacationes munerum redimi: at hercule
verbera et volnera, duram hiemem, exercitas aestates,
bellum atrox aut sterilem pacem sempiterna: nec aliud
levamentum quam si certis sub levibus militia iniretur ;
ut singulos denarios mererent; sextusdecimus stipendii
anv-us finem afferret: ne ultra sub vexillis tenerentur,
sed eisdem in castris praemium pecunia selveretur.
An praetorias cohortes, quae binos denarios accepe-
rint, quae post sedecim annos penetibus suis reddan-
tur, plus periculorum suscipere? Non obtrectari a se
urbanas excubias: sibi tamen apud-horridas gentes
e contuberniis hostem adspici.
Translate into Latin:
Archias was born at Antioch and was remarkable
from bovhood for his ability and skill in writing.
_ After travelline throuchout Asia, where he enjoyed
great fame as a poet, he came to Rome in the year
105 B. C. Not lone before he had received great
618 . FACULTY OF ARTS.
rewards for his poetry in the cities of Southern ΤΑΝ
He was still a young man, and yet he was at once
received as an intimate friend by the Luculli. He .
was also the friend of Cicero, who defended him when
he was accused of having illegally obtained Roman
citizenship. In the first part of his speech Cicero
said that he owed to Archias all the powers of intel-
lect and oratory he possessed, for the latter had been
his chief guide in the pursuit ΟἹ all the branches of
literature.
A.—HIstTory.
THURSDAY, SEPT. IOTH:—MORNING, 9 TO 15.
Write A. and B. in separate books.
What is the origin of the myths of the regal
period, and to what causes may their growth be
ascribed. What ts Euhemerism?
State briefly what vou know of Spurius Maelius,
Papirius Cursor, Curius Dentatus, Appius Claucaius
Caecus.
3. Give the chief events irom January 1, B.C. 43 to
the death of Brutus.
4. Sketch the early career of Pyrrhus, and his
schemes to found an Hellenic empire in the West.
5. Describe the main causes which led to the fail
of the Republic.
B.—GREEK History.
6. Give a detril d acceunt of the reforms of Clcis-
thenes? Summarize the general effect of these.
7. Give as complete a list as you can of the revolts
of Athenian allies between 470 ΒΟΥ and 410 B.C.,
with dates.
Compare the pcesition of Athens as head cf her
allies with that of Sparta, as the leading power of the
Peloponnese. Dee the elements of inSecuritv in
each.
8. Discuss (a) the influence cn the result of Cimon,
Brasidas, Cleon, Alcibiades, Thrasvbulus; (Ὁ) the im-
portance of the alliance with Megara. .
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 619
g. With what events are the following names as-
sociated? — Naupactus, Eurymedon, Oenophyta,
Ithome, Delium, Leuctra. Give dates and indicate
the effects of these events.on the general course of
Greek History.
ΤΟ. Discuss the advantages and disadvantages οἵ
election by lot.
ENGLISH LITERATURE.
SHAKESPERE: The Tempest; Mitton, Paradise Lost, I.
and II,
FRIDAY, SEPT. IITH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1. Point out, with the help of specific illustrations,
the great merit of The Tempest as a close and coherent
dramatic composition.
2. Give your impression of the character of Caliban;
quote in support of your view.
3. Give examples, from The Tempest, in illustration
of the following points :—skilful and accurate use of
nautical terms, precise and graphic poetic expression,
expressions indicative of individual character, Shak-
spere’s knowledge of contemporary events.
4. Point out, with the help of examples, Milton’s
inventiveness in imagery and comparison. Quote as
accurately as possible.
5. Give a summary of:—The building of the Infernal
Palace, the disposition of Belial as revealed through
his counsels.
6. What terms does Milton use to describe the
many-sided character of Satan? Dwell on the appo-
siteness of the expressions employed.
>. What proof may be feund in Paradise Lost, I. and
II. (a) that Milton had a wide knowledge of the ancient
classics, (b) that his sense of harmony and rhythm in
verse was exceptionally keen?
8. Write a short dissertation on the principal! literary
sources of either The Tempest or Paradise Lost.
020 FACULTY OF ARTS.
ENGLISH: LITERATURE AND COMPOS EDIGING
Fripay, SEPT, IITH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
A.—CHarRLes LAMB: Essays of Elia.
1, What is meant by the phrase “Charles Lamb’s
quaint and original turn for paradox?” Illustrate fully.
2. What may be inferred from the Essays of Elia .
concerning Lamb’s literary preferences and dislikes?
Give ample illustration.
3. Discuss Lamb’s professed view in the essay “On _
the Artificial Comedy of the Last Century.”
4. Make notes on the following:—Lamb’s varied |
and expressive vocabulary, the character of James
Elia, the pathetic strain in the Essays of Elia.
5. Wherein lies the special originality of Charles
Lamb’s. literary style?
6. Note autobiographical details in the Essays of
Elia, and point out the difficulty of authenticating
them.
B.—ComMPoOsITION.
Write an essay on any one of the following subjects:
a. Satan, the Hero of Paradise Lost.
b. The Partition of Poland.
c. The Universality of Shakspere’s Genius. ae
MIS LORY:
Myers’ Mediaeval and Modern History, Part I.
TUESDAY, SEPT. I5TH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
. Sketch the reign of Justinian.
2: Mention the chief stages in the spread of Mo-
hammedanism.
3. What are the main aspects of mediaeval Chivalry?
4. Outline the leading episodes of:
(a) The Second Crusade:
(b) The Children’s Crusade.
5. Write as detailed an account as you can of the
origin of the Ottoman Turks, and of their fortunes
until 1500.
6. Emphasize the main features of intellectual: life
during the Middle Ages.
FACULTY “OF ARTS. ® 621
7. Make brief notes on:
The Council of Whitby; the battle of Nineveh (627) ;-
the golden age of the Caliphate; the Iconoclastic
Controversy; the Normans in Italy; the Mendicant
Orders; the Hanseatic League; the invention of print-
ing; Piers Plowman; the Trouveurs.
FRENCH.
Monpbay, SEPT. 14TH :—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
I. Faire une analyse de La Nuit de Mai; en citer
quelques vers
ou
Ecrire une courte esquisse biographique de la vie de
Musset.
11. Montrer la supériorité de l’exposition ou raconter
Vintrigue du Tartuffe.
III. La légende d'Iphigénie dans l’antiquité.
ou
Le caractére et le role d’Eriphyle-
Ou
Le caractére d‘Agamemnon.
IV. Traduire en francais:
Alexander the Great, one of the most famous gen-
erals who have ever lived, died at Babylon. He was
on the point of turning his victorious arms against
the nations of the West, when he had to leave the
scene of the greatest victories which the world had yet
seen. It has been remarked that he was born on the
day that the temple of Ephesus was burnt, and that
he died on the same day as Diogenes, the cynic, one
of the most eccentric personages who have arrogated
to themselves (sarroger) the title of philosopher.
Although his life was short, he had proved himself a
great warrior, and his fame had spread throughout the
whole world. He died before he had had the oppor-
tunity of showing that he possessed the qualities of a
great ruler, as well as those of a great general. There
is no one who has read the story of his life without
wishing that he had hved to develop his genius in the
arts of peace. One does not believe that history can
offer a stranger mixture of simplicity. force of charac-
ter, and ambition.
022 _ FACULTY OF ARTs.
GERMAN.
Monpay, SEPT. 14TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
I. Translate into English :—
(a) Ob mun gleich Die meijten fic) Diefer wiehtigen, in der
Here vorgehenden Creiqniffe nur zu einer leidenjchaftlicyen Unt-
erbaltung bedienten, jo waren doc) auch andere, welche den
Crnjt diefer Seiten wohl cinfahen und befitrehteten, dap bei einer
Teilnahme Sranfreids der Kriegsfdhauplas jich auch in unjern
Segenden atyfthun foune. Wan Hielt uns Kinder mehr als
bisher ju Danie, und fuchte uns anf mancherfei Weije zu
bejchaytigen und yu unterbalten. Su folchem Ende hatte man
Das von der Gropnrutter Hirterlayfene Pruppenjpiel wieder auf-
qejtellt, und zwar dergeftalt cingerichtet, Daf Die Sufehaner in
meinem Gtebelsimmer fiber, Die ppielenden und divigierenden
Perfonen aber, jowie das Theater jelbjt vom Profeenium an, in
einent Mebenzinumer Plagk und Maum fanden. Durch die be-
jondere Bergiinjtiqung, bald dieyen bald jenen Knaben als
Sujehauer eingulayfen, ermarb ic) mir anfangs viele Freunde ;
allein Die Unrube, die tm Den Kindern ftect, lies fie nicht lange
geduldige Sujdauer bleiben.
(ὁ) Wejtphalen bejtund aus cingeluen Hofen, deren jeder
citten cigentimltchen und freien Bejiwer hatte. Weehreve folcher
οὐ mradten cine Bauerfehart aus, die Gewshnlich den Namen
Des Altejten und vornehniften Hofes fithrte. Cs qrimdet fich in
Der erjten YAnlage der Bauerjfehaften, dap der altejte Sop auch der
erjte im Mange bleiben und der vornehmere werden nuipte, wo
von Seit 211 Seit Die Davon ausgegangenen Kinder, Cufel, Haus-
qenojfen zujantinenfanten und einige Tage feterten_und zechten.
Der Anfang oder dag Ende des Sommers war die gewosbhntliche
Seit dazu, wo jeder Hopbeyiwer etwas von jJeinen qezogenen
Hriteten und auch wohl cin junges Φ {πὸ Vieh zum Bauermahl
mitbradte. Wran beyprad) fic) ber mannigfaltiqe Geqenjtande
und nahin Miteypracde, Heivaten wurden da geyehlopfen, Todes-
fille angezeigt, und der Sohn als cingetretenes Haupt feines
paterlichen Crbes erfehien dann gewip nut volleren Handeri und
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 623
iusgejudterem Wiehe bei jfeimem erften Cintritt mm die Wer-
— annlung.
Il- Translate into English (at sight):
Der Bauer that alles, wie ihm gebeifen worden war. ls er
Mint cit weniq gedoftert hatte, gefeah es, Dab einem reiden
qropen Serr Geld gejtohlen wurde. Da hodrte derfelbe von dem
Doktor WlLaviffend, dev im dem und dent Dorje wohne und rwijfen
mitfie, wo das Geld hingefommmen fei. Wljo [ἰδ der Here
jeinen Wagen anjpannen, fubr nach dem Dorf und dem Haus
es Doftors, nud fragte ibn, ob er der Doftor Wllwijfend ware.
Der Bauer antwortete: ,ϑ Sa, der bin ich.” Dazforderte thn der
Herr auf, gleich mitzugeben und das gejtobhlene Geld wiederzu-
“haffen, und er war auch fofort dazu bereit und jagte: ,, Schon
echt, aber meine Frau, die Grete, mup auch mit.” Der Herr
hatte nichts Dagegen, lies beide in Den Wagen jteigen und fithr
nad) Sauje κα.
III. Translate into German:
‘(a) A merchant met a sailor, and had a conversa-
tion with him. Among other things he asked him
where his father died. The sailor answered: “My
father, my grandiather and great-grandfather all died
on the sea.” “And are you not afraid to go upon the
water ?” asked the merchant again. The sailor replied
to this: “Will you tell me, please, where your ancestors
died 2” “They all died in their beds,” said the mer-
chant, ‘like good Christians.” “Now then,” said the
sailor, “your ‘ancestors all died in bed, and you are not
afraid to go to bed, and am 1 to be afraid to go to sea,
because my ancestors died there: le
(b) If I had known that you were coming I should
have gone to meet you.
I have been asked to be present at the meeting; I
have heard that you are to read something.
IV. Give a full account of the period in Schiller’s life
which Don Carlos belongs:
V. Write about the less frequently met classes of
“separable” and “inseparable” compound verbs.
40
ΑΝ ἢ... τυ SE Δ a te Ὁ ,"
᾿ felon cel Ἶ {ιν
= ae sir TRE ἐπα, 23, + NT
624 FACULTY OF ARTS.
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE.
ELEMENTS oF PoLrricAL SCIENCE.
TUESDAY, SEPT. I5TH:—MORNING, 9 TO TI2.
1. Give a summary of Seeley’s discussion of “Gov-
ernment by One.”
[First Serres, Lecrure VIII.]
2. “Primitive society rested not upon contract, but
on status.” Explain:
3. Discuss (after Wilson), the nature of International
Law.
4. Give Wilson’s classification of the functions of
Government with some of his leadiig subdivisions.
5. Write a short paper on the Origin of the State.
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL’ SCIENCE.
CONSTITUTION AND GOVERNMENT OF E\NGLAND.
* TUESDAY, SEPT. I5TH :—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
1. Accurately explain the composition of the House
of Lords. τῇ
2. (a) Can a Statute of Parliament constitute a vio-
lation of the English Constitution? Give reasons for
your answer.
(b) Distinguish between the Law and the Custom
of the English Constitution.
3. Discuss (after Burgess) the tenure of the British
Crown. : a
4. Define the extent of the jurisdiction of the House
of Lords as a court.
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE.
ELEMENTS OF Economic THEorRY, I.
Monpay, SEPT. I14TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Omit one of the questions.)
τ. Walker names three “obstacles which Political
Economy encounters.” Enumerate and discuss them.
‘2, What is understood by ‘“‘capital”? What is its
origin and from what sources is it increased? What
are its chief forms?
3. Show how changes in the supply of a commodity ©
influence its value, giving illustrations. '
THIRD YEAR SCHOLARSHIPS. 625
4. Why is the problem of value in international ex-
changes discussed on different lines to those followed
for value in domestic exchanges?
5. Show how the development of American food pro»
duction has operated on land-rents in England.
6. State Walker’s view as to the labourer being the
residual claimant to the product of industry, and com-
pare it with the doctrine of the Wages Fund.
7, What are the chief advantages which cooperative
industry may offer the labouring classes and the com-
munity in general?
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE.
ELements oF Economic Tueory, II.
‘Monpay, SEPT. I4TH:—AFTERNOON, 2.30 TO 5.30.
(Omit one of the questions.)
τ. Show how different rates of interest may, appa-
rently, coexist in the same market. What further
causes may lead to different rates in different markets?
2: Discuss the influences which determine the value
of money, giving especial attention to the influences
connected with credit.
3. What change, if any, is made in the value of
money by the exaction of seigniorage? What relation
is there between debasement of coin and its deprecia-
ΈΘΠ
4. Explain what is meant by over-production and
by under-consumption, and discuss their relation to
hard times.
5. Describe the National Banking System of the
United States, especially in its relation to the currency,
and sketch briefly its origin and growth.
6. Summarize Walk r’s discussion of the views of
Henry George, and state the leading points in which
he claims to refute those views.
7. What different bases for the assessment of the
amount of taxation a citizen should pay have been
proposed? Is progressive taxation justifiable?
i )
020 FACULTY OF ARTS.
ECONOMICS AND POLITICAL SCIENCE.
Tue History or Economic THEORY.
WEDNESDAY, SEPT. 16TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Omit one of the questions.)
1. Explain what Adam Smith meant by the “system ᾿
of natural liberty,” and state the cases in which he
commends legal restraint on individual liberty, giving
his reasons for each such exception
2. State the view, expressed by Malthus, of what
is now known as the law of diminishing returns.
Show how this law, in connection with the conditions
prevailing in England at the end of the eighteenth cen-
tury, suggests the conclusion embodied in Malthus’
second proposition.
3. How did Ricardo come to write on economic
theory, and what defects are most conspicuous in his
mode of exposition? Show the relation between
Ricardo’s theory of value and that of Marx, as also
the difference between them.
4. State and criticise Mill’s exposition -of the rela-
tion of cost of production to value.
5. Discuss the position in economic investigation of
the methods of deduction and induction respectively
explaining the general nature of these methods as
applied to economics.
6. State the explanation given by Bagehot of “Why
Lombard Street is often very dull and sometimes ex-
tremely excited.”
7. Give a brief account of Jevons’ work in economic
Statistics. ;
EXHIBITION AND PRIZE
EXAMINATIONS
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE
---- -- "
EXUBIION AND PRIZE EXAMINATIONS
SECOND YEAR EXHIBITION. AND PRIZE
EXAMINATION, 1903.
MATHEMATICS.
SATURDAY, SEPT. I9TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
1. Given the-base and vertical angle of a triangle,
find the locus of the intersection of the bisectors of
its angles.
2. The sides of a triangle are 5, 6, 7; find the length
of the bisector of the angle between the sides whose
lengths are 5 and 7.
3. A parabola being traced on paper, find its focus
and axis.
4. Find a point in a given plane such that the sum
of its distances from two given points, not in the plane
but on the same side of it, may be a minimum.
ΕΠ care in. G, ΡΟ andra? — bt ΞΞΞ τ then pg
51| 7. 16 in ἘΠ΄
6. The equation («2 — br) (m + 1) = (m — 1)
(ax — c) has roots equal in magnitude and opposite in
sign; find m.
7. Show that the coefficient of +” in the expansion of
: |27
(το. φ) 1. ---
aa
8. Assuming (cos @ + i sin 0)" = cos n@ Lisinn@
when Ἢ is a positive integer, prove it is true when Ἢ is
fractional or negative.
I I
9. Show that tan) + — tan? y= a — tan} =
10. If sin B is the geometric mean between sin A
and cos 4 then cos 2B = 2 cos? (A + 45°).
630 EXHIBITION AND PRIZE EXAMINATIONS,
11. Prove
5 ORG Te g 7 “πῃ
(1) sin — + sin salient τὴ ---ΞΞ
i fi 7
‘ ΚΡΎΦΑ ΤΣ S77
514 n— sin πῆς πος
7 7 7
(2) τ Ἢ tana tan 2 a = sec a.
12. Solve the equation cos 8 —-sin θ-- cosa—sin ὃ
for all values of @
THIRD AND FOURTH YEARS EXHIBITION AND
PRIZE EXAMINATION, 1003.
MATHEMATICS.
SATURDAY, SEPT. I19TH:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.30.
I. In any plane triangle
da'=— cos αὐ ‘cos Bade. bisinaG dA
2. Explain a method, involving differentiation, of
obtaining the roots of equations, and find to three
decimal places one root of the equation
SP 2 200:
3. The height of the greatest rectangle which can
be inscribed in a given right segment of a parabola is
two-thirds of the height of the latter.
4. Show that the radius of curvature of the hypo-
2
cycloid +? + y3 = a3 jis 3 Pary.
200%
1-Ἐ- αὐ +23
1} 9
re —~ |“%2—a? dx, (2
5) Integrate (1) aN (2)
(3) x tan® χάχ.
6+. Obtain a formula for the reduction of { cos" Od 6,
7. The area of the curve y? = 1 -++ 4? 4? between
2 == 4 andy = '4 revolves: abouts the axismot τὸ
Show that the volume of the solid thus generated is
Tv log Ὡ:
8.+ Find three terms of the expansion of e” cos r.
g.* Show how to find the tangent to a parabola. the
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE. 631
tangent making a given angle with a given straight
line.
10}. Reduce the conic
114? — 12ry + 6y? — 84 — 20 — 3 = 0
to its principal axes.
11*, Find a new origin such that the equation of the
curve of question 10, when referred to parallel axes,
shall contain no terms of the first degree.
12*. The normal at any point of an ellipse bisects
the angle between the focal radii of the point.
13*. The time of vertical descent from a given point
to the centre of a vertical circle is the same as that to
the circumference down a tangent.
14*. A body is projected horizontally from a height
h with a speed v. Find the equation of its path.
15+. What is meant by the centre of percussion?
Explain how its position may be calculated.
16+. A circular disc of 3 in. diameter rolls down
from the top of another disc of 12 in. diameter,
Prove that the speed of the centre = 8 sin i where
θ is the angle which the common tangent makes with
the horizontal.
* For Third Year only.
+ For Fourth Year only.
SCOTT EXHIBITION EXAMINATION.
SUMMER READINGS IN ENGLISH.
Monpay, SEPT. 2IST—AFTERNOON, 2 TO 5.
Candidates are recommended to pay attention to the form
as well as the matter, of their answers. Composition
and spelling will be taken into account along with
knowledge of the books in determining the result.
Only two questions in each section are to be attempted—
etght in ail.
A.—-SHAKSPERE’S HENRY V.
τ. Tell what you know of the date of this play and
its connection with Shakspere’s personal history.
632 EXHIBITION AND PRIZE EXAMINATIONS.
2. What is the relation of Henry V. to the fiterary
and historical conditions of the Elizabethan period?
3. Discuss two of the persons of Henry V. as types
of national character.
B.—GoOLDSMITH’S VICAR OF WAKEFIELD.
4. Write on Goldsmith’s relations to the leading men
of his time.
5. Outline the character of the Vicar.
6. What portions of the novel probably relate Gold-_
smith’s own experiences?
C.—Scorr’s WAVERLEY.
7. Write a life of Scott, and give your opinion of his
character.
8. Relate Waverley’s “nocturnal adventure” and -
meeting with Charles Edward.
g. Discuss Scott’s descriptions of Highland customs
and scenery.
D.—STEVENSON’S KIDNAPPED.
10. Give a short account of Stevenson’s family and
early life.
11. Compare Kidnapped with other stories of ad-
venture you have read.
12. Narrate David’s experiences on the island of
Farraid.
SCOTT EXHIBITION EXAMINATION.
DESCRIPTIVE GEOMETRY.
MonDAY, SEPTEMBER 2IST:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
1 Draw a_ considerable portion of the curve
described by a point τή in. within the circumference of a
circle 1% in. in diameter, when this circle rolls exteriorly
on the circumference of a circle whose diameter 18. 3%
inches.
FACULTY OT APPLIED SCIENCE. 633
2 A right prism 3” in- long, having a pentagonal
end, side of pentagon I in., penetrates a right vertical
cylinder 3 inches long, diameter of end 1% in., so that
their axes bisect each other at right angles. Show
elevation when a rectangular face of prism is vertical
and at 30° to the NP:
Also give the development of the surface of the prism,
showing the section lines.
fae itee points, A, B, and. C, are the angles of a
triangle. Show the plan and elevation of the triangle,
when placed as indicated by the given positions of its
angles; also show, by the process of rebattment, the
true shape of the triangle.
A is 1” above H.P., and 134” in front V.P.
B is 2%” above H- P., and 4” in front V.P.
€ is 4” above H.P., and Ml 5 in front V.P-
The plan of AB is 1 %” long, and the plan of BC
is 1” long.
4 A right hexagonal pyramid, axis 3 inches, edge
ot-base 1”, rests on one of the edges of its base on the
H-P.; so that its axis is inclined at 45° to the H.P., and
30° to the V.P- Represent the solid in plan and eleva-
tion.
Let a section plane parallel to the V.P. cut through
the solid so as to pass through the centre of its base.
Show the development of the surface of the solid
(triangular faces and base), and mark the intersection
lines made by the section plane.
RA tetrahedron, edge 2% in., has one edge at 25°
to H.P., and 15° to V.P., and an edge adjacent to this
at 40° to H.P. Show plan and elevation.
BRITISH ASSOCIATION EXHIBITION, 1903.
THEORY. OF STRUCTURES:
MonpaAy, SEPT. 21ST:—MORNING, 9 TO 12.
(Candidates may attempt all the questions.)
1. Define in general terms the meaning of the term
strain, and show how to apply δ your definition to obtain
a measure of the strain in the case of a body subjected
to (a) simple longitudinal tension, (6) pure shear, (c)
cubical compression.
634 EXHIBITION AND PRIZE EXAMINATIONS,
2. What is meant by the resilience of a bar?
A bar, 1% inches square and 50 inches long, is sub- —
jected to a tensile pull of 30,000 pounds. Caiculate
the work stored up in the bar when E is 31,000,000.
3. State the assumption made in determining the
equations for the strength of a transversely loaded
beam, and deduce the formulae from these assump-
tions, showing clearly how these latter modify the
equations.
A bar of circular section is bent into an arc of a
circle of 750 feet radius. Find the moment of resis-
tance when E is 32,000,000, and find also the greatest
stress in the metal.
4. Draw to scale the shearing force and bending
moment diagrams for the case of a beam 20 feet long,
supported at the ends and loaded with three weights
of 3, 2 and 4 tons, at distances of 5, 9, 16 feet respec-
tively from one end. Also determine the shearing
force and bending moment diagrams when a further
load of 3% ton per foot run covers the bridge. =)
5. A plate girder, 6 feet deep and’ 50 foot ‘span
carries a uniformly distributed load of 3,000 pounds
per foot run. Design the central section of this girder
when the allowable stress is 14,000 pounds per square
inch.
6. Find a general expression for the deflection of
a beam at the point of application of the load when
the beam is supported at both ends, and hence deduce
the deflection for the case where the loading is central.
Determine the deflection at the load point of a
round steel rod, 1% inch in diameter, placed on sup-
ports 8 feet apart and loaded with 500 pounds ata .
distance of 3 feet from one end. E = 30,000,000.
7. Find the deflection at the free end of a cantilever
of length 1, when loaded with a uniform load of W
pounds per foot run and also with a concentrated load
of W pounds at the outer end.
8. Obtain the theorem of three moments for the
case of a uniform beam with continuous loads of dif-
ferent amounts on adjacent spans.
A continuous girder has three spans of 20 60 and
40 feet, respectively: it carries a load of 3,000*pounds
per foot run and the extreme ends are free. Cal-:
FACULTY OF APPLIED SCIENCE. 635
culate the bending moments at the intermediate sup-
ports, and draw diagrams of bending moment and
stress, to scale, for the whole span.
g. Obtain an expression for the intensity of the shear
in the cross section of a beam in the form V== mn A
and hence show how the shearing stress is distributed
in a beam of rectangular section.
10. Show that a hollow shaft is both stiffer and
stronger than a solid shaft of the same weight and
length, and explain what objections have been urged
against the employment of hollow shafts.
A four inch steel shaft revolves at 140 revolutions
per minute and the maximum stress to which it is
subjected is 12,000 pounds per square inch. Calculate
the number of foot pounds of work transmitted per
minute.
mis A steel cylinder, of 3 inches, internal diameter
and 1% inches thick, is subjected to an internal pres-
sure of 3,000 pounds per square inch. Calculate the
hoop stress at the inner and outer diameters and at
the centre of the cylinder walls.
LE MeGill University, Montreal
5 Calendar
M2
1903/04
PLEASE DO NOT REMOVE
CARDS OR SLIPS FROM THIS POCKET
eee ee δες
UNIVERSITY OF TORONTO LIBRARY
NS
En wen nnn int Stott OSS Pe hoe GA SB th Sa ng Sue neh πστ΄ να τι τισι
Crea ᾿
ΞΑΣΣΣΤΕΣΣΞᾺ
- ;
ἀρὰ wal Tate lata te tee .-
ersctas
» she tn “τ tates A a ον
ave on ee Oe jee
oF ν-νς een we meee A Bat hl a
aed WE OP) αἱ
Pelsae τ Senos
—— 7 Meee? Le
Speers στε τος
πος
oe ne oe τα το τῷ
ποτ τὸ Ὁ πὸ τὸ τ SOT Tle
on te at
ΠΕ
i
i
= err ay re oe τὰς ας ΜᾺ. δ,
Sat
—
we
cs
ie
4
Ὧν
obet
ata
ted Ser
ye
4}
ΜΗ
4 iid Bi
at
AS ee me oe oe
ii
itis
ehh
fafat
Ἡ Η
i
᾿
Selah i
:
=e =
ee ee πὸ ton oe τα τ
Rt
ἱ
ob to 9 ae to pl
'
4
=
bt
4
τὰν
t
ἐξ
Γ}
ἘΣ
τ
ΜΠ
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11